JP7809359B2 - gaming machines - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines such as pachislot machines and pachinko machines.

Conventionally, gaming machines have been known that have a board case with enhanced security to prevent unauthorized access to the control board (see, for example, Patent Document 1). Such a board case is configured so that the control ROM cannot be replaced unless it is destroyed.

Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-55112

Incidentally, such a board case is required to enhance security not only for access to the control board but also for a CPU (Central Processing Unit) chip mounted on the control board.

The present invention has been made in consideration of these points, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can prevent fraudulent use of the CPU chip and can detect fraudulent use of the CPU chip at an early stage.

In order to achieve the above object, the gaming machine according to this embodiment provides the following gaming machine.
A control board (e.g., main control board 610) on which predetermined electronic components (e.g., CPU chip 611) related to game control are mounted;
a transparent board case (e.g., main board case 620) that houses the control board;
The substrate case is
a recessed portion (e.g., recessed portion 643) that is recessed toward the predetermined electronic component at a location facing the predetermined electronic component;
two protruding pieces (e.g., protruding pieces 669) that are continuous with the recessed portion and that face the first side surface and the second side surface of the predetermined electronic component, respectively, and have a U-shaped cross section that is parallel to the bottom of the recessed portion;
a rib (e.g., rib 670a) continuous with the side wall of the recessed portion,
The two protruding pieces are:
a facing portion (for example, a facing portion 669a) facing the first side surface or the second side surface of the predetermined electronic component, and two connection portions (for example, two connection portions 669b) connected to both ends of the facing portion,
a length of the facing portion in a direction in which the recessed surface portion faces the predetermined electronic component is longer than a length of the two connecting portions in a direction in which the recessed surface portion faces the predetermined electronic component;
A gaming machine in which the protruding piece is located within the contour of the bottom of the downturned portion and is positioned so as not to overlap with the specified electronic component in the direction in which the downturned portion and the specified electronic component face each other .
This configuration prevents tampering with a specific control component and allows for early detection of tampering with the specific control component. Furthermore, the presence of the protruding piece prevents unauthorized access to the specific electronic component from the first and second sides of the specific electronic component. Furthermore, the cross-sectional shape parallel to the bottom of the beveled portion of the protruding piece is U-shaped, thereby increasing the strength of the protruding piece itself. Therefore, destruction of the protruding piece for the purpose of tampering can be prevented or suppressed. Furthermore, the presence of a rib continuous with the side wall of the beveled portion can suppress or prevent damage or deformation of the side wall of the beveled portion.
In addition, the gaming machine may further include the following configurations.

(1) A section control means (e.g., FIG. 403) for controlling the section to one of a plurality of types including a normal section (e.g., a normal section) in which advantageous operation modes (e.g., navigation) that are advantageous to the player cannot be notified, and an advantageous section (e.g., an advantageous section) in which the advantageous operation modes can be notified;
An update means (for example, a process for updating various information related to the AT according to the progress of the game by the main control circuit 100) that updates predetermined parameters (for example, variables that affect the performance of instruction functions such as pseudo settings and various information related to the AT among the information stored in the main RAM 103) used to control the degree of advantage during the advantageous period according to the progress of the game within the advantageous period;
and an initialization means (e.g., FIG. 405) for initializing the predetermined parameters in response to receiving a special reset operation;
A gaming machine in which the zone control means maintains the advantageous zone even when the special reset operation is received in the advantageous zone (for example, see when a special reset is performed in Figure 405).

With this configuration, the gaming establishment can perform a special reset operation that can initialize certain parameters, allowing the interests of both the gaming establishment and the player to be appropriately adjusted. Furthermore, by maintaining control over the advantageous zone, the zone immediately after the special reset operation does not become a non-advantageous zone, making it possible to manage the status based on the situation in the advantageous zone before the special reset operation is performed.

(2) A counter updating means (for example, a process for updating the advantageous zone payout number counter by the main control circuit 100 according to the progress of the game) capable of updating the counter value of a predetermined counter according to the increase or decrease of the game value in the advantageous zone,
The interval control means terminates the advantageous interval and controls the interval to the normal interval when the counter value reaches a predetermined value (for example, an upper limit of 2400),
The counter update means maintains the counter value of the specified counter even when the special reset operation is accepted in the advantageous zone (see, for example, when a special reset is performed in Figure 405), (1) gaming machine.

With this configuration, the counter value of the specified counter is maintained even when a special reset operation is received, allowing the player to maintain an advantageous state (a state in which a large number of coins are sucked in), thereby increasing motivation to play even after a special reset operation is performed.

(3) A special state control means (for example, a process for controlling the main control circuit 100 to the pseudo BNS) that controls the transition to a special state (for example, an AT state, a pseudo BNS, etc.) in which the notification of the advantageous operation mode can be generated and the game value is increased;
A notification setting value update means (e.g., SL04 in FIG. 406) is provided that, when an update condition is satisfied, can update the notification setting value to one of a plurality of types of notification setting values (e.g., pseudo settings 0 to 7) that have different degrees of favorability for determining whether to transition to the special state;
The predetermined parameters include notification setting values updated by the notification setting value update means (see, for example, Figure 405), (1) a gaming machine.

With this configuration, the notification setting value is updated to one of several different types, which allows for variations in the degree of advantage in determining whether a special state is entered, and the notification setting value can be updated by performing a special reset operation, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

(4) The gaming machine described in (3) may be configured such that the update condition is met when a game is played after the special reset operation is accepted and a first trigger is satisfied (e.g., YES in SL02 of FIG. 406).

With this configuration, the notification setting value is updated not when the special reset operation is accepted, but when the first trigger is met during subsequent play. As a result, while the gaming establishment can intervene in updating the notification setting value, it cannot adjust the notification setting value that is set, eliminating the need to consider which notification setting value to set.

(5) A gaming machine as described in (4), in which the update condition can be met by satisfying a trigger different from the first trigger as the game progresses, even when the special reset operation has not been accepted (for example, YES in SL03 of FIG. 406).

With this configuration, even when the special reset operation is not accepted, the notification setting value is updated when a trigger different from the first trigger is met as the game progresses. As a result, the notification setting value is automatically updated as the player progresses through the game, which saves the gaming facility the trouble of setting the notification setting value and provides the player with the added fun of being involved in updating the notification setting value.

(6) The gaming machine described in (5) may be such that the update condition is met by satisfying a trigger different from the first trigger when the zone control means ends the normal zone and controls to the advantageous zone, even when the special reset operation has not been accepted (for example, YES at SL06 in FIG. 406).
With this configuration, even when the special reset operation is not accepted, the notification setting value is updated when a trigger different from the first trigger is met in response to the end of the advantageous zone and control to the normal zone. As a result, the notification setting value is automatically updated as the player progresses through the game, which saves the gaming facility the trouble of setting the notification setting value and provides the player with the fun of being involved in updating the notification setting value.

(7) Equipped with a presentation control means (e.g., processing by the sub-control circuit 200) that can control the presentation unit (e.g., display device, lamp, LED, waist lamp, etc.) according to the progress of the game,
The presentation control means is capable of controlling the presentation unit in a manner different from that of the gaming machine described in (e.g., Figure 415), (5) or (6), during the period from when the special reset operation is accepted until the first trigger is met (e.g., during advantageous waiting mode entered by the special reset) to when a trigger different from the first trigger (e.g., when transitioning to a normal mode or advantageous waiting mode in which the pseudo setting value is waiting to be updated) is met (e.g., when transitioning from a normal mode to advantageous normal mode, or from advantageous waiting mode after a series of pullbacks until transitioning to advantageous normal mode).
With this configuration, it is possible to identify from the state of the presentation unit when the notification setting value is updated through the acceptance of a special reset operation, and as a result, it is possible to notify or suggest to the person who performed the special reset operation (for example, a store clerk at an amusement facility) that the state has been reached after the special reset operation.

(8) A gaming machine as described in (4) in which the degree of advantage in the judgment regarding the transition to the special state is constant (e.g., Figure 404(c)) during the period from when the special reset operation is accepted until the first trigger is met (e.g., while in advantageous waiting after the special reset shown in Figure 403).
With this configuration, it is possible to prevent advantages and disadvantages from arising between players while it is confirmed that the notification setting value will be updated.

With the gaming machine of the above configuration, it is possible to initialize certain information depending on the operation, appropriately adjusting the benefits between the gaming parlor and the player, while also managing the status based on the situation in the advantageous zone before initialization.
The present invention may comprise only the matters specifying the invention set forth in the claims, or may comprise only a part of the matters specifying the invention set forth in the claims, or may comprise, in addition to the matters specifying the invention set forth in the claims or a part of the matters specifying the invention, a configuration other than the matters specifying the invention (a configuration different from the matters specifying the invention, a configuration not set forth in the claims, etc.).

FIG. 2 is a diagram showing the external structure of the gaming machine according to the first embodiment. 1 is a diagram showing the internal structure of the gaming machine according to the first embodiment. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the gaming machine according to the first embodiment. FIG. FIG. 2 is a diagram for explaining the functional flow of the gaming machine according to the first embodiment. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining the playability of the first gaming machine according to the first embodiment. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining modes of the first gaming machine according to the first embodiment. 3A to 3C are diagrams showing various tables of the first gaming machine according to the first embodiment. 1A to 1C are diagrams showing various tables of a first gaming machine according to a first embodiment. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a symbol arrangement table of the first gaming machine according to the first embodiment. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing an internal lottery table of the first gaming machine according to the first embodiment. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a symbol combination table of the first gaming machine according to the first embodiment. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a symbol combination table of the first gaming machine according to the first embodiment. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a symbol combination table of the first gaming machine according to the first embodiment. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a symbol combination table of the first gaming machine according to the first embodiment. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining the correspondence between the internal winning combinations, stop operation modes, display combinations, etc. of the first gaming machine according to the first embodiment. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining the limit processing of the first gaming machine according to the first embodiment. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the configuration of a winning flag storage area, a winning activation flag storage area, and a symbol code storage area of the first gaming machine according to the first embodiment. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the configuration of a carryover role storage area of the first gaming machine according to the first embodiment. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the configuration of a game status flag storage area of the first gaming machine according to the first embodiment. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the configuration of a mode flag storage area of the first gaming machine according to the first embodiment. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the configuration of an operation stop button storage area of the first gaming machine according to the first embodiment. A diagram showing the configuration of a press sequence storage area of the first gaming machine according to the first embodiment. 10 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by a main control circuit of the first gaming machine according to the first embodiment. 10 is a flowchart showing a power-on process executed by a main control circuit of the first gaming machine according to the first embodiment. 10 is a flowchart showing a medal acceptance/start check process executed by a main control circuit of the first gaming machine according to the first embodiment. 10 is a flowchart showing an internal lottery process executed by a main control circuit of the first gaming machine according to the first embodiment. 10 is a flowchart showing a game start state control process executed by a main control circuit of the first gaming machine according to the first embodiment. A flowchart showing the processing at the start of play during a favorable zone executed by the main control circuit of the first gaming machine of the first embodiment. 10 is a flowchart showing a reel stop control process executed by a main control circuit of the first gaming machine according to the first embodiment. 10 is a flowchart showing a game end state control process executed by a main control circuit of the first gaming machine according to the first embodiment. A flowchart showing the processing at the end of play during a favorable zone executed by the main control circuit of the first gaming machine of the first embodiment. 10 is a flowchart showing a periodic interrupt process executed by a main control circuit of the first gaming machine according to the first embodiment. 10 is a flowchart showing an overview of the sub-side control processing executed by the sub-control circuit of the gaming machine according to the first embodiment. 1 is a diagram showing an example of the configuration of a medalless gaming machine according to a first embodiment. FIG. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing an example of the configuration of a main control board of the gaming machine according to the first embodiment. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an example of a lock effect according to the second embodiment. A figure showing a specific example of the lock effect corresponding to lock effect number "1". A figure showing a specific example of the lock effect corresponding to lock effect number "2". A figure showing a specific example of the lock effect corresponding to lock effect number "3". A figure showing a specific example of the lock effect corresponding to lock effect number "4". A figure showing a specific example of the lock effect corresponding to lock effect number "5". A figure showing a specific example of the lock effect corresponding to lock effect number "6". 10 is a flowchart showing a lock effect determination process performed in the main control circuit. 10 is a flowchart showing a lock effect execution process performed in the main control circuit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of an image displayed on the main display device in a simulated game. 10 is a flowchart showing the processing during pseudo-game play performed in the main control circuit. 10 is a flowchart showing normal pseudo-game processing performed in the main control circuit. 10 is a flowchart showing a post-pseudo game reel effect process performed in the main control circuit. 10 is a flowchart showing the processing during pseudo-game play after reel presentation performed in the main control circuit. 10 is a flowchart showing a reel rotation start process performed in the main control circuit. 10 is a flowchart showing a random delay process performed in the main control circuit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of temporal changes in the reel control state when a pseudo game is being played. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of temporal changes in the reel control state when a pseudo game is being played. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of temporal changes in the reel control state when a pseudo game is being played. 11 is a flowchart showing a lock effect execution process performed in a main control circuit according to the third embodiment. 10 is a flowchart showing a pseudo-game start process performed in the main control circuit. 10 is a flowchart showing normal pseudo-game processing performed in the main control circuit. 10 is a flowchart showing a stop button operation acceptance process performed in the main control circuit. 4 is a flowchart showing a swing control process performed in a main control circuit. 10 is a flowchart showing the pseudo-game ending process performed in the main control circuit. 10 is a flowchart showing a pseudo-game challenge operation acceptance process performed in the main control circuit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of an image displayed on the main display device. 10 is a flowchart showing a process performed in the main control circuit when a bonus is won. 10 is a flowchart showing a process for determining a lock effect at the end of a game, which is carried out in the main control circuit. 10 is a flowchart showing a process for executing a lock effect at the end of a game, which is carried out in the main control circuit. 10 is a flowchart showing the process for starting a lock effect at the end of a game, which is carried out in the main control circuit. FIG. 4 is a diagram showing a memory map of the main control circuit. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining the gameplay of the first gaming machine (modified example) according to the first embodiment. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining an example of preferential control (during normal mode) of the first gaming machine (variant) according to the first embodiment. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining an example of preferential control (during ST) of the first gaming machine (modified example) according to the first embodiment. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining an example of control of the anticipation effects of the first gaming machine (variant) according to the first embodiment. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining an example of control of the anticipation effects of the first gaming machine (variant) according to the first embodiment. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining an example of control of the anticipation effects of the first gaming machine (variant) according to the first embodiment. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining an example of control of the anticipation effects of the first gaming machine (variant) according to the first embodiment. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining an example of control of the anticipation effects of the first gaming machine (variant) according to the first embodiment. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining an example of control of the anticipation effects of the first gaming machine (variant) according to the first embodiment. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining an example of control of the anticipation effects of the first gaming machine (variant) according to the first embodiment. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining an example of control of the anticipation effects of the first gaming machine (variant) according to the first embodiment. This is a diagram for explaining variant 3 of the push order bell (example of transmission information control (part 1)) of the first gaming machine (variant) related to the first embodiment. This is a diagram for explaining variant 3 (example of transmission information control (part 2)) of the push order bell of the first gaming machine (variant) according to the first embodiment. 10A is a diagram showing a transition of a game state according to a fourth embodiment of the present invention, and FIG. 10B is a table summarizing transition conditions of a game state according to the fourth embodiment of the present invention. 1A is a diagram showing a symbol arrangement table, and FIG. 1B is a diagram showing a symbol code table. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a symbol combination table. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a symbol combination table. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a combination table by flag. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a combination table by flag. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a combination table by flag. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a combination table by flag. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a combination table by flag. A figure showing an internal lottery table for the RT0 gaming state. 10A is a diagram showing an internal lottery table for the RT1 gaming state, and FIG. 10B is a diagram showing an internal lottery table for the BB gaming state. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of the correspondence between internal winning combinations, stop operation modes, display combinations, etc. A figure showing an example of the transition flow of the game state in the non-advantageous zone and the advantageous zone in the fourth embodiment of the present invention. A diagram showing the transition of the ball output state in the fourth embodiment of the present invention. 10 is a table summarizing the conditions for transitioning the ball output state according to the fourth embodiment of the present invention. 1A is a diagram showing numerical values displayed on the instruction monitor in the pseudo BIG and pseudo REG, and FIG. 1B is a diagram showing the contents corresponding to the numerical values displayed on the instruction monitor. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the correspondence between internal winning combinations, sub-flags, and payout flags. A flowchart showing the processing performed in the main control circuit at the start of play in a non-advantageous zone. 1A is a diagram showing a lottery table for determining whether a game is to move to an advantageous zone, and FIG. 1B is a diagram showing a lottery table for determining whether a game is to move to an advantageous zone. 10 is a flowchart showing the process at the start of consecutive games to prepare for the game, which is carried out in the main control circuit. 1A is a diagram showing a consecutive game preparation mode lottery table (1), and FIG. 1B is a diagram showing a consecutive game preparation mode lottery table (2). A diagram showing a lottery table for transition to consecutive game challenges. 1A is a diagram showing a consecutive-game challenge transition determination lottery table, and FIG. 1B is a diagram showing a consecutive-game preparation fall lottery table. 10 is a flowchart showing the processing at the start of a normal stage game performed in the main control circuit. 10 is a flowchart showing a process at the start of a normal stage performed in the main control circuit. 1A is a diagram showing a normal transition mode lottery table, and FIG. 1B is a diagram showing a normal transition ceiling lottery table. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a point mode lottery table. 10 is a flowchart showing a normal stage-only process performed in the main control circuit. A figure showing a freeze lottery table during the normal stage. A diagram showing a normal stage transition flag/winning flag lottery table. A diagram showing a normal stage transition flag/winning flag lottery table. A diagram showing a normal stage transition flag/winning flag lottery table. 10 is a flowchart showing the common processing for normal ball output state performed in the main control circuit. 10 is a flowchart showing a normal prescribed number of games counter update process performed in the main control circuit. This is a diagram showing the lottery table for transitioning to high probability 1 with the normal number of plays. This is a diagram showing the lottery table for transitioning to high probability 1 with the normal number of plays. A diagram showing a ceiling fake preparation lottery table. 10 is a flowchart showing ceiling-related processing performed in the main control circuit. A figure showing a lottery table for lottery types when the ceiling is reached. A figure showing a lottery table for lottery types when the ceiling is reached. 10 is a flowchart showing point-related processing performed in the main control circuit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a point acquisition lottery table. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a lottery table when points are reached. 10 is a flowchart showing a process for lottery-determining the number of premonition games when a flag is drawn during the normal stage, which is performed in the main control circuit. 10 is a flowchart showing the process of lottery determination of the number of premonition games when a pseudo BIG/promotion chance is won during the normal stage, which is performed in the main control circuit. 10 is a flowchart showing a process for lottery-determining the number of premonition games when a chance stage is won during a normal stage, which is performed in the main control circuit. (a) is a diagram showing a lottery table for determining the number of premonition plays when a pseudo BIG or promotion chance is won during the normal stage (when a point is reached), (b) is a diagram showing a lottery table for determining the number of premonition plays when a pseudo BIG or promotion chance is won during the normal stage (when a ceiling is reached), and (c) is a diagram showing a lottery table for determining the number of premonition plays when a pseudo BIG or promotion chance is won during the normal stage (basic). (d) is a diagram showing a lottery table for determining the number of premonition plays when a chance stage is won during the normal stage (when a point is reached). (e) is a diagram showing a lottery table for determining the number of premonition plays when a chance stage is won during the normal stage (basic). (f) is a diagram showing a lottery table for determining the number of premonition plays when a ceiling fake is won during the normal stage. 10 is a flowchart showing the premonition game number counter management process for the normal stage performed in the main control circuit. 10 is a flowchart showing a probability mode-related process performed in the main control circuit. (a) is a diagram showing a high probability 2 transition lottery table (1). (b) is a diagram showing a high probability 2 transition lottery table (2). (c) is a diagram showing a high probability 2 transition lottery table (3). (d) is a diagram showing a high probability 2 drop lottery table. 10 is a flowchart showing a promotion chance pre-processing performed in the main control circuit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a promotion chance transition lottery table. 10 is a flowchart showing a game start process for a chance stage performed in the main control circuit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a chance stage guaranteed number of plays lottery table at the start of the chance stage. A figure showing a pseudo-BIG/promotion chance lottery table during the chance stage. A diagram showing a lottery table for adding the number of plays during the chance stage. 10 is a flowchart showing a process of lottery for determining the number of premonition games when a flag is drawn during a chance stage, which is performed in the main control circuit. A figure showing a lottery table for determining the number of premonition games when a flag is drawn during a chance stage. 10 is a flowchart showing a chance stage counter management process performed in the main control circuit. 10 is a flowchart showing the processing performed in the main control circuit at the start of a promotion chance game. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a promotion chance mode lottery table. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a promotion chance mode lottery table. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a lottery table during promotion chances. A figure showing the next pseudo-game lottery table. A figure showing a pseudo-BIG promotion lottery table when the specified number of plays is played. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the current pseudo gaming lottery table. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the contents of a pseudo game. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the flow of the game during a promotion chance. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a presentation when a pseudo-BIG is won in the first game of a promotion chance. This is a diagram showing an example of the presentation when all pseudo-BIGs are not won in the first to fourth games of the promotion chance. 10 is a flowchart showing the processing performed in the main control circuit at the start of a pseudo BIG game. 10 is a flowchart showing a pseudo-BIG start process performed in the main control circuit. A figure showing a consecutive win challenge lottery table at the start of pseudo BIG. A diagram showing a 1G consecutive lottery table during pseudo BIG. 10 is a flowchart showing a pseudo-BIG counter management process performed in the main control circuit. 10 is a flowchart showing pseudo-BIG termination processing (1) performed in the main control circuit. A figure showing a lottery table when the number of successful replies is insufficient. 10 is a flowchart showing pseudo-BIG termination processing (2) performed in the main control circuit. A figure showing the consecutive win challenge lottery table at the end of the final second pseudo BIG. 10 is a flowchart showing the processing at the start of a pseudo-REG game performed in the main control circuit. A diagram showing a consecutive win challenge lottery table at the start of a pseudo-REG. A diagram showing a 1G consecutive lottery table during pseudo REG. 10 is a flowchart showing a pseudo-REG counter management process performed in the main control circuit. 10 is a flowchart showing the processing performed in the main control circuit at the start of a consecutive game challenge game. A figure showing a pseudo bonus lottery table at the start of a consecutive win challenge. A figure showing a lottery table for determining the number of games at the start of a consecutive game challenge. A diagram showing a lottery table during a consecutive win challenge. A figure showing a lottery table for transitioning to normal mode at the end of a consecutive win challenge. 10 is a flowchart showing a counter management process for consecutive game challenges performed in the main control circuit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a list of counters managed in the main control circuit. 4 is a flowchart showing an AT-related process performed in the main control circuit when the lever is on. 10 is a flowchart showing AT-related processing performed in the main control circuit when the engine is completely stopped. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a presentation when a penalty occurs during a promotion chance. FIG. 13 is a diagram illustrating an example of the configuration of a microprocessor of a main control board according to a fifth embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 13 is a diagram illustrating the configuration of various registers included in a main CPU according to a fifth embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a memory map of a microprocessor according to a fifth embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining an overview of external interrupt processing related to power interruption detection in the fifth embodiment of the present invention. 13 is a flowchart showing a main process in a fifth embodiment of the present invention. 13 is a flowchart showing a power-on process in a fifth embodiment of the present invention. 13 is a flowchart showing a CRC check process (outside a used area) in the fifth embodiment of the present invention. 13 is a flowchart showing a CRC calculation process (outside the used area) in the fifth embodiment of the present invention. 13 is a flowchart showing processing of an error that makes it impossible to return to play (outside the use area) in the fifth embodiment of the present invention. 13 is a flowchart showing a BB (special prize) number of play check process, a transmission standby & RAM initialization process, and a designated RAM initialization process in a fifth embodiment of the present invention. 13 is a flowchart showing a BB (special prize) number of play check process, a transmission standby & RAM initialization process, and a designated RAM initialization process in a fifth embodiment of the present invention. 13 is a flowchart showing an out-of-use area RAM initialization process (out-of-use area) and an out-of-use area RAM initialization process (continuation) in a fifth embodiment of the present invention. 13 is a flowchart showing a random number value acquisition process and an internal lottery process in the fifth embodiment of the present invention. 13 is a flowchart showing a random number value acquisition process and an internal lottery process in the fifth embodiment of the present invention. 13 is a flowchart showing interface 2 output processing (outside of the use area) and interface 2 output processing (continuation) in a fifth embodiment of the present invention. 13 is a flowchart showing a process for determining an abnormality in the number of passing medals (outside the use area) in the fifth embodiment of the present invention. A flowchart showing the medal payout/replay operation processing, settlement execution processing, and medal payout processing in the fifth embodiment of the present invention. A flowchart showing the medal payout/replay operation processing, settlement execution processing, and medal payout processing in the fifth embodiment of the present invention. 13 is a flowchart showing a medal passing number counting process (outside the use area) in the fifth embodiment of the present invention. A flowchart showing the role ratio monitor aggregation start process (outside the use area) in the fifth embodiment of the present invention. 13 is a flowchart showing a periodic interrupt process in the fifth embodiment of the present invention. 13 is a flowchart showing a test firing signal control process (outside the use range) in the fifth embodiment of the present invention. 13 is a flowchart showing an error detection process (outside of a used area) in the fifth embodiment of the present invention. 13 is a flowchart showing a setting value check process (outside the use area) and a random number inspection process (outside the use area) in a fifth embodiment of the present invention. 13 is a flowchart showing a power interruption process in a fifth embodiment of the present invention. 13 is a flowchart showing a CRC generation process (outside a used area) in a fifth embodiment of the present invention. 13 is a flowchart showing an out-of-use area error cause clearing process (outside the use area) in the fifth embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining a situation regarding designation of a call destination in CALLEX in the fifth embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining a process related to a CRC check of a main RAM in the fifth embodiment of the present invention. 13 is a flowchart showing a 4-bit data acquisition process in the fifth embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining a process related to a 4-bit data acquisition process in the fifth embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a table defined so as to be read by applying a 4-bit data acquisition process in the fifth embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a table defined so as to be read by applying a 4-bit data acquisition process in the fifth embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a table defined so as to be read by applying a 4-bit data acquisition process in the fifth embodiment of the present invention. 13 is a flowchart showing a 2-bit data acquisition process in the fifth embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining a process related to a 2-bit data acquisition process in the fifth embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a table defined so as to be read by applying a 2-bit data acquisition process in the fifth embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining a process related to a common process in which a lower address of a counter is used as an input parameter in the fifth embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining a process related to a common process in which a lower address of a counter is used as an input parameter in the fifth embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining a method for determining a clear start address of an out-of-use RAM area in a fifth embodiment of the present invention. 13 is a flowchart showing a stop button input monitoring process in the fifth embodiment of the present invention. 13 is a flowchart showing a common information backup generation process and a common information backup restoration process in a fifth embodiment of the present invention. 13 is a flowchart showing common information restoration processing in the fifth embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 13 is a diagram illustrating common processing in backup generation and backup restoration in a fifth embodiment of the present invention. A block diagram showing the electrical configuration of a gaming machine equipped with a main control board related to a sixth embodiment of the present invention. A figure showing an example configuration of a game information display unit, a medal count display unit, and a medal lending display unit installed in a gaming machine equipped with a main control board related to the sixth embodiment of the present invention. A diagram showing an example of the configuration of the main control microprocessor and the medal count control microprocessor of the main control board in the sixth embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 13 is a schematic diagram of an example of a circuit configuration of a main control board according to a sixth embodiment of the present invention. This is a diagram to explain an example of the change in the difference in number of coins when multiple types of values are set as the initial value of the advantageous zone payout number counter. This is a diagram to explain the case where the initial value of the advantageous zone payout number counter is set taking into account the average net increase in the number of coins per game in the AT state, which is part of the ball output performance of the gaming machine. This is a diagram to explain specific examples 1 to 3 of whether or not the advantageous zone payout number counter is processed for each trigger. FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating an example of data (retained data) that is not subject to clearing for each trigger. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing state transitions when settings are changed in the case of specific example 3. This is a diagram to explain an example of updating the advantageous zone payout number counter before and after a setting change in relation to the ceiling number. 10A and 10B are diagrams illustrating examples of notifications made in relation to a complete function. 10 is a flowchart showing a complete function calculation process for updating CMP_MY and the like. 10 is a flowchart for partially explaining the error processing, mainly the processing related to the operation of the complete function. 10 is a flowchart for explaining a complete-related notification process for making various notifications based on CMP_MY. FIG. 1 is a diagram showing a gaming system including a pachislot machine, a data display device placed on top of the pachislot machine, and a hall computer. FIG. 4 is a diagram for explaining a lighting pattern of a lamp. FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating a model identification pattern. 10 is a flowchart showing a lighting pattern detection process performed in the data display device. 10A and 10B are diagrams for explaining examples of displaying predetermined advantageous-related information and advance notices. 10A and 10B are diagrams for explaining examples of displaying predetermined advantageous-related information and advance notices. 10A and 10B are diagrams showing specific examples of when various notifications based on CMP_MY are made on a two-digit seven-segment LED. 10A and 10B are diagrams illustrating examples of LEDs for making various notifications based on CMP_MY. A diagram showing the transition flow of the gaming state between the bonus state and non-bonus state of a pachislot machine in the second gaming machine of this embodiment. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a symbol arrangement table in the second gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of the contents of a symbol combination in the second gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a symbol combination determination table for RT0 and RT1 in the second gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a symbol combination determination table for RT0 and RT1 in the second gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a symbol combination determination table for RT2 in the second gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a symbol combination determination table for RT2 in the second gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a correspondence table between winning combination numbers, winning combination names, and winning combination group numbers in the second gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a correspondence table between winning combination group numbers and winning combination group names in the second gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a table of winning combinations that can be won in the RT state (RT0 to RT2) in the second gaming machine according to this embodiment. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of an internal lottery table in the second gaming machine according to the present embodiment. A figure showing an example of notification of the order of pressing buttons using an instruction monitor in the second gaming machine of this embodiment. A figure showing an example of the payout (replay, BB, number of medals paid out) for the winning selection depending on the RT state and push order in the second gaming machine of this embodiment. A figure showing an example of a scenario group lottery table in the second gaming machine of this embodiment. A figure showing an example of a scenario lottery table for scenario group A in the second gaming machine of this embodiment. A figure showing an example of a scenario lottery table for scenario group B in the second gaming machine of this embodiment. A figure showing an example of a scenario rewrite lottery table in the second gaming machine of this embodiment. A figure showing an example of a high probability 1 map position lottery table in the second gaming machine of this embodiment. A figure showing an example of a high probability 2 map position lottery table in the second gaming machine of this embodiment. A figure showing an example of a GSB consecutive rank lottery table in the second gaming machine of this embodiment. A figure showing an example of a TS type 0_premonition transition lottery table for low probability in the second gaming machine of this embodiment. A figure showing an example of a TS type 0_premonition transition lottery table for high probability 1 in the second gaming machine of this embodiment. A figure showing an example of a TS type 0_premonition transition lottery table for high probability 2 in the second gaming machine of this embodiment. A figure showing an example of a TS type 0_premonition transition lottery table for the ceiling in the second gaming machine of this embodiment. A figure showing an example of an initial AT level lottery table in the second gaming machine of this embodiment. A figure showing an example of an AT level promotion lottery table in the second gaming machine of this embodiment. A figure showing an example of a premonition game number lottery table in the second gaming machine of this embodiment. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a RUSH promotion lottery table in the second gaming machine according to the present embodiment. A figure showing an example of a RUSH start navigation count lottery table in the second gaming machine of this embodiment. A figure showing an example of a RUSH_RUSH pseudo-BNS lottery table in the second gaming machine according to this embodiment. A figure showing an example of a pseudo-BNS lottery table during pseudo-BNS end_RUSH in the second gaming machine according to this embodiment. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a BC rewrite lottery table when a RUSH burst occurs in the second gaming machine according to this embodiment. A figure showing an example of a compensation mode transition lottery table in the second gaming machine of this embodiment. A figure showing an example of an AT level promotion lottery table during compensation mode in the second gaming machine of this embodiment. A figure showing an example of a navigation count lottery table in compensation mode in the second gaming machine of this embodiment. A figure showing an example of a specified cherry rewrite lottery table in the second gaming machine of this embodiment. A figure showing an example of a scenario-related data table in the second gaming machine of this embodiment. A figure showing an example of a TY value_addition 1 data table in the second gaming machine of this embodiment. A figure showing an example of a TY value_addition 2 data table in the second gaming machine of this embodiment. A figure showing an example of a non-AT compensation point data table in the second gaming machine of this embodiment. A figure showing an example of an AT compensation point data table in the second gaming machine of this embodiment. A figure showing an example of a premonition point number data table when no instruction is given in the second gaming machine of this embodiment. A figure showing an example of an instruction T time_premonition point number data table in the second gaming machine of this embodiment. A diagram showing the transition flow of the game state taking into account pachislot notifications in the second gaming machine of the above embodiment. 13 is an oblique view showing the configuration of a coaxial cable used in a gaming machine according to a seventh embodiment of the present invention. FIG. FIG. 286 is a cross-sectional view of the coaxial cable of FIG. 285. This is a diagram for comparing the resistance to electromagnetic noise of the coaxial cable in Figure 285 with that of a discrete cable. A schematic diagram showing the appearance of one cable assembly (harness) used in the gaming machine related to the seventh embodiment. 13A is a schematic plan view of another cable assembly used in the gaming machine according to the seventh embodiment, and FIG. 13B is a schematic cross-sectional view of the cable assembly of FIG. (a) is a perspective view of an all-fine-coaxial type cable subassembly having the coaxial cable of Figure 285 as a component, (b) is a perspective view of a cable subassembly with mixed fine-coaxial/discrete cable wiring, and (c) is a perspective view of a ground finger type cable subassembly. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing the resolution, number of pixels, and aspect ratio of a display device. FIG. 1 is a diagram illustrating an outline of a state in which a fine-coaxial cable is twisted. FIG. 10 is a rear perspective view of the front door showing an example of connections between components using a cable assembly (harness) including at least a thin coaxial cable. 1 is a diagram showing a first state of a cable assembly (harness) when components are connected using the cable assembly (harness) including at least a thin coaxial cable; FIG. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a second state of the cable assembly (harness) when components are connected using the cable assembly (harness) including at least a thin coaxial cable. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a third state of the cable assembly (harness) when components are connected using the cable assembly (harness) including at least a thin coaxial cable. A conceptual diagram of a medalless gaming machine and a sandwich. Conceptual diagram of a managed gaming machine and a sandbox. Conceptual diagram of the operation base (specification example 1). Conceptual diagram of the area around the medal count display unit (specification example 1). Conceptual diagram of a cross section near the medal count display unit (specification example 1). Overall image of the gaming machine (specification example 2). Conceptual diagram of the operation base (specification example 2). Conceptual diagram of the area around the medal count display unit (specification example 2). Conceptual diagram of a cross section near the medal count display unit (specification example 2). Overall image of the gaming machine (specification example 3). Conceptual diagram of the area around the medal count display unit (specification example 3). Conceptual diagram of a cross section near the medal count display unit (specification example 3). An example of the specifications for the credit addition sound (loan sound) of a medalless gaming machine. An example of the specifications for the sound that counts one coin for a medalless gaming machine (sound of transferring one coin from gaming machine to Sand). An example of the specifications for the long press counting sound of a medalless gaming machine (sound transferred from gaming machine to Sand all at once). The counting completion sound and off-edge sound of the counting button on a medalless gaming machine. Example A of sound effects for adding and counting balls on a managed gaming machine (pachinko machine). Example 1 of credit addition specifications at the time of lending. An oblique view showing the external structure of the gaming machine related to the eighth embodiment. FIG. 23 is a side view of the gaming machine according to the eighth embodiment. FIG. 19 is an exploded oblique view of the gaming machine according to the eighth embodiment. A front view of the gaming machine according to the eighth embodiment, showing the state in which the mask for the second mode is connected to the cabinet. A side view of the gaming machine according to the eighth embodiment, showing the state in which the mask for the second form is connected to the cabinet. FIG. 20 is an exploded oblique view of the upper mask in the gaming machine according to the eighth embodiment. 13 is an oblique view of the lower mask in the gaming machine according to the eighth embodiment, viewed from the front side. 13 is an oblique view of the lower mask in the gaming machine according to the eighth embodiment, seen from the rear side. A side view of the lower mask in the gaming machine related to the eighth embodiment. FIG. 19 is an oblique view of an operation unit in the gaming machine according to the eighth embodiment. FIG. 19 is an oblique view of a start lever device in the gaming machine according to the eighth embodiment. FIG. 19 is an exploded oblique view of the start lever device in the gaming machine according to the eighth embodiment. 13 is an oblique view of the start lever in the gaming machine according to the eighth embodiment, seen from the rear side. FIG. 13 is an exploded oblique view of the light-guiding base in the gaming machine according to the eighth embodiment, seen from the front. FIG. FIG. 13 is an exploded oblique view of the light guide base in the gaming machine according to the eighth embodiment, viewed from the rear. 13 is an exploded oblique view of a lever support base in the gaming machine according to the eighth embodiment. FIG. 13 is a cross-sectional view illustrating the operation of the start lever device in the gaming machine according to the eighth embodiment. FIG. A cross-sectional view illustrating light incident on the start lever in a non-operated state in the gaming machine according to the eighth embodiment. A cross-sectional view illustrating light incident on the start lever in the operating state in the gaming machine according to the eighth embodiment. FIG. 13 is an oblique view of an operation unit in a first modified example of the gaming machine according to the eighth embodiment. FIG. 10 is a perspective view of a start lever device according to a first modified example. 13 is an oblique view of the lower mask in the second modified example of the gaming machine according to the eighth embodiment, viewed from the front side. FIG. 10 is a perspective view of a tray according to a second modified example. FIG. 10 is an exploded perspective view of a tray according to a second modified example. FIG. 10 is a perspective view of the lower mask showing a state in which the tray is placed at a retracted position in a second modified example. FIG. 10 is a side view of the operation section unit in the second modified example. FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating the configuration of a volume operation unit in a second modified example. FIG. 11 is a perspective view of a stop button operation assisting member in a second modified example. FIG. 10 is an exploded perspective view of a stop button operation assisting member in a second modified example. FIG. 11 is a perspective view of the operation section unit showing a state in which the stop button operation auxiliary member in the second modified example has been rotated from the use position. 10A and 10B are explanatory diagrams illustrating the operation of the stop button operation assisting member in the second modified example. 10A and 10B are explanatory diagrams illustrating the operation of another example of the stop button operation assisting member in the second modified example. FIG. 20 is a schematic diagram showing the configuration of the operation unit in a third modified example of the gaming machine according to the eighth embodiment. FIG. 10 is a front view showing a main board case that houses a main control board according to another example, attached to a cabinet. 10 is a perspective view showing a state in which a main board case accommodating a main control board according to another example is removed from a cabinet. FIG. 10 is a plan view showing the mounting surface of a main control board according to another example. FIG. 10 is an exploded perspective view of a main board case according to another example. FIG. 10 is a perspective view of an upper case of a main board case according to another example. FIG. 10 is a plan view showing the inside of the upper case of a main board case according to another example. FIG. 10 is a view showing the right side of the upper case of a main board case according to another example. FIG. 10 is a view showing the left side surface of the upper case of a main board case according to another example. FIG. 10 is a plan view showing a main board case accommodating a main control board according to another example. 10A and 10B are diagrams illustrating the opening operation of the main board case according to another example. 10A and 10B are diagrams illustrating the opening operation of the main board case according to another example. 10A and 10B are diagrams illustrating the opening operation of the main board case according to another example. 10A and 10B are diagrams illustrating the opening operation of the main board case according to another example. 10A and 10B are diagrams illustrating the opening operation of the main board case according to another example. 10A and 10B are diagrams illustrating a sealing operation of a main board case according to another example. FIG. 10 is an exploded perspective view of a lower door mechanism according to another example. FIG. 10 is a front view of a decorative unit according to another example. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the rear side of a decorative unit according to another example. FIG. 10 is a view showing the rear side of a lower door body according to another example. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing a state in which a slide member is attached to the rear surface of a lower door body according to another example, as viewed from the rear surface side. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing a state in which a slide member is attached to the rear surface of a lower door body according to another example, as viewed from the front surface side. FIG. FIG. 10 is a perspective view of a first slide member according to another example. FIG. 10 is an exploded perspective view of a first slide member according to another example. FIG. 10 is a bottom view of a first member of a first slide member according to another example. FIG. 10 is a front view of a second slide member according to another example. FIG. 10 is a perspective view of a third slide member according to another example. FIG. 10 is a front view of a fourth slide member according to another example. FIG. 10 is a view showing the rear side of a lower door mechanism according to another example. 10 is a diagram illustrating the state in which the upper hook portion of the decorative unit according to another example is inserted into the upper hook through-hole of the lower door body. FIG. A diagram illustrating the state in which the upper hook portion of a decorative unit in another example is engaged with the upper hook receiving portion of the first slide member. 10 is a diagram illustrating a state in which the lower hook portion of the decorative unit according to the modified example is inserted into the lower hook through-hole of the lower door body. FIG. A diagram illustrating the state in which the lower hook portion of a decorative unit in another example is engaged with the lower hook receiving portion of the third slide member. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of the operation of a movable prop. A figure showing an example of the initial operation of a movable device of the gaming machine related to the 10th embodiment. A figure showing another example of a movable prop. A figure showing examples of voice patterns according to navigation customization in the gaming machine of the 10th embodiment. A figure explaining the operation volume when entering a password in the gaming machine of the 10th embodiment. FIG. 10 illustrates basic lamp control for the stop button. A diagram showing the flow of play in a chance zone where a freeze may occur. A figure showing the lamp control of the stop button when a freeze occurs in the gaming machine of the 10th embodiment. A figure showing the lamp control of the stop button when a freeze occurs in the gaming machine of the 10th embodiment. A figure explaining the display control of the volume adjustment screen in the gaming machine related to the 10th embodiment. A diagram showing the shape of the lower tray in the medalless gaming machine according to the tenth embodiment. A diagram showing the shape of the lower tray in the medalless gaming machine according to the tenth embodiment. A diagram showing an example of cable wiring in the gaming machine according to the tenth embodiment. A diagram showing an example of cable wiring in the gaming machine according to the tenth embodiment. A diagram showing the transition of game states in a medalless gaming machine according to the eleventh embodiment. A figure showing the pattern arrangements of the left reel 3L, center reel 3C, and right reel 3R in the medal-less gaming machine of the 11th embodiment. A figure showing a pattern combination table in the medalless gaming machine related to the 11th embodiment. FIG. 23 is a diagram showing a combination table by flag in the medalless gaming machine according to the eleventh embodiment. FIG. 23 is a diagram showing a combination table by flag in the medalless gaming machine according to the eleventh embodiment. A figure showing an internal lottery table in the medalless gaming machine related to the 11th embodiment. FIG. 23 is a diagram showing an example of the correspondence between internal winning roles, stop operation modes, display roles, etc. in the medalless gaming machine according to the eleventh embodiment. FIG. 23 is a diagram showing an example of the correspondence between internal winning roles, stop operation modes, display roles, etc. in the medalless gaming machine according to the eleventh embodiment. FIG. 23 is a diagram showing an example of the correspondence between internal winning roles, stop operation modes, display roles, etc. in the medalless gaming machine according to the eleventh embodiment. A figure showing an example of the transition flow of the ball output state during the non-advantageous zone, advantageous zone, and advantageous zone in the medalless gaming machine of the 11th embodiment. 404(a) shows the correspondence between the internal winning combination and the sub-flag in the medal-less gaming machine according to the 11th embodiment, and FIG. 404(b) is a diagram showing the names of the sub-flags in the medal-less gaming machine according to the 11th embodiment. FIG. 404(c) is a diagram showing the coefficients of the direct lottery for the pseudo bonus during the normal period and advantageous waiting. A figure to explain an example of information that is initialized when transitioning to a normal zone or when a special reset is performed in the medalless gaming machine of the 11th embodiment. A figure to explain the initial setting processing regarding pseudo-settings performed when transitioning from the normal area or advantageous standby to advantageous normal in the medalless gaming machine of the 11th embodiment. This is a figure to explain the pseudo-setting lottery, the low setting number acquisition lottery, and the pseudo-setting ceiling number of plays lottery in the medalless gaming machine related to the 11th embodiment. A figure showing the distribution of the average number of games played until each pseudo setting is updated in the medalless gaming machine of the 11th embodiment. A diagram summarizing the winning rate for each pseudo setting in the medalless gaming machine of the 11th embodiment. A figure for explaining various processes for each main game state in the medalless gaming machine according to the 11th embodiment. A figure to explain the lock that may occur in the medalless gaming machine according to the eleventh embodiment. A diagram for explaining the specifications of external signals in the medal-less gaming machine according to the eleventh embodiment. A figure showing an example of sound specifications related to long press counting in the medalless gaming machine of the 11th embodiment. This figure is for explaining an example of the presentation state that is controlled when the medal-less gaming machine according to the 11th embodiment is controlled to one of the sub-game states, when power is cut off, when a special reset is performed, when demo mode is restored, etc. A figure for explaining the state of the display device and waist panel when the medal-less gaming machine of the 11th embodiment is in a non-market state in which gaming is not expected to be performed. A timing chart for explaining an overview of the processing related to the second pseudo-setting suggestion effect in the medalless gaming machine of the 11th embodiment. A diagram showing the transition of game states including RT and device operation in a pachislot machine related to the 12th embodiment. A diagram showing a pattern arrangement table, a pattern code table, and a pay line in a pachislot machine according to the twelfth embodiment. A figure showing the internal lottery table for lottery roles when not inside RB and when inside RB in a pachislot machine related to the 12th embodiment. A figure showing the internal lottery table for lottery roles during RB operation in the pachislot machine related to the 12th embodiment. A figure showing an example of the correspondence between internal winning roles, payouts, stop operation modes, display roles, etc. in a pachislot machine related to the twelfth embodiment. A figure showing an example of the transition flow of the ball output state in a pachislot machine related to the 12th embodiment. A figure showing the winning combination and pattern combination of ``F_RB+F_3 321'' in the pachislot machine related to the 12th embodiment. A figure showing the pattern combinations of RB and 3-coin roles in the pachislot machine related to the 12th embodiment. This figure shows an example of the stop display mode when the first stop is other than the left when "F_RB+F_3 coins 321" is drawn in the pachislot machine of the 12th embodiment, but the stop operation is not performed in the push order corresponding to "F_RB+F_3 coins 321". FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of the stop display mode when the first stop is on the left when "F_RB+F_3 coins 321" is won in the pachislot machine according to the twelfth embodiment. FIG. 22 is a diagram showing an example of reel control according to a winning combination that can result in an RB win in a pachislot machine according to the twelfth embodiment. A figure showing a timing chart for explaining the advantageous zone transition flow in a pachislot machine related to the 12th embodiment. A diagram showing the transition of game states in a pachislot machine related to the thirteenth embodiment. A diagram showing lottery roles in a pachislot machine related to the thirteenth embodiment. A figure showing an example of an internal lottery table in a pachislot machine related to the 13th embodiment. A figure showing an example of an internal lottery table in a pachislot machine related to the 13th embodiment. A figure showing an example of the procedure for processing during BB in a pachislot machine related to the 13th embodiment. A figure showing a timing chart for explaining the pattern of transition to RT in the pachislot machine related to the thirteenth embodiment.

[First embodiment]
Hereinafter, a gaming machine according to this embodiment will be described with reference to the drawings. Note that in this embodiment, a pachislot machine will be described as an example of the gaming machine.

[1. Pachislot machine structure]
First, the structure of the pachislot machine 1 will be described with reference to Figures 1 and 2. Note that Figure 1 is a diagram showing the external structure of the pachislot machine 1, and Figure 2 is a diagram showing the internal structure of the pachislot machine 1. For ease of explanation, the following description of the external structure may sometimes explain part of the internal structure, and vice versa.

[1-1. External structure]
[1-1-1. Housing]
The pachislot machine 1 is composed of a rectangular box-shaped housing 2. The housing 2 has a metal cabinet G that serves as the gaming machine main body and has a rectangular opening on the front side, an upper door mechanism UD located at the upper front part of the cabinet G, and a lower door mechanism DD located at the lower front part of the cabinet G.

The cabinet G has an intermediate support plate G1, a pair of left and right side walls G2, a rear wall G3, a top wall G4, and a bottom wall G5. Note that the rear wall G3 and bottom wall G5 are not shown in Figures 1 and 2. Two openings G4a are formed in the top wall G4 of the cabinet G, penetrating vertically and spaced a predetermined distance apart in the left-right direction. Wooden plate members G4b are attached to the top wall G4 so as to cover each of the two openings G4a.

The plate member G4b is used to secure the pachislot machine 1 to the gaming island (not shown) when it is installed in an amusement parlor. As long as such a securing method is ensured, it can be made of metal or resin, or can be formed integrally with the top wall G4. Furthermore, as long as a certain level of strength is ensured for the cabinet G, some or all of the components can be made of wood or resin.

Inside the cabinet G, an upper opening G101 that opens forward is formed on the upper side, sandwiched between an intermediate support plate G1, and a lower opening G102 that opens forward is formed on the lower side, sandwiched between the intermediate support plate G1. In other words, the interior of the cabinet G is divided into an upper space and a lower space, sandwiched between the intermediate support plate G1, which functions as a partition plate that divides the interior of the cabinet G into the upper and lower spaces. The upper space is the space behind the upper door mechanism UD within the cabinet G, and houses the main display device 210, described below, etc. The lower space is the space behind the lower door mechanism DD within the cabinet G, and houses the reel unit RU, described below, main control board 71, etc.

The cabinet G does not necessarily have to include the intermediate support plate G1. In other words, as long as each device can be properly accommodated within the cabinet G, it may not have a partition between the upper and lower spaces. The cabinet G can also be referred to simply as the "box" or "main body," or, because it functions as a frame that supports or fixes the upper door mechanism UD and lower door mechanism DD, it can also be referred to as the "main body frame," "support body," "support frame," or "fixing frame," etc.

[1-1-2. Front door]
The upper door mechanism UD and the lower door mechanism DD are formed to correspond to the shape and size of the opening of the cabinet G, and are provided so as to be able to close the upper and lower spaces of the opening in the cabinet G. In other words, the upper door mechanism UD and the lower door mechanism DD function as front doors provided on the front side of the pachislot machine 1.

Furthermore, each of the upper door mechanism UD and lower door mechanism DD is attached to the cabinet G so that it can be opened and closed freely, for example, by an opening and closing mechanism (not shown), such as a hinge, provided on the left side wall G2. It is also possible to configure either the upper door mechanism UD or the lower door mechanism DD to be openable and closable using the above-mentioned opening and closing mechanism, while the other can be attached and detached only when one of the door mechanisms is in the open state.

The upper door mechanism UD has a performance display window UD1 located in its center and an upper lamp 23 located above the performance display window UD1. The performance display window UD1 is configured as a transparent panel made of resin, for example, and allows the performance images displayed on the screen device C located on its back side and constituting the main display device 210 (described below) to be viewed. Note that in this embodiment, the main display device 210, which displays performances through the performance display window UD1, may be described as the main performance display unit 21.

The lower door mechanism DD has a main display window 4 located approximately in the center of its upper part, and a reel unit RU attached to the inside of the cabinet G behind the main display window 4.

The reel unit RU is primarily composed of three reels: 3L (left reel), 3C (center reel), and 3R (right reel). Each reel 3L, 3C, and 3R is composed of, for example, a cylindrical reel body and a translucent reel band attached to the periphery of the reel body. The reel band has multiple (e.g., 20) symbols printed at predetermined intervals along the reel's rotation direction. Furthermore, each reel 3L, 3C, and 3R is arranged in parallel (in a horizontal row) so that each can rotate vertically at a constant speed. The main display window 4 is, for example, a transparent panel made of resin, allowing at least a portion (e.g., three) of the symbols on the periphery of each reel 3L, 3C, and 3R to be visible. Furthermore, a light source (a reel lamp, which is included in the lamps and LEDs described below) is provided inside each reel 3L, 3C, 3R at a position where the symbols can be seen at least through the main display window 4, and while at least each reel 3L, 3C, 3R is spinning, it is illuminated from the inside at a constant brightness, ensuring the visibility of the symbols.

The lower door mechanism DD also has a sub-effect display unit 22 located on the left side of the main display window 4, and a performance button 10b located on the right side of the main display window 4. The sub-effect display unit 22 displays the performance images displayed on the sub-display device 220 (described below). The sub-effect display unit 22 can be configured as a touch panel, and can function not only as a performance display but also as one of the performance buttons. The performance button 10b is an operation unit that accepts performance operations (performance operations) from the player.

The lower door mechanism DD has a roughly horizontal base formed below the main display window 4, and includes a MAX BET button 6a, a 1 BET button 6b, and a settlement button 9 on the left side, a performance button 10a located roughly in the center, and a medal slot 5 on the right side.

The MAX BET button 6a and 1 BET button 6b are operation units that accept game operations (betting operations; they can also be called "insertion operations" or "betting operations") by the player to use medals deposited (credited) inside the pachislot machine 1. When the MAX BET button 6a is operated, if the current number of bets is less than the maximum number of bets (for example, three medals) and the number of credited medals is equal to or greater than that difference, the maximum number of medals will be bet. On the other hand, if the number of credited medals is less than that difference, no medals will be bet. Furthermore, when the 1 BET button 6b is operated, if the current number of bets is less than the maximum number of bets and one or more medals are credited, one medal will be bet.

The settlement button 9 is an operation unit that accepts a player's game operation (settlement operation) to return (settle) credited medals. If the settlement button 9 is operated when there are no credited medals, the player may be able to accept a game operation (C/P mode selection operation) to select either a credit mode (C mode) in which inserted or paid-out medals are credited, or a pay mode (P mode) in which the medals are not credited, within the creditable number (for example, 50 medals). In other words, the settlement button 9 can also function as a so-called C/P button. The effect button 10a is an operation unit that accepts a player's operation for effect (effect operation).

The medal insertion slot 5 accepts medals inserted into the pachislot machine 1 from outside by a player. The accepted medals are detected by a selector 31, described below, and a determination is made as to whether they are valid medals. If an accepted medal is invalid, the accepted medal is returned from the medal payout outlet 11, described below. If an accepted medal is valid and the current number of bets is less than the maximum number of bets, one medal is bet. If the current number of bets is the maximum number of bets and the number of credited medals has not reached the creditable number, one medal is credited. On the other hand, if the number of credited medals has reached the creditable number, the accepted medal is returned from the medal payout outlet 11, described below.

The lower door mechanism DD also has an information display device 14 located between the main display window 4 and the base portion. The information display device 14 is composed of multiple lamps (LEDs) and a 7-segment LED, and displays information about the game depending on the lighting state of the lamps.

Furthermore, the lower door mechanism DD has a start lever 7 located below the base on the left side, three stop buttons 8L, 8C, and 8R located approximately in the center, and a locking mechanism 15 located on the right side. The start lever 7 is attached so that it can tilt freely within a predetermined angle range, and is an operation unit that accepts the player's game operation (start operation) to start play. Each stop button 8L, 8C, and 8R is located corresponding to each reel 3L, 3C, and 3R, and is an operation unit that accepts the player's game operation (stop operation) to stop the respective reel's rotation.

The locking mechanism 15 is, for example, a key cylinder lock. When the lower door mechanism DD is closed, an amusement facility manager (e.g., a store employee) inserts a door key (not shown) into the keyhole and turns it clockwise to unlock the door, opening the lower door mechanism DD. The locking mechanism 15 may also function as a reset switch in addition to managing the opening and closing of the door mechanism. For example, when an amusement facility manager inserts the door key into the keyhole and turns it counterclockwise, it may be capable of detecting a reset operation similar to the reset switch 53 described below. In this embodiment, when the lower door mechanism DD is opened, the upper door mechanism UD may also be opened in conjunction with this. Alternatively, a separate locking mechanism corresponding to the upper door mechanism UD may be provided, allowing the opening and closing of each to be managed independently.

The lower door mechanism DD also has a lower panel 13 located in the center of its lower part, a medal tray 12 located below the lower panel 13, a medal payout opening 11 located above the medal tray 12, and sound transmission holes 24a and 24b located on the left and right of the medal payout opening 11.

The lower panel 13 is composed of a decorative panel bearing model information, such as a logo representing the model name or characters representing a motif, and a light source (a lower lamp, included in the lamps and LEDs described below) for illuminating this decorative panel from the rear side. The medal tray 12 stores medals paid out from the medal payout outlet 11. The medal payout outlet 11 discharges medals paid out (or returned) from inside the pachislot machine 1 to the outside. Note that medals discharged from the medal payout outlet 11 include those paid out from the hopper device 32 described below and those returned from the selector 31 via a cancel chute (not shown). The sound transmission holes 24a, 24b are located on the rear side of each, and allow sound such as sound effects and background music output from speakers 35a, 35b (speaker 35a is not referenced in Figure 2) attached to the interior of the cabinet G to pass through to the front side of the pachislot machine 1.

In this embodiment, the upper door mechanism UD and lower door mechanism DD are provided to correspond to the fact that the interior of the cabinet G is divided into an upper space and a lower space. However, as long as the opening in the cabinet G can be opened and closed appropriately, the mechanism can be configured as a single door mechanism or as three or more door mechanisms. It can also be configured as a double door mechanism in the front-to-rear direction (for example, an outer door and an inner door). The upper door mechanism UD and lower door mechanism DD can be simply referred to as "doors" or "doors," or, because they function as components that allow the opening in the cabinet G to be opened and closed, they can also be referred to as "opening and closing components," "door components," or "door components."

[1-1-3. Variable display section]
As described above, the pachislot machine 1 includes the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R and the main display window 4. When the start lever 7 is operated (when a start operation is performed by a player), the stepping motors 51L, 51C, and 51R (described below) are driven and controlled to start the rotation of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R. As a result, the symbols displayed in the main display window 4 are displayed in a variable manner. Furthermore, when the stop buttons 8L, 8C, and 8R are operated (when a stop operation is performed by a player), the stepping motors 51L, 51C, and 51R (described below) are driven and controlled to stop the rotation of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R. As a result, the symbols displayed in the main display window 4 are displayed in a static manner.

In other words, each of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R and the main display window 4 constitutes a variable display unit (means) capable of variably displaying (and stopping) multiple symbols in multiple rows, or multiple variable display units (means) capable of variably displaying (and stopping) multiple symbols. The variable display unit (means) can also be referred to as a "symbol display unit (means)" or "variable display unit (means)." The symbols can also be referred to as "pictures" or "designs," and, as long as they are information that can be visually identified by the player, they can also be referred to as "identification information," etc.

Furthermore, the main display window 4 is configured so that when the rotation of each reel 3L, 3C, 3R is stopped, three consecutively arranged symbols are displayed within its frame. That is, the main display window 4 displays one symbol (three symbols in total) in each of the upper, middle, and lower areas of each column (the symbols are displayed in a 3-row x 3-column format within the frame of the main display window 4). The main display window 4 is sometimes referred to as the "symbol display area" or "window portion," etc.

In addition, pay lines are defined in the main display window 4. Pay lines are lines used to determine whether a specified combination of symbols is displayed when all the symbols in all columns are stopped and displayed in response to the player's stop operation. In this sense, pay lines can also be called "winning lines" or "determination lines." Pay lines are also configured as lines connecting any of the areas in each column. In other words, if the main display window 4 is configured to display symbols in a 3-row x 3-column format, it is possible to define up to 27 different pay lines. However, in practice, one or more of these lines can be defined as pay lines, and the remaining lines can be defined as inactive lines.

For example, the line connecting the middle area of reel 3L, the middle area of reel 3C, and the middle area of reel 3R is called the "center line," the line connecting the upper area of reel 3L, the upper area of reel 3C, and the upper area of reel 3R is called the "top line," the line connecting the lower area of reel 3L, the lower area of reel 3C, and the lower area of reel 3R is called the "bottom line," the line connecting the lower area of reel 3L, the middle area of reel 3C, and the upper area of reel 3R is called the "cross-up line," and the line connecting the upper area of reel 3L, the middle area of reel 3C, and the lower area of reel 3R is called the "cross-down line." Because these lines connect the areas of each column in a straight line, one or more of these lines are often defined as active lines. However, as mentioned above, so-called irregular lines that connect the areas of each column with broken lines can also be defined as active lines.

In addition, for an active line to be activated, the player must bet the number of medals required for the current game (the number of medals that can be used to start a game) prior to starting the game. However, the number of active lines that are activated may remain the same regardless of the number of bets, or may vary depending on the number of bets. For example, if the three lines described above - the "center line," "top line," and "bottom line" - are defined as active lines, in the former case, the "center line," "top line," and "bottom line" are activated regardless of the number of bets - from 1 to 3. On the other hand, in the latter case, if the number of bets is 1, only the "center line" is activated; if the number of bets is 2, the "center line" and "top line" are activated; and if the number of bets is 3 (the maximum number of bets), the "center line," "top line," and "bottom line" are activated.

In this embodiment, the variable display unit has three reels 3L, 3C, and 3R and a main display window 4 that can display three symbols in each column, thereby displaying symbols in a 3 row x 3 column format, but the symbol display format in the variable display unit is not limited to this. For example, the number of reels can be one, two, or four or more, and the number of symbols displayed in each column can be one, two, or four or more, to display symbols in a format different from the above format. In this case, the number of definable active lines can also be increased or decreased as appropriate.

In addition, in this embodiment, the variable display unit displays the symbols by rotating each of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R, but the configuration of the variable display unit is not limited to this. For example, it may be configured using an image display device similar to the main display device 210 and sub-display device 220 described below, or it may be configured using other display devices (e.g., organic EL, 7-segment LED, etc.). It may also be configured using other physical devices (e.g., belts, etc.). The layout and size of the variable display unit can be changed as appropriate.

In addition, in this embodiment, the variable display unit functions as a main display unit directly related to the game and is controlled by the main control circuit 100 described below. However, a variable display unit may also be provided as a sub-display unit related to effects not directly related to the game and controlled by the sub-control circuit 200 described below. The sub-display unit may be configured using, for example, the main display device 210 or the sub-display device 220. That is, in addition to the main display unit, a sub-display unit may be provided as a variable display unit that displays symbols in response to the player's start operation (or the fulfillment of other start conditions) and stops symbols in response to the player's stop operation (or the fulfillment of other stop conditions). In this case, to allow the player to identify whether a variable display unit is directly related to the game, an identification mark such as "reel" or "main reel" may be attached near the main display unit, making it possible to identify the variable display unit as the main display unit. Such identification display may also be displayed on the main display device 210 or the sub-display device 220.

[1-1-4. Medal slot]
As described above, the pachislot machine 1 is equipped with a medal insertion slot 5 that accepts medals inserted into the pachislot machine 1 by a player from outside. The medal insertion slot 5 and the selector 31, described below, function to bet the number of medals required for one game, similar to the MAX BET button 6a and the 1 BET button 6b, and therefore such insertion action can also be referred to as, for example, a betting operation. Therefore, the medal insertion slot 5 can also be said to be a betting operation detection unit (means) that can detect a player's betting operation. The shape, arrangement, size, etc. of the medal insertion slot can be changed as appropriate. Furthermore, when the pachislot machine 1 is configured as a medalless gaming machine, as described below, the medal insertion slot is not necessarily a required component.

In this embodiment, medals are used as gaming media as gaming value used in games or awarded according to game results, but gaming value used in this manner is not limited to this. For example, coins, gaming balls, gaming point data or tokens, etc. can also be used. Gaming value can also be simply referred to as "value" or "gaming value," etc.

[1-1-5. Operation section]
The pachislot machine 1 is equipped with the following operation units as operation units that can be operated by the player. Note that the operation units shown below are merely examples, and the machine may be configured to include operation units different from these, or may not include operation units that are not necessarily required.

[1-1-5-1. Bet button]
As described above, the pachislot machine 1 includes a MAX BET button 6a and a 1 BET button 6b that accept a player's betting operation to use medals deposited (credited) therein. Furthermore, such betting operations are detected by a bet switch 6S, which will be described later. Therefore, the MAX BET button 6a, the 1 BET button 6b, and the bet switch 6S constitute a bet operation detection unit (means) that can detect a player's betting operation. Note that the bet buttons only need to be able to detect a player's betting operation, and their shape, placement, size, and the like can be changed as appropriate. Furthermore, while the MAX BET button 6a and the 1 BET button 6b are provided in this embodiment, it is also possible to provide only the MAX BET button 6a without the 1 BET button 6b. Furthermore, a 2 BET button for betting two medals may also be provided separately.

[1-1-5-2. Start lever]
As described above, the pachislot machine 1 is equipped with the start lever 7 that accepts a start operation by a player to start a game. This start operation is detected by a start switch 7S, which will be described later. Therefore, the start lever 7 and the start switch 7S constitute a start operation detection unit (means) that can detect a start operation by a player. Note that the start lever may be modified as needed in terms of its shape, position, size, etc., as long as it is capable of detecting a start operation by a player.

[1-1-5-3. Stop button]
As described above, the pachislot machine 1 is provided with stop buttons 8L, 8C, and 8R, each corresponding to a reel 3L, 3C, and 3R, that accept a player's stop operation to stop the respective reels. Furthermore, such stop operations are detected by a stop switch 8S, which will be described later. Therefore, the stop buttons 8L, 8C, and 8R and the stop switch 8S constitute a stop operation detection unit (means) that can detect a player's stop operation. Note that the stop buttons may be modified as needed, as long as they are capable of detecting a player's stop operation.

[1-1-5-4. Settlement button]
As described above, the pachislot machine 1 is equipped with a settlement button 9 that accepts a player's settlement operation (return operation) to return (settle) credited medals. Furthermore, such a settlement operation is detected by a settlement switch 9S, which will be described later. Therefore, the settlement button 9 and the settlement switch 9S constitute a settlement operation detection unit (means) that can detect a player's settlement operation. Note that the settlement button only needs to be capable of detecting a player's settlement operation, and its shape, placement, size, etc. can be changed as appropriate.

[1-1-5-5. Effects buttons]
As described above, the pachislot machine 1 is equipped with effect buttons 10a and 10b that accept effect operations by the player. Such effect operations are detected by detection switches (not shown) provided corresponding to the respective effect buttons. Therefore, the effect buttons 10a and 10b and the detection switches constitute an effect operation detection unit (means) capable of detecting the effect operations of the player. The effect buttons only need to be capable of detecting the effect operations of the player, and their shape, arrangement, size, etc. can be changed as appropriate. In addition, while the present embodiment is provided with two effect buttons 10a and 10b, the machine can be configured without either of these buttons, or with only one of these buttons. It can also be configured with three or more effect buttons.

The main uses of the effect buttons are to change the effect mode when a specific effect (for example, an operation-linked effect, as described below) is executed, and to perform selection and confirmation operations in the user menu, as described below. Therefore, it is possible to configure the system so that effect buttons are provided according to the purpose. For example, effect buttons 10a and 10b are used for the former purpose, and the touch panel described above can be used for the latter purpose. Note that for the latter purpose, a jog dial, cross key, or the like, which can accept selection and confirmation operations, can also be provided as a separate effect button.

[1-1-6. Medal payout outlet]
As described above, the pachislot machine 1 is equipped with a medal payout outlet 11 that discharges medals that are paid out (or returned) from inside the pachislot machine 1 to the outside. When a win occurs and medals are paid out, the medal payout outlet 11 awards medals paid out from a hopper device 32 (described below) to the player, and therefore can also be said to be part of a bonus awarding means that awards a bonus to the player. The shape, arrangement, size, etc. of the medal payout outlet can be changed as appropriate. Furthermore, when the pachislot machine 1 is configured as a medalless gaming machine (described below), the medal payout outlet is not necessarily a required component.

[1-1-7. Medal tray]
As described above, the pachislot machine 1 is equipped with a medal tray 12 that stores medals paid out from the medal payout opening 11. In other words, the medal tray 12 constitutes a storage unit (means) that can store the awarded gaming value. Note that the shape, arrangement, size, etc. of the medal tray can be changed as appropriate. Furthermore, when the pachislot machine 1 is configured as a medalless gaming machine, which will be described later, the medal tray 12 is not necessarily a required component.

[1-1-8. Waist panel]
As described above, the pachislot machine 1 is equipped with a lower back panel 13, which is composed of, for example, a decorative panel on which model information is depicted and a lower back lamp for illuminating the decorative panel from the rear side. The lower back panel 13 basically indicates to the player in an easy-to-understand manner what model the pachislot machine 1 is, but it can also be configured as one of the effect execution means capable of executing effects, for example, by the lighting mode of the lower back lamp, or by configuring the lower back panel 13 itself as an image display device or the like.

[1-1-9. Information display]
As described above, the pachislot machine 1 includes the information display device 14 that displays information about the game by its lighting mode. That is, the information display device 14 constitutes an information display unit (means) that can display information about the game.

The information display device 14 is composed of, for example, an insert lamp, a start lamp, a replay lamp, a bet number lamp, a credit lamp, a payout number lamp, an instruction monitor, a limit lamp, etc.

When the insert lamp lights up, it indicates that medals can be inserted. When the start lamp lights up, it indicates that play can begin by operating the start lever 7. When the replay lamp lights up, it indicates that medals have been automatically inserted due to the replay operation. When the bet number lamp lights up, it indicates the number of medals bet. When the credit lamp lights up, it indicates the number of medals credited. When the payout number lamp lights up, it indicates the number of medals paid out (payout number) according to the game result.

The instruction monitor also includes an alarm lamp (stop operation display unit) and a section lamp (status display unit). Under circumstances in which information about a stop operation is notified to the player (e.g., in an AT state), the alarm lamp displays information about the stop operation by lighting up in a manner that uniquely corresponds to the information about the stop operation being notified. Note that "a manner that uniquely corresponds to the information about the stop operation being notified" refers to, for example, a manner in which the indicator monitor displays the number "1" when announcing the push order (which may be described as the "batting order" in this embodiment) "1st (performing the first stop operation on reel 3L)," the indicator monitor displays the number "2" when announcing the push order "2nd (performing the first stop operation on reel 3C)," and the indicator monitor displays the number "3" when announcing the push order "3rd (performing the first stop operation on reel 3R)." Note that the alarm lamp does not necessarily have to be provided separately from the credit lamp and payout number lamp. For example, information about the stop operation may be displayed using either the credit lamp or the payout number lamp.

In this manner, in this embodiment, when information about a stop operation is notified to a player, the information about the stop operation is not only notified by a sub-side notification means (e.g., the main display unit 21) controlled by the sub-control circuit 200 (described below), but also by an instruction monitor serving as a main notification means controlled by the main control circuit 100 (described below). Note that the notification mode of the main notification means and the notification mode of the sub-notification means may be different from each other. That is, the main notification means only needs to notify the information about the stop operation in a manner that uniquely corresponds to the information about the stop operation being notified, and does not necessarily need to notify the information about the stop operation directly. For example, when notifying the push order "1st," even if the number "1" is displayed on the instruction monitor, some players may not be able to identify the content of the notification. On the other hand, the sub-side notification means only needs to notify the information about the stop operation directly. For example, when notifying the push order "1st," the main display unit 21 only needs to directly notify instruction information for performing the first stop operation on reel 3L.

Furthermore, the section lamp, when lit, indicates that the current state is in the advantageous section, described below. For example, when transitioning from a non-advantageous section to an advantageous section, described below, the section lamp lights up at any time before play in the advantageous section begins, and when the advantageous section ends and transitions to a non-advantageous section, it goes out at any time before play in the non-advantageous section begins. Note that the timing of lighting the section lamp is not limited to this. For example, when transitioning from a performance section (normal advantageous section) described below in a non-advantageous section or advantageous section to an increase section (AT state) described below in an advantageous section for the first time, the section lamp may light up at any time before play in the increase section begins. In other words, the section lamp may indicate that the current state is in an advantageous section, regardless of whether it is an effect section or an increase section, or may indicate at least the period from the start of the first increase section to the end of the advantageous section, including this.

The limit lamp also indicates, depending on how it lights up, whether or not a limit process, described below, has been executed, or the possibility of this. For example, by lighting up when a limit process has been executed, it notifies the player that a favorable state (such as an AT state) has been forcibly ended by the execution of the limit process. For example, by flashing when the execution of the limit process is imminent, it notifies the player that there is a high possibility that the favorable state will be forcibly ended by the execution of the limit process. In addition to these, other information related to the limit process can also be appropriately communicated by setting triggers for lighting, flashing, or turning off.

[1-1-10. Performance display]
As described above, the pachislot machine 1 includes a main effect display unit 21 and a sub effect display unit 22 that display effect images. The main effect display unit 21 and the sub effect display unit 22 constitute an effect display unit (means) that can display effects. They are also configured as one of the effect execution means that can execute effects from a visual perspective for the player.

The main display unit 21 includes a main display device 210 that displays effects through the effect display window UD1. The main display device 210 is configured as a display unit A that is replaceably mounted on an intermediate support plate G1 within the cabinet G. The display unit A is a so-called projection mapping device that includes an irradiation unit B that emits light for image display and a screen device C that displays images by irradiating the light from the irradiation unit B. While this configuration of the main display device 210 enables sophisticated and impressive effects to be displayed in this embodiment, the configuration of the main display device 210 is not limited to this. As long as it can provide effects that are visually appealing to the player, it can be configured as an image display device such as a liquid crystal display or organic electroluminescence (EL) display, a 7-segment LED display, or a display device such as a variable display device or dot display device for sub-reels. Furthermore, its shape, layout, size, and other factors can be appropriately modified based on these considerations. Furthermore, if the pachislot machine 1 is primarily designed to entertain players through the results of the winning combination, it may be configured without the main effect display unit 21 (the same applies to the sub effect display unit 22).

The sub-effect display unit 22 includes a sub-display device 220. The sub-display device 220 is configured as a liquid crystal display device. Like the main display device 210, the sub-display device 220 can be configured as another image display device or display device, or as a variable display device or dot display device. From this perspective, its shape, layout, size, and other factors can be modified as appropriate. The main effect display unit 21 has a large screen, so it primarily displays effects closely related to the current game, such as push order notifications, win notifications, and continuous effects. The sub-effect display unit 22 has a small screen, so it primarily displays effects less closely related to the current game, such as game history. This allows for separate display content to be displayed according to the purpose. In addition, this embodiment is configured with two effect display units, the main effect display unit 21 and the sub-effect display unit 22. However, the system can be configured with neither of these units, or with only one of them. It can also be configured with three or more effect display units.

[1-1-11. Lamp]
As mentioned above, the pachislot machine 1 is equipped with one or more lamps (light-emitting means) that can produce effects by changing their light-emitting modes (not only lighting, flashing, or extinguishing, but also their brightness and light-emitting color if configured as a full-color LED), such as the upper lamp 23 given as an example. Furthermore, such light-emitting means are configured as one of the effect execution means that can produce effects from a visual perspective for the player. Note that from this perspective, the number, shape, arrangement, size, etc. of the light-emitting means can be changed as appropriate.

Other lamps included in the lamps and LEDs described below include, for example, side lamps provided on both end faces of the upper door mechanism UD and the lower door mechanism DD, and operation unit lamps provided within each operation unit. The latter include the function of informing the player whether or not each operation unit is operable, and therefore, when performing this function, the light emission pattern does not change depending on the presentation content, but can be controlled to emit light in a unique light emission pattern.

[1-1-12. Speaker]
As described above, the pachislot machine 1 is equipped with speakers 35a, 35b that output sounds such as sound effects and background music. The speakers 35a, 35b constitute audio output means capable of producing effects by outputting sounds. They are also configured as one of the effect execution means capable of producing effects from an auditory perspective for the player. From this perspective, the number, shape, arrangement, size, etc. of the speakers can be changed as appropriate.

[1-1-13. Other production devices]
It should be noted that the pachislot machine 1 may be provided with other effect devices in addition to the various effect devices (effect execution means) described above. For example, it is possible to provide effect devices such as movable effect devices, such as so-called gadgets, vibration effect devices that produce effects by vibration, or air effect devices that produce effects by injecting air, and to execute effects. In other words, any effect device that can execute an effect that appeals to any of the player's five senses (sight, hearing, touch, taste, and smell) (allowing the player to recognize that an effect is being executed) can be used. Therefore, in this embodiment, "executing an effect" means that an effect may be executed using one or more of the various effect devices (effect execution means) described above, unless otherwise specified.

[1-2. Internal structure]
[1-2-1. Selector]
The selector 31 (reference numeral omitted in FIG. 2) is a path through which medals inserted through the medal insertion slot 5 flow down, and is provided on the rear side of the lower door mechanism DD. The selector 31 includes, for example, a medal sensor 31S, which will be described later, and a sorting device.

The medal sensor 31S detects medals inserted through the medal insertion slot 5 and determines whether the detected medals are appropriate. If the medal sensor 31S determines that the detected medals are appropriate and the sorting device is ready to accept the medals, the sorting device is controlled and driven to guide the medals to the hopper device 32, described below. In this case, the number of bets or credits is incremented by one. On the other hand, if the medal sensor 31S determines that the detected medals are not appropriate or the sorting device is not ready to accept the medals, the sorting device is controlled and driven to return the medals through the cancel chute and from the medal payout outlet 11. If an abnormality occurs in the medal detection by the medal sensor 31S, a selector error occurs. In this case, the error state can be cleared by eliminating the cause of the abnormality (for example, a medal jam) and performing a reset operation.

In other words, the selector 31 constitutes a gaming medium detection unit (means) capable of detecting the inserted gaming medium. The selector 31 also constitutes a determination means capable of determining whether the inserted gaming medium is valid. The selector 31 also constitutes a sorting means that stores the inserted gaming medium internally if it is valid, and discharges it to the outside if it is invalid. The configuration, placement, size, etc. of the selector 31 can be changed as appropriate. Furthermore, if the pachislot machine 1 is configured as a medalless gaming machine, as described below, the selector 31 is not necessarily a required component.

[1-2-2. Hopper device]
The hopper device 32 is provided in the lower space within the cabinet G. The hopper device 32 has, for example, a bucket section that stores medals that are inserted through the medal insertion port 5 and guided by the selector 31, a disk section that is provided at the bottom of the bucket section and stirs the medals stored in the bucket section and guides them one by one to the discharge section, a discharge section that discharges the medals guided by the disk section one by one, and a count sensor that counts the medals discharged from the discharge section.

The bucket is configured to be able to store a certain number of medals. Any medals exceeding this number are guided through a guide passage provided on the top side to the auxiliary medal storage 33, which will be described later. If the medals stored in the bucket become empty, a hopper empty error occurs. In this case, the error state can be cleared by refilling the bucket with medals and performing a reset operation.
The disk unit has multiple medal-shaped cutouts formed radially from the center, and when the central shaft is rotated in accordance with a drive signal, medals that fit into the cutouts are guided one by one to the discharge unit. The rotation of the disk unit agitates the medals stored in the bucket unit. If an abnormality occurs in the rotation of the disk unit, a hopper jam error occurs. In this case, the error state can be cleared by eliminating the cause of the abnormality (for example, a medal jam) and performing a reset operation.

The count sensor detects medals dispensed from the dispenser and counts the number of medals. For example, when one medal is dispensed, the disc starts rotating, and then the count sensor counts that one medal has been dispensed, causing the disc to stop rotating. In this way, the correct number of medals is dispensed.

In other words, the hopper device 32 constitutes a gaming media payout unit (means) capable of paying out gaming media. Furthermore, as described above, it can also be said to be part of the bonus granting means that grants bonuses to players. Furthermore, the configuration, placement, size, etc. of the hopper device 32 can be changed as appropriate. Furthermore, if the pachislot machine 1 is configured as a medal-less gaming machine, as described below, it is not necessarily a required component.

[1-2-3. Auxiliary medal storage]
The auxiliary medal storage 33 is provided in the lower space within the cabinet G. The auxiliary medal storage 33 has, for example, a storage section that stores medals guided from the bucket section of the hopper device 32, and an auxiliary medal storage switch 33S that is provided near the storage section and detects the amount of medals stored in the storage section.

The storage unit is configured to be able to store a certain number of medals. If the auxiliary medal storage switch 33S determines that more than the certain number of medals have been stored, an auxiliary medal storage error occurs. In this case, the error state will be cleared if the number of medals stored in the storage unit is reduced to at least below the certain number and a reset operation is performed.

In other words, the auxiliary medal storage 33 constitutes a surplus gaming media storage section (means) that can store surplus gaming media. Note that the configuration, placement, size, etc. of the auxiliary medal storage 33 can be changed as appropriate. Also, if the pachislot machine 1 is configured as a medal-less gaming machine, as described below, it is not necessarily a required component.

[1-2-4. Power supply]
The power supply device 34 is provided in the lower space within the cabinet G. The power supply device 34 has, for example, a power supply board 34a and a power switch 34b, and supplies power to the pachislot machine 1 when the power switch 34b is turned on. The power supply device 34 converts 100V AC power supplied from a power cable (not shown) into DC power required by each component, similar to household electrical appliances, and supplies the converted power to each component. In other words, the power supply device 34 constitutes a power supply unit (means) capable of supplying the required power to the gaming machine. The configuration, arrangement, size, etc. of the power supply device 34 can be changed as appropriate.

In this embodiment, the setting key switch 52 and reset switch 53 (described below) are configured to be provided on the main control board 71 (more specifically, on the main control board case (described below)), but these switches can also be configured to be provided on the power supply unit 34.

[1-2-5. Substrate]
The pachislot machine 1 includes the following boards as boards required for various controls: Note that the boards listed below are merely examples, and the machine may be configured to include boards different from these, or may not include boards that are not necessarily required.

[1-2-5-1. Main control board]
The main control board 71 is attached to the rear side of the reel unit RU inside the cabinet G. The main control board 71 is a game control board that controls games, and is housed in a transparent (or nearly transparent) resin main control board case (not shown) so that its state can be seen. The electrical configuration of the main control board 71 will be described later.

The specifications of the main control board 71 are subject to various constraints, and while it is generally configured with various electronic components DIP mounted, some or all of the various electronic components may be configured with SMT mounting (surface mounting). In this case, test points may be provided to check operation using a tester or oscilloscope. Small electronic components not exceeding 6 square mm may also be used for some or all of the various electronic components. The board surface of the main control board 71 may also be configured with multiple layers.

[1-2-5-2. Sub-control board]
The sub-control board 72 is attached to the back side of the intermediate support plate G1 inside the cabinet G. The sub-control board 72 is a performance control board that controls performance-related aspects, and is housed in a resin sub-control board case (not shown). The sub-control board case can be configured as a transparent (or nearly transparent) resin case like the main control board case, or as an opaque (or nearly opaque) case made of another material. The electrical configuration of the sub-control board 72 will be described later.

[1-2-5-3. Other substrates]
(Main relay board)
The main relay board 73 (reference numeral omitted in FIG. 2 ) is attached to a specific position within the cabinet G (e.g., the rear side of the lower door mechanism DD) and is an intermediate control board that relays between the main control board 71 and various devices connected to the main relay board 73, and between the main control board 71 and the sub-control board 72. Note that the main relay board 73 is configured as a separate board from the main control board 71 for the sake of control efficiency and wiring efficiency. Therefore, unless there is a particular problem, it is also possible to have the main control board 71 perform all of the functions of the main relay board 73, and to eliminate the main relay board 73. From this perspective, the main relay board 73 may be further divided into multiple relay boards to improve control efficiency and wiring efficiency. In other words, multiple boards may be provided as main relay boards.

(Sub-relay board)
The sub-relay board 74 is attached to a specific position within the cabinet G (for example, on the rear side of the lower door mechanism DD) and is an intermediate control board that relays between the sub-control board 72 and various devices connected to the sub-relay board 74, and between the main control board 71 and the sub-control board 72. Because the sub-relay board 74 is configured as a separate board from the sub-control board 72 for the sake of control efficiency and wiring efficiency, it is also possible to assign all of the functions of the sub-relay board 74 to the sub-control board 72 and not provide the sub-relay board 74 unless there is a particular problem. From this perspective, the sub-relay board 74 may be further divided into multiple relay boards to improve control efficiency and wiring efficiency. In other words, multiple boards may be provided as sub-relay boards.

(External centralized terminal board)
The external centralized terminal board 55 is attached to a specific position within the cabinet G (for example, the back of the lower space) and outputs signals such as a medal insertion signal, a medal payout signal, external signals 1 to 4, and a security signal to the outside of the pachislot machine 1. The output start and end conditions for external signals 1 to 4 can be set appropriately, making it possible to report to the outside the transition of the internal state of the pachislot machine 1 (for example, bonus state or AT state) according to the gameplay. Furthermore, since the external centralized terminal board 55 is usually connected to an external data display or hall computer, these devices can also recognize not only the medal insertion/payout status and error occurrence status of the pachislot machine 1, but also the transition of such internal states.

(Testing machine interface board)
The first interface board 301 for the test machine and the second interface board 302 for the test machine are both relay boards used to output various signals related to gameplay to the test machine during the certification test (test firing test) of the pachislot machine 1 (note that these relay boards are not installed in the pachislot machine 1 as a released product for sale, and therefore the various electronic components necessary for connecting to the first interface board 301 for the test machine and the second interface board 302 for the test machine are not mounted on the main control board 71 for sale). For example, test signals for controlling main game-related operations (e.g., internal lottery, reel stop control, etc.) are output via the first interface board 301 for the test machine, and test signals related to the push order navigation determined by the main control board 71 are output via the second interface board 302 for the test machine.

[2. Electrical configuration of pachislot machine]
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachislot machine 1 will be described with reference to Fig. 3. Fig. 3 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachislot machine 1.

As described above, the pachislot machine 1 has a main control board 71, a sub-control board 72, a main relay board 73, and a sub-relay board 74. The main control board 71 and the main relay board 73, the main relay board 73 and the sub-relay board 74, and the sub-relay board 74 and the sub-control board 72 are electrically connected to each other. Furthermore, the main control board 71 and the sub-control board 72 are electrically connected to enable one-way serial communication from the main control board 71 to the sub-control board 72 via the main relay board 73 and the sub-relay board 74.

The main control board 71 is equipped with a main control circuit 100, which functions as a game control unit that controls gameplay. The main control circuit 100 includes, for example, a main CPU 101, a main ROM 102, a main RAM 103, a clock pulse generating circuit (not shown), a random number circuit (not shown), and the like. The main ROM 102 stores various control programs executed by the main CPU 101, various data tables, and data for sending various control commands to the sub-control circuit 200. The main RAM 103 has a storage area for storing various data, such as internal winning combinations determined by the execution of the control programs. The clock pulse generating circuit generates a clock pulse signal for operating the main CPU 101. The random number circuit generates random numbers within a predetermined range (e.g., 0 to 65535 or 0 to 255). The main CPU 101 executes various control programs based on the generated clock pulse signal. Furthermore, the main CPU 101 extracts one or more values from the generated random numbers as random values, as necessary. In this way, all gameplay operations are controlled.

The sub-control board 72 is equipped with a sub-control circuit 200 that functions as a performance control unit for controlling performance-related aspects. The sub-control circuit 200 is configured to include, for example, a sub-CPU 201, a sub-RAM 203, etc. A ROM cartridge board 202 is also connected to the sub-control board 72. The ROM cartridge board 202 stores various control programs executed by the sub-CPU 201, various data tables, and various performance data (for example, video data and drive data related to the main display device 210, video data related to the sub-display device 220, lamp data related to the lamp/LED group, sound data related to the speaker group, etc.). The sub-RAM 203 is provided with a storage area for registering performance content and various performance data determined by execution of the control program, as well as a storage area for storing data related to various control instructions (commands) sent from the main control board 71. The random number values for the effects may be generated and selected within the sub-CPU 201 from a predetermined range of random numbers (e.g., 0 to 32767), or may be generated and selected by a random number circuit similar to that in the main control circuit 100. A sub-ROM may be included within the sub-control circuit 200 rather than the ROM cartridge board 202, with various control programs and the like stored in the sub-ROM. Various effect data may be stored on the ROM cartridge board 202, and various control programs and data tables may be stored in the sub-ROM within the sub-control circuit 200. The sub-control circuit 200 may also include a dedicated image processor (e.g., a VDP), such as a GPU, which is used to generate (edit) the images displayed on the main display device 210 and sub-display device 220.

The main control board 71 is electrically connected to the stepping motors 51L, 51C, 51R, setting key switch 52, reset switch 53, winning ratio monitor device 54, external central terminal board 55, hopper device 32, auxiliary medal storage switch 33S, and power supply device 34. The main control board 71 is also electrically connected to the door opening/closing monitoring switch 56, medal sensor 31S, bet switch 6S, start switch 7S, stop switch 8S, settlement switch 9S, and information display device 14 via the main relay board 73. If the first test machine interface board 301 and second test machine interface board 302 are installed, they are electrically connected to the main control board 71 via the main relay board 73, for example.

Note that the external centralized terminal board 55, hopper device 32, auxiliary medal storage switch 33S, power supply device 34, medal sensor 31S, bet switch 6S, start switch 7S, stop switch 8S, settlement switch 9S, information display device 14, first interface board for test machine 301, and second interface board for test machine 302 have already been explained, so their explanation will be omitted here.

Each stepping motor 51L, 51C, and 51R is connected to each reel 3L, 3C, and 3R via gears with a predetermined reduction ratio, and their drive rotates and stops each reel 3L, 3C, and 3R. Each time a pulse is output to each stepping motor 51L, 51C, and 51R, each reel 3L, 3C, and 3R rotates a fixed angle. Therefore, the main CPU 101 counts the number of pulses output to each stepping motor 51L, 51C, and 51R, and manages the symbol positions of each reel 3L, 3C, and 3R based on this count. Each reel 3L, 3C, and 3R is also provided with a reel index (not shown) that determines the initial position for this management, and an index sensor (not shown) that detects the position of the reel index.

The setting key switch 52 is used when changing the setting value of the pachislot machine 1 (e.g., six levels of setting 1 to setting 6) (setting change) or when checking the setting of the pachislot machine 1 (setting check). Here, the setting value indicates the degree of advantage the player has in terms of gameplay; typically, the lower the setting value (e.g., closer to setting 1), the lower the player's advantage, and the higher the setting value (e.g., closer to setting 6), the higher the player's advantage. The setting key switch 52 is turned on when, for example, an amusement parlor manager inserts a setting key (not shown) into the keyhole and turns it counterclockwise from the initial position, and turns off when the setting key is returned to the initial position. When the power to the pachislot machine 1 is off, turning the setting key switch 52 on and then on will allow settings to be changed, and turning the setting key switch 52 on while the power to the pachislot machine 1 is still on will allow settings to be confirmed.

The reset switch 53 can detect a reset operation by the gaming parlor's administrator. The reset operation is an operation to clear various error states. Furthermore, the reset switch 53 can detect a setting value confirmation operation by the gaming parlor's administrator when settings can be changed. When the reset switch 53 is operated when settings can be changed, the setting value increases by one each time (when setting 6 is reached, it returns to setting 1). This allows the setting value to be confirmed. The setting value thus confirmed is confirmed when the start lever 7 is subsequently operated once. In other words, the start switch 7S can detect a setting value confirmation operation by the gaming parlor's administrator. Thus, to change the settings, the following setting change operation is required: turn on the setting key switch 52, operate the reset switch 53 to select a setting value, operate the start lever 7 to confirm the selected setting value, and then turn off the setting key switch 52. This is just one example of a setting change operation; settings can also be changed using other operations. Additionally, when changing or checking settings, the current setting value may be displayed, for example, on the credit lamp or payout number lamp mentioned above.

The role ratio monitor device 54 is configured, for example, with a four-digit, seven-segment LED and is installed inside the main control board case. The role ratio monitor device 54 sequentially displays various percentage information related to games compiled and calculated by the main CPU 101. This percentage information is used by the gaming parlor manager to check for any tampering with the pachislot machine 1. The role ratio monitor device 54 may be mounted on the main control board 71 or on another board (e.g., a percentage display board) connected to the main control board 71. It may also be installed elsewhere within the cabinet G. For example, it may be installed on the main control board case. A management switch for starting the display on the role ratio monitor device 54 or switching its content may be installed within the cabinet G, and when this switch is operated, the various percentage information described above may be displayed. Furthermore, assuming the use of such a management switch, for example, the information display device 14 may be configured to double as the role ratio monitor device 54. Furthermore, immediately after power-on or after a predetermined time has passed since power-on (for example, about 10 seconds, a buffer time that takes into account the time required for the main control circuit 100 and sub-control circuit 200 to start up), in order to be able to confirm that the 4-digit 7-segment LED of the role ratio monitor device 54 is functioning normally, it is desirable to configure it so that it lights up (or blinks) for a predetermined period of time with a test pattern such as "8.8." (a pattern in which all segment and decimal LEDs light up).

In the role ratio monitor device 54, for example, the top two digits display the type of ratio information, and the bottom two digits display a value (%) indicating that ratio information. Here, the various types of ratio information displayed on the role ratio monitor device 54 include, for example, cumulative specific section ratio information, consecutive role ratio information and role ratio information for the most recent 6,000 games, cumulative consecutive role ratio information and role ratio information, etc.

Specific section ratio information is information that indicates the proportion of plays in a play section (e.g., AT state) in which information about a stop operation advantageous to the player was notified, out of the play section of the target number of plays (for example, 175,000 games for "cumulative," 6,000 games for "most recent 6,000 games," etc.; the same applies below), (or it may simply be the number of plays in an advantageous section). Furthermore, continuous feature ratio information is information that indicates the proportion of medals paid out during the operation of a first-class special feature (RB) (including the operation of a first-class special feature (RB) when the feature continuous operating device (BB) related to the first-class special feature is in operation), out of the number of medals paid out in the play section of the target number of plays. Furthermore, the feature ratio information is information that indicates the proportion of medals paid out during the operation of the first type special feature (RB), second type special feature (CB), and normal feature (SB) out of the total medals paid out in the play section of the target number of games. Here, "during the operation of the first type special feature (RB)" includes the operation of the first type special feature (RB) while the feature continuous operation device (BB) associated with the first type special feature is in operation, and "during the operation of the second type special feature (CB)" includes the operation of the second type special feature (CB) while the feature continuous operation device (MB) associated with the second type special feature is in operation.

In addition, a game zone in which information about a stop operation advantageous to the player is being notified (for example, in AT mode) can be considered to be a zone in which a special feature is in operation, or a continuous feature operation device is in operation, and the respective percentage information can be used to tally and calculate the percentage information. In other words, the role ratio monitor device 54 need only display the necessary percentage information appropriately, and the various percentage information that can be displayed are not limited to these. Furthermore, for models in which the corresponding numerical information (corresponding information) does not exist, such as when displaying continuous feature percentage information on a model that does not have a Type 1 special feature (RB), or when displaying specific section percentage information on a model that does not have a favorable section function (AT function), when the relevant item is displayed, it is desirable to display a non-compatible information identification display, such as by lighting two vertical bars in the center of the last two digits of the four-digit seven-segment LED that display the numerical information (% information indicating the ratio), such as "- -", so that the user can immediately recognize that the model does not have compatible information.

The door open/close monitoring switch 56 is provided, for example, on the opening/closing side (right side) of the lower door mechanism DD. It may be provided on the rear side of the lower door mechanism DD or on the cabinet G side. A similar door open/close monitoring switch may also be provided on the upper door mechanism UD. The door open/close monitoring switch 56 monitors the opening/closing of the lower door mechanism DD by turning on when the lower door mechanism DD is open and turning off when it is closed. If the door open/close monitoring switch 56 turns on, a door open error occurs. In this case, the error state is cleared by closing the lower door mechanism DD.

The sub-control board 72 is electrically connected to the ROM cartridge board 202, main display device 210, and sub-display device 220. The sub-control board 72 is also electrically connected to the 24-hour door monitoring unit 61, a group of performance buttons such as performance buttons 10a and 10b, lamps and LEDs such as upper lamp 23, and a group of speakers such as speakers 35a and 35b via the sub-relay board 74.

Note that the ROM cartridge board 202, main display device 210, sub-display device 220, effect buttons, lamps/LEDs, and speakers have already been explained, so a detailed explanation will be omitted here.

The 24-hour door monitoring unit 61, like the door opening/closing monitoring switch 56, is installed, for example, on the opening/closing side (right side) of the lower door mechanism DD. It has the same function as the door opening/closing monitoring switch 56 in that it monitors the opening and closing of the lower door mechanism DD, but by allowing this monitoring to be performed on the sub-control circuit 200 side as well, it is possible to further store the opening/closing history of the lower door mechanism DD for a certain period of time. This opening/closing history can be confirmed from the hall menu, which will be described later. Therefore, for example, if there is a history of the door being opened after the arcade manager has left outside of business hours, or if there is a history of the door being open for a long period of time during business hours, it can be recognized that there is a high possibility of fraudulent activity.

[3. Functional flow of pachislot machines]
Next, the functional flow of the pachislot machine 1 will be described with reference to Fig. 4. Fig. 4 is a diagram for explaining the functional flow of the pachislot machine 1.

When a player inserts a medal into the pachislot machine 1 (a bet operation is performed) and operates the start lever 7 (a start operation is performed), a single random number value (in this embodiment, this may be described as an "internal lottery random number value") is extracted from a predetermined range of random numbers (for example, 0 to 65535).

The internal lottery means (main CPU 101, which performs the internal lottery processing described below) draws a lottery based on the extracted random number value and determines the internal winning combination. The determination of the internal winning combination determines in advance the symbol combinations that are permitted to be displayed on the pay line. Symbol combinations include "winning" combinations that provide the player with benefits such as the payout of medals, the activation of replays, and the activation of bonuses, as well as other so-called "losing" combinations. A combination that results in the payout of medals is referred to as a "minor combination," a combination that activates replays is referred to as a "replay combination," and a combination that activates a bonus (bonus state) is referred to as a "bonus combination." A combination that can be internally won (i.e., a combination of symbols that is permitted to be formed) is sometimes simply referred to as a "combination." The internal winning combination may also be referred to as a "winning combination," a "predetermined result," or a "derivation allowable condition," etc. The internal lottery means may also be referred to as a "combination determining means," a "winning combination determining means," a "predetermining means," or a "derivation allowable condition determining means," etc.

Furthermore, when the start lever 7 is operated (a start operation is performed), multiple reels begin to spin. Then, when the player operates the stop buttons (stop buttons 8L, 8C, and 8R) corresponding to the reels (reels 3L, 3C, and 3R) (a stop operation is performed), the reel stop control means (main CPU 101, which performs the reel stop control process described below) controls the stopping of the corresponding reels based on the internal winning combination and the timing (or the order in which the stop buttons are pressed) of the stop buttons. Note that the operation means for performing the start operation is not limited to a lever-shaped device like the start lever 7, and may be any operation means that allows the player to perform the start operation. Furthermore, the operation means for performing the stop operation is not limited to a button-shaped device like the stop buttons 8L, 8C, and 8R, and may be any operation means that allows the player to perform the stop operation.

In pachislot machine 1, control is basically performed to stop the rotation of the corresponding reel within a specified time (190 msec) from when the stop button is pressed. In this embodiment, the number of symbols that move as the reel rotates within this specified time is called the "number of sliding symbols." In this embodiment, when the specified period is 190 msec, the maximum number of sliding symbols (maximum number of sliding symbols) is set to four symbols.

When an internal winning combination that allows the display of a winning symbol combination has been determined, the reel stop control means stops the rotation of the reels within a specified time of typically 190 msec (the equivalent of four symbols) so that the symbol combination is displayed on the pay line as much as possible. The reel stop control means also uses the specified time to stop the rotation of the reels so that symbol combinations that are not permitted to be displayed by the internal winning combination are not displayed on the pay line. The symbols displayed when the reels have stopped spinning are sometimes referred to as "stop display" or "display result." Displaying symbols when the reels have stopped spinning is sometimes referred to as "deriving the stop display" or "deriving the display result."

The reel stop control means may also be configured to perform automatic stop control, which automatically stops each reel when a predetermined automatic stop time has elapsed since the reels began spinning, even if the player has not performed a stop operation. In this case, since the reels will stop without the player's intervention, it is desirable to stop the reels so that no winning symbol combinations are displayed along the pay line, even if any internal winning combinations have been determined.

When all of the reels have stopped spinning in this way, the winning determination means (main CPU 101, which performs the winning activation determination process described below) determines whether the combination of symbols displayed on the pay line is a winning combination (or any other predetermined combination). That is, it determines whether a winning combination of symbols (or any other predetermined combination of symbols) has been achieved. Then, if the winning determination means determines that the displayed combination of symbols is a winning combination (or any other predetermined combination) (that is, a winning combination of symbols (or any other predetermined combination of symbols) has been achieved), a bonus such as the payout of medals is awarded to the player, or various controls are carried out in response to this. As an example, the above series of steps is carried out as one game (unit game) in pachislot machine 1.

The winning determination means may simply determine whether the symbol combination displayed on the pay line corresponds to any of a plurality of predetermined symbol combinations, or it may determine whether the symbol combination corresponds to the internal winning combination determined by the internal lottery means. That is, in the former case, it may determine whether the symbol combination corresponds to a winning combination separately from the internal winning combination. In this case, as long as the reel stop control means performs appropriate stop control, it is possible to sufficiently ensure the prevention of erroneous winning, thereby reducing the control burden associated with erroneous winning detection. On the other hand, in the latter case, by being able to determine whether the symbol combination associated with a winning combination is a symbol combination that is permitted to win, it is possible to detect erroneous winning in the event of an erroneous winning due to a reel malfunction or the like, thereby improving security.

Furthermore, in pachislots, during the series of gaming operations described above, various effects are produced using the display devices (e.g., main display device 210, sub-display device 220, etc.), the light output from various lamps (e.g., upper lamp 23, etc.), the sound output from speakers (e.g., speakers 35a, 35b, etc.), or a combination of these. In other words, these are effect execution means that execute the effects. The content of the effects executed by the effect execution means may be determined on the main control circuit 100 side (main side) or on the sub-control circuit 200 side (sub side). In other words, any of these can be effect content determination means.

For example, when the start lever 7 is operated (a start operation is performed), a random number value for effect is sampled separately from the random number value for the internal lottery. Once the random number value for effect is sampled, the effect content determination means determines by lottery (or according to predetermined determination conditions) the effect to be executed this time from among multiple types of effect content associated with the internal winning combination.

Next, once the effect content is determined by the effect content determination means, the effect execution means executes the corresponding effect in conjunction with various triggers, such as when the reels start spinning, when each reel stops spinning, and when it is determined whether or not a win has been won. In this way, in pachislot machine 1, for example, by executing effect content associated with an internal winning role, the player is provided with an opportunity to know or predict the determined internal winning role (which can also be expressed as the symbol combination to be aimed for, the button press sequence, etc.), thereby increasing the player's interest.

[4. Basic specifications regarding the playability of pachislot machines]
Next, the basic specifications regarding the playability of the pachislot machine 1 will be explained.

[4-1. Design arrangement]
As described above, the pachislot machine 1 is designed so that a game is played by displaying multiple symbols in a variable and static manner. Therefore, the main control circuit 100 must be configured to be able to determine which symbols are located at which positions on each of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R. Therefore, the main ROM 102 stores data for identifying the type of symbol located at each symbol position on at least each of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R. While various data configurations can be employed as long as the above objective is achieved, the present embodiment uses a symbol arrangement table (see FIG. 9) described below as an example.

The symbol arrangement table specifies symbol position data (e.g., "0" to "19") indicating the position of each symbol in the rotation direction of each of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R. Each symbol position data is also associated with data for identifying the type of symbol (e.g., a symbol code). The symbol arrangement table also specifies the position of the symbol located in the middle area of each reel within the frame of the main display window 4 when the reel index is detected as "0." The number of symbols in each column, the number of symbol types, and the maximum number of sliding pieces can be changed and specified as appropriate.

[4-2. Design Combination]
As described above, the pachislot machine 1 is designed so that the combination of displayed symbols affects the game outcome. That is, the pachislot machine 1 can award various benefits, transition from the current state to a relatively advantageous state, or transition from the current state to a relatively unfavorable state, depending on the combination of displayed symbols. Therefore, the main control circuit 100 must be configured to be able to grasp such symbol combinations. For this reason, the main ROM 102 contains data for identifying such symbol combinations. While various data configurations can be adopted as long as the above objective is achieved, the present embodiment uses the symbol combination table (see FIGS. 11 to 14) described below as an example.

The symbol combination table specifies data (for example, "display role" or "winning activation flag") indicating the types of combinations of multiple predetermined symbols that can be displayed on an active line. The symbols that make up each symbol combination can be identified, for example, using the symbol codes described above. Each symbol combination is also associated with data indicating the type of bonus (for example, "payout, etc."). The symbol combination table basically has a data structure that corresponds to the winning flag storage area, winning activation flag storage area, and symbol code storage area (see Figure 17), which will be described later. The number of symbol combination types, the content of the bonus, etc., can be changed and specified as appropriate.

[4-3. Internal lottery]
As described above, the pachislot machine 1 is designed so that the game outcome is affected by which symbol combinations are permitted to be displayed (predetermined in advance). That is, the pachislot machine 1 is capable of determining the internal winning combination (i.e., the type of symbol combination that may be displayed (or the type of bonus that may be awarded)) prior to (in advance of) the player's stop operation. Therefore, the main control circuit 100 must be configured to be able to grasp such internal winning combinations. For this reason, the main ROM 102 contains data for identifying such internal winning combinations. While various data configurations can be adopted as long as the above objective is achieved, the present embodiment uses the internal lottery table (see FIG. 10 ), which will be described later, as an example.

The internal lottery table specifies data indicating the types of multiple predetermined internal winning combinations (for example, "No." or "winning number"), and lottery values that determine each internal winning combination in each gaming state. Note that the lottery values may vary depending on the set value. Each internal winning combination is also associated with the type of (corresponding) symbol combination that is permitted to be displayed. Note that pachislot machine 1 allows multiple symbol combinations to be associated with one internal winning combination, and when such an internal winning combination is determined, the symbol combination that will be displayed is determined by stop control.

Here, for example, in the internal lottery process of this embodiment described below (see FIG. 26; more specifically, the internal winning combination determination process of S64), first, a random number value extracted by a random number circuit from a predetermined range of numbers (e.g., 0 to 65535) is sequentially added and updated with a lottery value specified for each internal winning combination. Next, a determination is made as to whether the lottery result (lottery value + random number value) exceeds 65535 (whether the lottery result has overflowed). Then, for a predetermined internal winning combination, if the result of this determination exceeds 65535, that internal winning combination is awarded (the internal winning combination is determined). However, if this determination is made for all internal winning combinations and none exceed 65535, the internal winning combination for this game is a "lose." Note that this is merely one example of internal lottery processing, and various methods can be used for the lottery processing as long as an appropriate lottery is performed according to the lottery value (winning probability). For example, the extracted random number value may be sequentially subtracted and updated by a lottery value specified for each internal winning combination, and then the internal winning combination may be determined by determining whether the subtraction result (lottery result) is below 0 (whether the lottery result has underflowed).

In this way, in the internal lottery table, the larger the specified lottery value of an internal winning combination, the higher the probability of it being determined (winning probability). The winning probability of each internal winning combination can be expressed as "lottery value specified for each winning number / number of all random number values that can be drawn (random number denominator: 65536)."

[4-4. Stop control]
As described above, the pachislot machine 1 is designed so that the game outcome is affected by the final symbol combination displayed by the player's stop operation, among the symbol combinations permitted to be displayed based on the determination of the internal winning role. In other words, the pachislot machine 1 is capable of controlling (determining) the type of symbol combination that will ultimately be displayed based not only on the type of determined internal winning role, but also on the timing and sequence of the player's stop operations (also referred to as the "stop operation mode" or "stop operation procedure"). Therefore, the main control circuit 100 must be configured to determine the type of stop control to be performed for each internal winning role, depending on the player's stop operation mode. For this reason, the main ROM 102 contains data for specifying such stop control modes. While various data configurations can be adopted as long as these objectives are achieved, in this embodiment, a stop table and a pull-in priority table (not shown) are used as examples.

The stop table prescribes data indicating the amount of symbol movement (e.g., "number of sliding symbols") for each symbol position data of each reel 3L, 3C, and 3R. For example, suppose a predetermined stop table is selected in a game in which a predetermined internal winning combination is determined. Next, suppose a stop operation is performed on the spinning reel 3L. At this time, suppose the stop start position (the symbol position data in the middle area of reel 3L when the stop operation is performed) is "0." Furthermore, suppose the number of sliding symbols prescribe for symbol position data "0" in the predetermined stop table is "4." The main control circuit 100 then controls reel 3L to stop at a symbol position four symbols away (the position with symbol position data "4") (the planned stop position becomes "4"). In this way, the stop table prescribes data (number of sliding symbols) that makes it possible to directly determine the stop position. Note that this data configuration is merely one example. Furthermore, using such a stop table to perform stop control is generally referred to as "table control."

The attraction priority table specifies data (e.g., "attraction priority") that indicates which symbol combination is given priority for display (attraction) when there are multiple symbol combinations that are permitted to be displayed. For example, suppose a predetermined attraction priority table is selected in a game in which a predetermined internal winning combination is determined. Here, the predetermined internal winning combination permits the display of symbol combination A and symbol combination B, and the predetermined attraction priority table specifies attraction priorities such that symbol combination B is given priority over symbol combination A. Next, suppose a stop operation is performed on reel 3L while it is spinning. At this time, suppose the stop start position is "0".

The main control circuit 100 then searches for symbols that make up symbol combination A and symbol combination B at each symbol position within the maximum number of sliding symbols (e.g., "4"), including the stop start position, to determine whether they are present. If neither symbol is present, the main control circuit 100 determines the stopping position according to a predetermined rule (e.g., stopping at a closer position, stopping at a farther position, etc.). If only symbols that make up symbol combination A are present, the main control circuit 100 determines the stopping position corresponding to the symbol. If only symbols that make up symbol combination B are present, the main control circuit 100 determines the stopping position corresponding to the symbol. If both symbols are present, the main control circuit 100 determines the stopping position corresponding to the symbol, since symbol combination B is displayed preferentially over symbol combination A. Note that the draw priority may be stored for all symbol positions during rotation of the target reel according to the selected draw priority table, or may be stored for each symbol position within the maximum number of sliding symbols, including the stop start position, when a stop operation is performed on the target reel. This data structure is merely an example. Furthermore, using such a pull-in priority table to perform stop control is generally referred to as "control control."

In this embodiment, stop control can be performed by performing only "table control," or by performing only "control control." Alternatively, stop control can be performed by first tentatively determining the stopping position by performing "table control," then searching for a more appropriate stopping position by performing "control control," and then changing the stopping position depending on the search results.

In this way, in pachislot machine 1, the combination of symbols that will ultimately be displayed on the pay line is determined based on, for example, the following three factors:

The first element is the determined internal winning combination (the lottery result of the internal lottery process). For example, if the result of the internal lottery process is a "miss," none of the symbol combinations related to the replay role, the symbol combination related to the minor role, or the symbol combination related to the bonus role will ultimately be displayed on an active line. Note that a "miss" can be considered to be one of the internal winning roles, or it can be considered to be a lottery result in which no internal winning role is determined.

The second factor is the timing of the player's stop operation (the position of the symbols (pressed position) when the player operates one of the stop buttons). For example, in this embodiment, the maximum number of sliding symbols is set to four symbols. Therefore, even if one of the internal winning combinations is selected as a result of the internal lottery process, if the symbols that make up a symbol combination that is permitted to be displayed are positioned on an active line (or on each active line, if there are multiple active lines), the symbol combination may not be displayed depending on the timing of the player's stop operation. This is known as a "miss."

The third element is the player's press order (the order in which the player operates the stop buttons). For example, in this embodiment, an internal winning combination associated with a combination of multiple symbols may be determined, and in this case, the combination of symbols ultimately displayed on the active line may vary depending on the player's press order. Such an internal winning combination is called a "push order combination," and if it is a replay combination, it may be called a "push order replay," and if it is a minor combination, it may be called a "push order minor combination."

[4-5. Game Status]
In the pachislot machine 1, various game states can be set as game states in order to vary the degree of advantage to the player or to achieve intended gameplay. An example of such a game state will be described below.

[4-5-1. Bonus state]
In the pachislot machine 1, when a bonus role is won and a symbol combination associated with the bonus role is displayed on an active line, it is possible to transition to a bonus state (activate the bonus state). It is also possible to configure the machine so that such a bonus state is not provided. Furthermore, it is also possible to configure the machine so that multiple bonus states are provided by providing multiple types of bonus roles. When a bonus role is won, a state (carry-over state) occurs in which the bonus role is carried over as an internally-won role over multiple games until the symbol combination associated with the bonus role is displayed on an active line. Such a bonus role is sometimes referred to as a "carry-over role." This carry-over state is also sometimes referred to as a "(bonus) flag interval" or "(bonus) internally-won" state.

The bonus state is a state in which it is possible to vary the lottery pattern for small roles (including the winning probability, its content, and the stop control pattern, etc.; the same applies below) compared to a state in which the bonus state is not activated (non-bonus state). (Because it is also a state in which it is possible to vary the lottery pattern for replay roles, the bonus state can also be considered one pattern of the RT state described below.) Therefore, if such a lottery pattern is relatively advantageous to the player, the bonus state will be a more advantageous gaming state than the non-bonus state. On the other hand, if such a lottery pattern is relatively disadvantageous to the player, the bonus state will be a less advantageous gaming state than the non-bonus state.

Examples of bonus roles include a first-class special role (RB), a role continuous operation device (BB) related to a first-class special role, a second-class special role (CB) (but not a carryover role), a role continuous operation device (MB) related to a second-class special role, and a normal role (SB) (but not a carryover role). Furthermore, for example, the bonus states corresponding to each bonus role are configured as follows: The RB state is configured as a game state that ends when a predetermined number of wins (for example, the upper limit is 8 times) or a predetermined number of plays (for example, the upper limit is 12 times) have been played. The BB state is configured as a game state that ends when more medals than a predetermined number of payouts (for example, the upper limit is 285) have been paid out.

The CB state is configured as a game state that ends when one game has been played. The MB state is configured as a game state that ends when more medals than a predetermined number of medals have been paid out (for example, the upper limit is 153 medals), or when RB or SB is won during the MB state. The SB state is configured as a game state that ends when one game has been played.

The condition for activating the bonus state is not limited to the display of a combination of symbols associated with a bonus role on a payline. For example, during the operation of a special feature continuous activation device (BB) associated with a first-class special feature, a special feature (RB) can be configured to automatically activate when the feature continuous activation device (BB) associated with the first-class special feature begins operation, when play begins when the first-class special feature is not in operation, or when the operation of the first-class special feature ends. In other words, the RB can be controlled to always be in operation while the BB is in operation, without specifying the symbol combination associated with the RB. Here, the RB during BB operation is sometimes referred to as "JAC," and a specification in which the RB is automatically activated during BB operation is sometimes referred to as "auto JAC." Furthermore, during BB operation, the RB can be controlled to be activated when a specified symbol combination associated with the RB is displayed on a payline. Such a specification in which the RB is activated based on the display of a corresponding symbol combination is sometimes referred to as "manual JAC." The same applies to the relationship between the special device continuous operation device (MB) for the second-class special device and the second-class special device (CB). In other words, it is possible to control the CB so that it is always in operation while the MB is in operation without specifying the combination of symbols related to the CB, or it is possible to control the CB so that it is in operation when the specified combination of symbols related to the CB is displayed on the pay line while the MB is in operation.

[4-5-2. RT state]
In the pachislot machine 1, when a predetermined transition condition is met, it is possible to transition to the RT state (activate the RT state). Note that it is also possible to configure the machine so that such an RT state is not provided. It is also possible to configure the machine so that multiple RT states are provided. The RT state is a state in which the lottery mode of the replay role can be varied relative to a state in which the RT state is not activated (non-RT state). Therefore, if such a lottery mode is relatively advantageous to the player, the RT state becomes a more advantageous gaming state than the non-RT state. On the other hand, if such a lottery mode is relatively disadvantageous to the player, the RT state becomes a less advantageous gaming state than the non-RT state. Furthermore, when multiple RT states are provided, the same applies to the differences between the multiple RT states. In this case, an RT state in which the lottery pattern for the replay role (particularly the winning probability) is relatively favorable to the player may be referred to as a "high RT state" or a "high probability replay state," while an RT state in which the lottery pattern for the replay role (particularly the winning probability) is relatively unfavorable to the player may be referred to as a "low RT state" or a "low probability replay state."

The RT state can be transitioned, for example, when any of the following transition conditions are met. Furthermore, if multiple RT states are provided, the same applies to transitions between those multiple RT states.

(1) When RB, BB, or MB is won. (2) When a combination of symbols related to RB, BB, or MB is displayed. (3) When the RB state, BB state, or MB state ends. (4) When a specific combination of symbols is displayed when RB, BB, or MB is not won (carried over) and the state is not RB, BB, or MB. (5) When a predetermined number of games have been played after the transition condition of (3) or (4) is met. [4-5-3. AT State]
In the pachislot machine 1, when a predetermined transition condition is met, it is possible to transition to the AT state (activate the AT state). Note that it is also possible to configure the machine not to provide such an AT state. It is also possible to configure the machine to provide multiple AT states. The AT state is a gaming state that is configured as a more advantageous state than a state in which the AT state is not activated (non-AT state), for example, by notifying the player of information about a stop operation that is advantageous to the player when the above-mentioned push order role is won.

When multiple AT states are provided, the degree of advantage to the player can be varied by varying the play period for each AT state (including the likelihood of extension, if such period can be extended (also called "addition"; the same applies below)), the type of role for which information on a stop operation is notified, or the probability of notification of information on a stop operation. The transition and termination conditions for the AT state can be set appropriately according to the gameplay (excluding termination due to the execution of limit processing, described below). The AT state may also be treated as if it were the bonus state described above, in which case it may be referred to as a "pseudo bonus state", etc.

Furthermore, as long as the play period in the AT state is managed appropriately, it may be managed by the number of games (number of plays) (game number management), or by the number of sets, with a predetermined number of games considered as one set (set number management). It may also be managed by the number of payouts or net increase (difference in number of coins) during the AT state (payout number management, difference in number of coins management). It may also be managed by the number of notifications (number of navigations) that affect the payout of medals in the AT state (for example, push order navigation when a push order minor feature is won) (navigation number management). The same applies when the AT state is extended. The play period granted when transitioning to the AT state and the play period granted when the AT state is extended may be managed by different management methods. Furthermore, when multiple AT states are provided, they may be managed by the same management method, or by different management methods.

[4-5-4. ART state]
In the pachislot machine 1, when a predetermined transition condition is met, it is possible to transition to an ART state that combines the above-mentioned high RT state and AT state (activate the ART state). That is, the ART state means an AT state that is performed in a high RT state, so it differs from the AT state in that at least a low RT state and a high RT state are provided as RT states, and control is performed to transition to the high RT state (or transition to the low RT state is avoided), but the basic control is the same as the AT state (if information about a stop operation advantageous to the player is notified, resulting in a transition to the high RT state (or transition to the low RT state is avoided), it can be said to be synonymous with the AT state). Note that when the transition condition for the ART state is met, it may first transition to the AT state, and then transition to the high RT state to transition to the ART state, or it may transition to the ART state by transitioning to the high RT state and the AT state simultaneously (or approximately simultaneously).

[4-5-5. Other gaming conditions]
It should be noted that the pachislot machine 1 can also have gaming states other than the various gaming states described above. For example, the various modes in the advantageous zones (see Figures 5 and 6) described below are also states in which the player plays the game, and can change the degree of advantage of whether or not to transition to an AT state, which is a pseudo-bonus state, and therefore these can be considered gaming states. From a similar perspective, it is also possible to provide gaming states that can change the degree of advantage of whether or not to transition to a bonus state. For example, when a bonus role is won (carried over), it is possible to configure the machine to change the degree of advantage of the player by providing a gaming state in which a combination of symbols related to the bonus role is more likely to be displayed by stop control, and a gaming state in which a combination of symbols related to the bonus role is relatively less likely to be displayed. In addition, for example, by providing a game state in which a bonus role is won with a predetermined probability (easy to win) and a game state in which the bonus role is won with a probability lower than the predetermined probability (relatively difficult to win), it is possible to configure the game so that the player's degree of advantage can be varied.

Furthermore, the following methods can be employed to vary the degree of advantage of whether or not to transition to the AT state (which may also include whether or not to extend the play period of that AT state while in the AT state; the same applies below). For example, a "special role" can be determined as an internal winning role. The number of medals awarded for this special role varies depending on the player's stop operation mode (which may be the timing of the stop operation, the order in which buttons are pressed, or a combination of these) (for example, if the stop operation mode is appropriate (correct), eight medals are paid out, and if the stop operation mode is inappropriate (incorrect), one medal or no medal is paid out).

If the specific combination is won in a specific game state, and eight coins are paid out, no decision will be made as to whether or not to change the degree of advantage for transitioning to the AT state in this game to a more advantageous one (this may also include a decision as to whether or not to transition directly to the AT state, or whether or not to directly extend the game period of that AT state; hereinafter referred to as an "advantageous decision"). On the other hand, if eight coins are not paid out, the advantageous decision will be made in this game. Alternatively, if the specific combination is won in the specific game state described above, and eight coins are paid out, the advantageous decision will be made in this game. On the other hand, if eight coins are not paid out, the advantageous decision will not be made in this game.

In this way, when a player plays using a specific game method, the game may result in either an advantageous decision being made for the current game, or in a situation where the advantageous decision is not made (advantageous decisions are restricted). Note that the player may change between the current game and the next game, and if such restrictions continue into the next game and beyond, there is a risk that the (next) player will suffer a significant disadvantage. Therefore, it is desirable that such restrictions only apply to the current game and not continue into the next game and beyond. Such restrictions are also sometimes referred to as "penalties."

[4-6. Gaming area]
In order to prevent excessive gambling in the pachislot machine 1, it is possible to provide various game zones as game states based on concepts different from the game states described above. An example of such a game zone will be described below. The game zones can be broadly divided into non-advantageous zones and advantageous zones.

(Non-advantageous section)
The non-advantageous section is configured as a gaming period during which it is not possible to notify the player of a stop operation mode that is advantageous to the player, and has the following requirements: Note that the following requirements are merely examples, and if at least one of the requirements is relaxed or tightened, they can be changed accordingly.

(1) It is not possible to notify the player of advantageous stop operation modes (for example, button press order navigation, etc.). Therefore, it is not possible to control the machine to the AT or ART states described above.

(2) If the setting value is changed (settings are changed), or if an initialization condition such as a "RAM abnormality" described below is met, the non-advantageous zone will be set as the initial state.

(3) When the limit processing described below is executed in the advantageous zone (i.e., when a predetermined value that is updated as play progresses during the advantageous zone (e.g., the value of the advantageous zone game count counter or advantageous zone payout counter described below) reaches a predetermined value (e.g., 1,500 games or 2,400 coins)), a non-advantageous zone is set as the initial state. Note that the predetermined value may be referenced, and if the predetermined value reaches a specific updated value even before it reaches the predetermined value, the non-advantageous zone may be set using that as a condition. Also, if a predetermined termination condition is met during the advantageous zone and the zone is determined to end (e.g., if a lottery to determine the end of the advantageous zone is held and the lottery is won), the non-advantageous zone may be set using that as a condition.

(4) In non-advantageous zones, processing related to advantageous zones (for example, processing to determine whether to transition to an advantageous zone) can only be performed by referencing the determined internal winning role, and cannot be performed by referencing various parameters other than the internal winning role, such as the derived result display (symbol combination) or the number of games played in the non-advantageous zone (or the advantageous zone before the transition). The internal winning role that has been determined can be determined by referencing data that directly indicates the internal winning role, such as the winning number, or by referencing data that indirectly indicates the internal winning role, such as a sub-flag (where multiple roles are treated as one piece of data to be determined) generated or converted from the data of the internal winning role.

(5) Non-advantageous zones are basically in state 1, and multiple states cannot be set within a non-advantageous zone. For example, it is not possible to set different states, such as the non-advantageous zone after the end of an advantageous zone being non-advantageous zone A, and the non-advantageous zone after the settings are changed being non-advantageous zone B.

(Advantageous area)
The advantageous section is configured as a gaming period during which it is possible to notify the player of advantageous stop operation modes, and it meets the following requirements: Note that the following requirements are merely examples, and if at least one of the requirements is relaxed or tightened, they can be changed accordingly.

(1) It is possible to notify the player of advantageous stop operation modes (for example, button press order navigation, etc.). Therefore, it is possible to control the machine to the AT state or ART state described above.

(2) If the setting value is changed (settings are changed), or if an initialization condition such as a "RAM abnormality" described below is met, it will not be possible to set the advantageous zone as the initial state.

(3) If the limit processing described below is executed in a favorable zone, the favorable zone must be terminated.

(4) In advantageous zones, processing related to the advantageous zone (for example, determining whether to transition to a different game state (mode) during the advantageous zone, or whether to extend a specific game state (mode)) can be performed not only by referencing the determined internal winning combination, but also by referencing various parameters other than the internal winning combination, such as the derived result display (combination of symbols) and the number of games played during the advantageous zone. Other examples of the various parameters that can be referenced include, for example, bonus information such as points that can be awarded according to the various parameters described above, the type of bonus state, the type of RT state, the timing of the stop operation for one of the reels, or the push order.

(5) Multiple states can be set within the advantageous zone. For example, it is possible to set states such as a normal state that is unfavorable to the player, a CZ state that makes it easier to transition to the AT state, or an AT state in which the expected value of medal increase is positive when a stop operation is performed in response to the notification. Furthermore, for example, states such as a CZ precursor state, which is set as a waiting state until the actual transition to the CZ state in response to a decision to transition to the CZ state in the normal state, and in which a premonition effect suggesting a transition to the CZ state may be performed, or an AT precursor state, which is set as a waiting state until the actual transition to the AT state in response to a decision to transition to the AT state in the normal state or CZ state, and in which a premonition effect suggesting a transition to the AT state may be performed, can also be set according to gameplay.

(6) The lighting of a section lamp (status display unit) that can indicate whether the section is a non-advantageous section or an advantageous section can indicate that the section is in an advantageous section (if the section lamp is off, it can indicate that the section is in a non-advantageous section). As mentioned above, the timing at which the section lamp starts to light can be set to any timing. Basically, it can start to light up when the section moves from a non-advantageous section to an advantageous section and continue to light up until the section moves back to a non-advantageous section. Alternatively, if the section moves from a non-advantageous section to an advantageous section (the advantageous section has started) and the advantageous section to which the user has moved is in a normal state, the lamp may not start to light up, but may start to light up when the AT state is first reached. If the advantageous section to which the user has moved is in an AT state, the lamp may start to light up from that point on.

[4-7. Limiter]
In the pachislot machine 1, in order to prevent excessive gambling due to an advantageous zone continuing for too long, it is possible to set an upper limit (restriction) on the period of time that the advantageous zone continues. Such an upper limit is called a "limiter." In addition, in this embodiment, the termination of the advantageous zone by such a limiter is described as the execution of limit processing or the activation of the limiter. An example of such a limiter will be described below.

(Game limiter)
The game count limiter is configured as a limiter that executes a limiting process when the number of games (number of plays) during the advantageous period reaches "1500." For example, the advantageous period game count counter described below starts counting when the advantageous period begins and increments by one each time a play is completed. When the value of the advantageous period game count counter reaches a predetermined value (e.g., "1500" or more), the advantageous period is forcibly terminated and a transition to a non-advantageous period occurs (e.g., even if the play period in the AT state remains). The number of games at which the game count limiter activates can be set to any number of games as long as it is equal to or less than the upper limit of "1500." Furthermore, if the requirements for such a game count limiter are relaxed or tightened, the limiter can be appropriately changed accordingly. Furthermore, the limiter may gradually reduce the risk of gambling depending on the number of games played during the advantageous period.

(Payout limiter)
The payout number limiter is configured as a limiter that executes a limiting process when the number of medals paid out during a favorable zone reaches 2400. For example, the favorable zone payout number counter (described below) starts counting when the favorable zone begins and increments the count by the corresponding number of medals each time a medal is paid out (more specifically, the net increase obtained by subtracting the number of bets from the number of payouts). When the value of the favorable zone payout number counter reaches a predetermined value (e.g., 2400 or more), the favorable zone is forcibly terminated and the game transitions to a non-favorable zone (e.g., even if the game period in the automatic time slot (AT) remains). The payout number at which the payout number limiter activates can be set to any payout number up to the upper limit of 2400. Furthermore, if the requirements for such a payout number limiter are relaxed or tightened, the limiter can be appropriately modified accordingly. Furthermore, the limiter may gradually reduce the risk of gambling depending on the number of medals paid out during a favorable zone.

Also, for example, the advantageous zone payout number counter described below may be configured to count the positive amount from the most recent lowest point, with the point at which the absolute value of the number of medals has decreased the most since the start of the advantageous zone as the lowest point (starting point) (i.e., the count is decremented if no payout has occurred). In other words, the payout number limiter may be configured as a limiter that executes limit processing when a maximum of 2,400 medals have been paid out since the number of medals began to increase during the advantageous zone (e.g., when the AT state began). Also, for example, the advantageous zone payout number counter described below may simply count the actual number of payouts (i.e., the number of payouts without subtracting the number of bets) rather than the net increase mentioned above.

The pachislot machine 1 may execute limit processing for the advantageous zone using only the game count limiter, may execute limit processing for the advantageous zone using only the payout limiter, or may execute limit processing for the advantageous zone using both the game count limiter and the payout limiter. When using both limiters, it is desirable to end the advantageous zone when the activation conditions of either limiter are met after the advantageous zone has started.

Furthermore, the types of limiters are not limited to the game count limiter and payout limiter described above. For example, a navigation count limiter may be provided that executes limit processing when the number of times push order minor roles are navigated during the AT state (i.e., the number of times information about stop operations advantageous to the player for roles related to the payout of medals is notified) reaches a predetermined number of times (e.g., 400 times). In other words, as long as gambling can be appropriately suppressed, limit processing can be executed using various conditions related to the game.

[4-8. External Signals]
As described above, the pachislot machine 1 is designed to be capable of outputting multiple types of external signals to the outside. For example, if external signal 1 is turned on when a bonus state is initiated and turned off when the bonus state is terminated, a bonus state effect linked to this can be performed in the external data display device. Furthermore, if external signal 1 is turned on when a BB state is initiated and turned off when the BB state is terminated, and external signal 2 is turned on when an MB state is initiated and turned off when the MB state is terminated, not only can the external data display device perform the bonus state effect described above, but it can also count the number of bonuses by type.

Furthermore, for example, if external signal 1 is turned on when an AT state begins, and turned off when the AT state ends, it is possible to perform AT state effects linked to this on the external data display.Furthermore, for example, if external signal 1 is turned on when a specific AT state begins, and turned off when the specific AT state ends, and external signal 2 is turned on when a specific AT state begins, and turned off when the specific AT state ends, it is possible to not only perform the above-mentioned AT state effects on the external data display, but also count the number of ATs by type.

Also, for example, if the AT state is configured as an AT state managed by the number of sets, and external signal 1 is turned on when the first set of the AT state begins, and external signal 2 is turned on each time a set begins from the second set onwards, the external data display device can also count the number of initial hits in the AT state and the number of times the AT state has been extended. The timing for turning each external signal on and off can be set as appropriate. In other words, as long as the situation is properly recognized by the external data display device, hall computer, etc., the output mode of each external signal can be set as appropriate. For example, the period from the off state to the on state and back to the off state can be set to various conditions, such as a predetermined time, the duration of one game, or until the state changes.

[4-9. Commands]
As described above, the pachislot machine 1 is designed to be able to send multiple types of commands from the main control circuit 100 to the sub-control circuit 200. Note that the pachislot machine 1 does not allow the main control circuit 100 and the sub-control circuit 200 to communicate with each other, and is required to communicate only in one direction, from the main control circuit 100 to the sub-control circuit 200. Therefore, the main control circuit 100 needs to send information (commands) to the sub-control circuit 200 at appropriate times to report changes in the state of the pachislot machine 1, etc. An example of such a command is described below.

The main control circuit 100 sends an initialization command to the sub-control circuit 200, for example, when a setting change operation is performed. The initialization command includes parameters that specify the setting values, game status, etc. Also, for example, when a bet operation is performed, the main control circuit 100 sends a medal insertion command. The medal insertion command includes parameters that specify the number of bets, etc. Also, for example, when a start operation is performed, the main control circuit 100 sends a start command. The start command includes parameters that specify the internal winning combination, game status, etc. Also, for example, when a lock effect is performed, the main control circuit 100 sends a lock command. The lock command includes parameters that specify the content of the lock effect, etc. Also, for example, when reels 3L, 3C, and 3R start spinning, the main control circuit 100 sends a reel spin start command. The reel spin start command includes parameters that specify that reel spinning has started, etc.

Also, for example, when a stop operation is performed, a reel stop command is sent. The reel stop command includes parameters that specify the reel to be stopped and the position where that reel will be stopped. Also, for example, when all reels are stopped and a displayed role (winning activation flag) is confirmed, a winning activation command is sent. The winning activation command includes parameters that specify the type of displayed role and the details of the bonus to be awarded. Also, for example, when a favorable zone starts, a favorable zone start command is sent. The favorable zone start command includes parameters that specify the start of the favorable zone and the mode (game state). Also, for example, when a favorable zone ends, a favorable zone end command is sent. The favorable zone end command includes parameters that specify the end of the favorable zone and the cause of its end. Also, for example, when a settlement operation is performed, a settlement command is sent. The settlement command includes parameters that specify the number of returns, etc. Note that these are merely examples, and other commands can be sent as needed, and unnecessary commands can be suppressed.

[4-10. Performance]
As described above, in the pachislot machine 1, in order to increase the interest of the game, to inform the player of useful information, or to achieve the intended gameplay, it is possible to execute various effects using various effect devices. An example of such effects will be described below.

[4-10-1. Main side production]
In the pachislot machine 1, the following effects can be performed, for example, under the control of the main control circuit 100 side (main side). As mentioned above, the pachislot machine 1 is capable of announcing information about the stop operation using the instruction monitor, and this is also included in the effects in a broad sense.

(Rock production)
In the pachislot machine 1, when a predetermined execution condition is met, an effect can be performed in which the progress of the game is stopped for a predetermined period of time (the player's game operations are disabled for a predetermined period of time). Such an effect is called a "lock effect (or simply "lock")" or a "freeze effect (or simply "freeze")." Note that the machine can be configured so that such a lock effect is not performed, or so that multiple types of lock effects can be performed.

The gaming operations to be invalidated may be, for example, start operations, stop operations, or other operations. For example, if start operations are invalidated for a specified period of time, game progress will be stopped for a specified period of time after all stop operations have been performed. For example, if stop operations are invalidated for a specified period of time, game progress will be stopped for a specified period of time after a start operation has been performed. Furthermore, if multiple types of lock effects are provided, the period during which game progress is stopped (the period during which the player's gaming operations are invalidated) and the type of gaming operation to be invalid can be set for each lock effect.

(Reel performance)
In the pachislot machine 1, when a predetermined execution condition is met, an effect can be produced by the effect display mode of each reel 3L, 3C, 3R (including not only the variable display mode but also a combination with the stopped display mode) during the execution of the above-mentioned lock effect. Such an effect is called a "reel effect" as well as a "pattern effect," etc. Note that the machine can be configured not to produce such a reel effect, or can be configured to produce multiple types of reel effects. Furthermore, when it is said that a "lock effect is produced (executed)," it also includes both cases where a reel effect is produced and cases where it is not produced.

In short, reel effects are produced by spinning or stopping (temporarily stopping) each reel 3L, 3C, and 3R without the player's input during a period in which the player's input is disabled. Therefore, it is possible to set an operation pattern that produces such effects without considering the rotation speed or maximum number of sliding symbols. Furthermore, by setting multiple operation patterns, it is possible to provide multiple types of reel effects. Furthermore, by combining multiple types of reel effects with multiple types of lock effects, it is possible to set an even wider variety of effect patterns. Note that the reel effects may use any one, any two, or all three of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R.

(Pseudo-game)
In the pachislot machine 1, when a predetermined execution condition is met, an effect can be performed in which a pseudo game is played while the above-mentioned lock effect is being executed. Such an effect is called a "pseudo game." Note that the machine can be configured so that such a pseudo game is not performed, or so that multiple types of pseudo games can be performed. Furthermore, when "a lock effect is performed (executed)," this also includes both cases where a pseudo game is performed and cases where it is not performed.

In essence, pseudo-games involve accepting simulated player operations during a period in which the player's operations are invalid, thereby spinning or stopping (temporarily stopping) the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R to create effects. In other words, the reel effects described above are further enhanced by the player's operations. Note that, for example, the MAX BET button 6a, 1 BET button 6b, start lever 7, stop buttons 8L, 8C, and 8R, and the settlement button 9 are primarily intended for use in game operations, and it is not ideal for them to be used for any other purpose. However, pseudo-games allow these operations to be accepted, provided that measures are taken to prevent the player from mistaking them for actual gameplay.

Here, we will explain the flow of the simulated game using an example. The simulated game is carried out, for example, as follows:

(1) The player's actual start operation (the execution conditions are met and the pseudo game begins here)
(2) Each reel rotates in a simulated manner (during simulated play)
(3) Accepts a pseudo-stop operation, which temporarily stops each reel (during pseudo-play).
(4) After a random delay process, each reel actually starts spinning (the simulated game ends and the actual game begins).
The random delay process is a process for randomly generating a delay period for each reel before starting rotation (such a delay period is also called a "rearrangement period") to correct the situation where, for example, if specific symbols are displayed in a line in the above-mentioned situation (3) and the reels start rotating normally in the above-mentioned situation (4), a player may be more likely to use the specific symbols as a landmark to stop the reels (this may aid in so-called "eye-pressing"). Also, when the reels are temporarily stopped in the above-mentioned situations (3) and (4), it is desirable to ensure that the phase signal in the excitation control of each stepping motor is always less than a predetermined time (e.g., 500 ms) so that the reels are alternately changed between forward and reverse directions, so as not to be mistaken for being completely stopped.

One of the measures mentioned above is, for example, when an arbitrary symbol combination temporarily stops in the above-mentioned situation (3) (when the third reel temporarily stops and then all reels temporarily stop), slightly vibrating (swinging) each reel up and down until the random delay process is started in the above-mentioned situation (4). Note that, as long as the phase signal changes within the above-mentioned predetermined time, such swinging may not be performed when the first reel temporarily stops or when the second reel temporarily stops.

As one of the above-mentioned measures, for example, a pseudo-game lamp may be provided to indicate that a pseudo-game is in progress, and the pseudo-game lamp may be illuminated from the time when the pseudo-game begins in the above-mentioned situation (1) until the time when the random delay process begins in the above-mentioned situation (4). It is desirable that the pseudo-game lamp be installed above the operation unit that accepts the player's game operations, and in a position that is visible during gameplay. It is also desirable that the pseudo-game lamp be an independent lamp that is not used for any other purpose, and that the entire display portion of the pseudo-game lamp be covered with a single-color border. It is also desirable that the display area of the pseudo-game lamp, including the explanatory portion of the pseudo-game lamp, has a certain surface area (for example, one side exceeding 10 mm and a surface area exceeding 642 square mm). Additionally, it is desirable that the description of the pseudo game lamp be written in a way that makes it clear that the pseudo game lamp is a lamp that indicates that a pseudo game is in progress (for example, "FREEPLAY," "pseudo game effect in progress," or "automatic reel effect in progress"), and that such description should occupy at least one-third of the surface area. Note that the pseudo game lamp may be controlled by the main control circuit 100 or the sub-control circuit 200.

As one of the measures mentioned above, for example, a pseudo-game display indicating that a pseudo-game is in progress may be displayed on the main display device 210 or the sub-display device 220 (or both) from the time the pseudo-game starts in the above-mentioned situation (1) until the random delay process starts in the above-mentioned situation (4). It is desirable that the pseudo-game display be displayed above the operation unit that accepts the player's game operations and in a position that is visible during gameplay (in this embodiment, since both the main display device 210 and the sub-display device 220 are above the operation unit, either may be used). It is also desirable that the display range of the pseudo-game display, including its explanatory portion, have a certain surface area (e.g., one side exceeds 10 mm, the surface area exceeds 642 square mm if the display screen is less than 7 inches, or the surface area is 8.2% or more of the entire screen if the display screen is 7 inches or larger). Additionally, it is desirable that the explanatory portion of the pseudo-game display be written in a way that makes it clear that the pseudo-game display is intended to notify players that a pseudo-game is in progress (for example, "FREEPLAY," "pseudo-game effect in progress," or "automatic reel effect in progress"), and that it be large enough for players to read without being obscured.

Furthermore, for example, during a simulated game (for example, from the start of the simulated game in the above-mentioned situation (1) until the start of the random delay processing in the above-mentioned situation (4)), it is desirable to configure the instruction monitor so that information about the stop operation is not announced (if it is necessary to display information about the stop operation on the instruction monitor during that game, the display should start when the random delay processing starts). This can further prevent a player from mistakenly believing that an actual game is being played during a simulated game. Note that, if any of the above measures are taken, during a simulated game, information about the stop operation may be announced on the sub-side presentation device (for example, the main display device 210 or the sub-display device 220). Similarly, during a simulated game, the sub-side presentation device may perform presentations according to the results of the simulated game (linked to the simulated game operations).

Furthermore, during actual gameplay, test signals corresponding to the player's game operations or the state in which such game operations are possible are output via the test machine first interface board 301. However, during simulated gameplay, test signals corresponding to the player's simulated game operations or the state in which such simulated game operations are possible are not output. Therefore, during simulated gameplay, a test signal (pseudo game signal) may be output to enable the test machine to recognize that a simulated game is being played. Furthermore, when the test machine first interface board 301 receives a pseudo game signal from the main control board 71, it may output a signal for controlling the pseudo game progress to the main control board 71, thereby allowing the pseudo game to proceed on the main control board 71 side (i.e., the test machine first interface board 301 may be equipped with a pseudo game progress function). Furthermore, if the test machine first interface board 301 is equipped with such a pseudo game progress function, a switch may be provided to switch the function on and off. This makes it possible to arbitrarily set whether or not to check the simulated game effects during the certification test (test firing test) of the pachislot machine 1.

[4-10-2. Sub-side production]
In the slot machine 1, the sub-control circuit 200 (sub-side) can control the following effects, for example: As mentioned above, the slot machine 1 can notify the player of stop operation information using the main display device 210, etc., and this is also included in the effects in a broad sense.

(Normal performance)
In the pachislot machine 1, when a predetermined execution condition is met, an effect that is completed in the current game (i.e., ends in one game) can be performed. Such an effect is called a "normal effect" or a "single effect." Note that the machine can be configured not to perform such a normal effect, or can be configured to perform multiple types of normal effects.

(Continuous performance)
In the pachislot machine 1, when a predetermined execution condition is met, a continuous effect can be produced over multiple plays (i.e., a continuous effect over multiple games). Such an effect is called a "continuous effect" or a "continuous effect." Note that the machine can be configured not to produce such continuous effects, or can be configured to produce multiple types of continuous effects.

(Operation-linked effects)
In the pachislot machine 1, when a predetermined execution condition is met, an effect can be produced in which the effect content can be changed according to the effect operation by the player. Such an effect is called an "operation-linked effect" or "button effect," etc. Note that the configuration can be such that such an operation-linked effect is not performed, or the configuration can be such that multiple types of operation-linked effects can be performed. Furthermore, the operation-linked effect can be configured as a normal effect or as a continuous effect. Furthermore, the effect operation can include not only an operation on the effect button group, but also various game operations.

The various effects described above can be used for a variety of purposes. For example, they can be used to suggest or notify set values, internal winning combinations, game status, game zone, bonus content, and the period until a bonus is awarded. They can also be used to suggest or notify the degree of advantage in these areas. These uses are merely examples.

(Other performances)
The pachislot machine 1 can also perform effects other than those described above. For example, various notifications to players or gaming establishments (e.g., addiction prevention notifications, loss prevention notifications, error state notifications, demo state notifications, etc.) are also included in the effects in a broad sense, as notifications other than those described above. The addiction prevention notification can be, for example, a warning or the like issued when a favorable zone ends. The loss prevention notification can be, for example, a warning or the like issued when a favorable zone ends or when a settlement operation is performed. The error state notification can be, for example, a warning or the like issued when an error occurs until it is resolved. The demo state notification can be, for example, a notification that a machine is vacant when a predetermined period of no play has occurred or when a settlement operation is performed.

[5. First gaming machine]
Next, with reference to Figures 5 to 22, a specific example of specifications related to the gameplay of the pachislot machine 1 will be described as a "first gaming machine." Note that some or all of the various specifications and functions described as the first gaming machine in this embodiment can be applied to other gaming machines in this embodiment, and some or all of the various specifications and functions described as other gaming machines in this embodiment can be applied to the first gaming machine in this embodiment. In other words, an appropriate combination of these can be considered as the invention according to this embodiment.

First, in the first gaming machine, the active line is defined as only one line, the above-mentioned "center line." Furthermore, the first gaming machine has two gaming states: a non-bonus state and a bonus state. The non-bonus state includes a 2BB flag interval where the "F_2BB" (a bonus role that can only be won when two coins are bet; hereinafter, sometimes simply referred to as "2BB") described below is carried over, a 3BB flag interval where the "F_3BB" (a bonus role that can only be won when three coins are bet; hereinafter, sometimes simply referred to as "3BB") described below is carried over, and a non-flag interval where no bonus role has been won (no bonus role has been carried over). The bonus state includes a 2BB state, which is entered when a symbol combination related to 2BB is displayed, and a 3BB state, which is entered when a symbol combination related to 3BB is displayed.

Furthermore, the first gaming machine allows players to play with two medals bet (two-bet state) or three medals bet (three-bet state). Note that "betting" includes the player inserting two or three medals into the medal slot 5 for play, the player operating the MAX BET button 6a or 1 BET button 6b to bet two or three medals from their credits, and the player automatically betting two or three medals when a replay combination is won.

[5-1. Gaming Characteristics of the First Gaming Machine]
Next, the flow of games in the first gaming machine will be described with reference to Figures 5 to 8. Note that Figure 5 is a diagram showing an example of the transition flow of game states in non-advantageous zones and advantageous zones in the first gaming machine, Figure 6 is a diagram for explaining an example of each mode in the first gaming machine, and Figures 7 and 8 are diagrams showing an example of various tables in the first gaming machine.

As shown in Figure 5, in the first gaming machine, the states in which a player plays are broadly divided into non-advantageous zones and advantageous zones, and advantageous zones are further divided into effect zones (advantageous zones, normal play) and increase zones (advantageous zones, pseudo bonus). Non-advantageous zones are gaming states (non-AT states) in which information about stop operations that are advantageous to the player is not notified, and are gaming states that are disadvantageous to the player. Effect zones are gaming states (non-AT states) in which information about stop operations that are advantageous to the player is not notified, and are gaming states that are disadvantageous to the player, similar to non-advantageous zones, but differ from non-advantageous zones in that mode transitions occur, as described below.

In other words, the non-advantageous zone is the control state that is the initial state that is controlled when play in the advantageous zone ends, when a setting change operation is performed, when other initialization conditions are met, or when the machine is shipped from the factory, etc., while the effect zone is the control state that is the normal state in which the player plays normally, and in which the expected probability of transitioning to the increased zone (awarding) can be changed by mode transitions, etc.

On the other hand, the increase section is a game state (AT state) in which information about stop operations that are advantageous to the player is notified, and is a game state that is advantageous to the player. In other words, the increase section is a control state that is advantageous in that it allows the player to increase the number of medals. Note that both the presentation section and the increase section are advantageous sections, and by transitioning between these sections, a series of advantageous sections are formed.

In the first gaming machine, as shown in FIG. 7(a), in a non-advantageous zone, a non-advantageous zone sub-flag is determined as secondary information (sub-flag) corresponding to the internal winning combination (see FIG. 10, described below). The sub-flag is information used to group internal winning combinations that play similar roles (such as whether or not they are a winning combination and their winning probability) in various lotteries related to gameplay (various processes related to advantageous zones) performed by the main control circuit 100, and assign the same information to make the group identifiable. This eliminates the need to provide various data tables for each internal winning combination, allowing for data compression and avoiding strain on the capacity of the main ROM 102. In a non-advantageous zone, a lottery is conducted using this non-advantageous zone sub-flag.

The non-advantageous zone sub-flag "Replay Bell" is determined when the internal winning combination is any of "F_Replay A" (No. "3"), "F_Replay B" (No. "4"), and "F_Bell 123A1" to "F_Bell 321B2" (No. "10" to No. "33"). The non-advantageous zone sub-flag "Weak Cherry" is determined when the internal winning combination is "F_Cherry" (No. "5"). The non-advantageous zone sub-flag "Watermelon" is determined when the internal winning combination is "F_Watermelon" (No. "9"). The non-advantageous zone sub-flag "Confirmed Cherry" is determined when the internal winning combination is any of "F_Confirmed Cherry" (No. "6") and "F_Reach Eye" (No. "8"). The non-advantageous zone sub-flag "Middle Cherry" is determined when the internal winning combination is "F_Middle Cherry" (No. "7"). Note that non-advantageous zones can also be configured so that winning sub-flags and winning sub-flags can be determined, just like advantageous zones. Furthermore, the correspondence between these is not limited to the above.

Furthermore, in the first gaming machine, as shown in FIG. 7(a), in the advantageous zone, a sub-flag at the time of winning the advantageous zone is determined as secondary information (sub-flag) corresponding to the internal winning role (see FIG. 10 described below). Furthermore, in the advantageous zone, a sub-flag at the time of winning the advantageous zone is determined as secondary information (sub-flag) corresponding to the combination of symbols displayed. In the advantageous zone, a lottery is held using these sub-flags at the time of winning the advantageous zone and the sub-flag at the time of winning the advantageous zone.

When a favorable zone is won, the sub-flag "Bell" is determined when the internal winning combination is any of "F_Bell123A1" to "F_Bell321B2" (No. "10" to No. "33"). When a favorable zone is won, the sub-flag "Weak Cherry" is determined when the internal winning combination is "F_Cherry" (No. "5"). When a favorable zone is won, the sub-flag "Watermelon" is determined when the internal winning combination is "F_Watermelon" (No. "9"). When a favorable zone is won, the sub-flag "Determined Cherry" is determined when the internal winning combination is either "F_Determined Cherry" (No. "6") or "F_Reach Eye" (No. "8"). When a favorable zone is won, the sub-flag "Medium Cherry" is determined when the internal winning combination is "F_Middle Cherry" (No. "7").

When entering the advantageous zone, the sub-flag "Tsuu Replay 1" is set when the internal winning combination is either "F_Replay A" (No. "3") or "F_Replay B" (No. "4") and the "Right Up Replay" symbol combination is displayed (i.e., the winning combination is "Right Up Replay"). When entering the advantageous zone, the sub-flag "Tsuu Replay 2" is set when the internal winning combination is either "F_Replay A" (No. "3") or "F_Replay B" (No. "4") and the "Parallel Replay" symbol combination is displayed (i.e., the winning combination is "Parallel Replay").

Here, in the first gaming machine, as described below, when the internal winning combination is "F_Replay A" (No. "3"), a "Right-Rising Replay" symbol combination is displayed between 3BB flags, and a "Parallel Replay" symbol combination is displayed between 2BB flags and non-flag spaces.

In other words, when the internal winning combination is "F_Replay A" (No. "3"), "Tsutsu Replay 1" is determined as the sub-flag when entering the advantageous zone between 3BB flags, and "Tsutsu Replay 2" is determined as the sub-flag when entering the advantageous zone between 2BB flags and non-flags. In the first gaming machine, when the sub-flag when entering the advantageous zone differs in this way, the degree of advantage in the various lotteries described below (for example, the pseudo-bonus transition lottery using the pseudo-bonus transition lottery table shown in Figure 7(c) or the mode transition lottery using the mode transition lottery table shown in Figure 8(f)) is changed.

Note that in the first gaming machine, for example, "F_Replay A" (No. "3") is used as an example of a role in which the sub-flag changes when a player enters a favorable zone depending on whether the win is between 3BB flags or 2BB flags. However, the manner in which the sub-flag changes when a player enters a favorable zone is not limited to this. For example, as described below, when the internal winning role is "F_Bell 123B1" (No. "12"), the stop control is different for the 3BB flag and the 2BB flag. Therefore, when such a role is won, the number of medals paid out may not change (or may change), but the combination of symbols displayed may be different, thereby determining a different sub-flag when a player enters a favorable zone. Then, depending on the sub-flag when a player enters a favorable zone, the degree of advantage in the various lotteries described below may change.

Furthermore, for example, as described below, when the internal winning combination is "F_Watermelon" (No. "9"), regardless of which flag interval (non-flag interval) it is, if the pressing position (stop operation timing) is appropriate, the "watermelon" symbol combination will be displayed, and if the pressing position is inappropriate, a miss will occur and the "watermelon spill" symbol combination will be displayed. Therefore, when such a combination is won, different sub-flags for when the advantageous zone is entered may be determined depending on whether the win is achieved without a miss or whether a miss occurs. Then, the degree of advantage in the various lotteries described below may be varied depending on whether the sub-flag for when the advantageous zone is entered is different.

Also, for example, when the internal winning combination is "F_Replay A" (No. "3"), if the stopping operation is performed in a specific manner between 3BB flags (this specific manner may be, for example, a manner in which the stopping operation is performed in a predefined hitting order (correct button press order), a manner in which the pressing position (timing of the stopping operation) is appropriate, or a manner in which a combination of these is performed), a "parallel replay" symbol combination is displayed, and if the stopping operation is not performed in the specific manner, a "right-up replay" symbol combination is displayed, and different sub-flags for when the advantageous zone is entered may be determined based on this. Then, the degree of advantage in the various lotteries described below may be varied depending on the different sub-flags for when the advantageous zone is entered.

In other words, the first gaming machine allows the final stop display pattern for a specific combination to differ depending on the number of bets, the game state, the type of stop operation, or any combination of these, and it is possible to determine different secondary information according to different stop display patterns, thereby applying all of the methods that can change the degree of advantage.

Returning to the explanation of the gameplay of the first gaming machine, in the non-advantageous zone, a lottery for transitioning to an advantageous zone is held for each play. Specifically, the advantageous zone transition lottery table shown in Figure 7(b) is referenced to determine the internal winning combination, and at a predetermined timing during the play after the non-advantageous zone sub-flag is determined according to the internal winning combination, the transition mode, etc. is determined according to the non-play zone sub-flag. Note that this determination may involve only the type of mode to be used when transitioning to the advantageous zone ("Advantageous Zone Start" in Figure 5), or it may involve not only the type of mode but also a transition to a pseudo-bonus ("Advantageous Zone Start + Pseudo Bonus Start" in Figure 5). However, it is also possible to configure the game so that transitioning to a pseudo-bonus is not determined in the non-advantageous zone.

Now, with reference to Figure 6, we will explain each mode in the first gaming machine. In the first gaming machine, the mode is control information (which can also be referred to as the game state or control state) for varying the expectation of transitioning (awarding) to an increase zone (pseudo bonus) in the presentation zone (normal play), and in the presentation zone (normal play), the mode determines whether or not to transition to a pseudo bonus, whether to maintain an advantageous zone, or whether to end the advantageous zone and transition to a non-advantageous zone.

Start mode is a relatively unfavorable mode that is likely to be occupied when transitioning from a non-favorable zone to a favorable zone (effect zone), and the expected probability of transitioning to a pseudo-bonus is relatively low (see (c) in Figure 7 below). The expected probability of transitioning to a more favorable mode is also relatively low (see (f) in Figure 8 below). Although not shown, in start mode, the ceiling game count is set to 965 games. The ceiling game count is used to forcibly transition to a pseudo-bonus when a certain period of time has elapsed without transitioning to a pseudo-bonus. Therefore, the lower the ceiling game count, the more advantageous it is for the player, and the higher the ceiling game count, the more disadvantageous it is for the player.

Normal A mode is the mode in which players are most likely to stay while playing, and is a relatively unfavorable mode. The likelihood of transitioning to a pseudo-bonus is relatively low (see (c) in Figure 7 below), and the likelihood of transitioning to a more favorable mode is also relatively low (see (f) in Figure 8 below). In normal A mode, the ceiling game count is set to "965 games." Also, in Figure 6, "approximately 999G after pseudo-bonus" refers to the fact that, after the pseudo-bonus ends, a transition occurs to end A mode or end B mode (described below), where 32 games are played without transitioning to a pseudo-bonus. If a player transitions to a non-favorable zone and then selects normal A mode when transitioning from the non-favorable zone to the favorable zone, the apparent ceiling game count will be "965 games" + the "32 games" play period in end A mode or end B mode + the number of games required to transition from the non-favorable zone to the favorable zone. The same applies to normal B mode, Heaven Preparation mode, and Chance mode.

Normal B mode is a mode in which players tend to stay relatively longer while playing, and although it is a relatively unfavorable mode, it is more favorable than normal A mode, and the likelihood of transitioning to a pseudo-bonus is relatively low (see Figure 7 (c) below), and the likelihood of transitioning to a more favorable mode is also relatively low (see Figure 8 (f) below). In normal B mode, the ceiling number of games is set to "965 games."

In Heaven Preparation Mode, the likelihood of transitioning to a pseudo-bonus is relatively low (see Figure 7 (c) below), but the ceiling number of games is set at 466 games, and if a transition to a pseudo-bonus occurs, it is guaranteed that the mode will transition to Heaven Mode after the end (see Figure 8 (f) below), making it a relatively advantageous mode in that sense.

In Chance Mode, the likelihood of transitioning to a pseudo-bonus is relatively high (see Figure 7 (c) below), and the ceiling number of games is set at 222 games, making it a relatively advantageous mode in that sense. However, the likelihood of transitioning to Heaven Mode is not high (see Figure 8 (f) below).

End A mode is a relatively unfavorable mode in which players are likely to remain if they transition to a pseudo bonus and do not transition to heaven mode (including heaven preparation mode) after the pseudo bonus ends, and the expected probability of transitioning to a pseudo bonus is the lowest (see (c) in Figure 7 below), and the expected probability of transitioning to a more favorable mode is also relatively low (see (f) in Figure 8 below). In End A mode, if 32 games are played after the pseudo bonus ends without transitioning to a pseudo bonus, the favorable zone itself ends and the player transitions to a non-favorable zone.

End B mode is a relatively unfavorable mode that players tend to stay in if they transition to a pseudo bonus and do not transition to Heaven mode (including Heaven preparation mode) after the pseudo bonus ends. However, it is more favorable than End A mode, and the likelihood of transitioning to a pseudo bonus is relatively low (see (c) in Figure 7 below), and the likelihood of transitioning to a more favorable mode is also relatively low (see (f) in Figure 8 below). In End B mode, as with End A mode, if 32 games are played after the pseudo bonus ends without transitioning to a pseudo bonus, the favorable zone itself ends and the player transitions to a non-favorable zone. End A mode and End B mode can also be collectively referred to as "end mode."

Guaranteed mode is the mode in which you remain when Heaven C mode ends, and since the expectation of transitioning to a pseudo bonus is relatively high (see (c) in Figure 7 below), and the ceiling number of games is set to "32 games," in that sense it is a relatively advantageous mode. However, the expectation of transitioning to Heaven mode is not high (see (f) in Figure 8 below). In other words, when Heaven C mode ends, in order to prevent a decrease in interest due to this, Guaranteed mode is positioned as a mode that attempts to maintain (guarantee) a relatively advantageous state for a certain period of time.

Heaven A mode is a mode in which consecutive pseudo bonuses can be expected (this may include the extension (addition) of the AT state if the AT state is configured to continue due to a decision to extend (add) the AT state; the same applies below). The expected probability of transitioning to a pseudo bonus is relatively high (see (c) in Figure 7 below), the ceiling number of games is set to 32 games, and the probability of maintaining the ceiling mode (Heaven mode loop rate) is set to a moderate level, making it a relatively advantageous mode. Although not shown in Figure 6, for example, it is possible to set different ceiling mode loop rates. For example, the lottery value can be set so that when the set value is an odd number (1, 3, 5), the ceiling mode loop rate is approximately 75%, and when the set value is an even number (2, 4, 6), the ceiling mode loop rate is approximately 67%. Alternatively, the lottery value can simply be set so that the higher the set value, the higher the ceiling mode loop rate. The same applies to Heaven B mode and Heaven C mode, which will be described later, and it is also possible to set different ceiling mode loop rates.

Heaven B mode is a mode in which consecutive pseudo bonuses can be expected, and the probability of transitioning to a pseudo bonus is relatively high (see Figure 7 (c) below). The ceiling number of games is set to "32 games." Furthermore, the probability of maintaining the ceiling mode (heaven mode loop rate) is set high, making it a relatively advantageous mode. In other words, in terms of the ceiling mode loop rate, it is an even more advantageous mode than Heaven A mode.

Heaven C mode is a mode in which consecutive pseudo bonuses can be expected, and the expectation of transitioning to a pseudo bonus is relatively high (see Figure 7 (c) below). The ceiling number of games is set to "32 games," and the probability of maintaining the ceiling mode (heaven mode loop rate) is set quite high, making it a relatively advantageous mode. In other words, in terms of the ceiling mode loop rate, it is an even more advantageous mode than Heaven A mode and Heaven B mode. Heaven A mode, Heaven B mode, and Heaven C mode can be collectively referred to as "heaven mode."

Note that the above modes are merely examples, and the mode configuration is not limited to these. Modes other than those described above can also be set, and some of the above modes can be chosen not to be set.

Up to this point, we have described non-advantageous zones as being less advantageous than advantageous zones, but the relationship between non-advantageous zones and advantageous zones is not limited to this. For example, the transition rate to the increasing zone may be higher in non-advantageous zones than when at least one mode is set in the advantageous zone, or the average number of games required to transition to the increasing zone may be shorter. Alternatively, we could design the non-advantageous zone to be the most likely to become an increasing zone. This creates an incentive to play even in a state that is confirmed as a non-advantageous zone after a setting change, motivating players to start playing even from the time the store opens. Furthermore, even if the zone lamp stops lighting 32 games after the end of the pseudo bonus, it is not confirmed that the most disadvantageous state has occurred, so this motivates players to continue playing even in such a situation. Up to this point, we have described the effect zone as a game state in which information about stop operations advantageous to the player is not notified. However, if the effect zone is in a state that is less advantageous than the increasing zone (for example, by reducing the frequency of notifications or changing the winning combination that is the target of the notification), the game state in which information about stop operations is notified may also be configured.

Returning to the explanation of the gameplay of the first gaming machine, in the presentation section (normal play), a pseudo-bonus transition lottery (when a winning lottery is drawn) is first conducted for each play by referencing the advantageous section winning sub-flag. Specifically, the pseudo-bonus transition lottery table shown in Figure 7(c) is referenced to determine the internal winning combination, and at a predetermined timing during the play after the advantageous section winning sub-flag is determined in accordance with the internal winning combination, it is determined whether or not to transition to a pseudo-bonus in accordance with the advantageous section winning sub-flag. Note that in Figure 7(c), "non-winning" means that a transition to a pseudo-bonus will not occur, "winning (current play)" means that a transition to a pseudo-bonus will occur from the current play, and "winning (next play)" means that a transition to a pseudo-bonus will occur from the next play.

In addition, with the first gaming machine, if a "winning lottery (current game)" is determined, gaming operations (stop operations) are invalidated for a certain period of time at the start of the current game, or if a "winning lottery (next game)" is determined, at the start of the next game. During this invalid period, a reel effect in which "red 7" symbols are displayed in the main display window 4 (a "red 7s aligned" effect) is produced, followed by a pseudo bonus. If it is necessary to notify information about the stop operation during a game in which the "red 7s aligned" effect is produced, the information about the stop operation is notified at least when the invalid period ends and gaming operations (stop operations) become enabled (this may be before, but not before the start of the random delay processing described above).

If the pseudo bonus transition lottery (if it wins) in the presentation section (normal play) determines that a transition to a pseudo bonus will occur, a mode transition lottery (if it wins) is held. Specifically, the mode transition lottery table shown in Figure 8 (f) is referenced, and the transition mode is determined based on the current mode and the sub-flag set when the advantageous section is selected. Note that this transition mode may be a mode that includes the pseudo bonus, or a mode after the pseudo bonus ends. Furthermore, if the pseudo bonus transition lottery (if it wins) determines that a transition to a pseudo bonus will occur, and the mode transition lottery (if it wins) is held, the pseudo bonus transition lottery (if it wins), mode transition lottery (if it reaches the ceiling), and mode transition lottery (if it wins), described below, will not be held.

If the pseudo bonus transition lottery (when drawn) does not determine a transition to a pseudo bonus during the presentation section (normal play), a pseudo bonus transition lottery (when drawn) is held for each play (more specifically, for a play in which "F_Replay A" or "F_Replay B" is drawn), with reference to the sub-flag when entering the advantageous zone. Specifically, the pseudo bonus transition lottery table shown in Figure 7(c) is referenced to determine the winning combination, and at a predetermined timing during that play (before the start of the next play) after the sub-flag when entering the advantageous zone is determined according to that winning combination, it is determined whether or not to transition to a pseudo bonus according to the sub-flag when entering the advantageous zone.

In the pseudo bonus transition lottery table shown in Figure 7(c), the probability of deciding to transition to a pseudo bonus is higher when "Tsu-Rip 2" is determined as the sub-flag when entering an advantageous zone than when "Tsu-Rip 1" is determined as the sub-flag when entering an advantageous zone. However, the manner in which "Tsu-Rip 2" is given preferential treatment over "Tsu-Rip 1" is not limited to this. For example, when "Tsu-Rip 2" is determined as the sub-flag when entering an advantageous zone, it may be determined with a predetermined probability that a transition to a pseudo bonus will occur, but when "Tsu-Rip 1" is determined as the sub-flag when entering an advantageous zone, it may be possible to prevent a transition to a pseudo bonus from being decided.

If the pseudo bonus transition lottery (when winning) in the presentation section (normal play) determines that a transition to a pseudo bonus will occur, a mode transition lottery (when winning) is held. Specifically, the mode transition lottery table shown in Figure 8 (f) is referenced, and the destination mode is determined based on the current mode and the sub-flag set when entering the advantageous section. Note that this destination mode may be a mode that includes the pseudo bonus, or a mode after the pseudo bonus ends. Furthermore, if the pseudo bonus transition lottery (when winning) determines that a transition to a pseudo bonus will occur and a mode transition lottery (when winning) is held, the mode transition lottery (when reaching the ceiling), described below, will not be held.

In the mode transition lottery table shown in Figure 8 (f), the probability of deciding to transition to a mode that is relatively advantageous to the player is higher when "Tsu-Rip 2" is determined as the sub-flag when entering an advantageous zone than when "Tsu-Rip 1" is determined as the sub-flag when entering an advantageous zone. However, the manner in which "Tsu-Rip 2" is given preferential treatment over "Tsu-Rip 1" is not limited to this. For example, when "Tsu-Rip 2" is determined as the sub-flag when entering an advantageous zone, it may be determined with a predetermined probability that the player will transition to a mode that is relatively advantageous to the player, but when "Tsu-Rip 1" is determined as the sub-flag when entering an advantageous zone, it may be possible to prevent the decision to transition to a mode that is relatively advantageous to the player.

If the pseudo bonus transition lottery (when a prize is won) does not determine a transition to a pseudo bonus during the presentation section (normal play), the ceiling game count is updated (this can be done by addition or subtraction), and if the ceiling game count reaches the ceiling game count associated with the current mode (or determined in advance when transitioning to a favorable section, etc.), a transition to a pseudo bonus is determined. In this case, it is possible to always determine a "winning lottery (current play)" or to always determine a "winning lottery (next play)." Alternatively, either of these can be determined by lottery.

When the ceiling number of games is reached during the presentation section (normal play) and it is decided to transition to a pseudo bonus, a mode transition lottery (at the ceiling) is held. Specifically, the mode transition lottery table shown in Figure 8 (f) is referenced, and the destination mode is determined based on the current mode. Note that this destination mode may be a mode that includes the pseudo bonus, or may be a mode after the pseudo bonus ends.

The processing related to the pseudo bonus transition lottery (when a win occurs) and the pseudo bonus transition lottery (when a prize is won) differs only in the type of sub-flag, and is otherwise the same processing content, so it can be controlled using the same lottery table and control flow. The processing related to the mode transition lottery (when a win occurs) and the mode transition lottery (when a prize is won) differs only in the type of sub-flag, and is otherwise the same processing content, so it can be controlled using the same lottery table and control flow.

Also, if "Winning Lottery (Played This Time)" is not set as a type of pseudo bonus winning lottery, then at the time the sub-flag for winning the advantageous zone is determined, the sub-flag for winning the advantageous zone will also have already been determined, and the ceiling game count can also have already been updated. Therefore, the pseudo bonus transition lottery (when winning), pseudo bonus transition lottery (when winning), and pseudo bonus transition processing when the ceiling is reached can be performed together in a single process. Similarly, the mode transition lottery (when winning), mode transition lottery (when winning), and mode transition lottery (when the ceiling is reached) can also be performed together in a single process.

Returning to the explanation of the gameplay of the first gaming machine, as described above, if a decision is made to transition to a pseudo bonus in the presentation section (normal play) and the pseudo bonus begins ("Pseudo bonus start" in Figure 5), the machine transitions to the increase section (pseudo bonus). Also, as described above, if control is exercised in end A mode or end B mode in the presentation section (normal play) and 32 games are played without transitioning to a pseudo bonus ("End of advantageous section (via end A/B)" in Figure 5), the machine transitions to a non-advantageous section. Furthermore, if the conditions for the limit processing shown in Figure 16, described below, are met, the advantageous section will be forcibly ended ("End of advantageous section (limit processing)" in Figure 5), resulting in a transition to a non-advantageous section.

In the increase section (pseudo bonus), a ceiling shortening lottery is held when the pseudo bonus starts. Specifically, the ceiling shortening lottery table shown in Figure 8 (e) is referenced, and it is determined whether or not to shorten the ceiling number of games after the pseudo bonus ends, depending on the current mode. Note that in Figure 8 (e), "Non-winning" means that the ceiling number of games will not be shortened, and "Winning (ceiling number of games = 0 updated)" means that the ceiling number of games set to "0" (shortened) after the pseudo bonus ends, regardless of the mode. Note that the ceiling shortening lottery can be held not only when the pseudo bonus starts, but also every time a pseudo bonus is played.

If the result of the ceiling shortening lottery is that the ceiling game number will not be shortened, and if the player does not have the 1G consecutive stock (described below) when the pseudo bonus ends, the ceiling game number will be set according to the current mode (in the end mode, the advantageous period ends after 32 games (and is cleared accordingly), so the ceiling game number will not be set, but the ceiling game number may be provisionally set here), the pseudo bonus will end ("Pseudo bonus end" in Figure 5), and the game will transition to the presentation period (normal play). On the other hand, if the result of the ceiling shortening lottery is that the ceiling game number will be shortened, the ceiling game number will be set to "0 games" when the pseudo bonus ends. This means that the pseudo bonus will start again from the next play after the pseudo bonus ends. In this case, the pseudo bonus will start when the ceiling game number is reached, so the mode transition lottery (at ceiling) described above will be performed.

In the increase zone (pseudo bonus), a mode transition lottery (when drawn) is conducted for each game (more specifically, for games in which the sub-flag for the advantageous zone is determined to be "guaranteed role" or "medium chain"). Specifically, the mode transition lottery table shown in Figure 8 (f) is referenced, and the destination mode is determined based on the current mode and the sub-flag for the advantageous zone. Note that the destination mode may also be determined when a sub-flag for the advantageous zone other than those described above is determined. However, in this case, to prevent a mode that is relatively less favorable than the current mode from being determined as the destination mode, a different mode transition lottery table with a different lottery value than the mode transition lottery table shown in Figure 8 (f) may be referenced.

In the increase zone (pseudo bonus), a mode transition lottery (when a win occurs) is conducted for each game (more specifically, for games in which "F_Replay A" or "F_Replay B" is won). Specifically, the mode transition lottery table shown in Figure 8 (f) is referenced, and the destination mode is determined based on the current mode and the sub-flag when entering the advantageous zone. As with the above, in this case, to prevent a mode that is relatively less favorable than the current mode from being determined as the destination mode, a different mode transition lottery table with a different lottery value from the mode transition lottery table shown in Figure 8 (f) may be referenced.

In the increase zone (pseudo bonus), a 1G consecutive draw is held for each game. Specifically, the 1G consecutive draw table shown in Figure 7(d) is referenced, and whether or not a 1G consecutive draw will occur is determined based on the current mode and the sub-flag for when a favorable zone is drawn or when a favorable zone is entered. Note that in Figure 7(d), "Non-winning" means that a 1G consecutive draw will not occur, and "Winning (1G consecutive + 1)" means that the right to generate a 1G consecutive draw (1G consecutive stock) is awarded (the 1G consecutive stock counter is incremented by 1). Note that multiple 1G consecutive stocks (up to 255) can be stocked (accumulated) by the 1G consecutive stock counter. Therefore, multiple 1G consecutive stocks may be awarded during a single pseudo bonus. The 1G consecutive draw table can also be configured so that multiple 1G consecutive stocks can be awarded in a single 1G consecutive draw.

If the value of the 1G consecutive stock counter is 1 or greater when the pseudo bonus ends (i.e., if 1G consecutive stocks are held), one 1G consecutive stock is consumed (the 1G consecutive stock counter is decremented by 1), and the pseudo bonus will start again from the next play after the pseudo bonus ends. In this case, since the pseudo bonus starts according to the right to 1G consecutive stocks, the mode transition lottery described above will not be held. On the other hand, if the value of the 1G consecutive stock counter is not 1 or greater when the pseudo bonus ends (i.e., if 1G consecutive stocks are not held), and if the ceiling shortening lottery described above has not been won, the ceiling game number will be set according to the current mode (in the end mode, the advantageous period ends after 32 games (and is cleared accordingly), so the ceiling game number will not be set, but it may be set provisionally here), the pseudo bonus will end ("Pseudo bonus end" in Figure 5), and the game will transition to the presentation period (normal play).

In addition, if a player wins the ceiling shortening lottery and also has 1G consecutive stocks, the result of the ceiling shortening lottery may take priority, and a pseudo bonus corresponding to the ceiling shortening is executed after the pseudo bonus corresponding to the 1G consecutive stocks is executed, or the 1G consecutive stocks may take priority, and a pseudo bonus corresponding to the 1G consecutive stocks is executed after the pseudo bonus corresponding to the ceiling shortening is executed. In the latter case, information that allows the existence of a ceiling shortening to be carried over can be stored separately.

In the first gaming machine, the configuration of the increase section (pseudo bonus) is given as an example, where it lasts for 55 games and allows for the win of up to 275 coins, but the configuration of the pseudo bonus is not limited to this. For example, the pseudo bonus may be configured as a "pseudo BB (big bonus)," and another pseudo bonus, a "pseudo RB (regular bonus)," which lasts for 22 games and allows for the win of up to 110 coins may be included. In this case, when the above-mentioned pseudo bonus transition lottery, the ceiling-reaching lottery, or the 1G consecutive lottery determines whether to transition to a pseudo bonus (to grant the right), the type of pseudo bonus (e.g., whether it will be a "pseudo BB" or a "pseudo RB") can be determined with a predetermined probability (e.g., 50% each). The "pseudo RB" may have a different value than the "pseudo BB" (more specifically, a lower value than the "pseudo BB"). For example, the number of continuing games may be the same as the "pseudo BB," but the bell navi rate (probability of announcing information about a stop operation) may be lowered to differentiate the maximum number of coins that can be won, resulting in different values. Furthermore, when the "pseudo RB" is started, a reel effect may be displayed in which a "BAR" pattern is aligned in the main display window 4, or a reel effect may be displayed in which "red 7-red 7-BAR" is displayed. Furthermore, the increase section is not limited to being configured as a pseudo bonus. For example, it may be configured as an AT state or ART state in which the number of continuing games (playing period) can be changed.

Furthermore, if the conditions for executing the limit processing shown in Figure 16 below are met during the pseudo-bonus, the advantageous period will be forcibly ended ("End of advantageous period due to limit processing" in Figure 5), resulting in a transition to a non-advantageous period.

In the first gaming machine, the above-described game flow is based on the assumption that play is basically performed with three coins bet. Therefore, when play is performed with two coins bet, various lotteries using, for example, (a) to (d) in Figure 7 and (e) and (f) in Figure 8 are not performed, and the ceiling number of games is not updated. Furthermore, when play is performed with two coins bet during a pseudo bonus, the pseudo bonus does not become an increase period because the system is configured so that medals do not increase when two coins are bet. In other words, the first gaming machine is configured so that playing with two coins bet basically puts the player at a disadvantage.

Here, when play is performed in the two-coin bet state, lotteries (e.g., various lotteries using (a)-(d) of Figure 7, (e) and (f) of Figure 8, etc.) and processing (e.g., updating the ceiling game count, etc.) related to the advantageous zone (AT) are not performed, but it is desirable that the advantageous zone game number counter for the game count limiter described above and the advantageous zone payout number counter for the payout number limiter described above are updated. These limiters have the function of appropriately suppressing gambling by restricting the number of games played in the advantageous zone and the upper limit on the number of coins won. Therefore, if these counters were not updated in the two-coin bet state, there is a possibility that the upper limit on the number of games played in the advantageous zone or the number of coins won will be exceeded due to play in the two-coin bet state, resulting in a situation where gambling cannot be appropriately suppressed. Therefore, it is desirable that the limiter counters be configured to be updated every game regardless of the number of coins bet.

Furthermore, in the first gaming machine, the above-described game flow is basically based on the assumption that play is performed in a non-bonus state. Therefore, when play is performed in a bonus state (2BB state and 3BB state), various lotteries using, for example, (a) to (d) in Figure 7 and (e) and (f) in Figure 8 are not performed, and the ceiling number of games is not updated. Furthermore, if a bonus state is entered during a pseudo-bonus, the bonus state is configured to have a lower expected medal increase value than a non-bonus state (more specifically, a non-bonus state with three medals bet), so the pseudo-bonus may not be an increase period. In other words, the first gaming machine is configured so that playing in a bonus state may put the player at a disadvantage.

For this reason, the first gaming machine is configured to recommend playing in a 3-coin bet state between 2BB flags (in this embodiment, the 3-coin bet state between 2BB flags is sometimes described as a "recommended gaming state," and other states are sometimes described as "non-recommended gaming states"). That is, in the first gaming machine, 2BB is a bonus role that can only be won in a 2-coin bet state, and a symbol combination related to 2BB between 2BB flags is only a winning combination in a 2-coin bet state, but not a winning combination in a 3-coin bet state. Also, 3BB is a bonus role that can only be won in a 3-coin bet state, and a symbol combination related to 3BB between 3BB flags is only a winning combination in a 3-coin bet state, but not a winning combination in a 2-coin bet state. Also, 3BB never wins between 2BB flags, and 2BB never wins between 3BB flags.

The first gaming machine uses these configurations to, for example, win 2BB in a non-flag bet state with two coins (without winning 2BB), resulting in a 2BB flag bet, and then play in a 3-coin bet state, allowing you to play in the recommended game state described above without worrying about whether or not you win a bonus role.

As mentioned above, in the first gaming machine, a ceiling shortening lottery is conducted during a pseudo bonus. Looking at the ceiling shortening lottery table shown in Figure 8 (e), when the current mode is either Guaranteed Mode, Heaven A Mode, Heaven B Mode, or Heaven C Mode, there is a 1/8 (32/256) probability of winning the ceiling shortening lottery, while in other modes, the ceiling shortening lottery is not won. In other words, in a mode where the ceiling number of games is "32 games," those "32 games" may be shortened to "0 games," and in a mode where the ceiling number of games is greater than that, the ceiling number of games will never be shortened.

In addition, even in modes where the ceiling number of games is greater than "32 games," it may be decided that the ceiling number of games will be reduced with a lower probability (for example, 1/64) than in modes where the ceiling number of games is "32 games."

Furthermore, the manner in which the ceiling number of games is reduced is not limited to the above. For example, the same effect can be achieved by reducing "32 games" to a smaller number of predetermined games (0-31 games). Therefore, the number of games to be reduced when the ceiling reduction lottery is won may be determined further, or the number of games to be reduced in the ceiling reduction lottery may be determined in advance.

Furthermore, the triggers for conducting the ceiling shortening lottery are not limited to those described above. For example, during a pseudo-bonus, the ceiling shortening lottery may be conducted for each game. Furthermore, in the advantageous zone (normal play), when the current mode is one of the guaranteed mode, heaven A mode, heaven B mode, or heaven C mode, the ceiling shortening lottery may be conducted for each game. In these cases, the advantageous zone winning sub-flag and advantageous zone winning sub-flag are referenced to determine whether or not to win the ceiling shortening lottery.

Furthermore, as mentioned above, in the first gaming machine, a 1G consecutive lottery is conducted during the pseudo bonus. Looking at the 1G consecutive lottery table shown in Figure 7(d), it can be seen that 1G consecutive stocks may be awarded regardless of the current mode. In other words, the right to continue the pseudo bonus can be awarded regardless of whether the mode has a ceiling game count of "32 games."

However, the manner in which this right is granted is not limited to the above. For example, in a mode where the ceiling number of games is "32 games," a 1G consecutive lottery may not be conducted in consideration of the fact that a ceiling shortening lottery will be conducted, and in a mode where the ceiling number of games is greater than "32 games," a 1G consecutive lottery may be conducted, thereby preventing the game from becoming overly gambling-oriented.

Furthermore, the triggers for the 1G consecutive lottery are not limited to those described above. For example, the 1G consecutive lottery could be conducted in advantageous zones (performance zones) other than pseudo bonuses, and the resulting 1G consecutive stocks could be consumed in the next pseudo bonus.

Although not shown in Figures 5 to 8, in the first gaming machine, when the pseudo bonus starts or during the pseudo bonus, if the current mode is Heaven mode, a special bonus effect is executed with a predetermined probability to suggest that the player is in an advantageous state. Therefore, when the special bonus effect is executed, it is possible to anticipate that the ceiling shortening lottery will be executed. Furthermore, this special bonus effect may be executed with a 100% probability when the ceiling shortening lottery is won. In this way, for example, when the special bonus effect is executed at the start of the pseudo bonus, it suggests that the player is at least in Heaven mode, and further, it can create a sense of anticipation that the ceiling shortening lottery may also be won. Furthermore, this special bonus effect may be executed with a predetermined probability or 100% probability when the 1G consecutive lottery is won during the pseudo bonus. This allows for a variety of possibilities to be suggested, such as (1) Heaven mode only, (2) Heaven mode + ceiling shortening win, (3) Heaven mode + 1G consecutive win, (4) Heaven mode + ceiling shortening win + 1G consecutive win, (5) 1G consecutive win only, etc., which can increase the enjoyment of the game.

In this way, in the first gaming machine, if it is determined that the game will be controlled to an advantageous state again within a predetermined period (e.g., 32 games) after the end of an advantageous state (e.g., a pseudo bonus) (e.g., in the case of Heaven mode), that period may be further shortened. Therefore, even if the play period of a series of advantageous zones is limited (e.g., when limit processing is executed), it is possible to prevent a decline in the player's interest in the game by allowing the player to play in a state with as high a degree of advantage as possible.

Furthermore, with the first gaming machine, even if it is not certain that the advantageous state will be restored within a predetermined period of time after the advantageous state has ended (for example, in the case of end mode), the advantageous state may be restored by granting a right (for example, 1G consecutive stock), thereby heightening the player's anticipation and increasing the enjoyment of the game.

In addition, although not shown in Figures 5 to 8, in the first gaming machine, if the sub-flag when the advantageous zone is won is determined to be "Confirmed Role" (i.e., if "F_Confirmed Cherry" or "F_Reach Eye" is determined as the internal winning role), and if the result of the mode transition lottery described above is that a transition to Heaven C mode is made, a special lock effect can be executed with a probability of 1/2 (this probability is arbitrary). Furthermore, even when the sub-flag when the advantageous zone is won is determined to be "Middle Cherry" (i.e., if "F_Middle Cherry" is determined as the internal winning role), the player can receive the same benefits as when the sub-flag when the advantageous zone is won is "Confirmed Role." Therefore, when the sub-flag when the advantageous zone is won is determined to be "Middle Cherry," a special lock effect can be executed in the same way as when the sub-flag when the advantageous zone is won is "Confirmed Role."

Here, because a "confirmed combination" is a combination that also confirms a transition to a pseudo bonus (see (c) in Figure 7), when the special lock effect is executed, the player is able to recognize that a transition to a pseudo bonus and a transition to Heaven C mode has occurred, which is very exciting for the player. The special lock effect is configured, for example, as an effect in which game operations (stop operations) are disabled for approximately 20 seconds at the start of play. During this time, special reel effects may be performed, such as the reels vibrating or spinning backward, or special images that are not normally displayed may be displayed on the main effect display unit 21. Special music that is not normally output may also be output. Of course, effects can also be created using a combination of these. Furthermore, game operations are not disabled, but these effects may be continued until the player performs the next game operation (i.e., the player may be allowed to decide whether to allow the effects to be executed to the end or to cancel them midway and continue playing).

However, in the first gaming machine, as shown in Figure 16 below, even if you are in Heaven C mode, the advantageous zone may be forcibly terminated by the execution of limit processing, so it may not be desirable to repeatedly execute the above-mentioned special lock effect.

Therefore, in the first gaming machine, the special lock effect is executed only once within the same series of advantageous zones. Specifically, the special lock effect is executed the first time a decision is made to execute it within a series of advantageous zones, but the system is controlled so that the special lock effect is not executed thereafter within the same series of advantageous zones, even if the same conditions are met. One method is to store information indicating that a special lock effect has been executed once, and then, if that information is stored within the same series of advantageous zones thereafter, not make a decision on whether to execute the special lock effect in the first place. Alternatively, the decision may be made, but if the information is stored, the decision result may be rewritten to indicate that the special lock effect will not be executed, even if it indicates that the special lock effect will be executed. The stored information can then be cleared when the advantageous zone ends.

Note that the manner in which the execution of the special lock effect is limited is not limited to the above. For example, the upper limit on the number of times the special lock effect can be executed may be set to "two" or "three" times rather than "one time." In other words, the execution of the special lock effect is limited, but the upper limit may be set to multiple times. This can be set appropriately depending on the expected number of balls paid out per special lock effect.

Furthermore, the conditions for determining whether or not a special lock effect will be executed are not limited to those described above. In other words, in the above, a mode transition is triggered by a winning lottery for a "fixed role," and the determination of whether or not a special lock effect will be executed is made on the condition that the mode in question is Heaven C mode. However, since there may be cases where a transition to Heaven C mode is triggered by factors other than a winning lottery for a "fixed role" (see (f) in Figure 8), a determination of whether or not a special lock effect will be executed in these cases may also be made, and the execution of a special lock effect may be determined at a predetermined probability (which may be the same probability as when a winning lottery for a "fixed role" is triggered, or it may be a different probability).

Also, for example, when a "fixed role" is won, a decision may first be made as to whether or not a special lock effect will be executed, and if it is decided that a special lock effect will be executed, a transition to Heaven C mode may occur. In other words, the special lock effect may be executed in response to a decision to transition to Heaven C mode, or a transition to Heaven C mode may be made in response to a decision to execute a special lock effect.

Furthermore, for example, the degree of progress of play within the advantageous zone may be used as a condition for determining whether or not a special lock effect will be executed. For example, when the value of the advantageous zone game count counter or control game count counter described below is less than 750, or when the value of the advantageous zone payout counter or control payout counter described below is less than 1201, a determination as to whether or not a special lock effect will be executed is made as described above; and when the value of the advantageous zone game count counter or control game count counter described below is 750 or greater, or when the value of the advantageous zone payout counter or control payout counter described below is 1201 or greater, it is possible to prevent the determination of whether or not a special lock effect will be executed from then on in the same series of advantageous zones.

In this way, in the first gaming machine, the play period for a series of advantageous zones is limited to a fixed period (see Figure 16 described below). Furthermore, even if control information that is highly advantageous to the player (for example, Heaven C mode) is set multiple times within the same series of advantageous zones, control is performed so that special effects (for example, special lock effects) are not performed each time. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the gambling nature of the game from becoming excessively high while also preventing a decline in the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, in the first gaming machine, within a series of advantageous zones, the winning of a specific role (e.g., a "fixed role") may trigger control to a favorable state (e.g., a pseudo bonus), and control information that is highly advantageous to the player (e.g., Heaven C mode) may be set. Even if this occurs multiple times within the same series of advantageous zones, the machine is controlled so that special effects (e.g., special lock effects) are not performed each time. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the gambling aspect of the game from becoming excessively high, while also preventing a decline in the enjoyment of the game.

In addition, the first gaming machine is capable of determining secondary information (e.g., a sub-flag when a favorable zone is won) according to the determined internal winning combination, as well as determining secondary information (e.g., a sub-flag when a favorable zone is entered) according to the combination of symbols displayed, and is capable of determining whether or not to grant a favorable state (e.g., a pseudo bonus) in which information regarding the player's stopping operation is notified according to the secondary information determined for each.

In this way, the first gaming machine can create a sense of anticipation regarding the awarding of an advantageous state not only when an internal winning combination is determined, but also when a symbol combination is displayed, thereby diversifying the gameplay regarding the awarding of an advantageous state.

In addition, in the first gaming machine, both the information corresponding to the determined internal winning combination and the information corresponding to the displayed symbol combination are managed as common secondary information, which helps prevent an increase in the control load and amount of information related to the granting of advantageous states.

Furthermore, in the first gaming machine, when the gaming value bet is a first amount (e.g., 3 coins), a first special role (e.g., 3BB) can be won, but a second special role (e.g., 2BB) cannot be won. Furthermore, when the gaming value bet is a second amount (e.g., 2 coins), a second special role can be won, but the first special role cannot be won. Furthermore, when a specific role (e.g., "F_Replay A") is won, if the first special permission state (e.g., between 3BB flags) is reached, a predetermined symbol combination (e.g., "Right-Up Replay") is displayed, and if the second special permission state (e.g., between 2BB flags) is reached, a specific symbol combination (e.g., "Parallel Replay") is displayed (see Figure 15 below).

The first gaming machine is capable of determining different secondary information when a combination of predetermined symbols is displayed and when a combination of specific symbols is displayed. In other words, the first gaming machine can vary the determination of whether an advantageous state will be awarded depending on which special permission state is in effect, even when the same specific combination is determined. This allows for further diversification of gameplay while minimizing the increase in control load and information volume related to the awarding of advantageous states.

Furthermore, in the first gaming machine, it is possible to determine whether or not to grant an advantageous state when at least a specific combination is won and a specific symbol combination is displayed.

Here, in the first gaming machine, since both the predetermined symbol combination and the specific symbol combination are symbol combinations related to replay, the same benefit of activating replay will be awarded regardless of which combination is displayed.

However, the manner in which the same benefit is awarded is not limited to the above. For example, a specific combination may be configured as a specific minor combination related to the award of game value. Then, when a specific minor combination is won, for example, in the first special permission state, a predetermined symbol combination (a symbol combination related to the award of game value equivalent to a "right-up lip") that awards game value of one coin (this value is arbitrary and may be any value less than the betted game value, or may be a value greater than the betted game value) may be displayed; and in the second special permission state, a specific symbol combination (a symbol combination related to the award of game value equivalent to a "parallel lip") that awards the same number of game values as when the predetermined symbol combination is displayed may be displayed.

Furthermore, both the predetermined symbol combination and the specific symbol combination may be configured as "miss" symbol combinations (however, in order to be able to determine whether or not to grant an advantageous state, the symbol combinations must be distinguishable as being different from pure "miss" combinations). Even in this case, the value remains the same.

In this way, the first gaming machine can vary the decisions regarding the granting of advantageous states depending on which special permission state is in effect, even when the same specific combination is determined. This makes it possible to diversify the gameplay while preventing an increase in the control load and amount of information required for the granting of advantageous states. Furthermore, in a game in which a specific combination is determined, the same benefit is awarded regardless of which special permission state is in effect, so even when the gameplay is varied, it is possible to prevent players from suffering direct disadvantages.

Furthermore, in the first gaming machine, if a specific combination is won and the second special permission state is in effect, it may be configured so that when a stop operation is performed in a specific manner, a specific combination of symbols can be displayed, but when a stop operation is not performed in a specific manner, it is not possible to display the specific combination of symbols.

It may also be possible to determine whether or not to grant an advantageous state at least when a specific combination of symbols is displayed when a specific role is won. If a specific role is determined as an internal winning role, it may be possible to set different degrees of advantage regarding the granting of an advantageous state when a specific combination of symbols is displayed and when a specific combination of symbols is not displayed.

In addition, if a specific combination is won, and the first special permission state is in effect, a combination of predetermined symbols may be displayed regardless of the stop operation mode; and, if the second special permission state is in effect, a combination of predetermined symbols may be displayed when a stop operation is performed in a specific mode, and a combination of predetermined symbols may be displayed when a stop operation is not performed in a specific mode.

In this case, the specific combination can be configured so that a specific symbol combination is displayed on at least one reel when the timing of the stop operation is appropriate (in this embodiment, this may be described as "press position ○" or "correct press position", etc.), and a predetermined symbol combination is displayed when the timing of the stop operation is inappropriate (in this embodiment, this may be described as "press position ×" or "incorrect press position", etc.). This allows the degree of advantage regarding the granting of an advantageous state to vary depending on the player's stop operation (or the timing of the stop operation), allowing the player to concentrate more on the game and increasing the player's interest in the game.

As mentioned above, a specific combination can also be configured as a specific minor combination. In this case, on at least one reel, if the timing of the stop operation is appropriate (when the button is pressed at ○), a specific combination of symbols is displayed and a predetermined number of game values is awarded, and if the timing of the stop operation is inappropriate (when the button is pressed at ×), a specific combination of symbols is displayed and a predetermined number of game values is awarded. In this case, the predetermined number may be the same as the specific number (i.e., the same benefit). Alternatively, a game value greater than the specific number may be awarded for the specific number. Alternatively, a game value less than the specific number may be awarded for the specific number. At least one of the specific combination of symbols and the specific combination of symbols may be the combination of symbols when a miss occurs. In other words, either the predetermined number or the specific number may be set to "0." This not only makes it possible to change the degree of advantage in granting an advantageous state based on the player's stop operation (or the timing of the operation), but also to change the direct content of the bonus, allowing players to concentrate more on the game, further diversifying the gameplay and increasing the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, if there is only one type of special role, the appropriate timing for the stop operation is also limited, so it is desirable to provide multiple special roles with different appropriate timings for the stop operation. For example, on one reel, a first special role may be provided in which, when the stop operation is performed at a first timing, an appropriate stop operation occurs and a combination of specific symbols is displayed, but when the stop operation is performed at any timing other than the first timing, the appropriate stop operation occurs and the combination of specific symbols is not displayed; a second special role may be provided in which, when the stop operation is performed at a second timing different from the first timing, the appropriate stop operation occurs and the combination of specific symbols is displayed, but when the stop operation is performed at any timing other than the second timing, the appropriate stop operation occurs and the combination of specific symbols is not displayed; and a third special role may be provided in which, when the stop operation is performed at a third timing different from the first and second timings, the appropriate stop operation occurs and the combination of specific symbols is displayed, but when the stop operation is performed at any timing other than the third timing, the appropriate stop operation occurs and the combination of specific symbols is not displayed, and all of these roles have the same winning probability.

In this case, the specific winning combination can be configured so that a specific symbol combination is displayed when the batting order is appropriate (when the button press order is correct), and a predetermined symbol combination is displayed when the batting order is inappropriate (when the button press order is incorrect). This allows the degree of advantage regarding the granting of an advantageous state to vary depending on the player's stopping operation (procedure), allowing the player to concentrate more on the game and increasing the player's interest in the game.

Furthermore, as described above, the specific combination can also be configured as a specific minor combination. In this case, if the batting order is appropriate (in the case of the correct button press order), a specific symbol combination is displayed and a predetermined number of game points is awarded. If the batting order is inappropriate (in the case of the incorrect button press order), a specific symbol combination is displayed and a predetermined number of game points is awarded. In this case, the predetermined number may be the same as the specific number (i.e., the same bonus). A higher game point may be awarded for the specific number than the specific number. A lower game point may be awarded for the specific number than the specific number. At least one of the specific symbol combination and the specific symbol combination may be the symbol combination when a miss occurs. In other words, either the predetermined number or the specific number may be set to "0." This not only changes the degree of advantage related to the awarding of an advantageous state due to the player's stop operation (procedure), but also changes the content of the direct bonus. This allows the player to concentrate more on the game, further diversifies the gameplay, and increases the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, since only one type of special role limits the appropriate batting order, it is desirable to provide multiple special roles with different appropriate batting orders. For example, a first special role may be provided in which, when the left first stop appears, an appropriate stopping operation is performed and a combination of special symbols is displayed, and when the center/right first stop appears, an appropriate stopping operation is not performed and a combination of special symbols is not displayed; a second special role may be provided in which, when the center first stop appears, an appropriate stopping operation is performed and a combination of special symbols is displayed, and when the left/right first stop appears, an appropriate stopping operation is not performed and a combination of special symbols is not displayed; and a third special role may be provided in which, when the right first stop appears, an appropriate stopping operation is performed and a combination of special symbols is displayed, and when the left/center first stop appears, an appropriate stopping operation is not performed and a combination of special symbols is not displayed; and these roles may be set to win with the same probability of winning.

So far, we have mentioned that in a unit game in which a specific combination is won, the stop operation mode (at least one or both of the timing of the stop operation and the batting order) can change the process for determining whether a non-advantageous zone will transition to an advantageous zone, and the process for determining whether an advantageous state will be granted in an advantageous zone (including pseudo-bonus transition lotteries, mode transition lotteries, and other processes for changing the advantageous degree of the game situation in an advantageous zone). However, among such changes, changes that are relatively disadvantageous to the player (which may ultimately result in an disadvantage) can be considered the above-mentioned penalty. Therefore, when such a change occurs, the system may be configured to generate an optional effect (warning notification) to draw attention to the player.

Furthermore, in the first gaming machine, when a specific combination is won, the likelihood of an advantageous state being awarded is higher when a specific symbol combination is displayed than when a predetermined symbol combination is displayed. In other words, assuming a three-coin bet, the second special permission state (e.g., between 2BB flags) is a state in which the awarding of an advantageous state is favored more favorably than the first special permission state (e.g., between 3BB flags).

Furthermore, in the first gaming machine, if a predetermined role (for example, "Push Order Bell B" described below) is won, if the first special permission state is active, the combination of award symbols (for example, a combination of symbols that will result in the payout of eight coins) is displayed regardless of the batting order, whereas if the second special permission state is active, the combination of award symbols is displayed if the batting order is the predefined correct push order, but if the batting order is not the predefined correct push order, the combination of award symbols is not displayed, resulting in a miss where no game value is awarded, or a combination of symbols that will award less game value than if the combination of award symbols were displayed (for example, a combination of symbols that will result in the payout of one coin) is displayed. In other words, ignoring the activation of advantageous states, the first special permission state is a state in which the awarding of game value is favored more favorably than the second special permission state.

In other words, if a player plays in a non-recommended gaming state with three bets between 3BB flags, the probability of awarding an advantageous state is not favored, but the probability of awarding gaming value when an advantageous state is not activated is favored, so the player can play in a state where the difference in slope value between when an advantageous state is activated and when it is not activated is relatively small. In this way, a state in which the player's gaming value is unlikely to decrease, although the possibility of the player being able to suddenly increase their gaming value is reduced, can be defined as, for example, a "stable state."

On the other hand, if a player plays in a recommended game state, the probability of obtaining an advantageous state is favored, but the probability of obtaining game value when an advantageous state is not activated is not favored, so the player can play in a state where the difference in slope value between when an advantageous state is activated and when it is not activated is relatively large. In this way, a state in which the player is more likely to be able to rapidly increase their game value, but in which the player's game value is likely to decrease, can be defined as, for example, a "rough seas state."

The method for creating the two states, the stable state and the rough seas state, is not limited to the above. For example, in the "stable state," the pseudo bonus transition probability is increased compared to the "rough seas state" in the pseudo bonus transition lottery described above, while the transition probability to Heaven mode is decreased compared to the "rough seas state" in the mode transition lottery described above. Furthermore, in the "rough seas state," the pseudo bonus transition probability is decreased compared to the "stable state" in the pseudo bonus transition lottery described above, while the transition probability to Heaven mode is increased compared to the "stable state" in the mode transition lottery described above. In this way, a state can be created in the "stable state" where it is easier to win a pseudo bonus for the first time but it is difficult to win consecutive wins, while a state can be created in the "rough seas state" where it is harder to win a pseudo bonus for the first time but it is easier to win consecutive wins. Note that the stop control for the predetermined combination may vary between 2BB flags and 3BB flags, as described above, or it may be different (i.e., not favoring 3BB flags).

[5-2. Symbol Arrangement Configuration of First Gaming Machine]
Next, the symbol arrangement configuration of the first gaming machine will be described with reference to Fig. 9. Fig. 9 is a diagram showing an example of a symbol arrangement table of the first gaming machine. As shown in Fig. 9, in the first gaming machine, ten types of symbols, namely "Red 7", "BAR", "Replay", "Bell", "Watermelon", "Cherry", "Red Blank", "Yellow Blank", "White Blank 1", and "White Blank 2", are arranged on each of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R at the positions shown in Fig. 9. Furthermore, as shown in the symbol code table, symbol codes 1 to 10 are assigned to each symbol.

[5-3. Internal winning combination configuration of first gaming machine]
Next, the internal winning combination configuration of the first gaming machine will be described with reference to Figures 10 to 15. Figure 10 is a diagram showing an example of an internal lottery table of the first gaming machine. Also, Figures 11 to 14 are diagrams showing an example of a symbol combination table of the first gaming machine. Also, Figure 15 is a diagram showing an example of the correspondence between the internal winning combination, the stop operation mode, and the display combination, etc. of the first gaming machine. That is, below, the types of internal winning combinations drawn by lottery in the first gaming machine, and which symbol combinations (which can also be referred to as display combinations, winning combinations, stop display modes, display results, etc.) are displayed depending on the stop operation mode (i.e., the hitting order, stop operation timing, etc.) when each internal winning combination is won will be described.

First, in the first gaming machine, in the internal lottery process (see FIG. 26) described below, each internal winning combination shown in FIG. 10 is won with the probability shown in FIG. 10 (lottery value/probability denominator: 65536). The symbol combinations permitted to be displayed when each internal winning combination is won are as shown in the "corresponding symbol combinations" in FIG. 10. Also, in FIGS. 11 to 14, "BB" indicates a symbol combination related to a bonus role, "REP" indicates a symbol combination related to a replay role, and "FRU" indicates a symbol combination related to a minor role.

"F_2BB" can be determined as an internal winning combination when a game is played with two bets in a non-bonus state (more specifically, between non-flags), but is configured not to be determined as an internal winning combination when a game is played with three bets. In a game where "F_2BB" wins in a two-bet state, or in a game where a "lose" occurs between 2BB flags, if the press position ○ is reached on each reel, "BB01" is displayed and the game transitions to 2BB state (bonus state based on 2BB). On the other hand, in a game where a three-bet state occurs, even between 2BB flags, "BB01" will not be displayed.

"F_3BB" can be determined as an internal winning combination when a game is played with three bets in a non-bonus state (more specifically, between non-flags), but is configured not to be determined as an internal winning combination when a game is played with two bets. In a game with three bets in which "F_3BB" wins, or in a game with a "lose" between 3BB flags, if the press position is ○ on each reel, "BB02" will be displayed and the game will transition to the 3BB state (a bonus state based on 3BB). On the other hand, "BB02" will not be displayed when a game with two bets is played, even between 3BB flags.

In the 2BB and 3BB states, the lottery value in the "Bonus State" column in Figure 10 is referenced to determine the internal winning combination (only a three-coin bet is allowed to start play). During the 2BB and 3BB states, the RB, a first-class special combination, is always activated (RB state). The RB state is repeatedly terminated and activated again if two wins occur or two games are played after activation. In addition, in the first gaming machine, the condition for terminating the 2BB state is stipulated as more than one medal being paid out in the 2BB state, and the condition for terminating the 3BB state is stipulated as more than 176 medals being paid out in the 3BB state.

When the 2BB or 3BB state ends, a special mode transition process is performed. For example, if the mode when the bonus state is transitioned to (this is equivalent to when the bonus state ends, as mode transitions do not occur during the bonus state), i.e., the current mode, is "Start Mode," the mode to transition to will be "Start Mode." Also, if the current mode is "Normal A Mode," "Normal B Mode," "Heaven Preparation Mode," or "Chance Mode," the mode to transition to will be "Normal A Mode." Also, if the current mode is "End A Mode" or "End B Mode," the mode to transition to will be "End A Mode." Also, if the current mode is "Guaranteed Mode," "Heaven A Mode," "Heaven B Mode," or "Heaven C Mode," the mode to transition to will be "Guaranteed Mode."

"F_Replay A" is configured to be determined as an internal winning combination in non-bonus states, regardless of the number of bets. When determined as an internal winning combination, between non-flag and 2BB flags, regardless of the stopping operation mode, one of "REP64" to "REP72" (these can be collectively referred to as "parallel replays" because they display the "replay" symbols in a straight line in the bottom row or in a straight line in the middle row. Also, "REP64" to "REP71" can be collectively referred to as "lower row replays," and "REP72" can be referred to as "middle row replay") is displayed, and a replay is awarded. On the other hand, between 3BB flags, regardless of the stopping operation mode, "REP73" (which displays the "replay" symbols in a straight line in the top right, so can be referred to as "right-up replay") is displayed, and a replay is awarded.

"F_Replay B" is configured to be determined as an internal winning combination in non-bonus states, regardless of the number of bets. It can be determined as an internal winning combination when three coins are bet, but can also be configured not to be determined as an internal winning combination when two coins are bet. If it is determined as an internal winning combination, a "Parallel Replay" will be displayed and a replay will be awarded regardless of the stop operation mode, regardless of the state.

"F_Cherry" is configured to be determined as an internal winning combination regardless of the number of bets in non-bonus mode. It can be determined as an internal winning combination in three-coin bet mode, but can be configured not to be determined as an internal winning combination in two-coin bet mode. If determined as an internal winning combination, a "middle row replay" is displayed in two-coin bet mode regardless of the stop operation mode, and a replay is awarded. In three-coin bet mode, if the push position is ○ on at least the left reel 3L, one of "REP28," "REP60," to "REP63" (these can be collectively referred to as "cherry replays" because they display the "cherry" symbol in the lower row on the left reel 3L) is displayed, and a replay is awarded. On the other hand, if the push position is ×, other replays (e.g., "REP57" to "REP59") are displayed, and a replay is awarded.

"F_Confirmed Cherry" is configured to be determined as an internal winning combination regardless of the number of bets in non-bonus states. While it can be determined as an internal winning combination in three-coin bet states, it can also be configured not to be determined as an internal winning combination in two-coin bet states. If determined as an internal winning combination, a "middle row replay" is displayed in two-coin bet states regardless of the stop operation mode, and a replay is awarded. In three-coin bet states, if the pressing order is any of "batting order 1" through "batting order 4," pressing position ○ on at least the left reel 3L will display one of "REP42" through "REP56" (these symbols display a "cherry" symbol in the lower row on the left reel 3L; for example, symbols that can increase the player's expectations, such as "REP42," can also be displayed on other reels, and these can be collectively referred to as "confirmed cherry replays"), and a replay is awarded. On the other hand, if the button is pressed at an X position, other replies (such as the aforementioned "Cherry rep" or "REP29" to "REP41") will be displayed and a replay will be awarded. Furthermore, if the button press is either "batting order 5" or "batting order 6," a "middle row rep" will be displayed and a replay will be awarded regardless of the stop operation mode.

"F_Middle Cherry" is configured to be determined as an internal winning combination regardless of the number of bets in the non-bonus state. While it can be determined as an internal winning combination in the three-coin bet state, it can also be configured not to be determined as an internal winning combination in the two-coin bet state. If it is determined as an internal winning combination, a "middle replay" is displayed regardless of the stop operation mode in the two-coin bet state, and a replay is awarded. In the three-coin bet state, if the pressing order is any of "batting order 1" through "batting order 4," and if the pressing position is ○ on at least the left reel 3L, one of "REP15" through "REP19" (these can be collectively referred to as "middle cherry replays" because they display the "cherry" symbol in the middle row on the left reel 3L) is displayed, and a replay is awarded. On the other hand, if the pressing position is ×, other replays (e.g., "REP20" through "REP27") are displayed, and a replay is awarded. Additionally, if the button press is either "batting order 5" or "batting order 6," a "middle lip" will be displayed regardless of the stop operation mode, and a replay will be granted.

"F_Reach Eye" is configured to be determined as an internal winning combination regardless of the number of bets in non-bonus states. Note that while it can be determined as an internal winning combination in three-coin bet states, it can also be configured so that it is not determined as an internal winning combination in two-coin bet states. If it is determined as an internal winning combination, a "middle lip" is displayed in two-coin bet states regardless of the stop operation mode, and a replay is awarded. In three-coin bet states, if the push order is any of "batting order 1" through "batting order 4," one of "REP01" through "REP14" (these are, by convention, configured as combinations of symbols that can definitely notify (or suggest) a transition to a state advantageous to the player, and these can be collectively referred to as "reach eye lip") is displayed regardless of the stop operation mode, and a replay is awarded. Furthermore, if the push order is either "batting order 5" or "batting order 6," a "middle lip" is displayed regardless of the stop operation mode, and a replay is awarded.

"F_Watermelon" is configured to be determined as an internal winning combination regardless of the number of bets in a non-bonus state. When determined as an internal winning combination, if the push position for each reel is ○, one of "FRU10" to "FRU12" (these display watermelon symbols side by side and can be collectively referred to as "watermelon") will be displayed, and if three coins are bet, three medals will be paid out, and if two coins are bet, two medals will be paid out. On the other hand, if the push position is ×, one of "FRU08" and "FRU09" (these do not display watermelon symbols side by side and can be collectively referred to as "watermelon spill") will be displayed, and one medal will be paid out. Note that if the push position is ×, a spill will occur and no medals will be paid out.

"F_Bell 123A1", "F_Bell 123A2", "F_Bell 132A1", "F_Bell 132A2", "F_Bell 213A1", "F_Bell 213A2", "F_Bell 231A1", "F_Bell 231A2", "F_Bell 312A1", "F_Bell 312A2", "F_Bell 321A1", and "F_Bell 321A2" are configured to be determined as internal winning combinations in non-bonus states regardless of the number of bets. These can be collectively referred to as "Push Order Bell A".

As shown in Figure 15, "Push Order Bell A" is a push order minor feature with six options (one of "Batting Order 1" to "Batting Order 6" is the correct push order), and if it is determined as an internal winning feature, and the stop operation is performed in the corresponding correct push order, one of the following "bells" will be displayed: "Right Downward Bell" ("FRU03"), "Upper Bell" ("FRU01" and "FRU02"), "Middle Bell" ("FRU04"), "Right Upward Bell" ("FRU05"), "Small Hill Bell" ("FRU06"), and "Lower Bell" ("FRU07").If three coins are bet, eight medals will be paid out, and if two coins are bet, two medals will be paid out. On the other hand, if the stop operations are not performed in the corresponding correct button sequence, and the first stop operation is correct, there is a 1/2 probability that the remaining stop operations will result in a press position ○, and if the press position is ○, one of the winning "1-coin roles" ("FRU13" to "FRU116") will be displayed, and one medal will be paid out. On the other hand, if the press position is ×, a miss will occur and no medal will be paid out. Also, if the first stop operation is incorrect, there is a 1/8 probability that the remaining stop operations will result in a press position ○, and if the press position is ○, one of the winning "1-coin roles" will be displayed, and one medal will be paid out. On the other hand, if the press position is ×, a miss will occur and no medal will be paid out.

"F_Bell 123B1", "F_Bell 123B2", "F_Bell 132B1", "F_Bell 132B2", "F_Bell 213B1", "F_Bell 213B2", "F_Bell 231B1", "F_Bell 231B2", "F_Bell 312B1", "F_Bell 312B2", "F_Bell 321B1", and "F_Bell 321B2" are configured to be determined as internal winning combinations in non-bonus states regardless of the number of bets. These can be collectively referred to as "Push Order Bell B".

As shown in Figure 15, "Push Order Bell B" is not a push order minor feature between the 3BB flags in the 2-coin bet state and the 3-coin bet state. If it is determined to be an internal winning feature, one of the above-mentioned "bells" will be displayed regardless of the stop operation mode, and 8 medals will be paid out if the 3-coin bet state is in effect, and 2 medals will be paid out if the 2-coin bet state is in effect.

Also, as shown in Figure 15, "Push Order Bell B" is a push order minor role in states other than between 3BB flags in the 3-coin bet state (between non-flags in the 3-coin bet state, between 2BB flags in the 3-coin bet state), and when it is determined as an internal winning role, if the stop operation is performed in the corresponding correct push order, one of the above-mentioned "bells" will be displayed and eight medals will be paid out. On the other hand, if the stop operation is not performed in the corresponding correct push order, if the first stop operation is correct, there is a 1/2 probability that the push position will be ○ for the remaining stop operations, and if the push position is ○, one of the winning "1-coin roles" will be displayed and one medal will be paid out. On the other hand, if the push position is ×, a miss will occur and no medal will be paid out. Furthermore, if the first stop operation is incorrect, there is a 1/8 probability that the push position will be ○ for the remaining stop operations, and if the push position is ○, one of the winning "1-coin roles" will be displayed and one medal will be paid out. On the other hand, if the pressed position is X, a miss will occur and no medals will be paid out.

The "8 F_RB" combination can be determined as an internal winning combination during bonus mode. If determined as an internal winning combination, one of the "bells" described above will be displayed and 8 medals will be paid out regardless of the stop operation mode.

The "1 F_RB" can be determined as an internal winning combination in the bonus state. If it is determined as an internal winning combination, one of the above-mentioned "1-coin combinations" (more specifically, "FRU117" to "FRU120" have been added) will be displayed regardless of the stop operation mode, and one medal will be paid out.

Note that the internal lottery table shown in Figure 10, the symbol combination tables shown in Figures 11 to 14, and the correspondence between internal winning combinations, stop operation modes, and display combinations shown in Figure 15 are merely examples, and are not limited to the modes shown here.

For example, in the first gaming machine, a "loss" can occur in various situations, such as a pure "loss," a "loss" due to missing "BB01" in a 2-bet state where "BB01" can be displayed, or a "loss" due to missing "BB02" in a 3-bet state where "BB02" can be displayed, or a "loss" due to a 3-bet state between 2 BB flags, or a "loss" due to a 2-bet state between 3 BB flags, or a "loss" due to missing a "push order minor win." Therefore, in order to vary the symbol combinations displayed as "losses" in some or all of these cases, these different symbol combinations are specified in advance in a symbol combination table, and these are allowed to be displayed as "corresponding symbol combinations" depending on the determined internal winning combination, so that the symbol combinations displayed as "losses" can be varied depending on the situation, etc.

[5-4. Limit processing configuration of first gaming machine]
Next, the limit process configuration of the first gaming machine will be described with reference to Figure 16. Figure 16 is a diagram for explaining an example of each limit process in the first gaming machine. As shown in Figure 16, the first gaming machine is configured to execute limit processes, including a normal limit process (number of games), a normal limit process (number of payouts), a special limit process (number of games), a special limit process (number of payouts), a semi-limit process (number of games), and a semi-limit process (number of payouts). Note that this is only an example of executable limit processes, and limit processes other than these limit processes may be executed, or some of these limit processes may not be executed.

The normal limit processing (number of games) is executed when the value of the advantageous zone game number counter reaches 1500 or more (i.e., when 1500 consecutive games have been played during the advantageous zone). The advantageous zone game number counter starts counting the number of games when the advantageous zone (including the presentation zone) begins, and ends counting and is cleared (initialized) when the advantageous zone ends (including when the limit processing is activated). The advantageous zone game number counter also counts when the number of bets is 2 or 3. The advantageous zone game number counter also counts when the number of bets is 2BB or 3BB.

When the normal limit process (number of games) is executed (activated), the advantageous zone is forcibly ended and transitioned to a non-advantageous zone, regardless of whether it is during a presentation zone or an increase zone (pseudo bonus). At this time, all information related to the advantageous zone (for example, information for controlling the presentation zone or increase zone, information related to the current mode, information related to the pseudo bonus play period, information related to the ceiling game count and whether the ceiling has been shortened, the value of the 1G consecutive stock counter, and other information obtained during the advantageous zone, as well as various information required to control the advantageous zone) is also cleared (initialized).

Normal limit processing (payout number) is executed when the value of the favorable zone payout number counter reaches 2401 or more (i.e., when the number of medals paid out during the favorable zone exceeds 2400). The favorable zone payout number counter starts counting the number of medals paid out (here, for example, the "net increase (difference in number of medals)") when the favorable zone (including the presentation zone) begins, and ends counting and is cleared (initialized) when the favorable zone ends (including when the limit processing is activated). The favorable zone payout number counter counts both when the number of medals bet is 2 or 3. The favorable zone payout number counter also counts in 2BB and 3BB states. For example, when a "miss" or "missed win" occurs during the favorable zone, the favorable zone payout number counter subtracts a value calculated appropriately according to the actual payout number (for example, "-2 medals" or "-3 medals") Therefore, if the number of medals does not increase but decreases after the advantageous period begins, the value may become negative (alternatively, it can be configured to always maintain "0" when a negative value occurs). In other words, the advantageous period payout number counter is capable of counting from the lowest point of the number of medals paid out during the advantageous period to the defined highest point (difference in number of medals: 2400).

When the normal limit process (payout amount) is executed (activated), the advantageous zone is forcibly ended and the player transitions to a non-advantageous zone, regardless of whether the player is in the performance zone or the increase zone (pseudo bonus). At this time, all information related to the advantageous zone described above is also cleared (initialized).

The special limit process (number of games) is executed when the value of the control game number counter reaches 1445 or more (i.e., when 1445 consecutive plays have been played during the advantageous period). The control game number counter starts counting the number of plays when the advantageous period (including the presentation period) begins, and stops counting and is cleared (initialized) when the advantageous period ends (including when the limit process is activated). The control game number counter counts when the number of bets is three, but does not count when the number of bets is two. The control game number counter counts when the game is in a non-bonus state, but does not count when the game is in a 2BB state or a 3BB state. However, the control game number counter can also be configured in the same way as the advantageous period game number counter.

When the special limit process (number of games) is executed (activated), if the pseudo bonus is in progress (i.e., during the increase period), the pseudo bonus will not be forcibly ended midway, but when the pseudo bonus ends, the advantageous period will be forcibly ended accordingly, and the game will transition to a non-advantageous period. At this time, all information related to the advantageous period mentioned above will also be cleared (initialized).

On the other hand, if you are not in a pseudo bonus (i.e., if you are in a presentation period), you will first be forced to transition to the pseudo bonus. In other words, even if you do not win the pseudo bonus transition lottery, you will transition to the pseudo bonus by executing this special limit process (number of games). Then, when the pseudo bonus you transitioned to ends, the advantageous period will be forcibly ended accordingly, and you will transition to a non-advantageous period. At this time, all information related to the advantageous period described above will also be cleared (initialized).

Note that the value of the advantageous zone game number counter where normal limit processing (number of games) is executed (activated) is "1500", while the value of the control game number counter where special limit processing (number of games) is executed (activated) is "1445". Since the maximum number of games played (continuable period) during a pseudo bonus is "55 games" in the first gaming machine (see Figure 5), this difference takes into account the playable period during a pseudo bonus.

In other words, the normal limit processing (number of games) is executed when a predetermined restricted period of play has been played in the advantageous zone in order to prevent the gambling nature of the game from becoming excessively high. However, if this normal limit processing (number of games) is executed immediately after or during the start of a pseudo-bonus, for example, the player may feel distrust or a sense of loss, which may reduce their interest in the game. Therefore, in the first gaming machine, the special limit processing (number of games) is executed in play that is one playable period (55 games) before the play in which the normal limit processing (number of games) is executed, thereby preventing the pseudo-bonus from ending prematurely and causing the player to feel distrust or a sense of loss.

From this perspective, the timing at which the special limit processing (number of games) is executed (activated) is not limited to the above. For example, the special limit processing (number of games) may be executed in a game that is two consecutive periods per increased section (55 games x 2 sets = 110 games) before the game in which the normal limit processing (number of games) is executed. Furthermore, for example, to provide a slight grace period, the special limit processing (number of games) may be executed in a game that is one consecutive period per increased section (55 games) + grace period (2 games) before the game in which the normal limit processing (number of games) is executed. Furthermore, for example, in a case where a premonition state is passed through before transitioning to a pseudo bonus, and the maximum number of games in this premonition state is "4 games," the special limit processing (number of games) may be executed in a game that is one consecutive period per increased section (55 games) + maximum premonition period (4 games) before the game in which the normal limit processing (number of games) is executed. In other words, the timing at which the special limit process (number of games) is executed (activated) can be any timing before the timing at which the normal limit process (number of games) is executed, and can be set appropriately according to individual game specifications, etc.

The special limit process (payout number) is executed when the value of the control payout number counter reaches 2126 or more (i.e., when the number of medals paid out during the advantageous period exceeds 2125). The control payout number counter starts counting the number of medals paid out (here, for example, the "net increase (difference in number of medals)") when the advantageous period (including the presentation period) begins, and stops counting and is cleared (initialized) when the advantageous period ends (including when the limit process is activated). The control payout number counter counts when the number of bets is three, but does not count when the number of bets is two. The control payout number counter counts when the game is in a non-bonus state, but does not count when the game is in a 2BB or 3BB state.

In addition, when a "miss" occurs during a favorable period, the control payout counter subtracts an appropriate count value according to the actual number of medals paid out (for example, "-3 medals"). However, when a "miss" occurs during a favorable period (at least when a difference occurs from the maximum number of medals paid out), the control payout counter counts the number of medals paid out as if no "miss" (or difference) had occurred. Specifically, for example, in a game where a player bets three coins and wins "Push Order Bell A," if the hitting order is correct, the number of medals paid out (maximum value) will be "8 medals" (the difference in number is "+5 medals"); however, if the hitting order is incorrect and the pressing position is correct, the number of medals paid out will be "1 medal" (the difference in number is "-2 medals"); if the pressing position is incorrect, a miss will occur and the number of medals paid out will be "0 medals" (the difference in number is "-3 medals"); however, the control payout counter will count the difference in number of medals as "+5 medals" in either case in that game.

Furthermore, for example, if the value of the advantageous zone payout number counter becomes greater than the value of the control payout number counter due to activation of the 2BB state or 3BB state, the value of the control payout number counter is corrected to the value of the advantageous zone payout number counter. Note that the control payout number counter can also be configured in the same way as the advantageous zone payout number counter.

When the special limit process (payout amount) is executed (activated), if the pseudo-bonus is in progress (i.e., if it is in an increasing period), the pseudo-bonus will not be forcibly ended midway, but when the pseudo-bonus ends, the advantageous period will be forcibly ended accordingly, and the player will transition to a non-advantageous period. At this time, all information related to the advantageous period mentioned above will also be cleared (initialized).

On the other hand, if you are not in a pseudo bonus (i.e., if you are in a presentation period), you will first be forced to transition to the pseudo bonus. In other words, even if you do not win the pseudo bonus transition lottery, you will transition to the pseudo bonus by executing this special limit process (payout number). Then, when the pseudo bonus you transitioned to ends, the advantageous period will be forced to end accordingly, and you will transition to a non-advantageous period. At this time, all information related to the advantageous period described above will also be cleared (initialized).

Here, note that the value of the advantageous zone payout counter where normal limit processing (payout number) is executed (activated) is "2401", while the value of the control game number counter where special limit processing (payout number) is executed (activated) is "2126". Since the maximum number of coins that can be won during a pseudo bonus (amount of game value that can be awarded) in the first gaming machine is "275 coins" (see Figure 5), this difference takes into account the amount of game value that can be awarded during a pseudo bonus.

In other words, normal limit processing (payout number) is executed when a predetermined regulated amount of game value has been awarded in a favorable zone in order to prevent the game from becoming overly gambling-oriented. However, if this normal limit processing (payout number) is executed immediately after the start of a pseudo-bonus or during it, for example, the player may feel distrust or a sense of loss, and their interest in the game may decrease. Therefore, in the first gaming machine, special limit processing (payout number) is executed when an amount of game value awarded is less than the amount of game value that would trigger normal limit processing (payout number) by the amount of game value that can be awarded per increase zone (275 coins), thereby preventing the pseudo-bonus from ending prematurely and causing the player to feel distrust or a sense of loss.

From this perspective, the timing at which the special limit process (payout number) is executed (activated) is not limited to the above. For example, the special limit process (payout number) may be executed when a game value amount that is less than the game value amount at which the normal limit process (payout number) is executed is awarded by the amount of game value that can be awarded per two increase intervals (275 coins x 2 sets = 550 coins). Furthermore, for example, to provide a slight grace period, the special limit process (number of games) may be executed when a game value amount that is less than the game value amount at which the normal limit process (payout number) is executed is awarded by the amount of game value that can be awarded per increase interval (275 coins) + the amount of game value equivalent to the grace period (8 coins). In other words, the timing at which the special limit process (payout number) is executed (activated) may be any time before the timing at which the normal limit process (payout number) is executed, and can be set appropriately depending on the individual game specifications, etc.

The semi-limit process (number of games) is executed when the value of the control game number counter is "1390" or greater, calculated by multiplying the value of the 1G consecutive counter (if the ceiling reduction lottery is won and the result is "ceiling reduction enabled," an additional "1" is added) by "55" (i.e., the duration for which the pseudo bonus can continue). For example, if the value of the 1G consecutive counter is "1" and the result is "ceiling reduction enabled," the latter value is "55 x 2 = 110," so the semi-limit process (number of games) will be executed (activated) when the value of the control game number counter reaches "1280."

The semi-limit process (payout number) is executed when the value of the control payout number counter is multiplied by 275 (i.e., the amount of gaming value that can be awarded for the pseudo bonus) and the result is 1851 or greater. For example, if the value of the 1G consecutive counter is 1 and "ceiling shortening" is enabled, the latter value is 275 x 2 = 550, so the semi-limit process (payout number) is executed (activated) when the value of the control payout number counter reaches 1301. Note that since the semi-limit process (number of games) and the semi-limit process (payout number) both impose the same restrictions, once one of the activation conditions is met and activated, there is no need for the other to be activated again, even if the other activation condition is met.

When the semi-limit processing (number of games) or the preparation limit processing (number of payouts) is executed (activated), the above-mentioned 1G consecutive lottery and ceiling shortening lottery will no longer be executed during the pseudo-bonus in the subsequent series of advantageous zones. In other words, the extension of the play period in the increase zone is suppressed. Note that the method of suppressing the extension of the play period in the increase zone is not limited to this. For example, in the above-mentioned 1G consecutive lottery, the probability of winning 1G consecutively may be made lower than usual, or in the above-mentioned ceiling shortening lottery, the probability of winning ceiling shortening may be made lower than usual. In other words, the above-mentioned 1G consecutive lottery and ceiling shortening lottery themselves may be executed, but it may be made more difficult to win these lotteries. Also, for example, in the presentation zone after the execution of the semi-limit processing (number of games), the lottery value that will result in a winning lottery in the pseudo-bonus transition lottery may be lowered to make it more difficult to transition to the pseudo-bonus. Alternatively, the lottery value that determines a mode transition advantageous to the player in the mode transition lottery may be lowered, making it more difficult for consecutive pseudo bonuses to occur.

In addition, once the semi-limit processing (number of games) or semi-limit processing (number of payouts) is executed (activated), special processing will be performed during the subsequent advantageous period when a "fixed role" (see (a) in Figure 7) is drawn during the performance period. Below, this special processing will be explained using the example of a case where the "fixed role" is "F_fixed cherry" (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "fixed cherry").

When neither the semi-limit processing (number of games) nor the semi-limit processing (number of payouts) is active, if a "Definite Cherry" is drawn during the presentation period (which may be during the increase period), the "Winning Lottery (Next Game)" is determined in the pseudo-bonus transition lottery (see (c) of Figure 7). Furthermore, in the first gaming machine, the "Cherry" symbol on the left reel 3L is a symbol that players have high expectations for, so in games where stop operation information is not announced, the general procedure is for the player to perform the stop operation on the first left stop and aim for the "Cherry" symbol (aiming for the "BAR" symbol as a guideline). Therefore, when playing using the general procedure, when a "Definite Cherry" is drawn, the "Cherry" symbol first stops on the bottom row of the left reel 3L on the first left stop. Furthermore, when neither the semi-limit processing (number of games) nor the semi-limit processing (number of payouts) is activated, if a "confirmed cherry" is drawn, a notification may be made to the effect that the first stop on the left ("batting order 1" and "batting order 2") should be made. Furthermore, a "winning lottery (next game)" is not limited to one in which the pseudo-bonus starts from the next game, but may also be one in which the pseudo-bonus starts from the next game or later.

At this point, a skilled player will further determine whether it is a "weak che" or a "confirmed cherry" by, for example, performing a stopping operation on the center reel 3C and right reel 3R, aiming for the "BAR" symbol. As a result, the "BAR" symbol will line up in the middle row of each reel, and the player will be able to recognize that they have won a "confirmed cherry" (see, for example, "REP42" in Figure 11). On the other hand, an unskilled player may not, or may be unable to, perform a stopping operation on the center reel 3C and right reel 3R, aiming for the "BAR" symbol, and may not be able to determine whether it is a "weak che" or a "confirmed cherry" from the stop display pattern (see, for example, "REP28" in Figure 11).

In the first gaming machine, when neither the semi-limit processing (number of games) nor the semi-limit processing (number of payouts) is activated, if a "Determined Cherry" is won and the "Determined Cherry Rep" symbol combination is displayed, a special winning sound is output. Also, if a "Determined Cherry" is won and the "Determined Cherry Rep" symbol combination is not displayed, but the "Cherry Rep" symbol combination is displayed, a special winning sound is output. The special winning sound may be output with a 100% probability, or with a predetermined probability (for example, a 50% probability).

In any case, if you win a "Confirmed Cherry" when neither the semi-limit processing (number of games) nor the semi-limit processing (number of payouts) is activated, a "Red 7 Align" effect will be displayed at the start of the next game, and you will be notified that a pseudo-bonus will begin, and the pseudo-bonus will begin.

On the other hand, if a "Confirmed Cherry" is drawn during the presentation period (or during the increase period) after either the semi-limit processing (number of games) or semi-limit processing (number of payouts) has been activated, the pseudo-bonus transition lottery will initially determine "Winning Lottery (Next Game)" (see (c) in Figure 7), but this determination result will be rewritten to "Winning Lottery (Current Game)" by executing special processing. Then, at the start of the current game, a "Red 7 Align" presentation will be displayed, announcing that a pseudo-bonus will begin, and the pseudo-bonus will then begin.

At this time, in the current game, the "Determined Cherry Lip" symbol combination (including the "Cherry Lip" symbol combination) is not displayed, and a notification (special notification) is made of information regarding the stop operation to display the "Middle Lip" symbol combination. For example, in the first gaming machine, a special notification is made to perform the first stop on the right ("Batting Order 5" and "Batting Order 6") (see Figure 15). As a result, when neither the semi-limit processing (number of games) nor the semi-limit processing (number of payouts) is activated, the game flow is changed to "Determined Cherry Lip" display → pseudo-bonus start from the next game. However, after either the semi-limit processing (number of games) or the semi-limit processing (number of payouts) is activated, the game flow is changed to "Middle Lip" display → pseudo-bonus start from the current game → stop operation performed in accordance with the special notification. The special notification may be controlled by the main (main control board 71) side, or it may be controlled only by the sub (sub control board 72) side, from the viewpoint that the player will not suffer any disadvantages even if the result is a transition to a pseudo bonus.

In addition, if a "Confirmed Cherry" is won after either the semi-limit processing (number of games) or semi-limit processing (number of payouts) has been activated, and the "Confirmed Cherry Rep" symbol combination is displayed despite a special notification, the special winning sound will not be output.

Furthermore, in the first gaming machine, if "F_Replay A" or "F_Replay B" is determined as the internal winning combination, the stop operation procedure is generally not announced. Therefore, if the stop operation procedure is announced and the "middle replay" is displayed only when the above-mentioned special notification is made, when such a situation occurs, the player will clearly recognize that one of the semi-limit processes has been activated, which may result in a decrease in interest in the game. Therefore, during the advantageous zone, regardless of whether one of the semi-limit processes is activated (or even after one of the semi-limit processes has been activated), if "F_Replay A" or "F_Replay B" is determined as the internal winning combination, a notification similar to the special notification may be made with a predetermined probability. This prevents the player from feeling unnatural when a special notification is made. Furthermore, when "F_Replay A" or "F_Replay B" is determined as the internal winning combination, a notification similar to the special notification may also be made when the pseudo bonus transition lottery is won. In this case, when "F_Replay A" or "F_Replay B" is determined as the internal winning combination, the pseudo bonus transition lottery may determine a "win (current game)" with a predetermined probability.

So far, we have used the example of monitoring the play period in the advantageous zone using the "number of games" and "number of payouts" to activate the normal limit process, special limit process, and semi-limit process, but the conditions for executing each limit process are not limited to those described above and can be changed as appropriate. For example, when each limit process is executed, the value of the advantageous zone game count counter, the value of the advantageous zone payout counter, the value of the control game count counter, the value of the control payout counter, the value of the 1G consecutive counter, and whether or not the ceiling is shortened (i.e., variables for activating the semi-limit process) can be changed as appropriate depending on the game specifications, market trends, etc.

Furthermore, the method for monitoring the play period in the advantageous zone is not limited to the above. For example, if the "number of navigations" is used to monitor the play period in the advantageous zone, normal limit processing (number of navigations), special limit processing (number of navigations), or semi-limit processing (number of navigations) can be executed in the same manner as above. In other words, any element (parameter) whose value can be counted can be used to monitor the play period in the advantageous zone, and by specifying the value at which normal limit processing is executed, the value at which special limit processing is executed, and the value at which semi-limit processing is executed for the element used, each limit processing can be executed in the same manner as above.

As described above, in the first gaming machine, advantageous states (e.g., pseudo bonuses) and specific states (e.g., presentation zones) are controlled as a series of advantageous zones, and when the play period in this series of advantageous zones reaches a predetermined period (e.g., the value of the advantageous zone game count counter is 1500 or greater), or when the amount of play value awarded in this series of advantageous zones reaches a predetermined amount (e.g., the value of the advantageous zone payout counter is 2401 or greater), this series of advantageous zones is forcibly terminated. However, when the play period in this series of advantageous zones reaches a specific period shorter than the predetermined period (e.g., the value of the control game count counter is 1445 or greater), or when the amount of play value awarded in this series of advantageous zones reaches a specific amount less than the predetermined amount (e.g., the value of the control payout counter is 2126 or greater), if the advantageous state exists, the series of advantageous zones is terminated when transitioning to the specific state.

In other words, with the first gaming machine, a series of advantageous periods are not forcibly ended in the middle of an advantageous state, but rather can be ended within a certain period in a natural flow that accompanies the end of an advantageous state. This prevents excessive gambling while also preventing players from feeling distrust or a sense of loss, making it possible to take into consideration the emotions of players.

In addition, in the first gaming machine, advantageous states (e.g., pseudo bonuses) and specific states (e.g., presentation zones) are controlled as a series of advantageous zones, and when the play period in this series of advantageous zones reaches a predetermined period (e.g., the value of the advantageous zone game count counter is 1500 or greater), or when the amount of game value awarded in this series of advantageous zones reaches a predetermined amount (e.g., the value of the advantageous zone payout counter is 2401 or greater), this series of advantageous zones is forcibly terminated. However, when the play period in this series of advantageous zones reaches a specific period shorter than the predetermined period (e.g., the value of the control game count counter is 1445 or greater), or when the amount of game value awarded in this series of advantageous zones reaches a specific amount less than the predetermined amount (e.g., the value of the control payout counter is 2126 or greater), if the advantageous state is not reached, a transition to the advantageous state is made, and when the transition to the advantageous state ends and a transition to the specific state is made, the series of advantageous zones is terminated.

In other words, with the first gaming machine, a series of advantageous periods is not forcibly ended in the middle of an advantageous state, but rather can be ended within a certain period of time in a natural flow that accompanies the end of an advantageous state. Furthermore, when ending a series of advantageous periods in this way, if the state is not advantageous, the system transitions the player to an advantageous state before ending the period. This prevents excessive gambling while also preventing the player from feeling distrust or a sense of loss, making it possible to take the player's emotions into consideration.

Furthermore, in the first gaming machine, the specific period or specific amount is set taking into consideration the duration for which an advantageous state can continue (e.g., "55 games") or the amount of gaming value that can be awarded (e.g., "275 coins"), thereby preventing excessive restrictions on the amount of gaming value awarded to a player while still taking into consideration the player's feelings.

In addition, in the first gaming machine, the advantageous state may be extended by granted rights (e.g., "1G consecutive stock" and "ceiling shortening"), but when the play period in a series of advantageous zones is shorter than the specific period and becomes a special period set according to the number of granted rights (e.g., when the value of the control game number counter reaches a value at which semi-limit processing (number of games) is executed), or when the amount of game value granted in a series of advantageous zones is less than the specific amount and becomes a special amount set according to the number of granted rights (e.g., when the value of the control payout number counter reaches a value at which semi-limit processing (number of payouts) is executed), the granting of rights is suppressed in the series of subsequent advantageous zones. This prevents, for example, a player from being granted more rights than they can consume, which would force the series of advantageous zones to end, causing the player to feel distrust or a sense of loss. This makes it possible to prevent excessive gambling while also taking into consideration the player's emotions.

Furthermore, in the first gaming machine, when calculating the above-mentioned "specific amount" and "special amount," even if a difference occurs between the amount of game value that should have been awarded and the amount of game value that has actually been awarded due to, for example, a player's operational error or ignoring instructions, this difference is not taken into consideration and calculation is performed based on the amount of game value that should have been awarded. This prevents a series of advantageous periods from being extended more than necessary due to such player behavior, and prevents unfairness from arising between players who have engaged in such behavior and those who have not, making it possible to prevent excessive gambling while also taking into consideration the feelings of players.

In addition, in the first gaming machine, when a fixed combination (e.g., a "fixed cherry") that confirms a transition to an advantageous state is won while the granting of rights is suppressed (e.g., after the semi-limit processing has been activated), a special notification is issued to prevent the display of a special symbol combination (e.g., a "fixed cherry rep") that clearly indicates the winning of this fixed combination. This prevents the player from feeling, for example, that the winning of the fixed combination was a wasted win. In other words, by not allowing the player to clearly recognize the trigger that initiated the advantageous state while the granting of rights is suppressed, it is possible to prevent excessive gambling while also taking into consideration the player's emotions. Note that any presentation execution means may be used to issue the special notification.

Furthermore, in the first gaming machine, when a special notification is issued, the advantageous state that would have started in the next game is started in the current game. This allows the player to perform the stopping operation in accordance with the special notification in a natural flow, preventing the player from feeling uncomfortable even when such a special notification is issued.

In addition, in the first gaming machine, when the granting of rights is not suppressed and a fixed combination is won and a special symbol combination is displayed, a special notification (for example, output of a special winning sound) can be made. However, when the granting of rights is suppressed and a fixed combination is won and a special symbol combination is displayed, a special notification cannot be made. This prevents the player from feeling that winning the fixed combination was a wasted win, for example. In other words, by not allowing the player to clearly recognize the trigger that initiated the advantageous state when the granting of rights is suppressed, it is possible to prevent excessive gambling while also taking into consideration the player's emotions. Note that any effect execution means may be used to make the special notification.

In addition, the first gaming machine determines whether or not to issue a special notification depending on whether or not a fixed combination has been drawn, whether or not a special symbol combination has been displayed, and whether or not a special notification has been issued. This allows for more appropriate management of the circumstances under which a special notification is issued.

In addition, in the first gaming machine, the advantageous zone game number counter and advantageous zone payout number counter count regardless of the amount of gaming value bet, making it possible to execute normal limit processing (number of games) and normal limit processing (number of payouts) not only when three coins are bet but also when two coins are bet.

Furthermore, in the first gaming machine, the control game number counter and control payout number counter count when three coins are bet, but do not count when two coins are bet. Therefore, when three coins are bet, it is possible to execute special limit processing (number of games) and special limit processing (number of payouts), but when two coins are bet, it is not possible to execute special limit processing (number of games) and special limit processing (number of payouts). Therefore, when two coins are bet, the execution of normal limit processing (number of games) or normal limit processing (number of payouts) may force the end of a series of advantageous periods, even during a pseudo bonus.

In the first gaming machine, for example, the probability of winning a minor prize and the number of medals paid out differ between the three-coin bet state and the two-coin bet state (see Figures 10 to 15), making it more disadvantageous to the player when playing in the two-coin bet state than when playing in the three-coin bet state. However, this is not the only way to make playing in the two-coin bet state more disadvantageous to the player. For example, if playing in the two-coin bet state during a pseudo bonus, the system may be configured to put the player at a disadvantage by not announcing the stop operation procedure.

In this way, in the first gaming machine, when a first amount of gaming value (e.g., "3 coins") is bet and play is performed, a series of advantageous periods is not forcibly ended in the middle of an advantageous state, and it is possible for a series of advantageous periods to end within a certain period in a natural flow following the end of an advantageous state. This prevents excessive gambling while also preventing the player from feeling distrust or a sense of loss, making it possible to take the player's emotions into consideration. On the other hand, when a second amount of gaming value (e.g., "2 coins") is bet and play is performed, a series of advantageous periods may be forcibly ended in the middle of an advantageous state, which makes the player realize that they did not play in the intended way and encourages the player to play in the intended way.

In addition, in a series of advantageous zones, betting a second amount of game value and playing is more disadvantageous to the player than betting a first amount of game value and playing. Therefore, by making such a warning possible, it is possible to encourage the player to play in a more advantageous state, and to prevent a decrease in the player's interest in the game due to playing in a way that the player did not intend.

[5-5. Storage Area Configuration of First Gaming Machine]
Next, the storage area configuration of the first gaming machine will be described with reference to Figures 17 to 22. Figure 17 is a diagram showing an example of a winning flag storage area, a winning activation flag storage area, and a symbol code storage area of the first gaming machine. Also, Figure 18 is a diagram showing an example of a carryover role storage area of the first gaming machine. Also, Figure 19 is a diagram showing an example of a game status flag storage area of the first gaming machine. Also, Figure 20 is a diagram showing an example of a mode flag storage area of the first gaming machine. Also, Figure 21 is a diagram showing an example of an activation stop button storage area of the first gaming machine. Also, Figure 22 is a diagram showing an example of a press order storage area of the first gaming machine.

(Winning flag storage area, winning activation flag storage area, and symbol code storage area)
First, the configuration of the winning flag storage area (internal winning combination storage area), the winning activation flag storage area (display combination storage area), and the symbol code storage area will be described with reference to Fig. 17. In the first gaming machine, the winning flag storage area, the winning activation flag storage area, and the symbol code storage area have the same data configuration.

Each of the above-mentioned storage areas consists of storage areas 1 to 26, each represented by one byte of data. Note that the data stored in each storage area is only the one byte of data in the "Data" column in Figure 17, but for ease of explanation, Figure 17 also lists the "combination" (in Figure 17, the symbols on reel 3L, reel 3C, and reel 3R are listed in that order) indicating the symbol combination associated with the bit of each storage area, as well as its contents (see Figures 11 to 14).

The data stored in the winning flag storage area is used by the main CPU 101 to identify the type of symbol combination corresponding to the internal winning combination (i.e., the type of symbol combination permitted to be displayed in the current game). For example, if 2BB is won in the current game (if it is carried over), a "1" is stored in bit 0 of storage area 1.

The data stored in the winning activation flag storage area is used by the main CPU 101 to identify the type of symbol combination corresponding to the displayed role (i.e., the type of symbol combination displayed on the pay line in the current game). For example, if a symbol combination corresponding to 2BB is displayed on the pay line in the current game, a "1" is stored in bit 0 of storage area 1.

The data stored in the symbol code storage area is used by the main CPU 101 to identify the types of symbol combinations that can still be displayed on an active line in the current game while at least one of the reels is spinning. For example, if a symbol combination related to 2BB can still be displayed on an active line while at least one of the reels is spinning in the current game, a "1" is stored in bit 0 of storage area 1.

(Carryover role storage area)
Next, the configuration of the carryover combination storage area will be described with reference to Fig. 18. The carryover combination storage area is configured as a storage area represented by 1-byte data.

When the internal lottery process determines that the bonus role of "F_2BB" (2BB) or "F_3BB" (3BB) is the internal winning role, these bonus roles are stored in the carryover role storage area as carryover roles (a "1" is stored in the corresponding bit). The carryover role stored in the carryover role storage area is retained and not cleared until the corresponding symbol combination is displayed on an active line. Also, while a carryover role is stored in the carryover role storage area, in addition to the internal winning role (minor role/replay role) determined by the internal lottery process, the carryover role (bonus role) is stored in the winning flag storage area.

(Game status flag storage area)
Next, the configuration of the game status flag storage area will be described with reference to Figure 19. The game status flag storage area is a storage area represented by 1 byte of data. For example, if the current game status is 2BB, a "1" is stored in bit 0 of the storage area.

Note that the first gaming machine does not have an RT state, and therefore the gaming state flag storage area shown in FIG. 19 does not have an area indicating the type of RT state. However, if an RT state is provided, for example, a "1" is stored in the bit of the storage area corresponding to the current RT state. Note that in the first gaming machine, data indicating the type of gaming state (mode) in the advantageous zone is stored separately in a mode flag storage area, which will be described later, but it can also be stored and managed in this gaming state flag storage area. The same applies to the gaming zones of non-advantageous zones and advantageous zones. A beneficial zone flag storage area (not shown) can be provided for management, or data can be stored and managed in this gaming state flag storage area. The same applies to gaming states such as the AT state and ART state. An AT state (ART state) flag storage area (not shown) can be provided for management, or data can be stored and managed in this gaming state flag storage area.

(Mode flag storage area)
Next, the configuration of the mode flag storage area will be described with reference to Figure 20. The mode flag storage area is composed of storage area 1 and storage area 2, each represented by 1 byte of data. For example, if the current mode is start mode, "1" is stored in bit 0 of storage area 1. Also, if the current mode is heaven A mode, "1" is stored in bit 0 of storage area 2. Note that in the first gaming machine, the pseudo bonus state is also managed as one of the modes.

(Operation stop button storage area)
Next, the configuration of the activated stop button storage area will be described with reference to Figure 21. The activated stop button storage area is a storage area represented by 1 byte of data. Bits 0 to 2 of the activated stop button storage area store data indicating the type of stop button that has already been operated (the type of reel that has stopped), and bits 4 to 6 store data indicating the type of stop button that has not yet been operated (the type of reel that is currently spinning).

For example, if the stop button 8L is the stop button that was pressed this time, i.e., the activated stop button, then a "1" is stored in bit 0 of the activated stop button storage area. Also, for example, if the stop button 8L is a stop button that has not yet been pressed, i.e., a valid stop button, then a "1" is stored in bit 4. The main CPU 101 distinguishes between the stop button that was pressed this time and a stop button that has not yet been pressed based on the data stored in the activated stop button storage area.

(Press order storage area)
Next, the configuration of the pressing order storage area will be described with reference to Fig. 22. The pressing order storage area is configured as a storage area represented by 1-byte data. The pressing order indicates the order in which the stop buttons were pressed, i.e., the pressing order (batting order).

For example, when all reels are spinning, a "1" is stored in bits 0 to 5 of the press order storage area. Next, when stop button 8L is pressed (because it is the first "left" stop), bits 0 and 1 remain "1", but bits 2 to 5 are changed to "0". Next, when stop button 8C is pressed (because it is the first "left" stop and the second "center" stop), bit 0 remains "1", but bit 1 is changed to "0". The main CPU 101 identifies the press order for the current game based on the data stored in the press order storage area.

[6. Processing by the main control circuit]
23 to 32, the contents of the various processes executed by the main CPU 101 of the main control circuit 100 using each program will be described. Note that in the description of the various processes shown below, a specific example of the process contents may be explained using the specifications of the first gaming machine, but the process contents of the various processes shown below are not limited to this.

[6-1. Main Processing]
First, the main processing (main operation processing) executed by the main CPU 101 of the main control circuit 100 will be described with reference to Fig. 23. Fig. 23 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the main processing. Fig. 23 also shows the power-on processing that is executed prior to the start of the main processing.

First, when power is supplied to the pachislot machine 1 (when the power is turned on), the main CPU 101 performs power-on processing (S1). This processing involves various processes required when the power is turned on. Details of the power-on processing will be described later.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs initialization processing at the end of one game (S2). In this processing, data in a designated storage area in the main RAM 103 is cleared. Note that the designated storage area here is a storage area from which data must be erased for each unit game, such as a winning flag storage area or a prize activation flag storage area.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs medal acceptance and start check processing (S3). During this processing, it checks the input status of, for example, the medal sensor 31S, bet switch 6S, and start switch 7S, and performs various processing required at the start of play. Details of the medal acceptance and start check processing will be described later.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a random number value acquisition process (S4). In this process, it extracts random numbers for internal lotteries (e.g., a range of 0 to 65535) and random numbers for effects (random numbers for other lotteries) used in various gameplay-related lotteries (e.g., a range of 0 to 65535 or a range of 0 to 255), and stores the extracted random numbers in a random number value storage area (not shown) provided in the main RAM 103. Note that the manner in which the various random numbers are acquired is not limited to the above. It is possible to acquire the required number of random numbers from predetermined numerical ranges (e.g., a range of 0 to 65535, a range of 0 to 32767, a range of 0 to 255, or a range of 0 to 127, etc.).

Next, the main CPU 101 performs internal lottery processing (S5). This processing involves various processes required to determine the internal winning combination based on the internal lottery table and internal lottery random number value corresponding to the current game state, etc. Details of the internal lottery processing will be described later.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs game start state control processing (S6). In this processing, when game play starts, if a transition condition for each game state is met (for example, based on a determined internal lottery combination, etc.), the main CPU 101 performs various processes necessary to transition the game state in accordance with the transition condition that has been met, or to manage the play period of the current game state. Details of the game start state control processing will be described later.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a start command generation and storage process (S7). In this process, start command data to be sent to the sub-control circuit 200 is generated and the generated data is stored in a communication data storage area (not shown) provided in the main RAM 103. The data stored in the communication data storage area is transmitted from the main control circuit 100 to the sub-control circuit 200 in the communication data transmission process (see S204 in Figure 32) described below. The methods for generating, storing, and transmitting data for other commands are also basically the same.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs main-side effect control processing at the start of game (S8). In this processing, if various effects are to be performed under the control of the main control circuit 100 (main side) when game play begins, various processes necessary to perform those effects are performed. For example, if a lock effect is to be performed at the start of game play, the execution of that lock effect is controlled. Furthermore, if this includes a pseudo game, the progress of that pseudo game (or notifications related to the pseudo game) is controlled. Furthermore, for example, if the AT state is active and information on a stop operation is to be notified by the instruction monitor, the notification mode is controlled. Furthermore, although details are omitted, if a lock effect is to be performed, a lock command generation and storage process is performed during this processing.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs reel stop initialization processing (S9). In this processing, various information necessary for stop control, such as the type of stop table and the type of draw priority table to be used in the current game, is set based on the internal winning combination, game status, etc.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs reel spin start processing (S10). This processing requests that all reels start spinning. Once all reels have been requested to start spinning, the reel control processing (see S203 in Figure 32), described below, controls the drive of each stepping motor 51L, 51C, and 51R, and each reel 3L, 3C, and 3R starts spinning. Once each reel has started spinning, it is accelerated until its rotation speed reaches a constant speed, and then this constant speed is maintained. Also, although details are omitted, this processing involves the generation and storage of a reel spin start command.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a draw priority order storage process (S11). In this process, for each symbol (symbol position) on the spinning reel (all reels in this case), data indicating the draw priority order is obtained by referencing the set internal winning combination and the set draw priority order table, and stored in a draw priority order data storage area (not shown). Although not shown, the symbol code storage process, described below, is performed prior to this process.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs reel stop control processing (S12). In this processing, various processes are performed to stop the rotation of the corresponding reel based on the determined internal winning combination (or information related to various stop control settings set accordingly) and the stop operation mode of each stop button 8L, 8C, 8R. Details of the reel stop control processing will be described later.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a win activation determination process (S13). In this process, it determines whether the combination of symbols displayed on the active line is one of the combinations defined in the symbol combination table. For example, it determines whether there is a bit in which a "1" is stored in the win activation flag storage area. Also, although details are omitted, this process involves the win activation command generation and storage process.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs medal payout/replay activation processing (S14). In this processing, if the symbol combination determined in the above-mentioned winning activation determination processing is a symbol combination related to a minor role, the corresponding number of medals is paid out. If the symbol combination is a symbol combination related to a replay role, various processing steps are performed to activate replay in the next game. Note that, for example, if the symbol combination determined in the above-mentioned winning activation determination processing is a symbol combination related to a replay role, a process is performed to set a value equal to the number of bets in the current game in the automatic medal counter described below. Also, in this processing, a medal payout signal corresponding to the number of medals to be paid out is output from the external centralized terminal board 55.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs end-of-game state control processing (S15). In this processing, when the game ends, if a transition condition is met for each game state (for example, based on the combination of displayed symbols), various processes are performed to transition the game state in accordance with the transition condition that has been met, or to manage the play period of the current game state. Details of the end-of-game state control processing will be described later.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs main-side effect control processing at the end of game play (S16). In this processing, if various effects are to be performed under the control of the main control circuit 100 side (main side) when game play ends, various processes necessary to perform those effects are performed. For example, if a lock effect is to be performed at the end of game play, the execution of that lock effect is controlled. Furthermore, if this includes a pseudo game, the progress of that pseudo game (or notifications related to the pseudo game) is controlled. Furthermore, although details are omitted, if a lock effect is to be performed, a lock command generation and storage process is performed during this processing.

In this way, in the pachislot machine 1, one unit game is controlled by performing the above-mentioned processes S2 to S16, and the progress of the game is controlled by repeating these processes. Note that the machine can be configured to perform processes other than these as needed, or to not perform some of these processes. In other words, the various processes described above are merely examples.

(Power-on processing)
Next, the power-on process performed in S1 of the main process will be described with reference to Fig. 24. Fig. 24 is a flowchart showing an example of the power-on process.

First, the main CPU 101 performs a power-on initialization process (not shown), then performs a write test on the main RAM 103, and determines whether the write to the main RAM 103 was successful (S21). In other words, the main CPU 101 determines whether an abnormality has occurred in the main RAM 103.

If the main CPU 101 determines that the writing to the main RAM 103 was successful (YES in S21), it determines whether the setting key switch 52 is in the ON state (S22). In other words, the main CPU 101 determines whether the setting can be changed.

When the main CPU 101 determines that the setting key switch 52 is in the on state (YES in S22), it performs initialization processing when the setting is changed (S23). In this processing, data in a designated storage area in the main RAM 103 is cleared. Note that the designated storage area here is a storage area from which data needs to be erased when the setting is changed, such as a carryover role storage area, a game status flag storage area, or a mode flag storage area.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs an initialization command generation and storage process (S24). In this process, initialization command data indicating that the setting change process has started is generated and sent to the sub-control circuit 200, and the generated data is stored in the communication data storage area.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a setting change process (S25). In this process, by accepting the setting value determination operation or setting value confirmation operation described above, the main RAM 103 is initialized, and then the new setting value is set (stored) in the setting value storage area (not shown) of the main RAM 103. Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether the setting key switch 52 has been turned off (S26). In other words, the main CPU 101 determines whether the state in which the setting can be changed has ended after the new setting value was set.

If the main CPU 101 determines that the setting key switch 52 is not in the OFF state (NO in S26), it waits until the setting key switch 52 is turned OFF. On the other hand, if it determines that the setting key switch 52 is turned OFF (YES in S26), it performs an initialization command generation and storage process (S27). In this process, it generates initialization command data to be sent to the sub-control circuit 200, indicating that the setting change process has ended, and stores the generated data in the communication data storage area. After this process, the main CPU 101 ends the power-on process.

If the main CPU 101 determines in S22 that the setting key switch 52 is not in the on state (NO in S22), it determines whether the backup data is normal (S28). In other words, the main CPU 101 determines whether the various information backed up when the power supply to the pachislot machine 1 was cut off (power outage) is normal.

If the main CPU 101 determines that the backup data is normal (YES in S28), it performs a game return process (S29). This process returns the pachislot machine 1 to the state it was in before the power was cut off. After this process, the main CPU 101 ends the power-on process.

If the main CPU 101 determines in S21 that writing to the main RAM 103 was not performed normally (NO in S21), or if it determines in S28 that the backup data is not normal (NO in S28), it performs power-on error processing (S30). Note that errors that occur as a result of this power-on error processing are not resolved by the reset operation described above, but are resolved when a new setting value is set. Therefore, after power-on error processing, the main CPU 101 turns off the power to the pachislot machine 1, and then does not proceed to normal processing (S2 onwards in Figure 23) until a new setting value is set (until the processing of S22 to S26 described above is performed).

(Medal reception and start check processing)
Next, the medal acceptance and start check process performed in S3 of the main process will be described with reference to Fig. 25. Fig. 25 is a flowchart showing an example of the medal acceptance and start check process procedure.

First, the main CPU 101 determines whether the value of the automatic insertion medal counter is "0" (S41). In other words, the main CPU 101 determines whether a replay role was won in the previous unit game (whether a replay was activated).

When the main CPU 101 determines that the value of the automatic insertion medal counter is not "0" (NO in S41), it performs automatic insertion processing (S42). In this processing, the same number of medals as were inserted in the previous unit game are automatically inserted. Furthermore, although details are omitted, if automatic insertion is performed, a medal insertion command generation and storage process is performed in this processing. Also, in this processing, a medal insertion signal is output from the external centralized terminal board 55.

If the main CPU 101 determines in S41 that the value of the automatic insertion medal counter is "0" (YES in S41), or after processing S42, it performs auxiliary medal storage switch check processing (S43). In this processing, it determines whether the auxiliary medal storage switch 33S is in the ON state (i.e., whether a certain number of medals or more are stored in the auxiliary medal storage 33), and if it determines that the auxiliary medal storage switch 33S is in the ON state, it generates an auxiliary medal storage error. In this case, processing waits until the error is resolved. If it determines that the auxiliary medal storage switch 33S is not in the ON state, this processing ends.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a medal insertion status check process (S44). In this process, the current number of bets and credits is checked, and it is also determined whether medal acceptance is prohibited or a selector error has occurred. If medal acceptance is possible, the state becomes one in which medal acceptance is possible (a state in which betting operations can be accepted) (medal acceptance is permitted). Note that if a selector error has occurred, processing will wait until the error is resolved.

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the machine is ready to accept medals (S45). If the main CPU 101 determines that the machine is ready to accept medals (YES in S45), it performs a medal insertion check process (S46). In this process, the number of bets and the number of credits are updated based on the detection results of the medal sensor 31S and the bet switch 6S. Furthermore, although details are omitted, if a bet operation is performed, a medal insertion command generation and storage process is performed in this process. Furthermore, in this process, a medal insertion signal is output from the external centralized terminal board 55.

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not it is possible to insert medals or to deposit credits (S47). That is, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the number of bets is "3" and the number of credits is "50". If the main CPU 101 determines that it is not possible to insert medals or deposit credits (that is, the number of bets is "3" and the number of credits is "50") (NO in S49), it prohibits the acceptance of medals (S48). That is, the main CPU 101 sets the state to one in which it is not possible to accept medals (a state in which betting operations are not acceptable).

If the main CPU 101 determines in S45 that the machine is not in a state where medals can be accepted (NO in S45), if it determines in S47 that medals can be inserted or credits can be deposited (YES in S47), or after processing S48, it determines whether the number of inserted medals is the number required to start playing (S49). In the case of the first gaming machine, this process determines, for example, whether the current number of bets is "2" or "3."

If the main CPU 101 determines that the number of inserted coins is the number required to start playing (YES in S49), it determines whether the start switch 7S is in the ON state (S50). In other words, the main CPU 101 determines whether the player has performed a start operation.

When the main CPU 101 determines that the start switch 7S is in the ON state (YES in S50), it prohibits the acceptance of medals (S51). After this process, the main CPU 101 ends the medal acceptance/start check process.
If the main CPU 101 determines in S49 that the number of inserted coins is not the number required to start playing (NO in S49), or if it determines in S50 that the start switch 7S is not in the ON state (NO in S50), it returns the processing to S44.

(Internal lottery processing)
Next, the internal lottery process performed in S5 of the main process will be described with reference to Fig. 26. Fig. 26 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the internal lottery process.

First, the main CPU 101 performs a process to check the setting value and the number of inserted medals (S61). In this process, the setting value and the number of bets for the current unit game are checked. Next, the main CPU 101 sets an internal lottery table according to the setting value, the number of bets, the game status, etc. (S62). Next, the main CPU 101 acquires a random number value for the internal lottery from the random number value storage area (S63). That is, the main CPU 101 acquires the data of the random number value for the internal lottery acquired in S4 of the main process described above. Note that if this process determines that the setting value is other than "1" to "6" or the number of bets is other than "1" to "3," the main CPU 101 determines that a serious error has occurred and executes the power-on error process described above (see S30 in FIG. 24).

Next, the main CPU 101 performs an internal winning combination determination process (S64). In this process, the acquired internal lottery random number value is sequentially updated (e.g., added and updated) using the lottery values for each internal winning combination defined in the set internal lottery table, and it is determined whether the updated result is a predetermined result (e.g., whether an overflow has occurred). If a predetermined result is achieved, that internal winning combination is determined as the internal winning combination for this unit game. Note that if the predetermined result is not achieved even after determining all internal winning combinations, the result of this unit game will be a "loss" (a "loss" is determined as the internal winning combination).

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether an internal winning combination has been determined (S65). If the main CPU 101 determines that an internal winning combination has not been determined (NO in S65), the process returns to S64. That is, the main CPU 101 sequentially updates the internal winning combinations to be determined (sequentially updates the random number values for the internal lottery), and repeats the process of S64 until determinations have been made for all internal winning combinations (or until an internal winning combination is determined halfway through).

When the main CPU 101 determines that an internal winning role has been determined (YES in S65), it determines whether the determined internal winning role is a role that is not eligible for carryover (i.e., whether it is a minor role or a replay role, rather than a bonus role that is a carryover role) (S66). When the main CPU 101 determines that the determined internal winning role is a role that is not eligible for carryover (YES in S66), it updates the winning flag storage area (S67). In this process, the main CPU 101 updates the data in the winning flag storage area based on the internal winning role determined in the process of S64. In other words, the main CPU 101 stores a "1" in the bit in the data in the winning flag storage area that corresponds to the combination of symbols that are permitted to be displayed in accordance with the determined internal winning role.

If the main CPU 101 determines in S66 that the determined internal winning combination is not a combination that is not eligible for carryover (NO in S66), or after processing S67, it determines whether the determined internal winning combination is eligible for carryover (i.e., whether it is a bonus combination that is a carryover combination) (S68).

When the main CPU 101 determines that the determined internal winning combination is a carryover target combination (YES in S68), it determines whether the data in the carryover combination storage area is "0" (S69). That is, the main CPU 101 determines whether any bonus combinations have yet been carried over. When the main CPU 101 determines that the data in the carryover combination storage area is "0" (YES in S69), it updates the carryover combination storage area (S70). In this process, the main CPU 101 updates the data in the carryover combination storage area based on the internal winning combination determined in the process of S64. That is, the main CPU 101 stores "1" in the bit in the data in the carryover combination storage area that corresponds to the combination of symbols that are permitted to be displayed in accordance with the determined internal winning combination.

If the main CPU 101 determines in S68 that the determined internal winning combination is not a carryover eligible combination (NO in S68), if it determines in S69 that the data in the carryover combination storage area is not "0" (NO in S69), or after processing S70, it again determines whether the data in the carryover combination storage area is "0" (S71).

When the main CPU 101 determines that the data in the carryover role storage area is not "0" (NO in S71), it updates the winning flag storage area (S72). In this process, the data stored in the carryover role storage area is reflected in the data in the winning flag storage area. In other words, when a bonus role is carried over (or a win has been won in the current unit game), the main CPU 101 stores "1" in the bit in the winning flag storage area for the data corresponding to the combination of symbols that is permitted to be displayed in accordance with the bonus role.

If the main CPU 101 determines in S71 that the data in the carryover role storage area is "0" (YES in S71), or after processing S72, it performs a sub-flag setting process (S73). In the case of the first gaming machine, this process may set, for example, a non-advantageous zone sub-flag or an advantageous zone winning sub-flag based on the internal winning role. This process may also set information corresponding to the stop operation information notified by the instruction monitor when in the AT state. After this process, the main CPU 101 terminates the internal lottery process.

(Game start state control process)
Next, the game start state control process performed in S6 of the main process will be described with reference to Fig. 27. Fig. 27 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the game start state control process.

First, the main CPU 101 performs a game state transition condition satisfaction check process (S81). In this process, when game play begins, a check is made to see if a transition condition for transitioning from one game state to another has been satisfied. For example, if a transition to a flag interval as a specified RT state is made based on winning a specified bonus role, this process checks whether the specified bonus role has been won. Note that in the case of the first gaming machine, the flag interval is not configured as an RT state (i.e., as a game state stored in the game state flag storage area), so this check is unnecessary. Furthermore, for example, if there is a specific RT state that starts or ends when a specific number of games are played after a specific transition condition is satisfied, this specific number of games can also be managed in this process.

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether a transition condition for transitioning to one of the game states has been met (S82). If the main CPU 101 determines that a transition condition for transitioning to one of the game states has been met (YES in S82), it updates the game state flag storage area (S83). That is, the main CPU 101 sets the game state according to the met transition condition. Next, the main CPU 101 performs setting processing according to the set game state (S84). In this processing, if it is necessary to set the game period for the game state or to set lottery values (lottery tables) for various lottery processes other than the internal lottery process in response to the transition of the game state, such setting processing is performed as appropriate.

If the main CPU 101 determines in S82 that the transition condition for transitioning to one of the gaming states has not been met (NO in S82), and after processing S84, it determines whether the current gaming zone is a non-advantageous zone (S85). If the main CPU 101 determines that the current gaming zone is a non-advantageous zone (YES in S85), it performs a process to check whether the advantageous zone start condition has been met (S86). In this process, when starting play, a check is made to see whether the transition condition for transitioning from a non-advantageous zone to an advantageous zone (advantageous zone start condition) has been met. Note that in the case of the first gaming machine, this process involves, for example, conducting the aforementioned advantageous zone transition lottery and checking whether the result of this lottery will start an advantageous zone.

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether the conditions for starting the advantageous zone have been met (S87). If the main CPU 101 determines that the conditions for starting the advantageous zone have not been met (NO in S87), it terminates the game start state control process. Furthermore, if the main CPU 101 determines that the conditions for starting the advantageous zone have been met (YES in S87), it performs setting processing for the start of the advantageous zone (S88). That is, the main CPU 101 starts (sets) the advantageous zone. In this processing, in response to the start of the advantageous zone, it appropriately performs setting processing such as starting counting of various counters (see FIG. 16) related to various limit processing (i.e., starting monitoring of the game period for the series of advantageous zones).

Next, the main CPU 101 updates the mode flag storage area (S89). That is, the main CPU 101 sets the mode (game state) during the advantageous zone that has started. Note that in the case of the first gaming machine, this process sets the destination mode determined in accordance with the results of the advantageous zone transition lottery described above, for example.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a setting process according to the set mode (S90). In this process, if it is necessary to set a play period (including the ceiling game count, etc.) for the set mode or to set lottery values (lottery tables) for various lottery processes other than the internal lottery process, such setting processes are appropriately performed. In the case of the first gaming machine, for example, in this process, according to the set destination mode, when a transition to the pseudo bonus mode is made, the play period is set to "55 games," when a transition to the end mode is made, the play period is set to "32 games," and when a transition to any other mode is made, the corresponding ceiling game count is set. Also, lottery values (lottery tables) for various lotteries (see Figures 7 and 8, etc.) are set. After this process, the main CPU 101 terminates the game start state control process.
When the main CPU 101 determines in S85 that the current game zone is not a non-profitable zone (i.e., a profitable zone) (NO in S85), it performs a game start process during the profitable zone (S91). The details of the game start process during the profitable zone will be described later.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a process to check whether the advantageous zone end condition has been met (S92). In this process, when game play begins, a check is made to see whether the transition condition for transitioning from the advantageous zone to the non-advantageous zone (the advantageous zone end condition) has been met. In the case of the first gaming machine, this process checks, for example, whether the activation conditions for various limit processes have been met based on the number of games played in the advantageous zone (see FIG. 16), or whether 32 games have elapsed if the current mode is the end mode.

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether the conditions for ending the advantageous zone have been met (S93). If the main CPU 101 determines that the conditions for ending the advantageous zone have been met (YES in S93), it performs initialization processing at the end of the advantageous zone (S94). That is, the main CPU 101 ends the advantageous zone and sets a non-advantageous zone. In this processing, in response to the end of the advantageous zone, initialization processing is performed to clear all information (i.e., information related to the advantageous zone) such as various counters related to various limit processes (see FIG. 16), the mode (game state) during the advantageous zone, and the play period of that mode (including the ceiling game number, etc.). Then, after this processing, the main CPU 101 ends the game start state control processing. Furthermore, if the main CPU 101 determines that the conditions for ending the advantageous zone have not been met (NO in S93), it ends the game start state control processing.

(Processing at the start of play during advantageous zone)
Next, the game start processing during the advantageous period performed in S91 of the game start state control processing described above will be described with reference to Fig. 28. Fig. 28 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the game start processing during the advantageous period.

First, the main CPU 101 performs various counter update processing (at the start of play) (S101). In this processing, for example, various counters related to various limit processing based on the number of games played in the advantageous zone (see FIG. 16), various counters that manage the play period such as various modes (play states) during the advantageous zone, or various counters that manage other advantageous degrees are updated according to predetermined update conditions (for example, subtracting (adding) 1 per game).

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether a specific mode (AT state) is in progress (S102). If the main CPU 101 determines that a specific mode is in progress (YES in S102), it performs AT period management processing (at the start of play) (S103). In this processing, for example, if it is possible to extend the AT state play period (e.g., by extending the number of games or adding more sets) at the start of play, it determines whether the conditions for such an extension are met and performs processing such as extending the play period based on the results of this determination (if it is possible to shorten the AT state play period, processing related to the shortening is performed). Furthermore, this processing may manage the AT state play period regardless of whether it is extended, or the AT state play period may be managed in the processing of S101 described above, with only processing related to the extension being performed in this processing. In the case of the first gaming machine, this process involves, for example, conducting the above-mentioned 1G consecutive lottery based on the sub-flag when the advantageous zone is selected, conducting a 1G consecutive lottery, and then processing to extend the pseudo bonus according to the results of this lottery.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a navigation setting process (S104). This process sets information corresponding to the stop operation information notified by the instruction monitor and information corresponding to the stop operation information to be included in the start command. Note that this process may also be able to determine whether or not to generate a navigation. In other words, when a role to be notified is drawn in the AT state, a navigation may not necessarily occur, and whether or not a navigation will occur in this process may be determined according to predetermined conditions (for example, the type of role to be notified or a predetermined probability of a navigation occurring).

If the main CPU 101 determines in S102 that the specific mode is not in effect (NO in S102), or after S104, it determines whether the mode transition condition is met (S105). In the case of the first gaming machine, this process determines whether the transition mode has been determined in accordance with the results of the mode transition lottery described above, which is based on the sub-flag when the advantageous zone is selected.

When the main CPU 101 determines that the mode transition condition has been met (YES in S105), it updates the mode flag storage area (S106). That is, the main CPU 101 sets the mode (game state) within the advantageous zone to which the player has transitioned. Note that in the case of the first gaming machine, this process sets the transition destination mode determined, for example, in accordance with the results of the mode transition lottery described above based on the sub-flag when the advantageous zone is selected.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs setting processing according to the set mode (S107). In this processing, if it is necessary to set the play period for that mode (including the ceiling number of games, etc.) or set lottery values (lottery tables) for various lottery processes other than the internal lottery process, depending on the set mode, such setting processing is performed as appropriate. Note that in the case of the first gaming machine, this processing is similar to the processing of S90 described above, for example. Then, after this processing, the main CPU 101 ends the processing at the start of play during the advantageous period. Furthermore, if the main CPU 101 determines that the mode transition condition has not been met (NO in S105), it ends the processing at the start of play during the advantageous period.

The state control process at the start of play shown in Figure 27 and the state control process at the end of play shown in Figure 30, as well as the process at the start of play during a favorable period shown in Figure 28 and the process at the end of play during a favorable period shown in Figure 31, are basically configured in almost the same way. This means that processes that can be performed either when play starts or when play ends (for example, processes that reference a determined internal lottery role, such as changing the game state or mode, but the processing results only need to be reflected by the time the current game ends (or the start of the next game)) can be performed in either order, and does not mean that similar processes are performed in both orders. Therefore, such processes may be performed either when play starts or when play ends.

In contrast, processing that needs to be performed when game play begins (for example, the navigation setting processing described above) can be performed when game play begins, and processing that needs to be performed when game play ends (for example, processing that references the combination of displayed symbols) can be performed when game play ends. Furthermore, processing that needs to be performed at a predetermined time after game play begins but before game play ends, or processing that is better performed (for example, processing that references the stop operation mode of the first stop operation), can be performed at that time.

(Reel stop control process)
Next, the reel stop control process performed in S12 of the main process will be described with reference to Fig. 29. Fig. 29 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the reel stop control process.

First, the main CPU 101 determines whether the rotation speed of all reels has reached a predetermined constant speed (e.g., 80 rotations per minute) (i.e., whether they are rotating at a constant speed) (S111). If the main CPU 101 determines that all reels are not rotating at a constant speed (NO in S111), it waits until all reels are rotating at a constant speed. On the other hand, if it determines that all reels are rotating at a constant speed (YES in S111), it allows each reel to stop (S112). In other words, the main CPU 101 enables each stop button. Accordingly, the activated stop button storage area is updated (in the case of the first gaming machine, for example, bits 4 to 6 of the activated stop button storage area are set to "1").

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether a valid stop button has been operated (S113). If the main CPU 101 determines that a valid stop button has not been operated (NO in S113), the processing waits until a valid stop button is operated. Note that if automatic stop control is to be performed, this waiting time can be measured, and the automatic stop control can be performed when the measurement result reaches a predetermined time.

When the main CPU 101 determines that a valid stop button has been operated (YES in S113), it updates the activated stop button storage area and the press sequence storage area (S114). In the case of the first gaming machine, for example, when the first stop operation is performed on reel 3L (when stop button 8L is pressed), this process stores a "1" in bit 0 of the activated stop button storage area and updates bit 4 to "0." Additionally, bits 2 to 5 of the press sequence storage area are updated to "0."

Next, the main CPU 101 determines the reel to be controlled based on the activated stop button (S115). In this process, for example, if stop button 8L is pressed, reel 3L is determined to be the reel to be controlled.

Next, the main CPU 101 stores the stop start position from the symbol counter (S116). The symbol counter is configured as a counter for tracking symbol position data (e.g., "0" to "19"). In this process, for example, if the stop button 8L is pressed, the symbol position data of the middle area of reel 3L at the time the stop button 8L was pressed is stored as the stop start position.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a sliding symbol count determination process (S117). In this process, the most appropriate number of sliding symbols (the amount of symbol movement) is determined, for example, by referencing the number of sliding symbols specified in the stop table described above and the data in the pull-in priority data storage area described above.

Next, the main CPU 101 stores the planned stop position based on the stop start position and the number of sliding symbols (S118). In this process, the stop start position stored in the process of S116 described above and the symbol position data of the position where the symbol will ultimately stop based on the number of sliding symbols determined in the process of S117 described above are stored as the planned stop position.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a reel stop command generation and storage process (S119). In this process, data for the reel stop command to be sent to the sub-control circuit 200 is generated, and the generated data is stored in a communication data storage area provided in the main RAM 103. Note that the reel stop command can be configured to include parameters that can specify not only the intended stop position, but also the stop start position and the number of sliding symbols.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a symbol code storage process (S120). In this process, the symbol code storage area is updated while also referencing the type of symbol (symbol code) at the intended stop position for reels whose intended stop positions have already been determined. Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not there is an active stop button (S121). In other words, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not there are any reels that are still spinning (whether or not a stop operation has been performed on all reels).

If the main CPU 101 determines that a valid stop button is present (YES in S121), it performs a control change process (S122). In this process, if it is necessary to change the stop table or pull priority table set in the reel stop initial setting process described above, for example, depending on the player's stop operation behavior up to this point, the various information required for such stop control is reset.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a draw priority storage process (S123). In this process, for each symbol (symbol position) on the spinning reel, the main CPU 101 references the set internal winning combination and the set draw priority table, while also referencing the type of symbol at the planned stop position on reels whose planned stop positions have already been determined, to obtain data indicating the draw priority, and stores this in the draw priority data storage area. After this process, the main CPU 101 then returns the process to S113. Furthermore, if the main CPU 101 determines that there is no valid stop button (NO in S121), it terminates the reel stop control process.

(Game End State Control Processing)
Next, the game end state control process performed in S15 of the main process will be described with reference to Fig. 30. Fig. 30 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the game end state control process.

First, the main CPU 101 performs a game state transition condition fulfillment check process (S131). In this process, when game play ends, a check is made to see if a transition condition for transitioning from one game state to another has been fulfilled. For example, if a transition to a predetermined RT state or a predetermined bonus state is to be made based on the display of a predetermined symbol combination, this process checks whether the predetermined symbol combination has been displayed. Furthermore, if the game is in the predetermined RT state or the predetermined bonus state, this process checks whether the termination conditions for these game states have been fulfilled. Note that in the case of the first gaming machine, this process checks, for example, whether a symbol combination related to 2BB or 3BB has been displayed. Furthermore, if the game is in the 2BB state or the 3BB state, a check is made to see whether the termination conditions for these game states have been fulfilled by the payout of medals.

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether a transition condition for transitioning to one of the game states has been met (S132). If the main CPU 101 determines that a transition condition for transitioning to one of the game states has been met (YES in S132), it updates the game state flag storage area (S133). That is, the main CPU 101 sets the game state according to the transition condition that has been met. Note that in the case of the first gaming machine, in this process, for example, if a symbol combination related to 2BB or 3BB is displayed, a "1" is stored in bit 0 or bit 1 of the game state flag storage area, and the 2BB state or 3BB state is set. Also, for example, if the game state is in the 2BB state or 3BB state and the termination condition for these game states is met, bit 0 or bit 1 of the game state flag storage area is updated to "0."

The main CPU 101 then performs setting processing according to the set gaming state (S134). In this processing, when it is necessary to set the gaming period for that gaming state or to set lottery values (lottery tables) for various lottery processes other than the internal lottery process in response to the transition of the gaming state, such setting processing is performed as appropriate. Note that in the case of the first gaming machine, for example, if the 2BB state is set, the payout number as the termination condition is set to "1," and if the 3BB state is set, the payout number as the termination condition is set to "176."

If the main CPU 101 determines in S132 that the transition condition for transitioning to one of the game states has not been met (NO in S132), and after processing S134, it determines whether the current game zone is a non-favorable zone (S135). If the main CPU 101 determines that the current game zone is a non-favorable zone (YES in S135), it performs a process to check whether the favorable zone start condition has been met (S136). Note that, as mentioned above, in a non-favorable zone, only processing that references the determined internal lottery role is possible, and therefore this processing is the same as the processing of S86 described above (game start state control processing).

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether the conditions for starting the advantageous zone have been met (S137). If the main CPU 101 determines that the conditions for starting the advantageous zone have not been met (NO in S137), it terminates the end-of-game state control process. Furthermore, if the main CPU 101 determines that the conditions for starting the advantageous zone have been met (YES in S137), it performs setting processing at the start of the advantageous zone (S138). Note that, as mentioned above, in non-advantageous zones, only processing that references the determined internal lottery role is possible, so this processing is the same as the processing of S88 described above (state control processing at the start of game).

Next, the main CPU 101 updates the mode flag storage area (S139). That is, the main CPU 101 sets the mode (game state) for the advantageous period that has started. As mentioned above, in the non-advantageous period, only processing that references the determined internal winning combination is possible, so this processing is the same as the processing of S89 described above (game start state control processing).

Next, the main CPU 101 performs setting processing according to the set mode (S140). In this processing, if it is necessary to set the play period for that mode (including the ceiling number of games, etc.) or set lottery values (lottery tables) for various lottery processes other than the internal lottery process, depending on the set mode, such setting processing is performed as appropriate. Note that, as mentioned above, only processing that references the determined internal lottery combination is possible in the non-advantageous zone, so this processing is the same as the processing at S90 described above (game start state control processing).

When the main CPU 101 determines in S135 that the current game zone is not a non-profitable zone (i.e., a profitable zone) (NO in S135), it performs a game end process during the profitable zone (S141). The details of the game end process during the profitable zone will be described later.
Next, the main CPU 101 performs a process for checking whether the advantageous zone end condition is met (S142). In this process, when the game ends, a check is made to see whether the transition condition for transitioning from the advantageous zone to the non-advantageous zone (the advantageous zone end condition) is met. In the case of the first gaming machine, this process checks, for example, whether the activation conditions for various limit processes are met based on the payout number during the advantageous zone (see FIG. 16), or whether 32 games have elapsed if the current mode is the end mode.

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether the conditions for ending the advantageous period have been met (S143). If the main CPU 101 determines that the conditions for ending the advantageous period have been met (YES in S143), it performs initialization processing at the end of the advantageous period (S144). That is, the main CPU 101 ends the advantageous period and sets a non-advantageous period. In this processing, in response to the end of the advantageous period, initialization processing is performed to clear all information (i.e., information related to the advantageous period) such as various counters related to various limit processing (see FIG. 16), the mode (game state) during the advantageous period, and the play period of that mode (including the ceiling game number, etc.). Then, after this processing, the main CPU 101 terminates the game end state control processing. Furthermore, if the main CPU 101 determines that the conditions for ending the advantageous period have not been met (NO in S143), it terminates the game end state control processing.

(Processing at the end of play during the advantageous period)
Next, the process at the end of a game during an advantageous period, which is performed in S141 of the above-mentioned game end state control process, will be described with reference to Fig. 31. Fig. 31 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the process at the end of a game during an advantageous period.

First, the main CPU 101 performs various counter update processing (at the end of play) (S151). In this processing, for example, various counters related to various limit processing based on the number of payouts during the advantageous period (see FIG. 16), various counters that manage the play period such as various modes (play states) during the advantageous period, and various counters that manage other advantageous degrees are updated according to predetermined update conditions (for example, the number of payouts, the number of times a predetermined combination of symbols is displayed, the stop operation mode, etc.).

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether a specific mode (AT state) is in progress (S152). If the main CPU 101 determines that a specific mode is in progress (YES in S152), it performs AT period management processing (at the end of play) (S153). In this processing, for example, if it is possible to extend the AT state play period (e.g., by extending the number of games or adding more sets) at the end of play, it determines whether the conditions for such extension are met and performs processing such as extending the play period based on the results of this determination (if it is possible to shorten the AT state play period, processing related to the shortening is performed). Furthermore, this processing may manage the AT state play period regardless of whether it is extended, or the AT state play period may be managed in the processing of S151 described above, with only processing related to the extension being performed in this processing. In the case of the first gaming machine, this process involves, for example, conducting the above-mentioned 1G consecutive lottery based on the sub-flag when the advantageous zone is entered, and then processing to extend the pseudo bonus according to the results of this lottery.

If the main CPU 101 determines that the specific mode is not in progress (NO in S152), or after S153, it determines whether the mode transition condition is met (S154). In the case of the first gaming machine, this process determines whether the transition mode has been determined based on the results of the mode transition lottery described above, which is based on the sub-flag when the advantageous zone is entered.

When the main CPU 101 determines that the mode transition condition has been met (YES in S154), it updates the mode flag storage area (S155). That is, the main CPU 101 sets the mode (game state) within the advantageous zone to which the player has transitioned. Note that in the case of the first gaming machine, this process sets the transition destination mode determined, for example, in accordance with the results of the mode transition lottery described above, which is based on the sub-flag set when the advantageous zone is entered.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs setting processing according to the set mode (S156). In this processing, if it is necessary to set the play period for that mode (including the ceiling number of games, etc.) or set lottery values (lottery tables) for various lottery processes other than the internal lottery process, depending on the set mode, such setting processing is performed as appropriate. Note that in the case of the first gaming machine, this processing is similar to the processing of S140 described above, for example. Then, after this processing, the main CPU 101 ends the processing at the end of play during the advantageous period. Furthermore, if the main CPU 101 determines that the mode transition condition has not been met (NO in S154), it ends the processing at the end of play during the advantageous period.

[6-2. Periodic interrupt processing]
First, the periodic interrupt process executed by the main CPU 101 of the main control circuit 100 will be described with reference to Fig. 32. Fig. 32 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the periodic interrupt process.

In this embodiment, the periodic interrupt processing cycle (one interrupt time) is set to "1.1172 ms." However, the periodic interrupt processing cycle is not limited to this. For example, periodic interrupt processing may be executed at a different cycle, or even if the same cycle is set, the number of interrupts actually executed for some or all of the processing may be set to "2" or more, resulting in periodic interrupt processing being executed at a different cycle.

First, the main CPU 101 performs a register save process (S201). Next, the main CPU 101 performs an input port check process (S202). In this process, the input states (on or off) of the various sensors and switches connected to the main control board 71 (including those connected via the main relay board 73) are checked. For example, the input state at the time of the previous interrupt is compared with the input state at the time of the current interrupt to check whether the input state has changed. If the input state has changed, the change is stored in input port storage area 0 (not shown) of the main RAM 103, and input states that have not changed are stored as is in input port storage area 1 (not shown) of the main RAM 103.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs reel control processing (S203). In this processing, it controls the drive of each stepping motor 51L, 51C, and 51R, and controls the rotation and stopping of each reel 3L, 3C, and 3R. Next, the main CPU 101 performs communication data transmission processing (S204). In this processing, it transmits each parameter of each command stored in the communication data storage area to the sub-control circuit 200. Note that in this processing, if no command data is stored in the communication data storage area, it transmits the data stored in input port storage area 0 and input port storage area 1 to the sub-control circuit 200 as an input status command.

In this embodiment, the various command data is temporarily stored in a communication data storage area and then transmitted to the sub-control circuit 200 during periodic interrupt processing. However, for example, the various command data may be stored directly in a communication circuit (not shown) provided within the main control circuit 100 and transmitted to the sub-control circuit 200 without being stored in the communication data storage area. Also, although detailed explanation is omitted in this embodiment, the various command data is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 200 via serial communication. However, for example, the various command data may be transmitted to the sub-control circuit 200 via parallel communication.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs 7-segment LED drive processing (S205). This processing controls the display content of devices connected to the main control board 71 (including those connected via the main relay board 73), such as the information display device 14. Next, the main CPU 101 performs timer update processing (S206). This processing updates various timers managed by the main control circuit 100.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs error detection processing (S207). In this processing, it detects whether various error conditions have occurred based on the input status, etc., checked in S202 described above. Next, the main CPU 101 performs door open/close check processing (S208). In this processing, for example, the open/close status of the lower door mechanism DD is checked based on the input status of the door open/close monitoring switch 56. Note that if various error conditions have occurred or if the input status of the door open/close monitoring switch 56 is open (off), a security signal is output from the external central terminal board 55.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs register restoration processing (S209). After this processing, the main CPU 101 ends the periodic interrupt processing.

[7. Processing by the sub-control circuit]
Next, an outline of the sub-side control processing executed by the sub CPU 201 of the sub control circuit 200 using each program will be described with reference to Fig. 33. Fig. 33 is a flowchart showing an example of the outline of the sub-side control processing.

In addition, in the pachislot machine 1, various restrictions are placed on the main control circuit 100 side (including the main control board 71 and main control board case) from the perspective of preventing fraudulent activities and unauthorized modifications, but not as many restrictions are placed on the sub-control circuit 200 side (including the sub-control board 72 and sub-control board case). Therefore, the sub-control board 72 (and sub-control circuit 200) can use a variety of configurations depending on the type and number of connected performance devices, the type of performance performed by those performance devices, and the balance between manufacturing costs, etc. This is why Figure 33 uses the term "overview."

First, when the power is turned on, the sub-CPU 201 performs power-on processing in the same manner as the main CPU 101 (S301 and S302). This processing includes detecting whether an abnormality occurred when the power was turned on, initializing data stored in the sub-RAM 203, and activating various tasks required to perform the various performance execution control processes described below.

Furthermore, when the sub-CPU 201 receives a command sent from the main control circuit 100, it performs a performance execution control process when the command is received (S303 and S304). In this process, for example, when an initialization command is received, the parameter information of the received initialization command is referenced, and if a setting change has been made, the appropriate initialization process is performed on the sub-side, and if the setting change has not been made, the sub-side is also subjected to a process to restore the state before the power outage.

For example, when a start command is received, the parameter information of the received start command is referenced, and if the state is not AT, the content of the presentation that suggests or notifies the internal winning combination, game status, etc. is determined (by lottery, if necessary), and various presentation devices are controlled so that the presentation with the determined content is executed. Furthermore, if the state is AT, in addition to this, the content of the presentation that notifies the advantageous stop operation mode is determined, and various presentation devices are controlled so that the presentation with the determined content is executed.

For example, when a lock command is received, the parameter information of the received lock command is referenced, the content of the effect linked to the content of the lock effect is determined, and various effect devices are controlled so that the effect with the determined content is executed.For example, when a reel stop command is received, the parameter information of the received reel stop command is referenced, the content of the effect linked to the stop start position and the planned stop position (or simply the number of stop operations performed, etc.) is determined, and various effect devices are controlled so that the effect with the determined content is executed.For example, when a winning activation command is received, the parameter information of the received winning activation command is referenced, and if a bonus is awarded, the content of the effect linked to the awarded bonus is determined, and various effect devices are controlled so that the effect with the determined content is executed.

Furthermore, when effect buttons 10a, 10b connected to the sub-control board 72 (including those connected via the sub-relay board 74) are operated, for example, the sub-CPU 201 performs effect button operation effect execution control processing (S305 and S306). In this processing, for example, if an effect button corresponding to an effect is operated while an operation-linked effect is being executed, the sub-CPU 201 controls various effect devices so that the content of the operation-linked effect changes. Also, for example, if an effect button is operated to call up the user menu (described below) while not playing, the sub-CPU 201 performs control to display the user menu. Also, if an effect button is operated for a selection or confirmation operation while the user menu is displayed, the sub-CPU 201 performs control in accordance with these operations.

Furthermore, if a trigger other than the above-mentioned trigger occurs, the sub-CPU 201 performs other effect execution control processing (S307). In this processing, for example, if a non-operation period during which no game-related operations or user menu-related operations are performed reaches a predetermined period (e.g., approximately 30 seconds), the sub-CPU 201 determines the content of the effect related to the demo state notification and controls various effect devices so that the effect with the determined content is executed.

[8. Other functions of pachislot machines]
As described above, the pachislot machine 1 is equipped with various functions for controlling games and various functions for controlling presentations, as well as various configurations for realizing these functions, but it can also be equipped with other functions, such as those shown below. Below, an example of other functions on the player's side and an example of other functions on the gaming parlor's side will be explained.

[8-1. Player's side]
For example, a user menu is displayed by the player's presentation operation, the desired menu is selected from the user menu, and then the player performs appropriate selection and decision operations on the selected menu, allowing the player to obtain various information and make various settings.

For example, when the "Layout/Payout Table" is selected and confirmed, an information screen will be displayed on the display screen, allowing players to check the symbol layout on the pachislot machine 1, the specified symbol combination, and the payout (bonus details) when that combination is won.

For example, when "Volume/Light Adjustment" is selected and confirmed, a settings screen is displayed on the effect display unit, allowing settings to be made for the brightness of the various display devices on the pachislot machine 1, the volume of the sound output from the speakers, or the light intensity of the lamps and LEDs. When making such settings, in order to allow for more detailed settings or to more easily accept settings-related operations, the various operation units that accept the player's game operations can be used as part of the operation unit that accepts operations related to those settings (i.e., the operation unit that accepts effect operations).

Furthermore, for example, when "Custom" is selected and confirmed, a setting screen is displayed on the effect display unit, allowing the user to set the presentation mode of the pachislot machine 1 (for example, the type of character used in the presentation (including the type of character (display mode) itself, the type of voice corresponding to the character, or the type of costume or item (individual display mode) associated with the character), the probability of the presentation occurring (including the type of expectation level when the presentation occurs), or the mode of suggestion or notification (including the timing of presentation execution, etc.)). During such configuration, in order to enable more detailed settings or to make it easier to accept settings-related operations, the various operation units that accept the player's game operations can be used as part of the operation unit that accepts operations related to the settings (i.e., the operation unit that accepts presentation operations).

Furthermore, for example, when "UniMemo" is selected and confirmed, it becomes possible to receive an information provision service using the player's mobile device (e.g., a mobile phone, smartphone, etc.). With such an information provision service, for example, the player can log in to start playing (play can also be started without logging in), and then log out when play is finished, allowing them to check or obtain game history information (e.g., information related to various game results, such as the total number of games played, the number of times an advantageous game state occurred, and the maximum number of coins won).

In addition, for example, the game history information may also include information regarding accompanying benefits, such as information indicating the types of characters that can be displayed during play and the types of music that can be output depending on the results of the game (whether the unlocking conditions are met), and information indicating the types of characters that can be displayed on the player's mobile device and the types of music that can be output.

Note that various methods for logging in and out of such information provision services can be employed. For example, logging in and out can be accomplished by having the player read a two-dimensional code displayed on the display unit using the player's terminal, or by having the player enter or memorize a password (specifically, for example, when logging out at the end of a game, a four- to ten-digit character string can be displayed instead of a two-dimensional code as a password to be entered next time, which the player can obtain by writing it down on paper or taking a photo of it on a mobile device, and then entering the password obtained in this way when logging in before the start of the next game). Furthermore, these methods can also be combined as appropriate to enable logging in and out.

[8-2. Amusement parlor side]
For example, the hall menu is displayed by the setting confirmation operation (which may be a setting change operation or other operation by the amusement parlor administrator) by the amusement parlor administrator, the desired menu is selected from the hall menu, and then, when an appropriate selection and decision operation is performed for the selected menu, the amusement parlor administrator can obtain various information and make various settings.

For example, when "Time Setting" is selected and confirmed, a setting screen is displayed in the display effect section, allowing the date and time, etc. of the pachislot machine 1 to be set. The date and time can also be configured to be automatically updated, for example, during the sub-side power-on process described above (see S302 in Figure 33).

For example, when "Total Medal Information" is selected and confirmed, an information screen is displayed on the display screen, allowing users to check historical information such as the number of coins inserted and paid out within a specified period of time (for example, each of seven business days) on the pachislot machine 1. This type of menu can also be configured as a menu in the user menu.

For example, if "Settings Change/Confirmation History" is selected and confirmed, an information screen will be displayed on the display screen, allowing the user to check history information indicating the number of settings change operations and setting confirmation operations performed on the pachislot machine 1 within a predetermined period (for example, each business day for seven business days). For example, if "Error Information History" is selected and confirmed, an information screen will be displayed on the display screen, allowing the user to check history information indicating the date and time of error occurrences and their details within a predetermined period (for example, each business day for seven business days) on the pachislot machine 1.

For example, if "Monitoring History" is selected and confirmed, an information screen will be displayed on the display screen, allowing the user to check historical information such as the date and time the door was opened within a specified period (for example, each of seven business days) on the pachislot machine 1, as well as that period. For example, if "Warning Settings" is selected and confirmed, a settings screen will be displayed on the display screen, allowing the user to set the type and frequency of various warning notifications on the pachislot machine 1.

For example, when "Power Saving Mode Setting" is selected and confirmed, a settings screen is displayed on the display screen, allowing the user to set whether or not to activate the power saving function of the pachislot machine 1. Such a menu can also be configured as a menu within a user menu. Furthermore, when making such settings, in order to allow for more detailed settings or to more easily accept settings-related operations, the various operation units that accept the player's game operations can be used as part of the operation unit that accepts settings-related operations (i.e., the operation unit that accepts effect operations).

For example, when "Limit Setting" is selected and confirmed, a settings screen is displayed on the display screen, allowing the user to set whether or not to activate the limit function on the pachislot machine 1. The limit function is a function that, when a predetermined activation condition is met, renders the machine unplayable until a cancellation operation (e.g., a reset operation) is performed by the gaming facility manager. The predetermined activation condition may be met, for example, when the advantageous zone is forcibly ended by executing the limit process described above, or when a specific state (e.g., a bonus state, an increase zone, or an advantageous zone (including an activation zone)) ends. Furthermore, when the limit function is set to ON, the automatic settlement function described below may also be set to ON in conjunction with this.

For example, when "Automatic Settlement Settings" is selected and confirmed, a settings screen is displayed on the effect display unit, allowing the user to set whether or not to activate the automatic settlement function of the pachislot machine 1. The automatic settlement function is a function that automatically settles credits (i.e., automatically returns all credited gaming value) when a predetermined activation condition is met. The predetermined activation condition may be met, for example, when the advantageous zone is forcibly ended by executing the limit process described above, or when a specific state (for example, a bonus state, an increase zone, or an advantageous zone (including an effect zone)) ends. Furthermore, when the automatic settlement function is set to ON, the above-mentioned limit function may also be set to ON in conjunction with this.

When setting the limit-play function or automatic settlement function, in order to allow for more detailed settings or to make it easier to accept settings-related operations, the various operation units that accept the player's game operations can be used as part of the operation unit that accepts operations related to those settings (i.e., the operation unit that accepts presentation operations). However, in this case, it is not desirable to unnecessarily increase the number of operation units that can accept operations, so it is also possible to use only a specific operation unit (for example, a stop button) as part of the operation unit that accepts settings-related operations.

[9. Extension Example]
Up to this point, a pachislot machine 1 has been described as an example of a gaming machine to which the invention according to this embodiment can be applied. However, the gaming machines to which the invention according to this embodiment can be applied are not limited to this. For example, the invention according to this embodiment can also be applied to gaming machines known as "pachinko machines" or "slot machines," and similar effects can be obtained. In other words, the invention according to this embodiment can be applied to all gaming machines that can play games (perform gaming control) in accordance with the gaming actions (operations) of the player. Furthermore, the configurations and functions of gaming machines including the pachislot machine 1 are not limited to those described above, and various modifications and extensions are possible. Below, such an extension example will be described, although it is merely an example.

(Pachinko machine)
A pachinko machine has, for example, a game board with a game area where game balls can roll and flow down, a glass door including protective glass that protects the game area while making it visible from the outside, a performance display device provided in a specified area of the game area (which may be provided outside the game area), a payout unit that pays out game balls, and a board unit that includes various control boards that perform various controls related to games and performances, and these are supported by a frame body (sometimes simply referred to as a "frame" or the like).

The front of a pachinko machine is equipped with, for example, a launch handle as one of the player's operating means, an upper tray in which game balls to be used in the game can be stored, and a lower tray in which paid-out game balls can be stored. Many machines are also equipped with the above-mentioned effect buttons and movable effect devices. The game area is also equipped with, for example, a starting area (sometimes called a "starting port") or a specific area (sometimes called a "V winning port") through which game balls can pass, a variable winning device (sometimes called a "large winning port") that can transition between a state in which game balls have an easy chance of winning and a state in which they have a hard time winning, and a variable display device that can variably display identification information (sometimes called a "pattern" or the like, including "special patterns" and "normal patterns").

In pachinko machines, players play by operating a launch handle to launch a game ball into the game area. For example, when a launched game ball passes through the starting area, the variable display begins. At this time, a decision is made (i.e., whether to transition the game state to a big win game state or a small win game state, which are more favorable to the player) based on a probability determined by the current state (e.g., whether the game is in a high-variable game state, with a relatively high probability of winning) and the type of starting area (i.e., whether to transition the game state is determined by lottery or judgment). After that, when the variable display stop condition (e.g., the set variable time has expired) is met, the variable display stops in a stop pattern corresponding to the result of the decision. If the result of the decision is to transition the game state (a win), the stop pattern also becomes a display result corresponding to the win, and the game transitions to the game state corresponding to the win in response to the display result. On the other hand, if the above decision result is one that does not result in a change in the game state (a loss), the display result for the stopped ball will also correspond to a loss, and the game state will not change. Note that, for example, if the launched game ball passes through a specific area (specific areas are usually designed to be difficult for game balls to pass through), it is decided to change the game state regardless of the variable display device.

In other words, pachislot machine 1 begins play when the player bets the required medals and performs a start operation, whereas pachinko machines differ in that the player fires the required game ball by operating a launch handle, and the game begins when the game ball passes through a starting area, for example. However, both machines share the commonality that the game begins due to the player's gaming action. Pachislot machine 1 and pachinko machines also share the commonality that the stop mode that will ultimately be permitted to be displayed (in other words, the content of the bonus to be awarded) is determined when the start trigger is met.

Furthermore, while pachislot machine 1 basically stops the variable display when the player performs a stop operation, pachinko machines stop the variable display when a stop condition is met (without the player performing a stop operation), which is a difference between the two. However, both machines stop the variable display according to a predetermined decision and award a bonus according to the stopped state. Pachislot machine 1 and pachinko machines also have in common the ability to execute effects related to the game. For example, the effect display device functions as the effect display unit and information display unit described above. Furthermore, pachinko machines may of course also be provided with effect execution means such as the aforementioned lamps, speakers, or other effect devices, and effects may be executed using these.

In many pachinko machines, the decorative symbols (which are sometimes referred to as "identification information") are displayed in a variable manner on the performance display device. As mentioned above, the actual game results are displayed on the variable display device, but because the variable display devices are small and the display results are shown using the lighting patterns of multiple LEDs, it is often difficult for players to recognize the game results. For this reason, the mainstream pachinko machines are designed to play by displaying decorative symbols in a variable manner (and stationary) on the performance display device in conjunction with the variable display on the variable display device. Furthermore, the variable display of such decorative symbols (although for presentation purposes, the variable display may begin after a certain delay when the start trigger is met, or may temporarily stop before the stop condition is met) is basically the same as the variable table device described above, with the identification information being displayed as variable or static as the game progresses (for example, in the case of a win, the decorative symbols are displayed as static in a special stop mode (e.g., matching symbols), while in the case of a loss, the decorative symbols are displayed as static in a non-special stop mode (e.g., scattered symbols)). Therefore, the invention according to this embodiment can be applied to this as one aspect of the variable display unit described above.

In other words, in this embodiment, the various items described as the configuration of the external or internal structure of the pachislot machine 1 can also be applied to the configuration of the external or internal structure of a pachinko machine, except for those that have properties unique to the pachislot machine 1 (for example, those that require medals and cannot be replaced by game balls).

Furthermore, in pachinko machines, various controls related to gameplay are performed by a main control circuit acting as a game control unit mounted on a main control board (including the case where some control related to payouts is performed by a payout control circuit mounted on a payout control board electrically connected to the main control board), and various controls related to presentation are performed by a sub-control circuit acting as a presentation control unit mounted on a sub-control board. Therefore, the various matters described as the electrical configuration of pachislot machine 1 can be applied to the electrical configuration of pachinko machines, except for those that have characteristics unique to pachislot machine 1 (for example, those related to stop operations, etc.).

Furthermore, as described above, the pachislot machine 1 can provide game states that are relatively advantageous to the player (or may be disadvantageous depending on the configuration), such as a bonus state, RT state, AT state, and an ART state that combines these. For example, in the bonus state, the lottery mode for small winning combinations is made more advantageous than in the non-bonus state, making it possible to maintain a state in which medals are more likely to be awarded (increase) for a certain period of time; in the RT state, the lottery mode for replay combinations is made more advantageous than in the non-RT state, making it possible to maintain a state in which losses are less likely to occur (and, as a result, medals are less likely to decrease) for a certain period of time; and in the AT state, an advantageous stop operation mode is notified, making it possible to maintain a state in which medals are more likely to be awarded (increase) for a certain period of time.

In contrast, pachinko machines can also be equipped with various game states with similar characteristics. For example, in a big win game state or a small win game state, the variable prize-winning device is controlled differently from normal, enabling the game to transition to a state in which game balls are more likely to win, thereby enabling a state in which game balls are more likely to be awarded (increased) to continue for a certain period of time. Also, in a time-saving game state (sometimes referred to as an "electric support state"), normal symbols are controlled differently from normal, enabling a state in which game balls are more likely to pass through the starting area, thereby increasing the frequency of lottery draws by the variable display device and enabling a state in which game balls are less likely to decrease to continue for a certain period of time. Also, in a probability-variant game state, special symbols are controlled differently from normal, enabling a state in which the variable display device has a higher probability of winning (and as a result, game balls are more likely to increase) to continue for a certain period of time.

In other words, in this embodiment, the various matters described as control configurations related to game state transitions (or shifts) as part of the playability of the pachislot machine 1 can be applied as control configurations related to game state transitions (or shifts) of pachinko machines, except for those that have properties unique to the pachislot machine 1 (for example, those that involve transitions between play zones). The same applies to the various other matters described as part of the playability of the pachislot machine 1.

Incidentally, pachinko machines can also transition to a time-limited play state when the number of plays in a non-time-limited play state (normal play state) reaches a specified number. In other words, pachinko machines can also be equipped with a ceiling function (a function that transitions to a favorable state (e.g., time-limited play state) as a way to recover from a stuck game if an unfavorable state (e.g., normal play state) continues for a predetermined period (e.g., 900 games (spins)) without transitioning to a favorable state (e.g., jackpot play state)). Therefore, the various matters described as configurations related to the ceiling function of pachislot machine 1 can also be applied as configurations related to the ceiling function of pachinko machines.

Furthermore, in a pachinko machine, if the stop pattern of the variable display device results in a display result corresponding to a specific miss during a non-time-saving game state (normal game state), it is possible to transition to a time-saving game state. In other words, even in a pachinko machine, a transition (transition) between game states (not triggered by a transition to a jackpot game state, etc.) is possible due to the display of a specific display result (specific symbol combination). Therefore, for example, the various matters described as configurations related to a transition (transition) to the RT state due to the display of a specific symbol combination on a pachislot machine 1 can also be applied as configurations related to a transition (transition) to a time-saving game state due to the display of a specific display result on a pachinko machine.

(Medalless gaming machine)
In the pachislot machine 1 of this embodiment, one of the conditions for starting play is the player's betting operation (i.e., inserting medals held in hand into the medal insertion slot 5 to place a bet, or operating the MAX BET button 6a or 1 BET button 6b to place a bet with credited medals), and if medals are to be paid out when play ends, the hopper device 32 is driven to pay out medals from the medal payout opening 11, or medals are credited, as described above, but the configuration of the pachislot machine 1 is not limited to this.

For example, the invention according to this embodiment can be applied to all types of gaming in which a player bets the amount of gaming value required for a game, the game is played based on that bet, and a bonus is awarded (e.g., gaming value is awarded) based on the outcome of the game. In other words, the invention can be applied not only to types in which medals are physically inserted (bet) and paid out by the player's actions, but also to those in which the gaming value held by the player is managed electromagnetically within the pachislot machine 1 (or, even if not electromagnetically, at least managed in a manner that prevents the player from directly accessing the gaming value), allowing for medal-free gaming. Here, such pachislot machines 1 are referred to as "medalless gaming machines." Medalless gaming machines are also sometimes referred to as "managed gaming machines" or "enclosed gaming machines," etc.

The game value held by the player may be electromagnetically managed by the main control circuit 100 (main control board 71) itself, or by a game value management device attached to (connected to) the main control circuit 100 (main control board 71) (hereinafter, such a management device may be referred to as a "medal count control board"). An example of how this game value management device is installed is described below.

The gaming value management device is a device equipped with at least ROM and RWM (or RAM) and installed in the pachislot machine 1. It is connected to an external gaming value providing device (hereinafter, such a gaming value providing device may be referred to as a "communication-only unit") for two-way communication via a communication device (hereinafter, such a communication device may be referred to as a "connection terminal board"). By performing the necessary communication with the external gaming value providing device, the gaming value management device can perform operations such as lending gaming value (i.e., providing the gaming value required for a player to place a gaming value bet), granting gaming value (i.e., providing the granted gaming value to a player when a winning combination related to the granting of gaming value is achieved (such combination is realized)), and electromagnetically recording the gaming value provided by these operations. The gaming value providing device is also sometimes referred to as a "gaming value (gaming medium) handling device," "gaming value (gaming medium) lending device," or "sandbox."

The external gaming value providing device is also connected to an external ball payout management device (ball payout management server), and the gaming value management device is configured to be able to send ball payout management information to the external ball payout management device via a communication device and the external gaming value providing device. Here, the ball payout management information is made up of various pieces of information necessary to enable the external ball payout management device to manage ball payouts. An example of ball payout management information will be described later. The external gaming value providing device and the external ball payout management device are connected, for example, by an internet line.

Here, "balls paid out" directly refers to the number of gaming media paid out, but in this embodiment, the concept also includes, for example, the difference (net increase) between the number of payouts and the number of bets, the degree of benefit given to the player (for example, how much the player gained (how much the gaming establishment lost), or how much the player lost (how much the gaming establishment gained), etc.), the duration of an advantageous state (for example, a bonus state, an AT state, or a series of advantageous periods, etc.), or the degree of gambling potential assumed by a combination of these.

Also, for example, a retained game value number display device (not shown) that displays the number of retained game values may be provided on the front side of the pachislot machine 1, and the game value management device may manage the number of game values displayed on this retained game value number display device based on the management results of the number of game values. In other words, the game value management device may not only record the total number of game values that a player can use for play by electromagnetic means, but may also be configured to be able to control the display of the recorded results. In this case, it is desirable that the game value management device have the ability to allow a player to freely transmit a signal indicating the recorded number of game values to an external game value providing device, and also have the ability to prevent the recorded number of game values from being reduced except by direct operation by the player, and also have the ability to transmit a signal indicating the recorded number of game values only via a communications device.

The gaming value management device may not only have the function of electromagnetically managing a player's gaming value using an external gaming value providing device, but also the function of managing the number of gaming values bet by the player's physical actions and the number of gaming values paid out by the physical actions of the pachislot machine 1. In other words, it may also be capable of managing the actual insertion and payout of medals in a conventional pachislot machine 1. In this way, the pachislot machine 1 can be controlled using conventional methods, or using methods similar to those of the medal-less gaming machine described above, allowing for a common configuration regardless of the specifications of the pachislot machine 1. In this case, the gaming value management device may directly control the selector 31 and hopper device 32 described above, or it may indirectly control these by controlling them using the main control circuit 100 (main control board 71) and transmitting the control results.

In addition to the above, the pachislot machine 1 may be provided with various operating means necessary for the operation of a medal-less gaming machine, such as a lending operating means and a return (settlement) operating means that can be operated by the player. The gaming value providing device may be provided with various operating means necessary for the operation of a medal-less gaming machine, such as a lending operating means and a return operating means that can be operated by the player, in addition to various devices such as an insertion slot for valuables such as banknotes, an insertion slot for recording media (e.g., IC cards), and a contactless communication antenna for depositing electronic money from a mobile terminal (all not shown). Insertable recording media include not only non-member recording media issued by gaming establishments on the same day, but member recording media held by members of the gaming establishment. Gaming value recorded on non-member recording media is valid only for the day (it becomes invalid from the following day onwards), but gaming value recorded on member recording media is valid from the following day onwards.

An example of the flow of play in this case will be explained below. For example, first, the player deposits valuable value into the game value providing device using one of the methods. The game value providing device subtracts a predetermined amount of valuable value in response to the player's operation of one of the lending operation means, and provides the game value corresponding to the subtracted value to the pachislot machine 1. The player then plays, and if more game value is required, repeats the above operation. Thereafter, when the player has acquired a predetermined amount of game value as a result of the game and wishes to end the game, the player operates one of the return operation means. The game value management device transmits the number of game values to the game value providing device in response to the player's operation of one of the return operation means. The game value providing device ejects the recording medium on which the transmitted number of game values is recorded. When the game value number has been transmitted, the game value management device clears the number of game values stored in itself. The player can take the ejected recording medium to a prize exchange center or the like to exchange it for a prize, or can move to another pachislot machine 1 and continue playing by inserting the ejected recording medium into a game value providing device corresponding to the other machine. Also, if the ejected recording medium is a member's recording medium, it will remain valid from the next day onwards, so the player can stop playing here.

In the above example, the game value management device transmits the total number of game values to the game value providing device in response to the player's return operation. However, the device may be configured to transmit only the number of game values desired by the player depending on the manner of the player's return operation. In other words, the game value held by the player may be divided. Furthermore, while the game value providing device records the transmitted number of game values on a recording medium and dispenses it, it may transmit information of the same value to the player's mobile terminal using the above-mentioned non-contact communication antenna, or may dispense, for example, cash or a cash equivalent, as long as it provides the player with something of equivalent value.

The pachislot machine 1 or the gaming value providing device may also be provided with a lock operation means that can be operated by the player, and in response to an operation on this lock operation means, the gaming value management device and the gaming value providing device may be controlled to a state (locked state) in which communication between them is disabled. In this case, the pachislot machine 1 or the gaming value providing device may be configured to perform authentication processes such as setting a PIN (and inputting the set PIN), issuing a one-time password (and inputting the issued one-time password), or biometric authentication, and the locked state may be released if the results of the authentication process are normal.

With the medal-less gaming machine described so far, compared to when gaming media are physically provided for play, there is no need to provide some external structures such as the medal insertion slot 5 and medal payout outlet 11, or some internal structures such as the selector 31 and hopper device 32. This not only reduces the cost and manufacturing costs of the gaming machine, but also reduces the power consumption of the gaming machine. Furthermore, since it is more difficult to access the inside of the gaming machine, fraudulent activity against the gaming machine can be prevented. Furthermore, because players do not come into direct contact with the gaming media, the gaming environment is improved and noise can be reduced. In other words, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can improve various aspects of the environment surrounding the gaming machine.

(Example of medal-less gaming machine configuration)
Next, a configuration example in which the pachislot machine 1 is configured as a medal-less gaming machine will be described with reference to Fig. 34. Fig. 34 is a diagram showing an example of the configuration of a medal-less gaming machine. Note that, hereinafter, a configuration example in which a medal count control board (game value management device) is provided will be mainly described.

As described above, the medal count control board is connected to the main control board 71 and manages the number of medals (game value count) held by the player. The medal count control board is also connected to the communications-only unit (game value providing device) via a connection terminal board (communication device). The medal count control board also transmits ball payout management information to the ball payout management device via the connection terminal board and communications-only unit. The medal count control board is also equipped with a medal count control circuit (not shown). The medal count control circuit is also composed of, for example, a medal count control CPU (not shown), a medal count control ROM (not shown), and a medal count control RWM (not shown).

The ball payout management device is, for example, a server for managing ball payouts managed by an association (information center) to which the gaming machine manufacturer belongs, and is provided for the purpose of making it possible to monitor whether the gambling nature of each gaming machine is appropriate (ball payout performance) by storing the transmitted ball payout management information in the ball payout management device.

From this perspective, the medal count control board and connection terminal board, like the main control board 71, perform important functions in the pachislot machine 1, and therefore must be installed inside the pachislot machine 1 in a manner that prevents fraudulent acts and unauthorized modifications. Configuration example 1 and configuration example 2 shown in Figure 34 show examples of such a configuration.

<Configuration Example 1>
Configuration example 1 shown in Figure 34 shows that the medal count control board and connection terminal board are housed in the main control board case, similar to the main control board 71. Here, the main control board case is usually sealed in various ways to make it difficult to open (or remove) it, or to make it possible to recognize traces of it having been opened (or the number of times it has been opened) (for example, sealing with crimping, affixing a sealing sticker, or affixing a crimping sticker that records when the crimping has been cut, etc.).

Therefore, by housing the medal count control board and connection terminal board within the main control board case, the same security effect as the main control board 71 can be achieved, and fraudulent acts and unauthorized modifications can be appropriately prevented.

<Configuration Example 2>
Configuration example 2 shown in Figure 34 shows that the medal count control board and connection terminal board are housed in a medal count control board case that is provided separately from the main control board case, unlike the above-mentioned configuration example 1. Note that the medal count control board case is configured as a transparent (or nearly transparent) resin case like the main control board case, and the medal count control board and connection terminal board housed therein are housed in a state where they can be easily seen.

Here, the medal count control board case of configuration example 2 can be configured to undergo the same sealing process as the main control board case, or it can be configured to undergo at least a partial sealing process. For example, the medal count control board case can be configured to be sealed by crimping, just like the main control board case, but without a sealing sticker. Also, for example, the main control board case may be required to use a predetermined crimping sticker, but the medal count control board case may be configured to allow the use of any sticker as the crimping sticker.

<Example of accumulated data>
The example of stored data shown in Figure 34 shows an example of various data stored in the ball-out management device. That is, it shows an example of ball-out management information that the medal count control board transmits to the ball-out management device via the connection terminal board and the communication-only unit. Note that this is merely an example, and it is also possible to configure the system so that some of the various information shown in Figure 34 is not transmitted, or to transmit information other than the various information shown in Figure 34.

Furthermore, the timing at which the medal count control board sends information to the communication-only unit can be arbitrary, and the timing at which the communication-only unit sends information to the ball payout management device can also be arbitrary. As long as the ball payout management device is able to monitor the ball payout performance of each gaming machine at least once per unit (for example, one business day of an amusement parlor), the information may be sent at any timing. For example, the timing at which the medal count control board sends information to the communication-only unit may be different from the timing at which the communication-only unit sends information to the ball payout management device. Also, for example, the timing at which the medal count control board sends information to the communication-only unit may differ depending on the type of information.

The accumulated data "total number of inserted coins" is the cumulative number of coins inserted per unit since each gaming machine was powered on. For example, the medal count control board transmits information on the number of game value coins bet by the player through betting operations, excluding those bets made through the replay operation, to the communication-only unit at a predetermined timing (e.g., for each unit of play), and the communication-only unit transmits the cumulative total of this information to the ball-out management device at a predetermined timing (e.g., when the gaming facility closes for business).

The accumulated data "total payout number" is the cumulative number of payouts per unit since each gaming machine was powered on. For example, the medal count control board transmits information on the number of game values awarded by the gaming machine's payout process, excluding those awarded by the replay operation, to the communications-only unit at a predetermined timing (e.g., for each unit play), and the communications-only unit transmits the cumulative total of this information to the payout management device at a predetermined timing (e.g., when the gaming facility closes for business).

The accumulated data "MY" is the maximum difference in number of coins that occurred during one unit after each gaming machine was powered on (in other words, the difference in number of coins obtained during the period in which the gaming value increased the most during one unit; this is referred to as "MY"). For example, the medal count control board calculates this maximum difference in number of coins and transmits the calculated information to the communications-only unit at a predetermined timing (for example, when the gaming establishment closes), and the communications-only unit transmits this information to the ball-out management device at a predetermined timing (for example, when the gaming establishment closes).

The accumulated data "total number of coins paid out from game devices" is the cumulative number of coins paid out per unit since the power to each gaming machine was turned on, and is also the cumulative number of coins paid out while various game devices are in operation. For example, the medal count control board transmits information about the number of game value awarded by the gaming machine's payout process while various game devices are in operation to the communications unit at a predetermined timing (for example, for each unit of play while various game devices are in operation), and the communications unit transmits the cumulative total of this information to the ball payout management device at a predetermined timing (for example, when the gaming facility closes for business).

The accumulated data "total number of consecutive feature payouts" is the cumulative number of payouts per unit since each gaming machine was powered on, and is also the cumulative number of payouts paid out while the consecutive feature (RB, including RB while BB is in operation) is in operation. For example, the medal count control board transmits information about the number of game value awarded by the gaming machine's payout process while the consecutive feature is in operation to the communications unit at a predetermined timing (for example, for each unit of play while the consecutive feature is in operation), and the communications unit transmits the cumulative total of this information to the ball payout management device at a predetermined timing (for example, when the gaming facility closes for business).

The medal count control board also transmits various types of information that can be displayed on the role ratio monitor device 54 to the communications unit at predetermined times (e.g., at the time of calculation by the role ratio monitor device 54), and the communications unit then transmits the information to the payout management device at predetermined times (e.g., at the time of transmission from the medal count control board). The accumulated data "role ratio" corresponds, for example, to the role ratio information described above; the accumulated data "sequential role ratio" corresponds, for example, to the consecutive role ratio information described above; the accumulated data "advantageous zone ratio" corresponds, for example, to the specific zone ratio information described above; the accumulated data "role ratio with instructions" corresponds, for example, to the role ratio information described above that is aggregated and calculated even during the AT state; and the accumulated data "role, etc. state ratio" corresponds, for example, to the specific zone ratio information that is aggregated and calculated even while various roles are in operation.

The accumulated data "number of plays" is the cumulative number of plays per unit since each gaming machine was powered on. For example, the medal count control board transmits information on the number of plays played to the communications unit at a predetermined timing (e.g., for each unit play), and the communications unit transmits the cumulative total of this information to the ball payout management device at a predetermined timing (e.g., when the gaming facility closes for business).

The stored data "main control chip ID number" is the individual identification number (also known as "CPU ID"; hereinafter referred to as the "chip ID number") of the main control circuit 100 of each gaming machine. For example, when the medal count control board sends various information to the communication-only unit, it sends information including this individual identification number, and when the communication-only unit sends various information to the ball payout management device, it sends information including this individual identification number.

The stored data "main control chip manufacturer code" is a manufacturer code recorded in the management area of the main ROM 102 of the main control circuit 100 of each gaming machine. For example, when the medal count control board sends various information to the communication-only unit, it sends information including this manufacturer code, and when the communication-only unit sends various information to the ball payout management device, it sends information including the manufacturer code it received.

The stored data "main control chip product code" is a product code recorded in the management area of the main ROM 102 of the main control circuit 100 of each gaming machine. For example, when the medal count control board sends various information to the communication-only unit, it sends information including this product code, and when the communication-only unit sends various information to the ball payout management device, it sends information including the product code it received.

The stored data "medal count control chip ID number" is the individual identification number of the medal count control circuit of each gaming machine. For example, when the medal count control board sends various information to the communication-only unit, it sends information including this individual identification number, and when the communication-only unit sends various information to the ball payout management device, it sends information including this individual identification number. Note that if a medal count control board is not provided and various information is sent to the communication-only unit by the main control board 71, this information will be "0".

The stored data "medal count control chip manufacturer code" is a manufacturer code recorded in the management area of the medal count control ROM of the medal count control circuit of each gaming machine. For example, when the medal count control board sends various information to the communication-only unit, it sends information including this manufacturer code, and when the communication-only unit sends various information to the ball payout management device, it sends information including this manufacturer code. Note that if a medal count control board is not provided and various information is sent to the communication-only unit by the main control board 71, this information will be "0".

The stored data "medal count control chip product code" is a product code recorded in the management area of the medal count control ROM of the medal count control circuit of each gaming machine. For example, when the medal count control board sends various information to the communications-only unit, it sends information including this product code, and when the communications-only unit sends various information to the ball payout management device, it sends information including this transmitted product code. Note that if a medal count control board is not provided and various information is transmitted to the communications-only unit by the main control board 71, this information will be "0".

In this way, the ball dispensing management device is able to store various types of information (ball dispensing management information) transmitted from gaming machines. Furthermore, the ball dispensing management information includes multiple pieces of individual identification information (for example, the aforementioned "main control chip ID number" through "medal count control chip product code") that can identify individual gaming machines. Therefore, the ball dispensing management device can identify the gaming machine that sent the information using this individual identification information, and if, for example, the correspondence between the "main control chip ID number" and the "medal count control chip ID number" changes over time, it can recognize the possibility that one of the control boards has been replaced (i.e., the possibility that fraud or unauthorized modification has occurred).

In addition, the payout management information includes multiple pieces of payout information (for example, the above-mentioned "total number of coins inserted" to "number of games played") that can identify the payout performance per unit. Therefore, the payout management device can use this payout information to determine whether the gambling nature of the gaming machine that sent the information is within an appropriate range. For example, if the "total number of coins paid out" or "ratio of devices with instructions" suddenly becomes significantly high, it can determine the possibility that fraud or unauthorized modifications have occurred, or that there may have been some kind of flaw in the original specification design.

If the ball payout management device recognizes the above-mentioned possibility, it is expected that the gaming parlor or gaming machine manufacturer will be notified of the result and appropriate measures will be taken. In other words, by building a management system that includes multiple managed gaming machines, a gaming value providing device (a communication-only unit) that transmits ball payout management information sent from the managed gaming machines to the ball payout management device, and a ball payout management device that manages the ball payout performance of each managed gaming machine based on the transmitted ball payout management information, it becomes possible to properly manage all managed gaming machines under its management.

<Modification 1>
As described above, medal-less gaming machines can be configured so that the number of game values held by a player is managed by a medal count control board. Therefore, a medal count monitor device (not shown) may be provided on the medal count control board so that the gaming parlor manager can grasp such management status and other information.

The medal count monitor device is, for example, composed of a four-digit, seven-segment LED, and is provided inside the medal count control board case. The medal count monitor device sequentially displays various information (for example, some or all of the above-mentioned ball payout management information) related to the number of gaming values tallied and calculated by the medal count control CPU (or it may be the main CPU 101). Note that if the medal count monitor device displays all of the display contents of the role ratio monitor device 54, the role ratio monitor device 54 need not be provided. Alternatively, the role ratio monitor device 54 may be configured to double as a medal count monitor device.

The medal count monitor device may be mounted on the medal count control board, or on another board (for example, a connection terminal board) connected to the medal count control board. It may also be installed elsewhere within the cabinet G. For example, it may be installed on the medal count control board case. A management switch for starting the display on the medal count monitor device or switching its content may also be installed within the cabinet G, and various information may be displayed when this switch is operated. Furthermore, assuming the use of such a management switch, for example, the information display device 14 may also be configured to function as the medal count monitor device.

The medal count monitor device may also be configured to display the type of error that has occurred when any of the various error conditions related to the device occur. For example, if a communication error occurs with the main control board 71, a communication error occurs with the connection terminal board, a communication error occurs with the gaming value providing device, or an abnormality occurs in the medal count control RWM, the corresponding numerical value may be displayed. In this case, to enable the gaming facility manager to easily recognize which error condition the displayed numerical value corresponds to, an explanatory section (such as a sticker or printed text) indicating the correspondence may be provided on or near the medal count control board case.

<Modification 2>
As described above, in a medalless gaming machine, the medal count control board can be configured to transmit ball management information to the outside via a connection terminal board. Here, in this embodiment, an external centralized terminal board 55 is also provided to transmit information to the outside. Therefore, the connection terminal board and the external centralized terminal board 55 can be configured, for example, as follows.

For example, the connection terminal board and the external centralized terminal board 55 can be configured as a common terminal board. This not only reduces the number of parts, but also the amount of wiring directed to the outside, thereby improving security.

Also, for example, the connection terminal board and the external centralized terminal board 55 are configured as a single unit. Also, for example, the connection terminal board and the external centralized terminal board 55 are arranged close to each other at least within the cabinet G. This improves work efficiency when connecting. Furthermore, the length of the wiring can be kept constant and the wiring locations can be limited, thereby improving security.

<Modification 3>
As described above, medalless gaming machines can be configured to transmit ball payout management information to a ball payout management device. Furthermore, the ball payout management device can appropriately manage the ball payout performance of each medalless gaming machine based on the transmitted ball payout management information. Therefore, assuming that ball payout performance can be appropriately managed in this manner, the above-mentioned limiter may not be provided. In other words, the machine may not have the function of forcibly terminating the advantageous zone when certain regulatory conditions are met.

Furthermore, the medal count control board may be equipped with a function for appropriately managing ball output performance, and on the assumption that ball output performance can be appropriately managed in this way, the above-mentioned limiter may not be provided. In other words, the machine may not have a function for forcibly ending the advantageous zone when certain regulatory conditions are met.

For example, the medal count control board is configured to include a ball output monitoring RWM (which may be the medal count control RWM described above, or a separate RWM). The ball output monitoring RWM is initialized, for example, when settings are changed, but is not initialized when a favorable zone ends, thereby monitoring ball output. If the monitored ball output exceeds a certain threshold, control may be exercised to reduce ball output performance, for example, by reducing the probability of a navigation occurring, reducing the probability that the AT state will be extended, or even ending the AT state itself, without forcibly ending the favorable zone itself. This also makes it possible to appropriately manage ball output performance. Note that in this case, such control results may be sent to the ball output management device as ball output management information. In other words, both the medal count control board and the ball output management device may be configured to manage the ball output performance of each medalless gaming machine.

(Example of the main control board configuration of a pachislot machine)
Next, a configuration example of the main control board 71 of the pachislot machine 1 will be described with reference to Fig. 35. Fig. 35 is a diagram showing an example of the configuration of the main control board 71. Note that, hereinafter, a configuration example of the reuse (reuse) of the main control board 71 will be mainly described.

As mentioned above, there are various restrictions on the specifications of the main control board 71 in pachislot machines 1, one of which is that the manufacturer's name and board control number must be printed on the main control board 71. The manufacturer's name is the name of the gaming machine manufacturer that produces pachislot machine 1, and the control number is a number that identifies the model of the main control board 71.

<Configuration Example 1>
Configuration example 1 shown in FIG. 35 shows that the manufacturer's name and board reference number are printed in text on the main control board 71, as in the past. In this configuration example 1 shown in FIG. 35, it is assumed that a pachislot machine 1 (hereinafter referred to as "model A") equipped with the main control board 71 is first manufactured by BB Co., Ltd. Initially, only the manufacturer's name "BB Co., Ltd." and the board reference number "BB-00-11-22" are printed in the lower row. If model A is subsequently removed from the gaming parlor and, for example, AA Co., Ltd. attempts to reuse the main control board 71 to manufacture a different pachislot machine 1 (hereinafter referred to as "model B"), AA Co., Ltd. must laser engrave the printed manufacturer's name and board reference number in the lower row and newly print their own serial number and board reference number in a different space (for example, the manufacturer's name "AA Co., Ltd." and the board reference number "AA-00-11-22" in the upper row of configuration example 1 shown in FIG. 35).

If model B is subsequently removed from the gaming parlor, and, for example, BB Co., Ltd. were to reuse the main control board 71 to manufacture a different pachislot machine 1 (hereinafter referred to as "model C"), BB Co., Ltd. would have to laser engrave the manufacturer's name and board control number printed on the top line and print a new serial number and board control number related to their company in a different space. However, since there is no more free space in configuration example 1 shown in Figure 35, there is a problem in that, even though the hardware is still fully reusable, the main control board 71 may not be able to be reused due to the constraints described above.

This is also true if multiple manufacturer names and board control numbers are printed on the board from the beginning. For example, even if the serial numbers and board control numbers for both AA Co., Ltd. and BB Co., Ltd. are printed on the board in advance, the serial number and board control number for AA Co., Ltd. will be erased by laser engraving when Model A is manufactured. Therefore, while it may be possible for BB Co., Ltd. to reuse it, it will no longer be possible for AA Co., Ltd. to reuse it. In contrast, the following configuration examples 2 and 3 are expected to solve the above-mentioned problems. In other words, it is possible to increase the reusability of boards used to control games, such as the main control board 71.

<Configuration Example 2>
Configuration example 2 shown in Figure 35 shows that a code including the manufacturer's name and board control number is printed. Note that in configuration example 2 shown in Figure 35, a QR code (registered trademark), which is a two-dimensional code, is used as an example of the code including the manufacturer's name and board control number, but a JAN code (bar code) or other code can also be used. In other words, the code may be any type as long as it includes information that allows a checker to uniquely identify the manufacturer's name and board control number using some means (for example, a mobile terminal, etc.).

In configuration example 2 shown in Figure 35, if model A is manufactured by BB Co., Ltd., the first code from the right is printed. The first code from the right contains information that can identify the manufacturing number and board control number associated with BB Co., Ltd. After that, when model A is removed from the gaming facility and, for example, AA Co., Ltd. attempts to manufacture model B, the second code from the right is printed and the first code from the right is erased by laser engraving. The second code from the right contains information that can identify the manufacturing number and board control number associated with AA Co., Ltd.

If model B is subsequently removed from the gaming facility and, for example, BB Co., Ltd. attempts to manufacture model C, the third code from the right is printed and the second code from the right is erased by laser engraving. The third code from the right contains information that can identify the serial number and board control number associated with BB Co., Ltd. If model C is subsequently removed from the gaming facility and, for example, AA Co., Ltd. attempts to reuse the main control board 71 to manufacture a different pachislot machine 1, AA Co., Ltd. can erase the third code from the right by laser engraving and print the fourth code from the right, which contains information that can identify the serial number and board control number associated with AA Co., Ltd., thereby making it possible to reuse the main control board 71 in an even newer pachislot machine 1.

In other words, in configuration example 2 shown in Figure 35, by printing a code including the manufacturer's name and board control number, it is possible to save printing space for each manufacturer's name and board control number on the surface of the main control board 71, making it possible to increase its reusability compared to configuration example 1 shown in Figure 35.

<Configuration Example 3>
Configuration example 3 shown in FIG. 35 , like configuration example 2 described above, illustrates printing a code including the manufacturer's name and board control number. Note that in configuration example 3 shown in FIG. 35 , multiple codes (e.g., four) are printed from the beginning. For example, two codes are printed for each of AA Co., Ltd. and BB Co., Ltd. Furthermore, on the surface of the main control board 71 (or on the corresponding main control board case), the locations corresponding to each code can be crimped with, for example, a strip-shaped member, etc., to fix the code in an unreadable state. Furthermore, for example, by cutting the strip-shaped member, etc., the fixation can be released, making the code readable.

In configuration example 3 shown in Figure 35, when model A is first assumed to be manufactured by BB Co., Ltd., only the first code from the right is readable, and the second to fourth codes from the right are unreadable. The first code from the right contains information that can identify the manufacturing number and board control number associated with BB Co., Ltd. Later, when model A is removed from the gaming facility and, for example, AA Co., Ltd. attempts to manufacture model B, only the second code from the right is readable, and the first, third, and fourth codes from the right are unreadable. The second code from the right contains information that can identify the manufacturing number and board control number associated with AA Co., Ltd.

If model B is subsequently removed from the gaming facility and, for example, BB Co., Ltd. attempts to manufacture model C, only the third code from the right will be made readable, and the first, second, and fourth codes from the right will be made unreadable. The third code from the right contains information that can identify the manufacturing number and board control number associated with BB Co., Ltd. If model C is subsequently removed from the gaming facility and, for example, AA Co., Ltd. attempts to reuse the main control board 71 to manufacture a different pachislot machine 1, AA can make only the fourth code from the right readable and the first through third codes from the right unreadable, thereby enabling them to reuse the main control board 71 in an even newer pachislot machine 1.

Furthermore, in configuration example 3 shown in Figure 35, it is sufficient to make at least one code readable and the other codes unreadable, which allows for further reuse and allows for reuse by a greater number of gaming machine manufacturers. Note that configuration example 3 shown in Figure 35 can also be configured so that only crimping holes are provided and codes are printed in the locations corresponding to the crimping holes each time the machine is reused.

Second Embodiment
The first embodiment has been described above. A second embodiment will now be described. The basic configuration of the pachislot machine 1 according to the second embodiment is the same as that of the pachislot machine 1 according to the first embodiment. In the following, components that are the same as those of the pachislot machine 1 according to the first embodiment will be described with the same reference numerals. Furthermore, explanations of portions that apply to the second embodiment as well as the first embodiment will be omitted.

Note that even if the above description contains statements that are limited to the pachislot machine 1 of the first embodiment, such as "In the first embodiment, ..." or "In the pachislot machine 1 of the first embodiment, ...," they can also be applied to the pachislot machine 1 of the second embodiment, provided that they do not deviate from the spirit of the second embodiment. Therefore, each configuration shown in the first embodiment (including each configuration shown in the modified example and the extended example) can be partially replaced with or combined with the configuration shown in the second embodiment.

Furthermore, even if a component has a different shape from the pachislot machine 1 according to the first embodiment, components with similar functions may be assigned the same reference numerals for convenience. Furthermore, even if a component has the same shape or the same processing as the pachislot machine 1 according to the first embodiment, different reference numerals or step numbers may be assigned for convenience.

<Rock performance>
FIG. 36 is a diagram showing an example of a lock effect. FIG. 37 is a diagram showing a specific aspect of a lock effect corresponding to lock effect number "1". FIG. 38 is a diagram showing a specific aspect of a lock effect corresponding to lock effect number "2". FIG. 39 is a diagram showing a specific aspect of a lock effect corresponding to lock effect number "3". FIG. 40 is a diagram showing a specific aspect of a lock effect corresponding to lock effect number "4". FIG. 41 is a diagram showing a specific aspect of a lock effect corresponding to lock effect number "5". FIG. 42 is a diagram showing a specific aspect of a lock effect corresponding to lock effect number "6".

As explained in the first embodiment, the lock effect is an effect that stops the progress of the game for a predetermined period of time (disables the player's game operations for a predetermined period of time). In this embodiment, as in the first embodiment, it is possible to execute reel effects or simulated games while the lock effect is being executed.

As explained in the first embodiment, reel effects are produced by spinning or stopping (temporarily stopping) each reel 3L, 3C, and 3R without the player's input during a period in which the player's input is disabled. Furthermore, pseudo-game effects are produced by accepting the player's input in a simulated manner during a period in which the player's input is disabled, thereby spinning or stopping (temporarily stopping) each reel 3L, 3C, and 3R.

Note that in lock effects (reel effects or simulated games), a combination of symbols may be displayed in a static state, but no special benefits will be awarded to the player based on that combination of symbols being displayed in a static state. For example, even if the combination of symbols displayed in a reel effect or simulated game matches a combination of symbols specified in the symbol combination table (see Figures 11 to 14), no medals will be paid out according to that combination of symbols.

Furthermore, for example, in this embodiment, when a specific symbol combination (for example, a line of red 7s) is stopped and displayed in the reel presentation or simulated game, a transition to the AT state may occur. However, this merely notifies (suggests) that a decision has been made to transition to the AT state via a specific symbol combination (for example, a line of red 7s) in a state where a transition to the AT state has already been decided; it does not mean that a decision has been made to transition to the AT state in response to a specific symbol combination (for example, a line of red 7s) being stopped and displayed.

In this embodiment, the lock effects shown in Figure 36 (lock effects corresponding to lock effect numbers "1" to "6") are provided as such lock effects. The lock effects corresponding to lock effect numbers "1" to "6" are each composed of one of the lock effects (i) to (iv) below, or a combination of two of these lock effects.

(i) "Red 7" symbols line up in the reel effect (ii) "Red 7" symbols do not line up in the reel effect (iii) "Red 7" symbols line up in the pseudo game (iv) "Red 7" symbols do not line up in the pseudo game In the lock effect corresponding to lock effect number "1", the effect (i) above is performed. In the lock effect corresponding to lock effect number "2", the effect (ii) above is performed. In the lock effect corresponding to lock effect number "3", the effect (iii) above is performed. In the lock effect corresponding to lock effect number "4", the effect (iv) above is performed. In the lock effect corresponding to lock effect number "5", the effect (iv) above is performed, followed by the effect (i). In the lock effect corresponding to lock effect number "6", the effect (ii) above is performed, followed by the effect (iii).

In this embodiment, the same symbol arrangement table (see Figure 9) as in the first embodiment is used, with the "Red 7" positioned at symbol position "0." Figures 37 to 42 also show numbers indicating the symbol positions corresponding to the symbols that are stopped and displayed.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 37, in the lock effect corresponding to lock effect number "1," after the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R start to spin (see FIG. 37(a)), the right reel 3R stops spinning (automatically) without the player's stopping operation, and a "red 7" is displayed as a stopped symbol in the middle area of the right reel 3R (see FIG. 37(b)). Next, the center reel 3C stops spinning (automatically) without the player's stopping operation, and a "red 7" is displayed as a stopped symbol in the middle area of the center reel 3C (see FIG. 37(c)). Then, the left reel 3L stops spinning (automatically) without the player's stopping operation, and a "red 7" is displayed as a stopped symbol in the middle area of the left reel 3L (see FIG. 37(d)).

As shown in Figure 38, in the lock effect corresponding to lock effect number "2," after the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R begin to spin (see Figure 38(a)), the right reel 3R stops spinning (automatically) without the player's stopping operation, and a "red 7" is displayed in the middle area of the right reel 3R (see Figure 38(b)). Next, the center reel 3C stops spinning (automatically) without the player's stopping operation, and a "red 7" is displayed in the middle area of the center reel 3C (see Figure 38(c)). Then, the left reel 3L stops spinning (automatically) without the player's stopping operation, and a symbol other than the "red 7" (in this example, a "white blank 1") is displayed in the middle area of the left reel 3L (see Figure 38(d)).

As shown in Figure 39, in the lock effect corresponding to lock effect number "3," after the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R start to spin (see Figure 39(a)), the right reel 3R stops spinning in response to a stop operation on the right reel 3R, and a "red 7" is displayed as a stopped symbol in the middle area of the right reel 3R (see Figure 39(b)). In this state, the right reel 3R swings at a predetermined timing. Next, the center reel 3C stops spinning in response to a stop operation on the center reel 3C, and a "red 7" is displayed as a stopped symbol in the middle area of the center reel 3C (see Figure 39(c)). In this state, the center reel 3C swings at a predetermined timing, and the swinging of the right reel 3R also continues. Then, the left reel 3L stops spinning in response to a stop operation on the left reel 3L, and a "red 7" is displayed as a stopped symbol in the middle area of the left reel 3L (see Figure 39(d)). In this state, the left reel 3L swings at a predetermined timing, and the right reel 3R and center reel 3C also continue to swing.

As shown in Figure 40, in the lock effect corresponding to lock effect number "4," after the rotation of each reel 3L, 3C, and 3R begins (see Figure 40(a)), the rotation of the right reel 3R stops in response to a stop operation on the right reel 3R, and a "red 7" is displayed as a stopped symbol in the middle area of the right reel 3R (see Figure 40(b)). In this state, the right reel 3R swings at a predetermined timing. Next, the rotation of the center reel 3C stops in response to a stop operation on the center reel 3C, and a "red 7" is displayed as a stopped symbol in the middle area of the center reel 3C (see Figure 40(c)). In this state, the center reel 3C swings at a predetermined timing, and the swing of the right reel 3R also continues. Then, the rotation of the left reel 3L stops in response to a stop operation on the left reel 3L, and a symbol other than the "red 7" (in this example, a "white blank 1") is displayed as a stopped symbol in the middle area of the left reel 3L (see Figure 40(d)). In this state, the left reel 3L swings at a predetermined timing, and the right reel 3R and center reel 3C also continue to swing.

As shown in Figure 41, in the lock effect corresponding to lock effect number "5," after the rotation of each reel 3L, 3C, and 3R begins (see Figure 41(a)), the rotation of the right reel 3R stops in response to a stop operation on the right reel 3R, and a "red 7" is displayed as a stopped symbol in the middle area of the right reel 3R (see Figure 41(b)). In this state, the right reel 3R swings at a predetermined timing. Next, the rotation of the center reel 3C stops in response to a stop operation on the center reel 3C, and a "red 7" is displayed as a stopped symbol in the middle area of the center reel 3C (see Figure 41(c)). In this state, the center reel 3C swings at a predetermined timing, and the swing of the right reel 3R also continues. Then, the rotation of the left reel 3L stops in response to a stop operation on the left reel 3L, and a symbol other than the "red 7" (in this example, a "white blank 1") is displayed as a stopped symbol in the middle area of the left reel 3L (see Figure 41(d)). In this state, the left reel 3L swings at a predetermined timing, and the right reel 3R and center reel 3C continue to swing. After that, the left reel 3L spins again (see Figure 41(e)), and the left reel 3L stops spinning (automatically) without the player performing a stopping operation, and a "red 7" is displayed as a stopped symbol in the middle area of the left reel 3L (see Figure 41(f)). In this state, the left reel 3L swings at a predetermined timing, and the right reel 3R and center reel 3C continue to swing.

As shown in Figure 42, in the lock effect corresponding to lock effect number "6," after each of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R begins to spin (see Figure 42(a)), the right reel 3R stops spinning (automatically) without the player's stopping operation, and a "red 7" is displayed as a stopped symbol in the middle area of the right reel 3R (see Figure 42(b)). Next, the center reel 3C stops spinning (automatically) without the player's stopping operation, and a "red 7" is displayed as a stopped symbol in the middle area of the center reel 3C (see Figure 42(c)). Then, the left reel 3L stops spinning (automatically) without the player's stopping operation, and a symbol other than the "red 7" (in this example, a "white blank 1") is displayed as a stopped symbol in the middle area of the left reel 3L (see Figure 42(d)). The left reel 3L then spins again (see Figure 42(e)), and stops spinning in response to a stop operation on the left reel 3L, with a "red 7" displayed as a static symbol in the middle area of the left reel 3L (see Figure 42(f)). In this state, the left reel 3L swings at a predetermined timing, while the right reel 3R and middle reel 3C do not swing. Note that after the "red 7" is displayed as a static symbol in the middle area of the left reel 3L, the right reel 3R and middle reel 3C may swing at a predetermined timing, similar to the left reel 3L.

<Lock effect determination process>
FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing the lock effect determination process carried out in the main control circuit.

The lock effect determination process shown in Figure 43 is performed by the main control circuit 100 after the process of step S6 (game start state control process) in Figure 23 (main process) is executed.

In the lock effect determination process, the main CPU 101 first determines whether the current game zone is an advantageous zone (step S1001). As explained in the first embodiment, an advantageous zone is a game period that can be controlled to a game state (AT state) in which information about stop operations that are advantageous to the player is notified. Advantageous zones include an effect zone (advantageous zone, normal game) and an increase zone (advantageous zone, pseudo bonus) (see Figure 5). An effect zone is a game state (non-AT state) in which information about stop operations that are advantageous to the player is not notified. It is similar to a non-advantageous zone in that it is a game state that is disadvantageous to the player, but differs from a non-advantageous zone in that a mode transition occurs. An increase zone is an AT state (a game state that is advantageous to the player).

If the main CPU 101 determines that the current gaming zone is not a favorable zone, it terminates this subroutine. On the other hand, if the main CPU 101 determines that the current gaming zone is a favorable zone, it determines whether or not a pseudo bonus is in progress (step S1002). As explained in the first embodiment, a pseudo bonus is a gaming state (AT state) in which information about stop operations that are favorable to the player is notified. The main CPU 101 can determine whether or not a pseudo bonus is in progress by referring to the mode flag storage area (see Figure 20) of the main RAM 103.

If it is determined that a pseudo bonus is in progress, the main CPU 101 determines whether the current game has transitioned to the pseudo bonus (step S1003). As explained in the first embodiment, when an internal winning combination is determined by the internal lottery process (see step S5 in FIG. 23), a sub-flag (see FIG. 7(a)) at the time of winning the advantageous zone is determined as secondary information (sub-flag) corresponding to the internal winning combination. Then, in the presentation zone (advantageous zone/normal play), the pseudo bonus transition lottery table (see FIG. 7(c)) is referenced, and a lottery (pseudo bonus transition lottery) is conducted based on the random number value and the sub-flag at the time of winning the advantageous zone, and the result of the pseudo bonus transition lottery is determined as "winning" or "not winning." The "winning" combination includes "winning (current play)" and "winning (next play)."

If a "winning lottery (current game)" is determined, for example, in step S106 of the processing at the start of play during the advantageous zone (see FIG. 28) for the current game (the game in which the pseudo bonus transition lottery was drawn), the bit corresponding to "pseudo bonus" in the mode flag storage area (see FIG. 20) is set to "1." As a result, if a "winning lottery (current game)" is determined, a transition will occur from the current game to the pseudo bonus. Similarly, if a "winning lottery (next game)" is determined, for example, in step S106 of the processing at the start of play during the advantageous zone (see FIG. 28) for the next game (the game following the game in which the pseudo bonus transition lottery was drawn), the bit corresponding to "pseudo bonus" in the mode flag storage area (see FIG. 20) is set to "1." As a result, if a "winning lottery (next game)" is determined, a transition will occur from the next game to the pseudo bonus.

If it is determined that the current game did not transition to the pseudo bonus, the main CPU 101 determines whether the 1G consecutive lottery was won (step S1004). As explained in the first embodiment, in the pseudo bonus, the 1G consecutive lottery table (see FIG. 7(d)) is referenced, and a lottery (1G consecutive lottery) is conducted based on the random number value and the sub-flag when the advantageous zone is won, and the result of the 1G consecutive lottery is determined to be "winning" or "not winning." As a "winning" result, "winning lottery (1G consecutive + 1)" is provided.

If "Winning (1G consecutive +1)" is determined, for example, in step S103 of the processing at the start of play during the advantageous zone (see FIG. 28), the right to generate 1G consecutive wins (1G consecutive stock) is granted (the 1G consecutive stock counter is incremented by 1). When the pseudo bonus ends, if the value of the 1G consecutive stock counter is 1 or greater (i.e., if 1G consecutive stocks are held), one 1G consecutive stock is consumed (the 1G consecutive stock counter is decremented by 1), and the pseudo bonus will start again from the next play after the pseudo bonus ends.

If it is determined in step S1003 that the current game has transitioned to the pseudo bonus, or if it is determined in step S1004 that the 1G consecutive lottery has been won, the main CPU 101 randomly selects one of the lock effect numbers "1" and "6" (see FIG. 36) (step S1005). The main CPU 101 then sets the lock effect start flag to ON (step S1006) and ends this subroutine. This results in a lock effect corresponding to the lock effect number "1" or "6." The lock effect corresponding to the lock effect number "1" or "6" is an effect equivalent to the "match red 7s" effect described in the first embodiment. Note that if the 1G consecutive lottery has been won, a lock effect different from the lock effect (the "match red 7s" effect) performed when the game transitions to the pseudo bonus (for example, the special bonus effect described in the first embodiment) may be performed.

If it is determined in step S1002 that a pseudo bonus is not in progress, the main CPU 101 determines whether the conditions for generating a special lock effect have been met (step S1007). As explained in the first embodiment, the special lock effect is an effect that can be executed with a predetermined probability when a "confirmed role" (see FIG. 7(a)) is determined as the sub-flag when a favorable zone is won, and a transition to Heaven C mode (see FIG. 6) is determined by the mode transition lottery (see FIG. 8(f)). In other words, the conditions for generating a special lock effect are that a "confirmed role" is determined as the sub-flag when a favorable zone is won, a transition to Heaven C mode is determined by the mode transition lottery, and the special lock effect generation lottery, which can be won with a predetermined probability, is won.

If the sub-flag indicates a "Confirmed Role" when a player wins the advantageous zone, the pseudo-bonus transition lottery always determines a "Winning Lottery (Next Play)" (see Figure 7(c)), confirming the transition to the pseudo-bonus. Heaven C mode is a mode in which consecutive pseudo-bonuses can be expected. When the pseudo-bonus starts, the ceiling shortening lottery table (see Figure 8(e)) is referenced, and a lottery based on a random number value (ceiling shortening lottery) is conducted, determining a "Winning Lottery" or "No Winning Lottery" as the result of the ceiling shortening lottery. If a "Winning Lottery" is determined, the ceiling game count is set to "0 games" when the pseudo-bonus ends. This means that the pseudo-bonus will start again from the next play after the pseudo-bonus ends. Heaven C mode is a mode in which a player can win the ceiling shortening lottery (heaven mode), and is also a mode in which heaven mode is likely to be maintained (a mode advantageous to the player).

If it is determined in step S1004 that the 1G consecutive lottery has not been won, or if it is determined in step S1007 that the conditions for generating the special lock effect have not been met, the main CPU 101 executes a lock effect lottery (step S1008). In this process, the main CPU 101 determines whether the result is a "win" or a "no win" by conducting a lottery based on a random number value. Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether the lock effect lottery has been won (step S1009). If it is determined that the lock effect lottery has not been won, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the lock effect lottery has been won, the main CPU 101 randomly selects one of the lock effect numbers "2" or "4" (see Figure 36) (step S1010). The main CPU 101 then sets the lock effect start flag to ON (step S1011) and ends this subroutine. This results in the lock effect (a so-called fake effect) corresponding to the lock effect number "2" or "4" being performed.

If it is determined in step S1007 that the conditions for generating the special lock effect have been met, the main CPU 101 randomly selects one of the lock effect numbers "3" and "5" (see Figure 36) (step S1012). The main CPU 101 then sets the lock effect start flag to ON (step S1013) and ends this subroutine. This causes the lock effect corresponding to the lock effect number "3" or "5" to be generated.

The lock effect corresponding to lock effect number "3" or "5" is equivalent to the special lock effect described in the first embodiment. As with the first embodiment, the special lock effect can be configured not to be executed if the degree of game progress (game history) during the advantageous zone meets certain conditions. Such game history can include the value of the advantageous zone game number counter, the value of the control game number counter, the value of the advantageous zone payout number counter, the value of the control payout number counter, etc. (values referenced in limit processing). An upper limit (limiter) is set for the duration of the advantageous zone, and limit processing is a process for ending the advantageous zone when the limiter is reached (see Figure 16).

In the lock effect determination process shown in Figure 43, it has been explained that if the pseudo-bonus transition lottery or the 1G consecutive lottery is won, a lock effect corresponding to lock effect number "1" or "6" will be performed (lock effects corresponding to lock effect numbers "3" and "5" will not be performed). However, in this embodiment, it may also be possible to perform a lock effect (special lock effect) corresponding to lock effect number "3" or "5" if the pseudo-bonus transition lottery or the 1G consecutive lottery is won. As explained in the first embodiment, when the semi-limit processing (number of games) or semi-limit processing (number of payouts) is activated, the 1G consecutive lottery will not be executed (see Figure 16). Furthermore, when the semi-limit processing (number of games) or semi-limit processing (number of payouts) is activated, the pseudo-bonus transition lottery may not be executed. When the pseudo bonus transition lottery and 1G consecutive lottery are no longer executed, the determination results in steps S1003, S1004, and S1007 in FIG. 43 all become "NO," and the lock effect is no longer executed. In this embodiment, for example, it is possible to configure the lock effect (pseudo game as a special lock effect) to no longer be executed when a variable in the advantageous zone (such as the value of the advantageous zone game count counter, the value of the control game count counter, the value of the advantageous zone payout counter, or the value of the control payout counter, or a value calculated based on these values and the value of the 1G consecutive stock counter) reaches a predetermined value or greater.

<Lock effect execution process>
Fig. 44 is a flowchart showing the lock effect execution process carried out in the main control circuit Fig. 45 is a diagram showing an example of an image displayed on the main display device in a pseudo game.

The lock effect execution process shown in Figure 44 is performed by the main control circuit 100 in step S8 (main effect control process at the start of play) of Figure 23 (main processing).

In the lock effect execution process, the main CPU 101 first determines whether the lock effect start flag (see steps S1006, S1011, and S1013 in FIG. 43) is set to on (step S1021). If it determines that the lock effect start flag is not set to on, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the lock effect start flag is set to on, the main CPU 101 executes a lock command generation and storage process (step S1022). In this process, the main CPU 101 generates lock command data and stores the generated lock command data in the communication data storage area of the main RAM 103. The lock command data stored in the communication data storage area is transmitted from the main control circuit 100 to the sub-control circuit 200 in the communication data transmission process (see step S204 in Figure 32). This enables the sub-control circuit 200 to recognize that reel locking has begun, and to determine the timing for executing various effects, etc.

Specifically, upon receiving the lock command data, the sub-control circuit 200 sets effect data corresponding to various lock effects. As a result, for example, if a lock effect corresponding to one of lock effect numbers "3" to "5" is selected in the lock effect determination process (see FIG. 43), the "Aim for 7" effect image 1100 shown in FIG. 45 is displayed on the main display device 210. The "Aim for 7" effect image 1100 is an image suggesting that the player should perform a stop operation in the order of "right reel 3R → center reel 3C → left reel 3L" and at the timing when a "red 7" symbol can be displayed on each reel 3L, 3C, and 3R. By displaying the "Aim for 7" effect image 1100, it is possible to have the player operate the stop buttons 8L, 8C, and 8R in the suggested order, thereby allowing the player to participate in a simulated game.

Next, the main CPU 101 sets the lock effect start flag to OFF (step S1023). Subsequently, the main CPU 101 executes a lock effect acceleration process (step S1024). In this process, the main CPU 101 requests the start of rotation of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R. When the start of rotation of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R is requested, the reel control process (see step S203 in FIG. 32) controls the drive of the stepping motor, and the rotation of each of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R begins. Then, each of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R accelerates until its rotation reaches a constant speed, and is then controlled to maintain that constant speed. Note that the rotational pattern of each of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R until the constant speed is reached is not limited to normal rotation (forward rotation) but may include reel actions such as slow rotation, high-speed rotation, reverse rotation, or a combination thereof. Additionally, each of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R may not be maintained in a constant rotational state, but may be decelerated immediately after reaching a predetermined speed.

In the reel control process (see step S203 in Figure 32), the main CPU 101 controls each stepping motor 51L, 51C, 51R by switching the excitation pattern of the excitation phase over time so that each reel 3L, 3C, 3R rotates and stops in the manner shown in Figures 37 to 42. When accelerating the rotation of reels 3L, 3C, 3R, the main CPU 101 outputs a pulse signal so that the excitation phase is excited based on the excitation pattern for acceleration. When rotating reels 3L, 3C, 3R at a constant speed, the main CPU 101 outputs a pulse signal so that the excitation phase is excited based on the excitation pattern for constant speed. When decelerating the rotation of reels 3L, 3C, 3R, the main CPU 101 outputs a pulse signal so that the excitation phase is excited based on the excitation pattern for deceleration. When reels 3L, 3C, and 3R are kept stopped, the main CPU 101 outputs pulse signals to excite the excitation phases based on the excitation pattern for stopping. When reels 3L, 3C, and 3R are swung, the main CPU 101 outputs pulse signals to excite the excitation phases based on the excitation pattern for swinging. Each excitation pattern is maintained for a predetermined time. This time is managed by the timer update process (see step S206 in Figure 32). The excitation method is not particularly limited, and two-phase excitation, one-two-phase excitation, or the like can be used as appropriate. Furthermore, stepping motors 51L, 51C, and 51R may be PM-type stepping motors or HB-type stepping motors. The drive method may be bipolar or unipolar.

After executing the processing of step S1024, the main CPU 101 determines whether the pseudo-game in progress flag is set to ON (step S1025). The pseudo-game in progress flag is a flag that indicates that a pseudo-game is being executed. Although not shown, if a lock effect corresponding to any of lock effect numbers "3" to "5" is selected, the main CPU 101 also performs processing to set the pseudo-game in progress flag to ON in the processing of step S1024. Furthermore, if a lock effect corresponding to lock effect number "6" is selected, the main CPU 101 sets the pseudo-game in progress flag to ON when it starts control to keep the left reel 3L stopped in the reel effect (see Figure 42 (d)) (when a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of rotation of each of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R).

If it is determined that the pseudo-game in-progress flag is set to ON, the main CPU 101 executes pseudo-game in-progress processing (step S1026). The pseudo-game in-progress processing will be described later using Figure 46.

If it is determined in step S1025 that the pseudo-game in progress flag is not set to ON, or after executing the processing of step S1026, the main CPU 101 determines whether the lock effect end flag is set to ON (step S1027). The lock effect end flag is a flag indicating that the lock effect has ended. Although not shown, if a lock effect corresponding to lock effect number "1" or "2" is selected, the main CPU 101 sets the lock effect end flag to ON when it starts control to maintain the left reel 3L in a stopped state (see Figures 37(d) and 38(d)) (when a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of rotation of each reel 3L, 3C, and 3R). Furthermore, if a lock effect corresponding to lock effect number "3" or "4" is selected, the main CPU 101 sets the lock effect end flag to ON (see step S1073 in FIG. 47) when it starts control to swing the left reel 3L (see FIGS. 39(d) and 40(d)) (when all stopping operations for the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R in the pseudo game are completed) or when it starts control to swing the left reel 3L that has stopped after the re-spinning (see FIG. 41(f)) or when a predetermined time has elapsed since the re-spinning of the left reel 3L or the left reel 3L was started or when it starts control to swing the left reel 3L that has stopped after the re-spinning (see step S1084 in FIG. 48). Furthermore, if the lock effect corresponding to lock effect number "6" is selected, the main CPU 101 sets the lock effect end flag to ON (see step S1112 in FIG. 49) when it starts control to swing the stopped left reel 3L after the respin (see FIG. 42(f)) (when the stopping operation for the left reel 3L in the pseudo game after the respin is completed).

If the main CPU 101 determines that the lock effect end flag is not set to ON, it returns the process to step S1025. On the other hand, if it determines that the lock effect end flag is set to ON, the main CPU 101 sets the random delay flag to ON (step S1028) and ends this subroutine. The random delay flag is a flag used for performing random delay processing. As explained in the first embodiment, random delay processing is processing for randomly generating a delay period for each reel 3L, 3C, and 3R after the lock effect before starting rotation, and is performed to prevent players from being prone to "eye-pressing" as a result of the lock effect. Details of the random delay processing will be explained later using Figure 51.

<Processing during pseudo-game play>
FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing the processing during pseudo-game play carried out in the main control circuit.

The pseudo-game processing shown in Figure 46 is processing performed by the main control circuit 100 in step S1026 of Figure 44 (lock effect execution processing).

In the simulated game processing, the main CPU 101 first determines whether the lock effect number selected in the lock effect determination processing (see Figure 43) is lock effect number "6" (step S1041).

If it is determined that the selected lock effect number is not lock effect number "6," the main CPU 101 executes normal pseudo game processing (step S1042). The normal pseudo game processing will be described later using FIG. 47. After executing the processing of step S1042, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

On the other hand, if the main CPU 101 determines that the selected lock effect number is lock effect number "6," it executes post-reel effect pseudo-game processing (step S1043). The post-reel effect pseudo-game processing will be described later using FIG. 49. After executing the processing of step S1043, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

<Normal pseudo-game processing>
FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing the normal pseudo-game processing performed in the main control circuit.

The normal pseudo-game processing shown in Figure 47 is processing performed by the main control circuit 100 in step S1042 of Figure 46 (pseudo-game processing).

In normal pseudo-game processing, the main CPU 101 first executes steps S1061 to S1068, which are essentially the same as steps S111 to S120 in Figure 29 (reel stop control processing).

Here, in the normal pseudo-game processing shown in FIG. 47, processing equivalent to steps S116 and S117 in FIG. 29 is not performed. That is, the number of sliding symbols (see step S117) is not determined, and in the processing of step S1066, the main CPU 101 determines and stores the predetermined position where the symbol will ultimately stop as the expected stop position, regardless of the stop start position (see step S116). As a result, each reel 3L, 3C, and 3R stops in the manner shown in FIGS. 39(b)-(d), 40(b)-(d), and 41(b)-(d). In the pseudo-game, predetermined symbols may be displayed in this manner regardless of the stop start position and the number of sliding symbols, or, similar to the reel stop control processing (in the main game) shown in FIG. 29, control may be performed to stop each reel 3L, 3C, and 3R based on the stop start position and the number of sliding symbols. In this case, for example, even if a lock effect corresponding to lock effect number "3" or "5" is selected, if the timing of the stop operation is not appropriate, the "red 7" symbol will not be aligned. Note that when each reel 3L, 3C, and 3R is stopped based on the stop start position and the number of sliding pieces, the maximum number of sliding pieces in the pseudo game may be the same as the maximum number of sliding pieces in the main game, or may be greater than or less than the maximum number of sliding pieces in the main game.

Furthermore, in step S111 of Figure 29, 80 rotations per minute was given as an example of the speed (constant rotation speed) when each reel 3L, 3C, 3R is rotating at a constant speed. The constant rotation speed in the pseudo game may be the same as the constant rotation speed in the main game (e.g., 80 rotations per minute), may be faster than the constant rotation speed in the main game (e.g., 90 to 180 rotations per minute, or 120 to 160 rotations per minute), or may be slower than the constant rotation speed in the main game (e.g., 10 to 60 rotations per minute, or 30 to 45 rotations per minute). Furthermore, in the normal pseudo game processing shown in FIG. 47, as in the main game, the stop buttons 8L, 8C, and 8R are activated in the pseudo game after the rotation speed of each of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R reaches a constant rotation speed (see step S1062). However, in the pseudo game, the stop buttons 8L, 8C, and 8R may also be activated before the rotation speed of each of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R reaches a constant rotation speed.

After executing the process of step S1068, the main CPU 101 determines whether the controlled reel (see step S1065) has stopped (step S1069). In this process, the main CPU 101 determines whether control to decelerate the rotation of the controlled reel has ended. The main CPU 101 recognizes that control to decelerate the rotation of the controlled reel has ended (the controlled reel has stopped) when the retention time of the deceleration excitation pattern has expired (when the time required to stop the rotation of the controlled reel has elapsed). If it determines that the controlled reel has not stopped, the main CPU 101 executes the process of step S1069 again. On the other hand, if it determines that the controlled reel has stopped, the main CPU 101 executes control to swing the controlled reel (step S1070). In this process, the main CPU 101 sets data corresponding to the swing excitation pattern for swinging the controlled reel. This drives and controls the stepping motor 51 corresponding to the reel to be controlled, causing the reel to swing in a predetermined manner. The excitation pattern for swinging is not particularly limited, but it is possible to adopt a configuration in which two-phase excitation is performed so that excitation pattern I and excitation pattern II are repeated as follows.

Although not shown, each stepping motor 51L, 51C, 51R has four excitation phases (A, B, C, and D) arranged in clockwise order, and eight excitation patterns (A-B, B, B-C, C, C-D, D, D-A, and A) are provided as 1-2 phase excitation patterns. For example, it is possible to employ a configuration in which an excitation pattern (e.g., B-C) with an offset value of 2 from a reference excitation pattern is held as excitation pattern I for time T1 (e.g., 3 interrupt times), and an excitation pattern (e.g., A-B) with an offset value of 0 from the reference excitation pattern is held as excitation pattern II for time T2 (e.g., 300 interrupt times). T2 is preferably less than 500 ms, and the sum of T1 and T2 is preferably less than 500 ms. For example, T1 can be set to approximately 1 to 20 ms (or 2 to 10 ms), and T2 can be set to approximately 100 to 490 ms (or 200 to 450 ms). The current used by the stepping motor 51 when excitation control is performed based on the oscillation excitation pattern may be configured to be greater than the current used by the stepping motor 51 when excitation control is performed based on the stop excitation pattern, and may be approximately the same as the current used by the stepping motor 51 when excitation control is performed based on the constant-speed excitation pattern. For example, the current used by the stepping motor 51 when excitation control is performed based on the oscillation excitation pattern may be approximately 60% (e.g., 40 to 80%, or 50 to 70%) of the current used by the stepping motor 51 when excitation control is performed based on the acceleration excitation pattern or the deceleration excitation pattern.

By controlling the driving of the stepping motor 51 as described above, the reel 3 can be swung up and down (see Figures 39(b)-(d), 40(b)-(d), and 41(b)-(d)). The swaying pattern of the reel 3 is not particularly limited, as long as the reel 3 moves to an extent that is noticeable to the player. However, because "swaying" refers to a slight vibration and can also be described as a "temporary stop," it is desirable that the amplitude of the vibration does not exceed one symbol (or 1/2 symbol, 1/4 symbol, 1/8 symbol, or 1/16 symbol). Note that "swaying" is a concept that encompasses not only cases in which the reel 3 moves at a regular cycle, but also cases in which the reel 3 moves non-periodically. Furthermore, periods in which the reel 3 is almost completely stopped are also included in "swaying," but it is desirable that such periods be less than 500 ms (e.g., 100-490 ms, or 200-450 ms). In other words, if the reel 3 performs some kind of movement within a range of less than 500 ms, it can be called "swinging."

After executing the processing of step S1070, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not any of the stop buttons 8L, 8C, and 8R are active (step S1071). This processing is the same as the processing of step S121 in Figure 29 (reel stop control processing). The main CPU 101 can recognize the operation status of the stop buttons 8L, 8C, and 8R by referencing the activated stop button storage area (see Figure 21).

If it is determined that valid stop buttons 8L, 8C, and 8R exist, the main CPU 101 proceeds to step S1063. On the other hand, if it is determined that valid stop buttons 8L, 8C, and 8R do not exist, the main CPU 101 determines whether the lock effect number selected in the lock effect determination process (see FIG. 43) is lock effect number "5" (step S1072).

If the main CPU 101 determines that the selected lock effect number is not lock effect number "5," it sets the lock effect end flag to ON (step S1073) and ends this subroutine. On the other hand, if the main CPU 101 determines that the selected lock effect number is lock effect number "5," it executes post-pseudo-game reel effect processing (step S1074). The post-pseudo-game reel effect processing will be described later using Figure 48. After executing the processing of step S1074, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

<Reel effect processing after pseudo game>
FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing the post-pseudo game reel effect processing carried out in the main control circuit.

The post-pseudo game reel effect processing shown in FIG. 48 is processing carried out by the main control circuit 100 in step S1074 of FIG. 47 (normal pseudo game processing).
In the post-pseudo-game reel effect processing, first, the main CPU 101 executes a re-acceleration process (step S1081). This process is the same as the process of step S1024 in FIG. 44 (lock effect execution process). In the process of step S1024, the main CPU 101 requests the start of rotation of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R, but in the process of step S1081, the main CPU 101 requests the start of rotation of only the left reel 3L. The rest of the process is as described in step S1024. By executing the process of step S1081, the drive of the stepping motor 51L is controlled, and the left reel 3L starts to rotate (see FIG. 41(e)).

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether the left reel 3L has stopped (step S1082). This process is the same as the process in step S1069 in Figure 47 (normal pseudo-game processing). The main CPU 101 can recognize that the left reel 3L has stopped when a predetermined time has passed since the left reel 3L began to spin again.

If it is determined that the left reel 3L has not stopped, the main CPU 101 executes the process of step S1082 again. On the other hand, if it is determined that the left reel 3L has stopped, the main CPU 101 executes control to swing the left reel 3L (step S1083). This process is the same as the process of step S1070 in Figure 47 (normal pseudo-game processing). This controls the drive of the stepping motor 51L, causing the left reel 3L to swing up and down (see Figure 41 (f)).

The main CPU 101 then sets the lock effect end flag to ON (step S1084) and ends this subroutine.

<Processing during pseudo-game after reel effect>
FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing the pseudo-game processing after reel presentation carried out in the main control circuit.

The pseudo-game processing after reel effect shown in Figure 49 is processing performed by the main control circuit 100 in step S1043 of Figure 46 (pseudo-game processing). As described above, when the lock effect corresponding to lock effect number "6" is selected, the pseudo-game flag is set to ON when a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of rotation of each of reels 3L, 3C, and 3R (see step S1024 of Figure 44). As a result, the determination result of step S1025 of Figure 44 becomes "YES", and the pseudo-game processing after reel effect shown in Figure 49 is initiated.

In the post-reel effect pseudo-game processing, the main CPU 101 first executes post-reel effect pseudo-game start command generation and storage processing (step S1101). In this processing, the main CPU 101 generates post-reel effect pseudo-game start command data and stores the generated post-reel effect pseudo-game start command data in the communication data storage area of the main RAM 103. The post-reel effect pseudo-game start command data stored in the communication data storage area is transmitted from the main control circuit 100 to the sub-control circuit 200 in the communication data transmission processing (see step S204 of Figure 32). This enables the sub-control circuit 200 to recognize that the reel effect (ii) above has ended and the pseudo game (iii) above has begun (see Figure 36), and to determine the timing of executing various effects. Specifically, upon receiving the post-reel effect pseudo-game start command data, the sub-control circuit 200 sets effect data corresponding to the end of the reel effect and the start of the pseudo game. As a result, for example, although not shown, a text image ("hit the lever" image) with the message "hit the lever" is displayed on the main display device 210, encouraging the player to operate the start lever 7.

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether the start lever 7 has been operated (step S1102). In this process, the main CPU 101 determines whether the start switch 7S has been turned on (see step S50 in FIG. 25). If it determines that the start lever 7 has not been operated, the main CPU 101 executes the process of step S1102 again. On the other hand, if it determines that the start lever 7 has been operated, the main CPU 101 executes a re-acceleration process (step S1103). This process is the same as the process of step S1081 in FIG. 48 (post-pseudo-game reel effect process). This controls the drive of the stepping motor 51L, and starts the rotation of the left reel 3L (see FIG. 42(e)). Thus, in the post-reel effect pseudo-game process shown in FIG. 49, the left reel 3L is re-spinned on the condition that the start lever 7 is operated after the reel effect ends. However, the left reel 3L may be automatically re-spun after the reel effect has ended (when a predetermined time has elapsed since all reels 3L, 3C, and 3R have stopped spinning in the reel effect).

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether the rotation speed of the left reel 3L has reached the constant rotation speed (step S1104). As described above, the constant rotation speed in the pseudo game may be different from the constant rotation speed (80 rotations per minute) in the main game (see step S1061 in Figure 47). If the main CPU 101 determines that the rotation speed of the left reel 3L has not reached the constant rotation speed, it executes the processing of step S1104 again. On the other hand, if it determines that the rotation speed of the left reel 3L has reached the constant rotation speed, the main CPU 101 allows the left reel 3L to stop (step S1105). In this processing, the main CPU 101 stores "1" in bit 4 of the activated stop button storage area (see Figure 21). This activates the left stop button 8L. As mentioned above, the left stop button 8L may be activated before the rotation speed of the left reel 3L reaches the constant rotation speed (see step S1062 in Figure 47).

The main CPU 101 then executes steps S1106 to S1111, which are essentially the same as steps S1063 to S1070 in FIG. 47. In the normal pseudo-game processing shown in FIG. 47, the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R corresponding to the operated stop buttons 8L, 8C, and 8R are determined as the reels to be controlled, but in the post-reel pseudo-game processing shown in FIG. 49, the left reel 3L is the reel to be controlled. By executing step S1111, the drive of the stepping motor 51L is controlled, causing the left reel 3L to swing up and down (see FIG. 42(f)). The main CPU 101 then sets the lock effect end flag to ON (step S1112) and ends this subroutine.

<Reel spin start process>
FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing the reel rotation start process carried out in the main control circuit.

The reel rotation start processing shown in Figure 50 is processing performed by the main control circuit 100 in step S10 of Figure 23 (main processing).

In the reel spin start processing, the main CPU 101 first determines whether the random delay flag (see step S1028 in Figure 44) is set to on (step S1121).

If the main CPU 101 determines that the random delay flag is set to ON, it determines whether a predetermined time has elapsed since the random delay flag was set to ON (since the lock effect ended) (step S1122). If it determines that the predetermined time has not elapsed, the main CPU 101 executes the processing of step S1122 again. On the other hand, if it determines that the predetermined time has elapsed, the main CPU 101 executes the random delay processing (step S1123). As described above, the random delay processing is a process for randomly generating a delay period for each reel 3L, 3C, and 3R after the lock effect has occurred before the reels begin to spin. Details of the random delay processing will be explained later using Figure 51. After executing the processing of step S1123, the main CPU 101 sets the random delay flag to OFF (step S1124) and ends this subroutine.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1121 that the random delay flag is not set to ON, the main CPU 101 executes normal acceleration processing (step S1125). This processing is the same as that described in step S10 of Figure 23 (main processing). In the processing of step S1125, unlike the random delay processing, the main CPU 101 simultaneously requests the start of rotation of each of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R. As a result, the start of rotation and acceleration of each of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R occur simultaneously, and they simultaneously reach a constant speed. After executing the processing of step S1125, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

In the reel spin start process shown in Figure 50, it is explained that once the lock effect has ended, the random delay process is automatically executed without any operation by the player. However, the random delay process may also be executed on the condition that the player performs an operation (for example, operating the start lever 7) after the lock effect has ended. In this case, for example, when the determination result in step S1122 is "YES," the above-mentioned "hit the lever" image (see step S1101 in Figure 49) may be displayed on the main display device 210. Thereafter, when the start lever 7 is operated, it is possible to configure the random delay process (processing in step S1123) to start at the timing of the start lever 7 operation. On the other hand, if the start lever 7 is not operated within a predetermined time after the "hit the lever" image is displayed, the random delay process may be started when the predetermined time has elapsed.

<Random Delay Processing>
FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing the random delay processing performed in the main control circuit.

The random delay processing shown in Figure 51 is processing performed by the main control circuit 100 in step S1123 of Figure 50 (reel rotation start processing).

In the random delay process, the main CPU 101 first obtains a random number value for the left reel, a random number value for the center reel, and a random number value for the right reel (step S1141). The random number value for the left reel, the random number value for the center reel, and the random number value for the right reel are random number values used to randomly determine the spin start timing of each of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R. In the process of step S1141, the main CPU 101 obtains a number between 0 and 20 as the random number value for the left reel, a number between 0 and 20 as the random number value for the center reel, and a number between 0 and 20 as the random number value for the right reel.

Next, the main CPU 101 sets values corresponding to the random number value for the left reel, the random number value for the center reel, and the random number value for the right reel to the left reel acceleration timer, the center reel acceleration timer, and the right reel acceleration timer, respectively (step S1142). In this process, the main CPU 101 sets the value obtained by multiplying the random number value for the left reel by a predetermined number (e.g., 32) to the left reel acceleration timer, sets the value obtained by multiplying the random number value for the center reel by a predetermined number (e.g., 32) to the center reel acceleration timer, and sets the value obtained by multiplying the random number value for the right reel by a predetermined number (e.g., 32) to the right reel acceleration timer. For example, if the random number value for the left reel is 5, the left reel acceleration timer is set to "160." If the random number value for the center reel is 10, the left reel acceleration timer is set to "320." If the random number value for the right reel is 15, the right reel acceleration timer is set to "480." The left reel acceleration timer, center reel acceleration timer, and right reel acceleration timer are each updated by the timer update process (see step S206 in Figure 32). That is, the left reel acceleration timer, center reel acceleration timer, and right reel acceleration timer are each decremented by 1 each time the periodic interrupt process (see Figure 32) is performed.

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether the left reel 3L has already accelerated (step S1143). The main CPU 101 can recognize that the left reel 3L has already accelerated if the left reel acceleration flag (see step S1146) is set to ON. If it determines that the left reel 3L has not already accelerated, the main CPU 101 determines whether the left reel acceleration timer is 0 (step S1144). If it determines that the left reel acceleration timer is 0, the main CPU 101 executes left reel acceleration processing (step S1145). In this processing, the main CPU 101 controls the excitation phase so that it is excited based on the same excitation pattern as the excitation pattern used to accelerate the left reel 3L in the normal acceleration processing (see step S1124 of Figure 50). Then, the main CPU 101 sets the left reel acceleration flag to ON (step S1146).

If the main CPU 101 determines in step S1143 that the left reel 3L has already accelerated, if it determines in step S1144 that the left reel acceleration timer is not 0, or after executing the processing of step S1146, the main CPU 101 determines whether the center reel 3C has already accelerated (step S1147). The main CPU 101 can recognize that the center reel 3C has already accelerated if the center reel acceleration flag (see step S1150) is set to on. If the main CPU 101 determines that the center reel 3C has not already accelerated, the main CPU 101 determines whether the center reel acceleration timer is 0 (step S1148). If it determines that the center reel acceleration timer is 0, the main CPU 101 executes center reel acceleration processing (step S1149). In this process, the main CPU 101 controls the excitation phase so that it is excited based on the same excitation pattern as the excitation pattern used to accelerate the center reel 3C in the normal acceleration process (see step S1124 in Figure 50). The main CPU 101 then sets the center reel acceleration completed flag to ON (step S1150).

If the main CPU 101 determines in step S1147 that the center reel 3C has already accelerated, if it determines in step S1148 that the center reel acceleration timer is not 0, or after executing the processing of step S1150, the main CPU 101 determines whether the right reel 3R has already accelerated (step S1151). The main CPU 101 can recognize that the right reel 3R has already accelerated if the right reel acceleration flag (see step S1154) is set to on. If the main CPU 101 determines that the right reel 3R has not already accelerated, the main CPU 101 determines whether the right reel acceleration timer is 0 (step S1152). If it determines that the right reel acceleration timer is 0, the main CPU 101 executes right reel acceleration processing (step S1153). In this process, the main CPU 101 controls the excitation phase so that it is excited based on the same excitation pattern as the excitation pattern used to accelerate the right reel 3R in the normal acceleration process (see step S1124 in Figure 50). The main CPU 101 then sets the right reel acceleration completed flag to ON (step S1154).

If it is determined in step S1151 that the right reel 3R has already accelerated, if it is determined in step S1152 that the right reel acceleration timer is not 0, or after executing the processing of step S1154, the main CPU 101 determines whether all of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R have already accelerated (step S1155). The main CPU 101 can recognize that all of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R have already accelerated if the left reel acceleration flag, center reel acceleration flag, and right reel acceleration flag are all set to ON. If it is determined that at least one reel 3 has not already accelerated, the main CPU 101 returns processing to step S1143. On the other hand, if it is determined that all of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R have already accelerated, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

As described above, the timing at which each reel 3L, 3C, and 3R starts spinning is determined randomly, and in this respect, the random delay process (the acceleration process for reels 3L, 3C, and 3R when a lock effect is performed) differs from the normal acceleration process (the acceleration process for reels 3L, 3C, and 3R when a lock effect is not performed). However, the behavior of each reel 3L, 3C, and 3R after spinning (the time it takes for each reel 3L, 3C, and 3R to reach a constant speed after starting to spin) is the same whether a lock effect is performed or not.

<Reel control state in pseudo game>
52 to 54 are diagrams showing an example of the change over time in the reel control state when a pseudo game is being played.

Figures 52 and 53 show the relationship between player operations and reel control states when a lock effect corresponding to lock effect number "3" (see Figure 36) is performed. Figure 54 shows the relationship between player operations and reel control states when a lock effect corresponding to lock effect number "6" (see Figure 36) is performed. In the figures, "acceleration" indicates that the reel control state is an acceleration control state, "constant speed" indicates that the reel control state is a constant speed control state, "deceleration" indicates that the reel control state is a deceleration control state, "stop" indicates that the reel control state is a stop control state, and "swing" indicates that the reel control state is a swing control state.

The acceleration control state is a state in which the excitation phase is excited based on an acceleration excitation pattern. The constant speed control state is a state in which the excitation phase is excited based on a constant speed excitation pattern. The deceleration control state is a state in which the excitation phase is excited based on a deceleration excitation pattern. The stop control state is a state in which the excitation phase is excited based on a stop excitation pattern. The oscillation control state is a state in which the excitation phase is excited based on an oscillation excitation pattern. Information indicating the reel control state (reel control state flag) is stored in a reel control state flag storage area (not shown) of the main RAM 103. The main CPU 101 recognizes the current reel control state by referencing the reel control state flag storage area, and in the reel control process (see step S203 in Figure 32), controls each stepping motor 51L, 51C, 51R so that the excitation phase is excited based on the excitation pattern corresponding to the reel control state.

In the example shown in FIG. 52, when the start lever 7 is operated, the reel control state for each of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R changes to an acceleration control state, and after a predetermined time has passed, the reel control state for each of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R changes to a constant speed control state. Thereafter, when one of the stop buttons 8 is operated as a first stop operation, the reel control state for the reel 3 targeted by the stop operation (first stopped reel) changes to a deceleration control state, and when the rotation of the first stopped reel stops, the reel control state for the first stopped reel changes to a swing control state. Similarly, when one of the stop buttons 8 is operated as a second stop operation, the reel control state for the reel 3 targeted by the stop operation (second stopped reel) changes to a deceleration control state, and when the rotation of the second stopped reel stops, the reel control state for the second stopped reel changes to a swing control state. Similarly, when any stop button 8 is operated as a third stop operation, the reel control state for the reel 3 that was the target of the stop operation (third stopped reel) changes to a deceleration control state, and when the rotation of the third stopped reel stops, the reel control state for the third stopped reel changes to a swing control state. Then, after the reel control state for all reels 3L, 3C, and 3R changes to the swing control state, a random delay process is performed, and at random timing, the reel control state for each reel 3L, 3C, and 3R changes to an acceleration control state, and then the reel control state for each reel 3L, 3C, and 3R changes to a constant speed control state.

In the example shown in FIG. 53, when the start lever 7 is operated, the reel control state for each of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R changes to an acceleration control state, and after a predetermined time has passed, the reel control state for each of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R changes to a constant speed control state. Thereafter, when one of the stop buttons 8 is operated as a first stop operation, the reel control state for the reel 3 targeted by the stop operation (first stopped reel) changes to a deceleration control state, and when the rotation of the first stopped reel stops, the reel control state for the first stopped reel changes to a swing control state. Similarly, when one of the stop buttons 8 is operated as a second stop operation, the reel control state for the reel 3 targeted by the stop operation (second stopped reel) changes to a deceleration control state, and when the rotation of the second stopped reel stops, the reel control state for the second stopped reel changes to a swing control state. Similarly, when one of the stop buttons 8 is operated as a third stop operation, the reel control state for the reel 3 that was the target of the stop operation (the third stopped reel) changes to a deceleration control state, and when the rotation of the third stopped reel stops, the reel control state for the third stopped reel changes to a swing control state. Then, when a predetermined time has passed since the reel control states for all reels 3L, 3C, and 3R changed to the swing control state, the reel control state for each of reels 3L, 3C, and 3R changes to a stop control state. After that, when random delay processing is performed, the reel control state for each of reels 3L, 3C, and 3R changes to an acceleration control state at random timing, and then the reel control state for each of reels 3L, 3C, and 3R changes to a constant speed control state.

As described above, when random delay processing is performed, in the example shown in FIG. 52, a direct transition from the swing control state to the acceleration control state occurs, whereas in the example shown in FIG. 53, a transition from the swing control state to the stop control state occurs first, and then a transition from the stop control state to the acceleration control state occurs. In this embodiment, a stop control state may or may not be interposed between the swing control state and the acceleration control state. If a stop control state is interposed, the timing of the transition from the swing control state to the stop control state is not particularly limited. For example, when the determination result of step S1122 in FIG. 50 is "YES," the reel control state for all reels 3L, 3C, and 3R may be transitioned from the swing control state to the stop control state. Furthermore, when the pseudo game is switched to the main game (for example, when the determination result in step S1122 in FIG. 50 is "YES"), the above-described "hit the lever" image (see step S1101 in FIG. 49) may be displayed on the main display device 210, and when the start lever 7 is operated, the reel control state for all reels 3L, 3C, and 3R may be switched from the swing control state to the stop control state. In these cases, the swinging of each reel 3L, 3C, and 3R ends simultaneously at the timing of the transition to the stop control state. This timing may be before or after the random delay process (see step S1123 in FIG. 50) is started. On the other hand, in this embodiment, the swinging may end at different times for each reel 3 (in the order in which the stop operation is performed). For example, for each reel 3, the swing control state may be switched from the swing control state to the stop control state when a predetermined time has elapsed since the reel control state was switched to the swing control state (since the rotation stopped).

In the example shown in Figure 54, when the start lever 7 is operated, the reel control state for each of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R becomes an acceleration control state, and after a predetermined time has passed, the reel control state for each of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R becomes a constant speed control state. After that, after a predetermined time has passed, the reel control state for the first stopped reel (e.g., the right reel 3R) becomes a stop control state via a deceleration control state, regardless of the player's stop operation (automatically). Similarly, the reel control state for the second stopped reel (e.g., the center reel 3C) becomes a stop control state via a deceleration control state, regardless of the player's stop operation (automatically). Similarly, the reel control state for the third stopped reel (e.g., the left reel 3L) becomes a stop control state via a deceleration control state, regardless of the player's stop operation (automatically). Thereafter, the "hit the lever" image (see step S1101 in FIG. 49) described above is displayed on the main display device 210. When the start lever 7 is operated, the reel control state for the third stopped reel (e.g., left reel 3L) changes from an acceleration control state to a constant speed control state. When the stop button 8 (e.g., left stop button 8L) corresponding to the third stopped reel is operated, the reel control state for the reel 3 targeted by the stop operation (third stopped reel) changes to a deceleration control state. When the third stopped reel stops spinning, the reel control state for the third stopped reel changes to a swing control state. When a random delay process is then performed, the reel control state for each of reels 3L, 3C, and 3R changes to an acceleration control state at random timing, and then the reel control state for each of reels 3L, 3C, and 3R changes to a constant speed control state.

As described above, in the example shown in FIG. 54, the rotation of the first stop reel (e.g., right reel 3R) and the second stop reel (e.g., center reel 3C) is automatically stopped, but the reel control state for these reels does not become the swing control state after they have stopped. In this manner, in this embodiment, if one reel 3 stops without the player's stop operation, it is possible to configure that reel 3 not to swing. For example, if the rotation of the first stop reel (e.g., right reel 3R) and the second stop reel (e.g., center reel 3C) is automatically stopped, and then the rotation of the third stop reel (e.g., left reel 3L) is stopped in response to the player's stop operation, these reels 3 may not swing when the first stop reel (e.g., right reel 3R) and the second stop reel (e.g., center reel 3C) stop, but may swing when the third stop reel (e.g., left reel 3L) stops. 54, the third stop reel (e.g., the left reel 3L) may be automatically stopped once and then stopped again in response to a stop operation performed after the re-spinning, or the third stop reel (e.g., the left reel 3L) may be stopped in response to a stop operation (from the beginning without re-spinning) without automatically stopping the third stop reel (e.g., the left reel 3L). Similarly, if the rotation of the first stop reel (e.g., the right reel 3R) is automatically stopped and then the rotation of the second stop reel (e.g., the center reel 3C) and the third stop reel (e.g., the left reel 3L) is stopped in response to a stop operation by the player, the reel 3 may not be swung when the first stop reel (e.g., the right reel 3R) is stopped, but these reels 3 may be swung when the second stop reel (e.g., the center reel 3C) and the third stop reel (e.g., the left reel 3L) are stopped. In the above, it has been explained that the reel 3 that is to be stopped first is stopped automatically, and the reel 3 that is to be stopped later is stopped in response to the player's stop operation, but the opposite is also possible: the reel 3 that is to be stopped first is stopped in response to the player's stop operation, and the reel 3 that is to be stopped later is stopped automatically.

In this embodiment, it is also possible to configure the reel 3 to swing even when it stops without the player's stopping operation. For example, if the rotation of the first stop reel (e.g., right reel 3R) through the third stop reel (e.g., left reel 3L) is automatically stopped as shown in FIG. 54, the first stop reel (e.g., right reel 3R) may be swung when the first stop reel (e.g., right reel 3R) stops, the second stop reel (e.g., center reel 3C) may be swung when the second stop reel (e.g., center reel 3C) stops, and the third stop reel (e.g., left reel 3L) may be swung when the third stop reel (e.g., left reel 3L) stops.

In Figures 52 to 54, the player operates one stop button 8, and after that stop button 8 changes from an operated state to a non-operated state (the stop switch 8S changes from an on state to an off state, i.e., becomes off-edge), the reel control state for the reel 3 corresponding to that stop button 8 is illustrated as changing to a swing control state. In this embodiment, the swing of the reel 3 corresponding to that stop button 8 may be initiated when the stop button 8 changes from an operated state to a non-operated state (becomes off-edge), or the swing of the reel 3 corresponding to that stop button 8 may be initiated when the stop button 8 changes from a non-operated state to an operated state (the stop switch 8S changes from an off state to an on state, i.e., becomes on-edge). For example, the sequence may be: on-edge of the first stop operation (no swing of the first stop reel) → off-edge of the first stop operation (start of swing of the first stop reel) → on-edge of the second stop operation (no swing of the second stop reel) → off-edge of the second stop operation (start of swing of the second stop reel) → on-edge of the third stop operation (no swing of the third stop reel) → off-edge of the third stop operation (start of swing of the third stop reel).

In addition, in this embodiment, when the rotation of the first stop reel (e.g., right reel 3R) through the third stop reel (e.g., left reel 3L) is stopped in response to a player's stop operation (see Figures 52 and 53), these reels 3 may not be swayed when the first stop reel (e.g., right reel 3R) and the second stop reel (e.g., center reel 3C) are stopped, and all reels 3 may be swayed when the third stop reel (e.g., left reel 3L) is stopped. For example, all reels 3 may be swayed when an off-edge of the stop switch 8S corresponding to the third stop reel (e.g., left reel 3L) is detected. Alternatively, in this case, the first stop reel (e.g., right reel 3R) and the second stop reel (e.g., center reel 3C) may not be swayed, and only the third stop reel (e.g., left reel 3L) may be swayed. For example, the sequence may be: on-edge of the first stop operation (no swing of the first stop reel) → off-edge of the first stop operation (no swing of the first stop reel) → on-edge of the second stop operation (no swing of the second stop reel) → off-edge of the second stop operation (no swing of the second stop reel) → on-edge of the third stop operation (no swing of the third stop reel) → off-edge of the third stop operation (all reels start to swing).

The above describes the pachislot machine 1 according to the second embodiment as one embodiment of the present invention.

[Third embodiment]
The first and second embodiments have been described above. A third embodiment will now be described. The basic configuration of the pachislot machine 1 according to the third embodiment is the same as that of the pachislot machine 1 according to the first and second embodiments. In the following description, the same components as those of the pachislot machine 1 according to the first and second embodiments will be assigned the same reference numerals. Furthermore, explanations of portions that apply to the third embodiment as well as the first and second embodiments will be omitted.

Note that even if the above description contains statements that are limited to the pachislot machine 1 of the first embodiment, such as "In the first embodiment, ..." or "In the pachislot machine 1 of the first embodiment, ...," they can also be applied to the pachislot machine 1 of the third embodiment, as long as they do not deviate from the spirit of the third embodiment. Similarly, the above description contains statements that are limited to the pachislot machine 1 of the second embodiment, as long as they do not deviate from the spirit of the third embodiment. Therefore, it is possible to partially replace or combine the configurations shown in the first and second embodiments (including the configurations shown in the modified examples and the extended examples) with the configurations shown in the third embodiment.

Furthermore, even if the shape is different from the pachislot machine 1 according to the first and second embodiments, components with similar functions may be assigned the same reference numerals for convenience. Furthermore, even if the shape or processing is the same as the pachislot machine 1 according to the first and second embodiments, different reference numerals or step numbers may be assigned for convenience.

<Lock effect execution process>
Fig. 55 is a flowchart showing the lock effect execution process carried out in the main control circuit, and Fig. 56 is a flowchart showing the pseudo game start process carried out in the main control circuit.

The lock effect execution process shown in Figure 55 is a process performed by the main control circuit 100 in step S8 (main side effect control process at the start of play) of Figure 23 (main processing). In the third embodiment, the lock effect execution process shown in Figure 44 was described as being performed as the process performed in step S8 (main side effect control process at the start of play) of Figure 23 (main processing). In this embodiment, the lock effect execution process shown in Figure 44 or the lock effect execution process shown in Figure 55 may be performed as the process performed in step S8 (main side effect control process at the start of play) of Figure 23 (main processing).

In the lock effect execution process, the main CPU 101 first determines whether the lock effect start flag (see steps S1006, S1011, and S1013 in FIG. 43) is set to on (step S1201). If it determines that the lock effect start flag is not set to on, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the lock effect start flag is set to ON, the main CPU 101 executes pseudo-game start processing (step S1202). Here, the pseudo-game start processing will be explained using Figure 56.

In the pseudo-game start processing, the main CPU 101 first determines whether the lock effect number selected in the lock effect determination processing (see FIG. 43) is any of lock effect numbers "3," "4," and "5" (step S1221). If it determines that the selected lock effect number is not any of lock effect numbers "3," "4," and "5," the main CPU 101 terminates this subroutine.

On the other hand, if the main CPU 101 determines that the selected lock effect number is one of lock effect numbers "3," "4," or "5," it sets a value corresponding to a predetermined time (e.g., 5 seconds) to the pseudo-game start lock timer (step S1222). The pseudo-game start lock timer is updated by the timer update process (see step S206 in Figure 32). In other words, the pseudo-game start lock timer is decremented by 1 each time the periodic interrupt process (see Figure 32) is performed.

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether the pseudo-game start lock timer is at 0 (step S1223). If it determines that the pseudo-game start lock timer is not at 0, the main CPU 101 executes the process of step S1223 again. This results in the pseudo-game start lock being performed for a predetermined period of time (e.g., 5 seconds). The pseudo-game start lock may be a lock effect (freeze) that does not involve a reel effect or a pseudo game, or a lock effect that involves a reel effect (reel action such as slow rotation, high-speed rotation, or reverse rotation). While the pseudo-game start lock is being performed, reels 3L, 3C, and 3R remain stopped, and any operation performed by the player will be invalid.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the pseudo game start lock timer is 0, the main CPU 101 executes a pseudo game start command generation and storage process (step S1224). In this process, the main CPU 101 generates pseudo game start command data and stores the generated pseudo game start command data in the communication data storage area of the main RAM 103. The pseudo game start command data stored in the communication data storage area is transmitted from the main control circuit 100 to the sub-control circuit 200 in the communication data transmission process (see step S204 in Figure 32). This enables the sub-control circuit 200 to recognize that it is time for the pseudo game to start, and to determine the timing for executing various effects, etc.

Specifically, upon receiving the pseudo-game start command data, the sub-control circuit 200 sets effect data corresponding to the start of the pseudo-game. As a result, for example, although not shown, a text image ("hit the lever" image) with the message "hit the lever" is displayed on the main display device 210, prompting the player to operate the start lever 7.

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether the start lever 7 has been operated (step S1225). In this process, the main CPU 101 determines whether the start switch 7S has been turned on (see step S50 in Figure 25). If it determines that the start lever 7 has been operated, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the start lever 7 has not been operated, the main CPU 101 determines whether a predetermined time has elapsed since the pseudo-game start command generation and storage process was executed (since the "hit the lever" image was displayed) (step S1226). If it is determined that the predetermined time has not elapsed, the main CPU 101 returns to step S1225. On the other hand, if it is determined that the predetermined time has elapsed, the main CPU 101 sets the pseudo-game cancel flag to ON (step S1227). The pseudo-game cancel flag is a flag used to cancel the pseudo-game. Thereafter, the main CPU 101 sets the lock effect start flag to OFF (step S1228) and ends this subroutine.

The above explains the pseudo-game start processing performed in step S1202 of Figure 55 using Figure 56. Let's return to the explanation of Figure 55.

After executing the processing of step S1202, the main CPU 101 determines whether the pseudo-game cancel flag is set to ON (step S1203). If it determines that the pseudo-game cancel flag is set to ON, the main CPU 101 terminates this subroutine.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the pseudo-game cancel flag is not set to ON, the main CPU 101 executes the processes of steps S1204 to S1210. However, since these processes are similar to the processes of steps S1022 to S1028 in FIG. 44, a description thereof will be omitted here. The main CPU 101 then terminates this subroutine.

As described above, if a lock effect corresponding to any of the lock effect numbers "3" through "5" is selected in the lock effect determination process (see FIG. 43), a lock is performed at the start of the pseudo game. If the start lever 7 is then operated, the rotation of reels 3L, 3C, and 3R for the pseudo game begins, and the pseudo game is performed (see steps S1206 and S1208 in FIG. 55). After a random delay process (see step S1123 in FIG. 50), the rotation of reels 3L, 3C, and 3R becomes the constant speed rotation for the main game. On the other hand, if the start lever 7 is not operated within a predetermined time after the "hit the lever" image is displayed, the pseudo game (spinning of reels 3L, 3C, and 3R for the pseudo game) is not performed, and after a normal acceleration process (see step S1125 in FIG. 50), the rotation of reels 3L, 3C, and 3R becomes the constant speed rotation for the main game.

As described above, in the lock effect execution process shown in FIG. 55, the pseudo game is started when the start lever 7 is operated. However, as explained in the second embodiment, the condition for starting the pseudo game is not limited to the operation of the start lever 7, and any operation of an operation unit (e.g., the start lever 7, the MAX BET button 6a, the 1 BET button 6b, the settlement button 9, etc.) can be used as appropriate. Furthermore, the condition for canceling the pseudo game (setting the pseudo game cancel flag to ON) is not limited to the passage of a predetermined time, and any operation of an operation unit (e.g., the start lever 7, the MAX BET button 6a, the 1 BET button 6b, the settlement button 9, etc.) can be used as appropriate.

<Normal pseudo-game processing>
Fig. 57 is a flowchart showing normal pseudo game processing carried out in the main control circuit. Fig. 58 is a flowchart showing stop button operation acceptance processing carried out in the main control circuit. Fig. 59 is a flowchart showing swing control processing carried out in the main control circuit. Fig. 60 is a flowchart showing pseudo game termination processing carried out in the main control circuit.

The normal pseudo-game processing shown in FIG. 57 is processing performed by the main control circuit 100 in step S1042 of FIG. 46 (pseudo-game processing). In the second embodiment, the normal pseudo-game processing shown in FIG. 47 was described as being performed as the processing performed in step S1042 of FIG. 46 (pseudo-game processing). In this embodiment, the normal pseudo-game processing shown in FIG. 47 or the normal pseudo-game processing shown in FIG. 57 may be performed as the processing performed in step S1042 of FIG. 46 (pseudo-game processing).

In normal pseudo-game processing, the main CPU 101 first executes steps S1241 and S1242. However, since these steps are similar to steps S1061 and S1062 in FIG. 47, their explanation will be omitted here.

After executing the processing of step S1242, the main CPU 101 executes a stop button operation acceptance process (step S1243). Here, the stop button operation acceptance process will be explained using Figure 58.

In the stop button operation reception process, the main CPU 101 first determines whether the stop button operation cancel flag is set to ON (step S1261). The stop button operation cancel flag is a flag that is set when the MAX BET button 6a is operated in a pseudo game (see step S1264). If it is determined that the stop button operation cancel flag is set to ON, the main CPU 101 terminates this subroutine.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the stop button operation cancel flag is not set to ON, the main CPU 101 determines whether a valid stop button 8L, 8C, or 8R has been operated (step S1262). This process is the same as the process of step S1063 in FIG. 47. The main CPU 101 can recognize the valid stop buttons 8L, 8C, or 8R by referencing the activated stop button storage area (see FIG. 21).

If it is determined that a valid stop button 8L, 8C, or 8R has been operated, the main CPU 101 terminates this subroutine. On the other hand, if it is determined that a valid stop button 8L, 8C, or 8R has not been operated, the main CPU 101 determines whether the MAX BET button 6a has been operated (step S1263). In this process, the main CPU 101 determines whether the BET switch 6S has been turned ON.

If it is determined that the MAX BET button 6a has been operated, the main CPU 101 sets the stop button operation cancel flag to ON (step S1264). The stop button operation cancel flag is a flag that indicates that all remaining stop button operations are to be omitted. After executing the processing of step S1264, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the MAX BET button 6a has not been operated, the main CPU 101 determines whether a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the stop button operation acceptance process shown in FIG. 58 (step S1265). If it is determined that the predetermined time has not elapsed, the main CPU 101 returns the process to step S1262. On the other hand, if it is determined that the predetermined time has elapsed, the main CPU 101 sets the stop button operation omission flag to ON (step S1266). The stop button operation omission flag is a flag that indicates that the current stop button operation will be omitted. After executing the process of step S1266, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

The stop button operation acceptance process performed in step S1243 of Figure 57 has been explained above using Figure 58. Let's return to the explanation of Figure 57.

After executing the processing of step S1243, the main CPU 101 updates the activated stop button storage area and the press order storage area (step S1244) and determines the reel to be controlled (step S1245). In these processes, if neither the stop button operation cancel flag nor the stop button operation omission flag is set to on, the main CPU 101 performs processing similar to the processing of steps S1064 and S1065 in FIG. 47. On the other hand, if the stop button operation cancel flag or the stop button operation omission flag is set to on, the main CPU 101 determines that the leftmost stop button 8 of the active stop buttons 8L, 8C, and 8R has been operated, updates the activated stop button storage area, and determines the reel to be controlled.

For example, if all stop buttons 8L, 8C, and 8R are enabled, the main CPU 101 stores a "1" in bit 0 of the activated stop button storage area, updates bit 4 to "0," and determines the left reel 3L as the controlled reel, just as when the left stop button 8L is operated. Also, if the center stop button 8C and the right stop button 8R are enabled, the main CPU 101 stores a "1" in bit 1 of the activated stop button storage area, updates bit 5 to "0," and determines the center reel 3C as the controlled reel, just as when the center stop button 8C is operated. Also, if the left stop button 8L and the center stop button 8C are enabled, the main CPU 101 stores a "1" in bit 0 of the activated stop button storage area, updates bit 4 to "0," and determines the left reel 3L as the controlled reel, just as when the left stop button 8L is operated. Additionally, if only the right stop button 8R is active, the main CPU 101 stores "1" in bit 2 of the activated stop button storage area, updates bit 6 to "0", and determines the right reel 3R as the reel to be controlled, just as it does when the right stop button 8R is operated.

The main CPU 101 then executes steps S1246 to S1249, which are essentially the same as steps S1066 to S1069 in FIG. 47. In step S1246, similar to step S1066, the main CPU 101 determines and stores the predetermined position where the symbols will ultimately stop as the expected stop position, regardless of the stop start position (see step S116). As a result, reels 3L, 3C, and 3R stop in the manners shown in FIGS. 39(b) to (d), 40(b) to (d), and 41(b) to (d), regardless of whether the stop button operation cancel flag or the stop button operation omission flag is set to on.

Here, when the stop button operation cancel flag or the stop button operation omission flag is set on, the spinning pattern of the controlled reel until it stops may be different compared to when the stop button operation cancel flag or the stop button operation omission flag are not set on. For example, when the stop button operation cancel flag is set on (when the MAX BET button 6a is operated), the time from when the stop button operation cancel flag or the stop button operation omission flag is operated until the controlled reel stops may be longer compared to when neither the stop button operation cancel flag nor the stop button operation omission flag are set on (when the stop button 8 is operated) (for example, the controlled reel may be spun one extra time before it stops). However, even if there is a difference in the spinning pattern, the symbol that is ultimately displayed as stopped will be the same regardless of whether the stop button operation cancel flag or the stop button operation omission flag is set on.

If it is determined in step S1249 that the controlled reel has stopped, the main CPU 101 executes swing control processing (step S1250). The swing control processing will now be explained using Figure 59.

In the swing control process, the main CPU 101 first determines whether the stop button operation cancel flag is set to ON (step S1281). If it determines that the stop button operation cancel flag is not set to ON, the main CPU 101 determines whether the stop button operation omission flag is set to ON (step S1282). If it determines that the stop button operation omission flag is set to ON, the main CPU 101 sets the stop button operation omission flag to OFF (step S1283).

If it is determined in step S1281 that the stop button operation cancel flag is set to ON, or after executing the processing of step S1283, the main CPU 101 executes control to stop the controlled reel (step S1284). In this processing, the main CPU 101 sets data corresponding to the excitation pattern for stopping the controlled reel. As a result, the controlled reel remains stopped in the manner shown in Figures 39(b)-(d), 40(b)-(d), and 41(b)-(d) (unlike the illustrations, no oscillation occurs).

If it is determined in step S1282 that the stop button operation omission flag is not set to ON, the main CPU 101 executes control to swing the controlled reel (step S1285). This process is the same as the process of step S1070 in Figure 47. As a result, the controlled reel swings in the manner shown in Figures 39(b) to (d), 40(b) to (d), and 41(b) to (d).

After executing step S1284 or step S1285, the main CPU 101 terminates this subroutine.

The above describes the swing control processing performed in step S1250 of Figure 57 using Figure 59. Let's return to the explanation of Figure 57.

After executing the processing of step S1250, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not there are any valid stop buttons 8L, 8C, and 8R (step S1251). This processing is the same as the processing of step S1071 in FIG. 47. If it is determined that there are no valid stop buttons 8L, 8C, and 8R, the main CPU 101 executes processing for terminating the pseudo game (step S1252). Here, the processing for terminating the pseudo game will be explained using FIG. 60.

In the pseudo-game termination process, the main CPU 101 first determines whether the lock effect number selected in the lock effect determination process (see FIG. 43) is lock effect number "3" (step S1301). If the main CPU 101 determines that the selected lock effect number is lock effect number "3," it outputs an AT-equivalent signal via the external centralized terminal board 55 (step S1302). As explained in the first embodiment, the external centralized terminal board 55 is connected to a data display device or hall computer external to the pachislot machine 1, and these devices can also recognize the medal insertion status and game state transition status in the pachislot machine 1.

The AT-equivalent signal is an external signal that is turned on when the AT state begins and turned off when the AT state ends. In the processing of step S1302, the main CPU 101 turns the external signal on. Similarly, although not shown, the main CPU 101 turns the external signal on after executing the processing of step S1083 in Figure 48. This causes the data display and hall computer to recognize that the AT state has begun.

In this way, in this embodiment, the AT-equivalent signal is configured to be turned on when the lock effect corresponding to lock effect number "3" or "5" ends (when the "red 7" pattern is displayed as stopped). Furthermore, as described in the first embodiment, multiple AT states (predetermined AT states and specific AT states) may be provided, with each AT state offering a different degree of advantage to the player. Examples of such AT states include the pseudo BB (big bonus) and pseudo RB (regular bonus) described in the first embodiment. Furthermore, the same symbol combination (e.g., a "red 7" pattern) may be displayed as stopped in the pseudo game both when a decision is made to transition to the pseudo BB and when a decision is made to transition to the pseudo RB. Furthermore, the same AT-equivalent signal may be turned on when a specific symbol combination (e.g., a line of "red 7" symbols) is displayed in a pseudo game when a decision is made to transition to a pseudo BB, and when a specific symbol combination (e.g., a line of "red 7" symbols) is displayed in a pseudo game when a decision is made to transition to a pseudo RB. This makes it impossible to know whether a transition to a pseudo bonus, a pseudo BB or a pseudo RB, has been decided at the time a specific symbol combination (e.g., a line of "red 7" symbols) is displayed in a pseudo game, thereby creating a sense of anticipation in the player. The timing at which the pseudo BB or pseudo RB actually starts is not particularly limited, but may be after a specific symbol combination (e.g., a line of "red 7" symbols) is displayed in a pseudo game (the unit game in which the pseudo game was played, or the unit game played a predetermined number of times after the unit game). For example, a pseudo BB may be initiated when a "red 7" pattern is displayed stopped along an active line during main play, and a pseudo RB may be initiated when a "BAR" pattern is displayed stopped along an active line during main play.

In the above, we have explained that the AT-equivalent signal is turned on when a specific symbol combination (e.g., a line of "red 7" symbols) is displayed in a static state during a simulated game (before the random delay process is initiated). Similarly, the AT-equivalent signal may be turned on when a specific symbol combination (e.g., a line of "red 7" symbols) is displayed in a static state during a reel effect (before the random delay process is initiated). The AT-equivalent signal may also be turned on when the simulated bonus actually starts (e.g., step S106 in FIG. 28). The timing for turning off the AT-equivalent signal is not particularly limited, but it may be turned off when the simulated bonus actually ends (e.g., step S155 in FIG. 31). As explained in the first embodiment, external signal 1 (the above-mentioned AT-equivalent signal) may be turned on when the first set of AT state is initiated, and external signal 2 may be turned on each time the second set or subsequent sets are initiated. From this perspective, the pseudo game may be performed only when it is decided to transition to the AT state for the first set (for example, it will not be performed if the 1G consecutive lottery is won). Also, when the AT-equivalent signal is turned on, the section lamp described in the first embodiment is lit.

If it is determined in step S1301 that the lock effect number is not lock effect number "3," the main CPU 101 determines whether the lock effect number selected in the lock effect determination process (see FIG. 43) is lock effect number "5" (step S1303). After executing the process of step S1302, or if it is determined in step S1303 that the lock effect number is not lock effect number "5" (i.e., lock effect number "4"), the main CPU 101 outputs a medal insertion signal via the external centralized terminal board 55 (step S1304).

As explained in the first embodiment, the medal insertion signal is a signal output from the external centralized terminal board 55 when a medal is inserted (see steps S42 and S46 in Figure 25). In other words, the medal insertion signal is output each time a main game is played, and the number of games played on the pachislot machine 1 can be recognized by the data display device or hall computer via the medal insertion signal. In this embodiment, by outputting the medal insertion signal even during pseudo games, the number of games played includes the number of pseudo games (the total number of main games and pseudo games). This allows the number of games to be counted up even when pseudo games are played. Although not shown, the main CPU 101 outputs the medal insertion signal even after executing the processing of step S1083 in Figure 48.

The medal insertion signal can be output when the pseudo game starts or ends. Examples of when the pseudo game starts include when the start lever 7 is operated (e.g., when the determination result of step S1225 in FIG. 56 is "YES") or when the pseudo game reels 3L, 3C, and 3R start spinning (e.g., when the processing of step S1206 in FIG. 55 is performed). Examples of when the pseudo game ends include when the pseudo game reels 3L, 3C, and 3R stop spinning (e.g., when the processing of FIG. 60 is performed) or when the main game reels 3L, 3C, and 3R start spinning (e.g., when the determination result of step S1122 in FIG. 50 is "YES" or when the first reel starts spinning due to random delay processing). Furthermore, if a medal insertion signal is output during a pseudo game, the unit game in which the pseudo game is played may be configured so that the medal insertion signal is not output when a medal is inserted.

After executing the processing of step S1304, the main CPU 101 sets the lock effect end flag to ON (step S1305) and ends this subroutine. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1303 that the lock effect number is lock effect number "5," the main CPU 101 executes post-pseudo-game reel effect processing (step S1306). The post-pseudo-game reel effect processing has been explained using Figure 48, so its explanation will be omitted here. After executing the processing of step S1306, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

The pseudo-game ending process performed in step S1252 of Figure 57 has been explained above using Figure 60. Returning to the explanation of Figure 57, after executing the process of step S1252, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

<Pseudo-game challenge operation reception process>
FIG. 61 is a flowchart showing the pseudo-game challenge operation acceptance process carried out in the main control circuit.

The pseudo game challenge operation acceptance process shown in FIG. 61 is a process performed by the main control circuit 100 in step S1243 of FIG. 57 (normal pseudo game processing). Above, it has been explained that the stop button operation acceptance process shown in FIG. 58 is performed as the process performed in step S1243 of FIG. 57 (normal pseudo game processing). In this embodiment, the pseudo game challenge operation acceptance process shown in FIG. 61 may be performed as the process performed in step S1243 of FIG. 57 (normal pseudo game processing).

Specifically, if all stop buttons 8 are valid (if none of the stop buttons 8 have been operated yet), i.e., if the current stop operation is the first stop operation, the pseudo-game challenge operation acceptance process shown in FIG. 61 is performed, and if an invalid stop button 8 exists (if at least one stop button 8 has been operated), i.e., if the current stop operation is the second stop operation or the third stop operation, the stop button operation acceptance process shown in FIG. 58 may be performed. The main CPU 101 can recognize the valid stop buttons 8L, 8C, 8R and the invalid stop buttons 8L, 8C, 8R by referencing the activated stop button storage area (see FIG. 21).

In the pseudo-game challenge operation acceptance process, the main CPU 101 first determines the stop button for pseudo-game progression (step S1321). In this process, the main CPU 101 determines one of the left stop button 8L, center stop button 8C, and right stop button 8R as the stop button for pseudo-game progression by performing a lottery based on a random number value.

Next, the main CPU 101 executes a pseudo-game start command generation and storage process (step S1322). In this process, the main CPU 101 generates pseudo-game start command data and stores the generated pseudo-game start command data in the communication data storage area of the main RAM 103. The pseudo-game start command data stored in the communication data storage area is transmitted from the main control circuit 100 to the sub-control circuit 200 in the communication data transmission process (see step S204 in Figure 32). This enables the sub-control circuit 200 to recognize that it is time for the pseudo-game to start, and to determine the timing for executing various effects, etc.

Specifically, upon receiving the pseudo-game start command data, the sub-control circuit 200 sets effect data corresponding to the start of the pseudo-game. As a result, for example, although not shown, a text image stating "Select one of the three correct options on the stop button to start the pseudo-game" is displayed on the main display device 210, prompting the player to operate the stop button 8.

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether a valid stop button 8L, 8C, or 8R has been operated (step S1323). This process is the same as the process of step S1063 in FIG. 47. If it is determined that a valid stop button 8L, 8C, or 8R has been operated, the main CPU 101 determines whether the operated stop button 8 matches the pseudo-game progress stop button determined in step S1321 (step S1324).

If the main CPU 101 determines that the operated stop button 8 matches the pseudo game progress stop button, it terminates this subroutine and proceeds to step S1244 in FIG. 57. On the other hand, if it determines that the operated stop button 8 does not match the pseudo game progress stop button, the main CPU 101 sets the pseudo game cancel flag to ON (step S1325) and terminates this subroutine.

Although not shown, if the pseudo-game cancel flag is set to ON, the main CPU 101 ends the pseudo-game challenge operation acceptance process shown in FIG. 61, then ends the normal pseudo-game processing shown in FIG. 57 without performing the processing of steps S1244 to S1252 in FIG. 57, and further ends the lock effect execution processing shown in FIG. 55 without performing the processing of steps S1209 and S1210 in FIG. 55.

If it is determined in step S1323 that the valid stop buttons 8L, 8C, and 8R have not been operated, the main CPU 101 executes the processes of steps S1326 to S1329. However, since these processes are similar to the processes of steps S1263 to S1266 in FIG. 58, their explanation will be omitted here. The main CPU 101 then terminates this subroutine.

As described above, if a pseudo game progress stop button (for example, the left stop button 8L) is operated as the first stop operation (if the three stop button choices are correct), the pseudo game continues, and after a random delay process (see step S1123 in Figure 50), reels 3L, 3C, and 3R begin to rotate at a constant speed for the main game. On the other hand, if a stop button 8 other than a pseudo game progress stop button (for example, the middle stop button 8C or the right stop button 8R) is operated as the first stop operation (if the three stop button choices are unsuccessful), the pseudo game ends at that point, and after normal acceleration process (see step S1125 in Figure 50), reels 3L, 3C, and 3R begin to rotate at a constant speed for the main game.

In this way, in this embodiment, the pseudo game can be configured to proceed on the condition that the appropriate stop button 8 is operated after the rotation of the pseudo game reels 3L, 3C, and 3R has begun. Meanwhile, operation of such an appropriate stop button 8 may also be used as a condition for starting the pseudo game. For example, in FIG. 56, it has been described that the pseudo game begins on the condition that the start lever 7 is operated. However, the pseudo game (spinning of the pseudo game reels 3L, 3C, and 3R) may also begin on the condition that an appropriate stop button 8 (e.g., the left stop button 8L) is operated instead of the start lever 7. Furthermore, if an inappropriate stop button 8 (e.g., the center stop button 8C or the right stop button 8R) is operated, the pseudo game may be canceled (and the pseudo game reels 3L, 3C, and 3R may not even be spun).

<Determining the freeze type>
FIG. 62 is a diagram showing an example of an image displayed on the main display device.

Figure 62 shows the freeze type determination screen displayed on the main display device 210. In this embodiment, multiple types of freezes (Freeze A, Freeze B, and Freeze C) are provided. Freeze A is a lock effect that does not involve a reel effect or simulated game. Freeze B is a lock effect that involves a forward-spinning reel effect. Freeze C is a lock effect that involves a reverse-spinning reel effect. The freeze type determination screen is a screen for determining one freeze from Freeze A, Freeze B, and Freeze C. The determined freeze will be executed, for example, as a lock at the start of simulated game play (see step S1223 in Figure 56).

Specifically, Figure 62 shows the freeze type determination screen, displaying freeze A image 1201, freeze B image 1202, freeze C image 1203, and arrow image 1204. Arrow image 1204 is an image that indicates which of freeze A image 1201, freeze B image 1202, and freeze C image 1203 has been selected. In the example shown in Figure 62, arrow image 1204 is displayed next to and adjacent to freeze A image 1201, indicating that freeze A image 1201 has been selected.

In this way, when freeze A image 1201 is selected (freeze A selected state), arrow image 1204 is displayed next to freeze A image 1201. Similarly, when freeze B image 1202 is selected (freeze B selected state), arrow image 1204 is displayed next to freeze B image 1202. When freeze C image 1203 is selected (freeze C selected state), arrow image 1204 is displayed next to freeze C image 1203.

The position of the arrow image 1204 can be switched using one of the following methods (a) to (c). For example, one of these methods can be set in the hole menu.

(a) Operation of the stop buttons 8L, 8C, 8R (b) Operation of the MAX BET button 6a (c) Timer management When the above (a) is set, the player can switch the position of the arrow image 1204 by operating the stop buttons 8L, 8C, 8R when the freeze type determination screen is displayed on the main display device 210, and can determine the type of freeze by operating the MAX BET button 6a. Specifically, if the MAX BET button 6a is operated in the freeze A selection state, freeze A is determined, if the MAX BET button 6a is operated in the freeze B selection state, freeze B is determined, and if the MAX BET button 6a is operated in the freeze C selection state, freeze C is determined.

When the above (b) is set, the player can switch the position of the arrow image 1204 by operating the MAX BET button 6a when the freeze type determination screen is displayed on the main display device 210, and can determine the freeze type by operating the start lever 7. Specifically, if the start lever 7 is operated in the freeze A selection state, freeze A is determined; if the start lever 7 is operated in the freeze B selection state, freeze B is determined; and if the start lever 7 is operated in the freeze C selection state, freeze C is determined.

If (c) above is set, when the freeze type determination screen is displayed on the main display device 210, the freeze type determination screen switches from one of the freeze A selection state, freeze B selection state, and freeze C selection state to the other at predetermined time intervals (for example, freeze A selection state → freeze B selection state → freeze C selection state → freeze A selection state, etc.). At this time, the player can determine the freeze type by operating the MAX BET button 6a. Specifically, if the MAX BET button 6a is operated in the freeze A selection state, freeze A is determined; if the MAX BET button 6a is operated in the freeze B selection state, freeze B is determined; and if the MAX BET button 6a is operated in the freeze C selection state, freeze C is determined. Note that if the MAX BET button 6a is not operated within a predetermined time, the freeze type determined corresponds to the state when that time has elapsed. Alternatively, the freeze type selected by lottery may be determined.

The timing at which the freeze type determination screen is displayed on the main display device 210 is not particularly limited, but it can be configured to display, for example, when a symbol combination related to BB is displayed stopped along an active line (BB wins). For example, the freeze type determination screen may be displayed when BB wins in one unit game and the start lever 7 is operated in the next unit game. Alternatively, when BB wins in one unit game, the freeze type determination screen may be displayed before the start lever 7 is operated in the next unit game.

The above describes the case where the type of freeze is determined, but a similar method may be used to determine the type of lock effect to be performed when a pseudo-bonus transition lottery or a 1G consecutive lottery is won. For example, on a screen similar to that of FIG. 62, methods such as those described in (a) to (c) above may be used to determine one of lock effects A (e.g., a lock effect without reel effects and pseudo play), lock effect B (e.g., a lock effect with reel effects), and lock effect C (e.g., a lock effect with pseudo play). The lock effect determined in this manner may be selected in steps S1005, S1010, and S1012 of FIG. 43. A similar method may also be used to determine the type of oscillation pattern (e.g., one of oscillation patterns A, B, and C described in the second embodiment). Note that the effects determined in this manner are not limited to effects controlled by the main control circuit 100, but may also be effects controlled by the sub-control circuit 200.

<Bonus winning process>
FIG. 63 is a flowchart showing the process carried out in the main control circuit when a bonus is won.

The bonus winning process shown in Figure 63 is performed in the main control circuit 100 after the process of step S70 in Figure 26 (internal lottery process) has been executed. In other words, the bonus winning process is performed before the rotation of each of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R begins in a bonus winning game (a unit game that has transitioned from a non-bonus state (a state that is neither a bonus state nor a carryover state) to a carryover state (between flags) due to a bonus role being determined as an internal lottery role).

In the bonus winning process, the main CPU 101 first determines whether BB has been determined as the internal winning combination (whether the current unit game is a BB winning game) (step S1341). If it determines that BB has not been determined as the internal winning combination, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

On the other hand, if it is determined that BB has been determined as the internal winning combination, the main CPU 101 randomly selects one of the lock effect numbers "1," "3," "5," or "6" (see FIG. 36) (step S1342). The main CPU 101 then sets the lock effect start flag to ON (step S1343) and ends this subroutine. This results in the lock effect corresponding to the lock effect number "1," "3," "5," or "6" being performed.

In the second embodiment, when a lock effect number corresponding to a pseudo game is selected, the "Aim for 7" effect image 1100 (see FIG. 45) is displayed on the main display device 210 (see step S1022 in FIG. 44). This makes it possible to prompt the player to perform a stop operation at a timing when the "red 7" symbol can be displayed in a static state on each of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R during the pseudo game. In this embodiment, the "Aim for 7" effect image 1100 may also be displayed on the main display device 210, but in this case, the "Aim for BAR" effect image (not shown) is displayed on the main display device 210. This makes it possible to prompt the player to perform a stop operation at a timing when the "BAR" symbol can be displayed in a static state on each of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R during the pseudo game.

In addition, here, after BB is determined as the internal winning combination, the BB state is initiated when a line of "red 7" symbols is displayed stopped along the active line in the main game (the "red 7" symbols are aligned), and after MB is determined as the internal winning combination, the MB state is initiated when a line of "BAR" symbols is displayed stopped along the active line in the main game (the "BAR" symbols are aligned). In this case, in the BB winning game (main game), the player should aim for the "red 7" symbol when operating the stop buttons 8L, 8C, and 8R.

However, as described above, when the "Aim for the BAR" effect image is displayed during a pseudo game, if the "Aim for the BAR" effect image continues to be displayed even after the pseudo game ends and the game transitions to the main game, the player will be led to aim for a different symbol (the "BAR" symbol) than the symbol (the "red 7" symbol) that they should actually be aiming for. This increases the chance that the "red 7" symbols will not stop and be displayed along the winning line (BB will not be awarded).

This is especially likely when the "Red 7" symbol and the "BAR" symbol are spaced apart on each reel 3L, 3C, and 3R. For example, as shown in Figure 9, if the symbol position ("0") corresponding to the "Red 7" symbol on at least one reel 3 (middle reel 3C) is not within the maximum number of sliding symbols (4 symbols) relative to the symbol position ("9") corresponding to the "BAR" symbol on that reel 3 (middle reel 3C), then if a stopping operation is performed on that reel 3 at the time when the "BAR" symbol appears on the pay line, it will be impossible for the BB to win. In this sense, the "Aim for the BAR" effect image is a hint designed to prevent the BB from winning.

In any case, it is desirable that the "Aim for the BAR" effect image displayed in the simulated game be terminated at a predetermined timing to prevent the player from misidentifying the symbol they should be aiming for (internal winning combination). This timing may be before or after the random delay process (see step S1123 in Figure 50) has begun. Specifically, the timing may be, for example, the period from when the second stop reel stops until when the third stop reel stops in the pseudo game (for example, when the determination result of step S1262 in FIG. 58 is "YES" and the operation of the stop button 8 is the third stop operation, or when the determination result of step S1265 in FIG. 58 is "YES" and the third stop operation is omitted), when all remaining stop button operations are omitted (for example, when the determination result of step S1263 in FIG. 58 is "YES"), or the period from when the third stop reel stops until when the third stop reel starts to swing (for example, when the determination result of step S1249 in FIG. 57 is "YES"). S" and the reel to be controlled is the third stopped reel), the timing when all reels 3L, 3C, and 3R have stopped in the pseudo game (for example, after the determination result in step S1251 in FIG. 57 is "YES" and before the processing in step S1252 is performed), when the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R for the main game start to rotate (for example, when the determination result in step S1122 in FIG. 50 is "YES" or the timing when the first reel starts to rotate due to random delay processing), the period after the rotation of each reel 3L, 3C, and 3R for the main game starts until the rotation of all reels 3L, 3C, and 3R reaches a constant speed, etc.

Furthermore, if another pseudo-game effect (for example, swing control) is being performed at the same time that the display of the "Aim for the BAR" effect image ends, that effect should also end. Furthermore, at that timing, an effect corresponding to BB being determined as the internal winning combination (BB suggestion effect) may be started (an image suggesting that BB has been determined as the internal winning combination (for example, "Aim for the 7" effect image 1100) may be displayed). This effectively prevents the player from mistaking the symbol they should be aiming for (the internal winning combination), and also suggests that they should aim for the "red 7" symbol.

As explained in the second embodiment, the pseudo game can be configured so that a predetermined symbol is displayed regardless of the stop start position and the number of sliding pieces. Therefore, in the pseudo game, even if the player aims for the "BAR" symbol when operating each stop button 8L, 8C, 8R (even if the stop operation is performed at a timing when the "BAR" symbol can be displayed on each reel 3L, 3C, 3R), the "red 7" symbol may be aligned. This makes it possible to suggest that BB has been determined as the internal winning combination through the "red 7" symbol alignment. If the "red 7" symbol is aligned in the pseudo game, the BB suggestion effect may not be performed in the main game.

Alternatively, the pseudo game may be configured so that a "BAR" pattern is achieved when a stop operation is performed at a timing when the "BAR" pattern can be stopped and displayed on each of reels 3L, 3C, and 3R (if the stop operation is not performed at the appropriate timing, the "BAR" pattern will not be achieved). Furthermore, the pseudo game may be configured so that a "BAR" pattern is achieved regardless of the stop start position and the number of sliding symbols. Alternatively, the pseudo game may be configured so that the "BAR" pattern is ready, but the "BAR" pattern is not achieved (the remaining "BAR" pattern is not stopped and displayed). If the "Red 7" pattern is not achieved in the pseudo game, it is desirable to perform the above-mentioned BB suggestion effect in the main game.

In this way, each time a "RED 7" symbol or a "BAR" symbol is stopped and displayed on each reel 3L, 3C, 3R, swing control (see step S1285 in Figure 59) is performed on each reel 3L, 3C, 3R. As explained in the second embodiment, this swing control is performed so that the "RED 7" symbol or a "BAR" symbol is positioned on the pay line when each reel 3L, 3C, 3R is positioned at the center of vibration or when each reel 3L, 3C, 3R is almost completely stopped.

As described above, when the bonus winning process shown in FIG. 63 is performed, the lock effect determination process shown in FIG. 43 may not be performed, or the lock effect determination process shown in FIG. 43 may be performed in conjunction with the bonus winning process shown in FIG. 63. Also, although not shown, if BB is not determined as the internal winning combination, a lock effect (a so-called false effect) corresponding to lock effect number "2" or "4" may be performed.

<Lock effect determination process at the end of the game>
FIG. 64 is a flowchart showing the process of determining the lock effect at the end of the game, which is carried out in the main control circuit.

The game end lock effect determination process shown in Figure 64 is performed by the main control circuit 100 after the process of step S156 in Figure 31 (game end process during advantageous period) is executed.

In the process for determining the lock effect at the end of play, the main CPU 101 first determines whether the current play zone is a favorable zone (step S1361). This process is the same as the process of step S1001 in FIG. 43. If it is determined that the current play zone is not a favorable zone, the main CPU 101 terminates this subroutine.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the current play zone is a favorable zone, the main CPU 101 determines whether the pseudo-bonus transition lottery has been won (step S1362). As explained in the first embodiment, when reels 3L, 3C, and 3R stop spinning during main play, a favorable zone entry sub-flag (see FIG. 7(a)) is determined as secondary information (sub-flag) corresponding to the combination of symbols that are stopped and displayed. Then, in the presentation zone (favorable zone/normal play), the pseudo-bonus transition lottery table (see FIG. 7(c)) is referenced, and a lottery (pseudo-bonus transition lottery) is conducted based on the random number value and the favorable zone entry sub-flag, and the result of the pseudo-bonus transition lottery is determined as "winning" or "not winning." Note that "winning" includes "winning lottery (current play)" and "winning lottery (next play)," but these will not be distinguished here.

If the main CPU 101 determines that the pseudo bonus transition lottery has not been won, it terminates this subroutine. On the other hand, if it determines that the pseudo bonus transition lottery has been won, the main CPU 101 randomly selects one of the lock effect numbers "1," "3," "5," or "6" (see FIG. 36) (step S1363). The main CPU 101 then sets the lock effect start flag to ON (step S1364) and terminates this subroutine. This results in the lock effect corresponding to the lock effect number "1," "3," "5," or "6" being performed.

Although not shown, even if the 1G consecutive lottery (see Figure 7(d)) is won, one of the lock effect numbers "1", "3", "5", and "6" may be selected (a lock effect corresponding to the lock effect number "1", "3", "5", or "6" is performed). Furthermore, if the pseudo-bonus transition lottery (and the 1G consecutive lottery) is not won, one of the lock effect numbers "2" and "4" may be selected (a lock effect corresponding to the lock effect number "2" or "4" is performed).

<Lock effect execution process at the end of the game>
Fig. 65 is a flowchart showing the process for executing the lock effect at the end of a game, which is carried out in the main control circuit. Fig. 66 is a flowchart showing the process for starting the lock effect at the end of a game, which is carried out in the main control circuit.

The end-of-game lock effect execution process shown in Figure 65 is a process performed by the main control circuit 100 in step S16 (end-of-game main-side effect control process) of Figure 23 (main processing).

In the game end lock effect execution process, the main CPU 101 first determines whether the lock effect start flag (see step S1364 in FIG. 64) is set to on (step S1381). If it determines that the lock effect start flag is not set to on, the main CPU 101 terminates this subroutine.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the lock effect start flag is set to ON, the main CPU 101 executes processing for starting the lock effect at the end of play (step S1382). Here, we will explain the processing for starting the lock effect at the end of play using Figure 66.

In the process for starting the lock effect at the end of game, the main CPU 101 first determines whether a replay has been awarded (step S1401). In this process, the main CPU 101 determines whether the combination of symbols stopped and displayed along the pay line is a combination of symbols related to a replay role (see Figures 11 to 14).

If it is determined that a replay has been won, the main CPU 101 executes a replay winning lock effect start command generation and storage process (step S1402). In this process, the main CPU 101 generates replay winning lock effect start command data and stores the generated replay winning lock effect start command data in the communication data storage area of the main RAM 103. The replay winning lock effect start command data stored in the communication data storage area is transmitted from the main control circuit 100 to the sub-control circuit 200 in the communication data transmission process (see step S204 in Figure 32). This allows the sub-control circuit 200 to recognize that a replay has been won and the lock effect will begin, and it can determine the timing for executing various effects, etc.

Specifically, upon receiving the command data to start the lock effect when a replay is won, the sub-control circuit 200 sets effect data corresponding to the start of the lock effect when a replay is won. As a result, for example, although not shown, a text image (bet request image) with the content "Please place a bet" is displayed on the main display device 210, prompting the player to operate the bet button (MAX bet button 6a or 1 bet button 6b). When a replay is won, there is no need to operate the bet button, and the bet request image can surprise the player.

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether a bet button (MAX bet button 6a or 1 bet button 6b) has been operated (step S1403). In this process, the main CPU 101 determines whether the bet switch 6S has been turned on. If it determines that either the MAX bet button 6a or the 1 bet button 6b has been operated, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

On the other hand, if it is determined that neither the MAX BET button 6a nor the 1 BET button 6b has been operated, the main CPU 101 determines whether the start lever 7 has been operated (step S1404). In this process, the main CPU 101 determines whether the start switch 7S has been turned on (see step S50 in FIG. 25). If it determines that the start lever 7 has not been operated, the main CPU 101 determines whether a predetermined time (e.g., 30 seconds) has elapsed since the replay winning lock effect start command generation and storage process was executed (since the bet request image was displayed) (step S1405).

If the main CPU 101 determines that the predetermined time has not elapsed, it returns to step S1403. If it determines in step S1404 that the start lever 7 has been operated, or if it determines in step S1405 that the predetermined time has elapsed, the main CPU 101 sets the lock effect cancel flag to ON (step S1406). The lock effect cancel flag is a flag used to cancel the lock effect. The main CPU 101 then sets the lock effect start flag to OFF (step S1407) and ends this subroutine.

If it is determined in step S1401 that a replay has not been won, the main CPU 101 executes a process for generating and storing a command to start a lock effect when a combination other than a replay is won (step S1408). In this process, the main CPU 101 generates command data to start a lock effect when a combination other than a replay is won, and stores the generated command data to start a lock effect when a combination other than a replay is won in the communication data storage area of the main RAM 103. The command data to start a lock effect when a combination other than a replay is won stored in the communication data storage area is transmitted from the main control circuit 100 to the sub-control circuit 200 in the communication data transmission process (see step S204 in Figure 32). This allows the sub-control circuit 200 to recognize that a combination other than a replay has been won and the lock effect will begin, and it can determine the timing for executing various effects, etc.

Specifically, upon receiving the command data to start the lock effect when a combination other than a replay is won, the sub-control circuit 200 sets effect data corresponding to the start of the lock effect when a combination other than a replay is won. As a result, for example, although not shown, a text image with the message "hit the lever" (a "hit the lever" image) is displayed on the main display device 210, encouraging the player to operate the start lever 7. When a combination other than a replay is won, it is normally necessary to operate the bet button before operating the start lever 7, but the "hit the lever" image can surprise the player.

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether the start lever 7 has been operated (step S1409). In this process, the main CPU 101 determines whether the start switch 7S has been turned on (see step S50 in Figure 25). If it determines that the start lever 7 has been operated, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the start lever 7 has not been operated, the main CPU 101 determines whether a predetermined time (e.g., 30 seconds) has elapsed since the execution of the lock effect start command generation and storage process for winning a prize other than a replay (since the "hit the lever" image was displayed) (step S1410). If it is determined that the predetermined time has not elapsed, the main CPU 101 returns to step S1409. On the other hand, if it is determined that the predetermined time has elapsed, the main CPU 101 sets the lock effect cancel flag to ON (step S1411). The lock effect cancel flag is a flag used to cancel the lock effect. Thereafter, the main CPU 101 sets the lock effect start flag to OFF (step S1412) and ends this subroutine.

The above explains the process for starting the lock effect at the end of game, which is performed in step S1382 of Figure 65, using Figure 66. Let's return to the explanation of Figure 65.

After executing the processing of step S1382, the main CPU 101 determines whether the lock effect cancel flag is set to ON (step S1383). If it determines that the lock effect cancel flag is set to ON, the main CPU 101 terminates this subroutine.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the lock effect cancel flag is not set to ON, the main CPU 101 executes the processes of steps S1384 to S1390. However, since these processes are the same as the processes of steps S1022 to S1028 in FIG. 44, a description thereof will be omitted here. The main CPU 101 then terminates this subroutine.

As described above, if it is determined that a lock effect will be performed in a unit game in which a replay is won, the bet button (MAX bet button 6a or 1 bet button 6b) is operated, which causes reels 3L, 3C, and 3R to begin rotating for the lock effect and the lock effect is performed (see steps S1386 and S1388 in Figure 65), and in the next unit game, after a random delay process (see step S1123 in Figure 50), the rotation of reels 3L, 3C, and 3R will become the constant speed rotation for the main game. On the other hand, if it is determined that a lock effect will be performed in a unit game in which a replay is won, but the bet button (MAX BET button 6a or 1 BET button 6b) is not operated within a predetermined time after the bet request image is displayed, or if the start lever 7 is operated, the lock effect (spinning of reels 3L, 3C, 3R for the lock effect) will not be performed, and in the next unit game, the normal acceleration process (see step S1125 in Figure 50) will be performed, and the rotation of reels 3L, 3C, 3R will return to the constant speed rotation for the main game.

In the process for starting the lock effect at the end of a game shown in FIG. 66, if the start lever 7 is operated without operating the bet button (MAX bet button 6a or 1 bet button 6b), the game will proceed to the next unit game. In this case, operation of the start lever 7 in the next unit game may be omitted. In other words, if the judgment result in step S1404 in FIG. 66 is "YES," the judgment result in step S50 in FIG. 25 may be "YES" without waiting for the start lever 7 to be operated in the next unit game. However, unlike the process for starting the lock effect at the end of a game shown in FIG. 66, the game may be configured not to proceed to the next unit game unless the bet button (MAX bet button 6a or 1 bet button 6b) is operated. Furthermore, even if the bet button (MAX BET button 6a or 1 BET button 6b) is not operated, the game may proceed to the next unit game, but the game may be configured so that the game only proceeds to the next unit game if the bet button (MAX BET button 6a or 1 BET button 6b) is not operated for a fairly long time (for example, one minute).

Furthermore, if it is determined that a lock effect will be performed in a unit game in which a winning combination other than a replay is achieved, the start lever 7 is operated to start the rotation of reels 3L, 3C, and 3R for the lock effect, thereby performing the lock effect (see steps S1386 and S1388 in Figure 65), and in the next unit game, after a random delay process (see step S1123 in Figure 50), the rotation of reels 3L, 3C, and 3R will be at the constant speed for the main game. On the other hand, if it is determined that a lock effect will be performed in a unit game in which a winning combination other than a replay is achieved, but the start lever 7 is not operated within a predetermined time after the "hit the lever" image is displayed, the lock effect (spinning of reels 3L, 3C, and 3R for the lock effect) will not be performed, and in the next unit game, after a normal acceleration process (see step S1125 in Figure 50), the rotation of reels 3L, 3C, and 3R will be at the constant speed for the main game. It is also possible to configure the game so that it will not proceed to the next unit game unless the start lever 7 is operated, or to configure the game so that it will only proceed to the next unit game if the start lever 7 is not operated for a fairly long time (for example, one minute).

<Stop button illumination control process during pseudo-game>
Although not shown, the main control circuit 100 performs a pseudo-game stop button illumination control process during the pseudo-game. Specifically, the main CPU 101 executes the process of step S1243 in FIG. 57 and then executes a pseudo-game stop button illumination control process. This causes, for example, the lighting state of each stop button 8L, 8C, and 8R to change. This will be explained in detail below.

Each stop button 8L, 8C, 8R has a similar configuration and is equipped with a stop button cover with a pressing portion that can be touched by the player, and a stop button LED located in a position recessed from the stop button cover. The stop button LED is a full-color LED that is capable of emitting multiple colors, including red, blue, and green. The stop button cover is made of a translucent material, and the light emitted from the stop button LED passes through the stop button cover and is emitted outside the pachislot machine 1, making it visible to the player.

In this embodiment, the pseudo game is configured to illuminate the stop button LEDs of the active stop buttons 8L, 8C, and 8R. Specifically, in step S1242 of FIG. 57, the main CPU 101 controls the stop button LEDs of all stop buttons 8L, 8C, and 8R to light up. Also, in step S1244 of FIG. 57, the main CPU 101 controls the stop button LED of the currently operated stop button 8 (or the stop button 8 that is deemed to have been operated when stop button operation is omitted) to turn off. Alternatively, if it is determined that the controlled reel has stopped in step S1249 instead of step S1244, the main CPU 101 may control the stop button LED of the currently operated stop button 8 (or the stop button 8 that is deemed to have been operated when stop button operation is omitted) to turn off.

Furthermore, when the main CPU 101 lights up the stop button LEDs of the active stop buttons 8L, 8C, and 8R, it may control the light emission color of the stop button LEDs to be a specific color (e.g., red).Furthermore, the main CPU 101 may control the stop button LED of the currently operated stop button 8 (or the stop button 8 that is deemed to have been operated even if the stop button operation is omitted) to be illuminated in a specific color (e.g., red).

At this time, if it has been decided that a special benefit will be awarded to a player (for example, if the player has won the pseudo bonus transition lottery (AT lottery)), the stop button LED may be controlled to emit a specific color (for example, red) with a higher probability than if it has not been decided that the special benefit will be awarded (for example, if the player has not won the pseudo bonus transition lottery (AT lottery)). Also, if it has been decided that a special benefit will be awarded to a player (for example, if the player has won the pseudo bonus transition lottery (AT lottery)), the stop button LED may be controlled to emit a specific color (for example, red) with a higher probability than if the stop button LED emits a predetermined color (for example, blue).

This allows the player to be informed of the degree of expectation for the simulated game through the light color of the stop button LEDs. This type of control can be performed individually for the three stop buttons 8L, 8C, and 8R. For example, if all three stop buttons 8 are lit in a specific color (e.g., red), the player's expectations can be raised, and if only one stop button 8 is lit in a specific color (e.g., red), the player's expectations can be relatively lowered.

The above describes the effects in which the lighting patterns of the stop buttons 8L, 8C, and 8R change, but the lighting patterns of the start lever 7 and bet buttons (MAX bet button 6a and 1 bet button 6b) may also be changed. For example, the start lever 7 and the MAX bet button 6a and 1 bet button 6b may each be equipped with a translucent cover and LED, similar to the stop button 8. The cover of the start lever 7 may be a spherical part that can be held by the player. For example, the LED of the start lever 7 may be lit when the above-mentioned "hit the lever" image is displayed on the main display device 210, or the LEDs of the MAX bet button 6a to 1 bet button 6b may be lit when the above-mentioned bet request image is displayed on the main display device 210.

In addition, at this time, the light color of the LEDs on the start lever 7 or bet buttons may be used to indicate to the player the degree of expectation of the pseudo game. For example, if it has been determined that a special benefit will be awarded to a player (e.g., if the player has won the pseudo bonus transition lottery (AT lottery)), the LEDs on the start lever 7 or bet buttons may be controlled to emit a specific color (e.g., red) with a higher probability than if it has not been determined that the special benefit will be awarded (e.g., if the player has not won the pseudo bonus transition lottery (AT lottery)). In addition, if it has been determined that a special benefit will be awarded to a player (e.g., if the player has won the pseudo bonus transition lottery (AT lottery)), the LEDs on the start lever 7 or bet buttons may be controlled to emit a specific color (e.g., red) with a higher probability than if the LEDs on the start lever 7 or bet buttons emit a predetermined color (e.g., blue).

The LEDs provided on the stop button 8, start lever 7, MAX BET button 6a, and 1 BET button 6b may be controlled by the main control circuit 100 or the sub-control circuit 200. If the LEDs are configured to be controlled by the sub-control circuit 200, when the main CPU 101 changes the lighting state of the LEDs, it generates command data corresponding to the change in lighting state and transmits the generated command data to the sub-control circuit 200. Note that in the main game, as in the pseudo game, an effect may be created in which the lighting state of the LEDs is changed.

<Backlight effect>
As explained in the first embodiment, a light source (reel lamp) is provided inside each reel 3L, 3C, 3R at a position where the symbols can be seen at least from the main display window 4, and at least while each reel 3L, 3C, 3R is rotating, the reels are illuminated from the inside with a constant brightness, thereby ensuring the visibility of the symbols.

In this embodiment, an effect (backlight effect) is created using such reel lamps (reel backlights). Although not shown, each reel 3L, 3C, and 3R is equipped with multiple LEDs (reel illumination LEDs) as reel backlights. These reel illumination LEDs are located inside the reel body of each reel 3L, 3C, and 3R so that they can individually illuminate each of the nine symbols displayed in a stopped state within the frame of the main display window 4.

Hereinafter, the reel illumination LED capable of illuminating the upper area of the left reel 3L will be referred to as the upper left reel illumination LED, the reel illumination LED capable of illuminating the middle area of the left reel 3L will be referred to as the middle left reel illumination LED, the reel illumination LED capable of illuminating the lower area of the left reel 3L will be referred to as the lower left reel illumination LED, the reel illumination LED capable of illuminating the upper area of the middle reel 3C will be referred to as the upper middle reel illumination LED, the reel illumination LED capable of illuminating the middle area of the middle reel 3C will be referred to as the middle middle reel illumination LED, the reel illumination LED capable of illuminating the lower area of the middle reel 3C will be referred to as the lower middle reel illumination LED, the reel illumination LED capable of illuminating the upper area of the right reel 3R will be referred to as the upper right reel illumination LED, the reel illumination LED capable of illuminating the middle area of the right reel 3R will be referred to as the middle right reel illumination LED, and the reel illumination LED capable of illuminating the lower area of the right reel 3R will be referred to as the lower right reel illumination LED.

The LEDs for illuminating the top left reel, the center left reel, the bottom left reel, the top center reel, the center center reel, the bottom center reel, the top right reel, the center right reel, and the bottom right reel each have multiple LEDs, allowing for backlight effects with complex lighting patterns to be realized on each of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R.

The backlight effect is achieved by turning off the reel illumination LEDs that were lit as each of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R stops during a simulated game. Specifically, when the main CPU 101 starts the rotation of each of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R during a simulated game (see step S1206 in FIG. 55 and step S1386 in FIG. 65), it controls the LEDs so that the LEDs for illuminating the top left reel, the LEDs for illuminating the center left reel, the LEDs for illuminating the bottom left reel, the LEDs for illuminating the top middle reel, the LEDs for illuminating the center middle reel, the LEDs for illuminating the bottom middle reel, the LEDs for illuminating the top right reel, the LEDs for illuminating the center right reel, and the LED for illuminating the bottom right reel are all lit.

When the main CPU 101 determines in step S1249 of FIG. 57 that the controlled reel has stopped, it controls the reel illumination LEDs capable of illuminating the upper area of the controlled reel, the reel illumination LEDs capable of illuminating the middle area of the controlled reel, and the reel illumination LEDs capable of illuminating the lower area of the controlled reel, so that the reel illumination LEDs capable of illuminating areas that are not located on a pay line are turned off. For example, assume that the pay line is the center line and the controlled reel is left reel 3L. In this case, the main CPU 101 controls the reel illumination LEDs to be turned off, while the LED for illuminating the upper left reel and the LED for illuminating the lower left reel remain lit. When turning off the reel illumination LEDs capable of illuminating areas that are not located on a pay line, the main CPU 101 may turn off all of the multiple LEDs provided as the reel illumination LEDs, or it may turn off only some of the multiple LEDs.

As a result, the visibility of symbols displayed in areas not on paylines is reduced, but the visibility of symbols displayed in areas on paylines is ensured. For example, in the lock effect corresponding to lock effect number "3" (see FIG. 36), in the state shown in FIG. 39(b), the visibility of "BAR" and "REPLAY" is reduced for the right reel 3R, while the visibility of "RED 7" is ensured. In the state shown in FIG. 39(c), the right reel 3R is the same as the state shown in FIG. 39(b), and the visibility of "WATERM" and "YELLOW BLANK" is reduced for the center reel 3C, while the visibility of "RED 7" is ensured. In the state shown in FIG. 39(d), the right reel 3R and center reel 3C are the same as the state shown in FIG. 39(c), and the visibility of "WHITE BLANK 1" and "WATERM" is reduced for the left reel 3L, while the visibility of "RED 7" is ensured. Therefore, even if some of the reel illumination LEDs go out, the player can clearly recognize that the "red 7" symbol has been lined up.

When turning off reel illumination LEDs that can illuminate areas not located on pay lines, it is desirable to configure the system so that turning off the reel illumination LEDs does not reduce the visibility of the symbols in areas located on pay lines. For example, it is recommended to configure the system so that a partition or similar is provided between adjacent areas so that the visibility of the symbols in each area is not interfered with by the lighting state of the reel illumination LEDs in other areas.

Furthermore, after turning off the reel illumination LEDs that can illuminate areas that are not located on the pay line, the LEDs may be turned on and off again. In this case, the lighting pattern of the LEDs may be used to indicate to the player the degree of expectation of the pseudo game. For example, when it has been determined that a bonus will be awarded to a player (e.g., when the player has won the pseudo bonus transition lottery (AT lottery)), the LEDs may be controlled to light up in a specific pattern with a higher probability than when it has not been determined that the bonus will be awarded (e.g., when the player has not won the pseudo bonus transition lottery (AT lottery)). Furthermore, when it has been determined that a bonus will be awarded to a player (e.g., when the player has won the pseudo bonus transition lottery (AT lottery)), the LEDs may be controlled to light up in a specific pattern with a higher probability than when they light up in a predetermined pattern.

The reel illumination LEDs may be controlled by the main control circuit 100 or the sub-control circuit 200. If the reel illumination LEDs are configured to be controlled by the sub-control circuit 200, when the main CPU 101 changes the lighting state of the reel illumination LEDs, it generates command data corresponding to the change in lighting state and transmits the generated command data to the sub-control circuit 200. Note that in the main game, as in the pseudo game, an effect may be created in which the lighting state of the reel illumination LEDs is changed.

<Internal structure of main ROM and main RAM (memory map)>
Next, with reference to Figures 67A to 67C, we will explain the internal configurations (hereinafter referred to as "memory maps") of the main ROM 102 and main RAM 103 included in the main control circuit 100. Note that Figure 67A is a diagram showing the memory map of the entire memory, Figure 67B is a diagram showing the memory map of the main ROM 102, and Figure 67C is a diagram showing the memory map of the main RAM 103.

In the memory map of the entire memory provided in the main control circuit 100, as shown in Figure 67A, from the top address (0000H), the memory area of the main ROM 102, the memory area of the main RAM 103, the built-in register area, and the XCS decode area are each located at a predetermined address in this order, with unused areas in between.

In the memory map of main ROM 102, as shown in Figure 67B, from the top address (0000H) of main ROM 102, the program area, data area, non-standard area, trademark recording area, program management area, and security setting area are located in this order, each at a designated address.

The program area stores control programs for various processes executed by the main CPU 101 in various control processes related to the playability of games played by players. The data area stores various data (e.g., data tables such as internal lottery tables, data for sending various control instructions (commands) to the sub-control circuit 42, etc.) used by the main CPU 101 in various control processes related to the playability of games played by players. In other words, the game ROM area (game memory area) consisting of the program area and data area stores various programs and data necessary for control processes (gameability-related processes) related to the playability of games actually played by players at gaming establishments.

In addition, the non-regular area stores control programs and data for various processes that are not directly related to the playability of the game played by the player (processes that do not affect playability). For example, the non-regular area stores programs and data used in the certification test (test firing test) of the pachislot 1, control programs and data used for checksum generation processes when power is lost and sum check processes when power is restored, as well as anti-fraud programs and the data required for them.

In the memory map of main RAM 103, as shown in Figure 67C, starting from the top address (F000H) of main RAM 103, the game RAM area (predetermined storage area, game temporary memory area) and non-standard RAM area (non-standard temporary memory area) are located in this order, each at a predetermined address.

The gaming RAM area is provided with a working area and stack area for temporarily storing various data, such as internal winning combinations, determined by the execution of a control program related to the playability of the game played by the player. Each type of data is then stored in the working area at a specified address within the gaming RAM area.

The non-regular RAM area also includes a non-regular work area, which serves as a work area for various processes that are not directly related to the playability of the game played by the player, and a non-regular stack. In this embodiment, this non-regular RAM area is used to execute various processes that are not directly related to the playability of the game played by the player, such as sum check processing.

As described above, in the pachislot machine 1 of this embodiment, various programs and data (tables) used for various processes that are not directly related to the playability of the game performed by the player are stored in a non-regular ROM area (non-regular memory area) located at an address different from the game ROM area in the main ROM 102. Furthermore, various processes that are not directly related to the playability of the game performed by the player are performed using a non-regular RAM area located at an address different from the game RAM area in the main RAM 103.

With this configuration of the main ROM 102, it is possible to place programs and data that are not necessary for the actual game played by the player in a ROM area (non-regular ROM area) where programs and the like were previously prohibited under previous rules. Therefore, in this embodiment, it is possible to avoid pressure on the capacity of the game ROM area.

<Test firing signal control processing (non-regulatory)>
Although not shown, the main control circuit 100 performs test firing signal control processing (non-standard) during periodic interrupt processing (see FIG. 32). The main CPU 101 executes the processing of step S208 in FIG. 32 and then executes test firing signal control processing (non-standard). In this processing, the main CPU 101 performs control processing when outputting various test signals to the test machine via the test machine first interface board 301 and the test machine second interface board 302 (see FIG. 3).

Specifically, the main CPU 101 saves the address of the stack area in the main RAM 103, sets the address of the non-regular stack area in the stack pointer (SP), and saves all register data. The main CPU 101 then processes signals output to the test machine via the first test machine interface board 301 and the second test machine interface board 302, including spin control signals (drive signals) for each reel, bonus (special prize) ON/OFF signals (test signals), and control signals corresponding to the state of the condition device signal control flag. The main CPU 101 then restores the saved data from all registers and sets the saved stack area address in the stack pointer (SP).

Such test firing test signal control processing (non-regular) is executed using the non-regular work area of the main RAM 103 (see Figure 67C). Note that test firing test signal control processing (non-regular) is also performed at times other than test firing tests (after the pachislot machine 1 is installed in the gaming facility), but at this time the main control board 71 is not connected to the test machine via the test machine first interface board 301 or the test machine second interface board 302, so various test signals are generated but not output.

As explained in the first embodiment, it is possible to configure the test machine so that a test signal (pseudo game signal) is output during simulated play, allowing the test machine to recognize that a simulated game is in progress. The control processing for outputting the pseudo game signal may be performed in the test firing test signal control processing (non-regular). In this case, the control processing for outputting the pseudo game signal is executed using the non-regular work area of the main RAM 103 (see Figure 67C).

Furthermore, as described in the first embodiment, when the test machine first interface board 301 receives a pseudo game signal, it may output a pseudo game progress control signal to the main control board 71, thereby allowing the pseudo game to proceed on the main control board 71 side (i.e., the test machine first interface board 301 may be provided with a pseudo game progress function). In this case, the main control board 71 may input the pseudo game signal to the test machine second interface board 302, and the test machine second interface board 302 may input the pseudo game signal to the test machine first interface board 301. Then, by sending a pseudo game progress control signal (stop signal) from the test machine first interface board 301 to the main control board 71, it is possible to configure the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R to stop (pseudo stop) during the pseudo game. This allows the test firing test to proceed smoothly.

Furthermore, when a replay wins and a simulated game is played (see Figure 66), a test signal (cancel signal) can be output to allow the test machine to recognize that the replay win is being canceled. In this case, a cancel signal (a signal prompting the operation of the bet button) may be output from the main control board 71 to the test machine via the test machine first interface board 301 (test machine second interface board 302). Alternatively, a signal indicating that a replay win has been played and a simulated game is being played may be input from the main control board 71 to the test machine first interface board 301 (test machine second interface board 302), and then a cancel signal may be output from the test machine first interface board 301 (test machine second interface board 302). Subsequently, a signal (bet signal) corresponding to the bet placed can be output to the test machine, allowing the next game to begin, thereby smoothly progressing the test firing test. The control processing for outputting such a signal can also be configured to be performed in the test firing signal control processing (non-regular). An example of a case in which a replay wins and a pseudo game is when the symbol combination displayed on reels 3L, 3C, and 3R outside the pay line is "Bell"-"Bell"-"Bell," but the winning combination is a replay.

The above describes the pachislot machine 1 according to the third embodiment as one embodiment of the present invention.

[Modification of the first gaming machine]
Next, with reference to Figures 68 to 80, further modifications (extension examples) of what was described as the first gaming machine in the first embodiment will be described. Note that, with respect to the various specifications, functions, etc. described as modifications of the first gaming machine in this embodiment, some or all of them can be applied to what is described as other gaming machines in this embodiment, and further, with respect to the various specifications, functions, etc. described as other gaming machines in this embodiment, some or all of them can be applied to what is described as modifications of the first gaming machine in this embodiment. In other words, an appropriate combination of these can be considered as the invention according to this embodiment.

The first gaming machine described above may employ a specification that, when a predetermined role (for example, a push order bell) is determined to be the winning role, if a stop operation is performed in a specific manner (for example, the first left stop), the AT-related processing is favorable, and if a stop operation is not performed in that specific manner, the AT-related processing is unfavorable.

In the first gaming machine described above, as an example of applying this specification, when a predetermined role is determined to be the winning role, if a stop operation is performed in a specific mode, SR1 is set as the SR information, whereas if a stop operation is not performed in that specific mode, SR2 is set as the SR information; if SR1 is set, the ceiling points are always decremented by 1, whereas if SR2 is set, the ceiling points may not be decremented by 1, thereby making the AT-related processing advantageous or disadvantageous.

The SR information is configured as information for identifying whether a player played using a specific game method. Specifically, it identifies whether a stop operation was performed on the first left stop (whether the first stop operation was performed on the first reel) in a game in which the push order bell was won. If a stop operation was performed on the first left stop in a game in which the push order bell was won, the SR information is set to "SR1." On the other hand, if a stop operation was performed on a stop other than the first left stop in a game in which the push order bell was won, the SR information is set to "SR2." Furthermore, in games in which a role other than the push order bell was won, "SR0" is set regardless of the push order.

However, these specifications can also be applied to gameplay different from that described above, and there is likely room for further innovation beyond what was explained in the section on the first gaming machine above, so these will be explained in this modified example.

Furthermore, with this type of specification, the predetermined role is configured so that when a stop operation is performed in a specific mode, the expected value of the game value to be awarded is low, but when a stop operation is not performed in a specific mode, the expected value of the game value to be awarded is high. As a result, the characteristics of the gaming machine as a whole are configured so that when a stop operation is performed in a specific mode, the awarding of game value is unfavorable, but when a stop operation is not performed in a specific mode, the awarding of game value is unilaterally favorable.

Therefore, in this modified example, basically, regardless of whether a predetermined role is determined as the winning role, when a predetermined control condition is met, if a stop operation is performed in a specific manner, control is performed to favor decisions related to the AT (AT-related processing), and if a stop operation is not performed in a specific manner, control is not performed to favor decisions related to the AT (AT-related processing).

<Gameplay of the first gaming machine (modified example)>
First, the flow of the game in this modified example will be described with reference to Fig. 68. Fig. 68 is a diagram showing an example of the transition flow of the game state in the non-advantageous zone and the advantageous zone in this modified example.

As with the first gaming machine described above, non-advantageous zones and advantageous zones are provided as states in which the player plays (playing zones). Furthermore, in the first gaming machine described above, a normal zone (non-advantageous zone) was provided as a game state related to the playability of the non-advantageous zone, and this is also true for this modified version. What differs from the first gaming machine described above is that during CZ, during ST, during first bonus, and during second bonus are provided as game states related to the playability of the advantageous zone.

During CZ and ST, the state is configured as a normal advantageous zone (presentation zone), but it is a more advantageous gaming state than during normal times (advantageous zone) in that it is easier to transition to the AT state than during normal times (advantageous zone) (or it is possible to determine whether to transition to the AT state under conditions different from those during normal times (advantageous zone)). Also, during the first bonus and second bonus, the state is configured as an increasing zone (AT state), and is basically the same gaming state as during the pseudo bonus in the first gaming machine described above. Also, in this modified example, during ST and second bonus, both gaming states constitute consecutive win zones. This will be explained later.

When it is decided to move to a favorable zone during normal play (non-favorable zone), (the favorable zone transition lottery is won), the game will move to normal play (favorable zone) (transition to favorable zone). In other words, the favorable zone will begin. It is also possible to decide to move to a CZ or the first bonus as a result of the favorable zone transition lottery, and if this decision is made, the game may move directly to the corresponding state.

When play is performed during normal play (advantageous zone) and the CZ transition condition is met, a transition to the CZ occurs (CZ transition condition met). The CZ transition condition may be met, for example, when a CZ transition lottery is held with a winning probability set according to the winning combination and the lottery is won, or when points are awarded according to the winning combination (or the progress of the play period) and the awarded points reach a specified value (when the cycle is reached) (or when a CZ transition lottery is held when the cycle is reached and the lottery is won), (the condition is met). In other words, it is sufficient to be able to determine whether or not to transition to the CZ for each predetermined trigger, and the above is merely one example.

Furthermore, when play is performed during normal play (advantageous zone) and the AT transition condition is met, a transition to the first bonus will occur (AT transition condition met). The AT transition condition may be met, for example, when an AT transition lottery is held with a winning probability set according to the winning combination and the lottery is won, or when an AT transition lottery is held when the aforementioned cycle is reached and the lottery is won (or when the AT win is determined as a partial result of the CZ transition lottery). Furthermore, the condition may be met, for example, when the set ceiling number of games or the number of CZ failures reaches a specified value. In other words, whether or not to transition to the first bonus should be determined for each predetermined trigger, and the above is merely one example.

In this modified example, the main route for gameplay is basically to transition from normal mode (advantageous zone) to CZ, and then when the AT transition conditions are met during the CZ, transition to the first bonus mode. Therefore, the probability of transitioning directly from normal mode (advantageous zone) to the first bonus mode is not necessarily high. Furthermore, it may be configured so that when the AT transition conditions are met, it may be decided to transition to the second bonus mode in some cases.

In addition, during normal play (advantageous zones), for example, in decisions related to whether or not a CZ transition condition is met, or decisions related to whether or not an AT transition condition is met, the probability of that decision differs depending on whether the current state is a favorable state or a non-favorable state. Specifically, if the current state is a favorable state, the above-mentioned decision is favored, and if the current state is a non-favorable state, the above-mentioned decision is not favored.

For example, during normal play (advantageous zone), when the current state is a favorable state, it is made easier to win the CZ transition lottery compared to at least a non-favorable state, and when the current state is a non-favorable state, it is made harder to win the CZ transition lottery compared to at least a favorable state. Note that "making it harder to win" includes cases where the lottery itself is not held (or the lottery is held, but the winning lottery value is set to "0", making it virtually impossible to win (or the winning lottery value is set to an extremely small value (such as "1"), making it virtually impossible to win)).

Furthermore, for example, during normal play (advantageous interval), when the current state is a favorable state, points are made more likely to be awarded than in a non-favorable state, and when the current state is a non-favorable state, points are made more difficult to award than in a favorable state. Note that "making it more difficult to award points" includes cases where the award decision is not made at all (or where the award decision is made, but the decision result is always "0", so that no points are actually awarded (or where the probability of the decision result being "1" or higher is extremely low, so that almost no points are actually awarded)). Of course, it is also possible to create differences in this way, for example, when a "watermelon" is won, "5" points are awarded in a favorable state, but only "1" point is awarded in a non-favorable state. Also, for example, if one point is awarded per game, it is possible to create differences in this way, such as the award process being carried out in a favorable state, but not in a non-favorable state.

Furthermore, for example, during normal play (advantageous zone), when the current state is a preferential state, it is made easier to win the AT transition lottery compared to at least a non-preferential state, and when the current state is a non-preferential state, it is made harder to win the AT transition lottery compared to at least a preferential state. Note that "making it harder to win" includes cases where the lottery itself is not held (or the lottery is held, but the winning lottery value is set to "0", making it virtually impossible to win (or the winning lottery value is set to an extremely small value (such as "1"), making it virtually impossible to win)).

Also, for example, during normal operation (advantageous zone), when the current state is a favorable state, decisions related to whether or not the CZ transition conditions are met are more favorable than in a non-favorable state, but decisions related to whether or not the AT transition conditions are met are the same as in a non-favorable state (i.e., no favorable treatment) can be adopted; or during normal operation (advantageous zone), when the current state is a favorable state, decisions related to whether or not the AT transition conditions are met are more favorable than in a non-favorable state, but decisions related to whether or not the CZ transition conditions are met are the same as in a non-favorable state (i.e., no favorable treatment) can be adopted.

During the CZ, for example, it is configured to be able to continue for a set period (for example, 16 games), and if the AT transition conditions are met during that time, the game will transition to the first bonus (CZ successful, AT win). On the other hand, if the AT transition conditions are not met during that time, the game will transition to the normal period (advantageous zone) (CZ failed, AT not won). The AT transition conditions during the CZ can be, for example, the same as those during the normal period (advantageous zone), or the same as those during the ST, which will be described later.

Furthermore, with regard to the preferential control described below, for example, if AT transition conditions similar to those during normal times (advantageous zones) are adopted during CZ (or if AT transition conditions different from those during ST are adopted at least), preferential control similar to that during normal times (advantageous zones) can be performed, and if AT transition conditions similar to those during ST are adopted (or if AT transition conditions different from those during normal times (advantageous zones) are adopted at least), preferential control similar to that during ST can be performed.

Also, different AT transition conditions can be used during the CZ. For example, during the first half of the CZ (e.g., games 1-10), an expectation lottery is held for each predetermined trigger (e.g., each time a specific combination is won, or each time a game is played) to determine (or upgrade) the AT winning expectation. Then, during the second half of the CZ (e.g., games 11-15), an AT lottery is held for each predetermined trigger (e.g., each time a specific combination is won, or each time a game is played). If the lottery is won, an AT winning (CZ success) is announced in the final game (e.g., the 16th game), and the game transitions to the first bonus from the next game. If the lottery is not won, an AT non-winning (CZ failure) is announced in the final game (e.g., the 16th game), and the game returns to normal mode (the advantageous zone) from the next game. This type of gameplay can be adopted.

In this case, for example, in the first half period, when the current state is a preferential state, it is made easier to win the expectation lottery compared to at least a non-preferential state, and when the current state is a non-preferential state, it is made harder to win the expectation lottery compared to at least a preferential state. Also, in the second half period, when the current state is a preferential state, it is made easier to win the AT lottery compared to at least a non-preferential state, and when the current state is a non-preferential state, it is made harder to win the AT lottery compared to at least a preferential state. Note that the manner of "making it harder to win" is the same as that described above.

Note that the specified period during the CZ is merely an example, and the period is not limited to the above. For example, if the number of games is managed, the period may be another period that does not change (e.g., 32 games), or another period that can change (e.g., one determined by lottery between 16 and 32 games). Furthermore, for example, the number of AT lotteries to be held may be specified (or determined by lottery), and the AT lottery may continue until this specified number of times (e.g., three) have been held. Furthermore, for example, a specified number of continuation lotteries (e.g., three) may be held, and if a continuation lottery during the run is not a winning lottery, the CZ will fail and end; if all continuation lotteries are winning lots, the CZ will end and end.

Furthermore, during the CZ, the final decision on whether to transition to the first bonus can be made based on one or more lottery or decision results, and the manner in which this is done is not limited to the above. Furthermore, the timing of transition from the CZ to the first bonus is not limited to the above. For example, the transition to the first bonus may be made from the game following the game in which the AT transition condition is met, without waiting for the final game.

In addition, during the CZ, it is basically configured as a normal advantageous zone in a non-AT state, but it may be configured to be in an AT state (increasing zone) for at least a portion of the period (for example, from the start until the push order bell is drawn three times), or the entire period may be configured as an increasing zone in an AT state.

During the first bonus, for example, the AT state (increase interval) is configured to continue for a specified period (e.g., 20 games), and once the specified period of play has been played, the game transitions to the consecutive win zone (the first bonus end condition is met). During the first bonus, a second bonus stock lottery is held at least every specified trigger (e.g., every time a specific combination is won, or after each play), and if the lottery is won, the value of the second bonus counter is incremented by 1. Then, when the specified period of play has been played, if the value of the second bonus counter is 1 or greater, the value of the second bonus counter is decremented by 1 and the game transitions to the second bonus state, and if the value of the second bonus counter is 0, the game transitions to the ST state.

The specified period during the first bonus is merely an example, and the period is not limited to the one described above. For example, if the number of games is managed, the period may be another period that does not change (e.g., 25 games), or another period that can change (e.g., 20, 25, or 30 games determined by lottery). It may also be managed by the number of times a navigation occurs (navigation count) when the push order bell is drawn (e.g., ending when the navigation count reaches 10), or by the difference in the number of coins (e.g., ending when the difference in the number of coins exceeds 100).

During the second bonus, for example, the AT state (increase interval) is configured to continue for a specified period (e.g., 10 games), and one set ends when play for the specified period is exhausted. During the second bonus, a second bonus stock lottery is held at least at each specified trigger (e.g., each time a specific combination is won or after each play), and if a win is won, the value of the second bonus counter is incremented by one. When play for the specified period is exhausted (when one set ends), if the value of the second bonus counter is 1 or greater (including when it was incremented during the first bonus or during ST), the value of the second bonus counter is decremented by one, and the next set during the second bonus begins. At this time (including when transitioning from the first bonus to the first bonus or during ST), the specified period may be determined by lottery (e.g., determining the number of games from 10, 20, or 40), and the specified period may be set according to the lottery results.

Furthermore, during the second bonus, when the specified period of play has been exhausted (when one set has ended), if the value of the second bonus counter is 0, the game will transition to ST (the second bonus end condition is met). Note that various management methods can be used to manage the specified period during the second bonus, similar to those described in the explanation for the first bonus.

The ST is configured to continue for a set period (e.g., 16 games), and if the second bonus transition conditions are met during that time, the game will transition to the second bonus (second bonus transition conditions met). On the other hand, if the second bonus transition conditions are not met during that time, the consecutive win zone ends (i.e., the advantageous period ends), initialization processing is performed at the end of the advantageous period, and the game will transition to normal mode (non-advantageous period) (end of consecutive win zone).

During ST, the game is basically configured as a normal advantageous zone in a non-AT state. For each predetermined trigger (for example, each time a specific combination is won, or each play), an AT transition lottery (second bonus transition lottery) is conducted with a winning probability set according to the winning combination and the type of lottery map described below. Additionally, for each predetermined trigger (for example, each time a specific combination is won, or each play), a second bonus stock lottery is conducted. Furthermore, these lotteries (determinations) are configured so that the determination probability differs depending on whether the current state is a favorable or non-favorable state. Specifically, if the current state is a favorable state, the above-mentioned determination is favored, and if the current state is a non-favorable state, the above-mentioned determination is not favored. This will be explained in more detail later using Figure 70.

If a player wins the second bonus transition lottery during ST, the game will transition to the second bonus period from the next game (or when the specified period of play has expired) (the second bonus transition condition is met). Also, if the value of the second bonus counter is 1 or greater when the specified period of play has expired without a win in the second bonus transition lottery, the value of the second bonus counter will be decremented by 1 and the game will transition to the second bonus period (the second bonus transition condition is met). On the other hand, if the value of the second bonus counter is also 0 when the specified period of play has expired without a win in the second bonus transition lottery, the consecutive win zone will end as described above, and the game will transition to normal mode (non-advantageous zone) (the consecutive win zone ends). Note that various management methods can be used to manage the specified period during ST, similar to those described in the explanation for CZ.

In this way, in this modified example, after the end of the first bonus, it is possible to alternate (loop) between the second bonus and ST, and although ST itself is not configured as an increasing section, by configuring it as a state where there is a high expectation of moving into the second bonus (where it is easy to get consecutive second bonuses), it can be configured as a consecutive win zone, a highly exciting gaming period for players. Furthermore, since the second bonus may itself result in consecutive wins (be extended), this can also increase the excitement.

It is also possible to provide multiple such consecutive win zones. For example, the above-mentioned consecutive win zone may be the first consecutive win zone, and if a specific transition condition is met in this first consecutive win zone, a transition to the more advantageous second consecutive win zone may occur. In this case, the specific transition condition may be met, for example, when the second bonus is executed a specified number of times (e.g., a total of 5 sets) in the first consecutive win zone. Also, for example, the specific transition condition may be met when the second bonus is executed for a specified period (e.g., a total of 100 games) in the first consecutive win zone. Of course, these are just examples, and various conditions that may be met depending on the player's game results can be employed.

In addition, as a mode for making the second consecutive win zone advantageous, for example, in the first consecutive win zone, the probability of the second bonus winning (looping) is set to a total of approximately 50-75%, while in the second consecutive win zone, this probability is set to a total of approximately 85%, making it relatively easier to transition into the second bonus (making it harder for the consecutive win zone to end). Also, for example, in the first consecutive win zone, 40 games are determined as the specified period during the second bonus at a predetermined probability, while in the second consecutive win zone, 40 games are more likely to be determined as a result. Alternatively, in the first consecutive win zone, the probability of winning the second bonus stock lottery is a predetermined probability, while in the second consecutive win zone, this also makes it easier to win, thereby making the degree of continuity during each second bonus advantageous. Of course, these are just examples, and any mode can be adopted as long as it ultimately provides an advantage to the player.

Although not shown in the illustration, various limit processes are also activated in this modified example. For example, if the value of the advantageous zone game count counter reaches 1420 or more, or the value of the advantageous zone payout counter reaches 2064 or more, during either the first bonus, second bonus, or ST, the game will transition to the ending state. The ending state is configured as a state in which navigation can occur for the push order bell until the payout limiter or game count limiter is activated. If any of these limiters are activated during the ending state, the advantageous zone will be forcibly ended and the game will transition to normal mode (non-advantageous zone).

In either state, if the value of the advantageous zone game count counter reaches 1500 or more, the game count limiter will be activated, and if the value of the advantageous zone payout counter reaches 2400 or more, the payout limiter will be activated. In this case, as described above, the advantageous zone will be forcibly ended, initialization processing will be performed at the end of the advantageous zone, and the zone will transition to normal mode (non-advantageous zone).

Note that because the game count limiter can only be activated by the number of games played, there is a possibility that a player who started playing just before the limiter was activated may lose interest (as the limiter would be activated immediately). Also, depending on the results of the advantageous zone transition lottery, it may be more advantageous for the player to end the advantageous zone once and transition to a non-advantageous zone, so frequently ending the advantageous zone may not actually contribute to the appropriate management of gambling. Therefore, from this perspective, the machine may be configured to only include a payout limiter as a limiter, and not include a game count limiter.

<Example of preferential control (normal mode) of first gaming machine (variant)>
Next, an example of preferential control during normal operation (advantageous zone) in this modified example will be described with reference to Fig. 69. Note that Fig. 69 shows a schematic flowchart illustrating an example of the preferential control process in order to explain the example of preferential control during normal operation (advantageous zone). Therefore, the specific control process in the preferential control is not necessarily limited to that shown in Fig. 69.

First, when a game is started (for example, when a start operation is performed), the main CPU 101 determines whether the preferential counter is 1 or greater (S4001). The preferential counter is a counter that manages whether the game is in a preferential state or a non-preferential state; if the preferential counter is 1 or greater at the start of a game, the game is controlled to be in a preferential state, and if the preferential counter is 0, the game is controlled to be in a non-preferential state.

When the main CPU 101 determines that the preferential counter is 1 or greater (YES in S4001), it sets the game state to the preferential state (S4002). Next, it decrements the preferential counter by 1 (S4003). Then, it proceeds to S4005.

On the other hand, if the main CPU 101 determines that the preferential counter is not 1 or greater (i.e., is 0) (NO in S4001), it sets the game state to a non-preferential state (S4004). Then, it proceeds to S4005.

Although not shown in Figure 69, when the processing of S4001 to S4004 sets the game state to a preferential state or a non-preferential state, the main CPU 101 refers to the setting result and makes decisions related to the AT state (for example, during the first bonus), such as decisions related to whether the CZ transition condition is met or whether the AT transition condition is met.

For example, if a preferential state is set, the main CPU 101 performs processing such as conducting a CZ transition lottery or an AT transition lottery in the game. It also performs processing such as awarding points and advancing the ceiling number of games in the game. On the other hand, if a non-preferential state is set, the main CPU 101 does not perform processing such as conducting a CZ transition lottery or an AT transition lottery in the game. It also does not perform processing such as awarding points or advancing the ceiling number of games in the game. As mentioned above, the manner in which the preferential state is made more advantageous than the non-preferential state, or the manner in which the non-preferential state is made less advantageous than the preferential state, are not limited to these.

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether the stop operation for the game is the first left stop (S4005). In other words, the main CPU 101 determines whether the stop operation for the game is performed in a specific manner. Note that this determination may be performed when the first stop operation is performed, or after the third stop operation.

If the main CPU 101 determines that the stop operation for the game is the first left stop (YES in S4005), it conducts a preferential counter addition lottery, and if the lottery is a winning lottery, it increments the preferential counter by 1 (S4006). Then, it terminates the processing. On the other hand, if the main CPU 101 determines that the stop operation for the game is not the first left stop (NO in S4005), it simply terminates the processing.

In the preferential counter addition lottery, for example, the probability denominator is "65536," the lottery value that determines the lottery result of "add preferential counter by 1" is assigned "65535," and the lottery value that determines the lottery result of "no preferential counter addition" is assigned "1." A preferential counter addition lottery table is referenced, and the lottery is conducted based on the sampled random number value. In this case, it is determined that the preferential counter will be incremented by 1 with a probability of "65535/65536," and that the preferential counter will not be incremented with a probability of "1/65536." In other words, in this modified example, when playing in preferential mode, the preferential counter value may not be incremented by 1 even if a stop operation is performed at the first left stop.

The configuration of the preferential counter addition lottery table described above is merely an example. For example, the probability denominator may be "256," with "255" assigned to the lottery value that determines the lottery result of "adding the preferential counter by 1," and "1" assigned to the lottery value that determines the lottery result of "not adding the preferential counter." In other words, the lottery may be conducted using a 1-byte random number instead of a 2-byte random number.

Furthermore, for example, the probability of determining "no preferential counter increment" may be increased from the above. For example, using the example of a 1-byte random number, the lottery value that determines the lottery result of "increment preferential counter by 1" may be assigned "192" or "128," and the lottery value that determines the lottery result of "no preferential counter increment" may be assigned "64" or "128." In other words, the probability may be set appropriately depending on the degree of advantage of the preferential state (or the degree of disadvantage of the non-preferential state). This is similar for other examples.

Also, for example, the probability denominator may be "65536," with "65536" assigned to the lottery value that determines the lottery result of "increase the preferential counter by 1" and "0" assigned to the lottery value that determines the lottery result of "not incrementing the preferential counter." In other words, the lottery process itself may be performed, but if the stop operation for the game is the first left stop, the preferential counter may essentially always be incremented by 1. In addition to this, for example, if the main CPU 101 determines in the processing of S4005 that the stop operation for the game is the first left stop, the processing of S4006 may simply increment the preferential counter by 1, and no lottery may be performed.

Furthermore, if the main CPU 101 determines in the processing of S4005 that the stop operation for the game is the first left stop, processing is performed in S4006 to set a preferential state for the next game, and if the main CPU 101 determines that the stop operation for the game is other than the first left stop, processing is performed in the subsequent processing (let's say S4007) to set a non-preferential state for the next game, and such control may be performed without using a preferential counter.

Also, for example, the probability denominator may be "65536," with "65534" assigned to the lottery value that determines the lottery result of "adding the preferential counter by 1," "1" assigned to the lottery value that determines the lottery result of "adding the preferential counter by 2," and "1" assigned to the lottery value that determines the lottery result of "not adding the preferential counter." In other words, it may be possible for the preferential counter value to be added by 2 or more in a single game, and it may be determined that the preferential state will continue for multiple games depending on the result of a single game.

In this way, through the processing of S4005 and S4006, the main CPU 101 increments the preferential counter by 1 as a general rule if the stop operation for the game is the first left stop. This will set the preferential state for the next game (see S4001 and S4002). On the other hand, if the stop operation for the game is not the first left stop, the preferential counter is not incremented as a general rule. This will set the non-preferential state for the next game (see S4001, S4003, and S4004).

In other words, in this modified example, by performing the preferential control described above, if a player plays at the first left stop, at least the next play will be in the preferential state, so if the player plays at the first left stop all the time, the game will basically be played in the preferential state all the time. On the other hand, if a player plays at a stop other than the first left stop, at least the next play will be in the non-preferential state, so if the player plays at a stop other than the first left all the time, the game will basically be played in the non-preferential state all the time.

In the example described above, when a stop operation is performed in a specific mode, the preferential counter is incremented and updated in S4006, so that the next game will be in the preferential state. However, the method of controlling the preferential counter is not limited to this. For example, after S4003 or S4004 and before S4005, the preferential counter may be incremented by 1. If S4005 is YES, the process may be terminated. Alternatively, if S4005 is NO, a preferential counter decrement lottery may be performed, and if the lottery result is successful, the preferential counter may be decremented by 1 and the process may be terminated. In this case, for example, a preferential counter decrement lottery table may be referenced, in which "65535" is assigned to the lottery value that determines the result of the "subtract preferential counter by 1" lottery and "1" is assigned to the lottery value that determines the result of the "not decrement preferential counter," and the lottery may be performed based on the extracted random value.

In this case, the preferential counter subtraction lottery table may have, for example, a probability denominator of "65536," "65534" assigned to the lottery value that determines the lottery result of "subtract preferential counter 1," "1" assigned to the lottery value that determines the lottery result of "subtract preferential counter 2," and "1" assigned to the lottery value that determines the lottery result of "not subtracting preferential counter." In other words, it may be possible for the preferential counter value to be effectively subtracted by 2 or more in a single game, and it may be determined that the non-preferential state will continue for multiple games depending on the result of a single game.

In addition, in this modified example, the preferential control described above is configured to be performed regardless of which winning role is determined, at least during normal play (advantageous zone). In other words, in this modified example, the preferential control described above can be performed in all games during normal play (advantageous zone). Furthermore, if the configuration is such that similar preferential control is performed during a CZ, the same applies during that CZ, and if the configuration is such that similar preferential control is performed during an ST, the same applies during that ST. In other words, in this modified example, the preferential control described above can be performed at least when not controlled in the AT state (during the first bonus or second bonus).

However, priority control such as that described above may also be executable in the AT state. For example, if there is a possibility that the control load will increase due to processing branching depending on whether or not the game is in the AT state, priority control such as that described above may always be executed. In this case, for example, when the game is in the AT state, various decisions and lotteries may be made without referencing the value of the preferential counter. Alternatively, a process specific to the AT state may be performed in which the preferential counter is incremented by 1 for each play, so that the value of the preferential counter is always 1 or greater during the AT state. In this case, when the game transitions to ST, the preferential counter's initial value may be set to "1".

Here, the first gaming machine described above has a push order minor feature, such as a "push order bell," in which the expected value of the game value awarded varies depending on the stop operation mode (batting order), and a non-issue feature (such as a replay feature or other minor feature) in which the expected value of the game value awarded does not vary depending on the stop operation mode (batting order) other than this push order minor feature. In a game in which the push order minor feature is determined to be the winning feature, if the stop operation is performed in a specific mode (for example, the first stop on the left), it may be considered an AT-preferential batting order in which AT-related processing is advantageous but the expected value of the awarded game value is low, and if the stop operation is performed in a mode other than the specific mode (for example, other than the first stop on the left), it may be considered an acquisition-preferential batting order (in other words, a non-AT-preferential batting order) in which AT-related processing is disadvantageous but the expected value of the awarded game value is high. In this modified example, these batting orders are configured in a different manner.

Specifically, as mentioned above, the overall characteristics of the gaming machine are such that when a stop operation is performed in a specific mode, the awarding of game value is unfavorable, while when a stop operation is not performed in a specific mode, the awarding of game value is unilaterally favorable. Regardless of the winning combination for each game, when a stop operation is performed in a specific mode, this is treated as a preferential AT batting order (i.e., it can be controlled to a preferential state), and when a stop operation is performed in a mode different from the specific mode, this is treated as a non-preferential AT batting order (i.e., it can be controlled to a non-preferential state). In other words, all combinations are subject to this preferential control.

However, since this preferential control is based on the premise that play is basically performed in the recommended gaming state, it may not apply to bonus roles (such as "F_BB") that, as a general rule, will not be won in the recommended gaming state.

Also, for example, so-called rare roles, such as "F_Cherry" and "F_Watermelon," which have a low probability of winning but are likely to be highly anticipated by players when various lotteries and determinations are made, may be excluded. Regarding the mode of excluding rare roles, for example, it is possible to adopt a mode in which rare roles are excluded if the current state is a favorable state and a rare role is determined as the winning role, but are not excluded if the current state is a non-favorable state and a rare role is determined as the winning role.

Also, for example, if the current state is a favorable state and a rare role is determined to be the winning role, it may be ineligible if it is determined that a transition to an advantageous state will occur, for example, by winning a CZ transition lottery or an AT transition lottery, but it may not be ineligible if a transition to an advantageous state is not determined.

Also, a configuration may be adopted in which only normal roles are subject to preferential control. Note that, for example, as described above, "normal roles" can be defined as all roles excluding bonus roles, or all roles excluding bonus roles and rare roles. Furthermore, when a game progresses with a bonus role carried over (between flags), they can also be defined as roles other than rare roles between flags. For example, overlapping roles between minor roles such as push order bells and bonus roles between flags, or overlapping roles between replay roles and bonus roles between flags, may be treated as "normal roles." They can also be defined in a different way. For example, among all roles, roles that are subject to preferential control and roles that are not excluded from preferential control can be predetermined (regardless of role type), and all roles that are subject to preferential control can be defined as normal roles. Note that roles that are subject to preferential control in this way are sometimes referred to as "penalty lottery tickets" or the like.

Also, for example, a push order replay can be provided for a replay role, and this push order replay can be configured to display a specific symbol combination when a stop operation is performed in a specific manner, but not display the specific symbol combination when a stop operation is not performed in a specific manner (however, both ultimately result in a replay), and this push order replay and push order minor role can be defined as normal roles, with other non-issue roles excluded.

<Example of preferential control (during ST) of first gaming machine (modification)>
Next, an example of preferential control during ST in this modified example will be described with reference to Figure 70. Figure 70 shows an overview of part of the game flow during ST in order to explain the example of preferential control during ST. Note that the same method as that described using Figure 69 can be used to control each game to either a preferential state or a non-preferential state, or a different method can be used.

(Example of specifications during ST)
First, an example of the specifications during ST will be described. As described above and as shown in FIG. 70, ST can be configured to continue for a specified period (e.g., 16 games). This specified period is managed by an ST game number counter, which is period management information. The value of the ST game number counter is incremented by one per game, regardless of whether the stop operation mode in that game is sequential pressing (first left stop) or irregular pressing (other than first left stop) (in other words, regardless of whether the game is controlled to a preferential state or a non-preferential state). In other words, the game period (period management information) during ST progresses regardless of the batting order. Note that the ST game number counter may be configured to manage the corresponding information by subtracting updates.

For example, if the variable display section is configured with three reels (left reel 3L, center reel 3C, right reel 3R), more specifically, performing the stop operation in the order of "left → center → right" is called "push in order," and performing the stop operation in the order of "left → right → center" is called "scissors cut." However, in the explanation of Figure 70 (and similarly when the left first stop is described as "push in order" elsewhere), the left first stop (both left → center → right and left → right → center) is referred to as "push in order." And, at least in this example, in the case of the left first stop, no particular difference is made between performing the stop operation in the order of left → center → right and performing the stop operation in the order of left → right → center (they are treated the same in terms of processing), and processing related to the preferential state is possible at the time of the first stop. However, it is also possible to differentiate between the processing of whether or not a preferred state is established when stopping operations are performed in the order of left → center → right and when stopping operations are performed in the order of left → right → center. For example, when stopping operations are performed in the order of left → center → right, it may be treated as a recommended stroke (a stop operation that results in a specific mode) that results in a preferred state, and when stopping operations are performed in the order of left → right → center, it may be treated as a non-recommended stroke (a stop operation that does not result in a specific mode) at the time of the second stop, just like with irregular strokes (first stop on center, first stop on right).

A MAP game number counter is also provided, which is lottery management information that manages the degree of advantage during ST. The value of the MAP game number counter is configured to increment by 1 if the stop operation mode for that game is sequential pressing, and not increment if it is irregular pressing. The value of the MAP game number counter is used to set the lottery MAP, and is configured so that the larger the value, the higher the probability of winning the second bonus transition lottery. In other words, the degree of advantage during ST (lottery management information) changes (progresses) to an advantageous value if sequential pressing is used, and does not change (progress) to an advantageous value if irregular pressing is used. The MAP game number counter may also manage the corresponding information by subtracting updates.

Also, although the probability is at least lower than when pressing buttons in an irregular sequence, there may be cases where the value of the MAP game number counter is not incremented even when pressing buttons in order. In this case, for example, the probability denominator may be "65536," and a MAP game number counter increment lottery table may be referenced, in which "65535" is assigned to the lottery value that determines the lottery result of "increment the MAP game number counter by 1," and "1" is assigned to the lottery value that determines the lottery result of "not increment the MAP game number counter," and the lottery is conducted based on the extracted random number value.

Furthermore, although the probability is at least lower than when pressing buttons in order, the value of the MAP game number counter may also be incremented when pressing buttons in an irregular sequence. In this case, for example, a MAP game number counter increment lottery table is referenced, in which "65535" is assigned to the lottery value that determines the lottery result of "not incrementing the MAP game number counter," and "1" is assigned to the lottery value that determines the lottery result of "incrementing the MAP game number counter by 1," and the lottery is conducted based on the extracted random number value.

Furthermore, with regard to the relationship between the value of the MAP game number counter and the lottery MAP, while maintaining the basic relationship that the larger the value of the MAP game number counter, the more advantageous the lottery MAP, for example, the value of the MAP game number counter and the lottery MAP may uniquely correspond to each other, and a lottery MAP may be set according to the value of the MAP game number counter, or one lottery MAP may be determined by lottery from among multiple lottery MAPs using a lottery value according to the value of the MAP game number counter.

Furthermore, with regard to the lottery map, for example, it may be one that can change the degree of advantage to a more favorable one by simply increasing the probability of winning the second bonus transition lottery as the game progresses (the lottery value that determines a winning lottery becomes larger), or it may be one that can change the degree of advantage to a more favorable one by increasing the degree of advantage as the target role for the second bonus transition lottery progresses (resulting in a higher probability of winning). It may also be one that can change the degree of advantage to a more favorable one by combining these. Please note that these are merely examples, and the degree of advantage may be changed to a more favorable one in other ways.

Using the example shown in Figure 70, for example, when lottery MAP is "A", the roles to be drawn are "watermelon" and "cherry", the probability denominator is "256", and the lottery value that determines a winning lottery for each is assigned a "1", and the lottery value that determines a losing lottery is assigned a "255". Also, when lottery MAP is "B", the roles to be drawn are "watermelon" and "cherry", the probability denominator is "256", and the lottery value that determines a winning lottery for each is assigned a "2", and the lottery value that determines a losing lottery is assigned a "254". Furthermore, when the lottery map is "C," the roles to be drawn are "watermelon" and "cherry," the probability denominator is "256," and the lottery value that determines a winning combination is assigned "3," and the lottery value that determines a losing combination is assigned "253."

When the lottery map is "D," the roles to be drawn are "watermelon," "cherry," and "special roles," the probability denominator is "256," and the lottery value that determines a winning lottery for each is assigned a "1," and the lottery value that determines a losing lottery is assigned a "255." When the lottery map is "E," the roles to be drawn are "watermelon," "cherry," and "special roles," the probability denominator is "256," and the lottery value that determines a winning lottery for each is assigned a "2," and the lottery value that determines a losing lottery is assigned a "254." Furthermore, when the lottery map is "F," the roles to be drawn are "watermelon," "cherry," and "special role," the probability denominator is "256," and the lottery value that determines a win is assigned "3," and the lottery value that determines a loss is assigned "253." For example, in this way, it can be configured so that the degree of advantage increases sequentially.

(Control Example 1)
Next, a case where the first to sixth games during ST are all played by pressing buttons in order will be explained as control example 1 (see (a) of Figure 70).

In the first game, the value of the ST game number counter is first incremented by 1. Furthermore, since the game was played in sequential order, the value of the MAP game number counter is also incremented by 1. Furthermore, since the game is controlled in a preferential state, a second bonus transition lottery is held in accordance with the winning combination and lottery MAP "A", and a second bonus stock lottery is also held.

In the second game, the value of the ST game number counter is first incremented by 1. Furthermore, since the game was played in sequential order, the value of the MAP game number counter is also incremented by 1. Furthermore, since the game is controlled in a preferential state, a second bonus transition lottery is held in accordance with the winning combination and lottery MAP "B", and a second bonus stock lottery is also held.

In the third game, the value of the ST game number counter is first incremented by 1. Furthermore, since the game was played in sequential order, the value of the MAP game number counter is also incremented by 1. Furthermore, since this game is controlled to a preferential state, a second bonus transition lottery is held in accordance with the winning combination and lottery map "C", and a second bonus stock lottery is also held.

In the fourth game, the value of the ST game number counter is first incremented by 1. Furthermore, since the game was played in sequential order, the value of the MAP game number counter is also incremented by 1. Furthermore, since the game is controlled to a preferential state, a second bonus transition lottery is held in accordance with the winning combination and lottery map "D", and a second bonus stock lottery is also held.

In the fifth game, the value of the ST game number counter is first incremented by 1. Furthermore, since the game was played in sequential order, the value of the MAP game number counter is also incremented by 1. Furthermore, since the game is controlled to a preferential state, a second bonus transition lottery is held in accordance with the winning combination and lottery map "E", and a second bonus stock lottery is also held.

In the sixth game, the value of the ST game number counter is first incremented by 1. Furthermore, since the game was played in sequential order, the value of the MAP game number counter is also incremented by 1. Furthermore, since the game is controlled to a preferential state, a second bonus transition lottery is held in accordance with the winning combination and lottery map "F", and a second bonus stock lottery is also held.

(Control Example 2)
Next, a case where the first game is played using irregular button presses and the remaining games are played using normal button presses during the first to sixth games of ST will be described as control example 2 (see (b) of Figure 70).

In the first game, the value of the ST game number counter is first incremented by 1. However, since the game was played using irregular button presses, the value of the MAP game number counter is not incremented by 1. Furthermore, since the game is controlled in a preferential state, a second bonus transition lottery is held in accordance with the winning combination and lottery MAP "A", and a second bonus stock lottery is also held.

In the second game, the value of the ST game number counter is first incremented by 1. Also, since the game was played in sequential order, the value of the MAP game number counter is also incremented by 1. Note that, since this game is controlled to a non-preferential state, the second bonus transition lottery is not conducted, and the second bonus stock lottery is not conducted either.

In the third game, the value of the ST game number counter is first incremented by 1. Furthermore, since the game was played in sequential order, the value of the MAP game number counter is also incremented by 1. Furthermore, since the game is controlled in a preferential state, a second bonus transition lottery is held in accordance with the winning combination and lottery MAP "B", and a second bonus stock lottery is also held.

In the fourth game, the value of the ST game number counter is first incremented by 1. Furthermore, since the game was played in sequential order, the value of the MAP game number counter is also incremented by 1. Furthermore, since this game is controlled to a preferential state, a second bonus transition lottery is held in accordance with the winning combination and lottery map "C", and a second bonus stock lottery is also held.

In the fifth game, the value of the ST game number counter is first incremented by 1. Furthermore, since the game was played in sequential order, the value of the MAP game number counter is also incremented by 1. Furthermore, since the game is controlled to a preferential state, a second bonus transition lottery is held in accordance with the winning combination and lottery map "D", and a second bonus stock lottery is also held.

In the sixth game, the value of the ST game number counter is first incremented by 1. Furthermore, since the game was played in sequential order, the value of the MAP game number counter is also incremented by 1. Furthermore, since the game is controlled to a preferential state, a second bonus transition lottery is held in accordance with the winning combination and lottery map "E", and a second bonus stock lottery is also held.

Compared to Control Example 1, in Control Example 1, the lottery map has progressed to "F" by the sixth game, whereas in Control Example 2, the lottery map has only progressed to "E" by the sixth game. Furthermore, in Control Example 2, because the second game is controlled to a non-preferential state, the second bonus transition lottery and second bonus stock lottery are not conducted in that game (as an example, no lottery is conducted). In other words, in Control Example 2, even if, for example, a player wins the "push order bell" in the first game and happens to be in the correct batting order, resulting in a large amount of game value being awarded, at least the AT-related processing is less favorable than in Control Example 1, and the game period during ST is not extended, so overall, Control Example 2 may be more disadvantageous to the player than Control Example 1.

(Control Example 3)
Next, we will explain control example 3, where, during the first to sixth games of ST, the first to fourth games are played using irregular button presses and the remaining games are played using normal button presses (see (c) of Figure 70).

In the first game, the value of the ST game number counter is first incremented by 1. However, since the game was played using irregular button presses, the value of the MAP game number counter is not incremented by 1. Furthermore, since the game is controlled in a preferential state, a second bonus transition lottery is held in accordance with the winning combination and lottery MAP "A", and a second bonus stock lottery is also held.

In the second game, the value of the ST game number counter is first incremented by 1. However, since the game was played using irregular button presses, the value of the MAP game number counter is not incremented by 1. Furthermore, since this game is controlled to a non-preferential state, the second bonus transition lottery is not conducted, and the second bonus stock lottery is not conducted either.

In the third game, the value of the ST game number counter is first incremented by 1. However, since the game was played using irregular button presses, the value of the MAP game number counter is not incremented by 1. Furthermore, since this game is controlled to a non-preferential state, the second bonus transition lottery is not conducted, and the second bonus stock lottery is not conducted either.

In the fourth game, the value of the ST game number counter is first incremented by 1. However, since the game was played using irregular button presses, the value of the MAP game number counter is not incremented by 1. Furthermore, since this game is controlled to a non-preferential state, the second bonus transition lottery is not conducted, and the second bonus stock lottery is not conducted either.

In the fifth game, the value of the ST game number counter is first incremented by 1. Also, since the game was played in sequential order, the value of the MAP game number counter is also incremented by 1. Note that, since this game is controlled to a non-preferential state, the second bonus transition lottery is not conducted, and the second bonus stock lottery is not conducted either.

In the sixth game, the value of the ST game number counter is first incremented by 1. Furthermore, since the game was played in sequential order, the value of the MAP game number counter is also incremented by 1. Furthermore, since the game is controlled to a preferential state, a second bonus transition lottery is held in accordance with the winning combination and lottery MAP "B", and a second bonus stock lottery is also held.

Compared to Control Example 1, in Control Example 1, the lottery map has progressed to "F" by the sixth game, whereas in Control Example 3, the lottery map has only progressed to "B" by the sixth game. Furthermore, in Control Example 3, games 2 through 5 are controlled to a non-preferential state, so the second bonus transition lottery and second bonus stock lottery are not conducted in those games (as an example, no lottery is conducted). In other words, in Control Example 3, even if a player wins the "push order bell" in games 1 through 4 and happens to be in the correct batting order, resulting in a large amount of game value being awarded, at least the AT-related processing is less favorable than in Control Example 1, and the game period during ST is not extended, so overall, Control Example 3 may be more unfavorable to the player than Control Example 1.

(Control Example 4)
Next, a case where the first to sixth games during ST are all played using irregular button presses will be explained as control example 4 (see (d) of Figure 70).

In the first game, the value of the ST game number counter is first incremented by 1. However, since the game was played using irregular button presses, the value of the MAP game number counter is not incremented by 1. Furthermore, since the game is controlled in a preferential state, a second bonus transition lottery is held in accordance with the winning combination and lottery MAP "A", and a second bonus stock lottery is also held.

In the second game, the value of the ST game number counter is first incremented by 1. However, since the game was played using irregular button presses, the value of the MAP game number counter is not incremented by 1. Furthermore, since this game is controlled to a non-preferential state, the second bonus transition lottery is not conducted, and the second bonus stock lottery is not conducted either.

In the third game, the value of the ST game number counter is first incremented by 1. However, since the game was played using irregular button presses, the value of the MAP game number counter is not incremented by 1. Furthermore, since this game is controlled to a non-preferential state, the second bonus transition lottery is not conducted, and the second bonus stock lottery is not conducted either.

In the fourth game, the value of the ST game number counter is first incremented by 1. However, since the game was played using irregular button presses, the value of the MAP game number counter is not incremented by 1. Furthermore, since this game is controlled to a non-preferential state, the second bonus transition lottery is not conducted, and the second bonus stock lottery is not conducted either.

In the fifth game, the value of the ST game number counter is first incremented by 1. However, since the game was played using irregular button presses, the value of the MAP game number counter is not incremented by 1. Furthermore, since this game is controlled to a non-preferential state, the second bonus transition lottery is not conducted, and the second bonus stock lottery is not conducted either.

In the sixth game, the value of the ST game number counter is first incremented by 1. However, since the game was played using irregular button presses, the value of the MAP game number counter is not incremented by 1. Furthermore, since this game is controlled to a non-preferential state, the second bonus transition lottery is not conducted, and the second bonus stock lottery is not conducted either.

In this Control Example 4, if the game is played using irregular button presses for the entire ST period, the same control will be applied from the 7th to the 15th games. The 16th game will be the final game in which it will be determined whether or not a second bonus will be awarded during ST, but because this game is also controlled to a non-preferential state, the second bonus transition lottery will not be held, and the second bonus stock lottery will not be held either.

Then, in the next game (although for example, if the second bonus stock lottery was won in the first game, the game may transition to the second bonus), basically no decision is made as to whether the second bonus will be awarded, and the game is controlled to a state where the ST end preparation for one game is made in order to display the results of the consecutive win zone (for example, how many sets of the second bonus were executed during the consecutive win zone, how many coins were won, etc.), and the ST ends for that game, which also ends the consecutive win zone (i.e., the advantageous period ends).

<Example of control of anticipation effects in the first gaming machine (variant)>
Next, control examples of the anticipation effects of this modified example will be described with reference to Figures 71 to 78. Note that Figures 71 and 72 are diagrams showing a control example (control example 1) when effect data 1 is determined, Figures 73 and 74 are diagrams showing a control example (control example 2) when effect data 2 is determined, and Figures 75 to 78 are diagrams showing a control example (control example 3) when effect data 3 is determined. To make the explanation easier to understand, these control examples will be described assuming that the variable display unit has three reels (left reel 3L, center reel 3C, and right reel 3R), as in this embodiment.

In addition, the term "expectation effect" as used here refers to an effect that can give the player a sense of anticipation, such as an effect that can be executed in a game in which a rare role is won during normal play (advantageous zone) (it can also be executed in a game in which a non-rare role is won), or an effect that can be executed in a premonition state in which it has been decided that a transition will occur into the CZ (or the first bonus) but the player has not yet transitioned to the CZ (or the first bonus) (it can also be executed in a so-called false premonition state).

In other words, it can be defined as a presentation that can notify the player that a situation advantageous to the player will occur (or not occur), or suggest the possibility (for example, the likelihood or expectation) that a situation advantageous to the player may occur. Furthermore, such notifications or suggestions are made by changing the presentation content (the presentation progresses) as the game progresses.

The above-mentioned uses are merely examples, and of course the device can be used for other purposes. For example, it may notify or suggest the expectation of a transition to the AT state during a CZ or ST, or it may notify or suggest the expectation of an extension of the AT state during a first bonus or second bonus. Also, in this example, as an example of an expectation effect, the notification or suggestion is made by a change in the display content (progression of the display content) on the main effect display unit 21, but this is not limited to this, and for example, the notification or suggestion may be made by progressing the effect through the presentation mode of other presentation execution means such as a lamp or speaker.

(Control Example 1)
First, a control example (control example 1) when effect data 1 is determined as an example of an anticipation effect will be described with reference to Figures 71 and 72. Note that Figure 71 is a diagram that schematically shows the progression of the display content when a stop operation is performed by pressing in order (first stop on the left) and the game progresses in this example, and Figure 72 is a diagram that schematically shows the progression of the display content when a stop operation is performed by pressing other than in order (other than the first stop on the left) and the game progresses in this example.

In this example, when the start operation is first performed, an introductory display is displayed showing the content of the performance and the expected level (the "Find the treasure!" display screen in Figures 71 and 72), and then the performance begins (the "Where is it?" display screen in Figures 71 and 72).

At this time, as shown in Figure 71, let's assume that a stop operation is performed at the first left stop. In this case, as the first stop operation is performed and the game progresses, the presentation progresses further (the "Where is it? Where is it?" display screen in Figure 71).

Next, if a second stop operation is performed on the remaining stop button, the presentation will progress further as the second stop operation is performed and the game progresses (in Figure 71, the display screen shows "Where is it? Where is it? Where is it?").

Next, when a third stop operation is performed on the remaining stop button, the presentation progresses further as the game progresses after the third stop operation. In this case, if the occurrence of an advantageous situation is notified or suggested, a favorable result is displayed (the "GET! CHANCE!" display screen in Figure 71). On the other hand, if the occurrence of an advantageous situation is not notified or suggested, an unfavorable result is displayed (the "Sorry..." display screen in Figure 71). In this way, when pressing the buttons in order, the final display content (or it may be predictable from the intermediate display content) gives the player a certain sense of expectation.

On the other hand, suppose that after the progression of the effect has begun, a stop operation is performed on a stop other than the first left stop, as shown in Figure 72. In this case, the progression of the effect is stopped, and a standby display corresponding to that effect is then displayed (the "Waiting for Treasure Stage" display screen in Figure 72). This standby display continues to be displayed even if a second or third stop operation is performed and the game progresses. In other words, if a stop operation is performed on a stop other than the first left stop, the effect will no longer progress, and the player will no longer be given the specified sense of anticipation.

In gaming machines where performing a stop operation on a reel other than the first left stop can put AT processing at a disadvantage, when a stop operation is performed on a reel other than the first left stop, it is a good idea to provide a situation explanation such as audio or text display explaining the situation, such as "An irregular press is being performed," "The middle reel is being stopped first," or "The right reel is being stopped first." If the operation is performed on the first left stop, no such situation explanation will occur, subtly making the player who performed the irregular press feel uncomfortable and encouraging them to stop the left reel first.

Such a situation explanation effect may be generated together with the occurrence of a standby display. Also, such a situation explanation effect may be generated only in a game in which irregular button presses put the AT processing at a disadvantage, or may be generated in a game in which irregular button presses are performed in a so-called normal game in which the batting order navigation does not occur and the AT processing is not at a disadvantage. The timing of the occurrence of the situation explanation effect may be when the stop button is pressed, when the stop button is released, or when the reel that has been stopped stops.

The situation explanation effect may be generated only at the first stop, or may be generated repeatedly at the second stop and thereafter. For example, if the stop operation is performed in the order of center → right → left, a situation explanation effect such as a voice saying "The center reel is stopping first" may be generated at the first stop, "The right reel is stopping" at the second stop, and "The left reel is stopping" at the third stop.

The situation explanation effect may also be achieved by, for example, turning off or flashing decorative lamps on the lower panel (waist panel 13), around the reels, reel backlights, and other such lamps in a special mode that differs from their normal lighting state. For example, the lower panel may remain lit if the reel stops from the left, and turn off if the reel stops from the middle or right. This would allow the player to infer that stopping the reel from the middle or right will result in some kind of disadvantage.

By providing this type of situation explanation, players who accidentally stop the center or right reel due to an operating error can be encouraged to play in the recommended game mode, such as stopping the left reel first, without being annoyed by a direct warning.

(Control Example 2)
First, a control example (control example 2) when effect data 2 is determined as an example of an anticipation effect will be described with reference to Figures 73 and 74. Note that Figure 73 is a diagram that schematically shows the progression of the display content when a stop operation is performed by pressing in order (first stop on the left) and the game progresses in this example, and Figure 74 is a diagram that schematically shows the progression of the display content when a stop operation is performed by pressing other than in order (other than the first stop on the left) and the game progresses in this example.

In this example, when the start operation is first performed, an introductory display is displayed showing the content of the performance and the expected level (the "Run from the enemy!" display screen in Figures 73 and 74), and then the performance begins (the "Hurry!" display screen in Figures 73 and 74).

At this time, as shown in Figure 73, assume that a stop operation is performed at the first left stop. In this case, as the first stop operation is performed and the game progresses, the presentation progresses further (the display screen in Figure 73 reads "Hurry! Hurry!").

Next, if a second stop operation is performed on the remaining stop button, the presentation will progress further as the second stop operation is performed and the game progresses (see the "Hurry! Hurry! Hurry!" display screen in Figure 73).

Next, when a third stop operation is performed on the remaining stop button, the presentation progresses further as the game progresses after the third stop operation. In this case, if the occurrence of an advantageous situation is notified or suggested, an advantageous result is displayed (the "Success!" display screen in Figure 73). On the other hand, if the occurrence of an advantageous situation is not notified or suggested, an unfavorable result is displayed (the "Failure..." display screen in Figure 73). In this way, when pressing buttons in order, the final display content (or it may be predictable from the intermediate display content) gives the player a certain sense of expectation.

On the other hand, suppose that after the progression of the effect has begun, a stop operation is performed on a stop other than the first left stop, as shown in Figure 74. In this case, the progression of the effect is stopped, and a standby display corresponding to that effect is then displayed (the display screen shown with diagonal lines in Figure 74. Note that this merely indicates that a standby display different from that in Control Example 1 will be displayed, and a display screen that makes it easy to recognize that it corresponds to the effect, such as "Waiting for escape stage," may also be displayed). This standby display continues to be displayed even if a second or third stop operation is performed and game play progresses. In other words, if a stop operation is performed on a stop other than the first left stop, the effect will no longer progress, and the player will no longer be given the specified sense of anticipation.

In the above-mentioned Control Example 1 and Control Example 2, if the first stop operation is anything other than the left first stop, the standby display corresponding to the respective effect is displayed from that point onwards, but the timing at which the standby display starts is not limited to this. For example, it may be displayed when the second stop operation is performed, or when the third stop operation is performed. Furthermore, the timing at which the standby display starts may differ for each. The same applies to Control Example 3, which will be described later.

In addition, in the above-mentioned Control Example 1 and Control Example 2, it was explained that there is an anticipation effect in Control Example 1 and an anticipation effect in Control Example 2 in order to illustrate that there are multiple different types of anticipation effects, but of course the number of types of such effects is not limited to two. It is possible to configure it so that there are more types where at least some of the display content differs. In this case, it is sufficient to provide a standby display corresponding to each effect. In addition, in the below-mentioned Control Example 3, it was explained that there is an anticipation effect in Control Example 3 in order to illustrate a case where the above-mentioned Control Example 1 is part of a continuous effect, but of course the number of types of such effects is not limited to one. It is possible to configure it so that there are more types where at least some of the display content differs. In this case, it is sufficient to provide a standby display corresponding to each effect.

In addition, in the above-mentioned Control Example 1 and Control Example 2, when a standby display is displayed, a unique standby display corresponding to each effect is displayed to minimize discrepancies with the content of each effect. However, a common standby display may also be displayed, for example, to reduce the amount of data. This also applies to Control Example 3, which will be described later.

In addition, in the above-mentioned Control Example 1 and Control Example 2, the standby display was always displayed when the first stop operation was other than the first left stop. However, for example, if the effect being executed ultimately displays a favorable result, the standby display may not be displayed, and if the effect ultimately displays an unfavorable result, the standby display may be displayed. In other words, even if a game is played at a stop other than the first left stop and the game is controlled to a non-favorable state, if this does not affect (or is unlikely to affect) the game situation (for example, if the AT lottery has already been won and the game is scheduled to transition to the AT state from the next game), the standby display may not be displayed. The same applies to Control Example 3, described below.

On the other hand, for example, if the effect being executed ultimately displays an unfavorable result, the standby display may not be displayed, but if the effect being executed ultimately displays an advantageous result, the standby display may be displayed. In other words, if the effect in question is originally a false effect, and not displaying a final result does not necessarily result in a disadvantage to the player, the standby display may not be displayed. This also applies to Control Example 3, described below.

The anticipation effects in Control Example 1 and Control Example 2 described above may be configured as one-off effects or as part of a continuous effect. For example, if configured as one-off effects, the same effect may be executed again in the next game after the game in which the effect was executed and the standby display was displayed. Alternatively, the effect lottery may not be executed in the next game after the game in which the effect was executed and the standby display was displayed, and no effect (except for the basic display screen) may be displayed. Furthermore, the standby display may end after it has started when a start operation is performed to start the next game. In this case, when the standby display ends, the display of the scheduled effect may start or resume. The standby display may end not when a start operation is performed, but when a bet operation for the next game is performed.

Alternatively, the standby display displayed in the previous game may continue to be displayed in the next game after the game in which the effect was displayed and the standby display was displayed. In this case, if a stop operation is performed by pressing the buttons in order in the next game, the same effect as the previous game may be executed again in the next game (the game two games after the game in which the standby display was first displayed), or the effect may be determined according to normal rules without any special control. Also, the effect may be determined according to normal rules without any special control in the next game after the game in which the effect was displayed and the standby display was displayed.

Furthermore, for example, if the continuous effects are configured as a series, the same effect as that executed in the game in which the standby display was displayed may be executed again in the game following the game in which the standby display was displayed. For example, suppose the continuous effects are configured as two games in which the first effect is executed in the first game and the second effect is executed in the second game. In this case, if all games are played in order, the first effect will be executed in the first game and the second effect will be executed in the second game.

On the other hand, for example, if the first game is played using irregular button presses, a standby display will be displayed partway through the first effect in that game. In this case, the first effect will be executed again in the second game, and if the second game is played using normal button presses, the first effect will be executed to the end in that game, and the second effect will be executed in the third game. Also, in this case, if the second game is played using irregular button presses, the same control as in the first game can be performed in that game. In other words, a standby display will be displayed partway through the first effect in the second game, and the first effect will be executed again in the third game, and if the third game is played using normal button presses, the first effect will be executed to the end in that game, and the second effect will be executed in the fourth game.

For example, if the first game is played using sequential button presses and the second game is played using irregular button presses, a standby display will be displayed midway through the second effect in that game. In this case, the second effect will be executed again in the third game, and if the third game is played using sequential button presses, the second effect will be executed to the end in that game. In addition, if the third game is played using irregular button presses, the same control as for the second game can be applied to that game. In other words, a standby display will be displayed midway through the second effect in the third game, and the second effect will be executed again in the fourth game, and if the fourth game is played using sequential button presses, the second effect will be executed to the end in that game.

However, if irregular button presses are continually being performed, causing problems with the same effect being repeated over and over, an upper limit can be placed on the number of games that can be played (for example, 10 games), and if the effect has not been completed even after the maximum number of games has been played, control can be exercised to end the effect midway. Note that a control example for when the effect is configured as a continuous effect will be described in detail later using Control Example 3 below.

In addition, the control to display a standby screen when play is not performed by pressing buttons in order may also be performed when an effect other than an anticipation effect is executed. In other words, the effects that are subject to this control are not limited to anticipation effects. For example, this control may also be performed when a development effect is executed that can notify or suggest whether the effect will continue (develop) thereafter. Furthermore, for example, this control may also be performed when a battle effect is executed that can notify or suggest whether or not to transition to an AT state during a CZ or ST. Furthermore, for example, this control may also be performed when a general effect is executed that can notify or suggest a winning combination or status. In other words, the effect that is subject to this control may be any of all effects.

(Control Example 3)
Next, a control example (control example 3) when effect data 3 is determined as an example of an anticipation effect will be described with reference to Figures 75 to 78. Note that Figures 75 and 76 are diagrams that schematically show the progression of the display content when a stop operation is performed by pressing the buttons in order (first stop on the left) in the first and second games in this example and the game progresses, and Figures 77 and 78 are diagrams that schematically show the progression of the display content when a stop operation is performed by pressing the buttons in order (other than first stop on the left) in the first game and the game progresses, and when a stop operation is performed by pressing the buttons in order (first stop on the left) in the second game in this example and the game progresses.

In this example, when the first game is started, an introductory display showing the presentation content and expected results (the "Find the treasure!" display screen in Figures 75 and 77) is displayed, and then the presentation begins (the "Where is it?" display screen in Figures 75 and 77).

At this time, as shown in Figure 75, let's assume that a stop operation is performed at the first left stop. In this case, as the first stop operation is performed and the game progresses, the presentation progresses further (the "Where is it? Where is it?" display screen in Figure 75).

Next, if a second stop operation is performed on the remaining stop button, the presentation will progress further as the second stop operation is performed and the game progresses (see the "Where is it? Where is it? Where is it?" display screen in Figure 75).

Next, if a third stop operation is performed on the remaining stop button, the effect will continue as the game progresses (the "NEXT..." display screen in Figure 75). This indicates that the effect will not end in the first game, but will continue into the second game.

Next, when the start operation for the second game is performed, the presentation will progress further as the start operation is performed and the game progresses (see the "Where is it!?" display screen in Figure 76).

At this time, as shown in Figure 76, let's assume that a stop operation is performed on the first left stop. In this case, as the first stop operation is performed and the game progresses, the presentation progresses further (in Figure 76, the display screen reads "Where is it? Where is it?!").

Next, if a second stop operation is performed on the remaining stop button, the presentation will progress further as the second stop operation is performed and the game progresses (in Figure 76, the display screen shows "Where is it?! Where is it?! Where is it?").

Next, if a third stop operation is performed on the remaining stop button, the presentation will progress further as the game progresses after the third stop operation. In this case, if the occurrence of an advantageous situation is notified or suggested, a favorable result is displayed (the "GET! CHANCE!" display screen in Figure 76). On the other hand, if the occurrence of an advantageous situation is not notified or suggested, an unfavorable result is displayed (the "Sorry..." display screen in Figure 76). In this way, if both the first and second games are pressed in order, the final display content of the second game (or it may be predictable from the intermediate display content) will give the player a certain sense of expectation.

On the other hand, suppose that after the progression of the effects in the first game has begun, a stop operation is performed on a stop other than the first left stop, as shown in Figure 77. In this case, the progression of the effects is stopped, and thereafter, a standby display corresponding to that effect is displayed in the first game (the "Waiting for Treasure Stage" display screen in Figure 77). This standby display continues to be displayed even if a second or third stop operation is performed and the game progresses. In other words, in games in which a stop operation is performed on a stop other than the first left stop, the effect will no longer progress.

However, when the second game begins, as shown in Figure 78, the effects of the first game are executed again in that second game. Specifically, when the start operation for the second game is performed, the progress of the effects begins (resumes) as the start operation is performed and play progresses (the "Where is it?" display screen in Figure 78). Note that although no introductory display is displayed in Figure 78, it is also possible to configure the effects to be executed again from the beginning, including the introductory display.

At this time, as shown in Figure 78, let's assume that a stop operation is performed on the first left stop. In this case, as the first stop operation is performed and the game progresses, the presentation progresses further (the "Where is it? Where is it?" display screen in Figure 78).

Next, if a second stop operation is performed on the remaining stop button, the presentation will progress further as the second stop operation is performed and the game progresses (see the "Where is it? Where is it? Where is it?" display screen in Figure 78).

Next, if a third stop operation is performed on the remaining stop button, the effect will continue as the game progresses (the "NEXT..." display screen in Figure 78). This indicates that the effect will not end in the second game, but will continue into the third game.

After that, in the third game, if a stop operation is performed at the first left stop, control will be performed to progress the presentation in the same manner as shown in Figure 76, whereas if a stop operation is performed at a stop other than the first left stop, the presentation up to the start operation shown in Figure 76 will be executed again, and then control will be performed to wait for the presentation to progress in the same manner as shown in Figure 77.

In the second game, if a stop operation is performed at a position other than the first left stop, the same control as in the first game (see Figure 77) will be performed again, and in the third game, the same control as in the second game (see Figure 78) will be performed again.

(Example of control when power is restored)
When the power switch (not shown) of the power supply device 34 is turned off (the power is turned off), or when the power supply to the pachislot machine 1 is cut off due to some other factor such as a power outage, and then the power supply is resumed and the machine recovers from the power outage, the game state and presentation state will basically return to the state they were in before the power outage. Here, if the above-mentioned standby display was being displayed at the time of the power outage, the following modes can be given as examples of how the machine will return to the state they were in before the power outage.

The first mode is one in which the standby display remains on (is resumed) when power is restored after a power outage. For example, if an amusement parlor closes and the power is turned off while the standby display remains on, and then the power is turned on again when the parlor reopens the next day without any settings being changed, and the standby display is canceled, the first player to play will be playing without knowing that their first game is being controlled to a non-preferential state, which could result in the player suffering an unexpected disadvantage. This first mode can prevent such problems from occurring.

The second aspect is one in which, when power is restored after a power outage, a different display (e.g., an initial screen) is displayed instead of the standby display. For example, if an amusement parlor closes with the standby display still displayed and the power is turned off, and then the power is turned on again the next day without any settings being changed, the standby display will resume. However, if the initial screen is displayed when settings are changed, it would be easy to tell whether settings have been changed based on whether the standby display is displayed when the parlor opens, which could cause unforeseen disadvantages to the amusement parlor. This second aspect can prevent such problems from occurring. As with the first aspect described above, it is desirable to control the display so that at least the display mode when power is restored after a power outage is the same as the display mode when settings are changed, as described below. This can prevent the above-mentioned problems from occurring in either aspect. The initial screen here refers, for example, to a screen displaying the so-called normal stay stage. A display screen dedicated to non-advantageous zones may be provided and used as the initial screen, or a stage display screen that can be displayed in both non-advantageous zones and advantageous zones may be provided and used as the initial screen.

(Example of control when changing settings)
When the setting value of the pachislot machine 1 is changed (when a setting change is made) by operating the setting key switch 52 or the like, if the above-mentioned waiting display was displayed during play before the setting change, the following modes can be mentioned as ways in which it may be restored.

The first mode is one in which the standby display remains on even after a setting change. As mentioned above, if the power is turned off and on without a setting change, the standby display resumes. However, if the initial screen is displayed when a setting change is made, it would be easy to tell whether a setting change has been made by whether the standby display is displayed when the store opens, which could cause an unexpected disadvantage to the gaming facility. This first mode can prevent such problems from occurring.

The second mode is one in which, after a setting change, a different display (for example, an initial screen) is displayed rather than a standby display. Even if a stop operation was performed by pressing irregular buttons in the previous game, the initialization process performed when the setting is changed will ensure that the first game after the setting change will not be in a non-preferential state (in this case, the preferential counter will be incremented by 1 in a fixed process in the first game), and since the presentation data is also initialized in the first place, there is no possibility that the first player will suffer a disadvantage.

Furthermore, for example, the pachislot machine 1 can be configured to perform a special reset operation, such as an initialization procedure different from the setting change procedure using the setting key switch 52, in which, while the power is off, pressing the reset button (not shown) on the main control board 71 (i.e., performing a predetermined initialization operation on the initialization operation means) and then turning the power on (i.e., performing a predetermined power-on operation) will reset (initialize) the advantageous zone while leaving the settings unchanged (i.e., the advantageous zone ends, the initialization process at the end of the advantageous zone is performed, and then a transition to a non-advantageous zone occurs). In this case, if the above-mentioned standby display was displayed before the special reset operation was performed, the standby display may not be displayed after the special reset operation (after the advantageous zone is reset), but rather an initial screen similar to the one described above may be displayed. Of course, to make it difficult to detect that such a special reset operation has been performed, the standby display may remain displayed even after the special reset operation (after the advantageous zone is reset). When a special reset operation is performed, the status of the advantageous zone is initialized and the non-advantageous zone is set as the initial state, but if the carryover status of the bonus role is set as the recommended play state, information regarding the carried-over bonus role (information in the carry-over role storage area) can be maintained.

(Other control examples)
After the start operation, an operation effect (e.g., the operation-linked effect described above) involving a predetermined operation for the effect may be performed. This effect generates a response effect, such as an expectation level indication, in response to an operation of a predetermined operation means for the effect, such as a chance button (e.g., the above-mentioned operation buttons 10a and 10b) or a touch panel (e.g., the above-mentioned sub-effect display unit 22). In this case, if no operation is performed on the target operation means for the effect after the start of accepting the operation for the effect, the device enters a wait state. However, if an irregular press is performed even in this wait state, the device switches to a standby display, the wait state for the operation for the effect also ends, and it is desirable that the response effect scheduled for that operation effect will not occur even if the operation means for the effect is subsequently operated. This can prevent the occurrence of a situation that is confusing to the player, where a response effect serving the role of an expectation level indication or the like occurs during the standby display.

Furthermore, in the case of specifications that allow for the setting of the presentation state (e.g., volume adjustment, light intensity adjustment, etc.) whether the reels are spinning or stopped, the presentation state may be set as needed even while the standby display associated with irregular button presses is displayed. Furthermore, in the case of specifications that allow for the setting of the presentation state (e.g., volume adjustment, light intensity adjustment, etc.) while the reels are stopped but not while the reels are spinning, the presentation state may be set as long as the reels are stopped, even while the standby display associated with irregular button presses is displayed. The same applies to the display of a user menu screen that allows for the display of game history, mobile-linked menus, partial payout tables, game flow, etc.; even while the standby display associated with irregular button presses is displayed, if the specifications allow for these, these may be displayed by performing the specified operation in the same way as under normal circumstances. Furthermore, the presentation state may be set as needed, for example, even during the standby state of the above-mentioned operation presentation, if the specifications allow for this setting.

Furthermore, after the start operation is performed, in the period from when the reels start to rotate until they reach a constant speed, the above-mentioned pseudo game may be performed, in which the reels are rotated and temporarily stopped by pressing the stop button. In such pseudo game, even if the stop operation is performed by pressing the buttons in an irregular manner, this is not considered an unrecommended playing method, so the standby display is not displayed and AT-related processing is not disadvantaged. Furthermore, during pseudo game, as described above, it is desirable to display a pseudo game display such as "FREEPPLAY" to make it clear that a pseudo game is in progress. Furthermore, if a pseudo game is to be performed while the standby display is displayed, the pseudo game display should be displayed along with the standby display.

<Modification of push order bell and transmission information control example of first gaming machine (modification)>
Next, referring to Figures 79 and 80, the configuration of the modified push order bell of this modified example and an example of control of the transmission information transmitted to the sub side will be described. The control example of the transmission information of this modified example can also be said to be an example of control of the transmission information of the first gaming machine. However, in this modified example, the one shown in Figure 79 is described as transmission information control example 1, and the one shown in Figure 80 is described as transmission information control example 2.

In addition, in this modified example, the variable display unit will be described as having three reels (left reel 3L, center reel 3C, and right reel 3R). In addition, in the modified example of the push order bell, some of the role configurations have been changed from the first gaming machine to explain the case where roles other than the push order bell are grouped in a similar manner. This will be described in more detail later.

(Modified example of push order bell)
In the modified example shown in Figure 79, for example, the internal winning roles include the replay roles "F_Normal Rip" and "F_Cherry", and the minor roles "F_Common Bell", "F_Push Order Bell A_123" to "F_Push Order Bell A_321" (the modified example of "Push Order Bell A"), "F_Push Order Bell B_213" to "F_Push Order Bell B_321" (the modified example of "Push Order Bell B"), "F_2 Choice 1 Piece Role A", "F_2 Choice 1 Piece Role B", "F_Common 1 Piece Role A", "F_Common 1 Piece Role B", and "F_Watermelon".

"F_Normal Replay" is a replay role, and regardless of the batting order or button press position, the corresponding symbol combination is displayed and a replay is awarded. Also, "F_Cherry" is a replay role, and regardless of the batting order or button press position, the corresponding symbol combination is displayed and a replay is awarded.

"F_Common Bell" is a minor winning combination that will display the corresponding symbol combination regardless of the batting order or the position where it is pressed, resulting in a 13-coin win.

The modified "Push Order Bell A" has a six-choice push order minor feature; if the stop operation is performed in the correct hitting order, the corresponding symbol combination is displayed and 13 coins are won; if the stop operation is performed in the incorrect hitting order and the first stopping operation is in the correct hitting order, the corresponding symbol combination is displayed regardless of the pressing position and 1 coin is won; if the stop operation is performed in the incorrect hitting order and the first stopping operation is also in the incorrect hitting order, if the pressing position for the specified reel is appropriate (the pressing position is correct 1/2 of the time), the corresponding symbol combination is displayed and 1 coin is won; if the pressing position for the specified reel is not appropriate (the pressing position is incorrect the remaining 1/2 of the time), a miss occurs and no prize is won (0 coins are won).

The modified "Push Order Bell B" has a four-choice push order minor feature where the first stop on the left is not defined as the correct hitting order. If the stop operation is performed in the correct hitting order, the corresponding symbol combination is displayed and 13 coins are won. If the stop operation is performed in the incorrect hitting order and the first stopping operation is the correct hitting order, the corresponding symbol combination is displayed regardless of the push position and 1 coin is won. If the stop operation is performed in the incorrect hitting order and the first stopping operation is also incorrect, if the push position for the specified reel is appropriate (the push position is correct 1/2 of the time), the corresponding symbol combination is displayed and 1 coin is won. If the push position for the specified reel is not appropriate (the push position is incorrect the remaining 1/2 of the time), a miss occurs and no prize is won (0 coins).

The modified "Push Order Bell B" is configured so that the first stop on the left is never the correct batting order, but any stop other than the first stop on the left may be the correct batting order; the first stop on the left is defined as a batting order that is unfavorable in terms of awarding game value, and any stop other than the first stop on the left is defined as a batting order that is unilaterally advantageous in terms of awarding game value, making it a push order minor feature that constitutes a biased bell.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 79, by configuring the modified "Push Order Bell B" in this way, when viewed as the gaming machine as a whole, if the stop operation is performed at batting order "123" or "132", the expected winning value is "1.1612", whereas if the stop operation is performed at batting order "213", "231", "312", or "321", the expected winning value is "2.716". In other words, if the stop operation is performed at the first left stop, the expected value of the game value awarded is lower than if the stop operation is performed at a stop other than the first left stop.

However, the expected winning value mentioned above is the expected winning value per game in a non-AT state (i.e., a situation in which a favorable stop operation mode is not announced), and since the number of bets required to play one game is three, the expected winning value will not exceed "3" regardless of the batting order played in a non-AT state (in other words, the payout rate will not exceed "1"). Therefore, for example, even if a player continues to perform stop operations other than the first left stop in a non-AT state, this is not configured in a way that will allow the player to continue to increase the game value, at least probabilistically.

"F_2 Choice 1 Coin Role A" and "F_2 Choice 1 Coin Role B" are minor roles with two choices for pressing position, not for the hitting order. For example, if "F_2 Choice 1 Coin Role A" is determined as the winning role, if the pressing position for the specified reel is appropriate (the pressing position is correct at 1/2 the timing (first timing)), the corresponding symbol combination will be displayed and a winning coin will be generated. If the pressing position for the specified reel is not appropriate (the pressing position is incorrect at the remaining 1/2 the timing (second timing)), a winning coin will be generated. occurs and no win occurs (0 coins); and when "F_2-choice 1-coin role B" is determined as the winning role, if the position pressed on the specified reel is appropriate (the press position is correct at 1/2 the timing (second timing)), the corresponding symbol combination will be displayed and 1 coin will be won, but if the position pressed on the specified reel is not appropriate (the press position is incorrect at the remaining 1/2 the timing (first timing)), a miss will occur and no win will occur (0 coins will be won).

"F_Common 1-Piece Role A" and "F_Common 1-Piece Role B" are minor roles, and the corresponding symbol combination will be displayed regardless of the batting order or press position, resulting in a 1-piece win.

"F_Watermelon" is a minor winning combination that will result in a 5-coin win, regardless of the batting order or press position. Note that this "F_Watermelon" can also be configured so that if the press position on a specific reel is appropriate, a 5-coin win will occur, but if the press position on a specific reel is inappropriate, a 1-coin win will occur.

(Example of transmission information control for a modified version of the push order bell (part 1))
Next, referring to Figure 79, the setting mode of the internal lottery information and instruction information using the modified push order bell will be described. Note that this is the transmission information control example (part 1) in order to distinguish it from the transmission information control example (part 2) described later with reference to Figure 80.

Transmission information control example (1) is a control example configured to transmit some information regarding the internal winning combination to the sub-side for each game, even in a non-AT state. In contrast, transmission information control example (2) is a control example configured to not transmit information regarding the internal winning combination to the sub-side when in a non-AT state.

(Setting mode 1 in non-AT state (advantageous zone))
Mode 1 shown in Figure 79 shows an example of a setting mode for internal lottery information and instruction information in the non-AT state of the advantageous zone (normal advantageous zone).

In this mode 1, if you win "F_Normal Rip", "F_Cherry", "F_Common 1-Piece Role A", "F_Common 1-Piece Role B", or "F_Watermelon", internal winning information ("1", "2", "16", "17", or "18") that allows the sub-side to identify each winning combination is set.

In addition, if you win "F_Common Bell" or the modified "Push Order Bell A", the sub-side will be able to identify which of these you have won, but internal winning information ("99") will be set which will not allow the sub-side to identify which one you have won. In other words, internal winning information will be set which groups "F_Common Bell" and the modified "Push Order Bell A".

In addition, if the modified "Push Order Bell B," "F_2 Choice 1 Piece Role A," or "F_2 Choice 1 Piece Role B" is won, the sub-side will be able to identify which of these has been won, but internal winning information ("98") will be set that will not allow the sub-side to identify which has been won. In other words, internal winning information will be set that groups the modified "Push Order Bell B," "F_2 Choice 1 Piece Role A," and "F_2 Choice 1 Piece Role B."

In addition, regardless of which winning combination is selected, instruction information ("99") is set so that the batting order cannot be determined on the sub-side. In other words, instruction information that groups all combinations is set.

(Setting mode 2 in non-AT state (advantageous zone))
Mode 2 shown in Figure 79 shows another example of the setting mode of internal lottery information and instruction information in the non-AT state of the advantageous zone (normal advantageous zone).

In this mode 2, if you win "F_Normal Rip", "F_Cherry", "F_Common Bell", "F_Common 1-Piece Role A", "F_Common 1-Piece Role B", or "F_Watermelon", internal winning information ("1", "2", "3", "16", "17", or "18") that allows the sub-side to identify each winning lottery will be set.

In addition, if the modified "Push Order Bell A" is won, the sub-side will be able to identify which of these has been won, but internal winning information ("80") will be set which will not allow the sub-side to identify which has been won. In other words, internal winning information is set which groups the modified "Push Order Bell A".

In addition, if the modified "Push Order Bell B," "F_2 Choice 1 Piece Role A," or "F_2 Choice 1 Piece Role B" is won, the sub-side will be able to identify which of these has been won, but internal winning information ("98") will be set that will not allow the sub-side to identify which has been won. In other words, internal winning information will be set that groups the modified "Push Order Bell B," "F_2 Choice 1 Piece Role A," and "F_2 Choice 1 Piece Role B."

Also, similar to the above-mentioned mode 1, regardless of which role is won, instruction information is set that prevents the batting order from being identified on the sub side (instruction information that becomes "no instruction"); however, in mode 2, if the modified "Push Order Bell B," "F_2 Choice 1 Piece Role A," or "F_2 Choice 1 Piece Role B" is won, the instruction information is set to "99," and if any other role is won, the instruction information is set to "0."

In this embodiment 2, if the modified "Push Order Bell A" is won, the internal winning information is set to "80" and the instruction information is set to "0" instead of "99", which makes it possible to perform a "Push Order Challenge Presentation" on the sub side (for example, a presentation such as "?-?-?" is displayed on the display screen, suggesting that at least the push order role has been won). This will be explained in more detail later.

(Setting mode 3 in non-AT state (advantageous zone))
Mode 3 shown in Figure 79 shows another example of the setting mode of internal lottery information and instruction information in the non-AT state of the advantageous zone (normal advantageous zone).

In this mode 3, if "F_Cherry", "F_Common 1-piece Role B", or "F_Watermelon" is won, internal winning information ("2", "17", or "18") that allows the sub-side to identify each winning result is set.

In addition, if you win "F_Normal Lip", "F_Common Bell", modified "Push Order Bell A", modified "Push Order Bell B", "F_2 Choice 1 Piece Role A", "F_2 Choice 1 Piece Role B", or "F_Common 1 Piece Role A", the sub-side will be able to identify that you have won one of these, but internal winning information ("97") will be set that will not allow the sub-side to identify which role you have won. In other words, internal winning information will be set that groups "F_Normal Lip", "F_Common Bell", modified "Push Order Bell A", modified "Push Order Bell B", "F_2 Choice 1 Piece Role A", "F_2 Choice 1 Piece Role B", and "F_Common 1 Piece Role A".

Also, similar to the above-mentioned mode 1, regardless of which role is won, instruction information is set that prevents the batting order from being identified on the sub side (instruction information that reads "no instruction"); however, in mode 3, if "F_Cherry," "F_Common 1-piece role B," or "F_Watermelon" is won, the instruction information is set to "0," and if any other role is won, the instruction information is set to "99."

The purpose of all of the above-mentioned modes 1 to 3 is to ensure that when a biased bell such as the modified "Push Order Bell B" is configured to be included in the internal winning combination, in a non-AT state, the winning combination, including the effects on the sub-side, is not recognizable to the player.

For example, even if the correct hitting order itself is not announced because the game is not in AT mode, if the player is able to recognize that a biased bell like the modified "Push Order Bell B" has been drawn, then in a game where the player recognizes this, they may intentionally perform a stop operation other than the first left stop (even if the gameplay is such that performing the first left stop gives an advantage in AT-related processing). In this case, there is a higher chance that the payout rate will deviate from the originally intended payout rate, which could result in a compromise to the fairness of the game.

Furthermore, since the fact that a player can recognize that a biased bell such as the modified "Push Order Bell B" has been drawn is essentially the same as being able to narrow down the advantageous hitting order in terms of the awarding of game value, it can be said that making this recognizable state is one aspect of the AT state. Therefore, under current regulations, for example, it would be necessary to display corresponding instruction information on the instruction monitor mentioned above, and the balls won in this state would need to be included in the above-mentioned "instruction-included device ratio" (for example, device ratio information that is also subject to aggregation and calculation during the AT state).

If such a need were to arise, it would make ball output design extremely difficult, and it would no longer be possible to guarantee the gameplay that allows for a dramatic increase in ball output by transitioning from non-AT state to AT state, which would significantly reduce player interest.

In this modified example, the information is set as described in aspects 1 to 3 above, assuming that the following requirements are met, so that there is no room for interpretation as an AT state.

For example, the first requirement is that in a game in which the internal lottery information is set to include (grouped with) biased bells such as the modified "Push Order Bell B," the payout rate will be less than 1 (or 1 or less) even if the stop operation is performed in any hitting order other than the first stop on the left (irregular pressing).

For example, in the above-mentioned modes 1 and 2, the modified "Push Order Bell B," "F_2 Choice 1 Coin Role A," and "F_2 Choice 1 Coin Role B" are grouped, and the internal winning information is set to "98." In a game where the internal winning information is set to "98" (in other words, a game where the group role is won), the expected winning value is 0.500 coins if the stopping operation is performed at batting order "123" or "132," whereas the expected winning value is 2.702 coins if the stopping operation is performed at batting order "213," "231," "312," or "321." In other words, regardless of the batting order in which the stopping operation is performed, the expected winning value does not exceed 3 (in other words, the payout rate does not exceed 1).

For example, in the above-mentioned aspect 3, "F_Normal Rip," "F_Common Bell," modified "Push Order Bell A," modified "Push Order Bell B," "F_2-Choice 1-Coin Role A," "F_2-Choice 1-Coin Role B," and "F_Common 1-Coin Role A" are grouped, and the internal winning information is set to "97." In a game where the internal winning information is set to "97" (in other words, a game where the group role is won), the expected winning value is 1.601 coins if the stopping operation is performed in the batting order of "123" or "132," whereas the expected winning value is 2.708 coins if the stopping operation is performed in the batting order of "213," "231," "312," or "321." In other words, regardless of the batting order in which the stopping operation is performed, the expected winning value does not exceed 3 (in other words, the payout rate does not exceed 1).

By doing this, for example, even if a player is able to recognize that the internal winning combination information "98" or "97" has been set and plays using irregular button presses, there will be no room for strategy, such as the player being able to increase the value of their game. Depending on the grouping method, there may be cases where the expected value of winning exceeds "3", but as long as it is ensured that the fairness of the game is not compromised, this is acceptable. However, from the above perspective, it is still desirable to configure the system so that the expected value of winning does not exceed "3".

For example, the second requirement is that in games where internal winning information is set that includes (groups with) biased bells such as the modified "Push Order Bell B," the sub-side will not perform any effects (batting order-related effects) that could indicate that the push order role has been won (or that the player could potentially recognize as batting order navigation), such as the above-mentioned "Push Order Challenge Effect."

For example, in the above-mentioned mode 1, the instruction information "99" is set for all winning combinations. Also, for example, in the above-mentioned mode 2, the instruction information "99" is set for a game in which the internal winning information "98" is set. Also, for example, in the above-mentioned mode 3, the instruction information "99" is set for a game in which the internal winning information "97" is set. In other words, on the sub-side, it is possible to control the sub-side so that the above-mentioned batting order-related effects can be performed in a game in which the instruction information "0" is received, while it is possible to control the sub-side so that the above-mentioned batting order-related effects cannot be performed in a game in which the instruction information "99" is received.

In addition, even in games where the sub-side has received the instruction information "99," it is permissible to use effects that are at least unrelated to batting order, such as effects that suggest a minor winning combination using a colored navigation such as a white or yellow navigation, or effects that warn of a chance when a stop operation is performed on the first left stop. Also, for example, in the case of the above-mentioned mode 1, the same effects may be used in the cases of internal winning information "99," internal winning information "98," and internal winning information "0" (a loss), or different effects may be used.

By doing this, players can more easily play in a specific mode (first stop on the left) that is advantageous for AT-related processing without being aware of the biased bell winnings. Furthermore, by setting the internal winning information and instruction information as described above, even if grouping information containing biased bells is sent to the sub-side, this does not make it possible to narrow down the advantageous batting order. Therefore, payouts in such games do not fall under payouts due to instructions, and are not required to be included in the above-mentioned "game device ratio including instructions." This makes it possible to accurately count payouts in the AT state and in effectively advantageous states while the game devices are operating, and it is believed that gaming establishments will also find it easier to understand the behavior of the gaming machine using the above-mentioned game device ratio monitor device 54.

It is also possible to add the following requirement (third requirement). For example, the third requirement is that in a game in which instruction information "99" is set, this fact is notified by a notification means controlled on the main side.

For example, a special lamp could be newly installed on the information display device 14, and in games where the instruction information "99" is set, this special lamp could be lit (or a specified display mode could be displayed). Alternatively, in games where the instruction information "99" is set, the instruction monitor could display a "-" or other indication that no instruction has been issued. Note that these are merely examples, and other notification means could also be used as long as some display mode can indicate to the player that no instruction has been issued.

By doing this, for example, when a special lamp lights up (or a "-" is displayed on the instruction monitor), the player can be notified or hinted that navigation will not occur (no notification of the stop operation mode will be given, no instructions will be given), making it easier for the player to play in a specific mode (first stop on the left) that is advantageous for AT-related processing without being conscious of winning the biased bell. Furthermore, this makes it possible to encourage players to play using the recommended playing method.

When using a special lamp, information on whether the special lamp is on or off may be further transmitted to the sub side. The sub side may then refer to this information and, if it recognizes that the special lamp is on, execute control to not perform the batting order-related effects described above. However, without transmitting such information, the control to not perform the batting order-related effects described above may be executed by comprehensively determining the internal lottery information and instruction information (or by determining whether instruction information "99" has been transmitted).

Furthermore, when an instruction monitor is used, for example, if instruction information "0" is set, the instruction monitor may be set to display "0," or alternatively, no information may be displayed on the instruction monitor (hidden). In either case, no instruction is generated on the main side. However, in this case, the sub side is permitted to perform the batting order-related effects described above. On the other hand, if instruction information "99" is set, the instruction monitor may be set to display "-" (or another identification information that is at least different from the above-mentioned "0" or hidden and that is different from each instruction). In this case, too, no instruction is generated on the main side. However, in this case, the sub side is prohibited from performing the batting order-related effects described above.

When "0" is displayed (or not displayed) on the instruction monitor, for example, when a push order replay is won, it is possible to have the sub-side perform batting order-related effects for special effects, such as a 7-match navigation to line up 7s as an additional notification (this does not affect the number of balls won even if the navigation is not followed). However, it is of course possible to not perform such batting order-related effects for special effects, and instead perform anticipation effects that are not related to batting order.

Also, when the instruction monitor displays "1" through "6," the corresponding batting order navigation can be performed on the sub-side. For example, if the instruction monitor displays "1," it can indicate the batting order "123," which stops the reels in the order of left, center, and right; if the instruction monitor displays "2," it can indicate the batting order "132," which stops the reels in the order of left, right, and center; if the instruction monitor displays "3," it can indicate the batting order "213," which stops the reels in the order of center, left, and right; if the instruction monitor displays "4," it can indicate the batting order "312," which stops the reels in the order of center, right, and left; if the instruction monitor displays "5," it can indicate the batting order "231," which stops the reels in the order of right, left, and center; and if the instruction monitor displays "6," it can indicate the batting order "321," which stops the reels in the order of right, center, and left. Furthermore, if the instruction monitor displays "-," as described above, the sub-side can prevent batting order-related effects from being performed.

Next, we will explain how the internal winning information and instruction information are set in the AT state, as well as how the internal winning information and instruction information are set in the non-advantageous zone.

(Setting mode 1 in AT state (advantageous zone))
Mode 1 shown in Figure 79 shows an example of a setting mode for internal lottery information and instruction information in the AT state (increasing zone) of the advantageous zone.

In this mode 1, if you win "F_Normal Rip", "F_Cherry", "F_Common Bell", "F_Common 1-Piece Role A", "F_Common 1-Piece Role B", or "F_Watermelon", internal winning information ("1", "2", "3", "16", "17", or "18") that allows the sub-side to identify each winning result will be set.

Furthermore, if the modified "Push Order Bell A" is won, the sub-side will be able to identify which of these has been won, but internal winning information ("80") will be set which will not allow the sub-side to identify which has been won. In other words, internal winning information is set which groups the modified "Push Order Bell A". However, because instruction information "1" to "6" is set which allows the sub-side to identify each correct hitting order, it is possible to notify advantageous stop operation patterns even with this configuration.

Furthermore, if the modified "Push Order Bell B" is won, the sub-side will be able to identify which of these has been won, but internal winning information ("81") will be set which will not allow the sub-side to identify which has been won. In other words, internal winning information is set which groups the modified "Push Order Bell B". However, because instruction information "3" to "6" is set which allows the sub-side to identify each correct hitting order, it is possible to notify advantageous stop operation patterns even with this configuration.

Furthermore, if "F_2 Choice 1 Piece Role A" or "F_2 Choice 1 Piece Role B" is won, the sub-side will be able to identify which of these has been won, but internal winning information ("82") will be set which will not allow the sub-side to identify which has been won. In other words, internal winning information is set which groups "F_2 Choice 1 Piece Role A" and "F_2 Choice 1 Piece Role B". However, since these are not push order minor roles, even if they are configured in this way, it will not affect the AT state. It is also possible to set different instruction information for each, so that the correct push position can be announced.

(Setting mode 2 in AT state (advantageous zone))
Mode 2 shown in Figure 79 shows another example of the setting mode of the internal lottery information and instruction information in the AT state (increase zone) of the advantageous zone.

In this mode 2, if you win "F_Normal Rip", "F_Cherry", "F_Common Bell", "F_Common 1-Piece Role A", "F_Common 1-Piece Role B", or "F_Watermelon", internal winning information ("1", "2", "3", "16", "17", or "18") that allows the sub-side to identify each winning lottery will be set.

Furthermore, if the modified "Push Order Bell A" is won, the sub-side will be able to identify which of these has been won, but internal winning information ("80") will be set, which will not allow the sub-side to identify which has been won. In other words, internal winning information is set that groups the modified "Push Order Bell A." In addition, in this mode 2, if the "F_Push Order Bell A_123" and "F_Push Order Bell A_132" are won, instruction information "10" will be set. This instruction information "10" is configured as instruction information that notifies the correct hitting order only for the first stop operation (first left stop), such as "1-?-?". In other words, in this mode 2, if the modified "Push Order Bell A" is won, a two-choice challenge presentation for the second stop operation will be performed. This is just one example.

Similarly, instruction information "20" is configured as instruction information that indicates the correct batting order only for the first stop operation (first stop on the center), for example, "?-1-?", and instruction information "30" is configured as instruction information that indicates the correct batting order only for the first stop operation (first stop on the right), for example, "?-?-1."

Furthermore, if the modified "Push Order Bell B" is won, the sub-side will be able to identify which of these has been won, but internal winning information ("81") will be set which will not allow the sub-side to identify which has been won. In other words, internal winning information is set which groups the modified "Push Order Bell B". However, because instruction information "3" to "6" is set which allows the sub-side to identify each correct hitting order, it is possible to notify advantageous stop operation patterns even with this configuration.

Furthermore, if "F_2 Choice 1 Piece Role A" or "F_2 Choice 1 Piece Role B" is won, the sub-side will be able to identify which of these has been won, but internal winning information ("82") will be set which will not allow the sub-side to identify which has been won. In other words, internal winning information is set which groups "F_2 Choice 1 Piece Role A" and "F_2 Choice 1 Piece Role B". However, since these are not push order minor roles, even if they are configured in this way, it will not affect the AT state. It is also possible to set different instruction information for each, so that the correct push position can be announced.

(Settings in non-advantageous sections)
The mode shown in Figure 79 shows an example of the setting mode of internal lottery information and instruction information in a non-advantageous zone (non-AT state).

In this mode, if you win "F_Normal Rip", "F_Cherry", "F_Common Bell", "F_Common 1-Piece Role A", "F_Common 1-Piece Role B", or "F_Watermelon", internal winning information ("1", "2", "3", "16", "17", or "18") that allows the sub-side to identify each winning combination is set.

Also, if you win the modified "Push Order Bell A," the sub-side will be able to identify which of these you won, but internal winning information ("80") will be set which will not allow the sub-side to identify which one you won.

In addition, if the modified "Push Order Bell B," "F_2 Choice 1 Piece Role A," or "F_2 Choice 1 Piece Role B" is won, the sub-side will be able to identify which of these has been won, but internal winning information ("98") will be set that will not allow the sub-side to identify which has been won. In other words, internal winning information will be set that groups the modified "Push Order Bell B," "F_2 Choice 1 Piece Role A," and "F_2 Choice 1 Piece Role B."

In addition, in this mode, if the modified "Push Order Bell B," "F_2 Choice 1 Piece Role A," or "F_2 Choice 1 Piece Role B" is won, the instruction information is set to "99," and if any other role is won, the instruction information is set to "0."

(Example of transmission information control for a modified version of the push order bell (part 2))
Next, referring to Figure 80, a transmission information control example (part 2) using a modified version of the push order bell will be described. As mentioned above, this transmission information control example (part 2) is a control example configured such that when in a non-AT state, information regarding the internal lottery role is not basically transmitted to the sub side. Also, in Figure 80, in order to explain this transmission information control example (part 2), a schematic flowchart showing an example of the process is shown. Therefore, the specific control process in the transmission information control is not necessarily limited to that shown in Figure 80.

First, when a game is started (for example, when a start operation is performed), the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the AT is in progress (S4011). That is, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the current state is the AT state. If the main CPU 101 determines that the AT is in progress (YES in S4011), it transfers processing to S4013.

On the other hand, if the main CPU 101 determines that the AT is not in progress (NO in S4011), it determines whether a rare combination has been won (S4012). If the main CPU 101 determines that a rare combination has not been won (NO in S4012), it simply ends the processing.

On the other hand, if the main CPU 101 determines that a rare combination has been won (YES in S4012), it proceeds to S4013. If YES in S4011 or YES in S4012, the main CPU 101 performs transmission information setting processing (S4013). Thereafter, it terminates this processing.

In the transmission information setting process, if the AT state is in effect (if S4011 is YES), for example, internal winning information and instruction information are transmitted using one of the AT state setting modes shown in FIG. 79. Also, if the non-AT state is in effect (if S4011 is NO) but a rare role is won (if S4012 is YES), the internal winning information corresponding to the won rare role is exceptionally transmitted. In this case, if the instruction information corresponding to the won rare role is "0", the instruction information may also be transmitted.

On the other hand, if the machine is in a non-AT state (S4011 is NO) and no rare combination has been won (S4012 is also NO), no information related to the internal winning combination is set (the processing of S4013 is not performed), and no information is sent to the sub-side. Note that "rare combination" here refers to combinations such as "F_Cherry" and "F_Watermelon", for example.

In this way, even if a biased bell such as the modified "Push Order Bell B" is included, the sub-side will not be able to recognize this winning lottery unless the machine is in the AT state, so the player will not be aware of the biased bell winning lottery and will be able to play in a specific mode (first stop on the left) that is advantageous for AT-related processing. Furthermore, since there is no need to consider how to configure the internal winning lottery information and instruction information in non-AT states, the control load and data volume can be reduced, and the ease of designing the gaming machine can be improved.

However, if information related to the internal winning combination were not transmitted for any combination, the sub-side would not perform any anticipation effects or other effects corresponding to the type of internal winning combination, which could significantly reduce the enjoyment of the game. Therefore, in this example, when a rare combination is won, the transmission information setting process is performed as an exception even in a non-AT state.

In accordance with the above-mentioned intent, if it is determined in S4011 that the AT state is present, the processing of S4013 is performed without providing the processing of S4012. However, if it is determined in S4011 that the AT state is not present (it is a non-AT state), the processing may be terminated as is, and the transmission information setting processing may not be performed, even for rare roles.

Furthermore, with this configuration, for example, when a rare role or at least a role other than the biased bell (or a role other than a group that includes the biased bell) is won, a different type of lock effect can be executed, and the type of lock effect can be sent to the sub-side via a lock command, ensuring that batting order-related effects are not executed for the biased bell, while for roles that are not related to this, effects related to the internal winning role can be executed.

<Gaming machine using the specifications of the first gaming machine (variant)>
According to the first gaming machine (variant), by using the specifications, it is possible to provide a gaming machine having the following configuration, for example.

For example, this gaming machine has a preferential state in which decisions related to the AT state are favored, and a non-preferential state that is not in the preferential state, and is controllable to either state at least when not controlled to the AT state; is configured so that when a stop operation is performed in a specific mode (e.g., first left stop), the expected value of the game value awarded is lower than when a stop operation is not performed in that specific mode; is capable of executing preferential control such that at least the next game can be controlled to a preferential state when a stop operation is performed in that specific mode, and at least the next game can be controlled to a non-preferential state when a stop operation is not performed in that specific mode; and is capable of displaying a specific standby display (e.g., a standby display) according to the type of specific performance being performed in a specific performance (e.g., an anticipation performance) in which the display content progresses as the game progresses, if a stop operation is not performed in that specific mode during a game in the preferential state.

Note that the stop operation resulting in a specific mode is not limited to the mode in which the left reel is the first to stop. For example, performing the first stop operation on any of the other reels may be configured to result in a stop operation in a specific mode. Also, for example, if the variable display unit is configured with four reels, performing stop operations on two specific reels in a specific order may be configured to result in a stop operation in a specific mode. Also, performing a stop operation on a specific reel (for example, the left reel) at a specific press position may be configured to result in a stop operation in a specific mode.

Furthermore, the stop operation mode controlled to the preferential state is configured so that the expected value of the game value awarded is lower than the stop operation mode controlled to the non-preferential state, but such preferential control may also be performed even if the expected value of the game value is the same. In other words, even if the winning combination is configured so that it does not include biased bells, a specific mode of the stop operation that can be controlled to the preferential state may be defined, and if the stop operation is performed in that specific mode, it may be controlled to the preferential state, and if the stop operation is not performed in that specific mode, it may be controlled to the non-preferential state.

The specific waiting display can also be used for a variety of purposes. For example, it can be used to notify or suggest that the progression of a presentation is on hold, or to notify or suggest that it will be controlled to a non-preferential state. It can also be used, for example, to notify or suggest that a presentation has ended prematurely. It can also be used, for example, to notify or suggest that the player has been put at a disadvantage by not performing a stop operation in a specific manner. It can also be used to notify or suggest that the player should play using a recommended playing method (for example, performing a stop operation in a specific manner). In other words, it can be used to notify or suggest various information related to preferential control or various information related to the progression of a presentation.

Also, for example, in this gaming machine, preferential control can be executed when a normal role is determined as the winning role.

Also, for example, this is a gaming machine in which preferential control can be executed regardless of which role is determined to be the winning role.

Games in which preferential control can be performed can be arbitrarily set according to specified control conditions. For example, preferential control may be performed under different conditions during normal play (advantageous zone), CZ, and ST. For example, in any of these states, preferential control may be performed regardless of which role is determined to be the winning role, and in other states, preferential control may be performed only when a normal role is determined to be the winning role. Also, even in the same state, preferential control may be performed regardless of which role is determined to be the winning role in one play period, and only when a normal role is determined to be the winning role in another play period.

Furthermore, for example, this is a gaming machine that can control whether to enter a preferential state or a non-preferential state on a per-game basis. However, as mentioned above, such preferential control may be performed on a multiple-game basis, or on a stop operation basis within a single game.

For example, in a game in a preferential state, if a first stop operation is performed in a specific mode, it may be possible to decide to control to the preferential state, but in the second stop operation, it may be possible to decide whether to further control to the preferential state, and if it is decided not to control to the preferential state, it may be possible to control to the non-preferential state. Also, for example, in a game in a preferential state, if a first stop operation is not performed in a specific mode, it may be possible to decide to control to the non-preferential state, but if a predetermined condition is met in the second stop operation, for example, if the preferred batting order is not reached, it may be possible to decide to control to the preferential state, and if it is decided to control to the preferential state, it may be possible to control to the preferential state.

Also, for example, this gaming machine controls games in a preferential state when the preferential counter value is 1, subtracts 1 from the preferential counter value, and adds 1 to the preferential counter value if a stop operation is performed in a specific mode during that game, but does not add 1 to the preferential counter value if a stop operation is not performed in the specific mode, thereby controlling games in which the preferential counter value is 1 or greater to be in the preferential state.

Also, for example, in a gaming machine where, during play in a preferential state, the value of the preferential counter may not be incremented by 1 even if a stop operation is performed in a specific manner.

Instead of the preferential counter, a non-preferential counter may be provided to manage the non-preferential state play period, and the value of the non-preferential counter may be incremented by 1 during play in the preferential state, and if a stop operation is performed in a specific mode during that play, the value of the non-preferential counter may be decremented by 1. However, if a stop operation is not performed in the specific mode, the value of the non-preferential counter may not be decremented by 1, and play for which the value of the non-preferential counter is 1 or greater may be controlled to the non-preferential state.

In this case, the system may be configured so that, during play in a preferential state, the value of the non-preferential counter is not decremented by 1 even if a stop operation is performed in a specific manner.

Furthermore, for example, if a power outage occurs while a specific standby display is being displayed, this gaming machine will be able to continue displaying the specific standby display even after power is restored.

Furthermore, for example, if a setting change is made while a specific waiting display is being displayed, this gaming machine is capable of displaying the specific waiting display even after the setting change.

Note that the manner in which the specific standby display is continued when transitioning from one state to another is not limited to the above. For example, if a game ends and a predetermined time (e.g., 30 seconds) has passed and it is determined that a non-play state has been reached, a demonstration screen would normally be displayed. However, if the specific standby display was being displayed, the specific standby display may be configured to continue to be displayed instead of the demonstration screen. In this case, if a further predetermined time (e.g., 2 hours) has passed since it was determined that a non-play state has been reached, the specific standby display may be terminated and the normal demonstration screen may be displayed.

Furthermore, for example, the specific effects include continuous effects that are executed across multiple games, and if a stop operation is not performed in a specific mode while continuous effects are being executed in a game in a preferential state, the gaming machine will display a specific standby display in that game, and then be able to execute the effect of the display content of that game again in the next game.

Note that "re-executing" does not only mean executing the entire effect from the beginning, but also includes executing only part of it. Furthermore, if adjustments are necessary when re-executing, adjustments can be made by changing only the execution time without changing the overall structure of the effect, or by omitting or adding some of the effect content. In other words, as long as the effect is executed in a way that the player perceives as the same effect being executed again without feeling uncomfortable, it does not necessarily have to be the exact same effect.

Continuous effects are sufficient as long as at least related effects are executed across multiple games, and include not only those in which predetermined information is announced or suggested for multiple games as a set, but also those in which predetermined information is announced or suggested for each game and executed across multiple games. Furthermore, they do not necessarily have to be executed across consecutive games; for example, if a performance scenario (performance control state) can be determined to control the performance tendency during a specific game period, such as a premonition state, and related effects can be executed even between non-consecutive games, it is also possible for an effect executed in one game to be executed again in a subsequent game, even between non-consecutive games.

Furthermore, for example, when a stop operation is first detected, if the stop operation is directed to a specific display column (e.g., the left reel), a specific mode will be activated, and if the stop operation is not directed to a specific display column, the specific mode will not be activated. The specific effect is an anticipation effect that is executed from the start of play, and when a specific effect is executed during play in a preferential state, if the first stop operation is not directed to a specific display column, the gaming machine will display a specific standby display from that point on.

The time when the stop operation is first detected may be the exact moment when the first stop operation is performed (when the stop button is operated and turns on, or when the stop button is operated and then turns off), or it may be any timing after the first stop operation and before the second stop operation.

Furthermore, for example, this gaming machine has a preferential state in which decisions related to the AT state are favored, and a non-preferential state that is not in the preferential state, and can be controlled to either state at least when not controlled to the AT state; when a stop operation is performed in a specific mode (for example, the first left stop), the expected value of the game value awarded is lower than when a stop operation is not performed in the specific mode; during ST, which is a non-AT state, it is more advantageous to the player than during normal play (advantageous period) and is configured to continue for a specified period (for example, 16 games); it is capable of executing preferential control such that at least the next game can be controlled to the preferential state when a stop operation is performed in the specific mode, and at least the next game can be controlled to the non-preferential state when a stop operation is not performed in the specific mode; the specified period progresses in accordance with the execution of one game, regardless of whether the gaming machine is in the preferential state; and the degree of advantage during ST may change to an advantageous one when play is performed in the preferential state, but will not change to an advantageous one when play is performed in the non-preferential state.

Note that ST does not necessarily have to be a more advantageous state than normal (advantageous zone). This type of control may also be performed during normal (advantageous zone) or CZ. This gaming machine can also, of course, perform specific wait displays similar to those described above, and various related controls can be performed. For example, when the machine is configured so that the same anticipation effects can be executed during normal (advantageous zone) and ST, if a specific wait display is to be performed, it may be configured so that different specific wait displays are displayed during normal (advantageous zone) and ST.

[Fourth embodiment]
The first to third embodiments have been described above. A fourth embodiment will now be described. The basic configuration of the pachislot machine 1 according to the fourth embodiment is the same as that of the pachislot machine 1 according to the first to third embodiments. In the following, components that are the same as those of the pachislot machine 1 according to the first to third embodiments will be described with the same reference numerals. Furthermore, explanations of portions that apply to the fourth embodiment from the explanations of the first to third embodiments will be omitted.

Note that even if the above description contains statements that are limited to the pachislot machine 1 of the first embodiment, such as "In the first embodiment, ..." or "In the pachislot machine 1 of the first embodiment, ...," they can also be applied to the pachislot machine 1 of the fourth embodiment, provided that they do not deviate from the spirit of the fourth embodiment. Similarly, the above description contains statements that are limited to the pachislot machine 1 of the second or third embodiment, and they can also be applied to the pachislot machine 1 of the fourth embodiment, provided that they do not deviate from the spirit of the fourth embodiment. Therefore, it is possible to partially replace or combine each of the configurations shown in the first to third embodiments (including each of the configurations shown in the modified examples and the extended examples) with the configuration shown in the fourth embodiment.

Furthermore, even if a component has a different shape from the pachislot machine 1 according to the first to third embodiments, the same reference numerals may be used for convenience to designate components with similar functions. Furthermore, even if a component has the same shape or the same processing as the pachislot machine 1 according to the first to third embodiments, different reference numerals or step numbers may be used for convenience.

<Game state transition flow>
Fig. 81(a) is a diagram showing transitions of game states according to the fourth embodiment of the present invention. Fig. 81(b) is a table summarizing transition conditions of game states according to the fourth embodiment of the present invention.

As explained in the first embodiment, the pachislot machine 1 can provide various game states in which the game is played in order to vary the player's degree of advantage or to achieve the intended gameplay. In this embodiment, the game states shown in Figure 81 (a) are managed by the main control circuit 100. Such game states include a bonus non-winning state, a flag-between state, and a bonus state.

The bonus non-winning state is a state in which the bonus has not been won and the bonus has not been activated (a prize has not been awarded). The flag-between state is a state in which the bonus role is carried over as an internal winning role, i.e., a state in which the bonus role has been won and the bonus has not been activated. The bonus state is a state in which the bonus is activated. As explained in the first embodiment, the flag-between state is also referred to as the carryover state, (bonus) flag-between, (bonus) internal intermediate, etc. When a bonus role is won and the symbol combination associated with that bonus role is displayed on an active line, it is possible to transition to the bonus state (activate the bonus state).

In this embodiment, a 3BB gaming state is provided as a bonus state. The bonus role corresponding to the 3BB gaming state is "F_3BB" (see Figures 85 to 89). In addition, a 3BB flag-interval state is provided as a flag-interval state.

The 3BB flag interval state is configured as the RT state (RT1 gaming state). As explained in the first embodiment, the RT state is a state in which the lottery mode for the replay role can be changed compared to the state in which the RT state is not activated (non-RT state). The bonus non-winning state is configured as a non-RT state (RT0 gaming state).

To explain this in more detail with reference to Figures 81(a) and 81(b), when "F_3BB" is determined as the internal winning combination (when an internal win occurs) in a bonus non-winning state, the main control circuit 100 transitions the gaming state from the bonus non-winning state to the 3BB flag interval state (see transition condition (1)).

"F_3BB" (3BB) is a carryover role (see Figure 18). When 3BB is internally won, the state of the internally won 3BB is carried over until the symbol combination corresponding to 3BB ("C_3BB" shown in Figure 83) is stopped and displayed along the active line (until 3BB wins). The 3BB flag interval state is a state in which the state of the internally won 3BB is carried over.

When the "C_3BB" symbol combination is displayed stopped along an active line in the 3BB flag interval state (when a 3BB wins), the main control circuit 100 transitions the game state from the 3BB flag interval state to the 3BB game state (see transition condition (2)). When more than the specified number of medals (55 medals) are paid out in the 3BB game state, the main control circuit 100 transitions the game state from the 3BB game state to the bonus non-winning state (see transition condition (3)).

<Pattern arrangement table>
FIG. 82(a) is a diagram showing a symbol arrangement table.

The symbol arrangement table shown in Figure 82(a) represents the arrangement of symbols arranged on the surface of each of the left reel 3L, center reel 3C, and right reel 3R. The symbol arrangement table defines the correspondence between the 20 symbol positions "0" to "19" and the symbols corresponding to each of these symbol positions.

Symbol positions "0" to "19" indicate the positions of the symbols arranged in the direction of rotation on each of the left reel 3L, center reel 3C, and right reel 3R. The symbols corresponding to symbol positions "0" to "19" can be identified by referencing the symbol arrangement table using the value of the symbol counter. Symbol types include "V," "Seven," "Bar," "Watermelon," "Cherry," "Bell A," "Bell B," "Lip A," "Lip B," and "Blank."

<Pattern code table>
FIG. 82(b) is a diagram showing a symbol code table.

As shown in Figure 82(b), each symbol arranged on each reel 3L, 3C, and 3R is identified by a symbol code table, and in this embodiment, each symbol is distinguished by 1 byte (8 bits) of data. The symbol code table shown in Figure 82(b) represents symbol codes, which are data used to identify the symbols arranged on the surfaces of the three reels 3L, 3C, and 3R.

For example, the symbol arrangement table shown in Figure 82(a) has been described as representing the arrangement of symbols arranged on the surface of each of the left reel 3L, center reel 3C, and right reel 3R, but the symbol arrangement table actually stored in the main ROM 102 represents the arrangement of symbol codes that identify the symbols arranged on the surface of each of the left reel 3L, center reel 3C, and right reel 3R.

In this embodiment, the symbols used in the pachislot machine 1 are, as mentioned above, 10 types: "V," "Seven," "Bar," "Watermelon," "Cherry," "Bell A," "Bell B," "Lip A," "Lip B," and "Blank." In the symbol code table, symbol codes "1" to "10" are assigned to each of the symbols: "V," "Seven," "Bar," "Watermelon," "Cherry," "Bell A," "Bell B," "Lip A," "Lip B," and "Blank."

<Pattern combination table>
83 and 84 are diagrams showing the symbol combination table.

The symbol combination table defines the correspondence between symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on an active line and the number of medals that will be paid out (number of medals paid out) when that symbol combination is stopped and displayed on an active line. The symbol combinations are shown, from left to right, as the symbols on the left reel 3L, center reel 3C, and right reel 3R. The name given to each combination is also shown.

The number of medals paid out is shown for the number of medals paid out when a single medal game is played (payout when betting one medal), the number of medals paid out when a double medal game is played (payout when betting two medals), and the number of medals paid out when a triple medal game is played (payout when betting three medals). In this specification, a unit game played by inserting one medal is referred to as a single medal game, a unit game played by inserting two medals is referred to as a double medal game, and a unit game played by inserting three medals is referred to as a triple medal game. In this embodiment, the number of medals that can be inserted in each game state is set to three.

The active line is a pseudo line (top-middle-bottom) that connects the top area of the left reel 3L, the middle area of the center reel 3C, and the bottom area of the right reel 3R. As explained in the first embodiment, the active line is activated when the number of medals required for the current game (the number of medals required to start the game) has been bet.

The symbol combination tables shown in Figures 83 and 84 correspond to symbol combinations ("combinations") identified by storage area identification data represented by 13 bytes, and the number of medals paid out when the combination is displayed on an active line when one, two, or three coins are bet.

Some of the diagrams show multiple combinations together. For example, "C_Missed Lip B_01-02" is made up of two combinations, "C_Missed Lip B_01" and "C_Missed Lip B_02." The combination called "C_Missed Lip B_01" corresponds to the symbol combination "V-Lip A-Bar," and the combination called "C_Missed Lip B_02" corresponds to the symbol combination "V-Lip A-Cherry." When these combinations are displayed along an active line, no medals are paid out, but a replay is activated.

Similarly, "C_321 Bell B_01-06" is made up of six combinations, "C_321 Bell B_01" through "C_321 Bell B_06." In the diagram, for "C_321 Bell B_01-06," three types of symbols ("Seven," "V," and "Cherry") are specified for the left reel 3L, two types of symbols ("Bell B" and "Bell A") are specified for the center reel 3C, and one type of symbol ("Bell A") is specified for the right reel 3R. This means that "C_321 Bell B_01-06" includes 3 x 2 x 1 = 6 combinations. When these combinations are displayed along an active line, 15 medals are paid out.

Also, when the "V-RIP B-V" combination known as "C_3BB" is displayed along an active line, no medals are paid out, but the game state transitions to the 3BB game state.

In the diagram, "REP" indicates a combination that activates a replay (replay) when a win is won, "FRU" indicates a combination that pays out medals when a win is won, and "BB" indicates a combination that activates the BB game state (3BB game state) when a win is won (see Figures 11 to 14).

<Flag Combination Table>
85 to 89 are diagrams showing combination tables by flag.

The flag combination table defines the correspondence between various internal winning combinations and the symbol combinations that can stop and be displayed on an active line. As a result, when an internal winning combination is determined, the type of symbol combination that can stop and be displayed on an active line (the type of winning combination) is uniquely determined.

Specifically, the flag combination tables shown in Figures 85 to 89 indicate combinations that are permitted to be displayed on the pay lines in accordance with the internal winning combinations. The internal winning combinations in this embodiment are "F_3BB", "F_Replay A", "F_Replay B", "F_213Bell A", "F_213Bell B", "F_213Bell C", "F_213Bell D", "F_231Bell A", "F_231Bell B", "F_231Bell C", "F_231Bell D", "F_312Bell A", "F_312Bell B", "F_312Bell C", "F_312Bell D", and "F_321Bell A". There are "F_bell A", "F_321 Bell B", "F_321 Bell C", "F_321 Bell D", "F_Common Bell A", "F_Common Bell B", "F_1 Piece Role A", "F_1 Piece Role B", "F_Cherry", "F_Parallel Watermelon", "F_Diagonal Watermelon", "F_Reach Eye Role A", "F_Reach Eye Role B", "F_Reach Eye Role C", "F_BB Confirmed Role A", "F_BB Confirmed Role B", "F_Common 1 Piece Role", and "F_Common 15 Piece Role".

For example, if the internal winning combination is "F_3BB," then "C_3BB" is permitted to be displayed on the active line. In other words, if the internal winning combination is "F_3BB," this indicates that the internal winning combination is BB (3BB).

Also, if the internal winning combination is "F_Replay B," the following are permitted to be displayed on the active line: "C_Missed Replay B_01-02," "C_Missed Replay A_01-02," "C_Middle Replay A_01-04," "C_Lower Replay A_01-06," "C_CU Replay_01-03," "C_Upper Replay B_01-06," "C_Upper Replay A_01-03," and "C_CD Replay_01-04."

In addition, if the internal winning role is "F_213 Bell A", it is permitted to display "C_One Piece Role C6_01-02", "C_One Piece Role C2_01-02", "C_One Piece Role C1_01-02", "C_Middle Right One Piece B_01-04", "C_Middle Right One Piece A_01-04", "C_Control Role E1_01-02", "C_Control Role D6_01-02", "C_Control Role D5_01-02", "C_Control Role D1_01-02", "C_Control Role B3_01-02", "C_Control Role B2_01-02", "C_Control Role B1_01-02", "C_Control Role A4_01-02", "C_Control Role A2_01-02", "C_Control Role A1_01-02", and "C_213 Bell A_01-03" on the active line.

<Internal lottery table>
The internal lottery tables in this embodiment include an internal lottery table (see Figure 90) that is referenced in a bonus non-winning state (RT0 gaming state), an internal lottery table (see Figure 91(a)) that is referenced in a 3BB flag interval state (RT1 gaming state), and an internal lottery table (see Figure 91(b)) that is referenced in a BB gaming state (3BB gaming state).

Figure 90 shows the internal lottery table for the RT0 gaming state. Figure 91(a) shows the internal lottery table for the RT1 gaming state. Figure 91(b) shows the internal lottery table for the BB gaming state.

The multiple internal lottery tables shown in Figures 90 and 91 are stored in the main ROM 102 corresponding to each game state and each number of inserted coins, and show the winning probability of each flag with a denominator of 65536 for each setting 1 to 6. For example, in Figure 90, the lottery value "4308" is specified for "F_213 Bell A." As a result, the probability of "F_213 Bell A" winning internally is "4308/65536."

There are two cases where "F_3BB" can be internally won: when "F_3BB" is internally won alone, and when "F_3BB" is internally won in combination with another internal winning combination. In Figures 90 and 91, when "F_3BB" is internally won alone, it is written as "F_3BB", and when "F_3BB" is internally won in combination with another internal winning combination, it is written as "F_3BB + (other internal winning combination)."

As shown in Figure 90, in the RT0 gaming state, "F_Common Bell B", "F_1 Piece A", "F_1 Piece B", "F_Cherry", "F_Parallel Watermelon", "F_Diagonal Watermelon", "F_Reach Eye A", "F_Reach Eye B", "F_Reach Eye C", "F_BB Confirmed Role A", and "F_BB Confirmed Role B" can overlap with "F_3BB" and be internally won. Also, if "F_Common Bell B", "F_1 Piece A", "F_1 Piece B", "F_Cherry", "F_Parallel Watermelon", "F_Diagonal Watermelon", "F_Reach Eye A", "F_Reach Eye B", "F_Reach Eye C", "F_BB Confirmed Role A", and "F_BB Confirmed Role B" are internally won, "F_3BB" will always be internally won.

As mentioned above, in the RT1 gaming state, "F_3BB" has already been internally drawn. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 91(a), in the RT1 gaming state, internally drawn roles other than "F_Common Bell B," "F_1 Piece A," "F_1 Piece B," "F_Cherry," "F_Parallel Watermelon," "F_Diagonal Watermelon," "F_Reach Eye A," "F_Reach Eye B," "F_Reach Eye C," "F_BB Confirmed Role A," and "F_BB Confirmed Role B" will also be internally drawn in addition to "F_3BB." Note that in the RT1 gaming state, a "lose" cannot be drawn alone, so a lottery value of "0" is set for a "lose."

Note that the lottery values for each winning combination shown in Figures 90 and 91 are common values for all settings, but setting differences may be set for some or all winning combinations.

<Correspondence between internal winning combinations, stop operation modes, and display combinations>
FIG. 92 is a diagram showing an example of the correspondence between internal winning combinations, stop operation modes, display combinations, etc.

In the first embodiment, it was explained which symbol combination (which can also be expressed as a display combination, winning combination, stop display mode, display result, etc.) is displayed depending on the stop operation mode when each internal winning combination is won (see Figure 15). In this embodiment, the correspondence between internal winning combinations, stop operation modes, and display combinations, etc. is configured as shown in Figure 92.

In the diagram, "1 → 2 → 3" indicates a case where the stop operation for the left reel 3L is performed as the first stop operation, the stop operation for the center reel 3C is performed as the second stop operation, and the stop operation for the right reel 3R is performed as the third stop operation (batting order 1). "1 → 3 → 2" indicates a case where the stop operation for the left reel 3L is performed as the first stop operation, the stop operation for the right reel 3R is performed as the second stop operation, and the stop operation for the center reel 3C is performed as the third stop operation (batting order 2).

"2 → 1 → 3" indicates a case where the stop operation for the center reel 3C is performed as the first stop operation, the stop operation for the left reel 3L is performed as the second stop operation, and the stop operation for the right reel 3R is performed as the third stop operation (batting order 3). "2 → 3 → 1" indicates a case where the stop operation for the center reel 3C is performed as the first stop operation, the stop operation for the right reel 3R is performed as the second stop operation, and the stop operation for the left reel 3L is performed as the third stop operation (batting order 4).

"3 → 1 → 2" indicates a case where the stop operation for the right reel 3R is performed as the first stop operation, the stop operation for the left reel 3L is performed as the second stop operation, and the stop operation for the center reel 3C is performed as the third stop operation (batting order 5). "3 → 2 → 1" indicates a case where the stop operation for the right reel 3R is performed as the first stop operation, the stop operation for the center reel 3C is performed as the second stop operation, and the stop operation for the left reel 3L is performed as the third stop operation (batting order 6).

Specifically, if "F_Replay A" is determined as the internal winning combination, and a stop operation is performed by batting order 1 or batting order 2, a "normal reply" will be displayed along the valid line; if a stop operation is performed by any of batting orders 3 through 6, a "miss reply" will be displayed along the valid line if the timing is successful, and a "normal reply" will be displayed along the valid line if the timing is unsuccessful. Similarly, if "F_Replay B" is determined as the internal winning combination, and a stop operation is performed by batting order 1 or batting order 2, a "normal reply" will be displayed along the valid line; and if a stop operation is performed by any of batting orders 3 through 6, a "miss reply" will be displayed along the valid line if the timing is successful, and a "normal reply" will be displayed along the valid line if the timing is unsuccessful.

"Normal replies" is a general term for "C_middle replies A_01-04," "C_bottom replies A_01-06," "C_CU replies_01-03," "C_top replies B_01-06," "C_top replies A_01-03," and "C_CD replies_01-04" (see Figure 83). "Removed replies" is a general term for "C_removed replies B_01-02" and "C_removed replies A_01-02" (see Figure 83).

As shown in Figure 89, the content of the "miss replies" that are permitted to be displayed on the active line differs between when the internal winning combination is "F_Replay A" and when the internal winning combination is "F_Replay B." Specifically, as described above, when the internal winning combination is "F_Replay B," "C_Missed Replies B_01-02" and "C_Missed Replies A_01-02" are permitted to be displayed on the active line as "Missed Replies." In contrast, when the internal winning combination is "F_Replay A," "C_Missed Replies A_01-02" are permitted to be displayed on the active line as "Missed Replies," but "C_Missed Replies B_01-02" are not permitted to be displayed on the active line. This is related to the playability of the pseudo-BIG (see Figure 93). Details will be provided later.

Furthermore, if any of "F_213 Bell A," "F_213 Bell B," "F_213 Bell C," and "F_213 Bell D" is determined to be the internal winning combination, when a stop operation is performed in batting order 3, a combination in which 15 medals are paid out if the button press is successful will be displayed along the valid line, and a combination in which 1 medal is paid out if the button press is unsuccessful will be displayed along the valid line. When a stop operation is performed in a batting order other than batting order 3, a combination in which 1 medal is paid out regardless of the button press will be displayed along the valid line.

Furthermore, if any of "F_231 Bell A," "F_231 Bell B," "F_231 Bell C," and "F_231 Bell D" is determined to be the internal winning combination, when a stop operation is performed in batting order 4, a combination in which 15 medals are paid out if the button press is successful will be displayed along the valid line, and a combination in which 1 medal is paid out if the button press is unsuccessful will be displayed along the valid line. When a stop operation is performed in a batting order other than batting order 4, a combination in which 1 medal is paid out regardless of the button press will be displayed along the valid line.

Furthermore, if any of "F_312 Bell A," "F_312 Bell B," "F_312 Bell C," or "F_312 Bell D" is determined to be the internal winning combination, when a stop operation is performed in batting order 5, a combination in which 15 medals are paid out if the button press is successful will be displayed along the valid line, and a combination in which 1 medal is paid out if the button press is unsuccessful will be displayed along the valid line. When a stop operation is performed in a batting order other than batting order 5, a combination in which 1 medal is paid out regardless of the button press will be displayed along the valid line.

Furthermore, if any of "F_321 Bell A," "F_321 Bell B," "F_321 Bell C," and "F_321 Bell D" is determined to be the internal winning combination, when a stop operation is performed in batting order 6, a combination in which 15 medals are paid out if the button press is successful will be displayed along the valid line, and a combination in which 1 medal is paid out if the button press is unsuccessful will be displayed along the valid line. When a stop operation is performed in a batting order other than batting order 6, a combination in which 1 medal is paid out regardless of the button press will be displayed along the valid line.

In this way, "F_213 Bell A," "F_213 Bell B," "F_213 Bell C," "F_213 Bell D," "F_231 Bell A," "F_231 Bell B," "F_231 Bell C," "F_231 Bell D," "F_312 Bell A," "F_312 Bell B," "F_312 Bell C," "F_312 Bell D," "F_321 Bell A," "F_321 Bell B," "F_321 Bell C," and "F_321 Bell D" are internal winning combinations (push order bells) that stop and display different combinations (combinations of symbols) along the winning line depending on the order of stopping operations (push order) for each of reels 3L, 3C, and 3R. When the push order bell is determined as the internal winning combination, 15 medals will be paid out if the push order is correct and the push is successful.

In addition, if any of "F_Parallel Watermelon", "F_Diagonal Watermelon", "F_Cherry", "F_Reach Eye Role A", "F_Reach Eye Role B", "F_Reach Eye Role C", "F_BB Confirmed Role A", and "F_BB Confirmed Role B" is determined as the internal winning role, the combination displayed along the active line will differ depending on whether the stopping operation is performed by batting order 1 or 2 or any of batting orders 3 to 6.

For example, if any of "F_Reach Eye Role A," "F_Reach Eye Role B," and "F_Reach Eye Role C" is determined as the internal winning role, when a stopping operation is performed by batting order 1 or batting order 2, "One Reach Eye" will be displayed along the active line, and when a stopping operation is performed by any of batting orders 3 through 6, "One Normal Show" will be displayed along the active line. "One Reach Eye" is a general term for the symbol combinations shown in Figures 83 and 84 that include the word "Reach Eye." "One Reach Eye" is a symbol combination that can be displayed along the active line only when any of "F_Reach Eye Role A," "F_Reach Eye Role B," and "F_Reach Eye Role C" is determined as the internal winning role.

In addition, if either "F_BB Confirmed Role A" or "F_BB Confirmed Role B" is determined as the internal winning role, when a stopping operation is performed by batting order 1 or batting order 2, "One BB Confirmed Reach" will be displayed along the active line, and when a stopping operation is performed by any of batting orders 3 through 6, "One Normal Roll" will be displayed along the active line. "One BB Confirmed Reach" is a general term for the symbol combinations shown in Figures 83 and 84 that include the words "BB Confirmed Role." "One BB Confirmed Reach" is a symbol combination that can only be displayed along the active line when either "F_BB Confirmed Role A" or "F_BB Confirmed Role B" is determined as the internal winning role.

<Gameplay>
Fig. 93 is a diagram showing an example of a transition flow of a game state in a non-advantageous zone and an advantageous zone according to the fourth embodiment of the present invention. Fig. 94 is a diagram showing the transition of a ball output state according to the fourth embodiment of the present invention. Fig. 95 is a table summarizing the transition conditions of a ball output state according to the fourth embodiment of the present invention.

In the pachislot machine 1 according to the fourth embodiment, the main control circuit 100 manages the game state (ball payout state) shown in FIG. 93 separately from the game state shown in FIG. 81. As shown in FIG. 93, the ball payout state is broadly divided into a non-advantageous zone and an advantageous zone.

As explained in the first embodiment, the advantageous zone is a game period that can be controlled to a game state (AT state) in which information about stop operations that are advantageous to the player is notified (see Figure 5). Advantageous zones include a presentation zone (advantageous zone, normal game) and an increase zone (advantageous zone, AT state). Presentation zones are basically game states (non-AT states) in which information about stop operations that are advantageous to the player is not notified, and are similar to non-advantageous zones in that they are game states that are disadvantageous to the player compared to the AT state, but differ from non-advantageous zones in that a transition in the ball output state occurs. Increase zones are AT states (game states that are advantageous to the player).

During the presentation section, the ball output state can be controlled to one of the following: Normal Stage, Chance Stage A, Chance Stage B, Consecutive Winning Preparation, Consecutive Winning Challenge, and Promotion Chance. Normal Stage, Chance Stage A, and Chance Stage B are collectively referred to as the normal ball output state. Furthermore, during the increase section, the ball output state can be controlled to one of the following: Pseudo BIG and Pseudo REG. The characteristics of each ball output state are described in detail below.

As shown in Figures 94 and 95, when a player wins the advantageous zone transition lottery (see step S4001 in Figure 98) in a non-advantageous zone and the result of the advantageous zone transition lottery (see step S4003 in Figure 98) determines that a transition to consecutive win preparation will occur, the main control circuit 100 transitions the ball output state from the non-advantageous zone to consecutive win preparation (see transition condition (A)). Also, when a player wins the advantageous zone transition lottery (see step S4001 in Figure 98) in a non-advantageous zone and the result of the advantageous zone transition lottery (see step S4003 in Figure 98) determines that a transition to consecutive win challenge will occur, the main control circuit 100 transitions the ball output state from the non-advantageous zone to consecutive win challenge (see transition condition (B)).

If the consecutive win preparation drop lottery (see step S4031 in Figure 100) is won during consecutive win preparation, the main control circuit 100 will transition the ball output state from consecutive win preparation to the normal stage (see transition condition (C)). If the consecutive win challenge transition lottery (see step S4027 in Figure 100) is won during consecutive win preparation, the main control circuit 100 will transition the ball output state from consecutive win preparation to consecutive win challenge (see transition condition (D)).

When a decision is made to transition to Chance Stage A in the normal stage as a result of the normal stage transition flag/winning flag lottery (see step S4082 in FIG. 108), the main control circuit 100 transitions the ball output state from the normal stage to Chance Stage A via the premonition state (see transition condition (E)). In Chance Stage A, when the number of unit games determined by the chance stage guaranteed number of games lottery at the start of the chance stage (see step S4303 in FIG. 134) have been played, the main control circuit 100 transitions the ball output state from Chance Stage A to the normal stage (see transition condition (F)).

When a decision is made to transition to Chance Stage B in the normal stage as a result of the normal stage transition flag/winning flag lottery (see step S4082 in FIG. 108), the main control circuit 100 transitions the ball output state from the normal stage to Chance Stage B via the premonition state (see transition condition (G)). In Chance Stage B, when the number of unit games determined by the chance stage guaranteed number of games lottery at the start of the chance stage (see step S4303 in FIG. 134) have been played, the main control circuit 100 transitions the ball output state from Chance Stage B to the normal stage (see transition condition (H)).

In the normal stage, when a transition to a promotion chance is determined as a result of the normal stage transition flag/winning lottery (see step S4082 in FIG. 108), the main control circuit 100 transitions the ball output state from the normal stage to the promotion chance via the premonition state (see transition condition (I)). Also, in chance stage A, when a transition to a promotion chance is determined as a result of the chance stage pseudo-BIG/promotion chance lottery (see step S4306 in FIG. 134), the main control circuit 100 transitions the ball output state from chance stage A to the promotion chance via the premonition state (see transition condition (I)). Also, in chance stage B, when a transition to a promotion chance is determined as a result of the chance stage pseudo-BIG/promotion chance lottery (see step S4306 in FIG. 134), the main control circuit 100 transitions the ball output state from chance stage B to the promotion chance via the premonition state (see transition condition (I)).

Also, in the normal stage, when a decision is made to transition to pseudo BIG as a result of the normal stage transition flag/winning lottery (see step S4082 in Figure 108), the main control circuit 100 transitions the ball output state from the normal stage to pseudo BIG via the premonition state (see transition condition (J)). Also, in the chance stage A, when a decision is made to transition to pseudo BIG as a result of the chance stage pseudo BIG/promotion chance lottery (see step S4306 in Figure 134), the main control circuit 100 transitions the ball output state from chance stage A to pseudo BIG via the premonition state (see transition condition (J)). Also, in Chance Stage B, if the result of the Pseudo BIG/Promotion Chance Lottery during the Chance Stage (see step S4306 in FIG. 134) determines that a transition to Pseudo BIG will occur, the main control circuit 100 will transition the ball output state from Chance Stage B to Pseudo BIG via the precursor state (see transition condition (J)).

If a promotion chance lottery (see step S4366 in FIG. 141) determines that a transition to pseudo BIG will occur during the promotion chance, the main control circuit 100 transitions the ball output state from the promotion chance to pseudo BIG (see transition condition (K)). If a promotion chance lottery does not determine that a transition to pseudo BIG will occur during the promotion chance and a predetermined number of unit games (four times) have been played, the main control circuit 100 transitions the ball output state from the promotion chance to pseudo REG (see transition condition (L)).

When a player wins the consecutive win challenge lottery in the pseudo-BIG (see step S4408 in FIG. 153), the main control circuit 100 will transition the ball output state from the pseudo-BIG to the consecutive win challenge when the pseudo-BIG termination condition is met (see transition condition (M)). When a player wins the consecutive win challenge lottery in the pseudo-REG (see step S4483 in FIG. 161), the main control circuit 100 will transition the ball output state from the pseudo-REG to the consecutive win challenge when the pseudo-REG termination condition is met (see transition condition (M)). The pseudo-BIG termination conditions and pseudo-REG termination conditions will be explained later using FIG. 96.

If a 1G consecutive lottery (see step S4484 in FIG. 161) is won in the pseudo-REG, the main control circuit 100 will transition the ball output state from the pseudo-REG to the pseudo-BIG when the pseudo-REG termination condition is met (see transition condition (N)). Furthermore, if a 1G consecutive lottery (see step S4384 in FIG. 152) is won in the pseudo-BIG, the main control circuit 100 will control the ball output state back to the pseudo-BIG when the pseudo-BIG termination condition is met.

In the consecutive-game challenge, if the result of the consecutive-game challenge lottery (see step S4525 in FIG. 165) is to transition to a promotion chance, the main control circuit 100 will transition the ball output state from the consecutive-game challenge to a promotion chance when the number of unit games determined by the consecutive-game challenge start game number lottery (see step S4523 in FIG. 165) have been played (see transition condition (O)).In the consecutive-game challenge, if the result of the consecutive-game challenge lottery (see step S4525 in FIG. 165) is to transition to a pseudo-BIG, the main control circuit 100 will transition the ball output state from the consecutive-game challenge to a pseudo-BIG when the number of unit games determined by the consecutive-game challenge start game number lottery (see step S4523 in FIG. 165) have been played (see transition condition (P)).

In a consecutive-game challenge, if the result of the normal transition lottery at the end of the consecutive-game challenge (see step S4528 in FIG. 165) determines that a transition to a non-advantageous zone will occur, the main control circuit 100 will transition the ball output state from the consecutive-game challenge to a non-advantageous zone (see transition condition (Q)). In a consecutive-game challenge, if the result of the normal transition lottery at the end of the consecutive-game challenge (see step S4528 in FIG. 165) determines that a transition to consecutive-game preparation will occur, the main control circuit 100 will transition the ball output state from the consecutive-game challenge to consecutive-game preparation (see transition condition (R)).

The above describes typical transition routes for each ball output state. In this embodiment, conditions other than the above transition conditions (A) to (R) are also set as conditions for transitioning between ball output states, and when each transition condition is met, a transition occurs from one ball output state to another. This is explained in more detail below.

Note that the presentation section can be set to a state that is unfavorable to the player (a state in which the gaming value of medals, etc. is reduced), but it can also be set to a state in which some information about stopping operations that is advantageous to the player can be notified (for example, the correct batting order for a specific batting order role or the bonus symbol combination that should be achieved).

<AT state (pseudo BIG and pseudo REG)>
96(a) is a diagram showing the numerical values displayed on the instruction monitor in the pseudo BIG and pseudo REG, and FIG. 96(b) is a diagram showing the contents corresponding to the numerical values displayed on the instruction monitor.

As explained in the first embodiment, in a situation where information about a stop operation is notified to the player (AT state), the information about the stop operation is not only notified by the sub-side notification means (e.g., the main effect display unit 21) controlled by the sub-control circuit 200, but also by the instruction monitor, which serves as the main-side notification means controlled by the main control circuit 100. As in the first embodiment, the instruction monitor is configured to include an notification lamp (stop operation display unit). In a situation where information about a stop operation is notified to the player (AT state), the notification lamp displays the information about the stop operation by lighting up in a manner that uniquely corresponds to the information about the stop operation being notified.

As shown in FIG. 96(a), in the pseudo BIG and pseudo REG, if "F_213 Bell A" is determined as the internal winning role, the number "1" is displayed on the indication monitor. In the pseudo BIG and pseudo REG, if "F_213 Bell B" is determined as the internal winning role, the number "5" is displayed on the indication monitor. In the pseudo BIG and pseudo REG, if "F_213 Bell C" is determined as the internal winning role, the number "1" is displayed on the indication monitor. In the pseudo BIG and pseudo REG, if "F_213 Bell D" is determined as the internal winning role, the number "5" is displayed on the indication monitor.

In addition, in the pseudo BIG and pseudo REG, if "F_231 Bell A" is determined as the internal winning combination, the number "2" is displayed on the indication monitor. In the pseudo BIG and pseudo REG, if "F_231 Bell B" is determined as the internal winning combination, the number "6" is displayed on the indication monitor. In the pseudo BIG and pseudo REG, if "F_231 Bell C" is determined as the internal winning combination, the number "2" is displayed on the indication monitor. In the pseudo BIG and pseudo REG, if "F_231 Bell D" is determined as the internal winning combination, the number "6" is displayed on the indication monitor.

In addition, in the pseudo BIG and pseudo REG, if "F_312 Bell A" is determined as the internal winning combination, the number "3" is displayed on the indication monitor. In the pseudo BIG and pseudo REG, if "F_312 Bell B" is determined as the internal winning combination, the number "7" is displayed on the indication monitor. In the pseudo BIG and pseudo REG, if "F_312 Bell C" is determined as the internal winning combination, the number "3" is displayed on the indication monitor. In the pseudo BIG and pseudo REG, if "F_312 Bell D" is determined as the internal winning combination, the number "7" is displayed on the indication monitor.

In addition, in the pseudo BIG and pseudo REG, if "F_321 Bell A" is determined as the internal winning role, the number "4" is displayed on the indication monitor. In the pseudo BIG and pseudo REG, if "F_321 Bell B" is determined as the internal winning role, the number "8" is displayed on the indication monitor. In the pseudo BIG and pseudo REG, if "F_321 Bell C" is determined as the internal winning role, the number "4" is displayed on the indication monitor. In the pseudo BIG and pseudo REG, if "F_321 Bell D" is determined as the internal winning role, the number "8" is displayed on the indication monitor.

As shown in FIG. 96(b), a value of "1" on the instruction monitor indicates that the first stop operation is to perform a stop operation on the center reel 3C by pressing with the aim of hitting "seven," the second stop operation is to perform a stop operation on the left reel 3L, and the third stop operation is to perform a stop operation on the right reel 3R. A value of "2" on the instruction monitor indicates that the first stop operation is to perform a stop operation on the center reel 3C by pressing with the aim of hitting "seven," the second stop operation is to perform a stop operation on the right reel 3R, and the third stop operation is to perform a stop operation on the left reel 3L.

A value of "3" on the instruction monitor indicates that the first stopping operation is to perform a stopping operation on the right reel 3R with a button press aimed at "seven," the second stopping operation is to perform a stopping operation on the left reel 3L, and the third stopping operation is to perform a stopping operation on the center reel 3C. A value of "4" on the instruction monitor indicates that the first stopping operation is to perform a stopping operation on the right reel 3R with a button press aimed at "seven," the second stopping operation is to perform a stopping operation on the center reel 3C, and the third stopping operation is to perform a stopping operation on the left reel 3L.

A value of "5" on the instruction monitor indicates that the first stopping operation is to perform a stopping operation on the center reel 3C by pressing with the eye aiming for the "buoy," the second stopping operation is to perform a stopping operation on the left reel 3L, and the third stopping operation is to perform a stopping operation on the right reel 3R. A value of "6" on the instruction monitor indicates that the first stopping operation is to perform a stopping operation on the center reel 3C by pressing with the eye aiming for the "buoy," the second stopping operation is to perform a stopping operation on the right reel 3R, and the third stopping operation is to perform a stopping operation on the left reel 3L.

A value of "7" on the instruction monitor indicates that the first stopping operation is to perform a stopping operation on the right reel 3R by pressing with the eye aimed at the "buoy," the second stopping operation is to perform a stopping operation on the left reel 3L, and the third stopping operation is to perform a stopping operation on the center reel 3C. A value of "8" on the instruction monitor indicates that the first stopping operation is to perform a stopping operation on the right reel 3R by pressing with the eye aimed at the "buoy," the second stopping operation is to perform a stopping operation on the center reel 3C, and the third stopping operation is to perform a stopping operation on the left reel 3L.

As described above, in pseudo BIG and pseudo REG, when the push order bell is determined as the internal winning combination, a number between "1" and "8" is displayed on the instruction monitor. The display of a number between "1" and "8" on the instruction monitor (announcement of information on the stop operation to make the push order bell win) is also called "bell navi." By performing the stop operation in accordance with the announcement (bell navi), the player can win 15 medals (see Figure 92). As a result, pseudo BIG and pseudo REG are in a gaming state (AT state) that is advantageous to the player. Furthermore, as explained below, pseudo BIG has more bell navi operations than pseudo REG, making it a more advantageous gaming state than pseudo REG.

Here, the pseudo BIGs include a first pseudo BIG and a second pseudo BIG. When the pseudo BIG starts, it is controlled as the first pseudo BIG. In the first pseudo BIG, when any of the following (normal replies) are displayed along the active line: "C_middle reply A_01-04," "C_lower reply A_01-06," "C_CU reply_01-03," "C_upper reply B_01-06," "C_upper reply A_01-03," and "C_CD reply_01-04," the first pseudo BIG transitions to the second pseudo BIG.

There is an upper limit to the number of times you can transition from the first Pseudo BIG to the second Pseudo BIG in one Pseudo BIG, and this upper limit is three times. If the number of transitions from the first Pseudo BIG to the second Pseudo BIG (number of winning regular replies) is two or less, the second Pseudo BIG will transition to the first Pseudo BIG after a predetermined number of Bell Navis (nine times) have been performed in the second Pseudo BIG. On the other hand, if the number of transitions from the first Pseudo BIG to the second Pseudo BIG (number of winning regular replies) is three, the Pseudo BIG will end without transitioning from the second Pseudo BIG to the first Pseudo BIG after a predetermined number of Bell Navis (nine times) have been performed in the second Pseudo BIG.

Furthermore, when Bell Navigation is performed a predetermined number of times (30 times) in the first pseudo BIG, the pseudo BIG will end, regardless of the number of transitions from the first pseudo BIG to the second pseudo BIG (number of regular RIP wins).Furthermore, when Bell Navigation is performed a predetermined number of times (5 times) in the pseudo REG, the pseudo REG will end.

The remaining number of Bernavis that can be performed in the first pseudo-BIG is managed by the first Bernavi count counter, and the remaining number of Bernavis that can be performed in the second pseudo-BIG and the remaining number of Bernavis that can be performed in the pseudo-REG are managed by the second Bernavi count counter. Furthermore, the remaining number of times that can be transitioned from the first pseudo-BIG to the second pseudo-BIG is managed by the normal remaining win count counter.

When the pseudo BIG begins, the first Bernavi count counter is set to "30" and the normal RIP remaining winning count counter is set to "3". The value of the first Bernavi count counter is decremented by 1 each time a Bernavi is performed in the first pseudo BIG. The value of the normal RIP remaining winning count counter is decremented by 1 each time there is a transition from the first pseudo BIG to the second pseudo BIG (each time a normal RIP wins in the first pseudo BIG).

When transitioning from the first pseudo BIG to the second pseudo BIG, the second Bernavi count counter is set to "9". The value of the second Bernavi count counter is decremented by 1 each time a Bernavi is performed in the second pseudo BIG. Also, when the pseudo REG starts, the second Bernavi count counter is set to "5". The value of the second Bernavi count counter is decremented by 1 each time a Bernavi is performed in the pseudo REG.

From the above, the termination condition for the pseudo-BIG is that either (i) or (ii) below is met, and the termination condition for the pseudo-REG is that (iii) below is met.

(i) The value of the first Bernavi count counter is 0. (ii) The value of the normal remaining winning count counter is 0, and the value of the second Bernavi count counter is 0. (iii) The value of the second Bernavi count counter is 0. Therefore, in a situation where there are many remaining Bernavis that can be executed in the first pseudo BIG (the value of the first Bernavi count counter), if the number of times that can be transitioned from the first pseudo BIG to the second pseudo BIG reaches the upper limit, the pseudo BIG will end without being able to enjoy the full benefits of the Bernavis in the first pseudo BIG. In order to maximize the number of medals paid out in the pseudo BIG, it is necessary to transition to the final (third) second pseudo BIG after the remaining number of Bernavis that can be executed in the first pseudo BIG (the value of the first Bernavi count counter) has become as few as possible. From this perspective, in a situation where there are many remaining Bernavis that can be executed in the first pseudo-BIG (the value of the first Bernavi count counter) and the remaining number of times that it is possible to transition from the first pseudo-BIG to the second pseudo-BIG (the value of the normal RIP remaining winning count counter) is one, it is desirable to avoid transitioning from the first pseudo-BIG to the second pseudo-BIG (winning a normal RIP).

In this regard, in this embodiment, even if "F_Replay A" or "F_Replay B" is determined as the internal winning combination in the first pseudo BIG, if either "C_Missed Replay B_01-02" or "C_Missed Replay A_01-02" (a miss replay) is displayed along the active line, there will be no transition from the first pseudo BIG to the second pseudo BIG, and the value of the remaining normal replay winning counter will not be decremented. In other words, by winning a miss replay, it is possible to avoid the transition from the first pseudo BIG to the second pseudo BIG (a normal replay winning).

As shown in FIG. 96(a), when "F_Replay A" or "F_Replay B" is determined as the internal winning combination in the pseudo-BIG, the number "9" or "10" is displayed on the indicator monitor. Specifically, when "F_Replay A" is determined as the internal winning combination in the pseudo-BIG, if the value of the normal replay remaining winning count counter is 2 or greater, or if the value of the first Bernavi count counter is 6 or less, the number "9" is displayed on the indicator monitor. Similarly, when "F_Replay B" is determined as the internal winning combination in the pseudo-BIG, if the value of the normal replay remaining winning count counter is 2 or greater, or if the value of the first Bernavi count counter is 6 or less, the number "9" is displayed on the indicator monitor.

In contrast, when "F_Replay A" is determined as the internal winning combination in a pseudo-BIG, if the value of the normal replay remaining winning count counter is 1 and the value of the first Bernavi count counter is 7 or greater, the number "10" is displayed on the indicator monitor. Similarly, when "F_Replay B" is determined as the internal winning combination in a pseudo-BIG, if the value of the normal replay remaining winning count counter is 1 and the value of the first Bernavi count counter is 7 or greater, the number "10" is displayed on the indicator monitor.

As shown in FIG. 96(b), the number "9" on the instruction monitor indicates that a stop operation should be performed to win a normal replay, and the number "10" on the instruction monitor indicates that a stop operation should be performed to win a miss replay. When the value of the remaining normal replay win counter is 1 and the value of the first Bernavi count counter is 7 or greater, and "F_Replay A" or "F_Replay B" is determined as the internal winning combination, the player can avoid transitioning from the first pseudo-BIG to the second pseudo-BIG (winning a normal replay) by performing a stop operation to win a miss replay in accordance with the notification. This prevents the pseudo-BIG from ending when there are many remaining Bernavis (the value of the first Bernavi count counter) that can be executed in the first pseudo-BIG (7 or more), allowing the player to continue the pseudo-BIG while enjoying the benefits of the Bernavis in the first pseudo-BIG.

As mentioned above, when the internal winning combination is "F_Replay A," it is permitted to display "C_Missed Replay A_01-02" on the active line as a "Missed Replay," and when the internal winning combination is "F_Replay B," it is permitted to display "C_Missed Replay B_01-02" on the active line as a "Missed Replay" in addition to "C_Missed Replay A_01-02" (see Figure 89).

In order for "C_Missed Replay A_01-02" to appear on an active line, the left reel 3L must be stopped when the symbol ("bar") at symbol position "6" is displayed in the middle area (the "bar" at symbol position "6" must be pressed perfectly). Because "C_Missed Replay A_01-02" are permitted to appear on an active line whether the internal winning combination is "F_Replay A" or "F_Replay B," successfully pressing the "bar" will result in "C_Missed Replay A_01-02" winning (avoiding a regular replay winning).

In contrast, to display "C_Missed Replay B_01-02" on an active line, the left reel 3L must be stopped when one of the symbols (all "buoys") between symbol positions "13" and "15" is displayed in the middle area (the "buoy" symbol between symbol positions "13" and "15" must be pressed with the right eye). When the internal winning combination is "F_Replay B," "C_Missed Replay B_01-02" is permitted to be displayed on an active line, and successfully pressing the "buoy" will result in "C_Missed Replay B_01-02" winning (avoiding a regular replay winning). On the other hand, if the internal winning combination is "F_Replay A," "C_Missed Replay B_01-02" is not permitted to appear on the active line, so even if you press the "Voy" button, "C_Missed Replay B_01-02" will not win, and in this case, a regular replay will win.

When the number "10" is displayed on the instruction monitor, the player can recognize that either "F_Replay A" or "F_Replay B" has been determined as the internal winning combination. However, the number displayed on the instruction monitor is the same ("10") when the internal winning combination is "F_Replay A" and when the internal winning combination is "F_Replay B," and the content of the effect displayed on the main effect display unit 21 is also the same (for example, the display of a text image such as "Miss Challenge"). Therefore, the player cannot recognize whether the internal winning combination is "F_Replay A" or "F_Replay B."

As long as you can successfully press the "bar" button, you can win a missed replay regardless of whether the internal winning combination is "F_Replay A" or "F_Replay B," so it doesn't matter whether the internal winning combination is "F_Replay A" or "F_Replay B." However, pressing the bar button successfully generally requires advanced skill and is difficult to achieve.

The timing of the stopping operation to successfully press the "buoy" button (the range of symbols to aim for) is wider than the timing of the stopping operation to successfully press the "bar" button (the range of symbols to aim for), so pressing the "buoy" button at the right time can be said to be easier than pressing the "bar" button at the right time. However, when pressing the "buoy" button at the right time in a situation where it is not possible to determine whether the internal winning combination is "F_Replay A" or "F_Replay B," if the internal winning combination is "F_Replay B," it is possible to win a miss replay, but if the internal winning combination is "F_Replay A," it is not possible to win a miss replay.

The ratio of the probability that "F_Replay A" will be determined as the internal winning combination to the probability that "F_Replay B" will be determined as the internal winning combination is approximately 1:3 (see Figures 90 and 91). Therefore, when pressing the "V" button in a situation where it is not possible to determine whether the internal winning combination is "F_Replay A" or "F_Replay B," the probability of winning a miss (assuming accurate pressing) is approximately 75%. In contrast, when pressing the "Bar" button precisely, the probability of winning a miss (assuming accurate pressing) is 100%. As a result, players play the first pseudo-BIG by choosing between pressing the "Bar" button precisely, which is highly difficult but can definitely result in a miss if successful, and pressing the "V" button precisely, which is less difficult but may not result in a miss even with accurate operation.

As shown in Figures 96(a) and (b), in the pseudo BIG and pseudo REG, if any of "F_Common Bell A" and "F_Common Bell B" (collectively referred to as "F_Common Bell" in the figures), "F_Parallel Watermelon," and "F_Diagonal Watermelon" is determined as the internal winning combination, the number "11" is displayed on the instruction monitor. The number "11" on the instruction monitor notifies that a stopping operation on a reel other than the left reel 3L (the center reel 3C or the right reel 3R) will be performed as the first stopping operation. The configuration of the instruction monitor can be designed as appropriate; for example, the numbers "1" to "8" on the instruction monitor may be displayed only in the 3BB flag interval state, and the numbers "9" to "11" on the instruction monitor may be displayed regardless of whether the 3BB flag interval state is present.

<Correspondence between internal winning combinations, sub-flags, and payout flags>
FIG. 97 is a diagram showing the correspondence between the internal winning combination, the sub-flag, and the payout flag.

As explained in the first embodiment, the sub-flag is information used to group internal winning roles that play similar roles (whether or not they are lottery eligible roles and their winning probability, etc.) in various lotteries related to gameplay (various processes related to advantageous zones) by the main control circuit 100, and assign the same information to make the group identifiable.

Figure 97 shows the correspondence between internal winning roles and sub-flags. Specifically, the sub-flag number "0" ("loser") is set for the internal winning roles "F_213 Bell A," "F_213 Bell B," "F_213 Bell C," "F_213 Bell D," "F_231 Bell A," "F_231 Bell B," "F_231 Bell C," "F_231 Bell D," "F_312 Bell A," "F_312 Bell B," "F_312 Bell C," "F_312 Bell D," "F_321 Bell A," "F_321 Bell B," "F_321 Bell C," "F_321 Bell D," "F_1-piece role B," "F_common 1-piece role," and "F_common 15-piece role."

The sub-flag number "1" ("Replay") is set for the internal winning combinations "F_Replay A" and "F_Replay B." The sub-flag number "2" ("Common Bell") is set for the internal winning combinations "F_Common Bell A" and "F_Common Bell B." The sub-flag number "3" ("Parallel Watermelon") is set for the internal winning combination "F_Diagonal Watermelon." The sub-flag number "4" ("Diagonal Watermelon") is set for the internal winning combination "F_Diagonal Watermelon."

Sub-flag number "5" ("Cherry") is set for the internal winning combination "F_Cherry." Sub-flag number "6" ("Reach Eye") is set for the internal winning combinations "F_Reach Eye A," "F_Reach Eye B," and "F_Reach Eye C." Sub-flag number "7" ("BB Confirmed A") is set for the internal winning combination "F_BB Confirmed B." Sub-flag number "8" ("BB Confirmed B") is set for the internal winning combination "F_1 Piece A." Sub-flag number "9" ("1 Piece") is set for the internal winning combination "Loss." Sub-flag number "10" ("Loss (Single BB)") is set for the internal winning combination "Loss."

As a result, if the internal winning combination is any of "F_213 Bell A", "F_213 Bell B", "F_213 Bell C", "F_213 Bell D", "F_231 Bell A", "F_231 Bell B", "F_231 Bell C", "F_231 Bell D", "F_312 Bell A", "F_312 Bell B", "F_312 Bell C", "F_312 Bell D", "F_321 Bell A", "F_321 Bell B", "F_321 Bell C", "F_321 Bell D", "F_1 Piece B", "F_Common 1 Piece" and "F_Common 15 Piece" then the sub-flag will be determined to be "miss".

If the internal winning combination is either "F_Replay A" or "F_Replay B", the sub-flag "Replay" is determined. If the internal winning combination is either "F_Common Bell A" or "F_Common Bell B", the sub-flag "Common Bell" is determined. If the internal winning combination is "F_Parallel Watermelon", the sub-flag "Parallel Watermelon" is determined. If the internal winning combination is "F_Diagonal Watermelon", the sub-flag "Diagonal Watermelon" is determined.

If the internal winning combination is "F_Cherry", the sub-flag "Cherry" is determined. If the internal winning combination is any of "F_Reach Eye A", "F_Reach Eye B", or "F_Reach Eye C", the sub-flag "Reach Eye" is determined. If the internal winning combination is "F_BB Confirmed A", the sub-flag "BB Confirmed A" is determined. If the internal winning combination is "F_BB Confirmed B", the sub-flag "BB Confirmed B" is determined. If the internal winning combination is "F_1 Piece A", the sub-flag "1 Piece" is determined. If the internal winning combination is "Miss", the sub-flag "Miss (Single BB)" is determined.

The above sub-flags are determined in the main control circuit 100 by the sub-flag setting process described in the first embodiment (see step S73 in Figure 26). Information indicating the determined sub-flag is then basically included in the start command data (see step S7 in Figure 23) and transmitted to the sub-control circuit 200. This allows the sub-control circuit 200 to recognize the determined sub-flag and perform an effect corresponding to that sub-flag.

However, in this embodiment, when the system is in a non-AT state and no stop operation information is displayed on the instruction monitor, if the internal winning combination is any of "F_213 Bell A," "F_213 Bell B," "F_213 Bell C," "F_213 Bell D," "F_231 Bell A," "F_231 Bell B," "F_231 Bell C," "F_231 Bell D," "F_312 Bell A," "F_312 Bell B," "F_312 Bell C," "F_312 Bell D," "F_321 Bell A," "F_321 Bell B," "F_321 Bell C," and "F_321 Bell D" (push order bells), information indicating the sub-flag is not sent to the sub-control circuit 200.

These push order bells constitute biased bells where the push order is incorrect if the first stop operation is performed on the left reel 3L, but the push order can be correct if the first stop operation is performed on the middle reel 3C or right reel 3R. When such a biased bell is determined as the internal winning combination, information indicating the sub-flag is not sent to the sub-control circuit 200, thereby preventing a stop operation (irregular push) aimed at winning the biased bell in a non-AT state. However, it is also possible to configure the system so that information indicating the sub-flag is sent to the sub-control circuit 200 even when the biased bell is determined as the internal winning combination.

The configuration of the biased bell is not particularly limited, and it is not necessary for there to be any internal winning combination that could result in the correct press order when a stop operation is performed on the left reel 3L as the first stop operation (see Figures 90 and 91). Alternatively, there may be an internal winning combination that could result in the correct press order when a stop operation is performed on the left reel 3L as the first stop operation, but the probability of this internal winning combination being determined may be lower than the probability of an internal winning combination that could result in the correct press order when a stop operation is performed on the center reel 3C or right reel 3R as the first stop operation.

Figure 97 also shows the correspondence between internal winning combinations and payout flags. There are six types of correspondence between internal winning combinations and payout flags (payout flag group 1, payout flag group 2, payout flag group 3, payout flag group 4, payout flag group 5, and payout flag group 6). The payout flag in one of these payout flag groups is determined depending on the game situation.

Specifically, if the internal winning combination is a "miss," the ball output flag in ball output flag group 1 is determined to be an "exclusion combination," the ball output flag in ball output flag group 2 is determined to be a "reach mark BB," the ball output flag in ball output flag group 3 is determined to be a "reach mark BB," the ball output flag in ball output flag group 4 is determined to be a "non-fall combination," the ball output flag in ball output flag group 5 is determined to be "other," and the ball output flag in ball output flag group 6 is determined to be a "reach mark BB."

If the internal winning combination is either "F_Replay A" or "F_Replay B," the ball output flag in ball output flag group 1 is set to "Exclusion combination," the ball output flag in ball output flag group 2 is set to "Other," the ball output flag in ball output flag group 3 is set to "Rep Bell," the ball output flag in ball output flag group 4 is set to "Non-fall combination," the ball output flag in ball output flag group 5 is set to "Other," and the ball output flag in ball output flag group 6 is set to "Other."

If the internal winning combination is any of "F_213 Bell A", "F_213 Bell B", "F_213 Bell C", "F_213 Bell D", "F_231 Bell A", "F_231 Bell B", "F_231 Bell C", "F_231 Bell D", "F_312 Bell A", "F_312 Bell B", "F_312 Bell C", "F_312 Bell D", "F_321 Bell A", "F_321 Bell B", "F_321 Bell C", and "F_321 Bell D", "Transition role" is determined as the ball dispensing flag in ball dispensing flag group 1, "Other" is determined as the ball dispensing flag in ball dispensing flag group 2, "Other" is determined as the ball dispensing flag in ball dispensing flag group 3, "Other" is determined as the ball dispensing flag in ball dispensing flag group 4, "Other" is determined as the ball dispensing flag in ball dispensing flag group 5, and "Other" is determined as the ball dispensing flag in ball dispensing flag group 6.

If the internal winning role is either "F_Common Bell A" or "F_Common Bell B", "Transition Role" is determined as the ball output flag in ball output flag group 1, "Other" is determined as the ball output flag in ball output flag group 2, "Rip Bell" is determined as the ball output flag in ball output flag group 3, "Non-Fall Role" is determined as the ball output flag in ball output flag group 4, "Other" is determined as the ball output flag in ball output flag group 5, and "Other" is determined as the ball output flag in ball output flag group 6.

If the internal winning role is "F_Parallel Watermelon", "Transition Role" is determined as the ball output flag in ball output flag group 1, "Weak Rare Role" is determined as the ball output flag in ball output flag group 2, "Weak Rare Role" is determined as the ball output flag in ball output flag group 3, "Non-Falling Role" is determined as the ball output flag in ball output flag group 4, "Parallel Watermelon" is determined as the ball output flag in ball output flag group 5, and "Other" is determined as the ball output flag in ball output flag group 6.

If the internal winning role is "F_Diagonal Watermelon," "Transition Role" is determined as the ball output flag in ball output flag group 1, "Diagonal Watermelon" is determined as the ball output flag in ball output flag group 2, "Diagonal Watermelon" is determined as the ball output flag in ball output flag group 3, "Non-Fall Role" is determined as the ball output flag in ball output flag group 4, "Diagonal Watermelon" is determined as the ball output flag in ball output flag group 5, and "Other" is determined as the ball output flag in ball output flag group 6.

If the internal winning role is "F_Cherry", "Transition Role" is determined as the ball output flag in ball output flag group 1, "Weak Rare Role" is determined as the ball output flag in ball output flag group 2, "Weak Rare Role" is determined as the ball output flag in ball output flag group 3, "Non-Falling Role" is determined as the ball output flag in ball output flag group 4, "Cherry" is determined as the ball output flag in ball output flag group 5, and "Other" is determined as the ball output flag in ball output flag group 6.

If the internal winning combination is any of "F_Reach Eyes Combination A", "F_Reach Eyes Combination B", and "F_Reach Eyes Combination C", "Transitional Combination" is determined as the ball output flag in ball output flag group 1, "Reach Eyes" is determined as the ball output flag in ball output flag group 2, "Reach Eyes" or "Reach Eyes BB" is determined as the ball output flag in ball output flag group 3, "Non-Falling Combination" is determined as the ball output flag in ball output flag group 4, "Other" is determined as the ball output flag in ball output flag group 5, and "Reach Eyes" is determined as the ball output flag in ball output flag group 6.

If the internal winning combination is either "F_BB Confirmed Combination A" or "F_BB Confirmed Combination B," the ball output flag in ball output flag group 1 is determined to be "Transitional Combination," the ball output flag in ball output flag group 2 is determined to be "Reach Eye BB," the ball output flag in ball output flag group 3 is determined to be "Reach Eye" or "Reach Eye BB," the ball output flag in ball output flag group 4 is determined to be "Non-Falling Combination," the ball output flag in ball output flag group 5 is determined to be "Other," and the ball output flag in ball output flag group 6 is determined to be "Reach Eye BB."

If the internal winning role is either "F_1-piece role A" or "F_1-piece role B", "Transition role" is determined as the ball output flag in ball output flag group 1, "Other" is determined as the ball output flag in ball output flag group 2, "Other" is determined as the ball output flag in ball output flag group 3, "Other" is determined as the ball output flag in ball output flag group 4, "Other" is determined as the ball output flag in ball output flag group 5, and "1-piece role" is determined as the ball output flag in ball output flag group 6.

If the internal winning role is either "F_Common 1-piece role" or "F_Common 15-piece role", "Exclusion role" is determined as the ball output flag in ball output flag group 1, "Other" is determined as the ball output flag in ball output flag group 2, "Other" is determined as the ball output flag in ball output flag group 3, "Other" is determined as the ball output flag in ball output flag group 4, "Other" is determined as the ball output flag in ball output flag group 5, and "Other" is determined as the ball output flag in ball output flag group 6.

The payout flag determined in this manner will be used in the various lotteries described below.

<Processing at the start of play for non-advantageous zones>
Fig. 98 is a flowchart showing the processing at the start of a game for a non-advantageous zone performed in the main control circuit. Fig. 99(a) is a diagram showing a lottery table for transition to an advantageous zone. Fig. 99(b) is a diagram showing a lottery table for transition to an advantageous zone.

The game start processing for non-advantageous zones shown in Figure 98 is processing performed by the main control circuit 100 in the processing of step S6 (game start state control processing) of Figure 23 (main processing) when the current game zone is a non-advantageous zone (see Figure 93) (for example, when the judgment result of step S85 of Figure 27 is "YES"). The main CPU 101 can recognize that the current game zone is a non-advantageous zone by referring to the ball output state flag storage area of the main RAM 103 (see Figure 20).

In the game start processing for non-advantageous zones, the main CPU 101 first executes advantageous zone transition lottery processing (step S4001). In this processing, the main CPU 101 refers to the advantageous zone transition lottery table (see FIG. 99(a)) and performs a lottery based on the payout flags in payout flag group 1 (see FIG. 97) and random number values, thereby determining whether the result of the advantageous zone transition lottery will be a "no win" or a "win."

In the advantageous zone transition lottery table shown in Figure 99 (a), lottery values corresponding to the results of the advantageous zone transition lottery ("non-winning" and "winning") are specified for each payout flag in payout flag group 1 ("exclusion role" and "transition role"). The probability of each outcome of the advantageous zone transition lottery being determined can be expressed as "lottery value specified for that result / number of all random number values that can be drawn (random number numerator: 256)". As a result, if the payout flag in payout flag group 1 is "exclusion role", there is a 0/256 probability of winning the advantageous zone transition lottery, and if the payout flag in payout flag group 1 is "transition role", there is a 256/256 probability of winning the advantageous zone transition lottery.

After executing the processing of step S4001, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the advantageous zone transition lottery has been won (step S4002). If it determines that the advantageous zone transition lottery has not been won, the main CPU 101 terminates this subroutine.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the advantageous zone transition lottery has been won, the main CPU 101 executes the advantageous zone transition lottery process (step S4003). In this process, the main CPU 101 refers to the advantageous zone transition lottery table (see FIG. 99(b)) and performs a lottery based on the payout flags in payout flag group 2 (see FIG. 97) and random number values, thereby determining the result of the advantageous zone transition lottery as either "Preparation for consecutive wins," "Consecutive wins challenge," or "Definite consecutive wins challenge."

In the lottery table for transitioning to the favorable zone shown in Figure 99 (b), lottery values corresponding to the results of the lottery for transitioning to the favorable zone ("Preparation for consecutive wins," "Consecutive wins challenge," and "Confirmed consecutive wins challenge") are specified for each payout flag in payout flag group 2 ("Other," "Weak rare combination," "Diagonal watermelon," "Reach mark," and "Reach mark BB"). The probability of each result of the lottery for transitioning to the favorable zone being determined can be expressed as "lottery value specified for that result / number of all random number values that can be drawn (random number denominator: 256)."

For example, if the payout flag in payout flag group 2 is "Other," the result of the lottery when moving to the advantageous zone will determine "Preparation for consecutive wins" with a probability of 256/256; if the payout flag in payout flag group 2 is "Diagonal Watermelon," the result of the lottery when moving to the advantageous zone will determine "Consecutive Wins Challenge" with a probability of 128/256, and "Definite Consecutive Wins Challenge" with a probability of 128/256.

If "preparation for consecutive games" is determined as a result of the lottery at the time of transition to the advantageous zone, the main CPU 101 sets the consecutive game preparation transition flag to ON. The consecutive game preparation transition flag is a flag indicating that it is time to start preparation for consecutive games. The main CPU 101 updates the ball payout status flag storage area (see FIG. 20) in the game start state control process (see step S6 in FIG. 23) for the unit game following the unit game in which the consecutive game preparation transition flag was set to ON. This causes a transition to preparation for consecutive games (see transition condition (A) in FIGS. 94 and 95).

Furthermore, if a "Consecutive Winning Challenge" or a "Definite Consecutive Winning Challenge" is determined as the result of the lottery when transitioning to the advantageous zone (if the Consecutive Winning Challenge is won), the main CPU 101 sets the Consecutive Winning Challenge transition flag to ON. The Consecutive Winning Challenge transition flag is a flag that indicates the timing to start the Consecutive Winning Challenge. The main CPU 101 updates the ball output status flag storage area (see FIG. 20) in the game start state control process (see step S6 in FIG. 23) for the unit game following the unit game in which the Consecutive Winning Challenge transition flag was set to ON. This causes a transition to the Consecutive Winning Challenge (see transition condition (B) in FIGS. 94 and 95). Furthermore, if a "Definite Consecutive Winning Challenge" is determined as the result of the lottery when transitioning to the advantageous zone, the main CPU 101 sets the Definite Consecutive Winning Challenge flag to ON. The Definite Consecutive Winning Challenge flag is referenced in the Consecutive Winning Challenge, and the Consecutive Winning Challenge is controlled advantageously.

After executing step S4003, the main CPU 101 terminates this subroutine.

In this embodiment, when the payout flag in payout flag group 1 is a "transition role" (when a transition role is established), the advantageous zone transition lottery is always a winning lottery; however, the coefficient for non-winning roles may be set to 1 or greater, so that it does not necessarily result in a winning lottery. Furthermore, it is possible to generate effects suggesting the establishment of a transition role or an exclusion role in a non-advantageous zone, thereby heightening the sense of anticipation as to whether or not a transition to an advantageous zone will occur. It is also possible to generate effects suggesting or announcing the establishment of a winning role with a high expectation of transitioning to a highly advantageous state, such as a consecutive win challenge or a confirmed consecutive win challenge (for example, a winning role corresponding to a payout flag other than "Other" shown in Figure 99(b) (weak rare role, diagonal watermelon, reach symbol, reach symbol BB)).

<Start of game processing for consecutive win preparation>
Fig. 100 is a flowchart showing the consecutive win preparation game start processing carried out in the main control circuit. Fig. 101(a) is a diagram showing the consecutive win preparation mode lottery table (1). Fig. 101(b) is a diagram showing the consecutive win preparation mode lottery table (2). Fig. 102 is a diagram showing the consecutive win challenge transition lottery table. Fig. 103(a) is a diagram showing the consecutive win challenge transition confirmation lottery table. Fig. 103(b) is a diagram showing the consecutive win preparation fall lottery table.

The game start processing for consecutive win preparation shown in Figure 100 is processing performed by the main control circuit 100 in the processing of step S6 (game start state control processing) of Figure 23 (main processing) when the current ball output state is consecutive win preparation (see Figure 93) (for example, when the judgment result of step S85 of Figure 27 is "NO"). The main CPU 101 can recognize the current ball output state by referring to the ball output state flag storage area of the main RAM 103 (see Figure 20).

In the game start processing for consecutive win preparation, the main CPU 101 first determines whether it is the start time of consecutive win preparation (step S4021). As described above, the transition to consecutive win preparation occurs in the game start state control processing (see step S6 of FIG. 23) for the unit game following the unit game in which the consecutive win preparation transition flag (see step S4003 of FIG. 98) is set to ON. In the game start state control processing for the unit game that transitions to consecutive win preparation, the payout state flag storage area (see FIG. 20) is updated to transition to consecutive win preparation, and then the game start processing for consecutive win preparation shown in FIG. 100 is performed. In the processing of step S4021, the main CPU 101 determines that it is the start time of consecutive win preparation if the current unit game has transitioned to consecutive win preparation (if the current unit game is the first game in consecutive win preparation).

If it is determined that preparation for consecutive wins has begun, the main CPU 101 determines whether the current game state is a 3BB flag interval state (see FIG. 81) (step S4022). The main CPU 101 can recognize that the current game state is a 3BB flag interval state by referencing the carryover role storage area (see FIG. 18) in the main RAM 103.

If the main CPU 101 determines that the current game state is the 3BB flag interval state, it sets the consecutive game preparation guarantee game number counter to "5" (step S4023). The value of the consecutive game preparation guarantee game number counter indicates the remaining number of unit games that guarantee staying in consecutive game preparation, and is stored in the main RAM 103. If the value of the consecutive game preparation guarantee game number counter is greater than 0, it is decremented by 1 each time a unit game is played in consecutive game preparation. Although not shown, this decrement is performed in the process of step S15 (game end state control process) in Figure 23 (main process).

Next, the main CPU 101 executes consecutive game preparation mode lottery processing (1) (step S4024). In this processing, the main CPU 101 refers to the consecutive game preparation mode lottery table (1) (see FIG. 101(a)) and performs a lottery based on a random number value to determine either "Mode 1" or "Mode 2" as the result of the consecutive game preparation mode lottery (1) (consecutive game preparation mode).

In the consecutive-game preparation mode lottery table (1) shown in FIG. 101(a), lottery values corresponding to the results ("Mode 1" and "Mode 2") of the consecutive-game preparation mode lottery (1) are specified for each setting value ("Setting 1," "Setting 2," "Setting 3," "Setting 4," "Setting 5," and "Setting 6"). The probability of each result of the consecutive-game preparation mode lottery (1) being determined can be expressed as "lottery value specified for that result / number of all random number values that can be drawn (random number denominator: 256)." As a result, regardless of the setting value, "Mode 2" is determined as the result (consecutive-game preparation mode) of the consecutive-game preparation mode lottery (1) with a probability of 256/256.

If it is determined in step S4022 that the current game state is not the 3BB flag interval state, the main CPU 101 sets the consecutive game preparation guaranteed game number counter to "0" (step S4025). Next, the main CPU 101 executes consecutive game preparation mode lottery processing (2) (step S4026). In this processing, the main CPU 101 refers to the consecutive game preparation mode lottery table (2) (see FIG. 101(b)) and performs a lottery based on a random number value to determine either "Mode 1" or "Mode 2" as the result of the consecutive game preparation mode lottery (2) (consecutive game preparation mode).

In the consecutive-game preparation mode lottery table (2) shown in Figure 101 (b), lottery values corresponding to the results of the consecutive-game preparation mode lottery (2) ("Mode 1" and "Mode 2") are specified for each setting value ("Setting 1," "Setting 2," "Setting 3," "Setting 4," "Setting 5," and "Setting 6"). The probability of each result of the consecutive-game preparation mode lottery (2) being determined can be expressed as "lottery value specified for that result / number of all random number values that can be drawn (random number denominator: 256)." As a result, regardless of the setting value, "Mode 1" is determined as the result of the consecutive-game preparation mode lottery (2) (consecutive-game preparation mode) with a probability of 256/256.

If it is determined in step S4021 that it is not the start time for preparation for consecutive games, or after executing the processing of step S4024 or step S4026, the main CPU 101 executes a consecutive game challenge transition lottery process (step S4027). In this process, the main CPU 101 refers to the consecutive game challenge transition lottery table (see FIG. 102) and performs a lottery based on the payout flags (see FIG. 97) in payout flag group 3 and the random number value, thereby determining whether the result of the consecutive game challenge transition lottery will be a "no win" or a "win."

The consecutive win challenge transition lottery table shown in Figure 102 is provided for each of the ball output flags in ball output flag group 3 ("Other," "Rip Bell," "Weak Rare Role," "Diagonal Watermelon," and "Reach Eye or Reach Eye BB"). If the ball output flag in ball output flag group 3 is "Other", the consecutive win challenge transition lottery table shown in FIG. 102(a) is referenced, if the ball output flag in ball output flag group 3 is "Rip Bell", the consecutive win challenge transition lottery table shown in FIG. 102(b) is referenced, if the ball output flag in ball output flag group 3 is "Weak Rare Role", the consecutive win challenge transition lottery table shown in FIG. 102(c) is referenced, if the ball output flag in ball output flag group 3 is "Diagonal Watermelon", the consecutive win challenge transition lottery table shown in FIG. 102(d) is referenced, and if the ball output flag in ball output flag group 3 is "Reach Eye" or "Reach Eye BB", the consecutive win challenge transition lottery table shown in FIG. 102(e) is referenced.

In each consecutive-game challenge transition lottery table, a lottery value corresponding to the outcome of the consecutive-game challenge transition lottery ("non-winning" and "winning") is specified for each consecutive-game preparation mode ("Mode 1" and "Mode 2"). The probability of each outcome of the consecutive-game challenge transition lottery being determined can be expressed as "the lottery value specified for that outcome / the number of all random number values that can be drawn (random number denominator: 256)."

For example, if the payout flag in payout flag group 3 is "Rip Bell" and the consecutive win preparation mode determined in consecutive win preparation mode lottery process (1) (see step S4024) or consecutive win preparation mode lottery process (2) (see step S4026) is "Mode 2," the consecutive win challenge transition lottery will be won with a probability of 32/256. Also, if the consecutive win preparation mode determined in consecutive win preparation mode lottery process (1) (see step S4024) or consecutive win preparation mode lottery process (2) (see step S4026) is "Mode 1," the consecutive win challenge transition lottery will not be won regardless of the payout flag in payout flag group 3.

If the player wins the consecutive win challenge transition lottery (wins the consecutive win challenge), the main CPU 101 sets the consecutive win challenge transition flag to ON. As described above, the consecutive win challenge transition flag is a flag that indicates the timing to start the consecutive win challenge. The main CPU 101 updates the ball output state flag storage area (see FIG. 20) in the game start state control process (see step S6 in FIG. 23) for the unit game following the unit game in which the consecutive win challenge transition flag was set to ON. This causes a transition to the consecutive win challenge (see transition condition (D) in FIGS. 94 and 95). As will be described later, the consecutive win challenge is a ball output state that allows for a transition to a pseudo-BIG or promotion chance with a relatively high probability, and the consecutive win preparation is a ball output state that allows for a transition to such a consecutive win challenge.

After executing the processing of step S4027, the main CPU 101 determines whether the consecutive-game challenge transition lottery has been won (step S4028). If it determines that the consecutive-game challenge transition lottery has been won, the main CPU 101 executes consecutive-game challenge transition determination lottery processing (step S4029). In this processing, the main CPU 101 refers to the consecutive-game challenge transition determination lottery table (see FIG. 103(a)) and performs a lottery based on the payout flags in payout flag group 3 (see FIG. 97) and the random number value, thereby determining either a "non-win" or a "win" as the result of the consecutive-game challenge transition determination lottery.

In the lottery table for determining whether to transition to the consecutive win challenge shown in Figure 103(a), a lottery value corresponding to the outcome of the lottery for determining whether to transition to the consecutive win challenge ("not winning" and "winning") is specified for each payout flag in payout flag group 3 ("Other," "Rip Bell," "Weak Rare Symbol," "Diagonal Watermelon," and "Reach Eye or Reach Eye BB"). The probability of each outcome of the lottery for determining whether to transition to the consecutive win challenge can be expressed as "lottery value specified for that result / number of all random number values that can be drawn (random number denominator: 256)."

For example, if the payout flag in payout flag group 3 is "Diagonal Watermelon," there is a 128/256 probability of winning the confirmed lottery at the time of transition to the consecutive win challenge. However, if the payout flag in payout flag group 3 is "Reach Eye" or "Reach Eye BB," the confirmed lottery at the time of transition to the consecutive win challenge will always be a loss. If the confirmed lottery at the time of transition to the consecutive win challenge is won, the main CPU 101 sets the confirmed consecutive win challenge flag to ON. As described above, the confirmed consecutive win challenge flag is referenced in the consecutive win challenge, and the consecutive win challenge is controlled advantageously. It is also possible to ensure that the confirmed lottery at the time of transition to the consecutive win challenge is won if the value of the consecutive win challenge winning count counter (see FIG. 171) is a predetermined value (e.g., 3) or greater.

If it is determined in step S4028 that the consecutive-game challenge transition lottery has not been won, or after executing the processing of step S4029, the main CPU 101 determines whether the value of the consecutive-game preparation guarantee number of plays counter (see steps S4023 and S4025) is "0" (step S4030). If it is determined that the value of the consecutive-game preparation guarantee number of plays counter is "0," the main CPU 101 executes consecutive-game preparation rollover lottery processing (step S4031). In this processing, the main CPU 101 refers to the consecutive-game preparation rollover lottery table (see FIG. 103(b)) and performs a lottery based on the payout flag (see FIG. 97) in payout flag group 4 and the random number value, thereby determining either a "no win" or a "win" as the result of the consecutive-game preparation rollover lottery.

In the consecutive win preparation drop lottery table shown in Figure 103 (b), lottery values corresponding to the results of the consecutive win preparation drop lottery ("non-winning" and "winning") are specified for each payout flag in payout flag group 4 ("Other" and "Non-dropping role"). The probability of each result of the consecutive win preparation drop lottery can be expressed as "lottery value specified for that result / number of all random number values that can be drawn (random number denominator: 256)". As a result, if the payout flag in payout flag group 4 is "Other," there is a 192/256 probability of winning the consecutive win preparation drop lottery, and if the payout flag in payout flag group 4 is "Non-dropping role," the consecutive win preparation drop lottery will always be a non-winning one.

If the consecutive win preparation drop lottery is won, the main CPU 101 sets the normal stage transition flag to ON. The normal stage transition flag is a flag that indicates that it is time to start the normal stage. The main CPU 101 updates the payout status flag storage area (see FIG. 20) in the game start status control process (see step S6 in FIG. 23) for the unit game following the unit game in which the normal stage transition flag was set to ON. This causes a transition to the normal stage (see transition condition (C) in FIGS. 94 and 95).

If it is determined in step S4030 that the value of the consecutive game preparation guaranteed number of games counter is not "0", or after executing the processing of step S4031, the main CPU 101 terminates this subroutine.

<Normal stage game start processing>
FIG. 104 is a flowchart showing the processing carried out in the main control circuit at the start of a normal stage game.

The game start processing for the normal stage shown in Figure 104 is processing performed by the main control circuit 100 in the processing of step S6 (game start state control processing) of Figure 23 (main processing) when the current ball output state is the normal stage (see Figure 93) (for example, when the judgment result of step S85 of Figure 27 is "NO"). The main CPU 101 can recognize the current ball output state by referring to the ball output state flag storage area of the main RAM 103 (see Figure 20).

In the game start processing for the normal stage, the main CPU 101 first determines whether it is the start of the normal stage (step S4041). As described above, the transition to the normal stage occurs during the game start state control processing (see step S6 in FIG. 23) for the unit game following the unit game in which the normal stage transition flag (see step S4031 in FIG. 100) is set to on. In the game start state control processing for a unit game that transitions to the normal stage, the payout state flag storage area (see FIG. 20) is updated to transition to the normal stage, and then the game start processing for the normal stage shown in FIG. 104 is performed. In the processing of step S4041, the main CPU 101 determines that it is the start of the normal stage if the current unit game has transitioned to the normal stage (if the current unit game is the first game of the normal stage).

If it is determined that it is the start of a normal stage, the main CPU 101 executes normal stage start processing (step S4042). Normal stage start processing will be described later using Figure 105.

If it is determined in step S4041 that the normal stage has not yet begun, or after executing the processing of step S4042, the main CPU 101 executes the normal ball dispensing state common processing (step S4043). The normal ball dispensing state common processing will be explained later using FIG. 113.

After executing the processing of step S4043, the main CPU 101 executes processing dedicated to the normal stage (step S4044). The processing dedicated to the normal stage will be described later using Figure 108.

After executing step S4044, the main CPU 101 terminates this subroutine.

<Normal stage start processing>
Fig. 105 is a flowchart showing the processing at the start of the normal stage performed in the main control circuit. Fig. 106(a) is a diagram showing a normal transition mode lottery table. Fig. 106(b) is a diagram showing a normal transition ceiling lottery table. Fig. 107 is a diagram showing a point mode lottery table.

The normal stage start processing shown in Figure 105 is processing performed by the main control circuit 100 in step S4042 of Figure 104 (normal stage game start processing).

In the normal stage start processing, the main CPU 101 first executes normal transition mode lottery processing (step S4061). In this processing, the main CPU 101 references the normal transition mode lottery table (see FIG. 106(a)) and performs a lottery based on a random number value to determine the result of the normal transition mode lottery (normal mode) as one of "Mode 1," "Mode 2," "Mode 3," "Mode 4," "Mode 5," "Mode 6," "Mode 7," or "Mode 8."

In the normal transition mode lottery table shown in Figure 106(a), lottery values corresponding to the results of the normal transition mode lottery ("Mode 1", "Mode 2", "Mode 3", "Mode 4", "Mode 5", "Mode 6", "Mode 7", and "Mode 8") are specified for each setting value ("Setting 1", "Setting 2", "Setting 3", "Setting 4", "Setting 5", and "Setting 6"). The probability of each result of the normal transition mode lottery being determined can be expressed as "lottery value specified for that result / number of all random number values that can be drawn (random denominator: 256)".

For example, when the setting value is setting 1, the results of the normal transition mode lottery (normal mode) are "Mode 1" with a probability of 98/256, "Mode 2" with a probability of 98/256, "Mode 3" with a probability of 24/256, "Mode 4" with a probability of 12/256, "Mode 5" with a probability of 12/256, "Mode 6" with a probability of 1/256, "Mode 7" with a probability of 3/256, and "Mode 8" with a probability of 8/256.

After executing the processing of step S4061, the main CPU 101 executes normal transition ceiling lottery processing (step S4062). In this processing, the main CPU 101 refers to the normal transition ceiling lottery table (see FIG. 106(b)) and performs a lottery based on a random number value to determine the result of the normal transition ceiling lottery (number of ceiling games) as one of "1", "51", "101", "151", "201", "251", "301", "351", "401", "451", "501", "551", "601", "651", "701", "801", or "901".

In the normal transition ceiling lottery table shown in Figure 106(b), lottery values corresponding to the results of the normal transition mode lottery ("1", "51", "101", "151", "201", "251", "301", "351", "401", "451", "501", "551", "601", "651", "701", "801", and "901") are specified for each normal mode ("Mode 1", "Mode 2", "Mode 3", "Mode 4", "Mode 5", "Mode 6", "Mode 7", and "Mode 8"). The probability of each result of the normal transition ceiling lottery being determined can be expressed as "lottery value specified for that result / number of all random number values that can be drawn (random denominator: 256)".

For example, if the normal mode determined in the normal transition mode lottery process (see step S4061) is "Mode 1," the result of the normal transition ceiling lottery (ceiling game count) is "201" with a probability of 16/256, "301" with a probability of 16/256, "401" with a probability of 48/256, "501" with a probability of 16/256, "601" with a probability of 48/256, "701" with a probability of 16/256, "801" with a probability of 40/256, and "901" with a probability of 56/256.

After executing the processing of step S4062, the main CPU 101 executes point mode lottery processing (step S4063). In this processing, the main CPU 101 refers to the point mode lottery table (see FIG. 107) and performs a lottery based on a random number value to determine one of "point mode 1," "point mode 2," or "point mode 3" as the result of the point mode lottery (point mode).

The point mode lottery table shown in FIG. 107 is provided for each of the point reach count counter values (0-2, 3-5, 6-8, and 9 or more). The point reach count counter value indicates the number of times the normal points (see FIG. 121) have reached a predetermined value (100). If the point reach count counter value is any of 0-2, the point mode lottery table shown in FIG. 107(a) is referenced. If the point reach count counter value is any of 3-5, the point mode lottery table shown in FIG. 107(b) is referenced. If the point reach count counter value is any of 6-8, the point mode lottery table shown in FIG. 107(c) is referenced. If the point reach count counter value is 9 or more, the point mode lottery table shown in FIG. 107(d) is referenced.

In each point mode lottery table, a lottery value corresponding to the result of the point mode lottery ("Point Mode 1", "Point Mode 2", and "Point Mode 3") is specified for each setting value ("Setting 1", "Setting 2", "Setting 3", "Setting 4", "Setting 5", and "Setting 6"). The probability of each result of the point mode lottery being determined can be expressed as "lottery value specified for that result / number of all random number values that can be drawn (random number denominator: 256)".

For example, if the value of the point reach counter is between "0" and "2" and the setting value is 6, "Point Mode 1" will be determined with a probability of 253/256, "Point Mode 2" with a probability of 2/256, and "Point Mode 3" with a probability of 1/256. Note that if the point mode value (any of 1-3) determined in this point mode lottery is smaller than the point mode value already determined, the point mode value determined in this point mode lottery will be discarded.

<Normal stage exclusive processing>
Fig. 108 is a flowchart showing the normal stage-only processing performed in the main control circuit. Fig. 109 is a diagram showing a normal stage freeze lottery table. Figs. 110 to 112 are diagrams showing normal stage transition flag/winning flag lottery tables.

The normal stage-only processing shown in Figure 108 is processing performed by the main control circuit 100 in step S4044 of Figure 104 (game start processing for normal stage).

In the normal stage-only processing, the main CPU 101 first executes normal stage freeze lottery processing (step S4081). In this processing, the main CPU 101 refers to the normal stage freeze lottery table (see FIG. 109) and performs a lottery based on the payout flags (see FIG. 97) in payout flag group 6 and the random number value, thereby determining the result of the normal stage freeze lottery as either "No Win," "Promotion Chance," or "Pseudo BIG."

The normal stage freeze lottery table shown in FIG. 109 is provided for each of the ball output flags in ball output flag group 6 ("Other," "Reach Eye," "Reach Eye BB," and "1-piece role"). If the ball output flag in ball output flag group 6 is "Other," the normal stage freeze lottery table shown in FIG. 109(a) is referenced, if the ball output flag in ball output flag group 6 is "Reach Eye," the normal stage freeze lottery table shown in FIG. 109(b) is referenced, if the ball output flag in ball output flag group 6 is "Reach Eye BB," the normal stage freeze lottery table shown in FIG. 109(c) is referenced, and if the ball output flag in ball output flag group 6 is "1-piece role," the normal stage freeze lottery table shown in FIG. 109(d) is referenced.

In each normal stage freeze lottery table, lottery values corresponding to the results of the normal stage freeze lottery ("No Win," "Promotion Chance," and "Pseudo BIG") are specified for each setting value ("Setting 1," "Setting 2," "Setting 3," "Setting 4," "Setting 5," and "Setting 6"). The probability of each result of the normal stage freeze lottery being determined can be expressed as "lottery value specified for that result / number of all random number values that can be drawn (random denominator: 256)."

For example, if the payout flag in payout flag group 6 is "Reach Eye" and the setting value is set to 1, the result of the freeze lottery during the normal stage will be "No Win" with a probability of 254/256, and "Promotion Chance" with a probability of 2/256. Also, if the payout flag in payout flag group 6 is "Reach Eye BB," regardless of the setting value, the result of the freeze lottery during the normal stage will be "No Win" with a probability of 255/256, and "Pseudo BIG" with a probability of 1/256.

When a "promotion chance" is determined as a result of the freeze lottery during the normal stage (when the promotion chance is won), the main CPU 101 updates the payout status flag storage area (see FIG. 20) in the game start state control process (see step S6 in FIG. 23) for the unit game following the unit game in which the freeze lottery during the normal stage was conducted. This causes a transition to the promotion chance. Also, when a "pseudo BIG" is determined as a result of the freeze lottery during the normal stage (when the pseudo BIG is won), the main CPU 101 updates the payout status flag storage area (see FIG. 20) in the game start state control process (see step S6 in FIG. 23) for the unit game following the unit game in which the freeze lottery during the normal stage was conducted. This causes a transition to the pseudo BIG.

Furthermore, if a "Promotion Chance" or "Pseudo BIG" is determined as the result of the normal stage freeze lottery (if the player wins the Promotion Chance or Pseudo BIG), a freeze will occur when the unit game in which the normal stage freeze lottery was drawn ends. As explained in the first embodiment, a freeze is an effect that stops the progress of the game for a predetermined period of time (invalidating the player's game operations for a predetermined period of time). The main CPU 101 controls the execution of the freeze in the main-side effect control process (see step S16 in Figure 23) at the end of the unit game. As a result, after the third stop operation is performed in the unit game, game operations are invalidated for a predetermined period of time. Thereafter, the game will transition to a Promotion Chance or Pseudo BIG when the start lever 7 is operated to start the next unit game.

During the freeze, effects corresponding to the freeze are displayed, such as images, sounds, and lamps, suggesting or announcing a promotion chance or a pseudo-BIG win. Furthermore, since reach symbols (symbols indicating a win, such as a pseudo-bonus) are often stopped on the main reels (reels 3L, 3C, and 3R) during the freeze, it is possible to draw attention to the reach symbols by lighting, flashing, or extinguishing the reel backlights (e.g., reel illumination LEDs located inside the reel bodies of reels 3L, 3C, and 3R so that each of the nine symbols displayed within the frame of the main display window 4 can be individually illuminated). As described below, in this embodiment, "one reach symbol" and "one BB-confirmed reach symbol" (see Figure 92) serve as reach symbols. Such reach symbols may be set to always stop when a stop operation is performed in a predetermined press order (e.g., the first symbol on the left) during the freeze, or may not be set to stop depending on the timing of the stop operation.

Furthermore, in one unit game during the premonition state, if a "promotion chance" or "pseudo BIG" is determined as a result of the normal stage freeze lottery (if a promotion chance or pseudo BIG is won), the main CPU 101 clears the value of the premonition game number counter (see step S4084). This ends the premonition state. Note that if a promotion chance or pseudo BIG has already been won at the time the processing of step S4081 is executed (if the promotion chance winning flag or pseudo BIG winning flag is set on), the main CPU 101 will not conduct a normal stage freeze lottery and will proceed to step S4082.

After executing the processing of step S4081, the main CPU 101 executes normal stage transition flag/winning lottery processing (step S4082). In this processing, the main CPU 101 refers to the normal stage transition flag/winning lottery flag lottery table (see Figures 110 to 112) and performs a lottery based on the payout flag in payout flag group 5 (see Figure 97) and the random number value, thereby determining one of "No Winning Lottery," "Chance Stage A," "Chance Stage B," "Promotion Chance," and "Pseudo BIG" as the result of the normal stage transition flag/winning lottery.

The normal stage transition flag/winning flag lottery tables include a normal stage transition flag/winning flag lottery table (see FIG. 110) referenced in non-high probability, a normal stage transition flag/winning flag lottery table (see FIG. 111) referenced in high probability 1 to high probability 2, and a normal stage transition flag/winning flag lottery table (see FIG. 112) referenced in high probability 3. In the normal ball dispensing state, the probability mode is controlled to one of non-high probability, high probability 1, high probability 2, and high probability 3 (see step S4085). In the normal stage transition flag/winning flag lottery, the normal stage transition flag/winning flag lottery table corresponding to the current probability mode is referenced from the normal stage transition flag/winning flag lottery tables in FIGS. 110 to 112.

The normal stage transition flag/winning flag lottery tables shown in Figures 110 to 112 are provided for each of the ball output flags in ball output flag group 5 ('Other', 'Parallel Watermelon', 'Diagonal Watermelon', and 'Cherry'). If the ball dispensing flag in ball dispensing flag group 5 is "other", the normal stage transition flag/winning lottery flag lottery table shown in Figure 110(a), Figure 111(a), or Figure 112(a) is referenced; if the ball dispensing flag in ball dispensing flag group 5 is "parallel watermelon", the normal stage transition flag/winning lottery flag lottery table shown in Figure 110(b), Figure 111(b), or Figure 112(b) is referenced; if the ball dispensing flag in ball dispensing flag group 5 is "diagonal watermelon", the normal stage transition flag/winning lottery flag lottery table shown in Figure 110(c), Figure 111(c), or Figure 112(c) is referenced; and if the ball dispensing flag in ball dispensing flag group 5 is "cherry", the normal stage transition flag/winning lottery flag lottery table shown in Figure 110(d), Figure 111(d), or Figure 112(d) is referenced.

In each normal stage transition flag/winning flag lottery table, lottery values corresponding to the results of the normal stage transition flag/winning flag lottery ("No Winning Lottery," "Chance Stage A," "Chance Stage B," "Promotion Chance," and "Pseudo BIG") are specified for each setting value ("Setting 1," "Setting 2," "Setting 3," "Setting 4," "Setting 5," and "Setting 6"). The probability of each result of the normal stage transition flag/winning flag lottery being determined can be expressed as "lottery value specified for that result / number of all random number values that can be drawn (random number denominator: 256)."

For example, if the current probability mode is High Probability 1 or High Probability 2 and the payout flag in Payout Flag Group 5 is "Diagonal Watermelon," then, regardless of the setting value, the results of the normal stage transition flag/winning flag lottery will determine "Chance Stage A" with a probability of 1/256 and "Chance Stage B" with a probability of 255/256. Also, if the current probability mode is High Probability 3 and the payout flag in Payout Flag Group 5 is "Parallel Watermelon," then, regardless of the setting value, the results of the normal stage transition flag/winning flag lottery will determine "No Win" with a probability of 128/256, "Promotion Chance" with a probability of 112/256, and "Pseudo BIG" with a probability of 16/256.

In non-high probability, high probability 1, and high probability 2, the probability that "Promotion Chance" or "Pseudo BIG" will be determined as a result of the normal stage transition flag/winning flag lottery is 0, and only in high probability 3 can "Promotion Chance" or "Pseudo BIG" be determined. This makes high probability 3 the most advantageous probability mode. In high probability 1 to high probability 2, the probability that "Chance Stage A" or "Chance Stage B" will be determined as a result of the normal stage transition flag/winning flag lottery is higher than in non-high probability. This makes high probability 1 and high probability 2 more advantageous probability modes than non-high probability.

When "Chance Stage A" is determined as a result of the normal stage transition flag/winning flag lottery (when Chance Stage A is won), the main CPU 101 adds 1 to the value of the chance stage A winning count counter. A value of 1 or greater on the chance stage A winning count counter indicates that Chance Stage A has been won. As will be described in detail below, when Chance Stage A is won, the player transitions to Chance Stage A via a premonition state (see transition condition (E) in Figures 94 and 95). The value of the chance stage A winning count counter indicates the number of times Chance Stage A has been won. Chance Stage A winning counts can be stockpiled, making it possible to transition from the normal stage to Chance Stage A the number of times corresponding to the value of the chance stage A winning count counter. When transitioning from the normal stage to Chance Stage A, the value of the chance stage A winning count counter is decremented by 1.

In addition, if "Chance Stage B" is determined as a result of the normal stage transition flag/winning flag lottery (if Chance Stage B is won), the main CPU 101 adds 1 to the value of the chance stage B winning count counter. A value of 1 or greater on the chance stage B winning count counter indicates that Chance Stage B has been won. As will be described in detail below, if Chance Stage B is won, the player transitions to Chance Stage B via a premonition state (see transition condition (G) in Figures 94 and 95). The value of the chance stage B winning count counter indicates the number of times Chance Stage B has been won. Winning chance stage B can be stockpiled, making it possible to transition from the normal stage to Chance Stage B the number of times corresponding to the value of the chance stage B winning count counter. When transitioning from the normal stage to Chance Stage B, the value of the chance stage B winning count counter is decremented by 1.

Furthermore, if a "promotion chance" is determined as a result of the normal stage transition flag/winning flag lottery (if the promotion chance is won), the main CPU 101 sets the promotion chance winning flag to ON. The promotion chance winning flag is a flag indicating that the promotion chance has been won. Details will be described later, but if the promotion chance is won, the game will transition to the promotion chance via the premonition state (see transition condition (I) in Figures 94 and 95).

In addition, if "Pseudo BIG" is determined as a result of the normal stage transition flag/winning flag lottery (if a Pseudo BIG is won), the main CPU 101 sets the Pseudo BIG winning flag to ON. The Pseudo BIG winning flag is a flag indicating that a Pseudo BIG has been won. Details will be described later, but if a Pseudo BIG is won, the game will transition to Pseudo BIG via a premonition state (see transition condition (J) in Figures 94 and 95). Note that if the promotion chance winning flag is set ON and "Pseudo BIG" is determined as a result of the normal stage transition flag/winning flag lottery (if a Pseudo BIG is won), the main CPU 101 will discard the promotion chance winning flag (set it to OFF).

After executing the processing of step S4082, the main CPU 101 executes point-related processing (step S4083). Point-related processing will be described later using FIG. 121.

After executing the processing of step S4083, the main CPU 101 executes a lottery process for determining the number of premonition plays when a flag is won during the normal stage (step S4084). The lottery process for determining the number of premonition plays when a flag is won during the normal stage will be described later using FIG. 124.

After executing the processing of step S4084, the main CPU 101 executes probability mode-related processing (step S4085). Probability mode-related processing will be described later using Figure 130.

After executing step S4085, the main CPU 101 terminates this subroutine.

Details will be provided later, but in the normal ball-dispensing state (normal stage, chance stage A, and chance stage B), the probability mode is controlled to one of three: non-high probability, high probability 1, high probability 2, or high probability 3. High probability 1 to 3 are modes that are basically based on the normal stage. High probability 1 is a high probability mode that is entered in a lottery (see step S4123 in Figure 114, as well as Figures 115 and 116) when the number of unit plays played in the normal ball-dispensing state reaches a predetermined value (any of "251," "351," "451," "551," "651," or "751") (when the specified number of stuck games since the start of the advantageous zone is reached). The lottery is held according to normal modes 1 to 8.

High Probability 2 is a high probability state that is entered when the value of normal points (see step S4163 in Figure 121) reaches 100 points (when points are reached) in a lottery (see step S4167 in Figure 121, Figure 123, step S4265 in Figure 130, and Figure 131(b)), or when a cherry is drawn (see step S4262 in Figure 130 and Figure 131(a)). The degree of advantage of the lottery state (probability mode) is equal between High Probability 1 and High Probability 2. High Probability 3 is a high probability state (so-called ultra high probability) that is entered when High Probability 2 is drawn during High Probability 1, or when High Probability 1 is drawn during High Probability 2, and is an even more advantageous state than High Probability 1 and High Probability 2.

High probability levels 1 to 3 have this kind of relationship. In this gaming machine, the main winning routes from the so-called normal state (normal stage in Figure 93) to the state that the player perceives as a win ("Promotion Chance" and "Pseudo BIG") are: when the number of unit plays reaches the ceiling number of games (see Figure 106 (b)); a winning lottery based on a winning combination such as a reach-eye combination (for example, a winning combination corresponding to "Reach Eye" or "Reach Eye BB" shown in Figure 109); and a winning lottery every time 100 normal points are reached. In the lottery based on a winning combination, it is easier to win a "Promotion Chance" or "Pseudo BIG" in Chance Stage A or Chance Stage B than in the normal stage.

For this reason, in the normal stage, the gameplay is such that you first transition from non-high probability to high probability 1 or 2, and then from high probability 1 or 2 to the chance stage (chance stage A or chance stage B) in order to aim for a win. In other words, high probability 1 and 2 function as preferential states for transitioning to the chance stage. As mentioned above, transition to high probability 1 is possible only after a certain number of games have been played, so you can expect to transition to high probability even if you do not draw (win) a so-called rare role (watermelon or cherry). Transition to high probability 2 is based on a lottery held when a point is reached or when a cherry is drawn, so transitioning can be expected depending on the winning role.

High Probability 3 is a state entered by overlapping high probability states, such as winning High Probability 2 while in High Probability 1, and winning High Probability 1 while in High Probability 2. As shown in Figure 112 (described below), there is no transition to the Chance Stage, and it functions as a state where you can expect to win a "Promotion Chance" or "Pseudo BIG." Because High Probability 3 is more advantageous than the Chance Stage, by suppressing transition to the Chance Stage, when there are games remaining in High Probability 3, High Probability 3 will not end due to a transition to a state less advantageous than High Probability 3.

In addition, instead of having a special high probability state like High Probability 3 that is transitioned to when high probabilities overlap, when multiple high probability states overlap (when the number of remaining games for High Probability 1 and the number of remaining games for High Probability 2 are both 1 or more), it is also possible to have a specification where, for example, after the number of games for High Probability 1 has been played, the number of games for High Probability 2 is played (transitioning to High Probability 2 after High Probability 1 has ended). Also, in this embodiment, High Probability 1 and 2 are considered to be states with equal degrees of advantage, but High Probability 2 may be more advantageous than High Probability 1, or vice versa.

In terms of presentation, it is advisable to use presentations that suggest the player's current state, such as non-high probability stages being primarily daytime stages, high probability stages 1 and 2 being primarily evening stages, and high probability stage 3 being primarily night stages. Furthermore, when a specific presentation (such as a transition to a night stage or red-text dialogue) occurs, presentations that definitively indicate the player's current state may be implemented, such as confirming that the player will move to high probability stage 3. Furthermore, it is also possible to provide presentations that occur in both high probability stages 1 and 2, or presentations that occur in high probability stage 1 but not in high probability stage 2, to create a game that allows players to guess the trigger for the transition to high probability.

<Normal ball output status common processing>
Figure 113 is a flowchart showing the common processing for normal ball output state performed in the main control circuit.

The normal ball output state common processing shown in Figure 113 is processing performed by the main control circuit 100 in step S4043 of Figure 104 (processing at the start of gameplay for the normal stage).

In the normal ball output state common processing, first, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not "F_BB confirmed role A" (see Figures 90 and 91) has been determined as the internal winning role in the internal winning role determination processing (see step S64 in Figure 26) (step S4101).

If it is determined that "F_BB Confirmed Role A" has been determined as the internal winning role, the main CPU 101 executes normal long freeze lottery processing (step S4102). In this processing, the main CPU 101 references a normal long freeze lottery table (not shown) and performs a lottery based on a random number value to determine either a "no win" or a "win" as the result of normal long freeze lottery (1). If the result of normal long freeze lottery (1) is a "win," the main CPU 101 determines either a "no win" or a "win" as the result of normal long freeze lottery (2). As a result, the probability of winning normal long freeze lottery (1) is 1/256, and the probability of winning normal long freeze lottery (2) is 64/256.

If both the Normal Long Freeze Lottery (1) and the Normal Long Freeze Lottery (2) are won, a long freeze will occur. A long freeze is a type of freeze, and compared to the freeze described above (see step S4081 in FIG. 108), the period during which game operations are disabled is longer. If both the Normal Long Freeze Lottery (1) and the Normal Long Freeze Lottery (2) are won, the main CPU 101 controls the execution of the long freeze in the main-side presentation control process at the start of play (see step S8 in FIG. 23) for the unit game in which the Normal Long Freeze Lottery (1) and the Normal Long Freeze Lottery (2) were drawn.

Furthermore, if both the normal long freeze lottery (1) and the normal long freeze lottery (2) are won, the main CPU 101 controls the execution of the pseudo game in the main presentation control process at the start of game (see step S8 in FIG. 23) for the unit game following the unit game in which the normal long freeze lottery (1) and the normal long freeze lottery (2) were drawn. The main CPU 101 also updates the payout status flag storage area (see FIG. 20) in the state control process at the start of game (see step S6 in FIG. 23) for the unit game following the unit game in which the normal long freeze lottery (1) and the normal long freeze lottery (2) were drawn. This completes the unit game in which the long freeze occurred, and a pseudo game is played upon operation of the start lever 7 to start the next unit game, resulting in a transition to a pseudo BIG.

Furthermore, if both the normal long freeze lottery (1) and the normal long freeze lottery (2) are won, the main CPU 101 sets the pseudo BIG (ED) flag to ON. When the pseudo BIG (ED) flag is set to ON, control is resumed to pseudo BIG when the pseudo BIG termination condition is met, and the pseudo BIG continues until the end of the advantageous zone. As explained in the first embodiment, when limit processing (see FIG. 16) is executed in the advantageous zone (i.e., when a predetermined value updated as play progresses during the advantageous zone (e.g., the value of the advantageous zone game count counter or advantageous zone payout counter) reaches a specified value (e.g., 3,000 games or 1,999 coins)), the advantageous zone transitions to a non-advantageous zone. At this time, the pseudo BIG also ends. Note that such limit processing may not be performed.

If both the normal long freeze lottery (1) and the normal long freeze lottery (2) are won, the main CPU 101 clears the value of the chance stage A win count counter, the value of the chance stage B win count counter, the promotion chance win flag, the pseudo BIG win flag, and the value of the premonition game count counter (see steps S4082 and S4084 in FIG. 108).

If it is determined in step S4101 that "F_BB Confirmed Role A" has not been determined as the internal winning role, or after executing the processing of step S4102, the main CPU 101 executes a normal prescribed number of plays counter update process (step S4103). The normal prescribed number of plays counter update process will be described later using FIG. 114.

After executing the processing of step S4103, the main CPU 101 executes ceiling-related processing (step S4104). Ceiling-related processing will be described later using Figure 118.

After executing the processing of step S4104, the main CPU 101 executes promotion chance pre-processing (step S4105). Promotion chance pre-processing will be described later using Figure 132.

After executing step S4105, the main CPU 101 terminates this subroutine.

<Normal regulation number of games counter update process>
Fig. 114 is a flowchart showing the normal prescribed number of plays counter update process performed in the main control circuit. Fig. 115 and Fig. 116 are diagrams showing the normal prescribed number of plays to high probability 1 transition lottery table. Fig. 117 is a diagram showing the ceiling fake preparation lottery table.

The normal specified number of plays counter update process shown in Figure 114 is a process performed by the main control circuit 100 in step S4103 of Figure 113 (normal ball payout state common process).

In the normal specified number of plays counter update process, the main CPU 101 first adds 1 to the value of the normal specified number of plays counter (step S4121). The value of the normal specified number of plays counter indicates the number of unit plays performed in the normal ball dispensing state, and is stored in the main RAM 103. The value of the normal specified number of plays counter is only added in the normal ball dispensing state (normal stage, chance stage A, and chance stage B), and is cleared when transitioning to a ball dispensing state other than the normal ball dispensing state.

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether the value of the normal specified number of plays counter is a predetermined value (one of "251," "351," "451," "551," "651," and "751") (step S4122).

If the main CPU 101 determines that the value of the normal specified number of plays counter is one of "251," "351," "451," "551," "651," or "751," the main CPU 101 executes a normal specified number of plays/high probability 1 transition lottery process (step S4123). In this process, the main CPU 101 refers to the normal specified number of plays/high probability 1 transition lottery table (see Figures 115 and 116) and performs a lottery based on a random number value to determine either "no win" or "high probability 1" as the result of the normal specified number of plays/high probability 1 transition lottery.

The normal specified number of plays to high probability 1 transition lottery tables shown in Figures 115 and 116 are provided for each of the normal modes ("Mode 1," "Mode 2," "Mode 3," "Mode 4," "Mode 5," "Mode 6," "Mode 7," and "Mode 8") determined in the normal transition mode lottery process (see step S4061 in Figure 105). When the normal mode is "Mode 1," the normal specified number of plays to high probability 1 transition lottery table shown in Figure 115(a) is referenced; when the normal mode is "Mode 2," the normal specified number of plays to high probability 1 transition lottery table shown in Figure 115(b) is referenced; when the normal mode is "Mode 3," the normal specified number of plays to high probability 1 transition lottery table shown in Figure 115(c) is referenced; and when the normal mode is "Mode 4," the normal specified number of plays to high probability 1 transition lottery table shown in Figure 115(d) is referenced. When the normal mode is "mode 5", the normal specified number of plays to high probability 1 transition lottery table shown in Figure 116(e) is referenced, when the normal mode is "mode 6", the normal specified number of plays to high probability 1 transition lottery table shown in Figure 116(f) is referenced, when the normal mode is "mode 7", the normal specified number of plays to high probability 1 transition lottery table shown in Figure 116(g) is referenced, and when the normal mode is "mode 8", the normal specified number of plays to high probability 1 transition lottery table shown in Figure 116(h) is referenced.

In each normal number of plays/high probability 1 transition lottery table, a lottery value corresponding to the result of the normal number of plays/high probability 1 transition lottery ("no win" and "high probability 1") is specified for each value of the normal number of plays counter ("251," "351," "451," "551," "651," and "751"). The probability of each result of the normal number of plays/high probability 1 transition lottery can be expressed as "lottery value specified for that result / number of all random number values that can be drawn (random number denominator: 256)." For example, if the normal mode is "Mode 1" and the value of the normal number of plays counter is "251," the result of the normal number of plays/high probability 1 transition lottery is determined with a probability of 240/256 and with a probability of 16/256.

When "High Probability 1" is determined as the result of the regular number of plays to transition to High Probability 1 (when High Probability 1 is won), the main CPU 101 sets High Probability 1 as the probability mode described above (see step S4082 in FIG. 108) and sets the High Probability 1 play count counter to "50." The value of the High Probability 1 play count counter indicates the remaining number of unit plays that can remain in High Probability 1, and is stored in the main RAM 103. If the value of the High Probability 1 play count counter is greater than 0, it is decremented by 1 each time a unit play is played. When the value of the High Probability 1 play count counter reaches 0, the game transitions from High Probability 1 to non-High Probability. Although not shown, this decrement is performed in the process of step S15 (game end state control process) in FIG. 23 (main processing).

When High Probability 2 is set as the probability mode (see step S4085 in FIG. 108), if "High Probability 1" is determined as the result of the regular specified number of plays to transition to High Probability 1 (if High Probability 1 is won), the main CPU 101 sets High Probability 3 as the probability mode, sets the High Probability 3 play count counter to "20," and clears the value of the High Probability 1 play count counter and the value of the High Probability 2 guaranteed play count counter described below. The value of the High Probability 3 play count counter indicates the remaining number of unit plays that can remain in High Probability 3, and is stored in the main RAM 103. If the value of the High Probability 3 play count counter is greater than 0, it is decremented by 1 each time a unit play is played. When the value of the High Probability 3 play count counter reaches 0, the game transitions from High Probability 3 to High Probability 2. Although not shown, this decrement is performed in the process of step S15 in FIG. 23 (main processing) (game end state control process).

After executing the processing of step S4123, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine. Note that if the probability mode is set to High Probability 3 at the time the processing of step S4123 is executed, the main CPU 101 will not normally perform the lottery for transitioning to High Probability 1 for the specified number of plays and will end this subroutine.

If it is determined in step S4122 that the value of the normal specified number of plays counter is not "251", "351", "451", "551", "651", or "751", the main CPU 101 determines whether the value of the normal specified number of plays counter is the ceiling number of games (the value determined in the ceiling lottery at the time of transition to normal (see step S4062 in Figure 105)) (step S4124).

If the main CPU 101 determines that the value of the normal specified number of plays counter is the ceiling number of games, it sets "Ceiling Preparation" (step S4125). "Ceiling Preparation" is a state controlled in the normal ball output state, and is a preparation period for transitioning to the premonition state (a state in which premonition effects are performed suggesting a transition to Chance Stage A, Chance Stage B, Promotion Chance, or Pseudo BIG). After executing the processing of step S4125, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

Note that if a promotion chance or pseudo BIG has been won at the time step S4125 is executed (if the promotion chance winning flag or pseudo BIG winning flag is set to ON), the main CPU 101 will end this subroutine without setting "Ceiling Preparation" to "Preparing for Ceiling." Also, if "Ceiling Preparation" is set and a promotion chance or pseudo BIG has been won, the main CPU 101 will clear "Ceiling Preparation."

If it is determined in step S4124 that the value of the normal specified number of plays counter is not the ceiling number of games, the main CPU 101 determines whether the value of the normal specified number of plays counter is a specific value (any of "51", "151", "201", "301", "401", "501", "601", "701", and "801") (step S4126).

If the main CPU 101 determines that the value of the normal specified number of plays counter is any of "51", "151", "201", "301", "401", "501", "601", "701", and "801", it executes a fake ceiling preparation lottery process (step S4127). In this process, the main CPU 101 refers to the fake ceiling preparation lottery table (see FIG. 117) and performs a lottery based on a random number value, thereby determining either "No Win" or "Fake Ceiling Preparation" as the result of the fake ceiling preparation lottery.

The ceiling fake preparation lottery table shown in Figure 117 is provided for each of the normal modes ("Mode 1," "Mode 2," "Mode 3," "Mode 4," "Mode 5," "Mode 6," "Mode 7," and "Mode 8") determined in the normal transition mode lottery process (see step S4061 in Figure 105). When the normal mode is "Mode 1," the ceiling fake preparation lottery table shown in Figure 117(a) is referenced; when the normal mode is "Mode 2," the ceiling fake preparation lottery table shown in Figure 117(b) is referenced; when the normal mode is "Mode 3," the ceiling fake preparation lottery table shown in Figure 117(c) is referenced; when the normal mode is "Mode 4," the ceiling fake preparation lottery table shown in Figure 117(d) is referenced; If the normal mode is "mode 5", the ceiling fake preparation lottery table shown in Figure 117(e) is referenced, if the normal mode is "mode 6", the ceiling fake preparation lottery table shown in Figure 117(f) is referenced, if the normal mode is "mode 7", the ceiling fake preparation lottery table shown in Figure 117(g) is referenced, and if the normal mode is "mode 8", the ceiling fake preparation lottery table shown in Figure 117(h) is referenced.

In each fake ceiling preparation lottery table, a lottery value corresponding to the outcome of the fake ceiling preparation lottery ("No Win" and "Fake ceiling preparation") is specified for each value of the normal specified number of plays counter ("51," "151," "201," "301," "401," "501," "601," "701," and "801"). The probability of each outcome of the fake ceiling preparation lottery can be expressed as "lottery value specified for that outcome / number of all random number values that can be drawn (random number denominator: 256)." For example, if the normal mode is "Mode 1" and the value of the normal specified number of plays counter is "51," the result of the fake ceiling preparation lottery is determined to be "No Win" with a probability of 192/256, and "Fake ceiling preparation" with a probability of 64/256.

When "Ceiling fake preparation in progress" is determined as the result of the ceiling fake preparation lottery (when a win occurs during ceiling fake preparation), the main CPU 101 sets ceiling fake preparation in progress. Ceiling fake preparation in progress is a state controlled in the normal ball output state, and is a preparation period for transitioning to the false premonition state (a state in which a premonition effect is performed even though no win has been won in Chance Stage A, Chance Stage B, Promotion Chance, or Pseudo BIG).

If the main CPU 101 determines in step S4126 that the value of the normal specified number of plays counter is not "51," "151," "201," "301," "401," "501," "601," "701," or "801," or after executing the processing of step S4127, the main CPU 101 terminates this subroutine.

Note that if the probability mode is set to High Probability 3 at the time step S4127 is executed, or if a promotion chance or pseudo BIG has been won (if the promotion chance winning flag or pseudo BIG winning flag is set on), the main CPU 101 will not conduct a ceiling fake preparation lottery and will terminate this subroutine. Also, if a promotion chance or pseudo BIG has been won while ceiling fake preparation is set, the main CPU 101 will clear ceiling fake preparation. Even if the value of the normal specified number of plays counter is any of "51," "151," "201," "301," "401," "501," "601," "701," and "801," if that value is the ceiling number of games, the determination result of step S4124 will be "YES," and therefore a ceiling fake preparation lottery will not be conducted.

In this embodiment, the proportion of games that trigger a false sign (number of games that occur) varies depending on the normal mode (modes 1 to 8) currently in play (the value of the normal specified number of plays counter, which is more likely to result in a winning lottery during the fake ceiling preparation period, differs for each normal mode). This means that even if the sign that occurs ends up being a false sign that does not lead to any special benefits (chance stage, promotion chance, transition to pseudo BIG), the player is not simply disappointed that it was a miss; rather, the number of games that caused the false sign to occur can serve as a clue to guess the currently in play mode. This allows the player to enjoy the fun of guessing the mode and the fun of further guessing the setting value from the mode.

<Ceiling-related processing>
Fig. 118 is a flowchart showing the ceiling-related processing carried out in the main control circuit. Fig. 119 and Fig. 120 are diagrams showing lottery tables for lottery types when the ceiling is reached.

The ceiling-related processing shown in Figure 118 is processing performed by the main control circuit 100 in step S4104 of Figure 113 (common processing for normal ball output state).

In ceiling-related processing, the main CPU 101 first determines whether "Ceiling preparation in progress" (see step S4125 in FIG. 114) is set (step S4141).

If it is determined that the ceiling preparation flag has been set, the main CPU 101 executes a ceiling preparation flag set lottery process (step S4142). In this process, the main CPU 101 references a ceiling preparation flag set lottery table (not shown) and performs a lottery based on a random number value to determine whether the result of the ceiling preparation flag set lottery will be "no win" or "win." This results in a 16/256 probability of winning the ceiling preparation flag set lottery.

If the value of the ceiling preparation game counter exceeds a predetermined value (17), the main CPU 101 will always determine "winning" as the result of the ceiling preparation flag set lottery. The value of the ceiling preparation game counter indicates the number of unit games played since the ceiling preparation was set, and is stored in the main RAM 103. Also, if a promotion chance or pseudo BIG has been won at the time the processing of step S4142 is executed (if the promotion chance winning lottery flag or pseudo BIG winning lottery flag is set on), the main CPU 101 will not conduct the ceiling preparation flag set lottery and will proceed to step S4143.

After executing the processing of step S4142, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the ceiling preparation flag set lottery has been won (step S4143). If it determines that the ceiling preparation flag set lottery has been won, the main CPU 101 executes ceiling-reaching lottery type lottery processing (step S4144). In this processing, the main CPU 101 refers to the ceiling-reaching lottery type lottery table (see Figures 119 and 120) and performs a lottery based on a random number value, thereby determining the result of the ceiling-reaching lottery type lottery as either "No Winning Lottery," "Promotion Chance," or "Pseudo BIG."

The ceiling-reaching lottery type lottery tables shown in Figures 119 and 120 are provided for each of the normal modes ("Mode 1," "Mode 2," "Mode 3," "Mode 4," "Mode 5," "Mode 6," "Mode 7," and "Mode 8") determined in the normal transition mode lottery process (see step S4061 in Figure 105). When the normal mode is "Mode 1," the ceiling-reaching lottery type lottery table shown in Figure 119(a) is referenced; when the normal mode is "Mode 2," the ceiling-reaching lottery type lottery table shown in Figure 119(b) is referenced; when the normal mode is "Mode 3," the ceiling-reaching lottery type lottery table shown in Figure 119(c) is referenced; and when the normal mode is "Mode 4," the ceiling-reaching lottery type lottery table shown in Figure 119(d) is referenced. When the normal mode is "mode 5", the lottery table for lottery types when the ceiling is reached shown in FIG. 120(e) is referenced, when the normal mode is "mode 6", the lottery table for lottery types when the ceiling is reached shown in FIG. 120(f) is referenced, when the normal mode is "mode 7", the lottery table for lottery types when the ceiling is reached shown in FIG. 120(g) is referenced, and when the normal mode is "mode 8", the lottery table for lottery types when the ceiling is reached shown in FIG. 120(h) is referenced.

In each ceiling-reaching lottery table, lottery values corresponding to the results of the ceiling-reaching lottery ("No Winning Lottery," "Promotion Chance," and "Simulated Big Win") are specified for each setting value ("Setting 1," "Setting 2," "Setting 3," "Setting 4," "Setting 5," and "Setting 6"). The probability of each outcome of the ceiling-reaching lottery can be expressed as "lottery value specified for that outcome / number of all random number values that can be drawn (random number denominator: 256)." For example, if the normal mode is "Mode 1" and the setting value is Setting 1, the result of the ceiling-reaching lottery is "Promotion Chance" with a probability of 255/256, and "Simulated Big Win" with a probability of 1/256.

When a "promotion chance" is determined as the result of the lottery for the type of lottery when the ceiling is reached (when the promotion chance is won), the main CPU 101 sets the promotion chance winning flag to ON. As described above, the promotion chance winning flag is a flag indicating that the promotion chance has been won. As will be described in detail later, when the promotion chance is won, the state transitions to the promotion chance via a premonition state (see step S4084 in FIG. 108). Furthermore, when a "promotion chance" is determined as the result of the lottery for the type of lottery when the ceiling is reached (when the promotion chance is won), the main CPU 101 sets the promotion chance winning flag to ON. The promotion chance winning flag when the ceiling is reached is a flag indicating that the promotion chance has been won in the lottery for the type of lottery when the ceiling is reached.

Also, if "Pseudo BIG" is determined as the result of the lottery for determining the winning type when the ceiling is reached (if the Pseudo BIG is won), the main CPU 101 sets the Pseudo BIG winning flag to ON. As described above, the Pseudo BIG winning flag is a flag indicating that the Pseudo BIG has been won. Details will be described later, but if the Pseudo BIG is won, the state transitions to Pseudo BIG via a premonition state (see step S4084 in Figure 108). Also, if "Pseudo BIG" is determined as the result of the lottery for determining the winning type when the ceiling is reached (if the Pseudo BIG is won), the main CPU 101 sets the Pseudo BIG winning flag when the ceiling is reached to ON. The pseudo BIG winning flag when the ceiling is reached is a flag that indicates that a pseudo BIG has been won in the lottery for winning types when the ceiling is reached.

If it is determined in step S4143 that the ceiling preparation flag set lottery has not been won, or after executing the processing of step S4144, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine. Note that when the processing of step S4144 is executed, the main CPU 101 clears the ceiling preparation flag.

If it is determined in step S4141 that "Ceiling Preparation" is not set, the main CPU 101 determines whether "Ceiling Fake Preparation" (see step S4127 in FIG. 114) is set (step S4145).

If it is determined that the ceiling fake preparation flag has been set, the main CPU 101 executes a ceiling fake preparation flag set lottery process (step S4146). In this process, the main CPU 101 references a ceiling fake preparation flag set lottery table (not shown) and performs a lottery based on a random number value to determine either a "no win" or a "win" as the result of the ceiling fake preparation flag set lottery. This results in a 20/256 probability of winning the ceiling fake preparation flag set lottery. Note that if the value of the ceiling fake preparation game number counter exceeds a predetermined value (17), the main CPU 101 always determines a "win" as the result of the ceiling fake preparation flag set lottery. The value of the ceiling fake preparation game number counter indicates the number of unit games played since the ceiling fake preparation flag was set, and is stored in the main RAM 103.

If the ceiling fake preparation flag setting lottery is won, the main CPU 101 sets the ceiling fake winning flag to ON. The ceiling fake winning flag is a flag indicating that the ceiling fake has been won. As will be explained in detail later, if the ceiling fake is won, the game will transition to a premonition state. However, unless the game wins on one of Chance Stage A, Chance Stage B, Promotion Chance, or Pseudo BIG, the game will not transition to these ball-out states even after the premonition state ends. In other words, this premonition state is a state in which a false premonition effect is performed (false premonition state). Furthermore, if the ceiling fake preparation flag setting lottery is won, the main CPU 101 clears the ceiling fake preparation state.

If it is determined in step S4145 that the ceiling fake preparation flag has not been set, or after executing the processing of step S4146, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine. Note that if a promotion chance or pseudo BIG has been won at the time the processing of step S4146 is executed (if the promotion chance winning flag or pseudo BIG winning flag is set on), the main CPU 101 does not draw to set the ceiling fake preparation flag and ends this subroutine.

<Point-related processing>
Fig. 121 is a flowchart showing point-related processing performed in the main control circuit. Fig. 122 is a diagram showing a point acquisition lottery table. Fig. 123 is a diagram showing a point attainment lottery table.

The point-related processing shown in Figure 121 is processing performed by the main control circuit 100 in step S4083 of Figure 108 (processing exclusive to normal stages).

In the point-related processing, the main CPU 101 first determines whether "F_Cherry" (see Figures 90 and 91) has been determined as the internal winning role in the internal winning role determination processing (see step S64 in Figure 26) (step S4161). If it determines that "F_Cherry" has been determined as the internal winning role, the main CPU 101 increments the value of the cherry counter by 1 (step S4162). The value of the cherry counter indicates the number of times "F_Cherry" has been determined as the internal winning role, and is stored in the main RAM 103. The value of the cherry counter is only incremented in the normal stage, and the upper limit is 4.

If it is determined in step S4161 that "F_Cherry" has not been determined as the internal winning combination, or after executing the processing of step S4162, the main CPU 101 executes a point acquisition lottery process (step S4163). In this process, the main CPU 101 refers to the point acquisition lottery table (see FIG. 122) and performs a lottery based on the payout flags (see FIG. 97) in payout flag group 3 and the random number value, thereby determining one of the following as the result of the point acquisition lottery: "No Win", "5", "10", "20", "30", "40", "50", or "100".

The point acquisition lottery table shown in Figure 122 is provided for each of the ball output flags in ball output flag group 3 ('Other', 'Rip Bell', 'Weak Rare Role', 'Diagonal Watermelon', and 'Reach Eye or Reach Eye BB'). If the ball dispensing flag in ball dispensing flag group 3 is "Other", the point acquisition lottery table shown in FIG. 122(a) is referenced, if the ball dispensing flag in ball dispensing flag group 3 is "Rip Bell", the point acquisition lottery table shown in FIG. 122(b) is referenced, if the ball dispensing flag in ball dispensing flag group 3 is "Weak rare combination", the point acquisition lottery table shown in FIG. 122(c) is referenced, if the ball dispensing flag in ball dispensing flag group 3 is "Diagonal Watermelon", the point acquisition lottery table shown in FIG. 122(d) is referenced, and if the ball dispensing flag in ball dispensing flag group 3 is "Reach Eye" or "Reach Eye BB", the point acquisition lottery table shown in FIG. 122(e) is referenced.

In each point acquisition lottery table, a lottery value corresponding to the point acquisition lottery outcome ("No Win," "5," "10," "20," "30," "40," "50," and "100") is specified for each Cherry Counter value ("0," "1," "2," "3," and "4"). The probability of each point acquisition lottery outcome being determined can be expressed as "lottery value specified for that outcome / number of all random number values that can be drawn (random number denominator: 256)." For example, if the payout flag in payout flag group 3 is "Rip Bell" and the Cherry Counter value is "4," the point acquisition lottery outcome will be "30" with a probability of 192/256, "50" with a probability of 32/256, and "100" with a probability of 32/256.

If the result of the point acquisition lottery is a value greater than "0" (if the point acquisition lottery is won), the main CPU 101 adds that value to the normal point value. The normal point value is used in the point achievement lottery (see step S4165) and is stored in the main RAM 103. The sub-effect display unit 22 (see Figure 1) displays an image (e.g., a meter) corresponding to the normal point value, allowing the player to visually see how many normal points have accumulated. When the meter is full, the point achievement lottery will be held.

When the value of normal points is added (when points are acquired), an effect indicating that points have been acquired may be displayed. In this embodiment, normal points are added according to the internal winning combination (replay or common bell) corresponding to the "Rep Bell" shown in FIG. 122(b). Therefore, for example, when a replay or common bell is won after all reels have stopped, a post-replay or common bell winning effect (in which light flows from the screen or reel backlight toward an image (meter, etc.) corresponding to the normal point value) may be displayed, making it easier for players to understand the gameplay characteristics of the meter increasing when a replay or common bell is won. Furthermore, an effect suggesting point acquisition or a point acquisition confirmation effect may be generated after the start lever is operated but before all reels have stopped. This configuration increases the excitement, especially when the player is close to reaching 100 points.

Furthermore, if the normal point value after the addition is 100 or more, the main CPU 101 sets the point arrival flag on. The point arrival flag is a flag indicating that the normal point value has reached 100. If the point arrival flag is set on in one unit game, when point-related processing in the next unit game of that unit game begins, the main CPU 101 sets the point arrival flag off and sets the point arrival lottery flag on. The point arrival lottery flag is a flag indicating that a point arrival lottery will be held.

After executing the processing of step S4163, the main CPU 101 determines whether the normal point value reached 100 in the previous unit game (step S4164). The main CPU 101 can recognize that the normal point value reached 100 in the previous unit game by referencing the point-at-a-point lottery flag.

If it is determined that the normal point value reached 100 in the previous unit game, the main CPU 101 increments the value of the point attainment counter by 1 (step S4165). As described above, the value of the point attainment counter indicates the number of times the normal point value has reached 100, and is stored in the main RAM 103. The value of the point attainment counter is incremented only in the normal stage, and is cleared when transitioning to a ball attainment state other than the normal ball-out state (normal stage, chance stage A, and chance stage B).

Then, the main CPU 101 executes point mode lottery processing (step S4166). In this processing, the main CPU 101 refers to the point mode lottery table (see FIG. 107) and conducts a lottery based on a random number value to determine the result of the point mode lottery (point mode) as one of "point mode 1," "point mode 2," or "point mode 3." This processing is similar to the processing of step S4063 in FIG. 105, so a description thereof will be omitted here.

Next, the main CPU 101 executes a lottery process when a point is reached (step S4167). In this process, the main CPU 101 refers to the lottery table when a point is reached (see FIG. 123) and performs a lottery based on a random number value to determine the result of the lottery when a point is reached: "High Probability 2," "Chance Stage A," "Chance Stage B," "Promotion Chance," or "Pseudo BIG."

The point reaching lottery table shown in Figure 123 is provided for each of the following: ``Point reaching count counter '0''', ``Point reaching count counter '1, 3, 5, 7''', ``Point reaching count counter '2, 4, 6, 8''', and ``Point reaching count counter '9 or more' or ``Point mode 3'''. If the value of the point reach count counter is "0", the point reach lottery table shown in FIG. 123(a) is referenced; if the value of the point reach count counter is any of "1", "3", "5", or "7" (odd numbers), the point reach lottery table shown in FIG. 123(b) is referenced; if the value of the point reach count counter is any of "2", "4", "6", or "8" (even numbers), the point reach lottery table shown in FIG. 123(c) is referenced; and if the value of the point reach count counter is "9" or greater or if the point mode (see step S4166) is "point mode 3", the point reach lottery table shown in FIG. 123(d) is referenced.

In each point-reaching lottery table, lottery values corresponding to the results of the point-reaching lottery (High Probability 2, Chance Stage A, Chance Stage B, Promotion Chance, and Pseudo BIG) are specified for each setting value ("Setting 1," "Setting 2," "Setting 3," "Setting 4," "Setting 5," and "Setting 6"). The probability of each result of the point-reaching lottery being determined can be expressed as "lottery value specified for that result / number of all random number values that can be drawn (random number denominator: 256)."

For example, if the value of the point arrival counter is any of "1," "3," "5," or "7" (an odd number) and the setting value is set to 6, the result of the lottery when the point is reached will be "High Probability 2" with a probability of 170/256, "Chance Stage A" with a probability of 76/256, "Chance Stage B" with a probability of 2/256, and "Promotion Chance" with a probability of 8/256. Furthermore, if the value of the point arrival counter is "9" or greater, or if the point mode is "Point Mode 3," then "Pseudo BIG" will be determined with a probability of 256/256 regardless of the setting value.

If "High Probability 2" is determined as the result of the lottery when the point is reached, the main CPU 101 sets the "High Probability 2" winning flag when the point is reached to ON. The "High Probability 2" winning flag when the point is reached is a flag indicating that "High Probability 2" has been determined as the result of the lottery when the point is reached. Details will be described later, but when the "High Probability 2" winning flag when the point is reached is set to ON, there is a possibility that the probability mode will shift from "Not High Probability" or "High Probability 1" to "High Probability 2" or "High Probability 3" (see step S4085 in FIG. 108).

Also, if "Chance Stage A" is determined as the result of the lottery when the point is reached (if Chance Stage A is won), the main CPU 101 adds 1 to the value of the chance stage A win count counter. As described above, a value of 1 or more on the chance stage A win count counter indicates that chance stage A has been won. As will be described in detail later, if chance stage A is won, the player transitions to chance stage A via a premonition state (see step S4084 in FIG. 108). Also, if "Chance Stage A" is determined as the result of the lottery when the point is reached (if Chance Stage A is won), the main CPU 101 adds 1 to the value of the chance stage A win count counter when the point is reached. A value of 1 or more on the chance stage A win count counter when the point is reached indicates that chance stage A has been won by the lottery when the point is reached.

Also, if "Chance Stage B" is determined as the result of the lottery when the point is reached (if Chance Stage B is won), the main CPU 101 adds 1 to the value of the chance stage B win count counter. As described above, a value of 1 or more on the chance stage B win count counter indicates that chance stage B has been won. As will be described in detail later, if chance stage B is won, the player transitions to chance stage B via a premonition state (see step S4084 in FIG. 108). Also, if "Chance Stage B" is determined as the result of the lottery when the point is reached (if Chance Stage B is won), the main CPU 101 adds 1 to the value of the chance stage B win count counter when the point is reached. A value of 1 or more on the chance stage B win count counter indicates that chance stage B has been won by the lottery when the point is reached.

Also, if a "promotion chance" is determined as a result of the point-reaching lottery (the promotion chance is won), the main CPU 101 sets the promotion chance winning flag on. As described above, the promotion chance winning flag is a flag indicating that the promotion chance has been won. As will be described in detail later, if the promotion chance is won, the state transitions to the promotion chance via a premonition state (see step S4084 in Figure 108). Also, if a "promotion chance" is determined as a result of the point-reaching lottery (the promotion chance is won), the main CPU 101 sets the point-reaching promotion chance winning flag on. The point-reaching promotion chance winning flag is a flag indicating that the promotion chance has been won in the point-reaching lottery.

Furthermore, if a "pseudo BIG" is determined as the result of the lottery when the point is reached (if the pseudo BIG is won), the main CPU 101 sets the pseudo BIG winning flag to ON. As described above, the pseudo BIG winning flag is a flag indicating that a pseudo BIG has been won. As will be described in detail later, if a pseudo BIG is won, the state transitions to the pseudo BIG via a premonition state (see step S4084 in FIG. 108). Further, if a "pseudo BIG" is determined as the result of the lottery when the point is reached (if the pseudo BIG is won), the main CPU 101 sets the pseudo BIG winning flag to ON when the point is reached. The pseudo BIG winning flag when the point is reached is a flag indicating that a pseudo BIG has been won in the lottery when the point is reached.

As a result of the above, if the value of the point reach counter is "9" or greater, or if point mode 3 is set as the point mode and a lottery is held when the point reach is reached, it is confirmed that a transition to pseudo BIG will occur. The image (e.g., meter, etc.) corresponding to the normal point value described above is colored according to the current point mode. As a result, for example, if point mode 3 is set as the point mode, the color of the meter will be a predetermined color (e.g., gold). Note that when processing step S4167 is executed, the main CPU 101 subtracts 100 from the normal point value.

If it is determined in step S4164 that the normal point value in the previous unit game has not reached 100, or after executing the processing of step S4167, the main CPU 101 terminates this subroutine.

Note that even if step S4164 determines that the normal point value reached 100 in the previous unit game, if a player has won Chance Stage A, Chance Stage B, Promotion Chance, or Pseudo BIG (if the value of the Chance Stage A Winning Count Counter or the Chance Stage B Winning Count Counter is 1 or greater, or if the Promotion Chance Winning Flag or Pseudo BIG Winning Flag is set to ON), if High Probability 3 is set as the probability mode, or if the player is in a premonition state, the main CPU 101 will end this subroutine without executing the processing of steps S4165 to S4167. However, even in these cases, if Point Mode 3 is set as the point mode, the main CPU 101 may execute the processing of steps S4165 to S4167.

Here, the premonition state includes a false premonition state, and even when in a false premonition state, the processing of steps S4165 to S4167 (lottery upon point arrival) is not executed. As described above, when a lottery upon point arrival is conducted, 100 is subtracted from the normal point value. However, by looking at the meter displayed on the sub-effect display unit 22, the player can recognize that a lottery upon point arrival has been conducted. If a lottery upon point arrival were not conducted during the premonition state, but a lottery upon point arrival was conducted during a false premonition state, the player could potentially discern from the meter that the premonition effect currently being performed is a false premonition effect. In this regard, in this embodiment, the false premonition state is managed by the main control circuit 100 in the same way as the real premonition state (see step S4146 in Figure 118), so it is possible to configure the system so that a lottery is not held when a point is reached during the false premonition state. This makes it difficult to distinguish between real premonition effects and false premonition effects, and ensures the player's anticipation for the premonition effects.

When the normal point value reaches a specified value (100 points), an effect indicating that 100 points have been reached may be displayed. Here, the effect may simply indicate that a lottery based on points (lottery when points are reached) is available, but it may also be possible to use the current point mode, set value, or value of the point-reach counter to display an effect that suggests the likelihood of winning a special bonus or the type of bonus that is likely to be won. For example, the default effect may be a flashing meter pattern when 100 points are reached, and if a lightning strikes the meter, it may indicate a high likelihood of winning a bonus (for example, a promotion chance or pseudo-BIG). Alternatively, an effect may be displayed that is unrelated to the image of the meter or the like that corresponds to the normal point value. For example, the type of mini-character that appears on the screen may suggest the likelihood of winning.

In addition, in this embodiment, since the point-reaching lottery process is executed in the unit game following the one in which 100 points are reached, it is possible to configure the unit game following the one in which the above-mentioned replay or common bell post-winning effect occurred to generate effects suggesting the likelihood of winning the bonus or the type of bonus that is likely to be won, during the unit game following the one in which the above-mentioned replay or common bell post-winning effect occurred. For example, the effects may be generated in accordance with the results of the point-reaching lottery after the lottery is performed and before the results of the lottery are announced (for example, after the start lever is operated in the unit game in which the point-reaching lottery was performed and before all reels have stopped). In this case, the results of the point-reaching lottery may be announced when all reels have stopped in the unit game in which the lottery was performed.

Furthermore, the following configurations can be adopted for point-related processing during the premonition state. For example, during the premonition state, the meter may be hidden regardless of whether it is a false premonition or a real premonition, allowing the player to concentrate on the premonition effects (Specification Example 1). Furthermore, even if the normal point value reaches 100 points during a false premonition and a lottery is held when the point is reached, the result may not be announced immediately, but after the premonition ends, an effect may be presented indicating that the point has been reached or that a lottery has been held when the point is reached, or the lottery results may be announced (Specification Example 2). Furthermore, Specification Example 1 and Specification Example 2 may be combined.

Here, if a point-attainment lottery is conducted in a non-premonition state, the result of the point-attainment lottery can be configured to be announced when all reels in the unit game in which the point-attainment lottery was conducted have stopped. Specification example 2, when a point-attainment lottery is conducted in a premonition state, generally announces the result after the premonition ends. However, if the lottery result is a promotion chance or pseudo-BIG win, it is desirable to announce the result during the premonition. In this case, it is advisable to present a winning notification effect corresponding to the presentation state during the false premonition, so that it does not feel unnatural. Note that, as mentioned above, when a false premonition occurs, it is possible to infer the setting value. However, when announcing a promotion chance or pseudo-BIG win through the point-attainment lottery during a false premonition, it is more difficult to guess the setting if it is unclear whether the premonition was false or not.

Also, if the normal point value reaches 100 points during a false premonition, the execution of the point-reaching lottery may be postponed until the end of the false premonition, or until 1 to 3 games after the end of the false premonition (Specification Example 3). In this case, the effects indicating the point has been reached, the effects indicating that the point-reaching lottery has been held, and the notification of the lottery results are also postponed. By doing this, in a situation where a transition to a promotion chance or pseudo-BIG is made possible by winning the lottery, it becomes easy for the player to understand whether the transition to the premonition was triggered by the winning lottery, or whether the transition to the promotion chance or pseudo-BIG was made as a result of the lottery held during the premonition.

<Lottery processing for the number of premonition games when a flag is drawn during the normal stage>
FIG. 124 is a flowchart showing the lottery processing for determining the number of premonition plays when a flag is drawn during the normal stage, which is performed in the main control circuit. FIG. 125 is a flowchart showing the lottery processing for determining the number of premonition plays when a pseudo BIG or promotion chance is drawn during the normal stage, which is performed in the main control circuit. FIG. 126 is a flowchart showing the lottery processing for determining the number of premonition plays when a chance stage is drawn during the normal stage, which is performed in the main control circuit. FIG. 127(a) is a diagram showing a lottery table for determining the number of premonition plays when a pseudo BIG or promotion chance is drawn during the normal stage (when a point is reached). FIG. 127(b) is a diagram showing a lottery table for determining the number of premonition plays when a pseudo BIG or promotion chance is drawn during the normal stage (when the ceiling is reached). FIG. 127(c) is a diagram showing a lottery table for determining the number of premonition plays when a pseudo BIG or promotion chance is drawn during the normal stage (basic). Fig. 128(d) is a diagram showing a lottery table for determining the number of premonition plays when a chance stage is won during the normal stage (when a point is reached). Fig. 128(e) is a diagram showing a lottery table for determining the number of premonition plays when a chance stage is won during the normal stage (basic). Fig. 128(f) is a diagram showing a lottery table for determining the number of premonition plays when a ceiling fake is won during the normal stage.

The premonition play number lottery process when a flag is drawn during the normal stage shown in Figure 124 is a process performed by the main control circuit 100 in step S4084 of Figure 108 (processing exclusive to the normal stage).

In the premonition play number lottery process when a flag is drawn during the normal stage, the main CPU 101 first determines whether the value of the premonition play number counter is 0 (step S4181). The value of the premonition play number counter indicates the remaining number of unit plays controlled in the premonition state, and is stored in the main RAM 103. In the premonition state during the normal stage, a premonition effect is performed suggesting a transition to one of chance stage A, chance stage B, promotion chance, or pseudo BIG. A value of the premonition play number counter that is not 0 (1 or greater) indicates that the premonition state is in progress.

If the main CPU 101 determines that the value of the premonition play count counter is not 0, it terminates this subroutine. On the other hand, if the main CPU 101 determines that the value of the premonition play count counter is 0, it determines whether the pseudo BIG winning flag is set to ON (step S4182). As described above, the pseudo BIG winning flag is a flag that indicates that a pseudo BIG has been won (see step S4082 in FIG. 108, step S4144 in FIG. 118, and step S4167 in FIG. 121).

If it is determined that the pseudo BIG winning flag is not set to ON, the main CPU 101 determines whether the promotion chance winning flag is set to ON (step S4183). As described above, the promotion chance winning flag is a flag that indicates that the promotion chance has been won (see step S4082 in FIG. 108, step S4144 in FIG. 118, and step S4167 in FIG. 121).

If it is determined in step S4182 that the pseudo BIG winning flag is set to ON, or if it is determined in step S4183 that the promotion chance winning flag is set to ON, the main CPU 101 executes a lottery process for determining the number of premonition plays when a pseudo BIG or promotion chance is won during the normal stage (step S4184). Here, the lottery process for determining the number of premonition plays when a pseudo BIG or promotion chance is won during the normal stage will be explained using FIG. 125.

In the premonition play count lottery process for winning a pseudo BIG or promotion chance during the normal stage, the main CPU 101 first determines whether the point-achieved pseudo BIG lottery flag or the point-achieved promotion chance lottery flag is set to ON (step S4201). As described above, the point-achieved pseudo BIG lottery flag is a flag indicating that a pseudo BIG has been won in the point-achieved lottery, and the point-achieved promotion chance lottery flag is a flag indicating that a promotion chance has been won in the point-achieved lottery (see step S4167 in FIG. 121).

If it is determined that the pseudo BIG winning flag when a point is reached or the promotion chance winning flag when a point is reached is set to ON, the main CPU 101 executes a lottery for the number of premonition plays when a pseudo BIG/promotion chance is won during the normal stage (when a point is reached) (step S4202). In this process, the main CPU 101 references the lottery table for the number of premonition plays when a pseudo BIG/promotion chance is won during the normal stage (when a point is reached) (see FIG. 127(a)) and performs a lottery based on a random number value to determine the result of the lottery for the number of premonition plays when a pseudo BIG/promotion chance is won during the normal stage (when a point is reached) (premonition play number candidate) as one of "0," "1-4," "5-8," "9-12," "13-16," "17-20," "21-24," "25-28," and "29-32."

The premonition play number lottery table for winning the pseudo BIG/promotion chance during the normal stage (when a point is reached) shown in Figure 127(a) specifies lottery values corresponding to the results of the premonition play number lottery for winning the pseudo BIG/promotion chance during the normal stage (when a point is reached) ("0," "1-4," "5-8," "9-12," "13-16," "17-20," "21-24," "25-28," and "29-32"). The probability of each result being determined in the premonition play number lottery for winning the pseudo BIG/promotion chance during the normal stage (when a point is reached) can be expressed as "lottery value specified for that result / number of all random number values that can be drawn (random number denominator: 256)."

As a result, when a pseudo-BIG/promotion chance is won during the normal stage (when a point is reached), the result of the premonition play number lottery (premonition play number candidate) is determined to be "0" with a probability of 64/256, "1-4" with a probability of 32/256, "5-8" with a probability of 128/256, "9-12" with a probability of 16/256, and "13-16" with a probability of 16/256. The determined premonition play number candidate may include multiple numerical values. In this case, the main CPU 101 further determines one of the multiple numerical values by performing a lottery based on a random number value. The main CPU 101 determines the single numerical value determined in this manner as the premonition play number. Note that when point mode 3 is set as the point mode, "0" may be determined as the premonition play number.

Then, the main CPU 101 adds 1 to the number of premonition games determined in step S4202 and sets the number of premonition games counter (step S4203), and ends this subroutine.

If it is determined in step S4201 that neither the point-reaching pseudo-BIG lottery flag nor the point-reaching promotion chance lottery flag is set to ON, the main CPU 101 determines whether the ceiling-reaching pseudo-BIG lottery flag or the ceiling-reaching promotion chance lottery flag is set to ON (step S4204). As described above, the ceiling-reaching pseudo-BIG lottery flag is a flag indicating that a pseudo-BIG lottery has been won in the ceiling-reaching lottery type lottery, and the ceiling-reaching promotion chance lottery flag is a flag indicating that a promotion chance has been won in the ceiling-reaching lottery type lottery (see step S4144 in FIG. 118).

If it is determined that the pseudo BIG win flag when the ceiling is reached or the promotion chance win flag when the ceiling is reached is set to ON, the main CPU 101 executes a lottery for the number of premonition plays when a pseudo BIG/promotion chance is won during the normal stage (when the ceiling is reached) (step S4205). In this process, the main CPU 101 references the lottery table for the number of premonition plays when a pseudo BIG/promotion chance is won during the normal stage (when the ceiling is reached) (see FIG. 127(b)) and performs a lottery based on a random number value to determine the result of the lottery for the number of premonition plays when a pseudo BIG/promotion chance is won during the normal stage (when the ceiling is reached) (premonition play number candidate) as one of "0," "1-4," "5-8," "9-12," "13-16," "17-20," "21-24," "25-28," and "29-32."

The basic structure of the lottery table for the number of premonition plays when a pseudo BIG/promotion chance is won during the normal stage (when the ceiling is reached) shown in Figure 127(b) is the same as the lottery table for the number of premonition plays when a pseudo BIG/promotion chance is won during the normal stage (when the point is reached) shown in Figure 127(a). As a result, the main CPU 101 determines the value of one as the number of premonition plays.

Then, the main CPU 101 adds 1 to the number of premonition games determined in step S4205 and sets the number of premonition games counter (step S4206), and ends this subroutine.

If it is determined in step S4204 that neither the ceiling-reaching pseudo BIG winning flag nor the ceiling-reaching promotion chance winning flag is set to ON, the main CPU 101 executes a lottery for the number of premonition plays when a pseudo BIG/promotion chance is won during the normal stage (basic) (step S4207). In this process, the main CPU 101 refers to a lottery table for the number of premonition plays when a pseudo BIG/promotion chance is won during the normal stage (basic) (see FIG. 127(c)) and performs a lottery based on a random number value to determine the result of the lottery for the number of premonition plays when a pseudo BIG/promotion chance is won during the normal stage (basic) (premonition play number candidate) from among "0," "1-4," "5-8," "9-12," "13-16," "17-20," "21-24," "25-28," and "29-32."

The basic configuration of the lottery table for the number of premonition plays when a pseudo BIG/promotion chance is won during the normal stage (basic) shown in Figure 127(c) is the same as the lottery table for the number of premonition plays when a pseudo BIG/promotion chance is won during the normal stage (when a point is reached) shown in Figure 127(a). As a result, the main CPU 101 determines the number of premonition plays to be one.

Then, the main CPU 101 adds 1 to the number of premonition games determined in step S4207 and sets the number of premonition games counter (step S4208), and ends this subroutine.

The above has described, using Figure 125, the premonition play number lottery process when a pseudo-BIG/promotion chance is won during the normal stage, which is performed in step S4184 of Figure 124. Returning to Figure 124, the explanation will be continued. After executing the process of step S4184, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

If it is determined in step S4183 that the promotion chance lottery flag is not set to ON, the main CPU 101 determines whether the value of the chance stage B win count counter is 1 or greater (step S4185). As described above, a value of the chance stage B win count counter being 1 or greater indicates that the chance stage B has been won (see step S4082 in FIG. 108 and step S4167 in FIG. 121).

If the main CPU 101 determines that the value of the chance stage B winning count counter is less than 1 (0), it determines whether the value of the chance stage A winning count counter is 1 or greater (step S4186). As described above, a value of the chance stage A winning count counter of 1 or greater indicates that the player has won chance stage A (see step S4082 in FIG. 108 and step S4167 in FIG. 121).

If it is determined in step S4185 that the value of the chance stage B winning count counter is 1 or greater, or if it is determined in step S4186 that the value of the chance stage A winning count counter is 1 or greater, the main CPU 101 executes a lottery process for determining the number of premonition plays when a chance stage is won during the normal stage (step S4187). Here, the lottery process for determining the number of premonition plays when a chance stage is won during the normal stage will be explained using FIG. 126.

In the premonition play count lottery process for winning a chance stage during the normal stage, the main CPU 101 first determines whether the value of the chance stage A win count counter when the point is reached or the value of the chance stage B win count counter when the point is reached is 1 or greater (step S4221). As described above, a value of the chance stage A win count counter when the point is reached being 1 or greater indicates that chance stage A has been won by the lottery when the point is reached, and a value of the chance stage B win count counter when the point is reached being 1 or greater indicates that chance stage B has been won by the lottery when the point is reached (see step S4167 in FIG. 121).

If the main CPU 101 determines that the value of the chance stage A win count counter when a point is reached or the value of the chance stage B win count counter when a point is reached is 1 or greater, the main CPU 101 executes a lottery for the number of premonition plays when a chance stage is won during the normal stage (when a point is reached) (step S4222). In this process, the main CPU 101 references the premonition play count lottery table for chance stage wins during the normal stage (when a point is reached) (see FIG. 128(d)) and performs a lottery based on a random number value to determine the result of the premonition play count lottery (premonition play number candidate) when a chance stage is won during the normal stage (when a point is reached) from among "0," "1-4," "5-8," "9-12," "13-16," "17-20," "21-24," "25-28," and "29-32."

The basic structure of the lottery table for determining the number of premonition plays when a chance stage is won during the normal stage (when a point is reached) shown in Figure 128 (d) is the same as the lottery table for determining the number of premonition plays when a pseudo BIG/promotion chance is won during the normal stage (when a point is reached) shown in Figure 127 (a). As a result, the main CPU 101 determines the number of premonition plays to be one.

Then, the main CPU 101 adds 1 to the number of premonition games determined in step S4222 and sets the number of premonition games counter (step S4223), and ends this subroutine.

If it is determined in step S4221 that the value of the chance stage A win count counter when the point is reached and the value of the chance stage B win count counter when the point is reached are both less than 1 (0), the main CPU 101 executes a lottery for the number of premonition plays when a chance stage is won during the normal stage (basic) (step S4224). In this process, the main CPU 101 references the premonition play number lottery table for when a chance stage is won during the normal stage (basic) (see FIG. 128(e)) and performs a lottery based on a random number value to determine the result of the lottery for the number of premonition plays when a chance stage is won during the normal stage (basic) (premonition play number candidate) as one of "0," "1-4," "5-8," "9-12," "13-16," "17-20," "21-24," "25-28," and "29-32."

The basic configuration of the premonition play number lottery table when a chance stage is won during the normal stage (basic) shown in Figure 128(e) is the same as the premonition play number lottery table when a pseudo BIG/promotion chance is won during the normal stage (when a point is reached) shown in Figure 127(a). As a result, the main CPU 101 determines the number of premonition plays to be one.

Then, the main CPU 101 adds 1 to the number of premonition games determined in step S4224 and sets the number of premonition games counter (step S4225), and ends this subroutine.

The above has described, using Figure 126, the process of determining the number of premonition games when a chance stage lottery is won during the normal stage, which is performed in step S4187 of Figure 124. Returning to the explanation of Figure 124, after executing the process of step S4187, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine. Note that if a winning lottery for chance stage A and a winning lottery for chance stage B are stocked, the process of step S4187 will be executed in the first unit game (the first game of the normal stage) after transitioning from chance stage A or chance stage B to the normal stage.

If it is determined in step S4186 that the value of the chance stage A winning count counter is less than 1 (0), the main CPU 101 determines whether the ceiling fake winning flag is set to ON (step S4188). As described above, the ceiling fake winning flag is a flag that indicates that a ceiling fake winning has occurred (see step S4146 in FIG. 118).

If the main CPU 101 determines that the ceiling fake winning flag is not set to ON, it terminates this subroutine. On the other hand, if it determines that the ceiling fake winning flag is set to ON, the main CPU 101 executes a lottery for the number of premonition plays when a ceiling fake winning lottery occurs during the normal stage (step S4189). In this process, the main CPU 101 refers to the lottery table for the number of premonition plays when a ceiling fake winning lottery occurs during the normal stage (see FIG. 128(f)) and performs a lottery based on a random number value to determine the result of the lottery for the number of premonition plays when a ceiling fake winning lottery occurs during the normal stage (premonition play number candidate): "0," "1-4," "5-8," "9-12," "13-16," "17-20," "21-24," "25-28," or "29-32."

The basic structure of the lottery table for determining the number of premonition plays when a ceiling fake win occurs during the normal stage shown in Figure 128 (f) is the same as the lottery table for determining the number of premonition plays when a pseudo BIG/promotion chance win occurs during the normal stage (when a point is reached) shown in Figure 127 (a). As a result, the main CPU 101 determines the number of premonition plays to be one.

Then, the main CPU 101 adds 1 to the number of premonition games determined in step S4189 and sets the number of premonition games counter (step S4190), and ends this subroutine.

As described above, when the initial value is set in the premonition play count counter in step S4203, step S4206, or step S4208 of FIG. 125, step S4223 or step S4225 of FIG. 126, or step S4190 of FIG. 124, the main CPU 101 generates premonition effect start command data and stores the generated premonition effect start command data in the communication data storage area of the main RAM 103. The premonition effect start command data stored in the communication data storage area is transmitted from the main control circuit 100 to the sub-control circuit 200 in the communication data transmission process (see step S204 of FIG. 32). This enables the sub-control circuit 200 to recognize that it is time to start the premonition effect, and performs processing to start displaying images, outputting sounds, outputting lights, etc. for the premonition effect. As a result, the premonition effect is performed (the game is controlled to be in the premonition state) for the number of unit games corresponding to the value set in the premonition play count counter.

<Normal stage premonition game number counter management process>
Figure 129 is a flowchart showing the premonition game number counter management process for the normal stage performed in the main control circuit.

The normal stage premonition play number counter management process shown in Figure 129 is a process performed by the main control circuit 100 in step S15 (end of game state control process) of Figure 23 (main processing) when the current ball output state is the normal stage (see Figure 93). The main CPU 101 can recognize the current ball output state by referring to the ball output state flag storage area (see Figure 20) in the main RAM 103.

In the normal stage premonition play number counter management process, the main CPU 101 first determines whether the value of the premonition play number counter (see steps S4203, S4206, and S4208 in FIG. 125, steps S4223 and S4225 in FIG. 126, and step S4190 in FIG. 124) is greater than 0 (step S4241). If it determines that the value of the premonition play number counter is 0, the main CPU 101 terminates this subroutine.

On the other hand, if the main CPU 101 determines that the value of the premonition play number counter is greater than 0, it subtracts 1 from the value of the premonition play number counter (step S4242). Then, the main CPU 101 determines whether the value of the premonition play number counter is 0 (step S4243). If it determines that the value of the premonition play number counter is not 0, the main CPU 101 terminates this subroutine.

On the other hand, if the main CPU 101 determines that the value of the premonition play count counter is 0, the main CPU 101 ends the premonition effect (step S4244). In this process, the main CPU 101 generates premonition effect end command data and stores the generated premonition effect end command data in the communication data storage area of the main RAM 103. The premonition effect end command data stored in the communication data storage area is transmitted from the main control circuit 100 to the sub-control circuit 200 in the communication data transmission process (see step S204 in Figure 32). This enables the sub-control circuit 200 to recognize that it is time to end the premonition effect, and performs processing to end the image display, sound output, light output, etc. that are being performed for the premonition effect.

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether the pseudo BIG winning flag is set to ON (step S4245). As described above, the pseudo BIG winning flag is a flag indicating that a pseudo BIG has been won (see step S4082 in FIG. 108, step S4144 in FIG. 118, and step S4167 in FIG. 121).

If it is determined that the pseudo BIG winning flag is set to ON, the main CPU 101 sets the pseudo BIG transition flag to ON (step S4246). Furthermore, although not shown, the main CPU 101 sets the pseudo BIG winning flag to OFF, and if the point-reaching pseudo BIG winning flag or the ceiling-reaching pseudo BIG winning flag are set to ON, the main CPU 101 also sets these flags to OFF. The main CPU 101 then terminates this subroutine.

The pseudo BIG transition flag is a flag that indicates the timing to start the pseudo BIG. The main CPU 101 updates the payout status flag storage area (see Figure 20) during the game start status control process (see step S6 in Figure 23) for the unit game following the unit game in which the pseudo BIG transition flag was set to ON. This causes a transition to the pseudo BIG.

If it is determined in step S4245 that the pseudo BIG winning flag is not set to ON, the main CPU 101 determines whether the promotion chance winning flag is set to ON (step S4247). As described above, the promotion chance winning flag is a flag indicating that the promotion chance has been won (see step S4082 in FIG. 108, step S4144 in FIG. 118, and step S4167 in FIG. 121).

If it is determined that the promotion chance winning flag is set to ON, the main CPU 101 sets the promotion chance transition flag to ON (step S4248). Furthermore, although not shown, the main CPU 101 sets the promotion chance winning flag to OFF, and if the point-reaching promotion chance winning flag or the ceiling-reaching promotion chance winning flag are set to ON, the main CPU 101 also sets these flags to OFF. The main CPU 101 then terminates this subroutine.

The promotion chance transition flag is a flag that indicates the timing to start the promotion chance. The main CPU 101 updates the payout status flag storage area (see Figure 20) during the game start status control process (see step S6 in Figure 23) for the unit game following the unit game in which the promotion chance transition flag was set to ON. This causes a transition to the promotion chance.

If it is determined in step S4247 that the promotion chance winning flag is not set to ON, the main CPU 101 determines whether the value of the chance stage B winning count counter is 1 or greater (step S4249). As described above, a value of the chance stage B winning count counter being 1 or greater indicates that the chance stage B has been won (see step S4082 in FIG. 108 and step S4167 in FIG. 121).

If the main CPU 101 determines that the value of the chance stage B winning count counter is 1 or greater, it sets the chance stage B transition flag to ON (step S4250). Furthermore, although not shown, the main CPU 101 subtracts 1 from the value of the chance stage B winning count counter. Furthermore, if the premonition state that is ending this time was initiated by a chance stage winning premonition play count lottery being conducted during the normal stage (when a point is reached) (see step S4222 in FIG. 126), the main CPU 101 subtracts 1 from the value of the chance stage B winning count counter when a point is reached. The main CPU 101 then terminates this subroutine.

The Chance Stage B transition flag is a flag that indicates the timing to start Chance Stage B. The main CPU 101 updates the payout status flag storage area (see Figure 20) during the game start status control process (see step S6 in Figure 23) for the unit game following the unit game in which the Chance Stage B transition flag was set to ON. This causes a transition to Chance Stage B.

If it is determined in step S4249 that the value of the chance stage B winning count counter is less than 1 (0), the main CPU 101 determines whether the value of the chance stage A winning count counter is 1 or greater (step S4251). As described above, a value of the chance stage A winning count counter of 1 or greater indicates that chance stage A has been won (see step S4082 in FIG. 108 and step S4167 in FIG. 121). If it is determined that the value of the chance stage A winning count counter is less than 1 (0), the main CPU 101 terminates this subroutine.

On the other hand, if the main CPU 101 determines that the value of the chance stage A winning count counter is 1 or greater, it sets the chance stage A transition flag to ON (step S4252). Furthermore, although not shown, the main CPU 101 subtracts 1 from the value of the chance stage A winning count counter. Furthermore, if the premonition state that is ending this time was initiated by the execution of a premonition play count lottery when the chance stage is won during the normal stage (when the point is reached) (see step S4222 in FIG. 126), the main CPU 101 subtracts 1 from the value of the chance stage A winning count counter when the point is reached. The main CPU 101 then terminates this subroutine.

The Chance Stage A transition flag is a flag that indicates the timing to start Chance Stage A. The main CPU 101 updates the payout status flag storage area (see Figure 20) during the game start status control process (see step S6 in Figure 23) for the unit game following the unit game in which the Chance Stage A transition flag was set to ON. This causes a transition to Chance Stage A.

As mentioned above, if you win any of Chance Stage A, Chance Stage B, Promotion Chance, and Pseudo BIG, you will transition through the premonition state and then to Chance Stage A, Chance Stage B, Promotion Chance, or Pseudo BIG. On the other hand, even if you win the Ceiling Fake, the ball output state will not change. Also, if you win multiple ball output states among Chance Stage A, Chance Stage B, Promotion Chance, and Pseudo BIG, the highest priority will be to transition to Pseudo BIG, followed by Promotion Chance, then Chance Stage B, and then Chance Stage A.

In addition, if the player enters the premonition state by winning the ceiling fake and then wins the promotion chance or pseudo BIG during the premonition state, the player may be set to transition to the promotion chance or pseudo BIG when the premonition state ends. Also, if the player enters the premonition state by winning chance stage A or chance stage B and then wins the promotion chance or pseudo BIG during the premonition state, the player may be set to transition to the promotion chance or pseudo BIG, or to chance stage A or chance stage B when the premonition state ends.

<Probability mode related processing>
Fig. 130 is a flowchart showing the probability mode related processing performed in the main control circuit. Fig. 131(a) is a diagram showing the high probability 2 transition lottery table (1). Fig. 131(b) is a diagram showing the high probability 2 transition lottery table (2). Fig. 131(c) is a diagram showing the high probability 2 transition lottery table (3). Fig. 131(d) is a diagram showing the high probability 2 drop lottery table.

The probability mode-related processing shown in Figure 130 is processing performed by the main control circuit 100 in step S4085 of Figure 108 (normal stage-only processing).

In the probability mode-related processing, the main CPU 101 first determines whether "F_Cherry" (see Figures 90 and 91) has been determined as the internal winning combination in the internal winning combination determination processing (see step S64 in Figure 26) (step S4261).

If it is determined that "F_Cherry" has been determined as the internal winning combination, the main CPU 101 executes the High Probability 2 Transition Lottery Process (1) (step S4262). In this process, the main CPU 101 refers to the High Probability 2 Transition Lottery Table (1) (see FIG. 131(a)) and performs a lottery based on a random number value to determine one of "0", "10", "20", "30", "40", or "50" as the result of the High Probability 2 Transition Lottery (1).

In the High Probability 2 Transition Lottery Table (1) shown in FIG. 131(a), lottery values corresponding to the results of the High Probability 2 Transition Lottery (1) ("0," "10," "20," "30," "40," and "50") are specified for each setting value ("Setting 1," "Setting 2," "Setting 3," "Setting 4," "Setting 5," and "Setting 6"). The probability of each result of the High Probability 2 Transition Lottery (1) being determined can be expressed as "the lottery value specified for that result / the number of all random number values that can be drawn (random number numerator: 256)." For example, if the setting value 1 is Setting 1, the results of the High Probability 2 Transition Lottery (1) are "0" with a probability of 170/256, "10" with a probability of 58/256, and "20" with a probability of 28/256.

As described above, in the normal ball dispensing state, the probability mode is controlled to one of non-high probability, high probability 1, high probability 2, and high probability 3. When the current probability mode is non-high probability, if a value greater than "0" is determined as the result of the high probability 2 transition lottery (1) (if the high probability 2 transition lottery (1) is won), the main CPU 101 sets the probability mode to high probability 2 and sets the value determined as the result of the high probability 2 transition lottery (1) to the high probability 2 guaranteed number of plays counter (step S4263). The value of the high probability 2 guaranteed number of plays counter indicates the remaining number of unit plays that guarantee staying in high probability 2, and is stored in the main RAM 103. If the value of the high probability 2 guaranteed number of plays counter is greater than 0, it is decremented by 1 each time a unit play is played in high probability 2. Although not shown, this subtraction is performed in step S15 (game end state control process) of FIG. 23 (main process).

Furthermore, when the current probability mode is High Probability 2 and a value greater than "0" is determined as the result of the High Probability 2 Transition Lottery (1) (the High Probability 2 Transition Lottery (1) is won), if the value determined as the result of the High Probability 2 Transition Lottery (1) is greater than the current value of the High Probability 2 Guaranteed Number of Plays Counter, the main CPU 101 sets the value determined as the result of the High Probability 2 Transition Lottery (1) to the High Probability 2 Guaranteed Number of Plays Counter, whereas if the value determined as the result of the High Probability 2 Transition Lottery (1) is equal to or less than the current value of the High Probability 2 Guaranteed Number of Plays Counter, the main CPU 101 discards the value determined as the result of the High Probability 2 Transition Lottery (1).

Furthermore, when the current probability mode is High Probability 1, if a value greater than "0" is determined as the result of the High Probability 2 Transition Lottery (1) (if the High Probability 2 Transition Lottery (1) is won), the main CPU 101 sets the probability mode to High Probability 3, sets the High Probability 3 play count counter to "20", clears the value of the High Probability 1 play count counter, and discards the value determined as the result of the High Probability 2 Transition Lottery (1). Note that when the current probability mode is High Probability 3, the main CPU 101 does not execute the High Probability 2 Transition Lottery (1) even if the determination result of step S4261 is "YES".

If it is determined in step S4261 that "F_Cherry" has not been determined as the internal winning role, or after executing the processing of step S4263, the main CPU 101 determines whether the high probability 2 winning flag when point is reached is set to ON (step S4264). As described above, the high probability 2 winning flag when point is reached is a flag indicating that "high probability 2" has been determined as the result of the lottery when point is reached (see step S4167 in FIG. 121).

If it is determined that the high probability 2 transition lottery flag is set to ON when the point is reached, the main CPU 101 executes the high probability 2 transition lottery process (2) (step S4265). In this process, the main CPU 101 refers to the high probability 2 transition lottery table (2) (see FIG. 131(b)) and performs a lottery based on a random number value to determine the result of the high probability 2 transition lottery (2) as one of "0," "10," "20," "30," "40," or "50." The basic configuration of the high probability 2 transition lottery table (2) shown in FIG. 131(b) is the same as the high probability 2 transition lottery table (1) shown in FIG. 131(a).

Similar to the processing of step S4263, when the current probability mode is not high probability, if a value greater than "0" is determined as the result of the high probability 2 transition lottery (2) (the high probability 2 transition lottery (2) is won), the main CPU 101 sets the probability mode to high probability 2 and sets the value determined as the result of the high probability 2 transition lottery (2) to the high probability 2 guaranteed number of plays counter (step S4266).

Furthermore, when the current probability mode is High Probability 2 and a value greater than "0" is determined as the result of the High Probability 2 Transition Lottery (2) (the High Probability 2 Transition Lottery (2) is won), if the value determined as the result of the High Probability 2 Transition Lottery (2) is greater than the current value of the High Probability 2 Guaranteed Number of Plays Counter, the main CPU 101 sets the value determined as the result of the High Probability 2 Transition Lottery (2) to the High Probability 2 Guaranteed Number of Plays Counter, whereas if the value determined as the result of the High Probability 2 Transition Lottery (2) is equal to or less than the current value of the High Probability 2 Guaranteed Number of Plays Counter, the main CPU 101 discards the value determined as the result of the High Probability 2 Transition Lottery (2).

Furthermore, when the current probability mode is High Probability 1, if a value greater than "0" is determined as the result of the High Probability 2 Transition Lottery (2) (if the High Probability 2 Transition Lottery (2) is won), the main CPU 101 sets the probability mode to High Probability 3, sets the High Probability 3 play count counter to "20", clears the value of the High Probability 1 play count counter, and discards the value determined as the result of the High Probability 2 Transition Lottery (2). Note that when the current probability mode is High Probability 3, the main CPU 101 does not execute the High Probability 2 Transition Lottery (2) even if the determination result in step S4264 is "YES".

If it is determined in step S4264 that the High Probability 2 Winning Flag upon Point Reaching is not set to ON, or after executing the processing of step S4266, the main CPU 101 determines whether it is time to transition from Chance Stage A or Chance Stage B to the Normal Stage (step S4267). As described above, transition to the Normal Stage occurs in the game start state control processing (see step S6 in Figure 23) for the unit game following the unit game in which the Normal Stage transition flag was set to ON. In the game start state control processing for the unit game that transitions to the Normal Stage, the payout state flag storage area (see Figure 20) is updated to transition to the Normal Stage, and then the game start processing for the Normal Stage shown in Figure 104 is performed. In the processing of step S4267, if the current unit game has transitioned to the normal stage (if the current unit game is the first game of the normal stage), and the ball output state from which the transition occurred is chance stage A or chance stage B, the main CPU 101 determines that it is time to transition from chance stage A or chance stage B to the normal stage.

If it is determined that it is time to transition from Chance Stage A or Chance Stage B to the Normal Stage, the main CPU 101 executes High Probability 2 Transition Lottery Processing (3) (step S4268). In this processing, the main CPU 101 refers to the High Probability 2 Transition Lottery Table (3) (see FIG. 131(c)) and performs a lottery based on a random number value to determine the result of the High Probability 2 Transition Lottery (3) as one of "0," "10," "20," "30," "40," or "50." The basic configuration of the High Probability 2 Transition Lottery Table (3) shown in FIG. 131(c) is the same as the High Probability 2 Transition Lottery Table (1) shown in FIG. 131(a).

Similar to the processing of step S4263, when the current probability mode is not high probability, if a value greater than "0" is determined as the result of the High Probability 2 Transition Lottery (3) (the High Probability 2 Transition Lottery (3) is won), the main CPU 101 sets the probability mode to High Probability 2 and sets the value determined as the result of the High Probability 2 Transition Lottery (3) to the High Probability 2 Guaranteed Play Count Counter (step S4269).

Furthermore, when the current probability mode is High Probability 2, if a value greater than "0" is determined as the result of the High Probability 2 Transition Lottery (3) (if the High Probability 2 Transition Lottery (3) is won), the main CPU 101 sets the value determined as the result of the High Probability 2 Transition Lottery (3) to the High Probability 2 Guaranteed Number of Plays Counter if the value determined as the result of the High Probability 2 Transition Lottery (3) is greater than the current value of the High Probability 2 Guaranteed Number of Plays Counter, whereas it discards the value determined as the result of the High Probability 2 Transition Lottery (3) if the value determined as the result of the High Probability 2 Transition Lottery (3) is equal to or less than the current value of the High Probability 2 Guaranteed Number of Plays Counter.

Furthermore, when the current probability mode is High Probability 1, if a value greater than "0" is determined as the result of the High Probability 2 Transition Lottery (3) (if the High Probability 2 Transition Lottery (3) is won), the main CPU 101 sets the probability mode to High Probability 3, sets the High Probability 3 play count counter to "20", clears the value of the High Probability 1 play count counter, and discards the value determined as the result of the High Probability 2 Transition Lottery (3). Note that when the current probability mode is High Probability 3, the main CPU 101 does not execute the High Probability 2 Transition Lottery (3) even if the determination result in step S4267 is "YES".

If it is determined in step S4267 that it is not time to transition from Chance Stage A or Chance Stage B to the Normal Stage, or after executing the processing of step S4269, the main CPU 101 determines whether the current probability mode is either High Probability 2 or High Probability 3 (step S4270). If it is determined that the current probability mode is either High Probability 2 or High Probability 3, the main CPU 101 determines whether the value of the High Probability 2 Guaranteed Play Count Counter is "0" (step S4271).

If the main CPU 101 determines that the value of the High Probability 2 Guaranteed Play Count Counter is "0", it executes a High Probability 2 Rollover Lottery process (step S4272). In this process, the main CPU 101 refers to the High Probability 2 Rollover Lottery Table (see FIG. 131(d)) and performs a lottery based on the payout flag (see FIG. 97) in payout flag group 4 and the random number value, thereby determining whether the result of the High Probability 2 Rollover Lottery will be a "No Win" or a "Win."

In the high probability 2 drop lottery table shown in Figure 131 (d), lottery values corresponding to the results of the high probability 2 drop lottery ("non-winning" and "winning") are specified for each ball output flag in ball output flag group 4 ("Other" and "Non-drop role"). The probability of each result of the high probability 2 drop lottery being determined can be expressed as "lottery value specified for that result / number of all random number values that can be drawn (random number denominator: 256)." As a result, if the ball output flag in ball output flag group 4 is "Other," there is a 192/256 probability of winning the high probability 2 drop lottery, and if the ball output flag in ball output flag group 4 is "Non-drop role," the high probability 2 drop lottery will always be a non-winning one. If the high probability 2 drop lottery is won, the main CPU 101 will transition the probability mode from high probability 2 or high probability 3 to non-high probability.

If it is determined in step S4270 that the current probability mode is neither High Probability 2 nor High Probability 3, if it is determined in step S4271 that the value of the High Probability 2 guaranteed play count counter is not "0", or after executing the processing of step S4272, the main CPU 101 terminates this subroutine.

<Pre-processing for promotion chances>
Fig. 132 is a flowchart showing the pre-promotion chance process carried out in the main control circuit, and Fig. 133 is a diagram showing a promotion chance transition lottery table.

The promotion chance pre-processing shown in Figure 132 is processing performed by the main control circuit 100 in step S4105 of Figure 113 (common processing for normal ball output state).

In the promotion chance pre-processing, the main CPU 101 first determines whether the value of the premonition play number counter (see steps S4203, S4206, and S4208 in FIG. 125, steps S4223 and S4225 in FIG. 126, and step S4190 in FIG. 124) is 1 (step S4281). If it is determined that the value of the premonition play number counter is not 1, the main CPU 101 terminates this subroutine.

On the other hand, if the main CPU 101 determines that the value of the premonition play count counter is 1, it determines whether the promotion chance winning flag is set to ON (step S4282). As described above, the promotion chance winning flag is a flag that indicates that a promotion chance has been won (see step S4082 in FIG. 108, step S4144 in FIG. 118, and step S4167 in FIG. 121).

Note that if the promotion chance winning flag is set to ON and a pseudo-BIG is won, the promotion chance winning flag will be set to OFF. Therefore, the fact that the promotion chance winning flag is set to ON means that a pseudo-BIG has not been won. Therefore, the result of the determination in step S4282 being "YES" can be said to mean that a transition to a promotion chance is scheduled for the next unit game.

If the main CPU 101 determines that the promotion chance lottery flag is not set to ON, it terminates this subroutine. On the other hand, if it determines that the promotion chance lottery flag is set to ON, the main CPU 101 executes point mode lottery processing (step S4283). In this processing, the main CPU 101 refers to the point mode lottery table (see FIG. 107) and performs a lottery based on a random number value to determine the result of the point mode lottery (point mode) as one of "point mode 1," "point mode 2," or "point mode 3."

This process is similar to the process of step S4063 in Figure 105, so a detailed explanation will be omitted here. Note that when executing the process of step S4283, if the value of normal points (see Figure 121) is 100 or greater, the main CPU 101 adds the quotient obtained when dividing the value of normal points by 100 to the value of the point reach count counter. For example, if the value of normal points is 250, then 250 ÷ 100 = 2 with a remainder of 50, so 2 is added to the value of the point reach count counter and the remainder of 50 points is discarded.

After executing the processing of step S4283, the main CPU 101 executes a promotion chance transition lottery process (step S4284). In this process, the main CPU 101 refers to the promotion chance transition lottery table (see FIG. 133) and performs a lottery based on a random number value to determine the result of the promotion chance transition lottery: "No Win," "Pseudo BIG," or "Pseudo BIG (ED)."

In the promotion chance transition lottery table shown in Figure 133, lottery values corresponding to the results of the promotion chance transition lottery ('No Win', 'Pseudo BIG', and 'Pseudo BIG (ED)') are specified for each of "Point Mode 1," "Point Mode 2," and "Point Mode 3, Normal Mode 7, or Normal Mode 8." The probability of each result of the promotion chance transition lottery being determined can be expressed as "lottery value specified for that result / number of all random number values that can be drawn (random number denominator: 256)."

As a result, when point mode 1 is set as the point mode, the result of the lottery when moving on to the promotion chance will be determined to be "no winning" with a probability of 256/256, and when point mode 2 is set as the point mode, the result of the lottery when moving on to the promotion chance will be determined to be "no winning" with a probability of 256/256. Also, when point mode 3 is set as the point mode, or when the normal mode is mode 7 or mode 8, the result of the lottery when moving on to the promotion chance will be determined to be "pseudo BIG" with a probability of 256/256.

If "Pseudo BIG" is determined as the result of the promotion chance transition lottery (if the Pseudo BIG is won), the main CPU 101 sets the promotion chance winning flag to OFF. Then, the main CPU 101 updates the payout status flag storage area (see FIG. 20) in the game start status control process (see step S6 in FIG. 23) for the unit game following the unit game in which the promotion chance transition lottery was drawn. This causes a transition to Pseudo BIG.

After executing step S4284, the main CPU 101 terminates this subroutine.

The above explains, using Figures 104 to 133, the various lottery processes performed in the normal stage (long freeze lottery process during normal play, lottery process for transition to high probability 1 when normal specified number of plays is reached, lottery process for ceiling fake preparation, lottery process for setting the ceiling preparation flag, lottery process for winning lottery type when ceiling is reached, lottery process for setting the ceiling fake preparation flag, lottery process when transitioning to promotion chance, lottery process for freeze during normal stage, lottery process for transition flag/winning lottery during normal stage, lottery process for point acquisition, lottery process for point mode, lottery process when point is reached, lottery process for number of premonition plays when flag is won during normal stage, lottery process for transition to high probability 2 (1) to (3), and lottery process for falling to high probability 2).

The order in which these processes are performed is not particularly limited, and may be configured to be executed in the following order: normal long freeze lottery processing, normal specified number of plays transition lottery processing, normal stage freeze lottery processing, ceiling fake preparation lottery processing, ceiling preparation flag set lottery processing, ceiling fake preparation flag set lottery processing, winning lottery type lottery processing when ceiling is reached, normal stage transition flag/winning lottery flag lottery processing, point acquisition lottery processing, point mode lottery processing, point reach lottery processing, premonition number of plays when normal stage flag is won lottery processing, high probability 2 transition lottery processing (1)-(3), high probability 2 fall lottery processing, and promotion chance transition lottery processing.

In this case, if the normal long freeze lottery is won (if both the normal long freeze lottery (1) and the normal long freeze lottery (2) are won), subsequent processing may not be executed. Also, if the normal stage freeze lottery is won (if the normal stage freeze lottery results in a "promotion chance" or "pseudo BIG"), subsequent processing may not be executed.

<Chance Stage Game Start Processing>
Fig. 134 is a flowchart showing the process at the start of games for the chance stage, which is carried out in the main control circuit. Fig. 135 is a diagram showing a lottery table for determining the guaranteed number of chance stage games at the start of the chance stage. Fig. 136 is a diagram showing a lottery table for determining pseudo-BIG and promotion chances during the chance stage. Fig. 137 is a diagram showing a lottery table for determining the additional number of games during the chance stage.

The game start processing for the chance stage shown in Figure 134 is processing performed by the main control circuit 100 in the processing of step S6 (game start state control processing) of Figure 23 (main processing) when the current ball output state is chance stage A or chance stage B (see Figure 93) (for example, when the judgment result of step S85 of Figure 27 is "NO"). The main CPU 101 can recognize the current ball output state by referring to the ball output state flag storage area of the main RAM 103 (see Figure 20).

In the game start processing for the chance stage, the main CPU 101 first determines whether it is the start of chance stage A or chance stage B (step S4301). As described above, transition to chance stage A occurs during the game start state control processing (see step S6 of FIG. 23) for the unit game following a unit game in which the chance stage A transition flag (see step S4252 of FIG. 129) is set to on. In the game start state control processing for a unit game that transitions to chance stage A, the payout state flag storage area (see FIG. 20) is updated to transition to chance stage A, and then the game start processing for the chance stage shown in FIG. 134 is performed. Similarly, transition to chance stage B occurs during the game start state control processing (see step S6 of FIG. 23) for the unit game following a unit game in which the chance stage B transition flag (see step S4250 of FIG. 129) is set to on. In the game start state control process for a unit game that transitions to chance stage B, the payout state flag storage area (see FIG. 20) is updated to transition to chance stage B, and then game start process for the chance stage shown in FIG. 134 is performed. In the process of step S4301, if the current unit game has transitioned to chance stage A or chance stage B (if the current unit game is the first game of chance stage A or chance stage B), the main CPU 101 determines that it is the start of chance stage A or chance stage B.

If it is determined that it is the start of Chance Stage A or Chance Stage B, the main CPU 101 clears High Probability 2 (step S4302). In this process, if High Probability 2 is set as the probability mode, the main CPU 101 clears the value of the High Probability 2 guaranteed play count counter and transitions the probability mode from High Probability 2 to Non-High Probability.

Next, the main CPU 101 executes a chance stage start chance stage guaranteed play number lottery process (step S4303). In this process, the main CPU 101 refers to the chance stage start chance stage guaranteed play number lottery table (see FIG. 135) and performs a lottery based on a random number value to determine one of "20", "40", "60", "80", or "100" as the result of the chance stage start chance stage guaranteed play number lottery (chance stage guaranteed play number).

In the chance stage start chance stage guaranteed number of plays lottery table shown in Figure 135, lottery values corresponding to the results of the chance stage start chance stage guaranteed number of plays lottery ('20', '40', '60', '80', and '100') are specified for each of "Chance Stage A" and "Chance Stage B." The probability of each outcome of the chance stage start chance stage guaranteed number of plays lottery being determined can be expressed as "lottery value specified for that result / number of all random number values that can be drawn (random number denominator: 256)."

As a result, in chance stage A, the result of the lottery for the number of guaranteed chance stage plays at the start of the chance stage (number of guaranteed chance stage plays) is determined to be "40" with a probability of 250/256, "60" with a probability of 5/256, and "100" with a probability of 1/256. Also, in chance stage B, the result of the lottery for the number of guaranteed chance stage plays at the start of the chance stage (number of guaranteed chance stage plays) is determined to be "20" with a probability of 250/256, "40" with a probability of 5/256, and "100" with a probability of 1/256. In chance stage B, a smaller value is more likely to be determined as the number of guaranteed chance stage plays compared to chance stage A.

After executing the processing of step S4303, the main CPU 101 sets the number of guaranteed chance stage games determined in step S4303 in the chance stage guaranteed game number counter (step S4304). The value of the chance stage guaranteed game number counter indicates the remaining number of unit games that guarantee staying in chance stage A or chance stage B, and is stored in the main RAM 103. As described below, the value of the chance stage guaranteed game number counter is decremented by 1 each time a unit game is played in chance stage A or chance stage B.

If it is determined in step S4301 that it is not the start of chance stage A or chance stage B, or after executing the processing of step S4304, the main CPU 101 executes the normal ball output state common processing (step S4305). This processing is the same as the processing of step S4043 in FIG. 104, and therefore a description thereof will be omitted here. Note that in chance stage A or chance stage B, even if "ceiling fake preparation in progress" is determined as a result of the ceiling fake preparation lottery (see step S4127 in FIG. 114) (if the lottery is won during ceiling fake preparation), ceiling fake preparation in progress is not set, and the lottery result is discarded.

After executing the processing of step S4305, the main CPU 101 executes a pseudo BIG/promotion chance lottery process during the chance stage (step S4306). In this process, the main CPU 101 refers to the pseudo BIG/promotion chance lottery table during the chance stage (see FIG. 136) and performs a lottery based on the payout flag in payout flag group 6 (see FIG. 97) and the random number value, thereby determining the result of the pseudo BIG/promotion chance lottery during the chance stage as either "No Win," "Promotion Chance," or "Pseudo BIG."

The pseudo-BIG/promotion chance lottery table during the chance stage shown in Figure 136 is provided for each of the payout flags in payout flag group 6 ("Other," "Reach Eye," "Reach Eye BB," and "1-piece role"). If the ball dispensing flag in ball dispensing flag group 6 is "other", the chance stage pseudo BIG/promotion chance lottery table shown in FIG. 136(a) is referenced, if the ball dispensing flag in ball dispensing flag group 6 is "reach eye", the chance stage pseudo BIG/promotion chance lottery table shown in FIG. 136(b) is referenced, if the ball dispensing flag in ball dispensing flag group 6 is "reach eye BB", the chance stage pseudo BIG/promotion chance lottery table shown in FIG. 136(c) is referenced, and if the ball dispensing flag in ball dispensing flag group 6 is "1-piece role", the chance stage pseudo BIG/promotion chance lottery table shown in FIG. 136(d) is referenced.

In the Pseudo BIG/Promotion Chance Lottery Table for each Chance Stage, lottery values corresponding to the results of the Pseudo BIG/Promotion Chance Lottery during the Chance Stage ("No Win", "Promotion Chance", and "Pseudo BIG") are specified for each of "Chance Stage A" and "Chance Stage B". The probability of each outcome of the Pseudo BIG/Promotion Chance Lottery during the Chance Stage can be expressed as "lottery value specified for that result / number of all random number values that can be drawn (random number denominator: 256)".

As a result, in Chance Stage A, as a result of the pseudo BIG/promotion chance lottery during the chance stage, if the ball output flag in ball output flag group 6 is "Other," a "no win" is determined with a probability of 256/256; if the ball output flag in ball output flag group 6 is "Reach Eye," a "promotion chance" is determined with a probability of 256/256; if the ball output flag in ball output flag group 6 is "Reach Eye BB," a "pseudo BIG" is determined with a probability of 256/256; and if the ball output flag in ball output flag group 6 is "1-piece role," a "no win" is determined with a probability of 256/256.

Also, in Chance Stage B, as a result of the pseudo BIG/promotion chance lottery during the chance stage, if the ball output flag in ball output flag group 6 is "Other," a "no win" is determined with a probability of 256/256; if the ball output flag in ball output flag group 6 is "Reach Eye," a "promotion chance" is determined with a probability of 256/256; if the ball output flag in ball output flag group 6 is "Reach Eye BB," a "pseudo BIG" is determined with a probability of 256/256; and if the ball output flag in ball output flag group 6 is "1-piece role," a "no win" is determined with a probability of 192/256, a "promotion chance" is determined with a probability of 58/256, and a "pseudo BIG" is determined with a probability of 6/256.

In this way, when the payout flag in payout flag group 6 is "Other," "Reach mark," or "Reach mark BB," the probability of determining each outcome of the pseudo BIG/promotion chance lottery during the chance stage is the same in chance stage A and chance stage B. On the other hand, when the payout flag in payout flag group 6 is "1-piece role," in chance stage A, "promotion chance" or "pseudo BIG" cannot be determined as the result of the pseudo BIG/promotion chance lottery during the chance stage, whereas in chance stage B, "promotion chance" or "pseudo BIG" can be determined as the result of the pseudo BIG/promotion chance lottery during the chance stage. This makes chance stage B a more advantageous payout state than chance stage A.

Also, as mentioned above, in the non-high probability, high probability 1, and high probability 2 stages during the normal stage, the probability that a "promotion chance" or "pseudo BIG" will be determined as a result of the normal stage transition flag/winning flag lottery (see step S4082 in Figure 108) is 0 (see Figures 110 and 111). In contrast, in chance stage A or chance stage B, the probability that a "promotion chance" or "pseudo BIG" will be determined as a result of the chance stage pseudo BIG/promotion chance lottery is relatively high. As a result, chance stage A or chance stage B has a more advantageous ball output state than the normal stage.

If a "promotion chance" is determined as a result of the pseudo-BIG/promotion chance lottery during the chance stage (if the promotion chance is won), the main CPU 101 sets the promotion chance winning flag to ON. The promotion chance winning flag is a flag indicating that the promotion chance has been won. Details will be described later, but if the promotion chance is won, the state will transition to the promotion chance via the premonition state (see transition condition (I) in Figures 94 and 95).

Furthermore, if "Pseudo BIG" is determined as the result of the Pseudo BIG/Promotion Chance Lottery during the Chance Stage (if a Pseudo BIG is won), the main CPU 101 sets the Pseudo BIG winning flag to ON. The Pseudo BIG winning flag is a flag indicating that a Pseudo BIG has been won. As will be described in detail later, if a Pseudo BIG is won, the state transitions to Pseudo BIG via the premonition state (see transition condition (J) in Figures 94 and 95). Note that if a "Pseudo BIG" is determined as the result of the Pseudo BIG/Promotion Chance Lottery during the Chance Stage (if a Pseudo BIG is won) while the promotion chance winning flag is set to ON, the main CPU 101 discards the promotion chance winning flag (sets it to OFF).

In addition, in chance stage A or chance stage B, if the ball output flag in ball output flag group 6 is "Reach Eye", that is, if any of "F_Reach Eye Role A", "F_Reach Eye Role B", or "F_Reach Eye Role C" is determined as the internal winning role (see FIG. 97), the promotion chance will always be won. Also, in chance stage A or chance stage B, if the ball output flag in ball output flag group 6 is "Reach Eye BB", that is, if any of "F_BB Confirmed Role A" or "F_BB Confirmed Role B" is determined as the internal winning role (see FIG. 97), the pseudo BIG will always be won.

As described above, if any of "F_Reach Eye Role A," "F_Reach Eye Role B," and "F_Reach Eye Role C" is determined as the internal winning combination, when the first stopping operation is performed on the left reel 3L, "One Reach Eye" is displayed stopped along the winning line (see Figure 92). "One Reach Eye" is a winning combination that can only be achieved if any of "F_Reach Eye Role A," "F_Reach Eye Role B," and "F_Reach Eye Role C" is determined as the internal winning combination. Therefore, when "One Reach Eye" is displayed stopped along the winning line, it means that any of "F_Reach Eye Role A," "F_Reach Eye Role B," and "F_Reach Eye Role C" has been determined as the internal winning combination, and by visually recognizing "One Reach Eye," the player can understand that they have won the promotion chance.

Also, as mentioned above, if either "F_BB Confirmed Role A" or "F_BB Confirmed Role B" is determined as the internal winning role, when the first stopping operation is performed on the left reel 3L, "BB Confirmed Reach One Piece" will be stopped and displayed along the winning line (see Figure 92). "BB Confirmed Reach One Piece" is a winning combination that can only be achieved if either "F_BB Confirmed Role A" or "F_BB Confirmed Role B" is determined as the internal winning role. Therefore, when "BB Confirmed Reach One Piece" is stopped and displayed along the winning line, it means that either "F_BB Confirmed Role A" or "F_BB Confirmed Role B" has been determined as the internal winning role, and by visually recognizing the "BB Confirmed Reach One Piece", the player can understand that they have won the pseudo-BIG.

In this way, the "One Ball to Reach" and "One Ball to Confirm BB Reach" serve to notify the player that they have won a promotion chance or pseudo-BIG (that the transition to the AT state has been confirmed). As will be described later, in this embodiment, a penalty will be incurred if a stop operation (irregular press) is performed on the center reel 3C or right reel 3R as the first stop operation. Therefore, in ball-out states other than the AT state (pseudo-BIG and pseudo-REG), the player will basically play by performing a stop operation on the left reel 3L as the first stop operation.

In contrast, in the normal stage, if any of "F_Reach Eye Role A," "F_Reach Eye Role B," "F_Reach Eye Role C," "F_BB Confirmed Role A," and "F_BB Confirmed Role B" is determined as the internal winning role, i.e., if the payout flag in payout flag group 5 is "Other" (see Figure 97), the probability of winning a promotion chance or pseudo-BIG is extremely low (see Figures 110 to 112). In light of the above roles of "One Reach Eye" and "One BB Confirmed Reach," it is not appropriate to show a "One Reach Eye" or "One BB Confirmed Reach" to a player even if they have not won either a promotion chance or a pseudo-BIG.

Therefore, in the normal stage, if any of "F_Reach Eye Role A," "F_Reach Eye Role B," "F_Reach Eye Role C," "F_BB Confirmed Role A," and "F_BB Confirmed Role B" is determined as the internal winning role, and neither the promotion chance nor the pseudo-BIG has been won, a notification is issued to perform a stop operation (irregular press) on the center reel 3C or the right reel 3R as the first stop operation. This notification (irregular press navigation) is issued by displaying on the main display device 210 an image suggesting that a stop operation (irregular press) on the center reel 3C or the right reel 3R be performed as the first stop operation. By performing a stop operation in accordance with the irregular press navigation, "one normal number" is displayed stopped along the pay line, and "one reach eye" or "one BB confirmed reach eye" does not appear. In this case, no notification is given on the instruction monitor, but even if any of "F_reach eye role A", "F_reach eye role B", "F_reach eye role C", "F_BB confirmed role A" and "F_BB confirmed role B" is determined as the internal winning role, the number of medals paid out will not differ depending on the type of stop operation (see Figure 92), so there is no particular problem.

In this way, Chance Stage A and Chance Stage B are ball output states in which a transition to the AT state is more likely to be announced through "one ball in the reach" or "one ball in the BB confirmed reach." In contrast, the normal stage is a ball output state in which the likelihood of a transition to the AT state is suggested through presentations controlled by the sub-control circuit 200, rather than through "one ball in the reach" or "one ball in the BB confirmed reach." In the normal stage, multiple presentation modes are provided according to probability mode, point mode, etc., and the background image displayed on the main display device 210 differs in each presentation mode. As a result, the likelihood of a transition is suggested depending on which presentation mode the player is in (background image).

In the normal stage, if any of "F_Reach Eye Role A," "F_Reach Eye Role B," "F_Reach Eye Role C," "F_BB Confirmed Role A," and "F_BB Confirmed Role B" is determined as the internal winning role, there is a possibility of winning a promotion chance or pseudo BIG in the normal stage freeze lottery (see step S4081 in Figure 108 and Figure 109) or the normal stage long freeze lottery (see step S4102 in Figure 113).If a promotion chance or pseudo BIG is won in the normal stage freeze lottery or normal stage long freeze lottery, when a stop operation is performed on the left reel 3L as the first stop operation, "one reach eye" or "one BB confirmed reach eye" will be displayed stopped along the activated line. On the other hand, if the promotion chance or pseudo-BIG is not won in the normal stage freeze lottery or normal stage long freeze lottery, the above irregular button push navigation will be performed, and the stopping operation will be performed according to the irregular button push navigation, so the "one ball in reach" or "one ball in reach to confirm BB" will not appear.

After executing the processing of step S4306, the main CPU 101 executes a lottery process for determining the number of premonition plays when a flag is won during the chance stage (step S4307). The lottery process for determining the number of premonition plays when a flag is won during the chance stage will be described later using Figure 138.

After executing the processing of step S4307, the main CPU 101 executes a lottery process for adding the number of plays during the chance stage (step S4308). In this process, the main CPU 101 refers to the lottery table for adding the number of plays during the chance stage (see FIG. 137) and performs a lottery based on the payout flag in payout flag group 5 (see FIG. 97) and the random number value, thereby determining one of "0", "20", "40", "60", "80", or "100" as the result of the lottery for adding the number of plays during the chance stage.

The chance stage number of plays addition lottery table shown in FIG. 137 is provided for each of the ball output flags in ball output flag group 5 ("Other," "Parallel Watermelon," "Diagonal Watermelon," and "Cherry"). If the ball output flag in ball output flag group 5 is "Other," the chance stage number of plays addition lottery table shown in FIG. 137(a) is referenced. If the ball output flag in ball output flag group 5 is "Parallel Watermelon," the chance stage number of plays addition lottery table shown in FIG. 137(b) is referenced. If the ball output flag in ball output flag group 5 is "Diagonal Watermelon," the chance stage number of plays addition lottery table shown in FIG. 137(c) is referenced. If the ball output flag in ball output flag group 5 is "Cherry," the chance stage number of plays addition lottery table shown in FIG. 137(d) is referenced.

In each chance stage play count addition lottery table, a lottery value corresponding to the outcome of the chance stage play count addition lottery ("0", "20", "40", "60", "80", and "100") is specified for each setting value ("Setting 1", "Setting 2", "Setting 3", "Setting 4", "Setting 5", and "Setting 6"). The probability of each outcome of the chance stage play count addition lottery being determined can be expressed as "lottery value specified for that outcome / number of all random number values that can be drawn (random number denominator: 256)".

For example, if the payout flag in payout flag group 5 is "Diagonal Watermelon" and the setting value is set to 6, the result of the chance stage play count addition lottery will be "0" with a probability of 126/256, "20" with a probability of 128/256, "40" with a probability of 1/256, and "60" with a probability of 1/256. The main CPU 101 adds the value determined as the result of the chance stage play count addition lottery to the value of the chance stage guaranteed play count counter.

After executing step S4308, the main CPU 101 terminates this subroutine.

<Lottery processing for the number of premonition games when a flag is drawn during the chance stage>
Fig. 138 is a flowchart showing a process for lottery determining the number of premonition games when a flag is won during the chance stage, which is performed in the main control circuit. Fig. 139 is a diagram showing a lottery table for lottery determining the number of premonition games when a flag is won during the chance stage.

The process for determining the number of premonition games when a chance stage flag is drawn, shown in Figure 138, is performed by the main control circuit 100 in step S4307 of Figure 134 (processing at the start of games for the chance stage).

In the premonition play number lottery process when a chance stage flag is drawn, the main CPU 101 first determines whether the value of the premonition play number counter is 0 (step S4321). The value of the premonition play number counter indicates the remaining number of unit plays controlled in the premonition state, and is stored in the main RAM 103. In the premonition state during chance stage A or chance stage B, a premonition effect is performed suggesting a transition to either a promotion chance or a pseudo BIG. A value of the premonition play number counter that is not 0 (1 or greater) indicates that the premonition state is in progress.

If the main CPU 101 determines that the value of the premonition play count counter is not 0, it terminates this subroutine. On the other hand, if the main CPU 101 determines that the value of the premonition play count counter is 0, it determines whether the pseudo BIG winning flag is set to ON (step S4322). As described above, the pseudo BIG winning flag is a flag that indicates that a pseudo BIG has been won (see step S4306 in FIG. 134 and step S4144 in FIG. 118).

If it is determined that the pseudo BIG winning flag is not set on, the main CPU 101 determines whether the promotion chance winning flag is set on (step S4323). As described above, the promotion chance winning flag is a flag that indicates that a promotion chance has been won (see step S4306 in FIG. 134 and step S4144 in FIG. 118). If it is determined that the promotion chance winning flag is not set on, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

If it is determined in step S4322 that the pseudo BIG winning flag is set to ON, or if it is determined in step S4323 that the promotion chance winning flag is set to ON, the main CPU 101 executes a lottery for the number of premonition plays when the chance stage flag is won (step S4324). In this process, the main CPU 101 refers to the lottery table for the number of premonition plays when the chance stage flag is won (see FIG. 139) and performs a lottery based on the payout flag in payout flag group 6 (see FIG. 97) and the random number value, thereby determining one of "0", "1", "2", "3", "4", "5", "6", "7", or "8" as the result of the lottery for the number of premonition plays when the chance stage flag is won.

The premonition play number lottery table when a flag is drawn during the chance stage shown in Figure 139 is provided for each of the payout flags in payout flag group 6 ("Other," "Reach Eye," "Reach Eye BB," and "1-piece role"). If the payout flag in payout flag group 6 is "other", the premonition play number lottery table when a chance stage flag is won shown in FIG. 139(a) is referenced, if the payout flag in payout flag group 6 is "reach eye", the premonition play number lottery table when a chance stage flag is won shown in FIG. 139(b) is referenced, if the payout flag in payout flag group 6 is "reach eye BB", the premonition play number lottery table when a chance stage flag is won shown in FIG. 139(c) is referenced, and if the payout flag in payout flag group 6 is "1-piece role", the premonition play number lottery table when a chance stage flag is won shown in FIG. 139(d) is referenced.

In the lottery table for the number of premonition plays when a flag during a chance stage is drawn, lottery values corresponding to the results of the lottery for the number of premonition plays when a flag during a chance stage is drawn ("0," "1," "2," "3," "4," "5," "6," "7," and "8") are specified for each of "Chance Stage A" and "Chance Stage B." The probability of each result of the lottery for the number of premonition plays when a flag during a chance stage is drawn can be expressed as "lottery value specified for that result / number of all random number values that can be drawn (random number denominator: 256)."

For example, in Chance Stage A, if the payout flag in Payout Flag Group 6 is "Other," the result of the lottery for the number of premonition plays when the flag during the Chance Stage is drawn will be "0" with a probability of 64/256, and "1" with a probability of 192/256. Also, in Chance Stage B, if the payout flag in Payout Flag Group 6 is "1-piece role," the result of the lottery for the number of premonition plays when the flag during the Chance Stage is drawn will be "1" with a probability of 8/256, "2" with a probability of 192/256, and "3" with a probability of 56/256.

After executing the processing of step S4325, the main CPU 101 sets the premonition play number counter to a number determined as a result of the premonition play number lottery when the chance stage flag is won, plus 1 (step S4325), and ends this subroutine.

In this way, when the initial value is set in the premonition play count counter, the main CPU 101 generates premonition effect start command data and stores the generated premonition effect start command data in the communication data storage area of the main RAM 103. The premonition effect start command data stored in the communication data storage area is transmitted from the main control circuit 100 to the sub-control circuit 200 in the communication data transmission process (see step S204 in Figure 32). This enables the sub-control circuit 200 to recognize that it is time to start the premonition effect, and performs processing to start displaying images, outputting sounds, outputting lights, etc. for the premonition effect. As a result, the premonition effect is performed (the game is controlled to be in the premonition state) for the number of unit games corresponding to the value set in the premonition play count counter.

<Counter management process for chance stage>
FIG. 140 is a flowchart showing the chance stage counter management process carried out in the main control circuit.

The chance stage counter management process shown in Figure 140 is a process performed by the main control circuit 100 in step S15 (game end state control process) of Figure 23 (main processing) when the current ball dispensing state is chance stage A or chance stage B (see Figure 93). The main CPU 101 can recognize the current ball dispensing state by referencing the ball dispensing state flag storage area (see Figure 20) in the main RAM 103.

In the chance stage counter management process, the main CPU 101 first determines whether the value of the premonition play number counter (see step S4325 in FIG. 138) is greater than 0 (step S4341). If it determines that the value of the premonition play number counter is 0, the main CPU 101 subtracts 1 from the value of the chance stage guaranteed play number counter (step S4342). Then, the main CPU 101 determines whether the value of the chance stage guaranteed play number counter is 0 (step S4343). If it determines that the value of the chance stage guaranteed play number counter is not 0, the main CPU 101 terminates this subroutine.

On the other hand, if the main CPU 101 determines that the value of the chance stage guaranteed play count counter is 0, it sets the normal stage transition flag to ON (step S4344) and ends this subroutine. As described above, the normal stage transition flag is a flag that indicates the timing to start the normal stage. The main CPU 101 updates the payout status flag storage area (see FIG. 20) in the game start status control process (see step S6 in FIG. 23) for the unit game following the unit game in which the normal stage transition flag was set to ON. This causes a transition to the normal stage (see transition conditions (F) and (H) in FIGS. 94 and 95).

If it is determined in step S4341 that the value of the premonition play number counter is greater than 0, the main CPU 101 determines whether the value of the chance stage guaranteed play number counter is greater than 0 (step S4345). If it is determined that the value of the chance stage guaranteed play number counter is greater than 0, the main CPU 101 subtracts 1 from the value of the chance stage guaranteed play number counter (step S4346).

If it is determined in step S4345 that the value of the chance stage guaranteed play number counter is 0, or after executing the processing of step S4346, the main CPU 101 subtracts 1 from the value of the premonition play number counter (step S4347). Then, the main CPU 101 determines whether the value of the premonition play number counter is 0 (step S4348). If it is determined that the value of the premonition play number counter is not 0, the main CPU 101 terminates this subroutine.

On the other hand, if the main CPU 101 determines that the value of the premonition play count counter is 0, the main CPU 101 ends the premonition effect (step S4349). In this process, the main CPU 101 generates premonition effect end command data and stores the generated premonition effect end command data in the communication data storage area of the main RAM 103. The premonition effect end command data stored in the communication data storage area is transmitted from the main control circuit 100 to the sub-control circuit 200 in the communication data transmission process (see step S204 in Figure 32). This enables the sub-control circuit 200 to recognize that it is time to end the premonition effect, and performs processing to end the image display, sound output, light output, etc. that are being performed for the premonition effect.

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether the pseudo BIG winning flag is set to ON (step S4350). As described above, the pseudo BIG winning flag is a flag indicating that a pseudo BIG has been won (see step S4306 in FIG. 134 and step S4144 in FIG. 118).

If it is determined that the pseudo BIG winning flag is set to ON, the main CPU 101 sets the pseudo BIG transition flag to ON (step S4351). Furthermore, although not shown, the main CPU 101 sets the pseudo BIG winning flag to OFF, and if the pseudo BIG winning flag when the ceiling is reached is set to ON, it also sets that flag to OFF. The main CPU 101 then terminates this subroutine.

As described above, the pseudo BIG transition flag is a flag that indicates the timing to start the pseudo BIG. The main CPU 101 updates the payout status flag storage area (see Figure 20) during the game start status control process (see step S6 in Figure 23) for the unit game following the unit game in which the pseudo BIG transition flag was set to ON. This causes a transition to the pseudo BIG.

Here, in Chance Stage A or Chance Stage B, the state transitions to the premonition state only if a pseudo-BIG or promotion chance is won. Therefore, if the determination result in step S4350 is "NO," the promotion chance winning flag is set to ON. Therefore, if it is determined in step S4350 that the pseudo-BIG winning flag is not set to ON, the main CPU 101 sets the promotion chance transition flag to ON (step S4352). Furthermore, although not shown, the main CPU 101 sets the promotion chance winning flag to OFF, and if the promotion chance winning flag when the ceiling is reached is set to ON, it also sets that flag to OFF. Thereafter, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

As described above, the promotion chance transition flag is a flag that indicates the timing to start the promotion chance. The main CPU 101 updates the payout status flag storage area (see Figure 20) during the game start status control process (see step S6 in Figure 23) for the unit game following the unit game in which the promotion chance transition flag was set to ON. This causes a transition to the promotion chance.

As described above, if a player wins either the Promotion Chance or the Pseudo BIG in Chance Stage A or Chance Stage B, the game will transition to the Promotion Chance or the Pseudo BIG via the premonition state. Also, as described above, if a player wins Chance Stage A or Chance Stage B in the normal stage and transitions to the premonition state, and if a player wins the Promotion Chance or the Pseudo BIG during the premonition state, the game can be configured to transition to Chance Stage A or Chance Stage B when the premonition state ends. In this case, the premonition play count counter is set to an initial value during the premonition play count lottery process (see FIG. 138) when the chance stage flag is won at the start of Chance Stage A or Chance Stage B (the first game of Chance Stage A or Chance Stage B), causing the game to transition to the premonition state, and then transitioning to the Promotion Chance or the Pseudo BIG when the premonition state ends.

<Promotion Chance Game Start Processing>
Fig. 141 is a flowchart showing the processing at the start of a promotion chance game carried out in the main control circuit. Figs. 142 and 143 are diagrams showing a promotion chance mode lottery table. Fig. 144 is a diagram showing a promotion chance lottery table. Fig. 145 is a diagram showing a next pseudo game lottery table. Fig. 146 is a diagram showing a pseudo BIG promotion lottery table when the specified number of games has been played. Fig. 147 is a diagram showing a current pseudo game lottery table. Fig. 148 is a diagram showing the contents of the pseudo game.

The promotion chance game start processing shown in Figure 141 is processing performed by the main control circuit 100 in the processing of step S6 (game start state control processing) of Figure 23 (main processing) when the current ball output state is promotion chance (see Figure 93) (for example, when the judgment result of step S85 of Figure 27 is "NO"). The main CPU 101 can recognize the current ball output state by referring to the ball output state flag storage area of the main RAM 103 (see Figure 20).

In the promotion chance game start processing, the main CPU 101 first determines whether the promotion chance has started (step S4361). As described above, the promotion chance is entered during the game start state control processing (see step S6 in FIG. 23) for the unit game following the unit game in which the promotion chance transition flag (see step S4248 in FIG. 129 and step S4352 in FIG. 140) has been set to on. In the game start state control processing for the unit game that transitions to the promotion chance, the payout state flag storage area (see FIG. 20) is updated to transition to the promotion chance, and then the promotion chance game start processing shown in FIG. 141 is performed. In the processing of step S4361, the main CPU 101 determines that the promotion chance has started if the current unit game has transitioned to the promotion chance (if the current unit game is the first game of the promotion chance).

If it is determined that the promotion chance has started, the main CPU 101 sets a predetermined value to the promotion chance play count counter (step S4362). In this process, the main CPU 101 generally sets the promotion chance play count counter to "3." However, if point mode 2 is set as the point mode (see step S4283 in FIG. 132), the main CPU 101 sets the promotion chance play count counter to "5." Furthermore, although not shown, the main CPU 101 clears various information (counters, etc.) set in the normal ball dispensing state. The value of the promotion chance play count counter indicates the remaining number of unit plays that can remain in the promotion chance state, and is stored in the main RAM 103. The value of the promotion chance play count counter is decremented by one each time a unit play is played. Although not shown, this decrement is performed in the process of step S15 (game end state control process) in FIG. 23 (main processing).

Next, the main CPU 101 executes the entry-time long freeze lottery process (step S4363). In this process, the main CPU 101 refers to the entry-time long freeze lottery table (not shown) and conducts a lottery based on a random number value to determine either a "no win" or a "win" as the result of entry-time long freeze lottery (1). If the result of entry-time long freeze lottery (1) is a "win," the main CPU 101 determines either a "no win" or a "win" as the result of entry-time long freeze lottery (2). This results in a 1/256 probability of winning entry-time long freeze lottery (1) and a 1/256 probability of winning entry-time long freeze lottery (2).

If both the entry-time long freeze lottery (1) and the entry-time long freeze lottery (2) are won, a long freeze will occur. The duration of the long freeze that occurs when the entry-time long freeze lottery (1) and the entry-time long freeze lottery (2) are won is the same as the duration of the long freeze that occurs when the normal mode long freeze lottery (1) and the normal mode long freeze lottery (2) (see step S4102 in FIG. 113) are won. If both the entry-time long freeze lottery (1) and the entry-time long freeze lottery (2) are won, the main CPU 101 controls the execution of the long freeze in the main-side presentation control process at the start of play (see step S8 in FIG. 23) for the unit game in which the entry-time long freeze lottery (1) and the entry-time long freeze lottery (2) were performed.

Furthermore, if both the entry-time long freeze lottery (1) and the entry-time long freeze lottery (2) are won, the main CPU 101 controls the execution of the pseudo game after the long freeze ends in the main-side presentation control process at the start of play (see step S8 in Figure 23) for the unit game in which the entry-time long freeze lottery (1) and the entry-time long freeze lottery (2) were performed. As a result, the pseudo game is played following the long freeze.

In addition, if both the Entry Long Freeze Lottery (1) and the Entry Long Freeze Lottery (2) are won, the ball output status flag storage area (see Figure 20) is updated. This causes a transition to pseudo BIG. The main CPU 101 also sets the pseudo BIG (ED) flag to ON. As described above, if the pseudo BIG (ED) flag is set to ON, control will be restored to pseudo BIG when the pseudo BIG termination condition is met, and the pseudo BIG will continue until the advantageous zone ends.

In this embodiment, "continue until the advantageous period ends" essentially means that the advantageous period ends when the difference in number of coins limiter (payout number limiter: for example, when 2,400 coins are reached). As will be described later, when the pseudo BIG (ED) flag is set to ON (transition to pseudo BIG (ED)), 2 is added to the value of the pseudo BIG stock counter. This ensures that control will occur at least three times in pseudo BIG mode, and in this case, it is possible to configure the difference in number of coins limiter to be activated before the three pseudo BIG modes end.

However, the benefit of a long freeze may be something other than a transition to a pseudo-BIG (ED) as described above. For example, when a long freeze occurs, at least a pseudo-BIG or a special bonus of pseudo-BIG or higher may be guaranteed. Special bonuses of pseudo-BIG or higher may include, for example, a guaranteed transition to pseudo-BIG a certain number of times (guaranteed consecutive pseudo-BIGs), or a special advantageous game (pseudo-bonus or AT) that is more valuable than pseudo-BIG. Furthermore, for machines that do not have limiters for the difference in number of coins or number of games, a special pseudo-bonus for a long freeze that continues for a certain period of time (for example, winning 1,000 coins or playing 500 games) may be provided.

In addition, in this embodiment, a long freeze lottery is not conducted in the bonus state, but in machines equipped with a real bonus (special role or role continuous operation device) that increases medals, a long freeze may be generated if a real bonus role is drawn in the promotion chance start game or during the promotion chance (for example, if 3BB is internally drawn), and the time when the bonus is in operation may be made into an add-on specialized zone (for example, a state in which it is easier to win a pseudo BIG, i.e., a state in which it is easier to add to the value of the pseudo BIG stock counter).

In addition, if the Pseudo BIG is controlled again when the Pseudo BIG end conditions are met, a Pseudo BIG end screen may be displayed to indicate the end, and then a Pseudo BIG-compatible pseudo game (such as a "V" combination) may be generated the next time the start lever is operated, creating a consecutive win-like effect. Alternatively, if the Pseudo BIG continues, no pseudo game may be generated and only an effect indicating continuation (such as the display of an image or sound indicating continuation, such as "Not yet!") may be displayed to continue the Pseudo BIG.

After executing the processing of step S4363, the main CPU 101 executes a promotion chance mode lottery process (step S4364). In this process, the main CPU 101 refers to the promotion chance mode lottery table (see Figures 142 and 143) and performs a lottery based on a random number value to determine one of "Mode 1," "Mode 2," "Mode 3," and "Mode 4" as the result of the promotion chance mode lottery (promotion chance mode).

The promotion chance mode lottery tables shown in Figures 142 and 143 are provided for each of the normal modes ("Mode 1," "Mode 2," "Mode 3," "Mode 4," "Mode 5," "Mode 6," "Mode 7," and "Mode 8") determined in the normal transition mode lottery process (see step S4061 in Figure 105), as well as for the "Consecutive Challenge → Promotion Chance Transition."

If the ball output state from which the transition to the promotion chance occurs is the normal ball output state (normal stage, chance stage A, or chance stage B), one of the promotion chance mode lottery tables shown in Figures 142 and 143 (a) to (h) is referenced. Specifically, if the normal mode is "mode 1," the promotion chance mode lottery table shown in Figure 142 (a) is referenced; if the normal mode is "mode 2," the promotion chance mode lottery table shown in Figure 142 (b) is referenced; if the normal mode is "mode 3," the promotion chance mode lottery table shown in Figure 142 (c) is referenced; and if the normal mode is "mode 4," the promotion chance mode lottery table shown in Figure 142 (d) is referenced. If the normal mode is "mode 5", the promotion chance mode lottery table shown in FIG. 142(e) is referenced, if the normal mode is "mode 6", the promotion chance mode lottery table shown in FIG. 143(f) is referenced, if the normal mode is "mode 7", the promotion chance mode lottery table shown in FIG. 143(g) is referenced, and if the normal mode is "mode 8", the promotion chance mode lottery table shown in FIG. 143(h) is referenced. Also, if the ball output state from which the transition to the promotion chance occurs is a consecutive chance challenge, the promotion chance mode lottery table shown in FIG. 143(i) is referenced.

In each promotion chance mode lottery table, lottery values corresponding to the results of the promotion chance mode lottery ("Mode 1," "Mode 2," "Mode 3," and "Mode 4") are specified for each setting value ("Setting 1," "Setting 2," "Setting 3," "Setting 4," "Setting 5," and "Setting 6"). The probability of each result of the promotion chance mode lottery being determined can be expressed as "lottery value specified for that result / number of all random number values that can be drawn (random number denominator: 256)."

For example, if the ball output state from which the promotion chance is entered is the normal ball output state and the normal mode is "Mode 3," then the promotion chance mode lottery result (promotion chance mode) will be determined to be "Mode 3" with a probability of 256/256, regardless of the setting value. Also, if the ball output state from which the promotion chance is entered is the normal ball output state and the normal mode is "Mode 6," then the promotion chance mode lottery result (promotion chance mode) will be determined to be "Mode 3" with a probability of 192/256, and "Mode 4" with a probability of 64/256, regardless of the setting value. Also, if the ball output state from which the promotion chance is entered is a consecutive challenge, then the promotion chance mode lottery result (promotion chance mode) will be determined to be "Mode 2" with a probability of 256/256, regardless of the setting value.

If it is determined in step S4361 that the promotion chance has not yet started, or after executing the processing of step S4364, the main CPU 101 determines whether the value of the promotion chance play count counter (see step S4362) is 1 or greater (step S4365).

If the main CPU 101 determines that the value of the promotion chance play count counter is 1 or greater, it executes a promotion chance lottery process (step S4366). In this process, the main CPU 101 refers to the promotion chance lottery table (see FIG. 144) and performs a lottery based on the payout flags (see FIG. 97) in payout flag group 2 and the random number value, thereby determining one of "Fake Pseudo Play," "Pseudo BIG," or "Pseudo BIG (ED)" as the result of the promotion chance lottery.

The promotion chance lottery table shown in Figure 144 is provided for each of the ball output flags in ball output flag group 2 ('Other', 'Weak rare role', 'Diagonal watermelon', 'Reach mark', and 'Reach mark BB'). If the ball dispensing flag in ball dispensing flag group 2 is "other", the promotion chance lottery table shown in FIG. 144(a) is referenced, if the ball dispensing flag in ball dispensing flag group 2 is "weak rare role", the promotion chance lottery table shown in FIG. 144(b) is referenced, if the ball dispensing flag in ball dispensing flag group 2 is "diagonal watermelon", the promotion chance lottery table shown in FIG. 144(c) is referenced, if the ball dispensing flag in ball dispensing flag group 2 is "reach eye", the promotion chance lottery table shown in FIG. 144(d) is referenced, and if the ball dispensing flag in ball dispensing flag group 2 is "reach eye BB", the promotion chance lottery table shown in FIG. 144(e) is referenced.

In each promotion chance lottery table, lottery values corresponding to the results of the promotion chance lottery ("Fake Pseudo Game," "Pseudo BIG," and "Pseudo BIG (ED)") are specified for each promotion chance mode ("Mode 1," "Mode 2," "Mode 3," and "Mode 4") determined in step S4364. The probability of each result of the promotion chance lottery being determined can be expressed as "lottery value specified for that result / number of all random number values that can be drawn (random number denominator: 256)."

For example, if the payout flag in payout flag group 2 is "Other" and the promotion chance mode is "Mode 4," the result of the promotion chance lottery will be "Fake Pseudo Game" with a probability of 204/256, and "Pseudo BIG (ED)" with a probability of 52/256. Also, if the payout flag in payout flag group 2 is "Reach Eye BB" and the promotion chance mode is "Mode 1," the result of the promotion chance lottery will be "Pseudo BIG" with a probability of 255/256, and "Pseudo BIG (ED)" with a probability of 1/256.

If "Pseudo BIG" or "Pseudo BIG (ED)" is determined as the result of the lottery during the promotion chance (if a Pseudo BIG is won), the main CPU 101 sets the Pseudo BIG winning flag to ON. As described above, the Pseudo BIG winning flag is a flag that indicates that a Pseudo BIG has been won.

After executing the processing of step S4366, the main CPU 101 executes the next pseudo game lottery processing (step S4367). In this processing, the main CPU 101 refers to the next pseudo game lottery table (see FIG. 145) and performs a lottery based on a random number value to determine one of "Pseudo Game 1," "Pseudo Game 2," "Pseudo Game 3," "Pseudo Game 4," "Pseudo Game 5," "Pseudo Game 6," "Pseudo Game 7," and "Pseudo Game 8" as the result of the pseudo game lottery.

The next pseudo game lottery table shown in Figure 145 is provided for each of the results of the promotion chance lottery ("Fake pseudo game," "Pseudo BIG," and "Pseudo BIG (ED)"). If "Fake pseudo game" is determined in step S4366, the next pseudo game lottery table shown in Figure 145(a) is referenced; if "Pseudo BIG" is determined in step S4366, the next pseudo game lottery table shown in Figure 145(b) is referenced; and if "Pseudo BIG (ED)" is determined in step S4366, the next pseudo game lottery table shown in Figure 145(c) is referenced.

In each next pseudo game lottery table, lottery values corresponding to the results of the next pseudo game lottery ("Pseudo Game 1," "Pseudo Game 2," "Pseudo Game 3," "Pseudo Game 4," "Pseudo Game 5," "Pseudo Game 6," "Pseudo Game 7," and "Pseudo Game 8") are specified for each promotion chance mode ("Mode 1," "Mode 2," "Mode 3," and "Mode 4") determined in step S4364. The probability of each result of the next pseudo game lottery being determined can be expressed as "lottery value specified for that result / number of all random number values that can be drawn (random number denominator: 256)."

For example, if the promotion chance mode is "Mode 1" and "Fake Pseudo Game" is determined in step S4366, the result of the next pseudo game lottery will be "Pseudo Game 1" with a probability of 86/256, and "Pseudo Game 2" with a probability of 170/256. Also, if the promotion chance mode is "Mode 1" and "Pseudo BIG" is determined in step S4366, the result of the next pseudo game lottery will be "Pseudo Game 3" with a probability of 112/256, "Pseudo Game 4" with a probability of 112/256, and "Pseudo Game 5" with a probability of 32/256. Furthermore, if the promotion chance mode is "Mode 1" and "Pseudo BIG (ED)" is determined in step S4366, the result of the next pseudo game lottery will be "Pseudo Game 3" with a probability of 32/256, "Pseudo Game 4" with a probability of 32/256, "Pseudo Game 5" with a probability of 32/256, and "Pseudo Game 6" with a probability of 160/256.

The main CPU 101 sets the pseudo game determined by the next pseudo game lottery. As a result, the main CPU 101 controls the execution of the pseudo game in the main presentation control process at the start of play (see step S8 in FIG. 23) for the unit game following the unit game for which the next pseudo game lottery was drawn. Furthermore, if "Pseudo BIG" or "Pseudo BIG (ED)" is determined as the result of the promotion chance lottery (the pseudo BIG winning flag is set ON), the main CPU 101 updates the payout status flag storage area (see FIG. 20) in the state control process at the start of play (see step S6 in FIG. 23) for the unit game following the unit game for which the promotion chance lottery was drawn. As a result, a transition to pseudo BIG occurs (see transition condition (K) in FIGS. 94 and 95).

Furthermore, if "Pseudo BIG (ED)" is determined as a result of the lottery during the promotion chance (if the Pseudo BIG (ED) is won), the main CPU 101 sets the Pseudo BIG (ED) flag to ON. As described above, if the Pseudo BIG (ED) flag is set to ON, control will be restored to Pseudo BIG when the Pseudo BIG termination condition is met, and thus Pseudo BIG will continue until the advantageous period ends.

After executing step S4367, the main CPU 101 terminates this subroutine.

If it is determined in step S4365 that the value of the promotion chance play count counter is less than 1 (0), the main CPU 101 determines whether the pseudo BIG winning flag is set to ON (step S4368). If it is determined that the pseudo BIG winning flag is set to ON, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the pseudo BIG winning flag is not set to ON, the main CPU 101 executes a pseudo BIG promotion lottery process when the specified number of plays is played (step S4369). In this process, the main CPU 101 refers to the pseudo BIG promotion lottery table when the specified number of plays is played (see FIG. 146) and performs a lottery based on a random number value to determine the result of the pseudo BIG promotion lottery when the specified number of plays is played: "Fake pseudo play," "Pseudo BIG," or "Pseudo BIG (ED)."

In the pseudo BIG promotion lottery table shown in Figure 146, lottery values corresponding to the results of the pseudo BIG promotion lottery when the specified number of plays is reached ("Fake pseudo play," "Pseudo BIG," and "Pseudo BIG (ED)") are specified for each promotion chance mode ("Mode 1," "Mode 2," "Mode 3," and "Mode 4") determined in step S4364. The probability of each result of the pseudo BIG promotion lottery when the specified number of plays is reached can be expressed as "lottery value specified for that result / number of all random number values that can be drawn (random number denominator: 256)."

For example, when the promotion chance mode is "Mode 1," the result of the pseudo BIG promotion lottery when the specified number of plays is played is determined to be "Fake Pseudo Game" with a probability of 232/256, and "Pseudo BIG" with a probability of 24/256. Also, when the promotion chance mode is "Mode 4," the result of the pseudo BIG promotion lottery when the specified number of plays is played is determined to be "Pseudo BIG" with a probability of 224/256, and "Pseudo BIG (ED)" with a probability of 32/256.

After executing the processing of step S4369, the main CPU 101 executes the current pseudo game lottery processing (step S4370). In this processing, the main CPU 101 refers to the current pseudo game lottery table (see FIG. 147) and performs a lottery based on a random number value to determine one of "Pseudo Game 1," "Pseudo Game 2," "Pseudo Game 3," "Pseudo Game 4," "Pseudo Game 5," "Pseudo Game 6," "Pseudo Game 7," and "Pseudo Game 8" as the result of the current pseudo game lottery.

The current pseudo game lottery table shown in Figure 147 is provided for each result of the pseudo BIG promotion lottery when the specified number of plays is played ("Pseudo BIG" and "Pseudo BIG (ED)"). If "Pseudo BIG" is determined in step S4369, the current pseudo game lottery table shown in Figure 147(a) is referenced, and if "Pseudo BIG (ED)" is determined in step S4369, the current pseudo game lottery table shown in Figure 147(b) is referenced.

In each current pseudo game lottery table, a lottery value corresponding to the result of the current pseudo game lottery ("Pseudo Game 1," "Pseudo Game 2," "Pseudo Game 3," "Pseudo Game 4," "Pseudo Game 5," "Pseudo Game 6," "Pseudo Game 7," and "Pseudo Game 8") is specified for each promotion chance mode ("Mode 1," "Mode 2," "Mode 3," and "Mode 4") determined in step S4364. The probability of each result of the current pseudo game lottery being determined can be expressed as "lottery value specified for that result / number of all random number values that can be drawn (random number denominator: 256)."

For example, if the promotion chance mode is "Mode 1" and "Pseudo BIG" is determined in step S4369, then "Pseudo Game 7" will be determined as the result of the current pseudo game lottery with a probability of 128/256, and "Pseudo Game 8" will be determined with a probability of 128/256. Also, if the promotion chance mode is "Mode 1" and "Pseudo BIG (ED)" is determined in step S4369, then "Pseudo Game 6" will be determined as the result of the current pseudo game lottery with a probability of 256/256. Furthermore, if "Fake Pseudo Game" is determined in step S4369, then "Pseudo Game 7" will be determined.

The main CPU 101 sets the pseudo game determined by the current pseudo game lottery. As a result, the main CPU 101 controls the execution of the pseudo game in the main side presentation control process at the start of play (see step S8 in Figure 23) for the unit game for which the current pseudo game lottery was performed. As a result, the pseudo game determined in step S4369 is executed following the pseudo game determined in step S4367.

Also, if "Pseudo BIG" or "Pseudo BIG (ED)" is determined as the result of the pseudo BIG promotion lottery when the specified number of plays has been played (if Pseudo BIG is won), the main CPU 101 updates the ball output status flag storage area (see Figure 20), thereby transitioning to Pseudo BIG. Also, if "Fake Pseudo Game" is determined as the result of the pseudo BIG promotion lottery when the specified number of plays has been played (if Pseudo BIG is not won), the main CPU 101 updates the ball output status flag storage area (see Figure 20), thereby transitioning to Pseudo REG (see transition condition (L) in Figures 94 and 95).

Furthermore, if "Pseudo BIG (ED)" is determined as the result of the Pseudo BIG promotion lottery when the specified number of plays has been played (if the Pseudo BIG (ED) is won), the main CPU 101 sets the Pseudo BIG (ED) flag to ON. As described above, if the Pseudo BIG (ED) flag is set to ON, control will be restored to Pseudo BIG when the Pseudo BIG termination condition is met, and thus Pseudo BIG will continue until the advantageous zone ends.

After executing step S4370, the main CPU 101 terminates this subroutine.

The above has described eight types of pseudo games (pseudo games 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, and 8). As explained in the first embodiment, the pseudo games are configured to be able to be executed while a lock effect is being executed. A lock effect (lock) is an effect that stops the progress of the game for a predetermined period of time (disables the player's game operations for a predetermined period of time).

As shown in FIG. 148, in pseudo game 1, a "V," "Seven," or "Bar" is completed on the top line, but the "V," "Seven," and "Bar" do not line up on any of the center line, top line, bottom line, cross-up line, and cross-down line. Pseudo game 1 is a pseudo game that can be executed when "fake pseudo game" is determined in step S4366. In pseudo game 2, a "V," "Seven," or "Bar" is completed on the bottom line, but the "V," "Seven," and "Bar" do not line up on any of the center line, top line, bottom line, cross-up line, and cross-down line. Pseudo game 2 is a pseudo game that can be executed when "fake pseudo game" is determined in step S4366.

In pseudo game 3, "V"s line up on any of the center line, top line, bottom line, cross-up line, and cross-down line (the top line if the first stopping operation is performed on the left reel 3L), or "Sevens" line up on the center line. Pseudo game 3 is a pseudo game that can be executed when "pseudo BIG" or "pseudo BIG (ED)" is determined in step S4366. In pseudo game 4, "V"s line up on any of the center line, top line, bottom line, cross-up line, and cross-down line (the bottom line if the first stopping operation is performed on the left reel 3L), or "Sevens" line up on the center line. Pseudo game 4 is a pseudo game that can be executed when "pseudo BIG" or "pseudo BIG (ED)" is determined in step S4366.

In pseudo game 5, "V"s line up on any of the center line, top line, bottom line, cross-up line, and cross-down line (or on the cross-up line if the first stop operation is performed on the left reel 3L), or "Sevens" line up on the center line. Pseudo game 5 is a pseudo game that can be executed when "Pseudo BIG" or "Pseudo BIG (ED)" is determined in step S4366. In pseudo game 6, "V"s are completed on the center line, cross-up line, and cross-down line, and "V"s line up on the center line, or "Sevens" line up on the center line, and "Bars" do not line up on any of the lines. Pseudo game 6 is a pseudo game that can be executed when "Pseudo BIG (ED)" is determined in step S4366 or step S4369.

Furthermore, pseudo game 6 is a pseudo game that can only be executed when "pseudo BIG (ED)" is determined. In other words, when pseudo game 6 is executed, pseudo BIG (ED) (pseudo BIG will continue until the advantageous zone ends) is confirmed. For example, pseudo games that are executed when the normal long freeze lottery (1) and the normal long freeze lottery (2) (see step S4102 in FIG. 113) are won, as are pseudo games that are executed when the entry long freeze lottery (1) and the entry long freeze lottery (2) (see step S4363 in FIG. 141) are won, and are also pseudo games 6.

In pseudo game 7, "V" and "Seven" do not line up on any of the center line, top line, bottom line, cross-up line, and cross-down line, and "Bar" lines up on the center line. Pseudo game 7 is a pseudo game that can be executed when "Pseudo BIG" or "Fake pseudo game" is determined in step S4369. Note that if "Pseudo BIG" is determined and pseudo game 7 is executed, a reel effect (reel re-spin) is performed after pseudo game 7 ends, and "V" or "Seven" lines up on any line. On the other hand, if "Fake pseudo game" is determined and pseudo game 7 is executed, reel re-spin is not performed.

In pseudo game 8, a "bar" is completed on any of the center line, top line, bottom line, cross-up line, and cross-down line, but a "V", "Seven", and "Bar" do not line up on any of the lines. Pseudo game 8 is a pseudo game that can be executed when a "pseudo BIG" is determined in step S4369. If a "pseudo BIG" is determined and pseudo game 8 is executed, a reel effect (re-spinning of the reels) is performed after pseudo game 8 ends, and a "V" or "Seven" lines up on any of the lines.

<Promotion Chance Game Flow>
Figure 149 shows the flow of the game during a promotion chance.

As shown in Figure 149, a long freeze (see step S4363 in Figure 141) may occur in the first game of the promotion chance (value of the promotion chance game count counter: 3). If this freeze occurs, a pseudo game aiming for a BB (pseudo game 6) occurs following the freeze, and a pseudo BB (pseudo BIG) begins. On the other hand, if a freeze does not occur, the first game of the promotion chance is consumed, and operation of the start lever 7 triggers a transition to the second game of the promotion chance.

In the second promotion chance game (value of the promotion chance game number counter: 2), a pseudo game (see step S4367 in FIG. 141) is played that is determined based on the results of the promotion chance lottery held in the first game (see step S4366 in FIG. 141). If the pseudo BIG transition symbols ("V" or "Seven") line up in the pseudo game (first pseudo game aiming for BB), a pseudo BB (pseudo BIG) begins. On the other hand, if the pseudo BIG transition symbols ("V" or "Seven") do not line up in the pseudo game (first pseudo game aiming for BB), the second promotion chance game is exhausted, and operation of the start lever 7 triggers a transition to the third promotion chance game.

In the third promotion chance game (value of the promotion chance game count counter: 1), a pseudo game (see step S4367 in FIG. 141) is played that is determined based on the results of the promotion chance lottery held in the second game (see step S4366 in FIG. 141). If the pseudo BIG transition symbols ("V" or "Seven") line up in the pseudo game (second pseudo game aiming for BB), a pseudo BB (pseudo BIG) begins. On the other hand, if the pseudo BIG transition symbols ("V" or "Seven") do not line up in the pseudo game (second pseudo game aiming for BB), the third promotion chance game is exhausted, and operation of the start lever 7 triggers a transition to the fourth promotion chance game.

In the fourth promotion chance game (value of the promotion chance game count counter: 0), a pseudo game (see step S4367 in Figure 141) occurs that is determined based on the result of the promotion chance lottery held in the third game (see step S4366 in Figure 141). If the pseudo BIG transition symbol ("V" or "Seven") is lined up in this pseudo game (third pseudo game aiming for BB), a pseudo BB (pseudo BIG) begins. On the other hand, if the pseudo BIG transition symbols ("V" or "Seven") are not lined up in this pseudo game (third pseudo game aiming for BB), a pseudo game aiming for RB (pseudo game 7) will occur and a pseudo RB (pseudo REG) will begin unless a pseudo BIG is won in the pseudo BIG promotion lottery when the specified number of games is played (see step S4369 in FIG. 141).

In the above, it has been explained that if a "fake pseudo game" is determined as a result of the promotion chance lottery (see step S4366 in Figure 141) conducted in the third game of the promotion chance, a fake pseudo game (pseudo game 1 or pseudo game 2) is determined based on the result (see step S4367 in Figure 141), and that in the fourth game of the promotion chance, the fake pseudo game is played as the third pseudo game aiming for BB, regardless of the result of the pseudo BIG promotion lottery when the specified number of games has been played (see step S4369 in Figure 141). However, if a "fake pseudo game" is determined as a result of the promotion chance lottery held in the third game of the promotion chance (see step S4366 in FIG. 141), and if a pseudo BIG is won in the pseudo BIG promotion lottery held when the specified number of plays is played in the fourth game of the promotion chance (see step S4369 in FIG. 141), the fake pseudo game may be discarded, and a pseudo game determined based on the result of the pseudo BIG promotion lottery held when the specified number of plays is played (see step S4370 in FIG. 141) may be played as the third pseudo game aiming for BB.

Also, Figure 149 shows that the pseudo BIG or pseudo REG starts after a pseudo game (a pseudo game aiming for BB or a pseudo game aiming for RB) is played. The player can recognize that the pseudo BIG or pseudo REG starts when the pseudo BIG transition symbol ("V" or "Seven") or the pseudo REG transition symbol ("Bar") lines up during the pseudo game (a pseudo game aiming for BB or a pseudo game aiming for RB). However, the timing at which the pseudo BIG or pseudo REG actually starts (the timing at which the payout status flag storage area (see FIG. 20) is updated) may be after the pseudo game (the pseudo game aiming for BB or the pseudo game aiming for RB) has been played (for example, during the main side presentation control process at the start of the game (see step S8 in FIG. 23)), or it may be before the pseudo game (the pseudo game aiming for BB or the pseudo game aiming for RB) has been played (for example, during the state control process at the start of the game (see step S6 in FIG. 23)).

<Example of promotion chance (when a pseudo-BIG win occurs in the first game)>
FIG. 150 shows an example of the presentation when a pseudo-BIG is won in the first game of the promotion chance.

As an example of the presentation shown in Figure 150, Figure 150(a) shows an image corresponding to the word "WIN" being displayed on the main display device 210 in the unit game immediately before the unit game that transitions to the promotion chance (in the case of transitioning from the normal ball output state to the promotion chance, the final game in the normal ball output state: the winning lottery notification game).

Figure 150(b) shows how, following the state shown in Figure 150(a), in the first game of the promotion chance (value of the promotion chance number of plays counter: 3), an image corresponding to the words "Bonus promotion lottery in progress" is displayed on the main display device 210 in response to the promotion chance lottery being held (see step S4366 in Figure 141). Here, it is assumed that a "pseudo BIG" is determined as the result of the promotion chance lottery. Note that the long freeze (see step S4363 in Figure 141) has not been won.

Figure 150(c) shows how, after the state shown in Figure 150(b), in the second promotion chance game (value of the promotion chance game number counter: 2), an image corresponding to the words "Aim for V!" is displayed on the main display device 210 when the pseudo game (see step S4367 in Figure 141) determined based on the result of the promotion chance lottery held in the first game (see step S4366 in Figure 141) begins. This image suggests that a stopping operation should be performed at a timing when the "buoy" symbol, which serves as the pseudo BIG transition symbol, can be stopped and displayed on each reel 3L, 3C, and 3R. This encourages the player to perform a stopping operation aimed at the "buoy."

Figure 150(d) shows how, in the pseudo game played in the second promotion chance game (promotion chance game number counter value: 2) after the state shown in Figure 150(c), when all reels 3L, 3C, and 3R have stopped spinning, an image corresponding to the words "V.V.V" and "BIG BONUS!" is displayed on the main display device 210. This notifies the player that the "V" pseudo BIG transition symbol has been lined up, and that a transition to a big bonus (pseudo BIG) will occur. When the pseudo BIG transition symbol is lined up (when the pseudo BIG starts), external signal 1 described in the first embodiment is turned on.

After the state shown in Figure 150(d), in the second promotion chance game (value of the promotion chance play count counter: 2), following the pseudo play (with the rotation of each reel 3L, 3C, 3R stopped), a lock occurs and the progress of the game is further halted for a predetermined period. Figure 150(e) shows that during the period in which the lock is in effect, a screen for selecting the effect (BB effect) to be performed in the pseudo BIG is displayed on the main display device 210. By operating the effect button, the player can select one of effects A, B, or C as the BB effect.

Figure 150(f) shows the state in which, after the state shown in Figure 150(e), in the second game of the promotion chance (value of the promotion chance play count counter: 2), when one effect (here, effect B) is determined as the BB effect, images corresponding to the words "Play proceeds with the lever," "0 coins won," and "30 navigations remaining" are displayed on the main display device 210. This makes it possible to prompt the player to operate the start lever 7, and the lock ends when the start lever 7 is operated. Also, even if the start lever 7 is not operated, the lock ends when a predetermined time (e.g., 50 seconds) has elapsed since all reels 3L, 3C, and 3R have stopped spinning in the pseudo-game. "0 medals won" indicates the number of medals won by the player in the pseudo BIG (the difference between the number paid out and the number inserted), and "30 remaining navi times" indicates the remaining number of Bernavi times that can be performed in the first pseudo BIG described above (see Figure 96) (the value of the first Bernavi number counter).

After the state shown in Figure 150(f) is reached, when the start lever 7 is operated, the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R begin to spin for actual play (main play) (a random delay process is performed and the game progresses). Figure 150(g) shows the push order navigation image displayed on the main display device 210 at this time. The push order navigation image is an image used to notify the player of the correct push order for the push order bell (bell navigation). Here, since "F_321 Bell D" has been determined as the internal winning combination, it is notified that the first stop operation should be a stop operation for the right reel 3R with a push aimed at the "buoy," the second stop operation should be a stop operation for the center reel 3C, and the third stop operation should be a stop operation for the left reel 3L (see Figure 96). Furthermore, since one bell navigation has been performed, the number of "remaining navigations" has decreased by one to "29."

Figure 150(h) shows how, after the state shown in Figure 150(g), when all reels 3L, 3C, and 3R have stopped spinning, an image corresponding to the words "GET 15 coins" is displayed on the main display device 210. Here, a stop operation is performed in accordance with the notification (bell navigation), and the push order bell is activated, resulting in 15 medals being paid out (see Figure 92). In addition, the number of "earned" coins is updated to the difference (12 coins) between the number of coins paid out (15 coins) and the number of coins inserted (3 coins).

Note that in the state shown in Figures 150(e) to (h), the transition from Promotion Chance to Pseudo BIG has already occurred, and the first game of Pseudo BIG is shown, but for convenience, it is described as the second game of Promotion Chance.

<Example of promotion chance (when pseudo BIG is not won)>
FIG. 151 shows an example of the presentation when the pseudo BIG is not won in the first to fourth promotion chance games.

As an example of the presentation shown in Figure 151, Figure 151(a) shows an image corresponding to the word "WIN" being displayed on the main display device 210 in the unit game immediately before the unit game that transitions to the promotion chance (in the case of transitioning from the normal ball output state to the promotion chance, the final game in the normal ball output state: the winning lottery notification game).

Figure 151(b) shows how, following the state shown in Figure 151(a), in the first game of the promotion chance (value of the promotion chance play count counter: 3), an image corresponding to the words "Bonus promotion lottery in progress" is displayed on the main display device 210 in response to a promotion chance lottery (see step S4366 in Figure 141). Here, it is assumed that a "fake pseudo play" has been determined as a result of the promotion chance lottery. Note that the long freeze (see step S4363 in Figure 141) has not been won.

Figure 151(c) shows how, after the state shown in Figure 151(b), in the second promotion chance game (value of the promotion chance game number counter: 2), an image corresponding to the words "Aim for V!" is displayed on the main display device 210 when the pseudo game (see step S4367 in Figure 141) determined based on the result of the promotion chance lottery held in the first game (see step S4366 in Figure 141) begins. This image suggests that a stopping operation should be performed at a timing when the "buoy" symbol, which serves as the pseudo BIG transition symbol, can be stopped and displayed on each reel 3L, 3C, and 3R. This encourages the player to perform a stopping operation aimed at the "buoy."

Figure 151(d) shows how, in the pseudo game played in the second promotion chance game (promotion chance game number counter value: 2) after the state shown in Figure 151(c), when all reels 3L, 3C, and 3R have stopped spinning, images corresponding to the words "Sorry" and "Play will proceed when lever is on" are displayed on the main display device 210. This notifies the player that the "V" symbol, which is the pseudo BIG transition symbol, has not lined up (the pseudo BIG has not been won), and also prompts the player to operate the start lever 7.

After the state shown in Figure 151 (d), when the start lever 7 is operated, the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R begin to spin for actual play (main play) (the game progresses with a random delay process). Figure 151 (e) shows that in the second promotion chance game (value of the promotion chance game number counter: 2), in response to a promotion chance lottery (see step S4366 in Figure 141), an image corresponding to the words "Bonus promotion lottery in progress" is displayed on the main display device 210. Here, it is assumed that "fake pseudo game" has been determined as the result of the promotion chance lottery.

Figure 151 (f) shows how, after the state shown in Figure 151 (e), in the third promotion chance game (value of the promotion chance game count counter: 1), an image corresponding to the words "Aim for V!" is displayed on the main display device 210 when the pseudo game (see step S4367 in Figure 141) determined based on the result of the promotion chance lottery held in the second game (see step S4366 in Figure 141) begins. This image suggests that a stopping operation should be performed at a timing when the "buoy" symbol, which serves as the pseudo BIG transition symbol, can be stopped and displayed on each reel 3L, 3C, and 3R. This encourages the player to perform a stopping operation aimed at the "buoy."

Figure 151(g) shows how, in a pseudo game played in the third promotion chance game (promotion chance game number counter value: 1) after the state shown in Figure 151(f), when all reels 3L, 3C, and 3R have stopped spinning, images corresponding to the words "Sorry" and "Play will proceed when lever is on" are displayed on the main display device 210. This notifies the player that the "V" symbol, which is the pseudo BIG transition symbol, has not lined up (the pseudo BIG has not been won), and also prompts the player to operate the start lever 7.

After the state shown in Figure 151 (g), when the start lever 7 is operated, the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R begin to spin for actual play (main play) (random delay processing is performed and play progresses). Figure 151 (h) shows that in the third promotion chance game (value of the promotion chance play count counter: 1), in response to a promotion chance lottery being held (see step S4366 in Figure 141), an image corresponding to the words "Bonus promotion lottery in progress" is displayed on the main display device 210. Here, it is assumed that "fake pseudo play" has been determined as the result of the promotion chance lottery.

Figure 151(i) shows an image corresponding to the words "Aim for V!" being displayed on the main display device 210 when a pseudo game (see step S4367 in Figure 141) determined based on the results of the promotion chance lottery conducted in the third game (see step S4366 in Figure 141) begins in the fourth promotion chance game (value of the promotion chance play count counter: 0) after the state shown in Figure 151(h). This image suggests performing a stop operation when the "V" symbol, which serves as a pseudo BIG transition symbol, is displayed on each reel 3L, 3C, and 3R. This encourages the player to perform a stop operation aiming for the "V." Note that, here, it is assumed that a "fake pseudo game" is determined as a result of the pseudo BIG promotion lottery when the specified number of plays is consumed (see step S4369 in Figure 141). Furthermore, in the fourth promotion chance game (value of the promotion chance game number counter: 0), two pseudo games are played, and the pseudo game (see step S4367 in FIG. 141) determined based on the result of the promotion chance lottery played in the third game (see step S4366 in FIG. 141) will be referred to as the first pseudo game.

Figure 151(j) shows how, in the first pseudo game played in the fourth promotion chance game (promotion chance game number counter value: 0) after the state shown in Figure 151(i), when all reels 3L, 3C, and 3R have stopped spinning, images corresponding to the words "Sorry" and "Play will proceed when lever is on" are displayed on the main display device 210. This notifies the player that the "V" symbol, which is the pseudo BIG transition symbol, has not lined up (the pseudo BIG has not been won), and also prompts the player to operate the start lever 7.

After the state shown in Figure 151 (j), when the start lever 7 is operated, a pseudo game (see step S4370 in Figure 141) determined based on the results of the pseudo BIG promotion lottery when the specified number of plays has been played (see step S4369 in Figure 141) begins. This pseudo game will be referred to as the second pseudo game. Figure 151 (k) shows an image corresponding to the words "Aim for the BAR!" being displayed on the main display device 210 when the second pseudo game, which is played in the fourth promotion chance game (value of the promotion chance play count counter: 0), begins. This image suggests that a stopping operation should be performed at a timing when a "bar" symbol, as a pseudo REG transition symbol, can be stopped and displayed on each reel 3L, 3C, and 3R. This encourages the player to perform a stopping operation aiming for the "bar."

Figure 151 (l) shows how, in the second pseudo game played in the fourth promotion chance game (promotion chance game number counter value: 0) after the state shown in Figure 151 (k), when all reels 3L, 3C, and 3R have stopped spinning, an image corresponding to the words "REGULAR BONUS!" and "PLAY PROGRESS BY TURNING THE LEVER" is displayed on the main display device 210. This notifies the player that a transition to a regular bonus (pseudo REG) will occur, and prompts the player to operate the start lever 7. When the pseudo REG transition symbols are aligned (when the pseudo REG begins), the external signal 2 described in the first embodiment is turned on.

After the state shown in Figure 151 (l), when the start lever 7 is operated, the rotation of each reel 3L, 3C, and 3R begins for actual play (main play) (a random delay process is performed to progress the game). Figure 151 (m) shows the state in which the push order navigation image is displayed on the main display device 210 at this time. The push order navigation image is an image for notifying the correct push order for the push order bell (bell navigation). Here, since "F_231 Bell A" to "F_231 Bell C" have been determined as the internal winning combination, it is notified that the first stop operation should be a stop operation for the center reel 3C with a push aimed at "seven," the second stop operation should be a stop operation for the right reel 3R, and the third stop operation should be a stop operation for the left reel 3L (see Figure 96). In addition, "4 Navigations Remaining" indicates the remaining number of bell navigations that can be performed in the pseudo-REG (the value of the second bell navigation number counter). The initial value for "Navi remaining" is 5, but since one Bell Navi was performed, the number of "Navi remaining" has been reduced by 1 and updated to "4."

Figure 151(n) shows that after the state shown in Figure 151(m), when all reels 3L, 3C, and 3R have stopped spinning, an image corresponding to the words "GET 15 coins" is displayed on the main display device 210. Here, a stop operation is performed in accordance with the notification (bell navigation), and the push order bell is won, resulting in the payment of 15 medals (see Figure 92).

Note that in the state shown in Figures 151(m) and (n), the transition from the promotion chance to the pseudo-REG has already occurred, and the first game of the pseudo-REG is shown, but for convenience, it is described as the fourth game of the promotion chance.

As explained above, when a promotion chance occurs, the game will always transition to either the pseudo BIG or pseudo REG AT state. In other words, a promotion chance is a ball output state in which a transition to the AT state is confirmed. During the promotion chance, it is determined which AT state the game will transition to, and an effect is played to notify the player of the AT state to which the game will transition through the pseudo game. If the pseudo BIG transition symbol ("V" or "Seven") is aligned in the pseudo game played from the first game to the final game, the game will transition to pseudo BIG. If the pseudo BIG transition symbol ("V" or "Seven") is not aligned in the first pseudo game played in the final game, the pseudo REG transition symbol ("Bar") will be aligned in the second pseudo game, and the game will transition to pseudo REG. A transition to pseudo REG is only possible in the final game; a transition to pseudo REG will not occur in games other than the final game.

So far, we have explained the specifications for displaying symbols at the start of a pseudo bonus, etc., using a pseudo game that the player can stop. However, instead of or in conjunction with a pseudo game, it is also possible to use a reel effect in which the reels stop automatically without the player having to stop the game, to display symbols at the start of a pseudo bonus, etc. If a reel effect is used, the presentation effect will be inferior to that of a pseudo game, but the main program capacity can be reduced compared to a pseudo game.

In addition, in pseudo games, the reels automatically stop after a predetermined time (e.g., 30 seconds) has elapsed since the pseudo game reels started spinning or the stop operation was enabled, and symbols such as those displayed when a pseudo bonus game begins are displayed. Therefore, in a broad sense, pseudo games can also be considered a type of reel presentation. In the case of automatic stopping due to the passage of time, the reels may be controlled so that a planned symbol combination (such as a buoy, seven, or bar) stops, or a stop signal may be input to each reel to stop it when the time has elapsed. In the latter case, if the timing is right, the planned symbol combination will line up, but there may also be cases where the symbol combination does not line up.

The reel stop control for a pseudo game can be implemented in any of the ways described in the above-mentioned embodiments. For example, the number of sliding symbols may be limited to a maximum of four, and the pseudo stop result may change depending on the pressing position (timing of the stop operation), in the same or similar manner as in a normal game (main game). Alternatively, the symbol may slide to a predetermined position depending on the type of pseudo game (pseudo game 1-8) regardless of the pressing position. Even in a type where the result changes depending on the pressing position, the stop control may be implemented to limit the possible stop positions to two or three (for example, in pseudo game 3, the symbol may slide four or more symbols depending on the pressing position to result in either a buoy or a seven), allowing the player to easily understand the resulting result. Furthermore, in the case of a type in which the result changes depending on the button press position, for example, even if neither a buoy nor a seven-line appears when the pseudo-BIG starts, it is desirable that the effects at the start of the pseudo-BIG (for example, the effects corresponding to a buoy line shown in Figure 150 (d)) be performed in the same manner as when a buoy line appears, so that the player can understand the situation.

In this embodiment, the maximum number of games played during a promotion chance is four (or six), and the number of games is not increased; however, the number of games for a promotion chance may be extended if certain conditions are met. For example, the remaining number of games may be extended if a rare combination is won but a pseudo-BIG is not won. Furthermore, when extending a promotion chance, the number of games may be increased by +1 game, +5 games, or the player may transition to a state such as an infinite promotion chance that continues until a pseudo-BIG is won.

<Processing at the start of pseudo BIG game>
Fig. 152 is a flowchart showing the pseudo BIG game start processing carried out in the main control circuit. Fig. 153 is a flowchart showing the pseudo BIG start processing carried out in the main control circuit. Fig. 154 is a diagram showing a pseudo BIG start consecutive win challenge lottery table. Fig. 155 is a diagram showing a pseudo BIG 1G consecutive win lottery table.

The pseudo BIG game start processing shown in Figure 152 is processing performed by the main control circuit 100 in the processing of step S6 (game start state control processing) of Figure 23 (main processing) when the current ball output state is pseudo BIG (see Figure 93) (for example, when the judgment result of step S85 of Figure 27 is "NO"). The main CPU 101 can recognize the current ball output state by referring to the ball output state flag storage area (see Figure 20) of the main RAM 103.

In the pseudo BIG game start processing, the main CPU 101 first determines whether it is the start of a pseudo BIG game (step S4381). As described above, a transition to a pseudo BIG game occurs during the game start state control processing (see step S6 in FIG. 23) for the unit game following a unit game in which the pseudo BIG transition flag (see step S4246 in FIG. 129 and step S4351 in FIG. 140) is set to ON, or the unit game following a unit game in which a pseudo BIG game is won in a promotion chance lottery (see step S4366 in FIG. 141) during a promotion chance, or a unit game in which a pseudo BIG game is won in a pseudo BIG promotion lottery when the specified number of games is played during a promotion chance (see step S4369 in FIG. 141). In the game start state control process for a unit game that transitions to pseudo BIG, the payout state flag storage area (see FIG. 20) is updated to transition to pseudo BIG, and then the game start process for pseudo BIG shown in FIG. 152 is performed. In the process of step S4381, the main CPU 101 determines that it is the start of pseudo BIG if the current unit game has transitioned to pseudo BIG (if the current unit game is the first pseudo BIG game).

If it is determined that it is time for the pseudo-BIG to start, the main CPU 101 executes pseudo-BIG start processing (step S4382). Here, the pseudo-BIG start processing will be explained using FIG. 153.

In the pseudo BIG start processing, the main CPU 101 first determines whether it is time to transition from a promotion chance (step S4401). This processing is performed when the current unit game has transitioned to pseudo BIG (when the current unit game is the first game of pseudo BIG). The main CPU 101 determines that it is time to transition from a promotion chance if the ball output state at the transition source is a promotion chance.

If it is determined that the time has not yet passed from the promotion chance, the main CPU 101 sets a pseudo game (step S4402). In this process, if the pseudo BIG (ED) flag (see step S4102 in FIG. 113, and steps S4363, S4366, and S4369 in FIG. 141) is set to ON, the main CPU 101 sets pseudo game 6 (see FIG. 148). If the pseudo BIG (ED) flag is not set to ON, the main CPU 101 sets pseudo game 5 (see FIG. 148). As a result, the main CPU 101 controls the execution of the set pseudo game in the main-side presentation control process at the start of play for the unit game (see step S8 in FIG. 23). Furthermore, although not shown, the main CPU 101 clears various information (counters, etc.) set in the normal ball-dispensing state.

If it is determined in step S4401 that it is time to transition from the promotion chance, or after executing the processing of step S4402, the main CPU 101 sets the first pseudo BIG (step S4403). As described above, the first pseudo BIG and the second pseudo BIG are provided as pseudo BIGs, and when the pseudo BIG starts, it is controlled to the first pseudo BIG.

Next, the main CPU 101 sets the first Bernavi count counter to "30" (step S4404). As described above, the value of the first Bernavi count counter indicates the remaining number of Bernavis that can be performed in the first pseudo-BIG, and is stored in the main RAM 103. The value of the first Bernavi count counter is decremented by 1 each time a Bernavi is performed in the first pseudo-BIG.

Next, the main CPU 101 sets the normal reply remaining winning count counter to "3" (step S4405). As described above, the value of the normal reply remaining winning count counter indicates the remaining number of times a transition from the first pseudo BIG to the second pseudo BIG is possible, and is stored in the main RAM 103. The value of the normal reply remaining winning count counter is decremented by 1 each time a transition from the first pseudo BIG to the second pseudo BIG occurs (each time a normal reply wins in the first pseudo BIG).

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether the pseudo BIG (ED) flag (see step S4102 in FIG. 113, and steps S4363, S4366, and S4369 in FIG. 141) is set to ON (step S4406). If it determines that the pseudo BIG (ED) flag is set to ON, the main CPU 101 terminates this subroutine.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the pseudo BIG (ED) flag is not set to ON, the main CPU 101 adds 2 to the value of the pseudo BIG stock counter (step S4407). The value of the pseudo BIG stock counter indicates the remaining number of times that pseudo BIG can be controlled again when the pseudo BIG termination condition is met, and is stored in the main RAM 103.

Next, the main CPU 101 executes a pseudo BIG start consecutive game challenge lottery process (step S4408). In this process, the main CPU 101 refers to the pseudo BIG start consecutive game challenge lottery table (see FIG. 154) and performs a lottery based on a random number value to determine whether the result of the pseudo BIG start consecutive game challenge lottery will be a "no win" or a "win."

In the Pseudo BIG Start Consecutive Chance Challenge Lottery Table shown in Figure 154, lottery values corresponding to the results of the Pseudo BIG Start Consecutive Chance Challenge Lottery ("Non-Winning" and "Winning") are specified for each setting value ("Setting 1," "Setting 2," "Setting 3," "Setting 4," "Setting 5," and "Setting 6"). The probability of each result of the Pseudo BIG Start Consecutive Chance Challenge Lottery being determined can be expressed as "lottery value specified for that result / number of all random number values that can be drawn (random number denominator: 256)." As a result, regardless of the setting value, there is a 1 in 256 probability of winning the Pseudo BIG Start Consecutive Chance Challenge Lottery.

If the consecutive-game challenge lottery at the start of the pseudo-BIG is won, the main CPU 101 sets the consecutive-game challenge winning flag to ON. The consecutive-game challenge winning flag is a flag indicating that the consecutive-game challenge has been won. Details will be described later, but if the consecutive-game challenge is won, the game will transition to the consecutive-game challenge when the pseudo-BIG ending condition is met (see transition condition (M) in Figures 94 and 95).

After executing the processing of step S4408, the main CPU 101 executes the entry-time long freeze lottery processing (step S4409). This processing is similar to the processing of step S4363 in FIG. 141, so its explanation will be omitted here. After executing the processing of step S4409, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

The pseudo-BIG start processing performed in step S4382 of Figure 152 has been explained above using Figure 153. Let's return to the explanation of Figure 152.

If it is determined in step S4381 that the pseudo BIG has not yet started, or after executing the processing of step S4382, the main CPU 101 determines whether the value of the pseudo BIG stock counter is 2 or greater (step S4383). If it is determined that the value of the pseudo BIG stock counter is 2 or greater, the main CPU 101 terminates this subroutine.

If the main CPU 101 determines that the value of the pseudo BIG stock counter is less than 2, it executes a pseudo BIG 1G consecutive lottery process (step S4384). In this process, the main CPU 101 refers to the pseudo BIG 1G consecutive lottery table (see FIG. 155) and performs a lottery based on the payout flag (see FIG. 97) in payout flag group 6 and the random number value, thereby determining the result of the pseudo BIG 1G consecutive lottery as either "No Win," "Pseudo BIG," or "Pseudo BIG (ED)."

The pseudo BIG 1G consecutive lottery table shown in FIG. 155 is provided for each of the payout flags in payout flag group 6 ("Other," "Reach mark," "Reach mark BB," and "1 coin role"). If the payout flag in payout flag group 6 is "Other," the pseudo BIG 1G consecutive lottery table shown in FIG. 155(a) is referenced. If the payout flag in payout flag group 6 is "Reach mark," the pseudo BIG 1G consecutive lottery table shown in FIG. 155(b) is referenced. If the payout flag in payout flag group 6 is "Reach mark BB," the pseudo BIG 1G consecutive lottery table shown in FIG. 155(c) is referenced. If the payout flag in payout flag group 6 is "1 coin role," the pseudo BIG 1G consecutive lottery table shown in FIG. 155(d) is referenced.

In each Pseudo BIG 1G consecutive lottery table, lottery values corresponding to the results of the Pseudo BIG 1G consecutive lottery ("No Win", "Pseudo BIG", and "Pseudo BIG (ED)") are specified for each of the "First Pseudo BIG" and "Second Pseudo BIG". The probability of each result of the Pseudo BIG 1G consecutive lottery can be expressed as "lottery value specified for that result / number of all random number values that can be drawn (random number denominator: 256)".

As a result, in the first pseudo BIG, as a result of the 1G consecutive lottery during the pseudo BIG, a "non-winning" lottery is determined with a probability of 256/256, regardless of the payout flag in payout flag group 6. Also, in the second pseudo BIG, as a result of the 1G consecutive lottery during the pseudo BIG, if the payout flag in payout flag group 6 is "Other" or "1-piece role," a "non-winning" lottery is determined with a probability of 256/256, and if the payout flag in payout flag group 6 is "Reach Eye" or "Reach Eye BB," a "non-winning" lottery is determined with a probability of 255/256, and a "Pseudo BIG" is determined with a probability of 1/256. If a "Pseudo BIG" is determined as a result of the 1G consecutive lottery during the Pseudo BIG (if the 1G consecutive lottery is won), the main CPU 101 adds 1 to the value of the Pseudo BIG stock counter.

After executing step S4384, the main CPU 101 terminates this subroutine.

<Counter management process for pseudo BIG>
FIG. 156 is a flowchart showing the pseudo-BIG counter management process performed in the main control circuit.

The pseudo BIG counter management process shown in Figure 156 is a process performed by the main control circuit 100 in step S15 (game end state control process) of Figure 23 (main processing) when the current ball output state is pseudo BIG (see Figure 93). The main CPU 101 can recognize the current ball output state by referring to the ball output state flag storage area (see Figure 20) in the main RAM 103.

In the pseudo BIG counter management process, the main CPU 101 first determines whether or not it is controlled by the first pseudo BIG (step S4421). If it determines that it is controlled by the first pseudo BIG, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not a replay ("F_Replay A" or "F_Replay B" (see Figures 90 and 91)) has been determined as the internal winning role in the internal winning role determination process (see step S64 in Figure 26) (step S4422).

If it is determined that a replay has been determined as the internal winning combination, the main CPU 101 adds 1 to the value of the replay counter established during the first pseudo-BIG (step S4423). The value of the replay counter established during the first pseudo-BIG indicates the number of times a replay ("F_Replay A" or "F_Replay B") has been determined as the internal winning combination during the first pseudo-BIG, and is stored in the main RAM 103.

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether a normal lip has been awarded (step S4424). In this process, the main CPU 101 determines whether the combination of symbols stopped and displayed along the pay line is a "normal lip" (any of "C_middle lip A_01-04," "C_lower lip A_01-06," "C_CU lip_01-03," "C_upper lip B_01-06," "C_upper lip A_01-03," and "C_CD lip_01-04" (see Figure 83)).

If it is determined that a normal RIP has won, the main CPU 101 subtracts 1 from the value of the normal RIP remaining winning count counter (see step S4405 in FIG. 153) (step S4425). Then, the main CPU 101 sets the second pseudo BIG (step S4426). This transitions from the first pseudo BIG to the second pseudo BIG.

Next, the main CPU 101 sets the second Bernavi count counter to "9" (step S4427). As described above, the value of the second Bernavi count counter indicates the remaining number of Bernavis that can be performed in the second pseudo-BIG, and is stored in the main RAM 103. The value of the second Bernavi count counter is decremented by 1 each time a Bernavi is performed in the second pseudo-BIG.

If it is determined in step S4424 that the normal reply has not been won, or after executing the processing of step S4427, the main CPU 101 terminates this subroutine.

If it is determined in step S4422 that a replay has not been determined as the internal winning role, the main CPU 101 determines whether a bell navi has occurred (step S4428). In this process, the main CPU 101 determines whether a push order bell (any of "F_213 Bell A," "F_213 Bell B," "F_213 Bell C," "F_213 Bell D," "F_231 Bell A," "F_231 Bell B," "F_231 Bell C," "F_231 Bell D," "F_312 Bell A," "F_312 Bell B," "F_312 Bell C," "F_312 Bell D," "F_321 Bell A," "F_321 Bell B," "F_321 Bell C," and "F_321 Bell D" (see Figures 83 and 84)) has been determined as the internal winning role. As mentioned above, in the pseudo BIG mode, if the push order bell is determined to be the internal winning combination, information on the stopping operation to make the push order bell win is announced (bell navigation is performed).

If it is determined that a Bernavi event has occurred, the main CPU 101 subtracts 1 from the value of the first Bernavi event count counter (see step S4404 in FIG. 153) (step S4429). The main CPU 101 then determines whether the value of the first Bernavi event count counter is 0 (step S4430). If it is determined that the value of the first Bernavi event count counter is 0, the main CPU 101 executes pseudo BIG end processing (1) (step S4431). The pseudo BIG end processing (1) will be described later using FIG. 157.

If it is determined in step S4428 that a Bernavi event has not occurred, if it is determined in step S4430 that the value of the first Bernavi event counter is not 0, or after executing the processing of step S4431, the main CPU 101 terminates this subroutine.

If it is determined in step S4421 that control is not being performed by the first pseudo BIG (control is being performed by the second pseudo BIG), the main CPU 101 determines whether or not a Bell Navi has occurred (step S4432). This process is the same as the process in step S4428. If it is determined that a Bell Navi has not occurred, the main CPU 101 terminates this subroutine.

On the other hand, if it is determined that a Bernavi event has occurred, the main CPU 101 subtracts 1 from the value of the second Bernavi event counter (see step S4427) (step S4433).Then, the main CPU 101 determines whether the value of the second Bernavi event counter is 0 (step S4434).If it is determined that the value of the second Bernavi event counter is not 0,
The main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

On the other hand, if the main CPU 101 determines that the value of the second Bernavi counter is 0, it determines whether the value of the normal RIP remaining winning counter (see step S4425) is 0 (step S4435). If it determines that the value of the normal RIP remaining winning counter is 0, it executes pseudo BIG end processing (2) (step S4436). Pseudo BIG end processing (2) will be described later using FIG. 159.

On the other hand, if the main CPU 101 determines that the value of the normal remaining winning count counter is not 0, it sets the first pseudo BIG (step S4437). This causes a transition from the second pseudo BIG to the first pseudo BIG.

After executing step S4436 or step S4437, the main CPU 101 terminates this subroutine.

<Pseudo BIG End Processing (1)>
157 is a flowchart showing the pseudo-BIG end process (1) performed in the main control circuit. FIG. 158 is a diagram showing a lottery table when the number of successful rep is insufficient.

The pseudo BIG termination process (1) shown in Figure 157 is performed by the main control circuit 100 in step S4431 of Figure 156 (pseudo BIG counter management process). This process is also performed when the above-mentioned condition for terminating the pseudo BIG, "(i) the value of the first Bernavi counter is 0," is met.

In the pseudo-BIG end processing (1), the main CPU 101 first determines whether the value of the pseudo-BIG stock counter (see step S4407 in FIG. 153) is 2 or greater (step S4441).

If the main CPU 101 determines that the value of the pseudo BIG stock counter is less than 2, it determines whether the value of the first pseudo BIG hit rep counter (see step S4423 in FIG. 156) is 2 or less (step S4442).

If the main CPU 101 determines that the value of the first pseudo-BIG successful reply counter is 2 or less, it executes a lottery process for when the number of successful replies is insufficient (step S4443). In this process, the main CPU 101 refers to the lottery table for when the number of successful replies is insufficient (see FIG. 158) and performs a lottery based on a random number value to determine the result of the lottery for when the number of successful replies is insufficient: "No Winning Lottery," "Pseudo-BIG," or "Pseudo-BIG (ED)."

In the lottery table for when the number of successful replays is insufficient shown in Figure 158, lottery values corresponding to the results of the lottery for when the number of successful replays is insufficient ("non-winning," "pseudo BIG," and "pseudo BIG (ED)") are specified for each value of the successful replay counter during the first pseudo BIG, i.e., the number of times a replay was determined as an internal winning role during the first pseudo BIG ("0 times," "1 time," and "2 times"). The probability of each result being determined in the lottery for when the number of successful replays is insufficient can be expressed as "lottery value specified for that result / number of all random number values that can be drawn (random denominator: 256)."

For example, if the value of the successful reply counter during the first pseudo-BIG is "1," the result of the lottery when the number of successful replies is insufficient will be a "no win" with a probability of 224/256, and a "pseudo-BIG" with a probability of 32/256. If a "pseudo-BIG" is determined as the result of the lottery when the number of successful replies is insufficient (if the lottery when the number of successful replies is insufficient is won), the main CPU 101 adds 1 to the value of the pseudo-BIG stock counter.

If it is determined in step S4442 that the value of the first pseudo-BIG successful replay counter is 3 or greater, or after executing the processing of step S4443, the main CPU 101 determines whether the value of the pseudo-BIG stock counter is 1 or greater (step S4444).

If it is determined in step S4441 that the value of the pseudo BIG stock counter is 2 or greater, or if it is determined in step S4444 that the value of the pseudo BIG stock counter is 1 or greater, the main CPU 101 sets the pseudo BIG continuation flag to ON (step S4445). The pseudo BIG continuation flag is a flag indicating that the pseudo BIG will continue. The main CPU 101 executes pseudo BIG start processing (see FIG. 153) in the game start state control processing (see step S6 in FIG. 23) for the unit game following the unit game in which the pseudo BIG continuation flag was set to ON. This allows the pseudo BIG to continue.

Furthermore, when the main CPU 101 executes the processing of step S4445, it subtracts 1 from the value of the pseudo BIG stock counter. Note that if it is determined that the number of times controlled to pseudo BIG (the pseudo BIG start processing is executed) during one advantageous period will be three or more times, it is possible not to subtract from the value of the pseudo BIG stock counter. In this case, it is determined that pseudo BIG (ED) (pseudo BIG will continue until the advantageous period ends) will occur.

If it is determined in step S4444 that the value of the pseudo BIG stock counter is less than 1 (0), the main CPU 101 determines whether the consecutive win challenge flag is set to ON (step S4446). As described above, the consecutive win challenge flag is a flag that indicates that the consecutive win challenge has been won (see step S4408 in FIG. 153).

If it is determined that the consecutive win challenge lottery flag is set to ON, the main CPU 101 sets the consecutive win challenge transition flag to ON (step S4447). As described above, the consecutive win challenge transition flag is a flag that indicates the timing to start the consecutive win challenge. The main CPU 101 updates the payout status flag storage area (see FIG. 20) in the game start status control process (see step S6 in FIG. 23) for the unit game following the unit game in which the consecutive win challenge transition flag was set to ON. This causes a transition to the consecutive win challenge.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the consecutive win challenge lottery flag is not set to ON, the main CPU 101 sets the non-advantageous zone transition flag to ON (step S4448). The non-advantageous zone transition flag is a flag that indicates the timing to start the non-advantageous zone. The main CPU 101 updates the payout status flag storage area (see FIG. 20) in the game start status control process (see step S6 in FIG. 23) for the unit game following the unit game in which the non-advantageous zone transition flag was set to ON. This causes a transition to the non-advantageous zone.

After executing the processing of step S4445, step S4447, or step S4448, if the consecutive win challenge lottery flag is set to ON, the main CPU 101 sets the flag to OFF and ends this subroutine. Note that if the pseudo-BIG continues, the consecutive win challenge lottery flag is carried over, and in this case, the consecutive win challenge lottery processing at the start of the pseudo-BIG (see step S4408 in FIG. 153) may not be performed.

<Processing at the end of pseudo-BIG (2)>
Fig. 159 is a flowchart showing the pseudo BIG end process (2) performed in the main control circuit. Fig. 160 is a diagram showing a consecutive chance challenge lottery table at the end of the final second pseudo BIG.

The Pseudo BIG End Processing (2) shown in Figure 159 is processing performed by the main control circuit 100 in step S4436 of Figure 156 (Pseudo BIG Counter Management Processing). This processing is also performed when the above-mentioned condition for ending the Pseudo BIG, "(ii) the value of the normal RIP remaining winning count counter is 0 and the value of the second Bernavi count counter is 0," is met.

In the pseudo-BIG end processing (2), the main CPU 101 first determines whether the value of the pseudo-BIG stock counter (see step S4407 in FIG. 153) is 1 or greater (step S4461).

If the main CPU 101 determines that the value of the pseudo BIG stock counter is 1 or greater, it sets the pseudo BIG continuation flag to ON (step S4462). As described above, the pseudo BIG continuation flag is a flag indicating that the pseudo BIG will continue. The main CPU 101 executes the pseudo BIG start processing (see FIG. 153) in the game start state control processing (see step S6 in FIG. 23) for the unit game following the unit game in which the pseudo BIG continuation flag was set to ON. This allows the pseudo BIG to continue.

Furthermore, when the main CPU 101 executes the processing of step S4462, it subtracts 1 from the value of the pseudo BIG stock counter. Note that if it is determined that the number of times controlled to pseudo BIG (the pseudo BIG start processing is executed) during one advantageous period will be three or more times, it is possible not to subtract from the value of the pseudo BIG stock counter. In this case, it is determined that pseudo BIG (ED) (pseudo BIG will continue until the advantageous period ends) will occur.

On the other hand, if the main CPU 101 determines that the value of the pseudo BIG stock counter is less than 1 (0), it determines whether the consecutive win challenge flag is set to ON (step S4463). As described above, the consecutive win challenge flag is a flag that indicates that the consecutive win challenge has been won (see step S4408 in FIG. 153).

If it is determined that the consecutive win challenge lottery flag is not set to ON, the main CPU 101 executes the consecutive win challenge lottery process at the end of the final second pseudo BIG (step S4464). In this process, the main CPU 101 refers to the consecutive win challenge lottery table at the end of the final second pseudo BIG (see FIG. 160) and performs a lottery based on a random number value to determine whether the result of the consecutive win challenge lottery at the end of the final second pseudo BIG is a "no win" or a "win."

The consecutive win challenge lottery table at the end of the final second pseudo BIG shown in Figure 160 is provided for each value of the first Bernavi count counter when the final second pseudo BIG is entered ("less than 6" and "6 or more"). The value of the first Bernavi count counter when the final second pseudo BIG is entered is the value of the first Bernavi count counter (see step S4429 in Figure 156) when the final (third) second pseudo BIG is entered (when the value of the normal remaining winning count counter becomes 0 as a result of the processing of step S4425). If the value of the first Bernavi number counter when the final second pseudo BIG is entered is less than "6", the consecutive win challenge lottery table at the end of the final second pseudo BIG shown in Figure 160(a) is referenced, and if the value of the first Bernavi number counter when the final second pseudo BIG is entered is "6" or greater, the consecutive win challenge lottery table at the end of the final second pseudo BIG shown in Figure 160(b) is referenced.

In each Final Second Pseudo BIG End Consecutive Winning Challenge Lottery Table, a lottery value corresponding to the outcome of the Final Second Pseudo BIG End Consecutive Winning Challenge Lottery ("No Winning" and "Winning") is specified for each setting value ("Setting 1," "Setting 2," "Setting 3," "Setting 4," "Setting 5," and "Setting 6"). The probability of each outcome of the Final Second Pseudo BIG End Consecutive Winning Challenge Lottery can be expressed as "lottery value specified for that outcome / number of all random number values that can be drawn (random denominator: 256)."

As a result, if the value of the first Bernavi counter when the final second pseudo BIG is entered is less than "6," there is a 256/256 probability of losing the consecutive win challenge lottery at the end of the final second pseudo BIG, regardless of the set value. Also, if the value of the first Bernavi counter when the final second pseudo BIG is entered is "6" or greater, there is a 2/256 probability of winning the consecutive win challenge lottery at the end of the final second pseudo BIG, regardless of the set value. After executing the processing of step S4464, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the consecutive win challenge lottery at the end of the final second pseudo BIG is won (step S4465).

If it is determined in step S4463 that the consecutive win challenge lottery flag is set to ON, or if it is determined in step S4465 that the consecutive win challenge lottery at the end of the final second pseudo-BIG has been won, the main CPU 101 sets the consecutive win challenge transition flag to ON (step S4466). As described above, the consecutive win challenge transition flag is a flag that indicates the timing to start the consecutive win challenge. The main CPU 101 updates the payout status flag storage area (see FIG. 20) in the game start status control process (see step S6 in FIG. 23) for the unit game following the unit game in which the consecutive win challenge transition flag was set to ON. This causes a transition to the consecutive win challenge.

If it is determined in step S4465 that the player has not won the consecutive-win challenge lottery at the end of the final second pseudo-BIG, the main CPU 101 sets the non-advantageous zone transition flag to ON (step S4467). As described above, the non-advantageous zone transition flag is a flag that indicates the timing to start the non-advantageous zone. The main CPU 101 updates the payout status flag storage area (see FIG. 20) in the game start status control process (see step S6 in FIG. 23) for the unit game following the unit game in which the non-advantageous zone transition flag was set to ON. This causes a transition to the non-advantageous zone.

The zone lamp (also called the status indicator or advantageous zone lamp) that was lit during the advantageous zone will change from lit to unlit after all reels have stopped for the game in which a transition to a non-advantageous zone has been determined. As explained in the first embodiment, the zone lamp lights up to indicate that the current state is within the advantageous zone.

After executing the processing of step S4462, step S4466, or step S4467, if the consecutive win challenge lottery flag is set to ON, the main CPU 101 sets the flag to OFF and ends this subroutine. Note that if the pseudo-BIG continues, the consecutive win challenge lottery flag is carried over, and in this case, the consecutive win challenge lottery processing at the start of the pseudo-BIG (see step S4408 in FIG. 153) may not be performed.

<Processing at the start of a pseudo-REG game>
Fig. 161 is a flowchart showing the pseudo-REG game start processing performed in the main control circuit. Fig. 162 is a diagram showing a pseudo-REG start consecutive game challenge lottery table. Fig. 163 is a diagram showing a pseudo-REG 1G consecutive game lottery table.

The pseudo-REG game start processing shown in Figure 161 is processing performed by the main control circuit 100 in step S6 (game start state control processing) of Figure 23 (main processing) when the current ball output state is pseudo-REG (see Figure 93) (for example, when the judgment result of step S85 of Figure 27 is "NO"). The main CPU 101 can recognize the current ball output state by referring to the ball output state flag storage area (see Figure 20) of the main RAM 103.

In the pseudo-REG game start processing, the main CPU 101 first determines whether it is the start of the pseudo-REG (step S4481). As described above, transition to the pseudo-REG occurs during the game start state control processing (see step S6 in FIG. 23) in the final game of the promotion chance (value of the promotion chance game number counter: 0). In the game start state control processing for a unit game that transitions to a pseudo-REG, the payout state flag storage area (see FIG. 20) is updated to transition to the pseudo-REG, and then the pseudo-REG game start processing shown in FIG. 161 is performed. In the processing of step S4481, the main CPU 101 determines that it is the start of the pseudo-REG if the current unit game has transitioned to the pseudo-REG (if the current unit game is the first game of the pseudo-REG).

If it is determined that the pseudo-REG has started, the main CPU 101 sets the second Bernavi count counter to "5" (step S4482). As described above, the value of the second Bernavi count counter indicates the remaining number of Bernavis that can be executed in the pseudo-REG, and is stored in the main RAM 103. The value of the second Bernavi count counter is decremented by 1 each time a Bernavi is executed in the pseudo-REG.

Next, the main CPU 101 executes a pseudo-REG start consecutive-game challenge lottery process (step S4483). In this process, the main CPU 101 refers to the pseudo-REG start consecutive-game challenge lottery table (see FIG. 162) and performs a lottery based on a random number value to determine whether the result of the pseudo-REG start consecutive-game challenge lottery will be a "no win" or a "win."

The pseudo-REG start consecutive-win challenge lottery table shown in FIG. 162 is provided for each value of the advantageous zone play count counter for ball output ("199 or less" and "200 or more"). The advantageous zone play count counter for ball output is the advantageous zone game count counter described above, and the value of the advantageous zone play count counter for ball output indicates the number of unit plays performed in the advantageous zone and is stored in main RAM 103. Although not shown, the value of the advantageous zone play count counter for ball output is incremented only in the advantageous zone and is cleared when transitioning to a non-advantageous zone. If the value of the advantageous zone play count counter for ball output is "199" or less, the pseudo-REG start consecutive-win challenge lottery table shown in FIG. 162(a) is referenced, and if the value of the advantageous zone play count counter for ball output is "200" or more, the pseudo-REG start consecutive-win challenge lottery table shown in FIG. 162(b) is referenced.

In each Pseudo-REG Start Consecutive-Hour Challenge Lottery Table, a lottery value corresponding to the outcome of the Pseudo-REG Start Consecutive-Hour Challenge Lottery ("Non-Winning" and "Winning") is specified for each setting value ("Setting 1," "Setting 2," "Setting 3," "Setting 4," "Setting 5," and "Setting 6"). The probability of each outcome of the Pseudo-REG Start Consecutive-Hour Challenge Lottery can be expressed as "the lottery value specified for that outcome / the number of all random number values that can be drawn (random number denominator: 256)." As a result, if the value of the advantageous zone play count counter for ball output is "199" or less, there is a 1 in 256 probability of winning the Pseudo-REG Start Consecutive-Hour Challenge Lottery, regardless of the setting value. Also, for example, if the value of the advantageous zone play count counter for ball output is 200 or more and the setting value is set to 6, there is a 40/256 chance of winning the consecutive win challenge lottery at the start of the pseudo-REG.

If the consecutive-game challenge lottery at the start of the pseudo-REG is won, the main CPU 101 sets the consecutive-game challenge winning flag to ON. As described above, the consecutive-game challenge winning flag is a flag indicating that the consecutive-game challenge has been won. Details will be described later, but if the consecutive-game challenge is won, the game will transition to the consecutive-game challenge when the pseudo-REG termination condition is met (see transition condition (M) in Figures 94 and 95).

If it is determined in step S4481 that the pseudo-REG has not yet started, or after executing the processing of step S4483, the main CPU 101 executes a 1G consecutive lottery process during the pseudo-REG (step S4484). In this process, the main CPU 101 refers to the 1G consecutive lottery table during the pseudo-REG (see FIG. 163) and performs a lottery based on the payout flag (see FIG. 97) in payout flag group 6 and the random number value, thereby determining the result of the 1G consecutive lottery during the pseudo-REG as either "No Winning Lottery," "Pseudo BIG," or "Pseudo BIG (ED)."

The pseudo-REG 1G consecutive lottery table shown in FIG. 163 is provided for each of the payout flags in payout flag group 6 ("Other," "Reach mark," "Reach mark BB," and "1 coin role"). If the payout flag in payout flag group 6 is "Other," the pseudo-REG 1G consecutive lottery table shown in FIG. 163(a) is referenced. If the payout flag in payout flag group 6 is "Reach mark," the pseudo-REG 1G consecutive lottery table shown in FIG. 163(b) is referenced. If the payout flag in payout flag group 6 is "Reach mark BB," the pseudo-REG 1G consecutive lottery table shown in FIG. 163(c) is referenced. If the payout flag in payout flag group 6 is "1 coin role," the pseudo-REG 1G consecutive lottery table shown in FIG. 163(d) is referenced.

In each pseudo-REG 1G consecutive lottery table, lottery values corresponding to the results of the pseudo-REG 1G consecutive lottery are specified. The probability of each result of the pseudo-REG 1G consecutive lottery can be expressed as "lottery value specified for that result / number of all random number values that can be drawn (random number denominator: 256)." For example, if the payout flag in payout flag group 6 is "Reach Eye BB," the results of the pseudo-REG 1G consecutive lottery are "Non-Winning" with a probability of 240/256, "Pseudo BIG" with a probability of 15/256, and "Pseudo BIG (ED)" with a probability of 1/256.

If "Pseudo BIG" or "Pseudo BIG (ED)" is determined as the result of the 1G consecutive lottery during the pseudo-REG (if the 1G consecutive lottery is won), the main CPU 101 sets the pseudo-BIG winning flag to ON. As described above, the pseudo-BIG winning flag is a flag indicating that a pseudo-BIG has been won. Also, if "Pseudo BIG (ED)" is determined as the result of the 1G consecutive lottery during the pseudo-REG (if the pseudo-BIG (ED) is won), the main CPU 101 sets the pseudo-BIG (ED) flag to ON. As described above, if the pseudo-BIG (ED) flag is set to ON, the pseudo-BIG will be controlled again when the pseudo-BIG end condition is met, and as a result, the pseudo-BIG will continue until the advantageous zone ends.

After executing step S4484, the main CPU 101 terminates this subroutine.

<Pseudo REG Counter Management Processing>
FIG. 164 is a flowchart showing the pseudo-REG counter management process performed in the main control circuit.

The pseudo-REG counter management process shown in Figure 164 is a process performed by the main control circuit 100 in step S15 (game end state control process) of Figure 23 (main processing) when the current ball output state is pseudo-REG (see Figure 93). The main CPU 101 can recognize the current ball output state by referring to the ball output state flag storage area (see Figure 20) in the main RAM 103.

In the pseudo-REG counter management process, the main CPU 101 first determines whether or not a Bernavi has occurred (step S4501). This process is similar to the process of step S4428 in FIG. 156, so a description of this process will be omitted here. If it is determined that a Bernavi has not occurred, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

On the other hand, if it is determined that a Bernavi event has occurred, the main CPU 101 subtracts 1 from the value of the second Bernavi event count counter (see step S4482 in FIG. 161) (step S4502). Then, the main CPU 101 determines whether the value of the second Bernavi event count counter is 0 (step S4503). If it is determined that the value of the second Bernavi event count counter is not 0, the main CPU 101 terminates this subroutine.

On the other hand, if the main CPU 101 determines that the value of the second Bernavi count counter is 0, it determines whether the pseudo BIG winning flag is set to ON (step S4504). As described above, the pseudo BIG winning flag is a flag indicating that a pseudo BIG has been won (see step S4484 in FIG. 161).

If it is determined that the pseudo BIG winning flag is set to ON, the main CPU 101 sets the pseudo BIG transition flag to ON (step S4505). As described above, the pseudo BIG transition flag is a flag that indicates the timing to start the pseudo BIG. The main CPU 101 updates the payout status flag storage area (see FIG. 20) in the game start status control process (see step S6 in FIG. 23) for the unit game following the unit game in which the pseudo BIG transition flag was set to ON. This causes a transition to the pseudo BIG (see transition condition (N) in FIGS. 94 and 95).

On the other hand, if it is determined that the pseudo-BIG winning flag is not set to ON, the main CPU 101 determines whether the consecutive-game challenge winning flag is set to ON (step S4506). As described above, the consecutive-game challenge winning flag is a flag that indicates that the consecutive-game challenge has been won (see step S4483 in FIG. 161).

If it is determined that the consecutive win challenge lottery flag is set to ON, the main CPU 101 sets the consecutive win challenge transition flag to ON (step S4507). As described above, the consecutive win challenge transition flag is a flag that indicates the timing to start the consecutive win challenge. The main CPU 101 updates the payout status flag storage area (see FIG. 20) in the game start status control process (see step S6 in FIG. 23) for the unit game following the unit game in which the consecutive win challenge transition flag was set to ON. This causes a transition to the consecutive win challenge.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the consecutive win challenge lottery flag is not set to ON, the main CPU 101 sets the non-advantageous zone transition flag to ON (step S4508). The non-advantageous zone transition flag is a flag that indicates the timing to start the non-advantageous zone. The main CPU 101 updates the payout status flag storage area (see FIG. 20) in the game start status control process (see step S6 in FIG. 23) for the unit game following the unit game in which the non-advantageous zone transition flag was set to ON. This causes a transition to the non-advantageous zone.

After executing the processing of step S4505, step S4507, or step S4508, if the pseudo-BIG winning flag or the consecutive-game challenge winning flag is set to ON, the main CPU 101 sets these flags to OFF and ends this subroutine. Note that when transitioning to pseudo-BIG, the consecutive-game challenge winning flag is carried over, and in this case, the consecutive-game challenge lottery processing at the start of pseudo-BIG (see step S4408 in FIG. 153) may not be performed.

So far, we have explained the processing related to pseudo-REGs, but as mentioned above, pseudo-REGs have a lower advantage in terms of ball output than pseudo-BIGs. For this reason, it is desirable to be able to execute setting suggestion effects, etc., during pseudo-REGs or at the end of pseudo-REGs, that do not occur during pseudo-BIGs, in order to minimize the decline in player interest. As setting suggestion effects, it is possible to adopt the aspects described in the above-mentioned embodiments as appropriate.

<Processing at the start of play for consecutive challenge>
Fig. 165 is a flowchart showing the processing at the start of consecutive games in the main control circuit. Fig. 166 is a diagram showing a pseudo-bonus lottery table at the start of a consecutive game challenge. Fig. 167 is a diagram showing a game number lottery table at the start of a consecutive game challenge. Fig. 168 is a diagram showing a lottery table during a consecutive game challenge. Fig. 169 is a diagram showing a regular transition lottery table at the end of a consecutive game challenge.

The game start processing for consecutive win challenge shown in Figure 165 is processing performed by the main control circuit 100 in the processing of step S6 (game start state control processing) of Figure 23 (main processing) when the current ball output state is consecutive win challenge (see Figure 93) (for example, when the judgment result of step S85 of Figure 27 is "NO"). The main CPU 101 can recognize the current ball output state by referring to the ball output state flag storage area (see Figure 20) of the main RAM 103.

In the game start processing for the consecutive win challenge, the main CPU 101 first determines whether it is the start of the consecutive win challenge (step S4521). As described above, the transition to the consecutive win challenge occurs in the game start state control processing (see step S6 in FIG. 23) for the unit game following the unit game in which the consecutive win challenge transition flag (see step S4003 in FIG. 98, step S4027 in FIG. 100, step S4447 in FIG. 157, step S4466 in FIG. 159, and step S4507 in FIG. 164) is set to on. In the game start state control processing for the unit game that transitions to the consecutive win challenge, the payout state flag storage area (see FIG. 20) is updated to transition to the consecutive win challenge, and then the game start processing for the consecutive win challenge shown in FIG. 165 is performed. In the processing of step S4521, if the current unit game has transitioned to a consecutive game challenge (if the current unit game is the first game of the consecutive game challenge), the main CPU 101 determines that it is time to start the consecutive game challenge.

If it is determined that it is the start of a consecutive-game challenge, the main CPU 101 executes a consecutive-game challenge start pseudo-bonus lottery process (step S4522). In this process, the main CPU 101 references the consecutive-game challenge start pseudo-bonus lottery table (see FIG. 166) and performs a lottery based on a random number value to determine the result of the consecutive-game challenge start pseudo-bonus lottery: "No Win," "Promotion Chance," "Pseudo BIG," or "Pseudo BIG (ED)."

In the pseudo bonus lottery table at the start of the consecutive win challenge shown in FIG. 166, lottery values corresponding to the results of the pseudo bonus lottery at the start of the consecutive win challenge ("No Win," "Promotion Chance," "Pseudo BIG," and "Pseudo BIG (ED)") are specified for each setting value ("Setting 1," "Setting 2," "Setting 3," "Setting 4," "Setting 5," and "Setting 6") and "Definite Consecutive Win Challenge." "Definite Consecutive Win Challenge" indicates that the confirmed consecutive win challenge flag (see step S4003 in FIG. 98 and step S4029 in FIG. 100) is set to on. The probability of each result of the pseudo bonus lottery at the start of the consecutive win challenge being determined can be expressed as "lottery value specified for that result / number of all random number values that can be drawn (random number denominator: 256)."

As a result, if the confirmed consecutive win challenge flag is not set on, the result of the pseudo bonus lottery at the start of the consecutive win challenge will be a "no win" with a probability of 178/256, a "promotion chance" with a probability of 77/256, and a "pseudo BIG" with a probability of 1/256, regardless of the set value. Also, if the confirmed consecutive win challenge flag is set on, the result of the pseudo bonus lottery at the start of the consecutive win challenge will be a "promotion chance" with a probability of 224/256, a "pseudo BIG" with a probability of 31/256, and a "pseudo BIG (ED)" with a probability of 1/256, regardless of the set value. In other words, if the confirmed consecutive win challenge flag is set on, it is determined that the game will transition to either the pseudo BIG or the promotion chance.

If a "promotion chance" is determined as a result of the pseudo bonus lottery at the start of the consecutive-game challenge (if the promotion chance is won), the main CPU 101 sets the promotion chance winning flag to ON. As described above, the promotion chance winning flag is a flag indicating that the promotion chance has been won. Also, if a "pseudo BIG" or "pseudo BIG (ED)" is determined as a result of the pseudo bonus lottery at the start of the consecutive-game challenge (if the pseudo BIG is won), the main CPU 101 sets the pseudo BIG winning flag to ON. As described above, the pseudo BIG winning flag is a flag indicating that the pseudo BIG has been won. Furthermore, if a "pseudo BIG (ED)" is determined as a result of the pseudo bonus lottery at the start of the consecutive win challenge (if a pseudo BIG (ED) is won), the main CPU 101 sets the pseudo BIG (ED) flag to ON. As described above, if the pseudo BIG (ED) flag is set to ON, control is again given to pseudo BIG when the pseudo BIG end condition is met, and thus pseudo BIG will continue until the advantageous zone ends.

After executing the processing of step S4522, the main CPU 101 executes a lottery process for determining the number of plays at the start of a consecutive challenge (step S4523). In this process, the main CPU 101 refers to the consecutive challenge start number of plays lottery table (see FIG. 167) and performs a lottery based on a random number value to determine the result of the consecutive challenge start number of plays lottery (number of consecutive challenge plays) as one of "1," "2," "3," or "4."

In the consecutive-game challenge start play count lottery table shown in Figure 167, a lottery value corresponding to the result of the consecutive-game challenge start play count lottery ("1," "2," "3," and "4") is specified for each result of the consecutive-game challenge start pseudo bonus lottery (see step S4522) ("No Win," "Promotion Chance," "Pseudo BIG," and "Pseudo BIG (ED)"). The probability of each result of the consecutive-game challenge start play count lottery being determined can be expressed as "lottery value specified for that result / number of all random number values that can be drawn (random number denominator: 256)."

As a result, if the result of the pseudo bonus lottery at the start of the consecutive challenge is "no win," the result of the lottery for the number of plays at the start of the consecutive challenge (number of plays in the consecutive challenge) will be determined to be "3" with a probability of 256/256. Also, if the result of the pseudo bonus lottery at the start of the consecutive challenge is "promotion chance," "pseudo BIG," or "pseudo BIG (ED)," the result of the lottery for the number of plays at the start of the consecutive challenge (number of plays in the consecutive challenge) will be determined to be "3" with a probability of 192/256, and "4" with a probability of 64/256.

After executing the processing of step S4523, the main CPU 101 sets the number of consecutive challenge games determined in step S4523 in the consecutive challenge game number counter (step S4524). The value of the consecutive challenge game number counter indicates the remaining number of unit games that can be played in the consecutive challenge, and is stored in the main RAM 103. As described below, the value of the consecutive challenge game number counter is decremented by one each time a unit game is played.

If it is determined in step S4521 that the consecutive-game challenge has not yet begun, or after executing the processing of step S4524, the main CPU 101 executes a consecutive-game challenge lottery process (step S4525). In this process, the main CPU 101 refers to the consecutive-game challenge lottery table (see FIG. 168) and performs a lottery based on the payout flags (see FIG. 97) in payout flag group 2 and the random number value, thereby determining the result of the consecutive-game challenge lottery as either "No Win," "Promotion Chance," "Pseudo BIG," or "Pseudo BIG (ED)."

In the lottery table during consecutive wins challenge shown in Figure 168, lottery values corresponding to the results of the lottery during consecutive wins challenge ("No Win", "Promotion Chance", "Pseudo BIG", and "Pseudo BIG (ED)") are specified for each payout flag in payout flag group 2 ("Other", "Weak Rare Role", "Diagonal Watermelon", "Reach Eye", and "Reach Eye BB"). The probability of each result of the lottery during consecutive wins challenge being determined can be expressed as "lottery value specified for that result / number of all random number values that can be drawn (random number denominator: 256)".

As a result, if the payout flag in payout flag group 2 is "Other," the result of the lottery during the consecutive win challenge will be "No Win" with a probability of 256/256. Also, if the payout flag in payout flag group 2 is "Weak Rare Role," the result of the lottery during the consecutive win challenge will be "Promotion Chance" with a probability of 256/256. Also, if the payout flag in payout flag group 2 is "Diagonal Watermelon" or "Reach Eye," the result of the lottery during the consecutive win challenge will be "Pseudo BIG" with a probability of 256/256. Also, if the payout flag in payout flag group 2 is "Reach Eye BB," the result of the lottery during the consecutive win challenge will be "Pseudo BIG" with a probability of 255/256, and "Pseudo BIG (ED)" with a probability of 1/256.

If a "promotion chance" is determined as a result of the lottery during the consecutive-game challenge (if the promotion chance is won), the main CPU 101 sets the promotion chance winning flag on. As described above, the promotion chance winning flag is a flag indicating that the promotion chance has been won. Furthermore, if a "pseudo BIG" or "pseudo BIG (ED)" is determined as a result of the lottery during the consecutive-game challenge (if the pseudo BIG is won), the main CPU 101 sets the pseudo BIG winning flag on. As described above, the pseudo BIG winning flag is a flag indicating that the pseudo BIG has been won. Furthermore, if a "pseudo BIG (ED)" is determined as a result of the lottery during the consecutive-game challenge (if the pseudo BIG (ED) is won), the main CPU 101 sets the pseudo BIG (ED) flag on. As mentioned above, if the pseudo BIG (ED) flag is set to ON, the pseudo BIG will be activated again when the pseudo BIG termination conditions are met, and the pseudo BIG will continue until the advantageous period ends.

In addition, when the promotion chance lottery flag is set to ON and "pseudo BIG" or "pseudo BIG (ED)" is determined as the result of the consecutive-game challenge lottery (a pseudo BIG is won), the main CPU 101 discards the promotion chance lottery flag (sets it to OFF). Furthermore, if the result determined in this consecutive-game challenge lottery is less favorable than the results determined in the previous consecutive-game challenge lottery or consecutive-game challenge start pseudo bonus lottery (see step S4522), the main CPU 101 discards the result determined in this consecutive-game challenge lottery.

After executing the processing of step S4525, the main CPU 101 determines whether the value of the consecutive challenge play count counter (see step S4524) is 1 (step S4526). A value of 1 in the consecutive challenge play count counter means that the unit play in question is the final game of the consecutive challenge. If it is determined that the value of the consecutive challenge play count counter is not 1, the main CPU 101 terminates this subroutine.

On the other hand, if the main CPU 101 determines that the value of the consecutive challenge game number counter is 1, it determines whether the promotion chance winning flag or pseudo BIG winning flag is set to ON (step S4527). If it determines that the promotion chance winning flag or pseudo BIG winning flag is set to ON, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

On the other hand, if it is determined that neither the promotion chance lottery flag nor the pseudo BIG lottery flag is set to ON, the main CPU 101 executes a lottery process for transitioning to normal at the end of a consecutive game challenge (step S4528). In this process, the main CPU 101 refers to the lottery table for transitioning to normal at the end of a consecutive game challenge (see FIG. 169) and performs a lottery based on a random number value to determine either the "non-advantageous zone" or "preparation for consecutive games" as the result of the lottery for transitioning to normal at the end of a consecutive game challenge.

In the lottery table for transitioning to normal at the end of a consecutive win challenge shown in Figure 169, lottery values corresponding to the results of the lottery for transitioning to normal at the end of a consecutive win challenge ("non-advantageous zone" and "consecutive win preparation") are specified for each of "Other" and "Pseudo Bonus → Consecutive Win Challenge." "Pseudo Bonus → Consecutive Win Challenge" indicates that the ball output state from which the current transition to the consecutive win challenge begins is a pseudo bonus (pseudo BIG or pseudo REG). "Other" indicates that the ball output state from which the current transition to the consecutive win challenge begins is a ball output state other than a pseudo bonus (pseudo BIG or pseudo REG). The probability of each outcome of the lottery for transitioning to normal at the end of a consecutive win challenge being determined can be expressed as "lottery value specified for that result / number of all random number values that can be drawn (random number denominator: 256)."

As a result, if the ball output state from which you are currently transitioning to the consecutive win challenge is a pseudo-bonus (pseudo-BIG or pseudo-REG), the result of the regular transition lottery at the end of the consecutive win challenge will determine a "non-advantageous zone" with a probability of 256/256. Also, if the ball output state from which you are currently transitioning to the consecutive win challenge is a ball output state other than a pseudo-bonus (pseudo-BIG or pseudo-REG), the result of the regular transition lottery at the end of the consecutive win challenge will determine a "consecutive win preparation" with a probability of 256/256.

In other words, when a transition is made from a pseudo-BIG or pseudo-REG to a consecutive-game challenge (see step S4447 in FIG. 157, step S4466 in FIG. 159, and step S4507 in FIG. 164), the result of the regular transition lottery at the end of the consecutive-game challenge, which is performed in the final game of the consecutive-game challenge, is always determined to be a "non-advantageous zone." Also, when a transition is made from a non-advantageous zone or consecutive-game challenge preparation to a consecutive-game challenge (see step S4003 in FIG. 98 and step S4027 in FIG. 100), the result of the regular transition lottery at the end of the consecutive-game challenge, which is performed in the final game of the consecutive-game challenge, is always determined to be a "consecutive-game preparation."

If a "non-advantageous zone" is determined as a result of the normal transition lottery at the end of a consecutive game challenge, the main CPU 101 sets the non-advantageous zone transition reservation flag to on. The non-advantageous zone transition reservation flag is a flag indicating that the start of a non-advantageous zone has been reserved. Also, if a "consecutive game preparation" is determined as a result of the normal transition lottery at the end of a consecutive game challenge, the main CPU 101 sets the consecutive game preparation transition reservation flag to on. The consecutive game preparation transition reservation flag is a flag indicating that the start of consecutive game preparation has been reserved.

After executing step S4528, the main CPU 101 terminates this subroutine.

<Counter management process for consecutive challenge>
Figure 170 is a flowchart showing the counter management process for consecutive game challenges performed in the main control circuit.

The counter management process for consecutive win challenges shown in Figure 170 is a process performed by the main control circuit 100 in step S15 (game end state control process) of Figure 23 (main processing) when the current ball output state is consecutive win challenge (see Figure 93). The main CPU 101 can recognize the current ball output state by referencing the ball output state flag storage area (see Figure 20) in the main RAM 103.

In the consecutive-game challenge counter management process, the main CPU 101 first subtracts 1 from the value of the consecutive-game challenge play count counter (see step S4524 in FIG. 165) (step S4541). Then, the main CPU 101 determines whether the value of the consecutive-game challenge play count counter is 0 (step S4542). If the main CPU 101 determines that the value of the consecutive-game challenge play count counter is not 0, it terminates this subroutine.

On the other hand, if the main CPU 101 determines that the value of the consecutive challenge game counter is 0, it determines whether the pseudo BIG winning flag is set to ON (step S4543). As described above, the pseudo BIG winning flag is a flag indicating that a pseudo BIG has been won (see steps S4522 and S4525 in FIG. 165).

If it is determined that the pseudo BIG winning flag is set to ON, the main CPU 101 sets the pseudo BIG transition flag to ON (step S4544). As described above, the pseudo BIG transition flag is a flag that indicates the timing to start the pseudo BIG. The main CPU 101 updates the payout status flag storage area (see FIG. 20) in the game start status control process (see step S6 in FIG. 23) for the unit game following the unit game in which the pseudo BIG transition flag was set to ON. This causes a transition to the pseudo BIG (see transition condition (P) in FIGS. 94 and 95).

On the other hand, if it is determined that the pseudo BIG winning flag is not set to ON, the main CPU 101 determines whether the promotion chance winning flag is set to ON (step S4545). As described above, the promotion chance winning flag is a flag that indicates that the promotion chance has been won (see steps S4522 and S4525 in FIG. 165).

If it is determined that the promotion chance winning flag is set to ON, the main CPU 101 sets the promotion chance transition flag to ON (step S4546). As described above, the promotion chance transition flag is a flag that indicates the timing to start the promotion chance. The main CPU 101 updates the payout status flag storage area (see FIG. 20) in the game start status control process (see step S6 in FIG. 23) for the unit game following the unit game in which the promotion chance transition flag was set to ON. This causes a transition to the promotion chance (see transition condition (O) in FIGS. 94 and 95).

On the other hand, if it is determined that the promotion chance lottery flag is not set on, the main CPU 101 determines whether the consecutive-game preparation transition reservation flag (see step S4528 in FIG. 165) is set on (step S4547). If it is determined that the consecutive-game preparation transition reservation flag is set on, the main CPU 101 sets the consecutive-game preparation transition flag on (step S4548). As described above, the consecutive-game preparation transition flag is a flag that indicates that it is time to start preparation for consecutive games. The main CPU 101 updates the payout status flag storage area (see FIG. 20) in the game start state control process (see step S6 in FIG. 23) for the unit game following the unit game in which the consecutive-game preparation transition flag was set on. This causes a transition to consecutive-game preparation (see transition condition (R) in FIGS. 94 and 95).

If the determination result of step S4547 is "NO," this means that the non-advantageous zone transition reservation flag (see step S4528 in FIG. 165) has been set to ON. If it is determined in step S4547 that the consecutive win preparation transition reservation flag has not been set to ON, the main CPU 101 sets the non-advantageous zone transition flag to ON (step S4549). As described above, the non-advantageous zone transition flag is a flag that indicates the timing to start the non-advantageous zone. The main CPU 101 updates the payout status flag storage area (see FIG. 20) in the game start status control process (see step S6 in FIG. 23) for the unit game following the unit game in which the non-advantageous zone transition flag was set to ON. This causes a transition to the non-advantageous zone (see transition condition (Q) in FIGS. 94 and 95).

After executing step S4544, step S4546, step S4548, or step S4549, the main CPU 101 terminates this subroutine.

As explained above, while there is a possibility of transitioning to the Consecutive Chance Challenge when the Pseudo BIG or Pseudo REG ends, there is a relatively high probability of winning the Pseudo BIG or Promotion Chance. As a result, when transitioning from Pseudo BIG or Pseudo REG to the Consecutive Chance Challenge, players will play with the aim of transitioning back to Pseudo BIG or Pseudo REG (playing a consecutive challeng).

In addition, in the above, it has been explained that in the final game of a consecutive-game challenge, a consecutive-game challenge lottery (see step S4525 in FIG. 165) is conducted, followed by a consecutive-game challenge end-of-game normal transition lottery (see step S4528 in FIG. 165). However, as will be explained below, in the final game of a consecutive-game challenge, a consecutive-game challenge lottery may be conducted after a consecutive-game challenge end-of-game normal transition lottery. In this case, after the consecutive-game challenge preparation transition reservation flag or non-advantageous zone transition reservation flag is set on by the consecutive-game challenge end-of-game normal transition lottery, the pseudo-BIG lottery flag or promotion chance lottery flag may be set on by the consecutive-game challenge lottery. In this case, the game will transition to a pseudo-BIG or promotion chance (see steps S4544 and S4546 in FIG. 170), and when the processing of step S4544 or step S4546 is executed, the consecutive win preparation transition reservation flag or non-advantageous zone transition reservation flag may be set to off (discarded).

[Modification of the Fourth Embodiment (Penalty)]
The gameplay of the pachislot machine 1 according to the fourth embodiment has been described above. The gameplay can be created by performing the processes described using Figures 98 to 170, but the processes for realizing the gameplay are not limited to the above examples. In the modified example described below, a penalty is incurred if a player plays using a specific game method.

Regarding penalties, the first embodiment described a case in which a specific role is provided in which the number of medals awarded varies depending on the player's stop operation mode (which may be the timing of the stop operation, the order in which the buttons are pressed, or a combination of these) (for example, eight medals are paid out if the stop operation mode is appropriate (correct), and one medal or no medal is paid out if the stop operation mode is inappropriate (incorrect)).

Furthermore, it was explained that if a specific role is won in a specific game state, and eight coins are paid out, a decision will not be made as to whether or not to change the degree of advantage for transitioning to an AT state in this game to a more advantageous one (this may include a decision as to whether or not to transition directly to an AT state, or whether or not to directly extend the game period in that AT state; hereinafter referred to as an "advantageous decision"). However, if eight coins are not paid out, it is possible to make the advantageous decision for this game. In this specification, this restriction on making advantageous decisions is referred to as a "penalty."

As an example of such a penalty, a modified version of the first gaming machine (see Figures 68 to 80) was described in which, when a predetermined role (for example, the push order bell) is determined as the winning role, if a stop operation is performed in a specific mode (for example, the first left stop), the AT-related processing is favored, and if a stop operation is not performed in that specific mode, the AT-related processing is disadvantaged. The matters described as a modified version of the first gaming machine can also be applied to the pachislot machine 1 of this embodiment, as long as the basic playability of the pachislot machine 1 of this embodiment is not compromised.

Here, the push order bell in this embodiment, like the push order bell in the modified version of the first gaming machine, results in different combinations (combinations of symbols) that stop and are displayed along the pay line depending on the order (push order) of the stop operations on each of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R, and as a result, the number of medals paid out also differs. Furthermore, this push order bell constitutes the biased bell described above.

As a result, similar to the modified example of the first gaming machine, in a unit game in which the push order bell (biased bell) has been determined as the internal winning role, the expected value of the number of medals paid out when a stop operation is performed in a specific mode (e.g., first stop on the left) is smaller than the expected value of the number of medals paid out when a stop operation is not performed in that specific mode. Furthermore, regardless of whether the push order bell (biased bell) has been determined as the internal winning role, in one unit game, the expected value of the number of medals paid out when a stop operation is performed in a specific mode (e.g., first stop on the left) is smaller than the expected value of the number of medals paid out when a stop operation is not performed in that specific mode. Furthermore, in the non-AT state as a whole, the expected value of the number of medals paid out when a stop operation is performed in a specific mode (e.g., first stop on the left) in all unit games in the non-AT state is smaller than the expected value of the number of medals paid out when a stop operation is not performed in that specific mode in all unit games in the non-AT state.

The following describes a case in which, similar to the modified example of the first gaming machine, specifications are adopted that favor AT-related processing when a stop operation is performed in a specific mode (for example, the first left stop), and disadvantage AT-related processing when a stop operation is not performed in that specific mode.

In addition, "AT-related processing" includes processing for directly deciding to transition to the AT state (conducting an AT transition lottery), processing for deciding to transition to the CZ state (CZ) (conducting a CZ transition lottery), processing for setting the period during which the CZ state can continue (CZ period) (conducting a CZ period lottery), processing for deciding to transition to a relatively advantageous AT state among multiple types of AT states (advantage of the AT state) (conducting an AT advantage lottery), and processing for determining the mode referenced in the AT transition lottery, CZ transition lottery, or AT advantage lottery. The concept includes processing for setting the mode (reference mode) (holding a reference mode lottery), processing for shortening the period for which a relatively advantageous state (reference mode) can continue, processing for determining the state (reference mode) to transition to after the relatively advantageous state (reference mode) ends (holding a lottery for transition after falling), processing related to the period until transition to the AT state or CZ state, processing related to the conditions for holding an AT transition lottery or CZ transition lottery, and processing for performing an effect that notifies transition to the AT state (AT confirmation effect).

Examples of AT states include pseudo-BIG (a relatively advantageous AT state) and pseudo-REG (a relatively disadvantageous AT state). The CZ state is a state in which it is easier to transition to the AT state than during normal play (an advantageous zone). During normal play (an advantageous zone), the normal stage can be mentioned, and examples of the CZ state include Chance Stage A, Chance Stage B, and Consecutive Challenge. Promotion chance is a state in which transition to the AT state is confirmed, and such a state may also be included in the CZ state.

Examples of the above-mentioned "AT transition lottery" include the freeze lottery during the normal stage (see step S4081 in Figure 108), the long freeze lottery during the normal stage (see step S4102 in Figure 113), the lottery type lottery when the ceiling is reached (see step S4144 in Figure 118), the pseudo BIG/promotion chance lottery during the chance stage (see step S4306 in Figure 134), the pseudo bonus lottery at the start of a consecutive win challenge (see step S4522 in Figure 165), and the lottery during a consecutive win challenge (see step S4525 in Figure 165). In this example, essentially different AT transition lotteries are conducted during the normal stage (advantageous zone) and the CZ state, but the same AT transition lottery may also be conducted.

Examples of the above-mentioned "CZ transition lottery" include the consecutive win challenge transition lottery (see step S4027 in Figure 100), the normal stage transition flag/winning flag lottery (see step S4082 in Figure 108), and the point-reaching lottery (see step S4167 in Figure 121). Some of the lottery results for the normal stage transition flag/winning flag lottery and the point-reaching lottery determine a transition to the AT state, and so they also serve as AT transition lotteries.

Examples of the above-mentioned "CZ period lottery" include the lottery for the guaranteed number of chance stage plays at the start of the chance stage (see step S4303 in Figure 134), the lottery for adding the number of plays during the chance stage (see step S4308 in Figure 134), and the lottery for the number of plays at the start of a consecutive challenge (see step S4523 in Figure 165). The CZ period lottery includes a lottery for determining the initial value of the CZ period and a lottery for extending the CZ period.

Examples of the above-mentioned "AT advantage lottery" include the lottery at the time of transition to the promotion chance (see step S4284 in Figure 132), the long freeze lottery at the time of entry (see step S4363 in Figure 141), the lottery during the promotion chance (see step S4366 in Figure 141), and the pseudo-BIG promotion lottery when the specified number of plays has been played (see step S4369 in Figure 141). The AT advantage lottery can be conducted when it has been confirmed that the game will transition to the AT state.

Examples of the above-mentioned "reference mode lottery" include the consecutive win preparation mode lottery (see step S4024 and step S4026 in Figure 100), the consecutive win challenge transition confirmation lottery (see step S4029 in Figure 100), the normal transition mode lottery (see step S4061 in Figure 105), the point mode lottery (see step S4063 in Figure 105, step S4166 in Figure 121, and step S4283 in Figure 132), the normal specified number of plays high probability 1 transition lottery (see step S4123 in Figure 114), the high probability 2 transition lottery (see step S4262, step S4265, and step S4268 in Figure 130), and the promotion chance mode lottery (see step S4364 in Figure 141). The reference mode lottery includes a lottery to determine the initial value of the reference mode and a lottery to switch the reference mode.

Examples of the above-mentioned "processing for shortening the period during which a relatively advantageous state (reference mode) can be maintained" include processing for deciding to transition from a relatively advantageous state (reference mode) to an unfavorable state (reference mode) (conducting a fall lottery), and processing for reducing the remaining period during which a relatively advantageous state (reference mode) can be maintained. Examples of fall lottery include the consecutive game preparation fall lottery (see step S4031 in Figure 100) and the high probability 2 fall lottery (see step S4272 in Figure 130). Examples of processing for reducing the remaining period during which a relatively advantageous state (reference mode) can be maintained include subtracting the value of the consecutive win preparation guaranteed play count counter (see step S4023 in FIG. 100), the value of the high probability 2 guaranteed play count counter (see steps S4263, S4266, and S4269 in FIG. 130), the value of the chance stage guaranteed play count counter (see step S4304 in FIG. 134), the value of the promotion chance play count counter (see step S4362 in FIG. 141), and the value of the consecutive win challenge play count counter (see step S4524 in FIG. 165). Examples of the transition destination lottery after the drop include the normal transition lottery at the end of the consecutive win challenge (see step S4528 in FIG. 165).

The above-mentioned "processing related to the period until transition to the AT state or CZ state" can include processing for determining the period until transition to the AT state or CZ state (conducting a premonition period lottery), and processing for reducing the remaining period until transition to the AT state or CZ state. Examples of the premonition period lottery include lottery for the number of premonition plays when a pseudo-BIG/promotion chance is won during the normal stage (see steps S4202, S4205, and S4207 of FIG. 125), lottery for the number of premonition plays when a chance stage is won during the normal stage (steps S4222 and S4224 of FIG. 126), and lottery for the number of premonition plays when a flag is won during the chance stage (see step S4324 of FIG. 138). An example of a process for reducing the remaining period until transition to the AT state or CZ state is to subtract the value of the premonition play number counter (see steps S4203, S4206, and S4208 in FIG. 125, steps S4223 and S4225 in FIG. 126, and step S4325 in FIG. 138).

The above-mentioned "processing related to the conditions for conducting an AT transition lottery or a CZ transition lottery" can include processing for conducting a predetermined lottery if the condition is winning a predetermined lottery. If the condition is that a predetermined variable reaches a predetermined value, it can include processing for setting the predetermined value (conducting a condition-setting lottery) and processing for updating the predetermined variable. Examples of the predetermined lottery include a ceiling preparation flag set lottery (see step S4142 in FIG. 118). Examples of the condition-setting lottery include a normal transition ceiling lottery (see step S4062 in FIG. 105). Examples of the processing for updating the predetermined variable include processing for incrementing the value of the normal specified number of plays counter (see step S4121 in FIG. 114) and processing for incrementing the value of normal points (see step S4163 in FIG. 121).

The above-mentioned AT confirmation effect is an effect that is performed only when it is decided to transition to the AT state, and may be an effect that notifies the fact that the AT state will be transitioned to, or, if multiple types of AT states are provided, an effect that notifies the type of AT state to transition to (the result of the above-mentioned AT advantage lottery). The above-mentioned lock effect can be used as the AT confirmation effect, and the lock effect may be a lock effect accompanied by pseudo play, a lock effect accompanied by reel effect, or a lock effect (freeze) without reel effect or pseudo play. Examples of processing for performing pseudo play as an AT confirmation effect include next pseudo play lottery processing (see step S4367 in Figure 141) and current pseudo play lottery processing (see step S4370 in Figure 141). Examples of processing for performing a freeze as an AT confirmation effect include freeze lottery processing during the normal stage (see step S4081 in FIG. 108), long freeze lottery processing during normal play (see step S4102 in FIG. 113), and long freeze lottery processing upon entry (see step S4363 in FIG. 141).

Note that, while the above examples of AT-related processing have shown processing performed in states other than the AT state, AT-related processing also includes processing performed in the AT state. Furthermore, not only processing performed in advantageous zones, but also processing performed in non-advantageous zones can be considered AT-related processing as long as it falls under the aspects described above.

Examples of AT-related processing performed in the AT state include lottery processing for consecutive wins at the start of a pseudo-BIG (see step S4408 in FIG. 153), lottery processing for 1G consecutive wins (see step S4384 in FIG. 152 and step S4484 in FIG. 161), lottery processing for consecutive wins at the end of the final second pseudo-BIG (see step S4464 in FIG. 159), lottery processing when the number of successful rep is insufficient (see step S4443 in FIG. 157), etc. Examples of AT-related processing performed in a non-advantageous zone include lottery processing for transitioning to an advantageous zone (see step S4001 in FIG. 98, for example), lottery processing for transitioning to an advantageous zone (see step S4003 in FIG. 98), etc.

<Counter list>
FIG. 171 is a diagram showing a list of counters managed in the main control circuit.

In Figure 171, the name of each counter managed by the main control circuit 100, the clear timing, addition/subtraction timing, numerical range, and whether or not it is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 200 are shown in correspondence with each other. In the figure, "LEV" indicates when the start lever 7 is operated (when the start-of-game state control process (see step S6 in Figure 23) is performed), "3OFF" indicates when all reels 3L, 3C, and 3R have stopped spinning (when the end-of-game state control process (see step S15 in Figure 23) is performed), and "special prize in operation" indicates the bonus state (3BB game state shown in Figure 81). Note that in this example, AT-related processing is not performed in the bonus state, but AT-related processing may also be performed in the bonus state.

The consecutive win preparation guarantee play count counter manages the remaining number of unit games that guarantee staying in consecutive win preparation mode (see steps S4023 and S4025 in Figure 100). The value of the consecutive win preparation guarantee play count counter is decremented by 1 to "3OFF" (at the end of play) for each unit game during consecutive win preparation mode, excluding when the special prize is activated, and is cleared when the ball output state transitions to a state other than consecutive win preparation mode. In addition, a consecutive win preparation drop-out lottery (see step S4031 in Figure 100) will be held from the unit game following the unit game in which the value of the consecutive win preparation guarantee play count counter reaches 0.

The advantageous zone play count counter for ball output is a counter that manages the number of unit plays played in the advantageous zone (see Figure 162). The value of the advantageous zone play count counter for ball output is incremented by 1 to "3OFF" (at the end of play) for each unit play in the advantageous zone, excluding when the special prize is activated, and is cleared when moving to a non-advantageous zone.

The normal specified number of plays counter is a counter that manages the number of unit plays played in the normal ball output state (normal stage, chance stage A, and chance stage B) (see step S4121 in Figure 114). The value of the normal specified number of plays counter is incremented by 1 to "LEV" (at the start of play) for each unit play played in the normal ball output state, excluding when the special prize is activated, and is cleared when transitioning to a ball output state other than the normal ball output state.

The premonition play number counter is a counter that manages the remaining number of unit plays controlled in the premonition state (see steps S4203, S4206, and S4208 in Figure 125, steps S4223 and S4225 in Figure 126, and step S4325 in Figure 138). The value of the premonition play number counter is decremented by 1 to "3OFF" (at the end of play) for each unit play in the premonition state except when the special prize is activated, and is cleared when the ball output state transitions.

The normal point counter is a counter that manages points earned in the point acquisition lottery (see step S4163 in Figure 121). The point acquisition lottery is held for each unit game in the normal stage, except when the special prize is activated. The value of the normal point counter is used in the point achievement lottery (see step S4167 in Figure 121), and is decremented by 100 when the point achievement lottery is held ("LEV" (at the start of play)). In addition, the value of the normal point counter is cleared when transitioning to a ball acquisition state other than the normal ball output state (normal stage, chance stage A, and chance stage B).

The point reach count counter is a counter that manages the number of times the normal point value reaches 100 in the normal ball dispensing state (normal stage, chance stage A, and chance stage B) (see step S4165 in Figure 121). The value of the point reach count counter is incremented by 1 after the point acquisition lottery (see "LEV" (at the start of play)) is conducted in the normal stage (excluding when the special prize is activated), when the probability mode is not set to high probability 3, the game is not in a premonition state, and the normal point value is 100 or more before the point acquisition lottery is conducted. In addition, the value of the point reach count counter is cleared when transitioning to a ball dispensing state other than the normal ball dispensing state.

The Cherry Counter is a counter that manages the number of times "F_Cherry" is determined as the internal winning combination in the normal stage (see step S4162 in Figure 121). The value of the Cherry Counter is incremented by 1 when "F_Cherry" is determined as the internal winning combination ("LEV" (at the start of play)) in the normal stage, excluding when the special prize is activated. The value of the Cherry Counter is cleared when transitioning to a ball dispensing state other than the normal ball dispensing state (normal stage, chance stage A, and chance stage B).

The Chance Stage A Winning Count Counter is a counter that manages the number of times a player has won Chance Stage A (see step S4082 in FIG. 108 and step S4167 in FIG. 121). The value of the Chance Stage A Winning Count Counter is incremented by 1 when a player wins Chance Stage A ("LEV" (at the start of play)) in the Normal Stage Transition Flag/Winning Flag lottery (step S4082 in FIG. 108) or the Point Reached Lottery (see step S4167 in FIG. 121) held during the Normal Stage, excluding when the Special Prize is activated. The value of the Chance Stage A Winning Count Counter is decremented by 1 when the player transitions to Chance Stage A, and is cleared when the player transitions to a ball output state other than the normal ball output state (Normal Stage, Chance Stage A, and Chance Stage B).

The point-reaching chance stage A winning count counter is a counter that manages the number of times a player has won chance stage A in the point-reaching lottery (see step S4167 in Figure 121). The value of the point-reaching chance stage A winning count counter is incremented by 1 when a player wins chance stage A in the point-reaching lottery held during the normal stage, excluding when the special prize is activated ("LEV" (at the start of play)). In addition, the value of the point-reaching chance stage A winning count counter is decremented by 1 when the player transitions to chance stage A, and is cleared when the player transitions to a ball-dispensing state other than the normal ball-dispensing state (normal stage, chance stage A, and chance stage B).

The Chance Stage B Winning Count Counter is a counter that manages the number of times a player has won Chance Stage B (see step S4082 in FIG. 108 and step S4167 in FIG. 121). The value of the Chance Stage B Winning Count Counter is incremented by 1 when a player wins Chance Stage B ("LEV" (at the start of play)) in the Normal Stage Transition Flag/Winning Flag lottery (step S4082 in FIG. 108) or the Point Reached Lottery (see step S4167 in FIG. 121) held during the normal stage, excluding when the special prize is activated. The value of the Chance Stage B Winning Count Counter is decremented by 1 when a player transitions to Chance Stage B, and is cleared when a player transitions to a ball output state other than the normal ball output state (normal stage, chance stage A, and chance stage B).

The point-reaching chance stage B winning count counter is a counter that manages the number of times a player has won chance stage B in the point-reaching lottery (see step S4167 in Figure 121). The value of the point-reaching chance stage B winning count counter is incremented by 1 when a player wins chance stage B in the point-reaching lottery held during the normal stage (excluding when the special prize is activated) ("LEV" (at the start of play)). In addition, the value of the point-reaching chance stage B winning count counter is decremented by 1 when the player transitions to chance stage B, and is cleared when the player transitions to a ball-dispensing state other than the normal ball-dispensing state (normal stage, chance stage A, and chance stage B).

The chance stage guaranteed play number counter is a counter that manages the remaining number of unit plays that guarantee staying in chance stage A or chance stage B (see step S4304 in Figure 134). The value of the chance stage guaranteed play number counter is decremented by 1 to "3OFF" (at the end of play) for each unit play in chance stage A or chance stage B, except when the special prize is activated, and is cleared when transitioning to a ball output state other than the normal ball output state (normal stage, chance stage A, and chance stage B). In addition, transition to the normal stage occurs in the unit play following the unit play in which the value of the chance stage guaranteed play number counter reaches 0.

The High Probability 1 Play Count Counter manages the remaining number of unit plays that can remain in High Probability 1, and is set to "50" when High Probability 1 is won in the normal specified number of plays High Probability 1 transition lottery (see step S4123 in Figure 114). The value of the High Probability 1 Play Count Counter is decremented by 1 to "3OFF" (at the end of play) for each unit play when High Probability 1 is set in the normal ball output state (normal stage, chance stage A, and chance stage B) excluding when the special prize is activated, and is cleared when transitioning to a ball output state other than the normal ball output state (normal stage, chance stage A, and chance stage B).

The High Probability 2 Guaranteed Play Count Counter is a counter that manages the remaining number of unit plays that are guaranteed to stay in High Probability 2 (see step S4263, step S4266, and step S4269 in Figure 130). The value of the High Probability 2 Guaranteed Play Count Counter is decremented by 1 to "3OFF" (at the end of play) for each unit play when High Probability 2 is set in the normal stage (excluding when the special prize is activated), and is cleared when the ball output state transitions to a state other than the normal stage. In addition, a High Probability 2 drop-out lottery (see step S4272 in Figure 130) will be held from the unit play following the unit play in which the value of the High Probability 2 Guaranteed Play Count Counter has reached 0.

The first Bernavi count counter manages the remaining number of Bernavis that can be performed in the first pseudo-BIG (see step S4404 in FIG. 153). The value of the first Bernavi count counter is decremented by 1 to "3OFF" (at the end of play) during a unit game in which a Bernavi is performed in the first pseudo-BIG, and is cleared when the pseudo-BIG ends.

The normal RIP remaining winning counter is a counter that manages the remaining number of times a transition from the first pseudo BIG to the second pseudo BIG is possible (see step S4405 in FIG. 153). In the above explanation, the value of the normal RIP remaining winning counter is decremented by 1 when a transition from the first pseudo BIG to the second pseudo BIG occurs (when a normal RIP wins in the first pseudo BIG) (see step S4425 in FIG. 156). However, here, the value is decremented by 1 when the second pseudo BIG ends after a transition from the first pseudo BIG to the second pseudo BIG ("3OFF" (end of game)), i.e., when the result of the determination in step S4434 in FIG. 156 is "YES". The value of the normal RIP remaining winning counter is cleared when the pseudo BIG ends.

The second Bernavi count counter manages the remaining number of Bernavis that can be executed in the second pseudo-BIG or pseudo-REG, and is set to "9" when the second pseudo-BIG starts, and to "5" when the pseudo-REG starts (see step S4427 in FIG. 156 and step S4482 in FIG. 161). The value of the second Bernavi count counter is decremented by 1 to "3OFF" (at the end of play) during a unit game in which a Bernavi is executed in the second pseudo-BIG or pseudo-REG, and is cleared when the pseudo-BIG or pseudo-REG ends.

The pseudo BIG stock counter is a counter that manages the remaining number of times control can be made to pseudo BIG when the termination conditions for pseudo BIG or pseudo REG are met (see steps S4441 and S4444 in Figure 157, and step S4461 in Figure 159). In the above explanation, whether or not to control to pseudo BIG when the termination conditions for pseudo REG are met is managed by the pseudo BIG winning flag (see step S4504 in Figure 164), but here, in the pseudo REG, it is managed by the pseudo BIG stock counter, just like in the pseudo BIG. The value of the pseudo BIG stock counter is incremented by 1 when a pseudo BIG is won ("LEV" (at the start of play)) in the 1G consecutive lottery (see step S4384 in FIG. 152 and step S4484 in FIG. 161), and is decremented by 1 when a pseudo BIG or pseudo REG ends and a new pseudo BIG begins. The value of the pseudo BIG stock counter is also cleared when a transition to a pseudo BIG (ED) (ending BB) occurs.

In the above explanation, the Pseudo BIG (ED) flag (see step S4406 in FIG. 153) is used to control the continuation of the Pseudo BIG until the end of the advantageous zone. However, here, the Pseudo BIG (ED) is managed as a separate ball output state from the Pseudo BIG in the ball output state flag storage area (see FIG. 20). As a result, if the Pseudo BIG (ED) is won in a 1G consecutive lottery (see step S4384 in FIG. 152 and step S4484 in FIG. 161), the ball output state will transition to Pseudo BIG (ED). The Pseudo BIG (ED) may be a ball output state in which the Pseudo BIG continues until the end of the advantageous zone, or may be the same ball output state as a normal Pseudo BIG, except that 2 is added to the value of the Pseudo BIG stock counter when the Pseudo BIG starts.

The first pseudo-BIG replay counter manages the number of times a replay ("F_Replay A" or "F_Replay B") is determined as the internal winning combination during the first pseudo-BIG (see step S4423 in FIG. 156). The value of the first pseudo-BIG replay counter is incremented by 1 to "3OFF" (at the end of play) during each unit play in which a replay is determined as the internal winning combination during the first pseudo-BIG. The value of the first pseudo-BIG replay counter is cleared when the pseudo-BIG or pseudo-REG ends, or when transitioning to the pseudo-BIG (ED).

The normal mode counter is a counter that manages normal mode, and when a transition occurs from a ball dispensing state other than the normal ball dispensing state (normal stage, chance stage A, and chance stage B) to the normal ball dispensing state ("LEV" (at the start of play)), the value determined in the normal transition mode lottery (see step S4061 in Figure 105) is set. The value of the normal mode counter is cleared when a transition occurs to a ball dispensing state other than the normal ball dispensing state or promotion chance state.

The point mode counter is a counter that manages the point mode, and is set to a value determined in the point mode lottery (see step S4063 in Figure 105, step S4166 in Figure 121, and step S4283 in Figure 132) held during the normal ball dispensing state (normal stage, chance stage A, and chance stage B) ("LEV" (at the start of play)). The value of the point mode counter is cleared when transitioning to a ball dispensing state other than the normal ball dispensing state or promotion chance state.

The consecutive-chance challenge winning count counter is a counter that manages the number of times a consecutive-chance challenge has been won in the non-advantageous zone or in the consecutive-chance preparation zone. The value of the consecutive-chance challenge winning count counter is incremented by 1 when a consecutive-chance challenge is won ("LEV" (at the start of play)) in the lottery at the time of transition to the advantageous zone (see step S4003 in Figure 98) or the lottery for transitioning to the consecutive-chance challenge (see step S4027 in Figure 100). In addition, the value of the consecutive-chance challenge winning count counter is cleared when transitioning to the normal ball-out state (normal stage, chance stage A, and chance stage B) and when the pseudo bonus (pseudo BIG, pseudo BIG (ED), or pseudo REG) ends.

<AT-related processing when lever is on>
FIG. 172 is a flowchart showing the AT-related processing performed in the main control circuit when the lever is on.

The lever-on AT-related processing shown in Figure 172 is processing performed by the main control circuit 100 in step S6 (game start state control processing) of Figure 23 (main processing).

In the lever-on AT-related processing, the main CPU 101 first executes processing that is not affected by the penalty (step S4601). In this processing, the main CPU 101 executes some of the AT-related processing described above and updates various information (counters, flags, etc.) based on the results of that AT-related processing.

The processing performed in step S4601 can include processing that is disadvantageous to the player, processing to perform an AT confirmation effect, processing performed when a ball-out state begins (when the current unit game is the first game in that ball-out state), and processing performed when a ball-out state ends (when the current unit game is the final game in that ball-out state). AT-related processing performed in the AT state or in a non-advantageous zone is also included in the processing performed in step S4601.

Examples of the above-mentioned "processing that is disadvantageous to the player" include the consecutive win preparation fall lottery processing (see step S4031 in Figure 100) and the high probability 2 fall lottery processing (see step S4272 in Figure 130). The consecutive win preparation fall lottery processing and the high probability 2 fall lottery processing are the above-mentioned "processing for deciding to transition from a relatively advantageous state (reference mode) to an unfavorable state (reference mode) (performing a fall lottery)."

Examples of the "processing for performing an AT confirmation effect" include the normal long freeze lottery processing (see step S4102 in FIG. 113) and the entry long freeze lottery processing (see step S4363 in FIG. 141). The normal long freeze lottery processing and the entry long freeze lottery processing are the "processing for performing a freeze as an AT confirmation effect" described above. As described above, if the normal long freeze lottery processing or the entry long freeze lottery is won in one unit game, the execution of the long freeze is controlled by the main effect control processing at the start of play in that unit game (see step S8 in FIG. 23). As a result, a long freeze occurs before each reel 3L, 3C, 3R begins spinning (before the first stop operation is performed).

Examples of the "processing performed when a single ball-out state begins (when the current unit game is the first game in that ball-out state)" include consecutive win preparation mode lottery processing (see step S4024 and step S4026 in FIG. 100), normal transition mode lottery processing (see step S4061 in FIG. 105), normal transition ceiling lottery processing (see step S4062 in FIG. 105), point mode lottery processing (see step S4063 in FIG. 105), chance stage guaranteed number of plays lottery processing at the start of chance stage (see step S4303 in FIG. 134), promotion chance mode lottery processing (see step S4364 in FIG. 141), consecutive win challenge pseudo-bonus lottery processing (see step S4522 in FIG. 165), consecutive win challenge start number of plays lottery processing (see step S4523 in FIG. 165), etc.

Of these processes, the consecutive win preparation mode lottery process, normal transition mode lottery process, point mode lottery process, and promotion chance mode lottery process are the processes described above for "setting the mode (reference mode) referenced in the AT transition lottery, CZ transition lottery, or AT advantage lottery (conducting a reference mode lottery)." Note that the point mode lottery process is performed when the normal stage begins (see step S4063 in FIG. 105), when the normal point value reaches 100 (see step S4166 in FIG. 121), and when transitioning from the normal ball output state to the promotion chance state (see step S4283 in FIG. 132). Here, of these point mode lottery processes, only the point mode lottery process performed when the normal stage begins is the subject of step S4601.

The chance stage guaranteed play count lottery process at the start of the chance stage and the consecutive game challenge play count lottery process are the above-mentioned "processes for setting the period during which the CZ state can continue (CZ period) (carrying out a CZ period lottery)." The normal transition ceiling lottery process is the above-mentioned "processing related to the conditions for carrying out an AT transition lottery or CZ transition lottery." The consecutive game challenge start pseudo bonus lottery process is the above-mentioned "processing for directly determining whether to transition to the AT state (carrying out an AT transition lottery)."

The above-mentioned "processing performed when one ball-out state ends (when the current unit play is the final game of that ball-out state)" can be, for example, the lottery for transitioning to normal at the end of a consecutive game challenge (see step S4528 in FIG. 165). The lottery for transitioning to normal at the end of a consecutive game challenge is the above-mentioned "processing for determining the state (reference mode) to transition to after the end of a relatively advantageous state (reference mode) (performing a lottery for transition destination after falling)."

After executing the processing of step S4601, the main CPU 101 executes backup processing (step S4602). In this processing, the main CPU 101 stores AT-related parameters as backup data in a specified area of the main RAM 103. AT-related parameters are various pieces of information (counters, flags, etc.) that can be updated as a result of AT-related processing. For example, the AT-related parameters include the counters and various winning flags shown in FIG. 171. The winning flag is a flag indicating that the AT transition lottery or CZ transition lottery has been won (for example, a pseudo-BIG winning flag, a promotion chance winning flag, a consecutive win challenge winning flag, etc.).

By performing the processing of step S4602, many AT-related parameters will be stored as backup data, but some AT-related parameters will not be stored as backup data (are not subject to backup). Information that may be updated by performing "processing not affected by penalties" (see step S4601 and step S4626 in Figure 173) can generally be excluded from backup.

For example, AT-related parameters that are not subject to backup include information that can be updated by the above-mentioned "processing to reduce the remaining period for which a relatively advantageous state (reference mode) can continue," information that can be updated by the AT-related processing performed in the AT state, and information that can be updated by the above-mentioned "processing performed when a ball-out state begins (when the current unit game is the first game in that ball-out state)."

Examples of the above-mentioned "information that can be updated by performing processing to reduce the remaining period for which a relatively advantageous state (reference mode) can be continued" include the consecutive win preparation guaranteed play count counter (see step S4023 in FIG. 100), the high probability 2 guaranteed play count counter (see step S4263, step S4266, and step S4269 in FIG. 130), the chance stage guaranteed play count counter (see step S4304 in FIG. 134), the promotion chance play count counter (see step S4362 in FIG. 141), the consecutive win challenge play count counter (see step S4524 in FIG. 165), and the high probability 1 play count counter (see step S4123 in FIG. 114).

The above-mentioned "information that can be updated by AT-related processing performed in the AT state" includes, for example, the first Bernavi count counter (see step S4404 in FIG. 153), the normal remaining win count counter (see step S4405 in FIG. 153), the second Bernavi count counter (see step S4427 in FIG. 156 and step S4482 in FIG. 161), the first pseudo-BIG win counter (see step S4423 in FIG. 156), the pseudo-bonus win counter (see step S4424 in FIG. 156), the first pseudo-BIG win counter (see step S4425 in FIG. 156), the pseudo-bonus win counter (see step S4426 in FIG. 156), the first pseudo-BIG win counter (see step S4427 in FIG. 156), the pseudo-bonus win counter (see step S4426 in FIG. 156), the first pseudo-BIG win counter (see step S4426 in FIG. 156), the pseudo-bonus win counter (see step S4426 in FIG. 156), the first pseudo-BIG win counter (see step S4426 in FIG. 156), the pseudo-BONUS win counter (see step S4426 in FIG. 156), the first ... Examples of such flags include the consecutive win challenge lottery flag after the end of the pseudo bonus (see step S4408 in FIG. 153 and step S4483 in FIG. 161), the pseudo BIG stock counter (see step S4441 and step S4444 in FIG. 157 and step S4461 in FIG. 159), and a flag that is set when a pseudo BIG (ED) is won in the 1G consecutive lottery (see step S4384 in FIG. 152 and step S4484 in FIG. 161). Note that here, the consecutive win challenge lottery flag that is set ON in the AT state is referred to as the consecutive win challenge lottery flag after the end of the pseudo bonus to distinguish it from the consecutive win challenge lottery flag that is set ON in states other than the AT state. If a confirmed consecutive win challenge flag is set in the AT state, this flag (confirmed consecutive win challenge flag after the end of the pseudo bonus) can also be included in "information that can be updated by AT-related processing performed in the AT state."

Examples of the above-mentioned "information that can be updated by processing performed when a single ball-out state begins (when the current unit game is the first game in that ball-out state)" include the consecutive win preparation mode counter, normal mode counter, and promotion chance mode counter. The consecutive win preparation mode counter, normal mode counter, and promotion chance mode counter are counters that manage the consecutive win preparation mode, normal mode, and promotion chance mode, respectively. The consecutive win preparation mode counter, normal mode counter, and promotion chance mode counter are information that can be updated by processing the consecutive win preparation mode lottery process, the normal transition mode lottery process, and the promotion chance mode lottery process, respectively. The consecutive win preparation mode lottery process, the normal transition mode lottery process, and the promotion chance mode lottery process are the above-mentioned "processing performed when a single ball-out state begins (when the current unit game is the first game in that ball-out state)." Note that the point mode lottery process is also included in "processing performed when a single ball output state begins (when the current unit game is the first game in that ball output state)", but in addition to when the normal stage begins (see step S4063 in FIG. 105), this process is also performed when the normal point value reaches 100 (see step S4166 in FIG. 121) and when transitioning from the normal ball output state to a promotion chance (see step S4283 in FIG. 132), so here, the point mode counter (counter that manages the point mode) is the target of backup.

AT-related parameters other than those not subject to backup as described above can be subject to backup. Here, information that can be updated by performing the processing from step S4603 to step S4621 in FIG. 173 is subject to backup.

For example, AT-related parameters that are subject to backup include information that can be updated by performing the above-mentioned "processing for directly deciding to transition to the AT state (conducting an AT transition lottery)" or "processing for deciding to transition to the CZ state (CZ) (conducting a CZ transition lottery)," as well as information indicating various states (reference modes).

Examples of information that can be updated by performing the above-mentioned "processing for directly deciding to transition to the AT state (conducting an AT transition lottery)" or "processing for deciding to transition to the CZ state (CZ) (conducting a CZ transition lottery)" include the chance stage A winning count counter, chance stage A winning count counter when a point is reached, chance stage B winning count counter, chance stage B winning count counter when a point is reached, promotion chance winning flag, promotion chance winning flag when a point is reached, pseudo BIG winning flag, pseudo BIG winning flag when a point is reached, etc.

Examples of the "information indicating various states (reference modes)" include information indicating the ball output states shown in FIG. 93 (non-advantageous zone, normal stage, chance stage A, chance stage B, consecutive win preparation, consecutive win challenge, promotion chance, pseudo BIG, and pseudo REG), information indicating the probability mode (non-high probability, high probability 1, high probability 2, and high probability 3), and information that plays a supporting role in the ball output state. Examples of information indicating the ball output state include information indicating the current ball output state (current ball output state) and information indicating the next ball output state (next ball output state). The current ball output state is managed in a ball output state flag storage area (see FIG. 20), and the next ball output state is similarly managed in a next ball output state flag storage area (not shown).

The next payout states include "none," "next non-advantageous zone," "next normal stage," "next chance stage A," "next chance stage B," "next consecutive win preparation," "next consecutive win challenge," "next promotion chance," "next pseudo BIG," and "next pseudo REG." When controlled to a premonition state, a "1" is stored in the bit corresponding to one of the next payout states in the next payout state flag storage area. For example, if the current payout state is "normal stage" and the next payout state is "next chance stage A," this indicates that the premonition state has been reached due to a win in chance stage A during the normal stage. If the next payout state is other than "none" when the premonition play count counter value reaches 0, the payout state will transition to the payout state corresponding to that next payout state. On the other hand, if the next payout state is "none" when the premonition play count counter value reaches 0, the current payout state will continue.

Examples of information that plays a supplementary role in determining the ball output status include information indicating that ceiling preparation is in progress (see step S4125 in FIG. 114) (ceiling reached state flag), information indicating that ceiling fake preparation is in progress (see step S4127 in FIG. 114) (ceiling fake state flag), confirmed consecutive win challenge flag (see step S4003 in FIG. 98 and step S4029 in FIG. 100), and information indicating that the 3BB flag interval state (see step S4022 in FIG. 100) is not in effect at the start of consecutive win preparation (non-internal state flag at start of consecutive win preparation). Furthermore, pseudo BIG and pseudo REG can be managed using appropriate flags (pseudo BIG activation state flag, pseudo REG activation state flag, second pseudo BIG start state flag, second pseudo BIG activation state flag, etc.), and these flags can also be considered information that plays a supplementary role in determining the ball output status.

Information indicating the ball dispensing state also includes information indicating the previous ball dispensing state (previous ball dispensing state), but this information is not subject to backup. The previous ball dispensing state is the ball dispensing state in which the balls were dispensed during the previous unit game, and by comparing the previous ball dispensing state with the current ball dispensing state, it is possible to check whether the ball dispensing state has changed.

Furthermore, of the counters shown in FIG. 171, counters other than those mentioned above as not subject to backup (counters for the number of games in the advantageous zone for ball output, counter for the number of normal prescribed games, counter for the number of premonition games, normal point counter, counter for the number of times a point has been reached, cherry counter, point mode counter, counter for the number of times a consecutive challenge has been won, etc.) are subject to backup. Furthermore, although not shown in FIG. 171, the counter for the number of games during ceiling preparation (see step S4142 in FIG. 118) is also subject to backup.

After executing the processing of step S4602, the main CPU 101 executes various AT-related processes when the lever is on (step S4603). In this processing, the main CPU 101 executes all AT-related processes that are executed when the start lever 7 is operated (when the game start state control processing (see step S6 in Figure 23) is executed), except for the processing executed in step S4601. Of the processes described using Figures 98 to 170 as being executed in the game start state control processing (see step S6 in Figure 23), all processes that are not executed in step S4601 are executed in steps S4603 to S4604.

Specifically, the processing performed in step S4603 includes lottery processing for transition to consecutive wins challenge (see step S4027 in FIG. 100), lottery for determining the transition to consecutive wins challenge (see step S4029 in FIG. 100), lottery processing for freeze during normal stage (see step S4081 in FIG. 108), lottery processing for transition flag/winning flag during normal stage (see step S4082 in FIG. 108), lottery processing for transition to normal specified number of plays with high probability 1 (see step S4123 in FIG. 114), and ceiling preparation processing. Flag set lottery processing (see step S4142 in FIG. 118), lottery processing for type of lottery when ceiling is reached (see step S4144 in FIG. 118), point mode lottery processing (see step S4166 in FIG. 121), lottery processing when point is reached (see step S4167 in FIG. 121), lottery processing for number of premonition plays when pseudo BIG/promotion chance is won during normal stage (see step S4202, step S4205, and step S4207 in FIG. 125), chance stage during normal stage Lottery processing for the number of premonition plays at the time of winning (see step S4222 and step S4224 in FIG. 126), lottery processing for transition to high probability 2 (see step S4262, step S4265, and step S4268 in FIG. 130), lottery processing for transition to promotion chance (see step S4284 in FIG. 132), lottery processing for pseudo BIG and promotion chance during chance stage (see step S4306 in FIG. 134), lottery processing for adding the number of plays during chance stage (see step S4308 in FIG. 134), Examples of such processes include lottery processing for the number of premonition plays when a flag is drawn during the match stage (see step S4324 in FIG. 138), lottery processing during promotion chance (see step S4366 in FIG. 141), lottery processing for the next pseudo play (see step S4367 in FIG. 141), lottery processing for pseudo BIG promotion when the specified number of plays has been consumed (see step S4369 in FIG. 141), lottery processing for the current pseudo play (see step S4370 in FIG. 141), lottery processing during consecutive win challenge (see step S4525 in FIG. 165), etc.

These processes are essentially advantageous to the player, and correspond to the "advantageous decision" described above. In this modified example, if the penalty conditions described below (see step S4623 in Figure 173) are met, such advantageous decisions will be restricted (the results of the advantageous decision will be canceled).

Of the above-mentioned "processing for performing a freeze as an AT confirmation effect," the normal long freeze lottery processing (see step S4102 in FIG. 113) and the entry long freeze lottery processing (see step S4363 in FIG. 141) are performed in step S4601. In contrast, the normal stage freeze lottery processing (see step S4081 in FIG. 108) is performed in step S4603. As described above, the long freeze controlled as a result of the normal long freeze lottery or entry long freeze lottery occurs before the rotation of each reel 3L, 3C, and 3R begins (before the first stop operation is performed). In contrast, the freeze controlled as a result of the normal stage freeze lottery occurs after the rotation of each reel 3L, 3C, and 3R has stopped (after the third stop operation is performed). In this respect, the freeze lottery process during the normal stage differs from the long freeze lottery process during the normal stage and the long freeze lottery process when entering the stage.

After executing the processing of step S4603, the main CPU 101 updates various information (counters, flags, etc.) based on the results of the AT-related processing performed in step S4603 (step S4604). Also, during this processing, the main CPU 101 updates the values of counters that are backed up and that may be incremented or decremented when the start lever 7 is operated ("LEV" shown in FIG. 171) (e.g., the normal specified number of plays counter, normal point counter, point reach count counter, cherry counter, point mode counter, consecutive challenge win count counter, etc.) if it is time for increment or decrement. After executing the processing of step S4604, the main CPU 101 terminates this subroutine.

<AT related processing when completely stopped>
FIG. 173 is a flowchart showing the AT-related processing performed in the main control circuit when the engine is completely stopped.

The AT-related processing at full stop shown in Figure 173 is processing performed by the main control circuit 100 in step S15 (game end state control processing) of Figure 23 (main processing).

In the AT-related processing when all reels are stopped, the main CPU 101 first executes various AT-related processing when all reels are stopped (step S4621). In this processing, the main CPU 101 executes all AT-related processing that is performed when all reels 3L, 3C, and 3R have stopped spinning (when the end-of-game state control processing (see step S15 in Figure 23) is performed), except for the processing performed in step S4626. Of the processing described using Figures 98 to 170 as being performed in the end-of-game state control processing (see step S15 in Figure 23), all processing that is not performed in step S4626 is performed in steps S4621 to S4622.

In the above, it has been explained that the promotion chance pre-processing (see step S4105 in FIG. 113) and the high probability 2 transition lottery processing (3) (see steps S4267 to S4269 in FIG. 130) are performed in the start-of-game state control processing (see step S6 in FIG. 23). However, here, it is assumed that the promotion chance pre-processing (see step S4105 in FIG. 113) and the high probability 2 transition lottery processing (3) (see steps S4267 to S4269 in FIG. 130) are performed in the end-of-game state control processing (see step S15 in FIG. 23). Also, in step S4621, it is determined whether the penalty condition (see step S4623) is met, and if it is determined that the penalty condition is met, the high probability 2 transition lottery processing (3) may not be executed.

After executing the processing of step S4621, the main CPU 101 updates various information (counters, flags, etc.) based on the results of the AT-related processing performed in step S4621 (step S4622). Also, in this processing, the main CPU 101 updates the values of counters that are the target of backup and that may be added or subtracted when all reels 3L, 3C, and 3R have stopped spinning ("3OFF" shown in FIG. 171) (for example, the advantageous ball-out zone play count counter, the premonition play count counter, etc.) if it is time for addition or subtraction.

After executing the processing of step S4622, the main CPU 101 determines whether the penalty conditions are met (step S4623). Here, the penalty conditions are that all of the following (a) to (g) are met:

(a) It is not in a non-advantageous zone (including a unit game that transitions to an advantageous zone). (b) The first stop operation is a stop operation (irregular press) on the center reel 3C or the right reel 3R. (c) It is not in a pseudo-BIG. (d) It is not in a pseudo-REG. (e) It is not in a pseudo-BIG (ED). (f) When in the normal stage or during preparation for a consecutive win, none of the following internal winning roles have been determined: "Miss", "F_Reach Eye Role A", "F_Reach Eye Role B", "F_Reach Eye Role C", "F_BB Confirmed Role A", "F_BB Confirmed Role B", "F_1 Piece Role A", and "F_1 Piece Role B". (g) It is not in a bonus state (3BB game state shown in Figure 81). As described above, when any of "F_Reach Eye A,""F_Reach Eye B,""F_Reach Eye C,""F_BB Confirmed A," and "F_BB Confirmed B" is determined as the internal winning combination in the normal stage, if neither the promotion chance nor the pseudo-BIG is won, a notification (irregular button press navigation) is issued to perform a stop operation on the center reel 3C or the right reel 3R as the first stop operation. In this case, it is inappropriate to impose a penalty even if a stop operation in accordance with the irregular button press navigation is performed. Therefore, when any of "F_Reach Eye A,""F_Reach Eye B,""F_Reach Eye C,""F_BB Confirmed A," and "F_BB Confirmed B" is determined as the internal winning combination in the normal stage, the penalty condition is not established (see (f) above).

Furthermore, even if a "miss" is determined as the internal winning combination in the normal stage, if a stop operation is performed on the left reel 3L as the first stop operation, there is a possibility that a symbol combination that the player may perceive as a "reach" (for example, a result in which three "V"s are displayed on the left reel 3L) will appear, so irregular button navigation will also be performed. Furthermore, if the situations in which irregular button navigation occurs are limited, there is a possibility that a player may be able to guess the results of AT-related processing based on the occurrence of irregular button navigation. Therefore, irregular button navigation will also be performed when either "F_1-Coin Role A" or "F_1-Coin Role B" is determined as the internal winning combination in the normal stage. As a result, in the normal stage, if any of the following roles are determined as the internal winning roles: "F_Reach Eye Role A," "F_Reach Eye Role B," "F_Reach Eye Role C," "F_BB Confirmed Role A," and "F_BB Confirmed Role B," as well as "Miss," "F_1-Piece Role A," and "F_1-Piece Role B," the penalty conditions will not be met. Similarly, for consecutive win preparations, if these roles are determined as the internal winning roles, the penalty conditions will not be met (see (f) above).

If it is determined in step S4623 that the penalty condition is met, the main CPU 101 assigns backup information to various counters/flags (step S4624). In this process, the main CPU 101 overwrites the information (counters, flags, etc.) updated in steps S4604 of FIG. 172 through step S4622 of FIG. 173 with the information (counters, flags, etc.) stored as backup data in step S4602 of FIG. 172. This changes the AT-related parameters from the updated information to the information stored as backup data. In other words, the AT-related parameters revert to the information stored at the time of the previous unit game, and the results of the AT-related processing performed in the current unit game are canceled.

Then, if it has been determined that a pseudo game will be played in the next unit game, the main CPU 101 discards the pseudo game information (step S4625). In this process, if information indicating that a pseudo game will be played in the next unit game (pseudo game information) is stored as a result of the processing of steps S4604 in FIG. 172 through S4622 in FIG. 173, the main CPU 101 erases the pseudo game information. For example, if the current ball output status is a promotion chance, and a pseudo game determined by the next pseudo game lottery (see step S4367 in FIG. 141) is set, the main CPU 101 erases the information indicating the pseudo game. This cancels the pseudo game that was scheduled to be played in the unit game following the unit game for which the next pseudo game lottery was drawn.

The pseudo-game information discarded in the processing of step S4625 is updated based on the results of the AT-related processing performed in step S4603 of FIG. 172 through step S4621 of FIG. 173. In this regard, as described above, the next pseudo-game lottery processing (see step S4367 of FIG. 141) is performed in step S4603 of FIG. 172, while the normal long freeze lottery processing (see step S4102 of FIG. 113) is performed in step S4601 of FIG. 172. Even if the normal long freeze lottery is won, it will be decided that a pseudo-game will be played in the next unit game, but in this case, it will not be subject to processing in step S4625 and the pseudo-game will not be canceled.

If it is determined in step S4623 that the penalty condition is not met, or after executing the processing of step S4625, the main CPU 101 executes processing that is not affected by the penalty (step S4626). In this processing, the main CPU 101 executes some of the AT-related processing described above, and updates various information (counters, flags, etc.) based on the results of that AT-related processing. Examples of processing executed in step S4626 include processing that is disadvantageous to the player, AT-related processing executed in the AT state, etc.

In the processing of step S4626, the main CPU 101 performs the above-mentioned "processing disadvantageous to the player" by updating (subtracting 1) the values of, for example, the consecutive win preparation guaranteed play count counter (see step S4023 of FIG. 100), the high probability 2 guaranteed play count counter (see step S4263, step S4266, and step S4269 of FIG. 130), the chance stage guaranteed play count counter (see step S4304 of FIG. 134), the promotion chance play count counter (see step S4362 of FIG. 141), the consecutive win challenge play count counter (see step S4524 of FIG. 165), and the high probability 1 play count counter (see step S4123 of FIG. 114). Furthermore, if the value of the chance stage guaranteed play count counter is 0, the main CPU 101 transitions to the normal stage (see step S4344 of FIG. 140).

The "AT-related processing performed in the AT state" is, for example, the final second pseudo-BI
Examples of such processes include a lottery process for a consecutive win challenge at the end of G (see step S4464 in FIG. 159), a lottery process when the number of successful rep is insufficient (see step S4443 in FIG. 157), etc. In addition, the main CPU 101 updates the information indicating the previous ball output state described above.

Furthermore, in the processing of step S4626, the main CPU 101 executes supplemental exception processing for the consecutive-game winning preparation rollover lottery processing (see step S4031 in FIG. 100). This processing is processing in which, if a player wins the consecutive-game winning preparation rollover lottery performed in step S4601 in FIG. 172, and also wins the consecutive-game winning challenge transition lottery performed in step S4603 in FIG. 172 (see step S4027 in FIG. 100) and the consecutive-game winning challenge transition flag is set ON, the result of the consecutive-game winning preparation rollover lottery is discarded. As a result of this, the next unit game will transition to the consecutive-game winning challenge. On the other hand, if a player wins the consecutive-game winning preparation rollover lottery and also wins the consecutive-game winning challenge transition lottery, but a penalty condition is met, the consecutive-game winning challenge transition flag is set OFF in step S4624. Therefore, in this case, the supplementary exception processing will not be executed, and the next unit game will transition to the normal stage.

In addition, in the processing of step S4626, the main CPU 101 executes supplemental exception processing for the consecutive-game challenge end normal transition lottery processing (see step S4528 in FIG. 165). This processing is processing in which, when a transition to a non-advantageous zone or consecutive-game challenge preparation zone is scheduled as a result of the consecutive-game challenge end normal transition lottery performed in step S4601 in FIG. 172, a promotion chance or pseudo-BIG lottery is won in the consecutive-game challenge lottery processing performed in step S4603 in FIG. 172, and the promotion chance winning flag or pseudo-BIG winning flag is set to ON, the result of the consecutive-game challenge end normal transition lottery is discarded. As a result of this, the supplemental exception processing is executed, and the next unit game will transition to the promotion chance or pseudo-BIG lottery. On the other hand, if a transition to the non-advantageous zone or the consecutive-game preparation zone is scheduled by the consecutive-game challenge end normal transition lottery, and if a promotion chance or pseudo-BIG lottery is won during the consecutive-game challenge, but a penalty condition is met, the promotion chance lottery flag or pseudo-BIG lottery flag is set to OFF in step S4624. Therefore, in this case, the supplemental exception processing is not executed, and the next unit game will transition to the non-advantageous zone or the consecutive-game preparation zone. Also, in FIG. 165, it has been described that the consecutive-game challenge end normal transition lottery processing is executed when the determination result of step S4527 is "NO," but the consecutive-game challenge end normal transition lottery processing may also be executed without executing step S4527 (regardless of whether the promotion chance lottery flag or pseudo-BIG lottery flag is set to ON). In this case, the supplemental exception processing can be executed even if a promotion chance or pseudo BIG is won in the pseudo bonus lottery at the start of the consecutive game challenge (see step S4522 in FIG. 165). Note that because the pseudo bonus lottery processing at the start of the consecutive game challenge is performed in step S4601 in FIG. 172, if a promotion chance or pseudo BIG is won in the pseudo bonus lottery at the start of the consecutive game challenge, the promotion chance winning flag or pseudo BIG winning flag will not be set to OFF in step S4624 even if the penalty condition is met.

Furthermore, in the processing of step S4626, the main CPU 101 executes supplemental exception processing for the consecutive-games preparation rollover lottery processing (see step S4031 in FIG. 100). This processing discards the result of the consecutive-games preparation rollover lottery processing if the consecutive-games preparation rollover lottery performed in step S4601 in FIG. 172 is won, the consecutive-games challenge transition lottery performed in step S4603 in FIG. 172 is also won, and the consecutive-games challenge transition flag is set to on.

After executing step S4626, the main CPU 101 terminates this subroutine.

As a result, for example, in the normal stage, the current value of the chance stage A winning count counter is stored as backup data in step S4602 of FIG. 172. Thereafter, if the chance stage A is won in the normal stage transition flag/winning flag lottery performed in step S4603 (see step S4082 of FIG. 108), 1 is added to the value of the chance stage A winning count counter in step S4604. Thereafter, if a penalty condition is met in that unit game, the value of the chance stage A winning count counter after the increment in step S4604 is overwritten by the value of the chance stage A winning count counter stored as backup data in step S4602 in step S4624 of FIG. 173. As a result, the value of the Chance Stage A Winning Count Counter will return to the value it had before the normal stage transition flag/winning flag lottery was held, and the results of the normal stage transition flag/winning flag lottery will be canceled.

Also, for example, in Chance Stage A, in step S4602 of FIG. 172, information indicating the current pseudo BIG winning flag (here, "OFF") is stored as backup data. Thereafter, if a pseudo BIG is won in the pseudo BIG/promotion chance lottery during the chance stage (see step S4306 of FIG. 134) performed in step S4603, the pseudo BIG winning flag is set to ON in step S4604. Thereafter, if a penalty condition is met in the unit game, in step S4624 of FIG. 173, the information indicating the pseudo BIG winning flag after processing in step S4604 ("ON") is overwritten with the information indicating the pseudo BIG winning flag ("OFF") stored as backup data in step S4602. As a result, the pseudo BIG winning flag is set back to off, and the results of the pseudo BIG/promotion chance lottery during that chance stage are canceled. Note that, although the above describes an example in which information indicating a pseudo BIG win is managed by a flag, information indicating a pseudo BIG win may also be managed by a counter, in the same way as information indicating a win in Chance Stage A.

Also, for example, in consecutive win preparation, if the consecutive win preparation drop lottery (see step S4031 in FIG. 100) performed in step S4601 of FIG. 172 is won, the normal stage transition flag is set to ON. Information that may be updated by performing step S4601 is not subject to backup, and information indicating this flag is not stored as backup data in step S4602. Furthermore, the AT-related parameters that are the subject of processing in step S4624 of FIG. 173 are information that is updated based on the results of the AT-related processing performed in steps S4603 to S4621, and because the consecutive win preparation drop lottery is performed in step S4601, the normal stage transition flag is not subject to processing in step S4624. Therefore, even if a penalty condition is met in that unit game, the information indicating the normal stage transition flag after processing in step S4601 ("ON") is maintained, and a transition to the normal stage will occur in the next unit game.

Furthermore, for example, the consecutive win preparation guaranteed play count counter (see step S4023 in Figure 100), the high probability 2 guaranteed play count counter (see step S4263, step S4266, and step S4269 in Figure 130), the chance stage guaranteed play count counter (see step S4304 in Figure 134), the promotion chance play count counter (see step S4362 in Figure 141), the consecutive win challenge play count counter (see step S4524 in Figure 165), and the high probability 1 play count counter (see step S4123 in Figure 114) are not subject to backup. Therefore, in step S4602 in Figure 172, the values of these counters are not stored as backup data. Furthermore, AT-related parameters that are not subject to backup are not subject to processing in step S4624 in Figure 173. Therefore, regardless of whether the penalty condition is met, if the value is 1 or greater, the value is decremented by 1 in step S4626 for each unit game.

For example, the premonition play count counter (see steps S4203, S4206, and S4208 in FIG. 125, steps S4223 and S4225 in FIG. 126, and step S4325 in FIG. 138) is subject to backup. The AT-related parameters that are subject to backup are also subject to processing in step S4624 in FIG. 173. Therefore, when controlled in a premonition state, the current value of the premonition play count counter is stored as backup data in step S4602. Then, in step S4622, one is subtracted from the value of the premonition play count counter. Thereafter, when the penalty condition is met, the value of the premonition play count counter after subtraction in step S4622 is overwritten in step S4624 with the value of the premonition play count counter stored as backup data in step S4602. This causes the value of the premonition play counter to return to the value it had when the unit play started, canceling the subtraction.

As explained above, to achieve the playability of the pachislot machine 1 according to the fourth embodiment, numerous AT-related processes must be executed. However, the penalty function can be implemented through relatively simple processing, without creating complex branching in the flowchart between processes that are not affected by penalties and processes that are affected by penalties. This allows for appropriate penalty implementation while saving the capacity required for penalty-related processing. If the AT-related processing were to be executed after determining whether the penalty conditions were met, the AT-related processing would need to be executed after the first stop operation, making it difficult to reflect the results of the AT-related processing (such as the AT transition lottery) in the presentation. In this regard, the above example allows the AT-related processing to be executed before determining whether the penalty conditions are met (when the start lever 7 is operated), allowing the results of the AT-related processing (such as the AT transition lottery) to be immediately reflected in the presentation. Note that, in order to create presentations based on the results of the AT-related processing, information indicating the results of the AT-related processing can be included in the start command data (see step S7 in Figure 23).

Although not explained above, in the processing of step S4601 in FIG. 172 or step S4626 in FIG. 173, the main CPU 101 clears each counter when it is the clear timing for that counter (see FIG. 171). Also, in the processing of step S4601 in FIG. 172, if the current ball output state is a promotion chance and the value of the promotion chance play count counter is 1, the main CPU 101 provisionally sets the destination ball output state (pseudo-REG or pseudo-BIG) after the promotion chance ends. In this processing, the main CPU 101 sets pseudo-REG as the destination ball output state if the promotion chance mode is any of "Mode 1" to "Mode 3," and sets pseudo-BIG if the promotion chance mode is "Mode 4." This provisional setting of the destination ball output state will be referred to as "forced setting."

Here, in the final game of the promotion chance (value of the promotion chance play count counter: 0), if the pseudo BIG winning flag is set ON at the time the pseudo BIG promotion lottery process is performed when the specified number of plays is consumed (see step S4369 in FIG. 141), the main CPU 101 can transition to pseudo BIG based on the pseudo BIG winning flag. However, if the pseudo BIG winning flag is not set ON at that time, the main CPU 101 cannot transition to pseudo BIG based on the pseudo BIG winning flag, and cannot transition to pseudo REG based on the pseudo REG winning flag (because the pseudo REG winning flag is not set ON in this case). In this case, the main CPU 101 refers to the forcibly set ball payout state and transitions to that ball payout state. This situation can occur because a "pseudo REG" is not provided (the pseudo REG winning flag is not set ON) as a result of the promotion chance lottery (see step S4366 in FIG. 141) and the pseudo BIG promotion lottery when the specified number of plays is played (see step S4369 in FIG. 141), and because the pseudo BIG winning flag may be set OFF if a penalty condition is met.

For example, if the value of the promotion chance number of plays counter is 1, and a pseudo BIG is won in the promotion chance lottery (see step S4366 in FIG. 141) performed in step S4603 of FIG. 172, and the pseudo BIG winning flag is set to ON, but if a penalty condition is met, the pseudo BIG winning flag is set to OFF in step S4624 of FIG. 173. Thereafter, in the next unit play (value of the promotion chance number of plays counter: 0), if a pseudo BIG is not won in the pseudo BIG promotion lottery when the specified number of plays is consumed (see step S4369 in FIG. 141), neither the pseudo BIG winning flag nor the pseudo REG winning flag will be set to ON. In this case, the main CPU 101 refers to the forcibly set ball payout state and transitions to that ball payout state.

Also, when the value of the promotion chance number of plays counter is 1, if the pseudo BIG is not won in the promotion chance lottery (see step S4366 in FIG. 141) performed in step S4603 in FIG. 172, and if the pseudo BIG is not won in the pseudo BIG promotion lottery when the specified number of plays is consumed (see step S4369 in FIG. 141) in the next unit play (value of the promotion chance number of plays counter: 0), then neither the pseudo BIG winning flag nor the pseudo REG winning flag will be set to ON. In this case, the main CPU 101 will refer to the forcibly set ball output state and transition to that ball output state.

<Example of promotion chance (when a penalty occurs)>
Figure 174 shows an example of a presentation when a penalty occurs during a promotion chance.

As an example of the presentation shown in Figure 174, Figure 174(a) shows an image corresponding to the word "WIN" being displayed on the main display device 210 in the unit game immediately before the unit game that transitions to the promotion chance (in the case of transitioning from the normal ball output state to the promotion chance, the final game in the normal ball output state: the winning lottery notification game).

Figure 174(b) shows that after the state shown in Figure 174(a), in the first game of the promotion chance (value of the promotion chance number of plays counter: 3), a promotion chance lottery (see step S4366 in Figure 141) is held, and an image corresponding to the words "Bonus promotion lottery in progress" is displayed on the main display device 210. Note that the long freeze (see step S4363 in Figure 141) is not a winning lottery.

Figure 174(c) shows the state after the state shown in Figure 174(b) in the first game of the promotion chance (value of the promotion chance play count counter: 3), when reels 3L, 3C, and 3R start to spin and a stop operation (irregular press) is performed on center reel 3C or right reel 3R as the first stop operation, an image corresponding to the words "irregular press being performed" is displayed on the main display device 210. An image corresponding to the words "bonus promotion lottery in progress" also continues to be displayed.

Figure 174(d) shows that after the state shown in Figure 174(c), in the second game of the promotion chance (value of the promotion chance play count counter: 2), an image corresponding to the words "Bonus promotion lottery in progress" is displayed on the main display device 210 in response to the promotion chance lottery being held (see step S4366 in Figure 141). As a result of irregular button presses being performed in the first game, a penalty condition is met, and the pseudo-game (see step S4367 in Figure 141) determined based on the result of the promotion chance lottery held in the first game (see step S4366 in Figure 141) is canceled (see step S4625 in Figure 173).

Figure 174(e) shows the state in which, after the state shown in Figure 174(d), in the second game of the promotion chance (value of the promotion chance play count counter: 2), when reels 3L, 3C, and 3R start to spin and a stop operation (irregular press) is performed on center reel 3C or right reel 3R as the first stop operation, an image corresponding to the words "irregular press being performed" is displayed on the main display device 210. An image corresponding to the words "bonus promotion lottery in progress" also continues to be displayed.

Figure 174 (f) shows how, following the state shown in Figure 174 (e), in the third game of the promotion chance (value of the promotion chance play count counter: 1), an image corresponding to the words "Bonus promotion lottery in progress" is displayed on the main display device 210 in response to the promotion chance lottery being held (see step S4366 in Figure 141). As a result of irregular button presses being performed in the second game, a penalty condition is met, and the pseudo-game (see step S4367 in Figure 141) determined based on the result of the promotion chance lottery held in the second game (see step S4366 in Figure 141) is canceled (see step S4625 in Figure 173).

Figure 174 (g) shows the state after the state shown in Figure 174 (f) in the third promotion chance game (promotion chance play count counter value: 1), where, after reels 3L, 3C, and 3R have started to spin, when a stop operation (irregular press) is performed on center reel 3C or right reel 3R as the first stop operation, an image corresponding to the words "irregular press being performed" is displayed on the main display device 210. An image corresponding to the words "bonus promotion lottery in progress" also continues to be displayed.

Figure 174(h) shows an image corresponding to the words "Aim for the BAR!" being displayed on the main display device 210 when the pseudo game (see step S4370 in Figure 141) determined based on the results of the pseudo BIG promotion lottery when the specified number of plays is consumed (see step S4369 in Figure 141) begins in the fourth game of the promotion chance (value of the promotion chance play count counter: 0) after the state shown in Figure 174(g). This image suggests that a stopping operation should be performed at a timing when a "bar" symbol, as a pseudo REG transition symbol, can be stopped and displayed on each reel 3L, 3C, and 3R. This encourages the player to perform a stopping operation aiming for the "bar." As a result of irregular button presses being performed in the third game, the penalty conditions are met, and the pseudo game (see step S4367 in FIG. 141) determined based on the results of the promotion chance lottery performed in the third game (see step S4366 in FIG. 141) is canceled (see step S4625 in FIG. 173). In contrast, the pseudo game determined based on the results of the pseudo BIG promotion lottery when the specified number of plays has been played (see step S4369 in FIG. 141) occurs without being affected by the penalty.

Figure 174(i) shows how, in a pseudo game played in the fourth promotion chance game (promotion chance game number counter value: 0) after the state shown in Figure 174(h), when all reels 3L, 3C, and 3R have stopped spinning, an image corresponding to the words "REGULAR BONUS!" and "PLAY PROGRESS BY PRESSING THE LEVER ON" is displayed on the main display device 210. This notifies the player that a transition to a regular bonus (pseudo REG) will occur, and prompts the player to operate the start lever 7.

After the state shown in Figure 174(i) is reached, when the start lever 7 is operated, the rotation of each reel 3L, 3C, and 3R begins for actual play (main play) (a random delay process is performed to progress the game). Figure 174(j) shows the push order navigation image displayed on the main display device 210 at this time. The push order navigation image is an image for announcing the correct push order for the push order bell (bell navigation). Here, since "F_231 Bell A" to "F_231 Bell C" have been determined as the internal winning combination, it is announced that the first stop operation should be performed on the center reel 3C with a push aimed at "seven," the second stop operation should be performed on the right reel 3R, and the third stop operation should be performed on the left reel 3L (see Figure 96). In addition, "4 Navigations Remaining" indicates the remaining number of bell navigations that can be performed in the pseudo-REG (the value of the second bell navigation number counter). The initial value for "Navi remaining" is 5, but since one Bell Navi was performed, the number of "Navi remaining" has been reduced by 1 and updated to "4."

The above describes the case where a "fake pseudo game" is determined as a result of the pseudo BIG promotion lottery when the specified number of plays has been played (see step S4369 in Figure 141). As a result, a pseudo game aiming for "BAR" occurs (see Figure 174 (h)), and the game transitions to a pseudo REG (see Figures 174 (i) and (j)). In contrast, if a "pseudo BIG" or "pseudo BIG (ED)" is determined as a result of the pseudo BIG promotion lottery when the specified number of plays has been played (see step S4369 in Figure 141), then instead of the effects in Figures 174 (h) to (j), effects such as those in Figures 150 (c) to (h) are performed, and the game transitions to a pseudo BIG.

As explained above, in this embodiment, even if a pseudo-BIG is won in an AT-related process (e.g., a lottery during a promotion chance) performed in one unit game and the pseudo-BIG winning flag is set to ON, if a penalty condition is met in that unit game, the pseudo-BIG winning flag is returned to its OFF state (see step S4624 in FIG. 173). This invalidates the result of the AT-related process (e.g., a lottery during a promotion chance). On the other hand, AT-related parameters that are not subject to backup (e.g., a promotion chance play count counter) are updated even if a penalty condition is met (see step S4626 in FIG. 173). Therefore, each time a penalty condition is met in a promotion chance, one opportunity to be promoted to the pseudo-BIG is lost. Furthermore, if it has been determined that the game will transition to a promotion chance via a premonition state, and a penalty condition is met in the winning notification game (see FIG. 174(a)), the value of the premonition play count counter will not be updated (see step S4624 in FIG. 173), and therefore the game will not transition to a promotion chance as long as the penalty condition is met.

In addition, in this embodiment, if a penalty condition is met in a unit game and a decision is made to play a pseudo game as a result of AT-related processing (e.g., a lottery during a promotion chance) executed in that unit game, the pseudo game is discarded. On the other hand, if a penalty condition is met in a unit game and a decision is made to play a pseudo game as a result of AT-related processing (e.g., a pseudo BIG promotion lottery when the specified number of plays is consumed) executed in a unit game other than that unit game (e.g., the next unit game), the pseudo game is not discarded based on the fact that the penalty condition is met. However, even in such a case, the pseudo game may be discarded. Note that, here, it is assumed that a pseudo game is played at the start of play (in the game start state control processing (see step S6 in Figure 23)), and the pseudo game scheduled to be played in the unit game following the unit game in which the penalty condition was met is discarded. However, the pseudo game may also be performed at the end of the game (during the game end state control process (see step S15 in Figure 23)), in which case the pseudo game scheduled to be performed in the unit game in which the penalty condition was met may be discarded.

The penalty condition can be met when a stop operation (irregular press) is performed on the center reel 3C or right reel 3R as the first stop operation. However, this stop operation is, of course, a stop operation in the actual game (main game), not a stop operation in the pseudo game. Therefore, even if a stop operation is performed on the center reel 3C or right reel 3R as the first stop operation in the pseudo game that occurs in the fourth promotion chance game (value of the promotion chance game number counter: 0), a pseudo BIG or pseudo REG will start in that unit game.

In addition, Figure 174 explains that when irregular button presses are performed, an image corresponding to the words "Irregular button presses are being performed" is displayed on the main display device 210. As explained in the modified example of the first gaming machine, when a stop operation is performed in a manner that may result in a penalty condition being met, it is possible to configure the device to display text or sound to explain the situation, saying "Irregular button presses are being performed."

Furthermore, if a stop operation is performed in a manner that could result in a penalty condition, the presentation content may be changed (the currently running presentation may be terminated). For example, as described above, in the normal stage, multiple presentation modes are provided, and if an irregular button press is performed while the player is in a presentation mode with a relatively high expectation (special presentation mode), the screen may be switched to the presentation mode with the lowest expectation (basic presentation mode) at the time the first stop operation is performed. Furthermore, when the player is in Chance Stage A, Chance Stage B, or consecutive win preparation, the player is in a presentation mode different from the normal stage, and if an irregular button press is performed in these ball output states, the screen may similarly be switched to the basic presentation mode. On the other hand, when the player is in a consecutive win challenge or promotion chance, the player is in a presentation mode different from the normal stage, but if an irregular button press is performed in these ball output states, the presentation mode may not be switched (the currently displayed background image may be maintained).

Fifth Embodiment
The first to fourth embodiments have been described above. The fifth embodiment will now be described. The basic configuration of the pachislot machine 2001 according to the fifth embodiment is the same as that of the pachislot machine 1 according to the first to fourth embodiments. In the following, components that are the same as those of the pachislot machine 1 according to the first to fourth embodiments will be described with the same reference numerals. Furthermore, explanations of portions that apply to the fifth embodiment from the explanations of the first to fourth embodiments will be omitted.

Note that even if the above description contains statements that are limited to the pachislot machine 1 of the first embodiment, such as "In the first embodiment," or "In the pachislot machine 1 of the first embodiment," these statements can also be applied to the pachislot machine 1 of the fifth embodiment, provided that they do not deviate from the spirit of the fifth embodiment. Similarly, the above description contains statements that are limited to the pachislot machines 1 of the second to fourth embodiments, and these statements can also be applied to the pachislot machine 1 of the fifth embodiment, provided that they do not deviate from the spirit of the fifth embodiment. Therefore, it is possible to partially replace or combine each of the configurations shown in the first to fourth embodiments (including each of the configurations shown in the modified examples and the extended examples) with the configuration shown in the fifth embodiment.

Furthermore, even if a component has a different shape from the pachislot machine 1 according to the first to fourth embodiments, the same reference numerals may be used for convenience to designate components with similar functions. Furthermore, even if a component has the same shape or the same processing as the pachislot machine 1 according to the first to fourth embodiments, different reference numerals or step numbers may be used for convenience.

(microprocessor)
The pachislot machine 2001 of this embodiment has a configuration similar to that of the pachislot machine 1 of the first embodiment described above, and the main control board 2071 is similar in configuration to the main control board 71 of the first embodiment (see FIG. 1). A detailed view of the microprocessor (main control circuit) 2100 included in the main control board 2071 is shown in FIG. 175, for example. The microprocessor 2100 shown in FIG. 175 corresponds to the main control circuit 100 of the first embodiment shown in FIG. 1, and the main CPU 2101, main ROM 2102, and main RAM 2103 shown in FIG. 175 correspond to the main CPU 101, main ROM 102, and main RAM 103 of the first embodiment shown in FIG. 1, respectively. Although not shown in FIG. 1, in this embodiment, in addition to the microprocessor 2100, a random number circuit 2150, a clock pulse generating circuit 2160, and a power management circuit 2170 are also included in the main control board 2071.

The random number circuit 2150 generates a role lottery random number value (a random number value corresponding to the internal lottery random number value in the first embodiment) used in the internal lottery process, and the clock pulse generation circuit 2160 generates a clock pulse signal for operating the main CPU and outputs the generated clock pulse signal to the clock circuit 2105 (EX) (described below) within the microprocessor 2100. The microprocessor 2100 executes a control program based on the input clock pulse signal.

The power management circuit 2170 manages fluctuations in the 12V DC power supply voltage supplied from the power supply board and supplies 5V DC (VCC) power to the microprocessor 2100. For example, when power is turned on (when the power supply voltage rises from 0V to the startup voltage value (10V)), the power management circuit 2170 outputs a reset signal to a reset controller 2106 (XSRST) (described below) within the microprocessor 2100, and when a power interruption occurs (when the power supply voltage falls from 12V to below the power interruption voltage value (10.5V)), it outputs a power interruption detection signal to a parallel input port 2111 (XINT) (described below) within the microprocessor 2100. In other words, the power management circuit 2170 functions as a means (startup means) for outputting a reset signal (startup signal) to the microprocessor 2100 when power is turned on, and further functions as a means (power interruption means) for outputting a power interruption detection signal (power interruption signal) to the microprocessor 2100 when a power interruption occurs.

Furthermore, when the microprocessor 2100 inputs a reset signal to the XSRST terminal, the reset controller 2106 generates a reset interrupt, and the main CPU 2101 starts operation from address "0000"H. Address "0000"H is the starting address where the power-on processing (Figure 180) described below is stored, and inputting a reset signal to the XSRST terminal and starting operation from address "0000"H is also called a "power-on reset."

Next, an example configuration of the microprocessor 2100 of this embodiment will be described with reference to Figure 175. The microprocessor 2100 is a microprocessor with security functions for use in gaming machines.

The microprocessor 2100 has a main CPU 2101, a main ROM 2102, a main RAM 2103, an external bus interface 2104 (signal bus 2116 (local bus)), a clock circuit 2105, a reset controller 2106, an arithmetic circuit 2107, a matching block 2108, unique information 2109, a random number circuit 2110 (random number generation circuit), a parallel input port 2111, an interrupt controller 2112, a timer circuit 2113, a serial communication circuit 2114, and a parallel output port 2115. The components of the microprocessor 2100 other than the signal bus 2116 are connected to each other via the signal bus 2116.

The main CPU 2101 executes various control programs and performs various controls based on the clock pulses generated by the clock circuit 2105. The main CPU 2101 also executes various control programs to control game operations and the counting of game media (game value) at the time of payout and settlement.

The main ROM 2102 stores various control programs executed by the main CPU 2101, various data tables, etc. The storage capacity of the main ROM 2102 is, for example, 12 kilobytes. In the microprocessor 2100, the main ROM 2102 stores various control programs executed by the main CPU 2101, various data tables, data for sending various control instructions (commands) to the sub-control board 72, etc.

The main RAM 2103 is provided with various storage areas for storing various data (parameters, flags, etc.) used when the main CPU 2101 executes various control programs. The main RAM 2103 has a storage capacity of, for example, 1 kilobyte. In the microprocessor 2100, the main RAM 2103 is provided with storage areas for storing various data such as internal winning combinations determined by executing the control programs, as well as storage areas for storing various counters (e.g., medal counters, insertion counters, etc.) used when executing payout control, etc., and various flags, etc.

The external bus interface 2104 is an interface circuit for electrically connecting the microprocessor 2100 to an external signal bus to which various components located outside the microprocessor 2100 are connected.

Clock circuit 2105 is configured to include, for example, a frequency divider (not shown), and converts the clock pulse signal input from the clock pulse generating circuit into clock pulse signals of multiple frequencies used for operating the main CPU and other components (e.g., timer circuit 2113). The clock pulse signals of multiple frequencies generated by clock circuit 2105 are output to all circuits within microprocessor 2100 except for clock circuit 2105 (main CPU 2101 to external bus interface 2104, and reset controller 2106 to parallel output port 2115) at frequencies corresponding to the operation of each circuit.

The reset controller 2106 resets the IAT (Illegal Address Trap) 2106a and WDT (watchdog timer) 2106b based on the reset signal input from the power management circuit. The arithmetic circuit 2107 includes a multiplication circuit 2107a, a division circuit 2107b, and a CRC circuit (cyclic redundancy check (CRC16) circuit) 2107c. When an inspection device is connected, the verification block 2108 verifies the signal level to determine whether the connected inspection device is genuine.

Unique information 2109 stores the unique information (identification information) of the microprocessor 2100. The chip individual number of the microprocessor 2100 consists of 4 bytes of data and is set when the chip is manufactured. In addition, the chip individual number of the microprocessor MP is set to a different number for each chip.

In the microprocessor 2100, the unique information (identification information) of the microprocessor 2100 is stored in the unique information 2109. The ROM code of the main ROM 2102 and the individual chip number of the microprocessor 2100 are also stored in the unique information 2109. The ROM code of the main ROM 2102 is composed of 4 bytes x 4 pieces of data, i.e., 16 bytes of data. Each 4-byte piece of data that makes up the ROM code of the main ROM 2102 is generated from data stored in the area of addresses "0000h" to "2FBFh" in the built-in ROM (main ROM 2102), and the method of generating the 4-byte data also differs for each 4-byte piece of data.

The random number circuit 2110 generates random numbers within a predetermined range (e.g., 0 to 65535 or 0 to 255). The random number circuit 2110 is composed of multiple random number registers, such as random number register 0 for obtaining 2-byte hard-latch random numbers, random number registers 1 to 3 for obtaining 2-byte soft-latch random numbers, and random number registers 4 to 7 for obtaining 1-byte soft-latch random numbers. In the microprocessor 2100 of this embodiment, the main CPU 2101 obtains one value from a predetermined range of random numbers generated by an external random number circuit 2150, separate from the random number circuit 2110, as, for example, a random number value for role lottery (random number value for internal lottery). However, instead of the random number circuit 2150, random number register 0 for obtaining 2-byte hard-latch random numbers may be used to obtain the random number value for internal lottery.

The parallel input port 2111 is an input port (memory-mapped I/O) for signals input to the microprocessor 2100 from various circuits (e.g., a power management circuit, etc.) external to the microprocessor 2100. The parallel input port 2111 is also connected to the random number circuit 2110 and the interrupt controller 2112. In the microprocessor 2100, a start switch (e.g., a start switch corresponding to the start switch 7S in the first embodiment) is connected to the parallel input port 2111. When the start switch is turned on (on edge) in response to operation of a start lever (e.g., the start lever 7S in the first embodiment), a latch signal is output from the parallel input port 2111 to a predetermined random number register (e.g., random number register 0) in the random number circuit 2110. Then, in the random number circuit 2110, the predetermined random number register is latched in response to the input of the latch signal, and a 2-byte hard-latch random number is obtained.

The interrupt controller 2112 controls the timing of interrupt processing by the main CPU 2101 based on a reset signal or power interruption detection signal input from the power management circuit via the parallel input port 2111, or a timeout signal input at a predetermined interval from the timer circuit 2113. Furthermore, when a reset signal or power interruption detection signal is input from the power management circuit, or when a timeout signal is input from the timer circuit 2113, the interrupt controller 2112 outputs an interrupt request signal indicating an interrupt processing start command to the main CPU 2101. The main CPU 2101 then performs various interrupt processing based on the interrupt request signal input from the interrupt controller 2112.

Specifically, in the microprocessor 2100, the interrupt controller 2112 controls the execution timing of interrupt processing by the main CPU 2101 (for example, the periodic interrupt processing shown in FIG. 32 in the case of a timeout signal) based on a reset signal or power interruption detection signal input from the power management circuit via the parallel input port 2111, or a timeout signal input from the timer circuit 2113 at 1.1172 msec intervals. The main CPU 2101 then performs various processes within the periodic interrupt processing (for example, see FIG. 32) based on an interrupt request signal input from the interrupt controller 2112 in response to the timeout signal from the timer circuit 2113. Note that the interrupt processing by the main CPU 2101 executed based on a reset signal corresponds to the main processing shown in FIG. 23. In other words, the interrupt request signal issued by the interrupt controller 2112 serves as the starting point for all processing executed by the main CPU 2101.

The timer circuit 2113 (PTC) operates (counts the elapsed time) using the clock pulse signal (a clock pulse signal whose frequency is obtained by dividing the clock pulse signal for operating the CPU by a frequency divider (not shown)) generated by the clock circuit 2105. The timer circuit 2113 then outputs a timeout signal (trigger signal) to the interrupt controller 2112 at a predetermined interval (1.1172 msec for the microprocessor 2100).

The serial communication circuit 2114 is a communication circuit that controls the serial communication of various data between the control board on which the communication circuit is implemented and various boards provided external to the control board. In the microprocessor 2100, the serial communication circuit 2114 serially communicates data (various control commands, various data, etc.) with various boards (such as the sub-control board 2072) provided external to the main control board 2071. The serial communication circuit 2114 is composed of, for example, five communication circuits: SCU0 (the above-mentioned "asynchronous serial transmission/reception 0"), SCU1 (the above-mentioned "asynchronous serial transmission/reception 1"), and STU2 to STU4. Communication circuits SCU0 and SCU1 are composed of bidirectional serial communication circuits, and communication circuits STU2 to STU4 are composed of serial communication circuits dedicated to transmission.

For example, in this embodiment, for test firing signal control processing (transmission processing), communication circuit STU2 (for transmission to interface 2 (I/F2)), a serial communication circuit dedicated to transmission, is used. Furthermore, when connecting the main control board 2071 and sub-control board 2072 via serial communication, communication circuit STU3, a serial communication circuit dedicated to transmission, is used. Note that these communication specifications are a method of using serial communication circuits established from the perspective of anti-cheating (preventing fraudulent activity). Note that the above-mentioned interface 2 (I/F2) is the second interface board 302 for the test machine in Figure 3.

The parallel output port 2115 is an output port (memory-mapped I/O) for signals output from the microprocessor 2100 to various external circuits. In this example, data is output using a FIFO (First In First Out) method, for example.

(Registers in the main CPU)
Here, various registers of the main CPU 2101 will be described with reference to Fig. 176. Fig. 176 is a schematic diagram of the various registers included in the main CPU 2101.

As shown in FIG. 176 (A), the main CPU 2101 has, as main registers, extended registers (Q register, U register), general-purpose registers (A register, B register, C register, D register, E register, H register, L register), flag register (F register), index register (IX register, IY register), and stack pointer (stack pointer SP).

The main CPU 2101 also has sub-registers, including an extended register (Q' register), general-purpose registers (A' register, B' register, C' register, D' register, E' register, H' register, L' register), a flag register (F' register), and index registers (IX' register, IY' register). Each of the main registers and sub-registers mentioned above is composed of a 1-byte register.

In this embodiment, the B register and C register are used as a pair of registers (BC registers), and the D register and E register are used as a pair of registers (DE registers). Furthermore, in this embodiment, the H register and L register are used as a pair of registers (HL registers).

In addition, in this embodiment, it is possible to control processing by switching between two banks (Bank 0 and Bank 1), and with regard to the main registers and sub-registers mentioned above, there are main registers and sub-registers in Bank 0 and main registers and sub-registers in Bank 1, and by switching banks, the registers used and referenced by program instructions can be switched between the registers in Bank 0 and the registers in Bank 1.

In the program of this embodiment, the address data (address value) at the upper end of the address is stored in the Q register. For example, when the main CPU 2101 is reset, the Q register is set to the top address (upper end) "F0"H of the main RAM 2103 used in bank 0, and when the bank is switched to use bank 1, the Q register may be controlled (processed) to set the top address (upper end) "F2"H of the main RAM 2103 used in bank 1.

In addition to using the Q register as the upper address data, it is also possible to control (process) the main RAM 2103's starting address (upper side) "F0"H to be set in a register other than the Q register (for example, the H register), and to set the main RAM 2103's starting address (upper side) "F2"H to a register other than the Q register (for example, the D register).

In particular, when referencing the game area (RAM area within the used area, described below) and the out-of-area area (RAM area outside the used area, described below) of main RAM 2103, the upper addresses of the game area can be referenced using an instruction that uses the Q register (a specific register), and the upper addresses of the out-of-area area can be referenced using an instruction that uses a register other than the Q register.In this case, the control (processing) can be performed so that the top address (upper side) "F2"H is set in a register other than the Q register before or after switching to bank 1.

In addition, in the program of this embodiment, depending on the amount of control (processing) that references and writes to the game area and out-of-area area of the main RAM 2103, it is desirable to set the starting address (upper side) of the main RAM 2103 to be set in the Q register to "F0"H or "F2"H.

For example, if the number of times that the area whose top address (upper side) of main RAM 2103 references and writes to is "F0"H is large, set "F0"H to the Q register; if the number of times that the area whose top address (upper side) of main RAM 2103 references and writes to is "F2"H is large, set "F2"H to the Q register.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the control registers are an interrupt page address register (I register), a memory refresh register (R register), a program counter (PC), an interrupt enable register 1, and an interrupt enable register 2, each of which is made up of a 1-byte register.

Also, as shown in FIG. 176 (B), in each of the flag registers, the F register and the F' register, predetermined flag information indicating the result of the arithmetic processing is set in each bit. For example, in bit 6 (D6), data (zero flag) indicating whether the arithmetic result is "0" or not is set in the arithmetic result determination process. Specifically, if the arithmetic result is "0", data "1" is set in bit 6, and if the arithmetic result is not "0", data "0" is set in bit 6. Then, in the arithmetic result determination process, the main CPU 2101 determines the arithmetic result by referring to the data "0"/"1" in bit 6.

In addition, bit 2 (D2) of the flags register is set to a parity flag or an overflow flag. For example, when used as a parity flag, it counts the number of "1" bits in the destination where the operation result is stored when a logical operation is performed, and sets "0" if the total is odd, or "1" if the total is even. When used as an overflow flag, the overflow flag is set when an overflow occurs when a signed arithmetic operation is performed.

In addition, by using a specific command, it is possible to control each bit (e.g., bit 2) of the flag register to be set to the value of another register.

(Internal structure of main ROM and main RAM (memory map))
Next, the internal configurations (hereinafter referred to as "memory maps") of the main ROM 2102 and main RAM 2103 included in the microprocessor 2100 will be described with reference to Fig. 177. Fig. 177(A) shows a memory map of the entire memory, Fig. 177(B) shows the configuration of the built-in ROM of the entire memory, and Fig. 177(C) shows the configuration of the built-in RAM of the entire memory. The built-in ROM of Fig. 177(A) corresponds to, for example, the main ROM 2102 of Fig. 175, and the built-in RAM of Fig. 177(A) corresponds to the main RAM 2103 of Fig. 175.

In the memory map of the entire memory provided by the microprocessor 2100, as shown in Figure 177 (A), starting from the top address (e.g., "0000"H), the memory area of the main ROM 2102, the memory area of the main RAM 2103, and the area for the function registers are arranged in that order, with unused areas in between. Here, the function registers include two types of built-in registers, consisting of, for example, a first register used to set the operation of each peripheral function, and a second register for monitoring and control.

In the memory map of main ROM 2102, as shown in Figure 177 (B), from the top address of main ROM 2102 ("0000"H), the following areas are located in the order listed, at their respective predetermined addresses: in-use area program area 2102a, in-use area data area 2102b, unused area, out-of-use area program area 2102c, out-of-use area data area 2102d, unused area, trademark recording area 2102e, and program management area (e.g., an area for program management and security settings) 2102f. Furthermore, in-use area program area 2102a and in-use area data area 2102b are collectively referred to as in-use area ROM area 2202a, and out-of-use area program area 2102c and out-of-use area data area 2102d are collectively referred to as out-of-use area ROM area 2202b.

In this embodiment, as described above, unused areas of a predetermined size (e.g., 16 bytes) are provided between the in-use ROM area 2202a and the out-of-use ROM area 2202b, and between the out-of-use ROM area 2202b and the trademark recording area 2102e.

In the example of Figure 177 (B), the ROM area 2202a within the used area is the area from address "0000"H to address "1FF0"H, and the ROM area 2202b outside the used area is the area from address "2000"H to address "3DF0"H.

The program area 2102a in the usage area stores control programs for various processes executed by the main CPU 2101 in various control processes related to game progress and playability. The data area 2102b in the usage area stores various data used by the main CPU 2101 in various control processes related to game progress and playability (for example, data tables such as the internal lottery table (see Figure 10), data for sending various control instructions (commands) to the sub-control circuit 2200 (corresponding to the sub-control circuit 200 in the first embodiment), etc.).

In other words, the ROM area 2202a in the usage area, which consists of the program area 2102a in the usage area and the data area 2102b in the usage area, stores various programs and data necessary for control processing (game-related processing) related to the games actually played by players at the gaming facility.

In addition, the non-usage ROM area 2202b, consisting of the non-usage program area 2102c and the non-usage data area 2102d, stores control programs and data for various processes (processes that do not affect gameplay) that are not directly related to the game (progression of the game and gameplay) played by the player. For example, programs and data used in gaming machine certification tests (test firing tests), control programs and data used in checksum generation processes when power is lost and sum check processes when power is restored (when power is restored), as well as anti-fraud programs and the data required for them, are stored.

In the memory map of main RAM 2103, as shown in Figure 177 (C), starting from the top address of main RAM 2103 ("F000"H), the working area within the used area 2103a, the stack area within the used area 2103b, the unused area, the working area outside the used area 2103c, and the stack area outside the used area 2103d are located in this order at their respective predetermined addresses. Furthermore, the working area within the used area 2103a and the stack area within the used area 2103b are collectively referred to as the RAM area within the used area 2203a, and the working area outside the used area 2103c and the stack area outside the used area 2103d are collectively referred to as the RAM area outside the used area 2203b.

In this embodiment, as described above, an unused area of a predetermined size (e.g., 16 bytes) is provided between the RAM area within the used area 2203a and the RAM area outside the used area 2203b.

The working area 2103a within the use area and the stack area 2103b within the use area temporarily store various data (various random number values, internal lottery winning combinations, etc.) determined by the execution of a control program related to the game (game progress and playability) played by the player.

In addition, the out-of-use work area 2103c and the out-of-use stack area 2103d are work areas for various processes that are not directly related to the game (progression and playability) played by the player. In this embodiment, this out-of-use RAM area 2203b is used to execute various processes that are not directly related to the game played by the player, such as sum check processing.

As described above, in the pachislot machine 2001 of this embodiment, various programs and various data (tables) used for various processes not directly related to the game played by the player are stored in the outside-usage-area ROM area 2202b, which is located at an address different from the inside-usage-area ROM area 2202a, within the main ROM 2102. Furthermore, such various processes not directly related to the game played by the player are performed within the main RAM 2103 using the outside-usage-area RAM area 2203b, which is located at an address different from the inside-usage-area RAM area 2203a.

With this configuration of the main ROM 2102, programs and data not required for the actual game played by the player can be placed in another area (outside-use area ROM area 2202b), thereby avoiding pressure on the capacity of the inside-use area ROM area 2202a, which is set as a game area.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, as described above, by switching banks, it is possible to switch between processing related to Bank 0 and processing related to Bank 1. Here, the processing related to Bank 0 uses programs and data stored in the in-use ROM area 2202a of the main ROM 2102, temporarily using the in-use RAM area 2203a of the main RAM 2103, to perform calculations to control the game actions performed by the player. In other words, the processing related to Bank 0 can also be said to be processing related to the game areas (the in-use ROM area 2202a and the in-use RAM area 2203a). Furthermore, the main register and sub-register used at this time are the registers of Bank 0 described in Figure 176.

On the other hand, processing related to bank 1 uses programs and data stored in the off-use ROM area 2202b of the main ROM 2102, and temporarily uses the off-use RAM area 2203b of the main RAM 2103 to perform processing not directly related to the game played by the player (arithmetic processing for performing processing other than the game). In other words, processing related to bank 1 can also be said to be processing related to the off-area areas (off-use ROM area 2202b and off-use RAM area 2203b). Furthermore, the main register and sub-register used at this time are the registers of bank 1 described in Figure 176.

The processing related to bank 0 (processing related to the gaming area) is initiated by a program stored in the program area 2102a in the usage area of the main ROM 2102, and during this processing, data stored in the data area 2102b in the usage area of the main ROM 2102 is referenced, and data is referenced and updated using the working area 2103a in the usage area of the main RAM 2103, but data stored in the working area 2103c outside the usage area of the main RAM 2103, etc., may also be referenced.

Similarly, processing related to bank 1 (processing related to the area outside the area) is initiated by a program stored in the program area outside the area in use 2102c of main ROM 2102, and during this processing, data stored in the data area outside the area in use 2102d of main ROM 2102 is referenced, and data is referenced and updated using the work area outside the area in use 2103c of main RAM 2103, but data stored in the work area inside the area in use 2103a of main RAM 2103, etc., may also be referenced.

Switching from processing Bank 0 to processing Bank 1 is accomplished, for example, by executing a specific call instruction (e.g., "CALLEX") in a specific subprogram (also called a "subroutine"). Switching back from processing Bank 1 to processing Bank 0 is accomplished, for example, by executing a specific return instruction (e.g., "RETEX") in the specific subprogram called by the specific call instruction described above.

Furthermore, Figure 177 is a schematic representation of areas within memory, and the configuration of the present invention is not limited to the addresses shown or the apparent size (capacity) of each area.

(Interrupt enable register)
Next, the interrupt permission register 1 and the interrupt permission register 2 shown in FIG. 176 will be described in more detail.

Interrupt enable register 1, based on its value and the interrupt cause mask, determines whether to enable or disable maskable interrupts, which can be controlled so that interrupt processing is not performed for specific interrupt causes. Interrupt enable register 2 is used to restore the value of interrupt enable register 1 after processing non-maskable interrupts, which cannot be controlled so that interrupt processing is not performed for specific interrupt causes.

In addition to returning from non-maskable interrupt processing as described above, with regard to interrupt enable register 2, if an instruction to call processing related to an area outside the used area (e.g., outside the used area ROM area 2202b or outside the used area RAM area 2203b) (hereinafter referred to as an "outside the used area processing call instruction") is executed, and then an instruction to return from processing related to the outside the used area to processing related to an area within the used area (e.g., inside the used area ROM area 2202a or inside the used area RAM area 2203a) (hereinafter referred to as an "inside the used area processing return instruction") is issued, the value previously stored in interrupt enable register 2 is copied to interrupt enable register 1 (the value of interrupt enable register 2 is restored to interrupt enable register 1).

In addition, when a non-maskable interrupt is accepted or an instruction to call processing for an area outside the used area is executed, the value of interrupt permission register 1 is cleared (the value becomes "0"), and as a result, maskable interrupts are prohibited while that value is maintained.

Furthermore, the value of Interrupt Enable Register 2 is stored in the parity/overflow flag of the Flag Register (F Register) by a specific instruction, allowing the value of Interrupt Enable Register 2 to be referenced or temporarily saved.

Furthermore, when an interrupt enable instruction is executed, the value of interrupt enable register 1 becomes "1", indicating that an interrupt is enabled, and at the same time, the value of interrupt enable register 2 also becomes "1", indicating that an interrupt is enabled. In this way, when an interrupt enable instruction is executed, a maskable interrupt is enabled. Furthermore, when an interrupt disable instruction is executed, the value of interrupt enable register 1 becomes "0", indicating that an interrupt is disabled, and at the same time, the value of interrupt enable register 2 also becomes "0", indicating that an interrupt is disabled.

(Interrupt processing)
Next, an overview of the external maskable interrupt processing when a power outage is detected in this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 178.

When the main CPU 2101 receives an interrupt request signal from an external terminal (XINT terminal) via the parallel input port 2111, it starts a program whose start address is the entry address of the setting area associated with this external terminal. This program is external maskable interrupt processing. This setting area also contains data indicating the priority of the interrupt processing. For example, the entry address is stored in the upper bits of the setting area, and data indicating the priority is stored in the lower bits, with at least one "0" bit placed between the entry address and the data indicating the priority.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, when a timer interrupt signal is received from a timer counter (e.g., timer counter PTC2) of the timer circuit 2113, a program is started whose start address is the entry address of the setting area associated with this timer counter. This program is system timer interrupt processing. This setting area also contains data indicating the priority of the interrupt processing. For example, the entry address is stored in the upper bits of the setting area, and data indicating the priority is stored in the lower bits, with at least one "0" bit placed between the entry address and the data indicating the priority.

In this way, the above-mentioned setting area is provided for each interrupt cause, such as an external interrupt from an external terminal (XINT terminal) or a timer interrupt from a timer counter, and the data stored in the corresponding setting area determines the entry address of the processing program executed in response to the interrupt and the priority of the interrupt.

When the above-mentioned external maskable interrupt processing begins, the main CPU 2101 checks a specific address of the parallel input port 2111 to determine whether a power interruption signal has been received. This processing determines whether the interrupt cause is a power interruption, and if a power interruption signal is received, the interrupt mask register is updated with the interrupt cause mask shown in Figure 178 (A), and the specific interrupt cause is masked.

Here, in the interrupt mask register, the interrupt cause mask shown in Figure 178 (A) is set to "0" in the corresponding bits (for example, bit positions 2 and 3 of bits 0 to 7) so that, during initial setting after power-on, an interrupt caused by the timer counter (timer counter interrupt) and an interrupt caused by a power outage (power outage interrupt) are accepted. Then, in the above-mentioned external maskable interrupt processing, when a power outage occurs, bit positions 2 and 3 of the interrupt mask register are set to "1".

In this way, by setting bit position 2 and bit position 3 of the interrupt mask register to "1", the main CPU 2101 is controlled not to accept timer counter interrupts and power interruption interrupts from that point on (i.e., it is controlled not to start new external maskable interrupt processing or system timer interrupt processing).

Next, the external maskable interrupt process sets the XINT detection flag and sets a status indicating that a power outage has occurred. The contents of this XINT detection flag are then referenced to determine whether a power outage has occurred, and if a power outage has occurred, the power outage interrupt process (see Figure 199) is executed.

Figure 178 (B) shows the interrupt initial setting data stored in the program management area, which stores information necessary for the main CPU 2101 to execute programs. This data includes the setting value for interrupt priority.

Figure 178 (C) shows the priority order for each interrupt cause when the interrupt priority setting value is "01." As shown in Figure 178 (B), when the interrupt priority setting value is bit "01," the timer counter interrupt (interrupt from timer counter PTC2) is set to have a higher priority than the power interrupt (interrupt due to a signal from the XINT terminal). Note that this priority order can be changed by changing the setting value. Furthermore, in this embodiment, there is no need to specify the priority order in the program.

In the interrupt mask register of Figure 178(A), each bit is associated with a respective interrupt cause, but here, the interrupt causes shown in Figure 178(C) are associated in descending order of priority from bit position 0 to bit position 5. That is, bit position 0 of the interrupt mask register is associated with an interrupt from timer counter PTC0, bit position 1 is associated with an interrupt from timer counter PTC1, bit position 2 is associated with an interrupt from timer counter PTC2, bit position 3 is associated with an external interrupt from the external terminal (XINT terminal), bit position 4 is associated with an interrupt due to asynchronous serial transmission/reception 0, and bit position 5 is associated with an interrupt due to asynchronous serial transmission/reception 1. Bit positions 7 and 6 are unused.

As mentioned above, this embodiment is based on the assumption that timer counter interrupts and power interrupts occur, but as mentioned above, it can also handle at least interrupts caused by multiple timer counters, interrupts caused by multiple asynchronous serial transmission/reception, and external interrupts input from the XINT terminal.

This configuration, which uses an interrupt cause mask, can limit the occurrence of other interrupts after a power outage, eliminating the need to write branch instructions to process those other interrupts. As a result, the program structure can be simplified and the size can be reduced.

In addition, by using an interrupt cause mask, it is possible to limit the occurrence of other interrupts after a power outage occurs, so processing related to the power outage can be executed quickly after the power outage is detected, and there is no need to consider the execution timing or processing order of processing caused by those other interrupts.

In this way, whether or not to detect the occurrence of each interrupt cause can be adjusted by setting the bit position to "1" in the interrupt mask register. For example, after an external maskable interrupt process is executed upon detection of a power outage, it is possible to control the process so that interrupt processes related to specific interrupt causes are allowed.

(Processing by the main control circuit)
179 to 201, the contents of various processes executed by the main CPU 2101 of the main control circuit 2100 using each program will be described. Note that in the explanation of the various processes shown below, a specific example of the processing contents will be explained using the specifications of the slot machine 2001, but the processing contents of the various processes shown below are not limited to this.

First, referring to Figure 179, we will explain the main processing (main operation processing) executed by the main CPU 2101 of the main control circuit 2100. Note that Figure 179 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the main processing, which roughly corresponds to the flow shown in Figure 23 of the first embodiment described above, and descriptions of similar processing will be omitted where appropriate. Figure 179 also shows the power-on processing that is executed prior to the start of the main processing.

First, when power is supplied to the pachislot machine 1 (when the power is turned on), the main CPU 2101 performs power-on processing (step S2001). This processing involves various processes required when the power is turned on. Details of the power-on processing will be described later.

Next, the main CPU 2101 performs initialization processing at the end of one game (step S2002). In this processing, a subprogram for transmission standby and RAM initialization processing is called, which performs operations such as obtaining unsent data and clearing designated storage areas in the main RAM 2103. Details of the processing performed by the subprogram for transmission standby and RAM initialization processing will be described later.

Next, the main CPU 2101 performs medal acceptance/start check processing (step S2003). In this processing, the input status of the medal sensor, bet switch, and start switch (for example, the components corresponding to the medal sensor 31S, bet switch 6S, and start switch 7S in the first embodiment) is checked, and various processing required at the start of play is performed. Note that this medal acceptance/start check processing is the same as the medal acceptance/start check processing in the first embodiment (step S3 in Figure 23, see Figure 25).

Next, the main CPU 2101 performs random number value acquisition processing (step S2004). This processing extracts random number values for role lottery (e.g., a range of 0 to 65535) and random number values for effects (random number values for other lotteries) used in various gameplay-related lotteries (e.g., a range of 0 to 65535 or a range of 0 to 255), and stores the extracted random number values in a random number value storage area (not shown) provided in the main RAM 2103. Note that the manner in which the various random number values are acquired is not limited to the above. The required number of random number values can be acquired as appropriate from predetermined numerical ranges (e.g., a range of 0 to 65535, a range of 0 to 32767, a range of 0 to 255, or a range of 0 to 127). This random number value acquisition processing will be described later.

Next, the main CPU 2101 performs internal lottery processing (step S2005). This processing involves various processes required to determine the internal winning combination based on the internal lottery table and the random number value for the combination lottery, which correspond to the current game state, etc. Details of the internal lottery processing will be described later.

Next, the main CPU 2101 performs game start state control processing (step S2006). In this processing, when game play starts, if a transition condition is met for each game state (for example, based on a determined internal lottery combination, etc.), various processes are performed to transition the game state in accordance with the transition condition that has been met, or to manage the play period of the current game state. Note that this game start state control processing is similar to the game start state control processing of the first embodiment (step S6 in Figure 23, see Figure 27).

Next, the main CPU 2101 performs a start command generation and storage process (step S2007). In this process, start command data to be transmitted to the sub-control circuit 2200 is generated, and the generated data is stored in a communication data storage area (not shown) provided in the main RAM 2103. The data stored in the communication data storage area is transmitted from the main control circuit 2100 to the sub-control circuit 2200 in a communication data transmission process executed in the periodic interrupt process described below. The methods for generating, storing, and transmitting data for other commands are also basically the same. This start command generation and storage process is the same as the start command generation and storage process of the first embodiment (step S7 in Figure 23).

Next, the main CPU 2101 performs interface 2 output processing (step S2017). In this processing, the interface output processing stored in the out-of-use program area 2102c is called, and after generating transmission data, the generated data is output to interface 2 (I/F2) via serial communication. Details of the interface 2 output processing will be described later.

Next, the main CPU 2101 performs main-side effect control processing at the start of game (step S2008). In this processing, if various effects are to be performed under the control of the main control circuit 2100 (main side) when game play begins, various processes necessary to perform those effects are performed. For example, if a specific effect (such as a "lock effect," "freeze effect," or "pseudo game" effect using reels 3L, 3C, and 3R) is to be performed at the start of game play, the main CPU 2101 controls the execution of that effect. Furthermore, if this effect includes pseudo game play, the main CPU 2101 controls the progress of that pseudo game play (or notifications related to the pseudo game play). Note that this main-side effect control processing at the start of game play is the same as the main-side effect control processing at the start of game play in the first embodiment (step S8 in FIG. 23).

Next, the main CPU 2101 performs a reel stop initial setting process (step S2009). In this process, various information necessary for stop control, such as the type of stop table and the type of draw priority table to be used in the current game, is set based on the internal winning combination and game status. Note that this reel stop initial setting process is the same as the reel stop initial setting process in the first embodiment (step S9 in Figure 23).

Next, the main CPU 2101 performs a reel spin start process (step S2010). This process requests that all reels start spinning. Once all reels have been requested to start spinning, the reel control process (see, for example, step S203 in FIG. 32 of the first embodiment) controls the drive of each stepping motor (e.g., the stepping motors corresponding to 51L, 51C, and 51R in the first embodiment), causing each reel (e.g., the reels corresponding to 3L, 3C, and 3R in the first embodiment) to start spinning. Once each reel starts spinning, its rotation is accelerated until it reaches a constant speed, and then the constant speed is maintained. Although details are omitted, this process also includes a reel spin start command generation and storage process. This reel spin start process is similar to the reel spin start process of the first embodiment (step S10 in FIG. 23).

Next, the main CPU 2101 performs a draw priority storage process (step S2011). In this process, for each symbol (symbol position) on the spinning reel (all reels in this case), data indicating the draw priority is obtained by referencing the set internal winning combination and the set draw priority table, and stored in a draw priority data storage area (not shown). Although not shown, a symbol code storage process is performed prior to this process. This draw priority storage process is similar to the draw priority storage process of the first embodiment (step S11 in Figure 23).

Next, the main CPU 2101 performs reel stop control processing (step S2012). In this processing, various processes necessary to stop the rotation of the corresponding reel are performed based on the determined internal winning combination (or information related to various stop control settings set accordingly) and the stop operation mode of each stop button (for example, the stop buttons corresponding to 8L, 8C, and 8R in the first embodiment). Note that this reel stop control processing is similar to the reel stop control processing in the first embodiment (step S12 in Figure 23, see Figure 29).

Next, the main CPU 2101 performs a win activation determination process (step S2013). In this process, it determines whether the combination of symbols displayed on the active line is one of the combinations defined in the symbol combination table. For example, it determines whether there is a bit in which a "1" is stored in the win activation flag storage area. Also, although details are omitted, this process involves a win activation command generation and storage process. Note that this win activation determination process is the same as the win activation determination process of the first embodiment (step S13 in Figure 23).

Next, the main CPU 2101 performs a process to determine an abnormality in the number of medals passing through (step S2018). In this process, the difference (number difference) between the number of medals detected inside a selector (for example, a selector corresponding to selector 31 in the first embodiment) and the number of medals counted at the exit of that selector is calculated, and it is determined whether this number difference is within an acceptable range. Details of the process to determine an abnormality in the number of medals passing through will be described later.

Next, the main CPU 2101 performs medal payout/replay activation processing (step S2014). In this processing, if the symbol combination determined in the above-mentioned winning activation determination processing is a symbol combination related to a minor role, the corresponding number of medals is paid out. If the symbol combination is a symbol combination related to a replay role, various processing steps are performed to activate replay in the next game. Note that, for example, if the symbol combination determined in the above-mentioned winning activation determination processing is a symbol combination related to a replay role, a processing step is performed to set a value equal to the number of bets in the current game in the automatic medal counter described below. Also, in this processing, a medal payout signal corresponding to the number of medals to be paid out is output from an external centralized terminal board (for example, an external centralized terminal board corresponding to the external centralized terminal board 55 in the first embodiment). Note that the medal payout/replay activation processing will be described in detail below.

Next, the main CPU 2101 performs a role ratio monitor tally start process (step S2019). In this process, data for calculating various ratio information related to the game, which is displayed on a role ratio monitor device (for example, a role ratio monitor device corresponding to role ratio monitor device 54 of the first embodiment), is stored in a tally storage device. Details of the role ratio monitor tally start process will be described later.

Next, the main CPU 2101 performs game end state control processing (step S2015). In this processing, when game play ends, for various game states, if a transition condition is met (for example, based on the combination of displayed symbols), various processes are performed to transition the game state in accordance with the transition condition that has been met, or to manage the play period of the current game state. Note that this game end state control processing is similar to the game end state control processing of the first embodiment (step S15 in Figure 23, see Figure 30).

Next, the main CPU 2101 performs a BB (special prize) play count check process (step S2020). In this process, it determines whether the BB (special prize) operation has ended, and sets the "BB (special prize) end clear address" to the RAM initialization address. Here, the BB (special prize) play count is, for example, the number of plays in the BB state in the first embodiment. Then, in step S2020, it continues with a transmission standby & RAM initialization process and a designated RAM initialization process. Details of the BB (special prize) play count check process, transmission standby & RAM initialization process, and designated RAM initialization process will be described later.

Next, the main CPU 2101 performs main-side presentation control processing at the end of play (step S2016). In this processing, if various presentations are to be performed under the control of the main control circuit 2100 (main side) when play ends, various processes necessary to perform those presentations are performed. For example, if a predetermined presentation is to be performed at the end of play, the execution of that predetermined presentation is controlled. Furthermore, if this includes a pseudo-game, the progress of that pseudo-game (or notifications related to the pseudo-game) is controlled. Note that this main-side presentation control processing at the end of play is the same processing as the main-side presentation control processing at the end of play in the first embodiment (step S16 in Figure 23).

In this way, in the pachislot machine 2001, one unit game is controlled by performing the above-mentioned steps S2002 to S2020, and the progress of the game is controlled by repeating these steps. Note that the machine can be configured to perform processes other than these as needed, or to not perform some of these processes. In other words, the various processes described above are merely examples.

(Power-on processing)
Next, referring to Fig. 180, the power-on processing executed by the main CPU 2101 will be described. Fig. 180 is a flowchart showing the processing procedure of the power-on processing. As explained in Fig. 179, this power-on processing is called and executed before the main processing in the main CPU 2101 and immediately after power is turned on (step S2001 in Fig. 179).

The power-on process first calls the CRC check process (outside the area in use) to perform a CRC check on the main RAM 2103 (step S2031). In Figure 180, this process in step S2031 is referred to as "CRC check process (outside the area in use)." The "outside the area in use" in parentheses means that the "CRC check process" program is stored in the out-of-area program area 2102c of the main ROM 2102 (hereinafter, the notation (outside the area in use) after "... process" has the same meaning). Furthermore, when the subprogram that executes this process is called from a program stored in the in-area program area 2102a in step S2001 of Figure 179, it is called by "CALLEX" in the program, for example, and returns to the calling program by "RETEX."

In addition, the objects inspected by this CRC inspection process are the working area 2103a within the used area, the stack area 2103b within the used area, and the working area 2103c outside the used area of the main RAM 2103.

Depending on the results of the CRC inspection process, data indicating one of three states (game return impossible state 1 (CRC abnormality), game return impossible state 2 (power interruption abnormality), and game return possible state (normal)) is stored in the game return state storage area. Details of the CRC inspection process will be described later.

Next, in step S2032, the RAM initialization address is set to the "clear address when a RAM abnormality occurs" associated with the RAM area 2203a in the used area. It is then determined whether data indicating an impossible game return state (i.e., impossible game return state 1 or impossible game return state 2) is stored in the game return status storage area, and whether "impossible to return" is set in the impossible game return error flag (step S2033). If data indicating an impossible game return state is not stored in the game return status storage area or the impossible game return error flag (No in step S2033), in step S2034 the RAM initialization address is set to the "clear address when settings are changed" associated with the RAM area 2203a in the used area, and the process proceeds to step S2035.

If data indicating a game return impossible state is stored in the game return status storage area or the game return impossible error flag (Yes in step S2033), the processing of step S2034 is skipped and the process proceeds to step S2035.

Next, in step S2035, it is determined whether the setting change conditions are met, i.e., whether an operation to change the settings has been performed. When the arcade manager turns on a setting key switch (e.g., a switch corresponding to setting key switch 52 in the first embodiment) by inserting a setting key into the keyhole and turning it counterclockwise (from the initial position) (to perform the setting change process), and the door monitoring switch (e.g., a switch corresponding to door monitoring switch 56 in the first embodiment) indicates that the lower door mechanism (e.g., the lower door mechanism corresponding to lower door mechanism DD in the first embodiment) is open, and the main CPU 2101 can detect the on state and power is turned on (Yes in step S2035), step S2036 calls the designated RAM initialization process to initialize the main RAM 2103.

On the other hand, if the above-mentioned condition of Yes in step S2035 is not met and data indicating a game return impossible state (i.e., game return impossible state 1 (CRC abnormality) or game return impossible state 2 (power interruption abnormality)) is stored in the game return state storage area (No_1 in step S2035), data indicating "return impossible" is set in the game return impossible error flag in the outside use area working area 2103c, and game return impossible error processing is invoked. Details of game return impossible error processing will be described later.

Furthermore, if the condition for Yes in step S2035 described above is not met and data indicating a state in which game play can be returned to (i.e., a state in which game play can be returned to (normal)) is stored in the game play return status storage area (No_2 in step S2035), game play return processing is invoked. The game play return processing corresponds, for example, to the game play return processing of the first embodiment (step S29 in FIG. 24), and performs processing to return the game play status to the state before power interruption was detected.

If the above-mentioned condition of Yes in step S2035 is met, the designated RAM initialization process is called in step S2036. In this case, the designated RAM initialization process is called with the "address to be cleared when settings are changed" set as the RAM initialization address, and the designated RAM initialization process initializes the in-use area work area 2103a, the out-of-use area work area 2103c, etc. of the main RAM 2103. Details of the designated RAM initialization process will be described later.

Next, in step S2037, a setting change process is executed. In the setting change process, for example, the setting key switch described above is used to change the setting value of the pachislot machine 2001 (e.g., six levels of setting 1 to setting 6). Note that this setting change process is similar to the setting change described for the pachislot machine 1 of the first embodiment.

Next, in step S2038, the "clear address when settings are changed" for the RAM area 2203a in the used area is set as the RAM initialization address, and in step S2039, the transmission standby and RAM initialization process is called. Details of the transmission standby and RAM initialization process will be described later.

(CRC check processing (outside of used area))
Next, the CRC check processing (outside the area of use) executed by the main CPU 2101 will be described with reference to Fig. 181. Fig. 181 is a flowchart showing the processing procedure for the CRC check processing (outside the area of use). As mentioned above, this CRC check processing (outside the area of use) is called by "CALLEX" in the program in step S2031 of Fig. 180.

In the CRC check process (outside the used area), first, in step S2051, the stack pointer is set to the out-of-use stack area, and the program counter of the caller is stored in that area. Specifically, the stack start address ("F400"H) of the out-of-use stack area 2103d is set to the stack pointer (SP) provided in the register of bank 1. Furthermore, after being called by "CALLEX", the SP of the register of bank 1 is used as the stack pointer (SP) until returning to the caller by "RETEX", and the stack area used is the out-of-use stack area 2103d.

Next, in step S2052, the CRC calculation process (outside the used area) is called, where a CRC calculation is performed on the in-use area work area 2103a, the out-of-use area work area 2103c, etc. This process is written as "CRC calculation process (outside the used area)", but the "outside the used area" in parentheses means that the "CRC calculation process" program is stored in the out-of-use area program area 2102c of the main ROM 2102. Furthermore, the subprogram that executes this process is called in the program in step S2052 of Figure 181, for example, by "CALL", and the program returns to the calling program by "RET".

As mentioned above, the CRC calculation process (outside the area in use) is called using the usual "CALL" command, and "CALLEX" is not used. This is because both the calling program (CRC check process (outside the area in use)) and the program for this process are stored in the out-of-area program area 2102c of the main ROM 2102, and there is no bank switching.

Next, in step S2053, data indicating game return impossible state 1 (data indicating a CRC abnormality) is set in a specified area, and in step S2054, the CRC value at the time of power interruption is obtained. In this embodiment, when a power interruption occurs, processing similar to the CRC calculation processing (outside the used area) described above is performed, and the CRC value for the main RAM 2103 immediately before the power was turned off is stored. Note that this CRC value is obtained from the CRC value storage area 2103e in the outside used area working area 2103c, and the CRC calculation at the time of power interruption is performed for the outside used area working area 2103c, but not including the CRC value storage area 2103e.

Next, in step S2055, the difference between the calculation result (CRC16 calculation result) obtained in the CRC calculation process (outside the used area) and the CRC value obtained in step S2054 is calculated, and in step S2056, it is determined whether the calculation result is 0.

If the calculation result is 0, i.e., the calculation result (CRC16 calculation result) obtained by the CRC calculation process (outside the used area) matches the CRC value obtained in step S2054 (Yes in step S2056), data indicating game return impossible state 2 (data indicating a power interruption abnormality) is set in a specified area in step S2057; if they do not match (No in step S2056), proceed to step S2060.

Next, in step S2058, it is determined whether the power interruption flag is on. In this embodiment, if a power interruption occurs, the power interruption flag is set to on in step S2471 of the CRC generation process (outside the use area) (step S2455 in Figure 199) called by the power interruption interruption process. If the power interruption flag is on (Yes in step S2058), data indicating a state in which game play can be resumed (data indicating normal) is set in a specified area in step S2059. If the power interruption flag is not on (No in step S2058), that is, if the above-mentioned CRC generation process (outside the use area) has not been performed in the power interruption interruption process, the process proceeds to step S2060, and the set contents of the power interruption abnormality (game play unreturnable state 2) are ultimately stored in the game recovery status storage area.

Finally, in step S2060, the data (status) set in the specified area is stored in the game return status storage area. Also, at this point, the power interruption occurrence flag is set to OFF. Then, "RETEX" is used to return to the next address of the calling program counter saved in the off-chip stack area, and execution of the original program continues.

If, as a result of this CRC inspection process (outside the use area), the CRC calculation results do not match when the power is turned on and when the power is interrupted, the game will enter a state 1 where it is not possible to resume play (CRC abnormality). Even if the CRC calculation results match, if the power interruption flag is not on, the game will enter a state 2 where it is not possible to resume play (power interruption abnormality). Under all other conditions, the game will enter a state where it is possible to resume play (normal).

(CRC calculation processing (outside used area))
Next, with reference to FIG. 182, the CRC calculation process (outside the area of use) executed by the main CPU 2101 will be described. FIG. 182 is a flowchart showing the processing procedure for the CRC calculation process (outside the area of use). As mentioned above, this CRC calculation process (outside the area of use) is a process called by a "CALL" or the like in the program in step S2052 of the CRC check process (outside the area of use) in FIG. 181. The program that executes this CRC calculation process (outside the area of use) is a "normal subroutine" that is called from the "CRC check process (outside the area of use)" stored in the outside the area of use program area 2102c and always returns to the CRC check process (outside the area of use). In addition, a program stored in the outside the area of use program area 2102c that is called from a program also stored in the outside the area of use program area 2102c and always returns to the called program is also a "normal subroutine."

In the CRC calculation process (outside the used area), first, in step S2081, the CRC register port (address assigned to the "function register" in FIG. 177(A)) is set. For example, the port number for outputting the data to be CRC calculated to the CRC circuit 2107c is set, for example, in the C register. Next, in step S2082, the number of bytes to be used for the CRC calculation in the working area 2103a within the used area is set, for example, in the B register. Then, in step S2083, the starting address of the working area 2103a within the used area is set, for example, in the HL register. Here, the number of bytes to be used for the CRC calculation set in the B register is the data size to be used for the CRC calculation in the working area 2103a within the used area. Note that in the microprocessor 2100 used in this embodiment, addresses are all assigned to the "function register" in FIG. 177(A) for the input/output ports to each circuit built into the microprocessor 2100.

Next, the main CPU 2101 outputs the data specified by the CRC calculation byte count and starting address to the CRC circuit 2107c (step S2084). This process is performed, for example, by the OTIR instruction. The OTIR instruction writes the contents of the area specified by the HL register to the input/output port specified by the C register and U register (addresses assigned to the "function register" in Figure 177 (A) on the main CPU 2101 side), then subtracts 1 from the contents of the B register and adds 1 to the contents of the HL register. This process is repeated until the B register becomes 0, and the data to be CRC calculated is output to the CRC circuit 2107c. The CRC circuit 2107c then performs a CRC calculation on the received data to be CRC calculated. When the output of the data to be CRC calculated is complete, the B register becomes 0, and the HL register becomes the starting address of the stack area 2103b in the used area (for example, the address of the last address of the work area 2103a in the used area + 1).

Next, in step S2085, the main CPU 2101 sets the number of bytes to be subjected to the CRC calculation in the stack area 2103b within the used area to the B register, and outputs the data identified by the above starting address to the CRC circuit 2107c (step S2086). This output process is similar to the process of outputting the data to be subjected to the CRC calculation in the working area 2103a within the used area using the OTIR instruction described above. This process outputs the data to be subjected to the CRC calculation in the stack area 2103b within the used area to the CRC circuit 2107c, and a CRC calculation is performed on this data. At this time, the CRC calculation by the CRC circuit 2107c continues from the CRC calculation on the data to be subjected to the CRC calculation in the working area 2103a within the used area.

Then, a CRC calculation is similarly performed on the outside used work area 2103c. That is, in step S2087, the number of bytes to be subjected to the CRC calculation on the outside used work area 2103c is set in the B register, in step S2088, the starting address of the outside used work area 2103c is set in the HL register, and in step S2089, the data specified by the number of bytes to be subjected to the CRC calculation and the starting address is output to the CRC circuit 2107c, for example, using the OTIR instruction mentioned above. The CRC calculation is then performed on this data. At this time, the CRC calculation by the CRC circuit 2107c continues from the CRC calculation on the data to be subjected to the CRC calculation in the inside used stack area 2103b.

Note that the range of the working area outside the used area 2103c where the CRC calculation is performed excludes the CRC value storage area 2103e where the CRC value obtained by the CRC calculation when a power outage occurs. For example, the CRC value storage area 2103e is placed at the final address of the working area outside the used area 2103c, and the number of bytes for the CRC calculation is adjusted so that the data to be subjected to the CRC calculation extends up to just before that final address. The reason for this configuration is that when a power outage occurs, the result of the CRC calculation including the working area outside the used area 2103c is stored in the CRC value storage area 2103e of the working area outside the used area 2103c after the CRC calculation.

Then, in step S2090, the process waits for the calculation to be confirmed by the CRC circuit 2107c (cycles 1 to 5), and in step S2091, the CRC calculation result (CRC16 calculation result) is obtained from the CRC circuit 2107c, and processing ends. Here, the CRC calculation result is received, for example, from a specified parallel input port related to the CRC circuit 2107c and set, for example, in the HL register.

(Game return impossible error processing (out of use area))
Next, referring to Fig. 183, a description will be given of the game return impossible error processing (outside the use area) executed by the main CPU 2101. Fig. 183 is a flowchart showing the processing procedure of the game return impossible error processing (outside the use area). As described above, this game return impossible error processing (outside the use area) is called (for example, by CALLEX) when the judgment in step S2035 of Fig. 180 is No_1, that is, when no setting change operation is performed when the power is turned on and data indicating game return impossible state 1 (CRC abnormality) or game return impossible state 2 (power interruption abnormality) is stored in the game return state storage area.

In this embodiment, the game return impossible error processing (outside the use area) is executed by a program stored in the outside use area program area 2102c of the main ROM 2102, but it may also be configured to be executed by a program stored in the inside use area program area 2102a.

The game return impossible error processing (outside the use area) is also called (for example, by CALLEX) from the internal lottery processing (step S2005) of the main processing described below.

The game cannot be restored unless the power is turned off and settings are changed. If the power is turned on without changing the settings, the game cannot be restored error processing (outside of the usage area) will cause the device to enter a standby state with communication data transmission postponed. This processing is similar to the power-on error processing shown in step S30 of Figure 24 in the first embodiment.

When processing an error that makes it impossible to return to play (outside the usage area), first, in step S2111, interrupts are prohibited, which prevents power cut interrupts and other such processing from occurring. Next, in step S2112, the insertion of medals (and betting operations) is prohibited. Note that in the case of medal-less machines, only betting operations are prohibited.

Next, in step S2113, the information display device (for example, a display device using a 7-segment LED such as the information display device 14 of the first embodiment) is set to display that an error preventing return to play has occurred.

Next, in step S2114, the WDT 2106b of the reset controller 2106 is reset (cleared). This process causes the WDT 2106b to return to its initial value and restart counting, and then immediately thereafter a reset is performed again in step S2114, so that no process (restart due to reset) is initiated when the WDT 2106b reaches a predetermined count value.

In step S2115, control is performed to carry over the transmission of the remaining communication data. Control of carry over the transmission of the remaining communication data is a process for transmitting the stored communication data to the sub-control circuit 2200 immediately after power is restored if communication data is stored in the communication data storage area at the time the game recovery impossible error is detected. Specifically, the process of subtracting 1 from the value of the transmission interval timer is repeated in an infinite loop, and the value of the transmission interval timer immediately becomes 0 (however, it is never subtracted to a negative value).

In this embodiment, in the communication data transmission process of the periodic interrupt process described below, communication data is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 2200 at regular intervals (e.g., approximately 8 msec). After a predetermined value is set in the transmission interval timer, the value of the transmission interval timer is decremented by 1 at each interval. When the value reaches 0, any unsent communication data is transmitted.

However, when a game return impossible error is detected, as described above, interrupts are prohibited in step S2111, and therefore, in the periodic interrupt processing, the communication data transmission processing stored in the communication data storage area is stopped and the transmission of the remaining communication data is postponed. After that, when the power is turned off and on and a setting change processing is performed, the value of the transmission interval timer is set to 0, so that unsent communication data is immediately transmitted to the sub-control circuit 2200. Here, the communication data transmitted to the sub-control circuit 2200 includes, for example, various control commands related to the game presentation and data related to those commands.

In addition, even if the power is turned off during the infinite loop of the impossible-to-return-to-play error processing (outside the use area) (the process of infinitely repeating steps S2114 and S2115), interrupts are prohibited in step S2111 of the impossible-to-return-to-play error processing (outside the use area), so the power interruption processing does not occur, and the device is set to the off state (no setting change processing is performed) without operating the setting key. Even if the power is then turned on, data indicating an impossible-to-return-to-play state (i.e., impossible-to-return-to-play state 1 (CRC abnormality) or impossible-to-return-to-play state 2 (power interruption abnormality)) will remain stored in the game recovery status storage area, and the above-mentioned infinite loop will occur again immediately after the power is turned on, causing the device to enter standby mode.

Therefore, unless the setting change process is performed, the gaming machine cannot transition to normal operation. If the setting change process is performed, the communication data stored in the communication data storage area is cleared, and any unsent communication data stored in the communication data storage area before the game return impossible error occurred is discarded. This game return impossible error processing (outside the use area) allows for effective restart management in the pachislot machine 2001 of this embodiment.

(BB (special prize) number of games checked, transmission standby & RAM initialization, designated RAM initialization)
Next, referring to Figures 184 and 185, we will explain three processes executed by the main CPU 2101 (i.e., BB (special prize) number of plays check process, transmission waiting & RAM initialization process, and designated RAM initialization process).

Figures 184 and 185 are flowcharts showing the processing procedures for the three processes mentioned above, and are a single subprogram consisting of a series of consecutive program codes. This flowchart also includes two end symbols (rounded rectangles indicating "RET") and three start symbols (other rounded rectangles indicating symbols other than "RET", namely, "BB (special prize) number of plays check processing", "transmission standby & RAM initialization processing", and "designated RAM initialization processing"). The end symbols indicate that when the flow reaches that end symbol, it will return to the calling program, and the start symbols indicate addresses (entry points) from which other calling programs can be called.

For convenience, we will assign step numbers to each of the end symbols (returns) and start symbols (entry points).

The BB (special prize) number of plays check process is called from the calling program by specifying the address of entry point S2131 (the address of the program stored in the program area 2102a in the use area) or the label corresponding to that address. Specifically, this BB (special prize) number of plays check process is called from the main process shown in FIG. 179 (step S2020).

In step S2132 shown in FIG. 184, the main CPU 2101 determines whether BB (special prize) is in operation. If it is not in operation (No in step S2132), the process proceeds to return S2133, where the program returns to the calling program. If it is in operation (Yes in step S2132), the process proceeds to step S2134, where the program determines whether the operation of BB (special prize) has ended.

If the BB (special prize) operation has not ended (No in step S2134), the number of RB plays is decremented in step S2135, and it is determined in step S2136 whether RB has ended. If RB has not ended (No in step S2136), proceed to return S2133 and return to the calling program.

If the BB (special prize) operation has ended (Yes in step S2134) or the RB has ended (Yes in step S2136), the RB differential signal is set to off (test signal) in step S2137, and the interrupt is waited for two cycles in step S2138.

Next, in step S2139, it is determined whether or not the operation of BB (special prize) has finished. If the operation of BB (special prize) has not finished (No in step S2139), the process proceeds to return S2133 and returns to the calling program. On the other hand, if the operation of BB (special prize) has finished (Yes in step S2139), in step S2140, the RAM initialization address is set to the "BB (special prize) end clear address" related to RAM area 2203a in the used area.

Next, the process proceeds to entry point S2141 shown in Figure 185, where the transmission standby and RAM initialization process begins. The transmission standby and RAM initialization process is called from the calling program by specifying the address of entry point S2141 (the address of the program stored in the program area 2102a in the area of use) or the label corresponding to that address. Specifically, this transmission standby and RAM initialization process is called from the process of step S2039 shown in Figure 180, and when called from the process of step S2039, the RAM initialization address is set to the address set in step S2038.

Next, in step S2142, interrupts are prohibited, and then in step S2143, the communication data stored in the communication data storage area is obtained, and in step S2144, interrupt permission is set. Between the time when interrupts are prohibited and the time when they are permitted, the occurrence of interrupt processing such as periodic interrupt processing and power interruption processing is suppressed, thereby preventing the communication data transmission processing of periodic interrupt processing (see FIG. 195) from being performed and the communication data stored in the communication data storage area being transmitted.

Next, in step S2145, it is determined whether there is unsent communication data, and if there is unsent communication data (Yes in step S2145), the processing of steps S2142 to S2144 is repeated. If there is no unsent communication data (No in step S2145), the processing proceeds to entry point S2146, where the designated RAM initialization processing begins.

The designated RAM initialization process is called from the calling program by specifying the address of entry point S2146 (the address of the program stored in the program area in use 2102a) or the label corresponding to that address. Specifically, this designated RAM initialization process is called from the processing of step S2036 shown in FIG. 180, and when called from the processing of step S2036, the RAM initialization address is set to the address set in step S2032 or step S2034.

Next, in step S2147, the return address is protected (the program counter is stored in the stack area), the RAM initialization address is set, and the initialization count (= the number of bytes to be initialized) is set. Then, in step S2148, interrupts are disabled, and in step S2149, the contents of the RAM initialization address where the clear address for the RAM area 2203a in the used area is set is saved in the start address storage area. Specifically, the RAM initialization address is set by setting the address set in the DE register to the HL register, and the initialization count is the number of bytes calculated from the address set in the HL register to the address where the stack area protected by the return address is not cleared, and is the value set in the BC register.

Next, in step S2150, the out-of-use RAM initialization process (out-of-use area) is called (using CALLEX) to initialize the out-of-use RAM area 2203b. Details of the out-of-use RAM initialization process (out-of-use area) will be described later.

Then, in step S2151, RAM in the used area is initialized, that is, the RAM area 2203a in the used area is initialized, and in step S2152, interrupt permission is set. During the period from when interrupts are disabled to when they are allowed, interrupt processing such as periodic interrupt processing and power interruption processing is suppressed. Specifically, the number of initializations (= number of bytes to be initialized) is overwritten with 0 from the RAM initialization address set in step S2147 for the RAM area 2203a in the used area. Although not shown here, the initialization in step S2151 is performed, for example, by executing the "CLRIR" command.

In this RAM initialization process within the used area, the initialization start address for the RAM area 2203a within the used area is originally stored in the RAM initialization address, so this address is used as the initialization start address. Also, in this embodiment, the initialization end address for the RAM area 2203a within the used area is set to a fixed address, but it may also be set to a different address depending on the initialization start address.

Processing then proceeds to return S2153 and returns to the calling program.

(RAM initialization process outside the area of use (outside the area of use))
Next, with reference to FIG. 186, the out-of-use RAM initialization process (out-of-use area) executed by the main CPU 2101 will be described.

Figure 186 is a flowchart showing the processing steps for the above-mentioned out-of-use RAM initialization process (outside of the use area). Figure 186 shows two processes: out-of-use RAM initialization process (outside of the use area) and out-of-use RAM initialization process (continued). However, by executing, for example, a jump instruction in out-of-use RAM initialization process (outside of the use area), out-of-use RAM initialization process (continued) is subsequently executed, so these are described as a series of programs.

For convenience, we will assign step numbers to each of the two start symbols (rounded rectangles other than "RETEX", i.e., "RAM initialization outside of used area (outside of used area)" and "RAM initialization outside of used area (continued)").

The out-of-use RAM initialization process (outside the used area) is called by the calling program by specifying the address of entry point S2171 (the address of the program stored in the in-use program area 2102a) or the label corresponding to that address. Specifically, this out-of-use RAM initialization process (outside the used area) is called (by CALLEX) from step S2150 in Figure 185.

In step S2172 shown in FIG. 186, the main CPU 2101 moves (jumps) by specifying the address of entry point S2173 (the address of the program stored in the out-of-use area program area 2102c) or the label corresponding to that address, for example, using a jump command, and transfers control of the out-of-use area RAM initialization processing (outside of the used area). For convenience, the processing after the move is referred to as out-of-use area RAM initialization processing (continued). Also, for convenience, the move (jump) processing indicated by step S2172 is represented by a trapezoid symbol. Note that such move (jump) processing can be implemented in various ways, including using a jump command.

When the out-of-use RAM initialization process (continue) begins, in step S2174, a lower address (e.g., 1 byte) from the start address storage area is obtained and stored, for example, in a specified area (memory determination area) of the out-of-use work area 2103c. Here, the start address storage area stores a clear address related to the in-use RAM area 2203a, e.g., 2 bytes, set as the RAM initialization address (step S2149 in Figure 185). Depending on the situation, for example, one of the following is stored: a clear address when a RAM abnormality occurs, a clear address when settings are changed, a clear address at the end of BB (special prize), or a clear address at the end of one game. These clear addresses are addresses related to the in-use RAM area 2203a. The clear address at the end of one game is set as the RAM initialization address, for example, in the main side presentation control process at the end of game (step S2016) shown in Figure 179.

Next, in step S2175, the initialization start address used to initialize the RAM outside the used area (step S2183) is temporarily set to the address outside the used area that is cleared when a RAM abnormality occurs. If the address in the memory determination area is not the address that is cleared when a RAM abnormality occurs (No in step S2176), the initialization start address is set to the address outside the used area that is cleared when the settings are changed (step S2177) as the next candidate.

Next, if the address in the memory judgment area is not the address cleared when the settings are changed (No in step S2178), the next candidate initialization start address is set to the address outside the used area that is cleared when BB (special prize) ends (step S2179).

Furthermore, if the address in the memory determination area is not the address cleared at the end of BB (special prize) (No in step S2180), the initialization start address is finally set to the address cleared outside the use area at the end of one game (step S2181), and then the process proceeds to step S2182.

If the answer is Yes in step S2176, step S2178, or step S2180, proceed to step S2182 without changing the contents of the initialization start address.

By performing the above process, by referencing only the lower address (address of the memory determination area) of the start address storage area where the RAM initialization address for the in-use RAM area 2203a is stored, it is possible to specify the initialization start address of the out-of-use RAM area 2203b corresponding to that lower address.

Next, in step S2182, the initialization count (= number of bytes to be initialized) is calculated and set in a specified area. Then, the initialization start address set in the above process is used to initialize the out-of-use RAM area 2203b (step S2183). Specifically, the initialization count is set in the BC register by subtracting the initialization start address set in the HL register from the initialization end address of the out-of-use RAM area 2203b. Then, the specified range of the out-of-use RAM area 2203b is initialized by executing the "CLRIR" instruction described above. Note that in this embodiment, the initialization end address of the out-of-use RAM area 2203b is set to a fixed address regardless of the lower address of the start address storage area; however, like the initialization start address, it may be set to a different address depending on the lower address of the start address storage area. Then, "RETEX" is used to return to the calling program.

The program that executes the out-of-use RAM initialization process (continued) is stored in the out-of-use program area 2102c and is a "specific subroutine" that is stored in the in-use program area 2102a, is called from step S2150 of the process shown in Figures 184 and 185, and returns to that process.

(Random number acquisition process, internal lottery process)
Next, with reference to Figures 187 and 188, the random number value acquisition process and internal lottery process executed by the main CPU 2101 will be described.

Figure 187 is a flowchart showing the processing steps for the random number value acquisition process described above. Figure 188 is a flowchart showing the processing steps for the internal lottery process described above. These two processes are a single subprogram consisting of a series of consecutive program codes. This flowchart also includes one end symbol (a rounded rectangle marked "RET") and two start symbols (other rounded rectangles marked other than "RET", i.e., "random number value acquisition process" and "internal lottery process"). The end symbol indicates that when the flow reaches that end symbol, it will return to the calling program, and the start symbol indicates an address (entry point) from which other calling programs can be called.

For convenience, we will assign a step number to each of the two start symbols (representing "random number acquisition process" and "internal lottery process").

The random number value acquisition process is called from the calling program by specifying the address of the entry point S2201 (the address of the program stored in the program area in use 2102a) or the label corresponding to that address. Specifically, this random number value acquisition process is called from step S2004 in Figure 179.

As can be seen from Figures 187 and 188, when the internal lottery processing calls the random number value acquisition processing described above, processing automatically proceeds to the internal lottery processing entry point S2205, and there is no need to call it from the calling program. In Figure 179, to make the processing easier to understand, the internal lottery processing is shown as being called in step S2005 after step S2004, but in reality, when the random number value acquisition processing is called in step S2004, the internal lottery processing is automatically executed after the random number value acquisition processing is executed.

First, when the random number value acquisition process is started, the main CPU 2101 sets interrupt prohibition in step S2202 shown in FIG. 187, and then in step S2203, acquires a random number value for the role lottery and saves the acquired random number value in the role lottery random number value storage area. In this embodiment, the random number value for the role lottery is generated by the random number circuit 2150 connected to the microprocessor 2100.

Next, in step S2204, interrupt permission is set. Between the time when interrupts are disabled and the time when they are permitted, interrupt processing such as periodic interrupt processing and power interruption processing is suppressed.

Next, when the internal lottery process is initiated, the main CPU 2101 executes a medal insertion count check process in step S2206 shown in FIG. 188. During this process, the medal insertion count stored in the medal insertion counter and credit counter is updated based on the detection results of a medal sensor (e.g., a medal sensor corresponding to medal sensor 31S in the first embodiment) and a bet switch (e.g., a bet switch corresponding to bet switch 6S in the first embodiment) during the period in which medals can be accepted.

Next, in step S2207, the set content is obtained from the game return impossible error flag. For example, if the setting value check process (outside the use range) or the random number inspection process (outside the use range) described below, as shown in FIG. 198, determines that game return is impossible (abnormal), data indicating "return impossible" (for example, a value other than "0") is set to the game return impossible error flag, and if the game return is determined to be possible (normal), the game return impossible error flag remains set to data indicating "return possible" (for example, a value of "0").

Here, a determination is made as to whether the setting of the game return impossible error flag is "return impossible" (step S2208), and if the setting of the game return impossible error flag is "return impossible" (Yes in step S2208), the game return impossible error processing (see FIG. 183) is called. Note that although this embodiment refers to a "game return impossible state," it may more accurately be expressed as a "game continuation impossible state."

If the setting of the game return impossible error flag is not "return impossible" (No in step S2208), that is, if game return is possible (normal), in step S2209, the internal lottery table (address) used for internal lottery processing is set.

The subsequent internal lottery processing (steps S2210 to S2220) is the same as steps S62 to S73 shown in Figure 26 of the first embodiment, so a detailed description will be omitted.

(Interface 2 output processing (outside of use area))
189, the interface 2 output process (outside the use area) executed by the main CPU 2101 will be described. This process is a subprogram for outputting using the communication circuit STU2, which is a serial communication circuit dedicated to transmission to the second interface board 302 for testing machine in FIG. 3.

Figure 189 is a flowchart showing the processing steps for the interface 2 output processing (outside the area of use) described above. Figure 189 shows two processes: interface 2 output processing (outside the area of use) and interface 2 output processing (continued). However, by executing a jump instruction in interface 2 output processing (outside the area of use), interface 2 output processing (continued) is subsequently executed, so these will be described as a series of programs.

For convenience, we will assign step numbers to each of the two start symbols (rounded rectangles other than "RETEX", i.e., "Interface 2 output processing (outside of used area)" and "Interface 2 output processing (continued)").

Interface 2 output processing (outside the area in use) is called from the calling program by specifying the address of entry point S2241 (the address of the program stored in the area in use program area 2102a) or the label corresponding to that address. Specifically, this interface 2 output processing (outside the area in use) is called (by CALLEX) from step S2017 in Figure 179.

In step S2242 shown in FIG. 189, the main CPU 2101 moves (jumps) by specifying the address of entry point S2243 (the address of the program stored in the out-of-use program area 2102c) or the label corresponding to that address, for example, using a jump command, and moves control of interface 2 output processing (outside of the used area). For convenience, the processing after the move is referred to as interface 2 output processing (continuation). Also, for convenience, the move (jump) processing indicated by step S2242 is represented by a trapezoid symbol. Note that this move (jump processing) can be achieved in various ways, as described above.

When interface 2 output processing (continued) begins, step S2244 determines whether or not transmission is currently in progress to interface 2 (I/F2). Interface 2 represents an interface that connects the main control board 2071 and sub-control board 2072 via serial communication; for example, STU3, which is one of the serial communication circuits 2114 described above and is a serial communication circuit dedicated to transmission, controls communication between the main control board 2071 and sub-control board 2072.

If it is determined that transmission to interface 2 is not in progress (No in step S2244), in step S2245, the transmission parameter table (address) to be used for transmitting the transmission data is set, and then in step S2246, the transmission data is generated using the set transmission parameter table.

Then, in step S2247, the generated transmission data is sent to interface 2 (sub-control board 2072, sub-control circuit 2200), and then "RETEX" is used to return to the calling program.

Also, if it is determined that transmission to interface 2 is in progress (Yes in step S2244), no processing is performed and the program returns to the calling program using "RETEX."

The program that executes the interface 2 output processing (continued) is stored in the program area outside the area in use 2102c and is a "specific subroutine" that is stored in the program area within the area in use 2102a, is called by "CALLEX" from step S2017 of the main processing shown in FIG. 179, and returns to the main processing.

(Medal currency number abnormality determination process (outside of use area))
Next, referring to Fig. 190, the medal currency number abnormality determination process (outside the use area) executed by the main CPU 2101 will be described. Fig. 190 is a flowchart showing the processing procedure for the medal currency number abnormality determination process (outside the use area). As mentioned above, this medal currency number abnormality determination process (outside the use area) is a process called by "CALLEX" in the program in step S2018 of Fig. 179.

In the medal/currency count abnormality determination process (outside the use area), first, in step S2261, the medal insertion counter is set, and in step S2262, the guide rail medal/currency count is set. Here, the medal insertion counter counts the number of medals that have passed through the medal discharge guide connected to the outlet of a selector (for example, a selector corresponding to selector 31 in the first embodiment), and the guide rail medal/currency count is the number of medals detected (by a medal detection sensor) as having passed through a guide rail provided inside the selector.

Next, in step S2263, the difference between the number of medals inserted in the medal counter and the number of medals in the guide rail is calculated, and in step S2264, it is determined whether the difference is within the allowable range.

If it is determined that the difference in number of sheets is not within the allowable range (No in step S2264), data indicating an abnormal difference in number of sheets error is set in the out-of-use area error flag (step S2265). After step S2265, or if it is determined that the difference in number of sheets is within the allowable range (Yes in step S2264), the program returns to the calling program by "RETEX".

(Medal payout/replay operation processing, settlement execution processing, medal payout processing)
Next, with reference to Figures 191 and 192, three processes executed by the main CPU 2101 (i.e., medal payout/replay operation process, settlement execution process, and medal payout process) will be described.

Figures 191 and 192 are flowcharts showing the processing procedures for the three processes mentioned above, and are a single subprogram consisting of a series of consecutive program codes. This flowchart also includes two end symbols (rounded rectangles indicating "RET") and three start symbols (other rounded rectangles indicating symbols other than "RET", i.e., "medal payout/replay activation processing," "settlement execution processing," and "medal payout processing"). An end symbol indicates that when the flow reaches that end symbol, it will return to the calling program, and a start symbol indicates an address (entry point) from which other calling programs can be called.

For convenience, we will assign step numbers to each of the end symbols (returns) and start symbols (entry points).

The medal payout/replay activation process is called from the calling program by specifying the address of entry point S2281 (the address of the program stored in the program area 2102a in the use area) or the label corresponding to that address. Specifically, this medal payout/replay activation process is called from the main process shown in Figure 179 (step S2014). In the first embodiment, this process corresponds to the medal payout/replay activation process (step S14) shown in Figure 23.

In step S2282 shown in FIG. 191, the main CPU 2101 determines whether the winning combination is a replay or not, and if it is not a replay (No in step S2282), proceeds to step S2284. If it is a replay (Yes in step S2282), proceeds to step S2283, where the value of the medal insertion counter, which indicates the number of inserted medals, is set in the automatic insertion medal counter.

Next, in step S2284, the winning activation command is stored in the communication data storage area, and in step S2285, it is determined whether the winning number counter = 0. If the winning number counter = 0 (Yes in step S2285), proceed to return S2292 and return to the calling program.

If the winning medal counter is not equal to 0 (No in step S2285), in step S2286, the address of the payout medal counter storage area is set in a specified register. Next, in step S2287, it is determined whether the number of credit medals is at the upper limit (for example, 50 medals).

If the number of medals in the credit is not at the upper limit (No in step S2287), in step S2288, 1 is added to the credit counter, and each medal paid out as a result of a win is accumulated in the credit.

In step S2289, a medal payout count check process is executed. This medal payout count check process subtracts 1 from the payout count counter, adds 1 to the counter (medal out counter) for the medal payout signal output to the external centralized terminal board (for example, an external centralized terminal board corresponding to external centralized terminal board 55 in the first embodiment), and updates the medal insertion counter.

Next, in step S2291, it is determined whether payout has ended, i.e., whether the number of medals paid out has reached 0. If it is determined that payout has ended (Yes in step S2291), the process proceeds to return S2292 and returns to the calling program. If it is determined that payout has not ended (No in step S2291), the process returns to step S2287 and determines whether the number of medals credited has reached the upper limit.

If it is determined that the number of credit medals has reached the upper limit (Yes in step S2287), the process proceeds to step S2298 in FIG. 192, where the medal payout process related to the payout number counter is initiated. The medal payout process is executed when the number of credit medals has reached the upper limit in the flowchart shown in FIG. 191, and is also called when the settlement execution process (step S2293) shown in FIG. 192 is initiated (step S2295), as described below.

The medal payout process receives the number of medals to be paid out as an input parameter, and performs the payout process based on the number of medals to be paid out determined therein. In this embodiment, when this process is called, one of the payout number counter, credit counter, or medal insertion counter is received as an input parameter, and the number received is used as the number of medals to be paid out. In addition, at this time, the input parameter is the lower address (e.g., the lowest 8 bits) of the address (in the working area 2103a within the used area) where each counter is stored.

When the medal payout process begins, in step S2299, the hopper drive is turned on to operate the hopper device for paying out medals (for example, a device with a configuration similar to the hopper device 32 in the first embodiment), and in step S2300, it is determined whether a medal has passed through the hopper count switch. If it is determined that a medal has not passed through the hopper count switch (No in step S2300), a hopper error check process is performed in step S2301.

The hopper error check process detects hopper jam errors and hopper empty errors. In the case of a hopper jam error, it is determined that an error has been detected when the hopper count switch remains on for a certain period of time. In the case of a hopper empty error, it is determined that an error has been detected when the hopper count switch remains off for a certain period of time. When one of these errors is detected, the type of error detected is displayed on a specified 7-segment LED on an information display device (for example, a display device corresponding to information display device 14 in the first embodiment).

Then, the process proceeds to step S2300, where it is repeatedly determined whether a medal has passed through the hopper count switch. If it is determined that a medal has passed through the hopper count switch (Yes in step S2300), the process proceeds to step S2302, where a medal payout number check process is performed. This medal payout number check process is the same as the medal payout number check process in step S2289 shown in FIG. 191.

Next, in step S2303, it is determined whether payout has ended, i.e., whether the number of medals paid out has reached 0. If it is determined that payout has ended (Yes in step S2303), the program proceeds to return S2305 and returns to the program from which it was called. If it is determined that payout has not ended (No in step S2303), the program proceeds to step S2300 and repeats the determination of whether medals have passed the hopper count switch.

If it is determined that dispensing has ended (Yes in step S2303), proceed to step S2304, where the hopper drive is turned off, and then proceed to return S2305, returning to the calling program.

The flowchart in Figure 192 shows another entry point S2293 related to the settlement execution process.

This settlement execution process is a process in which a specified program is launched when the player presses the settlement button (for example, a button corresponding to settlement button 9 in the first embodiment) during the medal acceptance/start check process (step S2003) in the main process of Figure 179, and the program is called by specifying the address of entry point S2293 (the address of the program stored in the program area 2102a in the use area) or the label corresponding to that address. Note that in the first embodiment, this process corresponds to the process executed when the settlement button is pressed during the medal acceptance/start check process (step S3) shown in Figure 23.

When the settlement execution process begins, the main CPU 2101 sets the address of the credit counter storage area in a specified register in step S2294 shown in FIG. 192, and executes (calls) the medal payout process related to the credit counter in step S2295. This medal payout process is the process from step S2298 to step S2305 in FIG. 192, as described above.

When this medal payout process is completed, the program proceeds to step S2296, where it determines whether or not a replay is in progress. If a replay is in progress (Yes in step S2296), the program proceeds to return S2305, returning to the program that called the program. If a replay is not in progress (No in step S2296), the main CPU 2101 sets the address of the medal insertion counter storage area in a specified register in step S2297 and proceeds to the next step, where it executes the medal payout process related to the medal insertion counter. This medal payout process is the process from step S2298 to step S2305 in FIG. 192, as described above. In the flowchart of Figure 192, when the settlement execution process (steps S2293 to S2297) is completed, the program proceeds to the next payout process without returning. This continuous programming also eliminates the need for a CALL command for the payout process, and also reduces the number of RET commands by one, thereby saving space in the program area 2102a in the use area of the main ROM 2102.

When this medal payout process is complete, return S2305 returns to the calling program.

(Counting the number of medals passed (outside the area of use))
Next, referring to Fig. 193, the medal passing count counting process (outside the use area) executed by the main CPU 2101 will be described. Fig. 193 is a flowchart showing the processing steps for the medal passing count counting process (outside the use area). This medal passing count counting process (outside the use area) is the medal payout count check process (steps S2289, S2302) shown in Figs. 191 and 192, and its program is stored in the out-of-use area program area 2102c, and is called by the calling program using "CALLEX."

In the medal passing counting process (outside the use area), the medal insertion counter is updated in step S2321. Then, "RETEX" is used to return to the original program.

(Role ratio monitor aggregation start process (outside of use area))
Next, with reference to FIG. 194, the role ratio monitor tally start process (outside the use area) executed by the main CPU 2101 will be described. FIG. 194 is a flowchart showing the processing procedure for the role ratio monitor tally start process (outside the use area). This role ratio monitor tally start process (outside the use area) is called from the calling program by specifying the entry point address (the address of the program stored in the out-of-use area program area 2102c) or the label corresponding to that address. Specifically, this role ratio monitor tally start process (outside the use area) is called (by CALLEX) from step S2019 in FIG. 179.

The role ratio monitor tally start process (outside the use area) is a tally start process for displaying various ratio information related to the game on a role ratio monitor device (for example, a role ratio monitor device corresponding to role ratio monitor device 54 of the first embodiment), and the tallying, calculation, and display control process for the information to be displayed on the role ratio monitor device is executed, for example, in step S2364 of the periodic interrupt process.

When the role ratio monitor tally start process (outside the use area) is initiated, the main CPU 2101 sets the role ratio tally start flag in step S2341, and stores the special prize signal (a signal indicating a bonus (special prize) state) in the role ratio tally storage area in step S2342.

Next, in step S2343, the number of dispensed coins is stored in the tally storage area, and in step S2344, the navigation data is stored in the tally storage area. After that, "RETEX" is used to return to the original program.

(Periodic interrupt processing)
Next, the periodic interrupt processing executed by the main CPU 2101 will be described with reference to Fig. 195. Fig. 195 is a flowchart showing the processing procedure of the periodic interrupt processing.

In this embodiment, the periodic interrupt processing cycle (one interrupt time) is 1.1172 ms, but the periodic interrupt processing cycle is not limited to this. Furthermore, the periodic interrupt processing of this embodiment is the same as the periodic interrupt processing of the first embodiment shown in FIG. 32, except for the test firing signal control processing (outside the use area) in step S2364 and the error detection processing (outside the use area) in step S2368. Therefore, only the test firing signal control processing (outside the use area) and the error detection processing (outside the use area) will be explained here.

In step S2364, a test firing signal control process (outside the use area) is performed. This test firing signal control process (outside the use area) performs aggregation, calculation, and display control processes to display various ratio information related to the game on a role ratio monitor device (for example, a role ratio monitor device corresponding to role ratio monitor device 54 of the first embodiment). Details of the test firing signal control process (outside the use area) will be described later.

In step S2368, error detection processing (outside the area of use) is performed. This error detection processing (outside the area of use) corresponds to the error detection processing of the first embodiment (step S207 in Figure 32), and detects whether various error conditions have occurred based on the input status, etc. checked in step S2362. In this embodiment, a unique configuration also performs setting value check processing and random number inspection processing. Details of the error detection processing (outside the area of use) will be described later.

(Test firing signal control processing (outside of operating range))
Next, the test firing signal control process (outside the use area) executed by the main CPU 2101 will be described with reference to Fig. 196. Fig. 196 is a flowchart showing the processing procedure for the test firing signal control process (outside the use area). As mentioned above, this test firing signal control process (outside the use area) is a process called by "CALLEX" in step S2364 of Fig. 195.

In the test firing signal control process (outside the use area), first, in step S2391, a test signal generation process is performed. Next, in step S2392, a reel stop enable signal output process is performed.

Next, in step S2393, special prize signal control processing is performed, in step S2394, pseudo-game signal control processing is performed, and in step S2395, condition device signal control processing is performed.

Next, in step S2396, the role ratio monitor aggregation process is performed, in step S2397, the role ratio monitor display management process is performed, and in step S2398, the test signal output process is performed. After that, "RETEX" is used to return to the calling program. The main functions are: the role ratio monitor display management process is a display management process that includes display control on the role ratio monitor device 54, and the test signal output process is a test signal output process to the first interface board 301 for the test machine.

(Error detection process (out of use area))
Next, the error detection processing (outside the area of use) executed by the main CPU 2101 will be described with reference to Fig. 197. Fig. 197 is a flowchart showing the processing procedure for the error detection processing (outside the area of use). As mentioned above, this error detection processing (outside the area of use) is called by "CALLEX" in step S2368 of Fig. 195.

The error detection process (outside the range of use) corresponds to the error detection process (step S207 in Figure 32) executed in the periodic interrupt process of the first embodiment. First, in step S2411, the setting value check process (outside the range of use) is called. This setting value check process (outside the range of use) determines whether the setting value is normal or not, and details will be described later.

Next, in step S2412, a medal passage check process is performed, and in step S2413, a hopper check process is performed. Note that these processes are not necessary for medalless machines.

Next, in step S2414, the random number check process (outside the area of use) is called. This random number check process (outside the area of use) determines whether the random number circuit is operating normally, and details will be described later. After that, "RETEX" is used to return to the calling program.

(Setting value check process (outside of range of use), random number check process (outside of range of use))
Next, with reference to FIG. 198, two processes executed by the main CPU 2101 (i.e., setting value check process (outside the use area) and random number inspection process (outside the use area)) will be described.

Figure 198 is a flowchart showing the processing steps for the two processes mentioned above, and is a single subprogram consisting of a series of consecutive program codes. This flowchart also includes three end symbols (one rounded rectangle notating "RET" and two rounded rectangles notating "RET") and two start symbols (other rounded rectangles notating "RET", i.e., "Setting value check processing (outside of range of use)" and "Random number inspection processing (outside of range of use)"). The end symbols indicate that the flow will return to the calling program when it reaches that end symbol, and the start symbols indicate addresses (entry points) from which other calling programs can be called.

For convenience, we will assign step numbers to each of the end symbols (returns) and start symbols (entry points).

The setting value check process (outside the area of use) is called from the calling program by specifying the address of entry point S2431 (the address of the program stored in the out-of-area program area 2102c) or the label corresponding to that address. Specifically, this setting value check process (outside the area of use) is called from the error detection process (outside the area of use) shown in FIG. 197 (step S2411).

When the setting value check process (outside the use area) is initiated, the main CPU 2101 determines in step S2432 whether the setting value is normal. If it is not normal (No in step S2432), the process proceeds to step S2434, where it sets the game return impossible error flag to data indicating that return is impossible, and returns to the calling program with "RET" in step S2435.

On the other hand, if the setting value is determined to be normal (Yes in step S2432), the program returns to the calling program (step S2433). Note that because the processing in steps S2432 and S2433 is executed by a single command, the end symbol for returning to the calling program is written as "return" rather than "RET." Note that in this embodiment, a normal setting value is a value between 0 and 5 (setting 1 to setting 6) stored in the setting value storage area allocated to the working area within the used area 2103a, and any value other than the normal value is considered abnormal.

An example of the single instruction mentioned above is "opcode1 C, (Addr1), 6", where opcode1 is a description representing a specific instruction, the first operand "C" represents the C (carry) bit of flag register F (see Figure 176 (B)), the second operand "(Addr1)" represents the value stored at address Addr1, and the third operand "6" is the value stored at address Addr1 compared to. When this single instruction is executed, the value stored at address Addr1 is subtracted by 6. If the C bit of flag register F is "1", the program returns to the caller; if it is "0", the program proceeds to the next step.

In this case, address Addr1 represents the location in the working area within the used area 2103a where the setting value is stored. If this command causes the stored setting value to be 6 or greater, the C bit of flag register F is set to "0" and processing proceeds to step S2434 described above. If the stored setting value is 5 or less, the C bit of flag register F is set to "1", the setting value is determined to be normal, and processing returns to the caller. In this embodiment, the setting change process changes the setting value within the range of "0" to "5".

The random number checking process (outside the area in use) is called from the calling program by specifying the address of entry point S2436 (the address of the program stored in the out-of-area program area 2102c) or the label corresponding to that address. Specifically, this random number checking process (outside the area in use) is called from the error detection process (outside the area in use) shown in FIG. 197 (step S2414).

When the random number inspection process (outside the use area) is initiated, the main CPU 2101 determines in step S2437 whether the random number circuit for determining the winning combination (random number circuit 2150 connected to the microprocessor 2100) is normal. This determination is made, for example, by reading the status of the random number circuit 2150. Alternatively, if random number values are obtained multiple times from the random number circuit 2150 and the obtained multiple random number values match, it can be determined that the random number circuit 2150 has not updated the random number and an abnormality has occurred.

If the random number circuit for lottery winnings is normal (Yes in step S437), proceed to step S2438 to check another random number circuit; if it is not normal (No in step S437), proceed to step S2434, where the game return impossible error flag is set to data indicating that return is impossible, and return to the calling program with "RET" in step S2435.

Next, in step S2438, the random number circuit 2110 inside the microprocessor 2100 is inspected. In this embodiment, the random number circuit 2110 generates random numbers related to performances and random numbers for transitioning to the AT state. Here, it is determined whether the random number status of the internal information register is normal.

The internal information register (CIF) of the microprocessor 2100 has areas that notify of abnormalities in the random number update or the random number update clock frequency, and here, the values of these areas are checked to determine whether the random number circuit 2110 is operating normally. If the random number status of the internal information register is normal (i.e., the random number circuit 2110 is normal) (Yes in step S2438), the process returns to the calling program with "RET" in step S2439.

If the random number status of the internal information register is not normal (i.e., the random number circuit 2110 is not normal) (No in step S2438), as in the case of the random number circuit 2150, proceed to step S2434, where the game return impossible error flag is set to data indicating that return is impossible, and return to the calling program is made with "RET" in step S2435.

(Power interruption processing)
Next, the power interruption interruption processing executed by the main CPU 2101 will be described with reference to Fig. 199. Fig. 199 is a flowchart showing the processing procedure for the power interruption interruption processing. In this embodiment, as described above, when a power interruption occurs, the power interruption is detected by the power interruption detection signal output to the parallel input port 2111 (XINT), and in that case, the power interruption interruption processing is executed.

In the power interruption processing, the main CPU 2101 first saves all registers to the stack area (step S2451). In this embodiment, the main registers in bank 0 (general-purpose registers A, B, C, E, D, H, L, flag register F, index register IX, IY) and the sub-registers corresponding to these main registers are saved. However, the registers in bank 1 are not saved.

Next, in step S2452, the acceptance of medals is prohibited, and in step S2453, the hopper motor is turned off. Then, in step S2454, the current stack pointer SP is stored in a specified storage area. The reason for saving the current stack pointer SP is to return processing to the processing immediately before the power outage occurred, based on the stored stack pointer SP, during the game return processing shown in the power-on processing in Figure 180.

Next, in step S2455, the CRC generation process (outside the used area) is called, and in step S2456, settings are made to prohibit access to RAM (e.g., RAM area 2203a within the used area and RAM area 2203b outside the used area).

(CRC generation process (outside use area))
Next, the CRC generation process (outside the area of use) executed by the main CPU 2101 will be described with reference to Fig. 200. Fig. 200 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the CRC generation process (outside the area of use). As mentioned above, this CRC generation process (outside the area of use) is called by "CALLEX" in step S2456 of Fig. 199.

The CRC generation process (outside the area in use) first sets the power interruption occurrence flag to ON in step S2471. Next, in step S2472, the CRC calculation process (outside the area in use) is called, where CRC calculation is performed for the in-area working area 2103a, the out-of-area working area 2103c, etc. Note that the CRC calculation process (outside the area in use) is the same as the process described with reference to FIG. 182.

Next, in step S2473, the result (CRC value) of the CRC calculation process (outside the area in use) called in step S2472 is stored in a specified storage area. The CRC value stored in this way at the time of the power interruption is obtained in the CRC inspection process (outside the area in use) at power-on (step S2032 in Figure 180) and compared with the CRC value at power-on (steps S2054 and S2055 in Figure 181).

The CRC generation process (outside the used area) then returns to the calling program using "RETEX."

(Out-of-area error cause clearing process (outside of area))
Next, an outside-usage-area error cause clearing process (outside the use area) executed by the main CPU 2101 will be described with reference to Fig. 201. Fig. 201 is a flowchart showing the processing procedure for the outside-usage-area error cause clearing process (outside the use area).

The out-of-use area error cause clearing process (outside the use area) is a process for clearing the difference in number error and the like that was set in the out-of-use area error flag in the medal passing number abnormality determination process (outside the use area) in Figure 190. This process is initiated by pressing the reset button on the main control board 2071 (a button similar to the reset button on the main control board 71 described in connection with the modified example of the first gaming machine according to the first embodiment) when some kind of error that allows gameplay to be restored, such as a hopper jam error or hopper empty error, occurs.

The out-of-area error cause clearing process (outside of area of use) first obtains the error flag in step S2491, and then inverts the error flag (its bit) in step S2492. Next, in step S2493, the logical product of the out-of-area error flag and the inverted data is calculated, and in step S2494 the result of the logical product is set as the out-of-area error flag.

The out-of-area error cause clearing process (outside of area of use) then returns to the calling program using "RETEX."

Next, the characteristic configuration and functions of this embodiment will be explained in detail with reference to Figures 179 to 201, which have been explained so far. In addition, Figures 202 to 218 will also be referenced in this explanation.

[1. Specifying the call destination for CALLEX]
As described above, within the main ROM 2102, various programs and various data (tables) used for various processes that are not directly related to the game played by the player are stored in the outside-use-area ROM area 2202b, which is located at an address different from the inside-use-area ROM area 2202a, thereby avoiding pressure on the capacity of the inside-use-area ROM area 2202a, which is set as a game area.

In addition, processing related to bank 0 uses programs and data stored in the in-use ROM area 2202a of the main ROM 2102, temporarily using the in-use RAM area 2203a of the main RAM 2103, to perform calculations to control the game actions performed by the player. In other words, processing related to bank 0 can be said to be processing related to the game areas (the in-use ROM area 2202a and the in-use RAM area 2203a).

On the other hand, processing related to bank 1 uses programs and data stored in the off-use ROM area 2202b of the main ROM 2102, and temporarily uses the off-use RAM area 2203b of the main RAM 2103 to perform processing that is not directly related to the game played by the player (arithmetic processing for performing processing other than the game). In other words, processing related to bank 1 can be said to be processing related to the off-area areas (off-use ROM area 2202b and off-use RAM area 2203b).

The in-use ROM area 2202a of the main ROM 2102 is an area that stores programs and data for controlling the actions of games played by players. However, as gaming machine processing becomes more diverse and complex, the capacity of the specified in-use ROM area 2202a is becoming increasingly limited. Therefore, a major challenge is how to ensure that programs and data related to processing not directly related to games played by players are stored in the out-of-use ROM area 2202b of the main ROM 2102, while also conserving the capacity of the in-use ROM area 2202a of the main ROM 2102.

Furthermore, when processing bank 0, the instruction to call the subprogram that executes the processing of bank 1 is, for example, "CALLEX," followed by "RETEX" to return to the calling program. Such call instructions (for example, "CALLEX") are designed to take advantage of the characteristics of the main CPU 2101: if the subprogram is stored before a specific address (for example, "2100"H) in the out-of-use ROM area 2202b, i.e., in this embodiment, between "2000"H and "20FF"H, they become 2-byte instructions; if a subprogram is called that is stored after that specific address (i.e., between "2100"H and "24BF"H), they become 4-byte instructions.

As mentioned above, the size of a subprogram called by a "CALLEX" instruction varies depending on its storage location. When specifying the subprogram's destination address (hereafter referred to as the "start point") using an address, addresses between "2000"H and "20FF"H can be specified without the "20" in the upper address, and the CPU's design specifications require only one byte for the address. However, if the start point of the subprogram to be called is at "2100"H or higher, two bytes of space must be reserved for the upper and lower addresses. This was a design innovation adopted by the main CPU 2101 designers to take into account the constraints of the gaming machine industry and to make it easier to secure as much space as possible in the ROM area within the used area. Furthermore, given the address storage considerations described above, if the start point of the subprogram to be called is at "2100"H or higher, the "CALLEX" instruction could conceivably be a three-byte instruction. Therefore, since the machine language (the language that the CPU can understand) for the "CALLEX" command differs depending on the start point, gaming machine program designers must be careful about the start point of the subprogram specified by the "CALLEX" command.

In any case, by keeping the storage location of subprograms called with instructions such as "CALLEX" at addresses between "2000"H and "20FF"H, it is possible to save 2 bytes for each instruction in the in-use ROM area 2202a. Furthermore, if the start point of a subprogram being called with "CALLEX" is at an address after "2100"H, and it is a 3-byte instruction, the number of bytes that can be saved is 1 byte.

In consideration of the above situation, this embodiment is configured to minimize the capacity of the in-use ROM area 2202a when using an instruction (for example, "CALLEX") to call a subprogram that executes processing in bank 1 during processing in bank 0. Furthermore, gaming machine program designers no longer need to pay attention to the start point when using the "CALLEX" instruction.

The main ROM 2102 shown in Figure 202 (A) is a partial extract of the configuration of the main ROM 2102 in Figure 177 (B), and conceptually represents the conventional calling of a subprogram using CALLEX.

Figure 202(A) shows a situation in which program PRG1 is stored in the in-use program area 2102a of main ROM 2102, and PRG1 calls subprograms EX_Proc1 and EX_Proc2 with the call instruction "CALLEX." Here, EX_Proc1 and EX_Proc2 are stored in the out-of-use program area 2102c of main ROM 2102, and their start points (first addresses of storage locations) are before "2100"H. Therefore, the instruction size of the call instruction "CALLEX" used by PRG1 is 2 bytes. Figure 202(A) shows, with dotted lines, a situation in which EX_Proc1 is called from PRG1 with "CALLEX."

Furthermore, Figure 202(A) shows a situation in which program PRG2 is stored in the in-use program area 2102a of main ROM 2102, and PRG2 calls subprograms EX_Proc3, EX_Proc4, and EX_Proc5 using the call instruction "CALLEX." Here, EX_Proc3 is stored in the out-of-use program area 2102c of main ROM 2102, and its start point (first address of the storage location) is before "2100"H. Therefore, the instruction size of the "CALLEX" instruction that calls EX_Proc3 in PRG2 is 2 bytes. Furthermore, EX_Proc4 and EX_Proc5 are stored in the out-of-use program area 2102c of main ROM 2102, and their start points (first address of the storage location) are after "2100"H. Therefore, the instruction size of the "CALLEX" instruction that calls EX_Proc4 and EX_Proc5 in PRG2 is 4 bytes each. In Figure 202 (A), the situation in which EX_Proc4 is called by "CALLEX" from PRG2 is shown by the dotted line.

In this way, when using a call instruction such as "CALLEX" to call a subprogram whose start point is "2100"H or later, each call instruction consumes an extra 2 bytes of capacity in the program area 2102a within the used area.

The main ROM 2102 shown in Figure 202(B), like Figure 202(A), is a partial extract of the configuration of the main ROM 2102 in Figure 177(B), and conceptually represents the calling of a subprogram using CALLEX in this embodiment.

Figure 202(B) shows a situation in which program PRG3 is stored in the in-use program area 2102a of main ROM 2102, and PRG3 calls subprograms EX_Proc6 and EX_Proc7 using the call instruction "CALLEX." Here, EX_Proc6 and EX_Proc7 are stored in the out-of-use program area 2102c of main ROM 2102, and their start points (first addresses of storage locations) are before "2100"H. Therefore, the instruction size of the call instruction "CALLEX" used by PRG3 is 2 bytes. Such RPG3 has the same configuration as PRG1 shown in Figure 202(A). Figure 202(B) shows, with a dotted line, a situation in which EX_Proc6 is called from PRG3 using "CALLEX."

Furthermore, Figure 202(B) shows that program PRG4 is stored in the in-use program area 2102a of main ROM 2102, and that PRG4 calls subprogram EX_Proc8, address (label) EX_Proc9_JP, and address (label) EX_Proc10_JP using the call instruction "CALLEX." Here, EX_Proc8 is stored in the out-of-use program area 2102c of main ROM 2102, and its start point (first address of the storage location) is before "2100"H. Therefore, the instruction size of the instruction "CALLEX" in PRG4 that calls EX_Proc8 is 2 bytes.

EX_Proc9_JR and EX_Proc10_JR are stored in the external program area 2102c of the main ROM 2102, and their start points (first address of the storage location) are before "2100"H. Therefore, in PRG4, the instruction size of the "CALLEX" instruction that calls EX_Proc9_JR and EX_Proc10_JR is 2 bytes each. The addresses before "2100"H indicated by EX_Proc9_JR and EX_Proc10_JR contain programs such as the jump instruction "JR," which causes a further jump to the subprograms EX_Proc9 and EX_Proc10, where these subprograms are executed.

As shown in Figure 202(B), the addresses of EX_Proc9 and EX_Proc10 are "2100"H and above. However, the instruction size of the "CALLEX" that ultimately calls EX_Proc9 and EX_Proc10 in PRG4 is 2 bytes, as mentioned above. Figure 202(B) shows, with dotted lines, the situation in which EX_Proc9_JR is called from PRG4 by "CALLEX," and then EX_Proc9_JR subsequently jumps to (calls) EX_Proc9. Similarly, EX_Proc10_JR is called from PRG4 by "CALLEX," and then EX_Proc10_JR subsequently jumps to (calls) EX_Proc10. As will be described later, the relationship between EX_Proc9 and EX_Proc9_JR, and the relationship between EX_Proc10 and EX_Proc10_JR, corresponds to the relationship between out-of-use RAM initialization processing (continued) and out-of-use RAM initialization processing (out-of-use area) shown in FIG. 186, and the relationship between interface 2 output (continued) and interface 2 output (out-of-use area) shown in FIG. 187.

The configuration shown in Figure 202(B) allows the instruction size of a "CALLEX" command to be set to 2 bytes, which is used to call a subprogram located after address "2100"H. However, this requires an instruction size (e.g., 2 or 3 bytes) for a jump instruction in the area before address "2100"H in the out-of-use program area 2102c, resulting in a total increase of 1 or 2 bytes. However, even if this configuration wastes the capacity of out-of-use program area 2102c, which has relatively more capacity than in-use program area 2102a, it is still significant that it saves capacity in in-use program area 2102a, which is more tight on capacity.

Furthermore, with the above configuration of this embodiment, if the capacity of the addresses before "2100"H in the out-of-use program area 2102c becomes low, the subprograms stored in that area (for example, EX_Proc6, EX_Proc7, and EX_Proc8 in Figure 202(B)) can also be moved to addresses after "2100"H, and a jump instruction to jump to that subprogram can be placed at an address before "2100"H.

Note that jump instructions in the execution environment of this embodiment can be broadly divided into JP-series instructions and JR-series instructions. JP-series instructions are three-byte instructions consisting of three bytes: one byte for the instruction code (command) and two bytes for the absolute address. JR-series instructions are two-byte instructions consisting of two bytes: one byte for the instruction code (command) and one byte for the relative address. Therefore, if you want to conserve space for addresses before "2100"H in the out-of-use program area 2102c, it is preferable to use JR-series instructions. However, because JR-series instructions use a one-byte relative address, as described above, it is important to note that they can only jump to subprograms stored within (or "less than") 128 bytes in relative location. Furthermore, subprograms called by "CALLEX" are not limited to jump instructions. Any program (including instructions and other statements) can be used as long as it can ultimately call a subprogram located after "2100"H.

This configuration of this embodiment is applied, for example, to a program that executes out-of-use RAM initialization processing (out-of-use area) as shown in Figure 186.

First, the program that executes the processing in Figures 184 and 185 is stored in the in-use area program area 2102a of the main ROM 2102, and this program corresponds, for example, to PRG4 in Figure 202 (B). Then, in step S2150 shown in Figures 184 and 185, this program calls the out-of-use area RAM initialization processing (outside the in-use area) (steps S2171 and S2172) shown in Figure 186 by "CALLEX." This call corresponds, for example, to "CALLEX EX_Proc9_JR" in Figure 202 (B).

The out-of-use RAM initialization process (outside of the used area) shown in Figure 186 is a process that jumps (calls) to the out-of-use RAM initialization process (continued) shown in Figure 186, and this program corresponds, for example, to "EX_Proc9_JR" in Figure 202 (B). Finally, the out-of-use RAM initialization process (continued) shown in Figure 186 is executed, and this program corresponds, for example, to "EX_Proc9" in Figure 202 (B).

Finally, the final "RETEX" in the out-of-use RAM initialization process (continued) shown in Figure 186 returns to the calling program that was called by "CALLEX," and processing proceeds to step S2151 in Figure 185.

This method is also applied to the program shown in Figure 189 that executes interface 2 output processing (outside the use area).

First, the program that executes the main processing in Fig. 179 is stored in the in-use program area 2102a of the main ROM 2102, and this program corresponds, for example, to PRG4 in Fig. 202(B). Then, in step S2017 shown in Fig. 179, this program calls the interface 2 output processing (outside the in-use area) (steps S2241, S2242) shown in Fig. 189 using "CALLEX." This call corresponds, for example, to "CALLEX EX_Proc9_JR" in Fig. 202(B).

The interface 2 output process (outside the area in use) shown in Figure 189 is a process that jumps to (calls) the interface 2 output process (continuation) shown in Figure 189, and this program corresponds, for example, to "EX_Proc9_JR" in Figure 202 (B). Finally, the interface 2 output process (continuation) shown in Figure 189 is executed, and this program corresponds, for example, to "EX_Proc9" in Figure 202 (B).

Finally, the final "RETEX" in the interface 2 output process (continuation) shown in Figure 186 returns to the calling program that was called by "CALLEX," and processing proceeds to step S2008 in Figure 179.

Note that, as a rule restriction, writing to the in-use RAM area 2203a can only be performed by programs stored in the in-use program area 2102a, and writing to the out-of-use RAM area 2203b can only be performed by programs stored in the out-of-use program area 2102c. Therefore, if a flowchart in this embodiment contains the phrase "store...", the storage area is identified depending on whether the flowchart is a program stored in the in-use program area 2102a or the out-of-use program area 2102c.

On the other hand, when reading the work area within the used area 2103a and the work area outside the used area 2103c, it is possible to read either a program stored in the program area within the used area 2102a or a program stored in the program area outside the used area 2102c.

[2. CRC check of main RAM]
In this embodiment, the main RAM check acquires the CRC calculation result (CRC value) for the main RAM when a power outage occurs, acquires the CRC calculation result (CRC value) for the main RAM when the power is turned on, and compares these two CRC values when the power is turned on. If the difference is 0, the system is deemed normal (a state in which game return is possible), and then performs game return processing. On the other hand, if the difference is not 0, the system is deemed to have a CRC abnormality (a state in which game return is not possible 1), and then (unless an operation related to a setting change was performed when the power was turned on) proceeds to game return impossible processing (see Figures 180 and 181).

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the main RAM check is performed using the CRC circuit 2107c included in the microprocessor 2100 to perform a CRC calculation. Here, the concept of the CRC check of the main RAM in this embodiment will be explained with reference to Figure 203. Figure 203 shows the processing when power is interrupted on the left side, and the processing when power is applied on the right side.

(Processing in the event of power outage)
When a power interruption occurs, the power interruption is detected by a power interruption detection signal (the power interruption detection signal is input to the parallel input port 3111 (XINT terminal)), and in that case, the interruption interrupt process shown in Fig. 199 is executed by the interrupt controller 2112 (see Figs. 175 and 178). Then, in the power interruption interrupt process, a CRC generation process (outside the used area) is called in step S2455 to obtain the CRC value of the main RAM 2103.

The flow of the CRC generation process (outside the area in use) is shown in Figure 200. In this process, the power outage flag is turned on (step S2471), and then the CRC calculation process (outside the area in use) is called (step S2472). The calculation result obtained in this CRC calculation process (outside the area in use) is stored in the outside the area in use work area 2103c as the CRC value 2301 at the time of the power outage (step S2473).

The flow of this CRC calculation process (outside the used area) is shown in Figure 182. In this process, as shown in Figure 203, the starting address of the area and the number of bytes to be calculated are set for each of the in-use area work area 2103a, in-use area stack area 2103b, and out-of-use area work area 2103c of the main RAM 2103, and the data to be calculated is output to the CRC circuit 2107c.

In the CRC calculation process (outside the used area), data relating to the three areas in the main RAM 2103 described above is output sequentially to the CRC circuit 2107c, which then combines this data to obtain one CRC calculation result. However, it is also possible to obtain a CRC calculation result for each area and obtain three CRC calculation results.

In addition, in this embodiment, the main RAM 2103 is checked using CRC calculations for three areas: the in-use area work area 2103a, the in-use area stack area 2103b, and the out-of-use area work area 2103c, as described above. The out-of-use area stack area 2103d is omitted because it is not directly related to the progress of the game and is therefore of little importance. However, the check range of the main RAM 2103 may include the out-of-use area stack area 2103d, or may be an area or range different from that of this embodiment.

In addition, the CRC calculation result (CRC value 2301) when a power outage occurs is stored in the CRC value storage area 2103e of the out-of-use working area 2103c of the main RAM 2103, as shown in FIG. 203. Therefore, the CRC calculation in the CRC calculation process (outside the used area) is specified to exclude the CRC value storage area 2103e for the out-of-use working area 2103c. Note that in this embodiment and other embodiments, the processing when a power outage occurs is executed by the power outage interrupt processing, but this is not limited to this. For example, a subprogram that monitors the power outage detection signal may be provided within the periodic interrupt processing (FIG. 195), and when the power outage detection signal is detected, the power outage interrupt processing of FIG. 199 may be executed. In this case, it is desirable to execute the power interruption interrupt processing in Figure 199 after confirming that the power interruption detection signal is in a state indicating a power interruption state (power interruption detection signal = ON state) for 2 to 4 interruption times (1 interruption time = 1.1172 ms), as this will prevent malfunctions due to momentary power outages or noise in the power interruption detection signal.

(Processing when power is turned on)
When power is turned on, the flow shown in FIG. 179 starts, and first the power-on processing shown in FIG. 180 is executed. Then, in the power-on processing, a CRC check processing (outside the used area) is called in step S2031 to obtain the CRC value of the main RAM 2103. Before the power-on processing is executed, the main CPU 2101 sets the security settings and interrupt initial setting data stored in the program management area 2102f. The processing for this setting is not stored in the in-use program area 2102a, and is therefore not shown in the flow. This is a function of the microprocessor 2100 itself, and is also a function provided in the microprocessor 2100 to conserve the capacity of the in-use program area 2102a.

The flow of the CRC inspection process (outside the used area) is shown in Figure 181. In this process, the CRC calculation process (outside the used area) is called (step S2052). The obtained CRC calculation result (CRC value 2302 at power-on) is then compared with the CRC value 2301 at the time of the power outage. If the difference is 0 and the power outage flag is on, the game return status is considered normal (game return possible), and the game return process or setting change process proceeds (step S2035 in Figure 180). As mentioned above, the CRC value 2301 at the time of the power outage is stored in the CRC value storage area 2103e of the outside the used area working area 2103c of the main RAM 2103, and the CRC value 2301 is obtained from there.

The flow of the CRC calculation process (outside the area of use) called by the CRC inspection process (outside the area of use) is shown in Figure 182, and is the same as the CRC calculation process (outside the area of use) called by the CRC generation process (outside the area of use) during a power outage. Note that when a power outage occurs, the CRC calculation in the CRC calculation process (outside the area of use) is specified to exclude the CRC value storage area 2103e from the outside the area of use work area 2103c, but the CRC calculation is also performed over the same range when the power is turned on (because it is necessary to compare the CRC values of both).

With the configuration of this embodiment as described above, the main RAM is checked by CRC calculation using the CRC circuit 2107c when the power is turned off and when the power is turned on. In this process, as described above with reference to FIG. 182, it is sufficient to write the program so that the starting address and number of bytes for specifying the CRC calculation target are passed to the CRC circuit 2107c. On the other hand, when calculating a sum value, the main program must be written to read the calculation target area of the main RAM into a register one byte (or two bytes) at a time, accumulate these values in another register, and repeat this process as many times as the size of the calculation target area. Furthermore, when calculating sum values for multiple calculation target areas in the main RAM, such as areas within the used area and areas outside the used area, a program must be written to perform the above-mentioned accumulation for each of those calculation target areas.

In contrast, in this embodiment, there is no need to write such individual processes in the program executed by the main CPU 2101. As a result, there is no need to develop logic related to calculating sum values or comparing sum values in the program, which makes it possible to reduce the size of the program accordingly and ultimately saves program space in the main ROM 2102.

Furthermore, the program space saved in this way can be used to realize the gameplay related to the gaming machine, leading to providing players with a more fulfilling and sophisticated gameplay.

In addition, because the main RAM is checked by the CRC circuit 2107c, which is an independent circuit separate from the main CPU 2101, the load on the main CPU 2101 is reduced compared to check methods that calculate sum values. Furthermore, because there is no need to develop logic related to calculating and comparing sum values in programs executed by the main CPU 2101, the programs can be simplified and the processing time can be reduced. As a result, program development efficiency can be improved, the maintainability of the programs can be improved, and CRC checks can be performed in a short time.

[3. 4-bit data acquisition process]
Next, the 4-bit data acquisition process in this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS.

When storing data in a table stored in the data area 2102b in the used area of the main ROM 2102, the program is typically configured to store each piece of data in 1-byte or 2-byte units. However, if the data to be stored has 16 possible values, for example, from 0 to 15, and only a maximum of 4 bits are required, it is possible to store two pieces of data with a maximum of 4 bits per 1-byte area, thereby reducing the amount of storage space that is essentially unused and, as a result, saving capacity on the main ROM 2102.

Furthermore, if different types of data groups each contain a maximum of 4 bits of data like this, storing them all in a single table and using a common program to retrieve the target 4-bit data eliminates the need to create a program for each type of data, which also saves space in the main ROM 2102. Even if different types of data groups are stored in a single table, as long as it is known which data of which type is located in which entry (relative address position), it is possible to specify that the desired data be retrieved using a common program.

Figure 204 shows a common subprogram (4-bit data acquisition process) that extracts data individually from a table that stores two pieces of data, each with a maximum of 4 bits, in a 1-byte area, according to a specified entry.

Figure 204 is a flowchart showing the processing steps of the common subprogram (4-bit data acquisition process) described above.

In the 4-bit data acquisition process, first, in step S2511, the quotient obtained by dividing the selection value by 2 is used as the offset value, and the remainder is used as the odd/even judgment data. Here, the selection value is a value that indicates the position of the data stored in the table in that table, and has the same meaning as an "entry." Next, in step S2512, the target data in the table is acquired. Here, the data is data stored in the table in 1-byte units, and the target data includes two 4-bit data pieces, one of which is the 4-bit data to be acquired. The target data is 1 byte of data located at the starting address of the table + offset value.

Next, in step S2513, the odd/even determination data is used to determine whether the selected value is even or odd. If the odd/even determination data is 0 (Yes in step S2513), the selected value is an even number, and in step S2514, the upper 4 bits and lower 4 bits of the acquired target data are swapped using a swap command, and the process proceeds to step S2515. If the odd/even determination data is 1 (No in step S2513), the selected value is an odd number, and in this case, the swapping is not performed and the process proceeds to step S2515.

In step S2515, 4-bit data is obtained. If the selected value is an even number, the upper 4 bits and lower 4 bits of the obtained target data are swapped. The desired 4-bit data is obtained by ANDing this data with "0F"H (i.e., the bit string "00001111"), and the program then returns to the calling program. The obtained 4-bit data is ultimately stored in a specified area in the in-use work area 2103a or the out-of-use work area 2103c of the main RAM 2103. Note that the notation ("4-bit data") to the right of the "RET" notation in the end symbol (rounded rectangle) indicates that the 4-bit data obtained by the logical AND is stored (return value) in the A register, and the calling program can reference/obtain it using the 4-bit data from the A register.

Next, the 4-bit data acquisition process described in the flowchart of Figure 204 will be explained using a specific example shown in Figure 205.

As shown in Figure 205, the target table starts at address "1F00"H and has 1 byte of data (Data 1, Data 2, Data 3, ...). In this example, the upper 4 bits of Data 1 have a selection value (entry) of 0 and a value of 2, and the lower 4 bits have entry = 1 and a value of 3. The upper 4 bits of Data 2 have entry = 2 and a value of 12, and the lower 4 bits have entry = 3 and a value of 8. The upper 4 bits of Data 3 have entry = 4 and a value of 15, and the lower 4 bits have entry = 5 and a value of 0.

Furthermore, the starting address of Data 1 is "1F00"H, the same as the beginning of the table, the starting address of Data 2 is "1F01"H, and the starting address of Data 3 is "1F02"H.

Here, as shown in (1), the selection value (entry) of the 4-bit data to be obtained is set to "2." Then, as shown in (2), the quotient (offset value) = 1 and the remainder (even/odd determination data) = 0.

Next, in (3), the start of the target data is the table's start address "1F00" + offset value "1", i.e. "1F01"H, which corresponds to data 2 in the target table. The upper 4 bits of data 2 are entry = 2, with a value of 12, and the lower 4 bits are entry = 3, with a value of 8.

Next, in (4), the odd/even determination data is 0, i.e., an even number, so the upper 4 bits and lower 4 bits of data 2 are swapped. That is, the upper 4 bits are set to value 8 for entry = 3, and the lower bits are set to value 12 for entry = 2. Then, when the logical product of the swapped data and "0F"H (i.e., the bit string "00001111") is taken, the bit string "00001100" is obtained, and the bit string "1100" (value "8") is obtained from the rightmost 4 bits corresponding to entry = 2, which becomes the acquired 4-bit data.

When a large amount of data with values between 0 and 15 exists across multiple entries using this 4-bit data acquisition process, this data can be stored effectively by creating a table with the above data structure in main ROM 2102.

For example, the data for each entry shown in Figure 205 can be defined as a table (d4BITTBL) such as that shown in Figure 206(A). As mentioned above, the data for each entry takes a value between 0 and 15. Note that "DB" is a pseudo-instruction that defines the contents of one byte of data. Here, data 1 in Figure 205 is generated and defined by a calculation such as "DB 2 * 10H + 3" as shown in Figure 206(A). "* 10H" is a multiplication that shifts the value 2 of entry = 0 to the upper 4 bits. Data 2 in Figure 205 is generated and defined as "DB 12 * 10H + 8" in Figure 206(A), and data 3 in Figure 205 is generated and defined as "DB 15 * 10H + 0" in Figure 206(A). The calculations to obtain each byte of data are performed in advance, and the table data, which is a collection of the obtained byte of data, is stored, for example, in the data area 2102b in the used area of the main ROM 2102.

Note that the "pseudo instruction" mentioned above does not refer to an instruction to the CPU to execute a process (such as the "CALLEX" instruction mentioned above), but rather to an instruction for a conversion application (commonly known as an "assembler" or "compiler") used when converting a program source file into data to be written to ROM (stored during the gaming machine manufacturing process).

Furthermore, for example, if the above-described 4-bit data acquisition mechanism is applied to the symbol arrangement table of Figure 82(a) used in the 13th embodiment, the table can be defined as shown in Figure 206(B). The "dREEL_ZU1" table is data related to the left reel in the symbol arrangement table, the "dREEL_ZU2" table is data related to the middle reel in the symbol arrangement table, and the "dREEL_ZU3" table is data related to the right reel in the symbol arrangement table.

In addition, each 1-bit data defined by a "DB" has a comment on the right edge indicating which symbol position the symbol code corresponds to. Of course, a program that uses this data will know in advance which entry's data stores which symbol position's symbol code. In each "DB" definition, the data that is shifted to the upper 4 bits by multiplying by "10"H is the symbol code for odd-numbered symbol positions, and the lower 4 bits represent the symbol code for even-numbered symbol positions.

In each table definition, the symbol codes are represented by variables, with the value (bit string) of each variable shown below the table definition. This corresponds to the symbol arrangement code table (main reel) in Figure 82 (b) used in the 13th embodiment. There are 10 patterns in total, with the maximum value being 10 (bit string "1010"), and all can be expressed as 4-bit data. For example, the symbol code for the "V" symbol is 1 (bit string "0001"), and the symbol code for the "Bell B" symbol is 7 (bit string "0111").

In the example shown in Figure 206 (B), three tables "dREEL_ZU1", "dREEL_ZU2", and "dREEL_ZU3" are shown, but these can be defined as a single table (at consecutive storage locations within the data area in use 2102b), and each 4-bit data can be extracted (by specifying the table address and selection value) using the above-mentioned 4-bit data acquisition process executed by a common program. Furthermore, these data can also be further combined with other types of 4-bit data and defined as a single table (the same applies to the tables described in Figures 207, 208, and 211).

Furthermore, for example, if the above-mentioned 4-bit data acquisition mechanism is applied to the symbol combination arrangement tables of Figures 83 and 84 used in the 13th embodiment, the table can be defined as shown in Figure 207. The "dPayCnv" table represents data on the number of coins to be paid out (number of coins to be paid out when 3 coins are bet) for each 13-byte storage area type data (for each symbol combination) in the symbol combination table.

In addition, each 1-bit data defined by a "DB" has a comment on the right edge, indicating which storage area identification data the respective payout number corresponds to. Of course, a program using this data will know in advance which entry's data stores the payout number corresponding to which storage area identification data. In each "DB" definition, the data shifted to the upper 4 bits by multiplying by "10"H is the payout number data corresponding to the symbol combination represented by the odd-numbered bits of the storage area identification data, and the lower 4 bits are the payout number data corresponding to the symbol combination represented by the even-numbered bits of the storage area identification data. For example, in the 1-bit data defined by the first "DB," the upper bits contain the payout number corresponding to the symbol combination represented by bit "B1" in the first byte of the storage area type data, and the lower bits contain the payout number corresponding to the symbol combination represented by bit "B0" in the first byte of the storage area type data.

Furthermore, for example, in the 13th embodiment, when displaying numerical values on the instruction monitor in the pseudo BIG and pseudo REG, it is conceivable that the correspondence between the internal winning combination and the numerical values as shown in FIG. 96(a) can be defined as a new table (referred to as the instruction monitor determination table) by applying the 4-bit data acquisition mechanism of this embodiment. Here, the instruction monitor determination table can be defined as shown in FIG. 208. The "dNaviTbl" table shows the correspondence between the internal winning combination and the numerical values displayed on the instruction monitor as shown in FIG. 96(a).

Each 1-bit data defined by a "DB" has a comment on the right edge indicating which internal winning combination the value corresponds to. Of course, a program using this data will know in advance which entry's data stores the value corresponding to which internal winning combination. In each "DB" definition, the data shifted to the upper 4 bits by multiplying by "10"H is the value displayed in the pseudo-REG when the corresponding internal winning combination occurs, and the lower 4 bits are the value displayed in the pseudo-BIG when the corresponding internal winning combination occurs. Note that in this embodiment, the upper 4 bits are defined as odd numbers in the even/odd determination data, and the lower 4 bits are defined as even numbers in the even/odd determination data. However, the upper 4 bits may also be defined as even numbers in the even/odd determination data, and the lower 4 bits as odd numbers in the even/odd determination data. In this case, the determination in step S2513 of the 4-bit data acquisition process will be reversed, and the arrangement of each piece of data described above must be taken into consideration.

So far, we have explained the 4-bit data acquisition process. This 4-bit data acquisition process allows for a configuration in which smaller data sizes are possible because there are fewer possible patterns, for example, two pieces of data can be stored in a 1-byte area. This configuration is effective when applied to the in-use data area 2102b, which is running low on space, but it can also be applied to data stored in the out-of-use data area 2102d, with the aim of improving development efficiency and maintainability through program standardization, and saving space that may be required in the future.

[4. 2-bit data acquisition process]
Next, the 2-bit data acquisition process in this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS.

When storing data in a table stored in the data area 2102b in the used area of the main ROM 2102, the program is typically configured to store each piece of data in 1-byte or 2-byte units. However, if the data to be stored has four possible ranges, for example, from 0 to 3, and only a maximum of 2 bits are required, it is possible to store four pieces of data with a maximum of 2 bits in a 1-byte area, thereby reducing the amount of storage space that is essentially unused and, as a result, saving capacity on the main ROM 2102.

Furthermore, if different types of data groups each contain a maximum of two bits of data like this, storing them all in a single table and using a common program to retrieve the target two-bit data eliminates the need to create a program for each type of data, which also saves space in the main ROM 2102. Even if different types of data groups are stored in a single table, as long as it is known which data of which type is located in which entry (relative address position), it is possible to specify that the desired data be retrieved using a common program.

Figure 209 shows a common subprogram (2-bit data acquisition process) that extracts individual pieces of data, each up to four bits long, from a table that stores four pieces of data, each up to two bits long, in a 1-byte area, according to a specified entry.

Figure 209 is a flowchart showing the processing steps of the common subprogram (2-bit data acquisition process) described above.

In the 2-bit data acquisition process, first, in step S2531, the quotient obtained by dividing the selection value by 4 is used as the offset value, and the remainder is used as the shift counter. Here, the selection value is a value that indicates the position of the data stored in the table in that table, and has the same meaning as an "entry." Next, in step S2532, the target data is acquired. Here, the data is data stored in the table in 1-byte units, and the target data includes four 2-bit data pieces, one of which is the 2-bit data to be acquired. The target data is 1 byte of data located at the starting address of the table + offset value.

Next, in step S2533, the shift counter is incremented by 1. However, if the increment result is 4, it is reset to 0. Next, in step S2534, it is determined whether the shift counter is 0, and if it is determined to be 0 (Yes in step S2534), the process proceeds to step S2537.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the shift counter is not 0 (No in step S2534), the target data is shifted two bits to the left in step S2535. This left shift operation returns the two bits that were on the left side before the operation to the two right-most bits in the target data.

Next, in step S2536, the shift counter is decremented by 1, and then the process returns to step S2534, where 2-bit left shifts are repeated until the shift counter reaches 0. This flow allows the process to proceed to step S2537 without performing a single left shift operation for 2-bit data located at the right end of the data, such as selection values (entries) of 3, 7, and 11.

In step S2537, 2-bit data is obtained. The obtained target data is shifted left as appropriate using the above process. The desired 2-bit data is obtained by taking the logical AND of this data with "03"H (i.e., "00000011" in bit string terms), and then the program returns to the calling program. Note that the notation "(2-bit data)" to the right of the "RET" in the end symbol (rounded rectangle) means that the obtained 2-bit data is stored (returned value) in register A, and the calling program can reference/obtain it using the 2-bit data from register A.

Next, the 2-bit data acquisition process described in the flowchart of Figure 209 will be explained using a specific example shown in Figure 210.

As shown in Figure 210, the target table starts at address "1F00"H and has one byte of data (Data 1, Data 2, Data 3, ...). In this example, the first two bits of Data 1 have a selection value (entry) of 0 and a value of 1, the second two bits have entry = 1 and a value of 1, the third two bits have entry = 2 and a value of 0, and the fourth two bits have entry = 3 and a value of 3.

Furthermore, the first two bits of data 2 have a selection value (entry) of 4 and a value of 2, the second two bits have an entry of 5 and a value of 1, the third two bits have an entry of 6 and a value of 2, and the fourth two bits have an entry of 7 and a value of 3. The first two bits of data 3 have a selection value (entry) of 8 and a value of 1, the second two bits have an entry of 9 and a value of 1, the third two bits have an entry of 10 and a value of 3, and the fourth two bits have an entry of 11 and a value of 0.

Furthermore, the starting address of Data 1 is "1F00"H, the same as the beginning of the table, the starting address of Data 2 is "1F01"H, and the starting address of Data 3 is "1F02"H.

Here, as shown in (1), let's say the selected value (entry) of the 2-bit data to be obtained is "5." Then, as shown in (2), the quotient (offset value) = 1 and the remainder (shift counter) = 1.

Next, in (3), the start of the target data is the table's start address "1F00" + offset value "1", i.e., "1F01"H, which corresponds to data 2 in the target table. Data 2 contains four 2-bit data entries, 4 to 7.

Next, in (4), the shift counter = 1 + 1 = 2, and data 2 is shifted leftward twice by two bits. This left shift operation shifts the value 1 of entry = 5, which was originally in the second two-bit position in data 2, to the fourth two-bit position at the right end of data 2. Therefore, taking the logical AND of the shifted data with "03"H (i.e., the bit string "00000011") results in the bit string "00000001", and the bit string "01" (value "1") is obtained in the rightmost two bits corresponding to entry = 5, which becomes the obtained 2-bit data.

When a large amount of data with values between 0 and 3 exists across multiple entries due to this 2-bit data acquisition process, this data can be effectively stored by creating a table with the above data structure in main ROM 2102.

For example, if the above-described 2-bit data acquisition mechanism is applied to the symbol combination arrangement tables of Figures 83 and 84 used in the 13th embodiment, the table can be defined as shown in Figure 211. The "dAttCnv" table represents attribute data for each 13-byte storage area type data (each symbol combination) in the symbol combination table.

In addition, each byte of data defined in the "DB" has a comment on the right side indicating which storage area identification data each attribute corresponds to. Of course, a program that uses this data will know in advance which entry's data stores the attribute corresponding to which storage area identification data.

In addition, in each "DB," the data shifted to the first two bits (see Figure 210 for the first two bits to the fourth two bits) by multiplying by "40"H is attribute data corresponding to the combination of symbols represented by bits "B7" and "B3" of the storage area identification data, the data shifted to the second two bits by multiplying by "10"H is attribute data corresponding to the combination of symbols represented by bits "B6" and "B2" of the storage area identification data, the data shifted to the third two bits by multiplying by "4"H is attribute data corresponding to the combination of symbols represented by bits "B5" and "B1" of the storage area identification data, and the lower two bits (fourth two bits) are attribute data corresponding to the combination of symbols represented by bits "B4" and "B0" of the storage area identification data. Each byte of data is calculated by adding four pieces of data, for example, data multiplied by "40"H, "10"H, and "4"H, and the raw data, as described above. However, this calculation is performed in advance, and the table data, which is a collection of the byte data calculated in this way, is stored in the data area 2102b in the used area of the main ROM 2102, etc.

Note that Figure 211 is an example where 1 byte is written in 8-bit units, and when multiplied by "40"H, "10"H, and "4"H, for example, if the second byte of the "dAttCnv" table in Figure 211 is "DB 00000011B", it becomes "DB 0*40H+0*10H+0*4H+3", and if the third byte is "DB 01010101B", it becomes "DB 1*40H+1*10H+1*4H+1".

For example, in the 1-bit data defined by the first "DB," the first 2 bits represent the attribute corresponding to the combination of symbols represented by bit "B7" in the 0th byte of the storage area type data, the second 2 bits represent the attribute corresponding to the combination of symbols represented by bit "B6" in the 0th byte of the storage area type data, the third 2 bits represent the attribute corresponding to the combination of symbols represented by bit "B5" in the 0th byte of the storage area type data, and the fourth 2 bits represent the attribute corresponding to the combination of symbols represented by bit "B4" in the 0th byte of the storage area type data.

Here, four attribute patterns are set: "NON", "REP", "FRU", and "BB", which are represented as bit strings "00", "01", "10", and "11", respectively.

In this embodiment, we have described a method for obtaining 2-bit data by shifting 2 bits to the left, but 2-bit data can also be obtained in the same way by shifting 2 bits to the right. In that case, when "shifting data 2 bits to the right" is selected in step S2535 of the 2-bit data acquisition process, the arrangement of each piece of data described above must be taken into consideration.

So far, we have explained the 2-bit data acquisition process. This 2-bit data acquisition process allows for a configuration in which smaller data sizes are possible because there are fewer possible patterns, for example, four pieces of data can be stored in a 1-byte area. This configuration is effective when applied to the in-use data area 2102b, which is running low on space, but it can also be applied to data stored in the out-of-use data area 2102d, with the aim of improving development efficiency and maintainability through program standardization, and saving space that may be required in the future.

[5. Common processing using the lower address of the counter as an input parameter]
Figure 212 conceptually shows the processing flow in which medal payout processing is commonly used in the three processes shown in Figures 191 and 192 (medal payout/re-play operation processing, settlement execution processing, and medal payout processing).

In Figure 212, the start and end symbols (step S2292, RET) of the medal payout/replay operation processing (step S2281) are shown with detailed processing omitted, and the start and end symbols (step S2305, RET) of the settlement execution processing (step S2293) are also shown with detailed processing omitted. Furthermore, the settlement execution processing includes the start symbol of the medal payout processing (step S2298), and when this medal payout processing is called, the process also proceeds to the above-mentioned end symbol (step 2305, RET).

As described above, the medal payout/replay operation processing is called from the main processing shown in FIG. 179 (step S2014). More specifically, it is called when medals are paid out at the end of a unit game. On the other hand, the settlement execution processing is called from a specified program (for example, the settlement button press detection processing (a program that detects the pressing of the settlement button) in the medal acceptance/start check processing (step S2003) in the main processing of FIG. 179) when the player presses the settlement button (a state waiting for the start of a unit game in which medals can be accepted).

The medal payout process is called in three flows. In the first flow, it is called from the medal payout/replay operation process to pay out any medals that have overflowed from the credits when the credit counter reaches its upper limit. In the second flow, it is called from the settlement execution process when medals related to the credit counter are to be paid out in response to a settlement instruction. In the third flow, it is called from the settlement execution process when medals related to the medal insertion counter are to be paid out. As described above, in the settlement execution process, the medal payout process is called twice under certain conditions.

Now, with reference to Figure 212, the first to third flows described above will be explained in detail. The first flow is indicated by a thick solid arrow. First, the main processing calls the medal payout/replay operation processing (step S2281), which executes processing related to the medal payout and replay operation, sets the address of the payout number counter storage area in a specified register, and calls the medal payout processing (step S2298), which executes processing related to the medal payout, and then ends (step 2305, RET) to return to the main processing that called it.

Here, the medal payout process is called by, for example, a jump command (JP). With a jump command, the program counter is not saved in the stack area, and the program counter is updated sequentially while the command is executed. Therefore, even when the medal payout process ends, it does not return to the caller (the command following the jump command). Instead, when the medal payout process ends (step S2305, RET), it returns to the command that called the medal payout/replay operation process of the main process, and the next command is executed.

On the other hand, the call instruction (CALL) saves the program counter of the called instruction in the stack area, and when the called process is completed, the program returns to the caller and the next instruction in the program counter saved in the stack area is executed.

The second flow is indicated by the dotted arrow. First, the settlement button press detection process of the medal acceptance/start check process in the main process calls the settlement execution process (step S2293) in response to pressing the settlement button, and executes the process related to settlement. This then sets the address of the credit counter storage process in a specified register, and calls the medal payout process (step S2298) with a call command (CALL), which executes the process related to the medal payout, and then returns to the caller by ending (step 2305, RET).

The third flow is indicated by the dashed arrow. In the second flow, after returning to the caller, the process proceeds to the next command, where the address of the medal insertion counter storage area is set in a specified register and the medal payout process (step S2298) is executed again, where the process related to the medal payout is executed, and upon completion (step 2305, RET), the process returns to the settlement button press detection process that called the settlement execution process.

As shown in Figure 212, immediately before the medal payout process is called, the storage areas for the three types of medal counters are set in specified registers. This processing allows the medal payout process to be used in common as a process for paying out the number of medals for each medal counter. As a result, there is no need to write medal payout processing for each medal counter, saving space in the program area 2102a in the use area of the main ROM 2102.

Figure 213 shows how the storage area of each medal counter is set when the medal payout process described in Figure 212 is called, and how the storage area of each medal counter is referenced as a result.

The medal payout process, which is a common process, receives the lower address of each medal counter's storage area (in this embodiment, the lowest byte of a 2-byte address) from the calling program into the DE register or HL register, sets a specified upper address in that register to identify the address of each medal counter's storage area, references each medal counter from the working area 2103a in the used area of the main RAM 2103, obtains the number of medals for each, and pays out the obtained number of medals (processing such as the medal payout number check process (step S2302)).

For example, when the caller wishes to perform a payout process for the payout number counter, the lower address "20"H of the payout number counter's storage area is set as an input parameter in the DE register, and the medal payout process is called. The medal payout process then determines that the payout process is related to the payout number counter, and for example, sets "F0"H in the upper byte of the DE register to "F020"H, and uses this as an address to reference the payout number counter in the working area 2103a within the used area (for example, referenced using the code "(LD A, DE)"). In this example, the 1-byte payout number counter stored at the address location "F020"H stores the number of medals "15".

Note that "F0"H is set in the upper bits of the DE register here; this is a setting that is predetermined between the calling program and the called medal payout processing program. This setting eliminates the need to send the value of "F0"H as an input parameter to the medal payout processing program, thereby reducing the size of load commands in the calling program and ultimately saving space in the program area 2102a within the used area of the main ROM 2102. Note that while a fixed value such as "F0"H is set here, the upper address may be changed depending on the value of the lower address received as an input parameter. For example, if the lower address is smaller than "80"H, "F1"H is used as the upper address, and if the lower address is "80"H or greater, "F0"H is used as the upper address.

The same is true for the credit counter. First, the lower address "40"H of the credit counter's storage area is set as an input parameter in the DE register, and the medal payout process is called. The medal payout process then determines that this is a payout process related to the credit counter, so for example, "F0"H is set in the upper bits of the DE register to make it "F040"H, and this is used as an address to reference the credit counter in the working area within the used area 2103a (for example, the value is referenced using the code "(LD A, DE)"). In this example, the 1-byte credit counter stored at address "F040"H stores the number of medals, "42".

The same applies to the medal insertion counter. First, the lower address "60"H of the medal insertion counter's storage area is set as an input parameter in the DE register, and the medal payout process is called. The medal payout process then determines that this is a payout process related to the medal insertion counter, so for example, "F0"H is set in the upper bits of the DE register to make it "F060"H, and this is used as an address to reference the medal insertion counter in the working area 2103a within the used area (for example, referenced using the code "(LD A, DE)"). In this example, the 1-byte medal insertion counter stored at address "F060"H stores the number of medals "2".

As described above, the medal payout process receives the number of medals to be paid out as an input parameter and performs the payout process based on the number of medals to be paid out. In this embodiment, when this process is called, one of the payout number counter, credit counter, or medal insertion counter is received as an input parameter, and the number of the received counter is used as the number of medals to be paid out. Furthermore, the input parameter uses the lower address (e.g., the lower byte (8 bits) of a 2-byte address) of the address (in the working area 2103a within the used area) where each medal counter is stored. This allows the size of load commands to be smaller than if both the upper and lower addresses were specified, which saves space in the program area 2102a within the used area of the main ROM 2102. Furthermore, by passing parameters in this way, the medal payout process can be used as a common process, eliminating the need to write a process to pay out medals for each medal counter. This also saves space in the program area 2102a within the used area.

[6. Method for determining clear start address of RAM area outside used area]
As can be seen by referring to Figure 181, when the power to the gaming machine is turned on, a CRC inspection process (outside the use area) is performed, and if a CRC abnormality is detected, "game return impossible state 1 (CRC abnormality)" is set in the game return status storage area, and if the power outage occurrence flag is not on (i.e., if the power outage interrupt process is not performed normally), "game return impossible state 2 (power outage abnormality)" is set in the game return status storage area, and in all other cases, "game return possible state (normal)" is set in the game return status storage area.

Referring to FIG. 180, only when an operation to change settings is performed (Yes in step S2035), is the main RAM 2103 initialized (designated RAM initialization process (step S2036)). Furthermore, if the game return status storage area described above is in "game return impossible state 1 (CRC abnormality)" or "game return impossible state 2 (power interruption abnormality)" before this initialization is performed, or if the game return impossible error flag is set to data indicating "return impossible," the "address to clear when RAM abnormality occurs" for the in-use RAM area 2203a is set to the RAM initialization address. If the game return status storage area is in "game return possible state (normal)" and the game return impossible error flag is set to data indicating "return possible," the RAM initialization address is set to the "address to clear when setting is changed" for the in-use RAM area 2203a. When proceeding to designated RAM initialization (step S2146) shown in FIG. 185, the RAM initialization address is saved in the start address storage area, and based on this address, first, out-of-use RAM initialization processing (outside of the used area) (step S2150) is performed.

Figure 186 shows the flow of the out-of-use RAM initialization process (outside the used area), in which the RAM initialization address is set to either the "address to clear when a RAM abnormality occurs" for the in-use RAM area 2203a or the "address to clear when settings are changed" for the in-use RAM area 2203a. Here, the out-of-use RAM initialization process (outside the used area) uses the out-of-use RAM clear address when a RAM abnormality occurs as the initialization start address if the lowest byte (e.g., the lowest byte of the two bytes) of the RAM initialization address saved in the start address storage area is the lower address of the "address to clear when a RAM abnormality occurs" for the in-use RAM area 2203a (step S2183). In other words, the address to be cleared for the in-use RAM area 2203a is determined from the lower address, and the initialization start address is set to the clear address for the out-of-use RAM area 2203b.

Similarly, if the lowest byte stored in the memory determination area is the lower address of the "clear address when setting is changed" related to the in-use RAM area 2203a, the RAM outside the use area is initialized with the clear address when setting is changed as the initialization start address; if the lowest byte stored in the memory determination area is the lower address of the "clear address when BB (special prize) ends" related to the in-use RAM area 2203a, the RAM outside the use area is initialized with the clear address when setting is changed as the initialization start address; in all other cases, the RAM outside the use area is initialized with the clear address when one game ends as the initialization start address.

This determination can be made, for example, by referencing correspondence data that associates the lowest byte (i.e., the lower address stored in the memory determination area) of the initialization address (RAM initialization address) for the in-use RAM area 2203a with the initialization start address for the out-of-use RAM area 220b. In this case, if the highest byte of the initialization start address for the out-of-use RAM area 2203b is a fixed value such as "F2," it is sufficient to store only the lowest byte of this address. In the example shown in FIG. 186, the use area clear address at the end of one game is set only if it does not match any previous address, so there is no need to maintain a correspondence relationship for the use area clear address at the end of one game as the above-mentioned correspondence data. The correspondence data is stored, for example, in the in-use data area 2102b.

After that, returning to FIG. 185, RAM initialization within the used area (step S2151) is performed. In this case, the "address to clear when a RAM abnormality occurs" for RAM area 2203a within the used area, which is set as the initialization start address (RAM initialization address), or the "address to clear when settings are changed" for RAM area 2203a within the used area is used.

Then, returning to FIG. 180, when the setting change process (step S2037) is performed, the RAM initialization address is set to the "clear address when setting is changed" relating to the RAM area 2203a in the used area (step S2038).Then, when the transmission standby & RAM initialization process (step S2039) is called, processing starts from the transmission standby & RAM initialization process (step S2141) in FIG. 185, and after first obtaining unsent data (steps S2142 to S2145), processing starts again from the specified RAM initialization process (step S2146). This time, the RAM initialization address is set only to the "clear address when settings are changed" for the in-use RAM area 2203a, so in the out-of-use RAM initialization process (outside of the used area) (step S2150), for the out-of-use area, the out-of-use RAM is initialized using the clear address when settings are changed as the initialization start address, and for the in-use area (step S2151), the "clear address when settings are changed" for the in-use RAM area 2203a is used.

In addition, the BB (special prize) number of plays check process (step S2131) is called from the main process shown in Figure 179, and if it is determined that BB (special prize) operation has ended, the BB (special prize) end clear address is set to the RAM initialization address, and then, as above, the lower address of that address is stored in the memory determination area, and based on this lower byte, the BB (special prize) end outside use area clear address is set, and RAM outside the use area is initialized, and then RAM initialization within the use area is executed using the BB (special prize) end clear address of the RAM initialization address.

In addition, in the main side presentation control process at the end of a game (step S2016) shown in Figure 179, the clear address at the end of one game is set to the RAM initialization address, and then, as described above, the lower address of that address is stored in the memory judgment area, and based on this lower byte, the clear address outside the used area at the end of one game is set, and RAM outside the used area is initialized, and then RAM within the used area is initialized using the clear address at the end of one game of the RAM initialization address.

Figure 214 shows an overview of each of the clear addresses mentioned above. For the working area 2103a within the used area of the main RAM 2103, as mentioned above, the address locations of the "clear address when a RAM abnormality occurs," "clear address when settings are changed," "clear address at the end of BB (special prize)," and "clear address at the end of one game," which are set as RAM initialization addresses, are indicated by solid arrows. Furthermore, for the RAM area 2203a within the used area, a clear end address is set fixedly, and the range of initialization is from each of the above clear addresses, including the stack area 2103b within the used area, to this clear end address.

The clear end address is set, for example, so that the first address (the largest address value, 2 bytes) of the in-use stack area 2103b is not initialized. This is because the program counter of the calling program is stored here, and after RAM initialization, it is necessary to return from the running program to the calling program.

With regard to the out-of-use working area 2103c of the main RAM 2103, as described above, the address locations of the "out-of-use area clear address when a RAM abnormality occurs," "out-of-use area clear address when a setting is changed," "out-of-use area clear address when BB (special prize) ends," and "out-of-use area clear address when one game ends" converted based on the lower addresses of the RAM initialization address are indicated by dotted arrows. Note that the names of each clear address are substituted for the clear addresses within the used area and are not displayed. Furthermore, with regard to the out-of-use RAM area 2203b, a fixed clear end address is also set, and the range of initialization is from each of the above clear addresses to this clear end address. Note that while the out-of-use stack area 2103d is not subject to initialization here, this area may also be included in the area to be cleared. This area does not store data related to the game, and is therefore not subject to clearing in this embodiment.

As shown in Figure 214, the clear addresses for the in-use working area 2103a of the main RAM 2103 are set to different address locations. On the other hand, as shown in Figure 214, the clear addresses for the out-of-use working area 2103c of the main RAM 2103 are set to the same address location in some places, but may all be set to different address locations. Note that in this embodiment, the clear address for the out-of-use working area 2103c is determined according to the lower address of the clear address for the in-use working area 2103a, so it is necessary to set the clear addresses for the in-use working area 2103a so that they do not contain the same address or have the same value for the lower addresses.

In addition, non-clear areas that are not initialized under any circumstances are set at the beginning of the in-use working area 2103a and the beginning of the out-of-use working area 2103c of the main RAM 2103. These areas store data that should be retained even when the RAM is initialized.

With this configuration of the present embodiment, the clear address (clear start address) for RAM initialization related to the in-use RAM area 2203a is used as the selection condition for the clear address (clear start address) for RAM initialization related to the out-of-use RAM area 2203b. This eliminates the need to create individual processing condition programs that select the clear address for RAM initialization related to the out-of-use RAM area 2203b depending on the state of the gaming machine, which ultimately leads to savings in capacity of the main ROM 2102.

In addition, the process of clearing the out-of-use RAM area 2203b can be performed completely independently, making it easier to create and maintain programs for other standards.

[7. Standardization of reel stop control processing in actual games and simulated games]
In this embodiment, similar to the first embodiment, a pseudo game is performed. As described in relation to the first embodiment, the pseudo game is a presentation in which a pseudo game is performed during the execution of a presentation when predetermined execution conditions are met. In addition, in the pseudo game, a stop operation using a stop button (for example, a stop button corresponding to stop buttons 8L, 8C, and 8R in the first embodiment) is also accepted in the same way as in a normal game, and in particular, the process of monitoring the operation of the stop button is the same as in a normal game.

In this embodiment, therefore, the stop button input monitoring process for normal play and the stop button input monitoring process for simulated play are made common (i.e., they are processed by the same subroutine). This makes it possible to reduce the overall program size, and as a result, it is possible to save program space in the main ROM. Furthermore, by making the above common processes subroutines, the program structure is simplified, which in turn makes it possible to improve program development efficiency and maintainability.

The stop button input monitoring process in this embodiment determines whether a valid press of the stop button has occurred, and if a valid press has occurred, provides the calling program with data indicating that a valid press has occurred and also updates the stop button status information, etc.

In normal gameplay, this stop button input monitoring process roughly corresponds to the determination process of step S113 of the reel stop control process (FIG. 29) called by the main process (FIG. 23) of the first embodiment, where it is determined whether a valid stop button has been pressed. The stop button input monitoring process of this embodiment will be explained in detail later using a flowchart, but because this is an example of application to this embodiment, it may not be possible to directly incorporate it as the determination process of the reel stop control process of the first embodiment described above. The stop button input monitoring process of this embodiment, which will be described later, is provided as an example to explain the technical concept of the present application.

In addition, the stop button input monitoring process of this embodiment described above generally corresponds, in the pseudo-game mode, to the processes of steps S1063 and S1064 of the normal pseudo-game processing (Figure 47) called by the pseudo-game processing (Figure 46) of the second embodiment, and the judgment process of step S1106 of the post-reel pseudo-game processing (Figure 49) called by the pseudo-game processing (Figure 46) of the second embodiment, and also generally corresponds to the judgment process of step S1251 of the normal pseudo-game processing (Figure 57) of the third embodiment, and the judgment process of step S1262 of the stop button operation acceptance processing (Figure 58), where it is determined whether a valid stop button has been pressed. The stop button input monitoring process of this embodiment will be explained in detail later using a flowchart, but because this is an example of application to this embodiment, it is not necessarily possible to incorporate it directly into the normal pseudo-game processing of the second embodiment, the post-reel effect pseudo-game processing, or the normal pseudo-game processing of the third embodiment. The stop button input monitoring process of this embodiment, which will be described later, is provided as an example to explain the technical concept of this application.

Figure 215 shows a flowchart of the stop button input monitoring process of this embodiment. This process begins in step S2551, where the address of the stop button input status storage area is set in a specified register. This sets the address of input port storage area 1 (an area in main RAM 2103) that stores the status of the stop button input port, entered in the input port processing (step S2362) of the periodic interrupt processing in Figure 195, in a specified register (for example, the HL register).

Next, in step S2552, input port on-edge data is acquired. Here, the address of input port storage area 0 (an area within main RAM 2103) that stores the input port edge state of the stop button, which was input in the input port processing (step S2362) of the periodic interrupt processing in Figure 195, is set (for example, in the DE register).

Next, in step S2553, a logical OR operation is performed on the data obtained in step S2551 and the data obtained in step S2552, and valid stop button input data is obtained from the result of this operation. A valid stop button input requires that there is a press that is not chattering and that the reel corresponding to the press is currently spinning. If multiple stop buttons are pressed simultaneously, the stop button on the left takes priority (for example, in the first embodiment, priority is given to stop buttons 8L, 8C, and 8R in that order). Furthermore, if stop buttons 8L and 8C are pressed simultaneously while the first reel has stopped and the second reel is spinning, stop button 8L takes priority and stop button 8C is disabled.

Next, in step S2554, it is determined whether the press input is valid. If it is not valid (No in step S2554), data indicating the determination result "invalid" is retained and processing ends. If it is valid (Yes in step S2554), information about the stop button corresponding to the acquired information related to the validly pressed stop button and information about the operation status of the stop button are acquired below.

That is, in step S2555, the address of the first cylinder control data storage area is set in a specified register, in step S2556, the stop button activation bit is set in a specified register, in step S2557, the address is updated for one reel, in step S2558, the stop button activation bit is updated for one stop button, and in step S2559, valid/invalid information is extracted from the acquired stop button input.

Next, in step S2560, it is determined whether the information is valid. If it is not valid (No in step S2560), the process returns to step S2557. If it is valid (Yes in step S2560), the stop button status information, etc. is updated.

That is, in step S2561, the stop button information in the stop button input status storage area is updated, in step S2562 the operation status is stored in the stop button operation status storage area, and in step S2563 the stop button operation counter is decremented by 1. Thereafter, data indicating the judgment result "valid" is retained and processing ends.

The stop button input monitoring process configured in this way is called separately for normal play and simulated play, and the stop button input status storage area, stop button activation status storage area, and stop button activation counter are used in both normal play and simulated play, so the processing can be shared.

8. Common processing for backup generation and backup restoration
Of the common information backup generation process shown in Fig. 216, the process related to the generation of the common information backup generally corresponds to, for example, the backup process of the fourth embodiment described above (step S4602 in Fig. 172). Note that the process related to the generation of the common information backup shown in Fig. 216 shows the process realized in this embodiment, and therefore it is not necessarily possible to incorporate it as is as the backup generation process of the fourth embodiment described above. The common information backup generation process described here is provided as an example to explain the technical concept of the present application.

The process for generating a common information backup shown in FIG. 216 is executed, for example, in the process of this embodiment corresponding to the lever-on AT-related process of the fourth embodiment shown in FIG. 172. In the lever-on AT-related process, first, a process that is not affected by a penalty is executed, then a backup process is executed to store the original information of the various information in order to cancel updates of various information (counters and flags for AT-related parameters) in the event of a penalty, and then in the lever-on AT-related process, various AT-related lotteries are drawn when the lever is on, and various information is updated in accordance with the results of the AT-related lottery when the lever is on. Here, the various information corresponds to the data stored in the "common information storage area" of this embodiment, which will be described later, and the backup information corresponds to the data stored in the "common information backup storage area" of this embodiment, which will be described later.

Note that the lever-on AT-related processing is processing executed in the game start state control processing (step S6 in FIG. 23) of the main processing in the first embodiment, and this processing corresponds to the game start state control processing (step S2006 in FIG. 179) of the main processing in this embodiment. In the game start state control processing, when the start lever is operated, the "lever-on AT-related processing" shown in FIG. 172 (of the fourth embodiment) is performed. Also, as described above, in the AT state, advantageous stop operation modes are notified to the notification means (for example, a device corresponding to the notification monitor or main display device 210 in the first embodiment).

Of the common information backup restoration process shown in FIG. 216 and the common information restoration process shown in FIG. 217, the process related to the restoration of common information corresponds, for example, to the process of the fourth embodiment described above (step S4624 of FIG. 173 (process of assigning backed-up information to various counters and flags, i.e., process of returning data in the common information backup storage area to the common information storage area)). Note that the process related to the restoration of common information backup shown in FIGS. 216 and 217 represents the process realized in this embodiment, and therefore may not be able to be incorporated as is as the backup restoration process of the fourth embodiment described above. The common information restoration process described here is provided as an example to explain the technical concept of the present application.

The common information restoration process shown in FIG. 217 is called, for example, by the process of this embodiment corresponding to the AT-related process when all reels are stopped of the fourth embodiment shown in FIG. 173. In the AT-related process when all reels are stopped, when all reels are stopped, various AT-related lotteries are executed when all reels are stopped, and then various information (counters, flags, etc.) is updated according to the results of the AT-related lottery when all reels are stopped. If a predetermined penalty condition is met, the above-mentioned various updated information is written back to the backup information data, and the updates of the various information (i.e., the update according to the results of the AT-related lottery when the lever is on and the update according to the results of the AT-related lottery when all reels are stopped shown in FIG. 172) are canceled. Here, the various information corresponds to the data stored in the "common information storage area" of this embodiment, which will be described later, and the backup information corresponds to the data stored in the "common information backup storage area" of this embodiment, which will be described later.

Therefore, here, the cancellation of various information means that the contents of the various information updated after the backup process (step S4602) shown in FIG. 172 (i.e., the various information updated in steps S4603 and S4604 in FIG. 172 and step S4622 in FIG. 173) are returned to the state of the data backed up in step S4602.

Note that the AT-related processing at full stop in the fourth embodiment (FIG. 173) is processing executed in the game end state control processing of the main processing in the fourth embodiment (step S15 in FIG. 23), and this processing corresponds to the game end state control processing of the main processing in this embodiment (step S2015 in FIG. 179).

Figure 216 shows a flowchart explaining the processing steps for the common information backup generation process. In this process, first, settings related to common information backup generation are set in a specified register (step S2581). Then, in step S2584, the next pseudo-game selection effect number is cleared, and in step S2585, the address of the common information backup storage area (i.e., the area where the data stored in the common information storage area is backed up) is set in, for example, the HL register, and in step S2586, the address of the common information storage area is set in, for example, the DL register.

In this example, the common information storage area is the backup target (data restoration target), and, as in the fourth embodiment described above, includes AT-related parameters (various types of information (counters, flags, etc.) that can be updated as a result of AT-related processing), and some examples of these AT-related parameters are shown in Figure 171.

Next, in step S2587, the data length of the common information storage area is set in a specified register, and in step S2588, it is determined whether a backup restoration or backup is being performed. If a backup restoration is not being performed (i.e., a backup is being created) (No in step S2588), the addresses of the common information backup storage area and the common information storage area are swapped in step S2589.

After step S2589, or if it is determined in step S2588 that a backup restoration is being performed (Yes in step S2588), the process proceeds to step S2590, where the data in the storage area indicated by the source address is transferred to the storage area indicated by the destination address.

As described above, this is the common information backup generation process called by the game start state control process (step S2006 in FIG. 179) of the main process, so the determination of whether to restore or back up in step S2588 is No, and addresses are swapped in step S2589. Then, in the transfer process of step S2590, the source address is the address of the common information storage area, and the destination address is the address of the common information backup storage area, and a backup of the AT-related parameters is obtained by this process.

Furthermore, when the common information backup restoration process is called from step S2617 of the common information restoration process shown in Figure 217 (described later) using the A register as an argument, the process of step S2582 in Figure 216 is initiated, and this process determines whether or not restoration has occurred (i.e., whether or not the backup determination value (A register) = 0). If this process determines that restoration has occurred (A register = 0) (Yes in step S2582), the process proceeds to step S2583 described above. If it determines that restoration has not occurred (A register ≠ 0) (No in step S2582), the process terminates.

If the determination in step S2582 is Yes, the process proceeds to step S2583 described above, and the same processing as above is performed. However, since this is processing from the common information restoration processing, the determination of whether to restore backup or backup in step S2588 is Yes, and no address switching is performed in step S2589. Then, in the transfer processing in step S2590, the address of the transfer source becomes the address of the common information backup storage area, and the address of the transfer destination becomes the address of the common information storage area, and this processing performs backup restoration of AT-related parameters.

Figure 217 shows a flowchart explaining the processing steps for the common information restoration process. This process determines whether or not to perform the common information backup restoration process, that is, whether or not the penalty condition is met. Note that this determination is similar to the conditions described in connection with step S4623 in Figure 173 in the fourth embodiment described above.

First, in step S2611, if the game is in a favorable zone (i.e., not in a non-favorable zone) (Yes in step S2611), this is one of the penalty conditions, and the process proceeds to step S2612. If the game is not in a favorable zone (No in step S2611), the process terminates. Next, in step S2612, it is determined whether the first reel is at the first stop. If the first reel (e.g., reel 3L) is not at the first stop (i.e., a stop operation (irregular press) is performed on the center reel 3C or right reel 3R as the first stop operation) (No in step S2612), this is one of the penalty conditions, and the process proceeds to step S2613. If the first drum is the first stop (Yes in step S2612), proceed to step S2617. In this case, the backup determination value = ball-out game status flag, and since the ball-out game status flag has not been acquired at this time, a value other than 0 is set in the A register, and proceed to the common information backup restoration process in step S2617, where the process ends without actually performing the backup restoration process.

In step S2613, the payout game status flag is obtained. The payout game status flag allows the current payout state to be determined. For example, in the fourth embodiment, pseudo bonuses such as "pseudo BIG," "pseudo REG," and "pseudo BIG (ED)," as well as the 3BB game status shown in FIG. 81, can be determined. Then, in step S2614, it is determined whether the obtained payout game status flag indicates a bonus state. If a bonus state is indicated (Yes in step S2614), the process proceeds to common information backup restoration processing in step S2617. Here, whether or not backup restoration processing is performed is determined, for example, depending on the value of the payout game status flag. For example, if the value of the payout game status flag is set in register A and its content is set to 0, the penalty condition is met and backup restoration processing is performed.

If neither of the bonus states is in effect (No in step S2614), proceed to step S2615 to determine whether the internal winning combination is the combination to be determined. If it is not the combination to be determined (No in step S2615), proceed to step S2617. Here, if a value other than 0 is set in register A and the common information backup restoration process is called in step S2617, the process ends without actually performing the backup restoration process.

If the combination is subject to judgment (Yes in step S2615), in step S2616, a backup judgment value is obtained according to the internal winning combination. In other words, whether or not the penalty conditions are met is determined based on the internal winning combination. The backup judgment value stores data indicating whether or not there will be a return (A register = 0) or not (A register is other than 0). Next, the process proceeds to step S2617, where the common information backup return process in Figure 216 is called using the A register as an argument, and the process ends. Furthermore, in the common information backup return process in Figure 216, if the A register is 0, the backup return process is performed.

The determinations in steps S2611 to S2615 are related to penalty conditions. If these penalty conditions are met, backup restoration processing is performed and various information updates are restored. As described above, the penalty conditions are determined based on whether or not the machine is in a favorable zone, the stopping mode of the first drum, the bonus status, and the internal winning combination.

Here, with reference to Figure 218, we will provide an overview of the common information backup creation process and common information backup restoration process in this embodiment.

Figure 218 (A) shows an overview of the backup restoration process (so-called restore process) in the common information backup restoration process. In the main RAM 2103 shown on the left, common information is stored from address "F020"H in the working area 2103a within the used area over a length of L1, and the area shaded with diagonal lines slanting downward to the left is the common information storage area. Address "F020"H is also stored in the DE register. Meanwhile, common information backup, which is the previous version of common information, is stored from address "F030"H in the working area 2103a within the used area over a length of L1, and the area shaded with diagonal lines slanting downward to the right is the common information backup storage area. Address "F030"H is also stored in the HL register.

When the transfer command shown in (1) is executed in this state of main RAM 2103, an area of length L1 from the address stored in the HL register is transferred to an area starting from the address stored in the DE register. As a result, main RAM 2103 becomes as shown on the right. In other words, the common information data is rewritten with common information backup data.

This transfer command corresponds, for example, to the processing of step S2590 shown in FIG. 216.

Figure 218(B) shows an overview of the backup generation process (so-called backup processing) in the common information backup generation process. In the main RAM 2103 shown on the left, common information is stored over a length of L1 from address "F020"H in the working area within the used area 2103a. The area shaded with diagonal lines in a grid pattern is the common information storage area, and indicates that the data has been updated from the state in Figure 218(A).

On the other hand, the common information of the version used for the backup restoration in Figure 218 (A) is stored in the working area 2103a in the used area from address "F030"H over a length of L1, and the area shaded diagonally downward to the right is the common information backup storage area.

When the exchange instruction shown in (1) is executed in this state of main RAM 2103, the address stored in the HL register and the address stored in the DE register are swapped. As a result, in contrast to Figure 218 (A), address "F020"H is stored in the HL register, and address "F030"H is stored in the DE register.

Furthermore, when the transfer instruction (2) is executed, an area of length L1 from the address stored in the HL register is transferred to an area starting from the address stored in the DE register. As a result, the main RAM 2103 will be in the state shown on the right. In other words, the data in the common information backup is rewritten with the common information data.

This exchange instruction corresponds, for example, to the processing of step S2589 shown in Figure 216, and the transfer instruction corresponds, for example, to the processing of step S2590 shown in Figure 216. The data transfer direction of the transfer instruction is opposite in Figure 218(A) and Figure 218(B), but this is because the register values are swapped by the exchange instruction in Figure 218(B), and the code itself is the same.

As described above, backups of various information are obtained in the common information backup generation process of FIG. 216, which is executed in the game start state control process (step S2006), and the various information is restored to the state it was in at the start of play using the backups obtained for various information in the common information restoration process of FIG. 217, which is executed in the game end state control process (step S2015). However, if the penalty conditions described above are met, backup restoration processing is performed on the various information to cancel the updates to the various information at the end of play.

In addition, the common information restoration process shares most of its processing with the common information backup generation process, with the exception of determining penalty conditions. Clearing the next pseudo-game performance number, setting each storage area address, setting the length of the storage area, etc. are all common processes, and when transferring data, the storage area addresses are swapped between the common information restoration process and the common information backup generation process, reversing the data transfer direction.

By standardizing programs in this way, it is possible to reduce pressure on the capacity of the program area in the main ROM. Furthermore, by standardizing programs in this way, it is possible to simplify the program structure and description, improving the development efficiency and maintainability of the program.

[9. Detection of game return impossible error]
When the game-return-impossible error processing (outside the use area) shown in FIG. 183 is called, it sets interrupt prohibition, prohibits medal insertion, displays a message on the information display device (7-segment LED) indicating that a game-return-impossible error has occurred, and then starts an infinite loop. When this processing detects a game-return-impossible error and calls the game-return-impossible error processing (outside the use area), the pachislot machine 2001 enters a standby state due to an infinite loop. At this time, the pachislot machine 2001 does not accept any operations other than turning off the power, or at least, it can be made impossible to perform operations to start a game. Here, if the pachislot machine 2001 is powered off and then powered on again, if an operation to change the settings is performed using the setting key, the setting change operation becomes possible (see FIG. 180). If no operation to change the settings is performed when the power is turned on, the same standby state will occur again.

Furthermore, the causes of the game return impossible error are: (1) when a comparison of the CRC value calculated when the power is turned on with the CRC value calculated when the power is interrupted and stored in the CRC value storage area 2103e results in a mismatch (see Figures 180 and 181); when the comparison of the CRC values results in a match, but the CRC value calculation is not performed (or is not performed correctly) in the power interruption processing (see Figures 181, 199, and 200); and (3) when an abnormality in the setting value or the random number circuit is detected in the error detection processing (outside the use area) in the periodic interrupt processing (see Figures 195, 197, and 198).

For causes (1) and (2) above, the above-mentioned "unable to return to play" error processing (outside of the usage area) is executed as soon as the "unable to return to play" error is detected when the power is turned on. However, for cause (3), the "unable to return to play" error processing (outside of the usage area) is not executed when the power is turned on, and the "unable to return to play" error processing (outside of the usage area) is executed during the internal lottery processing (see Figure 188).

For this purpose, in the case of cause (3), the game return impossible error flag is set to data indicating "return impossible," and the contents of this flag are determined by internal lottery processing. As shown in FIG. 179, internal lottery processing is executed after the medal acceptance and start check processing, and is executed when medals are inserted (or credits are available) and the start switch is turned on by operating the start lever (i.e., when the player commands the start of play).

With this configuration in this embodiment, if an abnormality in the setting value or the random number circuit is detected, the abnormality is not displayed or a standby process (infinite loop) is performed at the time of detection. Instead, the next time the start lever is operated to start play, the abnormality is displayed and the machine goes into standby mode.

This behavior of the pachislot machine 2001 assumes a situation in which a cheating offense (so-called cheating) is committed after the gaming parlor closes, and the cheater (for example, a player) begins playing the following day immediately after the gaming parlor reopens, attempting to gain an unfair advantage. With the above-described mechanism of this embodiment, the cheater begins playing immediately after the gaming parlor opens, and only then will the gaming machine display an abnormality and enter a standby state, making it possible to identify the cheater on the spot (even if the cheater cannot be apprehended on the spot, it is possible to obtain video footage of the player operating the gaming machine, etc.). At this point, the cheater will begin playing under the mistaken belief that their cheating on the previous day was successful.

On the other hand, if an abnormality caused by fraud is detected, the gaming machine will display the abnormality and go into standby mode. In the situation described above where fraudulent activity occurs after the amusement center has closed the previous day, the abnormality will be displayed and the machine will go into standby mode when a staff member turns the machine on before the amusement center opens, meaning that the person who committed the fraud will not be present and it will be impossible to identify the person who committed the fraud.

The fifth embodiment of the present invention has been described above with reference to the drawings, but these configurations and processes are merely examples, and the technical concept of the present invention can be realized using a variety of other configurations and methods. Furthermore, while the above description primarily covers the application of the technical concept of the present application to pachislot machines, it can also be applied to pachinko machines and the medal-less gaming machine of the sixth embodiment described below.

Sixth Embodiment
(Medalless gaming machine)
In the pachislot machine 2501 of this embodiment, play begins with one of the conditions being the player's betting operation (i.e., inserting medals held in hand into the medal insertion slot 2505 to place a bet, or operating the MAX BET button 2506a or 1 BET button 2506b to place a bet with credited medals), and if medals are to be paid out when the game ends, the hopper device 2532 is driven to pay out medals from the medal payout port 2511, or the medals are credited, as described above, but the configuration of the pachislot machine 2501 is not limited to this.

For example, the invention according to this embodiment can be applied to all types of gaming in which a player bets the amount of gaming value required for a game, the game is played based on that bet, and a bonus is awarded based on the outcome of the game (e.g., gaming value is awarded). In other words, the invention can be applied not only to types in which medals are physically inserted (bet) and paid out through the player's actions, but also to those in which the gaming value held by the player is managed electromagnetically within the pachislot machine 2501 (or, even if not electromagnetically, at least managed in a manner that prevents the player from directly accessing the gaming value), allowing for medal-free gaming. Here, such pachislot machines 2501 are referred to as "medalless gaming machines." Medalless gaming machines are also sometimes referred to as "managed gaming machines" or "enclosed gaming machines," etc.

The game value held by the player may be electromagnetically managed by the main control circuit 2600 (main control board 2571) itself, or by a game value management device attached to (connected to) the main control circuit 2600 (main control board 2571) (hereinafter, such a management device may be referred to as a "medal count control board"). An example of how this game value management device is installed is described below.

The gaming value management device is a device equipped with at least ROM and RWM (or RAM) and installed in the pachislot machine 2501. It is connected to an external gaming value providing device (hereinafter, such a gaming value providing device may be referred to as a "communication-only unit") for two-way communication via a communication device (hereinafter, such a communication device may be referred to as a "connection terminal board"). By performing the necessary communication with the external gaming value providing device, the gaming value management device is capable of performing operations such as lending gaming value (i.e., providing the gaming value required for a player to place a gaming value bet), granting gaming value (i.e., providing the granted gaming value to a player when a winning combination related to the granting of gaming value is achieved (such combination is realized)), and electromagnetically recording the gaming value provided by these operations. The gaming value providing device is also sometimes referred to as a "gaming value (gaming medium) handling device," "gaming value (gaming medium) lending device," or "sandbox."

The external gaming value providing device is also connected to an external ball payout management device (ball payout management server), and the gaming value management device is configured to be able to send ball payout management information to the external ball payout management device via a communication device and the external gaming value providing device. Here, the ball payout management information is made up of various pieces of information necessary to enable the external ball payout management device to manage ball payouts. An example of ball payout management information will be described later. The external gaming value providing device and the external ball payout management device are connected, for example, by an internet line.

Here, "balls paid out" directly refers to the number of gaming media paid out, but in this embodiment, the concept also includes, for example, the difference (net increase) between the number of payouts and the number of bets, the degree of benefit given to the player (for example, how much the player gained (how much the gaming establishment lost), or how much the player lost (how much the gaming establishment gained), etc.), the duration of an advantageous state (for example, a bonus state, an AT state, or a series of advantageous periods, etc.), or the degree of gambling potential assumed by a combination of these.

Also, for example, a retained game value number display device (not shown) that displays the number of retained game values may be provided on the front side of the pachislot machine 2501, and the game value management device may manage the number of game values displayed on this retained game value number display device based on the management results of the number of game values. In other words, the game value management device may not only record the total number of game values that a player can use for play by electromagnetic means, but may also be configured to be able to control the display of the recorded results. In this case, it is desirable that the game value management device have the ability to allow a player to freely transmit a signal indicating the recorded number of game values to an external game value providing device, and also have the ability to prevent the recorded number of game values from being reduced except by direct operation by the player, and also have the ability to transmit a signal indicating the recorded number of game values only via a communications device.

The gaming value management device may not only have the function of electromagnetically managing a player's gaming value using an external gaming value providing device, but may also have the function of managing the number of gaming values bet by the player's physical actions and the number of gaming values paid out by the physical actions of the pachislot machine 2501. In other words, it may also be capable of managing the actual insertion and payout of medals in a conventional pachislot machine 2501. In this way, the pachislot machine 2501 can be controlled using conventional methods or using methods similar to those of the medal-less gaming machine described above, allowing for a common configuration regardless of the specifications of the pachislot machine 2501. In this case, the gaming value management device may directly control the selector 2531 and hopper device 2532 described above, or it may indirectly control these by controlling them using the main control circuit 2600 (main control board 2571) and transmitting the control results.

In addition to the above, the pachislot machine 2501 may be provided with various operating means necessary for the operation of a medal-less gaming machine, such as a lending operating means and a return (settlement) operating means that can be operated by the player. The gaming value providing device may be provided with various operating means necessary for the operation of a medal-less gaming machine, such as a lending operating means and a return operating means that can be operated by the player, in addition to various devices such as an insertion slot for valuables such as banknotes, an insertion slot for recording media (e.g., IC cards), and a contactless communication antenna for depositing electronic money from a mobile terminal (all not shown). Insertable recording media include not only non-member recording media issued by gaming establishments on the same day, but member recording media held by members of the gaming establishment. Gaming value recorded on non-member recording media is valid only for the day (it becomes invalid from the following day onwards), but gaming value recorded on member recording media is valid from the following day onwards.

An example of the flow of play in this case will be explained below. For example, first, the player deposits valuable value into the game value providing device using one of the methods. The game value providing device subtracts a predetermined amount of valuable value in response to the player's operation of one of the lending operation means, and provides the pachislot machine 2501 with game value corresponding to the subtracted valuable value. The player then plays, and if more game value is required, repeats the above operation. Thereafter, when the player has acquired a predetermined amount of game value as a result of the game and wishes to end the game, the player operates one of the return operation means. The game value management device transmits the number of game values to the game value providing device in response to the player's operation of one of the return operation means. The game value providing device ejects the recording medium on which the transmitted number of game values is recorded. When the game value number has been transmitted, the game value management device clears the number of game values stored in itself. The player can take the ejected recording medium to a prize exchange center or similar location to exchange it for a prize, or can move to another pachislot machine 2501 and continue playing by inserting the ejected recording medium into a game value providing device corresponding to that machine. Also, if the ejected recording medium is a member's recording medium, it will remain valid from the next day onwards, so the player can stop playing here.

In the above example, the game value management device transmits the total number of game values to the game value providing device in response to the player's return operation. However, the device may be configured to transmit only the number of game values desired by the player depending on the manner of the player's return operation. In other words, the game value held by the player may be divided. Furthermore, while the game value providing device records the transmitted number of game values on a recording medium and dispenses it, it may transmit information of the same value to the player's mobile terminal using the above-mentioned non-contact communication antenna, or may dispense, for example, cash or a cash equivalent, as long as it provides the player with something of equivalent value.

Furthermore, if the pachislot machine 2501 is not properly connected to the gaming value providing device (communication-only unit), and information corresponding to the number of gaming values is sent to the communication-only unit in response to the player's return operation, there is a risk that this information will be lost. Therefore, when the main control circuit 2600 (main control board 2571) is not properly connected to the communication-only unit, it may be configured to, for example, control the system to enter an error state when play begins, and in this error state, it may be made impossible to play (for example, a state in which betting operations, return operations, start operations, etc. cannot be accepted), thereby preventing play from progressing. This makes it possible to prevent information corresponding to the number of gaming values from being lost.

The pachislot machine 2501 or the gaming value providing device may also be provided with a lock operation means operable by the player, and may be controlled to a state (locked state) in which communication between the gaming value management device and the gaming value providing device is disabled in response to operation of this lock operation means. In this case, the pachislot machine 2501 or the gaming value providing device may be configured to perform authentication processes such as setting a PIN (and inputting the set PIN), issuing a one-time password (and inputting the issued one-time password), or biometric authentication, and the locked state may be released if the results of the authentication process are normal.

With the medal-less gaming machine described so far, compared to when gaming media are physically provided for play, there is no need to provide some external structures such as the medal insertion slot 2505 and medal payout outlet 2511, or some internal structures such as the selector 2531 and hopper device 2532. This not only reduces the cost and manufacturing costs of the gaming machine, but also reduces the power consumption of the gaming machine. Furthermore, since it is more difficult to access the inside of the gaming machine, fraudulent activity against the gaming machine can be prevented. Furthermore, because players do not come into direct contact with the gaming media, the gaming environment is improved and noise can be reduced. In other words, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can improve various aspects of the environment surrounding the gaming machine.

(Example of medal-less gaming machine configuration)
Next, with reference to Figures 219 to 222, other examples (other configuration examples, modified examples, and extended examples) of the main control board of a pachislot machine will be described. Note that, with regard to the various specifications and functions described as other examples of the main control board in this embodiment, some or all of them can be applied to other gaming machines (other configuration examples) described in this embodiment, and further, with regard to the various specifications and functions described as other gaming machines (other configuration examples) in this embodiment, some or all of them can be applied to other examples of the main control board in this embodiment. In other words, an appropriate combination of these can be considered as the invention according to this embodiment.

[Pachislot machine equipped with main control board according to another example]
First, with reference to Figures 219 and 220, a pachislot machine (referred to as pachislot machine 3001 in this example) equipped with a main control board according to another example will be described. Figure 219 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of pachislot machine 3001 equipped with main control board 3011, and Figure 220 is a diagram showing an example configuration of game information display unit 3037, medal count display unit 3041, and medal lending display unit 3042 provided in pachislot machine 3001 equipped with main control board 3011. Note that in this example, pachislot machine 3001 equipped with main control board 3011 according to another example is configured as a medalless gaming machine, but this is merely an example, and of the inventions described in this example, those that do not require this configuration can naturally also be applied to gaming machines (pachislot machine 1, pachislot machine 2001, etc.) in which games are played using physical gaming value.

The pachislot machine 3001 is configured to be able to play games by having the various components shown in Figure 219. The pachislot machine 3001, together with a gaming media lending device 3002 and peripheral devices 3003 such as a data display, constitutes a gaming system capable of performing various gaming-related operations. Although not shown, the gaming media lending device 3002 and peripheral devices 3003 such as a data display are connected to the gaming parlor's management computer (hall computer) via, for example, a LAN line, and are configured to be able to transmit data to the management computer. The gaming media lending device 3002 also has the same functions as the gaming value providing device (communication-only unit) described above.

The pachislot machine 3001 has a main control board 3011, a sub-control board 3012, a door relay board 3013, and a sub-relay board 3014. The main control board 3011 and the door relay board 3013, the door relay board 3013 and the sub-relay board 3014, and the sub-relay board 3014 and the sub-control board 3012 are electrically connected to each other. Furthermore, the main control board 3011 and the sub-control board 3012 are electrically connected so that one-way serial communication is possible from the main control board 3011 to the sub-control board 3012 via the door relay board 3013 and the sub-relay board 3014.

The main control board 3011 has a main control unit 3011a, which serves as a game control means (game control unit) that controls the progress of the game, and a medal count control unit 3011b, which serves as a game value control means (game value control unit) that controls the management of game value. The main control unit 3011a has the same functions as the main control board 2571 described above, and the medal count control unit 3011b has the same functions as the game value management device (medal count control board) described above.

Here, in Figure 219, the main control unit 3011a and the medal count control unit 3011b are mounted on the same main control board 3011, but they may also be mounted on separate boards (configured as separate boards) and electrically connected to perform the same functions.

The sub-control board 3012 is a performance control board that controls performance-related functions and is housed in a resin sub-control board case (not shown). The door relay board 3013 is attached to a specific position within cabinet G (for example, the back side of the lower door mechanism DD) and is an intermediate control board that relays signals between various devices and the main control board 3011, and between the main control board 3011 and the sub-control board 3012. The sub-relay board 3014 is attached to a specific position within cabinet G (for example, the back side of the lower door mechanism DD) and is an intermediate control board that relays signals between the various devices connected to the sub-relay board 3014 and the sub-control board 3012.

The pachislot machine 3001 also has a power supply unit 3015 that includes a power supply board 3015a and a power switch 3015b.

The pachislot machine 3001 also has a reel unit 3021, a reset switch 3022, a setting key switch 3023, and an adjustment switch 3024, which are electrically connected to the main control unit 3011a. These may also be connected to the main control unit 3011a via a door relay board 3013. Furthermore, as long as control is performed smoothly, they may also be connected to the medal count control unit 3011b.

The reel unit 3021 has the same functions as the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R (and stepping motors 51L, 51C, and 51R) described above. The reset switch 3022 has the same functions as the reset switch 53 described above. The setting key switch 3023 has the same functions as the setting key switch 52 described above. The settlement switch 3024 has the same functions as the settlement switch 9S described above.

However, since the pachislot machine 3001 in this example is configured as a medalless gaming machine, when the settlement switch 3024 detects that the corresponding settlement button (not shown) has been pressed, the number of credited medals is sent to the gaming medium lending device 3002 (described below) via the gaming ball etc. connection terminal board 3043 (described below) (credit settlement is performed).

The pachislot machine 3001 also has a start switch 3031, a return switch 3032, a 1BET switch 3033, a MAXBET switch 3034, a stop switch board 3035, a door open/close switch 3036, and a game information display unit 3037, all of which are electrically connected to the main control unit 3011a via the door relay board 3013. However, these may also be connected directly to the main control unit 3011a without going through the door relay board 3013. Furthermore, as long as control is performed smoothly, they may also be connected to the medal count control unit 3011b.

The start switch 3031 has the same function as the start switch 7S described above. The 1 bet switch 3033 has the same function as the bet switch 6S when the 1 bet button 6b described above is pressed. The max bet switch 3034 has the same function as the bet switch 6S when the max bet button 6a described above is pressed. The stop switch board 3035 has the same function as the stop switch 8S described above. The door opening/closing switch 3036 has the same function as the door opening/closing monitoring switch 56 described above.

Here, the return switch 3032 and its corresponding return button (not shown) are configured as a return operation detection unit (means) that can detect the player's return operation, and when the return switch 3032 detects that the corresponding return button has been pressed, the number of medals bet is returned as credits (bet settlement is carried out). The game information display unit 3037 will be explained later with reference to Figure 220.

The pachislot machine 3001 also has a medal count display unit 3041, a medal lending display unit 3042 including a medal lending operation board 3042a, a lending switch 3042b, and a return switch 3042c, a gaming ball etc. connection terminal board 3043, and a medal count clear switch 3044, all of which are electrically connected to the medal count control unit 3011b. These may also be connected to the medal count control unit 3011b via a door relay board 3013. Alternatively, they may be connected to the main control unit 3011a as long as control is performed smoothly. The medal count display unit 3041 and medal lending display unit 3042 will be explained later with reference to Figure 220.

The gaming ball etc. connection terminal board 3043 has the same functions as the external centralized terminal board 55 described above, and also has the same functions as the communication device (connection terminal board) described above. The gaming ball etc. connection terminal board 3043 is equipped with a connection mechanism (not shown) for connecting the gaming medium lending device 3002 to the medal count control unit 3011b, and for connecting the data display and other peripheral devices 3003 to the medal lending operation board 3042a, and the connection mechanism 3045a is provided with a connector (e.g., a 25-pin connector) consisting of multiple connection pins that is connected to the gaming medium lending device 3002 via a harness.

The medal count clear switch 3044 is a switch that can detect an initialization operation (e.g., a press operation) when an administrator at the gaming parlor clears (initializes) the number of medals credited to the pachislot machine 3001. When the medal count clear switch 3044 is pressed, it outputs a detection signal (medal count clear signal) to the medal count control unit 3011b. In this case, based on the medal count clear signal, the medal count control unit 3011b controls the medal count display unit 3041 so that the display on the five-digit seven-segment LED for credit display (see Figure 220 (B)) provided in the medal count display unit 3041 (described below) becomes "00000" (number of credits = 0).

The pachislot machine 3001 also has a display device 3051, which is electrically connected to the sub-control board 3012. Note that the display device 3051 may also be connected to the sub-control board 3012 via the sub-relay board 3014. Here, the display device 3051 has the same functions as the main display device 210 and sub-display device 220 described above.

The pachislot machine 3001 also has a speaker group 3052, an LED drive board 3053, a performance switch 3054, and an operation switch 3055, which are electrically connected to the sub-control board 3012 via the sub-relay board 3014. However, these may also be connected directly to the sub-control board 3012 without going through the sub-relay board 3014.

The speaker group 3052 has the same functions as the speaker groups 35a, 35b, etc. described above. The LED drive board 3053 is a board on which the drive circuits for each LED board 3056 are mounted, and each LED board 3056 has the same functions as the lamp/LED group 23, etc. described above. The effect switch 3054 and the operation switch 3055 have the same functions as the effect button groups 10a, 10b, etc. described above.

Next, with reference to Figure 220 (A), an example configuration of the game information display unit 3037 will be described. The game information display unit 3037 is configured to be able to display various types of game information, and its display operation is controlled by a main control microprocessor 3070 (main control circuit) described below within the main control unit 3011a. The game information display unit 3037 can be installed in any position that is easily visible to the player. For example, it may be installed on the base of the front door of the pachislot machine 1 (in Figure 1, the position where the medal slot 5 and performance button 10a are located, or nearby).

As shown in Figure 220(A), the gaming information display unit 3037 is provided with a payout display section for displaying information on the number of gaming media paid out (number of gaming values awarded). The payout display section is composed of a two-digit 7-segment LED ("Payout Display" in Figure 220(A)) for digitally displaying (notifying) this information to the player.

The game information display unit 3037 also has LEDs (hereinafter referred to as "line LEDs") for displaying the number of bets, labeled "START," "REPLAY," "1 BET," "2 BET," and "3 BET" in Figure 220(A)A, as lamps that indicate game operation information.

For example, when the number of gaming media bets (inserted numbers) is 0 (all line LEDs are off), pressing the 1 bet button 6b lights up the "1 BET" line LED, and when the 1 bet button 6b is pressed again, the "1 BET" and "2 BET" line LEDs light up, and when the 1 bet button 6b is pressed again, all of the "1 BET" to "3 BET" line LEDs light up, and the "START" line LED lights up. At this time, each time the 1 bet button 6b is pressed, the value of the accumulated number of gaming media (number of credits) displayed by the 5-digit 7-segment LED in the medal count display unit 3041 (described below) is decremented by 1.

Furthermore, for example, when the number of gaming media bets (inserted numbers) is 0 (all line LEDs are off), pressing the MAX BET button 6a will light up all of the line LEDs for "1 BET" to "3 BET," as well as the "START" line LED. At this time, with one bet operation, the value of the number of gaming media stored (number of credits) displayed on the 5-digit 7-segment LED in the medal count display unit 441 (described below) will be reduced by 3.

Furthermore, for example, if a replay role is won in the previous game, the "START" and "REPLAY" line LEDs will light up. At this time, the value of the number of gaming media stored (number of credits) displayed on the 5-digit 7-segment LED described below in the medal count display unit 3041 described below will not be subtracted.

The game information display unit 3037 is also provided with an instruction display unit for displaying information about the stop operation to be notified to the player in situations where such information is required (for example, in an AT state). The instruction display unit is composed of a three-digit seven-segment LED ("Instruction Display" in Figure 220 (A)) for digitally displaying (notifying) the information to the player. Similar to the instruction monitor (notification lamp) described above, the instruction display unit may display information that uniquely corresponds to the information about the stop operation to be notified (for example, displaying "1" when notifying the push order of "left → center → right"), or it may directly display the information about the stop operation to be notified (for example, displaying "123" when notifying the push order of "left → center → right").

Next, with reference to Figure 220 (B), an example configuration of the medal count display unit 3041 will be described. The medal count display unit 3041 is configured to be able to display information such as the number of game media stored (retained game value) inside the pachislot machine 3001, and its display operation is controlled by a medal count control microprocessor 3080 (game value control circuit) described below within the medal count control unit 3011b. The medal count display unit 3041 can be installed in any position that is easily visible to the player. For example, it may be installed on the base of the front door of the pachislot machine 1 (in Figure 1, the position where the medal insertion slot 5 and performance button 10a are located, or nearby). The medal count display unit 3041 also has the same functions as the above-mentioned retained game value number display device.

As shown in Figure 220 (B), the medal count display unit 3041 is provided with a credit display unit for displaying information on the number of gaming media stored (number of gaming values held). The credit display unit is composed of a five-digit seven-segment LED ("credit display" in Figure 220 (B)) for digitally displaying (notifying) this information to the player. Note that, for example, if a similar credit display is performed in the gaming media lending device 3002, the pachislot machine 3001 may not be provided with a credit display unit, or, as with conventional pachislot machines 1, a credit display may be performed with a predetermined number (for example, 50) as the upper limit.

The medal count display unit 3041 is also provided with an error display unit for displaying information about errors related to the control of the medal count (number of credits) managed by the medal count control unit 3011b. The error display unit is composed of a single-digit 7-segment LED ("Error Display" in Figure 220 (B)) for digitally displaying (notifying) this information to the player. If an error occurs related to the control of the medal count (number of credits) managed by the medal count control unit 3011b, an error code (letters, numbers, etc.) corresponding to the type of error is displayed by this single-digit 7-segment LED for error display. Because the error display unit is an error display means dedicated to the management and control of the medal count (game value), for example, there is no confusion between errors related to the management and control of the medal count and other errors, making it easier to recognize that an error related to the management and control of the medal count has occurred.

Here, examples of errors related to the control of the number of medals (number of credits) managed by the medal count control unit 3011b include upper limit exceeding errors. An upper limit exceeding error occurs when an upper limit (for example, "16369") is set on a credit counter provided in the medal count control unit 3011b for counting the number of stored gaming media, and it is determined that adding the number of payouts to the credit counter would exceed that upper limit. Note that if an upper limit exceeding error occurs, it can be resolved (cancelled) by performing a credit settlement.

Next, referring to Figure 220 (C), an example configuration of the medal lending display unit 3042 will be described. The medal lending display unit 3042 is configured to display information such as the number of gaming media (game value) remaining on a gaming card (not shown) inserted into the gaming media lending device 3002 (referred to as "degrees"), and its display operation is controlled by a medal count control microprocessor 3080 (game value control circuit) described below within the medal count control unit 411b. The medal lending display unit 3042 can be installed in any position that is easily visible to the player. For example, it may be installed on the base of the front door of the pachislot machine 1 (in Figure 1, the position where the medal insertion slot 5 and the performance button 10a are located, or nearby). The degree may also include the number of gaming media (game value) that can be loaned out depending on the amount of money inserted into the gaming media lending device 3002.

As shown in Figure 220 (C), the medal lending display unit 3042 is provided with a number display unit for displaying information on the remaining number of points. The number display unit is composed of a three-digit seven-segment LED ("Number Display" in Figure 220 (C)) for digitally displaying (notifying) this information to the player.

The medal lending display unit 3042 is also provided with a lending lamp, marked "Lending" in Figure 220 (C), which indicates whether the gaming medium can be loaned or not. The lending lamp is lit when the gaming medium can be loaned (before the loaning operation) and is extinguished when the gaming medium cannot be loaned (during loan, settlement, return, or when an error has occurred). The lending lamp is also configured to function as a loan button that can be pressed, and pressing this button (i.e., the loaning operation) is detected by the lending switch 3042b.

If the lending lamp is lit when a lending operation is detected (i.e., if a lending operation is possible), a predetermined number of gaming media are added to the number of credits managed by the pachislot machine 3001 from the number of points managed by the gaming media lending device 3002. In addition, the number of points remaining after subtracting the number of points corresponding to the predetermined number of gaming media is displayed on the point display unit. In this example, the lending lamp is configured to also function as a lending button, but the lending button may be provided separately from the lending lamp, and the lending lamp may be configured to only perform display functions.

The medal lending display unit 3042 is also provided with a return lamp marked "Return" in Figure 220 (C), which indicates whether the gaming medium can be returned or not. The return lamp is lit when the gaming medium can be returned (before the return operation), and is extinguished when the gaming medium cannot be returned (during lending, settlement, return, or when an error has occurred). The return lamp is also configured to function as a return button that can be pressed, and this pressing (i.e., return operation) is detected by the return switch 3042c.

If the return lamp is lit when a return operation is detected (i.e., if the return operation is possible), the number of credits or bets managed by the pachislot machine 3001 is added to the frequency managed by the gaming media lending device 3002, and then a gaming card with that frequency stored (this also includes a configuration in which the frequency itself is not stored on the gaming card, but information associated with it is stored) is ejected from the gaming media lending device 3002. Note that in this example, the return lamp is configured to also function as a return button, but the return button may be provided separately from the return lamp, with the return lamp only performing a display function.

In this example, dynamic lighting control is used as the control method for the various 7-segment LEDs provided in the game information display unit 3037, medal count display unit 3041, and medal lending display unit 3042, but a different control method (for example, static lighting control) may also be used.

[Configuration example of main control unit and medal count control unit of main control board according to another example]
Next, a configuration example of the main control unit and medal count control unit of the main control board according to another example will be described with reference to Fig. 221. Fig. 221 is a diagram showing a configuration example of the main control microprocessor 3070 and medal count control microprocessor 3080 of the main control board 3011.

As described above, the main control board 3011 is equipped with the main control unit 3011a and medal count control unit 3011b, as well as the medal count clear switch 3044. Details of the main control unit 3011a and medal count control unit 3011b will be described later. The main control board 3011 is installed inside the pachislot machine 3001, for example, in the same manner as the above-mentioned main control board 71, housed in a transparent (or nearly transparent) resin board case (in this example, the main control board case 3060).

Although not shown in the figures, the main control board case 3060 has various sealing structures to prevent it from being easily opened, or to ensure that if it is opened, traces of it are easily discernible, in order to prevent tampering. In other words, the main control board case 3060 is basically configured to make it difficult to access the main control board 3011 while still ensuring visibility of the main control board 3011.

In this example, since the medal count clear switch 3044 is mounted on the main control board 3011, it is necessary to ensure such safety while still allowing access to the medal count clear switch 3044 (operation of the medal count clear switch 3044) (i.e., without the main control board case 3060 being opened).

In this example, a small hole 3061a is formed in the main control board case 3060 at a position corresponding to the location of the medal count clear switch 3044, allowing the medal count clear switch 3044 to be pressed from outside the main control board case 3060.

In order to prevent the medal count clear switch 3044 from being easily operated by a human finger or the like, the size of the small hole 3061a may be, for example, approximately 2 mm in diameter or less. A gaming parlor staff member may then press this switch, for example, using a dedicated tool. As described above, the medal count clear switch 3044 is a switch used by the gaming parlor's administrator to clear (initialize) the number of medals credited to the pachislot machine 3001. Therefore, it is not used under normal circumstances. It is designed for use when an unexpected state occurs in the medal count control (control related to payouts, etc.) related to the management of the number of gaming media stored (number of credits). Therefore, this configuration is unlikely to cause problems, and it also prevents the medal count clear switch 3044 from being pressed accidentally.

Next, we will explain an example configuration of the main control unit 3011a. The main control unit 3011a has a main control microprocessor 3070 (game control circuit), a clock pulse generating circuit 3071 (not shown), and a power management circuit 3072 (not shown). Details of the main control microprocessor 3070 will be described later.

The clock pulse generating circuit 3071 generates a clock pulse signal for operating the main CPU and outputs the generated clock pulse signal to the clock circuit 3105 (EX) within the main control microprocessor 3070. The main control microprocessor 3070 executes the control program based on the input clock pulse signal.

The power management circuit 3072 manages fluctuations in the 12V DC power supply voltage supplied from the power supply board 3015a (see Figure 219) and supplies 5V DC (VCC) power to the main control microprocessor 3070. For example, when power is turned on (when the power supply voltage rises from 0V to the startup voltage value (10V)), the power management circuit 3072 outputs a reset signal to the reset controller 3106 (XSRST) described below in the main control microprocessor 3070, and when a power interruption occurs (when the power supply voltage falls from 12V to below the power interruption voltage value (10.5V)), it outputs a power interruption detection signal to the parallel input port 3111 (XINT) described below in the main control microprocessor 3070. In other words, the power management circuit 3072 also functions as a means (start-up means) for outputting a reset signal (start-up signal) to the main control microprocessor 3070 when power is turned on, and as a means (power outage means) for outputting a power outage detection signal (power outage signal) to the main control microprocessor 3070 when a power outage occurs.

Next, an example configuration of the medal count control unit 3011b will be described. The medal count control unit 3011b has a medal count control microprocessor 3080 (game value control circuit), a clock pulse generation circuit 3081 (not shown), a power supply management circuit 3082 (not shown), and a role ratio monitor 3083 (not shown). Details of the medal count control microprocessor 3080 will be provided later.

Furthermore, as is clear from a comparison between the main control unit 3011a and the medal count control unit 3011b, the medal count control unit 3011b is configured by adding a role ratio monitor 3083 to the main control unit 3011a, and the configurations and functions of the clock pulse generation circuit 3081 and power supply management circuit 3082 provided in the medal count control unit 3011b are similar to the configurations and functions of the clock pulse generation circuit 3071 and power supply management circuit 3072 provided in the main control unit 3011a, respectively. Therefore, a description of the configurations and functions of the clock pulse generation circuit 3081 and power supply management circuit 3082 will be omitted here.

In this example, the main control microprocessor 3070 and the medal count control microprocessor 3080 are gaming machine-specific microprocessors designed and manufactured by the same semiconductor manufacturer, and as described above, the clock pulse generating circuits (3071, 3081) and power management circuits (3072, 3082) have similar configurations and functions. Therefore, when the main control microprocessor 3070 and the medal count control microprocessor 3080 are mounted on the same control board (main control board 3011), as in this example, a single clock pulse generating circuit and power management circuit may be shared by the two microprocessors, rather than providing separate corresponding clock pulse generating circuits and power management circuits.

In other words, clock pulse generating circuit 3071 and clock pulse generating circuit 3081 can be configured as one and the same clock pulse generating circuit. Furthermore, power supply management circuit 3072 and power supply management circuit 3082 can be configured as one and the same power supply management circuit. Note that they can also be configured so that they share a clock pulse generating circuit but have individual power supply management circuits, or so that they share a power supply management circuit but have individual clock pulse generating circuits.

The role ratio monitor 3083 is composed of a four-digit, seven-segment LED and has the same functions as the above-mentioned role ratio monitor device 54. In this example, the role ratio monitor 3083 is similar to the above-mentioned role ratio monitor device 54 in that it is provided inside the main control board case 3060, but differs from the above-mentioned role ratio monitor device 54 in that it is implemented on the main control board 3011 as part of the medal count control unit 3011b, and its display content (various ratio information) is controlled by the medal count control microprocessor 3080. However, it may also be implemented on the main control board 3011 as part of the main control unit 3011a, and its display content (various ratio information) may be controlled by the main control microprocessor 3070.

The display content (various ratio information) is controlled by the medal count control microprocessor 3080, which is installed inside the main control board case 3060, but it may also be configured to be mounted on another board (for example, a ratio display board) connected to the medal count control unit 3011b, or such a display unit may be provided separately and connected to the medal count control unit 3011b. Either configuration can be adopted as long as visibility of the role ratio monitor 3083 can be ensured when the main control board 3011 is housed in the main control board case 3060 and installed inside the pachislot machine 3001.

Next, referring to Figure 221, an example configuration of the main control microprocessor 3070 and the medal count control microprocessor 3080 will be described. Both the main control microprocessor 3070 and the medal count control microprocessor 3080 are microprocessors with security functions for gaming machines, and in this example, the configuration of the main control microprocessor 3070 and the configuration of the medal count control microprocessor 3080 are the same (although they may, of course, have different configurations).

Therefore, the main control microprocessor 3070 and the medal count control microprocessor 3080 will be referred to simply as "microprocessor MP" in this explanation. Note that for components with different functions between the main control microprocessor 3070 and the medal count control microprocessor 3080, the differences will be explained as appropriate.

The microprocessor MP has a CPU 3101, ROM 3102, RAM 3103, external bus interface 3104 (signal bus 3116 (local bus)), clock circuit 3105, reset controller 3106, arithmetic circuit 3107, matching block 3108, unique information 3109, random number circuit 3110 (random number generator), parallel input port 3111, interrupt controller 3112, timer circuit 3113, serial communication circuit 3114, and parallel output port 3115. All components of the microprocessor MP except for signal bus 3116 are connected to each other via signal bus 3116. Terminals D0 to D7 of IC1 and terminals D0 to D7 of IC2, described below, are terminals for the external bus interface 3104 (see Figure 222, described below).

The CPU 3101 executes various control programs and performs various controls based on the clock pulses generated by the clock circuit 3105. In the main control microprocessor 3070, the CPU 3101 (hereinafter also referred to as the "main CPU") executes various control programs and performs control over all gaming operations. On the other hand, in the medal count control microprocessor 3080, the CPU 3101 (hereinafter also referred to as the "medal count control CPU") executes various control programs and mainly performs control over the counting of gaming media (gaming value) at the time of payout and settlement.

ROM 3102 stores various control programs executed by CPU 3101, various data tables, etc. The storage capacity of ROM 3102 is 12 kilobytes. In the main control microprocessor 3070, ROM 3102 (hereinafter also referred to as "main ROM") stores various control programs executed by main CPU 3101, various data tables, data for sending various control instructions (commands) to sub-control board 3012, etc. On the other hand, in the medal count control microprocessor 3080, ROM 3102 (hereinafter also referred to as "medal count control ROM") stores various control programs executed by medal count control CPU 3101, and various data required for input/output operations of signals and data between main control unit 3011a and gaming ball etc. connection terminal board 3043 (gaming medium lending device 3002, data display etc. peripheral devices 3003).

RAM 3103 is provided with various storage areas for storing various data (parameters, flags, etc.) used when CPU 3101 executes various control programs. The storage capacity of RAM 3103 is 1 kilobyte. In the main control microprocessor 3070, RAM 3103 (hereinafter also referred to as "main RAM") is provided with a storage area for storing various data such as internal lottery winning combinations determined by executing the control programs. On the other hand, in the medal count control microprocessor 3080, RAM 3103 (hereinafter also referred to as "medal count control RAM") is provided with a storage area for storing various counters (e.g., medal counter, insertion counter, etc.) and various flags used when executing payout control, etc.

The external bus interface 3104 is an interface circuit for electrically connecting the microprocessor MP to an external signal bus to which various components located outside the microprocessor MP are connected. An example of the connection configuration for the main control microprocessor 3070 and the medal count control microprocessor 3080 will be described later with reference to Figure 222.

Clock circuit 3105 is configured to include, for example, a frequency divider (not shown), and converts the clock pulse signals input from clock pulse generating circuits 3071 and 3081 into clock pulse signals of multiple frequencies used for CPU operation and other components (e.g., timer circuit 3113). The clock pulse signals of multiple frequencies generated by clock circuit 3105 are output to all circuits within microprocessor MP (CPU 3101 to external bus interface 3104, and reset controller 3106 to parallel output port 3115) except for clock circuit 3105, at frequencies corresponding to the operation of each circuit.

The reset controller 3106 resets the IAT (Illegal Address Trap) and WDT (Watchdog Timer) based on the reset signals input from the power management circuits 3072 and 3082. The arithmetic circuit 3107 includes a multiplication circuit and a division circuit. When an inspection device is connected, the verification block 3108 verifies the signal level to determine whether the connected inspection device is legitimate.

Unique information 3109 stores the unique information (identification information) of the microprocessor MP. The chip individual number of the microprocessor MP consists of 4 bytes of data and is set when the chip is manufactured. In addition, a different number is set for each chip as the chip individual number of the microprocessor MP.

In the main control microprocessor 3070, the main control microprocessor 3070's unique information (identification information) is stored in unique information 3109. The ROM code of ROM 3102 and the main control microprocessor 3070's individual chip number are also stored in unique information 3109. The ROM code of ROM 3102 is composed of 4 bytes x 4 pieces of data, i.e., 16 bytes of data. Each 4-byte piece of data that makes up the ROM code of ROM 3102 is generated from data stored in the area of addresses "0000h" to "2FBFh" in the built-in ROM (ROM 3102), and the method of generating the 4-byte data also differs for each 4-byte piece of data.

Meanwhile, in the medal count control microprocessor 3080, the medal count control microprocessor 3080's unique information (identification information) is stored in unique information 3109. The ROM code of medal count control ROM 3102 and the medal count control microprocessor 3080's individual chip number are also stored in unique information 3109. The ROM code of medal count control ROM 3102 is composed of 4 bytes x 4 pieces of data, i.e., 16 bytes of data. Each of the 4 bytes of data that make up the ROM code of medal count control ROM 3102 is generated from data stored in the area of addresses "0000h" to "0FBFh" in the built-in ROM (medal count control ROM 3102), and the method of generating the 4 bytes of data also differs for each 4 bytes of data.

Random number circuit 3110 generates random numbers within a predetermined range (e.g., 0 to 65535 or 0 to 255). Random number circuit 3110 is composed of multiple random number registers, and can be configured, for example, with random number register 0 for obtaining 2-byte hard-latch random numbers, random number registers 1 to 3 for obtaining 2-byte soft-latch random numbers, and random number registers 4 to 7 for obtaining 1-byte soft-latch random numbers. In main control microprocessor 3070, main CPU 3101 extracts one value from the predetermined range of random numbers generated by random number circuit 3110, for example, as a random number value for an internal lottery.

The parallel input port 3111 is an input port (memory-mapped I/O) for signals input to the microprocessor MP from various circuits (e.g., power management circuits 3072, 3082, etc.) external to the microprocessor MP. The parallel input port 3111 is also connected to the random number circuit 3110 and the interrupt controller 3112. In the main control microprocessor 3070, the start switch 3031 is connected to the parallel input port 3111, and when the start switch 3031 is turned on (on edge), a latch signal is output from the parallel input port 3111 to a specified random number register (e.g., random number register 0) of the random number circuit 3110. Then, in the random number circuit 3110, the specified random number register is latched by the input of the latch signal, and a 2-byte hard-latch random number is obtained.

The interrupt controller 3112 controls the timing of interrupt processing by the CPU 3101 based on a reset signal or power interruption detection signal input from the power management circuits 3072 and 3082 via the parallel input port 3111, or a timeout signal input at a predetermined interval from the timer circuit 3113. Furthermore, when a reset signal or power interruption detection signal is input from the power management circuits 3072 and 3082, or when a timeout signal is input from the timer circuit 3113, the interrupt controller 3112 outputs an interrupt request signal indicating an interrupt processing start command to the CPU 3101. The CPU 3101 then performs various interrupt processing based on the interrupt request signal input from the interrupt controller 3112.

Specifically, in the main control microprocessor 3070, the interrupt controller 3112 controls the execution timing of interrupt processing by the main CPU 3101 (for example, the periodic interrupt processing shown in FIG. 32 in the case of a timeout signal) based on a reset signal, a power interruption detection signal, or a timeout signal input from the power management circuit 3072 via the parallel input port 3111, or a 1.1172 msec cycle from the timer circuit 3113. The main CPU 3101 then performs various processes within the periodic interrupt processing (for example, see FIG. 32) based on an interrupt request signal input from the interrupt controller 3112 in response to the timeout signal from the timer circuit 3113. Note that the interrupt processing by the main CPU 3101 executed based on a reset signal corresponds to the main processing shown in FIG. 23. In other words, the interrupt request signal issued by the interrupt controller 3112 is the starting point for all processing executed by the main CPU 3101.

Meanwhile, in the medal count control microprocessor 3080, the interrupt controller 3112 controls the timing of interrupt processing by the medal count control CPU 3101 based on a reset signal, a power interruption detection signal, or a timeout signal input at 1 msec intervals from the timer circuit 3113 via the parallel input port 3111. Then, similar to the above, the medal count control CPU 3101 performs various processes, such as port input processing, game information reception processing, data transmission processing to the main control unit 3011a, data transmission processing to peripheral devices, data reception processing from peripheral devices, and port output processing, based on an interrupt request signal input from the interrupt controller 3112 in response to the reset signal, power interruption detection signal, or timeout signal. In other words, the interrupt request signal issued by the interrupt controller 3112 serves as the starting point for all processing performed by the medal count control CPU 3101.

The timer circuit 3113 (PTC) operates (counts the elapsed time) using the clock pulse signal generated by the clock circuit 3105 (a clock pulse signal with a frequency obtained by dividing the clock pulse signal for operating the CPU by a frequency divider (not shown)). The timer circuit 3113 then outputs a timeout signal (trigger signal) to the interrupt controller 3112 at predetermined intervals (1.1172 msec for the main control microprocessor 3070, and 1 msec for the medal count control microprocessor 3080).

The serial communication circuit 3114 is a communication circuit that controls the serial communication of various data between the control board on which it is implemented and various boards provided external to the control board. In the main control microprocessor 3070, the serial communication circuit 3114 serially communicates data (various control commands, various data, etc.) between the main control unit 3011a and various boards (e.g., sub-control board 3012, etc.) provided external to the main control board 3011. The serial communication circuit 3114 is made up of four communication circuits SCU0, SCU1, and STU2-STU4, with communication circuits SCU0 and SCU1 being made up of bidirectional serial communication circuits and communication circuits STU2-STU4 being made up of serial communication circuits dedicated to transmission. For example, when connecting the main control board 3011 (main control unit 3011a) and sub-control board 3012 via serial communication, the communication circuit STU2, which is a serial communication circuit dedicated to transmission, is used, and when connecting the main control unit 3011a and medal count control unit 3011b via serial communication, the communication circuit SCU0, which is a bidirectional serial communication circuit, is used. Note that this is the method of using serial communication circuits established from the perspective of anti-cheating measures (preventing fraudulent activity).

The parallel output port 3115 is an output port (memory-mapped I/O) for signals output from the microprocessor MP to various external circuits. In this example, data is output using a FIFO (First In First Out) method, for example.

[Example of circuit configuration of main control board according to another example]
Next, an example of the circuit configuration of a main control board according to another example will be described with reference to Fig. 222. Fig. 222 is a schematic diagram of an example of the circuit configuration of a main control board 3011.

Control boards used in gaming machines are generally configured as printed circuit boards (PCBs), and in this example, the main control board 3011 is also configured as a printed circuit board. In the case of a double-sided printed circuit board, for example, a copper-clad laminate with copper foil attached to both sides of the main board (insulating board) constructed as an insulator is processed using glass fiber or resin, and then cut to the required size. Then, through-holes, VIA holes, etc. are formed to allow electrical continuity. The copper foil in the areas to be left as the required wiring pattern (circuit pattern) is masked, and the copper foil in areas other than the masked areas is removed to form the wiring pattern. All areas of the formed wiring pattern that need not be exposed (such as areas to be soldered later) are covered with an insulating solder resist made of ink or film material (protected by laminating an insulating layer). The required electronic components are then mounted on the board manufactured in this way to form a control board that performs specific functions.

The electronic components mounted on such control boards include surface-mounted devices (SMD), which are mounted by soldering their terminals to the front (one side) of the control board, and dip-in-place (DIP) components (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "dip components"), which have their terminals inserted into through holes from the front (one side) of the control board and soldered to the back (other side) (or both the front and back sides).

Surface-mounted components are smaller than equivalent dip-mounted components, and do not require through-holes for mounting, which has the advantage of saving space on the mounting surface. Furthermore, because they have become more widely used than dip-mounted components in recent years, they also have the advantage of being easier to obtain and less expensive than equivalent dip-mounted components. On the other hand, because they are small, they are difficult to inspect using measuring instruments such as digital oscilloscopes, and they also have the disadvantage of being less strong after mounting than equivalent dip-mounted components.

On the other hand, dip-mounted components have the disadvantages of being more difficult to secure mounting space for than equivalent surface-mounted components, and being more expensive and difficult to obtain. However, they also have the advantages of being easier to handle than equivalent surface-mounted components, facilitating the above-mentioned inspections, and being stronger after mounting.

In this example, certain conditions are set taking into consideration these advantages and disadvantages, and if these conditions are met, surface-mounted components are used for the target electronic components and mounted on the main control board 3011; if these conditions are not met, dip-mounted components are used for the target electronic components and mounted on the main control board 3011. Here, we will focus on this point and explain an example of the circuit configuration of the main control board 3011.

(Outline of an example circuit configuration of the main control board 3011)
An example of the circuit configuration of the main control board 3011 will be outlined with reference to Fig. 222. Note that Fig. 222 shows an outline of an example of a specific location (the connection path between the main control microprocessor 3070 and the medal count control microprocessor 3080) on the main control board 3011, and does not show the entire circuit configuration on the main control board 3011. In other words, if certain conditions are met, it is possible to employ surface-mounted components in locations other than those shown in Fig. 222 and provide test patterns in the connection paths between these surface-mounted components.

In Figure 222, IC1 indicates the main control microprocessor 3070 (see Figure 221), and IC2 indicates the medal count control microprocessor 3080 (see Figure 40). Furthermore, IC3 to IC6 are, for example, 20-pin ICs configured as buffer ICs, and are surface-mounted components.

As shown in FIG. 222, IC1 and IC3 are connected by an external signal bus between the D0 to D7 terminals (data bus) of IC1 and the Y1 to Y8 terminals (signal output) of IC3. That is, IC3 is electrically connected to the external bus interface 3104 of the main control microprocessor 3070. Also, IC1 and IC4 are connected by an external signal bus between the D0 to D7 terminals (data bus) of IC1 and the Y1 to Y8 terminals (signal output) of IC4. That is, IC4 is electrically connected to the external bus interface 3104 of the main control microprocessor 3070. This makes it possible to output data from IC3 or IC4 to the main control microprocessor 3070.

The Y1 to Y8 terminals (signal outputs) of IC3 and IC4 may be configured as, for example, D0 to D7 terminals (data bus), allowing data to be input and output between the main control microprocessor 3070 and IC3 or IC4. Alternatively, the main control microprocessor 3070 may be configured to output data to IC3 or IC4.

Here, a "data bus" is a signal bus that handles data (for data transfer). In other words, a "data bus" refers to a signal bus that handles "data" signals. Although not used in this embodiment, there is also a signal bus called an "address bus" that handles addresses (for address specification). In other words, an "address bus" refers to a signal bus that handles "address" signals. In contrast, a "local bus," as the word "local" suggests, refers to a signal bus with a relatively slow transfer speed. Therefore, for example, a signal bus labeled "data bus" may be equivalent to a "local bus," and a signal bus labeled "local bus" may be equivalent to a "data bus," but there is no contradiction between these terms.

Furthermore, IC1 and IC3 are connected by a signal line between the XCS0 terminal (chip select) of IC1 and the G1 and G2 terminals (gate input) of IC3. Furthermore, IC1 and IC4 are connected by a signal line between the XCS1 terminal (chip select) of IC1 and the G1 and G2 terminals (gate input) of IC4. This makes it possible to switch on the IC1 side whether data is output from IC3 or IC4. The XCS0 and XCS1 terminals are output terminals from the parallel output port 3115 (see Figure 221).

Also, as shown in FIG. 222, IC2 and IC5 are connected by an external signal bus between the D0 to D7 terminals (data bus) of IC2 and the D0 to D7 terminals (data bus) of IC5. That is, IC5 is electrically connected to the external bus interface 3104 of the medal count control microprocessor 3080. Also, IC2 and IC6 are connected by an external signal bus between the D0 to D7 terminals (data bus) of IC2 and the D0 to D7 terminals (data bus) of IC6. That is, IC6 is electrically connected to the external bus interface 3104 of the medal count control microprocessor 3080. This enables data input and output between the medal count control microprocessor 3080 and IC5 or IC6 (or data output from the medal count control microprocessor 3080 to IC5 or IC6).

In addition, the D0 to D7 terminals (data bus) of IC5 and IC6 may be configured as, for example, Y1 to Y8 terminals (signal output), allowing data to be output from IC5 or IC6 to the medal count control microprocessor 3080.

Furthermore, the D0 to D7 terminals (data bus) of IC2 are connected to the input terminal (which may be an input/output terminal, not shown) of the role ratio monitor 3083 via an external signal bus. In other words, the role ratio monitor 3083 is electrically connected to the external bus interface 3104 of the medal count control microprocessor 3080.

Furthermore, IC2 and IC5 are connected by a signal line between the XCS2 terminal (chip select) of IC2 and the CP terminal (clock input) of IC5. Furthermore, IC2 and IC6 are connected by a signal line between the XCS3 terminal (chip select) of IC2 and the CP terminal (clock input) of IC6. This makes it possible to switch on the IC2 side whether to output data to IC5 or IC6. The XCS2 and XCS3 terminals are output terminals from the parallel output port 3115 (see Figure 221).

Furthermore, IC3 and IC5 are connected by signal lines between the A1 to A8 terminals (signal input) of IC3 and the Q0 to Q7 terminals (signal output) of IC5. This allows data to be output from IC5 to IC3. In other words, data output from IC2 is output to IC1 via IC5 (input → output) and IC3 (input → output). In other words, IC1 and IC2 are electrically connected in such a way that IC3 and IC5 are mounted on the connection path.

Furthermore, IC4 and IC6 are connected by signal lines between the A1 to A8 terminals (signal input) of IC4 and the Q0 to Q7 terminals (signal output) of IC6. This allows data to be output from IC6 to IC4. In other words, data output from IC2 is output to IC1 via IC6 (input → output) and IC4 (input → output). In other words, IC1 and IC2 are electrically connected in such a way that IC4 and IC6 are mounted on the connection path.

Note that these are merely examples, and the connection between IC1 and IC2 is not limited to the above. For example, the positions of IC3 and IC5 may be swapped, and in a connection path between IC1 and IC2 where IC3 and IC5 are implemented, data output from IC1 may be configured to be output to IC2 via IC5 (input → output) and IC3 (input → output). Also, for example, the positions of IC4 and IC6 may be swapped, and in a connection path between IC1 and IC2 where IC4 and IC6 are implemented, data output from IC1 may be configured to be output to IC2 via IC6 (input → output) and IC4 (input → output).

Also, for example, the Y1 to Y8 terminals (signal output) and A1 to A8 terminals (signal input) of IC3, and the Q0 to Q7 terminals (signal output) of IC5 may all be configured as input/output terminals (e.g., data buses), and the connection path between IC1 and IC2 where IC3 and IC5 are implemented may be configured to allow mutual input/output of data.Also, for example, the Y1 to Y8 terminals (signal output) and A1 to A8 terminals (signal input) of IC4, and the Q0 to Q7 terminals (signal output) of IC6 may all be configured as input/output terminals (e.g., data buses), and the connection path between IC1 and IC2 where IC4 and IC6 are implemented may be configured to allow mutual input/output of data.

Note that although reference numerals are omitted in Figure 222, the connection path between the A1 to A8 terminals (signal input) of IC3 and the Q0 to Q7 terminals (signal output) of IC5 has eight test points (TP1 to TP8, described below) connected to the respective signal lines. Furthermore, the connection path between the A1 to A8 terminals (signal input) of IC4 and the Q0 to Q7 terminals (signal output) of IC6 has eight test points (TP9 to TP16, described below) connected to the respective signal lines.

The following is a description of the configuration and effects of the gaming machine according to the present invention.

<Appendix A-1>
[0003] Conventionally, a gaming machine has been known that is a pachislot machine that includes a plurality of reels each having a plurality of symbols arranged on its periphery, a plurality of display windows corresponding to each reel and displaying some of the symbols arranged on the periphery of each reel so that the player can see them, a start switch that outputs a signal requesting the start of rotation of each reel when it detects an operation by the player (hereinafter referred to as a "start operation"), provided that medals have been inserted, a stop switch that outputs a signal requesting the stop of rotation of the reel according to the type of reel when it detects an operation by the player (hereinafter referred to as a "stop operation"), and a control unit that controls the operation of a stepping motor based on the signals output by the start switch and the stop switch to rotate and stop each reel. Typically, in such pachislot machines, a combination of symbols displayed in the display windows determines whether a prize has been won, and if a prize has been won, medals are paid out from a hopper and stored in a medal receiving unit.

In such gaming machines, programming technology has been disclosed that uses the CALLEX command when calling a program in control area 2 (game media number limit ROM area) from a program in control area 1 (main control ROM area) (for example, JP 2022-001223 A).

As in the gaming machine described above, when a program stored in the in-use ROM area uses the "CALLEX" command to call a program stored in the out-of-use ROM area, if the called program is located in the first address range (2000H to 20FFH) of the out-of-use ROM area, the "CALLEX" command will be a two-byte command. However, if the called program is located in the second address range (from 2100H), the "CALLEX" command will be a four-byte command. In such a situation, each time the "CALLEX" command is used, it will put pressure on the capacity of the in-use ROM area.

The present invention was made in consideration of the above points, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can effectively save the capacity used in specific program storage areas of the main ROM.

Another objective of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine with simple, easy-to-read program code that is easy to develop and maintain.

In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machine.
(A-1-1) The invention according to the first embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration.

A gaming machine (e.g., a slot machine 2001) that controls the progress of a game by implementing a microprocessor (e.g., a microprocessor 2100) including an arithmetic circuit (e.g., a main CPU 2101), a read memory (e.g., a main ROM 2102), and a read/write memory (e.g., a main RAM 2103),
The read memory is composed of a first storage means (e.g., a ROM area 2202a within the use area) in which programs and data directly related to the progress of the game are stored, and a second storage means (e.g., a ROM area 2202b outside the use area) in which programs and data not directly related to the progress of the game are stored,
The programs stored in the second storage means include specific subroutines that are called by the program stored in the first storage means, execute processing, and then always return to the program of the first storage means that called them (for example, a subprogram that executes RAM initialization processing (continued) outside the used area shown in FIG. 186 and a subprogram that executes interface 2 output processing (continued) shown in FIG. 189), and normal subroutines that are called by the program stored in the second storage means, execute processing, and then always return to the program of the second storage means that called them (for example, a CRC calculation processing (outside the used area) shown in FIG. 182).
the arithmetic circuit executes a specific call instruction (e.g., "CALLEX") used when calling the specific subroutine to call the specific subroutine;
The specific call instruction stores different instruction capacity in the first storage means depending on whether the specific subroutine to be called calls a program stored before a specific address (e.g., "2100"H) in the second storage means or a program stored at an address after the specific address (e.g., a 2-byte instruction when calling a program before the specific address, and a 4-byte instruction when calling a program after the specific address),
the instruction capacity is required to be larger when calling a program stored at an address after the specific address than when calling a program stored before the specific address,
A gaming machine characterized in that when the program body of the specific subroutine is stored at an address after the specific address, the specific call instruction executes the program body of the specific subroutine by calling a program (for example, a "JR" or "JP" instruction) stored at an address before the specific address, in order to reduce the instruction capacity.

According to the configuration of the present invention, in a program stored in the program area within the use area of the main ROM, by setting the actual storage location of the called subprogram before a specified address, an instruction that is originally 4 bytes long can be made into an instruction that is 2 bytes long, thereby effectively saving the capacity used in the program area within the use area of the main ROM.

(A-1-2) The second embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration in the first embodiment.

When the program body of the specific subroutine is stored at an address subsequent to the specific address, a processing code (e.g., a code that can be interpreted by the main CPU 2101) for executing the program body of the specific subroutine is stored at an address prior to the specific address,
The specific call instruction is configured to execute the processing code, thereby executing the program body of the specific subroutine.

With this configuration of the present invention, in a program stored in the program area within the main ROM's used area, by setting the actual storage location of the called subprogram before a specified address, instructions that are normally 4 bytes long can be converted into 2-byte instructions, effectively saving space in the program area within the main ROM's used area.

(A-1-3) The third embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration in the second embodiment.

The processing code is configured to be a jump instruction (e.g., a "JR" or "JP" instruction) for jumping to the program body of the specific subroutine.

With this configuration of the present invention, in a program stored in the program area within the main ROM's used area, by setting the actual storage location of the called subprogram before a specified address, instructions that are normally 4 bytes long can be converted into 2-byte instructions, effectively saving space in the program area within the main ROM's used area.

(A-1-4) The fourth embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration in the third embodiment.

The jump instruction is configured to be an instruction (e.g., a "JR" instruction) that identifies the program body of the specific subroutine by a relative address.

With this configuration of the present invention, in a program stored in the program area within the main ROM's used area, by setting the actual storage location of the called subprogram before a specified address, instructions that are normally 4 bytes long can be made 2 bytes long.Furthermore, by setting jump instructions using relative addresses, the instruction size can also be reduced, resulting in effective savings in the capacity used in the program area within the main ROM's used area.

(A-1-5) The fifth embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration in the first embodiment.

When the specific call instruction calls a program stored before the specific address in the second storage means, the program is identified using a lower address than the address at which the program is stored.

With this configuration of the present invention, in a program stored in the program area within the main ROM's used area, by setting the actual storage location of the called subprogram before a specified address, instructions that are normally 4 bytes long can be converted into 2-byte instructions, effectively saving space in the program area within the main ROM's used area.

(A-1-6) The sixth embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration in the first embodiment.

The arithmetic circuit functions as a game control means for controlling the progress of a game,
a payout means (e.g., a hopper device) for paying out game media according to the progress of a game;
and a settlement means (e.g., a settlement button) that can be pressed by a player to perform a settlement operation;
The game control means
a game value input means for detecting the game medium and inputting the game value (for example, a main CPU 2101 for executing a process for detecting an operation of inserting medals to bet, or a process for detecting an operation of betting credited medals by operating a bet button);
A winning payout means (for example, a main CPU 2101 that executes the medal payout/replay operation process shown in FIG. 191) that performs a winning payout process for paying out game media from the payout means in accordance with the winning combination;
a settlement processing means (for example, the main CPU 2101 that executes the settlement execution process shown in FIG. 192) that performs a settlement process for paying out game media from the payout means based on the depression of the settlement means;
and a payout processing means (for example, a main CPU 2101 that executes the medal payout and replay operation process shown in FIG. 191 ) that causes the payout means to perform a payout operation and performs a payout process.
The game value input means is capable of inputting a game value during a first period (for example, a unit game start waiting state (a period during which medals can be accepted and bets can be made, and before a start operation is performed using a start lever)),
The winning payout means is capable of performing the winning payout process during a second period that does not overlap with the first period (for example, the period from the end of a unit game until payout is completed),
the settlement processing means is capable of performing the settlement processing when the settlement means is pressed during the first period;
The payout processing means
The payout process can be executed when the winning payout process is performed by the winning payout means and when the settlement process is performed by the settlement process means,
When the prize payout process is performed by the prize payout means and when the settlement process is performed by the settlement processing means, different parameters (for example, the address of the corresponding medal counter) are assigned when the payout process is executed.

With this configuration of the present invention, a common payout process is used when the winning payout process or the settlement process is performed, thereby reducing pressure on the program area capacity of the main ROM. Furthermore, by using this common payout process, the program structure and description can be made simpler, improving the development efficiency and maintainability of the program.

(A-1-7) The seventh embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration in the sixth embodiment.

When the winning payout process is performed by the winning payout process, the parameters assigned when the payout process is executed are configured to be information relating to the address of a payout number storage area (e.g., a payout number counter storage area) that stores a value based on the number of gaming media paid out according to the winning combination.

With this configuration of the present invention, a common payout process is used when the winning payout process or the settlement process is performed, thereby reducing pressure on the program area capacity of the main ROM. Furthermore, by using this common payout process, the program structure and description can be made simpler, improving the development efficiency and maintainability of the program.

(A-1-8) The eighth embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration in the first embodiment.

The arithmetic circuit functions as a game control means for controlling the progress of a game,
A start operation detection means (e.g., a start lever) for detecting a start operation by a player;
An internal lottery combination determination means (main CPU 2101 that executes the internal lottery process called in the main process shown in FIG. 179 ) that determines an internal lottery combination with a predetermined probability based on the detection of the start operation by the start operation detection means;
A variable display means includes a plurality of display columns and displays the symbols provided in each display column in a variable manner (a main CPU 2101 that executes a reel rotation start process called in the main process shown in FIG. 179 );
A stop operation detection means (main CPU 2101 that executes the reel stop control process called in the main process shown in FIG. 179) that detects a stop operation by a player (for example, an operation of pressing a stop button),
A stop control means (main CPU 2101 that executes a reel stop control process called in the main process shown in FIG. 179) that stops the variable display of the symbols based on the determination result of the internal winning combination determination means and the detection of a stop operation by the stop operation detection means,
The variation display of the variation display means includes a game variation (normal game) for awarding a game value and a pseudo variation (pseudo game) for awarding no game value,
The stop control means executes a control process for stopping the variable display of the symbols for the game variation,
The game control means
A pseudo stop control means for executing a control process to stop the variable display of the pattern in the pseudo variation;
a stop operation detection input monitoring means (for example, a main CPU 2101 that executes a stop button input monitoring process shown in FIG. 215 ) for determining whether or not the detection of the stop operation by the stop operation detection means is valid;
The stop control means and the pseudo stop control means are each configured to execute the stop operation detection input monitoring means to determine whether the stop operation is valid or not (executing common processing in normal play and pseudo play (i.e., for example, the stop button input monitoring processing shown in Figure 215)).

This configuration of the present invention allows for some commonality between normal gameplay and simulated gameplay processing, thereby reducing pressure on the program area capacity of the main ROM. Furthermore, by sharing some commonality between normal gameplay and simulated gameplay processing, the present invention allows for simpler program structure and description, improving the development efficiency and maintainability of the program.

(A-1-9) The ninth embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration in its first embodiment.

The arithmetic circuit functions as a game control means for controlling the progress of a game,
the read/write memory has a first storage area (common information storage area) for storing a group of information relating to a game, and a second storage area (common information backup storage area) located at a position different from the first storage area,
The game control means
a saving means (for example, the main CPU 2101 that executes the common information backup generation process of FIG. 216) that saves all of the information stored in the first storage area to the second storage area when a predetermined condition is met;
a restoring means (for example, a main CPU 2101 that executes the common information restoring process of FIG. 217) that restores the information saved in the second storage area to the first storage area when the predetermined condition and a specific condition (for example, a penalty condition) are met,
The saving means and the restoring means are a common program except for some processes, and the saving means and the restoring means set the leading address of the first storage area to a first register (e.g., a DE register, an HL register) capable of setting 2 bytes of data, and set the leading address of the second storage area to a second register (e.g., an HL register, an DE register) capable of setting 2 bytes of data,
Transferring information stored in the source address set in the first register from the source address set in the second register to the destination address set in the second register in response to a transfer command;
When the processing by the return means is executed, the source address set in the first register and the destination address set in the second register are swapped before the transfer instruction is executed.

This configuration of the present invention allows for a partial sharing of the backup restoration process, which restores specified information to the information before the game, and the backup process, which backs up that specified information, thereby reducing pressure on the program area capacity of the main ROM. Furthermore, by promoting program sharing in this way, the program structure and description can be made simpler, improving the development efficiency and maintainability of the program.

(A-1-10) The tenth embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration in the ninth embodiment.

a game start instruction means (for example, a start lever) by which a player instructs the start of a game;
a variable display means (for example, each reel) capable of variably displaying a plurality of pieces of identification information in response to operation of the game start instruction means;
A role determination means capable of determining a winning role (for example, a main CPU 2101 that executes the internal lottery process shown in FIG. 188 );
a stop operation detection means (e.g., a stop button and a stop switch) capable of detecting a stop operation that stops the variable display of the variable display means;
A stop control means (for example, a main CPU 2101 that executes the reel stop control process shown in FIG. 179) that can stop the variable display of the variable display means and derive a stop display based on the winning combination determined by the combination determination means and the stop operation mode detected by the stop operation detection means;
A winning means (for example, the main CPU 2101 that executes the process of step S2013 in FIG. 179 ) that can generate a winning result corresponding to the stopped display;
and a notification means (for example, an indication monitor or a main display device) capable of notifying an advantageous stop operation mode.
When the game start instruction means is operated by the player,
The saving means saves information (e.g., various information) stored in the first storage area and related to an advantageous state (e.g., an AT state) in which notification by the notification means can be executed, into the second storage area (e.g., processing corresponding to step S4602 in FIG. 172 ),
The game state related processing means for updating the information related to the advantageous state updates the information stored in the first storage area (for example, processing corresponding to step S4603, step S4604 in FIG. 172, step S4622 in FIG. 173, etc.),
When the game start instruction means is operated by the player and a predetermined penalty condition is met, the return means is configured to return the information saved in the second storage area to the first storage area (for example, processing corresponding to step S4624 in Figure 173).

This configuration of the present invention allows for a partial sharing of the backup restoration process, which restores specified information to the information before the game, and the backup process, which backs up that specified information, thereby reducing pressure on the program area capacity of the main ROM. Furthermore, by promoting program sharing in this way, the program structure and description can be made simpler, improving the development efficiency and maintainability of the program.

(A-1-11) The eleventh embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration in the ninth embodiment.

The specific condition is a penalty condition that cancels a predetermined advantageous gaming state, and the penalty condition is configured to be a condition based on the gaming state and a predetermined operation by the player.

This configuration of the present invention allows for a partial sharing of the backup restoration process, which restores specified information to the information before the game, and the backup process, which backs up that specified information, thereby reducing pressure on the program area capacity of the main ROM. Furthermore, by promoting program sharing in this way, the program structure and description can be made simpler, improving the development efficiency and maintainability of the program.

According to the present invention, by reducing the size of the program stored in a specific area of the main ROM (the program area within the used area), it is possible to effectively conserve the capacity used in that specific area. Furthermore, according to the present invention, by configuring a program stored in a specific area of the main ROM so that the actual storage location of a called subprogram is set before a specified address, it is possible to achieve concise, easy-to-read program code, which ultimately improves development efficiency and maintainability.

Furthermore, according to the present invention, since some of the processing for normal games and simulated games is shared, it is possible to reduce pressure on the capacity of the program area in the main ROM. Furthermore, according to the present invention, by sharing some of the processing for normal games and simulated games, it is possible to simplify the program structure and description, thereby improving the development efficiency and maintainability of the program.

Furthermore, according to the present invention, the backup restoration process that restores specified information to the information before the game and the backup process that backs up that specified information can be partially shared, thereby reducing pressure on the program area capacity of the main ROM. Furthermore, by promoting program sharing in this way, the program structure and description can be made simpler, improving the development efficiency and maintainability of the program.

<Appendix A-2>
[0003] Conventionally, a gaming machine has been known that is a pachislot machine that includes a plurality of reels each having a plurality of symbols arranged on its periphery, a plurality of display windows corresponding to each reel and displaying some of the symbols arranged on the periphery of each reel so that the player can see them, a start switch that outputs a signal requesting the start of rotation of each reel when it detects an operation by the player (hereinafter referred to as a "start operation"), provided that medals have been inserted, a stop switch that outputs a signal requesting the stop of rotation of the reel according to the type of reel when it detects an operation by the player (hereinafter referred to as a "stop operation"), and a control unit that controls the operation of a stepping motor based on the signals output by the start switch and the stop switch to rotate and stop each reel. Typically, in such pachislot machines, a combination of symbols displayed in the display windows determines whether a prize has been won, and if a prize has been won, medals are paid out from a hopper and stored in a medal receiving unit.

In relation to such gaming machines, a main program calculates and stores a sum value of the main RAM when a power outage occurs, and when power is restored, the main program compares the stored sum value at the time of the power outage with the main RAM sum value calculated when power is restored to check whether there are any abnormalities in the main RAM (for example, JP 2018-027107 A). The sum value is, for example, the remainder obtained by treating the data string in the area being inspected as a string of integer values and calculating the sum, dividing this by a predetermined constant.

This main RAM check process is one of the most important processes in a gaming machine, but the process of calculating the sum value and using the calculated sum value to determine if there is an abnormality in the main RAM must all be performed by the main program, which puts pressure on the program area of the main ROM where the main program is stored. Furthermore, in order to perform this type of processing, the structure and description of the main program become more complex, which places a heavy load on the main CPU that executes the main program.

The present invention was made in consideration of the above points, and aims to provide a gaming machine that reduces the size of the processing program related to checking the main RAM and is configured so as not to take up too much space in the program area of the main ROM.

Furthermore, by performing calculations related to checking the main RAM outside the main CPU, the present invention aims to simplify the structure and description of the main program, improve the development efficiency and maintainability of the program, and further reduce the load on the main CPU and shorten processing time.

The present invention also aims to manage effective restarts based on CRC values calculated without using calculations by the main CPU.

In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machine.
(A-2-1) The invention according to the first embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration.

A gaming machine (e.g., a slot machine 2001) that controls the progress of a game by implementing a microprocessor (e.g., a microprocessor 2100) including an arithmetic circuit (e.g., a main CPU 2101), a read memory (e.g., a main ROM 2102), a read/write memory (e.g., a main RAM 2103), and a cyclic redundancy check circuit (e.g., a CRC circuit 2017c),
The microprocessor
a power cutoff means (for example, a main CPU 2101 that executes a power cutoff interruption process shown in FIG. 199) that executes a power cutoff process when a drop in the power supply voltage is detected;
power-on means for executing power-on processing when the power is turned on (for example, a main CPU 2101 for executing the power-on processing shown in FIG. 180 );
The power supply disconnection means performs an operation within a specific address range of the read-write memory (e.g., a part of the main RAM 2103) using the cyclic redundancy check circuit, and stores the operation result (e.g., a CRC value) in an operation result storage area (e.g., a CRC value storage area 2103e) outside the specific address range of the read-write memory;
The power-on means uses the cyclic redundancy check circuit to perform calculations within the specific address range of the read/write memory, and compares the calculation results with the calculation results stored in the calculation result storage area.

With this configuration of the present invention, the main RAM check that was previously calculated by the main program is performed using a CRC circuit built into the microprocessor, eliminating the need to calculate the sum value. This eliminates the need to write this calculation in the main program, making it possible to free up more free space in the program area of the main ROM. Furthermore, by eliminating the calculation of the sum value, the structure and writing of the main program can be made simpler. Furthermore, by not performing calculations related to the main RAM check, including the calculation of the sum value, in the main program, the load on the main CPU that executes the main program can be reduced.

(A-2-2) The second embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration in the first embodiment.

The microprocessor is configured to send data within the specific address range to the cyclic redundancy check circuit to cause the cyclic redundancy check circuit to perform an operation within the specific address range, and to receive the operation result from the cyclic redundancy check circuit.

With this configuration of the present invention, the main RAM check that was previously calculated by the main program is performed using a CRC circuit built into the microprocessor, eliminating the need to calculate the sum value. This eliminates the need to write this calculation in the main program, making it possible to free up more free space in the program area of the main ROM. Furthermore, by eliminating the calculation of the sum value, the structure and writing of the main program can be made simpler. Furthermore, by not performing calculations related to the main RAM check, including the calculation of the sum value, in the main program, the load on the main CPU that executes the main program can be reduced.

(A-2-3) The third embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration in the second embodiment.

the data in the specific address range transmitted to the cyclic redundancy check circuit includes data in a plurality of non-contiguous areas in the read/write memory;
The calculation result received from the cyclic redundancy check circuit is configured to be a single piece of data.

With this configuration of the present invention, the main RAM check that was previously calculated by the main program is performed using a CRC circuit built into the microprocessor, eliminating the need to calculate the sum value. This eliminates the need to write this calculation in the main program, making it possible to free up more free space in the program area of the main ROM. Furthermore, by eliminating the calculation of the sum value, the structure and writing of the main program can be made simpler. Furthermore, by not performing calculations related to the main RAM check, including the calculation of the sum value, in the main program, the load on the main CPU that executes the main program can be reduced.

(A-2-4) The fourth embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration in the first embodiment.

If the result of the calculation performed by the power-on means does not match the result of the calculation stored in the calculation result storage area (for example, if the result of the comparison does not match, a CRC abnormality (game return impossible state 1) is set in Figure 181 (step S2053), and if the game return impossible state is set in Figure 180 and predetermined conditions are met, game return impossible error processing is executed (NO_1 in step S2035), interrupt prohibition is set, and then the process loops), a standby process is executed to wait until the gaming machine is powered off.

With this configuration of the present invention, the main RAM check that was previously calculated by the main program is performed using a CRC circuit built into the microprocessor, eliminating the need to calculate the sum value. This eliminates the need to write this calculation in the main program, making it possible to free up more free space in the program area of the main ROM. Furthermore, by eliminating the calculation of the sum value, the structure and writing of the main program can be made simpler. Furthermore, by not performing calculations related to the main RAM check, including the calculation of the sum value, in the main program, the load on the main CPU that executes the main program can be reduced.

(A-2-5) The fifth embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration in the first embodiment.

If the power cutoff means determines that no calculations are being performed within the specific address range, the device is configured to execute a standby process that waits until the gaming machine's power is turned off.

With this configuration of the present invention, the main RAM check that was previously calculated by the main program is performed using a CRC circuit built into the microprocessor, eliminating the need to calculate the sum value and the need to write this calculation process in the main program, thereby freeing up more free space in the program area of the main ROM. Furthermore, main RAM abnormalities can be properly detected based on the CRC value calculated without using calculations by the main CPU, allowing for effective restart management.

(A-2-6) The sixth embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration in the fourth or fifth embodiment.

The system is configured to control the power supply interruption process so that it is not executed while the standby process is being executed.

With this configuration of the present invention, the main RAM check that was previously calculated by the main program is performed using a CRC circuit built into the microprocessor, eliminating the need to calculate the sum value and the need to write this calculation process in the main program, thereby freeing up more free space in the program area of the main ROM. Furthermore, main RAM abnormalities can be properly detected based on the CRC value calculated without using calculations by the main CPU, allowing for effective restart management.

(A-2-7) The seventh embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration in the fourth or fifth embodiment.

The power-on means
Even if the result of the calculation by the power-on means does not match the result of the calculation stored in the calculation result storage area, the gaming machine is configured to be controlled so that the standby process is not executed by performing a predetermined operation when the gaming machine is powered on.

With this configuration of the present invention, the main RAM check that was previously calculated by the main program is performed using a CRC circuit built into the microprocessor, eliminating the need to calculate the sum value and the need to write this calculation process in the main program, thereby freeing up more free space in the program area of the main ROM. Furthermore, main RAM abnormalities can be properly detected based on the CRC value calculated without using calculations by the main CPU, allowing for effective restart management.

(A-2-8) The eighth embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration in the fourth or fifth embodiment.

When the standby process is being executed,
A return impossible display is displayed indicating that the game cannot be returned,
When the power supply to the gaming machine is turned off and then turned on again, the standby process is executed again and the display indicating that recovery is not possible is displayed.

With this configuration of the present invention, the main RAM check that was previously calculated by the main program is performed using a CRC circuit built into the microprocessor, eliminating the need to calculate the sum value and the need to write this calculation process in the main program, thereby freeing up more free space in the program area of the main ROM. Furthermore, main RAM abnormalities can be properly detected based on the CRC value calculated without using calculations by the main CPU, allowing for effective restart management.

(A-2-9) The ninth embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration in the eighth embodiment.

Even if the gaming machine is powered off while the standby process is being executed, the system is configured to prevent the standby process from being executed again by performing a predetermined operation when the gaming machine is powered on again.

With this configuration of the present invention, the main RAM check that was previously calculated by the main program is performed using a CRC circuit built into the microprocessor, eliminating the need to calculate the sum value and the need to write this calculation process in the main program, thereby freeing up more free space in the program area of the main ROM. Furthermore, main RAM abnormalities can be properly detected based on the CRC value calculated without using calculations by the main CPU, allowing for effective restart management.

(A-2-10) The tenth embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration in the fourth or fifth embodiment.

The device further includes a communication control means for executing a communication data transmission process that transmits communication data at regular intervals to a control unit connected to the microprocessor, which controls the game presentation, and is configured so that the communication data transmission process is stopped while the standby process is being executed.

With this configuration of the present invention, the main RAM check that was previously calculated by the main program is performed using a CRC circuit built into the microprocessor, eliminating the need to calculate the sum value and the need to write this calculation process in the main program, thereby freeing up more free space in the program area of the main ROM. Furthermore, main RAM abnormalities can be properly detected based on the CRC value calculated without using calculations by the main CPU, allowing for effective restart management.

(A-2-11) The invention according to the eleventh embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration in the tenth embodiment.

The communication control means
a transmission interval timer for transmitting the communication data to the control unit at regular intervals;
When the value of the transmission interval timer reaches a predetermined value, the communication data is transmitted to the control unit.
while the standby process is being executed, the timer value of the transmission interval timer is repeatedly updated so that the timer value becomes the predetermined value;
The communication control means is configured to control the transmission of unsent communication data to the control unit as soon as the power of the gaming machine is turned on again and the communication data transmission process is started when unsent communication data remains due to the halt of the communication data transmission process.

With this configuration of the present invention, the main RAM check that was previously calculated by the main program is performed using a CRC circuit built into the microprocessor, eliminating the need to calculate the sum value and the need to write this calculation process in the main program, thereby freeing up more free space in the program area of the main ROM. Furthermore, main RAM abnormalities can be properly detected based on the CRC value calculated without using calculations by the main CPU, allowing for effective restart management.

According to the present invention, there is no longer a need to write the sum value calculation process in the main program, freeing up the program area in the main ROM. As a result, this freed up program area can be used for logic, etc., to enhance gameplay. Furthermore, by eliminating the sum value calculation process, the structure and description of the main program can be made simpler, improving the development efficiency and maintainability of the program. Furthermore, by not performing calculations related to main RAM checks, including the sum value calculation process, in the main program, the load on the main CPU that executes the main program can be reduced, and CRC checks can be performed in a shorter time.

Furthermore, according to the present invention, abnormalities in the main RAM can be properly detected based on a CRC value calculated without using calculations by the main CPU, and effective restart management can be achieved.

<Appendix A-3>
[0003] Conventionally, a gaming machine has been known that is a pachislot machine that includes a plurality of reels each having a plurality of symbols arranged on its periphery, a plurality of display windows corresponding to each reel and displaying some of the symbols arranged on the periphery of each reel so that the player can see them, a start switch that outputs a signal requesting the start of rotation of each reel when it detects an operation by the player (hereinafter referred to as a "start operation"), provided that medals have been inserted, a stop switch that outputs a signal requesting the stop of rotation of the reel according to the type of reel when it detects an operation by the player (hereinafter referred to as a "stop operation"), and a control unit that controls the operation of a stepping motor based on the signals output by the start switch and the stop switch to rotate and stop each reel. Typically, in such pachislot machines, a combination of symbols displayed in the display windows determines whether a prize has been won, and if a prize has been won, medals are paid out from a hopper and stored in a medal receiving unit.

In such gaming machines, technology has been disclosed in which multiple tables are stored in the main ROM and the control processing program retrieves data from those tables (for example, JP 2021-079129 A).

However, when each control processing program in the main control unit retrieves data from its corresponding table, it is common to provide a separate process for retrieving the data. However, as the number of control processes and table types increases, the number of processes for retrieving the data also increases, which puts pressure on the capacity of the main ROM that stores the control processing programs.

In addition, while it is common to store data in tables in units of one byte, there are many cases where there are few data patterns and one byte of capacity is not actually required when storing data in a table. In such cases, there is a large amount of unused space, which puts pressure on the capacity of the main ROM.

The present invention was made in consideration of the above points, and aims to provide a gaming machine that does not require separate data acquisition processes for each type of data, but instead uses a common data acquisition process to efficiently use the program storage area of the main ROM, thereby reducing pressure on the main ROM's capacity.

The present invention also aims to provide a gaming machine that can store multiple data items in a table's data storage unit, reducing unused space and easing pressure on the main ROM capacity. Furthermore, the above-mentioned common data acquisition process can expand multiple data items when they are stored in a table's data storage unit.

Another object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine equipped with a smaller program that can initialize the main RAM for both the in-use area work area and the out-of-use area work area, without the need to determine the RAM initialization range for each area.

The present invention also aims to simplify the structure and description of the main program, thereby improving the development efficiency and maintainability of the program.

The present invention also aims to make the RAM clearing process for the out-of-use work area completely independent from the RAM clearing process for the in-use work area, making it easier to create and modify programs that comply with other standards.

In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machine.
(A-3-1) The invention according to the first embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration.

A game control means (e.g., a main CPU 2101) that controls the progress of the game;
a first storage means (e.g., a main ROM 2102) in which programs and table data are stored;
a second storage means (e.g., a main RAM 2103) for storing data in association with the execution of the program;
The table data includes a plurality of table data,
The predetermined table data among the plurality of table data is a data group of one-byte data collected by a plurality of bytes,
the 1-byte data of the data group is a 4-bit data table composed of upper 4-bit data and lower 4-bit data,
the game control means has a 4-bit data acquisition means for acquiring 4-bit data consisting of only the upper 4 bits or the lower 4 bits from the 1-byte data of the 4-bit data table, and storing the 4-bit data in a predetermined area of the second storage means;
The 4-bit data acquisition means
This gaming machine is characterized in that after obtaining the 1-byte data from the 4-bit data table, the 4-bit data is obtained by swapping the upper 4-bit data and the lower 4-bit data contained in the 1-byte data according to predetermined conditions.

With this configuration of the present invention, even for data groups of different types, as long as the maximum data size is the same (for example, in 4-bit units), a common data acquisition process (data expansion process) can be used. This eliminates the need to provide a separate data acquisition process for each data type, making it possible to efficiently use the program storage area of the main ROM and reduce pressure on the main ROM's capacity. Furthermore, since two 4-bit data can be stored in each 1-byte of table data, unused space can be reduced, saving on main ROM capacity. Furthermore, this common 4-bit data acquisition process makes it easy to acquire the desired 4-bit data, even in special situations where two 4-bit data are stored in one byte of data.

(A-3-2) The second embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration in the first embodiment.

By the process of executing the 4-bit data acquisition means, the position of the predetermined table data (e.g., the top address of the table data) and the selection value (e.g., an entry indicating the relative position of the data to be acquired) are set,
The 4-bit data acquisition means is configured to determine, based on the result of dividing the selected value by a specific number, the location where 1 byte data to be acquired from the specified table data is stored, and a value indicating whether or not to swap the upper 4 bits of data with the lower 4 bits of data (for example, by dividing the selected value by 2 and making a determination based on the quotient and remainder).

With this configuration of the present invention, even for data groups of different types, as long as the maximum data size is the same (for example, in 4-bit units), a common data acquisition process (data expansion process) can be used. This eliminates the need to provide a separate data acquisition process for each data type, allowing for efficient use of the main ROM's program storage area and reducing pressure on the main ROM's capacity. Furthermore, since two 4-bit data can be stored in each byte of table data, unused space can be reduced, saving main ROM capacity. Furthermore, this common 4-bit data acquisition process makes it easy to acquire the desired 4-bit data by specifying the table data position and a selection value indicating the relative position of the data to be acquired, even in special situations where two 4-bit data are stored in one byte of data.

(A-3-3) The third embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration in the second embodiment.

The 4-bit data acquisition means is configured to divide the selected value by 2 to calculate a quotient and remainder, and to determine the position of the 1 byte of data to be acquired by adding a relative position based on the quotient to the position of the specified table data, and to determine whether to swap the upper 4 bits of data and the lower 4 bits of data depending on whether the remainder is odd or even.

With this configuration of the present invention, even for data groups of different types, as long as the maximum data size is the same (for example, in 4-bit units), a common data acquisition process (data expansion process) can be used. This eliminates the need to provide a separate data acquisition process for each data type, allowing for efficient use of the main ROM's program storage area and reducing pressure on the main ROM's capacity. Furthermore, since two 4-bit data can be stored in each byte of table data, unused space can be reduced, saving main ROM capacity. Furthermore, this common 4-bit data acquisition process makes it easy to acquire the desired 4-bit data by specifying the table data position and a selection value indicating the relative position of the data to be acquired, even in special situations where two 4-bit data are stored in one byte of data.

(A-3-4) The invention according to the fourth embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration in the first embodiment.
One byte of data in the 4-bit data table is generated by multiplying the 4-bit data stored in the upper 4 bits by "10"H, shifting it by 4 bits, and then adding it to the 4-bit data stored in the lower 4 bits.

With this configuration of the present invention, even for data groups of different types, as long as the maximum data size is the same (for example, in 4-bit units), a common data acquisition process (data expansion process) can be used. This eliminates the need to provide a separate data acquisition process for each data type, allowing for efficient use of the main ROM's program storage area and reducing pressure on the main ROM's capacity. Furthermore, since two 4-bit data can be stored in each byte of table data, unused space can be reduced, saving main ROM capacity. Furthermore, this common 4-bit data acquisition process makes it easy to acquire the desired 4-bit data by specifying the table data position and a selection value indicating the relative position of the data to be acquired, even in special situations where two 4-bit data are stored in one byte of data.

(A-3-5) The fifth embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration in the first embodiment.

the 1-byte data of the data group is a 2-bit data table configured of data in 2-bit units,
the game control means has a 2-bit data acquisition means for acquiring 2-bit data from the 1-byte data of the 2-bit data table and storing the 2-bit data in a predetermined area of the second storage means;
The 2-bit data acquisition means
After obtaining one byte of data from the two-bit data table, the two-bit data is obtained by shifting the obtained data by two bits in units according to a predetermined condition.

With this configuration of the present invention, even for data groups of different types, as long as the maximum data size is the same (for example, in 2-bit units), a common data acquisition process (data expansion process) can be used. This eliminates the need to provide a separate data acquisition process for each data type, allowing for efficient use of the main ROM's program storage area and reducing pressure on the main ROM's capacity. Furthermore, because four 2-bit data items can be stored in each byte of table data, unused space can be reduced, saving main ROM capacity. Furthermore, this common 2-bit data acquisition process makes it easy to acquire the desired 2-bit data by specifying the table data position and a selection value indicating the relative position of the data to be acquired, even in special situations where four 2-bit data items are stored in one byte of data.

(A-3-6) The sixth embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration in the fifth embodiment.

The position and selection value of the predetermined table data are set by the process of executing the 2-bit data acquisition means,
The 2-bit data acquisition means is configured to determine the location where the 1-byte data to be acquired from the specified table data is stored and the number of 2-bit shifts based on the result of dividing the selected value by a specific number.

With this configuration of the present invention, even for data groups of different types, as long as the maximum data size is the same (for example, in 2-bit units), a common data acquisition process (data expansion process) can be used. This eliminates the need to provide a separate data acquisition process for each data type, allowing for efficient use of the main ROM's program storage area and reducing pressure on the main ROM's capacity. Furthermore, because four 2-bit data items can be stored in each byte of table data, unused space can be reduced, saving main ROM capacity. Furthermore, this common 2-bit data acquisition process makes it easy to acquire the desired 2-bit data by specifying the table data position and a selection value indicating the relative position of the data to be acquired, even in special situations where four 2-bit data items are stored in one byte of data.

(A-3-7) The seventh embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration in the sixth embodiment.

The 2-bit data acquisition means is configured to divide the selected value by 4 to calculate a quotient and remainder, add a relative position based on the quotient to the position of the specified table data to determine the position of the 1-byte data to be acquired, and then determine the number of 2-bit shifts based on the remainder.

With this configuration of the present invention, even for data groups of different types, as long as the maximum data size is the same (for example, in 2-bit units), a common data acquisition process (data expansion process) can be used. This eliminates the need to provide a separate data acquisition process for each data type, allowing for efficient use of the main ROM's program storage area and reducing pressure on the main ROM's capacity. Furthermore, because four 2-bit data items can be stored in each byte of table data, unused space can be reduced, saving main ROM capacity. Furthermore, this common 2-bit data acquisition process makes it easy to acquire the desired 2-bit data by specifying the table data position and a selection value indicating the relative position of the data to be acquired, even in special situations where four 2-bit data items are stored in one byte of data.

(A-3-8) The eighth embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration in the fifth embodiment.

One byte of data in the 2-bit data table is generated by multiplying the 2-bit data stored in the first 2 bits by "40"H, multiplying the 2-bit data stored in the second 2 bits by "10"H, and multiplying the third 2-bit data by "4"H to shift each of the 2-bit data, and then adding the shifted 2-bit data to the 2-bit data stored in the fourth 2 bits.

With this configuration of the present invention, even for data groups of different types, as long as the maximum data size is the same (for example, in 2-bit units), a common data acquisition process (data expansion process) can be used. This eliminates the need to provide a separate data acquisition process for each data type, allowing for efficient use of the main ROM's program storage area and reducing pressure on the main ROM's capacity. Furthermore, because four 2-bit data items can be stored in each byte of table data, unused space can be reduced, saving main ROM capacity. Furthermore, this common 2-bit data acquisition process makes it easy to acquire the desired 2-bit data by specifying the table data position and a selection value indicating the relative position of the data to be acquired, even in special situations where four 2-bit data items are stored in one byte of data.

(A-3-9) The ninth embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration in its first embodiment.

Further provided is a setting switch (for example, a setting key switch) for changing or confirming a setting value;
The second storage means is composed of a third storage means (e.g., a RAM area 2203a within the used area) for storing data directly related to the progress of the game, and a fourth storage means (e.g., a RAM area 2203b outside the used area) for storing data not directly related to the progress of the game,
The game control means
Range calculation means for performing calculation within a specific address range of the second storage means and storing the calculation result in a calculation result storage area (for example, a CRC circuit 2107c for performing CRC calculation processing in a CRC generation process (outside the use area) called by the power interruption process shown in FIG. 199, and a main CPU 2101 for storing the CRC value of the calculation result in a CRC value storage area 2103e);
Range comparison means (for example, the main CPU 2101 that compares CRC values in the CRC check process (outside the use area) shown in FIG. 181) that performs calculation within a specific address range of the second storage means and compares the calculation result with the calculation result stored in the calculation result storage area;
an initialization means for initializing the second storage means (for example, a main CPU 2101 for executing initialization processing such as the designated RAM initialization processing shown in FIG. 185 );
The game control means
determining a start position of the third storage means in accordance with the state of the setting switch when power is turned on and the result of the comparison by the range comparison means;
determining a start position of the fourth storage means based on the determined start position of the third storage means;
The initialization means is configured to initialize the third storage means based on the determined start position of the third storage means, and to initialize the fourth storage means based on the determined start position of the fourth storage means.

With this configuration of the present invention, the state of the gaming machine is not judged when determining the RAM initialization range for the out-of-use work area, which allows for a corresponding reduction in program size and reduces pressure on the capacity of the main ROM's program area. Furthermore, this configuration allows for a simpler main program structure and description, improving the development efficiency and maintainability of the program.

(A-3-10) The tenth embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration in the ninth embodiment.

The final location to be initialized (for example, the clear end address shown in FIG. 214) is configured to be set one for each of the third storage means and the fourth storage means, regardless of the start location of the third storage means and the start location of the fourth storage means.

With this configuration of the present invention, the state of the gaming machine is not judged when determining the RAM initialization range for the out-of-use work area, which allows for a corresponding reduction in program size and reduces pressure on the capacity of the main ROM's program area. Furthermore, this configuration allows for a simpler main program structure and description, improving the development efficiency and maintainability of the program.

(A-3-11) The invention according to the eleventh embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration in the ninth embodiment.

The initialization means is configured to determine the starting position of the fourth storage means using correspondence data indicating the correspondence between the lower address of the starting position of the third storage means and the address of the starting position of the fourth storage means.

With this configuration of the present invention, the RAM initialization range for the out-of-use work area is determined without determining the state of the gaming machine, which allows for a corresponding reduction in program size and reduces pressure on the capacity of the main ROM's program area. Furthermore, this configuration allows for a simpler main program structure and description, improving the development efficiency and maintainability of the program. Furthermore, because the RAM initialization range for the out-of-use work area is determined based on part of the RAM initialization start address for the in-use work area, the RAM clearing process for the out-of-use work area can be completely independent, making it easy to create and modify programs that comply with other standards.

According to the present invention, even if the data groups are of different types, as long as the maximum data size is the same (for example, 4-bit units or 2-bit units), a common data acquisition process (data expansion process) can be used. This eliminates the need to provide a separate data acquisition process for each data type, and allows for efficient use of the program storage area in the main ROM, reducing pressure on the main ROM's capacity.

In addition, according to the present invention, multiple data can be stored in the table's data storage unit, reducing unused space and saving main ROM capacity. Furthermore, this common data retrieval process makes it easy to retrieve desired data even in special situations where multiple data are stored in the table's data storage unit (e.g., 1-byte data).

In addition, according to the present invention, the RAM initialization range for the out-of-use work area is determined based on the RAM initialization range for the in-use work area, eliminating the need to determine the RAM initialization range for each area, thereby reducing the program size and alleviating pressure on the program area capacity of the main ROM. Furthermore, the above-described configuration allows for a simpler main program structure and description, improving the development efficiency and maintainability of the program. Furthermore, because the RAM initialization range for the out-of-use work area is determined based on part of the RAM initialization start address for the in-use work area, the RAM clearing process for the out-of-use work area can be completely independent, making it easy to create and modify programs that comply with other standards.

<Appendix A-4>
[0003] Conventionally, a gaming machine has been known that is a pachislot machine that includes a plurality of reels each having a plurality of symbols arranged on its periphery, a plurality of display windows corresponding to each reel and displaying some of the symbols arranged on the periphery of each reel so that the player can see them, a start switch that outputs a signal requesting the start of rotation of each reel when it detects an operation by the player (hereinafter referred to as a "start operation"), provided that medals have been inserted, a stop switch that outputs a signal requesting the stop of rotation of the reel according to the type of reel when it detects an operation by the player (hereinafter referred to as a "stop operation"), and a control unit that controls the operation of a stepping motor based on the signals output by the start switch and the stop switch to rotate and stop each reel. Typically, in such pachislot machines, a combination of symbols displayed in the display windows determines whether a prize has been won, and if a prize has been won, medals are paid out from a hopper and stored in a medal receiving unit.

In gaming machines like this, technology has been disclosed in which multiple tables are stored in the main ROM and the control processing program retrieves data from those tables (for example, JP 2021-079129 A).

However, when each control processing program in the main control unit retrieves data from the corresponding table, it is common to provide a separate process for retrieving the data. However, as the number of control processes and table types increases, the number of processes for retrieving data also increases, which puts pressure on the capacity of the main ROM that stores the control processing programs.

In addition, while it is common to store data in tables in units of one byte, there are many cases where there are few data patterns and one byte of capacity is not actually required when storing data in a table. In such cases, there is a large amount of unused space, which puts pressure on the capacity of the main ROM.

The present invention was made in consideration of the above points, and aims to provide a gaming machine that does not require separate data acquisition processes for each type of data, but instead uses a common data acquisition process to efficiently use the program storage area of the main ROM, thereby reducing pressure on the main ROM's capacity.

The present invention also aims to provide a gaming machine that can store multiple data items in a table's data storage unit, reducing unused space and easing pressure on the main ROM capacity. Furthermore, the above-mentioned common data acquisition process can expand multiple data items when they are stored in a table's data storage unit.

In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machine.
(A-4-1) The invention according to the first embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration.

A game control means (e.g., a main CPU 2101) that controls the progress of the game;
a first storage means (e.g., a main ROM 2102) in which programs and table data are stored;
a second storage means (e.g., a main RAM 2103) for storing data in association with the execution of the program;
The table data includes a plurality of table data,
The predetermined table data among the plurality of table data is a data group of one-byte data collected by a plurality of bytes,
the 1-byte data of the data group is a 2-bit data table configured of data in 2-bit units,
the game control means has a 2-bit data acquisition means for acquiring 2-bit data from the 1-byte data of the 2-bit data table and storing the 2-bit data in a predetermined area of the second storage means;
The 2-bit data acquisition means
A gaming machine characterized in that after obtaining one byte of data from the 2-bit data table, the 2-bit data is obtained by shifting the obtained data by 2 bits in units according to predetermined conditions.

With this configuration of the present invention, even for data groups of different types, as long as the maximum data size is the same (for example, in 2-bit units), a common data acquisition process (data expansion process) can be used. This eliminates the need to provide a separate data acquisition process for each data type, making it possible to efficiently use the program storage area of the main ROM and reduce pressure on the main ROM's capacity. Furthermore, because four 2-bit data items can be stored in each byte of table data, unused space can be reduced, saving on main ROM capacity. Furthermore, this common 2-bit data acquisition process makes it easy to acquire the desired 2-bit data, even in special situations where four 2-bit data items are stored in one byte of data.

(A-4-2) The second embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration in the first embodiment.

By the process of executing the 2-bit data acquisition means, the position of the predetermined table data (e.g., the top address of the table data) and the selection value (e.g., an entry indicating the relative position of the data to be acquired) are set,
The 2-bit data acquisition means is configured to determine the location where the 1-byte data to be acquired from the specified table data is stored and the number of 2-bit shifts based on the result of dividing the selected value by a specific number (for example, by dividing the selected value by 4 and determining the number based on the quotient and remainder).

With this configuration of the present invention, even for data groups of different types, as long as the maximum data size is the same (for example, in 2-bit units), a common data acquisition process (data expansion process) can be used. This eliminates the need to provide a separate data acquisition process for each data type, allowing for efficient use of the main ROM's program storage area and reducing pressure on the main ROM's capacity. Furthermore, because four 2-bit data items can be stored in each byte of table data, unused space can be reduced, saving main ROM capacity. Furthermore, this common 2-bit data acquisition process makes it easy to acquire the desired 2-bit data by specifying the table data position and a selection value indicating the relative position of the data to be acquired, even in special situations where four 2-bit data items are stored in one byte of data.

(A-4-3) The third embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration in the second embodiment.

The 2-bit data acquisition means is configured to divide the selected value by 4 to calculate a quotient and remainder, and to determine the position of the 1-byte data to be acquired by adding a relative position based on the quotient to the position of the specified table data, and to determine the number of 2-bit shifts based on the remainder.

With this configuration of the present invention, even for data groups of different types, as long as the maximum data size is the same (for example, in 2-bit units), a common data acquisition process (data expansion process) can be used. This eliminates the need to provide a separate data acquisition process for each data type, allowing for efficient use of the main ROM's program storage area and reducing pressure on the main ROM's capacity. Furthermore, because four 2-bit data items can be stored in each byte of table data, unused space can be reduced, saving main ROM capacity. Furthermore, this common 2-bit data acquisition process makes it easy to acquire the desired 2-bit data by specifying the table data position and a selection value indicating the relative position of the data to be acquired, even in special situations where four 2-bit data items are stored in one byte of data.

(A-4-4) The fourth embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration in the first embodiment.

One byte of data in the 2-bit data table is generated by multiplying the 2-bit data stored in the first 2 bits by "40"H, multiplying the 2-bit data stored in the second 2 bits by "10"H, and multiplying the third 2-bit data by "4"H to shift each of the 2-bit data, and then adding the shifted 2-bit data to the 2-bit data stored in the fourth 2 bits.

With this configuration of the present invention, even for data groups of different types, as long as the maximum data size is the same (for example, in 2-bit units), a common data acquisition process (data expansion process) can be used. This eliminates the need to provide a separate data acquisition process for each data type, allowing for efficient use of the main ROM's program storage area and reducing pressure on the main ROM's capacity. Furthermore, because four 2-bit data items can be stored in each byte of table data, unused space can be reduced, saving main ROM capacity. Furthermore, this common 2-bit data acquisition process makes it easy to acquire the desired 2-bit data by specifying the table data position and a selection value indicating the relative position of the data to be acquired, even in special situations where four 2-bit data items are stored in one byte of data.

(A-4-5) The fifth embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration in the first embodiment.

a payout means (e.g., a hopper device) for paying out game media according to the progress of a game;
and a settlement means (e.g., a settlement button) that can be pressed by a player to perform a settlement operation;
The game control means
a game value input means for detecting the game medium and inputting the game value (for example, a main CPU 2101 for executing a process for detecting an operation of inserting medals to bet, or a process for detecting an operation of betting credited medals by operating a bet button);
A winning payout means (for example, a main CPU 2101 that executes the medal payout/replay operation process shown in FIG. 191) that performs a winning payout process for paying out game media from the payout means in accordance with the winning combination;
a settlement processing means (for example, the main CPU 2101 that executes the settlement execution process shown in FIG. 192) that performs a settlement process for paying out game media from the payout means based on the depression of the settlement means;
and a payout processing means (for example, a main CPU 2101 that executes the medal payout and replay operation process shown in FIG. 191 ) that causes the payout means to perform a payout operation and performs a payout process.
The game value input means is capable of inputting a game value during a first period (for example, a unit game start waiting state (a period during which medals can be accepted and bets can be made, and before a start operation is performed using a start lever)),
The winning payout means is capable of performing the winning payout process during a second period that does not overlap with the first period (for example, the period from the end of a unit game until payout is completed),
the settlement processing means is capable of performing the settlement processing when the settlement means is pressed during the first period;
The payout processing means
The payout process can be executed when the winning payout process is performed by the winning payout means and when the settlement process is performed by the settlement process means,
When the prize payout process is performed by the prize payout means and when the settlement process is performed by the settlement processing means, different parameters (for example, the address of the corresponding medal counter) are assigned when the payout process is executed.

With this configuration of the present invention, a common payout process is used when the winning payout process or the settlement process is performed, thereby reducing pressure on the program area capacity of the main ROM. Furthermore, by using this common payout process, the program structure and description can be made simpler, improving the development efficiency and maintainability of the program.

(A-4-6) The sixth embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration in the fifth embodiment.

When the winning payout process is performed by the winning payout process, the parameters assigned when the payout process is executed are configured to be information relating to the address of a payout number storage area (e.g., a payout number counter storage area) that stores a value based on the number of gaming media paid out according to the winning combination.

With this configuration of the present invention, a common payout process is used when the winning payout process or the settlement process is performed, thereby reducing pressure on the program area capacity of the main ROM. Furthermore, by using this common payout process, the program structure and description can be made simpler, improving the development efficiency and maintainability of the program.

(A-4-7) The seventh embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration in the first embodiment.

Further provided is a setting switch (for example, a setting key switch) for changing or confirming a setting value;
The second storage means is composed of a third storage means (e.g., a RAM area 2203a within the used area) for storing data directly related to the progress of the game, and a fourth storage means (e.g., a RAM area 2203b outside the used area) for storing data not directly related to the progress of the game,
The game control means
Range calculation means for performing calculation within a specific address range of the second storage means and storing the calculation result in a calculation result storage area (for example, a CRC circuit 2107c for performing CRC calculation processing in a CRC generation process (outside the use area) called by the power interruption process shown in FIG. 199, and a main CPU 2101 for storing the CRC value of the calculation result in a CRC value storage area 2103e);
Range comparison means (for example, the main CPU 2101 that compares CRC values in the CRC check process (outside the use area) shown in FIG. 181) that performs calculation within a specific address range of the second storage means and compares the calculation result with the calculation result stored in the calculation result storage area;
an initialization means for initializing the second storage means (for example, a main CPU 2101 for executing initialization processing such as the designated RAM initialization processing shown in FIG. 185 );
The game control means
determining a start position of the third storage means in accordance with the state of the setting switch when power is turned on and the result of the comparison by the range comparison means;
determining a start position of the fourth storage means based on the determined start position of the third storage means;
The initialization means is configured to initialize the third storage means based on the determined start position of the third storage means, and to initialize the fourth storage means based on the determined start position of the fourth storage means.

With this configuration of the present invention, the state of the gaming machine is not judged when determining the RAM initialization range for the out-of-use work area, which allows for a corresponding reduction in program size and reduces pressure on the capacity of the main ROM's program area. Furthermore, this configuration allows for a simpler main program structure and description, improving the development efficiency and maintainability of the program.

(A-4-8) The eighth embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration in the first embodiment.

a start operation detection means (e.g., a start lever) for detecting a start operation by a player;
An internal lottery combination determination means (main CPU 2101 that executes the internal lottery process called in the main process shown in FIG. 179 ) that determines an internal lottery combination with a predetermined probability based on the detection of the start operation by the start operation detection means;
A variable display means includes a plurality of display columns and displays the symbols provided in each display column in a variable manner (a main CPU 2101 that executes a reel rotation start process called in the main process shown in FIG. 179 );
A stop operation detection means (main CPU 2101 that executes the reel stop control process called in the main process shown in FIG. 179) that detects a stop operation by a player (for example, pressing a stop button),
A stop control means (main CPU 2101 that executes a reel stop control process called in the main process shown in FIG. 179) that stops the variable display of the symbols based on the determination result of the internal winning combination determination means and the detection of a stop operation by the stop operation detection means,
The variation display of the variation display means includes a game variation (normal game) for awarding a game value and a pseudo variation (pseudo game) for awarding no game value,
The stop control means executes a control process for stopping the variable display of the symbols for the game variation,
The game control means
A pseudo stop control means for executing a control process to stop the display of the symbol variation in the pseudo variation;
a stop operation detection input monitoring means (for example, a main CPU 2101 that executes a stop button input monitoring process shown in FIG. 215 ) for determining whether or not the detection of the stop operation by the stop operation detection means is valid;
The stop control means and the pseudo stop control means are each configured to execute the stop operation detection input monitoring means to determine whether the stop operation is valid or not (executing common processing in normal play and pseudo play (i.e., for example, the stop button input monitoring processing shown in Figure 215)).

This configuration of the present invention allows for some commonality between normal gameplay and simulated gameplay processing, thereby reducing pressure on the program area capacity of the main ROM. Furthermore, by sharing some commonality between normal gameplay and simulated gameplay processing, the present invention allows for simpler program structure and description, improving the development efficiency and maintainability of the program.

(A-4-9) The ninth embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration in its first embodiment.

the second storage means has a first storage area (common information storage area) for storing a group of information relating to games, and a second storage area (common information backup storage area) located at a position different from the first storage area,
The game control means
a saving means (for example, the main CPU 2101 that executes the common information backup generation process of FIG. 216) that saves all of the information stored in the first storage area to the second storage area when a predetermined condition is met;
a restoring means (for example, a main CPU 2101 that executes the common information restoring process of FIG. 217) that restores the information saved in the second storage area to the first storage area when the predetermined condition and a specific condition (for example, a penalty condition) are met,
the saving means and the restoring means are common programs except for some processes,
the saving means and the restoring means set the leading address of the first storage area in a first register (e.g., a DE register, an HL register) capable of setting two bytes of data, and set the leading address of the second storage area in a second register (e.g., an HL register, an DE register) capable of setting two bytes of data;
Transferring information stored in the source address set in the first register from the source address set in the second register to the destination address set in the second register in response to a transfer command;
When the processing by the return means is executed, the source address set in the first register and the destination address set in the second register are swapped before the transfer instruction is executed.

This configuration of the present invention allows for a partial sharing of the backup restoration process, which restores specified information to the information before the game, and the backup process, which backs up that specified information, thereby reducing pressure on the program area capacity of the main ROM. Furthermore, by promoting program sharing in this way, the program structure and description can be made simpler, improving the development efficiency and maintainability of the program.

(A-4-10) The tenth embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration in the ninth embodiment.

a game start instruction means (for example, a start lever) by which a player instructs the start of a game;
a variable display means (for example, each reel) capable of variably displaying a plurality of pieces of identification information in response to operation of the game start instruction means;
A role determination means capable of determining a winning role (for example, a main CPU 2101 that executes the internal lottery process shown in FIG. 188 );
a stop operation detection means (e.g., a stop button and a stop switch) capable of detecting a stop operation that stops the variable display of the variable display means;
A stop control means (for example, a main CPU 2101 that executes the reel stop control process shown in FIG. 179) that can stop the variable display of the variable display means and derive a stop display based on the winning combination determined by the combination determination means and the stop operation mode detected by the stop operation detection means;
A winning means (for example, the main CPU 2101 that executes the process of step S2013 in FIG. 179 ) that can generate a winning result corresponding to the stopped display;
and a notification means (for example, an indication monitor or a main display device) capable of notifying an advantageous stop operation mode.
When the game start instruction means is operated by the player,
The saving means saves information (e.g., various information) stored in the first storage area and related to an advantageous state (e.g., an AT state) in which notification by the notification means can be executed, into the second storage area (e.g., processing corresponding to step S4602 in FIG. 172 ),
The game state related processing means for updating the information related to the advantageous state updates the information stored in the first storage area (for example, processing corresponding to step S4603, step S4604 in FIG. 172, step S4622 in FIG. 173, etc.),
When the game start instruction means is operated by the player and a predetermined penalty condition is met, the return means is configured to return the information saved in the second storage area to the first storage area (for example, processing corresponding to step S4624 in Figure 173).

This configuration of the present invention allows for a partial sharing of the backup restoration process, which restores specified information to the information before the game, and the backup process, which backs up that specified information, thereby reducing pressure on the program area capacity of the main ROM. Furthermore, by promoting program sharing in this way, the program structure and description can be made simpler, improving the development efficiency and maintainability of the program.

(A-4-11) The invention according to the eleventh embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration in the ninth embodiment.

The specific condition is a penalty condition that cancels a predetermined advantageous gaming state,
The penalty conditions are configured to be conditions based on the game state and a predetermined operation by the player.

This configuration of the present invention allows for a partial sharing of the backup restoration process, which restores specified information to the information before the game, and the backup process, which backs up that specified information, thereby reducing pressure on the program area capacity of the main ROM. Furthermore, by promoting program sharing in this way, the program structure and description can be made simpler, improving the development efficiency and maintainability of the program.

According to the present invention, even if the data groups are of different types, as long as the maximum data size is the same (for example, in 2-bit units), a common data acquisition process (data expansion process) can be used. This eliminates the need to provide a separate data acquisition process for each data type, and allows for efficient use of the program storage area in the main ROM, reducing pressure on the main ROM's capacity.

Furthermore, according to the present invention, multiple data can be stored in the data storage unit of a table, reducing unused space and saving main ROM capacity. Furthermore, this common data retrieval process makes it easy to retrieve desired data even in special situations where multiple data are stored in the data storage unit of a table (for example, 1 byte of data).

With this configuration of the present invention, a common payout process is used when the winning payout process or the settlement process is performed, thereby reducing pressure on the program area capacity of the main ROM. Furthermore, by using this common payout process, the program structure and description can be made simpler, improving the development efficiency and maintainability of the program.

With this configuration of the present invention, the state of the gaming machine is not judged when determining the RAM initialization range for the out-of-use work area, which allows for a corresponding reduction in program size and reduces pressure on the capacity of the main ROM's program area. Furthermore, this configuration allows for a simpler main program structure and description, improving the development efficiency and maintainability of the program.

This configuration of the present invention allows for some commonality between normal gameplay and simulated gameplay processing, thereby reducing pressure on the program area capacity of the main ROM. Furthermore, by sharing some commonality between normal gameplay and simulated gameplay processing, the present invention allows for simpler program structure and description, improving the development efficiency and maintainability of the program.

This configuration of the present invention allows for a partial sharing of the backup restoration process, which restores specified information to the information before the game, and the backup process, which backs up that specified information, thereby reducing pressure on the program area capacity of the main ROM. Furthermore, by promoting program sharing in this way, the program structure and description can be made simpler, improving the development efficiency and maintainability of the program.

<Appendix A-5>
[0003] Conventionally, a gaming machine has been known that is a pachislot machine that includes a plurality of reels each having a plurality of symbols arranged on its periphery, a plurality of display windows corresponding to each reel and displaying some of the symbols arranged on the periphery of each reel so that the player can see them, a start switch that outputs a signal requesting the start of rotation of each reel when it detects an operation by the player (hereinafter referred to as a "start operation"), provided that medals have been inserted, a stop switch that outputs a signal requesting the stop of rotation of the reel depending on the type of reel when it detects an operation by the player (hereinafter referred to as a "stop operation"), and a control unit that controls the operation of a stepping motor based on the signals output by the start switch and the stop switch to rotate and stop each reel. Typically, in such pachislot machines, a combination of symbols displayed in the display windows determines whether a prize has been won, and if a prize has been won, medals are paid out from a hopper and stored in a medal receiving unit.

Among such gaming machines, there is one that performs separate processes: the settlement process, which is executed when the settlement button is pressed while waiting for a unit game to start, and the payout process, which is executed when the unit game ends (for example, JP 2019-170605 A).

When it comes to paying out gaming media, there is no difference between the settlement process and the payout process, and although there are common processing parts, it is common for the settlement process and the payout process to be separate processes, as in the gaming machine mentioned above, and the fact that each of these separate processes with common processing parts is written is one of the factors that put pressure on the program area of the main ROM.

The present invention was made in consideration of the above points, and aims to provide a gaming machine that standardizes the pressing of the settlement button while waiting for a unit game to start and the payout process for gaming media that is executed when a unit game ends, thereby reducing pressure on the program area capacity of the main ROM.

Another object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can reduce pressure on the capacity of the main ROM's program area by setting the lower address of the target counter when executing the gaming media payout process, which is executed when the settlement button is pressed or when a unit game ends.

Furthermore, by standardizing the payout process, the present invention aims to simplify the program structure and description, thereby improving the development efficiency and maintainability of the program.

In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machine.
(A-5-1) The invention according to the first embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration.

A game control means (e.g., a main CPU 2101) that controls the progress of the game;
a payout means (e.g., a hopper device) for paying out game media according to the progress of a game;
and a settlement means (e.g., a settlement button) that can be pressed by a player to perform a settlement operation;
The game control means
a game value input means for detecting the game medium and inputting the game value (for example, a main CPU 2101 for executing a process for detecting an operation of inserting medals to bet, or a process for detecting an operation of betting credited medals by operating a bet button);
A winning payout means (for example, a main CPU 2101 that executes the medal payout/replay operation process shown in FIG. 191) that performs a winning payout process for paying out game media from the payout means in accordance with the winning combination;
a settlement processing means (for example, the main CPU 2101 that executes the settlement execution process shown in FIG. 192) that performs a settlement process for paying out game media from the payout means based on the depression of the settlement means;
and a payout processing means (for example, a main CPU 2101 that executes the medal payout and replay operation process shown in FIG. 191 ) that causes the payout means to perform a payout operation and performs a payout process.
The game value input means is capable of inputting a game value during a first period (for example, a unit game start waiting state (a period during which medals can be accepted and bets can be made, and before a start operation is performed using a start lever)),
The winning payout means is capable of performing the winning payout process during a second period that does not overlap with the first period (for example, the period from the end of a unit game until payout is completed),
the settlement processing means is capable of performing the settlement processing when the settlement means is pressed during the first period;
The payout processing means
The payout process can be executed when the winning payout process is performed by the winning payout means and when the settlement process is performed by the settlement process means,
A gaming machine characterized in that different parameters (for example, the addresses of the corresponding medal counters) are assigned when the prize payout process is performed by the prize payout means and when the settlement process is performed by the settlement processing means.

With this configuration of the present invention, a common payout process is used when the winning payout process or the settlement process is performed, thereby reducing pressure on the program area capacity of the main ROM. Furthermore, by using this common payout process, the program structure and description can be made simpler, improving the development efficiency and maintainability of the program.

(A-5-2) The second embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration in the first embodiment.

When the winning payout process is performed by the winning payout process, the parameters assigned when the payout process is executed are configured to be information relating to the address of a payout number storage area (e.g., a payout number counter storage area) that stores a value based on the number of gaming media paid out according to the winning combination.

With this configuration of the present invention, a common payout process is used when the winning payout process or the settlement process is performed, thereby reducing pressure on the program area capacity of the main ROM. Furthermore, by using this common payout process, the program structure and description can be made simpler, improving the development efficiency and maintainability of the program.

(A-5-3) The third embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration in the first embodiment.

When the settlement process is performed by the settlement processing means, the payout process is configured to be executed twice for different payout operations.

With this configuration of the present invention, a common payout process is used when the winning payout process or the settlement process is performed, thereby reducing pressure on the program area capacity of the main ROM. Furthermore, by using this common payout process, the program structure and description can be made simpler, improving the development efficiency and maintainability of the program.

(A-5-4) The fourth embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration in the third embodiment.

When the settlement process is performed by the settlement process means and the payout process is executed twice,
The parameter assigned when the first payout process is executed is information relating to the address of a reserved number storage area (e.g., a credit counter storage area) in which the number of game media transferred from the number of payouts of the game media corresponding to the winning combination is stored,
The parameter assigned when executing the second payout process is configured to be information relating to the address of an input number memory area (e.g., a medal insertion counter storage area) in which the game value of the game medium detected by the game value input means is stored.
According to the configuration of the present invention, when the winning payout process or the settlement process is performed, a common payout process is used, which reduces the pressure on the capacity of the program area of the main ROM. Furthermore, by using such a common payout process, the program structure and description can be made simpler, which improves the development efficiency and maintainability of the program.

(A-5-5) The fifth embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration in the second or fourth embodiment.

The address information is configured to be part of the address of the corresponding storage area (for example, the address of the lowest byte of the 2-byte address data representing the storage location of the storage area).

With this configuration of the present invention, a common payout process is used when the winning payout process or the settlement process is performed, thereby reducing the pressure on the capacity of the main ROM's program area. Furthermore, by using this common payout process, the program structure and description can be made simpler, improving the development efficiency and maintainability of the program. Furthermore, because only a portion of the address of the corresponding memory area is set, the calling program size can be reduced accordingly, reducing the pressure on the capacity of the main ROM's program area.

(A-5-6) The sixth embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration in the fourth embodiment.

The command (e.g., a jump (JP) command) that executes the payout process when the winning payout process is performed by the winning payout process, and the command (e.g., a call (CALL) command) that executes the first payout process when the settlement process is performed by the settlement processing means, are configured to be different types of commands (they differ in whether or not they return to the calling program when the process is completed).

With this configuration of the present invention, a common payout process is used when the winning payout process or the settlement process is performed, thereby reducing pressure on the program area capacity of the main ROM. Furthermore, by using this common payout process, the program structure and description can be made simpler, improving the development efficiency and maintainability of the program.

(A-5-7) The seventh embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration in the sixth embodiment.

When the winning payout process is performed by the winning payout process, the call command for executing the payout process is a command that does not return to the next step of the call command that called the payout process (for example, a jump (JP) command),
When the settlement process is performed by the settlement processing means, the instruction to execute the first payout process is configured to be an instruction (e.g., a CALL instruction) to return to the next step of the call instruction that called the payout process.

With this configuration of the present invention, a common payout process is used when the winning payout process or the settlement process is performed, thereby reducing pressure on the program area capacity of the main ROM. Furthermore, by using this common payout process, the program structure and description can be made simpler, improving the development efficiency and maintainability of the program.

(A-5-8) The eighth embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration in the third embodiment.

When the settlement process is performed by the settlement process means and the payout process is executed twice,
When the payout process is executed, different parameters are assigned (for example, in the first payout process, address information of the credit counter storage area is assigned, and in the second payout process, address information of the medal insertion counter storage area is assigned).

With this configuration of the present invention, a common payout process is used when settlement processing is performed, thereby reducing pressure on the program area capacity of the main ROM. Furthermore, by using this common payout process, the program structure and description can be made simpler, improving the development efficiency and maintainability of the program.

(A-5-9) The ninth embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration in the fifth embodiment.

The payout processing means is configured to identify a storage area by combining a predetermined upper address with the lower address received as a parameter, and to perform payout processing based on the payout number stored in the storage area.

With this configuration of the present invention, a common payout process is used when the winning payout process or the settlement process is performed, thereby reducing pressure on the program area capacity of the main ROM. Furthermore, by using this common payout process, the program structure and description can be made simpler, improving the development efficiency and maintainability of the program.

(A-5-10) The tenth embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration in the eighth embodiment.

the program for executing the settlement processing means includes a program for executing the payout processing,
When the payout process is executed twice, the program range relating to the same payout process is controlled to be called.

With this configuration of the present invention, a common payout process is used when the winning payout process or the settlement process is performed, thereby reducing pressure on the program area capacity of the main ROM. Furthermore, by using this common payout process, the program structure and description can be made simpler, improving the development efficiency and maintainability of the program.

(A-5-11) The invention according to the eleventh embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration in the tenth embodiment.

The winning payout process is configured to be controlled so that when the payout process is executed, the program range related to the payout process is called.

With this configuration of the present invention, a common payout process is used when the winning payout process or the settlement process is performed, thereby reducing pressure on the program area capacity of the main ROM. Furthermore, by using this common payout process, the program structure and description can be made simpler, improving the development efficiency and maintainability of the program.

According to the present invention, by standardizing the payout process for gaming media that is executed when the settlement button is pressed or when a unit game ends, it is possible to reduce pressure on the capacity of the main ROM's program area.

Furthermore, according to the present invention, when the game media payout process is executed when the settlement button is pressed or when a unit game ends, the lower address of the target counter is set, which reduces the size of the calling program and reduces pressure on the program area capacity of the main ROM.

Furthermore, according to the present invention, by standardizing the payout process, the program structure and description can be made simpler, improving the development efficiency and maintainability of the program.

<Appendix A-6>
[0003] Conventionally, a gaming machine has been known that is a pachislot machine that includes a plurality of reels each having a plurality of symbols arranged on its periphery, a plurality of display windows corresponding to each reel and displaying some of the symbols arranged on the periphery of each reel so that the player can see them, a start switch that outputs a signal requesting the start of rotation of each reel when it detects an operation by the player (hereinafter referred to as a "start operation"), provided that medals have been inserted, a stop switch that outputs a signal requesting the stop of rotation of the reel according to the type of reel when it detects an operation by the player (hereinafter referred to as a "stop operation"), and a control unit that controls the operation of a stepping motor based on the signals output by the start switch and the stop switch to rotate and stop each reel. Typically, in such pachislot machines, a combination of symbols displayed in the display windows determines whether a prize has been won, and if a prize has been won, medals are paid out from a hopper and stored in a medal receiving unit.

Among such gaming machines, there is one that performs initialization from multiple starting addresses depending on the conditions of the game control working area (for example, JP 2019-141455 A).

In gaming machines like the one described above, only the game control work area is initialized, but nowadays, it is necessary to initialize the area within the main RAM's used area, which is the game control work area, and the area outside the main RAM's used area, which is not the game control work area, under the same conditions. Due to rules unique to the gaming machine industry, programs must be created according to the conditions for both the used area and the outside area, and stored in the main ROM. However, preparing such programs separately is one factor that puts pressure on the main ROM's program area, and also leads to the main program becoming more complicated.

The present invention was made in consideration of the above points, and aims to provide a gaming machine equipped with a smaller program that can initialize the main RAM for both the in-use area work area and the out-of-use area work area.

The present invention also aims to simplify the structure and description of the main program, thereby improving the development efficiency and maintainability of the program.

The present invention also aims to make the RAM clearing process for the out-of-use work area completely independent from the RAM clearing process for the in-use work area, making it easier to create and modify programs that comply with other standards.

In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machine.
(A-6-1) The invention according to the first embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration.

a game control means that implements a microprocessor (e.g., microprocessor 2100) including an arithmetic circuit (e.g., main CPU 2101), a read memory (e.g., main ROM 2102), and a read/write memory (e.g., main RAM 2103) and controls the progress of the game;
a setting switch (e.g., a key switch for setting) provided for changing or confirming a setting value;
The game control means
Range calculation means for performing calculation within a specific address range of the read-write memory and storing the calculation result in a calculation result storage area outside the specific address range of the read-write memory (for example, a CRC circuit 2107c for performing CRC calculation processing in a CRC generation process (outside the area in use) called by the power interruption process shown in FIG. 199, and a main CPU 2101 for storing the CRC value of the calculation result in a CRC value storage area 2103e);
a range comparison means (for example, the main CPU 2101 that compares CRC values in the CRC check process (outside the use area) shown in FIG. 181) that performs calculations within a specific address range of the read/write memory and compares the calculation results with the calculation results stored in the calculation result storage area;
An initialization means for initializing the read/write memory (for example, the main CPU 2101 for executing initialization processing such as the designated RAM initialization processing shown in FIG. 185);
a main processing means for performing main processing in accordance with the progress of a game (for example, a main CPU 2101 for executing the main processing shown in FIG. 179 );
The read/write memory is composed of a first storage means (e.g., a RAM area 2203a in the used area) for storing data directly related to the progress of the game, and a second storage means (e.g., a RAM area 2203b outside the used area) for storing data not directly related to the progress of the game,
The plurality of ranges are:
a first start address (e.g., a clear address when a RAM error occurs) of the first storage means when the setting switch is in an on state and a mismatch is detected by the range comparison means when the power is turned on;
a second start address (e.g., a clear address at the time of setting change) of the first storage means when the setting switch is in an on state at power-on and no matching mismatch is detected by the range matching means;
A third start position (for example, a clear address at the end of one game) of the first storage means when the unit game of the main processing means has ended and the next unit game has not yet started is set.
the initialization start positions of the first storage means, including the first start position, the second start position, and the third start position, are represented by a 2-byte address;
The initialization means
storing a 2-byte address value relating to one start position selected from the first start position, the second start position, or the third start position in a storage determination area;
determining an initialization start position of the second storage means according to the value of the lower address of the address stored in the storage determination area;
With respect to the first storage means, initialization is performed from an initialization start position of the first storage means, which is one of the first start position, the second start position, and the third start position (for example, initialization of RAM in the used area in step S2151 shown in FIG. 185 );
A gaming machine (e.g., pachislot machine 2001) characterized in that initialization is performed from the determined initialization start position of the second storage means (e.g., RAM initialization processing outside the used area (outside the used area) of step S2150 shown in FIG. 185) with respect to the second storage means.

With this configuration of the present invention, the RAM initialization range for the out-of-use work area is determined without determining the state of the gaming machine, which allows for a corresponding reduction in program size and reduces pressure on the capacity of the main ROM's program area. Furthermore, this configuration allows for a simpler main program structure and description, improving the development efficiency and maintainability of the program. Furthermore, because the RAM initialization range for the out-of-use work area is determined based on part of the RAM initialization start address for the in-use work area, the RAM clearing process for the out-of-use work area can be completely independent, making it easy to create and modify programs that comply with other standards.

(A-6-2) The second embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration in the first embodiment.

The final location to be initialized (for example, the clear end address shown in FIG. 214) is configured to be set one for each of the first storage means and the second storage means, regardless of the initialization start location of the first storage means and the initialization start location of the second storage means.

With this configuration of the present invention, the RAM initialization range for the out-of-use work area is determined without determining the state of the gaming machine, which allows for a corresponding reduction in program size and reduces pressure on the capacity of the main ROM's program area. Furthermore, this configuration allows for a simpler main program structure and description, improving the development efficiency and maintainability of the program. Furthermore, because the RAM initialization range for the out-of-use work area is determined based on part of the RAM initialization start address for the in-use work area, the RAM clearing process for the out-of-use work area can be completely independent, making it easy to create and modify programs that comply with other standards.

(A-6-3) The third embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration in the first embodiment.

the second storage means stores correspondence data indicating a correspondence relationship between a lower address of an initialization start position of the first storage means and an address of an initialization start position of the second storage means;
The initialization means is configured to use the correspondence data to determine an initialization start position of the second storage means that corresponds to the value of the lower address stored in the storage determination area.

With this configuration of the present invention, the RAM initialization range for the out-of-use work area is determined without determining the state of the gaming machine, which allows for a corresponding reduction in program size and reduces pressure on the capacity of the main ROM's program area. Furthermore, this configuration allows for a simpler main program structure and description, improving the development efficiency and maintainability of the program. Furthermore, because the RAM initialization range for the out-of-use work area is determined based on part of the RAM initialization start address for the in-use work area, the RAM clearing process for the out-of-use work area can be completely independent, making it easy to create and modify programs that comply with other standards.

(A-6-4) The fourth embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration in the first embodiment.

The arithmetic circuit functions as a game control means for controlling the progress of a game,
a payout means (e.g., a hopper device) for paying out game media according to the progress of a game;
and a settlement means (e.g., a settlement button) that can be pressed by a player to perform a settlement operation;
The game control means
a game value input means for detecting the game medium and inputting the game value (for example, a main CPU 2101 for executing a process for detecting an operation of inserting medals to bet, or a process for detecting an operation of betting credited medals by operating a bet button);
A winning payout means (for example, a main CPU 2101 that executes the medal payout/replay operation process shown in FIG. 191) that performs a winning payout process for paying out game media from the payout means in accordance with the winning combination;
a settlement processing means (for example, the main CPU 2101 that executes the settlement execution process shown in FIG. 192) that performs a settlement process for paying out game media from the payout means based on the depression of the settlement means;
and a payout processing means (for example, a main CPU 2101 that executes the medal payout and replay operation process shown in FIG. 191 ) that causes the payout means to perform a payout operation and performs a payout process.
The game value input means is capable of inputting a game value during a first period (for example, a unit game start waiting state (a period during which medals can be accepted and bets can be made, and before a start operation is performed using a start lever)),
The winning payout means is capable of performing the winning payout process during a second period that does not overlap with the first period (for example, the period from the end of a unit game until payout is completed),
the settlement processing means is capable of performing the settlement processing when the settlement means is pressed during the first period;
The payout processing means
The payout process can be executed when the winning payout process is performed by the winning payout means and when the settlement process is performed by the settlement process means,
When the prize payout process is performed by the prize payout means and when the settlement process is performed by the settlement processing means, different parameters (for example, the address of the corresponding medal counter) are assigned when the payout process is executed.

With this configuration of the present invention, a common payout process is used when the winning payout process or the settlement process is performed, thereby reducing pressure on the program area capacity of the main ROM. Furthermore, by using this common payout process, the program structure and description can be made simpler, improving the development efficiency and maintainability of the program.

(A-6-5) The fifth embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration in the fourth embodiment.

When the winning payout process is performed by the winning payout process, the parameters assigned when the payout process is executed are configured to be information relating to the address of a payout number storage area (e.g., a payout number counter storage area) that stores a value based on the number of gaming media paid out according to the winning combination.

With this configuration of the present invention, a common payout process is used when the winning payout process or the settlement process is performed, thereby reducing pressure on the program area capacity of the main ROM. Furthermore, by using this common payout process, the program structure and description can be made simpler, improving the development efficiency and maintainability of the program.

(A-6-6) The sixth embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration in the fourth embodiment.

When the settlement process is performed by the settlement processing means, the payout process is configured to be executed twice for different payout operations.

With this configuration of the present invention, a common payout process is used when the winning payout process or the settlement process is performed, thereby reducing pressure on the program area capacity of the main ROM. Furthermore, by using this common payout process, the program structure and description can be made simpler, improving the development efficiency and maintainability of the program.

(A-6-7) The seventh embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration in the sixth embodiment.

When the settlement process is performed by the settlement process means and the payout process is executed twice,
The parameter assigned when the first payout process is executed is information relating to the address of a reserved number storage area (e.g., a credit counter storage area) in which the number of game media transferred from the number of payouts of the game media corresponding to the winning combination is stored,
The parameter assigned when executing the second payout process is configured to be information relating to the address of an input number memory area (e.g., a medal insertion counter storage area) in which the game value of the game medium detected by the game value input means is stored.

With this configuration of the present invention, a common payout process is used when the winning payout process or the settlement process is performed, thereby reducing pressure on the program area capacity of the main ROM. Furthermore, by using this common payout process, the program structure and description can be made simpler, improving the development efficiency and maintainability of the program.

(A-6-8) The eighth embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration in the first embodiment.

The arithmetic circuit functions as a game control means for controlling the progress of a game,
a start operation detection means (e.g., a start lever) for detecting a start operation by a player;
An internal lottery combination determination means (main CPU 2101 that executes the internal lottery process called in the main process shown in FIG. 179 ) that determines an internal lottery combination with a predetermined probability based on the detection of the start operation by the start operation detection means;
A variable display means includes a plurality of display columns and displays the symbols provided in each display column in a variable manner (a main CPU 2101 that executes a reel rotation start process called in the main process shown in FIG. 179 );
A stop operation detection means (main CPU 2101 that executes the reel stop control process called in the main process shown in FIG. 179) that detects a stop operation by a player (for example, an operation of pressing a stop button),
A stop control means (main CPU 2101 that executes a reel stop control process called in the main process shown in FIG. 179) that stops the variable display of the symbols based on the determination result of the internal winning combination determination means and the detection of a stop operation by the stop operation detection means,
The variation display of the variation display means includes a game variation (normal game) for awarding a game value and a pseudo variation (pseudo game) for awarding no game value,
The stop control means executes a control process for stopping the variable display of the symbols for the game variation,
The game control means
A pseudo stop control means for executing a control process to stop the display of the symbol variation in the pseudo variation;
a stop operation detection input monitoring means (for example, a main CPU 2101 that executes a stop button input monitoring process shown in FIG. 215 ) for determining whether or not the detection of the stop operation by the stop operation detection means is valid;
The stop control means and the pseudo stop control means are each configured to execute the stop operation detection input monitoring means to determine whether the stop operation is valid or not (executing common processing in normal play and pseudo play (i.e., for example, the stop button input monitoring processing shown in Figure 215)).

This configuration of the present invention allows for some commonality between normal gameplay and simulated gameplay processing, thereby reducing pressure on the program area capacity of the main ROM. Furthermore, by sharing some commonality between normal gameplay and simulated gameplay processing, the present invention allows for simpler program structure and description, improving the development efficiency and maintainability of the program.

(A-6-9) The ninth embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration in its first embodiment.

The arithmetic circuit functions as a game control means for controlling the progress of a game,
a third storage means (e.g., a main ROM 2102) in which programs and table data are stored;
a fourth storage means (e.g., a main RAM 2103) for storing data in association with the execution of the program;
the fourth storage means has a first storage area (common information storage area) for storing a group of information relating to games, and a second storage area (common information backup storage area) located at a position different from the first storage area,
The game control means
a saving means (for example, the main CPU 2101 that executes the common information backup generation process of FIG. 216) that saves all of the information stored in the first storage area to the second storage area when a predetermined condition is met;
a restoring means (for example, a main CPU 2101 that executes the common information restoring process of FIG. 217) that restores the information saved in the second storage area to the first storage area when the predetermined condition and a specific condition (for example, a penalty condition) are met,
the saving means and the restoring means are common programs except for some processes,
the saving means and the restoring means set the leading address of the first storage area in a first register (e.g., a DE register, an HL register) capable of setting two bytes of data, and set the leading address of the second storage area in a second register (e.g., an HL register, an DE register) capable of setting two bytes of data;
Transferring information stored in the source address set in the first register from the source address set in the second register to the destination address set in the second register in response to a transfer command;
When the processing by the return means is executed, the source address set in the first register and the destination address set in the second register are swapped before the transfer instruction is executed.

This configuration of the present invention allows for a partial sharing of the backup restoration process, which restores specified information to the information before the game, and the backup process, which backs up that specified information, thereby reducing pressure on the program area capacity of the main ROM. Furthermore, by promoting program sharing in this way, the program structure and description can be made simpler, improving the development efficiency and maintainability of the program.

(A-6-10) The tenth embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration in the ninth embodiment.

a game start instruction means (for example, a start lever) by which a player instructs the start of a game;
a variable display means (for example, each reel) capable of variably displaying a plurality of pieces of identification information in response to operation of the game start instruction means;
A role determination means capable of determining a winning role (for example, a main CPU 2101 that executes the internal lottery process shown in FIG. 188 );
a stop operation detection means (e.g., a stop button and a stop switch) capable of detecting a stop operation that stops the variable display of the variable display means;
A stop control means (for example, a main CPU 2101 that executes the reel stop control process shown in FIG. 179) that can stop the variable display of the variable display means and derive a stop display based on the winning combination determined by the combination determination means and the stop operation mode detected by the stop operation detection means;
A winning means (for example, the main CPU 2101 that executes the process of step S2013 in FIG. 179 ) that can generate a winning result corresponding to the stopped display;
and a notification means (for example, an indication monitor or a main display device) capable of notifying an advantageous stop operation mode.
When the game start instruction means is operated by the player,
The saving means saves information (e.g., various information) stored in the first storage area and related to an advantageous state (e.g., an AT state) in which notification by the notification means can be executed, into the second storage area (e.g., processing corresponding to step S4602 in FIG. 172 ),
The game state related processing means for updating the information related to the advantageous state updates the information stored in the first storage area (for example, processing corresponding to step S4603, step S4604 in FIG. 172, step S4622 in FIG. 173, etc.),
When the game start instruction means is operated by the player and a predetermined penalty condition is met, the return means is configured to return the information saved in the second storage area to the first storage area (for example, processing corresponding to step S4624 in Figure 173).

This configuration of the present invention allows for a partial sharing of the backup restoration process, which restores specified information to the information before the game, and the backup process, which backs up that specified information, thereby reducing pressure on the program area capacity of the main ROM. Furthermore, by promoting program sharing in this way, the program structure and description can be made simpler, improving the development efficiency and maintainability of the program.

(A-6-11) The invention according to the eleventh embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration in the ninth embodiment.

The specific condition is a penalty condition that cancels a predetermined advantageous gaming state,
The penalty conditions are configured to be conditions based on the game state and a predetermined operation by the player.

This configuration of the present invention allows for a partial sharing of the backup restoration process, which restores specified information to the information before the game, and the backup process, which backs up that specified information, thereby reducing pressure on the program area capacity of the main ROM. Furthermore, by promoting program sharing in this way, the program structure and description can be made simpler, improving the development efficiency and maintainability of the program.

This invention provides a smaller program that can initialize the main RAM for both the in-use area work area and the out-of-use area work area, thereby reducing pressure on the program area capacity of the main ROM.

In addition, according to the present invention, the structure and description of the main program can be made simpler, improving the development efficiency and maintainability of the program.Furthermore, the RAM clearing process for the out-of-use work area can be made completely independent, making it easier to create and modify programs that comply with other standards.

Furthermore, according to the present invention, a common payout process is used when the winning payout process or the settlement process is performed, thereby reducing pressure on the capacity of the program area in the main ROM. Furthermore, by using such a common payout process, the program structure and description can be made simpler, improving the development efficiency and maintainability of the program.

Furthermore, according to the present invention, some of the processing for normal games and simulated games is shared, which reduces pressure on the capacity of the program area in the main ROM. Furthermore, according to the present invention, by sharing some of the processing for normal games and simulated games, the program structure and description can be made simpler, improving the development efficiency and maintainability of the program.

Furthermore, according to the present invention, the backup restoration process that restores specified information to the information before the game and the backup process that backs up that specified information can be partially shared, thereby reducing pressure on the program area capacity of the main ROM. Furthermore, by promoting program sharing in this way, the program structure and description can be made simpler, improving the development efficiency and maintainability of the program.

<Appendix A-7>
[0003] Conventionally, a gaming machine has been known that is a pachislot machine that includes a plurality of reels each having a plurality of symbols arranged on its periphery, a plurality of display windows corresponding to each reel and displaying some of the symbols arranged on the periphery of each reel so that the player can see them, a start switch that outputs a signal requesting the start of rotation of each reel when it detects an operation by the player (hereinafter referred to as a "start operation"), provided that medals have been inserted, a stop switch that outputs a signal requesting the stop of rotation of the reel according to the type of reel when it detects an operation by the player (hereinafter referred to as a "stop operation"), and a control unit that controls the operation of a stepping motor based on the signals output by the start switch and the stop switch to rotate and stop each reel. Typically, in such pachislot machines, a combination of symbols displayed in the display windows determines whether a prize has been won, and if a prize has been won, medals are paid out from a hopper and stored in a medal receiving unit.

In such gaming machines, the process of stopping the reels related to the symbol stop limit is generally handled separately for normal play and simulated play (for example, JP 2022-067988 A).

As in the gaming machine mentioned above, if normal play and simulated play were processed separately and corresponding programs were created for each, the program size would be small, but it would take up space in the program area of the main ROM.

The present invention was made in consideration of the above points, and aims to provide a gaming machine that shares some of the processing between normal games and simulated games, thereby reducing pressure on the program area capacity of the main ROM.

Furthermore, by sharing some of the processing between normal games and simulated games, the present invention aims to simplify the program structure and description, thereby improving the development efficiency and maintainability of the program.

In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machine.
(A-7-1) The invention according to the first embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration.

A game control means (for example, a main CPU 2101) that controls the progress of the game;
a start operation detection means (e.g., a start lever) for detecting a start operation by a player;
An internal lottery combination determination means (main CPU 2101 that executes the internal lottery process called in the main process shown in FIG. 179 ) that determines an internal lottery combination with a predetermined probability based on the detection of the start operation by the start operation detection means;
A variable display means includes a plurality of display columns and displays the symbols provided in each display column in a variable manner (a main CPU 2101 that executes a reel rotation start process called in the main process shown in FIG. 179 );
A stop operation detection means (main CPU 2101 that executes the reel stop control process called in the main process shown in FIG. 179) that detects a stop operation by a player (for example, an operation of pressing a stop button),
A stop control means (main CPU 2101 that executes a reel stop control process called in the main process shown in FIG. 179) that stops the variable display of the symbols based on the determination result of the internal winning combination determination means and the detection of a stop operation by the stop operation detection means,
The variation display of the variation display means includes a game variation (normal game) for awarding a game value and a pseudo variation (pseudo game) for awarding no game value,
The stop control means executes a control process for stopping the variable display of the symbols for the game variation,
The game control means
A pseudo stop control means for executing a control process to stop the display of the symbol variation in the pseudo variation;
a stop operation detection input monitoring means (for example, a main CPU 2101 that executes a stop button input monitoring process shown in FIG. 215 ) for determining whether or not the detection of the stop operation by the stop operation detection means is valid;
The stop control means and the pseudo stop control means each execute the stop operation detection input monitoring means to determine whether the stop operation is valid or not (a gaming machine (e.g., pachislot machine 2001) that executes a process common to normal gaming and pseudo gaming (i.e., the stop button input monitoring process shown in FIG. 215).

This configuration of the present invention allows for some commonality between normal gameplay and simulated gameplay processing, thereby reducing pressure on the program area capacity of the main ROM. Furthermore, by sharing some commonality between normal gameplay and simulated gameplay processing, the present invention allows for simpler program structure and description, improving the development efficiency and maintainability of the program.

(A-7-2) The second embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration in the first embodiment.

a payout means (e.g., a hopper device) for paying out game media according to the progress of a game;
and a settlement means (e.g., a settlement button) that can be pressed by a player to perform a settlement operation;
The game control means
a game value input means for detecting the game medium and inputting the game value (for example, a main CPU 2101 for executing a process for detecting an operation of inserting medals to bet, or a process for detecting an operation of betting credited medals by operating a bet button);
A winning payout means (for example, a main CPU 2101 that executes the medal payout/replay operation process shown in FIG. 191) that performs a winning payout process for paying out game media from the payout means in accordance with the winning combination;
a settlement processing means (for example, the main CPU 2101 that executes the settlement execution process shown in FIG. 192) that performs a settlement process for paying out game media from the payout means based on the depression of the settlement means;
and a payout processing means (for example, a main CPU 2101 that executes the medal payout and replay operation process shown in FIG. 191 ) that causes the payout means to perform a payout operation and performs a payout process.
The game value input means is capable of inputting a game value during a first period (for example, a unit game start waiting state (a period during which medals can be accepted and bets can be made, and before a start operation is performed using a start lever)),
The winning payout means is capable of performing the winning payout process during a second period that does not overlap with the first period (for example, the period from the end of a unit game until payout is completed),
the settlement processing means is capable of performing the settlement processing when the settlement means is pressed during the first period;
The payout processing means
The payout process can be executed when the winning payout process is performed by the winning payout means and when the settlement process is performed by the settlement process means,
When the prize payout process is performed by the prize payout means and when the settlement process is performed by the settlement processing means, different parameters (for example, the address of the corresponding medal counter) are assigned when the payout process is executed.

With this configuration of the present invention, a common payout process is used when the winning payout process or the settlement process is performed, thereby reducing pressure on the program area capacity of the main ROM. Furthermore, by using this common payout process, the program structure and description can be made simpler, improving the development efficiency and maintainability of the program.

(A-7-3) The third embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration in the second embodiment.

When the winning payout process is performed by the winning payout process, the parameters assigned when the payout process is executed are configured to be information relating to the address of a payout number storage area (e.g., a payout number counter storage area) that stores a value based on the number of gaming media paid out according to the winning combination.

With this configuration of the present invention, a common payout process is used when the winning payout process or the settlement process is performed, thereby reducing pressure on the program area capacity of the main ROM. Furthermore, by using this common payout process, the program structure and description can be made simpler, improving the development efficiency and maintainability of the program.

(A-7-4) The fourth embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration in the second embodiment.

When the settlement process is performed by the settlement processing means, the payout process is configured to be executed twice for different payout operations.

With this configuration of the present invention, a common payout process is used when the winning payout process or the settlement process is performed, thereby reducing pressure on the program area capacity of the main ROM. Furthermore, by using this common payout process, the program structure and description can be made simpler, improving the development efficiency and maintainability of the program.

(A-7-5) The fifth embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration in the fourth embodiment.

When the settlement process is performed by the settlement process means and the payout process is executed twice,
The parameter assigned when the first payout process is executed is information relating to the address of a reserved number storage area (e.g., a credit counter storage area) in which the number of game media transferred from the payout number of game media corresponding to the winning combination is stored,
The parameter assigned when executing the second payout process is configured to be information relating to the address of an input number memory area (e.g., a medal insertion counter storage area) in which the game value of the game medium detected by the game value input means is stored.

With this configuration of the present invention, a common payout process is used when the winning payout process or the settlement process is performed, thereby reducing pressure on the program area capacity of the main ROM. Furthermore, by using this common payout process, the program structure and description can be made simpler, improving the development efficiency and maintainability of the program.

(A-7-6) The sixth embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration in the first embodiment.

a game control means that implements a microprocessor (e.g., microprocessor 2100) including an arithmetic circuit (e.g., main CPU 2101), a read memory (e.g., main ROM 2102), and a read/write memory (e.g., main RAM 2103) and controls the progress of the game;
a setting switch (e.g., a key switch for setting) provided for changing or confirming a setting value;
The game control means
Range calculation means for performing calculation within a specific address range of the read-write memory and storing the calculation result in a calculation result storage area outside the specific address range of the read-write memory (for example, a CRC circuit 2107c for performing CRC calculation processing in a CRC generation process (outside the area in use) called by the power interruption process shown in FIG. 199, and a main CPU 2101 for storing the CRC value of the calculation result in a CRC value storage area 2103e);
a range comparison means (for example, the main CPU 2101 that compares CRC values in the CRC check process (outside the use area) shown in FIG. 181) that performs calculations within a specific address range of the read/write memory and compares the calculation results with the calculation results stored in the calculation result storage area;
An initialization means for initializing the read/write memory (for example, the main CPU 2101 for executing initialization processing such as the designated RAM initialization processing shown in FIG. 185);
a main processing means for performing main processing in accordance with the progress of a game (for example, a main CPU 2101 for executing the main processing shown in FIG. 179 );
The read/write memory is composed of a first storage means (e.g., a RAM area 2203a in the used area) for storing data directly related to the progress of the game, and a second storage means (e.g., a RAM area 2203b outside the used area) for storing data not directly related to the progress of the game,
The plurality of ranges are:
a first start address (e.g., a clear address when a RAM error occurs) of the first storage means when the setting switch is in an on state and a mismatch is detected by the range comparison means when the power is turned on;
a second start address (e.g., a clear address at the time of setting change) of the first storage means when the setting switch is in an on state at power-on and no matching mismatch is detected by the range matching means;
A third start position (for example, a clear address at the end of one game) of the first storage means when the unit game of the main processing means has ended and the next unit game has not yet started is set.
the initialization start positions of the first storage means, including the first start position, the second start position, and the third start position, are represented by a 2-byte address;
The initialization means
storing a 2-byte address value relating to one start position selected from the first start position, the second start position, or the third start position in a storage determination area;
determining an initialization start position of the second storage means according to the value of the lower address of the address stored in the storage determination area;
With respect to the first storage means, initialization is performed from an initialization start position of the first storage means, which is one of the first start position, the second start position, and the third start position (for example, initialization of RAM in the used area in step S2151 shown in FIG. 185 );
The second storage means is configured to be initialized from the determined initialization start position of the second storage means (for example, the out-of-use area RAM initialization process (out-of-use area) in step S2150 shown in FIG. 185).

With this configuration of the present invention, the RAM initialization range for the out-of-use work area is determined without determining the state of the gaming machine, which allows for a corresponding reduction in program size and reduces pressure on the capacity of the main ROM's program area. Furthermore, this configuration allows for a simpler main program structure and description, improving the development efficiency and maintainability of the program. Furthermore, because the RAM initialization range for the out-of-use work area is determined based on part of the RAM initialization start address for the in-use work area, the RAM clearing process for the out-of-use work area can be completely independent, making it easy to create and modify programs that comply with other standards.

(A-7-7) The seventh embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration in the sixth embodiment.

The final location to be initialized (for example, the clear end address shown in FIG. 214) is configured to be set one for each of the first storage means and the second storage means, regardless of the initialization start location of the first storage means and the initialization start location of the second storage means.

With this configuration of the present invention, the RAM initialization range for the out-of-use work area is determined without determining the state of the gaming machine, which allows for a corresponding reduction in program size and reduces pressure on the capacity of the main ROM's program area. Furthermore, this configuration allows for a simpler main program structure and description, improving the development efficiency and maintainability of the program. Furthermore, because the RAM initialization range for the out-of-use work area is determined based on part of the RAM initialization start address for the in-use work area, the RAM clearing process for the out-of-use work area can be completely independent, making it easy to create and modify programs that comply with other standards.

(A-7-8) The eighth embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration in the sixth embodiment.

the second storage means stores correspondence data indicating a correspondence relationship between a lower address of an initialization start position of the first storage means and an address of an initialization start position of the second storage means;
The initialization means is configured to use the correspondence data to determine an initialization start position of the second storage means that corresponds to the value of the lower address stored in the storage determination area.

With this configuration of the present invention, the RAM initialization range for the out-of-use work area is determined without determining the state of the gaming machine, which allows for a corresponding reduction in program size and reduces pressure on the capacity of the main ROM's program area. Furthermore, this configuration allows for a simpler main program structure and description, improving the development efficiency and maintainability of the program. Furthermore, because the RAM initialization range for the out-of-use work area is determined based on part of the RAM initialization start address for the in-use work area, the RAM clearing process for the out-of-use work area can be completely independent, making it easy to create and modify programs that comply with other standards.

(A-7-9) The ninth embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration in its first embodiment.

a third storage means (e.g., a main ROM 2102) in which programs and table data are stored;
a fourth storage means (e.g., a main RAM 2103) for storing data in association with the execution of the program;
the fourth storage means has a first storage area (common information storage area) for storing a group of information relating to games, and a second storage area (common information backup storage area) located at a position different from the first storage area,
The game control means
a saving means (for example, the main CPU 2101 that executes the common information backup generation process of FIG. 216) that saves all of the information stored in the first storage area to the second storage area when a predetermined condition is met;
a restoring means (for example, a main CPU 2101 that executes the common information restoring process of FIG. 217) that restores the information saved in the second storage area to the first storage area when the predetermined condition and a specific condition (for example, a penalty condition) are met,
the saving means and the restoring means are common programs except for some processes,
the saving means and the restoring means set the leading address of the first storage area in a first register (e.g., a DE register, an HL register) capable of setting two bytes of data, and set the leading address of the second storage area in a second register (e.g., an HL register, an DE register) capable of setting two bytes of data;
Transferring information stored in the source address set in the first register from the source address set in the second register to the destination address set in the second register in response to a transfer command;
When the processing by the return means is executed, the source address set in the first register and the destination address set in the second register are swapped before the transfer instruction is executed.

This configuration of the present invention allows for a partial sharing of the backup restoration process, which restores specified information to the information before the game, and the backup process, which backs up that specified information, thereby reducing pressure on the program area capacity of the main ROM. Furthermore, by promoting program sharing in this way, the program structure and description can be made simpler, improving the development efficiency and maintainability of the program.

(A-7-10) The tenth embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration in the ninth embodiment.

a game start instruction means (for example, a start lever) by which a player instructs the start of a game;
a variable display means (for example, each reel) capable of variably displaying a plurality of pieces of identification information in response to an operation of the game start instruction means;
A role determination means capable of determining a winning role (for example, a main CPU 2101 that executes the internal lottery process shown in FIG. 188 );
a stop operation detection means (e.g., a stop button and a stop switch) capable of detecting a stop operation that stops the variable display of the variable display means;
A stop control means (for example, a main CPU 2101 that executes the reel stop control process shown in FIG. 179) that can stop the variable display of the variable display means and derive a stop display based on the winning combination determined by the combination determination means and the stop operation mode detected by the stop operation detection means;
A winning means (for example, the main CPU 2101 that executes the process of step S2013 in FIG. 179 ) that can generate a winning result corresponding to the stopped display;
and a notification means (for example, an indication monitor or a main display device) capable of notifying an advantageous stop operation mode.
When the game start instruction means is operated by the player,
The saving means saves information (e.g., various information) stored in the first storage area and related to an advantageous state (e.g., an AT state) in which notification by the notification means can be executed, into the second storage area (e.g., processing corresponding to step S4602 in FIG. 172 ),
The game state related processing means for updating the information related to the advantageous state updates the information stored in the first storage area (for example, processing corresponding to step S4603, step S4604 in FIG. 172, step S4622 in FIG. 173, etc.),
When the game start instruction means is operated by the player and a predetermined penalty condition is met, the return means is configured to return the information saved in the second storage area to the first storage area (for example, processing corresponding to step S4624 in Figure 173).

This configuration of the present invention allows for a partial sharing of the backup restoration process, which restores specified information to the information before the game, and the backup process, which backs up that specified information, thereby reducing pressure on the program area capacity of the main ROM. Furthermore, by promoting program sharing in this way, the program structure and description can be made simpler, improving the development efficiency and maintainability of the program.

(A-7-11) The invention according to the eleventh embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration in the ninth embodiment.

The specific condition is a penalty condition that cancels a predetermined advantageous gaming state,
The penalty conditions are configured to be conditions based on the game state and a predetermined operation by the player.

This configuration of the present invention allows for a partial sharing of the backup restoration process, which restores specified information to the information before the game, and the backup process, which backs up that specified information, thereby reducing pressure on the program area capacity of the main ROM. Furthermore, by promoting program sharing in this way, the program structure and description can be made simpler, improving the development efficiency and maintainability of the program.

According to the present invention, some of the processing for normal games and simulated games is shared, which reduces pressure on the capacity of the program area in the main ROM. Furthermore, according to the present invention, by sharing some of the processing for normal games and simulated games, the program structure and description can be made simpler, improving the development efficiency and maintainability of the program.

Furthermore, according to the present invention, a common payout process is used when the winning payout process or the settlement process is performed, thereby reducing pressure on the capacity of the program area in the main ROM. Furthermore, by using such a common payout process, the program structure and description can be made simpler, improving the development efficiency and maintainability of the program.

Furthermore, according to the present invention, the RAM initialization range for the out-of-use work area is determined without determining the state of the gaming machine, which allows for a corresponding reduction in program size and reduces pressure on the capacity of the main ROM's program area. Furthermore, the above-described configuration allows for a simpler main program structure and description, thereby improving the development efficiency and maintainability of the program. Furthermore, because the RAM initialization range for the out-of-use work area is determined based on part of the RAM initialization start address for the in-use work area, the RAM clearing process for the out-of-use work area can be completely independent, making it easy to create and modify programs that comply with other standards.

Furthermore, according to the present invention, the backup restoration process that restores specified information to the information before the game and the backup process that backs up that specified information can be partially shared, thereby reducing pressure on the program area capacity of the main ROM. Furthermore, by promoting program sharing in this way, the program structure and description can be made simpler, improving the development efficiency and maintainability of the program.

<Appendix A-8>
[0003] Conventionally, a gaming machine has been known that is a pachislot machine that includes a plurality of reels each having a plurality of symbols arranged on its periphery, a plurality of display windows corresponding to each reel and displaying some of the symbols arranged on the periphery of each reel so that the player can see them, a start switch that outputs a signal requesting the start of rotation of each reel when it detects an operation by the player (hereinafter referred to as a "start operation"), provided that medals have been inserted, a stop switch that outputs a signal requesting the stop of rotation of the reel depending on the type of reel when it detects an operation by the player (hereinafter referred to as a "stop operation"), and a control unit that controls the operation of a stepping motor based on the signals output by the start switch and the stop switch to rotate and stop each reel. Typically, in such pachislot machines, a combination of symbols displayed in the display windows determines whether a prize has been won, and if a prize has been won, medals are paid out from a hopper and stored in a medal receiving unit.

For such gaming machines, technology for generating comprehensive status information has been disclosed (for example, JP 2019-198435 A).

Recent gaming machines generate general status information like the one described above through multiple lottery processes at the start of the game. However, depending on the player's play, the generated general status information may not be applied to the next game. In such cases, the general status information must be restored to its state before the game began. Creating a program to perform this type of processing is one of the factors that puts pressure on the program area of the main RAM.

The present invention was made in consideration of the above points, and aims to provide a gaming machine that partially shares the backup restoration process, which returns specified information to the information before the game, and the backup process, which backs up that specified information, thereby reducing pressure on the program area capacity of the main ROM.

Furthermore, the present invention aims to simplify the structure and description of programs by promoting program standardization, thereby improving the development efficiency and maintainability of those programs.

In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machine.
(A-8-1) The invention according to the first embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration.

A game control means (e.g., a microprocessor 2100) that controls the progress of the game and the status of the game;
a first storage means (e.g., a main ROM 2102) in which programs and table data are stored;
a second storage means (e.g., a main RAM 2103) for storing data in association with the execution of the program;
the second storage means has a first storage area (common information storage area) for storing a group of information relating to games, and a second storage area (common information backup storage area) located at a position different from the first storage area,
The game control means
a saving means (for example, the main CPU 2101 that executes the common information backup generation process of FIG. 216) that saves all of the information stored in the first storage area to the second storage area when a predetermined condition is met;
a restoring means (for example, a main CPU 2101 that executes the common information restoring process of FIG. 217) that restores the information saved in the second storage area to the first storage area when the predetermined condition and a specific condition (for example, a penalty condition) are met,
the saving means and the restoring means are common programs except for some processes,
the saving means and the restoring means set the leading address of the first storage area in a first register (e.g., a DE register, an HL register) capable of setting two bytes of data, and set the leading address of the second storage area in a second register (e.g., an HL register, an DE register) capable of setting two bytes of data;
Transferring information stored in the source address set in the first register from the source address set in the second register to the destination address set in the second register in response to a transfer command;
A gaming machine characterized in that when processing is executed by the return means, the source address set in the first register and the destination address set in the second register are swapped before executing the transfer command.

This configuration of the present invention allows for a partial sharing of the backup restoration process, which restores specified information to the information before the game, and the backup process, which backs up that specified information, thereby reducing pressure on the program area capacity of the main ROM. Furthermore, by promoting program sharing in this way, the program structure and description can be made simpler, improving the development efficiency and maintainability of the program.

(A-8-2) The second embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration in the first embodiment.

a game start instruction means (for example, a start lever) by which a player instructs the start of a game;
a variable display means (for example, each reel) capable of variably displaying a plurality of pieces of identification information in response to an operation of the game start instruction means;
A role determination means capable of determining a winning role (for example, a main CPU 2101 that executes the internal lottery process shown in FIG. 188 );
a stop operation detection means (e.g., a stop button and a stop switch) capable of detecting a stop operation that stops the variable display of the variable display means;
A stop control means (for example, a main CPU 2101 that executes the reel stop control process shown in FIG. 179) that can stop the variable display of the variable display means and derive a stop display based on the winning combination determined by the combination determination means and the stop operation mode detected by the stop operation detection means;
A winning means (for example, the main CPU 2101 that executes the process of step S2013 in FIG. 179 ) that can generate a winning result corresponding to the stopped display;
and a notification means (for example, an indication monitor or a main display device) capable of notifying an advantageous stop operation mode.
When the game start instruction means is operated by the player,
The saving means saves information (e.g., various information) stored in the first storage area and related to an advantageous state (e.g., an AT state) in which notification by the notification means can be executed, into the second storage area (e.g., processing corresponding to step S4602 in FIG. 172 ),
The game state related processing means for updating the information related to the advantageous state updates the information stored in the first storage area (for example, processing corresponding to step S4603, step S4604 in FIG. 172, step S4622 in FIG. 173, etc.),
When the game start instruction means is operated by the player and a predetermined penalty condition is met, the return means is configured to return the information saved in the second storage area to the first storage area (for example, processing corresponding to step S4624 in Figure 173).

This configuration of the present invention allows for a partial sharing of the backup restoration process, which restores specified information to the information before the game, and the backup process, which backs up that specified information, thereby reducing pressure on the program area capacity of the main ROM. Furthermore, by promoting program sharing in this way, the program structure and description can be made simpler, improving the development efficiency and maintainability of the program.

(A-8-3) The third embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration in the first embodiment.

The specific condition is a penalty condition that cancels a predetermined advantageous gaming state,
The penalty conditions are configured to be conditions based on the game state and a predetermined operation by the player.

This configuration of the present invention allows for a partial sharing of the backup restoration process, which restores specified information to the information before the game, and the backup process, which backs up that specified information, thereby reducing pressure on the program area capacity of the main ROM. Furthermore, by promoting program sharing in this way, the program structure and description can be made simpler, improving the development efficiency and maintainability of the program.

(A-8-4) The fourth embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration in the second embodiment.

The specified penalty condition is configured to be a condition based on whether the game state is in a specific game state (for example, whether it is in an advantageous zone).

This configuration of the present invention allows for a partial sharing of the backup restoration process, which restores specified information to the information before the game, and the backup process, which backs up that specified information, thereby reducing pressure on the program area capacity of the main ROM. Furthermore, by promoting program sharing in this way, the program structure and description can be made simpler, improving the development efficiency and maintainability of the program.

(A-8-5) The fifth embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration in the second embodiment.

The specified penalty condition is configured to be a condition based on whether the player's stopping operation is performed in a specific manner (for example, whether the first reel is the first stop).

This configuration of the present invention allows for a partial sharing of the backup restoration process, which restores specified information to the information before the game, and the backup process, which backs up that specified information, thereby reducing pressure on the program area capacity of the main ROM. Furthermore, by promoting program sharing in this way, the program structure and description can be made simpler, improving the development efficiency and maintainability of the program.

(A-8-6) The sixth embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration in the second embodiment.

The predetermined penalty condition is configured to be a condition based on whether the gaming state is in a specific bonus state (for example, whether it is in a bonus state such as pseudo-BIG or pseudo-REG).

This configuration of the present invention allows for a partial sharing of the backup restoration process, which restores specified information to the information before the game, and the backup process, which backs up that specified information, thereby reducing pressure on the program area capacity of the main ROM. Furthermore, by promoting program sharing in this way, the program structure and description can be made simpler, improving the development efficiency and maintainability of the program.

(A-8-7) The seventh embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration in its second embodiment.

The predetermined penalty conditions are configured to be conditions based on whether the winning combination determined by the combination determination means is a predetermined winning combination.

This configuration of the present invention allows for a partial sharing of the backup restoration process, which restores specified information to the information before the game, and the backup process, which backs up that specified information, thereby reducing pressure on the program area capacity of the main ROM. Furthermore, by promoting program sharing in this way, the program structure and description can be made simpler, improving the development efficiency and maintainability of the program.

(A-8-8) The eighth embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration in the first embodiment.

a payout means (e.g., a hopper device) for paying out game media according to the progress of a game;
and a settlement means (e.g., a settlement button) that can be pressed by a player to perform a settlement operation;
The game control means
a game value input means for detecting the game medium and inputting the game value (for example, a main CPU 2101 for executing a process for detecting an operation of inserting medals to bet, or a process for detecting an operation of betting credited medals by operating a bet button);
A winning payout means (for example, a main CPU 2101 that executes the medal payout/replay operation process shown in FIG. 191) that performs a winning payout process for paying out game media from the payout means in accordance with the winning combination;
a settlement processing means (for example, the main CPU 2101 that executes the settlement execution process shown in FIG. 192) that performs a settlement process for paying out game media from the payout means based on the depression of the settlement means;
and a payout processing means (for example, a main CPU 2101 that executes the medal payout and replay operation process shown in FIG. 191 ) that causes the payout means to perform a payout operation and performs a payout process.
The game value input means is capable of inputting a game value during a first period (for example, a unit game start waiting state (a period during which medals can be accepted and bets can be made, and before a start operation using a start lever)),
The winning payout means is capable of performing the winning payout process during a second period that does not overlap with the first period (for example, a period from the end of a unit game until payout is completed),
the settlement processing means is capable of performing the settlement processing when the settlement means is pressed during the first period;
The payout processing means
The payout process can be executed when the winning payout process is performed by the winning payout means and when the settlement process is performed by the settlement process means,
When the prize payout process is performed by the prize payout means and when the settlement process is performed by the settlement processing means, different parameters (for example, the address of the corresponding medal counter) are assigned when the payout process is executed.

With this configuration of the present invention, a common payout process is used when the winning payout process or the settlement process is performed, thereby reducing pressure on the program area capacity of the main ROM. Furthermore, by using this common payout process, the program structure and description can be made simpler, improving the development efficiency and maintainability of the program.

(A-8-9) The ninth embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration in the eighth embodiment.

When the winning payout process is performed by the winning payout process, the parameters assigned when the payout process is executed are configured to be information relating to the address of a payout number storage area (e.g., a payout number counter storage area) that stores a value based on the number of gaming media paid out according to the winning combination.

With this configuration of the present invention, a common payout process is used when the winning payout process or the settlement process is performed, thereby reducing pressure on the program area capacity of the main ROM. Furthermore, by using this common payout process, the program structure and description can be made simpler, improving the development efficiency and maintainability of the program.

(A-8-10) The invention according to the tenth embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration in the first embodiment.

Further provided is a setting switch (for example, a setting key switch) for changing or confirming a setting value;
The second storage means is composed of a third storage means (e.g., a RAM area 2203a within the used area) for storing data directly related to the progress of the game, and a fourth storage means (e.g., a RAM area 2203b outside the used area) for storing data not directly related to the progress of the game,
The game control means
Range calculation means for performing calculation within a specific address range of the second storage means and storing the calculation result in a calculation result storage area (for example, a CRC circuit 2107c for performing CRC calculation processing in a CRC generation process (outside the use area) called by the power interruption process shown in FIG. 199, and a main CPU 2101 for storing the CRC value of the calculation result in a CRC value storage area 2103e);
Range comparison means (for example, the main CPU 2101 that compares CRC values in the CRC check process (outside the use area) shown in FIG. 181) that performs calculation within a specific address range of the second storage means and compares the calculation result with the calculation result stored in the calculation result storage area;
an initialization means for initializing the second storage means (for example, a main CPU 2101 for executing initialization processing such as the designated RAM initialization processing shown in FIG. 185 );
The game control means
determining a start position of the third storage means in accordance with the state of the setting switch when power is turned on and the result of the comparison by the range comparison means;
determining a start position of the fourth storage means based on the determined start position of the third storage means;
The initialization means is configured to initialize the third storage means based on the determined start position of the third storage means, and to initialize the fourth storage means based on the determined start position of the fourth storage means.

With this configuration of the present invention, the state of the gaming machine is not judged when determining the RAM initialization range for the out-of-use work area, which allows for a corresponding reduction in program size and reduces pressure on the capacity of the main ROM's program area. Furthermore, this configuration allows for a simpler main program structure and description, improving the development efficiency and maintainability of the program.

(A-8-11) The invention according to the eleventh embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration in the first embodiment.

a start operation detection means (e.g., a start lever) for detecting a start operation by a player;
An internal lottery combination determination means (main CPU 2101 that executes the internal lottery process called in the main process shown in FIG. 179 ) that determines an internal lottery combination with a predetermined probability based on the detection of the start operation by the start operation detection means;
A variable display means includes a plurality of display columns and displays the symbols provided in each display column in a variable manner (a main CPU 2101 that executes a reel rotation start process called in the main process shown in FIG. 10 );
A stop operation detection means (main CPU 2101 that executes the reel stop control process called in the main process shown in FIG. 179) that detects a stop operation by a player (for example, an operation of pressing a stop button),
A stop control means (main CPU 2101 that executes a reel stop control process called in the main process shown in FIG. 179) that stops the variable display of the symbols based on the determination result of the internal winning combination determination means and the detection of a stop operation by the stop operation detection means,
The variation display of the variation display means includes a game variation (normal game) for awarding a game value and a pseudo variation (pseudo game) for awarding no game value,
The stop control means executes a control process for stopping the variable display of the symbols for the game variation,
The game control means
A pseudo stop control means for executing a control process to stop the display of the symbol variation in the pseudo variation;
a stop operation detection input monitoring means (for example, a main CPU 2101 that executes a stop button input monitoring process shown in FIG. 215 ) for determining whether or not the detection of the stop operation by the stop operation detection means is valid;
The stop control means and the pseudo stop control means are each configured to execute the stop operation detection input monitoring means to determine whether the stop operation is valid or not (executing common processing in normal play and pseudo play (i.e., for example, the stop button input monitoring processing shown in Figure 215)).

This configuration of the present invention allows for some commonality between normal gameplay and simulated gameplay processing, thereby reducing pressure on the program area capacity of the main ROM. Furthermore, by sharing some commonality between normal gameplay and simulated gameplay processing, the present invention allows for simpler program structure and description, improving the development efficiency and maintainability of the program.

According to the present invention, the backup restoration process that restores specified information to the information before the game and the backup process that backs up that specified information are partially shared, thereby reducing pressure on the program area capacity of the main ROM. Furthermore, by promoting program sharing in this way, the program structure and description can be made simpler, improving the development efficiency and maintainability of the program.

Furthermore, according to the present invention, a common payout process is used when the winning payout process or the settlement process is performed, thereby reducing pressure on the capacity of the program area in the main ROM. Furthermore, by using such a common payout process, the program structure and description can be made simpler, improving the development efficiency and maintainability of the program.

Furthermore, according to the present invention, the state of the gaming machine is not judged when determining the RAM initialization range for the out-of-use working area, which allows the program size to be reduced accordingly, thereby reducing pressure on the capacity of the program area in the main ROM. Furthermore, the above-mentioned configuration allows the structure and description of the main program to be more concise, thereby improving the development efficiency and maintainability of the program.

Furthermore, according to the present invention, some of the processing for normal games and simulated games is shared, which reduces pressure on the capacity of the program area in the main ROM. Furthermore, according to the present invention, by sharing some of the processing for normal games and simulated games, the program structure and description can be made simpler, improving the development efficiency and maintainability of the program.

<Appendix A-9>
[0003] Conventionally, a gaming machine has been known that is a pachislot machine that includes a plurality of reels each having a plurality of symbols arranged on its periphery, a plurality of display windows corresponding to each reel and displaying some of the symbols arranged on the periphery of each reel so that the player can see them, a start switch that outputs a signal requesting the start of rotation of each reel when it detects an operation by the player (hereinafter referred to as a "start operation"), provided that medals have been inserted, a stop switch that outputs a signal requesting the stop of rotation of the reel according to the type of reel when it detects an operation by the player (hereinafter referred to as a "stop operation"), and a control unit that controls the operation of a stepping motor based on the signals output by the start switch and the stop switch to rotate and stop each reel. Typically, in such pachislot machines, a combination of symbols displayed in the display windows determines whether a prize has been won, and if a prize has been won, medals are paid out from a hopper and stored in a medal receiving unit.

Furthermore, gaming machines have been disclosed that check RAM when powered on, and if a RAM abnormality is detected, issue a notification urging the user to resolve the abnormality (for example, JP 2006-326203 A).

However, with gaming machines like those described above, when hall staff turn on the power to the machine, an abnormality is immediately reported, so even if fraudulent activity (so-called cheating) is committed, the abnormality is immediately cleared, meaning the person committing the fraudulent activity never uses the gaming machine and goes undetected.

The present invention was made in consideration of the above points, and aims to provide a gaming machine that allows the person who committed the fraud to start playing on the gaming machine that has been the target of fraudulent activity.

Another object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that reduces the size of the processing program related to checking the main RAM and is configured so as not to overwhelm the program area of the main ROM. Furthermore, by performing the calculation processing related to checking the main RAM outside the main CPU, the structure and description of the main program can be simplified, improving the development efficiency and maintainability of the program, and further reducing the load on the main CPU.

In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machine.
(A-9-1) The invention according to the first embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration.

a game control means (e.g., main control board 2071) that has an arithmetic circuit (e.g., main CPU 2101), a read memory (e.g., main ROM 2102), a read/write memory (e.g., main RAM 2103), and a random number circuit (e.g., random number circuit 2110, random number circuit 2150) that generates random numbers and controls the progress of the game;
a setting switch (e.g., a key switch for setting) provided for changing or confirming a setting value;
The game control means
A main processing means for performing main processing as the game progresses (for example, a main CPU 2101 for executing the main processing shown in FIG. 179 );
A periodic processing means for executing processing at a fixed cycle (for example, a main CPU 2101 for executing periodic interrupt processing shown in FIG. 195 );
Range calculation means (for example, the main CPU 2101 that executes the CRC generation process (outside the area used) in FIG. 200, which is called by the power interruption process in FIG. 199) that performs calculation within a specific address range of the read/write memory (a predetermined area in the main RAM 2103) and stores the calculation result in a calculation result storage area (CRC value storage area 2103e) outside the specific address range of the read/write memory;
a range comparison means (for example, the main CPU 2101 that executes the CRC check process (outside the area in use) shown in FIG. 181) that performs calculations within a specific address range of the read/write memory and compares the calculation results with the calculation results stored in the calculation result storage area;
a setting value storage area in which the setting value is stored;
An error detection means for detecting an error in the game control means (for example, a main CPU 2101 that executes the CRC inspection process (outside the use area) shown in FIG. 181 and the setting value check process (outside the use area) shown in FIG. 198);
When the error detection means detects an error, an error processing means (for example, a main CPU 2101 that executes the game return impossible error processing (outside the use area) shown in FIG. 183) is provided,
When the error detection means detects an abnormality in the random number circuit, or when the set value stored in the set value storage area is different from a predetermined value, an error flag (for example, a game return impossible error flag) is set to an error (data representing "return impossible");
The game control means
When the range comparison means detects a mismatch, the error processing means is executed (for example, the game return impossible error processing is called in the power-on processing shown in FIG. 180),
A gaming machine characterized in that when an error is set in the error flag during the main processing (e.g., during the internal lottery processing), the error processing means (e.g., calling up the game return impossible error processing during the power-on processing shown in Figure 180) is executed.

With this configuration of the present invention, if fraudulent activity is committed, a game return impossible error will not occur at the time the fraudulent activity is committed. Instead, a game return impossible error will occur at the start of the unit game thereafter. This means that the person committing the fraudulent activity will start the gaming machine under the mistaken belief that the fraudulent activity was successful, and as a result, the person committing the fraudulent activity can be identified on the spot.

(A-9-2) The second embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration in the first embodiment.

The game control means further includes power-on means for executing a power-on process when the power is turned on,
The range comparison means is controlled to be executed by the power-on means (for example, executed in the power-on processing shown in FIG. 180 ),
The game control means
When a mismatch is detected by the range comparison means, the main processing means is controlled to execute the error processing means before performing the main processing (for example, in the power-on processing shown in Figure 180, if there is a CRC abnormality, a game return impossible error processing is called).

With this configuration of the present invention, if fraudulent activity is committed, a game return impossible error will not occur at the time the fraudulent activity is committed. Instead, a game return impossible error will occur at the start of the unit game thereafter. This means that the person committing the fraudulent activity will start the gaming machine under the mistaken belief that the fraudulent activity was successful, and as a result, the person committing the fraudulent activity can be identified on the spot.

(A-9-3) The third embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration in the first embodiment.

The error detection means is executed at a fixed cycle by the periodic processing means (for example, by the periodic interrupt processing shown in FIG. 195 ),
The game control means
When an error is set in the error flag, the error processing means is controlled to be executed (for example, by calling the game return impossible error processing in the internal lottery processing shown in Figure 188) after the player instructs the start of the game (for example, after the player operates the start lever).

With this configuration of the present invention, if fraudulent activity is committed, a game return impossible error will not occur at the time the fraudulent activity is committed. Instead, a game return impossible error will occur at the start of the unit game thereafter. This means that the person committing the fraudulent activity will start the gaming machine under the mistaken belief that the fraudulent activity was successful, and as a result, the person committing the fraudulent activity can be identified on the spot.

(A-9-4) The fourth embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration in the first embodiment.

The microprocessor (e.g., microprocessor 2100) of the game control means comprises the arithmetic circuit, the read memory, and the read/write memory;
the random number circuit includes a first random number circuit provided in the microprocessor and a second random number circuit disposed outside the microprocessor;
The error detection means is configured to set an error in the error flag when an abnormality is detected in either the first random number circuit or the second random number circuit.

With this configuration of the present invention, if fraudulent activity is committed, a game return impossible error will not occur at the time the fraudulent activity is committed. Instead, a game return impossible error will occur at the start of the unit game thereafter. This means that the person committing the fraudulent activity will start the gaming machine under the mistaken belief that the fraudulent activity was successful, and as a result, the person committing the fraudulent activity can be identified on the spot.

(A-9-5) The fifth embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration in the fourth embodiment.

The error detection means is configured to detect abnormalities in the first random number circuit and the second random number circuit using different methods.

With this configuration of the present invention, if fraudulent activity is committed, a game return impossible error will not occur at the time the fraudulent activity is committed. Instead, a game return impossible error will occur at the start of the unit game thereafter. This means that the person committing the fraudulent activity will start the gaming machine under the mistaken belief that the fraudulent activity was successful, and as a result, the person committing the fraudulent activity can be identified on the spot.

(A-9-6) The sixth embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration in the first embodiment.

The game control means further includes a power supply cutoff means for executing a power supply cutoff process when a drop in power supply voltage is detected,
the range calculation means is controlled to be executed by the power supply interruption means,
The game control means is configured to execute the error processing means (for example, call the game return impossible error processing in the power-on processing shown in Figure 180) if it is determined that the range calculation means is not being executed (for example, if the power outage occurrence flag is turned off) even if the range comparison means has not detected a comparison mismatch.

With this configuration of the present invention, if fraudulent activity is committed, a game return impossible error will not occur at the time the fraudulent activity is committed. Instead, a game return impossible error will occur at the start of the unit game thereafter. This means that the person committing the fraudulent activity will start the gaming machine under the mistaken belief that the fraudulent activity was successful, and as a result, the person committing the fraudulent activity can be identified on the spot.

(A-9-7) The seventh embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration in the first embodiment.

The error processing performed by the error processing means is
The error details are displayed on the display.
The device is configured to maintain a standby state in which no operation to start the game is accepted.

With this configuration of the present invention, if fraudulent activity is committed, a game return impossible error will not occur at the time the fraudulent activity is committed. Instead, a game return impossible error will occur at the start of the unit game thereafter. This means that the person committing the fraudulent activity will start the gaming machine under the mistaken belief that the fraudulent activity was successful, and as a result, the person committing the fraudulent activity can be identified on the spot.

(A-9-8) The eighth embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration in the seventh embodiment.

In the standby state, if the power is turned off and then a predetermined operation is performed on the setting switch when the power is turned on, a process to change or confirm the setting value is executed, and the main process is executed.

With this configuration of the present invention, if fraudulent activity is committed, a game return impossible error will not occur at the time the fraudulent activity is committed. Instead, a game return impossible error will occur at the start of the unit game thereafter. This means that the person committing the fraudulent activity will start the gaming machine under the mistaken belief that the fraudulent activity was successful, and as a result, the person committing the fraudulent activity can be identified on the spot.

(A-9-9) The ninth embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration in the eighth embodiment.

In the standby state, if the power is turned off and then turned on again without performing a specified operation on the setting switch, the device will return to the standby state.

With this configuration of the present invention, if fraudulent activity is committed, a game return impossible error will not occur at the time the fraudulent activity is committed. Instead, a game return impossible error will occur at the start of the unit game thereafter. This means that the person committing the fraudulent activity will start the gaming machine under the mistaken belief that the fraudulent activity was successful, and as a result, the person committing the fraudulent activity can be identified on the spot.

(A-9-10) The invention according to the tenth embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration in the fourth embodiment.

the microprocessor further comprises a cyclic redundancy check circuit;
The microprocessor is configured to send data within the specific address range to the cyclic redundancy check circuit to cause the cyclic redundancy check circuit to perform an operation within the specific address range, and to receive an operation result of the operation from the cyclic redundancy check circuit.

With this configuration of the present invention, by performing the calculation processing related to checking the main RAM outside the main CPU, the size of the processing program related to checking the main RAM can be reduced, and the program area in the main ROM can be prevented from being overwhelmed. Furthermore, the structure and description of the main program can be made simpler, improving the development efficiency and maintainability of the program, and further reducing the load on the main CPU.

(A-9-11) The invention according to the eleventh embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration in the tenth embodiment.

the data in the specific address range transmitted to the cyclic redundancy check circuit includes data in a plurality of non-contiguous areas in the read/write memory;
The calculation result received from the cyclic redundancy check circuit is configured to be a single piece of data.

With this configuration of the present invention, by performing the calculation processing related to checking the main RAM outside the main CPU, the size of the processing program related to checking the main RAM can be reduced, and the program area in the main ROM can be prevented from being overwhelmed. Furthermore, the structure and description of the main program can be made simpler, improving the development efficiency and maintainability of the program, and further reducing the load on the main CPU.

According to this invention, when fraudulent activity is committed, a game return impossible error does not occur at the time the fraudulent activity is committed. Instead, a game return impossible error occurs at the start of a unit game thereafter. This allows the person committing the fraudulent activity to start the gaming machine under the mistaken belief that the fraudulent activity was successful, making it possible to identify the person committing the fraud on the spot.

Furthermore, according to the present invention, by performing the calculation processing related to checking the main RAM outside the main CPU, the size of the processing program related to checking the main RAM can be reduced, and the program area in the main ROM can be prevented from being overwhelmed. Furthermore, the structure and description of the main program can be made simpler, improving the development efficiency and maintainability of the program, and further reducing the load on the main CPU.

[10. Other examples of expansion related to gameplay, etc.]
As described above, in this embodiment, the gameplay has been described by exemplifying the specifications and functions of a gaming machine (e.g., the first gaming machine, etc.), but the specifications and functions related to the gameplay are not limited to those described above, and various modifications and extensions are possible. Below, we will explain such an extension example, although it is merely an example. Note that some or all of the various specifications and functions described in this section can be applied to other gaming machines described in this embodiment. In other words, an appropriate combination of these can be considered as the invention related to this embodiment.

(Extended example 1: Initial value of the advantageous zone payout counter)
As described above, in this embodiment, the counter value of the advantageous zone payout number counter is updated according to the increase or decrease in the number of medals in the advantageous zone (e.g., step S101 in FIG. 28 , step S151 in FIG. 31 , etc.). Also, based on the counter value of the advantageous zone payout number counter, the lowest point is set as the point where the absolute value of the number of medals has decreased the most since the start of the advantageous zone. When the increase from the most recent lowest point reaches a specified value (e.g., 2400 medals), the advantageous zone is forcibly terminated and the game transitions to a non-advantageous zone (the AT state is terminated even if the game period in the AT state remains). However, the payout number limiter is not limited to this. For example, the start of the advantageous zone is set as the starting point (±0), and when the value of the advantageous zone payout number counter counted according to the progress of the game (the increase or decrease in medals) reaches a specified value, the advantageous zone is forcibly terminated and the game transitions to a non-advantageous zone.

In this configuration, if the number of medals decreases rather than increases after the start of the advantageous zone, the counter value of the advantageous zone payout number counter will be negative. The gaming machine must accurately manage and identify this negative value. However, managing and identifying negative values generally requires a larger amount of data than managing only positive values. Furthermore, for certain types of gaming machines (e.g., medal-less gaming machines), if a game limit is not implemented and the advantageous zone does not end depending on the number of games played, it is expected that the advantageous zone will remain open for a long period of time (e.g., one to two weeks), resulting in a large negative value (number of coins absorbed). For this reason, it is desirable to design the advantageous zone payout number counter to be able to count over as wide a range as possible while minimizing data volume, thereby maximizing the number of coins absorbed (number of coins lost by the player), which is the decrease in medals. Therefore, we will show an example of using a 2-byte counter as the advantageous zone payout number counter, counting the difference, including the number of coins absorbed, as a positive value in the range of 0 to 65535. In this example, the default value is set to "2400", but as mentioned above, the default value can be set to any payout number as long as it is less than "2400".

Figure 223 is a diagram illustrating an example of how the difference in coin count changes when multiple values are set as the initial value of the favorable zone payout counter. The vertical axis shows the counter value of the favorable zone payout counter, which is the difference in coin count, and the horizontal axis shows the progress of the game (time axis). Figure 223(a) shows an example of how the difference changes when 1000 is set as the initial value when the favorable zone starts. Figure 223(b) shows an example of how the difference changes when 65000 is set as the initial value. Figure 223(c) shows an example of how the difference changes when 63135 is set as the initial value. Figure 223(d) shows an example of how the difference changes when 2400 is set as the initial value. Note that Figures 223(a) to 223(c) show examples in which the favorable zone payout counter counts down when coins are inserted and up when coins are paid out, while Figure 223(d) shows an example in which the favorable zone payout counter counts up when coins are inserted and down when coins are paid out.

As mentioned above, the advantageous zone payout counter can count between 0 and 65,535. As shown in Figure 223(a), if the initial value is set to 1,000, the payout limiter will be activated when it exceeds 3,400. On the other hand, as the game progresses and the number of medals decreases rather than increases, the counter value of the advantageous zone payout counter decreases, resulting in a downward trend to the right as shown in Figure 223(a). However, the advantageous zone payout counter can only count up to 0. For this reason, even if the number of medals decreases after the counter value of the advantageous zone payout counter reaches 0 as shown in Figure 223(a), and the game is controlled to an advantageous state such as an automatic turnaround (AT) state, the maximum number of medals that can be won is 3,400, and the A portion shown in Figure 223(a) (the number of medals inserted by the player but not counted) will not be returned to the player. For this reason, if the initial value of the advantageous zone payout counter is set to 1,000, it is disadvantageous to the player but advantageous to the gaming facility.

Next, as shown in Figure 223(b), if the initial value of the advantageous zone payout number counter is set to 65,000, even if the number of medals decreases rather than increases as the game progresses, causing the count to decline to the right as shown in Figure 223(b), the difference in the number of medals can be counted until the counter value of the advantageous zone payout number counter reaches 0. Compared to Figure 223(a), the range in which the number of medals absorbed can be returned is wider, and the maximum number that can be won by entering an advantageous state such as an AT state is 65,535. However, the advantageous zone payout number counter can only count up to 65,535, and when it reaches 65,535, the payout number limiter is controlled. For this reason, if the advantageous zone were to enter an advantageous state such as an AT state immediately after the start of the advantageous zone, the advantageous zone would immediately end (with a net increase of 535 medals).

Therefore, if the initial value of the advantageous period payout counter is set to 63135 (= 65535 - 2400), which is the value that becomes 65535 when the net increase reaches the specified value of 2400, the advantageous period will not end before the net increase reaches the specified value of 2400, even if the player is controlled to an advantageous state such as an AT state immediately after the advantageous period begins.

Also, even if the number of medals decreases rather than increases as the game progresses, causing a downward slope to the right as shown in Figure 223(c), if the game is controlled to an advantageous state such as an AT state at timing X as shown in Figure 223(c), the maximum number that can be acquired will be the sum Y of the specified value of 2400 and the number of medals absorbed up to timing X, and the number of medals absorbed up to timing X will be returned to the player.

Furthermore, the difference in coins can be counted until the counter value of the favorable zone payout counter reaches 0. Compared to Figure 223(a), this broadens the range in which the number of coins absorbed can be returned, and the maximum number of coins that can be acquired by controlling the machine to a favorable state such as an automatic time slot (AT) is 65,535. On the other hand, the favorable zone payout counter can only count up to 0. Therefore, even if the machine is controlled to a favorable state such as an automatic time slot (AT) after the counter value of the favorable zone payout counter reaches 0 and the number of coins decreases, as shown in Figure 223(c), the maximum number of coins that can be acquired remains 65,535, and the A coins shown in Figure 223(c) (the number of coins inserted by the player but not counted) are not returned to the player. However, 63,135 coins, the number of coins absorbed by the favorable zone payout counter when the counter value reaches 0, is an extremely difficult number to reach during the operating hours of a typical gaming parlor, when the gaming machine is constantly being played on (fully operating) and is not controlled to a favorable state such as an automatic time slot (AT) for more than a week. For this reason, in the case of a typical gaming facility, it is not realistic for the number of coins absorbed to reach 63,135, and no real harm will occur. As a result, if 63,135 is set as the initial value of the advantageous zone payout number counter, it is possible to prevent either the player or the gaming facility from being at an advantage or disadvantage, and to achieve a balance between the player and the gaming facility.

Figure 223(c) illustrates the most preferable initial value for the advantageous zone payout counter when counting down on deposits and up on payouts. In contrast, Figure 223(d) illustrates the most preferable initial value for the advantageous zone payout counter when counting up on deposits and down on payouts. Figure 223(d) shows a case where the initial value of the advantageous zone payout counter is set to 2400 (= 0 + 2400), a value that becomes 0 when the net increase reaches the specified value of 2400. Even in this case, even if the advantageous zone is controlled to a favorable state such as an AT state immediately after the start of the advantageous zone, the advantageous zone will not end before the net increase reaches the specified value of 2400.

Also, even if the number of medals decreases rather than increases as the game progresses and the graph rises to the right as shown in Figure 223(d), if the game is controlled to an advantageous state such as an AT state at timing X as shown in Figure 223(d), the maximum number that can be acquired will be the sum Y of the specified value of 2400 and the number of medals absorbed up to timing X, and the number of medals absorbed up to timing X will be returned to the player.

Furthermore, the difference in coins can be counted until the counter value of the advantageous zone payout number counter reaches 0, which broadens the range in which the number of coins absorbed can be returned compared to Figure 223(a), and the maximum number that can be won by controlling the game in an advantageous state such as an AT state is 65,535 coins. On the other hand, the advantageous zone payout number counter can only count up to 65,535, and any coins exceeding the absorbed number of coins reached at 65,535 will not be returned to the player. However, as explained in Figure 223(c), in the case of a typical gaming facility, it is not realistic for the number of coins absorbed to reach 63,135, and no real harm will occur. As a result, if 2,400 is set as the initial value of the advantageous zone payout number counter, it is possible to prevent either the player or the gaming facility from being at an advantage or disadvantage, and a balance can be achieved between the player and the gaming facility.

Figures 223(c) and 223(d) use a 2-byte counter as the advantageous zone payout counter, and illustrate an initial value for the advantageous zone payout counter that allows at least the specified value of the payout limiter to be returned to the player and also allows the maximum number of coins to be returned to the player. However, the initial value of the advantageous zone payout counter is not limited to this, as long as it is set taking into account the specified value of the payout limiter, etc., and may be set taking into account the specifications of the gaming machine (e.g., ball output performance) in addition to the specified value of the payout limiter. Figure 224 illustrates an example where the initial value of the advantageous zone payout counter is set taking into account the average net increase in coins per game in AT state, which is part of the gaming machine's ball output performance.

Figure 224 illustrates an example of a gaming machine with specifications where the payout limiter's default value is set to 2326, the maximum number of games that can be played in a favorable zone is set to 4000, the count range of the favorable zone payout counter is set to 4384-18790, and the average net increase in coins per game in AT state is set to 2.2 coins. In theory, with a gaming machine with such specifications, even if the machine is in AT state for the entire duration of a single favorable zone, the average number of coins will be 8800 (= 4000 x 2.2). Furthermore, taking into account that there is a certain degree of variation in the probability of winning in practice and the probability of winning, the number of coins that would be gained if the machine were in AT state for the entire duration of a single favorable zone can be estimated at 12000 coins, which is approximately 1.5 times the original number.

In a gaming machine with the specifications shown in Figure 224, if the advantageous zone payout number counter counts down when coins are inserted and up when coins are paid out, the initial value of the advantageous zone payout number counter may be set to, for example, 16,464 (= 18,790 - 2,326), which is the upper limit of the advantageous zone payout number counter's count range minus the specified value of the payout number limiter. This ensures that even if the advantageous zone is controlled to a favorable state such as an automatic timer immediately after the start of the advantageous zone, the advantageous zone will not end before the net increase reaches the specified value of 2,326. Furthermore, the number of coins absorbed can be managed up to 12,080 (= 16,464 - 4,384), which is the maximum number that can be returned. On the other hand, if the number of coins decreases rather than increases as the game progresses and the count value of the advantageous zone payout number counter reaches the lower limit of 4,384, it is not possible to return more than 12,080 (the actual number of coins absorbed). However, even if a favorable state (for example, a game state in which medals increase, such as an AT state or a bonus being activated) begins when the count value of the favorable zone payout counter reaches its lower limit and the AT state continues for the entire period, it is possible to win 12,000 medals, the estimated maximum net increase in a single favorable zone, as mentioned above, without reaching the specified value (without start of payout limit control). This allows players to play without worrying about limits such as the number of medals absorbed.

In the case of certain types of gaming machines that do not have a game count limit, the AT state may continue for an extremely long number of games. For this reason, the count range of the advantageous zone payout number counter may be widened, and the initial value of the advantageous zone payout number counter may be set so that a larger number of coins can be returned. For example, if the count range of the advantageous zone payout number counter is set to 0 to 65,535 and the default value is set to 2,326, the initial value of the advantageous zone payout number counter may be set to 63,209 (= 65,535 - 2,326), allowing up to 63,209 coins to be returned as the number of coins that can be returned.

In addition, in the case of gaming machines equipped with a complete function (details to be described later) that disables game progress when the increase in the number of medals from the reference point (the cumulative number from the base point, hereinafter referred to as "CMP_MY") reaches an upper limit (e.g., 19,000), using the point at which the number of medals has decreased the most at the end of each game during a specified period from when the power is turned on (the lowest value of the cumulative number obtained by adding up the difference between the medals bet and the medals paid out) as the reference point (base point), the complete function may be activated before the payout limit is controlled, even if the sum of the specified value of the payout limit and the number of medals absorbed is equal to or greater than the upper limit (e.g., 19,000). For this reason, if the count range of the advantageous zone payout number counter is, for example, 0 to 19,000 and the default value is 2,400, setting the initial value of the advantageous zone payout number counter to 16,600 (= 19,000 - 2,400) will set the lower limit MAX to -16,600 coins, making it possible to reduce up to 16,600 coins as the number of coins absorbed. As a result, it is possible to prevent situations where the number of coins that could have been obtained through AT, etc., cannot be obtained due to a stoppage caused by the complete function, while also preventing the counter value of the advantageous zone payout number counter from being unnecessarily updated to the range of coins absorbed that cannot be reduced by the complete function.

Furthermore, the payout limiter is not limited to being activated (end of favorable zone) when a predetermined value (e.g., 2326 or 2400, hereinafter referred to as the first predetermined value) is reached. In addition, in certain states (e.g., when the main game state is in a low RT and the bonus is not activated), it may be activated (end of favorable zone) when a second predetermined value different from the first predetermined value is reached. The second predetermined value may be set to a value (e.g., 2285) smaller than the first predetermined value (2326). This is because, in machines that alternate between a bonus (net increase of approximately 120 coins) and an AT state during normal times during a favorable zone, a lottery (e.g., an AT lottery) related to the instruction function is also performed during the bonus, and if the player draws a bonus when the payout limiter is activated with only a small net increase, the player may suffer a loss and become dissatisfied. To avoid this, in certain situations (for example, when the main game state is at a low RT and the bonus is not activated), the advantageous period can be terminated by reaching a second specified value, which is slightly earlier than the first specified value.

In addition, when the count value of the advantageous zone payout number counter reaches a predetermined value that is a predetermined number up to a specified value, the system may transition to a predetermined ending state (execute an ending effect) until control of the payout number limiter begins. In this case, the predetermined value may be set to, for example, the initial value + 2176. In addition, when the number of games played in the advantageous zone reaches a specific value that is a specific number up to the upper limit number of games (4000), the system may transition to a predetermined ending state (execute an ending effect) until control of the game number limiter begins. In this case, the specific value may be set to, for example, 3868.

(Extended example 2: Initialization of the advantageous zone payout counter)
As described above, in the above-described embodiments (all embodiments including Extended Example 1), an initialization process is performed when a setting is changed, as shown in, for example, S23 of FIG. 24 or S2036 of FIG. 180, and data in a designated storage area in the main RAM 103 (including the counter value of the advantageous zone payout counter) is cleared (initialized). However, if the counter value of the advantageous zone payout counter is updated downward from its initial value and cleared while it is being absorbed, the maximum payout number decreases, which is disadvantageous to the player. Furthermore, the player may not have hope of receiving a refund for the number of medals absorbed, which may reduce the operating rate after the setting change. In a gaming machine in which the performance of the instruction function varies depending on the number of medals used (consumed) by the player (the difference in number of medals), for example, even if the AT closes without winning, there is a possibility that the setting may be changed and cleared, which may eliminate or halve the player's hope of receiving a refund for the number of medals used the next day. Furthermore, since it is possible to change the settings depending on the state of the gaming machine (the difference in the number of coins) when the amusement facility closes, there is a risk that the amusement facility manager or the like may intentionally or unintentionally set the machine to a disadvantage for the player.

To resolve this issue, the counter value of the advantageous zone payout counter may be maintained after a setting change, rather than being cleared. Specifically, the counter value of the advantageous zone payout counter may be stored and updated in an area other than a designated storage area in main RAM 103 that is not cleared when a setting change is made. This prevents players from being disadvantaged or from reducing utilization rates. For example, in a gaming machine in which the performance of the instruction function changes depending on the number of medals (difference in number) used (consumed) by a player, even if the gaming parlor closes without winning the AT, players can still play the next day in hopes of winning the AT based on the number of medals used. In addition, even if a setting change is made, players can expect changes in the performance of the instruction function, which greatly contributes to improving utilization rates. This also prevents gaming parlor managers and others from intentionally or unintentionally setting the system to a disadvantage for customers. In contrast, AT-related parameters other than those related to the advantageous zone payout counter are cleared when a setting change is made.

Here, referring to Figure 225, specific examples 1 to 3 of the possibilities for processing the advantageous zone payout counter for each trigger are explained. Figure 225 illustrates examples of advantageous zone payout counter processing, including the possibility of initializing the advantageous zone payout counter (setting its initial value), the possibility of performing a counter update process that updates the counter value of the advantageous zone payout counter according to the increase or decrease in medals, the possibility of referencing the counter value of the advantageous zone payout counter during AT lotteries, and the possibility of transmitting counter information to identify the counter value of the advantageous zone payout counter. Examples of triggers include startup after clearing the RWM, operation of a specific button by the gaming facility manager, a setting change by the gaming facility manager, during a normal zone (non-advantageous zone) during play, transition from a normal zone (non-advantageous zone) to an advantageous zone, during a favorable zone during play, the end of an advantageous zone due to reaching the specified value of 2,400 medals in the advantageous zone, and the end of an advantageous zone due to the establishment of an optional trigger in the advantageous zone (such as the end of the AT state).

"At startup after clearing the RWM" does not refer to the RAM being cleared using a so-called RAM clearing procedure in gaming machines that are equipped with such a procedure (for example, turning on the power while holding down the reset button initializes the same areas as when changing settings while maintaining the settings), but rather refers to the RWM being initialized and started up when the machine is shipped from the factory or when the power is turned on after an RWM error. Furthermore, "when a specific button, etc. is operated" refers to the operation of a specific control unit other than a setting change operation (for example, a RAM clearing procedure), allowing gaming facility managers and others to intentionally participate in the initialization.

In each of the specific examples 1 to 3 shown in Figures 225(a) to 225(c), in the column where the type of processing of the advantageous zone payout counter intersects with the type of trigger, "Required" is displayed if the processing is required at that trigger, "Permitted" is displayed if the processing can be performed at that trigger, and "Not possible" is displayed if the processing cannot be performed at that trigger, with special notes indicated by an asterisk (*). In all of the specific examples 1 to 3, initialization of the advantageous zone payout counter when the settings are changed is set to "Not possible," but other details are explained below for each of the specific examples 1 to 3.

First, in specific example 1 shown in Figure 225(a), initialization of the advantageous zone payout number counter is prohibited not only when changing settings but also when operating a specific button, etc., but is permitted when transitioning from a normal zone to an advantageous zone, or when the advantageous zone ends due to the realization of an optional trigger. As a result, whether or not to initialize the advantageous zone payout number counter is determined (determined) when transitioning from a normal zone to an advantageous zone and when the advantageous zone ends, allowing the machine to manage the determination of whether or not the player is at a disadvantage. Also, by not initializing the advantageous zone payout number counter when transitioning from a normal zone to an advantageous zone, or when the advantageous zone ends due to the realization of an optional trigger, the counter value of the advantageous zone payout number counter can be carried over (maintained) to the next advantageous zone. Furthermore, initialization of the advantageous zone payout number counter is required when starting up after clearing the RWM.

In addition, in Specific Example 1, counter update processing during normal play is defined as "required," and the favorable zone payout number counter can be updated as play progresses even in non-favorable zones. In other words, in Specific Example 1, the counter value of the favorable zone payout number counter is always updated, regardless of whether the zone is a normal zone (non-favorable zone) or a favorable zone. This allows for more accurate identification of the actual number of coins absorbed.

Furthermore, by making counter update processing "mandatory" during normal gameplay, it is possible to broaden the design possibilities for gaming machines (so-called 7U-type gaming machines) that are designed so that the number of games played in advantageous zones is less than 70% of the total number of games (advantageous zone stay ratio less than 70%) without setting differences in the performance of instruction functions, thereby diversifying gameplay. The reasons for this are explained below.

7U type gaming machines are limited to a 70% or less ratio of time spent in advantageous zones, so they must be designed to spend 30% or more in non-advantageous zones. Meanwhile, in non-advantageous zones, no AT-related processing can be performed other than the advantageous zone transition lottery, which references the internal winning combination, and penalties cannot be imposed by reference to the button press order. Therefore, in non-advantageous zones, no penalties are imposed even if the game is played using irregular button presses. As a result, if the machine is equipped with so-called biased bells (for example, bells with a high winning probability when the correct button press order is the first to stop in the middle or first to the right), the payout rate in non-advantageous zones will increase, making it impossible to achieve a low base.

However, as mentioned above, if the counter update process can be performed during normal play, and the number of coins absorbed in non-advantageous zones can be updated, even in 7U type gaming machines, by designing the machine so that absorbing coins in non-advantageous zones results in greater benefits from the AT after the transition to advantageous zones, even if the machine is equipped with so-called biased bells, it is possible to ensure that the left-first stop, which is a low base, is observed even in non-advantageous zones, and players can be encouraged to play in a low-base manner even in non-advantageous zones. In other words, it is possible to suppress or prevent inconveniences such as stopping operations in a press order that was not intended during the design stage in normal zones. As a result, it is possible to expand the design scope of 7U type gaming machines, which can be designed without the constraints of the ratio of instructed devices, and diversify gameplay.

Next, specific example 2 shown in Figure 225 (b) is an example in which the initialization of the advantageous zone payout number counter and the initialization of the advantageous zone correspond one-to-one. For this reason, initialization of the advantageous zone payout number counter is set to be impossible when transitioning from the normal zone to the advantageous zone, but is set to be required when the advantageous zone ends due to the establishment of any trigger. Furthermore, initialization of the advantageous zone payout number counter is set to be impossible when operating a specific button, etc., or when changing settings, but initialization of information related to the advantageous zone is also set to be impossible, as indicated by the * when changing settings. This allows information related to the advantageous zone, along with the advantageous zone payout number counter, to be maintained even if settings are changed during an advantageous zone. Note that if settings are changed during an advantageous zone, information related to the advantageous zone is maintained, but if the game is in an AT state, processing such as updating the information to prevent the game from starting from the effects in the AT state, or initializing the AT information related to the AT state, may be performed.

In addition, in specific example 2, it is specified that the counter value of the advantageous zone payout number counter can be referenced when settings are changed during an advantageous zone. This allows AT lotteries and the like to be conducted by referencing the counter value of the advantageous zone payout number counter when settings are changed during an advantageous zone. As a result, for example, when settings are changed during an advantageous zone, the counter value of the advantageous zone payout number counter can be referenced and AT lotteries (such as ceiling game number lotteries) can be conducted in a manner (with different degrees of advantage) depending on the number remaining until the specified value, the number of coins absorbed, etc., allowing for a design that minimizes losses (avoids disadvantages) for players after settings are changed.

Specific example 3 shown in Figure 225 (c) specifies that the advantageous zone payout number counter cannot be initialized when a specific button is operated or when settings are changed, but unlike specific example 2, it specifies that initialization of information related to the advantageous zone is required when settings are changed, as indicated by the *. As a result, when settings are changed during an advantageous zone, the advantageous zone payout number counter is maintained, while information related to the advantageous zone other than the advantageous zone payout number counter (AT-related parameters) can be initialized.

In addition, the gaming machine may be one that is determined to be one of specific examples 1 to 3 with regard to whether or not the advantageous zone payout number counter is processed for each trigger, or it may be one that is determined to be one of specific examples 1 to 3 (any combination) for each processing of the advantageous zone payout number counter, or it may be one that is determined to be one of specific examples 1 to 3 (any combination) after the trigger, or it may be one that is determined to be a combination not shown in specific examples 1 to 3.

Figure 225 explains the initialization of the advantageous zone payout number counter, etc., but provides examples of data other than the advantageous zone payout number counter that is not subject to clearing for each trigger. Figure 226 is a diagram for explaining an example of data that is not subject to clearing for each trigger (retained data). Figure 226 shows the triggers for clearing as initialization, such as when the advantageous zone ends, and when settings are changed. Data that needs to be retained to avoid putting the player at a disadvantage when initializing, such as when the advantageous zone ends, includes, for example, data for identifying the operation state of the condition devices related to the device continuous operation device and the bonus role winning flag, data for identifying the device and device continuous operation state, such as during a bonus, data for identifying the replay probability lottery state, such as RT, and data for identifying the number of reserved coins, such as credits. In addition, data that needs to be retained in the hardware configuration to prevent malfunctions during initialization, such as when a favorable zone ends, includes, for example, reel excitation information used for stepping motor excitation control, error information for identifying errors that have occurred, and information related to the role ratio display monitor for identifying the various information to be displayed on the role ratio monitor device 54.

In contrast, data that may be retained so as not to put players at a disadvantage when changing settings includes, for example, data for specifying the condition device operation status related to the reel and reel continuous operation device, data for specifying the reel and reel continuous operation status, and data for specifying the replay probability lottery status. Although not shown, as explained in Figure 225 and elsewhere, data that may be retained so as not to put players at a disadvantage when changing settings includes the count value of the advantageous zone payout number counter. Furthermore, data that may be retained in the hardware configuration when changing settings includes, for example, reel excitation information and information related to the reel ratio display monitor.

(Extended example 3: Example of behavior when changing settings when maintaining the advantageous zone payout counter)
As mentioned above, in the above-mentioned embodiments (all embodiments including extended examples 1 and 2), specific examples 1 to 3 were given as examples in which the counter value of the advantageous zone payout counter is not cleared by a setting change, but is maintained thereafter. Of these, the behavior when the setting is changed in specific example 3 will be explained below. Figure 227 is a diagram showing the state transition when the setting is changed in specific example 3.

As shown in Figure 227, when a setting change is made during a favorable zone, initialization of information related to the favorable zone indicated by * at the time of the setting change in Figure 225 (C) (for example, AT-related parameters other than the favorable zone payout number counter) is required, resulting in a transition to a non-favorable zone, and then a transition to a favorable zone when the favorable zone transition conditions are met. On the other hand, when a setting change is made, initialization of the favorable zone payout number counter is disabled, as shown at the time of the setting change in Figure 225 (C) and when transitioning to a favorable zone during a normal zone (non-favorable zone). In addition, counter update processing is disabled during a normal zone. For this reason, the counter value of the favorable zone payout number counter at the time of the setting change is carried over to the favorable zone to which the player transitioned from the non-favorable zone.

Note that when changing the settings in specific examples 1 to 3 shown in Figure 225, initialization of the advantageous zone payout number counter is disabled, and an example has been shown in which the counter value of the advantageous zone payout number counter is maintained, but this is not limiting; the counter value of the advantageous zone payout number counter may be referenced to determine whether to maintain the counter value or set to the initial value.

As a first example, when changing the settings, the counter value of the advantageous zone payout number counter is referenced to determine whether the counter value is the initial value, and if it is the initial value, the counter value is re-stored to the initial value (or the initial value is maintained), while if it is not the initial value, the counter value is maintained regardless of whether the current counter value is greater or less than the initial value.

As a second example, when changing settings, the counter value of the advantageous zone payout counter can be referenced to determine whether the counter value is decreasing from the initial value and whether a coin is being absorbed. If the counter value is not decreasing from the initial value and no coins are being absorbed, the initial value can be restored to the counter value, whereas if the counter value is decreasing from the initial value and coins are being absorbed, the current counter value can be maintained. This can avoid situations that are disadvantageous to the player, such as the maximum number of coins that can be won after changing settings being less than the specified value.

As a third example, when changing settings, the counter value of the advantageous zone payout counter is referenced to determine whether the counter value is increasing from the initial value and no coins are being absorbed. If the counter value is increasing from the initial value and no coins are being absorbed, the initial value is stored in the counter value again, but if the counter value is not increasing from the initial value and no coins are being absorbed, or if the counter value is the initial value, the current counter value can be maintained. This can avoid situations that are disadvantageous to the player, such as the maximum number of coins that can be won after changing settings being less than the specified value.

As a fourth example, in addition to the first to third examples above, if the counter value of the advantageous zone payout counter is maintained when the setting is changed, and the number of coins absorbed after the setting change exceeds a predetermined number, the counter value may be set (corrected) to a value that decreases from the initial value by a predetermined number. The predetermined number is, for example, a number within the allowable range for the maximum number of coins that can be redeemed. If the number of coins that can be redeemed after the setting change is 10,000, it would be 7,600 (= 10,000 - 2,400). For example, if the counter value of the advantageous zone payout counter at the time of the setting change is a value that results in a number of coins absorbed of 20,000, the number of coins absorbed will be corrected to a value that results in a number of coins absorbed of 7,600 (55,535 when the initial value is 63,135). Furthermore, if the number of coins that can be redeemed after the setting change is 19,000, the maximum number that activates the complete function (details will be described later), the predetermined number would be 16,600 (= 19,000 - 2,400). For example, if the counter value of the advantageous zone payout counter is a value that would result in an absorption of 20,000 coins when the settings are changed, the absorption will be corrected to a value that would result in an absorption of 16,600 coins (46,535 when the initial value is 63,135). As a result, by starting from a state where the total number of coins that can be returned is the specified value plus a predetermined number, as a guideline, it is possible to allow a certain amount of payouts, while preventing the number of coins that can be returned from becoming extremely large.

In the example shown, the counter value of the advantageous zone payout number counter is referenced to determine whether to maintain the counter value or set the initial value when the setting is changed, and then maintained or set, etc. However, this is not limited to this. A determination may be made when the setting is changed, and if it is determined that the initial value should be set, the setting flag may be set to the ON state, and when the advantageous zone is transitioned, a determination may be made as to whether the setting flag is ON, and if it is ON, the initial value may be stored, and if it is not ON, the counter value may be maintained.

(Extended example 4: Specification example)
Examples of specifications for the gaming machines described in the above-described embodiments (all embodiments that may include extended examples 1 to 3, hereinafter simply referred to as "embodiments") are listed below. Note that any of the specification examples described below may be applied to the gaming machines described in the embodiments, or two or more of the specification examples may be applied.

(AT granting one hit suppression specification in one game)
When configured as in the above embodiment, for example, if the count value at the start of the AT state is minus 5,000, the payout limiter will not activate until the difference exceeds "5,000 + 2,400" (i.e., 7,401 or more). Therefore, assuming that no limiters other than the payout limiter are installed, if the start of the AT state is determined in such a situation and, for example, if it is determined that the AT state will continue until the end of the advantageous zone (including intermittent continuation), the player will effectively be awarded a bonus of 7,400 AT difference. In this case, it is possible to use a design that emphasizes large wins, such as "GET 7,400 AT difference." However, if a design allows players to win too many medals in a single game, it may not be possible to adequately suppress gambling.

For this reason, it is desirable to design the AT expected value (difference in number of coins) that can be awarded in the AT awarding process in one game (including not only the process that determines whether to award the AT state (initial win), but also the process that determines whether to extend the AT state (addition)) to be limited to not exceed a specific value (preventing the awarding of an AT difference in number of coins that exceeds a specific value in a so-called "single hit"). For example, it is desirable to design the AT expected value that can be awarded in the AT awarding process in one game to be 3,000 coins or less. Note that the specific value is merely an example, and can be set to any value taking into account factors such as payout rate and degree of gambling. For example, it could be set to 2,400 coins, the same as the specified value, or any other value that exceeds the specified value (3,600 coins or 4,800 coins). Furthermore, various awarding modes can be adopted.

For example, if the AT state is managed by the difference in number of coins (in the case of difference in number of coins management), an AT difference of more than 3,000 coins should not be awarded. If the AT state is managed by the number of games (in the case of number of games management), the expected value of the net increase in coins per game should be taken into consideration, and if this is, for example, 3 coins per game, an AT game number of more than 1,000 games should not be awarded. Also, for example, if the AT state is managed by the number of sets (in the case of number of sets management), the number of games per set should also be taken into consideration, and if this is, for example, 100 games per set (as mentioned above, the expected value of the net increase in coins per game is 3 coins), an AT set number of more than 10 sets should not be awarded.

This technical concept can be summarized as follows, for example:

In a gaming machine equipped with a difference limiter (e.g., a payout limiter) that terminates a favorable zone when the gaming value increases beyond a specified value (e.g., 2,400 coins) starting from the start of the favorable zone, even if the decrease in gaming value (e.g., the number of coins absorbed since the start of the favorable zone (the number of coins lost by the player)) counted by a difference counter (e.g., a favorable zone payout counter) used in the difference limiter is a specified value (e.g., 5,000 coins), the expected value of gaming value awarded during the AT state in the AT awarding process for one game is configured to be equal to or less than a specific value (e.g., 3,000 coins) that is less than the specified value, and the value obtained by adding the specified value to the specified value (e.g., 7,400 coins) may exceed the specific value.

A gaming machine with the above configuration has the effect of appropriately suppressing gambling.

(Speech control specifications related to one-hit suppression)
When configured as in the above embodiment, as mentioned above, from the viewpoint of suppressing gambling, it is desirable that the AT expected value (here, an example of the AT difference number) awarded in one game does not exceed a specific value (here, an example of 3,000), and from the same viewpoint, it is also desirable that an effect that notifies that an AT difference number of more than 3,000 has been awarded in one game (for example, an effect such as the above-mentioned ``GET AT difference number of 7,400''; hereinafter referred to as ``one-hit effect'') is not performed.

However, even under these restrictions, it is possible that a notification may be made that makes it appear as if an AT difference of more than 3,000 coins has been awarded in a single game, even if the coins were not actually awarded in a single game (for example, awarded as a cumulative result over several games). However, if such a notification could lead a player to mistakenly believe that an AT difference of more than 3,000 coins has been awarded in a single game, such a notification could constitute a one-hit effect. Therefore, in order for the above restrictions to function properly (to appropriately curb gambling), it is desirable to also restrict (not execute) presentation expressions that could constitute such one-hit effects.

Here, an example of a presentation that may correspond to a one-hit presentation is explained below. Here, for example, there is a three-game award period in which an AT difference is awarded, and an AT difference is awarded in each of the first to third games (for example, an AT difference of 1,200 coins is awarded in each game), and it is announced that an AT difference of more than 3,000 coins (for example, 3,600 coins) has been awarded in the third game.

In the first presentation example, in the first and second games, only the fact that the player is in the award period (or only that the AT difference has been awarded) is notified, and in the third game, after a similar notification is made, it is notified that the AT difference awarded during the award period was 3,600 (a result notification is made). In this case, since no specific notification of the AT difference awarded is made except in the result notification, there is a risk that when looking at the final result notification, the player may mistakenly believe that an AT difference of 3,600 has been awarded in one shot. Therefore, as the result notification in this case may constitute a one-shot effect, it is desirable to limit such presentations.

In addition, even if a similar presentation is used, for example, in the above result notification, if a specific announcement is made about the AT difference awarded in each game during the awarding period, such as "1st game: plus 1200 coins, 2nd game: plus 1200 coins, 3rd game: plus 1200 coins, total: plus 3600 coins," and the presentation can be fully recognized as the result announcement for that game merely showing the cumulative total, then this is not considered to be a one-hit presentation and does not need to be restricted.

The second presentation example is a presentation expression in which, in the first and second games, it is announced that an AT difference of 1,200 coins has been awarded in each game (a progress announcement is made), and in the third game, after a similar progress announcement is made, it is announced that the AT difference awarded during the award period was 3,600 coins (a result announcement is made). In this case, because the progress announcement specifically announces the AT difference awarded, it is thought that even when looking at the final result announcement, there is no risk of mistakenly believing that an AT difference of 3,600 coins has been awarded in one go. Therefore, it is thought that there is no need to restrict presentation expressions like this.

As shown in the second presentation example, for example, after announcing in each game that the AT-related bonus awarded in each game is less than a specific amount (for example, an AT difference of 1,200 coins, which means the AT expected value is less than 3,000 coins), it is announced that the total amount of bonuses over a series of added periods (award periods) will exceed a specific amount (for example, a display such as "GET TOTAL 3,600 coins, exceeding the AT expected value of 3,000 coins" is displayed). This has the effect of preventing the player from mistakenly believing that more than a specific amount of bonuses have been awarded in a single game, appropriately suppressing excessive gambling, while also allowing the player to properly understand the amount of bonuses that have been awarded. Note that this also applies to the other examples of presentation examples described in this section as not requiring restrictions.

For example, in the progress notification above, even if there is no specific notification of the AT difference number that has been awarded, if a notification is made that suggests that the AT difference number that has been awarded is gradually increasing (for example, the number of jewels being added, or the meter increasing, etc.), and the result notification is made based on that (for example, jewels acquired in different unit games are broken one by one and the AT difference number is added, or numbers representing the AT difference number are displayed sequentially on the meter scale, etc.), then this would not be considered to be a one-hit effect and would not need to be restricted.

(AT application performance change specifications based on the number of sheets sucked)
When configured as in the above embodiment, as mentioned above, for example, when the counted value is minus 1000 at the start of the AT state (when the number of medals absorbed (for example, the number of medals reduced from the initial value of the advantageous zone payout number counter, the number of medals lost by the player, etc.) is 1000), the payout number limiter will not operate until the difference in the number of medals exceeds "1000 + 2400" (i.e., "3401" or more). Also, for example, when the counted value is minus 5000 at the start of the AT state (when the number of medals absorbed is 5000), the payout number limiter will not operate until the difference in the number of medals exceeds "5000 + 2400" (i.e., "7401" or more).

In other words, assuming that no limiters other than the payout limiter are installed, the more coins are absorbed at the start of the AT state (the more negative the counted value), the further away the payout limiter will be, and the more gaming value can be won during the same advantageous period. Therefore, the AT awarding performance may be changed depending on the number of coins absorbed. Even in gaming machines equipped with a game count limiter (e.g., one that activates after 3,000 or 4,000 games) that ends the advantageous period depending on the number of games elapsed since the start of the advantageous period in addition to the payout limiter, the AT awarding performance may be similarly changed depending on the number of coins absorbed. This is because, after considering the net increase in coins per game in the AT state and the number of games remaining until the end of the advantageous period according to the game count limiter, if the number of games remaining until the end of the advantageous period is secured so that the AT state will not be terminated midway, the greater the number of coins absorbed, the further away the payout limiter will be for the player to be activated.

For example, when the number of absorbed coins is relatively large, the degree of advantage in the AT granting process for the AT, which is an example of a benefit, may be increased such that (a) the probability of winning the AT is higher, and (b) the degree of advantage in the AT (for example, expected acquisition value or expected continuation value) is higher, compared to when the number of absorbed coins is relatively small. Specifically, when the number of absorbed coins is equal to or greater than a specific threshold or specific number, the degree of advantage in the AT granting process may be increased compared to when the number of absorbed coins is less than a specific threshold or specific number. Furthermore, when the number of absorbed coins is within a specific range, the degree of advantage in the AT granting process may be increased compared to when the number of absorbed coins is in a range different from the specific range (for example, a range less than the specific range, a range exceeding the specific range, etc.).

For example, the degree of advantage in the AT granting process may be higher when the number of absorbed sheets is 5,000 than when the number of absorbed sheets is 1,000. In other words, when the number of absorbed sheets is equal to or greater than a predetermined number, such as 5,000, the degree of advantage in the AT granting process may be higher than when the number of absorbed sheets is less than a predetermined number, such as 5,000. Various modes can be used to increase the degree of advantage. For example, only (a) can be used, or only (b) can be used. Both (a) and (b) can also be used. Note that the degree of advantage in the AT granting process may be higher when the number of absorbed sheets is relatively small than when the number of absorbed sheets is relatively large, thereby preventing the number of absorbed sheets from becoming extremely large.

A special AT state may also be established to which entry is possible only when the number of absorbed coins is equal to or greater than a specific number. For example, a specification may be adopted in which a player can enter a special AT state with an expected value of 3,000 coins only when 600 or more coins are absorbed. In other words, a transition to a special AT state that is advantageous for players who are not included in the AT lottery when the number of absorbed coins is less than a specific number, such as 600 coins, may be included in the AT lottery when the number of absorbed coins is equal to or greater than a specific number, such as 600 coins, thereby increasing the degree of advantage when the number of absorbed coins is equal to or greater than a specific number, such as 600 coins. Note that the special AT state may be an AT that always allows the player to obtain the number of coins up to the payout limiter (difference number limiter) (e.g., 600 coins + 2,400 coins = 3,000 coins), or an AT with an expected value of 3,000 coins that may end with a net gain of 3,000 coins or less. Furthermore, even in a special AT state, it may be possible for the special AT state to end with 2,400 or less coins acquired depending on the development during the special AT state (e.g., whether or not the bonus is successful). The expected value of the special AT state may be variable (fluctuating) depending on the number of coins absorbed. For example, the expected value of the special AT state may be variable (fluctuating) depending on the number of coins absorbed, such as an expected value of 3,000 coins if 600 coins have been absorbed, or an expected value of 4,000 coins if 1,600 coins have been absorbed. The value of the advantageous zone payout number counter may be directly reflected in the expected value on a coin-by-coin basis, or multiple thresholds may be set, such as a first threshold of 600 to 1,599 coins and a second threshold of 1,600 to 2,599 coins, and the expected value (degree of advantage) of the special AT state may be determined by determining which threshold the number of coins absorbed as determined by the value of the advantageous zone payout number counter matches. Furthermore, if the condition that the number of coins sucked in is 600 or more is met, the special AT state may have an expected value of 3,000 coins, regardless of the number of coins sucked in above that, thereby appropriately limiting the ball output performance in one shot. Furthermore, multiple types of such special AT states may be provided, and the machine may be controllable to one of multiple types of special AT states, including a special AT state in which the expected value changes depending on the number of coins sucked in, and a special AT state in which the expected value does not change depending on the number of coins sucked in (for example, a special AT state of a type depending on the transition conditions, or a special AT state of a type determined by lottery by referencing a table depending on the transition conditions, etc.).

It is also possible to set a number of AT games that can be won only when the number of absorbed coins is a specific number or more. For example, a specification may be made such that 3,000 AT games can be won only when 600 or more coins are absorbed. In other words, the number of AT games that is advantageous to the player, but which is not included in the AT lottery when the number of absorbed coins is less than a specific number such as 600, can be included in the AT lottery when the number of absorbed coins is a specific number such as 600, thereby performing the AT awarding process to increase the degree of advantage when the number of absorbed coins is a specific number such as 600 or more.

Furthermore, when changing the AT granting performance according to the number of coins absorbed, the degree of advantage of the AT granting process can be changed by referencing different AT lottery tables according to the threshold (range) of the number of coins absorbed, such as 0-500 coins, 501-1000 coins, 1001-2000 coins, 2001-3000 coins, or 3000 coins or more. For example, an AT lottery table corresponding to the range of the number of coins absorbed may be determined so that the degree of advantage of the AT granting process increases the larger the range of the number of coins absorbed. Also, in this case, even when the count value starting from the start of the advantageous zone is positive (and the number of coins absorbed is negative), the degree of advantage in the AT granting process may be changed by referencing different AT lottery tables (for example, different tables for net increases of 0 to 500 coins, 501 to 1000 coins, and 1001 to 2400 coins) depending on the threshold (range) of the net increase (or the number of coins absorbed that becomes a negative value). In this case, the degree of advantage in the AT granting process may be higher when the net increase is relatively small than when the net increase is relatively large.

In addition, when changing the AT granting performance depending on the number of coins absorbed, for example, different AT lottery tables can be referenced depending on the range of the number of coins absorbed, such as 0 to 500 coins (hereinafter referred to as the first range), 501 to 600 coins (hereinafter referred to as the second range), 601 to 1000 coins (hereinafter referred to as the third range), 1001 to 1100 coins (hereinafter referred to as the fourth range), 1101 to 1500 coins (hereinafter referred to as the fifth range), 1501 to 1600 coins (hereinafter referred to as the sixth range), etc., thereby changing the degree of advantage of the AT granting process. For example, the AT lottery table may be defined so that in a second range where the number of absorbed coins is greater than the first range, the degree of advantage of the AT granting process is higher than in the first range, in a fourth range where the number of absorbed coins is greater than the third range, the degree of advantage of the AT granting process is higher than in the third range, and in a sixth range where the number of absorbed coins is greater than the fifth range, the degree of advantage of the AT granting process is higher than in the fifth range. In this case, the AT lottery table may be defined so that the greater the range of absorbed coins, the higher the degree of advantage of the AT granting process, and so that in the third range, the degree of advantage of the AT granting process is higher than in the second range, and in the fifth range, the degree of advantage of the AT granting process is higher than in the fourth range. In other words, the degree of advantage of the AT granting process increases as the number of absorbed coins increases, and may be, for example, sixth range > fifth range > fourth range > third range > second range > first range. Furthermore, without being limited to this, the degree of advantage of the AT granting process may be, for example, 6th range > 4th range > 2nd range > 1st range = 3rd range = 5th range, or 6th range = 4th range = 2nd range > 1st range = 3rd range = 5th range, etc.

Furthermore, as shown in Extended Examples 1 to 3, if the advantageous zone payout number counter is not initialized when settings are changed, the number of coins absorbed is more likely to be larger than when it is initialized when settings are changed. For this reason, if a specification is adopted that changes the degree of advantage in the AT awarding process when predetermined conditions are met depending on the counter value (difference in coins) of the advantageous zone payout number counter (e.g., whether it is equal to or greater than a predetermined number or a specific number, whether the number of coins absorbed is within a large range, etc.), as described above, players will be more likely to benefit (receive preferential treatment) from the advantageous zone payout number counter not being initialized when settings are changed. For example, if the AT awarding lottery is favored when 1,000 or more coins are absorbed, the advantageous zone payout number counter, which has been updated to a value of 1,000 or more coins, will not be initialized even when the design is changed, and players will be able to play in the favorable state even after settings are changed.

In addition, the AT granting process may change (vary) the degree of advantage based on the value of other parameters in addition to the counter value of the advantageous zone payout number counter. The other parameters may be any that can be updated according to the progress of the game in the advantageous zone, and may be, for example, the following:
1: Status (low probability, high probability, ultra high probability) or mode related to the degree of advantage in the AT lottery; 2: RT status; 3: Game status related to bonus activation. Non-carryover, bonus carryover, bonus activation, bonus type, etc.; 4: Number of CZ wins or number of consecutive CZ failures where a CZ win was won but the AT was not won in the CZ; 5: Number of games played since the end of the previous (most recent) win (AT or bonus); 6: Points updated according to the progress of play during the advantageous zone. Points based on the number of games won, points awarded/updated according to the number of wins or prizes for a specified small role, or the number of misses, points awarded/updated according to the winning role, etc. Points are, for example, points referenced in AT lotteries and CZ lotteries, and the more points there are, the more advantageous the lottery will be.
7: The number of coins absorbed in the most recent predetermined number of games (e.g., 500, 1000 games, etc.). The percentage of coins absorbed in the most recent predetermined number of games (e.g., 1000 games, etc.) based on the advantageous zone payout counter.
8: The difference in number of coins from the start of the current advantageous zone (net increase, absorbed number of coins). Note that this does not apply to the first advantageous zone, as it is the same as the advantageous zone payout counter.
9: If in AT, the net increase in number of sheets starting from the start of this AT. Of the difference in number of sheets (net increase in number of sheets, number of sheets absorbed) starting from the start of this advantageous zone, the percentage of the net increase in number of sheets starting from the start of this AT. Of the number of sheets absorbed based on the advantageous zone payout number counter, the percentage of the net increase in number of sheets starting from the start of this AT.

Furthermore, the method for changing the degree of advantage of the AT granting process is not limited to this. For example, rather than providing a different AT lottery table, a variable (e.g., the lottery value itself, or a value for performing a predetermined calculation on a reference lottery value) corresponding to the number of coins absorbed (or the number of coins increased) may be defined, and the AT granting process may be performed by referring to that value, thereby changing the AT granting performance. The method of AT granting process itself is arbitrary, and methods other than those described above may be adopted as long as they change the AT granting performance according to the absorption situation and enable diverse gameplay. Furthermore, while an example has been shown in which the degree of advantage of the AT granting process is changed according to the number of coins absorbed determined from the counter value of the advantageous zone payout number counter, this is not limiting, and the degree of advantage of the AT granting process may also be changed according to the number of coins absorbed (number of losses) determined from the counter value of a predetermined counter equivalent to the counter value of the advantageous zone payout number counter. The predetermined counter is basically updated in the same manner as the advantageous zone payout counter when inserting and when a payout occurs, for example, but in games where push order navigation is used, it may also be updated to the number of coins that were expected to be paid out regardless of the actual operation mode (even in the case of an operation error). Note that the counter value of the predetermined counter may not be initialized when the settings are changed, just like the advantageous zone payout counter, or may be set to the same value (synchronized) as the advantageous zone payout counter when the settings are changed.

(Performance specifications related to the number of sheets sucked)
At any time during the advantageous zone (for example, at regular intervals in a non-AT state, when a CZ fails in a CZ state, when a continuous effect indicates a non-AT transition, when the AT state ends, when the threshold (range) for the number of coins absorbed changes, etc.), an effect may be executed that suggests or notifies the player of the current number of coins absorbed. Note that this effect may definitively notify the player of the current number of coins absorbed (including the range and the number of coins above (or below)). Alternatively, the effect may not definitively notify the player of the current number of coins absorbed (including the frequency and manner of occurrence). Furthermore, the effect may be such that the player can understand the current number of coins absorbed (the content of the notification) if the player has specific information in advance, but cannot understand the current number of coins absorbed (the content of the notification) if the player does not have the specific information, or may be such that the player can understand the current number of coins absorbed (the content of the notification) regardless of the information the player has.

For example, when configured as in the above extended examples 1 to 3, an effect may be executed according to the counter value of the advantageous zone payout number counter. As an effect according to the counter value of the advantageous zone payout number counter, for example, when the counter value of the advantageous zone payout number counter is decreasing from the initial value and is being sucked in, a suggestive effect may be executed that suggests that the counter value is being sucked in more than the initial value. By executing this suggestive effect, the player can understand that the counter value has not increased from the initial value and that at least the maximum number of 2,400 coins will be returned.

In addition, as an effect corresponding to the counter value of the advantageous zone payout number counter, when the counter value of the advantageous zone payout number counter is a specific threshold, a suggestive effect may be executed that suggests that the specific threshold is reached (possibly). Specifically, when the number of coins absorbed is equal to or greater than a specific number (e.g., 1,000 coins) based on the counter value of the advantageous zone payout number counter, a suggestive effect corresponding to the case where the number is equal to or greater than the specific number may be executed. This allows the player to understand that the number of coins absorbed is equal to or greater than the specific number. Furthermore, when the number of coins absorbed is equal to or greater than a specific number (e.g., 1,000 coins) based on the counter value of the advantageous zone payout number counter, a suggestive effect may be executed that suggests that the number is equal to or greater than the specific number at a higher rate than when the number is less than the specific number. Furthermore, when the number of coins absorbed is within a specific range (e.g., 1,000 to 3,000 coins) based on the counter value of the advantageous zone payout number counter, a suggestive effect corresponding to the case where the number is within the specific range (e.g., 1,000 to 3,000 coins) may be executed. This allows the player to understand that the number of coins absorbed is within a specific range. If the number of coins absorbed is within a specific range (e.g., 1,000 to 3,000 coins) based on the counter value of the advantageous zone payout number counter, a suggestion effect may be executed that suggests (possibly) that the number is within the specific range at a higher rate than when the number is below the specific range (e.g., 1,000 to 3,000 coins). In this case, the specific threshold, specific number, and specific range may be set to the number of coins absorbed that increases the advantage of the AT awarding process, as exemplified in the "(Specifications for changing AT awarding performance based on the number of coins absorbed)" column.

For example, when a specific threshold is set, the degree of advantage of the AT granting process may be set higher than when a value other than the specific threshold is set. Furthermore, when the number of coins is equal to or greater than a specific number (e.g., 1,000 coins), the degree of advantage of the AT granting process may be set higher than when the number of coins is less than the specific number. Furthermore, when the number is within a specific range (e.g., 1,000 to 3,000 coins), the degree of advantage of the AT granting process may be set higher than when the number is less than the specific range.

In addition, the effect corresponding to the counter value of the advantageous zone payout number counter may be an effect that can be executed based not only on the counter value of the advantageous zone payout number counter, but also on the set value that has been set, i.e., a suggestive effect that corresponds to the counter value of the advantageous zone payout number counter and the set value. Specifically, for example, a GOLD icon may appear as a suggestive effect at the end of the AT state, indicating that the set value is 4 or more and the number of coins absorbed is 3,000 or more.

If such a presentation were possible, even if the player stayed in the non-AT state for a long time, if it was suggested or notified that the number of coins absorbed was large, it would be possible to predict that the AT granting performance would improve, which would have the effect of not reducing the player's interest in the game and increasing their motivation and anticipation to play. On the other hand, if it was suggested or notified that the number of coins absorbed was small, it would be possible to give the player the option of quitting the game, which would have the effect of preventing them from becoming addicted to the game.

In addition, from the viewpoint of enhancing the gameplay, in the above-mentioned presentation, instead of or in addition to the number of coins absorbed, the number of games stayed in the advantageous zone (stay period) may be suggested or notified. Also, the number of games in the non-AT state in the advantageous zone (non-AT period) or the number of games in the AT state in the advantageous zone (AT period) may be suggested or notified. In this way, for example, it is possible to provide the enjoyment of predicting the current number of coins absorbed, taking into account the game data displayed on a data display installed in the gaming facility and the game data published by the gaming facility on its website.

At any time after the opening of the gaming establishment (for example, immediately after the opening of the gaming establishment (the first game, the 100th game, etc.), when the CZ fails in the first CZ state, when the first consecutive effect indicates no transition to AT, when the first AT state ends, when the threshold (range) for the number of coins absorbed first changes, etc.; preferably, this should occur as early as possible after the opening of the gaming establishment), a presentation may be executed that suggests or notifies the user that a setting change has been made. Note that this presentation may definitively notify the user that a setting change has been made, or, although it does not definitively notify the user, it may make it possible to predict whether a setting change has been made based on the frequency or manner in which it appears.

For example, assuming that when a setting change occurs, the advantageous zone ends and transitions to a non-advantageous zone, and the number of coins absorbed is also initialized, if such an effect is executed and a setting change is suggested or notified, it can be predicted that the number of coins absorbed from the previous day has not been carried over. On the other hand, if a setting change is suggested or notified, it can be predicted that the number of coins absorbed from the previous day has not been carried over. As described above, this provides the enjoyment of predicting the current number of coins absorbed, and also makes it possible to provide a game with a rich strategic element. This has the effect of promoting operation. Furthermore, the gaming establishment may be able to set whether or not such an effect is executed in the hall menu, etc. Setting such an effect (for example, a "setting fixed suggestion effect") to be disabled has the effect of making it more difficult for players to detect the setting change. On the other hand, if the setting fix suggestion effect is enabled, players will receive useful information (hints that will lead to winning), which will give players the impression that the gaming parlor is a good parlor, thereby having the effect of attracting more customers.

At times when the advantageous period may end (or has the potential to end) (for example, when the AT state ends, or when 32 games have been played since the AT state ended), a presentation may be executed that suggests or notifies the player whether the advantageous period will end (or has ended). Note that this presentation may definitively notify the player that the advantageous period will end (or has ended), or it may not definitively notify the player but may make it possible to predict whether the advantageous period will end (or has ended) based on the frequency or manner in which it appears.

For example, assuming a specification that does not include the above-mentioned interval lamp (status display unit), if such an effect is executed and it is suggested or notified that the advantageous interval is ending (or has ended), it can be predicted that the number of coins absorbed will not be carried over in subsequent games, and if it is suggested or notified that the advantageous interval has not ended, it can be predicted that the number of coins absorbed will be carried over in subsequent games.

For example, if a player stays in a non-AT state for a long time and then finally transitions to an AT state, only to have it end quickly, if it is suggested or notified that the advantageous period has not ended, it will be possible to predict that the AT awarding performance is increasing, thereby increasing motivation and anticipation for playing without reducing interest in the game. On the other hand, if a player achieves a certain amount of game value in the AT state and is suggested or notified that the advantageous period is ending (or has ended), it will be possible to predict that the AT awarding performance will not increase depending on the number of coins absorbed, and in this case the player can be given the option of quitting play, which will have the effect of preventing addiction to the game.

As mentioned above, even if a configuration is used in which a section lamp (status display unit) controlled by the main side is not provided, a sub-side section lamp (sub-side status display unit) controlled by the sub side may be provided in order to enable the effects described above. The sub-side section lamp may be controlled in the same manner as the section lamp controlled by the main side, such as turning on when transitioning from a non-favorable section to a favorable section, or when the AT state first begins in a favorable section, and turning off when the favorable section ends and transitions to a non-favorable section, or it may be controlled in a different manner. This has the effect of eliminating the need for a program related to section lamp control on the main side, thereby increasing the available data capacity on the main side. Furthermore, by providing appropriate suggestions or notifications to the player regarding their stay in a favorable section, it is possible to achieve a variety of gameplay features that incorporate predictions about the number of coins absorbed and the reset status of the favorable section.

For example, when the AT state ends, a lottery may be held as to whether or not to turn off the light even if the advantageous zone has not ended, and if the lottery is won, the light may be turned off. Alternatively, when the AT state ends, a lottery may be held as to whether or not to keep the light on even if the advantageous zone has ended, and if the lottery is won, the light may remain on. In this way, the game may become more diverse by allowing the light to behave differently from the main zone lamp that was previously installed. Note that the above-mentioned effects can be performed using various existing effect devices without installing such sub-zone lamps. In other words, the various effects described in this section can be performed using any effect execution means as long as the player can be appropriately suggested or notified.

(The specification allows you to set a value other than the initial value as the number of sheets to be sucked.)
In the case of a configuration like the above expansion examples 1 to 3, and furthermore, in the case of a specification in which the degree of advantage of the AT lottery changes according to the number of coins sucked in, there is a risk that a discrepancy will occur in the ball-out performance between a state in which tens of thousands of coins have been sucked in after operation at an amusement facility for several weeks or more, and a case in which a ball-out test is conducted from the initial value at a testing institution. Also, even when the gaming machine is operated and tested in-house by the gaming machine manufacturer to check whether the ball-out rate is as designed, there is a risk that it will be difficult to grasp the ball-out rate in a sucked-in state.

It is therefore desirable to have a method for setting a situation where the difference in number of coins is large and negative. For example, if a RAM clear procedure is performed (such as turning on the power while holding down the reset switch), a function can be provided to forcibly set a suck-in state, such as by setting the advantageous zone payout number counter to the maximum number of coins that can be sucked in (max value).

The maximum value (max value) that can be absorbed into the advantageous zone payout counter is, for example, if the advantageous zone payout counter's upper limit value = 65535 and its initial value = 63135 (65535 minus 2400, the default value that activates the payout limiter), and if the counter counts down when money is inserted and up when money is paid out, then the advantageous zone payout counter's counter value = 0. In other words, this is the value at which the advantageous zone payout counter cannot be updated any further in the negative direction (losing direction), which increases the number of coins absorbed.

The operating procedure for setting the number of coins to be sucked is not limited to the RAM clearing procedure, and any procedure (combination) involving the operation of a setting key, reset switch, power-on switch, etc. may be used as long as it can be operated by an amusement facility manager, etc.

Furthermore, the number of coins to be sucked that can be set by operation is not limited to a value that is the maximum number of coins to be sucked as long as it is a value that causes the machine to enter a sucking state, but may be a predetermined value (for example, 53,135, which is minus 10,000 coins, 43,135, which is minus 20,000 coins, the predetermined number shown in the fourth example: 7,600, which means that the number of coins that can be refunded after the setting is changed is 10,000 coins, or 16,600 (= 19,000 - 2,400), which means that the number of coins that can be refunded after the setting is changed is 19,000 coins, the upper limit for which the complete function (details of which will be described later) is activated), or may be a value determined from a plurality of predetermined values (for example, 53,135, 43,135... 3,135, 0, etc.) in accordance with operation (for example, making the value configurable and selecting by operating the reset switch, or setting by operating the start lever 7), or may be an arbitrary value that is input each time in accordance with operation (for example, making the value configurable and increasing by operating the stop button 8L, decreasing by operating the stop button 8R, or setting by operating the start lever 7). This ability to set the number of coins to be absorbed makes it easy to conduct ball output tests and check the ball output performance of gaming machines under development from the desired state (for example, a state where the maximum number of coins is set as the number to be absorbed, or a specified negative state), while also improving efficiency.

Furthermore, if the counter value of the advantageous zone payout counter is maintained even when the setting is changed, and the number of coins to be absorbed can be set by operation as described above, the counter value of the advantageous zone payout counter before setting is cleared or overwritten to set the number of coins to be absorbed for setting. Even if the number of coins to be absorbed can be set by operation and a value other than the maximum number is set as the number of coins to be absorbed, by setting the number of coins to a fairly large negative value (for example, minus 10,000 coins or minus 20,000 coins from the initial value) as the set value, the player will not necessarily be disadvantaged greatly even if the previous value is erased.

In addition, even if the setting number of coins to be sucked in can be set by operation, if the setting number of coins to be sucked in is smaller than the number of coins to be sucked in determined from the counter value of the current advantageous zone payout number counter, and setting the setting number of coins to be sucked in would result in a smaller number of coins, the number of coins to be sucked in may not be set; and the setting number of coins to be sucked in may only be set if the setting number of coins to be sucked in is larger than the number of coins to be sucked in determined from the counter value of the current advantageous zone payout number counter, and would result in a significantly smaller number of coins.

(Special low setting available)
When a gaming machine configured as in the above-described extended examples 1 to 3 and that maintains the counter value of the advantageous zone payout number counter even when the setting is changed is installed in an amusement facility, it is expected that the count value of the advantageous zone payout number counter will increase or decrease within a certain range of approximately -60,000 to -30,000 from the initial value. For this reason, it is expected that manufacturers will perform some input before shipping such gaming machines, causing the counter value of the advantageous zone payout number counter to be a negative value and absorbed to a certain extent before shipping. To improve the efficiency of this process of absorbing to a certain extent, for example, a special setting value that absorbs balls quickly and has low ball output performance may be set, and the machine may be set to this special setting value and then input before shipping.

The special setting value is set to a payout rate of around 80%, for example, and is the setting value that is set to be the lowest payout rate for model testing among the possible setting values. When a special setting value is set in a gaming machine, the setting notification effect is executed in a manner that is different (distinguishable) from when a setting value other than the special setting value is set, at least in a non-playing state where no player is playing, such as by controlling the lower back panel 13 to remain off regardless of whether play is being performed or not, or by controlling the lower back panel 13 to remain off when the machine is waiting for customers. This prevents, for example, a case in which a special setting value is set incorrectly in an actual gaming facility, resulting in a general player playing, or allows players to become aware of a gaming machine with an incorrect special setting before they start playing.

(Initialization specifications for the advantageous zone payout counter during model testing)
During model testing of a gaming machine, a test firing test is conducted at each of multiple setting values. On the other hand, for gaming machines configured as in the above-described extended examples 1 to 3, which maintain the counter value of the advantageous zone payout counter even when the setting is changed, the counter value of the advantageous zone payout counter cannot be initialized even during model testing. In this case, for example, for a test gaming machine brought to a testing facility by a manufacturer, if a test firing test is initially started with the counter value of the advantageous zone payout counter set to the initial value of 1, and then the setting is changed to 6 and a test firing test is conducted, the counter value of the advantageous zone payout counter resulting from the progress of play during the test at setting value 1 will become the value at the start of the subsequent test firing test at setting value 6. For this reason, it may be impossible to conduct tests under fair test start conditions for each setting value, making it difficult to standardize the test start conditions.

To prevent such problems from occurring, it is desirable to equip the testing facility with a function that allows it to initialize the counter value of the advantageous zone payout number counter. For example, during the setting change process after powering on, it may be possible to initialize the counter value of the advantageous zone payout number counter on the condition that a connection between the test terminal and the IF board is detected (i.e., on the condition that it is determined that the test machine is connected).

As a first example, when a connection between the test terminal and the IF board is not detected, the counter value of the advantageous zone payout number counter may not be initialized even when the settings are changed, whereas when a connection between the test terminal and the IF board is detected and the settings are changed, the counter value of the advantageous zone payout number counter may be initialized.

As a second example, even when a setting change is made while the connection between the test terminal and the IF board is detected, if the setting change is made using the normal procedure, the counter value of the advantageous zone payout number counter may not be initialized, but if the setting change is made using a special procedure, the counter value of the advantageous zone payout number counter may be initialized. The special procedure may be any procedure that differs from the normal procedure, and may be, for example, an operation in which the setting key switch 52 is turned on, and then a specific button (such as a reset switch) is turned on while the power is turned on. This allows the testing institution to initialize or not initialize the counter value of the advantageous zone payout number counter depending on the test content they wish to perform.

As a third example, when a connection between the test terminal and the IF board is not detected, the counter value of the advantageous zone payout number counter is not initialized even when the RAM is cleared (AT-related parameters other than the advantageous zone payout number counter are initialized while maintaining the same settings), whereas when a connection between the test terminal and the IF board is detected and the RAM is cleared, the counter value of the advantageous zone payout number counter is initialized.

As a fourth example, even when the RAM is cleared while the connection between the test terminal and the IF board is being detected, if the RAM is cleared using the normal procedure, the counter value of the advantageous zone payout number counter may not be initialized, but if the RAM is cleared using a special procedure, the counter value of the advantageous zone payout number counter may be initialized. The special procedure may be any procedure that differs from the normal procedure, and may be, for example, an operation in which the reset button is pressed and held for a predetermined period of time (e.g., 3 seconds) or more after the power is turned on, and then released. This allows the testing institution to initialize or not initialize the counter value of the advantageous zone payout number counter depending on the test content they wish to perform.

(Ceiling is set based on the number of suction sheets)
In the above-described embodiment, an example was described in which the AT state is controlled when the number of games played since the end of the previous AT state reaches a predetermined ceiling number of games (e.g., 500 games, which may be a predetermined number of games or a number determined by lottery) without being controlled to the next AT state from the end of the previous AT state during the advantageous zone. However, instead of or in addition to this, the AT state may be controlled when the number of coins absorbed since the end of the previous AT state based on the advantageous zone payout number counter reaches a predetermined ceiling number (e.g., 1,000 coins, which may be a predetermined number or a number determined by lottery) without being controlled to the next AT state from the end of the previous AT state during the advantageous zone. Furthermore, in a gaming machine configured as in the above-described extended examples 1 to 3, which maintains the counter value of the advantageous zone payout number counter even when the setting is changed, the AT state may be controlled when the number of coins absorbed since the end of the previous AT state reaches a predetermined ceiling number. This allows, for example, a player at an amusement facility to check the number of coins drawn the previous day using a slump graph or the like, predict whether or not the number is close to the ceiling number, and select the gaming machine to actually play, providing an interesting experience. An example of such a gaming machine will be described below.

Figure 228 is a diagram illustrating an example of updating the advantageous zone payout number counter before and after a setting change in relation to the ceiling number. Figure 228 illustrates an example in which the advantageous zone payout number counter is a counter that counts down on deposits and counts up on payouts within a range of 0 to 65535, with 63135 set as the initial value, and the ceiling number determined by lottery from a predetermined range (e.g., 100 to 5000). Note that in Figure 228, the advantageous zone payout number counter is set to an initial value of 63135, the initial ceiling number is determined to be 1000, and the next ceiling specific value is set to 62135 (= 63135 - 1000).

Figure 228(a) shows the transition from when the initial value is set in the advantageous zone payout number counter to when the number of coins absorbed reaches the ceiling number of 1000. As the number of coins absorbed reaches 1000, the counter value of the advantageous zone payout number counter becomes 62135 (= 63135 - 1000). Furthermore, as the counter value of the advantageous zone payout number counter falls below the next ceiling specific value, it is determined that the ceiling number has been reached, and the system is controlled to the AT state, and the absorbed medals are returned to the player.

Figure 228(b) shows the transition when the AT state controlled in Figure 228(a) ends with a net increase of, for example, 865 coins. Due to the net increase of 865 coins, the counter value of the advantageous zone payout counter is 63,000 (= 62,135 + 865).

Figure 228(c) shows a state in which the advantageous zone continues even after the AT state ends, the next ceiling number is again determined to be 1,000, and the next ceiling specific value is set to 62,000 (= 63,000 - 1,000). The next ceiling number may be determined by lottery, for example, by referring to a table in which winning probabilities are allocated to values within a predetermined range (e.g., 100 to 5,000), or by referring to a table with multiple types of tables with different degrees of advantageousness that correspond to the counter value of the current advantageous zone payout number counter (see a table in which the number of coins absorbed based on the counter value of the advantageous zone payout number counter is determined to be a number that is lower at a higher rate when the number is equal to or greater than a specific counter value (e.g., 5,000) than when the number is below the specific counter value). Furthermore, the next ceiling number may be, for example, a predetermined number, or a number that is predetermined according to the counter value of the advantageous zone payout number counter (when the number of coins absorbed based on the counter value of the advantageous zone payout number counter is equal to or greater than a specific counter value (e.g., 5000), a number that is less than when the number is less than the specific counter value is set).

Figure 228(d) shows the transition from the state shown in Figure 228(c) when the number of coins absorbed reaches 500. As the number of coins absorbed reaches 500, the counter value of the advantageous zone payout number counter becomes 62,500 (= 63,000 - 500). In this state, it is assumed that the amusement facility where the gaming machine is installed has closed its business. Furthermore, it is assumed that the settings of the gaming machine have been changed after the business has closed. The advantageous zone payout number counter is not initialized but maintained even when the settings are changed. Furthermore, since the next ceiling specific value is a value similar to the advantageous zone payout number counter, it is also not initialized but maintained even when the settings are changed.

Figure 228(e) shows the status of the gaming machine on the next business day. As mentioned above, the counter value of the advantageous zone payout counter is maintained at 62,500, the same as in Figure 228(d). The next ceiling specific value of 62,000 is also maintained. This allows the benefits of reaching the ceiling to be carried over, even on the next business day, for example. When the number of coins absorbed on the next business day reaches 500, it is determined that the ceiling number has been reached, and the machine is controlled to an AT state, allowing all coins absorbed, including those from the previous day, to be returned to the player. As a result, as mentioned above, it becomes possible for players at gaming parlors to enjoy the fun of checking the number of coins absorbed on the previous day using a slump graph, predicting whether it is close to the ceiling number, and selecting the gaming machine to actually play on.

In Figure 228, the next ceiling specific value is shown as an example of data that is maintained without being initialized along with the advantageous zone payout number counter even when the settings are changed, but instead, for example, the counter value of the advantageous zone payout number counter at the end of the previous AT may be used. If the ceiling number is a predetermined number, the next ceiling specific value can be set again based on the counter value of the advantageous zone payout number counter at the end of the previous AT. Also, if the ceiling number is determined by lottery, a new lottery can be conducted to determine the number and set the next ceiling specific value. Note that the data that is maintained without being initialized along with the advantageous zone payout number counter even when the settings are changed is not limited to the above as long as it is a value equivalent to the advantageous zone payout number counter, and both the next ceiling specific value and the counter value of the advantageous zone payout number counter at the end of the previous AT may be maintained without being initialized.

Up to this point, we have explained a specification for setting a ceiling based on the number of coins absorbed, in which the ceiling bonus (benefit) is awarded by directly referencing the number of coins absorbed by the advantageous zone payout counter. However, it is also possible to indirectly reference the number of coins absorbed by referencing other parameters that are correlated with the number of coins absorbed. For example, on a machine where irregular button presses can incur penalties, the number of times the left first stop is played during non-AT play, or a value obtained by multiplying that number by the expected subtraction value per game during normal play (e.g., 2 coins per game), may be used as a parameter for indirectly referencing the number of coins absorbed (the difference). Furthermore, the number of times a predetermined combination (e.g., a winning combination that guarantees a reduction in medals, such as a common 1-coin combination, or a combination with a negative expected value during non-AT play, such as a push order bell (batting order bell)) may be achieved as a parameter for indirectly referencing the number of coins absorbed (the difference). By indirectly referencing the number of coins absorbed (the difference in number) in this way, there is a fluctuation between the actual number of coins absorbed and the conditions for activating the ceiling, and even for players who can accurately grasp the number of coins absorbed from a data display, for example, it becomes difficult to know when the benefit of the ceiling will be activated, which makes it less interesting to wait for the ceiling compared to when aiming for a fixed ceiling.

(Specifications for displaying the counter value of the advantageous zone payout counter)
In the above-described embodiment, a difference number monitor device may be installed that displays the counter value of the advantageous zone payout number counter. The difference number monitor device may be, for example, a device configured with a four-digit, seven-segment LED and installed inside the main control board case (for example, mounted on the main control board 71 or on another board (e.g., a ratio display board) connected to the main control board 71), or may double as the role ratio monitor device 54. The difference number monitor device may constantly display the counter value of the advantageous zone payout number counter, or, if it doubles as the role ratio monitor device 54, may sequentially display various ratio information including the counter value of the advantageous zone payout number counter. This allows the gaming facility manager and others to understand the status of the difference number.

The counter value of the advantageous zone payout number counter may also be displayed in units of 100 coins. For example, in a four-digit seven-segment LED, the fourth digit (corresponding to the thousands digit) may display the initial letter "S" of the difference in coins, the third digit (corresponding to the hundreds digit) may display the ten thousandths digit of the counter value of the advantageous zone payout number counter, the second digit (corresponding to the tens digit) may display the thousands digit of the counter value of the advantageous zone payout number counter, and the first digit (corresponding to the ones digit) may display the hundreds digit of the counter value of the advantageous zone payout number counter. Therefore, if the counter value of the advantageous zone payout number counter is, for example, between 65,500 and 65,535, "S655" is displayed, and this value is the maximum value.

The following are some ideas for the advantageous zone payout counter. You can use any one of them, or combine multiple ideas as long as they are not inconsistent.

(Ingenuity 1 regarding the advantageous zone payout counter: No update of the number of coins when replay is activated)
When the symbol combination related to the replay is stopped and displayed on the pay line and the replay is activated, the advantageous zone payout number counter may be configured to maintain the value at that time without performing addition/subtraction processing. The technical concept can be summarized as follows.
"A gaming machine characterized by not updating the difference counter (counter for number of coins paid out in advantageous zones) when replaying"
By doing so, the main program can be simplified by not performing processing during replay, when the difference in number of coins does not change. Furthermore, if there is a Type 1 special feature that is only consumed with a two-coin bet (for example, ending after eight small wins or 12 games), and normal play is only for a three-coin bet, if replay is activated on the 12th game, the next game will be a normal game and will be forcibly treated as a three-coin bet. In other words, two coins will be bet at the start of the 12th game, and three coins will be automatically bet upon replay. In such cases, updating the difference in number of coins will complicate processing, but this can be solved by uniformly not updating the value of the advantageous zone payout number counter when replay is activated.

(Trick 2 for the advantageous zone payout counter: Excess determination is also performed on replays and pure losses)
The exceedance judgment, which determines whether the limiter has reached the threshold value at which the advantageous zone ends (a value exceeding +2400 in difference in number of coins from the start of the advantageous zone), is not only made when a small role (a payout role, a role that gives game value) is won, but is also made after all reels have stopped, preferably when a replay role is activated or when there is a loss (a losing combination stops on an active line with no payout, no role, and no replay activation). The technical concept can be summarized as follows:
"A role determination means capable of determining the winning role,
A difference counter (profitable zone payout number counter) that can recognize the increase or decrease in the number of game values;
A limiting means (2400 limiter) that ends the advantageous period when the difference counter reaches a predetermined threshold value;
Preparation,
The winning combination that can be determined by the combination determination means includes at least a combination of a granting combination (a small combination with a payout) for granting a game value and a replay combination for operating a replay;
A gaming machine characterized in that the determination of whether the difference counter has reached a predetermined threshold (a value exceeding +2,400 sheets in difference number from the start of the advantageous zone) is made even when replay is activated.
The gaming machine is characterized in that the achievement determination is performed even when a winning combination results in no special benefit being awarded.
In this way, even in games where the counter value is not updated in the direction approaching the limiter activation (games where addition processing is not performed if the payout is calculated as a positive value, and games where subtraction processing is not performed if the payout is calculated as a negative value), by making an arrival determination, the processing is standardized, which has the effect of reducing the capacity of the main program.

(Ingenuity 3 regarding the advantageous zone payout number counter: Provide separate difference number counters for the limiter and for payout processing)
It is also possible to have multiple difference counters (advantageous zone payout counters), one as a counter for managing the advantageous zone by activating the limiter, and the other for processing the payout balls used for AT-related judgments, lotteries, etc. It is also possible to have multiple difference counters for processing the payout balls. The technical concept can be summarized as follows:
"A first difference counter (a limiter counter) and a second difference counter (a payout counter) that can recognize an increase or decrease in the number of game values,
A limiting means (2400-piece limiter) that ends the advantageous period when the first difference counter reaches a predetermined threshold;
A state control means capable of controlling a special game state (AT state) capable of informing a player of a stop operation mode advantageous to the player;
special processing means capable of executing a special process (AT lottery, etc.) relating to the special game state by referring to the value of the second difference counter;
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with the following.
Since the limiter processing is common to all models, it is stored in a module common to all models in the main program, and special processing that differs depending on the model is stored in a module specific to the model, which has the effect of improving development efficiency.

In addition to AT lotteries and AT judgments, special processing also includes lotteries for AT-related state transitions (transitions between low-probability and high-probability states and mode transitions), the awarding of AT-related points, and various other AT-related judgments, such as determining whether to allow transitions to more profitable AT states.

The limiter counter is also updated in irregular situations, such as when playing with two coins on a gaming machine that recommends three coins, when a bonus is activated when a player makes a mistake in the button sequence and hits the buttons in an irregular manner on a machine with an irregular button press penalty, but the payout counter is not updated in irregular situations, which has the effect of curbing strategies such as reflecting unexpected draws in the AT-related judgments.

Note that, among the processes that refer to the difference in number of coins, the ball output counter may be referenced in all judgments other than the limiter processing, but the limiter counter may also be referenced for some judgments. The counter to be referenced may be set appropriately depending on the content of the ball output processing.

(Ingenuity 4 regarding the advantageous zone payout counter: The limiter is a difference number counter, and a separate MY counter is set up to determine the payout balls.)
When multiple difference counters are provided as in the above-mentioned device 3, the payout counter may be replaced with a difference counter (a counter that can count the increase or decrease in game value with the start of the advantageous zone as the reference point) and an MY counter (a counter that grasps the increase in game value from the point where the game value has decreased the most since the start of the advantageous zone as the reference point) may be used. The technical idea can be summarized as follows.
"A first difference counter (a limiter counter) and a second difference counter (a payout counter) that can recognize an increase or decrease in the number of game values,
an advantageous zone control means for controlling an advantageous zone in which a stop operation mode advantageous to a player can be notified and a non-advantageous zone in which the notification is not made;
A limiting means (2400-sheet limiter) that ends the advantageous period when the first difference counter reaches a predetermined threshold;
A state control means capable of controlling a special game state (AT state) advantageous to a player;
special processing means capable of executing a special process (AT lottery, etc.) relating to the special game state by referring to the value of the second difference counter;
Equipped with
The first difference counter is capable of counting the difference in the number of game values with the start of the advantageous period as a reference point,
The second difference counter is capable of counting the difference in the game value number using the point where the game value has decreased the most in the advantageous zone as a reference point.
By adopting such specifications, it becomes easier to develop specifications that suppress gambling, such as temporarily ending the special gaming state (AT) when the most 1,000 coins have been drawn in.

(Ingenuity 5 regarding the advantageous zone payout counter: Use the value of the difference counter to determine the end of the advantageous zone)
For example, in situations other than limiter activation, when predetermined conditions are met that are candidates for the end of the advantageous zone, such as the end of the AT, the end of the CZ, or when a predetermined number of games have passed since the end of the AT, the value of the difference counter (advantageous zone payout number counter) can be referenced, and if the value is 1,000 or more, the advantageous zone ends, and if it is less than 1,000, the advantageous zone continues, etc., so that the number of remaining winnable coins until the limiter is activated does not become small, thereby reducing the frequency with which the AT is terminated by the limiter. The counter referenced in this case can be either the value of the limiter counter described in idea 3 or the value of the ball output counter. The following is a description organized as a technical concept of an example specification in which the ball output counter is referenced to determine the end of the advantageous zone.
"A first difference counter (a limiter counter) and a second difference counter (a payout counter) that can recognize an increase or decrease in the number of game values,
an advantageous zone control means for controlling an advantageous zone in which a stop operation mode advantageous to a player can be notified and an unadvantageous zone in which the notification is not made;
A limiting means (2400-sheet limiter) that ends the advantageous period when the first difference counter reaches a predetermined threshold;
A means for determining the end of an advantageous period that can determine that the currently existing advantageous period will end when a predetermined condition is met (when a condition that can cause the advantageous period to end other than reaching a limiter, such as when an AT or the like ends or when a predetermined number of games have passed after the AT is met);
Equipped with
The advantageous zone end determination means is capable of determining that the currently existing advantageous zone will end when it references the value of the second difference counter and corresponds to a predetermined threshold value (for example, when the difference is a plus of 1,000 or more).
By doing this, it is possible to prevent situations that increase stress for players, such as when the game progresses with a small number of medals that can be won in the advantageous zone, and even if the player hits an AT or the like, they are unable to win many medals and the limiter is activated.

In addition, if the positive difference from the start of the advantageous period is a first threshold such as 1 to 999 coins, the advantageous period ends at 50%, and if the positive difference from the start of the advantageous period is a second threshold such as 1,000 coins or more, the advantageous period ends at 100%, making it difficult to tell when the advantageous period ends.

Furthermore, in the case of a negative difference in chips, the number of chips that can be won before the limiter is activated does not increase, so it is desirable that the probability of the advantageous zone ending even if the above-mentioned specified conditions are met is lower than in a positive difference in chips situation (0% = including cases where no decision is made to end).

Furthermore, after the end of the advantageous zone, the probability of transitioning to an advantageous zone should be very high, at around 1 in 1 to 1 in 5, and the specification should be such that immediately after transitioning from a non-advantageous zone to an advantageous zone, there will be a highly advantageous chance state (such as a higher AT with a higher expected win value if an AT reversal is won, or a high rate of AT reversal), so that interest in the game will not be diminished immediately after the advantageous zone ends. If such an advantageous zone is to be in a highly advantageous state immediately after its end (a non-advantageous zone, or immediately after the advantageous zone begins), the specification should be such that if a bonus is carried over when transitioning to an advantageous zone, the state will be highly advantageous, the bonus will be erased by changing the settings, and in non-advantageous zones, there will always be a transition to an advantageous zone on the first game, so that the CZ will not be entered in the first game after the setting change, and so that only immediately after the setting change will be targeted.

(Ingenuity 6 regarding the advantageous zone payout counter: Suggestion/notification of clearing of the difference counter)
When the advantageous zone ends, a display such as "The difference number counter has been cleared" or "0/2400" may be displayed to notify the player that the difference number counter has been cleared. Furthermore, a display that suggests a clearing may also be used, not just a notification. For example, if character A (Blue Don-chan) appears on the AT end screen, the player may be prompted to guess the situation, indicating that the difference number counter is unlikely to be cleared; if character B (Green Don-chan) appears, the difference number counter is likely to be cleared; and if character C (Red Don-chan) appears, the difference number counter is definitely cleared. The technical concept can be summarized as follows:
"A difference counter (limiter counter) that can recognize the increase or decrease of the game value number,
an advantageous zone control means for controlling an advantageous zone in which a stop operation mode advantageous to a player can be notified and a non-advantageous zone in which the notification is not made;
A limiting means (2400-piece limiter) that ends the advantageous period when the difference counter reaches a predetermined threshold value;
Equipped with
If a certain condition is met (when conditions that could lead to the end of the advantageous zone other than reaching the limiter, such as when an AT ends or a certain number of games have passed after the AT), the advantageous zone you are currently in may end.
A gaming machine characterized by having an effect (a suggestive effect or an informing effect, either one or both) that serves to suggest or notify that the advantageous zone has ended at a predetermined timing (in the game or any game after the advantageous zone has ended) when the predetermined conditions are met.
By doing so, even if a player wins a large number of medals, the difference number counter is reset, and the player can infer that he or she is in a situation where he or she can win many more medals.

It is advisable to make such suggestions or other effects occur at one of the following times:
・The final game of the advantageous zone ・A game in a non-advantageous zone immediately after the end of the advantageous zone ・A game that satisfies any condition after the end of the advantageous zone (for example, a condition related to the number of games, such as 32 games or 100 games since the end of the advantageous zone, a condition related to the formation of any winning role, such as the formation of a rare role once, or when a suggestive performance lottery is won)
Furthermore, when these conditions for occurrence are met, the effect can only occur when the player operates the effect operation means, and the game can be designed so that a player who wants to guess the end of the advantageous zone presses the effect button.

(About the absence display function)
With the above gaming machines, when a player leaves their seat in the middle of a game, other customers may not check carefully and assume the machine is vacant, leading to problems such as theft if the player leaves their personal belongings behind. While such problems can occur with any gaming machine, they are expected to occur more frequently with certain types of gaming machines that do not have a medal tray (for example, medalless gaming machines).

To prevent such problems from occurring, for example, when a player temporarily leaves their seat while playing (to take a toilet break, smoke a cigarette, answer a phone call, etc.), the player may operate the gaming machine's menu screen to display an image such as "On break" or "Away from seat" on the gaming machine's LCD display, thereby notifying other players and the gaming facility manager that the gaming machine is in use. For example, the gaming machine may be equipped with the following first to third functions.

The first function may be to display an image such as "On break" or "Away from seat" on the LCD display when the player operates a special effect button while a medal can be inserted or the reels can be started by operating the start lever. The image may also be terminated by a specific operation by the player (inserting a medal, operating the start lever, operating a special effect button, etc.).

As a second function, the image displayed in the first example above may also display the amount of time that has elapsed since the image began to be displayed (for example, "10 minutes have passed"). This allows the amusement facility manager to understand the status of the gaming machine (especially how much time has passed since the user left the machine).

A third function may be the ability to set whether or not the first function, etc., can be used. Specifically, while checking the settings, an "Away Function Settings" screen may be displayed, along with "ON" and "OFF" selection icons, and the amusement facility manager may operate a special effect button or the like to enable (enable) or disable (unavailable) the first function and the second function. This allows each amusement facility to select whether to enable or disable the function as needed.

(Lamp indicating external signal output)
As described above, in this embodiment, multiple types of external signals can be output to the outside via an external terminal board (external centralized terminal board 55 shown in Figure 3, or game ball etc. connection terminal board 443 shown in Figure 36). When an external signal is output, it is desirable to light up one of the lamps controlled by the main control board (main control board 71 or main control board 411) as an external signal output lamp, so that it is possible to visually check from the outside whether there are any errors in the external signal output.

Therefore, in a configuration where a section lamp controlled by the main side is provided, as in this embodiment, when a signal indicating the AT status is output from the external terminal board, the section lamp can also be used as an external signal output lamp, and the output of the external signal can be made visible by lighting the section lamp. On the other hand, in a configuration where a section lamp (status indicator) controlled by the main side is not provided, as described above, a separate external signal output lamp can be provided to make the output of the external signal visible.

In either configuration, the lighting state of a specified lamp allows confirmation that an external signal is being output, which has the effect of improving convenience for operators when checking whether a signal is being output properly from the gaming machine, and whether the signal from the gaming machine is being properly received by the store (e.g., hall computer). For example, if the specified lamp is lit but the hall computer cannot detect an external signal output from that machine, it becomes possible to detect a problem such as an improper connection or an internal break in the harness related to receiving the external signal (e.g., the harness connecting the gaming machine to the hall computer, or the harness connecting the sandwich, communication device, and hall computer of a medalless gaming machine).

[Summary of the invention relating to gaming machines in all embodiments including extension examples 1 to 4 relating to the advantageous zone payout number counter (appendix)]
In conventional gaming machines, it is possible to control a favorable zone in which the player can stay in an AT state that notifies the player of a batting order that is advantageous to the player, and some machines end the favorable zone when the difference between the number of medals inserted and the number of medals paid out in the favorable zone reaches a threshold value (see, for example, JP 2017-189215 A).

However, in these gaming machines, the difference in numbers is not taken into account when drawing lots for advantageous states such as automatic time slots. As a result, even if a player puts in a large number of coins, there is no benefit in the lottery for advantageous states, which can reduce motivation to continue playing and ultimately reduce utilization rates.

The present invention was made in consideration of these points, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can prevent a decline in operating rate.

To achieve the above objective, this embodiment provides a gaming machine with the following configuration.

(1) In a gaming machine (e.g., a slot machine, a pachinko machine, a medal-less gaming machine, etc.) in which a game is played by consuming game value (e.g., medals, game balls, credits, benefits, etc.) and game value can be awarded according to the progress of the game,
Counter updating means (e.g., step S101 in FIG. 28, step S151 in FIG. 31, counter update process in FIG. 225, etc.) that updates the counter value of a predetermined counter (e.g., advantageous zone payout counter, etc.) from an initial value (e.g., 63135, etc.) according to the increase or decrease in game value (consumed game value (e.g., medals used for betting, etc.) and awarded game value (e.g., paid-out medals, etc.));
When the counter value is a specific counter value within a decreasing range in which the game value is reduced from the initial value (for example, when the number of absorbed coins is a specific threshold, specific number, or specific range equal to or greater than a predetermined number such as 5,000 coins), a bonus granting means is provided that can grant a bonus to a player in a manner that is more advantageous to the player than when the counter value is not the specific counter value (for example, the degree of advantage in the AT granting process increases; see the "(Specifications for changing AT granting performance based on the number of absorbed coins)"column);
It is equipped with a suggestion effect execution means for executing a suggestion effect that suggests the possibility that the counter value is a specific counter value (for example, when the counter value is a specific threshold, executing a suggestion effect that suggests (possibility) that the counter value is a specific threshold. See the ``(Effect specifications related to the number of coins absorbed)'' column).

With this configuration, a suggestion effect can be executed that suggests the possibility that the counter value is a specific counter value that will grant a bonus that will increase the player's advantage. This makes it easier for the player to guess that the counter value is a specific counter value, and creates anticipation that a bonus may be granted that will increase the player's advantage, increasing the player's interest in the game and preventing a decrease in utilization rate.

(2) In the gaming machine of (1) above,
The device is provided with an advantageous zone control means (e.g., step S88 in FIG. 27) that can control an advantageous zone, which is a zone that can notify an operation mode (e.g., push order navigation) that is advantageous to the player,
The counter update means
When a predetermined condition is met, the counter value is set to the initial value (for example, the initial value is set when an opportunity is met in which the initialization of the advantageous zone payout number counter is set to "Yes" in FIG. 225),
The counter value can be updated between a decrease limit value (e.g., 0) in the direction in which the game value decreases from the initial value and an increase limit value (e.g., 65535) in the direction in which the game value increases from the initial value (e.g., FIG. 223(c)),
The difference between the initial value and the decrease limit value (e.g., 63135-0) is greater than the difference between the initial value and the increase limit value (e.g., 65535-63135),
The advantageous period control means ends the advantageous period when the counter value reaches the increase limit value (for example, steps S93 and S94 in Figure 27. In Figure 225, the advantageous period ends when a specified value such as 2,400 coins is reached during the advantageous period).

This configuration allows for a wider range of updates in the decreasing direction from the initial value than in the increasing direction, and it is possible to refund up to the total of the amount reduced from the initial value and the amount up to the increase limit. As a result, the amount reduced does not simply become a loss, but also increases the amount that can be refunded in the future. As a result, even if the amount is decreasing, it can increase the player's motivation to continue playing until a bonus or other benefit is awarded.

(3) In the gaming machine of (2) above,
The bonus granting means is capable of executing processing related to the granting of the bonus based on the counter value and a predetermined parameter that can be updated according to the progress of the game during the advantageous zone (for example, a parameter that can be updated according to the progress of the game during the advantageous zone; a parameter such as 1 to 9 in the ``(AT granting performance change specifications based on the number of coins absorbed)'' column).

This configuration allows for greater diversity in the rewards offered, increasing the enjoyment of the game.

(4) In any of the gaming machines described in (1) to (3) above,
A setting value changing means (for example, step S25 in FIG. 24) is provided for changing a setting value that affects the degree of advantage in a game;
The counter update means sets the counter value to the initial value when the termination condition for terminating the favorable zone is met, while being able to maintain the counter value even when the setting value is changed by the setting value change means (for example, initializing the counter value at the end of the favorable zone in Figure 225, but not being able to initialize it when the setting is changed).

With this configuration, the counter value is maintained even after the set value is changed, making it possible to, for example, refund the amount that has decreased from the initial value, thereby improving the operating rate of the gaming machine after the point at which the set value may be changed.

(4) In any of the gaming machines described in (1) to (3) above,
Counter values that are not the specific counter value include counter values in a decreasing range in which the game value increases more than the specific counter value (for example, when the number of absorbed coins is equal to or greater than a specific threshold/specific number, the degree of advantage in the AT granting process is higher than when the number of absorbed coins is less than a specific threshold/specific number).

With this configuration, the greater the decrease from the initial value, the greater the player's expectation that a bonus will be awarded that will be more advantageous to the player, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

Furthermore, with the gaming machine configured as described above, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can prevent a decline in operating rate.

[About the complete function]
(Regarding the complete function that references the number of MYs since power-on)
As described above, in this embodiment, when a predetermined operating condition is met, a stop function can be installed that disables play until the amusement facility manager cancels the operation (for example, changes the settings) or the RAM is initialized due to an abnormality.However, as such a stop function, in order to appropriately suppress gambling, it is also possible to install, for example, the complete function shown below.

The complete function sets the lowest number of medals at the end of each game during a specified period from when the power is turned on (the lowest cumulative total calculated by accumulating the difference between the medals bet and the medals paid out) as the base point (base point). When the increase in the number of medals from this base point (the cumulative total from the base point, hereafter referred to as "CMP_MY") reaches an upper limit, the complete function is activated and control is established to disable game progress. In the complete function active state, operations and detections required to progress the game, such as inserting medals and accepting bet and start lever operations, are disabled (disabled). An example of the upper limit is 19,000, but it is not limited to 19,000 as long as it is a predetermined value.

When the complete function is activated, the player and the gaming facility are notified that they cannot continue playing (that game progress has been disabled). Figure 229 is a diagram illustrating an example of a notification made in connection with the complete function. Figure 229 shows a display image on the main effect display unit 21 as an example of a notification. Note that Figure 229 shows an example in which an effect image or background image (here, an image of a character or the like moving) corresponding to the progress of the game is displayed in the center of the display area of the main effect display unit 21.

Figure 229(a) shows an example of a notification during the complete function activation state. During the complete function activation state, a notification pattern corresponding to the complete function activation state, for example, a message image indicating that the complete function has been activated (or disabled) such as "Complete function activated, today's play has ended" is continuously displayed within a rectangular frame in a predetermined upper area of the display area of the main effect display unit 21. The message image indicating that the complete function has been activated is displayed in priority (on a higher layer) over any effect images or background images. By providing such a notification, the reason and circumstances of the game suspension can be clearly communicated to players and store staff, thereby reducing the occurrence of disputes between players and gaming establishments. Note that the screen during the complete function activation state should not include elements that may significantly stimulate gambling, such as the date and time of completion or a "title." This further enhances the effectiveness of the complete function's activation in appropriately reducing gambling.

Figure 229(a) shows an example of a notification pattern on the main display unit 21 corresponding to the complete function activation state. However, in addition to this, notification may also be made by sound from a speaker or by the illumination of a lamp. For example, the speaker may emit a sound saying "Beep! Complete function activated. Today's play has ended" a first number of times (e.g., three times) or a first period of time (e.g., approximately one minute), and a lamp (e.g., a frame lamp located above the upper door mechanism UD) may be illuminated in a first manner (e.g., fully lit). It is desirable that the sound (sound effect, voice, etc.) suggesting or notifying the activation of the complete function be emitted at a specific volume (e.g., a fairly high volume of 85 dB or more, the same volume as when an error occurs, etc.) without being affected by the volume adjustment function.

In addition, even if CMP_MY reaches 19,000, if a so-called consecutive feature operation device (so-called big bonus, BB) or a first-class special feature (so-called regular bonus, RB) is in operation, the system will be controlled to a complete function activation standby state, which waits for the completion function to activate until the consecutive feature operation device or first-class special feature (collectively referred to as features, etc. below) finishes operating, and will then be controlled to the complete function activation state when the feature, etc. finishes operating. When controlled to the complete function activation standby state, the system will be controlled to the complete function activation state when the feature, etc. finishes operating, regardless of the subsequent CMP_MY value (even if it falls below 19,000). By adopting this specification, it is possible to suppress strategic play, such as, for example, after CMP_MY reaches 19,000 during bonus operation, intentionally missing out on minor features or other coin reduction strategies to adjust CMP_MY to 18,999 or less, then ending the bonus and waiting for the next bonus.

Figure 229 (b) shows an example of a notification during a complete function activation standby state. During a complete function activation standby state, a notification is given to the player or the gaming facility that it has been confirmed that play will not be able to continue and that this state is being awaited (that game progress will be disabled). An example of a notification pattern corresponding to the complete function activation standby state is a message image such as "Waiting for complete function activation" continuously displayed on the main effect display unit 21 in a square frame in a specified upper area of the display area of the main effect display unit 21, indicating that activation of the complete function has been confirmed and that the system is awaiting its activation. The notification corresponding to the complete function activation standby state notifies that activation of the complete function has been confirmed, and can therefore be said to be a disablement notification that game progress will be disabled.

A message image indicating that activation of the complete function has been confirmed and that activation is pending is displayed (on a higher layer) in priority to any effect images or background images. By making such a notification, it is possible to clearly communicate to players and store staff that game suspension has been confirmed and that activation is pending. Note that Figures 229(a) and 229(b) show an example in which the message image indicating that the complete function has been activated in Figure 229(a) is displayed in a manner that is more visible (for example, larger text size, larger square frame, etc.) than the message image indicating that activation of the complete function has been confirmed and that activation is pending in Figure 229(b), but this is not limiting and the message images may be displayed in a manner that provides the same visibility (for example, the same text size, etc.).

In addition, when a message image is displayed indicating that the complete function has been confirmed to be activated and that activation is pending, the activation termination conditions of the currently operating device may also be displayed. For example, if the currently operating device is a first-class device continuous activation device or a second-class device continuous activation device, the activation termination conditions of the device may be displayed as "The bonus will end when 100 coins are paid out. Play will end when the bonus ends." Also, for example, if the currently operating device is a first-class special device, the activation termination conditions of the device may be displayed as "The bonus will end when 12 games or 8 wins remain. Play will end when the bonus ends."

In addition, it is preferable that the display indicating the conditions for terminating the operation of these reels, etc., be displayed in a position that does not overlap with the display area for "Waiting for complete function to be activated" shown in Figure 229 (b) or the display area for the push order navigation image, or in a manner that does not excessively reduce the visibility of "Waiting for complete function to be activated" or the push order navigation image even if there is partial overlap (for example, by slightly overlapping the edges or making the display semi-transparent in the overlapping areas).

Note that even if the complete function is displayed (announced), some players may not understand it, so a simple explanation such as "game finished" or "end of game" may be displayed along with the message "Waiting for complete function to be activated." Similarly, when announcing the complete function via audio, as described below, it is preferable to also provide a simple explanation.

Figure 229(b) shows an example of a notification pattern on the main display unit 21 corresponding to the complete function activation standby state. However, in addition to this, notification may also be made by sound from a speaker or by illumination of a lamp. For example, the speaker may emit a sound saying "Beep! Complete function activation standby" a second number of times (e.g., once) or for a second period of time (e.g., approximately 30 seconds), and a lamp (e.g., a frame lamp located above the upper door mechanism UD) may be illuminated in a second manner (e.g., flashing while the sound is being played). It is desirable that the sound (sound effect, voice, etc.) suggesting or notifying standby for complete function activation be emitted at a specific volume (e.g., a reasonably high volume of 85 dB or more, the same volume as when an error occurs, etc.) without being affected by the volume adjustment function. However, this is not limited to this, and the sound may be emitted at a normal volume (e.g., the volume set by the volume adjustment function) taking into account that game play is in progress.

CMP_MY is updated for each game between the time all reels stop and the time it becomes possible to insert medals (bet operations). Figure 230 is a flowchart showing the complete function calculation process for updating CMP_MY, etc. The complete function calculation process is included in the main processing executed by the main CPU 101 shown in Figure 23, and is executed, for example, between the end of S12 and the transition to S2. The control program and data for the complete function calculation process are stored in a non-standard area of the main ROM 102.

In SA01, it is determined whether the value of the complete function activation flag, which determines whether the complete function is activated, is FFh. If it is not determined that the value of the complete function activation flag is FFh, the complete function is not activated nor is the complete function in standby mode, so the process moves to SA02, where it is determined whether a replay role was won in the completed game and a replay is in progress. The value of the complete function activation flag is stored and updated in a 1-byte area reserved exclusively for the complete function activation flag in the non-standard RAM area of main RAM 103.

If SA02 does not determine that a replay is in progress, SA03 determines whether the specified number (number of bets per game), which is the number of medals bet on the completed game, is subtracted from the CMP_MY counter used to identify the current CMP_MY, and whether the number of medals paid out, which is the number of medals paid out (awarded) in the completed game, is added to the CMP_MY counter, resulting in a value less than 0. In other words, SA03 determines whether the cumulative number obtained by adding up the difference based on the results of the completed game is less than 0. The value of the CMP_MY counter is stored and updated in a non-specified RAM area of main RAM 103, an area of 2 bytes or more reserved exclusively for CMP_MY.

If SA03 does not determine that the counter is less than 0, SA04 subtracts the specified number, which is the number of medals bet on the completed game, from the current CMP_MY counter, and adds the number of medals paid out, which is the number of medals paid out (awarded) in the completed game, to the result, and sets this value as the CMP_MY counter value. In other words, SA04 sets (updates) the CMP_MY counter value to the cumulative number obtained by accumulating the difference based on the results of the completed game.

On the other hand, if it is determined in SA03 that the value is less than 0, the CMP_MY counter is set (updated) to 0 in SA05. The CMP_MY counter value is only initialized (set to 0) when the power is turned on (including when a RAM abnormality occurs or settings are changed), such as in S1 of Figure 23. This makes it possible to determine the cumulative number of medals (increase) from the lowest value of the cumulative number obtained by accumulating the difference between the medals bet and the medals paid out since power was turned on, using the value of the CMP_MY counter as the base point.

After the value of the CMP_MY counter is updated in SA04 or SA05, a determination is made in SA06 as to whether the CMP_MY counter is 19,000 or greater (whether it has reached 19,000). If it is determined that the CMP_MY counter is 19,000 or greater, the complete function activation flag is set to FFh in SA07, and the complete function calculation process is terminated, regardless of whether the controlled game state is an advantageous state (medal increase zone) in which the player can increase medals, such as an AT or bonus, or a predetermined state in which the player cannot increase medals, such as the normal state.

The value of the complete function activation flag is only initialized (set to 00h) when there is a RAM abnormality or when the settings are changed. For example, even if it is possible to clear the RAM and reset the same settings by turning on the power while the reset button is pressed, the value of the complete function activation flag cannot be initialized by turning on the power while the reset button is pressed.

On the other hand, if it is not determined that the CMP_MY counter is 19,000 or greater, SA08 determines whether the value of the game interruption output flag is FFh. The game interruption output flag is a flag that specifies whether a game interruption signal should be output. The game interruption signal is a test signal that is output via the second test machine interface board 302 (hereinafter also referred to as IF2), and is output when an event occurs during testing that requires the test game to be interrupted.

If it is not determined in SA08 that the value of the game interruption output flag is FFh, a game interruption signal has not been output, and it is determined in SA09 whether the CMP_MY counter has reached a predetermined value (e.g., 18,500). The predetermined value is not limited to 18,500, as long as it is a number smaller than the upper limit. If it is not determined in SA09 that the CMP_MY counter has reached 18,500, the complete function calculation process is terminated.

On the other hand, when it is determined in SA09 that the CMP_MY counter has reached 18,500, regardless of whether the controlled game state is advantageous or a predetermined state, the value of the game interruption output flag is set to FFh in SA10 and the complete function calculation process is terminated. Note that when it is determined in SA08 that the value of the game interruption output flag is FFh, the game interruption signal has already been output, so the complete function calculation process is terminated.

In contrast, when SA01 determines that the value of the complete function activation flag is FFh, or when SA02 determines that replay is in progress, the complete function calculation process is terminated without updating the CMP_MY counter. In this way, when it has already been determined that the complete function will be activated, or when replay is in progress and there is no change in the cumulative number, processes such as updating the CMP_MY counter are not performed, regardless of whether the controlled gaming state is advantageous or a predetermined state. On the other hand, when it has not been determined that the complete function will be activated and replay is not in progress, processes such as updating the CMP_MY counter and determining whether the CMP_MY counter is 19,000 or greater are performed, regardless of whether the controlled gaming state is advantageous or a predetermined state. This ensures that the CMP_MY counter and complete function activation flag are updated at the appropriate time, preventing unnecessary (unnecessary) execution of SA03 to SA10, which would increase the processing burden on the main CPU 101.

Processing related to the activation of the complete function based on the value of the complete function activation flag is included in the main processing executed by the main CPU 101 shown in Figure 23, such as processing performed when starting a game such as S2 (processing performed before medals can be inserted). More specifically, processing related to the activation of the complete function is performed during error processing, which is processing performed when starting a game such as S2, and which determines whether an error has occurred in the gaming machine and, if an error has occurred, performs processing to address the error (including error monitoring, error stop processing, etc.).

Figure 231 is a flowchart that mainly explains part of the error processing, particularly the processing related to the operation of the complete function. The control program and data for error processing are stored in a specified area of the main ROM 102 (an area that is different from areas such as the program area and data area, and non-specified areas).

In SA21, processing is performed to output a CMP_MY command to the sub-control circuit 200, which enables the value of the CMP_MY counter updated in SA04 or SA05 in Figure 230 to be identified. This makes it possible for the sub-control circuit 200 to identify the current CMP_MY for each game, and various notifications based on CMP_MY can be executed.

In SA22, it is determined whether the value of the complete function activation flag is FFh. If it is determined in SA22 that the value of the complete function activation flag is FFh, it is determined in SA23 whether a reel or the like is in operation. If it is not determined that a reel or the like is in operation, the game is controlled to the complete function activation state and game progress is disabled. Therefore, regardless of whether the controlled game state is an advantageous state or a predetermined state (for example, regardless of whether it would have been controlled by AT or normal state after the reel or the like has ended), processing is performed in SA24 to output a complete function activation command to the sub-control circuit 200 that identifies the complete function activation state. This enables the sub-control circuit 200 to issue a notification during the complete function activation state as illustrated in FIG. 229(a).

At SA25, an automatic settlement process is performed. As a result, the credited medals are automatically returned (automatic settlement). Whether or not automatic settlement process is performed at SA25 is optional; for example, settlement process may be performed by operating the settlement button 9 (which is acceptable as it is not an operation for progressing the game), or the gaming facility may be able to set whether automatic settlement process or settlement process is performed by operation.

SA26 performs processing to output a security signal as an external signal from the external terminal board for a certain period of time (e.g., 30 seconds). This allows external data displays, hall computers, etc. to know that a security-related event has occurred. Note that if the gaming machine is the medal-less gaming machine described above, SA26, in addition to outputting the security signal, also outputs a complete signal for a certain period of time (e.g., 30 seconds) to, for example, a gaming value providing device (communication-only unit).

After SA26 is performed, the process transitions to a loop as shown in Figure 231, disabling game progress and controlling the machine to the complete function active state. The value of the complete function active flag is initialized (set to 00h) only in the event of a RAM abnormality or a setting change. Gaming parlors generally do not perform setting changes or power outage recovery operations during business hours. For this reason, if the complete function is activated during a business day, the machine will remain in the complete function active state until closing time. Therefore, when the machine is controlled to the complete function active state, the player will end play on that machine. This has the effect of curbing gambling, as it allows the player to stop playing in the extremely rare event that a large number of medals (19,000 in this case) are won.

On the other hand, when SA23 determines that a reel or other device is in operation, the value of the complete function activation flag is FFh, but because the reel or other device is in operation, the complete function activation standby state is entered. SA27 determines whether a complete function activation standby command, which identifies the complete function activation standby state, has been output to the sub-control circuit 200. If SA27 does not determine that a complete function activation standby command has been output to the sub-control circuit 200, SA28 performs processing to output a complete function activation standby command to the sub-control circuit 200. This enables the sub-control circuit 200 to issue a notification during the complete function activation standby state, as illustrated in Figure 229(b). SA23 determines whether or not a reel or other device is in operation, and if the value of the complete function activation flag in SA22 is FFh and the complete function is activated or confirmed, SA24 outputs a complete function activation command, or SA28 outputs a complete function activation standby command. As a result, regardless of whether the controlled game state is an advantageous state or a predetermined state, a notification is issued that game progress will be disabled, as shown in Figures 229(a) and (b).

When the complete function activation standby command has been output or processing to output it has been performed, the system transitions to SA32, where error processing (error monitoring, error stop processing, etc.) is performed for various errors (e.g., hopper empty error, door open error, etc.).

If it is not determined in SA22 that the value of the complete function activation flag is FFh, it is determined in SA29 whether the value of the game interruption output flag is FFh. If it is not determined in SA29 that the value of the game interruption output flag is FFh, the process proceeds directly to SA32.

On the other hand, when SA29 determines that the value of the game interruption output flag is FFh, SA30 determines whether a game interruption signal has been output to IF2 as a test signal. If SA30 does not determine that a game interruption signal has been output to IF2, SA31 performs processing to output a game interruption signal to IF2. This makes it possible to notify that the complete function is about to be activated even during a certification test (test firing test) of the pachislot machine 1, and allows the complete function to be paused before it is activated, thereby preventing the complete function from actually being activated and the hassle of deactivating (initializing) that operation. When the game interruption signal has been output or processing to output it has been performed, the process proceeds to SA32, where error processing for various errors is performed.

The timing for outputting the game interruption signal when CMP_MY reaches 18500 is during error processing, so it is the timing before medals can be inserted. However, it is not limited to this and may be, for example, the timing when medals can be inserted, the timing when the start lever 7 is operated, or the timing after the start lever 7 is operated while the reels are spinning. Furthermore, the control programs and data for generating transmission information for the game interruption signal, transmitting to a port, determining whether to transmit, etc. may be stored in a non-standard area of the main ROM 102.

(Advance notification before complete function activation)
However, if the complete function is suddenly activated without any warning and the machine is controlled to the complete function activated state or the complete function activation standby state, the player will be unable to continue playing at that point, even if there is a remaining AT difference, which may frustrate the player and reduce their motivation to play. Furthermore, players who are unaware or unable to grasp that the complete function is activated may mistakenly believe that the gaming machine is broken. Furthermore, since it is difficult for gaming parlor staff to identify in advance which gaming machines are approaching the time when the complete function will be activated, there is a risk that they will not be able to provide sufficient support to players whose complete function has been activated. Therefore, in order to ensure that players and staff are aware of the complete function activation state or the complete function activation standby state in advance, the system controls the machine to an advance notification state in which a warning is given to players and staff before the complete function is activated.

The advance notification state is entered, for example, when the CMP_MY for the complete function reaches a predetermined number (e.g., 18,500 coins) that is smaller than the upper limit (e.g., 19,000 coins), regardless of whether the game state being controlled at that time is advantageous or a predetermined state. In the advance notification state, the quantitative change in CMP_MY from the time of control until the complete function is activated (e.g., the number of coins remaining up to 19,000 coins) is visually and continuously notified so that it can be recognized even if the player changes midway.

The predetermined number that triggers control to the advance notification state is, for example, 18,500, but it is not limited to 18,500 as long as it is a value that is smaller than the upper limit and is a uniformly determined value in advance. It may also be a value different from the predetermined number that triggers the game interruption output flag to have its value set to FFh and the game interruption signal to be output (for example, a value smaller than the value that triggers the game interruption signal to be output, such as 18,400).

Figures 229(c) and (d) show examples of advance notifications during the advance notification state. Figure 229(c) is an example of an advance notification when CMP_MY reaches 18,504 medals following the payout of medals due to a small winning combination. In this example, a message image stating "496 medals remaining until the complete function is activated" is displayed within a square frame in a specified upper area of the display area of the main effect display unit 21. During the advance notification state, the remaining number of medals, calculated by subtracting CMP_MY, which is updated according to the results of play, from the upper limit (19,000), is continuously displayed until the complete function is activated. The advance notification message image is also displayed with priority (in a higher layer) over any effect images or background images.

Figure 229 (c) shows an example of a notification pattern on the main display unit 21 when controlled to the advance notification state. However, in addition to this, notifications may also be made by sound from a speaker or by the illumination of a lamp. For example, the speaker may emit a sound saying "Beep! Less than 500 coins left until the complete function is activated" a second number of times (e.g., once) or for a second period of time (e.g., approximately 30 seconds), and a lamp (e.g., a frame lamp located above the upper door mechanism UD) may illuminate in a second manner (e.g., flashing while the sound is being played). The sound from the speaker and the number of times, duration, and illumination manner of the lamp when controlled to the advance notification state may be the same as when controlled to the complete function activation standby state, or may be different.

The sound (sound effects, voice, etc.) suggesting or announcing that control has been made to the pre-alert state is output at a normal volume (such as the volume set by the volume adjustment function) taking into account that game play is in progress, but is not limited to this and may be output at a specific volume (for example, a fairly high volume of 85 dB or more, the same volume as when an error occurs, etc.) without being affected by the volume adjustment function. Furthermore, audio notifications during the pre-alert state may be made, for example, by outputting a sound from the speaker specifying the number of remaining coins in stages each time the number of remaining coins decreases by a predetermined number (for example, every 50 or 100 coins) (when the number of remaining coins falls below 400, a sound will be output from the speaker indicating "Beep♪ There are now less than 400 coins left until the complete function is activated").

Figure 229(d) shows an example of an advance notification when CMP_MY reaches 18,757 coins. In a specified upper area of the display area of the main effect display unit 21, a message image is displayed in a square frame stating, "243 coins remaining until the complete function is activated." This allows both the player and the store clerk to know the number of coins remaining until the complete function is activated. This spreads the player's frustration over the advance notification period, rather than activating the complete function suddenly, and prevents the player from mistaking the gaming machine for a malfunction. Furthermore, store clerks can consider support arrangements in advance depending on the number of coins remaining, thereby improving the support available to players whose complete function has been activated.

Note that the message images shown in Figures 229(c) and 229(d) are examples of messages that are displayed in a manner that is less visible than the message images shown in Figures 229(a) and 229(b) (for example, smaller font size, smaller square frame, etc.). This allows the portion (area) of the effect image displayed on the main effect display unit 21 in accordance with the progress of the game during the advance notification state that is obscured by the advance notification message image to be reduced. Note that the message images shown in Figures 229(c) and 229(d) and the message images shown in Figures 229(a) and 229(b) may be displayed in a manner that is the same in visibility (for example, the same font size, etc.). Furthermore, the message displayed in advance is not limited to those shown in Figures 229(c) and 229(d), and may include the words "today" and "end" to discourage erroneous play, such as "496 coins until the complete function is activated (*Today's play ends when the complete function is activated)."

In addition, Figures 229(c) and 229(d) show examples in which the number of remaining sheets until completion is displayed numerically in increments of one sheet, but this is not limited to this. Advance notification may also be provided in a format such as a meter display in which the remaining number changes in increments of 100 sheets (for example, a format in which the meter memory increases as the number of remaining sheets decreases, or a version in which the image described below in Figure 240(c1) is displayed). Advance notification may also be provided in a format in which the remaining number is switched in increments of 100 sheets (for example, "The complete function will be activated when approximately 500 sheets remain" to "The complete function will be activated when approximately 100 sheets remain"). Or, a message such as "The complete function will be activated when 19,000 sheets are reached. Approximately xxx sheets remain until activation" or "The complete function is approaching its upper limit for activation. Approximately xxx sheets remain until activation" may be displayed.

Furthermore, Figures 229(c) and 229(d) illustrate examples in which the message image is generally always displayed, but this is not limiting. For example, the message image may be displayed in a flashing pattern (fading gradually and then reappearing gradually) at predetermined intervals (for example, 2 or 3 seconds) as long as the notification to the player is self-evident.

In Figure 229, an example was explained in which various notifications based on CMP_MY are made on the main effect display unit 21, but if multiple image display devices are installed (such as in the case of pachislot machine 1, where a sub-display unit 220 is installed in addition to the main effect display unit 21), it is sufficient that the various notifications based on CMP_MY are made on any of the image display devices.Furthermore, the various notifications based on CMP_MY may first be made for a certain period of time on the main effect display unit 21, which has a larger display area, and then the various notifications may be moved to the sub-display unit 220, which has a smaller display area than the main effect display unit 21.

Figure 232 is a flowchart explaining the completion-related notification process for making various notifications based on CMP_MY. The completion-related notification process is included in the processes executed by the sub-CPU 201 (for example, S304 in Figure 33), and is executed when various commands shown in Figure 231 are received, for example. Therefore, the completion-related notification process is essentially executed between the time all reels stop and the time it becomes possible to insert medals (bet operation).

In SA41, it is determined whether the complete function is in operation. Specifically, it is determined that the complete function is in operation by receiving a complete function operation command. When it is determined in SA41 that the complete function is in operation, processing is performed to notify the player that the complete function is in operation, as shown in Figure 229(a), regardless of whether the controlled game state is an advantageous state or a predetermined state.

If SA41 does not determine that the complete function is in operation, SA43 determines whether the complete function is in standby mode. Specifically, a complete function standby command is received to determine that the complete function is in standby mode. If SA43 determines that the complete function is in standby mode, processing is performed to notify the player that the complete function is in standby mode, as shown in Figure 229(b), regardless of whether the controlled game state is an advantageous state or a predetermined state.

If SA43 does not determine that the complete function is in standby mode, SA45 determines whether the CMP_MY specified by the CMP_MY command is greater than or equal to the predetermined number of 18,500 (whether it has reached that number). In other words, it determines whether the advance warning state is in effect.

When SA45 determines that CMP_MY is 18,500 or greater, SA46 determines whether the value of the advance notification activation flag, which is used to determine whether the advance notification state is in effect, is FFh. If it is determined that the value of the advance notification activation flag is FFh, the process proceeds to SA48. However, if it is not determined that the value of the advance notification activation flag is FFh, SA47 sets the value of the advance notification activation flag to FFh and the process proceeds to SA48. As a result, when CMP_MY reaches 18,500, the value of the advance notification activation flag is set to FFh and the advance notification state is entered, regardless of whether the controlled game state is advantageous or a predetermined state.

SA48 performs processing to provide advance notification in a manner that corresponds to the value of CMP_MY. As a result, during the advance notification state, regardless of whether the controlled gaming state is advantageous or a predetermined state, the number of remaining coins up to the upper limit (19,000) is notified according to the value of CMP_MY, as shown in Figure 229(c) and other examples.

Returning to SA45, if it is determined that CMP_MY is not 18,500 or greater, SA60 determines whether the value of the advance notification activation flag is FFh. That is, it determines whether CMP_MY once reached 18,500 or greater but has since fallen below 18,500 due to game results. If SA60 determines that the value of the advance notification activation flag is FFh, SA61 determines whether the game state being controlled is in an advantageous state. That is, it determines whether the advantageous state continues and therefore there is a high possibility that CMP_MY will again reach 18,500 or greater in the future. If SA61 determines that the game state being controlled is in an advantageous state, it proceeds to SA48. Note that in this case too, the remaining number up to the upper limit (19,000) is reported according to the value of CMP_MY, so a remaining number of more than 500 will be reported.

On the other hand, if SA61 determines that the game state controlled by SA61 is not in a favorable state, SA62 terminates the advance notification, sets the advance notification activation flag to its initial value of 00h, and terminates the complete-related notification process. As a result, if CMP_MY falls below 18,500 (18,499 or less) during the advance notification state, if the game state controlled by SA61 is in a favorable state, it is determined that the situation is due to a temporary drop below 18,500 due to a failure to win a small prize, etc., and the advance notification continues in a manner appropriate to the value of CMP_MY. However, if the game state is not in a favorable state, it is determined that the situation is unlikely to return to 18,500 or above, and the advance notification is immediately terminated when CMP_MY falls below 18,500 (18,499 or less). This minimizes the possibility of the advance notification being resumed immediately after it was hidden, or of the advance notification being continued indefinitely despite the tendency for CMP_MY to decrease and the number of remaining coins to increase to 19,000.

As described above, by providing an advance warning before the complete function is activated, both the player and the store clerk can grasp the number of coins remaining before the complete function is activated. This can alleviate the player's frustration while preventing the misunderstanding that the gaming machine has malfunctioned. It is also expected to have certain benefits, such as increasing the ability of store clerks to provide support to players whose complete function has been activated. Furthermore, CMP_MY is only initialized when the power is turned on (including when a RAM abnormality occurs or settings are changed), and advance warnings based on CMP_MY generally continue until the power is cut off. Therefore, even if a player finishes playing on a gaming machine during an advance warning, other players (for example, players who are considering playing the machine) can be made aware that the complete function is about to be activated, which also has the effect of preventing unexpected damage to other players.

However, because gaming parlors generally have a large number of gaming machines, even if an advance notification is issued, there is a risk that support for the player whose complete function has been activated will not be provided reliably. For example, a store employee may miss or forget about the advance notification, or there may be poor coordination between store employees, causing the timing of support for another player to overlap. In such cases, this can increase the player's frustration and worsen the player's impression of the gaming parlor, leading to a lower evaluation of the gaming parlor. To prevent such inconveniences from occurring, the pachislot machine 1 is configured to issue a notification based on CMP_MY separately from the advance notification. Specifically, a first notification can be issued at a first timing before CMP_MY reaches a predetermined number (18,500), and a second notification can be issued at a second timing after CMP_MY has reached the predetermined number (18,500) and is approaching the upper limit number (19,000).

In the completion-related notification processing shown in FIG. 232, when it is not determined in SA45 that CMP_MY is 18,500 or greater, and it is not determined in SA60 that the value of the advance notification activation flag is FFh, the processing shown in SA63 to SA65 is performed, thereby making it possible to execute the first notification. In SA63, it is determined whether or not it is the timing (first timing) when CMP_MY has reached the first specific number, 18,000. When it is determined in SA63 that it is the timing when CMP_MY has reached 18,000, it is determined in SA64 whether or not the player is in an advantageous state. When it is determined in SA64 that the player is in an advantageous state, the first notification processing to execute the first notification is executed in SA65, and the completion-related notification processing is terminated. As a result, the first notification can be executed when CMP_MY has reached 18,000 and there is a high possibility that CMP_MY will continue to increase thereafter. On the other hand, if it is not determined in SA63 that CMP_MY has reached 18,000, or if it is not determined in SA64 that the game is in an advantageous state and CMP_MY is unlikely to continue increasing, the complete-related notification process ends without performing the first notification process. Note that if the determination in SA63 is YES, the process may simply proceed to SA65 and perform the first notification process.

The first notification may be, for example, a message image such as "The advance notification will begin in approximately 500 coins" displayed on the main display unit 21 for a predetermined period of time (e.g., one minute, the period until a new game begins, the period from the start of a new game until it ends, the period until the advance notification begins, etc.). While an example has been described in which the message image serving as the first notification does not include information regarding the number of coins remaining up to the upper limit of 19,000, this is not limiting, and the message image may include information regarding the number of coins remaining up to 19,000 (e.g., approximately 1,000 coins until completion).

The first notification may be configured to display a message image for a predetermined period of time, followed by an image indicating that the first notification has been made (for example, an image resembling a bronze trophy) at least until the advance notification begins. The first notification may also be configured to display a message image that gradually changes the number of remaining coins (for example, when the number of remaining coins reaches 900 or less, it indicates that there are approximately 900 remaining coins) each time the number of remaining coins until completion decreases by a predetermined number (for example, every time 100 coins decrease) (this includes displaying the message image for a predetermined period of time at that time, or continuously displaying the message image thereafter). The first notification may also be configured to update the remaining number of coins (for example, between 1000 and 501 remaining coins) in the same manner as the advance notification, leading to a subsequent advance notification.

The first notification may be, for example, the illumination of a specific LED mounted on the gaming machine. The specific LED may be an LED dedicated to the first notification, or may also serve as an LED for notifying other information. Furthermore, it may be an LED that is visible when a front door such as the lower door mechanism DD is closed, or an LED mounted inside the cabinet 2 that is visible when a front door such as the lower door mechanism DD is open. Furthermore, instead of or in addition to the above, the first notification may be a sound from a speaker or light emitted by a lamp (for example, a frame lamp located above the upper door mechanism UD that flashes for a predetermined period (e.g., 10 minutes)).

In this way, the first notification is issued just before the advance notification begins, allowing players and store staff to know that the advance notification start time and the activation time of the complete function are approaching. This allows players to spend more time dissipating their frustration at being unable to continue playing when the complete function is activated, and also allows store staff to identify gaming machines that may require support, increasing their attention and focus on the game status of those machines.

While it is common for gaming establishments to power on before opening and power off after closing, some gaming establishments do not perform the power-on and power-off procedures associated with opening and closing. For pachislot machines that have received an advance notification or first notification (a first notification that continues at least until the advance notification begins) on a certain business day at such an establishment, the CMP_MY counter is not initialized, and the advance notification or first notification state remains active from the beginning of the opening of the next business day. Here, the advance notification indicates that there are less than 500 coins remaining from the maximum number, meaning that the complete function is about to be activated, so the notification should be made reliably to avoid causing any disadvantage to the player. On the other hand, the first notification indicates that there are less than 1,000 coins remaining from the maximum number (at least more than 500 coins remaining), meaning that the likelihood of the complete function actually being activated is lower than when an advance notification is issued. In such a situation, if the first notification is issued from the beginning of opening, it may make players considering playing on the pachislot machine more wary than necessary, which could result in a decrease in the operating rate of the pachislot machine. Therefore, even if the CMP_MY counter is not initialized, the first notification may be terminated and the advance notification may continue when a specific condition is met, which may occur after the next day, for example. A specific example is explained below.

In addition to the sub-CPU 201 and sub-RAM 203, the sub-control circuit 200 is also equipped with a sub-RTC (Real Time Clock). The sub-RTC is a timing circuit that constantly keeps track of the date and time using an on-board battery, regardless of whether the pachislot machine 1 is powered on or not, and outputs information indicating the current date and time, i.e., information indicating the year, month, day, hour, minute, second, and day of the week, in response to a request from the sub-CPU 201.

When the pachislot machine 1 is powered on, the sub-control circuit 200 executes specific processing (e.g., interrupt processing) when a predetermined time (e.g., 2:00 a.m.) has passed based on the date and time information from the sub-RTC. In the specific processing, it determines whether the first notification, which continues at least until the advance notification is initiated, is being executed. If it is determined that the first notification is not being executed, the specific processing is terminated. However, if it is determined that the first notification is being executed, the specific processing is terminated by executing processing to terminate the first notification, regardless of the value of CMP_MY or whether the controlled gaming state is an advantageous state or a predetermined state. In other words, if the first notification is being executed when the predetermined time (e.g., 2:00 a.m.) has passed, processing to terminate the first notification is executed.

This prevents a first notification made during business hours the previous day from continuing to be made at the beginning of business the next day, in gaming parlors that do not turn the power on and off when opening and closing. As a result, it is possible to avoid making players considering playing on the pachislot machine feel unnecessarily wary, and to prevent a decrease in the utilization rate of the pachislot machine. In contrast, with specific processing, even if an advance notification is made, the advance notification continues because no processing is performed to terminate the advance notification after a specified time has passed. This prevents a player from being disadvantaged by being reliably notified that the complete function is about to be activated, meaning that there are 500 or fewer coins remaining until the upper limit.

Returning to Figure 232, in the complete-related notification process, when it is determined in SA45 that CMP_MY is 18,500 or greater, and a prior notification has already been issued in SA48, the processes shown in SA49 to SA51 are performed to enable a second notification to be issued.

SA49 determines whether it is the timing when CMP_MY has reached the second specific number, 18750 (second timing). If SA49 determines that it is the timing when CMP_MY has reached 18750, SA50 determines whether it is in an advantageous state. If SA50 determines that it is in an advantageous state, SA51 performs second notification processing to issue the second notification, and the completion-related notification processing ends. This enables the second notification to be executed when CMP_MY has reached 18750 and there is a high probability that CMP_MY will continue to increase. On the other hand, if SA49 does not determine that it is the timing when CMP_MY has reached 18750, or if SA50 does not determine that it is in an advantageous state and there is a low probability that CMP_MY will continue to increase, the completion-related notification processing ends without performing second notification processing. Note that if SA49 determines YES, the process may simply proceed to SA51 and perform second notification processing.

The advantageous states that are the subject of judgment in SA50 and SA64 include all states in which a player can increase medals, such as ATs and bonuses, but may also include replay times that increase the probability of winning a replay. Conversely, for example, ATs in which push order navigation is possible but medals do not increase or decrease because push order navigation occurs infrequently, or bonuses in which the probability of winning a small prize is higher than usual but medals do not increase or decrease because the combined probability of winning is low due to overlapping small prize wins, are not included in the advantageous states that are the subject of judgment in SA50 and SA64, and are instead considered to be predetermined states, such as normal states, in which a player cannot increase medals.

Furthermore, the advantageous state to be judged in SA50 and SA64 may be, for example, only the AT without a bonus, or conversely, only the bonus without an AT. Furthermore, ATs include high-purity increase ATs with a high net increase per game and low-purity increase ATs with a low net increase per game. The advantageous state to be judged in SA50 and SA64 may include both high-purity increase ATs and low-purity increase ATs, or it may include only high-purity increase ATs and not include low-purity increase ATs. Furthermore, bonuses include bonuses with a relatively large number of coins to be paid out at the end and bonuses with a relatively small number of coins to be paid out at the end. The advantageous state to be judged in SA50 and SA64 may include both bonuses with a relatively large number of coins to be paid out and bonuses with a relatively small number of coins to be paid out, or it may include only bonuses with a relatively large number of coins to be paid out and not include bonuses with a relatively small number of coins to be paid out.

The second notification may, for example, be a message image such as "The complete function is about to be activated" displayed on the main display unit 21 for a predetermined period of time (e.g., one minute, the period until a new game begins, the period from the start of a new game until the end of the new game, etc.). While an example has been described in which the message image serving as the second notification does not include information regarding the number of coins remaining up to the upper limit of 19,000, the second notification is not limited to this. It may also include information regarding the number of coins remaining up to 19,000 (e.g., an image that highlights the periphery of the advance notification image to highlight the remaining number of coins in the advance notification). Furthermore, the second notification may further include, after the message image has been displayed for a predetermined period of time, an image indicating that the second notification has been completed (e.g., changing the color of the trophy-like image to gold) until the complete function is activated.

The second alert may be, for example, a flashing of a specific LED used for the first alert, or an illumination of an LED other than the LED used for the first alert. The LED used for the second alert may be a dedicated LED (including cases where it also serves as the LED used for the first alert), or may also serve as an LED that notifies other information. Furthermore, it may be an LED that is visible when a front door such as the lower door mechanism DD is closed, or an LED mounted inside the housing 2 that is visible when a front door such as the lower door mechanism DD is open. Furthermore, instead of or in addition to the above, the second alert may be sound from a speaker or the illumination of a lamp (for example, a constantly lit frame lamp located above the upper door mechanism UD).

In this way, the second notification is made at a time when attention to the advance notification has waned as time passes since it was made, making it possible for players and store staff to be reminded that the time to activate the complete function is approaching. Furthermore, because store staff can coordinate and cooperate with each other taking into account the situation of each staff member, they can provide support swiftly when the complete function is activated. As a result, it is possible to avoid worsening players' impressions of the gaming establishment and improve the store's reputation and impression.

In the example shown, the first notification is terminated and not continued thereafter (for example, when the store opens the next business day) when a specific condition is met (for example, after 2:00 AM), which can occur over the course of a day. However, the second notification may be continued even when a specific condition is met without being terminated because a prior notification has been made. Alternatively, the second notification may be terminated when a specific condition is met, as with the first notification, and not continued thereafter (for example, when the store opens the next business day).

(When a complete function related notification is sent via a peripheral device)
232 has described an example in which a device mounted on the pachislot machine 1 makes complete function-related notifications regarding the first notification, second notification, advance notification state (including the number of remaining coins up to 19,000 in this case), complete function activation standby state, and complete function activation state, but in addition to or instead of this, complete function-related notifications may be made in peripheral devices such as a data display that is different from the pachislot machine 1. Below, for example, an example in which a complete function-related notification is made in a data display placed on top of the pachislot machine 1 will be described.

As shown in FIG. 233, the gaming system includes a pachislot machine 1, a data display 2001 located on top of the pachislot machine 1, and a hall computer. The pachislot machine 1 is equipped with lamps 3305a and 3305b (hereinafter collectively referred to as lamps 3305) on its top for transmitting data such as presentation patterns. The data display 2001 receives light from the lamp 3305 of the pachislot machine 1, thereby receiving data such as the game status and presentation patterns from the pachislot machine 1. In this way, data such as the game status and presentation patterns is transmitted from the pachislot machine 1 to the data display 2001 by receiving light from the lamp 3305 of the pachislot machine 1, allowing a large amount of information to be transmitted efficiently and with high accuracy. Note that this type of communication can be considered one-way, non-contact communication from the pachislot machine 1, which is an external device to the data display 2001, to the data display 2001.

The data display 2001 shown in Figure 233 is, for example, a data display called signage. This data display 2001 includes an LCD display 2002, an LED 2003, a speaker 2004, a call button 2005, and an image sensor unit 2311. The call button 2005 is a button for calling a store employee, and when the touch sensor detects that the call button 2005 has been pressed, the LCD display 2002, the LED 2003, the speaker 2004, etc. are controlled to output in accordance with the detection.

The data display 2001 detects light from the lamp 3305 of the pachislot machine 1 using the image sensor unit 2311, and based on the detection results, determines the game status and presentation pattern of the pachislot machine 1, and controls the LCD display 2002 to display a corresponding image according to the determined game status and presentation pattern. Furthermore, if necessary, it controls the speaker to output a sound corresponding to the presentation pattern and the LED 2003 to light up.

The image sensor unit 2311 includes, for example, a CMOS image sensor that captures images including the lamp 3305 of the pachislot machine 1 at predetermined time intervals. This CMOS image sensor is configured to capture images of the lamp 3305 at, for example, 220 fps or 440 fps.

In addition, this CMOS image sensor is designed to capture an image of the lamp 3305 of the pachislot machine 1 and its surroundings at a predetermined angle of view (for example, an angle of view of 30° or less) and light source distance (i.e., the distance between the CMOS image sensor and the lamp 3305, for example, 30 mm to 300 mm). As a result, the captured image captured by the CMOS image sensor will include not only the lamp 3305 of the pachislot machine 1, but also the lamps used for the pachislot machine 1's effects (for example, the top lamp and frame lamp of the pachislot machine 1), light from adjacent pachislot machines 1, light from lighting fixtures in the gaming parlor, and reflected light from these lights.

The lamp 3305 of the pachislot machine 1 can function as a dedicated light output device for transmitting data such as the game status and presentation patterns of the pachislot machine 1, or as a dual-purpose light output device that both produces presentation effects on the pachislot machine 1 and transmits data such as the game status and presentation patterns.

Lamps 3305a and 3305b are each configured with a full-color LED and are capable of emitting multiple colors, including white, red, yellow, yellow-green, green, cyan, blue, purple, magenta, and pink.

The pachislot machine 1 is configured so that lamps 3305a and 3305b can each be lit in a color that corresponds to the state of the pachislot machine 1. In other words, the combination of the light color of lamp 3305a and the light color of lamp 3305b corresponds to the state of the pachislot machine 1 (see Figure 234). In this specification, the "combination of the light color of lamp 3305a and the light color of lamp 3305b" is also referred to as the lighting pattern of lamp 3305.

The data display 2001 can recognize the light color of lamp 3305a and the light color of lamp 3305b by capturing images of lamp 3305a and lamp 3305b with a CMOS image sensor. This allows the data display 2001 to control the LCD display 2002, LED 2003, speaker 2004, etc., and communicate with the hall computer in a manner that corresponds to the lighting pattern of lamp 3305 on the pachislot machine 1 (the state of the pachislot machine 1).

The data display 2001 is also connected to the gaming media lending device 402 via a harness using a contact input/output method, allowing for two-way communication. The data display 2001 and the hall computer are also connected via a coaxial cable using a wired LAN method, and are also connected via a harness using a contact output method, allowing for two-way communication.

The data display 2001 also has RAM, which stores a data table (game state determination table) for determining the game state and presentation pattern of the pachislot machine 1, and a data table (presentation pattern table) for executing presentations according to the game state and presentation pattern.

The data display 2001 can download game status determination tables and effect pattern tables (including video data and audio data used for effects) from the hall computer via the communications interface.

In addition, data tables for determining the gaming status and presentation patterns of the pachislot machine 1, and data tables for executing presentations according to the gaming status and presentation patterns, may be transferred from an external storage device to RAM via the USB connection terminal of the communications interface, and the above data tables can be transferred using various other methods and routes.

Figure 234 is a diagram explaining the lamp lighting patterns. There are many lighting patterns for lamp 3305, but Figure 234 shows only some of the lighting patterns. In the figure, "LED Left" indicates lamp 3305a, and "LED Right" indicates lamp 3305b.

In "Pattern 1," lamp 3305a emits red light, and lamp 3305b emits blue-green light. "Pattern 1" is a lighting pattern that appears when the front door is detected to be open while the power is OFF. The front door of pachislot machine 1 is upper door 62a or lower door 62b (see Figure 2). Note that while lamps 3305a and 3305b cannot be lit when the power is OFF, if the door monitoring unit, which is constantly monitoring the open/closed state of the door, receives information that the above detection has been made when the power is turned ON, lamps 3305a and 3305b will light up in this pattern at a predetermined timing after the power is turned ON.

In "Pattern 2," lamp 3305a lights up red and lamp 3305b lights up green. "Pattern 2" is a lighting pattern that appears when it is detected that a setting change or confirmation may have occurred with the front door closed.

In "Pattern 3," lamp 3305a emits red light and lamp 3305b emits magenta light. "Pattern 3" is the lighting pattern that appears when it is detected that the hopper is empty.

In "Pattern 4," lamp 3305a emits red light, and lamp 3305b emits yellow-green light. "Pattern 4" is a lighting pattern that appears when a medal overflow is detected.

"Pattern 1" to "Pattern 4" are each examples of "error patterns." Error patterns are lighting patterns that appear when an abnormality (error) is detected in the pachislot machine 1.

In "Pattern 10," lamp 3305a emits a yellow light, and lamp 3305b emits a red light. "Pattern 10" is a lighting pattern that appears when custom gameplay with character A begins. In "Pattern 11," lamp 3305a emits a yellow light, and lamp 3305b emits a yellow-green light. "Pattern 11" is a lighting pattern that appears when custom gameplay with character B begins. In "Pattern 12," lamp 3305a emits a yellow light, and lamp 3305b emits a green light. "Pattern 12" is a lighting pattern that appears when custom gameplay with character C begins.

"Pattern 10" to "Pattern 12" are each examples of "custom start patterns." Custom start patterns are lighting patterns that appear when custom gameplay begins (when a custom start operation is performed).

In "Pattern 20," lamp 3305a emits yellow light, and lamp 3305b emits pink light. "Pattern 20" is a lighting pattern (custom end pattern) that appears when custom gameplay has ended (a custom end operation has been performed).

In "Pattern 30," lamp 3305a emits a yellow-green light, and lamp 3305b emits a pink light. "Pattern 30" is a lighting pattern that appears during the AT when custom play is not being performed. In "Pattern 31," lamp 3305a emits a yellow-green light, and lamp 3305b emits a green light. "Pattern 31" is a lighting pattern that appears during the AT when custom play is being performed by character A. In "Pattern 32," lamp 3305a emits a yellow-green light, and lamp 3305b emits a blue-green light. "Pattern 32" is a lighting pattern that appears during the AT when custom play is being performed by character B. In "Pattern 33," lamp 3305a emits a yellow-green light, and lamp 3305b emits a blue-green light. "Pattern 33" is a lighting pattern that appears during the AT when custom play is being performed by character C.

"Pattern 30" to "Pattern 33" are each examples of "AT patterns." AT patterns are lighting patterns that appear during the AT. AT patterns are examples of in-game presentation patterns (lighting patterns that correspond to presentations performed during play). Note that during the AT, predetermined presentations are performed using LCD displays, speakers, etc., and therefore AT patterns can also be said to be lighting patterns that appear when these predetermined presentations are performed.

In "Pattern 40," lamp 3305a emits green light, and lamp 3305b emits pink light. "Pattern 40" is a lighting pattern that appears when the AT starts without custom play being performed. In "Pattern 41," lamp 3305a emits green light, and lamp 3305b emits red light. "Pattern 41" is a lighting pattern that appears when the AT starts while custom play is being performed by character A. In "Pattern 42," lamp 3305a emits green light, and lamp 3305b emits yellow light. "Pattern 42" is a lighting pattern that appears when the AT starts while custom play is being performed by character B. In "Pattern 43," lamp 3305a emits green light, and lamp 3305b emits yellow-green light. "Pattern 43" is a lighting pattern that appears when the AT starts while custom play is being performed by character C.

"Pattern 40" to "Pattern 43" are each examples of "AT start patterns." AT start patterns are lighting patterns that appear when the AT starts (entering the AT). AT start patterns are examples of patterns for effects used during play. Note that when the AT starts, a specified effect is displayed using an LCD display device, speaker, etc., so AT start patterns can also be said to be lighting patterns that appear when this specified effect is displayed.

In "Pattern 50," lamp 3305a emits a reddish-purple light, and lamp 3305b emits a red light. "Pattern 50" is a lighting pattern that appears when effect A is performed. In "Pattern 51," lamp 3305a emits a reddish-purple light, and lamp 3305b emits a yellow light. "Pattern 51" is a lighting pattern that appears when effect B is performed. In "Pattern 52," lamp 3305a emits a reddish-purple light, and lamp 3305b emits a yellow-green light. "Pattern 52" is a lighting pattern that appears when effect C is performed.

"Pattern 50" to "Pattern 52" are each examples of "in-game effect patterns." Effects A to C are effects that are performed based on the type of internal winning combination when the start lever is operated. For example, effects A to C can be effects that are performed when a combination that confirms a transition to AT, a rare combination, a bonus combination, etc. is determined as the internal winning combination.

In "Pattern 60," lamp 3305a emits blue-green light, and lamp 3305b emits red light. "Pattern 60" is the lighting pattern that appears when a first notification is made in the first notification processing in SA65. In "Pattern 61," lamp 3305a emits blue-green light, and lamp 3305b emits yellow light. "Pattern 61" is the lighting pattern that appears when a second notification is made in the second notification processing in SA51. In "Pattern 62," lamp 3305a emits blue-green light, and lamp 3305b emits yellow-green light. "Pattern 62" is the lighting pattern that appears when an advance notification is made in the advance notification processing in SA48 during the advance notification state.

In "Pattern 63," lamp 3305a emits a blue-green light, and lamp 3305b emits a green light. "Pattern 63" is an illumination pattern that appears when the complete function is in standby mode and a complete function activation standby state notification is made in the complete function activation standby state notification process in SA44. In "Pattern 64," lamp 3305a emits a blue-green light, and lamp 3305b emits a blue light. "Pattern 64" is an illumination pattern that appears when the complete function is in standby mode and a complete function activation state notification is made in the complete function activation state notification process in SA42. Note that the illumination patterns that appear during the advance notification state may be set to five different illumination patterns, each in increments of 100, such as an illumination pattern when there are less than 500 remaining, an illumination pattern when there are less than 400 remaining, and an illumination pattern when there are less than 100 remaining. Different illumination patterns may be used depending on the remaining number up to 19,000.

"Pattern 60" to "Pattern 64" are each examples of "patterns related to the complete function." As mentioned above, patterns related to the complete function are lighting patterns that appear when the processing in SA42, SA44, SA48, SA51, and SA65 in Figure 232 is executed.

As explained above, the in-game presentation patterns include lighting patterns that appear during a specified game state (e.g., AT, ART, BB, etc.), lighting patterns that appear when a specified game state (e.g., AT, ART, BB, etc.) begins, lighting patterns that appear when the start lever is operated, lighting patterns that appear when a specified game state (e.g., AT, ART, BB, etc.) ends, and lighting patterns that appear when a combination of symbols is displayed stationary along an active line.

Furthermore, the in-game presentation patterns include lighting patterns in which lamps 3305a and 3305b are lit in a predetermined color during a single unit game (without carrying over to the next unit game), and lighting patterns in which lamps 3305a and 3305b are lit in a predetermined color and continue to be lit across multiple unit games. For example, "Pattern 50" to "Pattern 52" are lighting patterns in which lamps 3305a and 3305b are lit in a predetermined color during a single unit game. In "Pattern 50," after lamp 3305a emits a magenta light and lamp 3305b emits a red light upon operation of the start lever, lamp 3305a and lamp 3305b cease to emit a magenta light and lamp 3305b cease to emit a red light by the time the unit game ends. Furthermore, "Pattern 30" to "Pattern 33" are lighting patterns in which lamps 3305a and 3305b remain lit in a predetermined color for multiple unit games, and in "Pattern 30," lamp 3305a continues to emit a yellow-green light and lamp 3305b continues to emit a pink light until the AT ends.

Although not shown, both lamps 3305a and 3305b light up in white when the demo screen is displayed or during normal non-customization play (when character customization has not been performed and no special effects occur). The special effects are effects that trigger the lighting of lamps 3305a and 3305b in the pattern shown in FIG. 234 (causes a change in the lighting pattern). In other words, when custom gameplay is not being performed, both lamps 3305a and 3305b will generally light up in white.

Figure 235 is a diagram for explaining the model identification patterns. In addition to the lighting patterns described using Figure 234, the lamp 3305 also has the model identification patterns shown in Figure 235. The model identification patterns are lighting patterns that correspond to the model to which the pachislot machine 1 belongs, and are used to allow the data display 2001 or hall computer to recognize the model.

When the power is turned on in the pachislot machine 1 and a predetermined initialization process is performed, lamps 3305a and 3305b will light up in the pattern shown in Figure 235. It is common for halls (amusement parlors) to start up gaming machines and peripheral devices all at once on an island-by-island basis. As a result, the initialization process on the peripheral device (data display 2001) side is completed before the initialization process on the gaming machine (pachislot machine 1) side, and by the time lamps 3305a and 3305b light up, the camera (CMOS image sensor) of the data display 2001 is in a powered-up state. Therefore, the data display 2001 can recognize the model identification pattern shown in Figure 235 without missing any of it.

Specifically, in the model identification pattern, in the first step, lamp 3305a emits white light, and lamp 3305b also emits white light, and this state continues for 10 seconds. Then, in the second step, lamp 3305a emits blue-green light, and lamp 3305b also emits blue-green light, and this state continues for 1 second. Similarly, in the third step, lamp 3305a emits pink light, and lamp 3305b also emits pink light, and this state continues for 1 second. In the fourth step, lamp 3305a emits green light, and lamp 3305b also emits green light, and this state continues for 1 second. In the fifth step, lamp 3305a emits reddish-purple light, and lamp 3305b also emits reddish-purple light, and this state continues for 1 second. In the sixth step, lamp 3305a emits yellow-green light. In the seventh step, lamp 3305a emits purple light and lamp 3305b emits purple light, and this state continues for one second; in the eighth step, lamp 3305a emits yellow light and lamp 3305b emits yellow light, and this state continues for one second; in the ninth step, lamp 3305a emits blue light and lamp 3305b emits blue light, and this state continues for one second; and in the tenth step, lamp 3305a emits red light and lamp 3305b emits red light, and this state continues for one second.

Next, in the 11th step, lamp 3305a emits blue light and lamp 3305b emits blue light, and this state continues for one second; in the 12th step, lamp 3305a emits red light and lamp 3305b emits blue light, and this state continues for one second; and in the 13th step, lamp 3305a emits blue light and lamp 3305b emits red light, and this state continues for one second.

The lighting pattern in step 11 corresponds to the manufacturer (manufacturer information) that produced pachislot machine 1. For example, in step 11, lamp 3305a lights up blue and lamp 3305b lights up blue, indicating that pachislot machine 1 is a product of gaming machine manufacturer X. The lighting pattern in steps 12 and 13 corresponds to the model (model information) to which pachislot machine 1 belongs. For example, in step 12, lamp 3305a lights up red and lamp 3305b lights up blue, and in step 13, lamp 3305a lights up blue and lamp 3305b lights up red, indicating that pachislot machine 1 belongs to model A.

Note that lamps 3305a and 3305b are configured to light up in a predetermined pattern (learning pattern) in steps 1 to 10 before lighting up in a pattern corresponding to manufacturer information and model information in steps 11 to 13.

Figure 236 is a flowchart showing the lighting pattern detection process performed in the data display. The lighting pattern detection process shown in Figure 236 is a process that is repeatedly performed at a predetermined timing by the control unit of the data display 2001. The image sensor unit 231 is able to detect the light source (the position of lamp 3305a and lamp 3305b) while eliminating the effects of ambient light, which allows the control unit of the data display 2001 to identify the light emission color of lamp 3305a and the light emission color of lamp 3305b (detect the lighting pattern of lamp 3305).

In the lighting pattern detection process, the control unit of the data display 2001 first determines whether the combination of the light color of lamp 3305a and the light color of lamp 3305b is a lighting pattern that corresponds to the model identification pattern (step S1101). Specifically, the control unit of the data display 2001 determines whether the lighting pattern in steps 11 to 13 shown in FIG. 235 has been detected as the combination of the light color of lamp 3305a and the light color of lamp 3305b.

If it is determined that the lighting patterns in steps 11 to 13 of the model identification pattern have been detected, the control unit of the data display 2001 determines whether a lighting pattern corresponding to the learning pattern has been detected as a combination of the light color of lamp 3305a and the light color of lamp 3305b (step S1102). As described above, the learning pattern is the lighting pattern that appears before lamps 3305a and 3305b light up in a pattern corresponding to the manufacturer information and model information (the lighting pattern in steps 1 to 10 shown in FIG. 235). In the processing of step S1102, the control unit of the data display 2001 determines whether the lighting patterns in steps 1 to 10 have been detected for a predetermined period of time (19 seconds) before the lighting pattern in step 11 is detected. Note that the combination of the light color of lamp 3305a and the light color of lamp 3305b in the model identification pattern (each lighting pattern in steps 1 to 13) may be the same as the combination of the light color of lamp 3305a and the light color of lamp 3305b in any of the lighting patterns shown in FIG. 234. Even if these combinations are the same, by varying the lighting time, the control unit of the data display device 2001 can determine the type of lighting pattern and recognize the model identification pattern by detecting the combination of light colors and the lighting time.

If it is determined that a lighting pattern corresponding to the learning pattern has not been detected, the control unit of the data display 2001 terminates this subroutine.

On the other hand, if it is determined that a lighting pattern corresponding to the learning pattern has been detected, the control unit of the data display device 2001 determines whether data for the model corresponding to the lighting pattern in steps 11 to 13 has been stored (step S1103).

Prior to performing the processing of step S1103, the control unit of the data display 2001 detects the lighting pattern in steps 11 to 13. The control unit of the data display 2001 identifies the model corresponding to the lighting pattern in steps 11 to 13 by referencing a model identification table stored in a storage device such as ROM.

The model identification table specifies three lighting patterns ("11," "12," and "13" in the figure) each associated with one model and one manufacturer. "11," "12," and "13" respectively represent the 11th, 12th, and 13th steps in the model identification pattern. The control unit of the data display 2001 identifies the model corresponding to the three detected lighting patterns (steps 11 to 13) based on the model identification table. For example, if the three most recently detected lighting patterns are a pattern in which lamp 3305a lights up blue and lamp 3305b lights up blue, a pattern in which lamp 3305a lights up red and lamp 3305b lights up blue, and a pattern in which lamp 3305a lights up blue and lamp 3305b lights up red, the control unit of the data display 2001 identifies model A.

In the processing of step S1103, the control unit of the data display device 2001 determines whether data for the identified model (the model corresponding to the lighting patterns in steps 11 to 13) is stored in a storage device such as RAM. "Data for the model" refers to performance data for producing performance corresponding to the identified model. As will be described later, this performance data is configured to be downloaded from the hall computer, so the processing of step S1103 can also be described as processing for determining whether performance data corresponding to the identified model has already been downloaded.

If it is determined that the performance data for the identified model has already been downloaded, the control unit of the data display device 2001 ends this subroutine.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the effect data corresponding to the identified machine type has not already been downloaded, the control unit of the data display device 2001 requests the hall computer to send the effect data corresponding to that machine type (step S1104). Then, the control unit of the data display device 2001 receives the effect data corresponding to that machine type from the hall computer (step S1105).

In step S1104, the control unit of the data display 2001 sends an effect data request signal containing information indicating the identified model (model information) to the hall computer. The hall computer stores effect data corresponding to multiple models, including models A through F, in a storage device such as a hard disk drive. Upon receiving the effect data request signal, the hall computer sends effect data corresponding to the model indicated by the model information contained in the effect data request signal to the data display 2001. This allows the data display 2001 to download effect data corresponding to the model to which pachislot machine 1 belongs from the hall computer. In step S1105, the control unit of the data display 2001 stores the downloaded effect data in a storage device such as RAM.

After executing the processing of step S1105, the control unit of the data display device 2001 terminates this subroutine.

Note that although the description here assumes that the model is identified by the data display 2001, model identification may also be performed by the hall computer. In this case, for example, a model identification table may be stored in the hall computer, and information indicating the model identification pattern detected by the data display 2001 may be transmitted to the hall computer.

In addition, although it has been explained that the effect data corresponding to each machine type is stored in the hall computer, the effect data may not be stored in the hall computer. In this case, the hall computer may be configured to download effect data from an external device each time it receives an effect data request signal and transmit the downloaded effect data to the data display 2001. Furthermore, in the data display 2001, each time effect data is downloaded from the hall computer, the old effect data stored in the storage device may be deleted and replaced with new effect data, or effect data corresponding to a predetermined number of machines (for example, the effect data for the three most recently downloaded machines) may be stored.

If it is determined in step S1101 that no lighting patterns in steps 11 to 13 have been detected, the control unit of the data display 2001 determines whether a lighting pattern corresponding to an error pattern has been detected as a combination of the light color of lamp 3305a and the light color of lamp 3305b (step S1106). As described above, an error pattern is a lighting pattern that appears when an abnormality (error) is detected in the pachislot machine 1 (see FIG. 234). Note that a data table (the table corresponding to FIG. 234) that associates lighting patterns with pattern types (error patterns, custom start patterns, custom end patterns, in-game effect patterns, complete function-related patterns, etc.) is stored in a storage device such as a ROM, and the control unit of the data display 2001 can recognize the pattern type by referencing this data table.

If it is determined that a lighting pattern corresponding to an error pattern has been detected, the control unit of the data display 2001 notifies that an error has occurred (step S1107). Specifically, the control unit of the data display 2001 controls the video display unit and audio output unit to display an image notifying that an error has occurred on the LCD display 2002, or to output a sound notifying that an error has occurred from the speaker 2004. In this case, the control unit of the data display 2001 varies the notification mode depending on the type of error corresponding to the detected error pattern.

Then, the control unit of the data display 2001 sends an error signal to the hall computer indicating that an error has occurred (step S1108). The error signal contains information indicating the type of error. After executing the processing of step S1108, the control unit of the data display 2001 ends this subroutine.

If it is determined in step S1106 that a lighting pattern corresponding to an error pattern has not been detected, the control unit of the data display 2001 determines whether a lighting pattern corresponding to a custom start pattern has been detected as a combination of the light color of lamp 3305a and the light color of lamp 3305b (step S1109). As described above, a custom start pattern is a lighting pattern that appears when a custom game has started (a custom start operation has been performed) (see FIG. 234).

If it is determined that a lighting pattern corresponding to a custom start pattern has been detected, the control unit of the data display 2001 executes a custom start effect (step S1110). The custom start effect is an effect indicating that custom gameplay is about to begin, and is an effect that corresponds to the type of character that corresponds to the detected custom start pattern. As a result, an image corresponding to the character selected by the custom start operation is displayed on the LCD display 2002, and a sound corresponding to that character is output from the speaker 2004. After executing the processing of step S1110, the control unit of the data display 2001 terminates this subroutine.

If it is determined in step S1109 that a lighting pattern corresponding to the custom start pattern has not been detected, the control unit of the data display 2001 determines whether a lighting pattern corresponding to the custom end pattern has been detected as a combination of the light color of lamp 3305a and the light color of lamp 3305b (step S1111). As described above, the custom end pattern is a lighting pattern that appears when custom play has ended (a custom end operation has been performed) (see FIG. 234). In other words, when a custom end operation has been performed, lamps 3305a and 3305b emit light according to lighting pattern 20 (custom end pattern) shown in FIG. 234.

If it is determined that a lighting pattern corresponding to the customization end pattern has been detected, the control unit of the data display 2001 executes a customization end effect (step S1112). The customization end effect is an effect that indicates the end of custom gameplay, and an image corresponding to the character selected through customization is displayed on the LCD display 2002, and a sound corresponding to that character is output from the speaker 2004. After executing the processing of step S1112, the control unit of the data display 2001 ends this subroutine.

If it is determined in step S1111 that a lighting pattern corresponding to the custom end pattern has not been detected, the control unit of the data display 2001 determines whether a lighting pattern corresponding to a pattern for in-game effects has been detected as a combination of the light color of lamp 3305a and the light color of lamp 3305b (step S1113). As described above, a pattern for in-game effects is a lighting pattern that corresponds to the effects performed during play (effects generally performed in pachislot machines) (see Figure 234).

If it is determined that a lighting pattern corresponding to an in-play effect pattern has been detected, the control unit of the data display 2001 executes an in-play effect (step S1114). The in-play effect is an effect corresponding to the type of in-play effect pattern detected (an effect corresponding to an effect performed during play on the pachislot machine 1), and an image corresponding to the game status is displayed on the LCD display 2002, and audio corresponding to the game status is output from the speaker 2004. This makes it possible to link the effects performed on the pachislot machine 1 with the effects performed on the data display 2001. Furthermore, during the period when custom play is being performed (from the time the customization start operation is performed to the time the customization end operation is performed), effects corresponding to the content of the customization and the game status may be performed.

If it is determined in step S1113 that a lighting pattern corresponding to a pattern for in-game effects has not been detected, the control unit of the data display 2001 determines whether a lighting pattern corresponding to a pattern related to the complete function has been detected as a combination of the light color of lamp 3305a and the light color of lamp 3305b (step S1115). As described above, a pattern related to the complete function is a lighting pattern that appears when the processing at SA42, SA44, SA48, SA51, and SA65 in Figure 232 is executed (see Figure 234).

If it is determined that a lighting pattern corresponding to a pattern related to the complete function has been detected, the control unit of the data display 2001 issues a notification related to the complete function (step S1116). Specifically, the control unit of the data display 2001 controls the video display unit and audio output unit to display an image on the LCD display 2002 notifying the user that the first notification, second notification, advance notification state, complete function activation standby state, or complete function activation state is in progress, or to output a corresponding notification sound from the speaker 2004.

For example, in the case of the first notification, a message image such as "1000 more to complete" is displayed on the LCD display 2002 for a predetermined period (for example, 10 minutes, or until the advance notification starts, displaying the remaining number of sheets or a number in units of 100 sheets). Also, during the advance notification state, a message image such as "500 more to complete" is displayed on the LCD display 2002 for a predetermined period (for example, 10 minutes, or until the second notification or the complete function starts, displaying the remaining number of sheets or a number in units of 100 sheets).

Note that during the advance notification state, if five lighting patterns are provided for each remaining number of 100 coins as described above, the remaining number of coins may be notified according to the lighting pattern. For example, if the lighting pattern indicates that the remaining number of coins is less than 300, a message image such as "300 more to complete" is displayed on the LCD display 2002 for a predetermined period of time. In the case of the second notification, a message image such as "Complete soon" is displayed on the LCD display 2002 for a predetermined period of time (e.g., 10 minutes, or until the complete function is activated). When the complete function is activated, a message image such as "Complete activated" is displayed on the LCD display 2002 until the power to the pachislot machine 1 or the data display 2001 is cut off.

The control unit of the data display 2001 also sends a complete function-related signal to the hall computer that identifies whether the first notification, second notification, or advance notification state (which may include the remaining number of coins up to 19,000), the complete function activation standby state, or the complete function activation state (step S1117). If step S1115 returns NO, or after executing the processing of step S1117, the control unit of the data display 2001 ends this subroutine.

This allows store staff, as well as the manager in charge of the hall computer, to understand from the display status of the data display 2001 installed above the pachislot machine 1 whether the machine is in the first notification, second notification, advance notification state (which may include the remaining number of coins up to 19,000), complete function activation standby state, or complete function activation state. This allows store staff to identify gaming machines that may require assistance, and by increasing their attention and focus on the gaming status of those machines, they can provide prompt and accurate support.

In the lighting pattern detection process shown in FIG. 236, if it is determined in step S1115 that a complete function-related pattern has been detected, an example has been described in which a complete function-related notification corresponding to the lighting pattern is made in step S1116, and a complete function-related signal corresponding to the lighting pattern is sent to the hall computer in step S1117. However, this is not limiting, and only one of steps S1116 and S1117 may be executed.

(Relationship between notifications during advantageous situations and advance notifications)
In the pachislot machine 1, during an advantageous state such as an AT or a bonus, predetermined advantage-related information related to the advantageous state is displayed on the main effect display unit 21. The predetermined advantage-related information includes, for example, the net increase (net increase in number of coins, cumulative number) during the advantageous state from the start of control to the advantageous state, or during a series of advantageous states (specific period) from the advantageous state, the remaining number that can be controlled to continue in the advantageous state (the number of games remaining until the AT ends during the AT, the number of medals remaining until the bonus ends during a bonus, etc.), and during the AT, push order navigation, etc. Figures 237 and 238 are diagrams for explaining display examples of predetermined advantage-related information and advance notifications.

Figure 237 (a) shows an example of the display on the main effect display unit 21 during an advantageous state (here, during an AT). The number of games remaining in the AT (in this example, LAST: 303G) is displayed in the upper left of the display area of the main effect display unit 21, and the net increase during the series of advantageous states including the AT (in this example, TOTAL: 673; hereinafter also referred to as the advantageous state net increase notification) is displayed in the upper right of the display area. During a bonus, the number of medals remaining until the bonus ends (LAST: 100, for example) is displayed in the upper left of the display area of the main effect display unit 21.

In addition, in the center of the display area of the main effect display unit 21, an effect image or background image (here, an image of a character or the like moving) is displayed according to the progress of the game, and when button press navigation is performed, a button press navigation image is displayed superimposed (prioritized) on the background image. Note that a series of advantageous states includes not only periods when the player is continuously controlled to an advantageous state, but also advantageous states that are temporarily controlled to a normal state but are then controlled again within a predetermined period (e.g., within 32 games). In this way, when the player is temporarily controlled to a normal state, the remaining number and the net increase notification during the advantageous state are not displayed, but the net increase is internally counted and updated according to the progress and results of the game during the normal state, and when the player is controlled to an advantageous state again, a numerical image that identifies the updated net increase (the net increase reflecting the difference in the number during the normal state) is displayed.

The remaining number (LAST) and net increase (TOTAL) displayed during a favorable state are updated as the game progresses. The net increase (TOTAL), which notifies you of the net increase during a favorable state, is incremented (added) by one each time a small win is achieved based on the outcome of the game until it reaches a value equal to the number of coins paid out. When a bet is made and the start lever 7 is operated to start a new game, the bet amount is subtracted (added) from the displayed value. Specifically, for example, in the state shown in FIG. 237(a), if a small win resulting in a payout of eight coins is achieved based on the outcome of the game, the display is incremented (added) by one each time until it reaches "681," which is the sum of the eight coins, and is finally updated to "TOTAL: 681" as shown in FIG. 237(b). If you then bet three coins and operate the start lever 7 to start a new game, the three coins are subtracted (added) at once, and the display is updated to "TOTAL: 678" as shown in FIG. 237(c). The remaining number (LAST) is updated and displayed at the end of the game (as shown in Figure 237 (b) , during AT it is subtracted by 1, and during bonus it is subtracted by the number of coins paid out, etc.).

On the other hand, as mentioned above, the advance notification notifies the player of the number of coins remaining up to 19,000, the upper limit at which the complete function is activated, when the cumulative total net increase over a specified period from power-on has reached 18,500. When an advance notification is made during an advantageous state, the advance notification message image is displayed so that it does not overlap with the specified advantageous-related information. When an advance notification is made during an advantageous state, the advance notification message image is displayed in an area that does not overlap with the specified advantageous-related information, as shown in Figure 237 (d). In this case, the advance notification message image may be superimposed on the background image or a presentation image that corresponds to the progress of the game. For this reason, regardless of the position at which the predetermined advantage-related information is displayed when no advance notification is being given, as shown in Figure 237 (e), the advance notification message image may be displayed in a predetermined area (an area that has the least impact on the effect images, for example, above the main effect display section 21), and the position at which the predetermined advantage-related information is displayed (here, the display position of the remaining number (LAST) and net increase number (TOTAL)) may be moved to a position where it does not overlap with the advance notification.

The numerical value to be notified differs between the advance notification, which shows the remaining number up to 19,000, and the favorable net increase notification, which shows the net increase during a series of favorable states. However, advance notifications and favorable net increase notifications have in common the fact that the difference is updated with each play depending on the progress and results of the game. Therefore, if both were updated and displayed in the same manner, there is a risk of confusing the player. For this reason, pachislot machine 1 updates and displays the remaining number in the advance notification in a first manner, and updates and displays the net increase in the favorable net increase notification in a second manner that is different from the first manner. This makes it easier to distinguish between the two and prevents player confusion. Below, specific examples of the first manner in advance notifications and the second manner in favorable net increase notifications are explained.

First Example: In the first mode of advance notification, the remaining number of coins is not updated at the start of play, but is updated and displayed at the end of play even if a small win has not been won, whereas in the second mode of favorable net increase notification, the net increase is updated and displayed at the start of play, but is only updated and displayed at the end of play if a small win has been won. Figure 238(a) shows an example of the display when play begins in the state of Figure 237(d), Figure 238(b) shows an example of the display when play ends, a small win is won, and the payout of 8 coins has begun, and Figure 238(c) shows an example of the display when the payout of 8 coins has been completed. At the start of play, as shown in Figure 238(a), the remaining number of coins in the advance notification is not updated, whereas the net increase in the favorable net increase notification is updated and displayed by subtracting the amount of the bet. Also, at the end of a game, as shown in FIG. 238(c), the remaining number in the advance notification is updated to the difference (here, 8 payouts minus 3 bets = 5), and the net increase in the favorable net increase notification is updated to the amount of 8 payouts. Even if a small win does not occur and no medals are paid out at the end of a game, the remaining number in the advance notification is updated to the difference (the amount of the bet), but the net increase in the favorable net increase notification is not updated. This is because, as explained in FIG. 230, the process for updating the value of the CMP_MY counter used for advance notification is performed only between the time all reels stop and the time medals can be inserted. For this reason, the remaining number in the advance notification is updated only at the end of a game, and is not updated when a bet is made and a new game is started by operating the start lever 7. This eliminates the need to subtract the bet amount from the CMP_MY counter value at the start of play or update the display to the subtracted value when making an advance notification, thereby preventing an increase in processing burden, and the manner in which the update display makes it easier to distinguish from a net increase notification while in a favorable position, preventing confusion for the player. In this example, by not subtracting the bet amount from the CMP_MY counter value at the start of play or updating the display to the subtracted value, a difference of up to three coins can occur between the number of coins notified and the actual difference in the number of coins until the complete activation, but by maintaining the number of coins remaining at the end of play without displaying any words such as "approximately," a priority is given to not increasing the processing burden.

Second example: In the first mode of advance notification, the remaining number is not incremented or decremented by one and updated, but is instead switched to the remaining number all at once (all at once) and updated. In contrast, in the second mode of favorable net increase notification, at least at the end of play when a small win has been achieved, the net increase may be updated by incrementing the display by one until it reaches the net increase obtained by adding the number of coins paid out, as described above. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 238(b), the remaining number in the advance notification is updated by switching to the updated remaining number of "491" at the end of play. In contrast, the net increase in the favorable net increase notification is incremented by one (indicated by the downward arrow in FIG. 238(b) by one), and is updated to the net increase obtained by adding the number of coins paid out, as shown in FIG. 238(c).

Third example: The first mode of the advance notification and the second mode of the notification of net increase in favorable positions may have different timings for starting the update display. The timing for starting the update display in the advance notification may be set to occur before the timing for starting the update display in the notification of net increase in favorable positions. For example, as shown in FIG. 238(b), the update display in the notification of net increase in favorable positions may start after the update display in the advance notification is completed. Also, the timing for starting the update display in the notification of net increase in favorable positions may be set to occur before the timing for starting the update display in the advance notification. For example, the update display in the advance notification may start after the update display in the notification of net increase in favorable positions is completed.

Fourth example: Even if the advance notification is incremented or decremented to update the remaining number, just like the favorable net increase notification, the advance notification and favorable net increase notification may be set to have different numbers incremented or decremented at one time (e.g., 3 in the first mode and 1 in the second mode), or the time interval between one increment or decrement and the next increment or decrement (e.g., 0.1 seconds in the first mode and 0.3 seconds in the second mode) may be set to have different times.

Note that the first aspect of the advance notification and the second aspect of the notification of net increase during advantageous bets are not limited to any of the first to fourth examples, as long as they are different aspects, and may also be any combination of the first to fourth examples.

In addition, the pachislot machine 1 can execute various effects as the game progresses, and effect images corresponding to the effect being executed are displayed on the main effect display unit 21. Among the various effects, when a specific effect (including premium effects) is executed, such as an effect that notifies the player of a high probability of winning an AT or bonus, a powerful effect image is displayed across the entire display area of the main effect display unit 21. Furthermore, when a specific effect is executed while the player is in an advantageous state and a net increase in the advantageous state is being notified, control is performed to suspend the net increase in the advantageous state (control to hide the net increase number) in order to heighten the player's sense of anticipation through the effect image of the specific effect, and control is performed to resume the net increase in the advantageous state after the specific effect has ended.

On the other hand, if a special effect is executed while an advance notification is being given during an advantageous state, the advance notification will be maintained. This is because the advance notification has already notified the player that the complete function is about to be activated, making it difficult to heighten the player's anticipation with the special effect. If the advance notification were to be interrupted in such a situation in order to execute the special effect, it would give the impression that the player is being intentionally (actively) forced to view the special effect, which could actually upset the player.

Figure 238(d) shows an example of the display when a special effect is executed when game play begins in the state of Figure 238(c). In Figure 238(d), three large characters and an image that looks like an explosion are displayed across the entire display area of the main effect display unit 21 as the effect image for the special effect. As shown in Figure 238(d), even when a special effect is executed, the advance notification message image is displayed superimposed (given priority) on the effect image for the special effect in the same manner as before the special effect was executed. In contrast, the notification of net increase during advantageous play is interrupted and the net increase number is not displayed. This allows the effect image for the special effect to be as visible to the player as possible while the advance notification is maintained, which minimizes irritation to the player compared to interrupting the advance notification, etc.

In Figure 238 (d), an example is described in which control is performed to suspend the notification of net increase in favorable conditions when a special effect is executed, and control is performed to resume the notification of net increase in favorable conditions after the special effect has ended. However, this is not limited to this, and control may be performed to reduce the visibility of the notification of net increase in favorable conditions when a special effect is executed, and control to return the visibility of the notification of net increase in favorable conditions to its original state (normal state) after the special effect has ended.

Figure 238 (e) shows an example of reducing the visibility of the advantageous net increase notification by reducing the display size of the advantageous net increase notification image "TOTAL: 686" along with the remaining number image "LAST: 301" and moving the display to the upper left corner of the display area of the main effect display unit 21. Note that, as an example of reducing the visibility of the advantageous net increase notification, instead of or in addition to reducing the display size, it may be possible to increase the transmittance of the advantageous net increase notification to make it semi-transparent, or to hide it on the main effect display unit 21 while displaying it on the sub-display unit 220.

(Regarding initialization of the CMP_MY counter and the advantageous zone payout counter)
The CMP_MY counter is a counter for determining whether to activate the advance notification or complete function depending on the cumulative number of medal differences over a predetermined period from when the power is turned on, and is basically a predetermined period from when the power is turned on until the power is turned off, and is intended to prevent excessive gambling during one business day of a typical gaming parlor, which turns on the power before opening and turns off the power after closing.For this reason, as mentioned above, the CMP_MY counter is initialized not only when there is a RAM abnormality or when the settings are changed, but also when the power is turned on, which would likely occur before opening.

However, if the CMP_MY counter is uniformly initialized when the power is turned on, there may be situations where, for example, if an error other than a RAM abnormality occurs during a business day, it would be desirable to shut down the power and turn it on once the error is resolved, but the power cannot be turned on without initializing the CMP_MY counter. It is also anticipated that fraudulent activity could occur, such as shutting down the power and turning it on again with the intention of initializing the CMP_MY counter, even during a business day.

In this way, to prevent problems caused by uniformly initializing the CMP_MY counter when the power is turned on, the pachislot machine 1 may initialize the CMP_MY counter when a specific condition is not met when the power is turned on, and may not initialize the CMP_MY counter when a specific condition is met even when the power is turned on. Specific examples of specific conditions are provided below, but they are not limited to these. Specific conditions may be met by actively accepting operations or settings from a store clerk or the like, or may be met when a specified event occurs without the need for active operations or settings, or two or more conditions may be combined as AND or OR conditions.

(a) A condition that is met when the power is turned on after being cut off in a situation where an error other than a RAM abnormality has occurred in the pachislot machine 1 (for example, any error, or a specific type of error among errors (for example, a hopper empty error)). (b) A condition that is met when the power is turned on after being cut off in a situation where an operation on a specific operation unit (for example, an operation on the setting key switch 52 or the reset switch 53) is accepted. Note that the specific operation unit may be an operation unit dedicated solely to avoiding initialization of CMP_MY when the power is turned on, or may also serve as an operation unit that can be operated in accordance with the management and progress of the game. (c) A condition that is met when the time elapsed since the power was turned off is internally measured (for example, by periodically counting up the value of a specified counter), and when the power is turned on, the measured time (the counted-up value) is less than a specified time (a relatively long time, for example, a value equivalent to 6 hours). (d) A condition that is met when the power is turned on after being cut off during an advantageous state. (e) A condition (F) that is met by powering on after being shut off while one or more reels are spinning; a condition (G) that is met by powering on after being shut off while one or more bets have been placed; and a condition (H) that is met by powering on after being shut off while replay is in operation. Furthermore, the pachislot machine 1 is equipped with a favorable zone payout number counter that determines whether to activate a payout number limiter based on the cumulative difference in the number of medals in one favorable zone. The favorable zone payout number counter is similar to the CMP_MY counter in that it is a counter that prevents excessive gambling. For this reason, similar to the CMP_MY counter, it is conceivable that the favorable zone payout number counter is initialized when a specific condition is not met when power is turned on, and not initialized when a specific condition is met even when power is turned on.

However, unlike the CMP_MY counter, which aims to curb gambling during a gaming establishment's business day, the advantageous zone payout number counter aims to curb gambling during a single advantageous zone. Furthermore, an advantageous zone has a set upper limit on the number of games that can be played in the advantageous zone (e.g., 4000) in addition to the difference in medals, and when the upper limit is reached, the advantageous zone ends, and the advantageous zone payout number counter is also initialized.

In addition, instead of having a limiter that ends the advantageous zone when the upper limit of the number of games in the advantageous zone is reached, the advantageous zone may end when the difference in the number of medals reaches the upper limit or when the advantageous zone end conditions according to the specifications of the gaming machine (for example, when the AT ends) are met. The following explanation of the balance with the upper limit of the number of games is based on the assumption that the gaming machine has the upper limit of the number of games.

For this reason, if the advantageous zone payout counter is initialized when the power is turned on and specific conditions are not met, there is a risk that the advantageous zone payout counter will be initialized too much, or that the balance with the upper limit number of games in a particular advantageous zone will be disrupted, making it impossible to properly suppress gambling during that advantageous zone.

Thus, in pachislot machine 1, even if the CMP_MY counter is initialized when a specific condition is not met when the power is turned on and is not initialized when a specific condition is met even when the power is turned on, the advantageous zone payout counter may not be initialized, not only when a specific condition is met but also when the specific condition is not met, simply by turning the power on after a power cut. This allows the CMP_MY counter to be initialized or not depending on whether a specific condition is met even when the power is turned on, thereby improving convenience. In contrast, the advantageous zone payout counter is not initialized not only when a specific condition is met but also when the specific condition is not met simply by turning the power on, so gambling within a beneficial zone can be appropriately suppressed by ensuring a balance with the upper limit on the number of games in the advantageous zone without complicating processing.

(Modification of CMP_MY Counter Initialization)
As mentioned above, even during a business day, it is conceivable that a situation may occur in which the power is turned off and then turned on due to an operational error, either intentionally or unintentionally, to initialize the CMP_MY counter. Below, we will explain examples of specifications other than those exemplified above that prevent the CMP_MY counter from being initialized during business hours. Note that the initialization of the advantageous zone payout number counter is the same as described above, so we will not explain it here.
Specification 1: The software timer of the main program (hereinafter referred to as the "clear time timer") can measure the time that the power-on state is maintained after power is turned on. The measured time value information is maintained even when the power is turned off, but it is not updated.
Specification 2: The CMP_MY counter is not initialized when power is restored after a power outage before the cumulative time that has elapsed in the power-on state since the CMP_MY counter was initialized when the power was turned on (hereinafter also referred to as "cumulative elapsed time") reaches a specific time value (e.g., 12 hours).
Specification 3: When power is restored after the "cumulative elapsed time" reaches a specific time value or more (for example, 12 hours or more), the CMP_MY counter is initialized.
Specification 4: Regardless of whether the "cumulative elapsed time" has reached a specific time value, the CMP_MY counter is initialized when a setting change operation is performed.
Specification 5: Regardless of whether the "cumulative elapsed time" has reached a specific time value, if a RAM clear operation (sometimes referred to as an RWM clear operation or RAM clear operation; an operation in which the power is turned on while pressing the reset button on the main control board 2071) is performed, the CMP_MY counter is initialized.
Specification 6: If an RWM error (also called an RWM abnormality, RWM memory error, RAM abnormality, etc.) occurs when power is turned on, the CMP_MY counter is initialized.

By providing gaming machines with specifications 1 through 6, it is possible to prevent the CMP_MY counter from being initialized when power is restored within 12 hours of being turned on, without increasing the burden on store staff during store operations. Note that gaming machines without a RAM clear procedure may not be equipped with specification 5. Also, pachislot machines with a single setting level or pachinko machines without the concept of setting values may not be equipped with specification 4. In other words, it is sufficient to have at least one of specifications 4 or 5. Note that while the specific time value is 12 hours in this example, other time values may also be used.

As an example, let's assume a store opens at 10:00 and closes at 23:00. The playable time is 22:50 for customers with membership cards and 22:45 for customers without membership cards. This explanation assumes a gaming machine with a specific time value of 12 hours in a store with business hours. Since power is typically turned on between one hour and about 10 minutes before opening, we'll assume the machine is turned on at 9:30. The CMP_MY counter is initialized when the machine is turned on at 9:30. The software timer described in Specification 1 then starts counting the elapsed time immediately after power is turned on. Play begins on the gaming machine from 10:00, when the store opens. Between 9:50 and 21:30, when the "cumulative elapsed time" reaches 12 hours, the CMP_MY counter is not initialized even if power is restored. If power is restored after 21:30, the CMP_MY counter is initialized, but even customers with membership cards have approximately 1 hour and 20 minutes of playable time remaining. Although it depends on the specifications of the gaming machine, there is a limit to the amount of gaming value that can be earned in 1 hour and 20 minutes, so even if the power is restored after 9:30pm, it is possible to prevent the MY value of gaming value that can be earned in a day from becoming unlimited.

Assuming a store that is open 13 hours a day, as described above, a gaming machine whose specific time value matches the length of business hours, 13 hours, can completely prevent the CMP_MY counter from being initialized during business hours, so such a specification may be used.

However, setting the specific time value to the same time as business hours (13 hours) poses the following problems. If the power is turned on at 9:50 AM, the CMP_MY counter can be initialized after the power is restored after 10:50 PM. If the only customers playing until closing time are those without membership cards, and all customers finish playing and leave by 10:45 PM, the power-off process may begin before 10:50 PM. If the power is turned off at 10:46 PM, before the initialization time, and then turned on the next day, the CMP_MY counter will remain unchanged. For example, if the machine's MY is 18,000 coins on that day, it will be stopped when MY reaches 1,000 the next day. This will cause the player to feel a loss due to the immediate stoppage, and the store will suffer a loss as the machine's operation will be immediately halted (since it is common practice not to change settings or clear RAM during business hours). In anticipation of such cases, it is desirable to set the specific time value to a time value shorter than 13 hours, which is the standard business hours scale.

Due to work such as replacing new machines, shortened business hours may be implemented, such as from 5:00 PM to 11:00 PM. In such cases, changing the settings or clearing the RAM the next day will clear the CMP_MY counter, preventing the complete function from being activated early the following day due to the number of coins won the previous day. Generally, shortened business hours are implemented rarely, so changing the settings or clearing the RAM for all of the gaming machines in question does not impose a significant burden on the store.

The specific time value could be set to a standard business hours scale (for example, 13 hours) or longer, to strongly suppress the CMP_MY counter during business hours, but this would require operations to change the settings or perform RAM clear procedures on all machines even during normal business hours, or to shut off the power late at night more than 13 hours after power-on, which has the disadvantage of imposing a heavy burden on the store. Therefore, as mentioned above, setting the specific time value shorter than the standard business hours scale reduces the burden on the store.

The processes for updating the clear time timer, initializing the CMP_MY counter, and processing related to the complete function should be stored in a memory area outside the ROM's used area, and should be performed using the RAM's outside used area work area. Using the outside area saves resources for the main in-area program and the in-area work area. However, if there is room in the main's capacity, these processes can also be performed using the inside area.

(Modification of CMP_MY counter initialization, notification of clearable state, etc.)
It is desirable that the shop staff be able to recognize whether the CMP_MY counter is cleared when power is restored (hereinafter also referred to as the "clearable state"; after a specific time value has elapsed since the most recent power-on when the CMP_MY counter was counted) or whether it is not cleared (hereinafter also referred to as the "unclearable state"; before a specific time value has elapsed since the most recent power-on when the CMP_MY counter was counted). The following specifications are possible:
Specification A: When a predetermined operation is performed, at least one of a notification or a suggestion is given that the game is in a clearable state.When a predetermined operation is performed in an unclearable state, at least one of a notification or a suggestion is given that the game is in an unclearable state.
Specification B: When a predetermined operation is performed, at least one of a notification or a suggestion is given that the game is in a clearable state. When a game is in an unclearable state, no notification or suggestion is given that the game is in that state, even when a predetermined operation is performed.
Specification C: When a predetermined operation is performed, there is no notification/indication that the game is in a clearable state. When a predetermined operation is performed in an unclearable state, there is at least one notification or indication that the game is in an unclearable state.

Either specification A, B, or C can be adopted.

Here, the predetermined operation is an operation that is difficult or impossible for a player to perform but can be performed by a store clerk, such as opening the front door, turning the door key to the left to simply clear an error, or pressing the reset switch while the front door is open. Any operation may be a prerequisite for an alert, etc. The predetermined operation for issuing an alert/suggestion in a clearable state and the predetermined operation for issuing an alert/suggestion in an unclearable state may be the same operation or different operations.
An "alert" is when the state is clearly indicated by a message on the screen saying "The complete function counter will be reset if the power is cut off" or a guide voice to that effect being played.
"Suggestion" means notification in a manner that can be understood by anyone who knows the rules, such as by changing the background color of the screen display during a specified operation depending on whether the state is clearable or not, or by changing the lighting pattern of an arbitrary lamp (which may be part of a decorative lamp, a lamp dedicated to that function, or a dot on a segment) depending on whether the state is clearable or not.
"At least one of notification or suggestion" may refer to a device that has both notification and suggestion functions and performs one or more of them, or a device that has only notification function or only suggestion function and performs one or more of them. Hereinafter, when referring to "at least one of notification or suggestion," it may be abbreviated as "notification, etc."

Specification A has the advantage of making it easy to understand the status, as notifications are sent for both clearable and unclearable states.

In Specification B, notifications are only sent when the game is clearable. No notifications are sent when the game is unclearable, but the absence of notifications that would normally be sent when the game is clearable makes it possible to indirectly detect that the game is unclearable.

In Specification C, notifications are only sent when the game is in an unclearable state. Notifications are not sent when the game is clearable, but the absence of notifications that would normally be sent when the game is in an unclearable state means that the game is in an indirectly clearable state.

(Modification of CMP_MY Counter Initialization: Notification Regarding CMP_MY Counter Initialization)
When the CMP_MY counter is initialized by power recovery in a clearable state, it is desirable to notify the store clerk that this has been done. This is because the store clerk who performed the power recovery for the purpose of initializing the CMP_MY counter can be made aware that the initialization has been completed. The notification can be done by one or more of an image, a segment display, a sound, etc.

For example, after powering on, an image such as "The number counter for the complete function has been cleared" may be displayed, a sound may be played, or the identifier "CC" (the initials for complete clear) may be displayed in a specified segment such as the payout segment or credit segment to indicate that the counter has been cleared. Alternatively, the clearing may be indicated by lighting a special light-emitting mode corresponding to the counter being cleared, such as lighting up only a dot in a specified segment when powering on.

If power is restored when the counter cannot be cleared, an alert may be issued to the effect that the CMP_MY counter has not been initialized, or no alert may be issued. If an alert is issued, an image or sound may be displayed to indicate that "The number counter for the complete function has been maintained," or an alert may be issued that includes instructions on how to clear the counter, such as "The number counter for the complete function has been maintained. The counter will be cleared by clearing the RAM or changing the settings," to improve the convenience of the operator.

When the CMP_MY counter is initialized as a result of a setting change operation, the initialization of the CMP_MY counter may or may not be notified. If a notification is made, an image is displayed and a sound is emitted such as "The setting change is complete. The complete function number counter has been cleared." when the setting change process is completed. If a notification is not made, an image is displayed and a sound is emitted such as "The setting change is complete." when the setting change process is completed. Alternatively, the first notification means (e.g., a screen) may notify the user of the counter initialization, but the second notification means (e.g., a speaker) may not. This may be used, for example, to avoid the impression that the sound generated when the setting operation is completed is redundant. Furthermore, if the screen is small, the first notification means may be a speaker and the second notification means may be a screen, and the sound may be emitted, but the counter initialization may not be emitted on the screen. Incidentally, setting changes are performed with the front door open in slot machines, or with the main frame open relative to the outer frame in pachinko machines; either way, this corresponds to a door open error. When a door open error occurs, an error notification sound such as "Door is open" is emitted, but if it is emitted at the same time as the above-mentioned "Setting change complete" and "Counter initialization" sounds, it is difficult to hear. For this reason, it is desirable to emit the error notification sound such as "Door is open" after the "Setting change complete" and "Counter initialization" sounds have finished being emitted. However, if it is desired to simplify the sound output process, it is acceptable for the timing of the sound such as "Setting change complete" and the error notification sound to overlap at least partially.

When the CMP_MY counter is initialized as a result of a RAM clear operation, the fact that the CMP_MY counter has been initialized may or may not be notified. The notification method can be the same as when changing settings, as appropriate. There are four possible specifications for whether or not to notify the initialization of the counter. Any of these specifications may be used.

Also, different notification rules may be adopted depending on the notification means (screen, speaker, etc.).
When settings are changed: Notify When RAM is cleared: Notify When settings are changed: Notify When RAM is cleared: Not notify When settings are changed: Not notify When settings are changed: Not notify When RAM is cleared: Not notify When settings are changed: Whether the CMP_MY counter is in a clearable state or an unclearable state depends solely on whether the counter can be initialized when power is restored. In the case of a setting change or RAM clear, the CMP_MY counter is initialized after the operation regardless of whether the counter is clearable or unclearable. Therefore, if a notification is provided that the CMP_MY counter has been initialized when settings are changed or RAM is cleared, it is desirable to provide a similar notification format (e.g., the same notification audio) whether the counter is initialized in a clearable state or an unclearable state. It is sufficient for the store clerk to at least understand that the counter has been initialized; it is unnecessary to know what the state was before the counter was cleared. Therefore, by not providing unnecessary information, confusion for the person initializing the CMP_MY counter can be prevented.

When the gaming machine is powered on, it may take anywhere from several tens of seconds to a minute for the sub-side image control system to start up, and during this time an image (loading screen) such as "Starting up" or "NOW LOADING" is displayed on the screen to make it clear that the machine is waiting to start up. Once startup is complete, the loading screen will disappear and if it is simply a power outage recovery, the normal screen will be displayed, or if it is a setting change or RAM clear, a screen display indicating this will be displayed.

It is also a good idea to display an image indicating the initialization of the CMP_MY counter after the loading screen has finished displaying. The image indicating the initialization of the CMP_MY counter may be a corresponding image (such as a single image on the entire screen or a display in system font on a black background), or if initialization is performed normally upon power recovery after a power outage, an image stating "The number counter for the complete function has been cleared" may be displayed in front of the normal stage background. In either case, it is desirable to stop displaying the image indicating initialization after a predetermined period of time (approximately a few seconds). This is because if any operation is required to stop displaying the image, it will increase the burden on the operator.

(Modification of CMP_MY counter initialization: CMP_MY counter initialization and history screen)
For example, a function may be provided to display a menu screen for the hall when a predetermined operation, such as turning the setting key to the left while the power is on, is performed. This may include displaying a history of events such as setting changes, setting confirmation, RAM clearing, error occurrence, door opening, door closing, power off, and power on, as well as the time or date of occurrence.
For example, the display will be as follows: History number, event, date, time (hour, minute, second).

The lower the history number, the closer the event is to the present time (the time of displaying the history).
History number 1 Setting confirmation 2023/01/01 23:10:00
History number 2 Door open 2023/01/01 23:09:00
History number 3 Door closed 2023/01/01 09:50:00
History number 4 Setting change 2023/01/01 09:49:00
History number 5 Door open 2023/01/01 09:48:00
History number 6 Power on 2023/01/01 09:48:00
In this example, the power is turned on at 9:48, and since the door is open at the time of power-on, the door opening is recorded at the same time, and then the settings are changed and the door is closed. The store closes without any particular events during business hours, and then at 11:09 p.m. after closing, a store clerk opens the door and checks the settings, viewing the history. In this example, the CMP_MY counter initialization is not displayed in the history, but it may be displayed.
History number 1 Setting confirmation 2023/01/02 09:50:00
History number 2 Complete counter initialization 2023/01/02 09:48:00
History number 3 Door open 2023/01/02 09:48:00
History number 4 Power on 2023/01/02 09:48:00
In this way, the history will display whether initialization was performed when the power was turned on. This allows store staff to know when the counter was initialized the most recent or past time the power was turned on. The history item for complete counter initialization may display only initialization after powering on, or may also display complete counter initialization when settings are changed or after RAM is cleared.

If initialization is not performed when the power is turned on in the above situation, the following message will be displayed, allowing the operator to recognize that counter initialization has not occurred.
History number 1 Setting confirmation 2023/01/02 09:50:00
History number 2 Door open 2023/01/02 09:48:00
History number 3 Power on 2023/01/02 09:48:00
It should be noted that for the various items other than the complete counter initialization, the type of event to be displayed is arbitrary.

It may be possible to simply display a small number of events such as "setting changes, setting confirmation, RAM clear," or it may further display error types, door open/closed, etc. The displayed time may also be the date and hour/minute only, without seconds. It would also be good to have the ability to set the date and time (an item to input the current year, day, hour, minute, and second) in the hall menu, allowing for adjustment of time differences, etc.

Also, the elapsed time since power-on may be displayed instead of the time. This will be explained in the history display below. In this example, setting changes, setting confirmations, RAM clears, counter clears, power-on, etc. are displayed, but door opening and closing are not displayed.
History number 1 Setting confirmation 00:01:00
History number 2 Complete counter initialization 00:00:02
History number 3 Power on 00:00:00
History number 4 Power outage 13:20:00
History number 5 Complete counter initialization 00:00:02
History number 6 RAM clear 00:00:02
History number 7 Power on 00:00:00
On the first day, the power was turned on at 9:50 while clearing the RAM (while pressing the reset switch), and the counter was initialized accordingly. The history numbers are 7, 6, and 5. Note that the power-on time cannot be read from the elapsed time type history, so it is a good idea to make a separate note of the power-on time if necessary.

Since initialization is completed two seconds after power is turned on, the elapsed time value is displayed as "00:00:02 (0 hours, 0 minutes, 2 seconds)." For processes that are performed in conjunction with power-on, such as when the power is turned on, the elapsed time can be displayed as "00:00:00," the same time as power-on.

On the first day, the power was cut off at 11:10pm after closing time, 13 hours and 20 minutes later. This is record number 4.

The time of the power outage is unknown, but it is clear that it occurred at least 13 hours and 20 minutes after power was turned on (after the specific time value of 12 hours had elapsed), and the history can be verified after the fact that the CMP_MY counter was initialized the next time power was turned on.

The next day, the power is turned on at 9:50. This is history number 3. This history records the time elapsed since power was turned on, so the elapsed time in the history is 0:00:00. The CMP_MY counter is initialized when the power is turned on. This is history number 2. Just to be sure, one minute after power is turned on, the settings are checked (by turning the settings key while the power is still on) and the history screen for setting changes, etc. is viewed, which corresponds to history number 1. In this way, the display format on the history screen, which corresponds to the event type and the time elapsed since power was turned on, makes it clear that the counter was properly initialized, and the fact that the time elapsed since power was turned on is visible also has the advantage of making it easier to recognize the passage of a specific time value.

For history display, a signal indicating power-on is sent from the main control circuit (e.g., main control circuit 100) to the sub-control circuit (e.g., sub-control circuit 200) when the power is turned on. Similarly, if a setting change or RAM clear is performed, a corresponding signal is sent from the main control circuit to the sub-control circuit. If the CMP_MY counter is initialized upon power-on, a signal indicating this initialization should also be sent from the main control circuit to the sub-control circuit. However, instead of sending a signal indicating this initialization from the main control circuit to the sub-control circuit, the sub-control circuit may determine if the power was restored after 12 hours or more have elapsed since the last power-on, and display a message indicating that the CMP_MY counter has been initialized on the history display screen. Furthermore, since a signal indicating this can be received from the main control circuit when a setting change or RAM clear is performed, even if the sub-control circuit is configured not to receive a signal indicating that the CMP_MY counter has been initialized separately from signals indicating a setting change, etc., the sub-control circuit can recognize that the CMP_MY counter has been initialized and display the history.

In addition, when the CMP_MY counter is initialized, an external signal may be output. Examples of external signals include test signals, outer end signals output from the external terminal board, and external output signals output from the gaming ball lending terminal board to the sand for smart gaming machines. The test signals are received by the testing equipment at the testing facility, allowing the status of the gaming machine to be properly understood and the test to proceed smoothly. The outer end signals and external output signals are ultimately sent to the hall computer, either directly or via other relay devices, allowing the store to recognize that the CMP_MY counter has been initialized and to properly understand the situation.

(Modification of CMP_MY counter initialization: Explanation of CMP_MY counter initialization)
Incidentally, it is conceivable that there may exist a situation in the market where gaming machines exist that do not have a specific time value and the CMP_MY counter is initialized whenever power is restored, and gaming machines that have a specific time value (for example, 12 hours) and the CMP_MY counter is not initialized when power is restored until the specific time value has elapsed since power was turned on, which may cause confusion for store clerks when they are performing the work of initializing the CMP_MY counter. Therefore, it is desirable that machines that have a specific time value have a display that explains that they are machines that have a specific time value in a manner that allows at least store clerks to recognize them.

For example, a hall menu displayed during setting confirmation could display an explanation stating that a specific time value has been reached and that caution is advised when power is restored. In the case of machines without a screen, an explanatory section could be provided in any location, such as the lower panel or near the power switch inside the gaming machine cabinet, explaining things like "The MP_MY counter will not be initialized if power is restored within the specific time value," "The MP_MY counter will be initialized if power is restored after the specific time value has elapsed," or "The MP_MY counter will be initialized if the RAM is cleared or the settings are changed, even if within the specific time value." Furthermore, a logo indicating that the counter will not be initialized if power is restored within the specific time value, such as a design of the number 12, representing the specific time value, circled, could be provided in any location on the gaming machine's exterior.

(Modification of CMP_MY counter initialization: Elapsed time management method using a timer other than a software timer)
In the above example, the software timer is used to measure the time elapsed since power was turned on, but other time measuring means may also be used.

For example, the RTC function may be installed on the main control board or the main CPU.
In addition, a separate hardware board or the like can be provided that can monitor the time elapsed with the power off, rather than the cumulative time that the power has been on, so that the CMP_MY counter will not be initialized if the power is turned on and off within a short period of time (for example, if the time from power off to power on is less than four hours), thereby preventing the CMP_MY counter from being initialized during business hours.

(Regarding notification of the CMP_MY counter and the advantageous zone payout number counter)
The CMP_MY counter is intended to prevent excessive gambling activity during a business day in a typical gaming parlor, where the power is turned on at the start of business hours and turned off at the end of business hours. However, depending on the gaming parlor's management policy, there may be a need to more precisely and strictly control gambling activity or to reduce the amount of work required for power-off and power-on, such that only gaming machines whose CMP_MY counter value is approaching 18,500 or the like, even if they have not yet reached 18,500 or the like, are powered off and powered on. For this reason, information regarding the value of the CMP_MY counter may be notified when a notification condition is met, regardless of whether the value has reached 18,500 or the like, and the gaming parlor may be able to select whether to power off or power on based on the notified information.

The notification condition may be a condition that is met by a specific operation by a gaming parlor staff member, for example. For example, the notification condition may be met by a setting confirmation operation, and the value of the CMP_MY counter may be reported on a specified display unit as information related to the value of the CMP_MY counter. Furthermore, the information related to the value of the CMP_MY counter is not limited to the value of the CMP_MY counter, but may be the actual number of remaining coins obtained by subtracting the value of the CMP_MY counter from the upper limit for activating the complete function, or may be an approximate number of remaining coins (for example, numbers after the hundreds digit are rounded down and only numbers after the thousands digit are reported, so that if the value of the CMP_MY counter is 12551, "12000" is reported).

The specified display unit may be the main performance display unit 21, a 7-segment LED mounted inside the housing 2 and visible when a front door such as the lower door mechanism DD is open, or a 7-segment LED visible when a front door such as the lower door mechanism DD is closed.

In addition, for pachislot machines where the remaining number of coins, calculated by subtracting the value of the CMP_MY counter from the upper limit for activating the complete function, is less than a predetermined number (for example, less than 2000), when the notification conditions are met, a predetermined lamp may be illuminated in a specific manner (for example, a lamp that can illuminate the lower panel 13 located in the center of the lower part of the lower door mechanism DD from the back side may be illuminated in a flashing manner) to notify the user that the remaining number of coins is less than the predetermined number.

By reporting information about the value of the CMP_MY counter in this way, arcade staff can determine, based on the reported information, whether or not to initialize the CMP_MY counter by turning the power off and on again, thereby improving convenience. Even when information about the value of the CMP_MY counter can be reported when the reporting conditions are met, advance reports and reports of the activation of the complete function will still be made based on the value of CMP_MY.

The notification condition may be met when the hall menu is displayed by a setting confirmation operation, or when a menu called "CMP_MY Information" is included in the hall menu and the "CMP_MY Information" is selected and confirmed. If the notification is via the hall menu, for example, the main display unit 21 may display the CMP_MY counter value along with a slump graph since power-on, or when displaying these, the setting values may also be displayed. This makes it easier for store staff to grasp the overall status of the operating data.

Furthermore, if the notification condition is one that is met when "CMP_MY information" included in the hall menu is selected and confirmed, reference information regarding CMP_MY, such as "The value of the CMP_MY counter will be initialized when power is restored," may be displayed on the hall menu top screen, which may be displayed by a setting confirmation operation, or on the screen leading up to when "CMP_MY information" becomes selectable.

On the other hand, the value of the advantageous zone payout counter is not notified even when the notification conditions are met. This is because the value of the advantageous zone payout counter is not initialized by something like turning the power on, which has little impact on the amusement parlor's sales, but is initialized by something like changing settings, which has the potential to have a significant impact on the amusement parlor's sales. In other words, even if the amusement parlor manager were to know the value of the advantageous zone payout counter, it would be difficult to directly determine whether or not to make a setting change that could have a significant impact on the amusement parlor's sales, depending on the size of that value, and so it is assumed that there is no need to know the value of the advantageous zone payout counter.

For this reason, information regarding the value of the CMP_MY counter is reported when the reporting conditions are met, regardless of whether it has reached 18,500 or so, allowing the gaming facility to decide whether to turn the power off or on based on the reported information, but the value of the advantageous zone payout number counter is not reported, even when the reporting conditions are met. This prevents unnecessary processing to report information regarding the advantageous zone payout number counter value, and prevents an increase in processing burden.

(Regarding alarms that issue various notifications based on CMP_MY)
In Figure 229 and elsewhere, an example has been described in which various notifications based on CMP_MY are made on the main display device 210 (an image display device capable of displaying images), which is the main performance display unit 21, but this is not limiting and they may also be made on the sub-display device 220. Furthermore, various notifications based on CMP_MY may also be made on an LED mounted on the pachislot machine. This allows, for example, various notifications based on CMP_MY to be made even on a pachislot machine that does not have an image display device. Below, a specific example of making various notifications based on CMP_MY on an LED will be described.

Figure 239 shows a specific example of a two-digit 7-segment LED used to digitally display (notify) information to the player according to the progress and results of the game, and when various notifications are made based on CMP_MY. Figure 239 illustrates an example of a 7-segment LED controlled by the main control circuit 100 that displays, for example, the number of medals paid out according to the game result, and also serves as a payout display unit (payout number lamp) that displays push order navigation during the AT. However, it may also be a 7-segment LED that displays other information (for example, a 7-segment LED included in the information display device 14, a 7-segment LED controlled by the sub-control circuit 200, etc.). Since it is essential that the various notifications based on CMP_MY are recognizable by the player, it is preferable that the 7-segment LED that makes such notifications be easy to see, including its size and placement, and that notifications be provided by voice, sound effects, lamps, etc. in addition to the LED display.

When various notifications based on CMP_MY are made on the 7-segment LED controlled by the main control circuit 100, the completion-related notification process shown in FIG. 232 is executed by the main CPU 101 of the main control circuit 100. In this case, for example, a YES determination at SA23 in FIG. 231 results in a YES determination at SA41 in FIG. 232, and a NO determination at SA23 in FIG. 231 results in a YES determination at SA43 in FIG. 232. Furthermore, the value of the CMP_MY counter is referenced in SA45, SA48, SA49, SA63, etc. in FIG. 232. Furthermore, when the completion-related notification process is executed by the main CPU 101, the control program and data for the completion-related notification process are stored in a non-standard area of the main ROM 102.

Figure 239 (a) is an example of the display during the advance notification state when CMP_MY has reached 18,500, and shows the transition in the display state when the push order navigation is executed during the AT, a small win is achieved, and 8 coins are paid out. Figure 239 (a1) is an example of the display when the number of coins remaining until completion (19,000) is 401 or more but 500 or less, and the initial letter "L" of LAST and the hundreds digit of the number of coins less than 500 are displayed.

When a quantitative change in CMP_MY during the advance warning state is reported using a two-digit seven-segment LED, the first digit displays a number corresponding to the range of the number of sheets remaining until completion, out of multiple ranges (1-100 sheets, 101-200 sheets, ... 401-500 sheets) separated by a predetermined number of sheets (100 sheets).

The number corresponding to the range of remaining number of coins until completion is the hundreds digit of the maximum number of coins within that range. Therefore, when the remaining number is between 401 and 500 coins, it is displayed as "L5", when the remaining number is between 301 and 400 coins, it is displayed as "L4", when the remaining number is between 201 and 300 coins, it is displayed as "L3", when the remaining number is between 101 and 200 coins, it is displayed as "L2", and when the remaining number is between 1 and 100 coins, it is displayed as "L1".

In addition, the quantitative change in CMP_MY during the advance notification state is displayed when medals can be inserted from the end of play (or the end of payout in the case of a payout) until the start lever 7 is operated. When the start lever 7 is operated and the reels begin to spin, the advance notification is temporarily hidden, as shown in Figure 239 (a2). If push order navigation is performed thereafter, the push order navigation is displayed when the reel rotation speed reaches a constant speed. In Figure 239 (a3), the first digit displayed as the push order navigation is "1" as the number corresponding to the aforementioned "Play Order 1." When all reels have stopped and play has ended, the display returns to the state shown in Figure 239 (a1). When all reels have stopped and medals are paid out, the number of medals paid out is displayed and the display returns to the state shown in Figure 239 (a1).

Figure 239 (a4) shows an example when eight coins have been paid out, with "8" displayed in the first digit. If the range of the number of coins remaining to complete the payout changes as a result of the medal payout, the number corresponding to that range will be displayed in the first digit when it becomes possible to insert medals. In Figure 239 (a), advance notification is not displayed from the time the start lever is operated until the end of play. This is because there is a low probability that players will change between the start of reel rotation and the result of the game being obtained. However, advance notification may also be provided in a visually recognizable manner using other annunciators, etc., even between the time the start lever is operated and the end of play.

Figure 239 (b) is an example of the display when the number of remaining coins to complete is 1 or more and 100 or less, and shows the transition in the display state when the push order navigation is not executed, a replay is won, and a replay is activated. When coins can be inserted, "L1" is displayed according to the range of the number of coins remaining to complete, as shown in Figure 239 (b1).

When the start lever 7 is operated to start the reels spinning, the advance notice is temporarily hidden as shown in Figure 239 (b2), and as push order navigation is not performed either, the hidden state remains even when the reels reach a fixed speed. After that, when all reels stop and play ends (a replay is won and replay is activated), the notice remains hidden as shown in Figure 239 (b4) as no medals are paid out. Furthermore, during replay operation, even if it becomes possible to insert medals, the display does not transition to the state shown in Figure 239 (b1), and the display state shown in Figure 239 (b4) remains until the start lever 7 is operated.

In Figure 239 (b), the advance notification is hidden even when it is possible to insert a medal during replay operation. This is because most gaming machines notify the player of a replay win using effects or LED lamps, etc., so the likelihood of a player changing places while the advance notification is hidden is low, and even if a player does change places, the next player will not be at a disadvantage. However, even during the period when it is possible to insert a medal during replay operation, the advance notification may be made in a visually recognizable manner using another alarm, etc.

Figure 239(c) is an example of the display when the complete function is in standby mode. When the complete function is in standby mode, "L0" is displayed as shown in Figure 239(c) when medals can be inserted after the game has finished (or after the payout has finished in the case of a payout) and before the start lever 7 is operated. Figure 239(d) is an example of the display when the complete function is in operation. When the complete function is in operation, "CP" is displayed as shown in Figure 239(d). Note that while "CP" is used as an example of an identifier indicating that the complete function is in operation, this is not limited to this and any dedicated identifier, such as "Ed", may also be used.

We have explained an example in which various notifications based on CMP_MY are displayed on an LED, but it is possible that the content of the notification may not be understood or grasped from the two-digit 7-segment LED display alone. For this reason, when various notifications based on CMP_MY are displayed on an LED, it is preferable to display an explanatory display explaining the content of the notification on a panel of the gaming machine, such as the waist panel 13. Figure 239(e) is a diagram showing an example of an explanatory display that may be displayed on the waist panel 13. This allows even players with no prior knowledge to understand and grasp the meaning of various notifications based on CMP_MY.

The explanatory display does not need to cover all aspects of the notification content (in Figure 239(e) the explanatory display covers L3 and L2) as long as the meaning and content of the various notifications can be understood and grasped. Also, to reduce the number of characters, the explanatory display may be something like "Meaning of symbols displayed on the PAYOUT display: L5/L4/L3/L2/L1: Less than 500/400/300/200/100 coins remaining until completion. CP: Complete (top off)."

The explanatory display should be written on the panel in a size that allows the player to understand and grasp the content being notified by the LED display, and it is preferable that it be in a format that is always visible to the player regardless of the value of CMP_MY. For example, specifications should be avoided that are too small to be recognized, or that have the lamp turned off so that it is not visible under normal circumstances, but turn on the lamp as soon as the advance notification begins so that it is clearly visible.

In Figure 239, an example was described in which a 7-segment LED controlled by the main control circuit 100 is used to provide various notifications based on CMP_MY, but this is not limited to this. Various notifications based on CMP_MY may also be provided by a 7-segment LED controlled by the sub-control circuit 200, or an LED dedicated to providing various notifications based on CMP_MY may be used.

Figure 240 shows examples of LEDs used to make various notifications based on CMP_MY. The lamps and LEDs controlled by the sub-control circuit 200 include, for example, four-digit seven-segment LEDs used for effects and to notify net increases during advantageous states, and are positioned so that they can be seen by the player.

Figure 240 (a1) shows an example of a display when a four-digit seven-segment LED controlled by the sub-control circuit 200 is used for both, and Figure 240 (a2) shows an example of an explanatory display written on the lower back panel 13. The four-digit seven-segment LED notifies the player of effects and net increases during advantageous states until the advance notification state is reached, and after the advance notification state is reached, it is used as a dedicated alarm that notifies various types of notifications based on CMP_MY. When an advance notification is made using a four-digit seven-segment LED, "L" is displayed in the highest digit (leftmost digit) of the four-digit seven-segment LED, and the number of coins remaining until completion is always displayed in the lowest three digits.

In Figure 240 (a1), "L500" is displayed, indicating that there are "500" coins remaining until completion. The remaining number is updated in increments of one coin. When the remaining number is less than 100, "0" is displayed or hidden in the hundreds digit (for example, if the number is 99, "L099" or "L_99" is displayed), and when the remaining number is less than 10, "0" is displayed or hidden in the hundreds and tens digits (for example, if the number is 9, "L009" or "L__9" is displayed).

Furthermore, while the complete function is activated, the top two digits are hidden and the bottom two digits always display "___CP". While the complete function is in standby mode, any predetermined display state may be used, such as always displaying "L000". It is not limited to always displaying various notifications; for example, various notifications based on CMP_MY may be made when medals can be inserted between the end of play (or the end of payout in the case of a payout) and the operation of the start lever 7, and the original notifications (for example, notifications of effects or net increases during advantageous states) may be made at other times.

Figure 240 (b1) shows an example of a display when a three-digit seven-segment LED is provided as a dedicated LED for various notifications based on CMP_MY, and Figure 240 (b2) shows an example of an explanatory display written on the lower back panel 13. The three-digit seven-segment LED is provided in a position that is visible to the player. When an advance notification is given using the three-digit seven-segment LED, the number of coins remaining until completion is always displayed in those three digits.

In Figure 240 (b1), "500" is displayed, indicating that there are "500" coins remaining until completion. The remaining number is updated in increments of one coin. When the remaining number is less than 100, "0" is displayed or hidden in the hundreds digit (for example, if the number is 99, "099" or "_99" is displayed), and when the remaining number is less than 10, "0" is displayed or hidden in the hundreds and tens digits (for example, if the number is 9, "009" or "___9" is displayed).

In addition, when the complete function is activated, the last two digits will always show "CP." However, when the complete function is in standby mode, any predetermined display state may be used, such as always showing "000."

Figure 240 (c1) shows an example of a display when an alarm consisting of five LEDs is provided as LEDs dedicated to various notifications based on CMP_MY, and Figure 240 (c2) shows an example of an explanatory display written on the lower back panel 13. The alarm consisting of five LEDs is positioned so that it can be seen by the player.

When an advance warning is given using an alarm consisting of five LEDs, it is done by lighting up the LED corresponding to the range of the number of remaining sheets until completion, out of multiple ranges (1-100 sheets, 101-200 sheets, ... 401-500 sheets) divided into predetermined units of 100 sheets. As shown in Figure 240 (c1), five LEDs are arranged horizontally, and from the left they are called the first LED, second LED, third LED, and fourth LED, with the rightmost LED being called the fifth LED. The LEDs that correspond to the range of remaining numbers until completion are as follows: when the number of remaining numbers is 401 to 500, only the first LED lights up; when the number of remaining numbers is 301 to 400, both the first and second LEDs light up; when the number of remaining numbers is 201 to 300, all the first to third LEDs light up; when the number of remaining numbers is 101 to 200, all the first to fourth LEDs light up; and when the number of remaining numbers is 1 to 100, all the first to fifth LEDs light up.

Also, when the complete function is activated, all of the first through fifth LEDs are set to flash. However, when the complete function is in standby mode, any predetermined state can be set, such as only the first and fifth LEDs being lit.

In Figures 239 and 240, an example was explained in which various notifications based on CMP_MY were made using an LED, but as with the explanation in Figure 229, in addition to the notification using the LED, notifications may also be made using sound from a speaker (sound effects + voice, or sound effects only without voice) or by lighting up a lamp. Also, in Figures 239 and 240, of the various notifications based on CMP_MY, notifications in advance, complete function activation standby state, and complete function activation state were explained, but the first and second notifications should also be made in a manner that can be understood and grasped by players and store staff.

In addition, for gaming machines equipped with an image display device such as the main effect display unit 21, various notifications based on CMP_MY must be made on that image display device as shown in Figure 229, etc., and for gaming machines not equipped with an image display device, various notifications based on CMP_MY may be made on an LED. Note that for gaming machines equipped with an image display device such as the main effect display unit 21, if various notifications based on CMP_MY are made on that image display device as shown in Figure 229, etc., they may also be made on an LED as shown in Figures 239 and 240.

In addition, in Figures 239 and 240 (c1), examples have been described in which advance notification is given in units of 100 sheets from the remaining number of sheets of 500, but the unit number is not limited to 100 sheets and may be 50 sheets, 200 sheets, etc., although it is preferable to set a smaller value.
(Other examples and modifications of various notifications based on CMP_MY)
The notification images for various notifications based on CMP_MY shown in FIG. 229 are displayed preferentially (top layer) and continuously, but may be hidden when a predetermined condition is met. The predetermined condition may be, for example, the display of an error notification screen notifying that an error has occurred in the gaming machine, the display of a hall menu screen in response to a setting confirmation operation, or the display of a user menu screen in response to a player's presentation operation. In this case, the notification images for various notifications based on CMP_MY may be displayed again after the error is resolved or the hall menu is completed.

The predetermined condition may also be satisfied by, for example, displaying a two-dimensional code for logging out when a game ends while logged in to an information provision service such as "Unimemo." In relation to this, when a game is controlled to a complete function activation state, which forcibly ends a game while logged in to an information provision service, in addition to the message image shown in FIG. 229(a), a message image such as "Press the CHANCE button to display the two-dimensional code at the end" may be displayed, unlike when a game is logged in to an information provision service. Furthermore, when the CHANCE button is operated while this screen is displayed, the message image notifying that the complete function is activated may be hidden, and the two-dimensional code may be displayed along with a message image such as "Press the CHANCE button to end the display." Furthermore, when the CHANCE button is operated on the screen displaying the two-dimensional code, the original screen may be redisplayed, including the message image notifying that the complete function is activated.

Not only when the complete function is activated, but also when various notifications based on CMP_MY are being made and a two-dimensional code for logging out is displayed, the various notifications based on CMP_MY may be hidden and the two-dimensional code may be displayed, and when the CHANCE button is operated, the various notifications based on CMP_MY may be re-displayed. Furthermore, the screen displaying the two-dimensional code for logging out may also continue to display the various notifications based on CMP_MY, in which case the two-dimensional code may be displayed in priority over (superimposed on) the various notifications based on CMP_MY.

● In an example described above, in a gaming machine that can be controlled to multiple types of bonuses as a bonus device, when CMP_MY reaches 19000 during a bonus, the machine is uniformly controlled to a complete function activation standby state until the end of the bonus, regardless of the type of bonus. However, when CMP_MY reaches 19000 during a bonus, the machine may be immediately controlled to a complete function activation state rather than being uniformly controlled to a complete function activation standby state regardless of the type of bonus. It can be freely determined whether, when CMP_MY reaches 19000 during a bonus, the machine is controlled to a complete function activation standby state until the end of the bonus, or whether it is immediately controlled to a complete function activation state.

Also, when CMP_MY reaches 19000 during a bonus, it may be predetermined whether to control to a complete function activation standby state or to immediately control to a complete function activation state depending on the type of bonus (specifically, when CMP_MY reaches 19000 during a first type of bonus, it may be uniformly determined to control to a complete function activation standby state until the end of the first type of bonus, and when CMP_MY reaches 19000 during a second type of bonus, it may be uniformly determined to immediately control to a complete function activation state without controlling to a complete function activation standby state). This allows for greater flexibility in gaming machine design.

For example, a predetermined bonus with a high degree of advantage (e.g., a bonus that increases the game value while the bonus is active) could be the first type of bonus, and a specific bonus with a low degree of advantage (e.g., one that increases the game value by a smaller amount than the predetermined bonus while active, or one that increases the game value slightly, maintains the current status, or decreases the game value while the bonus is active) could be the second type of bonus. If a bonus that is not very advantageous or disadvantageous even when activated (second type of bonus) is active, the complete function would be activated (triggered) immediately, whereas if a bonus that is highly advantageous to the player (first type of bonus) is active, the complete function would be put into standby mode and the activation of the complete function would wait until the bonus ends.

Note that if the complete function is activated immediately when CMP_MY reaches 19000 during a bonus, the gaming machine will simply stop operating, and activation of the complete function is not included in the conditions for ending the bonus.

● Bonuses include bonuses (for example, Type 1 special devices) whose ending condition is that a specific number of games have been played, and which may end with a replay being selected in the final game and replay being activated. If such a bonus is set to be controlled to a complete function activation standby state when 19,000 is reached, it is possible that a replay will be selected in the final game of the bonus and the bonus will end with replay being activated, making it virtually impossible to replay. This eliminates the need to differentiate processing depending on whether replay is in operation, and allows for uniform control to the complete function activation state when a bonus ends while in a complete function activation standby state, preventing processing from becoming too complicated.

● When controlled to the complete function active state, as shown in SA26 in Figure 231, a security signal is output for a predetermined time (e.g., 30 seconds). Furthermore, if a setting change or the like is made while the security signal is being output and the complete function active state is initialized, the system is configured not to perform processing to output the security signal again after initialization, even if the security signal has not been output for the predetermined time. This is because the output of the security signal makes it possible to identify externally that the system has been controlled to the complete function active state, even if the predetermined time has not been reached. This prevents unnecessary processing, such as outputting the security signal again after initializing the complete function active state, and prevents the processing from becoming complicated.

● The security signal can also be output due to other factors, such as when an error occurs in the gaming machine. Therefore, it is possible that the machine will be controlled to the complete function activation state while the security signal is already being output due to other factors. For example, if medals have been paid out in response to a small win, the count will reach 19,000 and the machine will be controlled to the complete function activation state. If a hopper empty error occurs (at this point, a security signal is output), the door will be opened, medals will be replenished, and the error will be cleared, resulting in the medals being paid out and the machine will be controlled to the complete function activation state. However, since the door is still open at this point, the security signal output will continue, so a situation may arise in which the security signal is already being output when the machine is controlled to the complete function activation state. In this case, as long as the security signal output is guaranteed for a predetermined time (e.g., 30 seconds) after the machine is controlled to the complete function activation state, the security signal may continue to be output in response to the door being open even after the predetermined time has elapsed.

● Figure 231 describes an example in which loop processing is performed from SA26 onwards after a YES judgment is made in SA23 and control is placed into the complete function activation state. However, in the complete function activation state, any processing that disables game progress is sufficient, and processing unrelated to game progress, such as error monitoring processing that monitors for the occurrence of errors or setting confirmation processing that checks settings, is effectively executed. For this reason, if another factor (such as the occurrence of an error) occurs after control is placed into the complete function activation state and a security signal is output for a predetermined time, the security signal will be output. In this case, the security signal will be output until a release condition corresponding to the other factor is met, and so it may be output for more than the predetermined time.

● If the power is cut off and then turned on again while the complete function is activated and a security signal is being output, i) the security signal may be output for the remaining time up to the specified time, ii) the security signal may be output again for the specified time, or iii) no security signal may be output (the timer that counts the specified time may be cleared).

● During a bonus, an external signal is output to notify the outside world of the transition to the bonus state. However, if, for example, when CMP_MY reaches 19000 during a bonus, the system is immediately controlled to the complete function activation state without being controlled to the complete function activation standby state, the output of the external signal during that bonus may be stopped even if the bonus termination conditions are not met. This prevents the gaming machine's power from being cut off due to the external signal being output for a long period of time to notify the outside world of the transition to the bonus state. In contrast, the test signal output during a bonus may be maintained as is even when the system is controlled to the complete function activation state.

● As shown in SA26 in Figure 231, the security signal only needs to be output when the complete function activation flag is FFh in SA22, it is not determined in SA23 that a reel or other device is in operation, and the device is actually controlled to the complete function activation state. It does not need to be output during the complete function activation standby state, when the complete function activation flag is set to FFh but a reel or other device is in operation.

● As shown in Figure 231, the timing for activating the complete function may be any time between the time when the game result is obtained and the time when medals can be inserted. For example, even in a gaming machine that has a waiting time until the next game after the game result is obtained, the timing may be after that waiting time has elapsed, as long as it is within the time when medals can be inserted. Note that the waiting time here may also refer to, for example, the time during which operations are disabled (also known as locked or frozen) after all reels have stopped or after a payout has been completed.

● The volume of the error sound when an error occurs is set to, for example, 85 dB or higher in order to create gaming machines that are resistant to fraud. In contrast, the volume of the complete function activation notification may be lower than 85 dB, but, like the error sound, it may also be set to 85 dB or higher as mentioned above.

● While the timing when CMP_MY reaches 18,500 has been exemplified as the timing when the advance notification starts, it may also be set to, for example, when CMP_MY reaches 18,000, as long as the advance notification is given when CMP_MY reaches 18,500. For example, the first notification described above may be executed as an advance notification that starts when there are 1,000 sheets remaining until completion. In this case, the remaining number (for example, between 1,000 and 501 sheets remaining) may be updated and displayed in the same manner as the advance notification, leading to subsequent advance notifications.

Even if advance notification is initiated before CMP_MY reaches 18,500, it is preferable to output a game interruption signal from IF2 when CMP_MY reaches 18,500.

● Once CMP_MY reaches and is displayed as 18,500, advance notification may continue regardless of the controlled game state or the value of CMP_MY. However, if the power is turned off and on before the complete function is activated, CMP_MY will be initialized and no advance notification will be given. Note that if CMP_MY falls below 18,500, if the same numerical information as when it reached 18,500 is displayed in advance, the continuous change will not be visible. Therefore, it is preferable to update the numerical information according to the value of CMP_MY (for example, displaying the number of remaining coins itself if it is 500 or more, or displaying it in increments of 100 coins (for example, approximately 600 coins remaining, approximately 700 coins remaining, etc.)) and provide an advance notification.

● The main control circuit 100 does not perform control (effect management) such as changing the effect lottery aspect, such as the effect lottery rate or the type of effect to be drawn, based on the value of CMP_MY. For example, it does not perform control such as not generating or lowering the probability of the aforementioned lock effect, reel effect, or pseudo game when the activation of the complete function is approaching. This prevents the value of CMP_MY from affecting the playability of the gaming machine.

The main control circuit 100 may also provide a separate MY counter for effects (a counter updated in the non-standard RAM area of the main RAM 103) from the CMP_MY counter involved in the operation of the complete function, update the MY counter for effects according to the same counting conditions as the CMP_MY counter, and perform control (effect management) such as varying the effect lottery pattern based on the value of the MY counter for effects. For example, when the value of the MY counter for effects reaches 18,000 (effectively the CMP_MY value is also 18,000), the main control circuit 100 may control so that specific effects (lock effects, reel effects, simulated games, etc.) are not executed or their execution probability is reduced. The specific effects that are subject to restrictions may be effects that occur when the value of the effect MY counter reaches 18,000, such as a long freeze with an expected value of 2,000 coins, and the complete function is activated before the player has won 2,000 coins, which could result in the player feeling a sense of loss.

Furthermore, if the specific effect that is the subject of control (effect management) such as changing the effect lottery pattern based on the value of CMP_MY is an effect managed by lottery on the sub-control circuit 200 side, the sub-control circuit 200 may refer to the value determined based on the CMP_MY command output at SA21 in FIG. 231 and control the execution of the specific effect (for example, a large stock notification effect with an expected value of 2000 coins) when the CMP_MY value reaches 18000. In this case, by leaving a certain amount of stock hidden in an unnotified state, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling a sense of loss.

● When a complete function is installed, even in gaming machines (so-called normal types) that are not equipped with an instruction function (AT), it is preferable to be able to output a game interruption signal from IF2 so that gameplay can be interrupted before the complete function is activated during a certification test (test firing test). Furthermore, information used by IF2 to determine whether to output a game interruption signal is output from the main control circuit 100 at the end of each game using control programs and data for the specified area in main ROM 102, but transmission data may also be created using control programs and data for the non-specified area in main ROM 102.

● In SA60 to SA62 of Figure 232, an example was explained in which when CMP_MY becomes less than 18,500 (CMP_MY is 18,499 or less), the advance notification is immediately terminated if the player is not in an advantageous state, and the advance notification is not terminated if the player is in an advantageous state. However, this is not limited to this. When CMP_MY becomes less than 18,500 and the player is not in an advantageous state, the advance notification may be terminated if CMP_MY becomes 18,480 or less, for example, and when the player is in an advantageous state the advance notification may not be terminated, or the advance notification may be terminated if CMP_MY becomes 18,400 or less, which is smaller than 18,480.

In addition, SA60 to SA62 in Figure 232 explain an example in which the timing for ending the advance notification varies depending on whether or not the player is in an advantageous state, but this is not limiting. It is also possible to terminate the advance notification by simply performing SA62 without performing SA61, or by simply performing SA62 when CMP_MY falls below a predetermined number (for example, 18,450).

Furthermore, after CMP_MY reaches 18,500 and an advance warning is initiated, if CMP_MY falls below 18,500 and the advance warning is terminated, and then CMP_MY reaches 18,500 again, an advance warning will be initiated each time using images, LEDs, etc., but audio and sound effects may or may not be output.

For example, if CMP_MY reaches 18,500 and an advance notification is initiated, and then falls below 18,500 and the advance notification ends, and CMP_MY reaches 18,500 again, if CMP_MY falls below a predetermined value (e.g., 18,400) between the end of the advance notification and when it reaches 18,500 again, an advance notification using images, LEDs, etc., along with audio and sound effects, may be initiated. On the other hand, if CMP_MY does not fall below a predetermined value (e.g., 18,400) between the end of the advance notification and when it reaches 18,500 again, an advance notification using images, LEDs, etc. may be initiated, but audio and sound effects may not be output. This prevents players from feeling annoyed by audio and sound effects being output every time CMP_MY temporarily falls below 18,500 and then reaches 18,500 again, even while in an advantageous position.

● When displaying a customer waiting demo movie during an advance notification of the complete function, for example, the advance notification may be erased (hidden) during the customer waiting demo movie, and restored (displayed) when returning to the standby screen after the customer waiting demo movie ends. Furthermore, if there is no operation on the standby screen for a predetermined period of time and the customer waiting demo movie is to be displayed again (the advance notification is hidden), it is preferable that the predetermined period for displaying the standby screen (the period for which the advance notification is displayed) is set longer than the period for displaying the customer waiting demo movie (the period for which the advance notification is hidden). Furthermore, the advance notification may continue during the customer waiting demo movie, but the advance notification may be erased only while, for example, the manufacturer's logo or an anti-addiction display is displayed in the customer waiting demo movie. It is preferable to design the period for which the advance notification is hidden so that the number of coins remaining until completion can be continuously recognized even when players change.

The following describes cases where effect adjustments such as volume adjustment and light intensity adjustment (hereinafter referred to as "volume, etc.") can be made during advance notification. Volume, etc. can be adjusted by selecting the appropriate item from the menu screen, or by operating the directional pad or left/right keys. When adjusting volume, etc., it is preferable to play a sample sound indicating the volume level or display an image indicating the volume level (hereinafter referred to as "volume, etc." display).

For example, the following five types of display formats for the volume, etc. display are possible: Type 1: The volume, etc. display is overlaid (superimposed) on the current screen display Type 2: Switches to a screen dedicated to adjusting volume, etc. Type 3: Displayed on a sub-screen (sub-LCD, etc.) Type 4: No image showing volume, etc. is displayed Type 5: Volume, etc. values are displayed on a 7-segment display on non-LCD devices with no screen First, in the Type 1 specifications, the advance notification may continue even while the volume, etc. is being adjusted, and the volume, etc. display may be displayed in a position that does not superimpose on the advance notification image, or the advance notification image and the volume, etc. display may be displayed in a manner that superimposes at least a portion of them. Additionally, the advance notification display may be temporarily suspended while the volume, etc. is being adjusted.

In Type 2 specifications, advance notifications may not be displayed on the dedicated screen for adjusting volume, etc. This is because players who adjust volume, etc. generally intend to continue playing. However, advance notifications may also be displayed on the dedicated screen for adjusting volume, etc. In this case, as with Type 1 above, the advance notification image and the volume, etc. display do not need to be superimposed, or they may be at least partially superimposed, and advance notifications may be suspended while adjusting volume, etc.

In the Type 3 specification, when an advance notification is displayed on the main screen (such as the main performance display unit 21), the advance notification does not affect the layout of the sub-screen (such as the sub-display unit 220), so the volume and other information can be displayed on the sub-screen in the same manner as before the advance notification. If an advance notification is displayed on the sub-screen, the volume and other information display can be either not superimposed on the advance notification, partially superimposed, or the advance notification can be temporarily suspended while the volume and other information display is displayed, as in Type 1.

With Type 4, the volume after adjustment is determined from the sample sound output, and the light intensity after adjustment is determined from the way the light-emitting means lights up. This makes it a little less user-friendly than Types 1 to 3, but it also has the advantage of eliminating layout issues.

Type 5 specifications do not have a screen to begin with, so there are no problems with image layout. However, if the 7-segment display showing values such as volume is also used for advance warnings, it is preferable to temporarily suspend advance warnings and display the volume value when adjusting the volume, etc. During advance warnings, it is also possible to maintain the display of advance warnings without displaying the values showing volume, etc.

● Figure 237 (d) describes an example in which the advance notification message image is displayed in an area that does not overlap with predetermined advantage-related information including push order navigation, etc. However, this is not limited to this, and the advance notification message image may also be displayed in an area that can overlap with predetermined advantage-related information including push order navigation, etc. In this case, for example, the advance notification message image may be displayed in priority over the push order navigation, or the push order navigation may be displayed in priority over the advance notification message image as long as it allows the player to continuously recognize the number of coins remaining until completion even when the player changes.

In addition, Figure 238 (d) describes an example in which the advance notification message image is displayed in priority over the specific effects, but the specific effects may be displayed in priority over the advance notification message image as long as the player can continue to see the number of coins remaining until completion even when the player changes.

● When the value of the complete function activation flag is initialized by a setting change, an image message such as "The complete function has been deactivated" may be displayed on the main display unit 21, etc. Furthermore, a sound message saying "The complete function has been deactivated" may also be output along with the image message. In contrast, when the power is turned on, an image message such as "The counter for activation of the complete function (CMP_MY counter) has been cleared" may not be displayed. This provides a clear notification that the complete function has been deactivated, reassuring the operator, while not clearly notifying the initialization of the CMP_MY counter minimizes the risk of encouraging the machine to be operated beyond the standard increase number for the same business day by turning the power off and on again.

● Main RAM 103 has areas that are used during bonuses and advantageous periods, but the activation of the complete function does not trigger processing to clear the areas used during those bonuses or advantageous periods.

● The error processing control program and data shown in Figure 231 have been described as being stored in a specified area of the main ROM 102 (an area that is different from areas such as the program area, data area, and non-specified area). However, the process of determining whether a special feature is in operation in SA23 may use the control program and data stored in a non-specified area of the main ROM 102.

Furthermore, while the error processing shown in Figure 231 has been described as being executed by the main control circuit 100, it is not limited to this and may also be executed by, for example, a medal count control circuit. In this case, the CMP_MY counter update process may use the control program and data stored in the non-standard area.

(others)
A similar advance notification may also be provided for the payout number limiter. For example, when the payout number limiter counter reaches a specific number (e.g., 2,300 coins), a message such as "100 coins remaining until the payout number limiter is activated" may be displayed on the effect display unit to provide advance notification that the payout number limiter is about to be activated. Furthermore, if both the complete function and the payout number limiter are installed, advance notifications may be provided for both. For example, when the MY counter reaches a specific number (e.g., 18,500 coins) and the payout number limiter counter reaches a specific number (e.g., 2,300 coins), a message such as "500 coins remaining until the complete function is activated" and "100 coins remaining until the payout number limiter is activated" may be displayed on the effect display unit.

In this case, if play continues as is, the payout limiter will be activated first, ending the AT state. However, because the MY counter is not initialized (cleared) by the activation of the payout limiter, the situation where there are 400 coins remaining until the complete function is activated will continue. Therefore, in such a case, the display such as "100 coins remaining until the payout limiter is activated" will be terminated, but the display such as "400 coins remaining until the complete function is activated" will continue. In this case, as described above, the advance notification may be terminated when the value of the MY counter falls below 18,500 coins (or, if the condition for terminating the advance notification is different from the condition for starting the advance notification, when the number of coins reaches the condition for terminating the advance notification), or, once the advance notification has been initiated, it may be continued until the complete function is activated.

However, there are situations where it is confirmed that the complete function will be activated before the payout limiter is activated, such as when there are 50 medals remaining until the complete function is activated and 100 medals remaining until the payout limiter is activated. Here, assuming that an increase in medals equivalent to at least 50 medals is confirmed in the AT state, both the number of medals acquired that serves as a pre-notification condition for the complete function to be activated (for example, 18,500 or more medals starting from the lowest point since power-on) and the number of medals acquired that serves as a pre-notification condition for the payout limiter to be activated (for example, 2,300 or more medals starting from the start of the advantageous zone) are met. In such situations, it is possible to configure the display to display both a pre-notification of the complete function to be activated and a pre-notification of the payout limiter to be activated. This has the effect of allowing the player to accurately grasp the situation.

In addition, in such a situation, since the complete function will be activated first and the payout limiter will not be activated, it is possible to only provide an advance notification of the complete function activation, without providing an advance notification of the payout limiter activation. Information about limiters that will not be activated is not necessarily information that the player needs, and considering that notifications such as push order navigation are frequently provided, especially in AT mode, it can be said that not increasing the number of displayed items too much will allow the player to enjoy the AT mode more comfortably. In other words, this has the effect of preventing information overload. Note that in machines without the effect display unit described below, in situations where both an advance notification of the complete function activation and an advance notification of the payout limiter activation can be displayed, information about limiters that will not be activated may be hidden.

(When performing advance notification of the complete function activation and the payout number limiter activation on a machine without a performance display unit)
As mentioned above, when both the complete function and the payout limiter are installed, a gaming machine that has an effect display unit (e.g., a liquid crystal display device, etc.) can be configured to display both (i) an advance notification of the activation of the complete function and (ii) an advance notification of the activation of the payout limiter on its display screen.

Here, when a machine without a display effect unit is equipped with a complete function, the means for providing advance notification (a) has been described above. However, since machines without a display effect unit may also be equipped with both a complete function and a payout limiter, in such cases it is considered necessary to provide further advance notification (b). An example of such a method is explained below. Note that, as above, advance notification using the following method may also be provided for gaming machines equipped with a display effect unit.

First, even in a machine that does not have a display effect unit, if it has, for example, a first display unit (a 7-segment LED with approximately 2 to 4 digits) and a different second display unit (a 7-segment LED with approximately 2 to 4 digits), and each is capable of displaying an advance notification, it is possible to simultaneously display (A) and (B), for example, by displaying the advance notification for (A) on the first display unit and the advance notification for (B) on the second display unit. Note that the first display unit and the second display unit can each be, for example, any of the display means described above. In this case, the identifiers and display formats can be different, as described below.

On the other hand, in machines that do not have a display effect unit, if there are multiple display units but only one display unit that can be used for advance notifications, or if there is only one display unit, and both the advance notification conditions for the complete function activation and the advance notification conditions for the payout number limiter activation are met, it will be necessary to devise a way to determine whether (A) or (B) should be displayed and how.

When displaying one of the two, for example, as described above, it is possible to configure the advance notification to be given priority over the one that activates first. In other words, if the complete function activates before the payout number limiter, advance notification (a) may be displayed, and if the payout number limiter activates before the complete function, advance notification (b) may be displayed. This has the effect of displaying more appropriate information.

Also, for example, the display content may be switched from (A) to (B) and from (B) to (A) every predetermined time (e.g., 10 seconds), allowing the player to naturally see both displays without any operation. The switching may occur only while the game is in standby mode (e.g., from the end of payout until the next game start operation), or during gameplay (e.g., from the start operation until the end of payout), or both. Also, since players may change during game standby mode, the display of (A) may be given priority over the display of (B) while the game is in standby mode ((B) is not displayed), and the display of (B) may be given priority over the display of (A) while the game is in progress ((A) is not displayed). Or the opposite may also be true. Alternatively, during either period, both (A) and (B) may be displayed by switching as described above.

Also, for example, the display of (A) and (B) may be switched based on the player's switching operation rather than the passage of time. In this case, if the display unit is controlled by the main side, the display may be switched based on an operation on any operating means that does not affect the progress of the game, such as a bet operation during play (for example, pressing the MAX BET button 6a).

Furthermore, if the display unit is controlled by the sub-side, the display may be switched based on, for example, an operation on an operation unit for effects (for example, an operation button for effects). However, in the case of gaming machines that do not have an operation unit for effects, the display may be switched (when the sub-side receives information corresponding to an operation on an operation means that can be detected on the main side (for example, a bet operation during play, a start operation while the reels are spinning, or a stop operation after the reels have stopped; an operation that does not affect the progress of the game).

Note that operations that can switch the display are not limited to operations that do not affect the progress of the game. The display may also be switched based on operations that affect the progress of the game (for example, a bet operation when no bet has been placed, a start operation before the reels are spun, or a stop operation before the reels are stopped). In other words, the display may be switched by an operation that does not affect the progress of the game, allowing the player to switch the display at any time, or the display may be switched by an operation that affects the progress of the game, allowing the display to be switched without requiring a separate operation. Either approach has the effect of increasing convenience.

As another notification mode, for example, the advance notification (a) may be made on the display unit, while the advance notification (b) may be made by sounding a voice from a speaker, such as "500 more sheets until the limiter activates" or "Only a few more sheets until the limiter activates." Or the reverse may be possible. Alternatively, as described above, the prioritized advance notification may be made on the display unit, and the non-priority advance notification may be made on the speaker. Furthermore, when advance notification is made by a speaker, a lamp may be used instead of or in addition to the speaker. This has the effect of providing more information even with only one display unit that can be used for advance notification. The same applies when the content of the advance notification is switchable.

It is also possible to display different identifiers for the advance notification (a) and the advance notification (b). This has the effect of making it easier to understand which advance notification is being issued. For example, in the advance notification (a), if there are 500 coins remaining until the complete function is activated, "L500" is displayed. On the other hand, in the advance notification (b), if there are 500 coins remaining until the payout limiter is activated, "H500" is displayed. In other words, the "L" or "H" displayed in the leading digit of the 7-segment LED serves as an identifier, making it possible to recognize that these are different advance notifications even when the same number of coins remaining is displayed. Note that these identifiers are merely examples. For example, any letters, numbers, symbols, dot patterns, etc. can be used as identifiers as long as they can be displayed on a 7-segment LED and the display format makes it possible to recognize that different advance notifications are being issued.

Also, if there is room for the number of digits, an identifier consisting of two or more digits can be used. For example, identifiers such as "LM" or "SHL" may be used. However, when using a single-digit identifier, it is desirable to avoid using identifiers such as "E" which can easily be mistaken for an error notification, "S" which cannot be distinguished from a number in the segment display (which is the same as "5" in the segment display), or "O" (which is the same as "0" in the segment).

The advance warnings (a) and (b) may be displayed in different display modes (here, for example, colors). This has the effect of making it easier to see which advance warning is being given. For example, if the segment display can be displayed in multiple colors, the advance warnings (a) may be displayed in red, and the advance warnings (b) may be displayed in blue. Note that the above-mentioned method of differentiating the identifiers and the method of differentiating the display modes may be combined, or only one of the methods may be used. For example, the display modes may be different, with one being lit and the other flashing (or in different patterns).

When the advance notification (a) and the advance notification (b) can be displayed with different identifiers or display formats (including when only one of the advance notifications is given and the identifier or display format is specific), the configuration may allow the player to confirm how to interpret the advance notification display. For example, in the case of the advance notification (a), an explanation such as "'L000' indicates the number of coins remaining until the complete function is activated" may be displayed at any position on the surface of the front door (for example, on the base or part of the lower panel 13). This has the effect of making the content of the advance notification easier to understand.

Gaming machines that can provide any of the advance warnings described above have the advantage of being able to prevent unexpected losses from occurring due to a sudden stoppage of play, for example, after play has started.

(When various notifications based on CMP_MY are made on pachinko machines)
Although an example of making various notifications based on CMP_MY in a pachislot machine has been described, various notifications based on MY may also be made in the pachinko machine described above, and technical matters related to the various notifications (for example, the technical matters described with reference to Figures 229 to 240) may be applied. The complete function in a pachinko machine is a function that sets the point at which the number of game balls has decreased the most when the game results are obtained during a predetermined period from when the power is turned on as the reference, and when the increase in the number of game balls from this reference (the cumulative number from the base point, the "reference value counter") reaches an upper limit, the complete function is activated and control is made to a complete function activation state in which game progress is disabled.

When the complete function is activated, the so-called starting port, operating port, and gate are disabled, and the big prize port and electric chute are closed. The control for launching game balls may or may not be disabled. Furthermore, if there are game balls to be paid out, they will continue to be paid out even while the complete function is activated. An example of the upper limit number is 95,000, but it is not limited to 95,000 as long as it is a predetermined value.

When the complete function is activated on a pachinko machine, regardless of whether the controlled game state is a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot game state, a small jackpot game state, a probability variable game state, a time-saving game state, etc.) or a predetermined state (e.g., a normal state) (e.g., regardless of whether the game would have been controlled to a probability variable game state or a normal state after the jackpot game state ended), the player and the gaming parlor are notified that they cannot continue playing. When the complete function is activated on a pachinko machine, for example, an image display device that displays changing symbols may display a message such as "Complete function activated. The daily payout limit has been reached. Play ends for today." Furthermore, when the complete function is activated on a pachinko machine, a predetermined sound effect or voice is output from the speaker for a certain period of time (e.g., 10 seconds) or more, and an illuminated LED (frame lamp) or the like is illuminated in a predetermined manner. This notifies the player that the pachinko machine has been controlled to the complete function activated state.

Furthermore, when a pachinko machine is controlled to enter the complete function activation state, processing is performed to output a security signal as an external signal for a certain period of time (e.g., 30 seconds). If the pachinko machine is a smart pachinko machine, in addition to outputting the security signal, a complete signal is output for a certain period of time (e.g., 30 seconds) to, for example, an amusement value providing device. The complete function activation state may be initialized by either a RAM clear that involves a setting change or a RAM clear that does not involve a setting change, or by either RAM clear.

In addition, even if the reference value counter reaches 95,000, if a so-called special electric device or conditional device (for example, a big win game state or a small win game state) is in operation, the system will be controlled to a complete function activation standby state, which puts the complete function on hold until the end of operation, and will then be controlled to the complete function activation state when the operation ends. Once controlled to the complete function activation standby state, the system will be controlled to the complete function activation state when the operation ends, regardless of the value of the reference value counter thereafter (even if it temporarily falls below 95,000). Note that if the reference value counter reaches 95,000, the system may be immediately controlled to the complete function activation state even if a special electric device or other device is in operation.

While a pachinko machine is in a complete function activation standby state, regardless of whether the controlled game state is a favorable state (e.g., a probability variation game state) or a predetermined state (e.g., a standard state), a message image such as "The complete function will be activated after a win ends" is displayed on an effect display device that displays varying decorative symbols. Note that the message image displayed during the complete function activation standby state is not limited to this, and may include, for example, an image such as "Complete counter 95000/95000," an image such as "The complete function will be activated soon," an image such as "The complete function is about to activate!!," or an image such as "You are in a jackpot. Please continue playing. The complete function will be activated after a win ends. If activated, today's play will end." Furthermore, while a pachinko machine is in a complete function activation standby state, a predetermined sound effect or voice may be output from the speaker for a certain period of time (e.g., 10 seconds) or more, and an illuminated LED (frame lamp) or the like may be illuminated in a predetermined manner. This notifies the user that the pachinko machine has been controlled to a complete function activation standby state.

The reference value counter (MY) in a pachinko machine is the value obtained by subtracting the number of outs (number of game balls fired) from the number of safes (number of game balls paid out). In other words, it is updated by subtracting the number of outs from the current reference value counter value and adding the number of safes. If the reference value counter is 0, it will not be subtracted even if there is an out. The value of the reference value counter is initialized (set to 0) only when the power is turned on. This makes it possible to determine the cumulative number (increase) from the lowest cumulative number obtained by accumulating the difference numbers over a specified period of time since power was turned on, using the value of the reference value counter as the base point. Note that the value of the reference value counter may not be initialized when a specific condition is met, even when power is turned on. A specific condition may be met, for example, when power is restored after an error occurs or by operating a specific control unit.

Information regarding the value of the reference value counter in a pachinko machine can be displayed on a specified display unit when a notification condition is met by a specific operation (such as a setting confirmation operation). The reference value counter in a pachinko machine corresponds to the CMP_MY counter in a pachislot machine, and various notifications are made based on this value.

In the case of pachinko machines, if the number actually paid out (actual payout) were used as the safe number for counting, there is a possibility that the timing of stopping play due to completion would be delayed. Therefore, the reference value counter update process is performed in the main control circuit rather than the payout control circuit, and the number of planned prize balls is used as the safe number. On the other hand, in the case of smart pachinko machines, the reference value counter update process can be performed in either the main control circuit or the payout control circuit, and if performed in the payout control circuit, "planned number of prize balls = actual payout". The reference value counter can be decremented when an out is detected, or when a launch is detected. Note that when the reference value counter is decremented when a launch is detected, returning balls are added to prevent discrepancies from occurring with the actual difference number.

In addition, when the reference value counter reaches 75,000, a complete function pre-activation signal is output as a test signal, regardless of whether the controlled game state is advantageous or a predetermined state. This prevents the complete function from activating during type testing, making it impossible to continue the test.

In addition, in pachinko machines, when the reference value counter reaches 90,000, the game state being controlled at that time is controlled to the pre-alert state, regardless of whether it is an advantageous state or a predetermined state. The reference value counter value for controlling the game state to the pre-alert state is 90,000 in this example, but it is not limited to 90,000, and may be any value that is smaller than the upper limit of 95,000 and is uniformly determined in advance, such as 85,000.

During the advance notification state of a pachinko machine, regardless of whether the controlled game state is a favorable state or a predetermined state, a message image such as "Approximately 5,000 shots remaining until the complete function is activated" is displayed on the effect display device, etc. Note that the message image displayed during the advance notification state is not limited to this, and may also be an image such as "Complete counter 90012/95,000" where the upper limit number is the denominator and the current reference value counter value is the numerator (however, even if the reference value counter value exceeds 95,000, the numerator will not exceed 95,000 on the display), or an image where the remaining number changes in predetermined units (e.g., in units of 500 or 1,000) (for example, when it reaches 90,000, it displays "Approximately 5,000 shots remaining until the complete function is activated," and when it reaches 89,500, it displays "Approximately 4,500 shots remaining until the complete function is activated"). It may also be an image that displays the range to which the remaining number belongs within a range divided into predetermined units (for example, in units of 500 or 1000) (for example, an image that displays "Approximately 4001 to 5000 units remaining until the complete function is activated" when it reaches 90,000, and then "Approximately 3001 to 4000 units remaining until the complete function is activated" when it reaches 89,000), or an image in which the meter memory increases each time the remaining number decreases by a predetermined unit (for example, in units of 500 or 1000).

In addition, when a pachinko machine is in the advance warning state, a predetermined sound effect or voice may be output from the speaker for a certain period of time (e.g., 10 seconds) or more, and an LED (frame lamp) or the like may be illuminated in a predetermined manner. This notifies the user that the pachinko machine has been controlled to the advance warning state. In addition, when a pachinko machine is controlled to the advance warning state, a predetermined test signal or security signal may be output.

Pachinko machines may also be configured as follows: When the reference value counter reaches the upper limit of 95,000, a notification is issued that the complete function is activated or the complete function is in standby mode, disabling game progress, regardless of whether the controlled game state is advantageous or a predetermined state. Furthermore, when the reference value counter reaches 90,000, a predetermined number smaller than the upper limit, a prior notification is issued that displays the number of remaining balls up to 95,000 or a message image or the like corresponding to the remaining number, regardless of whether the controlled game state is advantageous or a predetermined state.

Furthermore, similar to SA49-SA51 and SA63-SA65 in FIG. 232, when the value of the reference value counter reaches a specific number that is smaller than the upper limit but different from the predetermined number, such as 85,000 or 92,500, a notification different from the message image displayed when the predetermined number of 90,000 is reached (see, for example, the first notification or the second notification) may be issued. In this case, the first notification or the second notification may be issued on the condition that the controlled game state is in an advantageous state when the specific number of 85,000 or 92,500 is reached.

Furthermore, when the value of the reference value counter reaches a specific number of 85,000 and the first notification is issued, but has not yet reached the predetermined number of 90,000 and an advance notification has not been issued, if it is determined that a predetermined time (e.g., 2:00 a.m.) has passed based on date and time information from a timing circuit that keeps track of the date and time, the first notification may be terminated regardless of the value of the reference value counter or whether the controlled game state is an advantageous state or a predetermined state. In other words, when the first notification is being executed when the predetermined time (e.g., 2:00 a.m.) has passed, processing may be performed to terminate the first notification. In contrast, with regard to an advance notification, processing is not performed to terminate the advance notification when the predetermined time (e.g., 2:00 a.m.) has passed.

In addition, in pachinko machines, for example, the net increase counted during a specific period (a series of advantageous states) in which advantageous states occur in succession, such as during a jackpot game state, or when a game is switched to a jackpot game state and then switched to a special game state or a time-limited game state after being switched to the jackpot game state, and then switched back to the jackpot game state, is reported (e.g., displaying "TOTAL: 2300"), and even during the advance notification state, information corresponding to the number remaining until the complete function is activated based on the value of the reference value counter is reported. With regard to these notifications, pachinko machines may also update and display the remaining number in the advance notification in a first manner, and update and display the net increase during the specific period in a second manner different from the first manner. For example, the first mode of advance notification may be to change the remaining number in units of 1000, while the second mode during the specified period may display the counted net increase itself, or change the net increase in units of 100; conversely, the first mode of advance notification may be to display the remaining number until completion based on the value of the reference value counter, or change the remaining number in units of 100, while the second mode during the specified period may change the net increase in units of 1000.

Furthermore, among the various effects executed by the effect display device, for example, with regard to specific effects (including premium effects) that notify players of a high probability of winning a jackpot, when the net increase number for the aforementioned specific period (series of advantageous conditions) is displayed and the specific effect is executed, control may be performed to suspend the display of the net increase number or to reduce the visibility of the net increase number image, while the remaining number in the advance notification may be displayed while maintaining the display mode of the remaining number image even when the specific effect is executed.

Also, even after the reference value counter reaches the predetermined number of 90,000 and an advance notification is initiated, the advance notification may be terminated when a display termination condition is met, which can be met when the reference value counter value falls below the predetermined number as the game progresses. In this case, the display termination condition differs depending on the game state being controlled. For example, the display termination condition in a predetermined state is met when the reference value counter value reaches a predetermined number less than the predetermined number (e.g., 89,999, 89,000, etc.). On the other hand, the display termination condition in an advantageous state may be configured not to be met even when the reference value counter value reaches the predetermined number (e.g., 89,999, 89,000, etc.). For example, the display termination condition may not be met regardless of the reference value counter value, or may be met when the reference value counter reaches a number smaller than the predetermined number (e.g., 89,999, 89,000, etc.) (e.g., 88,000, etc.).

[Summary of inventions relating to gaming machines using specifications of the complete function (Appendix)]
As explained above, a gaming machine using the complete function specification can be provided with the following configuration.

In conventional gaming machines, if a certain condition is met during a jackpot such as a big bonus, the machine will enter a stop state where no further operation is accepted, and further play will be restricted (see, for example, JP 2004-147874 A).

However, with these gaming machines, there is a risk that players may become frustrated when they are suddenly unable to play, or that players who are unaware that their gaming machine has reached a limit may mistakenly believe that the gaming machine is broken. Furthermore, it is difficult for gaming parlor staff to grasp that the limit is approaching, and this can lead to players being unable to provide adequate support to players who have reached a limit.

The present invention was made in light of these issues, and aims to provide a gaming machine that is user-friendly for both players and gaming parlors.

To achieve the above objective, this embodiment provides a gaming machine with the following configuration.

(1) In a gaming machine (e.g., a slot machine, a pachinko machine, a medal-less gaming machine, etc.) in which a game is played by consuming game value (e.g., medals, game balls, credits, benefits, etc.) and game value can be awarded according to the progress of the game,
A cumulative number specifying means (e.g., SA03 to SA05 in FIG. 230, CMP_MY counter, reference value counter, etc.) for specifying a cumulative number obtained by adding up the difference between the game value consumed (e.g., medals used for betting, game balls fired, etc.) and the game value awarded (e.g., medals, game balls paid out, etc.);
A game disabling means that disables the progress of the game when the lowest value of the cumulative number in a predetermined period (for example, the period from when the power is turned on) is used as a base point and the cumulative number from that base point reaches an upper limit number (for example, 19,000 for a pachislot machine, 95,000 for a pachinko machine, etc.) (for example, disabling the operation and detection required to progress the game, disabling the start port, operation port, gate, etc., closing the big prize port, electric chute, etc.);
a state control means (for example, a process for controlling the game state by a main control circuit) capable of controlling the game state to one of a plurality of states including a predetermined state (for example, a normal state) in which the game value consumed is greater than the game value awarded while being controlled, and an advantageous state (for example, a pachislot machine: a state in which a player can increase medals, such as an AT or bonus, a pachinko machine: a big win game state, a small win game state, a probability variable game state, a time-saving game state, etc.) in which the game state can be controlled to one of a plurality of states including a predetermined state (for example, a normal state) in which the game value consumed is greater than the game value awarded while being controlled, and an advantageous state in which the game value awarded is greater than the game value consumed while being controlled (for example, a pachislot machine: a state in which a player can increase medals, such as an AT or bonus, a pachinko machine: a big win game state, a small win game state, a probability variable game state, a time-saving game state, etc.);
a disabling notification means (for example, SA24 and SA28 in Fig. 229(a), Fig. 229(b), and Fig. 231, SA41 to SA44 in Fig. 232, etc.) that notifies the player that the progress of the game will be disabled by the game disabling means when the cumulative number from the base point reaches the upper limit number regardless of whether the game is controlled to the predetermined state or the advantageous state by the state control means;
Regardless of whether the state control means controls the machine to the predetermined state or the advantageous state, the machine is provided with an advance notification means (for example, Figures 229(c), 229(d), 239, 240, SA21 in Figure 231, SA45 to SA48 in Figure 232, etc.) that can issue an advance notification that enables identification of numerical information corresponding to the number remaining up to the upper limit number when the cumulative number from the base point reaches a predetermined number that is smaller than the upper limit number (for example, 18,500 for pachislot machines, 90,000 for pachinko machines, etc.).

With this configuration, regardless of the controlled game state, numerical information is displayed according to the number of balls remaining until game progress is disabled, allowing both the player and the store staff to understand. This allows the player's frustration to be spread out over the period of time during which advance notification is being given, rather than when game progress is suddenly disabled, and also prevents the player from misunderstanding that the gaming machine has broken down. Furthermore, since store staff can consider support arrangements in advance based on the number of balls remaining, it is possible to increase the support available to players who were playing on a gaming machine whose game progress has been disabled.

(2) In the gaming machine of (1) above,
The device is provided with specific notification means (e.g., SA49 to SA51, SA63 to SA65 in FIG. 232) that can notify specific information (e.g., first notification, second notification, etc.) different from the numerical information when the cumulative number from the base point reaches a specific number that is smaller than the upper limit number and different from the predetermined number (e.g., pachislot machine: 18,000, 18,750; pachinko machine: 85,000, 92,500, etc.).

This configuration makes it possible to minimize situations where support cannot be provided to players playing on a gaming machine whose progress has been disabled due to a store employee missing or forgetting to notify them of the advance warning, or due to a lack of cooperation and coordination between store employees, due to the large number of gaming machines installed in the gaming store.

(3) In the gaming machine of (2) above,
When the cumulative number from the base point reaches the specific number, the specific notification means can notify the specific information, provided that the advantageous state is being controlled (for example, SA50, SA64 in Figure 232).

This configuration allows for efficient notification of specific information, focusing on times when the cumulative number from the base point is likely to continue to increase.

(4) In the gaming machine of (2) or (3) above,
It is equipped with a signal output means (for example, SA08 to SA10 in Figure 230, SA29 to SA31 in Figure 231, etc.) that can output a game interruption signal to the outside when the cumulative number from the base point reaches the predetermined number, not when it reaches the specific number.

With this configuration, it is possible to externally determine whether the cumulative total from the base point has reached a predetermined number. As a result, for example, if a game interruption signal is output as a test signal, it is possible to notify the user that the time when game progress will be disabled is approaching, even during a test firing test, and to temporarily suspend gameplay before it is disabled. This prevents game progress from actually being disabled and the need to cancel (initialize) the disablement.

(5) In the gaming machine described in (2) or (3) above,
A timekeeping unit (e.g., a sub-RTC) is provided to measure the date and time;
The specific notification means terminates the notification of the specific information when a specific condition is met based on the date and time measured by the clock means while the specific information is being notified (for example, a process of terminating the first notification when 2:00 a.m. has passed while the power is still on),
When the advance notification means is making the advance notification, it continues to make the advance notification even when the specific condition is met based on the date and time measured by the timing means (for example, a process of continuing the advance notification even after 2:00 a.m. while the power is still on).

With this configuration, even if the cumulative number from the base point is not initialized, when a specific condition is met based on the clocked date and time, the notification of specific information is terminated, while advance notification continues. This prevents the notification of specific information from making players feel unnecessarily cautious and reducing the operating rate of the gaming machine, while continuing advance notification when it is being given to reliably notify players that they are imminently about to be unable to continue playing, thereby preventing the player from suffering any disadvantages.

(6) In the gaming machine of (1) above,
A specific period cumulative number display means (for example, a process for displaying TOTAL in FIG. 237(a)) is provided that can display a specific period cumulative number image that notifies the cumulative number in a specific period (for example, a bonus, AT, a series of periods including a bonus and AT, etc.) after the advantageous state is established,
the advance notification means is capable of displaying, as the numerical information, a remaining number image notifying the number of remaining balls up to the upper limit number, and updating and displaying the remaining number image in a first manner according to the progress of the game;
The specific period cumulative number display means updates and displays the specific period cumulative number image in a second mode different from the first mode according to the progress of the game (for example, Figure 237 (d), Figures 238 (a) to (c), etc.).

With this configuration, the remaining number image and the specific period cumulative number image are both cumulative numbers that are updated according to the progress and results of the game, but by using different update display formats, it is easier to distinguish between the two and it is possible to prevent confusion for players.

(7) In the gaming machine of (6) above,
A specific effect execution means (for example, a process for executing a specific effect) is provided, which is capable of executing a specific effect according to the progress of a game;
The specific period cumulative number display means performs control to suspend the display of the specific period cumulative number image or to reduce the visibility of the specific period cumulative number image when the specific performance is executed, while the advance notification means displays the remaining number image while maintaining the display mode even when the specific performance is executed (for example, Figure 238 (d), Figure 238 (e), etc.).

With this configuration, when a specific effect is executed, control is performed to suspend the display of the specific period cumulative number image or to reduce the visibility of the specific period cumulative number image, making the specific effect as visible to the player as possible, while maintaining the display mode of the remaining number image. This minimizes irritation to the player compared to systems that hide the remaining number image, etc.

(8) In the gaming machine of (1) above,
The advance notification means terminates the advance notification when a display termination condition is met, which may be met when the cumulative number from the base point becomes less than the predetermined number, even after the advance notification has started when the cumulative number from the base point reaches the predetermined number (for example, SA62 in FIG. 232 ),
The display termination condition when in the specified state is met when the cumulative number from the base point becomes a predetermined number less than the specified number, while the display termination condition when in the advantageous state is not met even if the cumulative number from the base point becomes the predetermined number (for example, SA61 in Figure 232).

With this configuration, if the cumulative count from the base point falls below a predetermined number, and the controlled game state is advantageous, the advance notification continues, indicating that the count has temporarily fallen below the predetermined number. However, if the game state is in a predetermined state, the advance notification can be terminated when the cumulative count reaches a predetermined number below the predetermined number, indicating that the count is unlikely to reach the predetermined number again. As a result, it is possible to prevent, as much as possible, the advance notification from resuming immediately after the advance notification has ended because the predetermined number has been reached, or the advance notification from continuing indefinitely despite the cumulative count from the base point decreasing and the remaining number up to the upper limit tending to increase.

(9) In the gaming machine of (1) above,
A favorable zone control means (e.g., a process for controlling to a favorable zone) is provided, which controls to a favorable zone when a start condition is satisfied, and ends the favorable zone when the cumulative number in the favorable zone (e.g., a favorable zone payout counter) reaches the zone upper limit number,
The cumulative number from the base point during the specified period is initialized when the power is turned on after being cut off if certain conditions are not met, but is not initialized when the certain conditions are met (for example, the CMP_MY counter is not initialized when predetermined conditions are met, such as when an error other than a RAM abnormality occurs or when a specific operation unit is operated), whereas the cumulative number during the favorable zone is not initialized even if the certain conditions are not met simply by turning the power on after being cut off (for example, the favorable zone payout number counter is not initialized simply by turning the power on after being cut off).

With this configuration, the cumulative number from the base point over a specified period can be initialized or not depending on whether a specific condition is met, even when the power is turned on, thereby improving convenience. In contrast, the cumulative number in an advantageous zone is not initialized simply by turning on the power, not only when a specific condition is met, but also when the specific condition is not met. This allows for the appropriate suppression of gambling within an advantageous zone by ensuring a balance with the upper limit on the number of games in the advantageous zone without complicating processing.

(10) In the gaming machine of (9) above,
The specific condition includes a condition that is met when an error occurs when the power is cut off.

With this configuration, even in situations where it would be preferable to shut off and then power on the device when an error occurs and clear the error, the power can be turned on without initializing the cumulative count from the base point over a specified period, thereby improving convenience.

(11) In the gaming machine of (1),
The system is provided with a favorable zone control means (e.g., a process for controlling to a favorable zone) that controls to a favorable zone when a start condition is satisfied, and ends the favorable zone when the cumulative number in the favorable zone (e.g., a favorable zone payout counter) reaches the zone upper limit number,
Information regarding the cumulative number from the base point during the specified period can be reported regardless of whether the specified number has been reached or not if the reporting conditions are met, while information regarding the cumulative number in the favorable zone cannot be reported even when the reporting conditions are met (for example, information regarding the value of the CMP_MY counter can be reported by performing a specific operation, but the value of the favorable zone payout number counter cannot be reported).

This configuration improves convenience by allowing the gaming establishment to decide whether to power off or power on based on information about the cumulative number from the base point that is notified when the notification conditions are met. In contrast, information about the cumulative number in the advantageous zone is not notified even when the notification conditions are met, so there is no needless (unnecessary) processing to notify information about the cumulative number in the advantageous zone, preventing an increase in the processing burden.

(Regarding volume adjustment)
As described above, in this embodiment, the volume of the sound output from the speaker group can be adjusted at least by the player operating the user menu. In addition, a configuration may be adopted in which the volume can also be adjusted on the gaming establishment side. For example, a "volume setting" can be selected on the hall menu, which is a menu screen on the gaming establishment side, and the volume level can be selected there. At least one of the selectable volume levels is set to a volume level that does not exceed a predetermined volume value (e.g., 85 dB) even if the player sets the maximum volume on the user menu.

This has the effect of providing a gaming machine that takes into consideration not only the gaming environment of nearby players, but also the living environment of gaming establishment staff and local residents, even if a player who prefers loud sounds plays at maximum volume. However, the manner in which the gaming establishment can set the volume level is not limited to this. For example, a physical switch such as a slide switch or volume switch could be provided inside or on the back of the cabinet, and the desired volume level could be selected by operating that switch.

[11. Second gaming machine]
Next, with reference to Figures 241 to 284, another specification of the pachislot machine 1 will be described as a "second gaming machine." Note that the embodiments described in Figures 1 to 240 apply to all of the configurations of the pachislot machine 1 that are not described in Figures 241 to 284.

In the pachislot machine 1, which is the second gaming machine, of the lines connecting the 3 rows and 3 columns of symbols displayed within the frame of the main display window 4, the line connecting the middle of the left reel 3L, the bottom of the middle reel 3C, and the bottom of the right reel 3R is used as the active line, and the other lines are used as pseudo lines. In other words, in the pachislot machine 1, of the 3 rows and 3 columns of unit symbol display areas in the main display window 4 that display one symbol from each reel, the lines formed by connecting the unit symbol display area in the middle of the left reel 3L, the unit symbol display area in the bottom of the middle reel 3C, and the unit symbol display area in the bottom of the reel 3R are used as the active line, and the lines formed by connecting the other unit symbol display areas are used as pseudo lines. Furthermore, in the pachislot machine 1, which is the second gaming machine, only 3-coin bets are supported.

[12-1. Game state transition flow]
First, with reference to Figure 241, we will explain the various game states and their transition flows managed by the main control circuit 100 (main CPU 101) of the pachislot machine 1, which is the second gaming machine.

[11-1-1. Basic game state transition flow]
In the pachislot machine 1, which is the second gaming machine, a big bonus (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "BB") is provided as a type of bonus game. The BB is a device for continuously operating a special role related to a regular bonus (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "RB"), which is called a first-class special role, and activates the RB continuously. Therefore, in the pachislot machine 1, which is the second gaming machine, the gaming status is managed based on whether or not the big bonus role has been won/activated (a prize has been won).

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 241, the main control circuit 100 manages three game states called "RT0", "RT1", and "RT2" based on whether or not a big bonus role (the winning roles described below, "F_Choice 1 Piece Role A" + "F_BB", "F_Choice 1 Piece Role B" + "F_BB", "F_Choice 1 Piece Role C" + "F_BB", "F_Choice 1 Piece Role D" + "F_BB", "F_Press Role" + "F_BB", "F_Reach Eye Role" + "F_BB", and the symbol combination with the symbol combination name "C_BB" that constitutes the winning role of "F_BB") has been won/activated (a prize has been won).

Note that RT0 is a state in which the big bonus role is not won and the big bonus is not activated. RT2 is a state in which the big bonus role is activated. In this embodiment, when the big bonus role is determined as the internal winning role, a state occurs in which the big bonus role is carried over as the internal winning role over multiple games until the big bonus role is won. RT1 is a state in which the big bonus role is carried over as the internal winning role, that is, a state in which the big bonus role is won and the big bonus is not activated. RT0, RT1, and RT2 differ in the type of winning combination and the winning probability associated with the game, and in the second gaming machine, pachislot machine 1, the replay probability for RT0 is 8978/65536, the replay probability for RT1 is 8982/65536, and the replay probability for RT2 is 0/65536 (see Figure 251).

When the setting is changed (when transition condition (0) is met), the main control circuit 100 transitions the game state from RT0-RT2 to RT0. In the fourth gaming machine, pachislot machine 1, RT0, RT1, and RT2 are RT states that do not use the number of plays as a trigger for transitioning to other RT states, i.e., infinite RT states, and transitions between RT states are controlled as follows:

If a big bonus role is determined as the winning role in RT0 and the big bonus role is not displayed in the determined game, the main control circuit 100 transitions the game state from RT0 to RT1. Specifically, if one of the winning combinations described below, "F_Choice 1-Coin A" + "F_BB", "F_Choice 1-Coin B" + "F_BB", "F_Choice 1-Coin C" + "F_BB", "F_Choice 1-Coin D" + "F_BB", "F_Pressing" + "F_BB", "F_Reach Eye" + "F_BB", or "F_BB", is won, and the symbol combination described below, "C_BB", does not line up on an active line in the winning game (if transition condition (1) is met), the main control circuit 100 will transition the game state from RT0 to RT1.

In pachislot machine 1, which is the second gaming machine, the priority order for draw-in is replay role (priority 1), winning role (priority 2), and bonus role (priority 3). In pachislot machine 1, which is the second gaming machine, in RT1, the machine is designed so that the carryover symbol combination "C_BB" does not align on an active line due to the symbol arrangement on each reel 3L, 3C, and 3R, the winning role won in that game and symbol combinations such as "C_BB" that are allowed to align on an active line in that game, and the draw-in priority order. For this reason, once the gaming state enters RT1, the gaming state will remain in RT1 unless the settings are changed.

Furthermore, when a big bonus role is determined as the winning role in RT0 and the big bonus role is displayed in the determined game, the main control circuit 100 transitions the game state from RT0 to RT2. Specifically, when one of the winning roles (described below) "F_Choice 1-Coin Role A" + "F_BB," "F_Choice 1-Coin Role B" + "F_BB," "F_Choice 1-Coin Role C" + "F_BB," "F_Choice 1-Coin Role D" + "F_BB," "F_Press Role" + "F_BB," "F_Reach Role" + "F_BB," or "F_BB" is won, and the symbol combination (described below) "C_BB" is aligned on an active line in the winning game (when transition condition (2) is met), the main control circuit 100 transitions the game state from RT0 to RT2. In addition, in the pachislot machine 1, which is the second gaming machine, the possibility of the symbol combination named "C_BB" lining up on an active line is limited to when the winning combination named "F_BB" described below is won out of the winning combinations named "F_Select 1 Piece A" + "F_BB", "F_Select 1 Piece B" + "F_BB", "F_Select 1 Piece C" + "F_BB", "F_Select 1 Piece D" + "F_BB", "F_Pressing Role" + "F_BB", "F_Reach Eye Role" + "F_BB", and "F_BB", which are described below, depending on the symbol arrangement of each reel 3L, 3C, and 3R, the symbol combination of the winning combination that is allowed to align on an active line in that game, the draw priority, etc.

Furthermore, when more than the specified number of medals are paid out in RT2 and the BB state ends (when transition condition (3) is met), the main control circuit 100 transitions the gaming state from RT2 to RT0. Here, in this embodiment, the specified number of medals that triggers the end of RT2 is "14 medals."

[11-2. Design layout table]
A symbol arrangement table is stored in the main ROM 102, and the symbol arrangement table will be described with reference to Fig. 242. The symbol arrangement table defines the correspondence between the position of each symbol in the rotation direction of the left reel 3L, center reel 3C, and right reel 3R, and the type of symbol arranged at each position (data specifying the type of symbol arranged at each position).

In addition, in the second gaming machine, pachislot machine 1, each reel displays 10 different symbols: "Red 7," "Blue 7," "BAR1," "BAR2," "Plum," "Orange," "Cherry 1," "Cherry 2," "Blank A," and "Blank B."

[11-3. Contents of symbol combination (symbol combination table)]
The main ROM 102 stores the details of the symbol combinations (symbol combination table), and the specific details of the symbol combinations will be described with reference to Fig. 243. In Fig. 243, the "symbol combination" column shows the following when the left reel 3L, the center reel 3C, and the right reel 3R stop:
The symbols on the left reel 3L, the center reel 3C, and the right reel 3R displayed along the active line are shown. The "Symbol Combination Name" column indicates the symbol combination of the left reel 3 shown in the left column of the corresponding "Symbol Combination" column.
The column "Payout" shows the name (symbol combination name) of the symbol combination consisting of one or more symbols of the center reel 3C shown in the center column, one or more symbols of the right reel 3R shown in the right column.
The column defines the payout to be awarded when the symbol combination indicated in the column is displayed on the active line.

The symbol combination name "C_BB" in the "Symbol Combination Name" column is the first-class special role continuous operation device (
BB), and the symbol combination name "C_BB" is "BAR
When the symbol combination named "C_BB" is displayed along the activated line, the game state shifts to RT2 (big bonus) (see FIG. 232).

In addition, when a symbol combination with the symbol combination name "S_Replay A" in the "Symbol Combination Name" column is displayed along an active line, a replay is activated. The symbol combination with the symbol combination name "S_Replay A" is made up of 12 combinations of the symbols "BAR1"/"BAR2" on the left reel 3L shown in the left column of the "Symbol Combination" column, the symbols "Blank A"/"Blank B" on the center reel 3C shown in the center column of the "Symbol Combination" column, and the symbols "BAR1"/"Orange"/"Blank A" on the center reel 3R shown in the right column of the "Symbol Combination" column. The symbol combination named "S_Replay A" is a symbol combination in which the symbols "Orange, Orange, Orange" are displayed on the top row of the left reel 3L, the top row of the middle reel 3C, and the top row of the right reel 3R, or a symbol combination in which the symbols "Orange, Orange, Orange" are displayed on the top row of the left reel 3L, the top row of the middle reel 3C, and the bottom row of the right reel 3R.

In addition, when a symbol combination associated with the symbol combination name "S_Replay B" in the "Symbol Combination Name" column is displayed along an active line, a replay is activated. There are four symbol combinations associated with the symbol combination name "S_Replay B," combining the "Plum" symbol on the left reel 3L shown in the left column of the "Symbol Combination" column, the "Blank A"/"Blank B" symbols on the middle reel 3C shown in the center column of the "Symbol Combination" column, and the "BAR1"/"Blank A" symbols on the right reel 3R shown in the right column of the "Symbol Combination" column. The symbol combination associated with the symbol combination name "S_Replay B" is a symbol combination in which the symbols "Orange," "Orange," and "Orange" are displayed on the bottom row of the left reel 3L, the top row of the middle reel 3C, and the top row of the right reel 3R.

In addition, when a symbol combination associated with the symbol combination name "S_Replay C" in the "Symbol Combination Name" column is displayed along an active line, a replay is activated. There are two symbol combinations associated with the symbol combination name "S_Replay C," combining the "Orange" symbol on the left reel 3L shown in the left column of the "Symbol Combination" column, the "Blank A"/"Blank B" symbols on the middle reel 3C shown in the center column of the "Symbol Combination" column, and the "Blue 7" symbol on the right reel 3R shown in the right column of the "Symbol Combination" column. The symbol combination associated with the symbol combination name "S_Replay C" is a symbol combination in which the symbols "Orange," "Orange," and "Orange" are displayed in the middle row of the left reel 3L, the top row of the middle reel 3C, and the middle row of the right reel 3R.

Furthermore, when the symbol combination named "S_15 A" in the "Symbol Combination Name" column is displayed along an active line, 15 medals will be paid out. There are two symbol combinations for the symbol combination named "S_15 A": the "Orange" symbol on the left reel 3L shown in the left column of the "Symbol Combination" column, the "Blank A"/"Blank B" symbols on the middle reel 3C shown in the center column of the "Symbol Combination" column, and the "Plum" symbol on the right reel 3R shown in the right column of the "Symbol Combination" column.

Furthermore, when the symbol combination named "C_15 B" in the "Symbol Combination Name" column is displayed along an active line, 15 medals will be paid out. The symbol combination named "C_15 B" is a combination of the "Plum" symbol on the left reel 3L shown in the left column of the "Symbol Combination" column, the "Plum" symbol on the middle reel 3C shown in the center column of the "Symbol Combination" column, and the "Orange" symbol on the right reel 3R shown in the right column of the "Symbol Combination" column.

Furthermore, when the symbol combination named "C_15 Coin C" in the "Symbol Combination Name" column is displayed along an active line, 15 medals will be paid out. The symbol combination named "C_15 Coin C" is a combination of the "Orange" symbol on the left reel 3L shown in the left column of the "Symbol Combination" column, the "Plum" symbol on the middle reel 3C shown in the center column of the "Symbol Combination" column, and the "Plum" symbol on the right reel 3R shown in the right column of the "Symbol Combination" column.

Furthermore, when the symbol combination named "C_15 D" in the "Symbol Combination Name" column is displayed along an active line, 15 medals will be paid out. The symbol combination named "C_15 D" is a combination of the "Orange" symbol on the left reel 3L shown in the left column of the "Symbol Combination" column, the "Plum" symbol on the middle reel 3C shown in the center column of the "Symbol Combination" column, and the "Blue 7" symbol on the right reel 3R shown in the right column of the "Symbol Combination" column.

Furthermore, when the symbol combination named "C_15 E" in the "Symbol Combination Name" column is displayed along an active line, 15 medals will be paid out. The symbol combination named "C_15 E" is a combination of the "Orange" symbol on the left reel 3L shown in the left column of the "Symbol Combination" column, the "Orange" symbol on the middle reel 3C shown in the center column of the "Symbol Combination" column, and the "Blue 7" symbol on the right reel 3R shown in the right column of the "Symbol Combination" column.

Furthermore, when the symbol combination named "C_15-piece F" in the "Symbol Combination Name" column is displayed along an active line, 15 medals will be paid out. The symbol combination named "C_15-piece F" is a combination of the "Plum" symbol on the left reel 3L shown in the left column of the "Symbol Combination" column, the "Orange" symbol on the middle reel 3C shown in the center column of the "Symbol Combination" column, and the "Orange" symbol on the right reel 3R shown in the right column of the "Symbol Combination" column.

Furthermore, when the symbol combination named "C_15-Coin G" in the "Symbol Combination Name" column is displayed along an active line, 15 medals will be paid out. The symbol combination named "C_15-Coin G" is a combination of the "Orange" symbol on the left reel 3L shown in the left column of the "Symbol Combination" column, the "Orange" symbol on the middle reel 3C shown in the center column of the "Symbol Combination" column, and the "Plum" symbol on the right reel 3R shown in the right column of the "Symbol Combination" column.

Furthermore, when the symbol combination named "S_15 H" in the "Symbol Combination Name" column is displayed along an active line, 15 medals will be paid out. The symbol combination named "S_15 H" has two combinations: the "Orange" symbol on the left reel 3L shown in the left column of the "Symbol Combination" column, the "Cherry 1"/"Cherry 2" symbols on the middle reel 3C shown in the center column of the "Symbol Combination" column, and the "Blue 7" symbol on the right reel 3R shown in the right column of the "Symbol Combination" column.

Furthermore, when the symbol combination named "C_15-Meal Role I" in the "Symbol Combination Name" column is displayed along an active line, 15 medals will be paid out. The symbol combination named "C_15-Meal Role I" is a combination of the "Orange" symbol on the left reel 3L shown in the left column of the "Symbol Combination" column, the "BAR1" symbol on the middle reel 3C shown in the center column of the "Symbol Combination" column, and the "Blue 7" symbol on the right reel 3R shown in the right column of the "Symbol Combination" column.

Furthermore, when the symbol combination named "S_15 J" in the "Symbol Combination Name" column is displayed along an active line, 15 medals will be paid out. The symbol combination named "S_15 J" has four possible combinations: the "Red 7"/"Blue 7" symbols on the left reel 3L shown in the left column of the "Symbol Combination" column, the "Blank A"/"Blank B" symbols on the middle reel 3C shown in the center column of the "Symbol Combination" column, and the "Blue 7" symbol on the right reel 3R shown in the right column of the "Symbol Combination" column.

In addition, when the symbol combination named "S_3-Coin A" in the "Symbol Combination Name" column is displayed along an active line, three medals will be paid out. The symbol combination named "S_3-Coin A" has eight possible combinations, combining the symbols "Red 7"/"Blue 7" on the left reel 3L shown in the left column of the "Symbol Combination" column, the symbols "Blank A"/"Blank B" on the middle reel 3C shown in the center column of the "Symbol Combination" column, and the symbols "Red 7"/"Cherry 1" on the right reel 3R shown in the right column of the "Symbol Combination" column.

In addition, when the symbol combination named "S_3-Piece Role B" in the "Symbol Combination Name" column is displayed along an active line, three medals will be paid out. The symbol combination named "S_3-Piece Role B" has six possible combinations: the "Red 7"/"Blue 7"/"BAR1" symbols on the left reel 3L shown in the left column of the "Symbol Combination" column, the "Cherry 1"/"Cherry 2" symbols on the middle reel 3C shown in the center column of the "Symbol Combination" column, and the "Orange" symbol on the right reel 3R shown in the right column of the "Symbol Combination" column.

In addition, when the symbol combination named "S_3-Coin C" in the "Symbol Combination Name" column is displayed along an active line, three medals will be paid out. There are two symbol combinations for the symbol combination named "S_3-Coin C": the "BAR1" symbol on the left reel 3L shown in the left column of the "Symbol Combination" column, the "Plum" symbol on the middle reel 3C shown in the center column of the "Symbol Combination" column, and the "Red 7"/"Cherry 1" symbols on the right reel 3R shown in the right column of the "Symbol Combination" column.

In addition, when the symbol combination named "S_3-Coin D" in the "Symbol Combination Name" column is displayed along an active line, three medals will be paid out. There are two symbol combinations for the symbol combination named "S_3-Coin D," which combine the "Orange" symbol on the left reel 3L shown in the left column of the "Symbol Combination" column, the "Blank A"/"Blank B" symbols on the middle reel 3C shown in the center column of the "Symbol Combination" column, and the "Orange" symbol on the right reel 3R shown in the right column of the "Symbol Combination" column.

In addition, when a symbol combination with the symbol combination name "S_1 Piece A" in the "Symbol Combination Name" column is displayed along an active line, one medal will be paid out. The symbol combination with the symbol combination name "S_1 Piece A" is made up of 18 combinations of the symbols "BAR1"/"BAR2"/"Plum" on the left reel 3L shown in the left column of the "Symbol Combination" column, the symbols "Blank A"/"Blank B" on the middle reel 3C shown in the center column of the "Symbol Combination" column, and the symbols "Red 7"/"Blue 7"/"Cherry 1" on the right reel 3R shown in the right column of the "Symbol Combination" column.

In addition, when the symbol combination named "S_1 Coin B" in the "Symbol Combination Name" column is displayed along an active line, one medal will be paid out. The symbol combination named "S_1 Coin B" has six possible combinations: the "Red 7"/"Blue 7"/"BAR2" symbols on the left reel 3L shown in the left column of the "Symbol Combination" column, the "Plum" symbol on the middle reel 3C shown in the center column of the "Symbol Combination" column, and the "Red 7"/"Cherry 1" symbols on the right reel 3R shown in the right column of the "Symbol Combination" column.

In addition, when the symbol combination named "S_1 Coin C" in the "Symbol Combination Name" column is displayed along an active line, one medal will be paid out. The symbol combination named "S_1 Coin C" has six possible combinations: the "Red 7"/"Blue 7"/"BAR2" symbols on the left reel 3L shown in the left column of the "Symbol Combination" column, the "Orange" symbol on the middle reel 3C shown in the center column of the "Symbol Combination" column, and the "Red 7"/"Cherry 1" symbols on the right reel 3R shown in the right column of the "Symbol Combination" column.

In addition, when the symbol combination named "S_1 D" in the "Symbol Combination Name" column is displayed along an active line, one medal will be paid out. There are two symbol combinations for the symbol combination named "S_1 D": the "BAR1"/"Orange" symbol on the left reel 3L shown in the left column of the "Symbol Combination" column, the "BAR1" symbol on the middle reel 3C shown in the center column of the "Symbol Combination" column, and the "Cherry 1" symbol on the right reel 3R shown in the right column of the "Symbol Combination" column.

In addition, when the symbol combination named "C_1 Piece E" in the "Symbol Combination Name" column is displayed along an active line, one medal will be paid out. The symbol combination named "C_1 Piece E" is a combination of the "Red 7" symbol on the left reel 3L shown in the left column of the "Symbol Combination" column, the "BAR1" symbol on the middle reel 3C shown in the center column of the "Symbol Combination" column, and the "Red 7" symbol on the right reel 3R shown in the right column of the "Symbol Combination" column.

In addition, when the symbol combination named "C_1 Piece F" in the "Symbol Combination Name" column is displayed along an active line, one medal will be paid out. The symbol combination named "C_1 Piece F" is a combination of the "Red 7" symbol on the left reel 3L shown in the left column of the "Symbol Combination" column, the "BAR1" symbol on the middle reel 3C shown in the center column of the "Symbol Combination" column, and the "Cherry 1" symbol on the right reel 3R shown in the right column of the "Symbol Combination" column.

In addition, when the symbol combination named "C_1-piece G" in the "Symbol Combination Name" column is displayed along an active line, one medal will be paid out. The symbol combination named "C_1-piece G" is a combination of the "Red 7" symbol on the left reel 3L shown in the left column of the "Symbol Combination" column, the "Blank A" symbol on the middle reel 3C shown in the center column of the "Symbol Combination" column, and the "Plum" symbol on the right reel 3R shown in the right column of the "Symbol Combination" column.

In addition, when the symbol combination named "C_1-Piece Role H" in the "Symbol Combination Name" column is displayed along an active line, one medal will be paid out. The symbol combination named "C_1-Piece Role H" is a combination of the "Red 7" symbol on the left reel 3L shown in the left column of the "Symbol Combination" column, the "Blank B" symbol on the middle reel 3C shown in the center column of the "Symbol Combination" column, and the "Plum" symbol on the right reel 3R shown in the right column of the "Symbol Combination" column.

In addition, when the symbol combination named "S_1 Piece Role I" in the "Symbol Combination Name" column is displayed along an active line, one medal will be paid out. There are two symbol combinations for the symbol combination named "S_1 Piece Role I": the "Blue 7"/"BAR2" symbol on the left reel 3L shown in the left column of the "Symbol Combination" column, the "BAR1" symbol on the middle reel 3C shown in the center column of the "Symbol Combination" column, and the "Red 7" symbol on the right reel 3R shown in the right column of the "Symbol Combination" column.

In addition, when the symbol combination named "S_1 J" in the "Symbol Combination Name" column is displayed along an active line, one medal will be paid out. There are two symbol combinations for the symbol combination named "S_1 J": the "Blue 7"/"BAR2" symbol on the left reel 3L shown in the left column of the "Symbol Combination" column, the "BAR1" symbol on the middle reel 3C shown in the center column of the "Symbol Combination" column, and the "Cherry 1" symbol on the right reel 3R shown in the right column of the "Symbol Combination" column.

In addition, when the symbol combination named "S_1-piece K" in the "Symbol Combination Name" column is displayed along an active line, one medal will be paid out. There are two symbol combinations for the symbol combination named "S_1-piece K": the "Blue 7"/"BAR2" symbol on the left reel 3L shown in the left column of the "Symbol Combination" column, the "Blank A" symbol on the middle reel 3C shown in the center column of the "Symbol Combination" column, and the "Plum" symbol on the right reel 3R shown in the right column of the "Symbol Combination" column.

In addition, when the symbol combination named "S_1 Piece L" in the "Symbol Combination Name" column is displayed along an active line, one medal will be paid out. There are two symbol combinations for the symbol combination named "S_1 Piece L", which combine the symbols "Blue 7"/"BAR2" on the left reel 3L shown in the left column of the "Symbol Combination" column, the symbol "Blank B" on the middle reel 3C shown in the center column of the "Symbol Combination" column, and the symbol "Plum" on the right reel 3R shown in the right column of the "Symbol Combination" column.

In addition, when the symbol combination named "S_1-piece M" in the "Symbol Combination Name" column is displayed along an active line, one medal will be paid out. There are two symbol combinations for the symbol combination named "S_1-piece M", which combine the "Plum" symbol on the left reel 3L shown in the left column of the "Symbol Combination" column, the "Blank A"/"Blank B" symbols on the middle reel 3C shown in the center column of the "Symbol Combination" column, and the "Orange" symbol on the right reel 3R shown in the right column of the "Symbol Combination" column.

In addition, when the symbol combination named "S_1 Piece Role N" in the "Symbol Combination Name" column is displayed along an active line, one medal will be paid out. There are two symbol combinations for the symbol combination named "S_1 Piece Role N", which combine the symbol "BAR1" on the left reel 3L shown in the left column of the "Symbol Combination" column, the symbol "Blank A"/"Blank B" on the middle reel 3C shown in the center column of the "Symbol Combination" column, and the symbol "Plum" on the right reel 3R shown in the right column of the "Symbol Combination" column.

In addition, when the symbol combination named "S_1 Piece O" in the "Symbol Combination Name" column is displayed along an active line, one medal will be paid out. The symbol combination named "S_1 Piece O" has eight possible combinations, combining the symbols "Red 7"/"Blue 7" on the left reel 3L shown in the left column of the "Symbol Combination" column, the symbols "Blank A"/"Blank B" on the middle reel 3C shown in the center column of the "Symbol Combination" column, and the symbols "BAR1"/"Blank A" on the right reel 3R shown in the right column of the "Symbol Combination" column.

In addition, when the symbol combination named "S_1 P" in the "Symbol Combination Name" column is displayed along an active line, one medal will be paid out. There are two symbol combinations for the symbol combination named "S_1 P": the "Orange" symbol on the left reel 3L shown in the left column of the "Symbol Combination" column, the "Blank A"/"Blank B" symbol on the middle reel 3C shown in the center column of the "Symbol Combination" column, and the "Blank A" symbol on the right reel 3C shown in the right column of the "Symbol Combination" column.

In addition, when the symbol combination named "C_1 Piece Q" in the "Symbol Combination Name" column is displayed along an active line, one medal will be paid out. The symbol combination named "C_1 Piece Q" is a combination of the "Orange" symbol on the left reel 3L shown in the left column of the "Symbol Combination" column, the "Cherry 1" symbol on the middle reel 3C shown in the center column of the "Symbol Combination" column, and the "Plum" symbol on the right reel 3R shown in the right column of the "Symbol Combination" column.

In addition, when a symbol combination with the symbol combination name "S_1 Piece R" in the "Symbol Combination Name" column is displayed along an active line, one medal will be paid out. The symbol combination with the symbol combination name "S_1 Piece R" is made up of 16 combinations of the symbols "Red 7"/"Blue 7"/"Plum"/"Orange" on the left reel 3L shown in the left column of the "Symbol Combination" column, the symbols "Plum"/"Orange" on the middle reel 3C shown in the center column of the "Symbol Combination" column, and the symbols "BAR1"/"Blank A" on the right reel 3R shown in the right column of the "Symbol Combination" column.

[11-4. Correspondence table between winning combination name and symbol combination name (symbol combination determination table)]
A correspondence table (symbol combination determination table) between winning combination names and symbol combination names is stored in the main ROM 102, and the correspondence table (symbol combination determination table) between winning combinations and symbol combinations will be described with reference to Figures 244 to 247. Figures 244 and 245 are symbol combination determination tables used when betting three coins in RT0 and RT1, and Figures 246 and 247 are symbol combination determination tables used when betting three coins in RT2.

The symbol combination determination table defines the correspondence between the winning combination names indicating various winning combinations and the symbol combination names associated with each winning combination name, which correspond to the symbol combinations that can be displayed on the active line. In other words, once a winning combination is determined, the type of symbol combination that can be displayed on the active line (the type of display combination that can win a prize) is uniquely determined.

The "●" mark in the "Symbol Combination Name" column in the symbol combination determination table indicates the symbol combination name that corresponds to the symbol combination that can be displayed on the active line if the winning symbol in the "Winning Symbol Name" column is won.

In the second gaming machine, pachislot machine 1, the main control circuit 100 (main CPU 101) varies stop control depending on the winning combination, game state (RT0-RT2), and reel stop order, and when a predetermined combination is determined as the winning combination, controls the reel spin stop so that it can display the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination name of the determined winning combination shown in Figures 244 and 245, which are used when betting three coins in RT0 and RT1, or Figures 77 and 247, which are used when betting three coins in RT2. Note that in the correspondence tables shown in Figures 244 and 245, and Figures 77 and 247, the symbol combination names corresponding to all symbol combinations that can be displayed for the determined winning combination are listed with a "●" mark; however, due to the symbols that are preferentially drawn, symbol combinations marked with a "●" may not be displayed.

[11-5. Correspondence between winning combinations and winning combination groups]
The main ROM 102 stores a correspondence table between winning role numbers, winning role names, and winning role group numbers (winning role number-winning role name-winning role group number data), and a correspondence table between winning role group numbers and winning role group names (winning role group data). With reference to FIG. 248, the winning role number-winning role name-winning role group number data will be described, and with reference to FIG. 249, the winning role group data will be described. The winning role number-winning role name-winning role group number data shown in FIG. 248 specifies the correspondence between the winning role number, winning role name, and winning role group number. Furthermore, the winning role group data shown in FIG. 249 specifies the correspondence between the winning role group number and winning role group name.

As shown in Figures 248 and 249, the winning role group with the winning role group name "Other" for the winning role group number "0" has the winning role name "Loser" for the winning role number "0", the winning role name "F_Orange Lip A" for the winning role number "1", the winning role name "F_Orange Lip B" for the winning role number "2", the winning role name "F_Orange Lip B" for the winning role number "3", and the winning role name "F_Orange Lip B" for the winning role number "4". This includes the winning combinations of "Jiripu C", winning combination number "4" with winning combination name "F_15 out of RB", winning combination number "15" with winning combination name "F_3 combination", winning combination number "20" with winning combination name "F_Press combination" + "F_BB", winning combination number "21" with winning combination name "F_Reach combination" + "F_BB", and winning combination number "22" with winning combination name "F_BB".

In addition, the winning role group with the winning role group name "Selection Role" for the winning role group number "1" includes the winning role name "F_Selection Plum A213" for the winning role number "5", the winning role name "F_Selection Plum A231" for the winning role number "6", the winning role name "F_Selection Plum A312" for the winning role number "7", the winning role name "F_Selection Plum A313" for the winning role number "8". This includes the winning roles of winning number "9" with the name "F_Select Plum A321", winning role number "9" with the name "F_Select Plum B213", winning role number "10" with the name "F_Select Plum B231", winning role number "11" with the name "F_Select Plum B312", and winning role number "12" with the name "F_Select Plum B321".

Furthermore, the winning role group with winning role group number "2" and winning role group name "Left Plum" includes the winning role with winning role number "13" and winning role name "F_Left Plum".

Furthermore, the winning role group with winning role group number "3" and winning role group name "Normal Cherry" includes the winning role with winning role number "14" and winning role name "F_Cherry".

Furthermore, the winning group with the winning group name "Standard Cherry" and winning group number "4" is a rewrite of the winning group with the winning group name "Normal Cherry" when the result of the Standard Cherry Rewrite Lottery is "Standard Cherry Rewrite."

[11-6. Winning roles that can be won in RT state]
The main ROM 102 stores a table of winning combinations that can be won in the RT state (RT winning combination data), and with reference to Figure 250, the winning combinations that can be won in the RT state (RT0 to RT2) will be described.

The "○" mark in the "RT state (RT0-RT2)" column of the RT winning combination data in Figure 250 indicates the winning combination name that can be won in RT state (RT0-RT2).

In RT0, the winning combinations that can be won are "F_Orange Lip B", "F_Orange Lip C", "F_Choice Plum A213", "F_Choice Plum A231", "F_Choice Plum A312", "F_Choice Plum A321", "F_Choice Plum B213", "F_Choice Plum B231", "F_Choice Plum B312", "F_Choice Plum B321", "F_Left Plum", "F_Cherry", "F_3-Coin Role", "F_Choice 1-Coin Role A" + "FBB", "F_Choice 1-Coin Role B" + "FBB", "F_Choice 1-Coin Role C" + "FBB", "F_Choice 1-Coin Role D" + "FBB", "F_Press Role" + "FBB", "F_Reach Eye Role" + "FBB", and "FBB".

In RT1, the following winning combinations are possible: "F_Orange Lip A", "F_Orange Lip B", "F_Orange Lip C", "F_Choice Plum A213", "F_Choice Plum A231", "F_Choice Plum A312", "F_Choice Plum A321", "F_Choice Plum B213", "F_Choice Plum B231", "F_Choice Plum B312", "F_Choice Plum B321", "F_Left Plum", "F_Cherry", "F_3-Coin Role", "F_Choice 1-Coin Role A" + "FBB", "F_Choice 1-Coin Role B" + "FBB", "F_Choice 1-Coin Role C" + "FBB", "F_Choice 1-Coin Role D" + "FBB", "F_Press Role" + "FBB", "F_Reach Eye Role" + "FBB".

In RT2, the winning combinations that can be won are "Miss", "F_15 in RB", and "F_Reach Eye" + "FBB".

[11-7. Internal lottery table]
The main ROM 102 stores an internal lottery table that is referenced when determining a winning combination, and the internal lottery table that is referenced when determining a winning combination will be described with reference to Figure 251. The internal lottery table is provided for each gaming state (RT0 to RT2), and defines the correspondence between the winning combination number, the winning combination, and the lottery value when the winning combination is determined for each setting value (setting 1 to setting 6). Here, each internal lottery table in Figures 251(a) to (c) indicates the number of random numbers that determine the winning combination for each winning combination name within the random number range of "0" to "65535." In addition, in RT0, the internal lottery table for RT0 in Figure 251(a) is referenced, in RT1, the internal lottery table for RT1 in Figure 251(b) is referenced, and in RT2, the internal lottery table for RT2 in Figure 251(c) is referenced.

In RT1, if "F_3-piece role" to "F_Orange Lip A" are drawn, they will be treated as overlapping winning roles with the carried-over bonus role. For example, if "F_Orange Lip A" is selected in a lottery using the internal lottery table in RT1 while "F_BB" is carried over, "F_Red BB" + "F_Orange Lip A" will be determined as the final winning role.

[11-8. Notification of push order using instruction monitor]
The main ROM 102 stores a table (push order notification data) related to the notification of the push order using the instruction monitor when a winning role is won. The push order notification data will be described with reference to FIG. 252. The push order notification data specifies information related to the notification of the push order using the instruction monitor for each winning role of the winning role name related to the winning role for each of RT0 during non-AT, RT1 during non-AT, RT0 during AT, and RT1 during AT. Note that AT includes GSB, BG, and BC, which are won during premonition B, while non-AT includes other states. A "0" in the "Display of instruction monitor" column in the push order notification data of FIG. 252 means that the push order of the stop buttons 8L, 8C, and 8R, which stop the left reel 3L, center reel 3C, and right reel 3R, is not notified. A "1" in the "Instruction Monitor Display" column means that the order in which the stop buttons 8L, 8C, and 8R should be pressed is indicated, with the first stop reel being the center reel 3C, the second stop reel being the left reel 3L, and the third stop reel being the right reel 3R. A "2" in the "Instruction Monitor Display" column means that the order in which the stop buttons 8L, 8C, and 8R should be pressed is indicated, with the first stop reel being the center reel 3C, the second stop reel being the right reel 3R, and the third stop reel being the left reel 3L. A "3" in the "Instruction Monitor Display" column means that the order in which the stop buttons 8L, 8C, and 8R should be pressed is indicated, with the first stop reel being the right reel 3R, the second stop reel being the left reel 3L, and the third stop reel being the center reel 3C. In addition, "4" in the "Instruction Monitor Display" column means that the order in which stop buttons 8L, 8C, and 8R are pressed is announced, with the first stop reel being the right reel 3R, the second stop reel being the center reel 3C, and the third stop reel being the left reel 3L.

[11-9. Payouts for winning selections according to RT status and push order]
In pachislot machine 1, which is the second gaming machine, the winning combinations that can be won are specified for each RT state (RT0 to RT2) (see Figure 250), and the symbol combinations that belong to the winning combinations are specified for each winning combination (see Figures 244 to 247). The symbol combinations that line up on the active line for each winning combination are specified according to the order in which the stop buttons 8L, 8C, and 8R that stop the left reel 3L, center reel 3C, and right reel 3R are pressed, and with reference to Figure 253, the symbol combinations that line up on the active line according to the order in which the stop buttons 8L, 8C, and 8R that stop the left reel 3L, center reel 3C, and right reel 3R are pressed will be described.

In Figure 253, "1-2-3" means the order in which stop buttons 8L, 8C, and 8R are pressed, so that the first stop reel is the left reel 3L, the second stop reel is the center reel 3C, and the third stop reel is the right reel 3R. Also, "1-3-2" means the order in which stop buttons 8L, 8C, and 8R are pressed, so that the first stop reel is the left reel 3L, the second stop reel is the right reel 3R, and the third stop reel is the center reel 3C. Also, "2-1-3" means the order in which stop buttons 8L, 8C, and 8R are pressed, so that the first stop reel is the center reel 3C, the second stop reel is the left reel 3L, and the third stop reel is the right reel 3R. Furthermore, "2-3-1" refers to the order in which stop buttons 8L, 8C, and 8R are pressed, where the first stop reel is the center reel 3C, the second stop reel is the right reel 3R, and the third stop reel is the left reel 3L. Furthermore, "3-1-2" refers to the order in which stop buttons 8L, 8C, and 8R are pressed, where the first stop reel is the right reel 3R, the second stop reel is the left reel 3L, and the third stop reel is the center reel 3C. Furthermore, "3-2-1" refers to the order in which stop buttons 8L, 8C, and 8R are pressed, where the first stop reel is the right reel 3R, the second stop reel is the center reel 3C, and the third stop reel is the left reel 3L.

A "-" in Figure 253 means that the symbol is not included in the lottery. For example, the symbol with the winning symbol name "F_Orange Lip A" marked with a "-" is not included in the lottery in RT0. "RP" in Figure 253 means that a symbol combination that awards a replay as a payout is aligned on an active line. "1 coin" in Figure 253 means that a symbol combination that will pay out 1 medal as a payout is aligned on an active line. "15 coins" in Figure 253 means that a symbol combination that will pay out 15 medals as a payout is aligned on an active line. "3 coins" in Figure 253 means that a symbol combination that will pay out 3 medals as a payout is aligned on an active line. "1 coin" in Figure 253 means that a symbol combination that will pay out 1 medal as a payout is aligned on an active line. "1 coin or 0 coins" in Figure 253 means that a symbol combination that will pay out 1 medal as a payout is aligned on an active line, or a symbol combination that will not result in a payout (1 coin, 3 coins, 15 coins, RP, BB) is aligned on an active line. "BB win or 0 coins" in Figure 253 means that a symbol combination that will result in a BB win is aligned on an active line, or a symbol combination that will not result in a payout (1 coin, 3 coins, 15 coins, RP, BB) is aligned on an active line.

For example, if the winning role with the winning role name "F_Orange Replay B" is drawn in the role lottery in RT1, regardless of whether the push order is "1-2-3," "1-3-2," "2-1-3," "2-3-1," "3-1-2," or "3-2-1," one of the symbol combinations "S_Replay A," "S_Replay B," or "S_Replay C" belonging to the winning role with the winning role name "F_Orange Replay B" will always align on a valid line.

In addition, if the winning role with the winning role name "F_Select Plum A213" is drawn in the role lottery in RT1, and the push order is "1-2-3," "1-3-2," "2-3-1," "3-1-2," or "3-2-1," one of the symbol combinations "S_1-Piece Role A," "S_1-Piece Role B," or "S_1-Piece Role D" belonging to the winning role with the winning role name "F_Select Plum A213" will always align on a valid line. On the other hand, if the push order is "2-1-3," one of the symbol combinations "S_15-Piece Role A," belonging to the winning role with the winning role name "F_Select Plum A213" will always align on a valid line.

In addition, if the winning role with the winning role name "F_Left Plum" is drawn in the role lottery in RT1, and the push order is either "1-2-3" or "1-3-2," one of the symbol combinations belonging to the winning role with the winning role name "F_Left Plum," namely "S_15-piece role A" or "C_15-piece role J," will always align on a valid line. On the other hand, if the push order is either "2-1-3," "2-3-1," "3-1-2," or "3-2-1," one of the symbol combinations belonging to the winning role with the winning role name "F_Left Plum," namely "S_1-piece role B" or "S_1-piece role C," will always align on a valid line.

In addition, if the winning role "F_Cherry" is drawn in the lottery results in RT1, and the push order is either "1-2-3" or "1-3-2," one of the symbol combinations "S_3-Piece Role A" to "S_3-Piece Role D" belonging to the winning role "F_Cherry" will always align on a valid line. On the other hand, if the push order is either "2-1-3," "2-3-1," "3-1-2," or "3-2-1," one of the symbol combinations "S_1-Piece Role R" belonging to the winning role "F_Cherry" will always align on a valid line.

In addition, if the winning role with the winning role name "F_Select 1-Coin Role A" + "F_BB" is drawn as a result of the role lottery in RT0, if the press order is either "1-2-3" or "1-3-2", one of the symbol combinations belonging to the winning role with the winning role name "F_Select 1-Coin Role A" + "F_BB", namely "S_1-Coin Role A", "C_1-Coin Role E", or "C_1-Coin Role G", will always align on a valid line. On the other hand, if the push order is "2-1-3", "2-3-1", "3-1-2", or "3-2-1", then either one of the symbol combinations belonging to the winning combination name "F_Select 1-Piece A" + "F_BB", namely "S_1-Piece A", "C_1-Piece E", or "C_1-Piece G", will line up on an active line, or a symbol combination that does not result in a payout (1 coin, 3 coins, 15 coins, RP, BB) will line up on an active line.

Also, if the winning combination with the winning role name "F_BB" is drawn in the role lottery results in RT0, regardless of whether the push order is "1-2-3," "1-3-2," "2-1-3," "2-3-1," "3-1-2," or "3-2-1," a symbol combination belonging to the symbol combination name "C_BB" that belongs to the winning combination with the winning role name "F_BB" will line up on a valid line (BB win), or a symbol combination that does not result in a payout (1 coin, 3 coins, 15 coins, RP, BB) will line up on a valid line.

[11-10. Scenario Group Lottery Table]
The main ROM 102 stores a scenario group lottery table that is referenced when determining a scenario group, and the scenario group lottery table will be described with reference to Fig. 254. The scenario group lottery table defines the correspondence between the lottery results (scenario group A to scenario group B) and the lottery values when the lottery results are determined. Here, the scenario group lottery table in Fig. 254 indicates the number of random numbers that determine each lottery result, within the range of random numbers "0" to "65535."

[11-11. Scenario lottery table]
The main ROM 102 stores a scenario lottery table that is referenced when determining a scenario. The scenario lottery table will be described with reference to FIGS. 255 and 256. The scenario lottery table defines, for each setting value (setting 1 to setting 6), the correspondence between the lottery results (scenario 01 to scenario 48) and the lottery values at the time the lottery results are determined. Here, the scenario lottery tables in FIGS. 255 and 256 indicate the number of random numbers that determine each scenario within the range of random numbers "0" to "65535." Note that if scenario group A is determined by scenario group lottery, the scenario lottery table for scenario group A in FIG. 255 is referenced, and if scenario group B is determined by scenario group lottery, the scenario lottery table for scenario group B in FIG. 256 is referenced.

[11-12. Scenario rewrite lottery table]
The main ROM 102 stores a scenario rewrite lottery table that is referenced when determining whether or not to rewrite the scenario to scenario 02, and the scenario rewrite lottery table will be described with reference to Figure 257. The scenario rewrite lottery table defines the correspondence between the lottery result (no rewrite, scenario 02) and the lottery value when the lottery result is determined. Here, the scenario rewrite lottery table in Figure 257 indicates the number of random numbers within the range of random numbers "0" to "255" that determine each lottery result.

[11-13. High probability 1 map position lottery table]
The main ROM 102 stores a high probability 1 map position lottery table that is referenced when determining the position of a map with a high probability of 1. The high probability 1 map position lottery table will be described with reference to FIG. 258. The high probability 1 map position lottery table specifies, for each scenario (scenario 01 to scenario 48), the correspondence between the lottery results (none, 1st time_01 to 1st time_13) and the lottery value when the lottery result is determined. Here, the high probability 1 map position lottery table in FIG. 258 indicates the number of random numbers that determine each lottery result from the range of random numbers "0" to "255." Here, the "○○" portion of the lottery result "1st time_○○" in the high probability 1 map position lottery table in FIG. 258 indicates the position of the map with a high probability of 1.

[11-14. High probability 2 map position lottery table]
The main ROM 102 stores a high probability 2 map position lottery table that is referenced when determining the position of a map that is determined to be high probability 2. The high probability 2 map position lottery table will be described with reference to FIG. 259. The high probability 2 map position lottery table specifies, for each scenario (scenario 01 to scenario 48), the correspondence between the lottery results (none, 2nd time_01 to 2nd time_13) and the lottery value when the lottery result is determined. Here, the high probability 2 map position lottery table in FIG. 259 indicates the number of random numbers that determine each lottery result from the range of random numbers "0" to "255." The "□□" portion of the lottery result "2nd time_□□" in the high probability 2 map position lottery table in FIG. 259 indicates the position of the map that is determined to be high probability 2.

[11-15. GSB consecutive rank lottery table]
The main ROM 102 stores a GSB consecutive rank lottery table that is referenced when determining the GSB consecutive rank, and the GSB consecutive rank lottery table will be described with reference to Fig. 260. The GSB consecutive rank lottery table defines the correspondence between the lottery results (rank 0 to rank 4) and the lottery values when the lottery results are determined. Here, the GSB consecutive rank lottery table in Fig. 260 indicates the number of random numbers that determine each lottery result within the range of random numbers "0" to "255."

[11-16. TS type 0 to TS type 5_Omen transition lottery table]
The main ROM 102 stores a TS type 0_omen transition lottery table that is referenced when determining the type of omen, and the TS type 0_omen transition lottery table will be described with reference to FIGS. 261 to 264. The TS type 0_omen transition lottery table is a lottery table used in TS type 0, and specifies the correspondence between the lottery results (miss, BG omen, BC omen, RUSH omen, GSB consecutive omen) and the lottery values when the lottery results are determined for each winning combination group number (0 (other), 1 (optional combination), 2 (left plum), 3 (normal cherry), 4 (prescribed cherry)). Here, the TS type 0_omen transition lottery tables of FIGS. 261 to 264 indicate the number of random numbers within the range of random numbers "0" to "255" that determine each lottery result. In addition, when TS type 0 is low probability, the TS type 0_premonition transition lottery table for low probability in Figure 261 is referenced, when it is high probability 1, the TS type 0_premonition transition lottery table for high probability 1 in Figure 262 is referenced, when it is high probability 2, the TS type 0_premonition transition lottery table for high probability 2 in Figure 263 is referenced, and when it is the ceiling, the TS type 0_premonition transition lottery table for ceiling in Figure 264 is referenced.

For each of TS types 1 through 5, TS type 1_omen transition lottery tables through TS type 5_omen transition lottery tables for low probability, high probability 1, high probability 2, and ceiling are prepared, and these are stored in main ROM 102. Similar to the TS type 0_omen transition lottery tables for low probability, high probability 1, high probability 2, and ceiling, the TS type 1_omen transition lottery tables through TS type 5_omen transition lottery tables specify the correspondence between the lottery results (miss, BG omen, BC omen, RUSH omen, GSB consecutive omen) and the lottery value when the lottery result is determined for each winning role group number (0 (other), 1 (optional role), 2 (left plum), 3 (normal cherry), 4 (default cherry)).

[11-17. Initial AT Level Lottery Table]
The main ROM 102 stores an initial AT level lottery table that is referenced when determining the initial AT level, and the initial AT level lottery table will be described with reference to Figure 265. The initial AT level lottery table specifies the correspondence between the lottery results (AT level 0 to AT level 7) and the lottery values when the lottery results are determined for each scenario (scenario 01 to scenario 48). Here, the initial AT level lottery table in Figure 265 indicates the number of random numbers within the range of random numbers "0" to "255" that determine each lottery result.

[11-18. AT Level Promotion Lottery Table]
The main ROM 102 stores an AT level promotion lottery table that is referenced when determining the promotion of the AT level, and the AT level promotion lottery table will be described with reference to FIG. 266. The AT level promotion lottery table specifies the correspondence between the lottery result (miss, promotion) and the lottery value when the lottery result is determined for each winning combination group number (0 (other), 1 (optional combination), 2 (left plum), 3 (normal cherry), 4 (prescribed cherry)). If the lottery result is "promotion," the AT level is raised by one rank. Here, the AT level promotion lottery table in FIG. 266 indicates the number of random numbers within the range of "0" to "255" that determine each lottery result.

[11-19. Premonition Game Number Lottery Table]
The main ROM 102 stores a premonition game number lottery table that is referenced when determining the number of premonition games, and the premonition game number lottery table will be described with reference to FIG. 267. The premonition game number lottery table defines the correspondence between the lottery results (number of premonition games 0 to 5) and the lottery value when the lottery result is determined for each state (BG_general, BC_general, RUSH general, GSB consecutive_general, during fake RUSH, during BG RUSH, during BC RUSH, and waiting for a break). Here, the premonition game number lottery table in FIG. 267 indicates the number of random numbers within the range of "0" to "255" that determine each lottery result. In addition, the ``〇〇'' sign in ``〇〇_General'' corresponds to the sign stored in the ``Sign type_General medium'' memory area, and the ``□□'' sign and flat tire waiting in ``□□_RUSH medium'' correspond to the signs stored in the ``Sign type_RUSH medium'' memory area.

[11-20. RUSH Promotion Lottery Table]
The main ROM 102 stores a RUSH promotion lottery table that is referenced when determining whether or not to promote to RUSH. The RUSH promotion lottery table will be described with reference to FIG. 268. The RUSH promotion lottery table specifies the correspondence between the lottery results (miss, BG premonition, BC premonition, RUSH promotion) and the lottery values when the lottery results are determined for each winning combination group number (0 (other), 1 (optional combination), 2 (left plum), 3 (normal cherry), 4 (prescribed cherry)). Here, the RUSH promotion lottery table in FIG. 268 indicates the number of random numbers within the range of "0" to "255" that determine each lottery result. In addition, Figure 268 also shows ``BG Premonition'' and ``BC Premonition'' as lottery results, but in the second gaming machine, Pachislot machine 1, the lottery results will never be ``BG Premonition'' or ``BC Premonition.''

[11-21. Rush Start Navigation Lottery Table]
The main ROM 102 stores a RUSH start navigation count lottery table that is referenced when determining the number of navigations at the start of a RUSH. The RUSH start navigation count lottery table will be described with reference to FIG. 269. The RUSH start navigation count lottery table specifies the correspondence between the lottery results (number of navigations: 0, 32, 48, 72, 96, 120, 144, 168, 192, 216, 240) and the lottery values when the lottery results are determined for each AT level (AT level 0 to AT level 7). Here, the RUSH start navigation count lottery table in FIG. 269 indicates the number of random numbers within the range of "0" to "255" that determine each lottery result.

[11-22. During RUSH_Pseudo BNS lottery table during RUSH]
The main ROM 102 stores a RUSH_RUSH pseudo-BNS lottery table that is referenced when determining the pseudo-BNS, and the RUSH_RUSH pseudo-BNS lottery table will be described with reference to Fig. 270. The RUSH_RUSH pseudo-BNS lottery table defines the correspondence between the lottery result (miss, during fake RUSH, during BG RUSH, during BC RUSH) and the lottery value when the lottery result is determined for each winning combination group number (0 (other), 1 (selection combination), 2 (left plum), 3 (normal cherry), 4 (specified cherry)). Here, the RUSH_RUSH pseudo-BNS lottery table in Figure 270 shows the number of random numbers that determine each lottery result within the range of random numbers "0" to "255".

[11-23. When pseudo BNS ends_Pseudo BNS lottery table during RUSH]
The main ROM 102 stores a pseudo BNS end_during_RUSH pseudo BNS lottery table that is referenced when determining the pseudo BNS, and the pseudo BNS end_during_RUSH pseudo BNS lottery table will be described with reference to Figure 271. The pseudo BNS end_during_RUSH pseudo BNS lottery table defines the correspondence between the lottery results (miss, during fake_RUSH, during BG_RUSH, during BC_RUSH) and the lottery values when the lottery results are determined. Here, the pseudo BNS end_during_RUSH pseudo BNS lottery table of Figure 271 indicates the number of random numbers within the range of random numbers "0" to "255" that determine each lottery result.

[11-24. BC rewrite lottery table when RUSH breaks]
The main ROM 102 stores a BC rewrite lottery table at the time of a RUSH burst, which is referenced when determining whether to rewrite to BC when a RUSH burst occurs. The BC rewrite lottery table at the time of a RUSH burst will be described with reference to Figure 272. The BC rewrite lottery table at the time of a RUSH burst defines the correspondence between the lottery result (miss, BC rewrite) and the lottery value when the lottery result is determined. Here, the BC rewrite lottery table at the time of a RUSH burst in Figure 272 indicates the number of random numbers within the range of random numbers "0" to "255" that determine each lottery result.

[11-25. Compensation Mode Transition Lottery Table]
The main ROM 102 stores a compensation mode transition lottery table that is referenced when determining whether or not to transition to compensation mode. The compensation mode transition lottery table will be described with reference to FIG. 273. The compensation mode transition lottery table specifies the correspondence between the lottery result (miss, transition to compensation mode) and the lottery value when the lottery result is determined for each compensation level (compensation level 0 to compensation level 7). If the lottery result is "transition to compensation mode," transition to compensation mode is determined. Here, the compensation mode transition lottery table in FIG. 273 indicates the number of random numbers within the range of "0" to "255" that determine each lottery result.

[11-26. AT level promotion lottery table during compensation mode]
The main ROM 102 stores an AT level promotion lottery table during compensation mode that is referenced when determining whether or not to promote the AT level during compensation mode, and the AT level promotion lottery table during compensation mode will be described with reference to Figure 274. The AT level promotion lottery table during compensation mode specifies the correspondence between the lottery result (miss, promotion) and the lottery value when the lottery result is determined for each AT level (AT level 0 to AT level 7). If the lottery result is "promotion," the AT level is raised by one rank. Here, the AT level promotion lottery table during compensation mode in Figure 274 indicates the number of random numbers within the range of random numbers "0" to "255" that determine each lottery result.

[11-27. Compensation mode navigation count lottery table]
The main ROM 102 stores a compensation mode navigation count lottery table that is referenced when determining the number of navigations in compensation mode. The compensation mode navigation count lottery table will be described with reference to FIG. 275. The compensation mode navigation count lottery table specifies the correspondence between the lottery results (0 times, 32 times, 48 times, 72 times, 96 times, 120 times, 144 times, 168 times, 192 times, 216 times, 240 times) and the lottery values when the lottery results are determined for each AT level (AT level 0 to AT level 7). Here, the compensation mode navigation count lottery table of FIG. 275 indicates the number of random numbers within the range of "0" to "255" that determine each lottery result.

[11-28. Regulation Cherry Rewrite Lottery Table]
The main ROM 102 stores a default cherry rewrite lottery table that is referenced when determining whether to rewrite the winning role group with the winning role group name "normal cherry" (winning role group number "3") to the winning role group with the winning role group name "default cherry" (winning role group number "4"). The default cherry rewrite lottery table will be described with reference to FIG. 276. The default cherry rewrite lottery table defines the correspondence between the lottery result (miss, default cherry rewrite) and the lottery value when the lottery result is determined. Here, the default cherry rewrite lottery table in FIG. 276 indicates the number of random numbers within the range of random numbers "0" to "255" that determine each lottery result.

[11-29. Scenario-related data table]
The main ROM 102 stores a scenario-related data table that is referenced when determining scenario-related data (number of MAP games, number of ceiling MAPs, total number of GSBs, TS type, compensation level, TY value_pseudo BNS initial value, TY value_RUSH initial value) according to the determined scenario, and the scenario-related data table will be described with reference to FIG. 277. The scenario-related data table specifies the number of MAP games, number of ceiling MAPs, total number of GSBs, TS type, compensation level, TY value_pseudo BNS initial value, and TY value_RUSH initial value for each scenario (scenario 00 to scenario 48). Details of the number of MAP games, number of ceiling MAPs, total number of GSBs, TS type, compensation level, TY value_pseudo BNS initial value, and TY value_RUSH initial value will be described later.

[11-30. TY value - Add-on 1 to Add-on 2 data table]
The main ROM 102 stores a TY value_addition 1 data table, which is referenced when determining the TY value to be added after high-probability MAP 1 is consumed, and a TY value_addition 2 data table, which is referenced when determining the TY value to be added after high-probability MAP 2 is consumed. The TY value_addition 1 data table and the TY value_addition 2 data table are described with reference to FIGS. 278 and 279. The TY value_addition 1 data table and the TY value_addition 2 data table specify the TY value to be added after high-probability MAP 1 is consumed and the TY value to be added after high-probability MAP 1 is consumed according to the pseudo-BNS and RUSH, respectively, for each scenario (scenario 00 to scenario 48). Details of the TY value will be described later.

[11-31. Compensation Point Data Table]
The main ROM 102 stores a compensation point data table that is referenced when determining compensation points during non-AT and AT, and the compensation point data table will be described with reference to Figures 280 and 281. The compensation point data table specifies the number of compensation points for each winning role number (winning role number "0" (winning role name "Miss") to winning role number "21" (winning role name "F_Reach Eye Role" + "F_BB")). Note that when a non-AT is occurring, the non-AT compensation point data table for non-AT in Figure 280 is referenced, and when an AT is occurring, the AT compensation point data table for AT in Figure 281 is referenced. Note that AT includes GSB, BG, and BC that are won during premonition B, and non-AT includes other states.

[11-32. Premonition point number data table]
The main ROM 102 stores a premonition point number data table that is referenced when determining the number of premonition points when there is no instruction to press buttons and when there is an instruction to press buttons. The premonition point number data table will be described with reference to Figures 282 and 283. The premonition point number data table specifies the number of premonition points for each winning combination number (winning combination number "0" (winning combination name "Miss") to winning combination number "21" (winning combination name "F_Reach Eye Combination" + "F_BB")). When there is no instruction to press buttons, the premonition point number data table for when there is no instruction in Figure 282 is referenced, and when there is an instruction to press buttons, the premonition point number data table for when there is an instruction in Figure 283 is referenced.

[11-33. Game state transition flow taking into account whether or not the notification (AT) function is activated]
Next, the transition flow of the game state taking into consideration whether or not the alarm (AT) function is activated will be explained with reference to Fig. 284. Each process of the transition flow of the game state is executed by the main control circuit 100. Fig. 284 shows the transition flow of the game state.

In this embodiment, the main control circuit 100 (main CPU 101) determines whether or not to activate a function that notifies the player of an advantageous push order when a push order role (e.g., "F_selection Plum A213") in which the push order determines an advantage or disadvantage is won. Therefore, in this embodiment, the activation/non-activation state of the AT function in RT1 is also managed as a gaming state. In this embodiment, when one of the push order plums ("F_selection Plum A213," "F_selection Plum A231," "F_selection Plum A312," "F_selection Plum A321," "F_selection Plum B213," "F_selection Plum B231," "F_selection Plum B312," "F_selection Plum B321") is won in RT1, the AT function is activated to create a pseudo-bonus gaming state (see Figure 252). There are three types of pseudo bonuses: a first pseudo bonus (BG) that continues until the number of times an advantageous push order that will result in a payout of 15 coins when one of the push order plums is drawn has been announced 30 times; a second pseudo bonus (BC) that continues until the number of times an advantageous push order that will result in a payout of 15 coins when one of the push order plums is drawn has been announced 6 times; and a pseudo single bonus (GSB) that continues until the number of times an advantageous push order that will result in a payout of 15 coins when one of the push order plums is drawn has been announced 1 or 2 times. Each pseudo bonus (BG, BC, GSB) will be described later.

In addition, in this embodiment, the main control circuit 100 (main CPU 101) manages not only the transitions between game states (RT0 to RT2) with different replay role lottery targets and lottery data, but also the transitions between advantageous zones that allow notification of advantageous push orders when a push order role (for example, "F_Select Plum A213") is won, and non-advantageous zones that prohibit such notification. Therefore, operation of the AT function is limited to advantageous zones, and the AT function is always in an inactive state in non-advantageous zones.

In this embodiment, the main control circuit 100 manages the non-advantageous zone "Normal (Non-advantageous Zone)" and the advantageous zones "General (Advantageous Zone)," "Omen A," "Omen B," "First Pseudo Bonus (BG)," "Second Pseudo Bonus (BC)," and "RUSH" as individual game states (ball output states) in RT0 and RT1. Note that the pseudo single bonus (GSB) is not managed as a ball output state, but is managed by setting the GSB display permission flag, described below, in the game state of "Omen B" or "RUSH."

(Normal (non-advantageous section))
The "normal (non-advantageous zone)" is a game state in which even if the push order role ("F_Selection Plum A213" with winning role number "5" to "F_Selection Plum B321" with winning role number "12": see Figure 252) is won, the advantageous push order is not announced, and it is set as a game state that is disadvantageous to the player. The "normal (non-advantageous zone)" is composed of either RT0 or RT1.

Normally (in the non-advantageous zone), whether or not to move to the advantageous zone is determined based on the results of the role lottery held each time a game is played. Specifically, in normal (non-advantageous zone) RT0, when any of the winning roles named "F_Orange Lip B", "F_Orange Lip C", "F_Choice Plum A213", "F_Choice Plum A231", "F_Choice Plum A312", "F_Choice Plum A321", "F_Choice Plum B213", "F_Choice Plum B231", "F_Choice Plum B312", "F_Choice Plum B321", "F_Left Plum", "F_Cherry", "F_3-piece role", "F_Choice 1-piece A" + "F_BB", "F_Choice 1-piece B" + "F_BB", "F_Choice 1-piece C" + "F_BB", "F_Choice 1-piece D" + "F_BB", "F_Press role" + "F_BB", "F_Reach look role" + "F_BB", or "F_BB" is won, it is determined that the game will move to the advantageous zone. Also, in the normal (non-advantageous zone) RT1, when any of the winning roles named "F_Orange Lip B", "F_Orange Lip C", "F_Choice Plum A213", "F_Choice Plum A231", "F_Choice Plum A312", "F_Choice Plum A321", "F_Choice Plum B213", "F_Choice Plum B231", "F_Choice Plum B312", "F_Choice Plum B321", "F_Left Plum", "F_Cherry", "F_3-piece role", "F_Choice 1-piece A" + "F_BB", "F_Choice 1-piece B" + "F_BB", "F_Choice 1-piece C" + "F_BB", "F_Choice 1-piece D" + "F_BB", "F_Press role" + "F_BB", "F_Reach look role" + "F_BB" is won, it is determined that the game will move to the advantageous zone. However, in normal (non-advantageous) RT2, regardless of the results of the lottery, it will not be determined that you will move to the advantageous zone.

If a decision is made to transition to a favorable zone in the normal (non-favorable zone), the next game will transition to the normal (favorable zone). The conditions for the end of the favorable zone include: (i) when the number of continuing games in the favorable zone reaches its upper limit (favorable zone counter = 4000); (ii) when the difference counter becomes 2400 greater than the value at the start of the favorable zone; (iii) when the first pseudo-bonus gaming state (BG) ends (excluding cases where a winning lottery is drawn during a RUSH or when a RUSH promotion lottery is won during the bonus gaming state (BG)); (iv) when the second pseudo-bonus gaming state (BC) ends (excluding cases where a winning lottery is drawn during a RUSH or when a RUSH promotion lottery is won during the bonus gaming state (BC)); and (v) when the gaming state (RUSH) ends.

When a transition from a non-advantageous zone to an advantageous zone is determined, the value of the advantageous zone counter is set to the initial value "0." The advantageous zone counter is incremented by 1 for each subsequent game in the advantageous zone, and when the advantageous zone counter value reaches 4000, the next game will be played in a non-advantageous zone.

Furthermore, when a transition from a non-advantageous zone to an advantageous zone is determined, the value of the difference number counter is set to its initial value (for example, initial value = 11,849 in pachislot machine 1, the second gaming machine). For each subsequent game in the advantageous zone, the number of medals inserted per game (for pachislot machine 1, the second gaming machine, number of medals inserted per game = 3) is subtracted from the value of the difference number counter, and the number of medals actually paid out is added to the value of the difference number counter. Note that the number of medals paid out is set to 0 in a game in which "RP" is awarded as a payout, and the number of medals inserted per game is set to 0 in the game following a game in which "RP" is awarded as a payout, and the difference number counter is updated. If the updated value of the difference number counter exceeds the initial value + a specified value (for example, specified value = 2,400 in pachislot machine 1, the second gaming machine), the next game will be played in the non-advantageous zone.

In this embodiment, when the advantageous zone shifts, one scenario is selected from multiple types of scenarios (scenario 01 to scenario 48), and the advantageous zone is operated based on the selected scenario.
(a) Number of MAP games (number of games for one MAP),
(b) Number of ceiling maps (number of maps until the ceiling is reached);
(c) Total number of GSBs (maximum number of pseudo single bonuses (pseudo single bonuses won during the general draw) in the advantageous zone),
(d) TS type used to select the premonition transition lottery table;
(e) a compensation level indicating the ease of transition to a compensation mode, which will be described later;
(f) TY value_pseudo BNS initial value, which indicates the initial upper limit of the number of navigations (number of notifications of advantageous push orders) allowed in the first and second pseudo bonus game states (BG, BC) of the advantageous zone;
(g) The values of the items (a) to (g) of the TY value_RUSH initial value, which indicate the initial upper limit of the number of navigations allowed during the game state (RUSH) of the advantageous zone, are predetermined (see the scenario-related table shown in FIG. 277 for an example). The number of MAP games is the number of times that a winning role of a winning role name belonging to the winning role group of the winning role group name "selection role" of the winning role group number "1" has been won, and when a winning role of a winning role name belonging to the winning role group of the winning role group name "selection role" has been won a number of times (number of MAP games) determined according to the type of scenario in each MAP, the game will move to the next MAP in the scenario. The ceiling MAP number is the MAP number at which the ceiling is set to forcibly transition to the first or second pseudo bonus game state (BG, BC) or game state (RUSH). For example, if the ceiling MAP number is set to "2", the second MAP becomes the ceiling MAP, and when the ceiling MAP ends, even if the premonition transition lottery is not won, the game will be forcibly transitioned to the first or second pseudo bonus game state (BG, BC) or game state (RUSH).

The initial upper limit (TY value_pseudo-BNS initial value) of the number of navigations (number of times an advantageous push order is announced) allowed in the first and second pseudo-bonus gaming states (BG, BC) is determined according to the type of scenario, which means that the total number of gaming media (medals) awarded in the first and second pseudo-bonus gaming states (BG, BC) is roughly determined according to the type of scenario. Similarly, the initial upper limit (TY value_RUSH initial value) of the number of navigations allowed in the gaming state (RUSH) is determined according to the type of scenario, which means that the total number of gaming media (medals) awarded in the gaming state (RUSH) is roughly determined according to the type of scenario. Furthermore, the upper limit (total GSB count) of pseudo single bonuses (pseudo single bonuses won during normal play) is determined by the type of scenario, which means that the total number of gaming media (medals) awarded by pseudo single bonuses during normal play (advantageous zone) is roughly determined by the type of scenario. In other words, the upper limit of gaming media (medals) awarded during the advantageous zone is roughly determined by the type of scenario.

Furthermore, in the final game of the ceiling MAP, the game transitions to the first or second pseudo-bonus game state (BG, BC) or game state (RUSH), and when that ends, the game transitions to a non-advantageous zone. Therefore, the upper limit of the number of continuing games in the advantageous zone is roughly determined by the number of MAP games and the number of ceiling MAPs determined according to the type of scenario. Once the upper limit of the number of continuing games in the advantageous zone is determined, the lower limit of the amount of gaming media that can be reduced in that advantageous zone can be managed. In other words, this second gaming machine, pachislot machine 1, is configured so that the upper limit of the amount of increase in gaming media and the lower limit of the amount of reduction can be roughly managed according to the type of scenario.

If it is decided to move to the advantageous zone, a scenario group lottery will be held using the scenario group lottery table shown in Figure 254. The scenario group lottery is a lottery that determines the type of scenario lottery table to be used in the scenario lottery, and this lottery will determine either scenario group A or scenario group B.

If it is determined that a transition to a favorable zone will occur, a scenario lottery is performed using the current setting (any of settings 1 to 6) of the scenario lottery table corresponding to the scenario group determined in the scenario group lottery (if scenario group A is determined in the scenario group lottery, the scenario lottery table for scenario group A, an example of which is shown in Figure 255, is used; if scenario group B is determined in the scenario group lottery, the scenario lottery table for scenario group B, an example of which is shown in Figure 256, is used). In this second gaming machine, pachislot machine 1, scenarios 01 to 48 are pre-defined as the scenario types (scenario numbers). In the scenario lottery table for scenario group A, the lottery value data is set so that one of scenarios 01 to 48 is selected, excluding scenario 05, scenario 07, scenario 08, scenario 21, scenario 22, scenario 24, scenario 27, scenarios 32 to 34, scenario 38, and scenario 45. On the other hand, in the scenario lottery table for scenario group B, lottery value data is set so that, out of scenarios 01 to 48, the scenario will be determined to be one of scenarios 05, 07, 08, 21, 22, 24, 27, 32 to 34, 38, or 45. The determined scenario number is stored in a scenario storage area set in main RAM 103.

If it is decided to move to the advantageous zone at RT0, a scenario rewrite lottery is held using the scenario rewrite lottery table shown in Figure 257. If the lottery decides to rewrite the scenario (if the lottery result is "Scenario 02"), the contents stored in the scenario memory area are rewritten. Specifically, in this embodiment, if it is decided to rewrite the scenario, the contents stored in the scenario memory area are rewritten to "Scenario 02".

If it is decided to move to a favorable zone, an initial AT level lottery is conducted using the scenario number portion stored in the scenario memory area of the initial AT level lottery table, an example of which is shown in Figure 265. The AT level determines the type of RUSH start navigation count lottery table used in the RUSH start navigation count lottery conducted when moving to the gaming state (RUSH). AT levels range from AT level 1 to AT level 7, and are determined to be one of AT level 1 to AT level 7 by the initial AT level lottery. The AT level determined by the initial AT level lottery is stored in the AT level memory area set in main RAM 103.

If it is determined that a transition to a favorable zone will occur, a high probability 1 map position lottery is conducted using the scenario number portion stored in the scenario memory area of the high probability 1 map position lottery table, an example of which is shown in Figure 258. Each of the one or more maps determined according to the scenario number is set to either low probability, high probability 1, high probability 2, or ceiling. For a map set to low probability, a low probability premonition transition lottery table (e.g., Figure 261) is used in the premonition transition lottery described below. For a map set to high probability 1, a high probability 1 premonition transition lottery table (e.g., Figure 262) is used in the premonition transition lottery. For a map set to high probability 2, a high probability 2 premonition transition lottery table (e.g., Figure 263) is used in the premonition transition lottery. For a map set to ceiling, a ceiling premonition transition lottery table (e.g., Figure 264) is used in the premonition transition lottery. The premonition transition lottery table for high probability 1 and the premonition transition lottery table for high probability 2 are both configured to make it easier to win the premonition transition lottery (winning either a BG premonition, BC premonition, RUSH premonition, or GSB consecutive premonition) than the premonition transition lottery table for low probability. In addition, the premonition transition lottery table for ceiling is configured to make it easier to win the premonition transition lottery than the premonition transition lottery table for low probability, the premonition transition lottery table for high probability 1, and the premonition transition lottery table for high probability 2.

The High Probability 1 Map Position Lottery determines which of the maps set according to the scenario number the High Probability 1 will be placed on. For example, if the lottery determines that the High Probability 1 will be placed on the second map (if the lottery result is "1st Time_02"), the High Probability 1 will be set on the second map.

If it is determined that a transition to a favorable zone will occur, a high probability 2 map position lottery is performed using the scenario number portion stored in the scenario memory area of the high probability 2 map position lottery table, an example of which is shown in Figure 259. The high probability 2 map position lottery determines which map, out of the number of maps set according to the type of scenario, the high probability 2 will be placed on. For example, if the lottery determines that the high probability 2 will be placed on the fourth map (if the lottery result is "2nd time_04"), the high probability 2 will be set on the fourth map.

In addition, of the number of maps determined according to the scenario number, all maps other than the high probability 1 map position determined by the high probability 1 map position lottery and the high probability 2 map position determined by the high probability 2 map position lottery are set to low probability except for the final map, and a ceiling is set for the final map.

Once the scenario number is determined, the number of MAP games set in the scenario number portion stored in the scenario memory area of the scenario-related data, an example of which is shown in Figure 277, is set in the MAP game number counter provided in the main RAM 103. Furthermore, the "TY value_pseudo BNS initial value" set in the scenario number portion stored in the scenario memory area of the scenario-related data, an example of which is shown in Figure 277, is set in the "TY value_pseudo BNS" memory area provided in the main RAM 103. Furthermore, the "TY value_RUSH initial value" set in the scenario number portion stored in the scenario memory area of the scenario-related data, an example of which is shown in Figure 277, is set in the "TY value_RUSH" memory area provided in the main RAM 103. Furthermore, the "GSB total number of times" set in the scenario number portion stored in the scenario memory area of the scenario-related data, an example of which is shown in Figure 277, is set in the GSB remaining number of times counter provided in the main RAM 103. In addition, the "TS type" set in the scenario number portion stored in the scenario storage area of the scenario-related data, an example of which is shown in Figure 277, is set in the TS type storage area provided in the main RAM 103. In addition, the "compensation level" set in the scenario number portion stored in the scenario storage area of the scenario-related data, an example of which is shown in Figure 277, is set in the compensation level storage area provided in the main RAM 103.

In addition, once the scenario number, high probability 1 map position, and high probability 2 map position are determined, a list of maps to be used during the advantageous zone is generated based on the scenario number. For example, the high probability 1 map position determined by the high probability 1 map position lottery is set in the "high probability 1 map position" memory area of the map list memory area provided in main RAM 103, and the high probability 2 map position determined by the high probability 2 map position lottery is set in the "high probability 2 map position" memory area of the map list memory area provided in main RAM 103. In addition, the value of the "ceiling map number" set for the scenario number is set in the "ceiling map position" memory area of the map list memory area provided in main RAM 103. Furthermore, the "MAP type" storage area is set to "High Probability 1" if "1" is set in the "High Probability 1 MAP location" storage area, "High Probability 2" if "1" is set in the "High Probability 2 MAP location" storage area, "Ceiling" if "1" is set in the "Ceiling MAP location" storage area, and "Low Probability" in all other cases.

The MAP list storage area includes a "MAP type" storage area, a "High probability 1 MAP position" storage area, a "High probability 2 MAP position" storage area, and a "Ceiling MAP position" storage area. For example, if the MAP position for High probability 1 determined in the High probability 1 MAP position lottery is 2 (lottery result is "1st time_02"), and the MAP position for High probability 2 determined in the High probability 2 MAP position lottery is 4 (lottery result is "2nd time_04"), and the ceiling MAP number is 14, then "2" is set in the "High probability 1 MAP position" storage area of the MAP list storage area, "4" is set in the "High probability 2 MAP position" storage area, and "14" is set in the "Ceiling MAP position" storage area. The "MAP type" storage area is set to the state set for the MAP in which the game is progressing (either Low probability, High probability 1, High probability 2, or Ceiling). In this case, in the first game that transitions to the normal medium (advantageous zone), since it is the first MAP (low probability), "low probability" is set in the "MAP type" memory area. When transitioning to the next MAP, one is subtracted from the values of the "High Probability 1 MAP Position" memory area, the "High Probability 2 MAP Position" memory area, and the "Ceiling MAP Position" memory area, and if the value of the "High Probability 1 MAP Position" memory area after subtraction of one is "1", "High Probability 1" is set in the "MAP type" memory area, if the value of the "High Probability 2 MAP Position" memory area after subtraction of one is "1", "High Probability 2" is set in the "MAP type" memory area, if the value of the "Ceiling MAP Position" memory area after subtraction of one is "1", "Ceiling" is set in the "MAP type" memory area, and otherwise "Low Probability" is set in the "MAP type" memory area. Therefore, in the next map (second map), the value of the "High Probability 1 MAP Location" memory area is "1," the value of the "High Probability 2 MAP Location" memory area is "3," and the value of the "Ceiling MAP Location" memory area is "13," and "High Probability 1" is set in the "MAP Type" memory area. In other words, each time you move to the next map, the values set in the "High Probability 1 MAP Location" memory area, the "High Probability 2 MAP Location" memory area, and the "Ceiling MAP Position" memory area are decremented by one. When the value of the "Ceiling MAP Position" memory area becomes "1," it becomes the final map (14th map), and "Ceiling" is set in the "MAP Type" memory area. Furthermore, when moving to the next map, the map game count (Fig. 277) corresponding to the scenario number is reset in the map game count counter.

Furthermore, after it is determined that a transition to the advantageous zone will occur and a "compensation level" based on the scenario-related data, an example of which is shown in FIG. 277, is set in the compensation level memory area, as an initial setting related to the compensation mode described below. If the "compensation level" set in the compensation level memory area based on the scenario-related data, an example of which is shown in FIG. 277, is other than "compensation level 0," the value in the compensation level memory area is decremented by one. Furthermore, the compensation mode permission flag, which specifies whether transition to compensation mode is permitted or prohibited, is set to "permitted." The compensation mode management game number counter, which is used to increase the compensation mode, is set to the specified number of selections for compensation mode (80 in this embodiment). Furthermore, the compensation mode management flag is set to wait for transition to compensation mode. The compensation mode permission flag, compensation mode management game number counter, and compensation mode management flag are each set in a designated memory area in the main RAM 103.

(General (advantageous zone))
If a transition to a favorable zone is determined in the normal (non-favorable zone), the game transitions to the normal (favorable zone) from the next game. In the normal (favorable zone), a premonition transition lottery is basically conducted for each game using a premonition transition lottery table (e.g., Figures 261 to 264). The premonition transition lottery results include "miss,""BGpremonition,""BCpremonition,""RUSHpremonition," and "GSB consecutive premonition," and one of these is determined by the lottery. If the lottery determines a "BG premonition," the game transitions to premonition A, which will be described later, and then transitions to the first pseudo-bonus game state (BG) after premonition A ends. If the lottery determines a "BC premonition," the game transitions to premonition A, which will be described later, and then transitions to the second pseudo-bonus game state (BC) after premonition C ends. If the lottery determines that the result is a "RUSH precursor," the game will transition to precursor A, which will be described later, and then transition to the game state (RUSH) after the end of precursor A. If the lottery determines that the result is a "GSB consecutive precursor," the game will transition to precursor B, which will be described later, and then transition to the game state (RUSH) or the normal state (advantageous zone) after the end of precursor B.

The premonition transition lottery is conducted using the winning role group number portion of the premonition transition lottery table provided for the TS type set in the TS type memory area and the MAP type set in the "MAP type" memory area to which the winning role for that game belongs. Here, a winning role number is determined using the internal lottery table, an example of which is shown in Figures 251(a)-(c). Furthermore, a winning role group number is determined from the determined winning role number using the correspondence table of winning role numbers, winning role names, and winning role group numbers, an example of which is shown in Figure 248. The determined winning role group number is used in the premonition transition lottery. For example, if "TS type 0" is set in the TS type storage area, "high probability 1" is set in the "MAP type" storage area, and the winning role for the game belongs to winning role group number "1", the premonition transition lottery will be conducted using the winning role group number "1" portion of the premonition transition lottery table for TS type 0 and high probability 1 (an example of the TS type 0 premonition transition lottery table for high probability 1 is shown in Figure 262).

(Omen transition lottery: When the map type is other than "ceiling")
When the MAP type is other than "ceiling," if the result of the premonition transition lottery is "BG premonition" or "BC premonition," the value of the "TY value_pseudo BNS" memory area is compared with the "TY value_BC transition subtraction value." Here, if the value of the "TY value_pseudo BNS" memory area is less than the "TY value_BC transition subtraction value," the lottery result is discarded. The "TY value_BC transition subtraction value" is "34" in this second gaming machine, pachislot machine 1, and this value is stored in advance in main ROM 102.

When the MAP type is other than "ceiling" and the result of the premonition transition lottery is "RUSH premonition," the value in the "TY value_RUSH" memory area is compared with the "TY value_RUSH threshold." If the value in the "TY value_RUSH" memory area is less than the "TY value_RUSH threshold," the lottery result is discarded. The "TY value_RUSH threshold" in this second gaming machine, pachislot machine 1, is "48," and this value is stored in advance in main ROM 102.

When the map type is other than "ceiling," if the result of the premonition transition lottery is "GSB consecutive premonition," the GSB remaining number counter is referenced. Here, if the value of the GSB remaining number counter is "0," the lottery result is discarded. Also, if "Premonition B" is set in the ball output status memory area, the lottery result is discarded. The ball output status memory area is set in a specified memory area of the main RAM 103.

When the map type is other than "ceiling," if the result of the premonition transition lottery is a winning lottery (either "BG premonition," "BC premonition," "RUSH premonition," or "GSB consecutive premonition"), and the lottery result is not discarded as described above, the lottery result will be set in the "Premonition type_general" memory area.

(Omen transition lottery: When the map type is "ceiling")
When the MAP type is "ceiling" and the premonition transition lottery is won ("RUSH premonition"), first, the value of the "TY value_pseudo BNS" memory area and the value of the GSB remaining number counter are added to the value of the "TY value_RUSH" memory area. After the addition, the value of the "TY value_pseudo BNS" memory area and the value of the GSB remaining number counter are cleared.

If the value in the "TY value_RUSH" memory area after the addition is equal to or greater than the "TY value_RUSH threshold," "RUSH precursor" is set in the "sign type_general medium" memory area. If the value in the "TY value_RUSH" memory area after the addition is less than the "TY value_RUSH threshold" and equal to or greater than the "TY value_BC threshold," "BC precursor" is set in the "sign type_general medium" memory area. The "TY value_BC threshold" is "34" in this second gaming machine, pachislot machine 1, and this value is stored in advance in main ROM 102. If the value in the "TY value_RUSH" memory area after the addition is less than the "TY value_BC threshold" and equal to or greater than the "TY value_BG threshold," "BG precursor" is set in the "sign type_general medium" memory area. The "TY value_BG threshold" is "7" in this second gaming machine, pachislot machine 1, and this value is stored in advance in the main ROM 102. Note that when the MAP type is "ceiling" and the premonition transition lottery is won ("RUSH premonition"), if the compensation mode management flag described below is "in compensation mode," "RUSH premonition" is set in the "premonition type_general medium" memory area regardless of the value in the "TY value_RUSH" memory area after the addition. Furthermore, if a RUSH premonition, BC premonition, or BG premonition is not set in the "premonition type_general medium" memory area, the result of the premonition transition lottery is discarded.

If the result of the premonition transition lottery is a winning lottery (either "BG premonition," "BC premonition," "RUSH premonition," or "GSB consecutive premonition") and the lottery result is not discarded in the above (premonition transition lottery: when the MAP type is other than "ceiling") or the above (premonition transition lottery: when the MAP type is "ceiling"), a premonition game number lottery will be held using the premonition type portion ("BG_general," "BC_general," "GSB consecutive_general," or "RUSH_general") stored in the "premonition type_general" memory area of the premonition game number lottery table, an example of which is shown in Figure 267. In the premonition game number lottery table, an example of which is shown in Figure 267, the "XX" premonition in "XX_General" corresponds to the premonition stored in the "Omen Type_General Medium" memory area, and the "□□" premonition and blowout standby in "□□_RUSH Medium" correspond to the premonition and blowout standby stored in the "Omen Type_RUSH Medium" memory area. The result of the lottery is set in the premonition game number counter set in the main RAM 103. The premonition game number counter manages the remaining number of wins for the winning role of the winning role name belonging to the winning role group with the winning role group name "Selected Role".

In this case, if either "BC Premonition," "BG Premonition," or "RUSH Premonition" is set in the "Omen Type_General" memory area, "Omen A" is set in the ball payout state memory area. This will cause the game to transition to the game state (Omen A) from the next game.

In this case, if "GSB consecutive sign" is set in the "sign type_general" memory area, "sign B" is set in the ball output status memory area. At this time, rank 1 is set in the GSB consecutive rank memory area. Also, if the value of the GSB remaining number counter is greater than the GSB consecutive display limit, a GSB consecutive rank lottery is held using the GSB consecutive rank lottery table, an example of which is shown in Figure 260. As a result of this lottery, the GSB consecutive rank is determined to be one of ranks 1 to 4. The result of this lottery is set in the GSB consecutive rank memory area. However, if the value in the "TY value_RUSH" memory area is less than the "TY value_RUSH threshold", the set GSB consecutive rank will be rewritten to rank 1 only if it is rank 4.

In this case, if the value of the premonition game number counter set by the premonition game number lottery is 0, the GSB display permission flag is set to "GSB display allowed."

(If you reach the ceiling without winning the premonition transition lottery)
When a winning role of a winning role name belonging to a winning role group of the winning role group name "selection role" is won and the GSB display permission flag, which will be described in detail later, is 1 or less, the MAP game number counter is decremented by 1. When the final game of the MAP type "ceiling" is reached without winning in the premonition transition lottery (when the value of the MAP game number counter becomes 0 for a MAP with a MAP type of "ceiling"), the ceiling is reached. When the ceiling is reached, first, the value of the "TY value_pseudo BNS" memory area and the value of the GSB remaining number counter are added to the value of the "TY value_RUSH" memory area. After the addition, the value of the "TY value_pseudo BNS" memory area and the value of the GSB remaining number counter are cleared.

If the value in the "TY value_RUSH" storage area after the addition is equal to or greater than the "TY value_RUSH threshold," "RUSH precursor" is set in the "sign type_general medium" storage area. If the value in the "TY value_RUSH" storage area after the addition is less than the "TY value_RUSH threshold" but equal to or greater than the "TY value_BC threshold," "BC precursor" is set in the "sign type_general medium" storage area. If the value in the "TY value_RUSH" storage area after the addition is less than the "TY value_BC threshold" but equal to or greater than the "TY value_BG threshold," "BG precursor" is set in the "sign type_general medium" storage area. Note that if the compensation mode management flag is "Compensation mode in" when the ceiling is reached, "RUSH precursor" is set in the "sign type_general medium" storage area regardless of the value in the "TY value_RUSH" storage area after the addition.

If "BC Premonition," "BG Premonition," or "RUSH Premonition" is set in the "Omen Type - General" memory area, "Omen A" is set in the payout status memory area. This causes the game to transition to the game state (Omen A) from the next game. If "Omen A" is set in the payout status memory area and the GSB display permission flag is 1 or less, the GSB display permission flag, GSB consecutive rank, and number of GSB displays during Omen B are cleared. The GSB display permission flag determines whether or not to allow the display of stop symbols to notify the player of the transition to a pseudo single bonus (GSB) when a winning combination with a winning combination name belonging to the winning combination group with the winning combination group name "Selection." If the GSB display permission flag is 0, GSB display is prohibited. If the GSB display permission flag is 1, display is permitted. Furthermore, when the GSB display permission flag is 2, it indicates the state after the stopped symbols related to the transition to GSB have stopped (during GSB). The GSB display permission flag, GSB consecutive rank, and number of GSB displays during premonition B are each set in a predetermined storage area of the main RAM 103. The GSB consecutive rank and number of GSB displays during premonition B will be described later.

When "Omen A" is set in the payout status memory area, a lottery is conducted for the number of premonition games using the portion corresponding to the memory contents of the "Omen Type - General Medium" memory area of the number of premonition games lottery table, an example of which is shown in Figure 267 (BG_General for BG omen, BC_General for BC omen, RUSH_General for RUSH omen, GSB_General for GSB consecutive omen). The result of this lottery is set in the number of premonition games counter set in main RAM 103.

In addition, if a winning role with a winning role name belonging to the winning role group with the winning role group name "Selected Role" is won and the GSB display permission flag is 1 or less, the MAP game number counter will be decremented by 1. If the MAP game number counter value reaches 0 for a MAP with a MAP type of "High Probability 1", "High Probability 2", or "Ceiling", if the MAP type is "High Probability 1", the MAP end flag will be set to "High Probability 1 End", if the MAP type is "High Probability 2", the MAP end flag will be set to "High Probability 2 End", and if the MAP type is "Ceiling", the MAP end flag will be set to "Ceiling End".

In addition, if a winning role with a winning role name belonging to the winning role group with the winning role group name "Selected Role" is won and the GSB display permission flag is 1 or less, the MAP game number counter will be decremented by 1. If the MAP game count counter value reaches 0 for a MAP with a MAP type of "Low Probability," "High Probability 1," or "High Probability 2," the values in the "High Probability 1 MAP Location" memory area, the "High Probability 2 MAP Location" memory area, and the "Ceiling MAP Location" memory area are each decremented by one. If the value in the "High Probability 1 MAP Location" memory area after decrementing by one is "1," the "MAP Type" memory area is set to "High Probability 1." If the value in the "High Probability 2 MAP Location" memory area after decrementing by one is "1," the "MAP Type" memory area is set to "High Probability 2." If the value in the "Ceiling MAP Location" memory area after decrementing by one is "1," the "MAP Type" memory area is set to "Ceiling." Otherwise, the "MAP Type" memory area is set to "Low Probability." In this case, the MAP game count counter is reset to the number of MAP games corresponding to the scenario number of the advantageous zone (see the scenario-related data shown as an example in FIG. 277).

(Processing when a specific map ends)
In the final game of a MAP with high probability 1, the MAP end flag is set to "High probability 1 end." When the MAP end flag is set to "High probability 1 end" during normal play (advantageous zone), the value in the pseudo BNS column is obtained from the TY value_addition 1 data table, an example of which is shown in FIG. 278, stored in the main ROM 102, and the value is added to "TY value_pseudo BNS." The value in the RUSH column is obtained and the value is added to "TY value_RUSH," and the MAP end flag is cleared. Note that the TY value_addition 1 data table specifies the pseudo BNS add-on value and the RUSH add-on value for each scenario number, and the add-on value corresponding to the scenario number of the advantageous zone is obtained.

In the final play of a 2 high probability map, the map end flag is set to "2 high probability end." When the map end flag is set to "2 high probability end" during normal play (favorable zone), the value in the pseudo BNS column is obtained from the TY value_addition 2 data table, an example of which is shown in Figure 279, stored in main ROM 102, and this value is added to "TY value_pseudo BNS." The value in the RUSH column is obtained and this value is added to "TY value_RUSH," and the map end flag is cleared. The TY value_addition 2 data table specifies the pseudo BNS add-on value and RUSH add-on value for each scenario number, and the add-on value corresponding to the scenario number of the favorable zone is obtained.

At the final play of the ceiling map, the map end flag is set to "ceiling end." At this time, a request to end the advantageous zone is set in the payout status memory area.

(others)
During the normal (advantageous zone), if the result of the role lottery is a winning role with the winning role name "F_Cherry" belonging to the winning role group with the winning role group name "Normal Cherry" of the winning role group number "3", a default cherry rewrite lottery will be held using the default cherry rewrite lottery table, an example of which is shown in Figure 276. If the lottery is a winning lottery (if the winning result is "default cherry rewrite"), the role lottery result will be rewritten to the winning role group name "Default Cherry" of the winning role group number "4". In addition, if the winning role group with the winning role group name "normal cherry" and the winning role group number "3" is rewritten to the winning role group with the winning role group name "standard cherry" and the winning role group number "4" by the specified cherry rewrite lottery, the winning role group number "4" part of each table will be used in the premonition transition lottery, AT level promotion lottery, etc.

If the premonition transition lottery is not won (missed) during the general period (advantageous zone), or if the lottery result is discarded despite a winning draw, an AT level promotion lottery will be held using the winning role group number portion related to the winning role for that game in the AT level promotion lottery table, an example of which is shown in Figure 266. Here, the winning role number is determined using the internal lottery table, an example of which is shown in Figures 251(a)-(c). Furthermore, the winning role group number is determined from the determined winning role number using the correspondence table of winning role numbers, winning role names, and winning role group numbers, an example of which is shown in Figure 248. The determined winning role group number is used in the AT level promotion lottery. If the lottery is won (if the lottery result is "promotion"), the value in the "AT level" storage area in main RAM 103 is incremented by one. However, the upper limit for the AT level is 7, and no further increments will be made.

(Compensation mode related)
In this second gaming machine, the pachislot machine 1, when a predetermined compensation mode transition condition is met, the machine transitions to the compensation mode. When transitioning to the compensation mode, the value of the compensation point counter is set to 0, and then the increase or decrease in the gaming media is counted by the compensation point counter. If a predetermined sign (BG sign, BC sign, RUSH sign: "sign type_general middle") is drawn in the sign transition lottery during the compensation mode in the general (advantageous zone), regardless of which sign is drawn, the "sign type_general middle" is set as the RUSH sign. In the gaming state (RUSH) transitioned from the RUSH sign, the "TY_RUSH" and the "RUSH navigation number counter" are not decremented until the value of the compensation point counter becomes greater than 0. Even if a GSB consecutive sign ("sign type_general") is drawn in the sign transition lottery during the compensation mode in the normal (advantageous zone), and the game state (RUSH) is subsequently transitioned to, the "TY_RUSH" and "RUSH navigation number counter" are not decremented in the game state (RUSH) transitioned from the RUSH sign until the value of the compensation point counter becomes greater than 0. In other words, if the game state (RUSH) is transitioned to during the compensation mode, the game state (RUSH) is configured not to end until the game media (medals) lost during the compensation mode are paid out. The main control circuit 100 also manages the compensation mode as a game state.

As described above, if it is decided to transition to the advantageous zone, the compensation mode permission flag is set to "permitted," and the "specified number of selection roles for compensation mode (80)" is set in the compensation mode management game number counter. During the general (advantageous zone), if the result of the role lottery is a winning role with a winning role name belonging to the winning role group with the winning role group name "selection role," and the compensation mode permission flag is set to "permitted," a compensation mode transition lottery is held using the compensation level portion stored in the compensation level memory area of the compensation mode transition lottery table, an example of which is shown in Figure 273. If the result of the lottery is "transition to compensation mode," the compensation mode management flag is set to "in compensation mode."

Furthermore, if the result of the compensation mode transition lottery is "Transition to compensation mode," an initial AT level lottery is conducted using the scenario number portion stored in the scenario memory area of the initial AT level lottery table, an example of which is shown in Figure 265. The AT level determined by the initial AT level lottery is stored in the AT level memory area set in main RAM 103.

In addition, during the general (advantageous zone), if the result of the role lottery is a winning role with a winning role name belonging to the winning role group with the winning role group name "Selected Role" and the compensation mode permission flag is set to "Permitted," the value of the compensation mode management game number counter is decremented by one each time. Then, if the value of the compensation mode management game number counter becomes 0, the value of the compensation mode management game number counter is again set to the "specified number of selected roles for compensation mode (80 times)," and various processes related to the compensation mode are performed. For example, if the compensation mode management flag is "in compensation mode" when the value of the compensation mode management game number counter is reset, a compensation mode AT level promotion lottery is performed using the AT level portion stored in the AT level memory area of the compensation mode AT level promotion lottery table, an example of which is shown in FIG. 274. If the lottery is won (if the lottery result is "promotion"), the value stored in the AT level storage area will be rewritten to a value incremented by one.

Also, when the value of the compensation mode management game number counter is reset, if the compensation mode management flag is "in compensation mode," a compensation mode navigation count lottery is conducted using the AT level portion stored in the AT level memory area of the compensation mode navigation count lottery table, an example of which is shown in Figure 275. The lottery result (number of navigations) is added to the compensation mode RUSH navigation count counter. The compensation mode RUSH navigation count counter is located in a specified memory area of the main RAM 103.

Furthermore, when the value of the game number counter for compensation mode management is reset, if the compensation mode management flag is set to "compensation mode transition permitted" and compensation level 7 is stored in the compensation level memory area, the compensation mode management flag is set to "compensation mode in progress." In such a case, an initial AT level lottery is performed using the scenario number portion stored in the scenario memory area of the initial AT level lottery table, an example of which is shown in FIG. 265. The AT level determined by the initial AT level lottery is stored in the AT level memory area set in main RAM 103. On the other hand, when the value of the game number counter for compensation mode management is reset, if the contents stored in the compensation mode memory area are compensation level 6 or lower, the contents stored in the compensation mode memory area are rewritten to a compensation level obtained by adding 1 to the compensation level.

Also, when the value of the compensation mode management game number counter is reset, if the compensation mode management flag was set to "Waiting for compensation mode transition," the compensation mode management flag will be set to "Compensation mode transition permitted."

As described above, in this second gaming machine, pachislot machine 1, in a game in which a winning role with a winning role name belonging to the winning role group with the winning role group name "selected role" is won during the general play (advantageous zone), a compensation mode transition lottery is conducted using the compensation level portion stored in the compensation level memory area of the compensation mode transition lottery table, an example of which is shown in Figure 273, and if the lottery is won, the machine will transition to compensation mode (compensation mode management flag). Even if the lottery continues without a winning combination, the compensation mode is incremented by one each time the number of times a winning combination of a winning combination name belonging to the winning combination group of the winning combination group name "Selection combination" reaches the "specified number of selection combinations for compensation mode (80 times)." As a result, when the compensation level reaches "7," the system is configured to transition to compensation mode (compensation mode management flag) in the next game in which a winning combination of a winning combination of a winning combination name belonging to the winning combination group of the winning combination group name "Selection combination" is won.

When the compensation mode management flag is set to "Compensation Mode", the compensation point counter is updated for each game by referencing the compensation point number data table, examples of which are shown in Figures 280 and 281. The compensation point number data table consists of an AT compensation point number data table, an example of which is shown in Figure 281, which is used in game states where an advantageous press order is announced when a press order role in which the number of game media (medals) paid out varies depending on the press order (from "F_Selection Plum A213" with winning role number "5" to "F_Selection Plum B321" with winning role number "12": see Figure 252), and a non-AT compensation point number data table, an example of which is shown in Figure 280, which is used in game states where an advantageous press order is not announced even if a press order role is won. The AT compensation point number data table is used, for example, for every game of "BG (first pseudo bonus game state (BG))" or "BC (second pseudo bonus game state (BC))", and when "RUSH (game state (RUSH))" and "omen B (game state (omen B))" are set in the ball output state memory area, and in games where the GSB display permission flag is set to "GSB in progress". In other games, the non-AT compensation point number data table is basically referenced and the compensation point counter is updated.

The compensation point number data table associates winning role numbers with compensation points (expected payout numbers of gaming media (medals)), and is pre-stored in main ROM 102. For example, in a game in which a favorable push order is announced when a push order role ("F_Selection Plum 213") is won, it is expected that the announcement will be followed. In this case, since 15 medals are expected to be paid out, 15 is associated with "F_Selection Plum 213 (winning role number 5)" in the AT compensation point number table. On the other hand, in a game in which a favorable push order is not announced when a push order role ("F_Selection Plum 213") is won, the stop button 8L is operated in a push order in which the first stop is left reel 3L, and therefore 1 is associated with "F_Selection Plum 213 (winning role number 5)" in the non-AT compensation point number table. Furthermore, in this embodiment, if a stop operation other than the first left stop is performed during non-AT play, an irregular hitting penalty is imposed, resulting in less favorable treatment than if the stop operation were performed on the first left stop in terms of AT-related judgments, lotteries, and value updates. Therefore, during non-AT play (games where no hitting order instructions have been issued), the recommended stop operation is performed on the first left stop, and the push order role (F_Select Plum role with winning role numbers 5 to 12) in Figure 280 is assigned a compensation point of 1, which is equivalent to the 1-coin role (see Figure 253) that will be won if the game is played on the first left stop. Note that the irregular hitting penalty only occurs in games that win push order roles, and may not occur in the case of winning roles where the payoff does not change depending on the push order (for example, a replay role or an F_Reach Eye role), or it may occur regardless of the winning role during non-AT play.

In a game where the compensation mode management flag is "in compensation mode," three game media (medals), the number of game media required to play one game, are subtracted from the compensation point counter for each game. A compensation point number data table corresponding to the game state, such as AT or non-AT, is referenced, and the compensation point number (expected number of medals to be paid out) corresponding to the winning combination number is added to the compensation point counter, updating the compensation point counter. In other words, this second gaming machine, pachislot machine 1, references the compensation point number data table to predict the number of medals that will actually be paid out based on whether or not a favorable push order is notified, and then counts the actual increase or decrease in medals during compensation mode using the compensation point counter. In other words, the value of the compensation point counter corresponds to the increase or decrease in medals during compensation mode.

(Omen A)
If the result of the sign transition lottery is one of "BG sign,""BCsign," or "RUSH sign," and the result is set in the "sign type_general" memory area, "sign A" is set in the ball payout state memory area. When "sign A" is set in the ball payout state memory area, the game transitions to the game state (sign A) from the next game. The game state (sign A) basically continues for the number of games determined by the sign game number lottery, and then transitions to a game state (first or second pseudo bonus game state (BG, BC), game state (RUSH)) according to the lottery result of the sign transition lottery. Note that when the final game in the game state (sign A) is completed, a pseudo game using each reel is played. In this pseudo game, the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R are stopped so that the display numbers corresponding to the game state to which the game is to be transitioned are finally displayed, thereby informing the player of the game state to which the game is to be transitioned. Various processes in the game state (sign A) will be described below.

In game mode (Omen A), if the result of the role lottery is a winning role for a winning role with a winning role name belonging to the winning role group with the winning role group name "Selected Role", and the GSB display permission flag is set to anything other than "GSB in progress", the value of the premonition game number counter will be decremented by one.

In the game state (Omen A), if "BG Omen" or "BC Omen" is set in the "Omen Type_General" memory area, a RUSH promotion lottery is conducted for each play using the winning role group number portion of the RUSH promotion lottery table, an example of which is shown in Figure 268, related to the winning role in that play. Here, the winning role number is determined using the internal lottery table shown in Figures 251(a)-(c). Furthermore, the winning role group number is determined from the determined winning role number using the correspondence table of winning role numbers, winning role names, and winning role group numbers shown in Figure 248, and the determined winning role group number is used in the RUSH promotion lottery. If the lottery result is "RUSH Omen," the value in the "TY Value_RUSH" memory area at the time of the lottery is referenced. Here, if the value in the "TY value_RUSH" storage area is less than the "TY value_RUSH threshold (48)", the lottery result is discarded. On the other hand, if the value in the "TY value_RUSH" storage area is equal to or greater than the "TY value_RUSH threshold (48)", the contents stored in the "Omen type_General medium" storage area are rewritten to "RUSH omen".

(MAP management)
The MAP generated based on the scenario number also progresses in the game state (omen A). Basically, in a game in which the result of the role lottery is a winning role with a winning role name belonging to the winning role group with the winning role group name "selection role," the MAP advances by one game, and when the number of MAP games determined according to the scenario number (for example, 40 for scenario number "01") is reached, the game moves to the next MAP. Here, if the MAP is high probability 1 ("MAP type" = "high probability 1") and it is the final game, the MAP end flag is set to "high probability 1 end." In the game state (sign A), when the MAP end flag is set to "High probability 1 end," as in the normal state (advantageous zone), the value in the pseudo BNS column is obtained from the TY value_addition 1 data table, an example of which is shown in FIG. 278, stored in the main ROM 102, and this value is added to "TY value_pseudo BNS," and the value in the RUSH column is obtained and this value is added to "TY value_RUSH." Note that the TY value_addition 1 data table specifies the pseudo BNS add-on value and RUSH add-on value for each scenario number, and the add-on value corresponding to the scenario number of the advantageous zone is obtained.

Furthermore, if the MAP progresses to a high probability 2 ("MAP type" = "High probability 2") and the final game of the high probability 2 MAP is determined, the MAP end flag is set to "High probability 2 end." When the MAP end flag is set to "High probability 2 end" in the game state (omen A), the value in the pseudo BNS column is obtained from the TY value_addition 2 data table, an example of which is shown in Figure 279, stored in main ROM 102, just as in the normal mode (favorable zone), and this value is added to "TY value_pseudo BNS." At the same time, the value in the RUSH column is obtained and added to "TY value_RUSH." The TY value_addition 2 data table specifies the pseudo BNS add-on value and RUSH add-on value for each scenario number, and the add-on value corresponding to the scenario number of the favorable zone is obtained.

Furthermore, if the result of the map progression in the game state (premonition A) is that the map in question is the final game of a map other than the ceiling ("MAP type" = "Ceiling"), the values of the "High Probability 1 MAP Position" memory area, the "High Probability 2 MAP Position" memory area, and the "Ceiling MAP Position" memory area are each decremented by one. If the value of the "High Probability 1 MAP Position" memory area after decrementing by one is "1," the "MAP Type" memory area is set to "High Probability 1." If the value of the "High Probability 2 MAP Position" memory area after decrementing by one is "1," the "MAP Type" memory area is set to "High Probability 2." If the value of the "Ceiling MAP Position" memory area after decrementing by one is "1," the "MAP Type" memory area is set to "Ceiling." Otherwise, the "MAP Type" memory area is set to "Low Probability." In this case, the MAP game count corresponding to the scenario number of the advantageous zone (see the scenario-related data shown as an example in FIG. 277) is reset to the MAP game count counter.

Furthermore, if the progress of the MAP in the game state (sign A) results in the MAP reaching the final game of the ceiling ("MAP type" = "ceiling"), the MAP end flag is set to "ceiling end." At this time, the value of the "TY value_pseudo BNS" memory area and the value of the GSB remaining count counter are first added to the value of the "TY value_RUSH" memory area. After the addition, the value of the "TY value_pseudo BNS" memory area and the value of the GSB remaining count counter are cleared.

If the value in the "TY value_RUSH" storage area after the addition is equal to or greater than the "TY value_RUSH threshold," "RUSH precursor" is set in the "sign type_general medium" storage area. If the value in the "TY value_RUSH" storage area after the addition is less than the "TY value_RUSH threshold" but equal to or greater than the "TY value_BC threshold," "BC precursor" is set in the "sign type_general medium" storage area. If the value in the "TY value_RUSH" storage area after the addition is less than the "TY value_BC threshold" but equal to or greater than the "TY value_BG threshold," "BG precursor" is set in the "sign type_general medium" storage area. Note that if the compensation mode management flag is "Compensation mode in" when the ceiling is reached, "RUSH precursor" is set in the "sign type_general medium" storage area regardless of the value in the "TY value_RUSH" storage area after the addition.

In the game state (omen A), an AT level promotion lottery is held for each game using the winning role group number portion related to the winning role in that game in the AT level promotion lottery table, an example of which is shown in Figure 266. Here, a winning role number is determined using the internal lottery table, an example of which is shown in Figures 251(a) to (c). Furthermore, a winning role group number is determined from the determined winning role number using the correspondence table of winning role numbers, winning role names, and winning role group numbers, an example of which is shown in Figure 248, and the determined winning role group number is used in the AT level promotion lottery. If the lottery is a winning lottery, the value in the "AT level" memory area provided in main RAM 103 is incremented by one.

When the value of the premonition game count counter reaches 0 in the game state (premonition A) (when the final game of the current MAP has been reached), and "BG premonition" is set in the "premonition type_general" memory area, "BG" is set in the payout state memory area. At this time, the "BG navigation count initial value" is set in the pseudo BNS navigation count counter. Also, if the value in the "TY value_pseudo BNS" memory area is not 0, "TY value_BG transition subtraction value (7)" is subtracted from the value in the "TY value_pseudo BNS" memory area. If the value in the "TY value_pseudo BNS" memory area is 0, "TY value_BG transition subtraction value (7)" is subtracted from the value in the "TY value_RUSH" memory area. Note that the "BG navigation count initial value" is "6" in this second gaming machine, pachislot machine 1, and is stored in advance in a specified memory area in main ROM 102.

When the value of the premonition game count counter reaches 0 in the gaming state (premonition A), if "BC premonition" is set in the "premonition type_general" memory area, "BC" is set in the ball payout state memory area. At this time, the "BC navigation count initial value" is set in the pseudo BNS navigation count counter. Also, if the value in the "TY value_pseudo BNS" memory area is not 0, "TY value_BC transition subtraction value (34)" is subtracted from the value in the "TY value_pseudo BNS" memory area. If the value in the "TY value_pseudo BNS" memory area is 0, "TY value_BC transition subtraction value (34)" is subtracted from the value in the "TY value_RUSH" memory area. Note that the "BC navigation count initial value" is "30" in this second gaming machine, pachislot machine 1, and is stored in advance in a specified memory area in main ROM 102.

When the value of the premonition game number counter reaches 0 in the gaming state (omen A), if "RUSH premonition" is set in the "omen type_general" memory area, "RUSH" is set in the payout state memory area. At this time, the "RUSH premonition management counter initial value" is set in the RUSH premonition management counter. The RUSH premonition management counter is provided in a predetermined memory area of the main RAM 103. In addition, the "RUSH premonition management counter initial value" is "75" in this second gaming machine, pachislot machine 1, and is stored in advance in a predetermined memory area of the main ROM 102. In addition, the GSB display permission flag is set to "GSB in progress", and "RUSH" is set in the "RUSH mid-type" memory area. "Rush intermediate type" can be "0: None" or "1: Rush", and the "Rush intermediate type" storage area is provided in a specified storage area of the main RAM 103.

Also, when "RUSH" is set in the payout status memory area in the game state (omen A), a lottery is held to determine the number of RUSH start navigations using the AT level portion stored in the "AT level" memory area of the RUSH start navigation number lottery table, an example of which is shown in Figure 269. The result of this lottery is set in the RUSH navigation number counter. However, if the memory content of the "MAP type" memory area is "ceiling" when "RUSH" is set in the payout status memory area, the value of the "TY value_RUSH" memory area is set in the RUSH navigation number counter. The RUSH navigation number counter is provided in a designated memory area of the main RAM 103.

In the gaming state (sign A), when "RUSH" is set in the payout state memory area and the compensation mode management flag is set to "Compensation mode in progress," the value of the compensation mode RUSH navigation number counter is set in the RUSH navigation number counter and the "TY value_RUSH" memory area. Furthermore, if the value of the compensation point counter is greater than the "minimum compensation point value," the "minimum compensation point value" and the "compensation correction value" are added to the compensation point counter. On the other hand, if the value of the compensation point counter is equal to or less than the "minimum compensation point value," the "compensation correction value" is added to the compensation point counter. The compensation point counter is stored in a specified memory area of the main RAM 103. Furthermore, in this second gaming machine, the pachislot machine 1, the "minimum compensation point value" is "-500" and the "compensation correction value" is "-26," and these are both stored in specified memory areas of the main ROM 102.

In the game state (Omen A), when the value of the Omen Game Count Counter reaches 0 and "RUSH" is set in the payout state memory area, the BC puncture flag is cleared.

When the value of the premonition game number counter reaches 0 in the game mode (premonition A), the contents of the "premonition type - general" memory area are cleared.

In addition, in the gaming state (omen A), the advantageous zone does not end, but ends when the gaming state (BC, BG, RUSH) entered via the omen (BC omen, BG omen, RUSH omen) ends. Also, in the gaming state (omen A), there is no transition to compensation mode.

(Omen B)
If the result of the premonition transition lottery during the normal period (advantageous period) is that "GSB consecutive premonition" is set in the "premonition type_normal period" memory area, "premonition B" is set in the ball payout state memory area, and the game state transitions to the game state (premonition B) from the next game. In the game state (premonition B), the premonition is that a maximum of four consecutive pseudo single bonuses (GSBs) will appear, and the number of consecutive pseudo single bonuses (GSBs) is determined based on the result of the GSB consecutive rank lottery conducted at the time of winning the premonition transition lottery.

The basic flow of a specific game state (Omen B) will be explained. If, as a result of the omen transition lottery during the normal (favorable zone), "GSB consecutive omen" is set in the "Omen Type_Normal" memory area, a lottery for the number of omen games is conducted using the "GSB consecutive_General" portion of the omen game number lottery table, an example of which is shown in Figure 267, and the result of this lottery is set in the omen game number counter. The omen game number counter is decremented by one if, in the game state (Omen B), the result of the role lottery is one of the winning roles with the winning role name belonging to the winning role group with the winning role group name "Selected Role." However, if the GSB display permission flag is set to "GSB," the omen game number counter is not decremented. In other words, in the gaming state (Omen B), if the result of the role lottery is any winning role belonging to the winning role group with the winning role group name "Selected Role", the value of the premonition game number counter will be decremented by one, unless the GSB display permission flag is set to "GSB in progress".

After the value of the premonition game number counter reaches 0, in a game in which the result of the re-draw is one of the winning roles with the winning role name belonging to the winning role group with the winning role group name "Selection Role", the GSB display permission flag is set to "GSB display permitted". In a game in which the GSB display permission flag is set to "GSB display permitted" and one of the winning roles belonging to the winning role group with the winning role group name "Selection Role" is won, the GSB display permission flag is set to "GSB in progress", and the value of the "GSB display count during premonition" memory area is incremented by one. In that game, a stop symbol combination is displayed that lets the player know that they have won a pseudo single bonus (GSB). The "GSB display count during premonition" memory area is located in a specified memory area of the main RAM 103.

In a subsequent game, if the push order plum ("F_Selection Plum A213" for winning role number "5" to "F_Selection Plum B321" for winning role number "12": see Figure 252) is won, a pseudo single bonus (GSB) will be played, in which an advantageous push order that will result in a payout of 15 coins will be announced. The pseudo single bonus (GSB) in the gaming state (omen B) will end when an advantageous push order is announced once. When a pseudo single bonus (GSB) is played in the gaming state (omen B), if the value of the GSB remaining count counter is 0, the "TY value_RUSH" will be decremented by one. Also, when a pseudo single bonus (GSB) is played in the gaming state (omen B), if the value of the GSB remaining count counter is greater than 0, the value of the GSB remaining count counter will be decremented by one. After that, another lottery is conducted for the number of premonition games, and the result of the lottery is set in the number of premonition games counter. After that, if the value in the "Number of GSB Displays During Premonition B" memory area is smaller than the value in the GSB consecutive rank memory area, the GSB display permission flag is set to "GSB display permitted." Therefore, in the game in which any of the winning roles with winning role names belonging to the winning role group with the winning role group name "Selected Role" is subsequently won, the GSB display permission flag is again set to "GSB in progress," and a pseudo single bonus (GSB) is performed. This series of processes is repeated until the value in the "Number of GSB Displays During Premonition B" memory area reaches 3.

If, as a result of the repetition, the value in the "Number of GSB Displayed During Premonition B" memory area becomes the same as the value in the GSB consecutive rank memory area (if the value in the GSB consecutive rank memory area is "3" or less), the "Number of Games to End Premonition B" is set in the premonition game number counter. After the "Number of Games to End Premonition B" is set in the premonition game number counter, if the value of the premonition game number counter becomes 0, the gaming state (premonition B) ends. In this second gaming machine, pachislot machine 1, the "Number of Games to End Premonition B" is "5", and is stored in advance in a specified memory area in main ROM 102.

On the other hand, if the value in the GSB consecutive rank storage area is set to "4," and as a result of repeating this series of processes, the value in the "Number of GSB Displays During Premonition B" storage area becomes the same as the value in the GSB consecutive rank storage area, transition to the gaming state (RUSH) is confirmed. At this time, as an initial process for transitioning to the gaming state (RUSH), the "RUSH Premonition Management Counter Initial Value" is set in the RUSH Premonition Management Counter. In this second gaming machine, pachislot machine 1, the "RUSH Premonition Management Counter Initial Value" is "75," and is stored in advance in a specified storage area in main ROM 102.

In addition, if the value in the "GSB Display Count During Premonition B" storage area becomes the same as the value in the GSB consecutive rank storage area, "RUSH" is set in the "RUSH Intermediate Type" storage area provided in a specified storage area in main RAM 103.

Also, if the value in the "GSB Display Count During Premonition B" storage area becomes the same as the value in the GSB Consecutive Rank storage area, a lottery is held for the number of navigations at the start of a RUSH using the AT level portion stored in the "AT Level" storage area of the RUSH Start Navigation Count Lottery Table, an example of which is shown in Figure 269. The result of this lottery is set in the RUSH Navigation Count Counter.

Also, when the value in the "GSB Display Count During Premonition B" storage area becomes the same as the value in the GSB Consecutive Rank storage area, if "Ceiling" is set in the "MAP Type" storage area, the RUSH Navigation Number Counter will be set to the value stored in the "TY Value_RUSH" storage area.

In addition, when the value of the "GSB Display Count During Premonition B" storage area becomes the same as the value of the GSB consecutive rank storage area, if the compensation mode management flag is set to "In Compensation Mode," a compensation mode RUSH Navigation Number Counter is set in the RUSH Navigation Number Counter and the "TY Value_RUSH" storage area. Furthermore, if the value of the compensation point counter is greater than the "Minimum Compensation Point Value," the "Minimum Compensation Point Value" and "Compensation Correction Value" are added to the compensation point counter. On the other hand, if the value of the compensation point counter is equal to or less than the "Minimum Compensation Point Value," the "Compensation Correction Value" is added to the compensation point counter.

If the value in the GSB consecutive rank memory area is set to "4," and the value in the "Number of GSBs displayed during Premonition B" memory area becomes the same as the value in the GSB consecutive rank memory area, when this processing is completed, the "Premonition type - general" memory area, GSB consecutive rank memory area, "Number of GSBs displayed during Premonition B" memory area, and BC puncture flag are each cleared, and the payout status memory area is set to "RUSH" (transition to game status (RUSH)).

In the game state (Omen B), if the GSB display permission flag is set to "GSB in progress," the GSB consecutive rank set in the "GSB consecutive rank" memory area is 3 or less, and the RUSH promotion standby flag during Omen B is set to "None," a RUSH promotion lottery is held for each game using the winning combination group number portion of the RUSH promotion lottery table, an example of which is shown in Figure 268, related to the winning combination for that game. If the lottery is successful (if the lottery result is "RUSH Omen"), the value in the "TY value_RUSH" memory area for that game is referenced, and if the value in the "TY value_RUSH" memory area is less than the "TY value_RUSH threshold (48)," the result of the lottery is discarded. On the other hand, if the value in the "TY value_RUSH" memory area for that game is equal to or greater than the "TY value_RUSH threshold (48)," "RUSH premonition" is set in the "omen type_general medium" memory area, and a premonition game number lottery is performed using the "RUSH_general" portion of the premonition game number lottery table, an example of which is shown in FIG. 267. The result of the premonition game number lottery is set in the premonition game number counter. If the value in the "TY value_RUSH" memory area for that game is equal to or greater than the "TY value_RUSH threshold (48)," the premonition B RUSH promotion standby flag is set to "standby." The premonition B RUSH promotion standby flag is also stored in a specified memory area in the main RAM 103.

In the game mode (Omen B), when the GSB display permission flag is set to "GSB in progress," and a push order plum ("F_Selection Plum A213" for winning role number "5" to "F_Selection Plum B321" for winning role number "12": see Figure 252) is won, if a favorable push order resulting in a payout of 15 medals is announced and the Premonition B RUSH promotion standby flag is set to "Waiting," "Omen A" is set in the payout status memory area, the game mode (Omen B) ends, and a transition to Premonition A takes place. At this time, the Premonition B RUSH promotion standby flag, the GSB display permission flag, the contents of the "GSB display count during Premonition B" memory area, and the contents of the "GSB consecutive rank" memory area are all cleared. In other words, if you win the RUSH promotion lottery while in gaming state (omen B), you will transition to gaming state (omen A) even if you are in the middle of gaming state (omen B). Then, after the transitioned gaming state (omen A) ends, a pseudo-game will display the stop symbol combination corresponding to the gaming state (RUSH), and you will then transition to gaming state (RUSH).

In the game state (Omen B), if the GSB display permission flag is set to anything other than "GSB in progress" and the GSB consecutive rank stored in the "GSB consecutive rank" memory area is "Rank 3" or lower, a premonition transition lottery is conducted for each game using the winning role group number portion of the premonition transition lottery table (e.g., Figures 261-264) provided for the TS type set in the TS type memory area and the MAP type set in the "MAP type" memory area to which the winning role for that game belongs. Here, a winning role number is determined using the internal lottery table, an example of which is shown in Figures 251(a)-(c). Furthermore, a winning role group number is determined from the determined winning role number using the correspondence table of winning role numbers, winning role names, and winning role group numbers, an example of which is shown in Figure 248. The determined winning role group number is used in the premonition transition lottery.

When the MAP type is other than "Ceiling," if the result of the premonition transition lottery is "BG premonition" or "BC premonition," the value in the "TY value_pseudo BNS" memory area is compared with the "TY value_BC transition subtraction value." If the value in the "TY value_pseudo BNS" memory area is less than the "TY value_BC transition subtraction value," the lottery result is discarded.

When the MAP type is other than "Ceiling" and the result of the premonition transition lottery is "RUSH premonition," the value in the "TY_VALUE_RUSH" memory area is compared with the "TY_VALUE_RUSH threshold." If the value in the "TY_VALUE_RUSH" memory area is less than the "TY_VALUE_RUSH threshold," the lottery result is discarded.

In addition, in the second gaming machine, pachislot machine 1, the result of the premonition transition lottery conducted in premonition B will never be a "GSB consecutive premonition."

When the map type is other than "ceiling," if the result of the premonition transition lottery is a winning lottery, and the lottery result is not discarded as described above, the lottery result will be set in the "Premonition Type_General" memory area.

If the result of the premonition transition lottery is a winning lottery and the lottery result is not discarded, "Premonition A" is set in the ball output status memory area. Additionally, the GSB display permission flag, the contents of the "GSB display count during premonition B" memory area, and the contents of the "GSB consecutive rank" memory area are all cleared. Additionally, 1 is added to the premonition game number counter (to play at least one game of premonition A).

When the MAP type is "Ceiling" and the premonition transition lottery is won ("RUSH premonition"), the value in the "TY value_pseudo BNS" memory area and the value of the GSB remaining count counter are first added to the value in the "TY value_RUSH" memory area. After the addition, the value in the "TY value_pseudo BNS" memory area and the value of the GSB remaining count counter are cleared.

If the value in the "TY value_RUSH" memory area after the addition is equal to or greater than the "TY value_RUSH threshold", "RUSH precursor" is set in the "sign type_general medium" memory area. If the value in the "TY value_RUSH" memory area after the addition is less than the "TY value_RUSH threshold" and equal to or greater than the "TY value_BC threshold", "BC precursor" is set in the "sign type_general medium" memory area. If the value in the "TY value_RUSH" memory area after the addition is less than the "TY value_BC threshold" and equal to or greater than the "TY value_BG threshold", "BG precursor" is set in the "sign type_general medium" memory area. Furthermore, when the map type is "ceiling" and the premonition transition lottery is won ("RUSH premonition"), if the compensation mode management flag described below is "in compensation mode", "RUSH premonition" will be set in the "premonition type_general medium" memory area regardless of the value in the "TY value_RUSH" memory area after the addition. If the "premonition type_general medium" memory area is not set in these processes, the result of the premonition transition lottery will be discarded.

If the premonition transition lottery is won and the lottery result is not discarded, "Premonition A" is set in the ball output status memory area. The GSB display permission flag, the contents of the "GSB display count during premonition B" memory area, and the contents of the "GSB consecutive rank" memory area are all cleared. Also, 1 is added to the premonition game count counter (to play at least one game of premonition A).

If the final play of a MAP type "ceiling" is reached without winning the premonition transition lottery, the ceiling will be reached. When the ceiling is reached, the value of the "TY value_pseudo BNS" memory area and the value of the GSB remaining count counter are first added to the value of the "TY value_RUSH" memory area. After the addition, the value of the "TY value_pseudo BNS" memory area and the value of the GSB remaining count counter are cleared.

If the value in the "TY value_RUSH" storage area after the addition is equal to or greater than the "TY value_RUSH threshold," "RUSH precursor" is set in the "sign type_general medium" storage area. If the value in the "TY value_RUSH" storage area after the addition is less than the "TY value_RUSH threshold" but equal to or greater than the "TY value_BC threshold," "BC precursor" is set in the "sign type_general medium" storage area. If the value in the "TY value_RUSH" storage area after the addition is less than the "TY value_BC threshold" but equal to or greater than the "TY value_BG threshold," "BG precursor" is set in the "sign type_general medium" storage area. Note that if the compensation mode management flag is "Compensation mode in" when the ceiling is reached, "RUSH precursor" is set in the "sign type_general medium" storage area regardless of the value in the "TY value_RUSH" storage area after the addition.

If "BC Premonition," "BG Premonition," or "RUSH Premonition" is set in the "Omen Type - General" memory area, "Omen A" is set in the ball payout status memory area. This causes the game to transition to the game state (Omen A) from the next game. Here, if "Omen A" is set in the ball payout status memory area and the GSB display permission flag is set to anything other than "GSB in progress," the GSB display permission flag, the memory contents of the "Number of GSB Displays During Omen B" memory area, and the memory contents of the "GSB Consecutive Rank" memory area are all cleared. In addition, 1 is added to the number of premonition games counter (to play at least one game of Omen A).

In the game mode (omen B), assuming that the GSB display permission flag is set to anything other than "GSB in progress" and the GSB consecutive rank stored in the "GSB consecutive rank" memory area is "Rank 3" or lower, if the result of the role lottery is a winning role with a winning role name belonging to the winning role group with the winning role group name "Selected Role," and the compensation mode permission flag is set to "Permitted," a compensation mode transition lottery will be held using the compensation level portion stored in the compensation level memory area of the compensation mode transition lottery table, an example of which is shown in Figure 273. If the result of the lottery is "Transition to compensation mode," the compensation mode management flag will be set to "In compensation mode."

If the result of the compensation mode transition lottery is "Transition to compensation mode," an initial AT level lottery is conducted using the scenario number portion stored in the scenario memory area of the initial AT level lottery table, an example of which is shown in Figure 265, and the result of the lottery is set in the AT level memory area.

In addition, in the gaming state (omen B), assuming that the GSB display permission flag is set to anything other than "GSB in progress" and the GSB consecutive rank stored in the "GSB consecutive rank" memory area is "Rank 3" or lower, the compensation mode permission flag is set to "Allowed," and the result of the role lottery is a winning combination belonging to the winning combination group with the winning combination group name "Selected combination," the value of the compensation mode management game number counter is decremented by one each time. Then, if the value of the compensation mode management game number counter becomes 0, the value of the compensation mode management game number counter is again set to the "specified number of selected combinations for compensation mode (80 times)," and various processes related to the compensation mode are performed. For example, when the value of the compensation mode management game number counter is reset, if the compensation mode management flag is "in compensation mode," a compensation mode AT level promotion lottery is held using the AT level portion stored in the AT level memory area of the compensation mode AT level promotion lottery table, an example of which is shown in FIG. 274. If the lottery is won (if the lottery result is "promotion"), the value stored in the AT level memory area is rewritten to a value incremented by one.

Also, when the value of the compensation mode management game number counter is reset, if the compensation mode management flag is "in compensation mode," a compensation mode navigation count lottery is conducted using the AT level portion stored in the AT level memory area of the compensation mode navigation count lottery table, an example of which is shown in Figure 275. The lottery result (navigation count) is added to the compensation mode RUSH navigation count counter.

Furthermore, when the value of the compensation mode management game number counter is reset, if the compensation mode management flag is set to "compensation mode transition permitted" and compensation level 7 is stored in the compensation level memory area, the compensation mode management flag is set to "compensation mode in progress." At this time, an initial AT level lottery is performed using the scenario number portion stored in the scenario memory area of the initial AT level lottery table, an example of which is shown in Figure 265, and the lottery result is set in the AT level memory area.

On the other hand, when the value of the compensation mode management game number counter is reset, if the contents stored in the compensation mode memory area are compensation level 6 or lower, the contents stored in the compensation mode memory area are rewritten to a compensation level that is one higher than the compensation level.

Also, when the value of the compensation mode management game number counter is reset, if the compensation mode management flag was set to "Waiting for compensation mode transition," the compensation mode management flag will be set to "Compensation mode transition permitted."

As described above, in this embodiment, not only during the normal game (advantageous zone) but also in the game state (omen B), a compensation mode transition lottery may be held in a game in which a winning role with a winning role name belonging to the winning role group with the winning role group name "Selection Role" is won, and if the lottery is won, the game will transition to compensation mode (the compensation mode management flag is set to "In compensation mode"). Even if the lottery continues without a winning role, the compensation mode is incremented by one each time the number of wins for a winning role belonging to the winning role group with the winning role group name "Selection Role" reaches the "specified number of selection roles for compensation mode (80 times)." As a result, when the compensation level reaches "7," the game will transition to compensation mode (the compensation mode management flag) in the next game in which a winning role belonging to the winning role group with the winning role group name "Selection Role" is won.

The case of transitioning to the compensation mode after the increase in the compensation level explained above will be explained in itemized terms with specific examples as follows.
The initial value of the compensation level is set to a value according to scenarios 1 to 48 in Figure 277, which is determined when moving to the advantageous zone. For example, if scenario 06 has the highest initial compensation level, the compensation level will be 5. Note that 1 is subtracted when the compensation level is set, so the effective initial value of the compensation level is 4.
・The probability of winning the Plum Selection role is approximately 1/2.1 (30880/65536, see Figure 251).
・Therefore, it takes approximately 168 games to achieve 80 selection plum roles.
- Except for the case where you win 1/256 in the lottery using the compensation mode transition lottery table in Figure 273 and transition to compensation mode, it takes approximately 168 x 3 = 504 games to increase the compensation level by three levels, from level 4 → 5 → 6 → 7.
・After reaching compensation level 7 after approximately 504 games, you will need to win a selection plum role with a probability of approximately 1/2.1 to move to compensation mode.
・Therefore, in Scenario 06, if we assume that no AT is entered from the start of the advantageous zone, the average number of games required to transition to compensation mode is approximately 504 + 2 = 506 games.
・The average number of games per 50 medals is 31.5 games (there is a slight difference depending on the setting), so 506 games ÷ 31.5 games × 50 medals = approximately 803 medals. Even in the most favorable scenario, just over 800 medals are required to reach the compensation mode via the main route to compensation mode, where the compensation level gradually increases as the specified number of selection plum roles are achieved.

As such, the general gameplay involves players switching to compensation mode after a certain number of medals have been consumed, and compensation mode also serves as a form of relief for players who have consumed a certain number of medals.

Incidentally, since this compensation level is an important factor in transitioning to compensation mode, it is possible to provide a display that suggests or notifies the player of this value, or it is possible to avoid providing a display that suggests or notifies the player so as not to overly arouse the player's expectations.

After entering compensation mode (compensation mode management flag: compensation mode in progress), the compensation point counter is updated every game in the same manner as when entering compensation mode (compensation mode management flag: compensation mode in progress) during normal play (advantageous zone).

(MAP related processing)
In the gaming state (omen B), as in the general mode (advantageous zone), the map basically advances by one (one game) when the result of the role lottery is a winning role with a winning role name belonging to the winning role group with the winning role group name "selection role." As a result of the progression of the map, in the final game of the high probability 1 map determined according to the scenario number, the map end flag is set to "high probability 1 end." In the gaming state (omen B), when the map end flag is set to "high probability 1 end," the value in the pseudo BNS column corresponding to the scenario number of the advantageous zone is obtained from the TY value_addition 1 data table, an example of which is shown in FIG. 278, and the value is added to "TY value_pseudo BNS." At the same time, the value in the RUSH column corresponding to the scenario number of the advantageous zone is obtained and the value is added to "TY value_RUSH."

In addition, in the final game of a MAP with high probability 2, the MAP end flag is set to "High probability 2 end." When the MAP end flag is set to "High probability 2 end" in the game state (omen B), the value in the pseudo BNS column corresponding to the scenario number of the favorable zone is obtained from the TY value_addition 2 data table, an example of which is shown in Figure 279, and this value is added to "TY value_pseudo BNS." At the same time, the value in the RUSH column corresponding to the scenario number of the favorable zone is obtained and this value is added to "TY value_RUSH."

In the final game of the ceiling map, the map end flag is set to "ceiling end." At this time, a request to end the advantageous zone is set in the payout status memory area.

In addition, in the final game of a map other than the ceiling map ("MAP TYPE" = "CEILING"), the values in the "HIGH PROBABILITY 1 MAP POSITION" memory area, "HIGH PROBABILITY 2 MAP POSITION" memory area, and "CEILING MAP POSITION" memory area are each decremented by one; if the value in the "HIGH PROBABILITY 1 MAP POSITION" memory area after decrementing by one is "1," "HIGH PROBABILITY 1" is set in the "MAP TYPE" memory area; if the value in the "HIGH PROBABILITY 2 MAP POSITION" memory area after decrementing by one is "1," "HIGH PROBABILITY 2" is set in the "MAP TYPE" memory area; if the value in the "CEILING MAP POSITION" memory area after decrementing by one is "1," "CEILING" is set in the "MAP TYPE" memory area; otherwise, "LOW PROBABILITY" is set in the "MAP TYPE" memory area. In addition, the MAP game count corresponding to the scenario number of the advantageous zone (see the scenario-related data shown as an example in FIG. 277) is reset to the MAP game count counter.

(AT level promotion lottery)
During the game state (omen B), an AT level promotion lottery is performed for each game using the winning role group number portion related to the winning role in the game in the AT level promotion lottery table, an example of which is shown in FIG. 266. Here, a winning role number is determined using the internal lottery table, an example of which is shown in FIG. 251(a) to (c). Further, a winning role group number is determined from the determined winning role number using the correspondence table of winning role numbers, winning role names, and winning role group numbers, an example of which is shown in FIG. 248. The determined winning role group number is used in the AT level promotion lottery. If the lottery is a winning lottery, the value of the AT level memory area is incremented by one.

(Processing for Determining the End of Premonition B)
In the game state (omen B), when the GSB display permission flag is set to a value other than "GSB in progress" and "omen A" is set in the ball output state memory area, in a game in which the result of the role lottery is a winning role of a winning role name belonging to a winning role group with a winning role group name of "selected role", if the value of the premonition game number counter is 0 and the value of the "GSB display count during premonition B" memory area is smaller than the GSB consecutive rank stored in the "GSB consecutive rank" memory area, the GSB display permission flag is set to "GSB display permitted".

On the other hand, when the GSB display permission flag is set to a value other than "GSB in progress" and "Omen A" is set in the ball payout status memory area, in a game in which the lottery result is a winning role belonging to the winning role group with the winning role group name "Selected Role," if the value of the premonition game number counter is 0 and the value of the "Number of GSB displays in Omen B" memory area is the same as the GSB consecutive rank stored in the "GSB consecutive rank" memory area, the contents of the "Omen type_General medium" memory area, the GSB display permission flag, the contents of the "Number of GSB displays in Omen B" memory area, and the contents of the "GSB consecutive rank" memory area are all cleared. In addition, the ball payout status memory area is set to "General medium."

An example of a game development created in the gaming state (Omen B) configured as described above is shown below.

For example, if the GSB consecutive rank is rank "1", a pseudo single bonus (GSB) will be played after the premonition game number counter of premonition B is consumed, and if the player does not win the RUSH promotion lottery or premonition transition lottery before the reset premonition game number counter is consumed, the game state (premonition B) will end after the reset premonition game number counter is consumed and the game will transition to normal mode (advantageous zone).

Also, if the GSB consecutive rank is rank "4", the premonition game counter is consumed and the pseudo single bonus (GSB) is repeated four times, after which the game state (premonition B) ends and the game state transitions to the game state (RUSH).

Also, for example, if the GSB consecutive rank is rank "1" and a transition to a pseudo single bonus (GSB) is permitted after the premonition game number counter has been counted (GSB display permission flag = "GSB in progress"), and the RUSH promotion lottery is won, the game state (premonition B) ends and the game state transitions to game state (premonition A). In game state (premonition A), a pseudo game is played after the premonition game number counter has been counted, the stop symbol combination corresponding to the game state (RUSH) is displayed, and the game state transitions to game state (RUSH).

Also, for example, if the GSB consecutive rank is rank "2," a pseudo single bonus (GSB) is played after the premonition game number counter of premonition B is consumed, and then the premonition transition lottery is won before the reset premonition game number counter is consumed, and if the result is a "BC or BG premonition," the game state (premonition B) ends and a transition to game state (premonition A) occurs. In game state (premonition A), a pseudo game is played after the premonition game number counter is consumed, the stopped symbol combination corresponding to the game state (BC or BG) is displayed, and a transition to game state (BC or BG) occurs.

Also, for example, if the GSB consecutive rank is rank "2," a pseudo single bonus (GSB) is played after the premonition game number counter of premonition B is consumed, and if the premonition transition lottery is won before the reset premonition game number counter is consumed, and the result is a "RUSH premonition," the game state (premonition B) ends and the game state transitions to (premonition A). In the game state (premonition A), a pseudo game is played after the premonition game number counter is consumed, the stopped symbol combination corresponding to the game state (RUSH) is displayed, and the game state transitions to (RUSH).

(First pseudo bonus gaming state (BG))
When "BG" is set in the payout state memory area, the game state (BG) is entered. At that time, the "BG navigation count initial value (6)" is set in the pseudo BNS navigation count counter. Also, if the value in the "TY value_pseudo BNS" memory area is not "0", the "TY value_BG transition subtraction value (7)" is subtracted from the value in the "TY value_pseudo BNS" memory area.

In the second pseudo bonus gaming state (BG), when the push order plum ("F_Selection Plum A213" with winning combination number "5" to "F_Selection Plum B321" with winning combination number "12": see Figure 252) is won, a favorable push order that will result in a payout of 15 coins is announced. At this time, the value of the pseudo BNS navigation number counter is decremented by one. Also, if "RUSH" is set in the "RUSH medium type" memory area in the gaming state (BG) and a value other than "Compensation mode in progress" is set in the compensation mode management flag, the value of the RUSH navigation number counter is decremented by one in a game in which the push order plum ("F_Selection Plum A213" with winning combination number "5" to "F_Selection Plum B321" with winning combination number "12": see Figure 252) is won.

If the value of the pseudo BNS navigation number counter is decremented to "0", the pseudo BNS flag during RUSH is cleared. Also, if "None" is set in the "RUSH type" memory area when the value of the pseudo BNS navigation number counter becomes "0", "General Medium" is set in the ball output status memory area (end of game mode (BG)). Also, if "None" is set in the "RUSH type" memory area and "RUSH precursor" is set in the "Omen type_General Medium" memory area when the value of the pseudo BNS navigation number counter becomes "0", "Omen A" is set in the ball output status memory area (end of game mode (BG)). Furthermore, when the value of the pseudo BNS navigation number counter reaches "0", if the "RUSH type" storage area is set to "none" and the MAP end flag is set to "ceiling end" or the forced end flag is set to "forced end", then a "request to end advantageous zone" is set in the ball output status storage area (end of game state (BG) + end of advantageous zone). The pseudo BNS flag during RUSH is set to either "pseudo BNS during non-RUSH" or "pseudo BNS during RUSH", and is stored in a designated storage area of the main RAM 103.

Also, if "RUSH" is set in the "RUSH Intermediate Type" memory area when the value of the pseudo BNS Navigation Number Counter is decremented to "0," "RUSH" is set in the payout status memory area and the GSB display permission flag is set to "GSB display permitted" (end of game mode (BG)).

When a transition is made from a gaming state other than a gaming state (RUSH) to the first pseudo bonus gaming state (BG), a RUSH promotion lottery is conducted for each game using the winning combination group number portion related to the winning combination for that game in the RUSH promotion lottery table, an example of which is shown in Figure 268. Specifically, in the first pseudo bonus gaming state (BG), if "none" is set in the "RUSH intermediate type" memory area, a RUSH promotion lottery is conducted for each game using the winning combination group number portion related to the winning combination for that game in the RUSH promotion lottery table, an example of which is shown in Figure 268. Here, the winning role number is determined using the internal lottery tables in Figures 251 (a) to (c), and then the winning role group number is determined from the determined winning role number using the correspondence table of winning role numbers, winning role names, and winning role group numbers in Figure 248, and the determined winning role group number is used in the RUSH promotion lottery.

If the lottery result is "RUSH Premonition," the value in the "TY Value_RUSH" memory area for that game is referenced, and if the value in the "TY Value_RUSH" memory area is less than the "TY Value_RUSH Threshold (48)," the result of the lottery is discarded. On the other hand, if the value in the "TY Value_RUSH" memory area for that game is equal to or greater than the "TY Value_RUSH Threshold (48)," "RUSH Premonition" is set in the "Omen Type_General Medium" memory area, and a premonition game number lottery is performed using the "RUSH_General" portion of the premonition game number lottery table, an example of which is shown in Figure 267. The result of the premonition game number lottery is set in the premonition game number counter.

In the first pseudo bonus game state (BG), if the RUSH pseudo BNS flag is set to "Non-RUSH pseudo BNS," an AT level promotion lottery is held for each game using the winning role group number portion related to the winning role in that game in the AT level promotion lottery table, an example of which is shown in Figure 266. Here, the winning role number is determined using the internal lottery table, an example of which is shown in Figures 251(a) to (c). Furthermore, the winning role group number is determined from the determined winning role number using the correspondence table of winning role numbers, winning role names, and winning role group numbers, an example of which is shown in Figure 248, and the determined winning role group number is used in the AT level promotion lottery. If the lottery is won, 1 is added to the value in the AT level memory area.

(Second pseudo bonus gaming state (BC))
When "BC" is set in the payout state memory area, the game state (BC) is entered. At that time, the "BC navigation count initial value (30)" is set in the pseudo BNS navigation count counter. Also, if the value of the "TY value_pseudo BNS" memory area is not "0", the "TY value_BC transition subtraction value (34)" is subtracted from the value of the "TY value_pseudo BNS" memory area.

In the second pseudo bonus game state (BC), when the push order plum ("F_Selection Plum A213" with winning combination number "5" to "F_Selection Plum B321" with winning combination number "12": see Figure 252) is won, a favorable push order that will result in a payout of 15 coins is announced. At this time, the value of the pseudo BNS navigation number counter is decremented by one. Also, if "RUSH" is set in the "RUSH medium type" memory area in the game state (BC) and a value other than "Compensation mode in progress" is set in the compensation mode management flag, the value of the RUSH navigation number counter is decremented by one in a game in which the push order plum ("F_Selection Plum A213" with winning combination number "5" to "F_Selection Plum B321" with winning combination number "12": see Figure 252) is won.

If the value of the pseudo BNS navigation number counter is decremented to "0", the pseudo BNS flag during RUSH is cleared. Also, if "None" is set in the "RUSH type" memory area when the value of the pseudo BNS navigation number counter becomes "0", "General Medium" is set in the ball output status memory area (end of game state (BC)). Also, if "None" is set in the "RUSH type" memory area and "RUSH precursor" is set in the "Omen type_General Medium" memory area when the value of the pseudo BNS navigation number counter becomes "0", "Omen A" is set in the ball output status memory area (end of game state (BC)). Also, when the value of the pseudo BNS navigation number counter reaches "0", if the "RUSH type" memory area is set to "None" and the MAP end flag is set to "Ceiling end" or the forced end flag is set to "Forced end", then a "Request to end advantageous zone" will be set in the ball output status memory area (end of game state (BC) + end of advantageous zone).

Also, if "RUSH" is set in the "RUSH Intermediate Type" memory area when the value of the pseudo BNS Navigation Number Counter is decremented to "0," "RUSH" is set in the payout status memory area and the GSB display permission flag is set to "GSB display permitted" (end of game state (BC)).

When a transition is made from a gaming state other than the gaming state (RUSH) to the second pseudo bonus gaming state (BC), a RUSH promotion lottery is conducted for each game using the winning combination group number portion related to the winning combination for that game in the RUSH promotion lottery table, an example of which is shown in Figure 268. Specifically, in the second pseudo bonus gaming state (BC), if "None" is set in the "RUSH intermediate type" memory area, a RUSH promotion lottery is conducted for each game using the winning combination group number portion related to the winning combination for that game in the RUSH promotion lottery table, an example of which is shown in Figure 268. Here, the winning role number is determined using the internal lottery tables in Figures 251 (a) to (c), and then the winning role group number is determined from the determined winning role number using the correspondence table of winning role numbers, winning role names, and winning role group numbers in Figure 248, and the determined winning role group number is used in the RUSH promotion lottery.

If the lottery result is "RUSH Premonition," the value in the "TY Value_RUSH" memory area for that game is referenced, and if the value in the "TY Value_RUSH" memory area is less than the "TY Value_RUSH Threshold (48)," the result of the lottery is discarded. On the other hand, if the value in the "TY Value_RUSH" memory area for that game is equal to or greater than the "TY Value_RUSH Threshold (48)," "RUSH Premonition" is set in the "Omen Type_General Medium" memory area, and a premonition game number lottery is performed using the "RUSH_General" portion of the premonition game number lottery table, an example of which is shown in Figure 267. The result of the premonition game number lottery is set in the premonition game number counter.

In the second pseudo bonus game state (BC), if the RUSH pseudo BNS flag is set to "Non-RUSH pseudo BNS," an AT level promotion lottery is held for each game using the winning role group number portion related to the winning role in that game in the AT level promotion lottery table, an example of which is shown in Figure 266. Here, the winning role number is determined using the internal lottery table, an example of which is shown in Figures 251(a) to (c). Furthermore, the winning role group number is determined from the determined winning role number using the correspondence table of winning role numbers, winning role names, and winning role group numbers, an example of which is shown in Figure 248, and the determined winning role group number is used in the AT level promotion lottery. If the lottery is won, 1 is added to the value in the AT level memory area.

(RUSH)
When "RUSH" is set in the payout state memory area, the game state transitions to the game state (RUSH). The game state (RUSH) is a game state in which a pseudo single bonus (GSB) is frequently performed, in which an advantageous push order is announced when one of the push order plums ("F_selection plum A213" with the winning combination number "5" to "F_selection plum B321" with the winning combination number "12": see FIG. 252) is won, until one of the RUSH end conditions is met, such as the value of the RUSH navigation number counter becoming 0, the value of the "TY value_RUSH" memory area becoming 0, or the forced end condition of the advantageous zone being met (forced end flag = "forced end"), so to speak, a pseudo single bonus (GSB) is frequently awarded in a short period of time.

More specifically, as an initial process when transitioning to the game state (RUSH), the "RUSH Premonition Management Counter Initial Value" is set in the RUSH Premonition Management Counter, the GSB Display Permission Flag is set to "GSB", "RUSH" is set in the "RUSH Premonition Type" memory area, and the result of the RUSH Start Navigation Number Lottery, which is conducted using the AT level portion stored in the "AT Level" memory area of the RUSH Start Navigation Number Lottery Table, an example of which is shown in Figure 269, is set in the RUSH Navigation Number Counter. Furthermore, if "Ceiling" is set in the "MAP Type" memory area, the value stored in the "TY Value_RUSH" memory area at that time is set in the RUSH Navigation Number Counter. After that, if the result of the role lottery is a winning lottery for one of the push order plums ("F_Selection Plum A213" with winning role number "5" to "F_Selection Plum B321" with winning role number "12": see Figure 252), a favorable push order that will result in a payout of 15 coins will be announced. At this time, if the value of the GSB navigation count counter is 0, the counter is set to "2" and then decremented by one. Next, even if the result of the role lottery is a winning lottery for one of the push order plums ("F_Selection Plum A213" with winning role number "5" to "F_Selection Plum B321" with winning role number "12": see Figure 252), a favorable push order that will result in a payout of 15 coins will be announced, and the value of the GSB navigation count counter will be decremented by one. As a result, the value of the GSB navigation count counter becomes 0, and the GSB display permission flag is set to "GSB display permitted" (one pseudo single bonus (GSB) ends). In other words, in this embodiment, the pseudo single bonus (GSB) in the game state (RUSH) continues until the advantageous push order is announced twice.

After that, in subsequent games, if the result of the lottery is a winning combination for the winning role group named "Selection Role," a stop symbol combination (GSB transition display) for reels 3L, 3C, and 3R will be displayed, indicating a transition to a pseudo single bonus (GSB). At this time, the GSB display permission flag is set to "GSB in progress." Then, in the next game and subsequent games, if one of the push order plums ("F_Selection Plum A213" for winning role number "5" to "F_Selection Plum B321" for winning role number "12": see Figure 252) is won, two consecutive games will be played in which the advantageous push order is announced, and the GSB display permission flag will be set to "GSB display permitted" (the two pseudo single bonuses (GSBs) will end). From this point on, the series of events from the GSB transition display to the pseudo single bonus (GSB) will basically be repeated until the RUSH end condition is met.

However, there may be a premonition period between one pseudo single bonus (GSB) and the next pseudo single bonus (GSB), during which the GSB transition display may be prohibited. Specifically, in this case, during the game state (RUSH), the number of premonition points corresponding to the winning role group number portion related to the winning role in that game is read from the premonition point number data table, an example of which is shown in Figure 282 or Figure 283, and the number of premonition points read is added to the premonition management counter during the RUSH. Here, the winning role number is determined using an internal lottery table, an example of which is shown in Figures 251(a) to (c), and then the winning role group number is determined from the determined winning role number using a correspondence table of winning role numbers, winning role names, and winning role group numbers, an example of which is shown in Figure 248, and the determined winning role group number is used to read out the number of premonition points from the premonition point number data table. The premonition point number table includes an instruction-present premonition point number data table, an example of which is shown in Figure 283, for games in which an advantageous press order is announced when a push order plum ("F_Selection Plum A213" with winning role number "5" to "F_Selection Plum B321" with winning role number "12": see Figure 252), is won, and an instruction-absent premonition point number data table, an example of which is shown in Figure 283, for games in which an advantageous press order is not announced, and the number of premonition points based on whether or not an advantageous press order is announced is added to the premonition management counter during the rush.

As a result, when the value of the GSB navigation count counter reaches 0 (when one pseudo single bonus (GSB) has ended), if the value of the RUSH premonition management counter is equal to or less than the "RUSH premonition determination value - for deceleration," the "premonition type - during RUSH" memory area is set to "fake premonition," the premonition game count counter is set to the value "RUSH premonition rewrite - long," and the GSB display permission flag is set to "GSB display not permitted." This prohibits the GSB transition display until the premonition game count counter reaches 0, and prohibits transition to the pseudo single bonus (GSB). In this embodiment, the "RUSH premonition determination value - for deceleration" is "10," which is pre-stored in a specified memory area of the main ROM 102. Furthermore, "RUSH Premonition Rewrite - Long" is "4" in this second gaming machine, pachislot machine 1, and is pre-stored in a specified storage area of the main ROM 102.

On the other hand, when the value of the GSB navigation count counter reaches 0 (when one pseudo single bonus (GSB) has ended), if the value of the RUSH premonition management counter is equal to or greater than the "RUSH premonition determination value for acceleration," the "premonition type during RUSH" memory area is set to "fake premonition," and the value of the premonition game count counter is greater than the value of "RUSH premonition rewrite short," the value of "RUSH premonition rewrite short" is set to the premonition game count counter. This prohibits the GSB transition display and the transition to the pseudo single bonus (GSB) until the premonition game count counter value reaches 0. Note that the "RUSH premonition determination value for acceleration" is "128" in this second gaming machine, pachislot machine 1, and is pre-stored in a specified memory area in main ROM 102. Furthermore, "RUSH Premonition Rewrite_Short" is "1" in this second gaming machine, pachislot machine 1, and is pre-stored in a specified storage area of the main ROM 102. During the gaming state (RUSH), the premonition game number counter is decremented by one for each game in which the GSB display permission flag is set to anything other than "GSB in progress" and the result of the role lottery is a winning combination belonging to the winning combination group name "Selected Role."

The conditions for ending the RUSH are whether the value of the RUSH navigation number counter reaches 0 or the value of the "TY value_RUSH" memory area reaches 0, and these values are decremented as follows: For example, if the compensation mode management flag is set to anything other than "In compensation mode," i.e., if the game has not yet entered compensation mode, when a push order plum ("F_selection plum A213" with winning combination number "5" to "F_selection plum B321" with winning combination number "12": see Figure 252) is won, the value of the RUSH navigation number counter is decremented by 1 and the value of the "TY value_RUSH" memory area is also decremented by 1.

On the other hand, if the compensation mode management flag is set to "In compensation mode," i.e., after transitioning to compensation mode, even if an advantageous press order is announced when a push order plum ("F_Selection Plum A213" with winning role number "5" to "F_Selection Plum B321" with winning role number "12": see Figure 252) is won during the game state (RUSH), neither the RUSH navigation number counter nor the value in the "TY value_RUSH" memory area will be decremented. Furthermore, if the value of the compensation point counter becomes greater than 0 when the compensation mode management flag is set to "In compensation mode," the compensation mode management flag will be set to "After compensation mode," and compensation mode will end. After the compensation mode management flag is set to "After Compensation Mode" during game play (RUSH), the value of the RUSH navigation number counter is decremented by one each time a favorable push order is announced when the push order plum is won, and the value in the "TY Value_RUSH" memory area is also decremented by one.

In other words, in this embodiment, in a game state (RUSH) that has transitioned to compensation mode, the RUSH navigation number counter and the "TY value_RUSH" memory area do not begin to decrement until the game media (medals) that were lost after transitioning to compensation mode have been paid out. Therefore, in a game state (RUSH) that has transitioned to compensation mode, game media (medals) are paid out to cover the loss in the game state after transitioning to compensation mode (the loss in medals during compensation mode is compensated for). After that, the increase in medals until either the RUSH navigation number counter or the value in the "TY value_RUSH" memory area reaches 0, at which point the RUSH end condition is met, corresponds to the increase in medals held at the time of transitioning to compensation mode.

When the value of the GSB navigation count counter reaches 0, that is, in a game where the pseudo single bonus (GSB) has ended, a pseudo BNS lottery is conducted during the pseudo BNS end RUSH using the pseudo BNS end RUSH lottery table, an example of which is shown in Figure 271, which is stored in a specified memory area of the main ROM 102. If the result of the lottery is "During BG RUSH," the value of the "TY value RUSH" memory area at that time is compared with the "TY value BG transition subtraction value (7)," and if the value of the "TY value RUSH" memory area is less than the "TY value BG transition subtraction value (7)," the result of the lottery is discarded. If the lottery result is not discarded, the lottery result is set to "Omen Type_RUSH" ("Omen Type_RUSH" = "BG Omen").

When the compensation mode management flag is set to "Compensation in progress" and the pseudo BNS lottery during the pseudo BNS end RUSH results in "BG RUSH in progress," the lottery result will be set to "Omen type RUSH in progress" regardless of the value of the "TY value RUSH" memory area at that time ("Omen type RUSH in progress" = "BG Omen"). When the pseudo BNS lottery during the pseudo BNS end RUSH results in "Fake RUSH in progress," the lottery result will be set to "Omen type RUSH in progress" regardless of the setting of the compensation mode management flag or the value of the "TY value RUSH" memory area at that time ("Omen type RUSH in progress" = "Fake Omen").

When the compensation mode management flag is set to a value other than "Compensation mode in progress", the GSB display permission flag is set to "GSB in progress", and an advantageous press order is announced in the winning game for the push order plum ("F_Selection Plum A213" with winning role number "5" to "F_Selection Plum B321" with winning role number "12": see Figure 252), and the value of the GSB navigation number counter becomes 0, if the RUSH end condition is met, "Puncture waiting" is set in the "Omen type_RUSH in progress" memory area, and the GSB display permission flag is set to "GSB display not permitted". Furthermore, if the value in the "TY value_RUSH" memory area is equal to or greater than the "TY value_BC transition subtraction value (34)" and the BC puncture flag is set to anything other than "BC puncture not permitted," a BC rewrite lottery is held when a RUSH puncture occurs, using the BC rewrite lottery table when a RUSH puncture occurs, an example of which is shown in Figure 272. The result of this lottery is set in the BC puncture flag provided in a specified memory area in the main RAM 103.

When the GSB display permission flag is set to "GSB in progress" and an advantageous push order is announced in the winning game of the push order plum ("F_Selection Plum A213" for winning role number "5" to "F_Selection Plum B321" for winning role number "12": see Figure 252), and the value of the navigation number counter during GSB becomes 0, if a value other than "none" is set in the "Omen type_RUSH in progress" memory area, a premonition game number lottery is performed using the part corresponding to the memory contents of the "Omen type_RUSH in progress" memory area of the premonition game number lottery table, an example of which is shown in Figure 267 (Fake_General for fake premonitions, BG_RUSH in progress for BG premonitions, BC_RUSH in progress for BC premonitions, and PUMP wait in progress for PUMP wait). The lottery result is set in the premonition game number counter, and the GSB display permission flag is set to "GSB display not permitted."

When the GSB display permission flag is set to "GSB in progress," and a favorable push order is announced in the winning game for the push order plums ("F_Selection Plum A213" for winning combination number "5" to "F_Selection Plum B321" for winning combination number "12": see Figure 252), and the value of the GSB navigation number counter becomes 0, if a value other than "Breakout Waiting" is set in the "Omen Type_RUSH in progress" memory area, and the value of the short-time guard game number counter stored in a specified memory area of the main RAM 103 is greater than the value of "Short-time_Determination Game Number," the BC puncture flag is set to "BC puncture not permitted," and the value of the short-time guard game number counter is cleared. Here, the "Short-time_Determination Game Number" is "150" in this second gaming machine, pachislot machine 1, and is pre-stored in a specified memory area of the main ROM 102.

Note that during the gaming state (RUSH), the value of the short-time guard game number counter is incremented by one each time a winning combination belonging to the winning combination group with the winning combination group name "Selection" is won. Therefore, in this embodiment, once the number of times a winning combination belonging to the winning combination group with the winning combination group name "Selection" has been won reaches 150 during the gaming state (RUSH), the game state will not transition to the second pseudo bonus gaming state (BC) after the gaming state (RUSH) ends (there will be no BC puncture).

In the game state (RUSH), when the GSB display permission flag is set to anything other than "GSB in progress", and "Omen type_RUSH in progress" is set to "None" or "Fake omen", a RUSH in progress_RUSH pseudo BNS lottery is conducted for each game using the winning role group number portion to which the winning role for that game belongs in the RUSH in progress_RUSH pseudo BNS lottery table, an example of which is shown in Figure 270. Here, a winning role number is determined using an internal lottery table an example of which is shown in Figures 251(a) to (c), and further, a winning role group number is determined from the determined winning role number using a correspondence table of winning role numbers, winning role names, and winning role group numbers an example of which is shown in Figure 248, and the determined winning role group number is used for the RUSH_RUSH pseudo-BNS lottery. If the result of the lottery is "BG_RUSH", the value of the "TY value_RUSH" memory area at that time is compared with the "TY value_BG transition subtraction value (7)", and if the value of the "TY value_RUSH" memory area is less than the "TY value_BG transition subtraction value (7)", the lottery result is discarded. If the lottery result is not discarded, the lottery result is set to "Omen Type_RUSH" ("Omen Type_RUSH" = "BG Omen").

When the compensation mode management flag is set to "Compensation in progress" and the RUSH_RUSH pseudo-BNS lottery results in "BG_RUSH in progress," the lottery result will be set to "Omen type_RUSH in progress" regardless of the value of the "TY value_RUSH" memory area at that time ("Omen type_RUSH in progress" = "BG Omen"). When the RUSH_RUSH pseudo-BNS lottery results in "Fake_RUSH in progress," the lottery result will be set to "Omen type_RUSH in progress" regardless of the setting of the compensation mode management flag or the value of the "TY value_RUSH" memory area at that time ("Omen type_RUSH in progress" = "Fake Omen").

Then, after the result of the RUSH_RUSH pseudo-BNS lottery is set in the "Omen Type_RUSH" memory area, the contents of the "Omen Type_RUSH" memory area are referenced, and if the result shows that a value other than "None" is set in that memory area, a premonition game number lottery is performed using the premonition game number lottery table. The result of this premonition game number lottery is set in the premonition game number counter, and the GSB display permission flag is set to "GSB display not permitted." Note that the configuration of this premonition game number lottery is the same as the premonition game number lottery performed during the general period (advantageous zone), so explanation will be omitted. Additionally, in the gaming state (RUSH), the value of the premonition game number counter is decremented by one for each game in which the GSB display permission flag is set to anything other than "GSB in progress" and the result of the role lottery is a winning combination belonging to the winning combination group with the winning combination group name "Selected combination."

If the GSB display permission flag is set to anything other than "GSB in progress" during game play (RUSH), and the value of the premonition game count counter reaches 0, the GSB display permission flag will be set to "GSB display permitted."

If, during the game mode (RUSH), the GSB display permission flag is set to anything other than "GSB in progress," and the value of the premonition game count counter reaches 0, and "Burnout waiting" is set in the "Premonition type_RUSH in progress" memory area, the payout status memory area is set to "Normal" and the value of the RUSH navigation number counter is cleared. In addition, the contents of the "RUSH in progress type" memory area, the contents of the "Premonition type_RUSH in progress" memory area, and the GSB display permission flag are all cleared.

Also, when the GSB display permission flag is set to anything other than "GSB in progress" during game play (RUSH), if the value of the premonition game count counter reaches 0, and "wait for burst" is set in the "premonition type_RUSH in progress" memory area, and "BC transition on burst" is set in the BC burst flag, "BC" is set in the payout status memory area. At this time, "BC navigation count initial value (30)" is set in the pseudo BNS navigation count counter, and "TY value_BC transition subtraction value (34)" is subtracted from the value in the "TY value_RUSH" memory area. Also, the BC burst flag is cleared.

Also, during the game mode (RUSH), when the GSB display permission flag is set to anything other than "GSB in progress" and the value of the premonition game count counter reaches 0, if "Burst Waiting" is set in the "Premonition Type_RUSH in progress" memory area, and if the MAP end flag is set to "Ceiling End", the Forced End flag is set to "Forced End", or the Compensation Mode Management flag is set to "After Compensation Mode", then "Request to End Advantageous Zone" will be set in the ball output status memory area.

Also, if the GSB display permission flag is set to anything other than "GSB in progress" during game play (RUSH), and the value of the premonition game number counter reaches 0, and "Burst Standby" is set in the "Premonition Type_RUSH in progress" memory area, the value of the short-term guard game number counter will be cleared.

Also, during the game state (RUSH), when the GSB display permission flag is set to anything other than "GSB in progress," if the value of the premonition game count counter reaches 0 and "Burst Wait" is set in the "Premonition Type_RUSH in progress" memory area, an initial AT level lottery is performed using the scenario number portion stored in the scenario memory area of the initial AT level lottery table, an example of which is shown in Figure 265, and the result of the lottery is set in the AT level memory area.

When the GSB display permission flag is set to a value other than "GSB in progress" during game play (RUSH), if the value of the premonition game count counter reaches 0 and "BG premonition" is set in the "premonition type_RUSH in progress" memory area, "BG" is set in the payout state memory area. At this time, the "BG navigation count initial value (6)" is set in the pseudo BNS navigation count counter, and if the compensation mode management flag is set to a value other than "Compensation mode in progress", the "TY value_BG transition subtraction value (7)" is subtracted from the value in the "TY value_RUSH" memory area. Furthermore, the contents of the "premonition type_RUSH in progress" memory area are cleared, and the pseudo BNS in progress flag is set to "pseudo BNS in progress in RUSH".

When the GSB display permission flag is set to a value other than "GSB in progress" during game play (RUSH), if the value of the premonition game count counter reaches 0 and "BC premonition" is set in the "premonition type_RUSH in progress" memory area, "BC" is set in the ball payout status memory area. At this time, the "BC navigation count initial value (30)" is set in the pseudo BNS navigation count counter, and if the compensation mode management flag is set to a value other than "Compensation mode in progress", the "TY value_BC transition subtraction value (34)" is subtracted from the value in the "TY value_RUSH" memory area. Furthermore, the contents of the "premonition type_RUSH in progress" memory area are cleared, and the pseudo BNS in progress flag is set to "pseudo BNS in progress in RUSH".

The pachislot machine 1, which is the second gaming machine described above, may be equipped with a notification means for notifying the player when compensation mode is entered. The notification means may be an audio notification or a lamp notification, and any means that can notify the player of this may be used as appropriate.

In the pachislot machine 1, which is the second gaming machine described above, during play in the game state (omen A) or game state (omen B), an effect (omen effect) may be displayed that suggests the possibility of transitioning to the first or second pseudo bonus game state (BG, BC) or the game state (RUSH). Examples of omen effects include a bounce stop effect for reels 3L, 3C, and 3R, or an effect that delays the start of rotation of reels 3L, 3C, and 3R.

In addition, in the above-described embodiment, the count of the increase or decrease in the number of gaming media (medals) lost during compensation mode (count of the compensation point counter) was roughly determined using compensation point data tables that were individually provided for the number of medals bet, when a favorable button press order was notified (AT_compensation point data table), and when a favorable button press order was not notified (non-AT_compensation point data table). However, the value of the compensation point counter may also be updated by referring to the number of medals bet and the number of medals actually paid out. Furthermore, in the case of a recommended stop operation mode (first left stop in this embodiment), the compensation point may be updated by referring to the compensation point data table, and in the case of a stop operation mode other than the recommended mode (for example, first middle stop or first right stop), the value of the compensation point counter may be updated by referring to the number of medals actually paid out. Furthermore, in the case of a stop operation mode other than the recommended mode, the compensation point counter may not be updated.

In addition, in the above embodiment, when "Ceiling" is set in the "MAP Type" memory area, if the compensation mode management flag is set to "In Compensation Mode" and the player wins the premonition transition lottery or reaches the ceiling (final game of MAP Type = "Ceiling"), the game state (RUSH) will not end in the subsequent game state (RUSH) until at least the game media (medals) that were lost during compensation mode are awarded (compensation point counter > 0). However, if the compensation mode management flag is set to "In Compensation Mode" and the player wins the premonition transition lottery ("RUSH premonition") while a MAP of another "MAP Type" is progressing, the game state (RUSH) may also be configured to not end until at least the game media (medals) that were lost during compensation mode are awarded (compensation point counter > 0).

Furthermore, in the pachislot machine 1, which is the second gaming machine described above, when "Ceiling" is set in the "MAP Type" memory area, if the compensation mode management flag is set to "In Compensation Mode" when the player wins the premonition transition lottery or reaches the ceiling (final game of MAP Type = "Ceiling"), the subsequent gaming state (RUSH) is configured not to end until at least the amount of gaming media (number of medals) lost during compensation mode is awarded (compensation point counter > 0). However, the gaming state (RUSH) may also be configured not to end until at least a portion of the amount of gaming media (number of medals) lost during compensation mode is awarded. In other words, the gaming state (RUSH) may be configured so that, rather than all medals lost during compensation mode being restored, only a portion of the lost medals are restored. In this case, for example, if the number of medals lost during compensation mode is A, a value in the range of 0 to A may be determined by lottery (number of medals recovered), and the game state (RUSH) may not end until at least the number determined by the number of medals recovered has been recovered.

[11-34. Supplementary notes]
Among conventional gaming machines, there is known a gaming machine that suppresses gambling by setting the upper limit of the number of games in one advantageous zone to 1,500 games (see, for example, JP 2017-169968 A (for example, paragraph 0168)).

However, while these gaming machines can reduce gambling, the upper limit on the number of balls that can be won is also easy to see, which can reduce interest in the game.

The above-mentioned supplementary notes were made in consideration of the above issues, and aim to provide a gaming machine that appropriately suppresses gambling while preventing a decline in interest in the game.

To achieve the above objective, the gaming machine described in the appendix can be provided with the following configuration:

The gaming machine (1) is equipped with a display means (reels 3L, 3C, 3C) having a plurality of variable display columns that variably display a plurality of types of symbols, and a stop operation means (stop buttons 8L, 8C, 8C) that stops the variable display of each of the variable display columns, and a game is played with a predetermined amount of gaming value as a bet amount per game, and the gaming value is awarded to the player according to the symbol combination when all of the variable display columns have stopped (Fig. 243).
A role lottery means (main control circuit 100 (main CPU 101)) that performs a role lottery to determine which role has been won among a plurality of roles (FIG. 253) including specific roles in which the amount of the award given to the player varies depending on the operation mode of the stop operation means;
a favorable zone transition control means (main control circuit 100 (main CPU 101)) for controlling the transition between a favorable zone (favorable zone in FIG. 284) in which it is permitted to notify the player of a favorable operation mode of the stop operation means when the specific combination is won, and a non-favorable zone (favorable zone in FIG. 284) in which it is prohibited to notify the player of a favorable operation mode of the stop operation means when the specific combination is won;
a first gaming value increment/decrement counting means (a difference counter of the main control circuit 100 (main CPU 101)) for counting the increment/decrement of the gaming value;
The first gaming value increase/decrease amount counting means is configured to be able to count the increase/decrease amount of the gaming value after the game has shifted to the advantageous zone,
The conditions for the advantageous zone transition control means to transition from the advantageous zone to the non-advantageous zone are as follows:
This is characterized in that the increase in the gaming value after entering the advantageous zone counted by the first gaming value increase/decrease counting means exceeds a predetermined threshold value (the specified value of the difference counter).

With this configuration, the start of the advantageous zone is used as the base, and if the increase in gaming value from the start of the advantageous zone exceeds a predetermined threshold, the advantageous zone is transitioned to a non-advantageous zone. This increases the increase in gaming value from the lowest point of gaming value in the advantageous zone, while preventing the increase in gaming value from the start of the advantageous zone from exceeding the predetermined threshold. This appropriately suppresses gambling and prevents a decline in interest in the game.

The gaming machine of (2) is the gaming machine of (1) above,
The advantageous zone includes a normal zone (general zone in FIG. 284) and a ball output zone (RUSH zone in FIG. 284) that is more advantageous than the normal zone.
When a predetermined ball output zone transition condition is met (the result of the premonition transition lottery conducted using the premonition transition lottery table such as FIG. 261 is "RUSH premonition"), a ball output zone transition control means (main control circuit 100 (main CPU 101)) transitions to the ball output zone (RUSH via premonition B in FIG. 284),
A ball-out period end control means (main control circuit 100 (main CPU 101)) that ends the ball-out period;
A specific game state transition control means (main control circuit 100 (main CPU 101)) that transitions to a specific game state (a state in the compensation mode) that begins in the normal period before transition to the ball output period when a predetermined specific game state transition condition is met (the result of the compensation mode transition lottery using the compensation mode transition lottery table of FIG. 273 is "transition to compensation mode");
a second gaming value increment/decrement counting means (a compensation point counter of the main control circuit 100 (main CPU 101)) for counting the increment/decrement of the gaming value after the transition to the specific gaming state;
The ball output period end control means is configured to be capable of performing ball output period end prohibition control for the ball output period entered during the specific game state, so as to prevent the end of the ball output period at least until the game value counted by the second game value increase/decrease counting means begins to increase (until the value of the compensation point counter exceeds the value at the start of the compensation mode).

With this configuration, the ball dispensing period termination prohibition control, which prevents the ball dispensing period from ending, is performed based on the start of the specific game state. This makes it more advantageous for the player if the specific game state starts early after the advantageous period begins, compared to if the specific game state starts late, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

(3) The gaming machine is
In the gaming machine of (2) above,
The ball-out period end control means is characterized in that it executes the ball-out period end prohibition control when a predetermined prohibition control execution condition is met (such as when the final game on the map of map type = ceiling is reached).

With this configuration, the ball-dispensing period end prohibition control that prevents the ball-dispensing period from ending is not always performed, which increases the excitement of the game.

The above embodiments and variations can be combined as appropriate.

Seventh Embodiment
The seventh embodiment will be described below. The seventh embodiment relates to a transmission means used for transmitting signals between electronic components in a gaming machine (for example, a gaming machine known as a "pachinko machine" or a "pachislot machine (slot machine)").

The gaming machine of the seventh embodiment uses coaxial cables as a transmission means for transmitting signals between at least some of the electronic components.

First, the coaxial cable 700 will be described with reference to Figures 285 and 286. Figure 285 is a perspective view showing the configuration of the coaxial cable 700, and Figure 286 is a cross-sectional view of the coaxial cable 700 in Figure 285.

As shown in Figures 285 and 286, the coaxial cable 700 has an inner conductor 700a, an inner insulator 700b surrounding the outer periphery of the inner conductor 700a, an outer conductor 700c surrounding the outer periphery of the inner insulator 700b, and an outer insulator 700d surrounding the outer periphery of the outer conductor 700c, with the inner conductor 700a, inner insulator 700b, outer conductor 700c, and outer insulator 700d all sharing the same axis. Note that, for example, the inner conductor may be referred to as the "center conductor," the inner insulator as the "insulator," the outer conductor as the "outer conductor (shield)," and the outer insulator as the "jacket."

The portions of the coaxial cable 700 at one end are referred to here as the "first portion at one end," "second portion at one end," and "third portion at one end," respectively, starting from the tip of the coaxial cable 700. In the example of the coaxial cable 700 shown in a perspective view in Figure 285, the inner insulator 700b, outer conductor 700c, and outer insulator 700d have been removed from the first portion at one end of the coaxial cable 700, leaving only the inner conductor 700a. In other words, the inner conductor 700a is exposed. For example, the exposed inner conductor 700a is electrically connected to a transmission path (e.g., a connector terminal of a connector forming a signal line). Furthermore, the outer conductor 700c and outer insulator 700d have been removed from the second portion at one end of the coaxial cable 700, leaving only the inner conductor 700a and inner insulator 700b. In other words, the inner insulator 700b is exposed. Furthermore, at the third section on one end of the coaxial cable 700, the outer insulator 700d has been removed, leaving only the inner conductor 700a, inner insulator 700b, and outer conductor 700c; in other words, the outer conductor 700c is exposed, and the exposed outer conductor 700c is electrically connected to ground (for example, the ground bar of a connector).

The other end of the coaxial cable 700 will be referred to here as the "first portion at the other end," "second portion at the other end," and "third portion at the other end," respectively, starting from the tip of the other end of the coaxial cable 700. The other end of the coaxial cable 700 has the same structure as the one end of the coaxial cable 700 shown in a perspective view in Figure 285. In the first portion at the other end of the coaxial cable 700, the inner insulator 700b, outer conductor 700c, and outer insulator 700d have been removed, leaving only the inner conductor 700a. In other words, the inner conductor 700a is exposed, and the exposed inner conductor 700a is electrically connected to a transmission path (e.g., a connector terminal of a connector forming a signal line). At the second section of the coaxial cable 700 at the other end, the outer conductor 700c and outer insulator 700d are removed, leaving only the inner conductor 700a and inner insulator 700b; that is, the inner insulator 700b is exposed. At the third section of the coaxial cable 700 at the other end, the outer insulator 700d is removed, leaving only the inner conductor 700a, inner insulator 700b, and outer conductor 700c; that is, the outer conductor 700c is exposed. For example, the exposed outer conductor 700c is electrically connected to ground (e.g., the ground bar of a connector).

In the coaxial cable 700, none of the inner conductor 700a, inner insulator 700b, outer conductor 700c, or outer insulator 700d has been removed except for the first, second, and third portions at one end of the coaxial cable 700, and the first, second, and third portions at the other end of the coaxial cable 700, and the outer conductor 700c and other components are protected by the outer insulator 700d.

The coaxial cable 700 has the advantage that the electrical signals transmitted through the inner conductor 700a are less susceptible to the effects of external electromagnetic waves (electromagnetic noise (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "noise")) because the outer conductor 700c that covers the inner conductor 700a acts as an electromagnetic shield.

Here, we will compare the electromagnetic noise resistance of the coaxial cable 700 and the discrete cable 701 with reference to Figure 287.

As shown in Figure 287(b), the discrete cable 701 is a cable having a conductor 701a that transmits electrical signals and an insulator 701b that surrounds the outer periphery of the conductor 701a. However, unlike the coaxial cable 700, the discrete cable 701 does not have a conductor (shield) that covers the conductor 701a and acts as an electromagnetic shield. Note that the insulator is sometimes called a "jacket," for example.

The discrete cable 701 has the insulator 701b removed at each of the ends of one side and the other side of the discrete cable 701, leaving only the conductor 701a; in other words, the conductor 701a is exposed, and the exposed conductor 701a is electrically connected to a transmission line (e.g., a connector terminal of a connector forming a signal line, a power line, etc.). Except for the ends of one side and the other side of the discrete cable 701, neither the conductor 701a nor the insulator 701b has been removed from the discrete cable 701, and the conductor 701a is protected by the insulator 701b.

When two discrete cables 701 are placed close to each other as shown in Figure 287(b), the discrete cables 701 do not have a conductor (shield) covering the conductor 701a, which means that interference is likely to occur between the signals transmitted through the two discrete cables 701, and noise is likely to be superimposed on the signals transmitted through the discrete cable 700. This makes communication errors more likely to occur when high-speed communication is performed.

On the other hand, when two coaxial cables 700 are placed close to each other as shown in Figure 287(a), the coaxial cables 700 have outer conductors 700c that cover the inner conductors 700a (the outer conductors 700c function as a shield for the inner conductors 700a), which means that interference is less likely to occur between signals transmitted through the two coaxial cables 700, and noise is less likely to be superimposed on the signals transmitted through the coaxial cables 700. As a result, communication errors are less likely to occur even during high-speed communication.

Therefore, when comparing coaxial cable 700 and discrete cable 701, coaxial cable 700 has stronger noise resistance than discrete cable 701, and when performing high-speed communication, it is more advantageous to use coaxial cable 700 than discrete cable 701.

In the gaming machine of the seventh embodiment, if the outer diameter of the coaxial cable 700 (the outer diameter of the outer insulator 700d) is D millimeters as shown in Figure 286, a coaxial cable 700 with an outer diameter D of approximately 1 millimeter or less is used as the transmission means. By using a thin coaxial cable 700 with an outer diameter D of approximately 1 millimeter or less, it becomes difficult to hide a locking component behind the coaxial cable 700, thereby improving security. Note that in the following description, a coaxial cable 700 with an outer diameter D of approximately 1 millimeter or less will be referred to as a "thin coaxial cable 700" where appropriate.

The coaxial cable 700 used to transmit signals between electronic components in gaming machines is not limited to a coaxial cable 700 (thin-wire coaxial cable 700) having an outer diameter D of approximately 1 mm or less, but may also be a coaxial cable 700 having an outer diameter D of more than approximately 1 mm.

Next, we will explain one cable assembly (harness) H used in an amusement machine with reference to Figure 288. Figure 288 is a schematic diagram showing the appearance of cable assembly (harness) H.

Cable assembly H is configured to include a cable subassembly 710, a first connector 720A attached to one end of cable subassembly 710, and a second connector 720B attached to the other end of cable subassembly 710.

The first connector 720A and the second connector 720B are male connectors with multiple connector terminals, and are attached to first and second female connectors with multiple connector terminals, respectively. The mating first and second connectors are, for example, provided on different circuit boards. In the description of the seventh embodiment of the gaming machine, the first and second connectors provided on the cable assembly, such as the first connector 720A and the second connector 720B provided on the cable assembly H, are referred to as the male side, and the mating first and second connectors are referred to as the female side, but the male and female sides may be reversed.

The cable subassembly 710 is configured to have multiple (e.g., 30) fine-coaxial cables 700. Note that in Figure 288, for simplicity of the drawing, only two fine-coaxial cables 700 are shown. The cable subassembly 710 has fine-coaxial cables 700, but does not have any cables other than the fine-coaxial cables 700 (e.g., discrete cables 701) (e.g., an all-fine-coaxial type cable subassembly 710a, one end of which is shown in a perspective view in Figure 290(a), or a ground finger type cable subassembly 710c, one end of which is shown in a perspective view in Figure 290(c)). Note that cable subassembly 710 may be, for example, a cable subassembly having a plurality of fine-coaxial cables 700 and a plurality (e.g., four) of cables other than fine-coaxial cables 700 (e.g., discrete cables 701) (for example, cable subassembly 710b of a fine-coaxial/discrete cable mixed wiring type, the perspective view of one end of which is shown in Figure 290(b)). Note that details of cable subassemblies 710a, 710b, and 710c will be described later with reference to Figures 290(a), (b), and (c).

In Figure 288, cable assembly H is depicted with two thin-coaxial cables 700 wound around it. The thin-coaxial cables 700 are characterized by their high flexibility. Therefore, when installing cable assembly H in an amusement machine, the thin-coaxial cables 700 can be bent significantly during installation. Therefore, first connector 720A and second connector 720B can be attached to their mating first and second connectors without being subject to constraints imposed by the relative positions of the first connector to which first connector 720A is attached and the second connector to which second connector 720B is attached, or by the presence or absence of components or the like between the first connector to which first connector 720A is attached and the second connector to which second connector 720B is attached. This point will be discussed later with reference to Figures 294 to 296.

Next, another cable assembly (harness) H1 used in gaming machines will be described with reference to Figure 289. Figure 289(a) is a schematic plan view of cable assembly H1, and Figure 289(b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of cable assembly H1 in Figure 289(a).

As shown in Figures 289(a) and (b), cable assembly H1 is configured to include a cable subassembly 710, a first connector 720A attached to one end of cable subassembly 710, a second connector 720B attached to the other end of cable subassembly 710, and a tube 721. Note that cable assembly H1 has the same structure as cable assembly H in Figure 288, except for the inclusion of tube 721.

The first connector 720A and the second connector 720B are each male connectors with multiple connector terminals, and are attached to first and second female connectors with multiple connector terminals. The mating female first and second connectors are, for example, provided on different circuit boards.

The cable subassembly 710 is configured to have multiple (e.g., 30) fine-coaxial cables 700. Note that in Figure 289, for simplicity of the drawing, the number of fine-coaxial cables 700 is shown as five. The cable subassembly 710 has fine-coaxial cables 700, but does not have any cables other than the fine-coaxial cables 700 (e.g., discrete cables 701) (e.g., an all-fine-coaxial type cable subassembly 710a, one end of which is shown in a perspective view in Figure 290(a), or a ground finger type cable subassembly 710c, one end of which is shown in a perspective view in Figure 290(c)). Note that cable subassembly 710 may be, for example, a cable subassembly having one or more fine-coaxial cables 700 and one or more cables other than fine-coaxial cables 700 (e.g., discrete cables 701) (for example, cable subassembly 710b of a fine-coaxial/discrete cable mixed wiring type, the perspective view of one end of which is shown in Figure 290(b)). Note that details of cable subassemblies 710a, 710b, and 710c will be described later with reference to Figures 290(a), (b), and (c).

The tube 721, which serves as a holding member for holding the cable, has, for example, a cylindrical shape. If the cable subassembly 710 has the micro-coaxial cable 700 but no cables other than the micro-coaxial cable 700 (e.g., discrete cable 701), all of the micro-coaxial cables 700 are bundled and housed inside the tube 721 and held inside the tube 721. Note that, for example, if the cable subassembly 710 is a cable subassembly that has the micro-coaxial cable 700 and cables other than the micro-coaxial cable 700 (e.g., discrete cable 701), all of the micro-coaxial cables 700 and all of the cables other than the micro-coaxial cable 700 (e.g., discrete cable 701) are bundled and housed inside the tube 721 and held inside the tube 721.

The tube 721 is made of, for example, a resilient resin and has excellent flexibility. By making the tube 721 highly flexible, in addition to the thin-coaxial cable 700 housed inside the tube 721, the tube 721 and the thin-coaxial cable 700 can be bent significantly when the cable assembly H1 is installed in an amusement machine. Therefore, the first connector 720A and the second connector 720B can be attached to the first and second connectors to which they are attached without being restricted by the relative positions of the first connector to which the first connector 720A is attached and the second connector to which the second connector 720B is attached, or by the presence or absence of components or the like between the first connector to which the first connector 720A is attached and the second connector to which the second connector 720B is attached.

In addition, tube 721 has a degree of transparency, such as transparency or translucency, that allows the inside of tube 721 to be seen when the inside of tube 721 is viewed from the outside with tube 721 in between. Therefore, the portion of thin-coaxial cable 700 housed inside tube 721 can be seen from outside tube 721. In Figure 289(a), the portion of thin-coaxial cable 700 housed inside tube 721 that is visible from the outside is depicted by a dotted line.

By using a transparent tube 721, the thin-coaxial cable 700 can be seen from outside the tube 721, preventing unauthorized use of the thin-coaxial cable 700. Furthermore, by using a transparent tube 721, the tube 721 does not obstruct visibility inside or behind the tube 721, making it difficult to hide gore components and improving security.

As shown in FIG. 289(a), the tube 721 is provided with identification information (cable assembly identification information) 722 for identifying the cable assembly H1 (cable assembly H1 including a cable subassembly 710 having a thin coaxial cable 700, a first connector 720A, a second connector 720B, and the tube 721). In the example of FIG. 289(a), the identification number "UE-123456" is provided as the cable assembly identification information 722. Note that the cable assembly identification information 722 is not limited to an identification number and may be, for example, an identification symbol or a code (e.g., a barcode, QR code (registered trademark)) from which information enabling identification of the cable assembly H1 can be obtained.

It may be difficult to affix identification information (thin-coaxial cable identification information) for identifying a thin-coaxial cable 700 with a small outer diameter. Furthermore, affixing thin-coaxial cable identification information to each of multiple thin-coaxial cables 700 would require an increased number of parts to which identification information must be affixed, resulting in poor manufacturing efficiency and increased costs. In contrast, the tube 721 that bundles and holds multiple thin-coaxial cables 700 inside has a larger outer diameter than a single thin-coaxial cable 700, making it easy to affix cable assembly identification information 722 to the tube 721. Furthermore, affixing cable assembly identification information 722 to the tube 721 reduces the number of parts to which identification information must be affixed compared to affixing thin-coaxial cable identification information to each of multiple thin-coaxial cables 700, thereby improving manufacturing efficiency and reducing costs.

Similar advantages can also be achieved when a cable assembly includes a micro-coaxial cable 700 and a cable other than the micro-coaxial cable 700 (e.g., a discrete cable 701), when the cable assembly includes two or more micro-coaxial cables 700 and cables other than the micro-coaxial cable 700 (e.g., a discrete cable 701), when the micro-coaxial cable 700 and cables other than the micro-coaxial cable 700 (e.g., a discrete cable 701) included in the cable assembly are housed in a tube 721, and when cable assembly identification information 722 is attached to the tube 721.

The mechanism for attaching the cable assembly identification information 722 to the tube 721 can also be applied when the cable assembly has a single thin-coaxial cable 700, in cases where the cable assembly has a thin-coaxial cable 700 but does not have any cables other than the thin-coaxial cable 700 (e.g., a discrete cable 701). In this case, the tube 721 that holds a single thin-coaxial cable 700 inside has a larger outer diameter than a single thin-coaxial cable 700, making it easy to attach the cable assembly identification information 722 to the tube 721.

The cable assembly identification information 722 can be formed on the tube 721 by printing or laser engraving the cable assembly identification information 722 directly on the tube 721. Alternatively, the cable assembly identification information 722 can be printed on a sticker in advance and then affixed to the tube 721. In this case, the simple task of preparing a sticker on which the cable assembly identification information 722 is printed and affixing it to the tube 721 is all that is required, thereby improving the manufacturing efficiency of the cable assembly H1.

Note that the cable assembly identification information 722 attached to the tube 721 is identification information for identifying the cable assembly H1, but is not limited to this and may be, for example, identification information for identifying the cable subassembly 710 (cable subassembly identification information).

Furthermore, instead of attaching the cable assembly identification information 722 to the tube 721, or in addition to attaching the cable assembly identification information 722 to the tube 721, identification information for identifying the cable (cable identification information) may be attached to each of the multiple cables including the thin-coaxial cable 700. In this case, since each cable is attached with cable identification information, it is possible to confirm whether each cable is genuine.

The tube 721 may be provided with a code (e.g., a barcode, QR code (registered trademark), etc.) that enables obtaining component information for the cable assembly H1 (such as information about the performance and specifications of the cable assembly H1). By reading the code and accessing the URL written in the code, workers can easily obtain and check the component information for the cable assembly H1, and can install the cable assembly H1 into the gaming machine while checking the component information for the cable assembly H1.

The component information can be formed on the tube 721 by printing the component information directly on the tube 721 or by laser engraving it. Alternatively, the component information can be printed on a sticker in advance and then affixed to the tube 721. In this case, it is sufficient to perform the simple task of preparing a sticker with the component information printed on it and affixing it to the tube 721, thereby improving the manufacturing efficiency of the cable assembly H1.

Note that the component information attached to the tube 721 is component information for the cable assembly H1, but is not limited to this and may be, for example, component information for the cable subassembly 710 (such as information on the performance and specifications of the cable subassembly 710).

The first male connector 720A and second male connector 720B provided on cable assemblies (harnesses) H and H1, the first female connector provided on a first component (such as a display device such as a liquid crystal display device or a circuit board) to which the first connector 720A is attached, and the second female connector provided on a second component (such as a display device such as a liquid crystal display device or a circuit board) to which the second connector 720B is attached are primarily used when connecting digital signals between a first component and a second component using a differential transmission method using the thin-coaxial cable 700. To properly transmit digital signals using the thin-coaxial cable 700, the following connections are made, for example.

When the male first connector 720A of the cable assembly H, H1 is attached to the female first connector of the first member, the inner conductor 700a is electrically connected to the signal circuit of the first member via the connector terminal of the male first connector 720A and the connector terminal of the female first connector, and the outer conductor 700c is connected to the ground of the first member via the metal structural part (shell) of the male first connector 720A and the metal structural part (shell) of the female first connector. Furthermore, when the male second connector 720B of the cable assembly H, H1 is attached to the female second connector of the second member, the inner conductor 700a is electrically connected to the signal circuit of the second member via the connector terminals of the male second connector 720B and the female second connector, and the outer conductor 700c is connected to the ground of the second member via the metal structural part (shell) of the male second connector 720B and the metal structural part (shell) of the female second connector. Connecting the outer conductor 700c to ground in this way improves the shielding performance of the outer conductor 700c, thereby improving the quality of communications, such as high-speed communications.

Next, cable subassemblies 710a, 710b, and 710c, which have the thin-coaxial cable 700 as a component, will be described with reference to Figures 290(a), (b), and (c).

Figure 290(a) is a perspective view of an all-fine-wire coaxial cable subassembly 710a. Note that Figure 290(a) shows one end of the cable subassembly 710a; the other end has the same structure.

The cable subassembly 710a is constructed by connecting only fine-coaxial cables 700, including fine-coaxial cables for transmitting electrical signals. The cable subassembly 710a includes a plurality (e.g., 30) of fine-coaxial cables 700, a first fine-coaxial cable ground bar 711a provided corresponding to one end of each of the fine-coaxial cables 700, and a second fine-coaxial cable ground bar (not shown) provided corresponding to the other end of each of the fine-coaxial cables 700. Each of the fine-coaxial cables 700 has the structure described, for example, with reference to Figures 285 and 286, and an outer diameter D (mm) of approximately 1 mm or less. The cable subassembly 710a includes only the fine-coaxial cables 700 and does not include any cables other than the fine-coaxial cables 700 (such as discrete cables). In Figure 290(a), for simplicity of illustration, the number of thin-coaxial cables 700 is shown as seven.

The multiple fine-coaxial cables 700 included in cable subassembly 710a are all assumed to have the same diameter. It is also possible to use fine-coaxial cables 700 of different diameters as the multiple fine-coaxial cables 700 included in cable subassembly 710a. For example, of DA+DB fine-coaxial cables 700, it is possible to use fine-coaxial cables 700 with a diameter D=Da for DA fine-coaxial cables 700 and fine-coaxial cables 700 with a diameter D=Db for DB fine-coaxial cables 700 (Da≠Db).

The cable subassembly 710a also includes a component (not shown) equivalent to the above-mentioned tube 721, which houses multiple fine-coaxial cables 700 inside. However, this component does not necessarily have to be included.

As described above, the first fine-coaxial cable ground bar 711a is a ground bar provided corresponding to one end of the plurality of fine-coaxial cables 700, and is made of, for example, a conductive metal. As shown in FIG. 290(a), the first fine-coaxial cable ground bar 711a has through holes through which the fine-coaxial cables 700 are inserted, corresponding to each of the plurality of fine-coaxial cables 700. A portion of one end of the fine-coaxial cable 700 where the outer conductor 700c is exposed (a portion where the outer insulator 700d has been removed, leaving only the inner conductor 700a, inner insulator 700b, and outer conductor 700c) is positioned inside the through hole of the first fine-coaxial cable ground bar 711a. In this state, the outer conductor 700c of the fine-coaxial cable 700 is soldered to the first fine-coaxial cable ground bar 711a, thereby electrically connecting the outer conductor 700c of the fine-coaxial cable 700 to the first fine-coaxial cable ground bar 711a.

As described above, the second fine-coaxial cable ground bar is a ground bar provided corresponding to the other ends of the multiple fine-coaxial cables 700, and is made of, for example, a conductive metal. Similar to the first fine-coaxial cable ground bar 711a, the second fine-coaxial cable ground bar has through holes corresponding to each of the multiple fine-coaxial cables 700, through which the fine-coaxial cables 700 are inserted. A portion of the other end of the fine-coaxial cable 700 where the outer conductor 700c is exposed (a portion where the outer insulator 700d has been removed, leaving only the inner conductor 700a, inner insulator 700b, and outer conductor 700c) is positioned inside the through hole of the second fine-coaxial cable ground bar. In this state, the outer conductor 700c of the fine-coaxial cable 700 is soldered to the ground bar for the second fine-coaxial cable, thereby electrically connecting the outer conductor 700c of the fine-coaxial cable 700 to the ground bar for the second fine-coaxial cable.

Each of the inner conductors 700a exposed at one end of each of the multiple fine-coaxial cables 700 is soldered to a corresponding connector terminal of a first connector provided in the cable assembly, thereby attaching one side of the cable subassembly 710a to the first connector. Furthermore, each of the inner conductors 700a exposed at the other end of each of the multiple fine-coaxial cables 700 is soldered to a corresponding connector terminal of a second connector provided in the cable assembly, thereby attaching the other side of the cable subassembly 710a to the second connector. This completes the cable assembly.

In this way, cable subassembly 710a is created before each of the first ends of the multiple fine-coaxial cables 700 is connected to a corresponding connector terminal of the first connector and each of the other ends of the multiple fine-coaxial cables 700 is connected to a corresponding connector terminal of the second connector. This makes it possible to simultaneously connect each of the first ends of the multiple fine-coaxial cables 700 to a corresponding connector terminal of the first connector, and simultaneously connect each of the other ends of the multiple fine-coaxial cables 700 to a corresponding connector terminal of the second connector. This simplifies the process of connecting the multiple fine-coaxial cables 700 to the first connector and the process of connecting the multiple fine-coaxial cables 700 to the second connector, and also improves quality stability.

Figure 290(b) is a perspective view of cable subassembly 710b with a mixed micro-coaxial/discrete cable wiring type. Note that Figure 290(b) shows one end of cable subassembly 710b; the other end has the same structure.

The cable subassembly 710b connects together fine-coaxial cables 700, including fine-coaxial cables for transmitting electrical signals, and a cable for supplying power (discrete cable 701 in Figure 290(b)). The cable subassembly 710b includes a plurality (e.g., 30) of fine-coaxial cables 700, a first fine-coaxial cable ground bar 711b provided corresponding to one end of the plurality of fine-coaxial cables 700, a second fine-coaxial cable ground bar (not shown) provided corresponding to the other end of the plurality of fine-coaxial cables 700, and a plurality (e.g., four) of discrete cables 701. Each of the plurality of fine-coaxial cables 700 has the structure described, for example, with reference to Figures 285 and 286, and an outer diameter D (mm) of approximately 1 mm or less. The discrete cable 701 has the structure described using Figure 287(b), for example. Note that in Figure 290(b), for the sake of simplicity, the number of thin-coaxial cables 700 is shown as seven, and the number of discrete cables 701 is shown as four.

All of the multiple fine-coaxial cables 700 included in cable subassembly 710b are assumed to have the same diameter. It is also possible to use fine-coaxial cables 700 of different diameters as the multiple fine-coaxial cables 700 included in cable subassembly 710b. For example, of the DA+DB fine-coaxial cables 700, it is possible to use fine-coaxial cables 700 with a diameter D=Da for the DA fine-coaxial cables 700 and fine-coaxial cables 700 with a diameter D=Db for the DB fine-coaxial cables 700 (Da≠Db).

The cable subassembly 710b also includes a component (not shown) equivalent to the above-mentioned tube 721, which houses multiple fine-coaxial cables 700 and multiple discrete cables 701 inside. However, this component does not necessarily have to be included.

As described above, the first fine-coaxial cable ground bar 711b is a ground bar provided corresponding to one end of the plurality of fine-coaxial cables 700, and is made of, for example, a conductive metal. As shown in FIG. 290(b), the first fine-coaxial cable ground bar 711b has through holes through which the fine-coaxial cables 700 are inserted, corresponding to each of the plurality of fine-coaxial cables 700. A portion of one end of the fine-coaxial cable 700 where the outer conductor 700c is exposed (a portion where the outer insulator 700d has been removed, leaving only the inner conductor 700a, inner insulator 700b, and outer conductor 700c) is positioned inside the through hole of the first fine-coaxial cable ground bar 711b. In this state, the outer conductor 700c of the fine-coaxial cable 700 is soldered to the first fine-coaxial cable ground bar 711b, thereby electrically connecting the outer conductor 700c of the fine-coaxial cable 700 to the first fine-coaxial cable ground bar 711b.

As described above, the second fine-coaxial cable ground bar is a ground bar provided corresponding to the other ends of the multiple fine-coaxial cables 700, and is made of, for example, a conductive metal. Similar to the first fine-coaxial cable ground bar 711b, the second fine-coaxial cable ground bar has through holes through which the multiple fine-coaxial cables 700 are inserted, corresponding to each of the multiple fine-coaxial cables 700. The exposed portion of the outer conductor 700c of the other end of the fine-coaxial cable 700 (the portion from which the outer insulator 700d has been removed, leaving only the inner conductor 700a, inner insulator 700b, and outer conductor 700c) is positioned inside the through hole of the second fine-coaxial cable ground bar. In this state, the outer conductor 700c of the fine-coaxial cable 700 is soldered to the ground bar for the second fine-coaxial cable, thereby electrically connecting the outer conductor 700c of the fine-coaxial cable 700 to the ground bar for the second fine-coaxial cable.

The inner conductors 700a exposed at one end of the multiple fine-coaxial cables 700 and the conductors 701a exposed at one end of the multiple discrete cables 701 are each soldered to a corresponding connector terminal of a first connector provided in the cable assembly, thereby attaching one side of the cable subassembly 710b to the first connector. The inner conductors 700a exposed at the other end of the multiple fine-coaxial cables 700 and the conductors 701a exposed at the other end of the multiple discrete cables 701 are each soldered to a corresponding connector terminal of a second connector provided in the cable assembly, thereby attaching the other side of the cable subassembly 710b to the second connector. This completes the cable assembly.

In this way, one end of each of the plurality of fine-coaxial cables 700 and one end of each of the plurality of discrete cables 701 are connected to the corresponding connector terminals of the first connector, and cable subassembly 710b is created before the other ends of each of the plurality of fine-coaxial cables 700 and one end of each of the plurality of discrete cables 701 are connected to the corresponding connector terminals of the second connector. In this way, it becomes possible to connect one end of each of the plurality of fine-coaxial cables 700 and one end of each of the plurality of discrete cables 701 to the corresponding connector terminals of the first connector all at once, and it becomes possible to connect the other ends of each of the plurality of fine-coaxial cables 700 and one end of each of the plurality of discrete cables 701 to the corresponding connector terminals of the second connector all at once. This simplifies the process of connecting the multiple fine-coaxial cables 700 and the multiple discrete cables 701 to the first connector and the process of connecting the multiple fine-coaxial cables 700 and the multiple discrete cables 701 to the second connector, and also improves quality stability.

Furthermore, in a cable assembly having cable assembly 710b, a first connector, and a second connector, the process of attaching the male first connector of the cable assembly to the female first connector of a first component (such as a display device such as a liquid crystal display device or a circuit board) makes it possible to simultaneously connect multiple fine-coaxial cables 700, including a fine-coaxial cable for transmitting electrical signals, and multiple discrete cables 701 for supplying power, to the first component. Furthermore, the process of attaching the male second connector of the cable assembly to the female second connector of a second component (such as a display device such as a liquid crystal display device or a circuit board) makes it possible to simultaneously connect multiple fine-coaxial cables 700, including a fine-coaxial cable for transmitting electrical signals, and multiple discrete cables 701 for supplying power, to the second component. This reduces the workload on the worker.

Furthermore, in a cable assembly having a cable subassembly 710b, a first connector, and a second connector, by using a common connector for multiple fine-coaxial cables 700, including a fine-coaxial cable for transmitting electrical signals, and multiple discrete cables 701 for power supply, the internal space of the gaming machine can be used more efficiently than when separate connectors are used for the fine-coaxial cables 700 and the discrete cables 701.

Figure 290(c) is a perspective view of a ground finger type cable subassembly 710c. Note that Figure 290(c) shows one end of the cable subassembly 710c; the other end has the same structure.

In the cable subassembly 710c, the finger (protrusion) 711c1 formed on the first coaxial cable ground bar 711c is directly connected to the corresponding connector terminal of the first connector included in the cable assembly including the cable subassembly 710c, the first connector, and the second connector, and the finger (protrusion) (not shown) formed on the second coaxial cable ground bar (not shown) is directly connected to the corresponding connector terminal of the second connector.

The cable subassembly 710c includes a plurality (e.g., 30) of fine-coaxial cables 700, including fine-coaxial cables for transmitting electrical signals; a first fine-coaxial cable ground bar 711c provided corresponding to one end of each of the fine-coaxial cables 700; and a second fine-coaxial cable ground bar (not shown) provided corresponding to the other end of each of the fine-coaxial cables 700. Each of the fine-coaxial cables 700 has the structure described in Figures 285 and 286, for example, and has an outer diameter D (mm) of approximately 1 mm or less. Note that, for simplicity's sake, Figure 290(c) depicts four fine-coaxial cables 700 and three fingers 711c1.

The multiple fine-coaxial cables 700 included in cable subassembly 710c are all assumed to have the same diameter. It is also possible to use fine-coaxial cables 700 of different diameters as the multiple fine-coaxial cables 700 included in cable subassembly 710c. For example, of the DA+DB fine-coaxial cables 700, it is possible to use fine-coaxial cables 700 with a diameter D=Da for the DA fine-coaxial cables 700 and fine-coaxial cables 700 with a diameter D=Db for the DB fine-coaxial cables 700 (Da≠Db).

The cable subassembly 710c also includes a component (not shown) equivalent to the above-mentioned tube 721, which houses multiple fine-coaxial cables 700 inside. However, this component does not necessarily have to be included.

As described above, the first fine-coaxial cable ground bar 711c is a ground bar provided corresponding to one end of the plurality of fine-coaxial cables 700, and is made of, for example, a conductive metal. As shown in FIG. 290(c), the first fine-coaxial cable ground bar 711c has through holes through which the fine-coaxial cables 700 are inserted, corresponding to each of the plurality of fine-coaxial cables 700. A portion of one end of the fine-coaxial cable 700 where the outer conductor 700c is exposed (a portion where the outer insulator 700d has been removed, leaving only the inner conductor 700a, inner insulator 700b, and outer conductor 700c) is positioned inside the through hole of the first fine-coaxial cable ground bar 711c. In this state, the outer conductor 700c of the fine-coaxial cable 700 is soldered to the first fine-coaxial cable ground bar 711c, thereby electrically connecting the outer conductor 700c of the fine-coaxial cable 700 to the first fine-coaxial cable ground bar 711c.

The first fine-coaxial cable ground bar 711c has fingers 711c1 formed thereon, which are directly connected to the corresponding connector terminals of the first connector included in the cable assembly including the cable subassembly 710c, the first connector, and the second connector.

As described above, the second fine-coaxial cable ground bar is a ground bar provided corresponding to the other ends of the multiple fine-coaxial cables 700, and is made of, for example, a conductive metal. Similar to the first fine-coaxial cable ground bar 711c, the second fine-coaxial cable ground bar has through holes through which the multiple fine-coaxial cables 700 are inserted, corresponding to each of the multiple fine-coaxial cables 700. The exposed portion of the outer conductor 700c of the other end of the fine-coaxial cable 700 (the portion from which the outer insulator 700d has been removed, leaving only the inner conductor 700a, inner insulator 700b, and outer conductor 700c) is positioned inside the through hole of the second fine-coaxial cable ground bar. In this state, the outer conductor 700c of the fine-coaxial cable 700 is soldered to the ground bar for the second fine-coaxial cable, thereby electrically connecting the outer conductor 700c of the fine-coaxial cable 700 to the ground bar for the second fine-coaxial cable.

Like the first fine-coaxial cable ground bar 711c, the second fine-coaxial cable ground bar has fingers formed on it, and the fingers are directly connected to corresponding connector terminals of the second connector included in the cable assembly including the cable subassembly 710c, the first connector, and the second connector.

The inner conductors 700a exposed at one end of the multiple thin-coaxial cables 700 and the fingers 711c1 formed on the first coaxial cable ground bar 711c are each soldered to a corresponding connector terminal of the first connector provided in the cable assembly, thereby attaching one side of the cable subassembly 710c to the first connector. The inner conductors 700a exposed at the other end of the multiple thin-coaxial cables 700 and the fingers formed on the second coaxial cable ground bar are each soldered to a corresponding connector terminal of the second connector provided in the cable assembly, thereby attaching the other side of the cable subassembly 710c to the second connector. This completes the cable assembly.

In this way, cable subassembly 710c is created before each of the first ends of the multiple fine-coaxial cables 700 is connected to a corresponding connector terminal of the first connector and each of the other ends of the multiple fine-coaxial cables 700 is connected to a corresponding connector terminal of the second connector. This makes it possible to simultaneously connect each of the first ends of the multiple fine-coaxial cables 700 to a corresponding connector terminal of the first connector, and simultaneously connect each of the other ends of the multiple fine-coaxial cables 700 to a corresponding connector terminal of the second connector. This simplifies the process of connecting the multiple fine-coaxial cables 700 to the first connector and the process of connecting the multiple fine-coaxial cables 700 to the second connector, and also improves quality stability.

The cable subassembly 710c also allows for a reduction in the number of fine-coaxial cables 700 used. Furthermore, by directly connecting the fingers 711c of the first fine-coaxial cable ground bar 711c to the corresponding connector terminal of the first connector and directly connecting the fingers of the second fine-coaxial cable ground bar to the corresponding connector terminal of the second connector, the outer conductors 700c of each of the multiple fine-coaxial cables 700 can be more reliably electrically connected to ground, thereby improving the electrical characteristics of the cable assembly 710c.

Next, the above-described thin-coaxial cable 700 will be compared with a flexible flat cable (FFC), a flexible printed circuit (FPC), a shielded FFC, and a shielded FPC.

For example, an FFC may have a structure in which multiple flat conductors arranged in parallel at regular intervals are sandwiched between film-like insulators from above and below. A shielded FFC may have a structure in which shielding material is placed on the outer surfaces of the insulators on both sides of the FFC. An FPC may have a single-sided structure in which one side of a film-like insulator (base) is covered in this order from the first side, followed by adhesive, conductor foil, adhesive, and insulator (coverlay). Alternatively, an FPC may have a double-sided structure in which one side of a film-like insulator (base) is covered in this order from the first side, followed by adhesive, conductor foil, adhesive, and insulator (coverlay) on the other side, followed by adhesive, conductor foil, adhesive, and insulator (coverlay) on the other side. A shielded FPC may have a structure in which adhesive and shielding material are placed in this order from the first side from the second side.

When comparing the maximum transmission speeds possible with thin-coaxial cable 700, FFC, FPC, shielded FFC, and shielded FPC, the maximum transmission speed possible with thin-coaxial cable 700 is greater than the maximum transmission speeds possible with shielded FPC and shielded FFC, and greater than the maximum transmission speeds possible with FPC and FFC. Furthermore, when comparing the maximum transmission distances possible with thin-coaxial cable 700, FFC, FPC, shielded FFC, and shielded FPC, the maximum transmission distance possible with thin-coaxial cable 700 is greater than the maximum transmission distances possible with shielded FPC and shielded FFC, and greater than the maximum transmission distances possible with FPC and FFC. In other words, because thin-coaxial cable 700 has stronger noise resistance than other cables, using thin-coaxial cable 700 enables high-speed, long-distance transmission.

For example, tests using actual gaming machines have confirmed that the FPCs currently used in gaming machines are capable of communication at a transmission speed of approximately 1 Gbps (gigabit per second). However, depending on the environment surrounding the FPC (for example, if there are other noise sources such as signal lines or power supplies nearby), there is a risk that stable communication quality may not be possible even at a transmission speed of approximately 1 Gbps (gigabit per second). Furthermore, because the FPC itself is a substrate and has a ground, noise generated from the signal lines within the FPC flows to the ground, providing noise prevention. This means that FPCs have stronger noise resistance than FFCs even without shielding, and therefore FPCs are superior to FFCs in terms of maximum transmission speeds that can be used for communication.

On the other hand, since the maximum transmission speed possible with thin-coaxial cable 700 > the maximum transmission speed possible with shielded FPC and shielded FFC > the maximum transmission speed possible with FPC and FFC, it can be assumed that the maximum transmission speed possible with thin-coaxial cable 700, shielded FPC, and shielded FFC exceeds the 1 Gbps (gigabit per second) confirmed in tests using an actual device for FPC. In tests using an actual device, it has been confirmed that thin-coaxial cable 700 is capable of communication at a transmission speed of approximately 2.7 Gbps (gigabit per second).

For the above reasons, for transmissions of 1 Gbps (gigabit per second) or above, shielded FFC, shielded FPC, and thin coaxial cable 700 are suitable transmission means.

Next, we will explain the resolution of display devices such as LCD displays that use thin coaxial cable 700. The resolution of display devices such as LCD displays for gaming machines has been increasing year by year, moving from VGA to XGA, with full HD currently the mainstream. However, with the recent expansion of product lineups for QHD, 4K, and 8K panels, it is possible that display devices with even higher resolutions will be used in gaming machines. For full HD, it is possible to obtain the desired image quality using LVDS and FFC, but for QHD, 4K, and 8K, LVDS cannot provide the transmission speed required to obtain the desired image quality, so high-speed transmission interface standards such as DisplayPort are adopted.

The resolution, number of pixels, and aspect ratios of VGA, XGA, FHD, QHD (WQHD), 4K, and 8K are as shown in Figure 291. The resolution, number of pixels, and aspect ratio of VGA (Video Graphics Array) are "640 x 480," "307200," and "4:3." The resolution, number of pixels, and aspect ratio of XGA (eXtended Graphics Array) are "1024 x 768," "786432," and "4:3." The resolution, number of pixels, and aspect ratio of FHD (Full High Definition) are "1920 x 1080," "2073600," and "16:9." Furthermore, the resolution, number of pixels, and aspect ratio of QHD (Quad-High Definition) (WQHD (Wide Quad-High Definition)) are "2560 x 1440," "3686400," and "16:9," and are used in, for example, 31.5-inch LCD display devices. The resolution, number of pixels, and aspect ratio of 4K are "3840 x 2160," "829440," and "16:9." The resolution, number of pixels, and aspect ratio of 8K are "7680 x 4320," "33177600," and "16:9."

Interface standards currently used in gaming machines, or that may be used in the future, include LVDS, Clockless Link, and DisplayPort. LVDS (Low Voltage Differential Signaling) is a differential serial interface standard that is driven by a 3.5 mA constant current source and transmits data at high speeds using a differential signal with an amplitude of 350 mV when terminated at 100 ohms, with a maximum transmission speed of 1 Gbps (gigabit per second). Clockless Link is a differential serial interface standard that uses clock data recovery and has a maximum transmission speed of 1.6 Gbps (gigabit per second). DisplayPort is a digital interface standard between a source (e.g., a computer) and a sink (e.g., a display) that transmits packetized RGB video data and audio data at a maximum transmission speed of 8.1 Gbps (gigabits per second). Other interface standards include HDMI (registered trademark) and USB 3.1, with HDMI (registered trademark) having a maximum transmission speed of 6 Gbps (gigabits per second) and USB 3.1 having a maximum transmission speed of 10 Gbps (gigabits per second).

For resolutions above QHD (WQHD) (such as QHD (WQHD), 4K, and 8K), the maximum LVDS transmission speed (1 Gbps (gigabit per second)) is insufficient to achieve the desired image quality, and a higher transmission speed is required. Because FFC and FPC cannot achieve transmission speeds above 1 Gbps (gigabit per second), the desired image quality cannot be achieved when using FFC or FPC for resolutions above QHD (WQHD). On the other hand, shielded FFC, shielded FPC, and thin coaxial cable 700, which have strong noise resistance, can achieve transmission speeds above 1 Gbps (gigabit per second), so the desired image quality can be achieved when using shielded FFC, shielded FPC, and thin coaxial cable for resolutions above QHD (WQHD). Since shielded FFCs, shielded FPCs, and thin coaxial cables 700 are generally more expensive than unshielded FFCs and unshielded FPCs, it is preferable to use shielded FFCs, shielded FPCs, and thin coaxial cables 700 as transmission means for resolutions of QHD (WQHD) or higher.

Next, we will explain the transmission advantages of the thin-coaxial cable 700.

Signal transmission characteristics are affected by various parameters, such as characteristic impedance, insertion loss, return loss, and crosstalk, but when it comes to high-speed transmission, thin coaxial cable 700 offers significant transmission advantages. The main reasons why coaxial cable 700 offers significant transmission advantages are (1) reduced return loss, (2) reduced insertion loss, and (3) high shielding properties that provide electromagnetic noise countermeasures and reduced crosstalk.

(Reduced return loss) The micro-coaxial cable 700, which is configured to include an inner conductor 700a, an inner insulator 700b, and an outer conductor 700c, can be matched to a specific impedance, thereby reducing return loss.

(Reduced insertion loss) When matching to a specific impedance, the thin-coaxial cable 700 can reduce insertion loss because it can ensure a larger cross-sectional area for the inner conductor 700a compared to FPC and FFC.

The outer conductor 700c of the thin coaxial cable 700 has its own shielding effect, which not only suppresses the generation of electromagnetic noise caused by the signal transmitted by the inner conductor 700a, but also protects the transmitted signal from electromagnetic noise coming from outside. Furthermore, the shielding effect of the outer conductor 700c reduces crosstalk between signal lines.

Next, we will explain the mechanical advantages of the thin-coaxial cable 700.

The thin-coaxial cable 700 has greater flexibility than a shielded FPC and a shielded FFC, and is easily bent, for example, as shown in Figure 288, or twisted, as shown in Figure 292. It has the mechanical advantage of maintaining stable electrical characteristics even when bent or twisted to a certain extent. Because of this mechanical advantage of the thin-coaxial cable 700, it is possible to connect components of a gaming machine by bending the thin-coaxial cable 700; specific examples will be described later with reference to Figures 294 to 296.

Next, an example of components connected using a cable assembly (harness) HH will be described with reference to Figure 293. The cable assembly HH is, for example, the cable assemblies H and H1 described above, and includes, for example, only a thin-coaxial cable 700 as a cable, or a thin-coaxial cable 700 plus a discrete cable 701.

Figure 293 is a rear perspective view of the front door 730 to show an example of a connection between components using a cable assembly HH. In Figure 293, a display device 731, such as an LCD display device, is connected to a display control board 732, which is equipped with a display control circuit that controls the display of the display device 731, using a cable assembly HH. Note that the display control board 732 can be, for example, the sub-control board 72 of the first embodiment or a dedicated control board.

Cable assembly HH is connected to display device 731 by fitting a first male connector (not shown) provided on cable assembly HH into a first female connector (not shown) provided on display device 731. Cable assembly HH is also connected to display control board 732 by fitting a second male connector (not shown) provided on cable assembly HH into a second female connector (not shown) provided on display control board 732. This enables data transmission between display control board 732 and display device 731.

The amount of video data transmitted from the display control board 732 to the display device 731 is large, so a high transmission speed is required. If the display control board 732 and the display device 731 are connected using an unshielded FFC or unshielded FPC, the required transmission speed cannot be achieved, and there is a risk that the quality of the video displayed on the screen of the display device 731 will not be maintained. On the other hand, if the display control board 732 and the display device 731 are connected using a thin coaxial cable 700, the thin coaxial cable 700 has an outer conductor 700c that functions as a shield, making it highly resistant to noise. This allows the required transmission speed to be achieved, and the quality of the video displayed on the screen of the display device 731 to be maintained. It is also possible to connect the display control board 732 and the display device 731 using a shielded FFC or shielded FPC, and in this case, the quality of the video displayed on the screen of the display device 731 can be maintained, just as with the thin coaxial cable 700.

Display control board 732 is housed in case 733, which is plated with a metal such as aluminum. By housing display control board 732 in this metal-plated case 733, electrical signals transmitted through circuits and wiring arranged on display control board 732 can be protected from electromagnetic noise. Noise countermeasures are provided for electrical signals transmitted between display control board 732 and display device 731 by the outer conductor 700c of thin coaxial cable 700, and noise countermeasures are provided for electrical signals transmitted through circuits and wiring arranged on display control board 732 by the metal plating of case 733, making the signals less susceptible to the effects of electromagnetic noise.

In addition, when video data transmission from the display control board 732 to the display device 731 is relayed by a relay board, the display control board 732 and the relay board may be connected by a thin coaxial cable 700, and the relay board and the display device 730 may be connected by a thin coaxial cable 700. In this case, too, the quality of the image displayed on the screen of the display device 731 can be maintained, just as when the display control board 732 and the display device 731 are connected using the thin coaxial cable 700 of the cable assembly HH.

In addition, both the first circuit board provided with a female first connector into which the male first connector of the cable assembly HH is mated, and the second circuit board provided with a female second connector into which the male second connector of the cable assembly HH is mated, may be housed in a metal-plated case, or only one of the circuit boards may be housed in a metal-plated case.

Examples of components connected using a cable assembly such as the cable assembly HH include the above-mentioned components, and include:
● Between the main control board and the payout control board ● Between the main control board and the sub-control board ● Between the first sub-control board and the second sub-control board (if the sub-control board consists of two boards) ● Between the sub-control board and the display control board (if the sub-control board and the display control board are separate boards) ● Between the display control board (for example, the sub-control board) and the display device ● Between the sub-control board and the relay board ● Between the relay board and the display device ● Between the main control board and the external terminal board ● Between the sub-control board and the LED board (LED boards are boards that have only LEDs mounted on them, or boards that have LEDs and LED drivers mounted on them) ● Between the main control board and the stop button operation detection board/bet operation detection board/settlement button operation detection board/start lever operation detection board (each of these detection boards is considered a type of main control board) ● Between the main control board and the reel control board of the reel unit ● Between the sub-control board and the touch module board ● Between the sub-control board and the infrared sensor board (an infrared sensor board is a board that has a sensor that detects proximity operations by the player) Examples include the area between the test terminal of the gaming machine and the test interface board (IF1 board, IF2 board, IF3 board).

In each of the above examples, the transmission signals transmitted through the thin coaxial cable 700 are protected from electromagnetic noise by the outer conductor 700c, which functions as a shield, thereby improving the stability of the gaming machine's operation.

Next, the state of the cable assembly (harness) HA when it is used to connect components will be described with reference to Figures 294 to 296. The cable assembly HA is, for example, the cable assemblies H and H1 described above, and may include, for example, only a thin-coaxial cable 700 as a cable, or may include a thin-coaxial cable 700 and a discrete cable 701.

In Figures 294 to 296, the cable assembly HA is described as comprising a cable subassembly 710HA having at least a fine coaxial cable 700, a first connector 720HAA provided at one end of the cable subassembly 710HA, and a second connector 720HAB provided at the other end of the cable subassembly 710HA.

The example in Figure 294 is intended for a case in which a first connector 720HAA on the male side and a second connector 720HAB on the male side of a cable assembly HA are attached to a first connector 741A on the female side of a first member 740A and a second connector 741B on the female side of a second member 740B, with an obstacle 750 between them. The first member 740A in Figure 294 and Figures 295 to 296 described below is, for example, a display device such as a liquid crystal display device, and the second member 740B is, for example, a display control board.

In the example of FIG. 294, because an obstacle 750 exists between the first connector 741A and the second connector 741B, the first connector 720HAA and the second connector 720HAB cannot be attached to the first connector 741A and the second connector 741B when the thin-coaxial cable 700 is straight. However, the thin-coaxial cable 700 has excellent flexibility and can be bent, and its electrical characteristics remain stable even when bent to a certain extent (the mechanical advantage of thin-coaxial cables described above). Therefore, by bending the thin-coaxial cable 700 to bypass the obstacle 750, the first connector 720HAA and the second connector 720HAB can be attached to the first connector 741A and the second connector 741B, and high-speed signal transmission is possible using the thin-coaxial cable 700.

In the example of Figure 294, the thin-coaxial cable 700 is bent in four places, but this is not limited to this. The first connector 720HAA and the second connector 720HAB may be attached to the first connector 741A and the second connector 741B by bending (bending/curving) the cable in one or more places.

The example in Figure 295 is intended for a case where the first connector 720HAA on the male side and the second connector 720HAB on the male side of the cable assembly HA are attached to the first connector 741A on the female side of the first member 740A and the second connector 741B on the female side of the second member 740B, with the first member 740A and the second member 740B on the female side being on the same placement surface and with an obstacle 750 between them.

In the example of Figure 295, because an obstacle 750 exists between the first connector 741A and the second connector 741B, when the thin-coaxial cable 700 is straight, the first connector 720HAA and the second connector 720HAB cannot be attached to the first connector 741A and the second connector 741B. However, the thin-coaxial cable 700 has excellent flexibility and can be bent, and its electrical characteristics are stable even when bent to a certain extent (the mechanical advantages of thin-coaxial cables described above). Therefore, by bending the thin-coaxial cable 700 so as to go around the obstacle 750 (for example, by going around the top of the obstacle 750 or around the side of the obstacle 750 as shown in FIG. 295), the first connector 720HAA and the second connector 720HAB can be attached to the first connector 741A and the second connector 741B, and high-speed signal transmission is possible using the thin-coaxial cable 700.

In the example of Figure 295, the thin-coaxial cable 700 is bent in four places, but this is not limited to this. The first connector 720HAA and the second connector 720HAB may be attached to the first connector 741A and the second connector 741B by bending (bending/curving) the cable in one or more places.

In the examples of Figures 294 and 295, there is one obstacle 750 between the first connector 741A of the first member 740A and the second connector 741B of the second member 740B, but this is not limited to this. Even if there are two or more obstacles between the first connector 741A and the second connector 741B, it is possible to attach the first connector 720HAA and the second connector 720HAB of the cable assembly HA to the first connector 741A and the second connector 741B by bending the thin-coaxial cable 700 to bypass each of the two or more obstacles.

The example in Figure 296 is intended for a case in which the connector surface of the first connector 741A on the female side of the first member 740A and the connector surface of the second connector 741B on the female side of the second member 740B do not face each other in parallel, but rather the surface including the former connector surface and the surface including the latter connector surface intersect perpendicularly (the normal to the connector surface of the first connector 741A and the normal to the connector surface of the second connector 741B intersect perpendicularly). This applies to a case in which the first connector 720HAA and the second connector 720HAB on the male side of the cable assembly HA are attached to the first connector 741A and the second connector 741B.

In the example of FIG. 296, because the connector surfaces of the first connector 741A and the second connector 741B are not parallel to each other, when the thin-coaxial cable 700 is straight, the first connector 720HAA and the second connector 720HAB cannot be attached to the first connector 741A and the second connector 741B. However, the thin-coaxial cable 700 has excellent flexibility and can be bent, and its electrical characteristics remain stable even when bent to a certain extent (the mechanical advantage of thin-coaxial cables described above). Therefore, by bending multiple thin-coaxial cables 700, the first connector 720HAA and the second connector 720HAB can be attached to the first connector 741A and the second connector 741B, and high-speed signal transmission is possible using the thin-coaxial cable 700.

In the example of Figure 296, the thin-coaxial cable 700 is bent in three places, but this is not limited to this. The first connector 720HAA and the second connector 720HAB may be attached to the first connector 741A and the second connector 741B by bending (bending/curving) the cable in one or more places.

In the example of Figure 296, the normal to the connector surface of the first connector 741A of the first member 740A and the normal to the connector surface of the second connector 741B of the second member 740B intersect perpendicularly. However, this is not limited to this. Even if the connector surfaces of the first connector 741A and the second connector 741B are not parallel to each other but are in a relationship other than where the normals of the two intersect perpendicularly (for example, when the connector surfaces of the first connector 741A and the second connector 741B face in opposite directions), it is still possible to attach the first connector 720HAA and the second connector 720HAB of the cable assembly HA to the first connector 741A and the second connector 741B by bending the thin-coaxial cable 700.

As explained above using specific examples in Figures 294 to 296, the first connector 720HAA and the second connector 720HAB can be attached to the mating first connector 741A and the mating second connector 741B by bending the thin-coaxial cable 700, without being restricted by the relative positions of the first connector 741A to which the first connector 720HAA is attached and the second connector 741B to which the second connector 720HAB is attached, or by whether or not there are obstacles such as parts between the first connector 741A to which the first connector 720HAA is attached and the second connector 741B to which the second connector 720HAB is attached. The use of the thin-coaxial cable 700 enables high-speed signal transmission.

Next, we will give an example of using a thin coaxial cable 700 as a transmission means for transmitting data between components.

For example, a thin coaxial cable 700 is used as a transmission means for transmitting data between a movable part (such as a movable LCD) and a board (such as a driver board, relay board, or sub-control board). Because the relative positional relationship between the movable part and the board changes as the movable part moves, the cable used for transmitting data between the movable part and the board needs to deform in accordance with the movement of the movable part. Because the thin coaxial cable 700 is flexible and easily deformed, the thin coaxial cable 700 is suitable as a transmission means for transmitting data between the movable part and the board. In this case, the use of the thin coaxial cable 700 also enables high-speed communication between the movable part and the board.

Fine-wire coaxial cable 700 is used as a transmission means for data transmission between a first member provided on the door side of the gaming machine (the front door side of a pachislot machine (slot machine) or the board side of a pachinko machine) and a second member provided on the main body side of the gaming machine (the cabinet side of a pachislot machine (slot machine) or the frame side of a pachinko machine). Because the relative positional relationship between the first member and the second member changes depending on whether the door of the gaming machine is open or closed, the cable used for data transmission between the first member and the second member must deform in response to the opening and closing of the door of the gaming machine. Because fine-wire coaxial cable 700 is flexible and easily deformed, it is suitable as a transmission means for data transmission between the first member provided on the door side of the gaming machine and the second member provided on the main body side of the gaming machine. In this case, the use of fine-wire coaxial cable 700 also enables high-speed communication between the first member and the second member.

The above two examples (an example in which a thin coaxial cable 700 is used for data transmission between a movable device and a circuit board, and an example in which a thin coaxial cable 700 is used for data transmission between a first member provided on the door side of the gaming machine and a second member provided on the main body side of the gaming machine) are examples that focus on the flexibility of the thin coaxial cable 700.

Also, the gaming machine is equipped with multiple display devices, and the first of the display devices requires a small amount of data for rendering (the amount of data required to render one screen is less than a predetermined amount), i.e., it is a display device that does not require high-speed communication (e.g., a small LCD display device, a sub-LCD display device, or a display device with a resolution of VGA, XGA, FHD, etc.), and the second of the display devices requires a large amount of data for rendering (the amount of data required to render one screen is greater than a predetermined amount), i.e., it is a display device that requires high-speed communication (e.g., a projector unit, a large LCD display device, or a display device with a resolution of QHD (WQHD), 4K, 8K, etc.). In this case, the thin coaxial cable 700 is not used as the transmission means between the first display device and the display control board, but rather a predetermined transmission means other than the thin coaxial cable 700 (e.g., a regular harness, FFC, FPC), and the thin coaxial cable 700 is used as the transmission means between the second display device and the display control board. In this way, by using the expensive thin coaxial cable 700 between the second display device and the display control board, which do not require high-speed communication, and not between the first display device and the display control board, which do, the number of places where the expensive thin coaxial cable 700 is used can be reduced, thereby reducing the overall cost of the gaming machine. Note that a shielded FFC, shielded FPC, or the like may also be used as a transmission means between the second display device and the display control board.

Furthermore, when the transmission means connecting the first and second members is located within a predetermined distance from a noise source (e.g., a noise-generating device such as a power supply unit or reel unit), i.e., when the transmission means is located in a location where noise above a predetermined level is present, a thin-coaxial cable 700 is used as the transmission means. When the transmission means connecting the third and fourth members is located further away from the noise source, i.e., when the transmission means is located in a location where noise above a predetermined level is not present, a thin-coaxial cable 700 is not used as the transmission means, but a predetermined transmission means other than the thin-coaxial cable 700 (e.g., a regular harness, FFC, FPC) is used. In this way, by using the expensive thin-coaxial cable 700 between the first and second members, which are susceptible to noise, rather than between the third and fourth members, which are less susceptible to noise, the number of locations where the expensive thin-coaxial cable 700 is used can be reduced, thereby reducing the overall cost of the gaming machine. Note that a shielded FFC, a shielded FPC, or the like may also be used as the transmission means between the first and second members.

FPCs and shielded FFCs are suitable as interfaces for image displays (liquid crystal displays, projections, etc.) that communicate at high speed between boards. FPCs can also be used to connect touch panel sensors (flat sensors) to boards, and FPCs with mounted chip components can also be used. Unshielded, relatively flexible FFCs are ideal for use in movable accessory units or in small spaces where connecting with a regular harness is difficult.

Furthermore, due to the increasing resolution of screens, mainly for video data, high-speed communication standard cables may be used as a transmission method between at least some of the components in gaming machines. In this case, in situations where communication quality cannot be maintained with conventional harnesses, communication quality can be maintained by using cables with shielded sections. Furthermore, improving the noise resistance of the cable can reduce costs by reducing the number of noise-suppressing components.

Examples of high-speed communication standard cables include USB cables, HDMI (registered trademark) cables, SATA cables, and DisplayPort cables.

USB cables comply with the USB (Universal Serial Bus) standard and are used, for example, to connect computers to peripheral devices. Because the USB cable's plug is a USB port on the gaming machine, during development of the gaming machine, developers can connect the gaming machine to a computer and send video data from the computer to the gaming machine, displaying the video on the gaming machine's screen. This allows developers to check the video on the actual gaming machine, facilitating the development of the gaming machine.

USB cable connector shapes include USB Type-A (2.0), USB Type-B (2.0), mini USB Type-B, Micro USB Type-B (2.0), Micro USB Type-B (3.0), USB Type-C, and Lightning.

HDMI (registered trademark) cables are used in accordance with the HDMI (registered trademark) (High-Definition Multimedia Interface) standard. They are used, for example, to connect a television to a hard disk recorder or game console, and are capable of transmitting video, audio, and control signals all in one cable.

HDMI (registered trademark) cable speeds (versions) include Standard (Version 1.2 and earlier), High Speed (Version 1.3-1.4), Premium High Speed (Version 2.0), and Ultra High Speed (Version 2.0).

In addition, HDMI (registered trademark) cable connectors come in various shapes, including HDMI (registered trademark) Type A connectors, HDMI (registered trademark) Type C connectors, HDMI (registered trademark) Type D connectors, and HDMI (registered trademark) Type E connectors.

SATA cables are used in accordance with the SATA (Serial Advanced Technology Attachment) interface standard, and are used, for example, to connect computers to storage devices (such as HDDs and SSDs) and optical drives.

There are three STA standards: "STA1," "STA2," and "STA3," the main difference between which is the data transfer speed.

The cable portion of SATA cables also comes in a variety of shapes, including a flat type and a round type that can be bent for easy handling.

In addition, STA cable connection terminals come in a variety of types, including a "straight type" where the cable extends straight from the terminal, and an "L-shaped type" where the connector part is bent in an L shape.

DisplayPort cables are used in accordance with the DisplayPort interface standard, and are used, for example, to connect a computer to a display device.

DisplayPort cable terminals include regular DisplayPort and MiniDisplayPort terminals.

In addition, some of the electronic components mounted on circuit boards and the like may not have part model numbers printed on them. For example, certain electronic components (chips, capacitors, connectors, etc.) may not have part model numbers printed on them. This allows for cost reductions by omitting printing. Also, if specialized parts for the gaming machine industry with printed part numbers become difficult to obtain due to discontinuation of production, substitute parts can be used.

Furthermore, as long as the part model number is the same, it is permissible to use electronic components that do not have standardized markings. For example, when manufacturing gaming machines of the same model (i.e., gaming machines of the same model), one gaming machine may use components marked with specific electronic components (chips, capacitors, connectors, etc.), while other gaming machines may use components that are not marked with specific electronic components or have different marking designs. This allows for the use of substitute parts when specialized parts marked with part numbers for the gaming machine industry become difficult to obtain due to discontinuation of production, etc.

Furthermore, if instructions for printing the part number on the electronic parts are attached to the data sheet of the type test application documents, multiple types of electronic parts may be used, or an additional data sheet may be added to increase the number of types of part number printed on the electronic parts. This increases the variety of electronic parts that can be used in gaming machines, making it easier to obtain electronic parts.

The board may also have empty terminals (terminals with no cables or other devices connected), or empty connectors (terminals with no connectors connected). This allows for cost reductions through the use of standardized boards. Furthermore, the use of standardized boards reduces resource consumption and the environmental impact.

It is also acceptable for some circuit boards (such as the main control board) to have unmounted components. This allows for cost reductions through the use of standardized circuit boards. Furthermore, standardizing circuit boards reduces resource consumption and reduces the burden on the environment.

[Additional notes to the seventh embodiment]
Conventionally, there have been gaming machines that use harnesses as a means for transmitting signals between electronic components. For example, in the gaming machine disclosed in Patent Document 1, a main control board and a reel stop board that controls the drive of each reel are connected by a harness (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2007-202698).

Recently, there has been a demand for faster transmission speeds due to an increase in the number of electronic components inside gaming machines and an increase in the amount of transmitted signals due to larger and higher resolution image display devices such as LCDs. The faster the transmission speed, the more susceptible the signal is to noise, causing the receiving electronic component to receive the signal incorrectly. In other words, the problem arises where the signal cannot be transmitted properly from the transmitting electronic component to the receiving electronic component.

This note was made in consideration of the above-mentioned issues, and aims to provide a gaming machine that enables noise-resistant and stable transmission between electronic components by increasing the noise resistance of the transmission means that mediates the transmission of signals between electronic components.

To achieve the above objective, the appendix provides the following gaming machine.

The gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the appendix comprises:
a coaxial cable (coaxial cable 700 of FIG. 285) having an inner conductor (inner conductor 700a of FIG. 285), an inner insulator (inner insulator 700b of FIG. 285) surrounding the outer periphery of the inner conductor, an outer conductor (outer conductor 700c of FIG. 285) surrounding the outer periphery of the inner insulator, and an outer insulator (outer insulator 700d of FIG. 285) surrounding the outer periphery of the outer conductor,
The coaxial cable is used as a transmission means,
The coaxial cable has an outer diameter of approximately 1 mm or less (D mm in FIG. 286 ≦approximately 1 mm).
It is characterized by:

With this configuration, the transmission means uses a coaxial cable with an outer conductor that shields the transmission signal from noise, increasing the noise resistance of the transmission means. This enables stable, noise-resistant signal transmission between electronic components, and enables higher transmission speeds while minimizing communication errors. Furthermore, using a thin coaxial cable with an outer diameter of approximately 1 millimeter or less makes it difficult to hide components behind the coaxial cable, thereby improving security.

A gaming machine according to a second embodiment of the present invention is a gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention,
Image display means (display device 731 in FIG. 293);
A display control means (display control board 732 in FIG. 293) for controlling the display of the image display means;
Furthermore,
The coaxial cable is used as a means for transmitting signals between the image display means and the display control means.

This configuration allows for improved transmission quality when transmitting video signals, which particularly require high transmission speeds, by using a coaxial cable with an outer conductor that shields the transmitted signal from noise.

The gaming machine according to the third embodiment of the appendix is the gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the appendix or the gaming machine according to the second embodiment of the appendix,
a cable assembly (cable assembly H1 in FIG. 289) including at least a plurality of cables (thin-coaxial cable 700 in FIG. 289) including the coaxial cable, a first connector (first connector 720A in FIG. 289) and a second connector (second connector 720B in FIG. 289) provided at both ends of the plurality of cables, and a transparent holding member (tube 721 in FIG. 289) inside which the plurality of coaxial cables are bundled and held;
The holding member is characterized in that identification information (identification information 722 in FIG. 289) for identifying the cable assembly is attached to the holding member.

It is anticipated that it would be difficult to mark cables with identification information (cable identification information) to identify them, such as coaxial cables with small outer diameters. Furthermore, marking each cable with cable identification information would require a large number of components to be marked with identification information, resulting in poor manufacturing efficiency and increased costs. In contrast, with this configuration, the holding member that holds multiple cables bundled together has a larger outer diameter than a single cable, making it easy to mark the holding member with identification information (cable assembly identification information) to identify the cable assembly. Furthermore, marking the holding member with cable assembly identification information requires fewer components to be marked with identification information than marking each cable with cable identification information, improving manufacturing efficiency and reducing costs. Furthermore, using a transparent holding member allows the coaxial cable to be viewed from the outside, preventing unauthorized use of the coaxial cable. Furthermore, the holding member does not obstruct visibility inside or behind the holding member, making it difficult to conceal hidden components, thereby improving security.

The above embodiments and variations can be combined as appropriate.

[others]
[1. Credit addition sound when borrowing]
When you press Sand's loan button (including cash loan, replay button, and saved medal replay button), 50 medals (46 medals if you loan 46 medals for 1,000 yen) will be added to the machine's credit.

When addition occurs (for example, when the addition process is completed), an addition sound effect (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "addition sound") is generated.

The additional sound can be a short sound of about 1-2 seconds, such as an electronic beep, or a sound of about 3-5 seconds that players will find difficult to miss. A short additional sound is less likely to interfere with the sound effects of the game.

On the other hand, when you win a small prize or other win, a winning sound effect (what would be called a payout sound effect on conventional medal machines) is also generated.

Even if you press the Sand Loan button while the reels are spinning, the loan process will still be valid, so if you stop the reels after pressing the Loan button, the sound effect for adding credits and the sound effect for winning may be heard at almost the same time.

By setting the volume of the credit addition sound to be greater than the volume of the winning sound, even if the player presses the loan button while the reels are spinning, a win occurs when all the reels stop, and the winning sound is emitted, the player will be able to easily recognize that the loan process has been completed by the addition sound.

In addition, when a win occurs, the credits change in two stages: from 10 to 19 (9 bell wins added) to 69 (50 loaned credits added). Therefore, it can be difficult to instantly tell from the credit numbers whether the loan process was carried out correctly. By making the sound of the addition easy to recognize, the player is informed that the loan has been completed successfully, giving them peace of mind.

The sound of credits being added is also audible when playing again or when a bonus win occurs.

If the addition sound uses a different audio channel from the winning sound, it is possible that the addition sound and the winning sound will be played simultaneously.

Methods for outputting the addition sound at an audible volume include: (Method 1) setting the volume so that the volume of the credit addition sound is greater than the volume of other effect sounds (such as winning sounds and background music); (Method 2) when outputting the addition sound while other effect sounds are being output, ducking sounds other than the addition sound (temporarily lowering the volume to continue outputting the sound, or setting the volume to 0 to continue outputting the sound, or temporarily stopping the output to make the other sounds easier to hear); and (Method 3) when outputting the addition sound, giving it priority over other effect sounds set on the same channel (stopping the output of other effect sounds on the same channel, in which case the output of the other effect sounds may or may not resume after the output of the addition sound has finished).

You can use just one of the above (Method 1) to (Method 3), or you can use multiple methods in combination. You can also set the method to be used depending on the type of other sound effects, etc.

[1.1. Sounds that are output with priority over additive sounds]
It should be noted that there may be a sound that is given priority over the addition sound. For example, such a sound may be an error sound (such as a door open error or an illegal hit error, which may occur even when communication between the gaming machine and the sand is normal), and if the timing of the error sound and the timing of the addition sound overlap, the sound of the error sound may be given priority over the sound of the addition sound.

In this case, the addition sound may not be emitted, or may be emitted at a volume lower than the normal addition sound (including volume "0"). Either method has the effect of more appropriately notifying players of events that are more significant in the progress of the game than the addition of credits.

1.2. Impact of Player Volume Adjustments
Some gaming machines have a function that allows players to adjust the volume to their desired level using a volume adjustment operation means (a dedicated key, or an operation means that also serves as an operation means for effects, such as a button or touch panel).

The added sound may be affected by the player's volume adjustment and output at a volume that corresponds to the volume level set by the player. In this case, the sound is output according to the volume set to suit the surrounding environment, preventing the added sound from being too loud and annoying.

Furthermore, the addition sound may be output at a constant, relatively loud volume, without being affected by the player's volume adjustment. In this case, the possibility that the player will miss the addition sound can be reduced.

In addition, if the counting sound, etc. is not affected by volume adjustment, the relationship of "volume setting of credit addition sound volume > winning sound volume" may not change even if the volume is set to the maximum possible value. This makes it possible to make the credit addition sound easy to hear even if the player adjusts the volume setting.

Furthermore, if counting sounds, etc. are affected by volume adjustment, it is desirable that they not be set to 0 (not muted) even when set to the lowest possible volume. This is because if counting-related sounds (counting sounds, addition sounds, settlement sounds, etc.) were muted, it could cause players to worry that the counting process was not performed properly.

[1.3. Timing for player volume adjustment]
It may be possible to adjust the volume in all situations (while the reel is spinning, when stopped, on the demo screen, etc.) except for certain situations where volume adjustment is not possible, such as when play is not possible due to an error, or when the left and right keys for adjusting the volume or the touch panel are used as a means of operating another function (for example, adjusting the light intensity, selecting a performance, or entering a password for a mobile phone linked function).

Alternatively, volume adjustment may be possible only when rotation is stopped.

It may be possible to adjust the volume even when waiting for an operation of an effect (for example, during an effect where "Press the effect button!" is displayed on the screen) using an effect operation means different from the volume adjustment operation means (which may be an operation means managed by the sub-control board, such as an effect button, effect lever, touch sensor, or distance sensor, or an operation means managed by the main control board, such as a start lever or bet button operated for the purpose of reel effects), so that the volume of the operation response effect can be adjusted appropriately.

The volume adjustment menu screen (volume display bar, etc.) may be opened with a single operation of the left or right key on the gaming machine, or the volume adjustment menu screen may be opened from the player menu screen.

[1.4. Effect of hall volume adjustment]
Some gaming machines have a volume adjustment function for the hall manager in addition to the volume adjustment for players. The addition sound may be affected by the volume adjustment for the hall manager and output at a volume according to the volume level set by the hall manager. In this case, the addition sound is output according to the volume set to suit the surrounding environment, so it is possible to prevent the addition sound from being too loud and annoying.

The addition sound may also be output at a constant, relatively loud volume, without being affected by the volume adjustments made by the hall manager. In this case, the chances of players missing the addition sound can be reduced.

The added sound may be affected by the hall volume adjustment, but not by the player volume adjustment.

[1.5. When an additional sound is output during the player's volume adjustment operation]
During volume adjustment for the player, when the volume is increased (for example, by pressing the up key if the adjustment is made with the up and down keys) or decreased (for example, by pressing the down key if the adjustment is made with the up and down keys), a sample sound may be played at the adjusted volume, allowing the player to roughly recognize the volume level.

For example, if the volume level is 3 (approximately 80 decibels) and you press the up key once, the volume level will change to 4 (approximately 82 decibels), and the sample sound will be played at volume level 4.

Even if the timing of the sample sound and the addition sound overlap, it is preferable to output the addition sound so that the player can recognize it. This is because the fact that credits have been added using cash or medals is generally more important information to the player than the volume of the sample sound.

In this case, one of the above-mentioned (Method 1) to (Method 3) may be adopted to give priority to outputting the added sound over the volume of the sampled sound, or the sampled sound may be output after outputting the added sound has finished.

Also, if the volume level changes while the additive sound is being played, the sound may be played at the volume before the change (for example, volume level 3) until the volume level changes, and then at the new volume after the volume level changes (for example, volume level 4) so that the player can recognize the change in volume of the additive sound, or the sound may be played at the volume it was at when the additive sound started to be played until the end.

It is possible to increase quietness by making sound effects extremely quiet or silent when the player volume adjustment is set to the lowest possible volume. However, even in gaming machines with such specifications where the player volume adjustment affects the volume of the additive sounds, it is desirable that the additive sounds be output at a volume that is easy for players to hear (approximately 40-70 decibels), with less impact from volume adjustment compared to other sound effects, so that players can recognize them.

[2. Operation of the credit LED segment when credits are added]
In the credit LED segment, the addition may be shown one by one, from 1 → 2 → 3 → ..., or by generating an increment operation that displays the process of displaying the added value for each of multiple values, from 0 → 1 → ... → 49 → 50, or it may be shown as 0 → 50 all at once without generating an increment operation.

If no increment operation is generated, it is preferable that the added sound also be a sound with a short duration of approximately 0.5 to 2 seconds.

If the addition sound continues for a long time after the increment has finished, it may give the impression that the credit addition has not yet finished.

Incidentally, if there is no increment operation, the segment changes instantly, so strictly speaking, even if the addition sound is a short duration, such as one second, the sound will continue to be emitted even after the credit display has changed to the added value. However, since the duration is short to begin with, there is little risk of the player feeling uncomfortable or misunderstanding this.

[3. On-screen credit display]
In addition to the credit segment controlled by the main control board or medal count management control board, the credit number may be displayed on the screen of an image display means such as a liquid crystal display or projection to make it easier for the player to see.

Whether or not to perform an increment operation when adding can be the same as in the credit segment, or it can be set differently from the credit segment.

[4. Sound effects related to credits and sandbox operations other than additive sounds]
So far, we have explained the innovations regarding the sound of credit addition in response to the operation of the lending button on the Sandbox side.

In addition to the sound of credits being added, the following sound effects may be generated in smart gaming machines, such as medal-less gaming machines and managed gaming machines (enclosed pachinko machines), where gaming value is managed by data rather than physical gaming media.
A credit transfer sound when transferring the gaming value in the credits from the gaming machine to the Sand gaming value storage medium (membership card, guest card, etc.) at the end of a game. For example, this is performed by pressing a transfer button near the credit segment.
A settlement sound for returning the betted gaming value to credits. For example, this is performed by pressing a settlement button near the max bet button on the gaming machine.
- A sound effect that suggests or notifies that credits cannot be temporarily transferred to the game value storage medium when the game value storage medium (membership card, guest card, etc.) is removed from the sand when a player temporarily leaves the facility for a break, etc.

Appropriate measures may be taken to make at least one or all of these credit-related sound effects as difficult for players to hear as possible, similar to the above-mentioned addition sound.

[5. Credit Addition Timing]
Even if the sand rental button is pressed while the reels are spinning, the credit addition process is valid, and the credit addition process is performed within a few seconds of pressing the rental button. For example, the credit addition process is performed validly even while the operation of the stop button is being detected.

[6. Other examples of measures related to counting sounds, etc.] Counting is possible even during play, and when the timing of counting completion and winning coincides, the counting completion sound may be louder and shorter in volume, while the winning sound may be quieter and longer in volume, so that the counting completion sound is easy to hear, while the winning sound is difficult to hear but can still be heard. It is desirable that at least one of the sound duration and volume of the two sounds be different.
Similarly, credits can be added even while playing, and when the timing of addition and winning coincides, the sound of addition or addition completion may be louder and shorter in volume, or the sound of winning may be quieter and longer in volume, etc.
When the counting is completed as an image and a winning display (for example, an image that displays "GET 10" when 10 bells are won) are provided, the winning display may be displayed for a shorter time. The winning sound is relatively longer than the counting-related sound, and the winning display is displayed for a shorter time, making it difficult to grasp the situation when multiple events occur at the same time.
-As another pattern, the time from when the counting process is completed until the display "Counting in progress" (or "Counting completed") disappears may be shorter than the time from when the winning process (credit addition, etc., can be specified as desired) is completed until the winning image (for example, an image that displays "GET 10" when 10 bells are won) disappears.
The length of the counting completion sound should be different from the length of the bet, start, stop, and winning sounds. If the sound lengths were perfectly the same, there is a high possibility that the player will miss the sound when the timing is right.

The above embodiments and variations can be combined as appropriate.

[6. Medalless gaming machines, managed gaming machines]
(Illustration of the process for renting a medal-less gaming machine)
Figure 297 (1) is a conceptual diagram of a gaming machine 1X and a gaming media rental device (also called a gaming value rental device, dedicated unit, or sandbox) 2X before rental. The max bet button 11X, 1 bet button 12X, and credit segment 14X are located on the top surface of the operation base 10X (a bulging or protruding portion at the front of the gaming machine, sometimes referred to as the base, control panel, or abbreviated as "konpane"), making them difficult to see from the front. Therefore, in this conceptual diagram, the location of the operation base 10X is shown in the relative positions when viewed from above, so that their relative positions can be understood.

For ease of explanation, gaming value equivalent to medals will sometimes be referred to as medals below, but this only means a bet or credit addition of a value equivalent to medals; no physical medals will be dispensed.

In addition, expressions such as "reserved segment," "reserved number display means," "segment indicating the number of retained game values," and "reserved game value number display means" may be used to refer to both the credit segment of medal-less pachislots and the held ball segment of sealed pachinko (managed gaming machine). While examples are described using pachislots and pachinko, it is possible to appropriately adopt the specifications for the credit segment for the held ball segment of pachinko and the specifications for the held ball segment for pachislots, as long as there is no contradiction.

(Credit segment status and on-screen credit-related displays)
The gaming machine 1X is provided with a credit segment (for example, a 7-segment for displaying credits in a medal count display unit, consisting of 5 or 6 digits, also called a reserve segment, etc.) 14X.

In addition, the image display means (transparent LCD display provided in front of the reels) 3X displays a CREDIT display indicating the accumulated medals in the bottom left corner, and a PAY display image indicating the medals awarded in the game in question in the bottom right corner.

At this point, the gaming value equivalent to the medals has not yet been loaned, so the CREDIT display on the screen is "00" and the CREDIT SEG display is "0".

In this case, the number of digits for the "0" displayed can be any number, but it is desirable for the credit segment Z4 to display a single digit "0". This is because a number is displayed in this segment Z4 almost all the time while the power is on, so reducing the number of digits displayed in the segment will help save power consumption. On the other hand, it is advisable to display the CREDIT on the screen as "00", the same number of digits as the PAY display, and align the number of digits in the gaming value display columns on the left and right to achieve a good visual balance.

The CREDIT and PAY displays on the screen may be (1) neither present, (2) CREDIT only, (3) PAY only, or (4) both CREDIT and PAY. The display may also be changed depending on the situation. For example, the demo screen (customer waiting screen) may not display either the CREDIT or PAY image, while the regular waiting screen, which is displayed after credits have been added, may display one of the predetermined images (2) to (4).

In addition, during an error, it is recommended that CREDIT and PAY images not be displayed, as this makes it easier to understand the situation if information unrelated to the error is suspended.

Note that while the credit segment 14X uses a single color segment, if the CREDIT display on the screen is also in a similar color to the CREDIT segment 14X, it will be easier to understand that they are the same information. For example, the CREDIT segment 14X may be a single red segment, and the CREDIT display may be in a reddish color.

(About Sandwich)
The player inserts a membership card with 500 medals (which can be replayed, i.e., medals that can be loaned out from the medals stored on the card) into Sand 2X and deposits 3,000 yen in banknotes into Sand 2X.

The small screen of Sand 2X displays the amount deposited and the number of medals that can be replayed. Sand 2X also has a bill insertion slot, insertion slots for membership cards and one-day cards, a return button 21X for ejecting cards, a loan button 22X for loaning from deposited cash, and a replay button 23X for loaning from saved medals. Also, in the illustration, a sticker affixed below Sand 2X reads "Game fee: 1,000 yen for 50 medals" and explains the store's loan rules.

(Condition after rental)
Figure 297 (2) is a conceptual diagram of the state after the replay button 23X is pressed once from the state of Figure 297 (1) and the gaming value equivalent to 50 medals is added to the credits of the gaming machine 1X.

When you operate the Sand 2X loan button 22X, the credits are added and the credit display changes. A loan sound (credit addition sound) is then heard. At the same time, the credit image on the LCD screen changes from "00" to "50."

Although this is described as an addition, in the program, it is not an addition process, but rather the result is updated to the value after the addition, and any update process can be used as appropriate. Also, strictly speaking, the credit addition process is carried out in an instant, and then the value in the credit segment is updated. More details will be given later.

(Image of managed gaming machine (pachinko machine) lending process)
Figure 298 (1) is a conceptual diagram of a gaming machine (pachinko machine) 1Y and a gaming medium rental device (also called a gaming value rental device, dedicated unit, or sand) 2Y before rental. The ball holding segment 11Y, the presentation button 12Y, and the volume and light adjustment key 13Y are located on the top surface of the operation base 10Y (a bulging or protruding portion at the front of the gaming machine, sometimes referred to as the base, control panel, or abbreviated "control panel"), making them difficult to see from the front. Therefore, in this conceptual diagram, the location of the operation base 10Y is shown in its relative position as viewed from above so that their relative positions can be understood. Unlike conventional pachinko machines that borrow game balls and load them into the machine for launch, the control panel does not have a ball tray, and the space saved by the control panel is used to enlarge the presentation button 12Y.

Generally, in the case of pachislot machines, Sand 2X is installed to the right of gaming machine 1X, while in the case of pachinko machines, Sand 2Y is installed to the left of gaming machine 1Y.

For the sake of convenience, the gaming value equivalent to balls will be referred to as balls, gaming balls, etc. in the following explanation; however, what is added to the held ball data through communication with Sand 2Y simply means the addition of the value equivalent to the balls; gaming balls are not paid out from Sand 2Y or ejected outside the pachinko machine. The gaming balls contained in the gaming area, which is the gaming ball flow area of the pachinko machine, and in the gaming ball circulation mechanism within the pachinko machine circulate. Specifically, the actual gaming balls launched from the launching section at the bottom left or top left of the board flow down the gaming area, then enter the outlet or winning port, pass through the circulation path within the gaming machine, and are then launched again from the launching device.

(Status of ball holding segment and ball holding related display on screen)
A five- or six-digit ball holding segment (a seven-segment segment indicating the number of game values held, equivalent to the credit segment or reserve segment in a pachislot machine) 11Y is provided on the front door of the gaming machine 1Y (included on the frame side in the gaming board and gaming frame). The ball holding segment 11Y and the counting button 14Y may be attached to the gaming machine as a single unit (ball holding number display unit).

At the time shown in Figure 298 (1), the game value (1 game value = the right to shoot one game ball) has not yet been loaned out, so the balls held segment 11Y displays "0." In this case, the number of digits displayed for the "0" can be any number, but it is desirable for the balls held segment 11Y to display a single digit "0." This is because a number is displayed in this segment almost all the time while the power is on, so keeping the number of digits displayed in the segment as small as possible will help conserve power consumption.

Although not shown, the number of balls held may also be displayed on the screen.

The display of held balls on the screen may be changed depending on the situation. For example, it may not be displayed on the demo screen (waiting for customers screen), but may be displayed on the normal waiting screen that appears after the held ball data from Sand 2Y is added, or the held balls may be displayed on the screen only when the player is in an advantageous state, such as during a jackpot, time-saving, special mode, or small jackpot rush state.

In addition, during an error, it is preferable not to display an image showing the number of balls held, as it is easier to understand the situation if the display of information unrelated to the error is suspended.

Although the held balls segment 11Y uses a single color segment, if the held balls display on the screen uses a similar color (similar color) to the held balls segment 11Y, it will be easier to understand that the information has the same meaning. For example,
In this case, the ball holding segment 11Y is a single red segment and the ball holding display is a red-based color.

(About Sandwich)
Figure 298 (1) shows a case where a player inserts a membership card with 500 medals (replay medals, that is, medals that can be borrowed from the medals stored on the card) into Sand 2Y.
The situation is that 3,000 yen worth of banknotes has been deposited into Y.

The small screen of Sand 2Y displays the amount deposited and the number of medals available for replay. Sand Z12 is also equipped with a bill insertion slot, insertion slots for membership cards and one-day cards, a return button 21Y for ejecting cards, a loan button 22Y for dispensing deposited cash, and a replay button 23Y for dispensing medals from saved medals. Also, in the illustration, a sticker affixed below the Sand reads "Game fee 1,000 yen, 250 balls" and explains the store's loan rules.

(Condition after rental)
Figure 298 (2) is a conceptual diagram of the state after pressing the replay button 23Y once from the state of Figure 298 (1) and adding the gaming value equivalent to 125 balls to the gaming machine's credits.

When you operate the loan button 22Y on Sandwich 2Y, the credits are added and the credit display changes. A loan sound (credit addition sound) is then played. At the same time, the credit image on the LCD screen changes from "00" to "50."

(Speaker placement)
In the gaming machine shown in Figure 298, five speakers 16Y, shown as diagonally shaded circles, are located at the top right, top left, bottom right, and bottom left (opposite the bottom right speaker) of the gaming machine 1Y, as well as a lower speaker located at the same height as the handle at the bottom of the gaming machine 1Y. Of these, the sound effect when the ball holding segment 11Y is updated (addition by loan from Sand 2Y or subtraction by transfer to Sand 2Y) is emitted from (1) the bottom right speaker, or (2) the bottom right and top right speakers. By emitting the sound from the right side of the gaming machine 1Y, which is located close to the ball holding segment 11Y, the sound output position is close to the changing segment, which is less likely to cause discomfort to the player. If the sound effect is emitted from a speaker far from the changing segment, it may be slightly uncomfortable. Incidentally, even in medal-less pachislot machines, the sound effect when the credit segment is updated may be emitted from the speaker closer to the credit segment.

However, there are no particular problems with sound output modes other than those mentioned above, as long as the sound is output at a volume that is audible enough for players to hear.

(Conceptual diagram of the operation base, specification example 1)
Figure 299 is a conceptual diagram of the operation base unit 10X of the gaming machine 1X shown in Figure 297. In reality, the part above the dotted line A-B is a conceptual diagram of the top surface of the operation base unit 10X as viewed from above, and the part below the dotted line A-B is actually a diagram of the front side surfaces of the operation base unit 10X (the roughly vertical surfaces facing the player) lined up.

Not all of these operating means are provided on the top surface of the operation base unit 10X; the operating means on the front side of the operation base unit 10X are also shown in the figure, providing a general conceptual view of the operating means of the operation base unit 10X.

In addition, Figure 300 (2) below has been created as a conceptual diagram of what would happen if the section were cut along the line connecting S1 and S2, which are indicated by dotted auxiliary lines.

The operation means and display unit are described below.
- Instruction monitor segment 31X: A two-digit segment that displays instruction information indicating the stop operation mode (batting order and target symbol) by the AT function. It is located in the upper left of the top surface of the operation base. In addition, a PAY segment (PAYOUT segment) that indicates the number of medals awarded in the unit game may also be provided. It is positioned away from the CREDIT segment. This prevents the player from mistaking the number indicating the instruction information (for example, numbers indicating the type of instruction, such as 1 to 18, are displayed while the reels are spinning in a game with instructions) for the number of medals remaining in the credit.

Note that, unlike the credit segment 14X described below, the instruction monitor segment 31X is not tilted diagonally forward (towards the player's line of sight), but is positioned facing almost directly upward, making it slightly more difficult to see than the credit segment 14X.

This is because the instruction information corresponding to the instruction monitor number is displayed on the screen in an easy-to-understand manner, allowing the player to play without being particularly aware of the instruction monitor.
MAXBET button 11X, 1BET button 12Y: A MAXBET button 11X and a 1BET button 12X are provided near the instruction monitor 31X of the operation base 10X. Even in a gaming machine that is exclusively for betting three coins, it is possible to bet one coin at a time by pressing the 1BET button 12X, but of course, in a machine that is exclusively for betting three coins, if the number of coins bet is two or less, the game cannot be started even by hitting the start lever 32X. The MAXBET button 11X and the 1BET button 12X are unitized and are assembled to the operation base 10X as a unit.
- Presentation button: Located approximately in the center of the top surface of the operation base 10X. Note that there may be multiple types of presentation buttons as presentation operation means, and presentation levers, touch panels, distance sensors, etc. may be provided instead of or in addition to the presentation buttons. The presentation operation means may also be equipped with a vibration mechanism so that the player can feel the vibration when operating it. The chance button 33X may also have a double structure, with the front cover being openable and closable, and an additional chance button provided inside.
- Medal count display unit 34X: Located on the right side of the top surface of the operation base 10X. Details will be provided later, but here we will explain its relative position and general shape. It is a rectangular unit with a depth of approximately 5 cm and a width of approximately 9 cm when viewed from above, and is made of black resin with explanatory text, CREDIT, and counting characters written in white letters. The front of the segments is made of transparent resin, so the lighting status of the segments can be seen.

The depth D1 of the top surface of the operation base 10X is approximately 10 cm. The depth (length in the front-to-back direction) of the medal count display unit 34X is approximately 5 cm. The distance D2 from the end of the medal count display unit 34X closest to the gaming machine screen (not shown in the above figure, but located at the top of the drawing) to the screen is approximately 2 cm. The distance D3 from the front end (player side) of the medal count display unit 34X to the front edge of the top surface of the operation base is approximately 3 cm. Note that these figures are merely examples, and the credit operation unit may be larger or smaller than the illustrated size. Note that the left-to-right direction (width of the cabinet) is 47.5 cm, so the width of the operation base 10X is also approximately 47.5 cm.
Counting button 15X: A circular button with a diameter of just under 2 cm, colored red for easy visibility. In this specification, the counting button 15X is a non-illuminated button to reduce costs and save space.
Settlement button 13X: Located on the left side of the front side of the operation base Z20 (the roughly vertical surface facing the player). This button is used to convert all bet medals back into credits at once. This button is also located away from the counting button 15X so that it is not mistaken for the counting button 15X. As long as they are separated by a certain amount, they do not have to be on opposite sides, but locating the counting button 15X to the right of the center of the cabinet and the settlement button 13X to the left of the center of the cabinet in this way has the effect of making it easier to prevent players from mistaking them.

In addition, since there are relatively few cases where players intentionally return the medals that have been bet after placing a bet, the settlement button 13X is located in a somewhat inconspicuous position, and the color of the button is black, which is a different color from the counting button 15X, so that it is difficult to confuse them with the counting button 15X. In addition, the settlement button 13X is about 1 cm in diameter, which is smaller than the counting button 15X.
Stop button 35X: Located approximately in the center of the front side of the operation base 10X. Unitized. Details omitted.
- Volume/light adjustment button and menu button 36X: The circle on the right is a menu button that displays a menu screen that displays game data, a guide on how to play, mobile phone linked functions, custom effects, etc. The triangles on the top, bottom, left, and right can be operated by using the up key to increase the light intensity, the down key to decrease the light intensity, the left key to decrease the volume, and the right key to increase the volume. These are located on the right side of the front side of the operation base 10X, and these buttons are unitized to make assembly work more efficient.
Keyhole 16X: A keyhole into which a door key (key) is inserted to open the front door of the gaming machine 1X. The door key is operated by a store clerk, and since there is no need for the player to be aware of the keyhole, it is provided on the right side of the gaming machine 1X. At least, no player operation means are to be located to the right of the keyhole 16X. In addition, when viewed from the front, the keyhole 16X is located closer to the end (right end) of the gaming machine 1X than the counting button 15X, and is in a position that is not very noticeable to the player when operating the counting button 15X.

(Conceptual diagram of the medal count display unit from above)
Figure 300 (1) is a conceptual diagram for explaining the vicinity of the medal count display unit 34X, which was simplified in Figure 299.

The medal count display unit 34X is rectangular when viewed from above, and is fitted with a credit segment 14X inside a black resin cover member. Explanations are written in white on the surface of the cover member, and a count button 15X is fitted in a circular opening in the cover member.

For convenience, the points are called F, C, T, and B from the front to the back of the gaming machine 1X. Details will be provided later.

The credit segment 14X is a 5-digit 7-segment LED that can display the number of credits recorded in the gaming machine 1X. A counting button 15X for transferring medals from the gaming machine 1X to Sand 2X is located near the credit segment 14X.

In addition, instructions on how to operate the counting button 15X are provided, so that players will not be confused when transferring medals to Sand 2X (Sand Z2 membership card, etc.) at the end of a game or during a break.

In Specification Example 1, the counting button 15X is a non-illuminating type and is made of red resin.

A white circle (shown as a black circle in the illustration) is provided around the count button 15X as an attention-grabbing decorative element, and the white circle on a black background makes the count button 15X stand out. Note that the color of the attention-grabbing decorative element is just one example, and it may be any color different from the background color, and may be decorative in a form other than circular. In addition to a surrounding pattern, some other design that draws attention to the surrounding area may also be used.

The credit segment 14X, count button 15X, and explanation section are unitized as a medal count display unit 34X, which is provided on the operation base 10X at the front of the gaming machine 1X.

(Variation: Example of specification in which the counting button is illuminated)
However, the counting button 15X may be configured to emit light, and the light may be different colors, such as green to indicate a countable state, red to indicate counting, and blue to indicate an uncountable state (such as when the credits are 0), thereby indicating to the player whether the counting button 15X is operable. Note that "indication" here means that even someone who does not know the lighting rules can get a general idea of the color of the lamp, and can also be considered as "notification" in the sense that a player who knows the rules can clearly recognize the state. For convenience, "indication" may be used to refer to something that includes "indication and notification." Similarly, in other descriptions, "indication" is explained as a concept that can include "notification."

(Conceptual diagram of cross section of medal count display unit)
Figure 300 (2) is a conceptual diagram of a cross section taken along the cross section S1-S2 of Figure 299, that is, in the vicinity of the medal count display unit 34X.

The operation base (control panel, sometimes abbreviated as control panel) 10X is a bulging section on which the start lever 32X, stop button 35X, effect buttons, MAXBET button 11X, payout segment, credit segment 14X, etc. are provided. For ease of illustration, the operation base 10X and medal count display unit 34X are drawn larger than they actually are in this diagram. Note that the various operating means (e.g., menu button) on the front side of the operation base 10X are not shown.

The gaming machine 1X consists of three inclined surfaces from the front to the back, which for convenience are referred to as points F, C, T, and B from the front. The surfaces that make up each point and the areas between them will be explained below. Point F: The closest point to the medal count display unit 34X (player side). Point C: A point about two-thirds of the way up from the front of the medal count display unit 34X. From here onwards, between points C and T, the angle of inclination is steeper than between points F and C. Point T: The point on the medal count display unit 34X that is highest above the operation base 10X. Point B: The point at the very back of the medal count display unit 34X (the back side, closest to the screen of the gaming machine).

Surface between points F and C (first surface): The surface on which the explanatory text, counting button 15X, and opening for counting button 15X are provided. Since there is no particular need for transparency inside, it is painted black with white lettering painted on top. However, it may also be made of opaque resin of any color without being painted.

The inclination angle (angle R in the illustration) of the operation base 10X relative to the top surface is approximately 20 degrees. An angle other than 20 degrees may be used. Setting the angle R between the operation base 10X and the inclined surface of the medal count display unit 34X to approximately 10 to 40 degrees makes it easy for players looking down during play, and also improves visibility from the front to some extent.

In addition, the operating portion of the counting button 15X (the surface that is pressed as a button) is also inclined at an angle of approximately 20 degrees, similar to the first surface (it is difficult to achieve exactly the same angle, so there is a difference of a few degrees), making it easy to operate from the front.

Side between points C and T (second side): This side has the word CREDIT displayed and the credit segment 14X. At least the area in front of the credit segment 14X is transparent so that the lighting state of the segment can be seen.

The inclination angle of the operation base 10X relative to the top surface is approximately 30 degrees.

Auxiliary line H is a perpendicular line drawn from the surface of credit segment 14X to make the inclination of the display surface of credit segment 14X easier to understand.

Surface between point T and point B (third surface): A surface that slopes toward the back. The angle of inclination relative to the top surface of the operation base 10X is approximately 70 degrees. Note that the angle of inclination relative to the top surface of the operation base 10X may be vertical (90 degrees) and the rear wall of the medal count display unit 34X may be configured as an upright wall. However, this angle is inclined at approximately 70 degrees rather than vertically, for the effect of making it easier to prop up devices such as smartphones, as described below, and because if the angle at point T, which is the apex of the triangle, is too sharp upward, there is a risk of injury to the player when operating the device. The angle is one example, and angles other than 70 degrees are acceptable, but from a space standpoint, it is preferable to have a certain degree of inclination, generally between 45 and 80 degrees.

In this way, the credit segment 14X of the medal count display unit 34X is tilted forward (towards the player), which makes it easier for the player to see because the credit segment 14X is positioned facing diagonally forward rather than directly above. Also, unlike medal gaming machines, which can tell whether a machine is empty or has been temporarily unoccupied by whether medals are placed on the bottom tray, medalless gaming machines make it difficult to tell at a glance whether a machine is empty. Therefore, by making the "0 credit" display, which indicates an empty machine, easily visible from a distance, it also has the effect of making it easier for players searching for an empty machine to recognize that the machine is empty.

A screen frame (protective frame) is provided on the top surface of the front operation base 10X of the LCD screen surface (which may be a transparent acrylic plate or glass). The frame also serves to prevent knocks by filling the gap between the base and the screen surface. For this reason, a "predetermined step" for knock prevention purposes may be provided at a location on the screen frame 5X in the illustration, either in place of the screen frame or in combination with the frame.

(Conceptual diagram showing an enlarged cross section of the medal count display unit)
In Figure 301 (1), the distance between the back of the medal count display unit 34X, which is the point T-point B surface (third surface), and the screen will be explained.

D5, the distance between point T, the apex of medal count display unit 34X, and the screen, is approximately 2 cm. It should be at least 1 cm or more. D4, the distance between point B, the contact point between the third surface of medal count display unit 34X and operation base 10X, and the screen frame (hereinafter sometimes referred to as screen protection member) 5X provided in front of the screen, is approximately 1.5 cm. This can be any number of centimeters as long as it is narrower than D5. The third surface of medal count display unit 34X is inclined at approximately 70 degrees toward the screen.

(Conceptual diagram of a typical smartphone)
Using Figure 301(2), we will explain the conceptual diagram of when a general smartphone is placed on Figure 301(1).

As a result, it is designed to be stable when a standard-sized smartphone (for example, 0.88 cm thick, 16.6 cm tall, 7.8 cm wide, 6.7-inch screen) is placed upright facing the screen.

By tilting the credit segment 14X forward, not only is it easier for the player to see, but by having the inclined portion protrude from the operation base 10X and providing enough width between it and the screen to fit a typical smartphone SF (the width of the widest part of the opposing part between the operation base 10X and the medal count display unit 34X must be 1 cm or more), the smartphone SF can be placed stably.

In addition, the height of the medal count display unit 34X at its highest point is approximately 2 cm from the operation base Z20, so the visibility of the smartphone SF placed upright is not significantly reduced.

Furthermore, by tilting the third surface of the medal count display unit 34X toward the screen, when the smartphone SF is placed upright, the bottom surface of the smartphone SF makes contact with two points—the operation base 10X and the third surface—making it easier to place the smartphone SF with the screen facing diagonally upward and forward. This improves the stability of the smartphone SF when placed upright compared to when the third surface of the operation base 10X is perpendicular to the top surface of the operation base 10X. Even when the third surface is perpendicular to the operation base 10X, the smartphone SF can still be placed upright in the gap between the medal count display unit 34X and the screen as long as D5 is 1 cm or more. While this makes it more difficult to face the smartphone SF's screen diagonally forward than when the third surface is an inclined surface, a structure may be adopted in which the third surface is approximately vertical and the distance of D5 is adjusted to allow the smartphone SF to be placed upright, taking space into consideration. Allowing players to view videos, model information, and the like on the smartphone SF while playing can improve their time performance. Even if a player's interest in the game declines during boring normal gameplay, this allows them to distract themselves to some extent. This structure for easily propping up a smartphone SF or similar device may be employed for devices other than the medal count display unit 34X. A predetermined protrusion (such as a display operation device such as a display button or a display lever, a unit containing such an operation device, a volume/light control key or a unit containing such a key, a MAXBET button or button unit, or a decorative protrusion with no particular function) can be provided on the top surface of the operation base 10X, with the rear surface inclined toward the back of the gaming machine, and a gap of 1 cm or more can be provided between the device and the rear wall (e.g., a protective plate in front of the screen, a middle panel, a decorative part, etc.). Note that objects other than smartphones can also be propped up; for example, a tablet, a notebook, an electronic cigarette, a notepad, or a pamphlet containing instructions for the machine can also be propped up as long as the size allows.

The inclined surface from point F to point T may be considered to be one surface with the same inclination. Also, as long as the inclination angles of the first surface (surface F-C) and the second surface (surface C-T) are different, either surface may be considered to have a steeper angle.

Player warnings, names of controls or lamps, and designated decorative designs may be applied to the top or front of the screen frame (hereinafter sometimes referred to as the "rear member") 5X, or other areas of the screen frame 5X that are visible to the player. The rear member may be any step, protrusion, or bulge located at the rear of the operation base, and is not limited to the screen frame. For example, the contents of this paragraph may be applied to decorative steps or protective steps that prevent objects from being inserted into the gap between the operation base 10X and the screen. In Figure 300, a step is provided in front of the screen (strictly speaking, further forward than the translucent plate in front of the screen). However, in a configuration where the screen is located higher than the reels when viewed from the front, the rear member may be located near a designated wall, such as the middle board (protective plate in front of the reels) or a decorative part of the gaming machine, and at the rear of the operation base.

Cautions and other information may be printed directly on the frame, or may be attached as stickers. Providing such information allows for effective use of the limited space on the control base. For example, cautions may include, "Do not stare at the light for long periods of time," or "Be careful not to pinch your fingers when moving the effect buttons." Predetermined decorative elements to attract the player's attention, such as warning colors (such as alternating yellow and black lines) or red, may be added to the edges or vicinity of the caution text to make it more noticeable to the player. The names of the controls may include, for example, "1 BET," "Settlement," or "MAX BET." For lamp names, if the bet number display lamps are located near the frame, they may include "1 BET," "2 BET," or "3 BET," and if the replay lamp is located near the frame, they may include, for example, "REPLAY," and other characters indicating the function of the lamp.

(Conceptual diagram of the operation base, specification example 2)
Figure 302 is a conceptual diagram of a design proposal different from Specification Example 1. As with Figure 297 and the like, for the operation base unit 50X, which is difficult to see when viewed from the front, the MAX BET button 11X and medal count display unit 52X on the operation base unit 50A are illustrated in their positional relationship when viewed from above, so that their positional relationship can be understood. Note that, based on these specifications, some of the specifications may be adopted from other specification examples within the scope of no contradiction, and some of the contents of these specification examples may be adopted in other specification examples.

Image display means 51X: LCD screen. Other display means, such as a projector and screen, may also be used.

In this example specification, the machine does not have a transparent LCD screen in front of the reels, but instead has a standard screen and reel window. However, it is also possible to place decorative lamps or panels in the location of the screen without having a screen.

Speakers 53X: Two are located on the left and right above the screen, and two are located on the left and right near the top edge of the reel window. Left and right decorative parts 54X: Decorative lamps and decorative elements are located in the areas corresponding to the diagonally shaded rectangles on both sides.

This does not refer to a rectangular decorative part, but rather to an approximate illustration of where the decorative part will be placed, and any design for the decorative part can be used.

Reel window 55X: Located below screen 51X. Although three windows are shown to clearly indicate the reel positions, there may be only one window (transparent portion), or all reels may be visible through one window. Middle panel 56X: Contains the reel window 55X and an effect lamp area (an area for lamps that notify of wins, lamps indicating expectations, and status lamps that indicate chance zones), as well as text displays such as "Reel" and "Main Reel" that clearly indicate the position of the main reel. The area from the top of operation base 50X to the bottom of the LCD screen corresponds to the middle panel 56X.

The operation base unit 50X will be explained with reference to Figure 303.

(Conceptual diagram of the operation base, specification example 2)
Figure 303 is a conceptual diagram of the operation pedestal 50X in Specification Example 2. In reality, the part above the dotted line A-B is a conceptual diagram of the operation pedestal 50X as viewed from above, while the part below the dotted line A-B actually shows the front side surfaces of the operation pedestal 50X (the roughly vertical surfaces facing the player). The operation pedestal 50X is gently inclined forward at about 15 degrees.

Not all of these operating means are provided on the top surface of the operation base unit 50X; the operating means on the side are also shown in the illustration, providing a conceptual diagram of all the operating means of the operation base unit 50X.

The cross-sectional diagram below has been created as a conceptual diagram of what would happen if the section were cut along the line connecting S1 and S2, which are indicated by dotted auxiliary lines.

The explanations for each operation and display are as follows. The explanations will be given in order, starting from the top left of the diagram.

(Explanation of each operation means and display unit in specification example 2) Left and right decorative units 54X: These are rectangular parts with diagonal lines on the left and right. Details are as described above.
MAXBET button 11X, 1BET button 57X: The MAXBET button 11X and 1BET button 57X are provided near the instruction monitor of the operation base 50X. Even in a gaming machine that is exclusively for betting three coins, it is possible to bet one coin at a time by pressing the 1BET button 57X, but of course in a machine that is exclusively for betting three coins, if the number of coins bet is two or less, the game cannot be started even by hitting the start lever 32X. Note that the MAXBET button 11X and 1BET button 57X are not unitized.

In addition, when the 1 BET button 57X is pressed and held (held down for 500 ms or more), it functions as a settlement button 57X, and a settlement process is performed in which the bet medals (1 to 3 medals) are returned to credits (the number of medals bet becomes 0, and medals equal to the number of medals bet are added to the credits). Also, sound effects are played when a bet operation or settlement operation is performed.

The MAXBET button 11X is a circle about 3 cm in diameter, and when operable, the internal LED lights up white, and when inoperable, it is off. The 1BET button 57X is a button about 1 cm in diameter with a pressing surface made of black resin, and does not emit light. Because it is a button that is operated less frequently, a button relatively smaller than the MAXBET button 11X is used.
- Presentation button 60X: Located approximately in the center of the top surface of the operation base 50X. Approximately trapezoidal in shape. Note that there may be multiple types of presentation buttons as presentation operation means, and presentation levers, touch panels, distance sensors, etc. may be provided in place of or in addition to the presentation buttons. The presentation operation means may also be equipped with a vibration mechanism so that the player can feel the vibration when operating it. Furthermore, a gimmick may be installed in which a solenoid or the like is used to cause the button to protrude from its normal position when a button is pressed to produce a highly anticipated presentation (which may be when a win or bonus is confirmed).
- Medal count display unit 52X: Located on the right side of the top surface of the operation pedestal 50X. Details will be provided later, but here we will explain its positional relationship and general shape. It is a rectangular unit with a depth of about 5 cm and a width of about 7 cm when viewed from above, and its transparent cover has a slope similar to that of the top surface of the operation pedestal.

The depth D1 of the top surface of the operation base 50X is approximately 7 cm. The depth (length in the front-to-back direction) of the medal count display unit 52X is approximately 5 cm. The distance D2 from the end of the medal count display unit 52X closest to the gaming machine screen (not shown in the above figure, but located at the top of the drawing) to the screen is approximately 1 cm. The distance D3 from the front end (player side) of the medal count display unit 52X to the front edge of the top surface of the operation base is approximately 1 cm. Note that these figures are merely examples, and the credit operation unit may be larger or smaller than the illustrated size. The left-to-right direction (width of the cabinet) is 47.5 cm, so the width of the operation base, including the left and right decorative parts 54X, is also approximately 47.5 cm.
Counting button 15X: The hardware configuration of the button uses the same button material as the 1 BET button 57X. It is a button with a press surface made of black resin, approximately 1 cm in diameter, and does not emit light. Since they look the same, it is positioned away from the 1 BET button (settlement button) 57X to avoid confusion. Specifically, the counting button 15X is positioned to the right of the center of the gaming machine, and the 1 BET button 57X is positioned to the left of the center of the gaming machine to prevent confusion.
Stop button 35X: Located almost in the center of the front side of the operation base. Unitized. Details omitted.
Volume and light adjustment buttons and menu button 36X: The central circle is a menu button that displays a menu screen that displays game data, a guide on how to play, mobile phone linked functions, and custom effects. The up, down, left, and right triangles can be used to increase light intensity with the up key, decrease light intensity with the down key, decrease volume with the left key, and increase volume with the right key. These are located on the right side of the front side of the operation base 50X, and these buttons are unitized to make assembly work more efficient.
Keyhole 16X: A keyhole into which a door key (key) is inserted to open the front door of the gaming machine. The door key is operated by a store clerk, and since there is no need for the player to be aware of the keyhole, it is located on the right side of the gaming machine. At least, no player operation means are located to the right of the keyhole 16X. In addition, when viewed from the front, the keyhole 16X is located closer to the end (right end) of the gaming machine than the counting button 15X, and is in a position that is not very noticeable to the player when operating the counting button 15X.

(Conceptual diagram of the area around the medal count display unit, specification example 2)
304 is a conceptual diagram of the vicinity of the medal count display unit 52X of the model of specification example 2 as seen from above. Unlike the model of specification example 1, the count button 15X and the credit segment 14X are not an integrated unit, but are attached to the operation base 50X as separate parts.

The medal count display unit 52X is provided with an INSERT lamp 61X, a START lamp 62X, a REPLAY lamp 63X, 1-3 BET lamps 64X, a 5-digit credit segment 14X, a dot LED 65X to the right of the credit segment, and a 2-digit PAY segment 66X. The functions of each section are as follows:
- INSERT lamp 61X: A lamp indicating the status in which a bet operation is possible. It lights up when the machine is in bet waiting mode and has 1 or more credits. It goes out when bet operations are disabled, such as when the reels are spinning or the machine is frozen. It also goes out when there are 0 credits. Even in a machine that only accepts 3 coins, if there is 1 or more credits stored, the 1 BET operation itself is possible, so the INSERT lamp 61X will be lit.
START lamp 62X: A lamp indicating that a game can be started by operating the start lever 32X. It is off when not in play. It lights up after the betting operation for the playable number of coins is completed.
REPLAY lamp 63X: The lamp is off when not in play. It lights up when a replay is activated due to the winning of a replay role. It remains lit until the end of the next game played as a replay, and goes out if the game in question is not a replay.
・1 BET to 3 BET lamps 64X: Lamps corresponding to the number of coins bet will light up. If one coin is bet, only the 1 BET lamp will light up. If two coins are bet, the 1 BET lamp and the 2 BET lamp will light up. If three coins are bet, all 1 to 3 BET lamps will light up. After the game is over, the lamps will continue to show the number of coins bet in the previous game for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds), and then turn off.

(Specifications for the credit segment, PAY segment, and dot LED, and measures to make it easier to recognize the number of credits and awarded medals) - Credit segment 14X: 5-digit 7-segment. Displays the number of saved coins. Displays the number in a different light color than the PAY segment 66X. For example, it is a segment made up of a single-color white LED. In the illustration, the white indicates that 31 credits are held. Naturally, LED colors other than white are acceptable, but it is preferable that the color be brighter than the PAY segment 66X (closer to white).

A full-color LED may be used to change the color depending on the situation. It is also possible to use a specification such as "00031" to display 0's in the tens, thousands, and hundreds digits that are not held, but in this specification example, the upper digits that do not hold game value are not displayed in order to reduce power consumption and to prevent mistakes (it is particularly difficult for people with astigmatism, nearsightedness, or farsightedness to distinguish between 0 and 8 when viewing a segmentation display from a distance).
PAY Segment 66X: A two-digit segment. This segment displays the number of medals awarded according to the winnings of the game. It corresponds to the payout segment of a medal-playing machine. After all reels have stopped, the number of medals awarded according to the winnings is displayed. When a bet operation for the next game is performed, the display of the number of medals awarded ceases and the segment returns to an unlit state. If no winnings related to medal awards occur in the game (including misses, replays, or bonuses), the number of medals awarded does not display "0" but remains unlit, making it easier to see that no winnings have occurred. The number can be displayed in a different color from the credit segment 14X. For example, it can be a single-color red LED. In the figure, the numbers are shown in black. The size of each of the five 7-segment segments of the credit segment 14X and the size of each of the two 7-segment segments of the pay segment 66X are approximately the same. The same size segment components (e.g., commercially available small 7-segment displays measuring 13 mm in height, 10 mm in width, 7 mm in depth, and 9.9 mm in character height) may be used, but different light colors may be used. Alternatively, segments of similar size may be used. For example, one of the segments may be the small segment described above, and the other may be a commercially available medium-sized 7-segment display measuring 17.5 mm in height, 12 mm in width, 7 mm in depth, and 13.2 mm in character height. Furthermore, the right-end segment of the dot LED 65X and the right-end segment of the PAY segment 66X are positioned approximately in the same horizontal direction, as shown by auxiliary line E. Because the horizontal width of the dot LED 65X is narrow, only 1/4 that of a 7-segment LED (the horizontal width in this example is approximately 2.5 mm), there is a horizontal offset of approximately 2.5 mm between the ones digit of the credit segment 14X and the ones digit of the PAY segment 66X, but their horizontal positions are approximately the same. Similarly, the tens digit of the credit segment 14X and the tens digit of the PAY segment 66X are roughly in the same position, although there is a deviation of about 2.5 mm in the left-right direction. This is to prevent confusion, because if segments representing numbers of different digits are arranged side by side in the front-to-back direction (for example, if the ones digit of the credit segment 14X and the tens digit of the PAY segment 66X are in roughly the same position front to back in the left-to-right direction), it is easy to get confused about which digit you are looking at when moving your eyes back and forth. In other words, when a group of multi-digit segments consisting of seven segments of similar size are arranged in parallel front to back, if the left-right deviation between the segment indicating the digit of the first column (credit segment 14X) and the segment of the second column (pay segment 66X) is at least 1/2 of the horizontal width of that segment (if the horizontal width of the segment is 10 mm, the difference in the left-right positions of the first column and the second column is 5 mm or less), this has the effect of enabling smooth recognition of numbers even when the eyes move back and forth.

In this specification example, information indicating the instruction information (the instruction number on the instruction monitor) is displayed on the PAY segment 66X while the reels are spinning when navigation is generated, and when all reels stop, the numbers on the instruction monitor disappear and the value of the number of coins awarded according to the winning combination is displayed. In other words, there is no dedicated segment for displaying the instruction monitor. By configuring the PAY segment 66X to double as an instruction monitor in this way, the number of parts can be reduced. Note that a predetermined segment that can display predetermined information other than the PAY segment 66X (instruction monitor number, error code, segment display for performance) may be provided near the credit segment 14X, and in this case, it is desirable that the light colors of the credit segment 14X and the predetermined segment be different.
Dot LED 65X: This LED lights up during periods when an external signal indicating a specific advantageous state, such as during an AT or bonus activation, is output to the outside of the gaming machine, and is off during other states (such as normal play). In a sample specification, the width is approximately 2.5 mm, the height is approximately 2.5 mm, and the dot size is approximately 2 mm x 2 mm. For example, it lights up when the AT starts and goes out when the AT ends (when the external signal output ends). Like the credit segment 14X, it is controlled by the main control board. By providing such a lamp, when the hall computer receives an external signal output from the medal count control board or main control board via a sandbox or other means, staff can check whether the signal harness (wiring on the in-store equipment) indicating a bonus is in progress is properly connected by checking the lamp's illumination status during installation or maintenance. Furthermore, this external signal may be transmitted in one shot at the start of an AT, bonus, or jackpot, or it may continue to output while an advantageous state, such as during an AT or bonus, is maintained and end when the advantageous state ends. Also, the signal to be output may differ depending on the type of advantageous state, and signal type 1 may be output for a big bonus, signal type 2 for a regular bonus, signal type 3 for an AT, etc. Note that, when an AT (pseudo bonus) starts, if the AT starts after seven symbols or the like are lined up in a normal game with sevens, or in a pseudo game or reel automatic stop action effect, the dot may be lit from the start of the game with sevens lined up (when the reels start to spin), or the dot may be lit from the lined up of sevens in a pseudo game, or the dot may be lit when the lever is turned on after sevens are lined up (when the lever is turned on to start the next game in the case of sevens lined up in a real game, or when the lever is turned on to cancel the lined up state of the reel effect in a pseudo game, etc.).
Count button 15X: As described above.

(Conceptual diagram of cross section of Specification Example 2)
Fig. 305(1) is a conceptual diagram cut along the cutting plane S1-S2 of Fig. 303, and is a diagram for explaining the inclination of the top surface A (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "top surface A") and the segment arrangement surface B (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "arrangement surface B") of the operation pedestal unit 50X. For ease of explanation, the operation pedestal unit 50X is illustrated at a larger scale than it actually is.

The top surface A of the operation base 50X is tilted forward at approximately 15 degrees. The medal count display unit 52X is inserted into the opening of the operation base 50X from the back side and secured with screws (not shown). The top surface C of the medal count display unit 52X (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "top surface C") is approximately horizontal with the top surface A of the operation base 50X (the inclination angle of both is the same). Unlike a structure in which the medal count display unit protrudes upward from the top surface of the operation base, as in Specification Example 1, the area around the medal count display unit 52X of the operation base 50X is configured as approximately the same plane. For example, if the medal count display unit were recessed into the operation base, visibility would be slightly reduced, but by not providing a step between the operation base 50X and the top surface of the medal count display unit 52X (if any, it would be a very small step of only a few millimeters), reduced visibility of the credit segment 14X, etc. is suppressed.

The medal count display unit 52X is equipped with a cover member made of translucent resin that includes at least a portion corresponding to the top surface C. The cover member is indicated by a dotted line in the figure. The cover member serves as the base of the unit and is attached to a base member that includes the segment placement surface B to form an integrated unit. Note that while the entire top surface C is translucent, a portion of the top surface C may be non-translucent as long as it has a translucent portion that allows the credit segment 14X and pay segment 66X to be visible.

The door base 67X corresponds to the base member of the door element of the front door of the gaming machine. Note that the operation pedestal 50X only needs to be provided on the front door, and does not necessarily have to be fixed directly to the door base 67X. A middle panel 56X is disposed above the door base 67X.

(Regarding the inclination of segment placement surface B)
In Figure 305 (2), solid lines indicate the inclination angles of top surfaces A and C (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "top surface A, etc.") and placement surface B, and auxiliary line F indicates the horizontal. Perpendicular lines are approximately vertical lines.

The inclination angle R1 of the top surface A etc. (the angle between auxiliary line F and the line indicating the inclination of the top surface A etc.) is approximately 15 degrees.

The inclination angle of placement surface B (the angle between auxiliary line F and the line indicating the inclination of placement surface B), R2, is approximately 30 degrees.

The difference between R2 and R1 is approximately 15 degrees.

By tilting the segment placement surface diagonally forward from the inclined surface of the operation base 50X in this way, the visibility of the credit segment 14X, dot LED 65X, and PAY segment 66X is improved. As shown by the perpendicular line H1 of the credit segment 14X and the perpendicular line H2 of the PAY segment 66X in (1), they are easier to see for players sitting in front of the gaming machine, and the tilt also improves visibility from a distance.

Note that the angles are just examples, and are not limited to the angles mentioned above, as long as the relationship R2 > R1 holds.

However, because the display will be visible through the translucent portion of the top surface C, if the angle of the placement surface B is too steep (close to vertical), visibility will be reduced, so it is preferable to set the angle R2 to approximately 60 degrees or less.

The PAY segment 66X is located at the front side of the placement surface B (closer to the player), but if it is placed too close to the front wall of the segment placement space (the wall in front of the medal count display unit), it will be blocked by the wall and visibility from diagonally forward will be reduced. Therefore, in this specification, the bottom end of the PAY segment 66X is spaced approximately 0.5 cm from the wall. A distance other than 0.5 cm is acceptable as long as it contributes to reducing the visibility of the PAY segment 66X.

(Overall image of the gaming machine in Specification Example 3)
Fig. 306 is a conceptual diagram of a design proposal that differs from specification examples 1 and 2. As with Fig. 297 and the like, in order to make the positional relationship of the operation base unit 70X, which is difficult to see when viewed from the front, the MAX BET button 11X, medal count display unit 71X, etc. on the operation base unit 70X clear, are illustrated in the positional relationship when the operation base unit 70X is viewed from above.

For ease of illustration, the lower panel is drawn small. The area surrounded by dotted lines A-A and B-B, where the lamp groups and other components are located, is actually narrow, measuring only about 2 cm vertically, but is drawn large.

Image display means 72X: An LCD screen. As with specification example 1, this type has a transparent LCD placed in front of the reels. PAY image display area 73X: Located in an area relatively close to the medal count display unit 71X at the bottom right of the LCD screen, there is a "PAY image display area" that displays an image indicating the number of medals awarded according to the winnings in that game at the end of one game. The number of medals awarded is displayed as a two-digit number below the three letters PAY. For example, if eight bells are awarded, the image "08" is displayed. The PAY letters and two-digit number are displayed on a circular base image (an image in which the PAY letters and two-digit number are a different color), so that even when the background color changes due to stage changes or special effects during normal play, the letters for the number of medals awarded do not blend in with the background color and become difficult to see.

The color of the PAY text, the color of the two-digit number for the amount awarded, the base image, etc. may change depending on the game state. For example, during normal play, the PAY is white, the two-digit segment display is blue, and the base image is a gray circle. During AT, the PAY may be red, the two-digit segment display may be red, and the base image may be a yellow rectangle, etc., to match the atmosphere of the presentation in each state.

Because changing its location depending on the state can confuse players, the display position is generally fixed during normal gameplay, such as during automatic time adjustment (AT), where the display position may remain in the lower right corner of the screen, though it may shift slightly depending on the state due to changes in the design of the base image). The display may also be turned off during specific effects, such as freeze effects, or when an error occurs. The PAY image is not displayed on the demo screen (waiting for customers), preventing vacant machines from being mistaken for active machines. Furthermore, during the waiting for game operations after credits are added, from betting, to reel spinning, to reel stop, the PAY image display area displays "00," making it easy for first-time players to understand that this area displays the awarded medals. Furthermore, since this specification example does not have a segment indicating the number of awarded medals, this area is provided. However, a PAY image display area may also be provided on machines that have a segment indicating the number of awarded medals.
Counting Image Display Area 74X: A portion of the LCD screen. Located below the right reel when viewed from the front. This area displays images such as "Counting" during the counting process when the counting button 15X is operated. This area is relatively close to the counting button 15X and the credit segment 14X to ensure easy visibility during the counting process. Since the counting process can be performed even while the reels are spinning, it is displayed near the edge of the screen where the main visual effects are displayed. Images for the batting order navigation and target specific symbols navigation provided by the AT function are displayed in a display area above the reels. Therefore, even if the counting process is performed while the batting order navigation is occurring, the images are displayed so that the "Counting" message and the navigation image do not overlap, enhancing player convenience. This is particularly useful when a large number of medals have been acquired, such as near closing time, which can take a long time to transfer, and when medals need to be transferred while the AT is being used. Furthermore, when this concept is applied to a managed gaming machine (pachinko machine), it is sufficient to display the image indicating that counting is in progress in a position where it does not overlap with operation instruction images such as an instruction to hit right during a jackpot, or to return the handle to the left when the time-saving feature or jackpot ends. Also, in the case of pachinko machines, it is preferable to display the counting in progress display in a position where it does not overlap with images that are desirable not to obstruct the display in terms of game progress, such as the image of the hold icon or the fourth pattern (a small mark image different from the decorative pattern that indicates that the special pattern is changing).

In addition, the "Counting" text does not overlap with the aforementioned PAY image. In this example, a CREDIT image (a numerical image indicating the number of CREDITs) is not displayed on the screen. However, if a CREDIT image were to be displayed, it would be desirable to display the "Counting" text in a position that does not overlap with the CREDIT image. The "Counting" image may be displayed in a position that does not overlap with the volume image (an image indicating the volume level) or the light intensity adjustment image (an image indicating the light intensity) displayed during volume adjustment, thereby enhancing the convenience of adjustment. Since these adjustment images are not particularly important, the counting image may be displayed on a layer in front of the adjustment image. Furthermore, if a device has a large main screen and a small sub-screen, the counting image may be displayed on either screen, but it is preferable to display it on the screen closest to the counting button 15X, etc. However, since the "Counting" image is not necessarily required for the specifications, it may not be displayed.
・Speaker 75X: The speakers are located at the positions indicated by the diagonal lines in the circle. There are four speakers in total, two on each side above the screen, and they are located to the left of the center of the cabinet on the vertical wall behind the bottom tray (which functions as a storage space as medals are not dispensed).

Of the two upper left speakers, the upper one is a regular speaker (for low to mid-range sounds), while the lower one is a tweeter speaker that is primarily suited to high-range sounds. Similarly, the upper one of the two right speakers is a regular speaker, while the lower one is a tweeter. By placing speakers according to the range of sound at positions close to the player's ear height, the acoustic effect is enhanced. The lower speaker is a so-called woofer (low-range speaker), which can emit deep bass sounds from the bottom of the cabinet.
Left and right decorative parts: Although not shown in the figure, decorative lamps and decorative members are arranged on both sides of the housing.
Middle panel 76X: A transparent plate (protective plate) in front of the liquid crystal screen and lamp group display area.
Lamp group display area 77X: This area is bounded by dotted lines A-A and B-B, and is approximately 2 cm vertically and 47.5 cm horizontally. From left to right, the following lamps are arranged: 3-digit segment S3, 2-digit segment S2, 1-3 BET lamps, REPLAY lamp, START lamp, and INSERT lamp. The areas without segments or lamps are decorated. The functions of the lamps in the area lamp group are the same as those described in FIG. 304, so a detailed description will be omitted.
3-digit segment S3: A segment for an instruction monitor controlled by the main control board. It can display the instruction number of the stop operation mode by the AT function.
・2-digit segment S2: In this example, this is a segment that is not used during gameplay. It is controlled by the main control board and can display error codes (information indicating the type of error, such as E1 to E8, 88, etc.) and setting values when changing settings. This segment can also be used as a PAY segment (a segment that can display the number of medals awarded according to the winnings of the game).
Lower panel 78X: Designed with a character or the model name that is the motif. The backlight may be turned on, off, or flashing depending on the state. Under normal conditions, the backlight of the lower panel 78X is on. For example, the lighting state of the lower panel 78X may change (flashing or temporarily going off) when a high expectation effect is displayed or a predetermined winning notification is announced. In addition, when setting L, which is a setting with an extremely low payout rate used as a test measure, is set as the setting value for the payout rate, the light may be turned off to warn store staff not to set setting L by mistake.

(Explanation of the lower tray and the translucent wall portion on the front side) Lower tray portion 79X: The door base member is made of resin (e.g., blue, red, etc.), and the top surface (the surface facing upward in the lower tray) is designed with the model name logo. A translucent, nearly transparent cover 80X is placed on top of the door base member. Since no physical medals are used, it functions as a storage space for the player. The transparent cover 80X has a sound output opening for the speaker (multiple small sound output holes, approximately 3-5 mm in diameter, arranged in an approximately circular shape to prevent dust and other particles from entering) at the position where the speaker is located on the left side of the vertical wall portion at the back of the lower tray 79X. In addition, the lower panel is located closer to the front than the lower tray 79X, and an LED is placed on the downward-facing wall portion of the area where the lower panel 78X is located. When a win occurs, an LED is emitted toward the lower tray, impressing the player with the award of game value. The transparent cover 80X has a translucent vertical wall approximately 2 cm high extending upward from the front end of the lower tray 79X. By making the vertical wall on the front side of the lower tray 79X translucent, items placed on the lower tray 79X are easier to see, reducing the likelihood of items such as electronic cigarettes or smartphones being left behind when play ends. Unlike medal gaming machines, when play ends, tasks such as counting (transferring) medals and removing cards with transferred medals from the sand occur, and the above-mentioned measures are taken to prevent attention from being lost to the lower tray 79X due to the workflow.

The upright wall portion on the front side of the lower tray 79X only needs to be translucent, and may be completely transparent, but may also be smoked or slightly colored.

(Regarding the operation base)
The operation base unit 70X in FIG. 306 will be described starting from the top left.

The top surface of the operation base is provided with a volume/light adjustment button and menu button unit 36X, a 1 BET button 12X, a MAX BET button 11X, a chance button for special effects 81X, and a medal count display unit 71X. The front surface of the operation base 70X is provided with a settlement button 13X, a start lever 32X, a stop button unit 35X, and a keyhole 16X.

Volume/light adjustment button and menu button unit 36X: There is a menu button in the center for displaying the player menu screen, and the light intensity can be adjusted with the up and down keys, and the volume with the left and right keys. Details are the same as those in Specification Example 1 above.

The volume and light intensity can be adjusted as needed while the reels are spinning, while medals are being counted (transferring from the gaming machine to the slot machine), and while credits are being added (transferring from the slot machine to the gaming machine), so players who feel that the sound effects during transfer are too loud or too quiet can instantly adjust the volume. An explanatory image is displayed at the bottom of the demo screen (waiting for customers) explaining that the volume can be adjusted with the left and right keys, and the light intensity can be adjusted with the up and down keys.

1BET button 12X: Formed as a unit with MAXBET button 11X. MAXBET button 11X: Formed as a unit with 1BET button 12X. Chance button 81X: A chance button for effects controlled by the effect control board. It lights up in white when operable, such as during button operation effects to create a sense of anticipation, and is normally off. It may also be equipped with lighting patterns that indicate high expectations, such as red or rainbow lighting, or that confirm a win, etc.

Also, if the credit count button 15X is pressed while the light is off and not during the button operation effect, the chance button 81X will light up white while the count button 15X continues to be pressed, and will return to its off state when the count button 15X stops being pressed.

By lighting up the effect button close to the credit segment 14X during counting (transfer), the deduction of the credit segment 14X during transfer becomes easier to see, even in a dimly lit hall.

In addition, if the counting button 15X is pressed while the chance button for the effect is lit white while waiting for a button to be pressed during the button operation effect, the white light will remain lit. Even if the chance button 81X is pressed during transfer and the condition for ending the white light indicating a wait for a button to be pressed is met, the white light (lighting mode indicating transfer in progress) will remain lit as long as the counting button 15X is pressed.

Also, if a transfer is initiated while the light is red, it will change to a white light indicating a transfer. This is because the transfer of credits is more important information for the game than the button press effect, which is a fun effect that creates anticipation (a fun effect that does not affect the outcome of the game), so the white light, which indicates that a transfer is in progress, is given priority.

During the transfer, the decorative lamps other than the chance button 81X may flash or light up to indicate/notify the player that a transfer is in progress, or the chance button 81X may not light up white, but the lighting pattern of a specified decorative lamp may be changed to a pattern corresponding to the transfer in progress to indicate/notify the player that a transfer is in progress.
- Medal count display unit 71X: Explained in Figures 307 and 308.
Settlement button 13X: A button for returning bet medals to credits. Does not emit light.
Start lever 32X: Game start operation detection means.
・Stop button 35X: Three buttons are unitized.
Keyhole 16X: A keyhole for opening the front door, provided near the right end of the front door, to the right of the counting button in the left-right direction.

The operation base unit 70X will be explained with reference to Figure 307.

(Regarding the operation base)
307 is a conceptual diagram of the medal count display unit 71X as seen from above. It is approximately 7 cm in the left-right direction and approximately 5 cm in the front-to-back direction.

The black resin cover has instructions written in white letters such as "Transfer CREDIT to rental unit" and "Press and hold for high-speed transfer."
Count button 15X: A gray button about 1 cm in diameter. A roughly circular white highlight decorative portion 90X is provided around the periphery, making the location of the button easy to understand even for first-time players.
・Counting characters 91X: The counting characters are written on a design with a right-pointing arrow motif. In the case of pachislot machines, the transfer destination of medals (medals as game value) is generally placed on the right side, so the design evokes the image of a rightward direction, so that the eye is drawn to the small LCD screen of the transfer destination, which displays the number of transferred medals. In the case of pachinko machines, it is better to use a design that evokes the image of a leftward direction.
Lamp 1: Error notification lamp. Lights red when communication with the machine is interrupted. Counting lamp 92X: The word "Counting Available" is written next to it. It lights green when there are medals stored in the credit segment, which allows counting. It is off when counting is not possible (0 credits). Counting is possible even during gameplay after lever-on, such as while the reels are spinning or during a freeze effect, or during effects that delay gameplay. If you need to temporarily leave your seat, such as to go to the restroom, you must eject cards from the machine to prevent theft. However, ejecting cards requires transferring all medals stored in the machine. This is because many machines are designed to prevent cards from being ejected from the machine when medals are stored. Therefore, counting (transferring) from the machine to the machine is possible even during gameplay, except in the event of an error.
Credit segment 14X: A five-digit credit segment. Six digits are also acceptable. At least the area in front of the credit segment is optically transparent.
- Credit segment emphasis decorative portion 93X: A white border is added to surround the credit segment 14X. Since the medal count lending unit is in black, the credit display portion stands out by surrounding it with a white border. The word CREDIT is added near the border of the emphasis decorative portion 93X. In the figure, CREDIT is written in white on a black background, but in the actual design, the word CREDIT is written in black on a solid white background. The color is not limited to the example shown.

(Conceptual diagram of the cross section near the medal count display unit, specification example 3)
Figure 308 is a conceptual diagram of a cross section when cutting the vicinity of the medal count display unit at the cutting plane S in Figure 306.

Top surface A of operation base 70X (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "top surface A") is gently inclined toward the front. The angle of inclination is approximately 10 degrees. Medal count display unit 71X is fixed with screws (not shown) so that it fits into the opening in top surface A from the backside. Top surface C of medal count display unit 71X (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "top surface C") is located in a position that protrudes slightly upward from top surface A. To prevent players from injuring themselves on the corners at the edges of top surface C, the corners are formed diagonally or in an arc shape to avoid sharp angles. The inclination of top surface A and top surface C is approximately the same.

As in the above-mentioned specification example 2, the segment arrangement surface B is inclined at a greater angle forward than the top surface A, making it easier for the player to see the credit segment 14X. The inclination angle of the segment arrangement surface is approximately 30 degrees.
Counting button 15X: The counting button 15X is provided in the opening of the top surface C, further back than the credit segment 14X (closer to the LCD), and the pressing surface of the counting button 15X is provided in a position recessed from the top surface C. In addition, the periphery of the counting button 15X has a slight incline, so that when pressing and holding the button for 10 seconds or more to transfer several thousand medals, part of the finger (such as the pad of the index finger) can be supported on the inclined surface, making it less tiring to press and hold the button for a long time.
Counting lamp 92X: In reality, the position of the counting button 15X in the left-right direction is different, so it is not shown in the cross-sectional view of cutting plane S, but is shown for convenience in explaining the anteroposterior relationship. An LED is located closer to the player than the counting button 15X. The LED is located on the unit itself, not on inclined surface B, so its inclination is approximately the same as that of top surface C.
Lamp group display row 95X: Since there are no lamp groups on the left and right sides of the cross section S, these areas are panel sections with designs. Placing lamps related to games near the medal count display unit 71X makes it difficult to understand the situation, so the medal count display unit 71X is placed to the right of the center of the gaming machine, and the bet lamps and the like are placed to the left of the center of the gaming machine. It is also possible to reverse the placement, placing the bet lamps and the like on the right and the medal count display unit 71X on the left.
PAY image display area 73X: Located near the bottom right when viewed from the front of the screen. Since the credit segment is updated according to the number of medals awarded for each game, the number of PAY coins and the credit segment 14X are located in a nearby area within the gaming machine so that they are naturally within the same field of view.

(Example of specifications for credit addition sound (loan sound) for medal-less gaming machines)
Figure 309 is a table explaining the sound effects (hereinafter also referred to as "credit addition sound,""additionsound,""lendingsound," etc.) that occur when credits are added when receiving a loan of gaming value equivalent to medals from Sand, as described in Figure 297. The sound output is controlled by the performance control board (sub-board). Specification example 1 refers to the same model specifications as specification example 1 described in Figure 299, etc. Similarly, specification example 2 refers to the same model specifications as specification example 2 described in Figure 302, etc. Specification example 3 refers to the same model specifications as specification example 3 described in Figure 306, etc. Specification example 4 is a different specification example from specification examples 1 to 3.

The credit addition sound specifications for medal-less gaming machines described here may also be adopted for the sound effects (also called "addition sounds," "lending sounds," etc.) when balls are added to managed gaming machines (enclosed pachinko machines).

It is desirable that sound effects related to the game value transfer process, such as the credit addition sound, ball addition sound, short press transfer sound, and long press transfer sound, are not played as other sound effects (for example, sound effects for creating a sense of anticipation or announcing whether a game has been won or lost, or sounds for operating menu screens or adjusting volume or brightness). This will help to prevent players from misunderstanding that a transfer has occurred while playing or operating a menu, etc.

(Credit addition sound start timing and credit segment increment) Sound start timing: In all specification examples 1 to 4, the credit addition sound is played at approximately the same timing as the start of the credit segment change. Details will be provided later, but strictly speaking, the loaned number data is sent from the sand to the gaming machine, and the gaming machine determines whether the loaned number data is within an appropriate range (whether it is 50 or less). If it is determined to be within the appropriate range, the credit value is updated (added) and the credit addition in the main program is completed. After that, the credit segment is updated according to the credit value after the updated data (the value of the number of medals held as gaming value).

Specification examples 1 and 2 do not include an increment operation for the credit segment. Increment operation refers to the operation of sequentially changing a value from 0 → 1 → 2 → ... → 49 → 50. It is not necessary to change the value by one; it can be changed by two, such as 0 → 2 → 4 ..., or the amount of change per change can be determined appropriately based on the total amount of change. Because there is no increment operation, when lending 50 cards, the value changes from "0" to "50" in one go. Since the change takes only a moment (generally less than 200 ms), "approximately the same timing as the start of the display of the credit segment change" in specification examples 1 and 2 of Figure 309 can also be interpreted as approximately the same timing as when the credit segment change ends, or approximately the same timing immediately after the credit segment change ends. In specification example 3, the length of the sound effect is set so that it is played for approximately the same time value as the time required for the increment operation. In specification example 4, the output of the additive sound begins approximately simultaneously with the start of the increment operation, and ends approximately simultaneously with the end of the increment operation. Note that these additive sounds can be output even when background music (BGM) is being output during normal play or at the automatic timer, or when sound effects (dialogue and other sound effects) are being output. Specifically, a separate sound channel is assigned to the sound effects and BGM. Furthermore, to make the additive sound easier to hear, ducking processing may be performed to temporarily lower the volume of the BGM and sound effects (including setting the volume to 0) when the additive sound is being output.

(Image of the credit addition sound)
In specification examples 1 and 3, a single sound effect is output once. In specification example 2, a voice (human voice) saying "Rented" is output once. In specification example 4, a looped sound effect is output during the credit increment operation.

(Credit addition sound duration)
In specification examples 1, 2, and 3, sound effects are emitted at a fixed time value regardless of the number of coins added. Specification example 3 includes a credit segment increment operation, and a single beeping sound effect is emitted regardless of the number of coins added. This is roughly the same time as the time required for an increment of about 50 coins. Even when the number of coins lent is small, such as when transferring only 10 medals from a membership card from the sandbox to the credits, the sound effect duration remains the same. Specification example 4 also includes an increment operation, but looped sound effects are continuously emitted during the increment operation. Note that sound control may involve continuous sound output without interruption, such as continuous single sound output, other than loop playback. In specification example 4, the time value varies depending on the number of coins added. Therefore, for example, the sound duration is shorter for a small number of coins, such as 1 or 2, but longer for 50 or more. The number of credits added at one time is set to 50 or less, and if a lending request command (credit addition command) of more than 50 is received, the gaming machine may determine the command as an invalid command, discard the command, and not update the credits. In this case, the credits are not updated (added), so the credit addition sound is not emitted.

(Lending type and credit addition sound)
There are four types of loans:
・Lending from cash/saving medals: Saving medals are medals that have been saved up until the previous day. The number of medals that can be replayed per day varies depending on the region and store, but it is usually limited to 500 or 460 medals per day.
・Renting medals from your possession: Your possession medals are the medals counted on the day. They can be added to your credits as replays with no limit.
- Lending from shared medals: In some cases, medals can be shared between multiple players, such as friends. In this case, medals can be lent after the sharing permission operation is performed from the medals held by other players to make them shared.

Regardless of the lending type, the credit addition sound on the gaming machine is the same, simplifying the process.

(Example of specifications for the counting sound of one coin for a medalless gaming machine (sound of one coin transferred from gaming machine to Sand))
FIG. 310 is a table explaining the sound effect (hereinafter referred to as the "one-coin transfer sound,""one-coin counting sound,""short-press transfer sound,""short-press counting sound," etc.) that occurs when credits are subtracted when game value equivalent to one medal is transferred from the gaming machine to the sand. Counting refers to the transfer of game value from the gaming machine to the sand, and the terms "transfer" and "counting" are used interchangeably. The transfer of one medal occurs when a short press of the counting button is detected, which is a press of the counting button for less than 500 ms.

Specifically, upon initial press (operation), that is, when the counting button press detection sensor detects a change from an off-edge state indicating no pressing to an on-edge state indicating pressing, and if a change from the on-edge state to the off-edge state is detected within 500 ms, the main control means determines that the counting button has been pressed briefly and performs the single-coin transfer process. On the other hand, if the on-edge state is maintained for more than 500 ms after the change to the on-edge state, the main control means determines that the counting button has been pressed briefly and performs the single-coin transfer process without performing the single-coin transfer process. As explained in Figure 309, Specification Examples 1 to 4 represent the same model specifications as Specification Examples 1 to 4 described above. The single-coin transfer sound specifications for medalless gaming machines may also be used in the sound effect (also referred to as the "single-coin transfer sound" or "single-coin counting sound") when transferring one ball from a managed gaming machine (enclosed pachinko machine). Additionally, the expression "sound of transfer/counting of 1 game value" is sometimes used to refer to both the transfer of one slot machine coin and the transfer of one pachinko ball.

(Timing when counting sound starts)
In all of specification examples 1 to 4, the one-coin counting sound is emitted at approximately the same timing as the start of the credit segment change. The amount of credit that changes with each count is only 1, e.g., from 10 to 11. Because the time required for the credit display to change is instantaneous (generally less than 200 ms), "approximately the same timing as the start of the credit segment change display" can also be interpreted as approximately the same timing as the end of the credit segment change, or approximately the same timing immediately after the end of the credit segment change. The one-coin counting sound and long press counting sound can be emitted even when background music (BGM) is being played during normal play or automatic timer play, or when sound effects (such as dialogue or other sound effects) are being played. Specifically, a separate sound channel is assigned to the sound effects and background music. To make the counting sound easier to hear, a ducking process may be performed to temporarily lower the volume of the background music and sound effects (including setting the volume to 0 or pausing sound output) when the counting sound is emitted.

(Image of the sound produced when counting one sheet)
The following are images of the sound effects for each specification. In specification examples 1 and 2, the same type of sound effect is emitted for the 50-count sound (long press counting sound) and the 1-count sound. In specification examples 3 and 4, different sound effects are emitted for the long press counting sound and the 1-counting sound. Using different sound effects is convenient because it allows the user to recognize the operation status of long press and short press by sound. On the other hand, if the same sound effect is used for long press and 1-counting, the number of sound effect types can be reduced, which leads to saving on sound ROM capacity.

(Counting sound duration for one sheet)
As shown in the table in Figure 310, the sound effect has a shorter duration than the sound that is often emitted when adding up approximately 46 to 50 coins. Because it is counting only one coin, the sound effect is shorter than the sound that would be emitted when adding up 50 coins, suggesting that the amount of movement of the game value is small.

(Example of specifications for the long press counting sound for medal-less gaming machines (sound of transfer from gaming machine to Sand))
FIG. 311 is a table explaining the sound effects (hereinafter referred to as "long press transfer/counting sound,""continuous transfer/counting sound,""multiple transfer/counting sound," etc.) that occur when credits are subtracted from a game machine when game values are transferred in bulk from the game machine to the slot machine. The long press counting sound will be explained below with reference to FIG. 311. The process of transferring many medals in bulk is performed when a long press is detected, which means the counting button is pressed for 500 ms or more. Specifications 1 to 4 are as described in the explanation of FIG. 309. The long press transfer sound specifications for medal-less game machines may also be used for the sound effects (also referred to as "long press transfer/counting sound,""continuous transfer/counting sound,""multiple transfer/counting sound," etc.) that occur when balls are transferred in bulk from a managed game machine (enclosed pachinko machine). The sound effects when transferring multiple game values in bulk for slot and pachinko machines may be referred to as "multiple game value transfer/counting sound."

(Long press counting sound start timing)
In all of specification examples 1 to 4, sound output begins at approximately the same timing as the start of the change in the credit segment. "Approximately the same timing" does not necessarily mean exactly the same timing, but also includes timing slightly earlier or later than the start of the change in the credit segment. The number of credits grasped as data on the main control board and/or medal count control board changes before the change in the credit segment. The flow is as follows: count press detected → 50 medals equivalent to one long press period are transferred every 300 ms → the value in the credit segment is updated by 50 medals.

(Long press counting sound output image, continuous sound output type of specification example 1 and 2)
Specification examples 1 and 2 will be described together. In this specification example, the long press counting sound is the same as the one-coin transfer sound, which is continuously emitted to give the player the impression that medals are being transferred in bulk. The long press operation transfers the first 50 medals 500 ms after the counting button is pressed, and then transfers 50 medals every 300 ms that the counting button is held pressed. If the counting button is held down, the transfer process ends when the remaining credits reach 0. In specification example 1, the transfer sound lasts approximately 0.6 seconds (600 ms), while in specification example 2, the transfer sound lasts approximately 0.5 seconds (500 ms), which is longer than the 0.3 seconds (300 ms) required to transfer 50 medals. In specification example 1, a transfer sound is emitted every time 50 medals are transferred. Therefore, if the button is held down, the next transfer sound begins to be emitted before the first transfer sound is completed, and the first transfer sound is not played to completion and ends halfway through. Specifically, when the counting button is pressed briefly in Specification Example 1, the beep sound is played to the end over 0.6 seconds. When pressed for a long time, the beep sound is played only partway through, except for the last beep: beep → beep → beep → ... → beep.

From the player's perspective, a beep is emitted every time 50 coins are counted, which has the advantage that the number of coins being transferred can be inferred from the number of beeps emitted. In specification example 1, a sound effect is emitted once when the presentation control means receives a command from the main control means indicating that a bulk transfer is in progress (this may be a command indicating the transfer of 50 coins or a command to detect a sustained long press equivalent to 300 ms). This specification has the advantage that the process of emitting a transfer sound once for each transfer is sufficient, and sound output control can be standardized for the sound output when transferring one coin and the sound output when transferring with a long press. It is also possible to provide separate sound output controls for short presses and long presses, and when a long press is detected, the above-mentioned beep → beep → beep ... sound can be continuously played as a continuous sound output sound.

(Long press counting sound output image, BGM playback type of specification example 3 and 4)
Specification examples 3 and 4 will be explained together. In this specification example, a sound effect (BGM) different from the one-coin transfer sound is played as the long press counting sound. While a long press is being detected, a predetermined BGM continues to play. Note that a sound effect other than BGM may also be used. Compared to specification examples 1 and 2, in which the same transfer sound is played for both short presses and long presses, by playing a sound different from the one-coin transfer sound when a button is pressed long, it becomes easier for the player to know that a long press operation is being performed.

In specification examples 3 and 4, each BGM is played in a loop, but BGM data with a similar sound can also be played continuously without looping. In models for specification examples 1 to 4, the maximum number of medals that can be stored in the credits is 16,383. Therefore, by preparing BGM that is longer than the time required for the transfer, sound can be maintained without looping. In specification example 3, the type of sound effect does not change depending on the number of medals transferred. However, in specification example 4, the BGM changes depending on the number of medals transferred (or being transferred) with a single long press, enhancing the sense of elation when a player who has acquired a large number of medals completes their game and transfers their medals. The type of sound also has the effect of allowing a rough estimate of how many medals have been transferred. Even if you have a large number of medals, if you stop pressing and hold the button halfway through and then press and hold again, the normal transfer sound ranging from 0 to 1,000 medals will be played. For example, if you have 2,000 credits and press and hold the counting button until 1,000 have been transferred, then release the counting button and press and hold again, the normal transfer sound will be heard, rather than the slightly higher-pitched transfer sound effect for transfers of 1,000 or more. Therefore, if you want to hear the transfer sound when the cumulative number of transferred coins is large, it is best to continue pressing and holding the button. Also, since the transfer sound for large numbers in Specification Example 4 also has the congratulatory meaning for the player, it is best to use the sound that plays later than the normal transfer sound when the total number of transferred coins is large as a sound effect or background music that gives a more luxurious impression.

(Press and hold if you have less than 50 credits remaining)
If the number of remaining medals stored in the credits falls below 50 during a long press or if there are fewer than 50 credits at the start of a long press, all remaining medals are transferred and the credits are set to 0, so that counting can be completed simply by continuing to press and hold, improving convenience for the player. Note that if there is only one medal remaining in the credits, even if a long press is performed, only one medal will be transferred, so the long press transfer sound may not be emitted and only a one medal transfer sound may be emitted to make it clear that one medal is being transferred, or, since the operation itself is a long press, the long press transfer sound may be emitted in the same way as when there are two or more credits, simplifying the control flow for outputting the transfer sound.

(Regarding credit segment decrements)
Decrement refers to the subtraction display on the segment. Specifications that display the process of decreasing a number in sequence, such as 200 → 199 → 198 → ... → 1 → 0, are marked as "with decrement."

Specification examples 1 and 2, which are marked as "no decrement," also decrement in increments of 50 from 200 → 150 → 100 → 50 → 0, so they can be said to have decrements in a broad sense; however, for ease of explanation, specifications that update the display in increments of 50 are marked as "no decrement." In specification examples 1 and 2, the display is updated by 50 every 300 ms in accordance with the transfer of 50 medals every 300 ms. The timing of the update and the sound of the transfer are nearly synchronized. In specification examples 3 and 4, the value is not updated in increments of 50, but is decremented sequentially from 200 → 199 → 198 → ... → 1 → 0, so the value displayed in the credit segment changes rapidly. In other words, the update of the credit segment and the sound of the transfer sound are not synchronized.

(Regarding increment and decrement)
The credit segment may also display increments and decrements (hereinafter collectively referred to as "increments, etc.") to display values that are changing when updating a value, in addition to when adding or transferring from the slot. For example, a decrement operation may be performed when adding game value due to a small winning combination, when settling the number of coins already bet, or when decrementing by three coins due to a MAXBET operation. Also, the credit display (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a "credit image") and pay display (displaying the number of coins awarded based on the result of the game; hereinafter sometimes referred to as a "pay image") displayed on the screen may also be animated, such as by increments. Note that the credit image or pay image may be displayed on the screen either alone or both.

Below are examples of patterns with and without increment/decrement. Note that while the credit image and pay image are assumed to be similar, they may have different specifications. Pattern 1: Credit segment: No Credit image, pay image: No Pattern 2: Credit segment: Yes Credit image, pay image: No Pattern 3: Credit segment: No Credit image, bay image: Yes Pattern 4: Credit segment: Yes Credit image, pay image: Any pattern can be adopted depending on the organic species specifications.

(Time values such as credit segment, credit image, pay image increment, etc.)
In the case of the above pattern 4, the relationship between the time required for incrementing the credit segment and the time required for incrementing the credit image and pay image can be set as follows. Hereinafter, the time required for incrementing is referred to as update time. Time value example 1: Update time of credit segment >
Update time of credit image and pay imageTime Value Example 2: Update time of credit segment ≒ Update time of credit image and pay imageTime Value Example 3: Update time of credit segment < Update time of credit image and pay imageAccording to the specification of Time Value Example 1, the credit segment is updated relatively slowly.With this specification, the image that is more likely to be in the player's field of view is updated more quickly, which makes it possible to smooth the progress of the game.

Time Value Example 2 is a specification that sets the time values to be approximately the same. Since the update cycles for the segment LED and the image are different, technically there will be differences, but the specification sets the time values to be approximately the same. This specification minimizes the discrepancy between the two, reducing the sense of discomfort felt by the player.

Time Value Example 3 is the specification adopted in Specification Example 3 above. By making it slower than the image segment, it is possible to present the changing numbers in a way that is easy for the player to see. With this specification, the credit image and pay image continue to update even after the credit segment update is complete, and then the image update is completed. Sound effects such as counting sounds may be played in accordance with the credit segment update time, or the image update time.

(Counting completion sound and off-edge sound of the counting button on a medalless gaming machine)
Figure 312 is a table of counting completion sounds and off-edge sounds for the counting buttons of medalless gaming machines.

In Specification Examples 3 and 4, when the remaining medal count reaches zero through a long press transfer and counting is complete, a sound is emitted to indicate that counting is complete, allowing the player to recognize the completion of the sound. In Specification Example 3, a voice message from Don-chan (the character featured on the gaming machine) is played once, saying, "Counting complete. Please come play again." Long press transfers are also possible while playing, such as while the reels are spinning. If a long press transfer is completed while the reels are spinning, the voice message "Counting complete. Please come play again." is also played. Similarly, if a transfer is initiated before the reels start spinning and completed while the reels are spinning, the same voice message is played. By playing the same type of counting completion sound regardless of the situation, the sound output process can be simplified. Completing a transfer while the reels are spinning is unlikely to cause a problem, as it is unlikely that the player will end the game without stopping the reels. Furthermore, if counting is completed while the reels are spinning and a small win occurs during that game, 1 to 15 medals will be added to the credits, and counting will be possible again. If a small win occurs during transfer by pressing the count button, the game value of the small win will be added to the credits after waiting for the transfer to complete. Furthermore, if a small win occurs while the count button is still pressed after transfer is complete, the credits will be added, but the transfer will not begin immediately. Instead, the credit transfer will begin only when the count button switches from its off-edge state (non-press detection state) to its on-edge state (press detection state). The type of transfer completion voice may vary depending on the number of transferred medals. For example, if the number of transferred medals is less than a predetermined number (e.g., 1,000 medals), a standard counting completion voice may be played, whereas if the number is equal to or greater than the predetermined number (e.g., 1,000 medals), a congratulatory voice such as "Counting is complete! Congratulations on your big win!" may be played. In the case of specification example 4, the same sound effect is played when counting is completed and when pressing the count button is stopped during long press transfer. This specification simplifies the sound output process because the same sound effect is played whenever the long press transfer state ends, regardless of the cause. As a variation, a specification that includes an off-edge sound like specification example 4 may also include a count completion sound that is different from the off-edge sound, so that the player can tell by sound whether the counting is complete or whether the counting was completed or whether the player released the count button before the counting was completed. As another variation, when there is one credit remaining, if a short press transfer is performed and the credit becomes zero, a transfer completion sound may be played to inform the player by voice that there are zero credits remaining. In specification examples 1 to 4, this occurs when one credit is remaining and one credit is transferred to the sandwich using a short press transfer, resulting in zero credits.

(Sound output when counting a small number of game values by pressing and holding)
Up to this point, specification examples 3 and 4 have been described as a flow in which, when counting is performed by pressing and holding the counting button, a long press counting sound is emitted first, followed by a count completion sound. When counting is performed by pressing and holding the counting button when the number of coins stored in the credits is small (e.g., 10 or less), the count completion sound may be emitted immediately without the long press counting sound. Because the actual counting time is short, emitting the long press counting sound before the count completion sound could result in a large discrepancy between the timing of the counting and the timing of the sound effect. Therefore, if the time required for counting is short (or until the credit segment value is updated to reflect the count completion), emitting the count completion sound without the long press counting sound can reduce this discrepancy and make the player feel less uncomfortable. For example, a situation in which a small number of coins is counted may occur when a player accidentally starts counting after three coins have been bet, then later realizes that the coins have been bet, presses the settlement button, transfers three coins from the betted coins to the credits, and then counts again.

(Sound output processing when counting a small number of game values by pressing and holding)
The sound output process may be varied depending on the number of credits stored, with a branching decision as to whether or not to output the long press counting sound (for example, if there are 10 or fewer credits, the long press counting sound is not output, and only the count completion sound is output). Alternatively, the sound output process for long press counting may be the same regardless of the number of credits stored, with the count completion sound being output as soon as the process is completed. This process results in either (1) the long press counting sound not being output, or (2) the long press counting sound being output for a short period of time that is difficult for the player to notice. Depending on the circumstances, the long press counting sound is not output, but the sound is output in a manner that allows the player to recognize that the count completion sound has been output. Because no branching is required, the latter approach reduces the amount of programming required for the sound output process.

(Example A of sound effects for adding and counting balls on a managed gaming machine (pachinko machine))
Figure 313 illustrates, as Specification Example A, the specifications for a gaming machine (an enclosed pachinko machine or a pachinko machine that manages gaming value using electronic data) that uses the counting-related specifications described in Figures 309 to 312. The ball holding segment corresponds to the credit segment of a medalless gaming machine. Holding ball data is added by operating the lending button (a button for lending balls from cash) or the replay button (a button for lending balls from the bank) on the side of the slot. The ball holding addition sound is emitted at approximately the same timing as the start of the display of the ball holding segment. In Specification Example A, the value displayed for the number of balls in the ball holding segment does not increment to show an intermediate increase in the value, but instead changes all at once from 0 to 125 balls (500 yen worth at a ball rental fee of 4 yen), so the segment changes instantaneously (generally within 200 ms). Therefore, "approximately the same timing as the start of the display of the ball holding segment change" is a concept that includes not only the same timing as the start of the segment change, but also slightly earlier or later than the change. If the counting button is pressed briefly (pressed for less than 500 ms), one ball is transferred from the gaming machine to the sandbox. In this case, a different sound effect is emitted from the ball counting sound. If the counting button is pressed for a long time (pressed for more than 500 ms), 250 balls are transferred from the balls in hand to the sandbox every 300 ms. The long press counting sound, called "Pimo," lasts about 0.5 seconds and is played until the end each time. Therefore, the ball counting segment is updated once every 300 ms, but the counting sound is played once every 500 ms. The segment update cycle and the counting sound cycle are different. While this design makes it difficult to estimate the number of balls being transferred from the number of sounds, the counting sound does not stop midway through each count, reducing the sense of incongruity.

This model does not include the off-edge sound of the counting button. Also, when counting is complete, a "ringing" sound effect is heard, followed by a voice saying "Counting completed." This voice is not that of the character (Don-chan) that is the motif of this model, but rather a generic narration voice that can be used on other models.

(Example 1 of credit addition specifications at the time of loan)
314 is a time chart explaining the specifications for adding credits in the medalless gaming machine of Specification Example 1. Note that other specification examples (including pachinko) also behave similarly to this time chart, so other specification examples will also be explained here.

The events occurring at times T1 to T8, and the periods X1 to X3 are explained below. T1: On-edge detection of pressing of the lending button at Sand. T2: Off-edge detection of pressing of the lending button at Sand. T3: A lending command is sent from Sand to the gaming machine. Strictly speaking, after sending the counting notification command (a command informing the gaming machine that the transfer of gaming value is about to begin), a lending notification command (a command containing lending serial number information, information indicating the number of lending coins, and a checksum) is sent within 170 ms, but for convenience of illustration, this is shown as T3. A one-byte timer for measuring 170 ms is provided on the gaming machine. T4: A lending command is received by the gaming machine. The counting notification command is received, and then the lending notification command is received within 170 ms, but for convenience of illustration, this is shown as T4. When the loan notification command is received, the loan serial number information (information indicating the number of loans: 0-255) is the next number after the number received last time, the number of loaned coins is within the range of 0-50, and the checksum value is checked to see if everything is normal. If everything is normal, the loan receipt result response command is returned to the host as "normal," the credit addition process is performed, and the credit segment is updated. T5: Credit segment addition change begins T6: Credit addition sound begins T7: Credit segment addition change ends T8: Credit addition sound ends X1: Time the loan button is pressed. This is an arbitrary time due to player operation, but since the loan process begins when the button changes from off to on, this time value does not particularly affect subsequent processing. There is no long press operation, etc. X2: The period during which the credit segment is updated. For example, if 50 coins are loaned, the number is updated from 0 to 50. Since this is a machine without an increment operation, it feels like an instant to the player. It is approximately 0.1 to 0.3 seconds. Note that in specification examples with increment operations, the time may be slightly longer. X3: Sound duration for credit addition sound. In specification example 1, it is approximately 0.9 seconds.

For convenience, T3 (sending the lending command) is shown as occurring after T2 (off-edge of the lending button), but the lending command may be sent before T2 if, for example, the player presses the lending button for an extended period of time. There is a time difference between T5 and T6, but the change in the credit display and the start of sound output may occur at the same time, or T6 (sound output) may start earlier than T5 (segment change).

(Other innovative features: 1:1 BET button)
The 1 BET button may have a settlement function (a function of returning all bet gaming value to credits at once). For example, the settlement function may be activated when the 1 BET button is pressed and held.

(Other idea 2: Set an upper limit on the number of credits, etc.)
If gaming value equivalent to too many medals/balls is stored as credit/held ball data, there is a problem that the player may be easily targeted by theft etc. Therefore, it is advisable to set an upper limit on the number of gaming value that can be stored.

For example, for medalless gaming machines, the upper limit can be 16,383 coins, and for managed gaming machines, the upper limit can be 65,535 balls. These upper limits are lower than the limiting function (for example, the MY or difference in coins for that day is capped at 19,000 coins or 95,000 shots). The following specifications may be used to prevent too much gaming value from being stored. The following are the specifications for each threshold for the number of stored credits.

Stored number 0-14,999 coins: None. If the number is large, the player may be notified as appropriate to count.

Stored number 15,000 to 16,368 medals: Game play can continue, but the peripheral board (effect control board) will issue a notification on the screen or via audio to prompt the player to count. The loan demand result response (a response command sent from the gaming machine to Sand when a loan command is sent from Sand, indicating that the loan has been successful) will be marked as abnormal, and the game will be unable to process the loan of medals (no credits will be added even if the loan button on Sand is pressed). While this will not affect the player, it is recommended that the test counting signal be output for a period long enough to transfer 500 medals (approximately 3,500 ms) to prevent the game machine from becoming unable to play in the middle of a model test.

When the number of credits stored is 16,389 or more, the relationship is 16,389 + 15 = 16,384 > 16,383 (upper limit). In other words, if there are 16,389 or more credits and 15 gaming values are awarded, which is the maximum number awarded per game according to the rules, the upper limit will be exceeded and the game will overflow. In this situation, the main control means will enter an error state and the game will be disabled (the start lever, bet button, and settlement button cannot be pressed).

In this state, it is possible to count by operating the counting button. If the number of stored medals falls below 16,369 as a result of counting, the error state is automatically cleared, so it can be cleared without having to call a store employee. If the number of stored medals falls below 16,369 as a result of counting, the error may not be cleared automatically, but may instead require a store employee to operate a reset switch or reset the key (a method of clearing an error that can be performed by turning the door key counterclockwise). During this error state, a signal indicating the error state should be output externally, so that the hall computer can also be made aware of the error. During this error state, it is also desirable to issue a notification on the screen or by voice prompting the user to continue counting.

(Technical concept 1: Unnecessary digits are not displayed in the display segment of the number of game values held)
This technical concept is summarized below.

A gaming machine (a medal-less gaming machine, a management gaming machine) that manages gaming value using data,
A game value display means (credit segment, ball segment) is provided which can display the number of game values held, and which is made up of a multi-digit segment display (5-digit or 6-digit segment),
The gaming machine is characterized in that the gaming value number display means displays a numerical value on a segment display of the digit required to indicate the number of gaming values held, and does not display a numerical value on segment displays of digits higher than that (for example, if no gaming value is held as shown in Figure 297, only "0" is displayed, and if 50 gaming values are held as shown in Figure 298, "50" is displayed and the digits above the hundreds digit are not displayed).

This type of gaming machine can reduce power consumption.

(Technical concept 2: The display segment for the number of game values held will show "0" if no game values are held.)
This technical concept is summarized below.

A gaming machine (a medal-less gaming machine, a management gaming machine) that manages gaming value using data,
The game value display means (credit segment, ball segment) is provided for displaying the number of game values held;
The game value number display means displays 0 when no game value is held (for example, as shown in Figures 297 and 298, when no game value is held, "0" is displayed).
A gaming machine characterized by:

With this type of gaming machine, it becomes easier to find the location of the credit segment even on an empty machine with no accumulated gaming value.

(Technical concept 3: Counting-related sound effects can be output from a speaker close to the game value number display means.)
This technical concept is summarized below.

A gaming machine (a medal-less gaming machine, a management gaming machine) that manages gaming value using data,
A game value number display means (credit segment, held ball segment) capable of displaying the number of game values held;
A plurality of sound output means (a plurality of speakers such as those shown in FIG. 298 and FIG. 302) are provided,
A gaming machine characterized in that a predetermined sound effect (at least one of a credit addition sound and a transfer sound) that is output when a counting-related process is performed can be output from a sound output means that is closest to the game value number display means among the plurality of sound output means.

With this type of gaming machine, when a change occurs in the segment indicating the number of play values, the sound effect is emitted from a position close to the segment, naturally guiding the player's gaze to the segment.

(Technical idea 4: The game value number display means is provided tilted forward)
This technical concept is summarized below.

A gaming machine (a medal-less gaming machine, a management gaming machine) that manages gaming value using data,
The game value display means (credit segment, ball segment) is provided for displaying the number of game values held;
The gaming value number display means is inclined toward the front of the gaming machine (see the inclination of the credit segment shown in Figure 300 (2) etc.)
A gaming machine characterized by:

With this type of gaming machine, the segment showing the number of play values is easily visible to players and customers looking for an available machine.

(Technical idea 5: The surface of the game value number display unit that allows the game value number display means to be viewed is inclined forward relative to the other surfaces.)
This technical concept is summarized below.

A gaming machine (a medal-less gaming machine, a management gaming machine) that manages gaming value using data,
A game value number display means (credit segment, held ball segment) capable of displaying the number of game values held;
The game value number display means and the counting operation means (counting button) are included in the unit (a medal number display unit, a ball number display unit),
The first face of the unit (the face with the counting button shown in FIG. 301) not having the game value number display means is inclined forward at a predetermined angle,
The first face (the face with the counting button shown in FIG. 301) of the game value number display means of the unit is inclined forward at a predetermined angle,
The second surface on which the gaming value number display means is visible is inclined forward at an angle greater than the predetermined angle (the surface with the credit segment shown in Figure 300 (2) etc.).
A gaming machine characterized by:

With this type of gaming machine, the gaming value number display unit is easier to see, and the segment showing the gaming value number is also easier to see for players and customers looking for an available machine.

(Technical idea 6: The top surface of the operation base has a predetermined protrusion, the protrusion has a predetermined surface that is inclined toward the back, and the widest part of the width between the predetermined surface and the wall on the back side is 1 cm or more.)
Operation means (such as a max bet button, a 1 bet button, a chance button, and a start lever shown in FIG. 299),
An operation base unit (operation base unit shown in FIG. 301) on which the operation means is arranged,
A predetermined protrusion (such as the medal count display unit shown in FIG. 301 or other protrusions described as modified examples) is provided on the top surface of the operation base,
The predetermined protrusion has a predetermined surface that is inclined toward the back side of the gaming machine,
A gaming machine characterized in that a distance of at least 1 cm is provided between a wall portion (the screen shown in Figure 301, specifically the protective plate in front of the screen) located further back than the specified protrusion and the specified surface in a wide portion (D5 in Figure 301).

This structure makes it easier to prop up devices such as smartphones on the top surface of the operation base, increasing convenience for players.

(Technical concept 7-1: The segment that shows the number of possessed game values is placed close to other segments, and the segments have different light colors.)
(Technical Concept 7-2: The other segments are segments that can display the number of game points awarded in the game.)
This technical concept is summarized below.

A gaming machine (a medal-less gaming machine, a management gaming machine) that manages gaming value using data,
A game value number display means (credit segment, ball segment) that can display the number of possessed game values, which is made up of a plurality of segment displays;
A specific display means (such as a PAY segment or an instruction monitor segment shown in FIG. 304) that can display information other than the number of game values held, which is made up of a segment display;
Equipped with
The game value number display means and the specific display means are provided adjacent to each other,
The segment indicator of the gaming value number display means can be lit in a first color (e.g., white),
The gaming machine is characterized in that the segment indicator of the specific display means can be lit in a second color (e.g., red).

The aforementioned gaming machine is characterized in that the specific display means is a segment (PAY segment) capable of displaying the number of game points awarded in the game.

With this type of gaming machine, the segments can be placed close together, allowing for wiring to be done in a centralized manner, and the different colors of the segments help prevent confusion about information.

In addition, by placing a segment indicating the number of earned play values for the game, which is information highly related to the number of held play values, nearby, it becomes easier to grasp the information necessary to understand the number of play values.

(Technical concept 8: When the segment showing the number of possessed gaming values is arranged in parallel with other segments, the deviation in the left-right direction is less than half the width of one segment.)
This technical concept is summarized below.

A gaming machine (a medal-less gaming machine, a management gaming machine) that manages gaming value using data,
A game value number display means (credit segment, ball segment) that can display the number of possessed game values, which is made up of a plurality of segment displays;
A specific display means (such as a PAY segment shown in FIG. 304, an instruction monitor segment, etc.) that can display information other than the number of possessed game values and that is made up of a plurality of segment displays;
Equipped with
The game value number display means and the specific display means are provided in parallel,
The left-right position of the rightmost segment (the one's digit segment of the credit segment) of the segment display of the gaming value number display means;
The horizontal positional distance of the rightmost segment (the one's digit segment of the PAY segment) of the segment indicator of the specific display means is less than half the width of one segment indicator of the game value number display means (see Figure 304. For a 10 mm wide segment, the horizontal deviation is less than 5 mm).
A gaming machine characterized by:

This configuration prevents the digits from shifting even when the eyes move back and forth, making it easier to recognize numbers.

(Technical idea 9: Providing a lamp corresponding to the output of the advantageous state signal near the number of held gaming values)
This technical concept is summarized below.

A gaming machine (a medal-less gaming machine, a management gaming machine) that manages gaming value using data,
A game value number display means (credit segment, held ball segment) capable of displaying the number of game values held, a state control means (main control means) capable of controlling a specific game state advantageous to the player, and a signal output means (such as a medal number control board) capable of outputting to the outside a specific signal indicating that the specific game state is being held (a signal that is output in one shot at the start of the specific game state or a signal whose output is maintained during the specific game state).
A predetermined lamp (dot LED in FIG. 304) that lights up when the specific signal is output;
Equipped with
The predetermined lamp is provided near the gaming value number display means (see the position of the credit segment and dot LED in FIG. 304).
A gaming machine characterized by:

With this type of gaming machine, the gaming value number display means and lamps can be placed in close proximity to each other, allowing for simplified wiring.

(Technical idea 10: The game value number display means is provided on an inclined surface provided below the top surface of the operation base, and is inclined toward the front surface.)
This technical concept is summarized below.

A gaming machine (a medal-less gaming machine, a management gaming machine) that manages gaming value using data,
A game value number display means (credit segment, held ball segment) capable of displaying the number of game values held, and an operation means (max bet button, 1 bet button, chance button, start lever, etc. shown in FIG. 303),
an operation base unit (operation base unit shown in FIG. 303) on which the operation means is arranged;
Equipped with
The gaming machine is characterized in that the gaming value number display means is disposed on an inclined surface (segment arrangement surface B shown in Figure 303 (1), etc.) that is provided below the top surface of the operation base and inclined toward the front side of the gaming machine.

With this type of gaming machine, the segments indicating the number of play values are easier to see for players and customers searching for an available machine, and because the inclined surface can be positioned lower than the top surface of the base, it is possible to reduce the unevenness of the top surface of the operating base, giving the gaming machine a sleek appearance and freeing up space, thereby improving operability during play.

(Technical idea 11: A gaming machine with a design that can guide the gaze to the right around the word "count" near the count button)
This technical concept is summarized below.

A gaming machine (a medal-less gaming machine, a management gaming machine) that manages gaming value using data,
a counting operation means (counting button) capable of detecting an operation for counting a game value;
The word "counting" is written near the counting operation means,
A gaming machine characterized in that the word "counting" is surrounded by a design (a right-pointing arrow as shown in Figure 307) that can guide the gaze to the right.

With this type of gaming machine, when performing the counting operation, the player's gaze can be naturally guided to the right, where the sand is generally placed, and the counted medals, etc. can be visually confirmed on the display means on the sand side.

(Technical idea 12-1: During counting, an image indicating that counting is in progress is displayed in an area of the image display means close to the counting button.)
(Technical Concept 12-2: The image indicating that counting is in progress is displayed in a position that does not overlap with the operation notification image regarding the progress of the game.)
This technical idea is summarized below.

A gaming machine (a medal-less gaming machine, a management gaming machine) that manages gaming value using data,
a counting operation means (counting button) capable of detecting an operation for counting a game value;
image display means;
Equipped with
A gaming machine characterized in that, while the game value is being counted, an image indicating that counting is in progress can be displayed in a predetermined display area of the image display means (counting image display area shown in Figure 306) that is close to the counting operation means.

Furthermore, it is possible to display operation notification images relating to the progress of the game (such as an AT navigation image for a pachislot machine, or a right-hit instruction image for a pachinko machine),
The gaming machine, characterized in that the image indicating that counting is in progress can be displayed in an area that does not overlap with the operation notification image.

This type of gaming machine can clearly notify the player that counting is in progress.

In addition, by displaying the counting image so that it does not overlap with the operation notification image, even if counting is performed during play while the operation notification image is displayed, it is possible to notify the player that counting is in progress in a manner that does not interfere with the progress of the game.

(Technical concept 13: When counting by long pressing, the counting sound is not emitted until the end, but is emitted in accordance with the transfer cycle.)
This technical concept is summarized below.

A gaming machine (a medal-less gaming machine, a management gaming machine) that manages gaming value using data,
a counting operation means (counting button) capable of detecting an operation for counting a game value; and a sound output means;
Equipped with
When the counting operation means is continuously operated (when pressed and held), it is possible to set the counting state to a continuous counting state in which a predetermined number of game values are counted at a predetermined cycle (for example, a state in which game values equivalent to 50 coins or 250 balls are transferred every 300 ms),
A gaming machine characterized in that the counting sound emitted in the continuous counting state is such that a new counting sound is emitted at each predetermined period even if the counting sound is in the middle of being emitted (see specification examples 1 and 2 in Figure 311).

With this type of gaming machine, a counting sound is emitted in accordance with the transfer cycle, making it easy to estimate the number of transferred coins from the number of times the counting sound is emitted.

(Technical concept 14: When counting by long press, the counting sound changes according to the cumulative number of play points counted from the start of operation.)
This technical concept is summarized below.

A gaming machine (a medal-less gaming machine, a management gaming machine) that manages gaming value using data,
a counting operation means (counting button) capable of detecting an operation for counting a game value; and a sound output means;
Equipped with
When the counting operation means is continuously operated (when pressed and held), it is possible to set the counting state to a continuous counting state in which a predetermined number of game values are counted at a predetermined cycle (for example, a state in which game values equivalent to 50 coins or 250 balls are transferred every 300 ms),
The counting sound emitted in the continuous counting state can be changed according to the number of game values that have been cumulatively counted since the start of operation of the counting operation means (see the description in the sound output image column of specification example 4 in Figure 311).
A gaming machine characterized by:

This type of gaming machine can give players a sense of elation when they win and count a lot of gaming value.

[7.1. Other innovations in medal-less gaming machines and managed gaming machines: Game value number clear switch]
A gaming machine may be provided with a game value number clear switch (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a "clear switch") that a store clerk can operate to clear (set to zero) the number of medals and balls recorded in the gaming machine. In the case of a single-board main control board, the clear switch is provided on the main control board. In the case of a two-board configuration consisting of a main control board and a medal number control board (a ball number control board in pachinko machines; hereinafter, both are referred to as the "game value number control board"), the clear switch is provided on the game value number control board. In other words, the clear switch is located inside the gaming machine cabinet, on the rear side of the gaming machine in the case of pachinko machines, and in a location that is difficult for players to operate. To prevent a store clerk from accidentally touching the switch and clearing the player's medals, etc., when opening the door to reset an error, etc., the following clear procedure is preferable. Step 1: Operate the power switch of the gaming machine to turn off the power. Step 2: While pressing the game value number clear switch, operate the power switch to turn on the gaming machine. When the power is turned on, the game value number is cleared and the game value number clear status (status indicating that the game has been cleared; for example, predetermined bit information) turns on. Step 3: After the clearing process, the normal game state is set and the game becomes playable. Step 4: After 3 seconds or more have passed since the game became playable, the game value number clear status turns off and the series of clearing processes ends.

By requiring this power ON/OFF operation when clearing, it is possible to prevent situations where the game value number is lost if the clear switch is accidentally touched.

It is advisable to provide a cover for the clear switch to prevent accidental activation. The cover should be biased by a spring or similar so that it is normally closed (the clear switch cannot be operated), but can be operated by moving the cover with a finger. The cover should also be transparent (colored or colorless, transparent) so that the position of the clear switch is easy to see. It is also advisable to provide wording near the clear switch to explain its function, such as "clear switch," "medal count clear switch," "held ball clear switch," or "held ball erase."

In addition, when the game value number is cleared, it is advisable to output an external signal indicating this (a signal that allows the hall computer to confirm the clearing via the sand). It is desirable to keep this signal output for at least 3 seconds after play becomes possible (until the above-mentioned game value number clear status is turned OFF) to prevent missed wins.

[7.2. Other innovations in medal-less gaming machines and managed gaming machines: Displaying error codes in the gaming value number segment]
An error code, which is a letter or number indicating the type of error that has occurred, may be displayed in the credit segment and the balls held segment. For example, E1 to E8 indicate various errors, and 88 indicates a serious error such as an RWM abnormality. The error code is displayed when the machine is not playable and cannot be loaned or counted. This is because if an error code indicating a minor error is displayed when the machine is playable and it becomes difficult to check the number of credits, it will impair convenience for the player.

It is advisable to alternate between displaying the number of play values and the error code so that the player can check the number of play values they own even during an error that would result in the display of an error code. For example, it is advisable to alternate between displaying the number of play values → error code → number of play values → error code → ... every approximately 2000 ms (2 seconds) until the error is resolved.

It is also a good idea to devise a segment display format to prevent the error code and game value number from being confused. For example, the error code display is left aligned with the most significant digits and the least significant digits are left blank. The game value number is left aligned with the most significant digits and the most significant digits are left blank. This can appropriately prevent confusion even if the segment is made up of single-color LEDs. In this case, when 50 medals are held, the segment display will change from E1 error "E1□□□" to "□□□50" to "E1□□□" to .... Note that in the case of a serious error such as an RWM memory error that makes it impossible to grasp the game value number on the main control board, the game value number cannot be displayed. Therefore, it is possible to maintain the display of an error code such as "88□□□" and not switch the display as described above.

In addition, if an LED capable of displaying multiple colors (such as a full-color LED) is used for the game value number segment, with the game value number display being a first color (for example, white) and the error code being a second color different from the first (for example, red), it will be easier to distinguish between the two. Incidents such as the front door being opened can also be considered errors, but since game value can be counted even while this is occurring (while the door is open), an error code will not be displayed.

[7.3. Other innovations in medal-less gaming machines and managed gaming machines: Changes in the number of gaming units held during counting]
If an event occurs in which the number of game values held in the credit segment or held ball segment increases or decreases while medals or balls are being counted (during transfer from the gaming machine to the sand), accurate counting may not be possible. Therefore, it is recommended to use the following specifications.
1: Specifications for restricting operations/processing that lead to a decrease in the number of play values during counting. During counting on a pachislot machine (e.g., while the counting button is pressed and held), even if the 1 bet button or max bet button is operated, the operation is invalid. Even if a bet button operation is detected, processing such as subtracting the credit value and adding the subtracted amount to the number of bets should not be performed while counting is in progress. Note that the details of the processing are not limited to those exemplified, as long as the operation does not result in a bet being placed by operating each betting means. Furthermore, to indicate an invalid operation, sound effects for betting should not be emitted if the bet button is operated during counting. Note that even during counting, bet button operations for effects (e.g., bet button operations for the start or progression of reel action or freeze, or operations when an effect that requires a bet button operation for an image change effect occurs) may be valid, or bet button operations may be treated as invalid throughout counting. During counting on a pachinko machine, operating the launch handle should not launch balls into the play area, preventing the number of held balls from decreasing.
2: Specifications for restricting settlement processing that leads to an increase in the number of gaming values during counting When settlement is performed on a medalless gaming machine, the medals bet are subtracted to 0, and the medals bet are added to the credits. If the credit value increases during counting, there is a risk that the counting will not be performed correctly. Therefore, the operation of the settlement button is invalid during counting, and settlement processing will not be performed even if a settlement operation is performed (pressing the settlement button, or long pressing the 1 bet button if settlement is performed by long pressing the 1 bet button). Furthermore, to indicate that the settlement operation is invalid, it is recommended that the sound effect for settlement is not played when a settlement operation is performed during counting.

As a variant, the counting process may be temporarily interrupted (terminated) when the settlement button is operated, and credits may be added through settlement, and then the counting process may be started again when the counting button is detected being pressed again.
3: Handling of Events That Lead to an Increase in the Number of Game Values During Counting: Winning a Minor Prize on a Medalless Game Machine; Entering a Game Ball into the Start Port, General Prize Port, or Large Prize Port on a Managed Game Machine; A Game Ball Launched from a Managed Game Machine with Insufficient Momentum and Missing the Play Area and Returning to the Launch Position. In these cases, the number of held game values will increase. Since counting is possible even while the game is in progress (while the reels are spinning, during the stop operation, or while game balls are being launched or released), the above events may occur during counting. In such cases, the process of adding game values due to winning or other factors may be suspended until the counting is complete, and then the game value equivalent to the increase due to winning or other factors may be added to the number of held game values once the counting process based on the counting operation is completed. Alternatively, if an event that leads to an increase in the number of game values occurs during counting, the counting process may be temporarily suspended (terminated) and the game value due to winning or other factors may be added. When the count button is pressed again, the counting process is started.

[7.4. Other innovations for medal-less gaming machines and managed gaming machines, rental acceptance, and periods when counting is not possible]
In order to ensure the stability of the operation of the gaming machine, it is possible to provide a period during which the reception of a lending signal from the Sand and the counting process, which is the transfer of gaming value from the gaming machine to the Sand, cannot be performed. For example, the following periods can be mentioned.
Setting Change: This is the state in which the setting value for the ball payout performance of a pachislot machine or a pachinko machine with a setting function is being changed. With the power off, insert and twist the setting key into the keyhole on the main control board, etc., and then turn the power on. This state is reached after power-on. An arbitrary setting value (settings 1-6) is selected by operating the setting value change button, and the setting is confirmed by operating the start lever or other means. When powering on for a setting change, information related to the game state is generally initialized. Furthermore, it is not necessary to initialize all game states; it is sufficient to initialize the area related to a predetermined game state. For example, in specifications that assume the maintenance of the carryover status of bonus roles, it is preferable not to initialize the storage area related to the carryover of bonus roles. Furthermore, the stored game value is maintained without being initialized during the setting change process (including the power-on process related to the setting change). In this state, lending and counting are preferably not possible.
・Setting confirmation This is the state in which the setting values related to the advantageous degree of ball output performance of a pachislot machine or a pachinko machine with a setting function are being confirmed. If the setting key is inserted into the keyhole of the main control board or the like and turned while the power is on, the machine will enter the setting confirmation state, and a number indicating the setting value will be displayed in the setting value display segment inside the cabinet or in the segments on the front of the machine (PAY segment, CREDIT segment, etc.). In this state, it is recommended that loaning and counting cannot be performed.
RAM clearing is a process to initialize the gaming machine. In the case of pachinko machines, the RAM clear process is performed when the power is turned on by operating the power switch while holding down the RAM clear button on the main control board or the like while the machine is powered off. A notification voice such as "RAM clearing completed" may be emitted upon completion. The same process is followed for pachislot machines, but the setting values (settings 1 to 6, etc.) are maintained during RAM clearing. Instead of providing a dedicated RAM clear button, the RAM clear process may be performed when the power is turned on while holding down an error release switch or the like, and the RAM clear button may be used in combination with other operating means.

Furthermore, it is not necessary to initialize all game states; it is sufficient to initialize the area related to a predetermined game state. For example, in the case of a specification that assumes that the carryover state of a bonus role is maintained, it is desirable not to initialize the memory area related to the carryover of the bonus role. It is also acceptable to specify a specification that does not include a procedure for clearing only RAM, but that clears game information through the initialization process at power-on when changing settings. However, because RAM clearing can be performed without using a setting key, it is more convenient for the operation of the hall to include a RAM clearing procedure separate from the setting change procedure. Furthermore, the stored game value number is maintained without being initialized in the RAM clearing process. It is preferable that lending and counting are not possible during the RAM clearing process.
During startup after power-on: This occurs when the power switch is operated normally with the power off, without any special setting changes or RAM clearing. After power-on, the main control system, controlled by the main control board and medal count control board (game ball dispensing control board), completes startup first, followed by the presentation control system, controlled by the presentation control board, which takes longer to start up. After the main control system starts up, a lighting pattern check is performed on the main control board's role ratio monitor (or base monitor in the case of pachinko machines) to demonstrate whether the segments are lighting up properly. However, since this is a post-startup process, the time required for the lighting pattern check is not included in the main control system startup time in this explanation. The main control system typically completes startup in approximately 3 to 10 seconds, while the presentation control system typically completes in approximately 10 seconds to 1 minute, depending on the model's specifications. At least for all gaming machines, the startup time for the presentation control system is greater than that for the main control system. In addition, for machines that require a long time for the presentation control system to start up, it is recommended to display the startup progress rate using an indicator (a meter image in which a horizontal bar extends according to the progress rate) and to display text such as "NOW LOADING" or "Starting up" to prevent store staff from mistaking the system for a malfunction. To enhance operational stability, lending and counting should be disabled between power-on and the completion of main control system startup. On the other hand, after the main control system startup is complete, lending and counting should be possible even before the presentation control system startup is complete. For example, if a store staff member notices remaining game value on the credits when the power is turned on (remaining from the previous day's closing time), they can quickly perform the counting process and complete the processing of leftover balls in preparation for opening the store, without waiting for the presentation system startup to complete. Of course, lending and counting are possible once both the main control system and presentation control system startup are complete. Furthermore, once the main control system has been started up, it is possible to continue playing the game even before the presentation control system has been started up, and it is possible to check whether the reels are rotating correctly when installing the machine by playing a game without waiting for the presentation control system to start up.

[7.5. Other innovations in medal-less gaming machines and controlled gaming machines - Sand unconnected state]
If the sandbox (the dedicated unit for lending) is not connected to the medalless gaming machine or the managed gaming machine, naturally, communication between the sandbox and the gaming machine is not possible, and lending and counting processes cannot be performed. Even if already-lent medals and other items are stored on the gaming machine, it is desirable to not accept operations related to game progress while the sandbox is not connected. Even if gameplay could proceed, even if a player wins and acquires game value, the game value data cannot be transmitted outside the gaming machine, and they cannot be exchanged for prizes, which would be detrimental to the player. While the harness between the connected gaming machine and the sandbox is rarely disconnected or broken, if an earthquake, component deterioration, or sandbox malfunction results in a disconnected (uncommunicable) state, it is desirable to quickly disable the game. The disconnected (uncommunicable) state and the connected state are recognized as follows: The sandbox is connected to the gaming machine's game ball lending connection terminal board via a harness. The game ball lending connection terminal board can check the connection status with the Sand using a connection confirmation power supply (also called VL). If this power supply is on, the game ball lending connection terminal board determines that the connection is normal and outputs a connection confirmation signal (also called a VL connection signal) to the medal count control board (game ball count control board). The medal count control board recognizes normal connection with the Sand by confirming receipt of the connection confirmation signal with the medal count control CPU. Note that in a system consisting of only a main control board and no medal count control board, the connection confirmation signal from the game ball lending connection terminal board is received by the main control board. Note that for the sake of convenience, other paragraphs state that "counting signals, etc. are output from the medal count control board or main control board" and "the medal count control board, etc. from the Sand receives a lending signal." However, strictly speaking, what is meant is that signals from the game machine to the Sand and signals from the Sand are input via the game ball lending connection terminal board.

The above embodiments and variations can be combined as appropriate.

(Auto counting status setting function)
So far, we have explained that pressing the count button for less than 500 ms (short press) counts one medal per press, while pressing the count button for 500 ms or more (long press) enters a continuous counting state in which 50 medals are counted every 300 ms as long as the button is pressed. However, with this specification, if a player wins a large number of medals, such as several thousand medals, they must continue to press the count button for several tens of seconds, which can be a burden to the player. Therefore, it is desirable to provide a function that automatically continues counting until the credit value stored in the gaming machine reaches 0 by pressing and holding the count button for a predetermined period of time (e.g., 5,000 ms = 5 seconds), assuming that the player releases the count button. In this state where counting continues automatically (hereinafter also referred to as the "auto-counting state"), 50 medals are counted every 300 ms. In other words, every 300 ms, a signal indicating 50 medals has been counted is output from the gaming machine to the sandbox, and the number of medals held in the credits is decremented by 50 medals. In this way, 50 medals are counted continuously every 300 ms, and the counting is completed when the credit value reaches 0. Note that, in the final transfer, if the credit value is less than 50, all medals (1 to 49) are transferred and the credit value becomes 0. Note that the long press time required to set the auto-counting state is not limited to 5 seconds; it may be any time between 500 ms and 5000 ms, or may be any time shorter than 5 seconds and longer than the basic long press time (500 ms). The following is a description organized as a technical concept.

(Technical concept: Auto counting state setting function)
"A gaming machine that manages gaming value with data (a medal-less gaming machine, a managed gaming machine)
a counting operation means (counting button) capable of detecting an operation for counting a game value;
When the continuous operation time of the counting operation means has exceeded a first time (when the long press time has exceeded 500 ms), it is possible to enter a continuous counting state in which a predetermined number of game values are counted at a predetermined cycle as long as the operation is continued (for example, a state in which 50 coins, or game values equivalent to 250 balls, are transferred every 300 ms as long as the long press is continued),
When the continuous operation time of the counting operation means has passed a second time longer than the first time (when the long press time has passed 5000 ms), the gaming machine can be set to an automatic counting state in which a predetermined number of game values are counted at predetermined intervals even if the operation is terminated (for example, an automatic counting state in which game values equivalent to 50 coins or 250 balls are transferred every 300 ms even if the operation of the counting button is stopped).
This type of specification reduces the burden on the player when performing the counting operation. Note that although the auto-counting function is mainly described for medal-less gaming machines (slot machines), it can also be appropriately adopted for managed gaming machines (pachinko machines). In the case of pachinko machines, the gaming value equivalent to 250 balls is transferred from the gaming machine to the sand every 300 ms during auto-counting.

(Example of transfer in auto counting mode and transfer interrupt function)
As an example, we will explain the change in the remaining credit number and the time that has elapsed since the count button was pressed and held when 1000 medals were transferred.
0ms 1000 sheets 300ms 1000 sheets 500ms 950 sheets 800ms 900 sheets 1100ms 850 sheets 1400ms 800 sheets 1700ms 750 sheets 2000ms 700 sheets 2300ms 650 sheets 2600ms 600 sheets 2900ms 550 sheets 3200ms 500 sheets 3500ms 450 sheets 3800ms 400 sheets 4100ms 350 sheets 4400ms 300 sheets 4700ms 250 sheets 5000ms 200 sheets 5300ms 150 sheets 5600ms 100 sheets 5900ms 50 sheets 6200ms 0 sheets First, if the count button is pressed for a long time, from 0 to 499 ms after the start of pressing, counting will not be performed.

Next, if the button is determined to be in a long press state after 500 ms, the system enters a continuous counting state, transferring 50 coins every 300 ms. From there, a total of approximately 800 coins are transferred by 5000 ms. After 5000 ms, the system enters an auto-counting state, where counting continues automatically even if the count button is released. In this example, counting continues for approximately 1.2 seconds, from 5000 ms to 6200 ms, even if the count button is released. While the reduction in operational burden is small for 1000 coins, the greater the number of coins, the longer the period during which the count button can be released, increasing the operational burden. Players can use the time during auto-counting to prepare for the day home (e.g., putting away their wallets or smartphones). Furthermore, if the count button is released during auto-counting and then pressed again for a predetermined period of time (e.g., 300 ms), an auto-counting interruption function may be provided, which cancels the auto-counting state and disables counting. This increases convenience for players who change their mind during transfer and decide to continue playing after all. After the auto counting mode is canceled, the counting button will return to its normal standby state, allowing you to count one coin with a short press, count continuously with a long press for 500 ms, or auto count with a long press for 5000 ms.

(Display image and lamp lighting indicating that auto counting is in progress)
In the auto counting state (hereinafter also referred to as "auto counting in progress"), a predetermined lamp may be turned on or flashed, or a display indicating that auto counting is in progress may be displayed on the screen.

For example, the counting lamp 92X in Figure 307 may be illuminated differently depending on the counting state (including non-counting states), such as being off when counting is not possible (e.g., 0 credits), lit when counting is possible, flashing during single coin counting or continuous counting, and flashing rapidly during auto counting. A full-color LED may be used to change color depending on the counting state, or an "AUTO" lamp may be installed on the medal count display unit and illuminated when auto counting is activated. Furthermore, a display area relatively close to the counting button, such as the counting image display area 74X in Figure 306, may display messages such as "Auto counting in progress" or "Automatic counting continues even if you release your hand." Furthermore, in the case of gaming machines equipped with counting buttons that can emit different light colors, such as the counting button 14Y in Figure 298, the lamp is illuminated green when counting is possible. It is illuminated red while the counting button is pressed (during single coin to continuous counting). It flashes red during auto counting. After counting is complete (transfer disabled state), the counting state may be indicated/notified to the player by lighting up blue or other lighting modes indicating that auto counting is in progress. Although examples have been described in which the lighting patterns and display images for the auto counting state, single counting, and continuous counting states are different, to simplify specifications, the single counting, continuous counting, and auto counting states may be the same, or the indications for the single counting and auto counting states may be different but the continuous counting and auto counting states may be the same.

(Commonization of counting programs)
As mentioned above, the transfer speed in both the continuous counting mode and the auto counting mode is the same, at 50 sheets every 300 ms. This means that a predetermined counting program that transfers 50 sheets every 300 ms can be referenced in both the counting process in the continuous counting mode and the counting process in the auto counting mode, eliminating the need to prepare separate programs that specify the transfer process for each mode, thereby saving space in the main program.

(Transmission sound in auto count mode)
As shown in Figures 310 to 312, sound effects (as mentioned above, sound effects, background music, voices, etc., used during counting are referred to as "counting sounds") are emitted during counting to clearly inform the player that counting is occurring. Therefore, it is desirable to emit a predetermined counting sound (hereinafter referred to as "auto-counting sound") even while counting is being performed in the auto-counting mode. The long press counting sound shown in Figure 311 refers to a sound effect emitted during a continuous counting mode of 500 ms or more. However, to avoid confusion with the auto-counting sound, the sound effect emitted during a continuous counting mode of 500 ms or more (excluding the auto-counting mode) will be referred to as the "continuous counting sound" in this description. In the following description, as an example, the same type of sound effect as the long press counting sound (continuous counting sound) shown in Figure 311 may be emitted as the auto-counting sound. For example, a model with specification example 1 will emit a continuous ♪beep sound, followed by a ♪beep → ♪beep → ♪beep → ... ♪beep sound. Since there is no distinction between the continuous count sound and the auto count sound, sound processing can be simplified. Furthermore, in a model where the count sound changes based on the cumulative number of continuously counted sheets, as shown in specification example 4 of FIG. 311, it is difficult to achieve a sound change based on the number of sheets counted if the continuous count sound and the auto count sound were changed separately. Therefore, the sound effect may be changed based on the total number of sheets counted without separating the continuous count sound and the auto count sound. However, since a total of 800 sheets will be counted if the count button is pressed and held for 5 seconds, the timing of the switch between the first and second count sounds and the timing of the auto count function setting may be set to be approximately the same, with count sound 1 being used for up to 800 sheets, count sound 2 for 801 or more sheets, and count sound 3 for 2000 or more sheets.

As another example, the continuous counting sound and the auto counting sound may be separate sound effects. For example, if separate sound effects are used in Specification Example 3 of Figure 311, during the continuous counting state from "long press counting starts → 5 seconds have passed since the counting button was pressed," the first BGM "♪Ten ten terorin~" is played as the continuous counting sound. During the auto counting state from 5 seconds onward, a looped voice message stating "Automatic counting is in progress. Counting will continue even if you release your hand from the counting button" is played as the auto counting sound. Such a direct announcement can properly inform the player of the auto counting function. However, instead of using an explanatory voice message, a second BGM different from the first BGM or any other sound effect different from the first BGM may also be played. Furthermore, if the number of credits held is less than 800 and counting is completed in less than 5 seconds of pressing the button (or if counting is completed in exactly 5 seconds, such as exactly 800, or if the counting is completed in 5 seconds + 300 ms, such as 801-850, which is too short to play a different sound effect), the auto-count state will not be set and the auto-count sound will not be played, even if the counting button is pressed and held for more than 5 seconds after the start of pressing. This allows the player to be properly informed of the counting status.

(Auto counting interruption sound)
As mentioned above, an auto-counting interruption function may be provided, which cancels the auto-counting state and puts counting into a state in which counting is not performed if the counting button is pressed again for a predetermined period of time (e.g., 300 ms) after the counting button is stopped being pressed during the auto-counting state. In this case, it is desirable to emit a predetermined sound effect (hereinafter, "auto-counting interruption sound") when the auto-counting state is canceled by pressing the counting button again for 300 ms. For example, the auto-counting interruption sound may be a 0.5-second sound effect such as "♪pong," or an explanatory voice message such as "automatic counting has been interrupted." To make it easy for the player to recognize, it is desirable that the auto-counting interruption sound be at least a sound effect different from the currently being played auto-counting sound. It is also possible to design the auto-counting interruption sound to simply end when the auto-counting sound is interrupted without emitting the auto-counting interruption sound.

(Explanation regarding the auto counting function)
It is desirable to provide an explanation near the count button that indicates that pressing and holding the count button for a predetermined period of time (e.g., 5 seconds) will activate the automatic counting mode. For example, the explanation section of the medal count display unit shown in FIG. 300 may state, "Pressing and holding the count button for 5 seconds will activate automatic counting. During automatic counting, all credits will be counted without the need to press the button." Furthermore, in gaming machines equipped with image display means such as an LCD, explanatory images regarding the automatic counting function may be displayed on the screen. For example, an image or video clearly illustrating the location of the count button within the gaming machine's exterior (which may be a diagram or photograph of the entire machine or a close-up of a portion such as the operating section) may be displayed, along with an image explaining the availability of counting methods (single-coin counting, continuous counting, automatic counting) according to the operating method. Such explanatory images may be displayed on a demo screen (a customer waiting screen) or a menu screen.

(Other functions during auto counting, QR, menu, volume and light adjustment)
Since there is no need to keep pressing the counting button during auto counting, the player can perform other operations while waiting for the counting to complete. To enhance the convenience for the player, it is advisable to enable the following operations (one or more of them) even during auto counting using a predetermined operating means such as a button (such as a presentation button on the sub-control side or a button for that function) or a touch panel.
1: Display of two-dimensional code for mobile phone-linked function It is recommended that two-dimensional codes for mobile phone-linked function can be displayed. Since the counting is during the end of the game, it is recommended that an end two-dimensional code be displayed that can read information including the history data of games played while logged in, and a closing two-dimensional code that can read the overall game history data for the day regardless of who the player is or whether they are logged in.
2: Display of Menu Screen It is preferable to be able to display a menu screen. It is particularly useful to configure the menu screen to display predetermined information regarding the game history, such as the number of games played that day, the number of bonuses played, the number of automatic time adjustments (AT) plays, and the appearance history of setting suggestion images, so that the player can check the results at the end of the game. However, other items may also be displayed on the menu screen. For example, the menu screen may display images introducing the copyrights or characters used as motifs in the gaming machine, two-dimensional codes (simple two-dimensional codes, not linked to apps, etc.) containing URL information for linking to gaming machine-related information sites such as machine introduction sites or official manufacturer pages, the current number of games since the end of the previous bonus (or AT), and images suggesting/informing the degree of advantage regarding ball-out performance, such as the current mode and status.
3: Presentation customization and volume/light intensity adjustment function Presentation customization allows the player to freely select appearance settings that do not affect (or have little effect on) presentation expectation, such as characters that are likely to appear in batting order navigation voices and cut-ins, and resident characters that wait on the presentation background stage, the edge of the screen, or a sub-screen, or balance customization allows the player to customize the balance between presentation appearance frequency and presentation expectation. An example of balance customization is a pachinko gaming machine (managed gaming machine) where the player can select the appearance frequency and expectation level of each presentation, such as adjusting the frequency of pre-reading presentations, the frequency of high-expectation pre-announcement presentations when a prize is won, or the frequency of group presentations, or a presentation balance package where the player can select any one of multiple presentation modes, such as a "pre-reading emphasis mode" that places more emphasis on anticipation through pre-reading presentations, a "simple mode" that reduces the frequency of presentations and unnecessary excitement, or a "one-shot announcement priority mode" that increases the frequency of one-shot guaranteed presentations such as movable gadgets and rainbow-colored lighting. Furthermore, a predetermined operation (such as pressing and holding specific buttons or pressing them simultaneously) to initialize these customizations may be provided so that a player who has finished playing can return the characters and balance to the initial settings as a consideration for the next player. Note that only character customization, only balance customization, or both may be provided.
In addition, either or both of the volume and light intensity adjustment may be possible during auto counting. The counting-related effects (counting sounds and counting-related lamp patterns) during auto counting may or may not be affected by the volume and light intensity adjustments made by the player.
4: Operation to change the position of movable devices - Movable devices that resemble characters protrude from the top of the gaming machine, etc. - The movable LCD protrudes upward from a predetermined position on the gaming machine, etc. - A state in which a movable device or sub-LCD is waiting in front of the main screen, reducing the visibility of the main screen If there is a function that can release such a state with a predetermined operation, it may be possible to perform an operation to change the position of such movable devices during auto-counting.
For example, by using a position change operation, it is possible to store movable parts and movable LCD screens that protrude from the top into a standby position, making it easier to see the data display that is generally installed on top of the gaming machine in the hall, and making it easier to retrieve luggage that has been placed on a shelf above the gaming machine, thereby increasing convenience when playing is finished.
Furthermore, a predetermined operation may be performed to move the movable props or sub-LCD from in front of the main screen to a standby position to improve the visibility of the main screen. The position change operation may be the same as a display operation for a menu screen, custom display, volume/light adjustment, etc. Specifically, when a button to display a menu screen or the like is pressed, the movable props waiting in front of the main screen may be moved to a standby position or a retracted position to improve the visibility of the main screen.

(Regarding bets during auto counting, settlement, winnings, etc.)
During automatic counting, an event may occur in which the number of gaming values held (number of credits, number of balls held) increases or decreases (hereinafter referred to as an "increase or decrease event").
For example, credits are reduced by pressing the 1 BET button or the MAX BET button on a medalless gaming machine, credits are added by pressing the settlement button when medals have already been bet or by winning a small prize, and the number of balls held is reduced by firing a gaming ball on a managed gaming machine, the number of balls held is added by a ball entering a prize slot, and the number of balls held is added when a fired gaming ball returns to the firing position without reaching the playing area.
If these increase/decrease events occur during automatic counting, the following specifications can be considered to ensure proper counting.

Specification A: If an increase or decrease event occurs during counting, the counting will be stopped immediately. By doing this, it is possible to prevent the counting (transfer to the sand) from being performed while the credit value fluctuates, making it easier for the player to accurately recognize the credits they have, and also preventing processing errors during transfer. Furthermore, a pressing sound may be emitted to suggest or notify that counting will be stopped due to the occurrence of such an increase or decrease event, or a message such as "Counting has been interrupted due to a bet operation" may be displayed on the screen.

Specification B: During counting, operations that cause increases or decreases are disabled. For example, during counting, pressing the settlement button will not perform the settlement process, and pressing the bet button will not place a bet. Although there are some events that cannot be disabled, such as the movement of the game balls, suppressing increases or decreases caused by pressing buttons makes it possible to perform stable counting.

Specification C: For increasing events only, counting is not interrupted and is reflected in credits after counting is completed. Specification A or B is adopted for decreasing events, and for increasing events (settlement, small win, balls entering a winning slot, etc.), auto-counting is completed and the number of credits (number of balls held) becomes 0, and then the increase is added back to 0. This makes it easier for players to understand the increase in game value that occurred during counting. In this case, a presentation indicating the occurrence of an increasing event (such as a winning sound or a display of GET 10 coins) may be played when an increasing event occurs (for example, when all reels stop in the case of a small win), or the game value increase presentation may be played after counting is completed, to warn players not to leave medals or other items behind after counting.
Depending on the type of event (such as the bet operation, settlement operation, or winning), specifications A to C may be set appropriately, such as specification A for the first event and specification B for the second event. These specifications may be adopted not only during auto counting, but also during single-coin counting and continuous counting.

(Power outage and recovery of gaming machine during auto counting)
During auto-counting, the power to a gaming machine may be cut off due to a power outage or a malfunction in the power supply equipment for the gaming machine island. Furthermore, a store clerk may accidentally turn off the power by operating the power switch of the gaming machine or the power switch of the entire gaming machine island while counting medals during an installation test, etc. In such cases, it is desirable to ensure a stable power supply and, after turning on the power by operating the power switch after the power outage, to return the machine to a state where counting is not currently in progress, rather than to the auto-counting state. This is because if auto-counting were to suddenly resume immediately after startup, it could cause errors. However, if it is considered necessary to return the machine to the state it was in before the power outage after power is restored, it may be possible to design the machine to return to the auto-counting state after power is restored during auto-counting.

(Communication error with the sandbox during auto counting)
If the gaming machine detects a communication error with the host computer during auto counting, it will immediately stop auto counting. Even if the machine subsequently recovers from the normal error, it should not return to auto counting mode, but should wait for the detection of a count button operation before resuming counting. If counting were to resume without any operation after recovery, there is a risk that counting would start unintentionally. Incidents that can cause communication errors include the power being turned off on the host computer, the communication harness being physically disconnected, or a communication error occurring.

(Auto counting while waiting for sub startup)
As mentioned above, in many gaming machines, the startup time for the presentation control system is longer than that for the main control system. For machines that require a long startup time for the presentation control system, it is recommended to display an indicator (a meter image in which a horizontal bar extends according to the startup rate) indicating the startup progress rate, and to display text such as "NOW LOADING" or "Starting up" to prevent store staff from mistaking this for a malfunction. To enhance operational stability, lending and counting are not possible from the time the power is turned on until the main control system has finished starting up. However, it is recommended that lending and counting be possible after the main control system has finished starting up and before the presentation control system has finished starting up (hereinafter referred to as "sub-startup waiting"). Even during the sub-startup waiting period, operating the counting button may enable single-coin counting, continuous counting, and auto counting. For example, if a store staff member notices remaining game value on the credits when the power is turned on (remaining from the previous day's closing time), they can quickly perform the counting process without waiting for the presentation system to finish starting up and complete the leftover ball processing in preparation for opening. In a situation where many credits remain immediately after power-on, and the medals are ones that can be erased without causing any problems, such as in a test play at installation, the medal count stored in the credits can be erased by operating the medal count clear switch 3044, etc. However, in a situation where the entire store suffers a power outage during business hours and then power is restored, but many players are already ready to leave, a store employee must quickly send the credits of multiple machines to the Sand side. In such a situation, the ability to automatically count while waiting for sub startup is useful because it allows the gaming value of the machine immediately after power-on to be quickly transferred to the Sand side.

Eighth Embodiment
Hereinafter, a gaming machine according to the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to the drawings. Note that in this embodiment, a pachislot machine will be described as an example of the gaming machine.

[Pachislot machine structure]
First, the structure of the pachislot machine 4001 will be described with reference to Figures 315 to 317. Figure 315 is a perspective view of the pachislot machine 4001, and Figure 316 is a side view of the pachislot machine 4001. Also, Figure 317 is an exploded perspective view of the pachislot machine 4001.

The pachislot machine 4001 is a medal-less gaming machine that manages the gaming value held by the player electromagnetically (or, if not electromagnetically, manages the gaming value in a manner that prevents the player from directly accessing it), allowing gaming without medals. The invention according to the eighth embodiment is not limited to application to medal-less gaming machines, but can also be applied to gaming machines that allow players to insert their own medals into a medal insertion slot to place a bet.

The pachislot machine 4001 is composed of a cabinet 4002. The cabinet 4002 has a cabinet G with a rectangular opening on the front side as the gaming machine body, an upper mask UM located at the top of the front side of the cabinet G, and a lower mask DM located at the bottom of the front side of the cabinet G. As shown in Figures 315 and 316, the upper mask UM and lower mask DM form the design of the front side of the pachislot machine 4001.

Cabinet G is formed in a roughly rectangular parallelepiped shape with one side open, and has a pair of left and right side walls G2, a back wall G3, a top wall G4, and a bottom wall G5. Cabinet G can be referred to simply as a "box" or "main body," or, because it functions as a frame that supports or fixes the upper door mechanism UD and lower door mechanism DD, it can also be referred to as a "main body frame," "support body," "support frame," or "fixing frame," etc.

As shown in Figure 317, a cabinet-side speaker device 4011 is disposed in the upper part of the internal space of the cabinet G. Sound effects, background music, and other sounds output from the cabinet-side speaker device 4011 are transmitted through sound transmission holes 4110 (described below) provided on both sides of the upper mask UM. The reel unit RU, main control board 4071, and other components are disposed in the middle part of the internal space of the cabinet G. The upper and middle parts of the internal space of the cabinet G are covered by the upper mask UM.

A lower door base DB is attached to the bottom of the cabinet G. The lower door base DB opens and closes the lower part of the internal space of the cabinet G. A power supply unit (not shown) is located at the bottom of the internal space of the cabinet G. The lower door base DB also has a lower mask connection part 4081 to which the lower mask DM is detachably connected.

The upper mask UM closes the middle and upper parts of the internal space of the cabinet G. The upper mask UM is detachably connected to an upper mask connection part 4012 provided on the side wall G2 of the cabinet G. The upper mask UM is formed in a roughly rectangular shape that is long in the vertical direction. The upper part of the upper mask UM protrudes above the top wall G4 of the cabinet G. The upper mask UM has an upper mask main body 4101 and a top panel 4102 that is detachably attached to the top of the upper mask main body 4101.

The lower mask DM is detachably connected to the lower mask connection part 4081 provided on the lower door base DB. The lower mask DM has a lower mask base 4201 that covers the lower door base DB, and an operation unit 4202 attached to the top of the lower mask base 4201. As shown in Figure 316, the operation unit 4202 protrudes forward (towards the player) from the top of the lower mask base 4201 to avoid interference with the upper mask UM.

[Mask for second form]
Next, a mask for the second mode connectable to the cabinet G according to this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 318 and 319.

Figure 318 is a front view of the cabinet G with the second mode mask connected. Figure 319 is a side view of the cabinet G with the second mode mask connected.

As shown in Figures 318 and 319, the cabinet G is configured so that a second-form mask can be connected. The second-form mask forms a design different from the eighth upper mask UM and lower mask DM (see Figure 315) described above. In other words, by connecting a second-form mask to the cabinet G from which the upper mask UM and lower mask DM have been removed, the design can be changed to correspond to a different model of gaming machine. Therefore, the cabinet G can be reused without being removed from the gaming center's gaming island (not shown).

The mask for the second mode consists of an upper mask for the second mode UM2 and a lower mask for the second mode DM2. The upper mask for the second mode UM2 is detachably connected to the cabinet G. The lower mask for the second mode DM2 is detachably connected to the lower door base DB (see Figure 317).

The upper mask UM2 for the second mode has a support base 4005 attached to the cabinet G and an upper mask body 4006 rotatably supported on the support base 4005. The support base 4005 is formed in the shape of a rectangular frame. The opening of the support base 4005 faces the middle and upper parts of the internal space of the cabinet G.

The upper mask body 4006 is rotatably connected to the left side of the support base 4005. The rotation axis of the upper mask body 4006 extends in the vertical direction. The upper mask body 4006 opens and closes the middle and upper parts of the internal space of the cabinet G. As shown in Figure 319, the upper surface of the second form upper mask UM2 (the upper surface of the support base 4005 and the upper surface of the upper mask body 4006) forms the same plane as the upper wall G4 of the cabinet G.

As shown in Figure 318, a display device 4007 is provided at the top of the front of the upper mask body 4006. A display window 4006a is provided at the bottom of the front of the upper mask body 4006. The display window 4006a is configured as, for example, a transparent panel made of resin. Through the display window 4006a, the player can see the three reels of the reel unit RU provided on the back side.

A pedestal 4008 is provided on the top of the second mode lower mask DM2. The pedestal 4008 is equipped with a MAX BET button, a 1 BET button, a settlement button, buttons for effects, and the like. The second mode lower mask DM2 also has, below the pedestal, a start lever located on the left side, three stop buttons located approximately in the center, and a locking mechanism located on the right side.

In addition, a waist panel 4009 is disposed in the center and bottom of the second mode lower mask DM2. The waist panel 4009 is composed of a decorative panel bearing model information, such as a logo representing the model name or characters representing a motif, and a light source (a waist lamp, included in the lamps and LEDs described below) for illuminating this decorative panel from the rear side.

[Upper Mask UM]
Next, the configuration of the upper mask UM will be described with reference to FIG.

Figure 320 is an exploded perspective view of the upper mask UM.

As shown in Figure 320, the upper mask UM has an upper mask body 4101 and a top panel 4102. The upper mask body 4101 is detachably connected to the cabinet G, and the top panel 4102 is detachably connected to the upper mask body 4101.

The upper mask body 4101 has a vertically long rectangular body frame 4104 and a display device 4105 held by the body frame 4104. The left and right sides of the body frame 4104 are curved so that they are convex toward the rear. The upper edge of the body frame 4104 is provided with an upper lamp 4107, a sound transmission hole 4108, a body-side connection part 4109, and an upper speaker device (not shown).

The upper lamp 4107 has a light-emitting means, and can create effects by varying its light-emitting mode (not only turning on, blinking, or off, but also its brightness and light color if configured as a full-color LED). Sound-transmitting holes 4108 are located on both sides of the upper lamp 4107 and face forward of the upper mask body 4101. Sound output from the upper speaker device passes through the sound-transmitting holes 4108.

The main body side connection portion 4109 is exposed from the top surface of the upper edge portion of the main body frame 4104. The panel side connection portion 4123 of the top panel 4102 is detachably connected to the main body side connection portion 4109. In addition, the main body side connection portion 4109 is provided with a connection terminal for electrically connecting the top panel 4102 and the upper mask main body 4101.

The top panel 4102 does not have to be connected to the upper mask body 4101. In this case, a connection cover that covers the main body connection part 4109 is attached to the upper edge of the main body frame 4104. This improves the design of the upper mask body 4101. It also prevents damage to the main body connection part 4109 and fraudulent acts against the pachislot machine 4001 via the main body connection part 4109.

Sound transmission holes 4110 and 4111, and side speaker devices (not shown) are provided on the left and right side edges of the main body frame 4104. The sound transmission holes 4110 face the sides of the main body frame 4104. As described above, sound output from the cabinet-side speaker device 4011 (see Figure 317) passes through the sound transmission hole 4110. The sound transmission hole 4111 faces forward of the main body frame 4104 and faces the side speaker devices. Sound output from the side speaker devices passes through the sound transmission hole 4111.

The display device 4105 is surrounded by the main body frame 4104 and is formed in a rectangular shape that is long in the vertical direction. The display device 4105 has a display surface 4105a that faces forward. The display surface 4105a is curved to follow the long side of the main body frame 4104. As a result, the display surface 4105a bends upward to face the player. As a result, the entire display surface 4105a can be easily viewed by the player. In addition, the display surface 4105a is provided with a display window 4112 that allows the three reels 4003L, 4003C, and 4003R of the reel unit RU arranged in the cabinet G to be viewed.

The top panel 4102 has a rectangular panel frame 4121 that is long in the left-right direction, a display panel (not shown) held by the panel frame 4121, a transparent cover 4122 that covers the front of the display panel, and an illumination unit (not shown) that irradiates the back of the display panel with light. A panel-side connection unit 4123 is provided on the bottom edge of the panel frame 4121. The panel-side connection unit 4123 is connected to the main body-side connection unit 4109 of the upper mask main body 4101. The panel-side connection unit 4123 has a connection terminal that connects to a connection terminal provided on the main body-side connection unit 4109.

The display panel displays, for example, information about the pachislot machine 4001. Information about the pachislot machine 4001 may include, for example, the model name of the pachislot machine 4001, characters associated with the pachislot machine 4001, and the "arrangement and payout table" of the pachislot machine 4001. The transparent cover 4122 is a transparent or translucent resin panel that allows the display panel located behind it to be seen.

The top panel according to the present invention may have a display device instead of a display panel and a lighting device. The top panel according to the present invention may also have a display panel, a lighting device, and a display device. Examples of images displayed on the display device of the top panel include images that are linked to images displayed on the display device 4105 of the upper mask body 4101, the number of games played since the end of the bonus (pseudo bonus) until the present, the number of times the bonus (pseudo bonus) has been won, etc.

[Lower Mask DM]
Next, the configuration of the lower mask DM will be described with reference to FIGS.

Figure 321 is a perspective view of the lower mask DM seen from the front side. Figure 322 is a perspective view of the lower mask DM seen from the back side. Figure 323 is a side view of the lower mask DM.

As described above, the lower mask DM has a lower mask base 4201 that covers the lower door base DB, and an operation unit 4202 attached to the top of the lower mask base 4201.

The lower mask base 4201 is formed in a roughly rectangular parallelepiped shape with openings on the top and back. As shown in FIG. 321 , the front of the lower mask base 4201 is provided with a pocket storage section 4211 and a sound transmission hole 4212. The pocket storage section 4211 is formed in approximately the center of the front of the lower mask base 4201. The pocket storage section 4211 is configured as a recess that can store a player's mobile device, a drinking water bottle, etc. The sound transmission hole 4212 is located below the pocket storage section 4211 and faces the lower speaker device 4218, which will be described later. The wall located at the back of the pocket storage section 4211 is part of the lower mask base 4201. Because the operation unit 4202 bulges forward, this wall has low visibility to the player. As a result, this wall does not have a design that displays the model name, characters, etc. Note that some kind of design may be applied to this wall to make it a decorative element.

As shown in Figures 322 and 323, the inside of the lower mask base 4201 is provided with multiple connection hooks 4214, two guide pins 4215, a mask-side relay board 4216, a connection terminal 4217, and a lower speaker device 4218.

The multiple connection hooks 4214 protrude rearward and have through holes that penetrate in the left-right or up-down direction. The lower mask connection parts 4081 provided on the lower door base DB pass through the through holes of the multiple connection hooks 4214. The two guide pins 4215 are inserted into guide holes (not shown) provided on the lower door base DB.

The mask side relay board 4216 is located approximately in the center of the back surface of the lower mask base 4201. The cartridge board 4210 is detachably connected to the mask side relay board 4216. The connection terminal 4217 is located to the side of the mask side relay board 4216. This connection terminal 4217 is electrically connected to the mask side relay board 4216 using wiring (not shown). The connection terminal 4217 is a drawer connector, and is connected to a connection terminal (drawer connector) provided on the lower door base DB (see Figure 317).

The connection terminal provided on the lower door base DB is mounted on the door-side relay terminal board, which is electrically connected to the main control board 4071 using wiring (not shown). Therefore, the mask-side relay board 4216 is electrically connected to the main control board 4071 via the connection terminal 4217 and the door-side relay terminal board, etc.

The lower speaker device 4218 is located below the mask side relay board 4216. The sound output from the lower speaker device 4218 passes through the sound transmission hole 4212 (see Figure 321).

The operation unit 4202 is fixed using screws to an operation panel fixing portion (not shown) provided on the top of the lower mask base 4201. The operation unit 4202 covers the top surface of the lower mask base 4201.

[Operation unit]
Next, the configuration of the operation unit 4202 will be described with reference to FIG.

Figure 324 is an oblique view of the operation unit 4202.

As shown in Figure 324, the operation unit 4202 has an operation unit base 4221. The operation unit base 4221 is formed in a hollow, approximately rectangular parallelepiped shape that is long in the left-right direction. A through-hole (not shown) is provided on the underside of the operation unit base 4221. This allows the internal space of the operation unit base 4221 to communicate with the internal space of the lower mask base 4201 (see Figure 321).

The top surface of the operation unit base 4221 is provided with a MAX BET button 4222, a 1 BET button 4223, a settlement button 4224, a performance button 4225, a left button 4226L, a right button 4226R, a volume knob 4227, and an information display device 4229. The MAX BET button 4222, the 1 BET button 4223, the settlement button 4224, the performance button 4225, and the information display device 4229 are the same as those described in the first embodiment, so their description will be omitted.

The left button 4226L and the right button 4226R are operation units that accept selection operations by the player, for example, when a selection screen is displayed on the display surface 4105a of the display device 4105. The volume knob 4227 is an operation unit that accepts volume adjustment operations. Turning the volume knob 4227 to the right (clockwise) gradually increases the volume, and turning the volume knob 4227 to the left (counterclockwise) gradually decreases the volume.

Three stop buttons 4231L, 4231C, and 4231R are provided on the front of the operation unit base 4221. Each stop button 4231L, 4231C, and 4231R corresponds to a respective reel 4003L, 4003C, and 4003R, and is an operation unit that accepts a player's game operation (stop operation) to stop the rotation of each reel.

A start lever device 4240 having a start lever 4241 is provided at the left corner of the operation unit base 4221. All components of the start lever device 4240 other than the start lever 4241 are located inside the operation unit base 4221. The start lever 4241 passes through a lever through-groove 4221a provided at the left corner of the operation unit base 4221 and protrudes forward and to the left of the operation unit base 4221. In the non-operated state, the top surface of the start lever 4241 forms approximately the same plane as the top surface of the operation unit base 4221.

A decorative part 4233 is provided at the right corner of the operation unit base 4221. The decorative part 4233 is formed in a shape that is bilaterally symmetrical to the start lever 4241. The decorative part 4233 passes through a decorative through-groove 4221b provided at the right corner of the operation unit base 4221 and protrudes forward and to the right of the operation unit base 4221.

The decorative part 4233 is made of translucent resin that transmits light. Inside the operation unit base 4221, there is a board on which an LED, which serves as a light source, is mounted, and a light-guiding member that guides the light emitted from the LED to the decorative part 4233. This allows light to pass through the decorative part 4233, creating an effect that makes it glow.

[Start lever device]
Next, the configuration of the start lever device 4240 will be described with reference to Figures 325 and 326.

Figure 325 is a perspective view of the start lever device 4240. Figure 326 is an exploded perspective view of the start lever device 4240.

As shown in Figures 325 and 326, the start lever device 4240 has a start lever 4241, an illumination base 4242, and a lever support base 4243. The start lever 4241 is made of translucent resin that transmits light. The illumination base 4242 irradiates light onto the start lever 4241. The lever support base 4243 supports the start lever 4241 so that it can tilt within a predetermined angle range.

(Start lever)
Next, the configuration of the start lever 4241 will be described with reference to Figures 326 and 327.

Figure 327 is an oblique view of the start lever 4241 from the rear side.

As shown in Figures 326 and 327, the start lever 4241 has an operation plate portion 4251 and a fixed plate portion 4252 that is continuous with the operation plate portion 4251.

The operation plate 4251 consists of a hollow plate with a roughly L-shaped planar shape. The operation plate 4251 has a presentation side end face 4251a that protrudes from the operation unit base 4221 (see Figure 324) and a light entrance side end face 4251b that faces the illumination base 4242. The corners formed by the upper and lower surfaces of the start lever 4241 and the presentation side end face 4251a are chamfered to give them a rounded shape. The light entrance side end face 4251b has an opening that opens to the internal space of the operation plate 4251. The start lever 4241 is provided with multiple light-guiding ribs 4253 that guide light incident from the light entrance side end face 4251b toward the presentation side end face 4251a.

The fixed plate portion 4252 protrudes approximately perpendicularly from the underside of the operation plate portion 4251. The fixed plate portion 4252 consists of a substantially L-shaped plate that fits along the light-incident side end surface 4251b. The fixed plate portion 4252 has a light-incident side wall surface 4252a that faces the lighting base 4242. The fixed plate portion 4252 guides light that enters through the light-incident side wall surface 4252a to the operation plate portion 4251.

The fixing plate portion 4252 has two screw through holes 4254 and two positioning protrusions 4255. Screws for fixing the start lever 4241 to the lever support base 4243 pass through the two screw through holes 4254. The two positioning protrusions 4255 protrude approximately perpendicularly from the light-entering side wall surface 4252a. The two positioning protrusions 4255 fit into two positioning holes 4305 (see Figure 326) provided in the lever support base 4243.

(lighting base)
Next, the configuration of the lighting base 4242 will be described with reference to Figures 328 and 329.

Figure 328 is an exploded perspective view of the lighting base 4242 as seen from the front. Figure 329 is an exploded perspective view of the lighting base 4242 as seen from the back.

As shown in Figures 328 and 329, the lighting base 4242 has a board holding member 4261, a light-guiding member 4262, and an attachment member 4263.

The board holding member 4261 is formed in a hollow, roughly rectangular parallelepiped shape with an open rear surface. A first LED board 4281 is attached to the front surface 4261a of the board holding member 4261. One flat surface of the first LED board 4281 faces the front surface 4261a of the board holding member 4261. Multiple LEDs 4280A are mounted on the other flat surface of the first LED board 4281. The multiple LEDs 4280A are arranged horizontally at appropriate intervals. The front surface 4261a of the board holding member 4261 is fixed to the mounting member 4263 using screws.

A second LED board 4282 is attached to the left side surface 4261b of the board holding member 4261. One flat surface of the second LED board 4282 faces the left side surface 4261b of the board holding member 4261. Multiple LEDs 4280B are mounted on the other flat surface of the second LED board 4282. The multiple LEDs 4280B are arranged horizontally at appropriate intervals.

As shown in Figure 329, a photosensor 4274, which represents one specific example of operation detection means, is attached to the right side surface 4261c of the board holding member 4261. The photosensor 4274 detects the detection piece 4316 (described below) of the lever support base 4243. The photosensor 4274 is, for example, a transmissive photosensor, with an emitter and receiver facing each other in the left-right direction. Furthermore, the opening of the space between the emitter and receiver of the photosensor 4274 faces the rear side of the gaming machine (the side opposite the player). This makes it difficult for the player to illegally access the receiver of the photosensor 4274, thereby preventing or suppressing fraudulent activity.

The substrate holding member 4261 is also provided with a fixing portion 4265. The fixing portion 4265 protrudes downward from the lower surface 4261d of the substrate holding member 4261. The light guide member 4262 is fixed to the fixing portion 4265 using a screw. The fixing portion 4265 is also fixed to the mounting member 4263 using a screw.

The light-guiding member 4262 consists of a plate that is approximately L-shaped when viewed from above, and has a first light-guiding section 4267 and a second light-guiding section 4268.

The first light guiding unit 4267 has a light incident surface 4267a facing the multiple LEDs 4280A mounted on the first LED substrate 4281, and a light exit surface 4267b opposite the light incident surface 4267a. The first light guiding unit 4267 diffuses the light from the multiple LEDs 4280A that enters through the light incident surface 4267a and emits it evenly from the light exit surface 4267b.

The second light guiding unit 4268 has a light incident surface 4268a facing the multiple LEDs 4280B mounted on the second LED substrate 4282, and a light exit surface 4268b opposite the light incident surface 4268a. The second light guiding unit 4268 diffuses the light from the multiple LEDs 4280B that enters through the light incident surface 4268a and emits it evenly from the light exit surface 4268b.

A fixing piece 4269 is provided at the lower end of the second light-guiding section 4268. The fixing piece 4269 is fixed to the fixing section 4265 of the substrate holding member 4261 using a screw. Hereinafter, the substrate holding member 4261 to which the light-guiding member 4262 is fixed will be referred to as the lighting body 4270.

The mounting member 4263 has a lighting fixing portion 4271, a support mechanism fixing portion 4272, and a mounting protrusion 4273.

The lighting fixture 4271 is formed in the shape of a hollow, roughly rectangular parallelepiped with openings on the right and rear sides. The lighting main body 4270 is housed in the internal space of the lighting fixture 4271. The front plate 4271a of the lighting fixture 4271 faces the light exit surface 4267b of the light-guiding member 4262. The left plate 4271b of the lighting fixture 4271 faces the light exit surface 4268b of the light-guiding member 4262. The front plate 4271a and the left plate 4271b are provided with a plurality of lighting through-holes 4275. The lighting through-holes 4275 face the start lever 4241 (Figure 325).

As shown in Figure 329, a screw hole boss 4276 is provided on the inside of the front plate portion 4271a. A screw is threaded into the screw hole boss 4276 to secure the front surface 4261a of the board holding member 4261 to the lighting fixing portion 4271. An opening 4277 is formed in the bottom plate portion 4271c of the lighting fixing portion 4271. The right side surface 4261c of the board holding member 4261 and the photosensor 4274 are inserted into the opening 4277.

As shown in Figure 328, the support mechanism fixing part 4272 is formed in a hollow, approximately rectangular parallelepiped shape with an open front. The lower plate part 4271c of the lighting fixing part 4271 also serves as the upper plate part of the support mechanism fixing part 4272.

The rear side of the lever support base 4243 (see Figure 326) is housed in the internal space of the support mechanism fixing part 4272. A fixing piece 4278 is provided on the left face plate part 4272a of the support mechanism fixing part 4272. A screw hole is formed in the fixing piece 4278. A screw is threaded into the screw hole of the fixing piece 4278 to fix the fixing part 4265 of the board holding member 4261 to the lighting fixing part 4271. The lever support base 4243 is fixed to the rear face plate part 4272b of the support mechanism fixing part 4272 using a screw.

The mounting protrusion 4273 protrudes downward from the lower plate portion 4272c of the support mechanism fixing portion 4272. The mounting protrusion 4273 is formed in a roughly rectangular parallelepiped shape with an open back surface. The mounting protrusion 4273 is fixed to the operation unit base 4221 (see Figure 324) of the operation unit 4202 using screws.

(Lever support base)
Next, the configuration of the lever support base 4243 will be described with reference to FIG.

Figure 330 is an exploded perspective view of the lever support base 4243.

As shown in Figure 330, the lever support base 4243 has a movable member 4291, a detection member 4292 fixed to the movable member 4291, and a support member 4293 that rotatably supports the movable member 4291.

The movable member 4291 has a roughly C-shape when viewed from above, and includes a lever fixing portion 4301 and a left arm portion 4302 and a right arm portion 4303 that protrude roughly perpendicularly from the lever fixing portion 4301. The lever fixing portion 4301 has a plane that is roughly perpendicular to the front-to-rear direction and is made of a rectangular plate that is long in the left-to-right direction. The forward-facing plane of the lever fixing portion 4301 faces the start lever 4241 (see Figure 326).

The lever fixing portion 4301 has two positioning holes 4305. Two positioning protrusions 4255 (see Figure 327) of the start lever 4241 fit into the two positioning holes 4305. The fixing plate portion 4252 of the start lever 4241 is fixed to the lever fixing portion 4301 using screws.

The left arm portion 4302 and the right arm portion 4303 are each continuous with the short sides of the lever fixing portion 4301 and protrude rearward. The left arm portion 4302 and the right arm portion 4303 have a plane that is approximately perpendicular to the left-right direction and are made of a rectangular plate that is long in the front-to-rear direction.

An upper contact piece 4306 and a spring engagement piece 4307 are provided on the upper long side of the left arm portion 4302. The upper contact piece 4306 is located closer to the lever fixing portion 4301 than the spring engagement piece 4307. In addition, a lower contact piece 4308 is provided on the lower long side of the left arm portion 4302. The upper contact piece 4306, spring engagement piece 4307, and lower contact piece 4308 each protrude toward the right arm portion 4303, and are made of plates with flat surfaces that are approximately perpendicular to the up-down direction.

An upper contact piece 4311 is provided on the upper long side of the right arm portion 4303. A lower contact piece 4312 is provided on the lower long side of the right arm portion 4303. The upper contact piece 4311 and the lower contact piece 4312 each protrude toward the left arm portion 4302 and are made of a plate having a plane that is approximately perpendicular in the vertical direction. A shaft through-hole 4310 is provided at the end of the left arm portion 4302 and the right arm portion 4303 opposite the lever fixing portion 4301 side.

The detection member 4292 has a fixed piece 4315 fixed to the right arm portion 4303, and a detection piece 4316 protruding from the fixed piece 4315. The fixed piece 4315 is formed in a roughly rectangular parallelepiped shape that is long in the front-to-rear direction. The front end of the fixed piece 4315 is positioned between the upper abutment piece 4311 and the lower abutment piece 4312 of the right arm portion 4303. The detection piece 4316 protrudes roughly perpendicularly from the top surface of the fixed piece 4315. The detection piece 4316 consists of a plate with a flat surface that is roughly perpendicular to the left-to-right direction.

The support member 4293 is formed in a hollow, roughly rectangular parallelepiped shape with open front and top surfaces, and has a left side 4293a, a right side 4293b, a rear side 4293c, and a bottom 4293d.

An upper stopper 4317 is provided at the upper end of the left side portion 4293a. The upper stopper 4317 protrudes toward the right side portion 4293b and consists of a plate with a flat surface that is approximately vertical. The lower surface of the upper stopper 4317 faces the upper abutment piece 4306 of the movable member 4291. A cushioning material 4321 is attached to the lower surface of the upper stopper 4317.

An upper stopper 4318 is provided at the upper end of the right side portion 4293b. The upper stopper 4318 protrudes toward the left side portion 4293a and consists of a plate with a flat surface that is approximately vertical. The lower surface of the upper stopper 4318 faces the upper abutment piece 4311 of the movable member 4291. A cushioning material 4322 is attached to the lower surface of the upper stopper 4318.

The rear portion 4293c is fixed to the rear plate portion 4272b (see Figure 328) of the lighting base 4242 using screws. A spring engagement groove 4319 is provided on the rear portion 4293c side of the bottom portion 4293d. The front side of the inner surface of the bottom portion 4293d faces the lower abutment pieces 4308, 4312 of the movable member 4291. A cushioning material 4323 is attached to the front side of the inner surface of the bottom portion 4293d. As a result, the cushioning material 4323 faces the lower abutment pieces 4308, 4312 of the movable member 4291.

A shaft 4294 is fixed to the left side portion 4293a and the right side portion 4293b. The shaft 4294 passes through through holes provided in the left side portion 4293a and the right side portion 4293b, and both ends are fixed by crimping using bearing bushings 4325 and retaining rings 4326. Note that the shaft 4294 can be fixed using any suitable fixing method, such as welding, adhesive, or press fitting. The shaft 4294 also passes through the shaft through-hole 4310 of the movable member 4291. As a result, the shaft 4294 rotatably supports the movable member 4291.

The shaft 4294 passes through the coil portion of the torsion spring 4328 and the spring retainer 4329. The coil portion of the torsion spring 4328 and the spring retainer 4329 are disposed between the left arm portion 4302 and the right arm portion 4303 of the movable member 4291. The spring retainer 4329 prevents the torsion spring 4328 from moving in the axial direction of the shaft 4294, positioning the torsion spring 4328 in a predetermined position on the left arm portion 4302 side.

One arm 4328a of the torsion spring 4328 engages with the spring engagement piece 4307 of the movable member 4291. The other arm (not shown) of the torsion spring 4328 engages with the spring engagement groove 4319 in the bottom portion 4293d. The torsion spring 4328 biases the movable member 4291 in a rotational direction (hereinafter referred to as the "first rotational direction") in which the lever fixing portion 4301 is displaced upward. Rotation of the movable member 4291 in the first rotational direction is stopped when the upper abutment pieces 4306, 4311 abut against the upper stoppers 4317, 4318 of the support member 4293.

When the rotation of the movable member 4291 in the first rotation direction is locked, the lower abutment pieces 4308, 4312 of the movable member 4291 are separated from the bottom 4293d of the support member 4293. The movable member 4291 can move in a rotation direction in which the lever fixing portion 4301 is displaced downward (hereinafter referred to as the "second rotation direction") until the lower abutment pieces 4308, 4312 abut against the bottom 4293d of the support member 4293.

[Operation of the start lever device]
Next, the operation of the start lever device 4240 will be described with reference to FIG.

Figure 331 is a cross-sectional view of the start lever device 4240 before operation (non-operated state), and Figure 331B is a cross-sectional view of the start lever device 4240 after operation (operated state).

As shown in Figure 331A, the start lever 4241 is fixed to the movable member 4291. When the start lever device 4240 is in an inoperative state where the start lever 4241 is not being pressed, the movable member 4291 is biased in a first rotation direction (clockwise in Figure 331) by the torsion spring 4328. The upper abutment piece 4306 (4311) of the movable member 4291 abuts against the upper stopper 4317 (4318) of the support member 4293. This prevents the movable member 4291 from rotating in the first rotation direction.

A cushioning material 4321 (4322) is attached to the underside of the upper stopper 4317 (4318) of the support member 4293. This allows the upper contact piece 4306 (4311) to contact the upper stopper 4317 (4318) via the cushioning material 4321 (4322). As a result, damage to the movable member 4291 and the support member 4293 can be prevented or suppressed. In addition, the sound generated when the upper contact piece 4306 (4311) contacts the upper stopper 4317 (4318) can be reduced.

A detection member 4292 is fixed to the movable member 4291. When the start lever device 4240 is in an inoperative state, the detection piece 4316 of the detection member 4292 is detected by the photosensor 4274. This detection result is transmitted to the main control board 4071 via the mask-side relay board 4216. When the photosensor 4274 detects the detection piece 4316, the main control board 4071 detects that the start lever 4241 is not being pressed.

As shown in Figure 331B, when the start lever 4241 is pressed downward (pressing operation), the movable member 4291 rotates in the second rotation direction (counterclockwise in Figure 331) against the spring force of the torsion spring 4328. This causes the start lever 4241 to tilt downward. The rotation of the movable member 4291 in the second rotation direction is stopped when the lower abutment piece 4308 (4312) abuts against the bottom 4293d of the support member 4293.

A cushioning material 4323 is attached to the inner surface of the bottom portion 4293d of the support member 4293. This allows the lower contact piece 4308 (4312) to contact the bottom portion 4293d of the support member 4293 via the cushioning material 4323. As a result, damage to the movable member 4291 and the support member 4293 can be prevented or suppressed. In addition, the sound generated when the lower contact piece 4308 (4312) contacts the bottom portion 4293d can be reduced.

When the movable member 4291 rotates in the second rotation direction, the detection piece 4316 of the detection member 4292 is no longer detected by the photosensor 4274. When the photosensor 4274 switches from detecting the detection piece 4316 to not detecting it, the main control board 4071 detects that the start lever 4241 has been pressed.

[Start lever lighting effects]
Next, the light effects of the start lever 4241 will be explained with reference to Figures 332 and 333.

Figure 332 is a cross-sectional view illustrating light incident on the start lever 4241 in the non-operated state. Figure 333 is a cross-sectional view illustrating light incident on the start lever 4241 in the operated state.

As shown in Figure 332, in a start lever device 4240 in a non-operated state, the multiple illumination through-holes 4275 of the illumination fixing portion 4271 face the fixing plate portion 4252 of the start lever 4241. As shown in Figure 332A, light emitted from the multiple LEDs 2480A enters the first light-guiding portion 4267 of the light-guiding member 4262 and is emitted from the light exit surface 4267b. The light emitted from the light exit surface 4267b then passes through the multiple illumination through-holes 4275 and enters the fixing plate portion 4252 of the start lever 4241.

Also, as shown in FIG. 332B, light emitted from the multiple LEDs 2480B enters the second light-guiding section 4268 of the light-guiding member 4262 and is emitted from the light-emitting surface 4268b. The light emitted from the light-emitting surface 4268b then passes through the multiple illumination through-holes 4275 and enters the fixing plate portion 4252 of the start lever 4241.

The fixed plate portion 4252 diffuses the incident light, illuminating the entire operation plate portion 4251 of the start lever 4241. In this way, when making the start lever 4241 of the start lever device 4240 glow when it is not being operated, the brightness of the operation plate portion 4251 can be increased by making light incident on the entire fixed plate portion 4252 of the start lever 4241.

As shown in Figure 333, in the start lever device 4240 in the operated state, the multiple illumination through-holes 4275 of the illumination fixing portion 4271 face the light-incident side end surface 4251b of the start lever 4241. As shown in Figure 333A, light emitted from the light-exiting surface 4267b of the first light-guiding portion 4267 passes through the multiple illumination through-holes 4275 and is incident on the light-incident side end surface 4251b of the start lever 4241 and the side surfaces of the multiple light-guiding ribs 4253 (see Figure 327). In addition, a portion of the light emitted from the light-exiting surface 4267b passes between the multiple light-guiding ribs 4253 and reaches the front side end surface 4251a.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 333B, light emitted from the light exit surface 4268b of the second light guiding section 4268 passes through multiple illumination through-holes 4275 and enters the light entrance side end surface 4251b of the start lever 4241 and the side surfaces of multiple light guiding ribs 4253 (see Figure 327). Furthermore, a portion of the light emitted from the light exit surface 4268b passes between the multiple light guiding ribs 4253 and reaches the front side end surface 4251a.

In this way, when lighting up the start lever 4241 of the start lever device 4240 in an operated state, light can be made to directly enter the operation plate portion 4251 of the start lever 4241. Furthermore, because multiple light-guiding ribs 4253 are provided inside the operation plate portion 4251, light can reach the display side end surface 4251a. As a result, the brightness of the operation plate portion 4251 can be increased.

In addition, the start lever device 4240 has a start lever 4241 that has a flat operating plate portion 4251. This makes it easier to press down the start lever 4241 with your hand, improving operability. The start lever device 4240 also provides a unique operating feel that differs from conventional start levers that have a spherical operating portion at the end of the shaft. In the operated state, the start lever 4241 is positioned farther away from the multiple LEDs 4280A, 4280B than in the non-operated state. However, due to the structure described above, the start lever 4241 can receive a sufficient amount of light from the multiple LEDs 4280A, 4280B even in the operated state. This prevents a decrease in brightness of the start lever 4241 when operated, and allows the illumination of the start lever 4241 to create a powerful effect even in the operated state.

In addition, when the start lever device 4240 is not in operation, the top surface of the start lever 4241 (operation plate portion 4251) is approximately flush with the top surface of the operation unit base 4221 (see Figure 324). This allows the start lever 4241 to be pressed down with the palm of the hand while placing the hand on the top surface of the operation unit base 4221 and the top surface of the start lever 4241. As a result, the start lever 4241 can be operated with minimal movement, reducing hand fatigue.

[Example 1 of start lever light effects: Notification of operable/unoperable state, etc.]
As described above, the start lever 4241 of this embodiment has a flat operation plate 4251, unlike conventional start levers that have a spherical operation portion at the tip of the shaft. Therefore, it is difficult for a first-time player to recognize that the start lever 4241 is the operation portion for performing the start operation. Therefore, when the start lever is in an inoperable state (operation disabled state), such as before a bet operation for game value is performed or while the reels are spinning, the control state of the LED related to the light emission of the start lever 4241 may be set to a first mode (off or a predetermined pattern), and when the start lever is operable after a bet operation for game value is performed, the control state of the LED related to the light emission of the start lever 4241 may be set to a second mode different from the first mode. This changes the light emission mode depending on whether or not a bet is placed, allowing even a first-time player to easily recognize the position of the start lever 4241 that should be operated after a bet.

The start lever 4241 according to this embodiment can also use its illumination pattern to indicate whether the current state is an inoperable state where start operation is not possible, or an operable state where start operation is possible. Specifications for the first and second modes are shown below. Any one of the following specifications may be adopted, or multiple specifications may be combined as long as no contradictions are present.

(Example 1: On/Off)
First mode: off Second mode: on/blinking In specification example 1, the start lever 4241 is off (first mode) in the inoperable state, and the start lever 4241 is lit or blinking (second mode) by placing a bet. In specification example 1, the state change is clear.

(Specification example 2: brightness difference)
First mode: Low brightness lighting Second mode: High brightness lighting In specification example 2, the start lever 4241 is lit at low brightness (first mode) when in an inoperable state, and is lit at high brightness (second mode) when a bet is placed. Specification example 2 changes the light emission mode according to the current situation, thereby preventing the appearance of the gaming machine from becoming extremely dark.

(Specification example 3: different colors)
First aspect: first emission color (e.g., white)
Second aspect: second emission color (e.g., blue)
In specification example 3, a change in color notifies/indicates an operable/inoperable state. For example, in an inoperable state, the start lever 4241 is lit white (first mode), and a bet operation causes the start lever 4241 to light up blue (second mode). Note that specification example 1 and specification example 3 may be combined, with the first mode being unlit and the second mode being lit up blue.

(Specification Example 4: Variation 1 with different colors)
First mode: off Second mode: specific light color (e.g., blue)
The stop buttons 4231L, 4231C, and 4231R may also be designed to emit different colors depending on whether they are in an enabled or disabled state.
Light Color of Stop Buttons 4231L, 4231C, and 4231R: Valid: Blue; Invalid: Red; Indication: White; Indication: Off. In this example, in a game in which batting order navigation (or batting order + symbol-pressing navigation) is not performed, the stop buttons are illuminated blue when the operation is valid and red when the operation is invalid. Furthermore, the stop buttons to be operated for stopping during AT are indicated by their illumination patterns. In a game in which batting order navigation occurs, the stop button corresponding to the reel to be stopped at that time is illuminated white, and the stop buttons corresponding to the other rotating reels are unilluminated. For example, if the correct batting order is center → right → left. While all reels are rotating, the stop button 4231C is illuminated white, and the stop buttons 4231L and 4231R are unilluminated. After the center reel is stopped for the first time, the stop button 4231C corresponding to the stopped center reel is illuminated red. Then, the stop button 4231R corresponding to the right reel to be pressed next is illuminated white, and the stop button 4231L corresponding to the left reel is turned off. In this specification, the basic operable color of the stop buttons is "blue," and the operable color of the start lever is also "blue." This makes it easy for a player to understand that the blue operating parts are operable. Note that the start lever and the stop buttons do not need to be the exact same blue (with the same RGB data values); as long as they are recognizable to a player as similar colors, the colors may be slightly different, taking into account the visual balance of each component. In this specification example, the operable color of the start lever is blue, and the stop button to be pressed as instructed is a different color from white. If the instruction color (white) of the stop buttons and the operable color of the start lever were the same color, there is a risk of players being distracted by the white illumination of the start lever on the left side of the cabinet and accidentally stopping the first reel from the left when the center reel should be stopped first, leading to a play order error. To avoid such mistakes, it is desirable to use different colors for the indicator and the lever-on color.

(Specification Example 5: Variation 2 with different colors)
First mode: off Second mode: specific light color (e.g., blue)
Light Color of the MAX BET Button 4222 Valid State: Red Invalid State: Off Specification Example 5 is a specification in which the valid state (a state in which a bet operation for a game value is possible) and invalid state (a state in which a bet operation for a game value is impossible) can be indicated by the light color of the MAX BET button 4222. Note that the light color "red" may be red light emitted by a full-color LED, red light emitted by a single-color red LED, or red light emitted by a white LED with a red sheet or the like inside the button to make it appear red. By differentiating the light color when operation is valid, it is possible to prevent misidentification of the operation means (for example, accidentally hitting the lever when you should bet one coin and then another to make it a bet of three). Note that the lever-on color and the valid operation color of the MAX BET button may be the same or similar colors.

The light color innovations for each operating mechanism described above may also be applied to start levers with light-emitting parts of any shape other than flat start levers.

[Start lever light effect example 2: Creating a sense of anticipation]
The following anticipation effects may be produced using the light color and light pattern of the start lever 4241. Note that the suggestive effects described below may include patterns that result in definitive notification.

(Example 1: Successful indication of lever judge performance)
As an effect in which the lever notifies whether a bonus has been awarded, the color of the light emitted by the lever when it is operable may indicate the degree of expectation. For example, while the normal lever-on color is blue, if the start lever is operable after a bet and the lever is operable, it may indicate a chance if it lights up red, or a rainbow color if it is a confirmed win. Such an effect may also be produced while waiting for a normal lever-on operation to start a game. Furthermore, this effect may be produced by temporarily freezing the game after accepting a lever-on operation to start a game, and then accepting a lever-on operation to release the freeze.

(Example 2: Successful indication when performing reel action with lever operation)
As an effect for announcing the granted bonus (such as AT stock), an effect may be configured in which an AT stock is notified if the reel action continues with the lever on. In this case, after accepting the normal lever-on operation for starting play, the reel action (the reel movement effect before constant speed rotation) begins, and each time a predetermined reel movement occurs with each lever on, the granting of a bonus is notified or suggested, and the effect ends when the reel movement that ends (including ending without any movement) is reached. For example, in an effect in which the stock is internally added in an 80% loop, and each time a seven is lined up as the reels rotate in reverse with the effect lever on, a stock +1 is notified, and the effect ends with the start of forward rotation, the light color of the lever indicates the expected probability of success (a seven-line action) occurring while the effect lever on operation is being accepted.

(Example 3: Suggestion of winning combination)
It may be possible to indicate a winning combination by illuminating the light at any timing during the period when the start lever 4241 is conventionally off, such as while the reels are spinning. Note that it is desirable to produce the lighting indicating a winning combination in a color different from the operable color so that the player does not mistake it for a lever-on operable state.

(Example 4: Creating a sense of incongruity)
As a presentation to notify/indicate a bonus or AT win, if the start lever lights up at the timing when it is normally off, it may be configured to indicate a win or high expectation. Note that if it lights up/flashes for a long time, there is a risk that the player will mistake it for a waiting state, so it is preferable to make it a short presentation of about 1 to 2 seconds.

(Example 5: Setting value suggestion)
The start lever may be used to produce a light-emitting effect that indicates a setting value (for example, setting 1 to 6) related to the advantageous degree of ball output performance. For example, when the AT ends, the color of the start lever may be white to indicate the default, blue to indicate an even number, yellow to indicate an odd number, red to indicate a setting of 4 or higher, and rainbow to confirm setting 6.

[Start lever light effect example 3: status notification/suggestion effect]
The following status notification/indication effects may be performed by the lighting mode of the start lever. Note that the specification example numbers are consecutive from the previous item. It is also possible to adopt appropriate combinations of each specification example.

(Example 6: Setting L notification effect)
In the case of a gaming machine with a setting (setting L) with a significantly low payout rate for ball payout testing, it is desirable to provide a notification effect that makes it clear at a glance that the setting is different from other settings so that store clerks who change the setting do not mistakenly select setting L. For example, this could be done by turning off the light on the lower panel 4009 at the bottom of the cabinet. In the gaming machine of this embodiment, the portion corresponding to the lower panel is the pocket storage section 4211, making it difficult to implement such an effect. Therefore, in the case of setting L, it is advisable to suggest or notify store clerks and players that some kind of unfavorable condition exists by, for example, having the start lever 4211 flash red while waiting for customers.

(Example 7: Error notification)
When an error occurs, the start lever 4211 may also be made to flash red to clearly indicate that an error has occurred.

(Example 8: Notification during complete function operation)
For example, the start lever 4211 may be always turned off during a stoppage due to the activation of the complete function, or may remain lit in red (a color different from the operable color) during a stoppage.

[Start lever light effect example 4: Demo screen, etc.]
In a light-emitting effect such as a demo state (a state where no game is being played and customers are waiting), the start lever 4211 may be illuminated in any light-emitting mode to easily attract the player's attention, either in combination with other decorative lamps or by itself. Also, the start lever 4211 may be illuminated in an appropriate light-emitting mode according to the state, such as when the player menu screen is open, when the hall menu is open, when settings are being changed or confirmed, etc.

[Example 5 of lighting effects on the start lever: Differences between the lever and the decorative parts of the exterior]
As described above, the right corner of the operation unit base 4221 is provided with a decorative unit 4233 that can emit light and has a shape symmetrical to the start lever 4241. A player at first glance may mistake the decorative unit 4233, which is symmetrical to the start lever 4241, for a start lever (an operation unit that can be operated to start). If the start lever 4241 and the decorative unit 4233 were illuminated with the same color when the start lever 4241 was in an operable state (e.g., after a bet on game value), the player would be more likely to mistake the decorative unit 4233 for the start lever. Therefore, in a situation where the start lever 4241 is illuminated with an illumination color (e.g., blue) indicating that it is in an operable state, it is desirable for the decorative unit 4233 to have an illumination control mode different from that of the start lever 4211 (e.g., white light emission or an off state). In this embodiment, the decorative part 4233 is also a decorative part that can emit light, but decorative parts with an appearance related to the start lever (things that are similar in design, things that are symmetrical, things that are not similar in design but are placed in close locations and are confusing, etc.) may be non-luminous decorative parts. In this case, the start lever emits light when it is operable, but the non-luminous decorative parts do not emit light, so the player can see at a glance the position of the start lever that should be operated.

[First Modification]
Next, a first modified example of the gaming machine according to the eighth embodiment will be described. The first modified example differs from the gaming machine according to the eighth embodiment in the operation unit. Therefore, the operation unit 4502 according to the first modified example will be described here.

[Operation unit]
First, the configuration of the operation unit 4502 will be described with reference to FIG.

Figure 334 is an oblique view of the operation unit 4502.

As shown in Figure 334, the operation unit 4502 has an operation unit base 4521. The operation unit base 4521 is formed in the shape of a hollow, approximately rectangular parallelepiped that is long in the left-right direction. A through-hole (not shown) is provided on the underside of the operation unit base 4521. This allows the internal space of the operation unit base 4521 to communicate with the internal space of the lower mask base 4201 (see Figure 321).

The top surface of the operation unit base 4521 is provided with a MAX BET button 4222, a 1 BET button 4223, a settlement button 4224, a performance button 4225, a left button 4226L, and a right button 4226R. Additionally, three stop buttons 4231L, 4231C, and 4231R are provided on the front surface of the operation unit base 4521. The MAX BET button 4222, 1 BET button 4223, a settlement button 4224, a performance button 4225, a left button 4226L, a right button 4226R, and stop buttons 4231L, 4231C, and 4231R are the same as those described using Figure 324, and therefore will not be described here.

The operation unit base 4521 is also provided with a start lever device 4540 having a left start lever 4541L and a right start lever 4541R. All components of the start lever device 4540 other than the left start lever 4541L and right start lever 4541R are disposed inside the operation unit base 4521. The left start lever 4541L passes through a lever opening (not shown) provided at the left end of the operation unit base 4521 and protrudes forward of the operation unit base 4521. The right start lever 4541R passes through a lever opening (not shown) provided at the right end of the operation unit base 4521 and protrudes forward of the operation unit base 4521.

[Start lever device]
Next, the configuration of the start lever device 4540 will be described with reference to FIG.

Figure 335 is a perspective view of the start lever device 4540.

As shown in FIG. 335, the start lever device 4540 has a left start lever 4541L, a right start lever 4541R, a left lever support base 4543L, a right lever support base 4543R, a shaft coupling mechanism 4544, and a photosensor 4545, which is a specific example of a detection means.

The left start lever 4541L has an operation plate portion 4551 and a support arm portion 4552. The operation plate portion 4551 is formed in the shape of a roughly rectangular flat plate with an appropriate thickness. The operation plate portion 4551 has a corner inclined surface 4551a formed by cutting out the upper right corner. This corner inclined surface 4551a comes into contact with the thumb of the left hand of the player operating the operation plate portion 4541L. Providing the corner inclined surface 4551a makes it easier for the player to rest their left hand on the operation plate portion 4551.

The support arm 4552 is connected to the back surface of the operation plate 4551. The support arm 4552 passes through a lever opening (not shown) provided at the left end of the operation unit base 4521 (see Figure 334). The support arm 4552 is fixed to the left shaft 4562 (described below) of the left lever support base 4543L. A spring engagement protrusion 4553 is provided on the upper part of the support arm 4552. The spring engagement protrusion 4553 is arranged inside the operation unit base 4521.

The right start lever 4541R has an operation plate portion 4556 and a support arm portion 4557. The operation plate portion 4556 is shaped symmetrically to the operation plate portion 4551 of the left start lever 4541L, and has a corner inclined surface 4556a formed by cutting out the upper left corner. This corner inclined surface 4556a comes into contact with the thumb of the right hand of the player operating the lever. Providing the corner inclined surface 4556a makes it easier for the player to rest their right hand on the operation plate portion 4551.

The support arm 4557 is connected to the back surface of the operation plate 4556. The support arm 4557 passes through a lever opening (not shown) provided at the right end of the operation unit base 4521 (see Figure 334). The support arm 4557 is fixed to the right shaft 4567 (described below) of the right lever support base 4543R. A spring engagement protrusion 4558 is provided on the upper part of the support arm 4557. The spring engagement protrusion 4558 is located inside the operation unit base 4521.

The left lever support base 4543L has a bearing portion 4561 and a left shaft 4562. The bearing portion 4561 rotatably supports the left shaft 4562, which extends in the left-right direction. The support arm portion 4552 of the left start lever 4541L is fixed to the left shaft 4562. This allows the left shaft 4562 to rotate together with the left start lever 4541L.

A spring engagement hook 4563 is provided on the upper part of the bearing portion 4561. One end of a tension coil spring 4560, which is a specific example of a biasing member, is engaged with the spring engagement hook 4563. The other end of the tension coil spring 4560 is engaged with a spring engagement protrusion 4553 of the left start lever 4541L. The engagement position between the tension coil spring 4560 and the spring engagement protrusion 4553 is lower than the engagement position between the tension coil spring 4560 and the spring engagement hook 4563. As a result, the tension coil spring 4560 biases the support arm portion 4552 in a rotational direction in which the operation plate portion 4551 is displaced upward (hereinafter referred to as the "first rotational direction r1").

Rotation of the support arm 4552 in the first rotation direction r1 is stopped when the upper part of the support arm 4552 abuts against the bearing part 4561. Therefore, the support arm 4552 is held by the bearing part 4561 in a state where it can rotate in a rotation direction in which the operation plate part 4551 is displaced downward (hereinafter referred to as the "second rotation direction r2"). Note that a buffer material (not shown) is provided between the upper part of the support arm 4552 and the bearing part 4561. Furthermore, the bearing part 4561 is fixed to the operation unit base 4521 (see Figure 334) via a mounting bracket 4564.

The right lever support base 4543R has a bearing portion 4566 and a right shaft 4567. The bearing portion 4566 rotatably supports the right shaft 4567, which extends in the left-right direction. The support arm portion 4557 of the right start lever 4541R is fixed to the right shaft 4567. This allows the right shaft 4567 to rotate together with the right start lever 4541R.

A spring engagement hook 4568 is provided on the upper part of the bearing portion 4566. One end of a tension coil spring 4560, which is a specific example of a biasing member, is engaged with the spring engagement hook 4568. The other end of the tension coil spring 4560 is engaged with a spring engagement protrusion 4558 of the right start lever 4541R. The engagement position between the tension coil spring 4560 and the spring engagement protrusion 4558 is lower than the engagement position between the tension coil spring 4560 and the spring engagement hook 4568. As a result, the tension coil spring 4560 biases the support arm portion 4557 in the first rotational direction r1.

Rotation of the support arm 4557 in the first rotation direction r1 is stopped when the upper part of the support arm 4557 abuts against the bearing part 4566. Therefore, the support arm 4557 is held by the bearing part 4566 in a state where it can rotate in the second rotation direction r2. Note that a buffer material (not shown) is provided between the upper part of the support arm 4557 and the bearing part 4566. Furthermore, the bearing part 4566 is fixed to the operation unit base 4521 (see Figure 334) via a mounting bracket 4569.

The shaft coupling mechanism 4544 corresponds to the connecting portion of the present invention and connects the left shaft 4562 and the right shaft 4567. The shaft coupling mechanism 4544 has a connecting shaft 4571, a left coupling portion 4572, a left link portion 4573, a right coupling portion 4574, and a right link portion 4575.

The connecting shaft 4571 extends in the left-right direction. The left connecting part 4572 is fixed to the left end of the connecting shaft 4571, and the right connecting part 4574 is fixed to the right end of the connecting shaft 4571. Therefore, the connecting shaft 4571, left connecting part 4572, and right connecting part 4574 rotate together.

The right end of the left shaft 4562 is rotatably connected to the left connecting portion 4572. The axis of the left shaft 4562 coincides with the axis of the connecting shaft 4571. The left link portion 4573 is disposed between the left connecting portion 4572 and the bearing portion 4561 and is fixed to the left shaft 4562. The left link portion 4573 has an engagement pin (not shown) that engages with the left connecting portion 4572. The engagement pin extends in the left-right direction and is located closer to the mounting bracket 4564 (rearward) than the connecting shaft 4571. Therefore, the axis of the engagement pin does not coincide with the axis of the left shaft 4562 or the connecting shaft 4571.

When the left link portion 4573 (left shaft 4562) rotates in the second rotational direction r2, the engagement pin of the left link portion 4573 engages with the left connecting portion 4572 and pushes up the left connecting portion 4572. This causes the left connecting portion 4572 to rotate in the second rotational direction r2 around the left shaft 4562. In other words, when the left link portion 4573 (left shaft 4562) rotates in the second rotational direction r2, the left connecting portion 4572 rotates together with the left link portion 4573 in the second rotational direction r2.

On the other hand, when the left connecting portion 4572 rotates in the second rotational direction r2 relative to the left link portion 4573, the left connecting portion 4572 moves away from the engagement pin of the left link portion 4573. Therefore, the left link portion 4573 does not rotate in the second rotational direction r2. In other words, even if the left connecting portion 4572 rotates in the second rotational direction r2, the left link portion 4573 (left shaft 4562) does not rotate together with the left connecting portion 4572.

The left end of the right shaft 4567 is rotatably connected to the right connecting portion 4574. The axis of the right shaft 4567 coincides with the axis of the connecting shaft 4571. The right link portion 4575 is disposed between the right connecting portion 4574 and the bearing portion 4566 and is fixed to the right shaft 4567. The right link portion 4575 has an engagement pin (not shown) that engages with the right connecting portion 4574. The engagement pin extends in the left-right direction and is located closer to the mounting bracket 4569 (rearward) than the connecting shaft 4571. Therefore, the axis of the engagement pin does not coincide with the axis of the right shaft 4567 and the connecting shaft 4571.

When the right link portion 4575 (right shaft 4567) rotates in the second rotational direction r2, the engagement pin of the right link portion 4575 engages with the right connecting portion 4574 and pushes up the left connecting portion 4572. This causes the right connecting portion 4574 to rotate in the second rotational direction r2 around the right shaft 4567. In other words, when the right link portion 4575 (right shaft 4567) rotates in the second rotational direction r2, the right connecting portion 4574 rotates together with the right link portion 4575 in the second rotational direction r2.

On the other hand, when the right connecting portion 4574 rotates in the second rotational direction r2 relative to the right link portion 4575, the right connecting portion 4574 moves away from the engagement pin of the right link portion 4575. Therefore, the right link portion 4575 does not rotate in the second rotational direction r2. In other words, even if the right connecting portion 4574 rotates in the second rotational direction r2, the right link portion 4575 (right shaft 4567) does not rotate together with the right connecting portion 4574.

A detection piece 4576 is provided on the top of the right connecting portion 4574. The detection piece 4576 is detected by a photosensor 4545. The photosensor 4545 is attached to a sensor attachment portion (not shown) provided on the operation unit base 4521 (see Figure 334). The photosensor 4545 is, for example, a light-projecting photosensor, with a light-emitting portion and a light-receiving portion facing each other in the vertical direction.

The right connecting portion 4574 has a spring engaging portion 4577. One end of a tension coil spring 4570, which is a specific example of a biasing member, is engaged with the spring engaging portion 4577. The other end of the tension coil spring 4570 is engaged with a spring hook 4529 provided on an internal member 4528 provided on the operation unit base 4521 (see FIG. 334). The tension coil spring 4570 biases the right connecting portion 4574 in the first rotation direction r1. As a result, the right connecting portion 4574 is held on the connecting shaft 4571 at a position where the detection piece 4576 is detected by the photosensor 4545.

[Operation of the start lever device]
Next, we will explain the operation of the start lever device 4540. In the start lever device 4540 in a non-operated state, the left start lever 4541L and the right start lever 4541R are biased in a first rotational direction r1 by the respective torsion coil springs 4560. The left start lever 4541L and the right start lever 4541R are supported by bearing portions 4561, 4566 in a state in which they can rotate in a second rotational direction r2.

When the start lever device 4540 is in a non-operated state, the detection piece 4576 of the right connecting portion 4574 is detected by the photosensor 4545. This detection result is sent to the main control board 4071 (see Figure 317) via the mask-side relay board (not shown). When the photosensor 4545 detects the detection piece 4576, the main control board 4071 detects that the left start lever 4541L and the right start lever 4541R are not being pressed.

For example, when the operation plate portion 4551 of the left start lever 4541L is pressed downward (pressing operation), the support arm portion 4552 rotates in the second rotation direction r2 against the spring force of the torsion coil spring 4560. This causes the operation plate portion 4551 to tilt downward. The rotation of the support arm portion 4552 in the second rotation direction r2 is stopped when the support arm portion 4552 abuts against a stopper (not shown) of the bearing portion 4561. Note that a cushioning material is attached to the stopper.

When the support arm 4552 rotates in the second rotational direction r2, the left shaft 4562 and left link portion 4573 rotate together with the support arm 4552 in the second rotational direction r2. The left link portion 4573 then rotates the left connecting portion 4572 in the second rotational direction r2. As a result, the connecting shaft 4571 and right connecting portion 4574, which are integrally connected to the left connecting portion 4572, rotate in the second rotational direction r2. At this time, the right link portion 4575 does not rotate in the second rotational direction r2, so the right start lever 4541R does not tilt in conjunction with the left start lever 4541L.

When the right connecting part 4574 rotates in the second rotation direction r2, the detection piece 4576 attached to the right connecting part 4574 moves away from the photosensor 4545. As a result, the detection piece 4576 is no longer detected by the photosensor 4545. When the photosensor 4545 switches from a state in which it detects the detection piece 4576 to a state in which it does not detect it (from ON to OFF), the main control board 4071 detects that the left start lever 4541L or the right start lever 4541R has been pressed.

When the operating plate portion 4551 of the left start lever 4541L is no longer pressed, the left start lever 4541L is urged in the first rotational direction r1 by the spring force of the torsion coil spring 4560 and returns to its non-operated position. At this time, the left link portion 4573 disengages from the left connecting portion 4572. The left connecting portion 4572, connecting shaft 4571, and right connecting portion 4574 are then urged in the first rotational direction r1 by the spring force of the tension coil spring 4570. As a result, the detection piece 4576 is detected by the photosensor 4545.

On the other hand, when the operation plate portion 4556 of the right start lever 4541R is pressed downward (pressing operation), the support arm portion 4557 rotates in the second rotation direction r2 against the spring force of the torsion coil spring 4560. This causes the operation plate portion 4556 to tilt downward. The rotation of the support arm portion 4557 in the second rotation direction r2 is stopped when the support arm portion 4557 abuts against a stopper (not shown) of the bearing portion 4566. Note that a cushioning material is attached to the stopper.

When the support arm 4557 rotates in the second rotational direction r2, the right shaft 4567 and right link 4575 rotate in the second rotational direction r2 together with the support arm 4557. The right link 4575 then rotates the right connecting portion 4574 in the second rotational direction r2. As a result, as described above, the detection piece 4576 is no longer detected by the photosensor 4545. The main control board 4071 then detects that the left start lever 4541L or the right start lever 4541R has been pressed.

When the right connecting portion 4574 rotates in the second rotational direction r2, the connecting shaft 4571 and the left connecting portion 4572, which are integrally connected to the right connecting portion 4574, rotate in the second rotational direction r2. At this time, the left link portion 4573 does not rotate in the second rotational direction r2, so the left start lever 4541L does not tilt in conjunction with the right start lever 4541R.

In this way, the start lever device 4540 can detect operation in the same way regardless of whether the player selects and operates the left start lever 4541L or the right start lever 4541R. Furthermore, because multiple start levers (operating means) that produce the same detection results are provided, operability can be improved. Furthermore, because the operation of the left start lever 4541L and the right start lever 4541R is detected by a common photosensor 4545, the number of parts can be reduced.

The start lever device 4540 also uses a single detection piece 4576 to detect whether either the left start lever 4541L or the right start lever 4541R has been operated. This allows for a reduction in the number of parts. Furthermore, because the left start lever 4541L and the right start lever 4541R are linked (connected) by the shaft linking mechanism 4544, it is possible to ensure that the detection results when the left start lever 4541L is operated are the same as the detection results when the right start lever 4541R is operated.

In addition, the start lever device 4540 has flat operating plate portions 4551, 4556 on the left start lever 4541L and right start lever 4541R. This makes it easier to press down the left start lever 4541L and right start lever 4541R with your hand, improving operability. Furthermore, the start lever device 4540 can provide a unique operating feel that differs from conventional start levers that have a spherical operating portion at the tip of the shaft.

In this example, a start lever has been used as an example of a specific operating means, but the operating means of the present invention is not limited to a start lever and can be applied to various input devices operated by players, such as a bed button, a settlement button, a button to lend gaming value, and a stop button.

In addition, the operation plate portion of at least one of the left start lever 4541L and right start lever 4541R in this example may be formed from a transparent or translucent resin. In that case, as in the eighth embodiment described above, a lighting base may be provided to illuminate the operation plate portion.

[Second Modification]
Next, a second modified example of the gaming machine according to the eighth embodiment will be described. The second modified example differs from the gaming machine according to the eighth embodiment in the lower mask DM. Therefore, the lower mask DM according to the second modified example will be described here.

[Lower Mask DM]
First, the configuration of the lower mask DM of the second modified example will be described with reference to FIG.

Figure 336 is a perspective view of the lower mask DM in the second modified example, viewed from the front side.

The lower mask DM of the second modified example has a lower mask base 4601 that covers the lower door base DB, and an operation unit 4602 attached to the top of the lower mask base 4601.

The lower mask base 4601 is formed in a roughly rectangular parallelepiped shape with openings on the top and back. As shown in Figure 336, a tray 4611 and a sound transmission hole 4212 are provided on the front of the lower mask base 4601. The tray 4611 is unfolded in front of the player when in use, and is placed in a retracted position where it is roughly parallel to the front of the lower mask base 4601 when not in use. The sound transmission hole 4212 is the same as in the eighth embodiment (see Figure 321).

As in the eighth embodiment, the inside of the lower mask base 4601 is provided with multiple connection hooks 4214, two guide pins 4215, a mask-side relay board 4216, a connection terminal 4217, and a lower speaker device 4218 (see Figure 322).

The operation unit 4602 is fixed using screws to an operation panel fixing portion (not shown) provided on the top of the lower mask base 4601. The operation unit 4602 covers the top surface of the lower mask base 4601.

[Tray]
Next, the structure of the tray 4611 will be described with reference to Figures 337 and 338.

Figure 337 is a perspective view of the tray 4611. Figure 338 is an exploded perspective view of the tray 4611.

As shown in FIG. 337, the tray 4611 has a tray panel 4612, a left pivot arm 4613, a right pivot arm 4614, a left support bracket 4615, and a right support bracket 4616.

The tray panel 4612 is formed as a hollow plate that is long in the left-right direction. When the tray panel 4612 is positioned in the use position, one long side faces forward (see Figure 336). When the tray panel 4612 is positioned in the retracted position, one long side faces downward (see Figure 339). The tray panel 4612 is formed from transparent resin.

As shown in Figure 338, the tray panel 4612 has an upper panel 4621 and a lower panel 4622. The upper panel 4621 forms the upper surface of the tray panel 4612 when in the use position. A recess 4621a is provided in approximately the center of the surface of the upper panel 4621. The recess 4621a is formed in a rectangular shape that is long in the left-right direction, and is designed to allow a mobile device such as a smartphone to be placed against it.

In the use position, one long side of the upper panel 4621 is located in the front, and the other long side is located in the rear (towards the lower mask base 4601). A bank rib 4621b is formed on the other long side of the upper panel 4621. The bank rib 4621b protrudes approximately perpendicularly from the surface of the upper panel 4621. The bank rib 4621b prevents items placed on the tray panel 4612 during use from falling towards the lower mask base 4601. The bank rib 4621b also prevents liquids, such as drinking water, spilled on the tray panel 4612 from flowing towards the lower mask base 4601.

The lower panel 4622 forms the underside of the tray panel 4612 when in the use position. The inner surface of the lower panel 4622 is covered by the upper panel 4621. A contactless power supply device 4630 capable of charging smartphones and tablet devices is located on the left side of the inner surface of the lower panel 4622. In other words, the contactless power supply device 4630 is located inside the tray panel 4612. Because the tray panel 4612 is formed from transparent resin, the player can recognize that the contactless power supply device 4630 is located inside the tray panel 4612. The tray panel 4612 may also be formed from a resin that does not transmit light. In that case, it is recommended to provide a mark on the tray panel 4612 indicating the position of the contactless power supply device 4630.

The left pivot arm 4613 has an arm body 4623 and an arm bracket 4624. The arm body 4623 has a pivot portion 4623a supported by the left support bracket 4615. The pivot portion 4623a is equipped with a locking mechanism that locks the pivot of the arm body 4623 between the use position and the non-use position. When a force is applied to the arm body 4623 locked in the use position to rotate it further away from the retracted position, the pivot portion 4623a is unlocked. This allows the arm body 4623 to rotate toward the retracted position. On the other hand, when a force is applied to the arm body 4623 locked in the retracted position to rotate it further away from the use position, the pivot portion 4623a is unlocked. This allows the arm body 4623 to rotate toward the use position.

The arm bracket 4624 is fixed to the arm body 4623 using screws. The arm bracket 4624 also has a panel fixing portion 4625 that is sandwiched between the upper panel 4621 and the lower panel 4622. The inner surface of the upper panel 4621 is provided with multiple bosses (not shown) into which screws for fixing the lower panel 4622 are threaded. The panel fixing portion 4625 is provided with through holes into which two of the multiple bosses (not shown) of the upper panel 4621 are inserted.

The right pivot arm 4614 is formed symmetrically to the left pivot arm 4613 and includes an arm body 4626 and an arm bracket 4627. The arm body 4627 includes a pivot part 4626a supported by the right support bracket 4616. The pivot part 4626a has the same locking mechanism as the pivot part 4623a.

The arm bracket 4627 is fixed to the arm body 4626 using screws. The arm bracket 4627 has a panel fixing portion 4628 that is sandwiched between the upper panel 4621 and the lower panel 4622. The panel fixing portion 4628 has through holes into which two of the multiple boss portions (not shown) of the upper panel 4621 are inserted.

The left support bracket 4615 and right support bracket 4616 are fixed to the front of the lower mask base 4601 (see Figure 336) using screws. The screws that fix the left support bracket 4615 and right support bracket 4616 to the lower mask base 4601 penetrate the lower mask base 4601 from the inner surface (rear side). However, the left support bracket and right support bracket according to the present invention may also be fixed using screws that penetrate the lower mask base 4601 from the front side. In this case, the tray can be attached and detached to and from the lower mask base 4601 without removing the lower mask base 4601 (lower mask DM) from the lower door base DB.

[Tray Operation]
Next, the operation of the tray 4611 will be described with reference to FIGS.

Figure 339 is a perspective view of the lower mask DM showing the tray 4611 in the retracted position.

When the tray 4611 is not in use, it is placed in the retracted position. As shown in Figure 339, when the tray 4611 is placed in the retracted position, the tray panel 4612 is approximately parallel to the front of the lower mask base 4601, and the upper panel 4621 faces forward (towards the player).

The pivoting parts 4623a and 4626a of the tray 4611, which is positioned in the retracted position, are locked. This fixes the tray 4611 in the retracted position. Therefore, even if a hand or finger catches on the tray panel 4612 and applies a force to the tray panel 4612 in a direction that rotates it toward the use position (a force that lifts the tray panel 4612 upward), the tray 4611 will not rotate toward the use position.

As mentioned above, the tray panel 4612 is made of transparent resin. Therefore, even when the tray panel 4612 faces the lower mask base 4601 in the retracted position, the decoration (design) on the front of the lower mask base 4601 can be seen through the tray panel 4612. The decoration on the front of the lower mask base 4601 may be, for example, a design sheet or logo panel provided for each model.

When using the tray 4611, first rotate the arm bodies 4623 and 4626 toward the lower mask base 4601 to unlock the rotating parts 4623a and 4626a. To rotate 4623 and 4626 toward the lower mask base 4601, press the end of one long side (lower long side) of the tray 4611 toward the lower mask base 4601.

Next, the arm bodies 4623 and 4626 are rotated away from the lower mask base 4601, so that the tray panel 4612 is approximately parallel to the horizontal direction, as shown in FIG. 336. This places the tray 4611 in the use position, and the rotating portions 4623a and 4626a are locked. As a result, the tray 4611 is fixed in the use position. The player can rest their arms, wrists, etc. on the tray panel 4612 of the tray 4611 placed in the use position, allowing them to play in a comfortable position. The player can also place a mobile device, a container of drinking water, etc. on the tray panel 4612.

[Operation unit]
Next, the configuration of the operation unit 4602 will be described with reference to FIG.

As shown in Figure 336, the operation unit 4602 has an operation unit base 4641. The operation unit base 4641 is formed in a hollow, approximately rectangular parallelepiped shape that is long in the left-right direction. A through-hole (not shown) is provided on the underside of the operation unit base 4641. This allows the internal space of the operation unit base 4641 to communicate with the internal space of the lower mask base 4601.

A start lever device 4642 having a start lever 4651 and a volume control unit 4643 are provided on the top surface of the operation unit base 4641. A payment button, a performance button, etc. may also be provided on the top surface of the operation unit base 4521. Three stop buttons 4231L, 4231C, and 4231R and a stop button operation auxiliary member 4644 are also provided on the front surface of the operation unit base 4521. The stop buttons 4231L, 4231C, and 4231R are the same as those described using Figure 324, so their description will be omitted.

[Start lever device]
Next, the configuration of the start lever device 4642 will be described with reference to FIG.

Figure 340 is a side view of the operation unit 4602.

As shown in FIG. 340, the start lever device 4642 has a start lever 4651, a lever support base (not shown), and an operation detection unit (not shown). The start lever 4651 has an operation unit 4652 and a shaft unit 4653 connected to the operation unit 4652. The lever support base and the operation detection unit are disposed inside the operation unit base 4641.

The operating unit 4652 is formed in a roughly rectangular parallelepiped shape that can be held in the palm of your hand. The front side (player side) of the top surface of the operating unit 4652 is curved to fit the base of the palm (carpus). A MAX BET button 4654 is provided on the rear side of the top surface of the operating unit 4652. This allows the MAX BET button 4654 to be pressed and operated with the fingers of the hand holding the operating unit 4652.

The operation unit 4652 may be provided with buttons other than the MAX BET button 4654, such as buttons for special effects. The operation unit 4652 may also be provided with a 1 BET button, a settlement button, a special effect button, etc., in addition to the MAX BET button 4654. For example, the settlement button may be provided on the side or bottom of the operation unit 4652 to prevent it from being accidentally operated when performing a start operation.

The shaft portion 4653 supports the operating portion 4652 so that it can move axially. Therefore, the operating portion 4652 can be pushed into the shaft portion 4653 (pushed toward the operating portion base 4641). The shaft portion 4653 penetrates the top surface of the operating portion base 4641. The lever support base supports the shaft portion 4653 so that it can tilt back and forth and left and right. Therefore, the operating portion 4652 can be slid back and forth and left and right.

The operation detection unit detects axial movement of the shaft portion 4653 in the operation unit 4652 and tilting of the shaft portion 4653 back and forth and left and right. This detection result is sent to the main control board 4071 (see Figure 317) via the mask-side relay board (not shown). When the operation detection unit detects axial movement of the shaft portion 4653 in the operation unit 4652 or tilting of the shaft portion 4653, it detects that the start lever 4651 has been operated.

As mentioned above, the start lever device 4642 has a MAX BET button 4654 provided on the operation unit 4652. This allows the player to perform a bet operation using the MAX BET button 4654 and a start operation using the start lever 4651 in one continuous motion. For example, by pressing the MAX BET button 4654 and pushing the operation unit 4652 backward, the bet operation and start operation can be performed in one continuous motion.

[Volume control]
Next, the configuration of the volume operation unit 4643 will be described with reference to FIG.

Figure 341 is a diagram explaining the configuration of the volume control unit 4643.

Figure 341A is a plan view of the volume operation unit 4643, and Figure 341B is a cross-sectional view of the volume operation unit 4643. As shown in Figure 341, the volume operation unit 4643 has a display plate 4661, a capacitance film 4662, and an LED board 4663. In other words, the volume operation unit 4643 is an operation unit that uses a capacitance-type touch panel.

The display plate 4661 forms the same plane as the upper surface of the operation unit base 4641 (see Figure 336). As shown in Figure 341B, the back surface of the display plate 4661 is provided with multiple gauge printing sections 4665 indicating a volume gauge, and a background printing section 4666 other than the multiple gauge printing sections 4665.

The multiple gauge print sections 4665 are each set in a rectangular shape with the same length in the left-right direction, and their height (the length parallel to the front-to-back direction of the gaming machine) gradually increases from left to right. The background print section 4666 is printed with black, non-transparent paint. Silk printing or pad printing, for example, can be used to print the background print section 4666.

The multiple gauge print sections 4665 are formed by stealth printing. Therefore, the multiple gauge print sections 4665 glow in a predetermined color when light is irradiated from the back side of the display plate 4661. On the other hand, the multiple gauge print sections 4665 appear to be the same black as the background print section 4666 when light is not irradiated from the back side of the display plate 4661.

The capacitance film 4662 faces the back surface of the display plate 4661. The capacitance film 4662 detects the position where the finger is touching from the slight change in capacitance that occurs between the capacitance film 4662 and the finger. The detection results of the capacitance film 4662 are transmitted to the LED board 4663. The detection results of the capacitance film 4662 are also transmitted to the main control board 4071 (see Figure 317) via a mask-side relay board (not shown).

The LED board 4663 faces the surface of the capacitance film 4662 opposite the side facing the display plate 4661. Multiple LEDs 4668 are mounted on the LED board 4663. The multiple LEDs 4668 are positioned opposite the multiple gauge print portions 4665. Light emitted from each LED 4668 passes through the capacitance film 4662 and is irradiated onto the opposing gauge print portion 4665.

When a player wants to adjust the volume, they touch the surface of the display plate 4661 with their finger. This causes the main control board 4071 (see Figure 317) to set the volume to the level corresponding to the gauge printed section 4665 closest to the touched location. The LED board 4663 also lights up the LED 4668 facing the gauge printed section 4665 closest to the touched location and the gauge printed section 4665 to the left of that gauge printed section 4665. This causes the gauge printed section 4665 closest to the touched location and the gauge printed section 4665 to the left of that gauge printed section 4665 to light up in a specified color. As a result, the player can confirm the adjusted volume from the number of lit gauge printed sections 4665.

The display plate 4661 may also be provided with volume indicators such as "Volume 1" and "Volume 2." The volume indicators should be placed near the corresponding gauge print section 4665. This makes it easier for the player to recognize the position of the gauge print section 4665 that corresponds to the volume they wish to adjust, allowing them to smoothly adjust the volume.

The LED board 4663 turns off the multiple LEDs 4668 after a predetermined time has elapsed. This causes all gauge print sections 4665 to appear black, just like the background print section 4666. In other words, when the multiple LEDs 4668 are turned off, the multiple gauge print sections 4665 can be made less noticeable. As a result, the appearance of the top surface of the operation section base 4641 on which the volume operation section 4643 is provided can be improved.

In this example, a volume control unit 4643 is provided with stealth printing on the display plate 4661. However, control units with a similar configuration are not limited to those that adjust the volume, and can be used, for example, to adjust the amount of light on a display device or to make other adjustments related to the gaming machine. Furthermore, a capacitive touch panel may be used to detect the operation of the stop button, effect button, start button, etc.

In this example, an operation unit using a capacitive touch panel has been described. However, the operation unit according to the present invention may also be configured to detect the pressed location using, for example, a strain gauge. A strain gauge is a mechanical sensor that detects strain from changes in electrical resistance by attaching a resistive material to a base material such as a plate. For example, an operation unit that detects the operation direction using a strain gauge instead of a cross key could be provided.

[Stop button operation auxiliary component]
Next, the configuration of the stop button operation auxiliary member 4644 will be described with reference to Figures 342 and 343.

Figure 342 is a perspective view of the stop button operation assisting member 4644. Figure 343 is an exploded perspective view of the stop button operation assisting member 4644. Figure 344 is a perspective view of the operation unit 4602 showing the stop button operation assisting member 4644 rotated from the use position.

As shown in Figures 342 and 343, the stop button operation assisting member 4644 has an operation assisting portion 4671, a shaft 4672, and shaft support portions 4673 and 4674. When placed in the use position (see Figure 336), the stop button operation assisting member 4644 can assist in the operation (stop operation) of the stop buttons 4231L, 4231C, and 4231R.

The operation assisting part 4671 has an auxiliary plate 4681, two bearing parts 4682 and 4683, and bearing covers 4684 and 4685. The operation assisting part 4671 is rotatably supported by the shaft 4672.

The auxiliary plate 4681 consists of a rectangular plate that is long in the left-right direction. The auxiliary plate 4681 has a button-facing surface 4681a and a pressing operation surface 4681b. When the stop button operation auxiliary member 4644 is placed in the usage position, the button-facing surface 4681a faces the three stop buttons 4231L, 4231C, and 4231R, and the pressing operation surface 4681b faces the player (see Figure 336).

Three button pressing portions 4687L, 4687C, and 4687R are formed on the button-facing surface 4681a (see Figure 344). The three button pressing portions 4687L, 4687C, and 4687R of the stop button operation assisting member 4644 arranged in the use position face the three stop buttons 4231L, 4231C, and 4231R, respectively, with a gap between them. The three button pressing portions 4687L, 4687C, and 4687R protrude approximately perpendicularly from the button-facing surface 4681a. The button pressing portion 4687C protrudes higher from the button-facing surface 4681a than the button pressing portion 4687R. Additionally, the button pressing portion 4687L protrudes higher from the button-facing surface 4681a than the button pressing portion 4687C.

The two bearings 4682, 4683 protrude from both the left and right short sides of the button-facing surface 4681a of the auxiliary plate 4681. The two bearings 4682, 4683 are made of plates with a flat surface that is approximately perpendicular to the left-right direction, and are formed in a roughly rectangular shape whose length is along the short side of the auxiliary plate 4681. The two bearings 4682, 4683 are provided with a through-hole through which the shaft 4672 passes.

The bearing covers 4684, 4685 each consist of an outer cover 4688 and an inner cover 4689. The outer cover 4688 faces the shaft support portions 4673, 4674, respectively. An engagement recess 4688a is provided on the surface of the outer cover 4688 facing the shaft support portions 4673, 4674. The inner cover 4689 faces the outer cover 4688, sandwiching the bearing portions 4682, 4683, respectively. The outer cover 4688 and the inner cover 4689 are fixed to each other using screws, with the bearing portions 4682, 4683 sandwiched between them.

The shaft supports 4673, 4674 are fixed to the front surface of the operation unit base 4641 (Figure 336) using screws. The screws that fix the shaft supports 4673, 4674 to the operation unit base 4641 penetrate the operation unit base 4641 from the inner surface side. However, the shaft supports according to the present invention may also be fixed using screws that penetrate the operation unit base 4641 from the front surface side. In this case, the stop button operation auxiliary member can be attached and detached to and from the operation unit base 4641 without removing the operation unit base 4641 from the lower mask base 4601.

The shaft supports 4673, 4674 are arranged at a predetermined distance in the left-right direction. The shaft supports 4673, 4674 have shaft insertion holes 4673a, 4674a, respectively. Both ends of the shaft 4672 are inserted into the shaft insertion holes 4673a, 4674a. Both ends of the shaft 4672 are fixed to the shaft supports 4673, 4674 using screws. At this time, angle washers 4677 are interposed between the shaft supports 4673, 4674 and the screw heads, respectively. This prevents the screws from loosening, and because the screw heads are inserted into the angle washers 4677, the appearance is improved.

In addition, stopper protrusions 4673b and 4674b are provided on the shaft support portions 4673 and 4674, respectively. The stopper protrusions 4673b and 4674b are formed in a cylindrical shape that protrudes forward. The stopper protrusions 4673b and 4674b come into contact with the button-facing surface 4681a of the auxiliary plate 4681, preventing the auxiliary plate 4681 from moving toward the operation unit base 4641.

A ball plunger (not shown) is attached to the surface of the shaft support parts 4673 and 4674 that faces the outer cover 4688 of the operation assist part 4671. The ball plunger biases the outer cover 4688. This allows the operation assist part 4671 to be fixed at any position within its rotation range.

When the stop button operation assisting member 4644 is in the use position, the ball plunger engages with the engagement recess 4688a of the outer cover 4688. This creates a clicking sensation in the player's hand as they rotate the operation assisting member 4671. As a result, the player is made aware that the stop button operation assisting member 4644 has been placed in the use position.

The operation assisting part 4671 can be rotated further from the use position (see Figure 336) toward the stop buttons 4231L, 4231C, and 4231R. In other words, when the operation assisting part 4671 is positioned in the use position, it can be rotated to the locking position where the two bearing parts 4682 and 4683 abut against the stopper protrusions 4673b and 4674b of the shaft supports 4673 and 4674.

The rotation distance of the operation assisting part 4671 from the use position to the locking position is a distance that does not allow the ball plunger to climb over the engagement recess 4688a. Therefore, when the player stops pressing the operation assisting part 4671 in the locking position, the ball plunger returns to the engagement recess 4688a. As a result, the operation assisting part 4671 returns to the use position.

The operation assist unit 4671 can be rotated in the direction opposite the use position (locking position) until the pressing operation surface 4681b contacts the underside of the operation unit base 4641. The player can then place the operation assist unit 4671 in any position that does not interfere with the stopping operation. Note that the operation assist unit of the present invention may also be configured to have a retracted position set using a locking means. In that case, it is preferable that the retracted position be configured to produce a clicking sensation in the player's hand.

[Operation of the stop button operation auxiliary member]
Next, the operation of the stop button operation auxiliary member 4644 will be described with reference to FIG.

Figure 345 is an explanatory diagram explaining the operation of the stop button operation assist member 4644.

As shown in Figure 345A, when the stop button operation auxiliary member 4644 is placed in the use position, the three button pressing portions 4687L, 4687C, and 4687R provided on the auxiliary plate 4681 face the three stop buttons 4231L, 4231C, and 4231R on the operation unit base 4641 with a gap between them. At this time, none of the three stop buttons 4231L, 4231C, and 4231R are pressed. The gap between the button pressing portion 4687L and the stop button 4231L is the smallest, and the gap between the button pressing portion 4687R and the stop button 4231R is the largest.

Next, when the player presses the auxiliary plate 4681 (operation auxiliary unit 4671) of the stop button operation auxiliary member 4644 toward the operation unit base 4641, the operation auxiliary unit 4671 rotates and the button pressing unit 4687L presses the stop button 4231L (see Figure 345B). As a result, the main control board 4071 (see Figure 317) detects that a stop operation has been performed on the stop button 4231L (first stop operation). At this time, the button pressing units 4687C, 4687R are not pressing the stop buttons 4231C, 4231R.

When the operation assisting unit 4671 rotates further, the button pressing unit 4687C presses the stop button 4231C (see Figure 345C). This causes the main control board 4071 (see Figure 317) to detect that a stop operation has been performed on the stop button 4231C (second stop operation). At this time, the button pressing unit 4687R is not pressing the stop button 4231R.

When the operation assisting part 4671 rotates further, the button pressing part 4687R presses the stop button 4231R (see Figure 345D). This causes the main control board 4071 (see Figure 317) to detect that a stop operation has been performed on the stop button 4231R (third stop operation).

In this way, by pressing the auxiliary plate 4681 of the stop button operation auxiliary member 4644 once, three stop operations can be performed in sequence. As a result, the player's actions required to perform stop operations can be reduced, reducing fatigue. Note that the gaming machine in this example does not have a so-called stop operation invalidation time, meaning that it is not necessary to wait a certain amount of time (e.g., 150 ms) between the detection of one stop operation and the detection of the next.

In this embodiment, the stop operation can be performed by pressing stop button 4231L, stop button 4231C, and stop button 4231R in that order (so-called forward pressing). However, the stop button operation assisting member of the present invention may also assist in a so-called reverse pressing stop operation, in which stop button 4231R is pressed first, and the pressing order can be set as appropriate.

[Another example of a stop button operation auxiliary member]
Next, a modified example of the stop button operation assisting member will be described with reference to FIG.

Figure 346 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the operation of another example of a stop button operation assisting member.

The stop button operation assisting member 4691, another example of a stop button operation assisting member, can assist in the stopping operation of the stop buttons 4231L, 4231C, and 4231R when placed in the use position (see Figure 346A). The stop button operation assisting member 4691 has an auxiliary plate 4692.

The auxiliary plate 4692 consists of a rectangular plate that is long in the left-right direction. The auxiliary plate 4692 is rotatably supported on a shaft (not shown) that extends in the up-down direction. The bearing portion of the auxiliary plate 4692 is provided at the left end. When the stop button operation auxiliary member 4691 is placed in the use position, the auxiliary plate 4692 faces the front surface of the operation unit base 4641. At this time, the left end of the auxiliary plate 4692 is closer to the front surface of the operation unit base 4641 than the right end of the auxiliary plate 4692.

Three button pressing portions 4693L, 4693C, and 4693R are formed on the auxiliary plate 4692. The three button pressing portions 4693L, 4693C, and 4693R protrude approximately perpendicularly from the surface of the auxiliary plate 4692 facing the front surface of the operation unit base 4641. The three button pressing portions 4693L, 4693C, and 4693R protrude from the auxiliary plate 4692 to the same height.

When the stop button operation assisting member 4691 is placed in the use position, the three button pressing portions 4693L, 4693C, and 4693R face the three stop buttons 4231L, 4231C, and 4231R, respectively, with a gap between them. At this time, none of the three stop buttons 4231L, 4231C, and 4231R are pressed. The gap between the button pressing portion 4693L and the stop button 4231L is the smallest, and the gap between the button pressing portion 4693R and the stop button 4231R is the largest.

Next, when the player presses the right end of the auxiliary plate 4692 and rotates it toward the operation unit base 4641, the button pressing unit 4693L presses the stop button 4231L (see Figure 346B). As a result, the main control board 4071 (see Figure 317) detects that a stop operation has been performed on the stop button 4231L (first stop operation). At this time, the button pressing units 4693C and 4693R are not pressing the stop buttons 4231C and 4231R.

When the auxiliary plate 4692 rotates further toward the operation unit base 4641, the button pressing unit 4693C presses the stop button 4231C, and then the button pressing unit 4693R presses the stop button 4231R. As a result, the main control board 4071 (see FIG. 317) detects that a stop operation has been performed on the stop button 4231C (second stop operation), and then detects that a stop operation has been performed on the stop button 4231R (third stop operation).

In this way, by pressing the auxiliary plate 4692 of the stop button operation auxiliary member 4691 once, three stop operations can be performed in sequence. As a result, the player's actions required to perform stop operations can be reduced, reducing the player's fatigue.

[Third Modification]
Next, a third modified example of the gaming machine according to the eighth embodiment will be described. The third modified example differs from the gaming machine according to the eighth embodiment in the operation unit. Therefore, the operation unit 4702 according to the third modified example will be described here.

[Operation unit]
First, the configuration of the operation unit 4702 will be described with reference to FIG.

Figure 347 is a schematic diagram showing the configuration of the operation unit 4702.

As shown in Figure 347, the operation unit 4702 has an operation unit base 4721. The operation unit base 4721 is formed in a hollow, approximately rectangular parallelepiped shape that is long in the left-right direction. A through-hole (not shown) is provided on the underside of the operation unit base 4721. This allows the internal space of the operation unit base 4721 to communicate with the internal space of the lower mask base 4201 (see Figure 321).

A max bet button 4722, a 1 bet button (not shown), a settlement button (not shown), and a performance button (not shown) are provided on the top surface of the operation unit base 4721. In addition, a start lever 4723 and three stop buttons (not shown) are provided on the front surface of the operation unit base 4721. The max bet button 4722, 1 bet button, settlement button, performance button, and stop button are the same as those described using Figure 324, so their description will be omitted.

The start lever 4723 has a shaft 4723a that penetrates the front of the operation unit base 4721, and a spherical operation unit 4723b that is provided at the tip of the shaft 4723a. A start operation detection unit (not shown) that detects the tilting of the shaft 4723a is also provided inside the operation unit base 4721. The detection results of the start operation detection unit are transmitted to the main control board 4071 (see Figure 317) via the mask-side relay board 4216 (see Figure 322).

The rear surface of the operation unit base 4721 has an inclined surface 4721a that faces diagonally upward. A start button 4724 is provided on the inclined surface 4721a. The start button 4724 and the max bet button 4722 are lined up at an appropriate distance in the front-to-back direction.

The start operation detection unit described above detects the pressing operation of the start button 4724. That is, the start lever device according to the third modified example has a start lever 4723, a start button 4724, and a start operation detection unit (not shown). The player can start the game by operating either the start lever 4723 or the start button 4724 (start operation).

When operating the start button 4724, the player places the palm of their hand on the max bet button 4722 and places their index and middle fingers on the start button 4724. Then, they press down on the max bet button 4722 with their palm, and press the start button 4724 with their index and middle fingers. This allows the player to smoothly perform bet and start operations with one hand.

[Other Modifications]
In the eighth embodiment and the first to third modified examples, the MAX BET buttons 4222, 4654, and 4722 are provided. However, the MAX BET buttons according to the present invention may also have a small display device such as a liquid crystal display or an organic EL display. The small display device may be:
The MAX BET button is located on the surface of the button in a position visible to the player. The display on the small display changes depending on the state. For example, the display on the small display changes depending on whether a bet is available or unavailable. This allows the player to confirm whether a bet is available before placing a bet using the MAX BET button.

The display unit A (see Figure 2) of the first embodiment described above is a so-called projection mapping device that includes an irradiation unit B that emits irradiation light for image display, and a screen device C that displays an image by emitting the irradiation light from the irradiation unit B. This irradiation unit B has a reflective mirror that reflects the irradiation light toward the screen device C. Such an irradiation unit B may also include a fan that blows air toward the reflective surface of the reflective mirror. The fan is positioned so as not to affect the irradiation light reflected by the reflective mirror. For example, the fan is activated when the gaming machine is powered on, and blows air toward the reflective surface of the reflective mirror for a predetermined period of time. This allows dust and dirt on the reflective surface of the reflective mirror to be removed by the wind, preventing the image displayed on the screen device C from becoming blurred due to dust and dirt on the reflective surface.

[Additional notes to the eighth embodiment]
Conventionally, there are known gaming machines in which a start lever is located on the left side of the main body of the gaming machine. A typical start lever has a structure in which a spherical operating part is provided at the tip of a shaft (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2004-105625).

However, there is room for further improvement in operating means such as the start lever.

The addition was made in consideration of these points, with the aim of improving the operability of the operating means.

To achieve the above objective, the appendix provides the following gaming machine.

(1) A first operating means (e.g., a left start lever 4541L) and a second operating means (e.g., a right start lever 4541R) provided at a position spaced apart from the first operating means;
An operation detection means (e.g., a photosensor 4545) capable of detecting an operation;
Equipped with
The operation detection means is capable of detecting an operation whether the first operation means is operated or the second operation means is operated.

With this configuration, regardless of whether the player selects and operates the first operating means or the second operating means, the operation can be detected in the same way. Furthermore, because multiple operating means that produce the same detection results are provided, the operability of the operating means can be improved. Furthermore, because the operation of the first operating means and the operation of the second operating means are detected by a common operation detection means, the number of parts can be reduced.

(2) In the gaming machine of (1) above,
A connection portion (e.g., a shaft coupling mechanism 4544) is provided to connect the first operating means and the second operating means,
The connection portion has a detected portion (e.g., a detection piece 4576),
The operation detection means can detect that an operation has been performed when the position of the detection target portion changes.

With this configuration, a single detection target detects whether the first operating means or the second operating means has been operated. This reduces the number of parts. Furthermore, because the first operating means and the second operating means are connected, the detection results when the first operating means is operated and the detection results when the second operating means are operated can be made to be the same.

(3) In the gaming machine of (2) above,
At least one of the first operating means and the second operating means is formed in a flat plate shape.

This configuration makes it easier to press down the flat operating means with your hand, improving operability. It also provides a unique operating feel.

Ninth Embodiment
The first to eighth embodiments have been described above. The ninth embodiment will now be described. The basic configuration of the pachislot machine 1 according to the ninth embodiment is the same as that of the pachislot machine 1 according to the first to eighth embodiments. In the following, components that are the same as those of the pachislot machine 1 according to the first to eighth embodiments will be described with the same reference numerals. Furthermore, explanations of portions that apply to the ninth embodiment from the explanations of the first to eighth embodiments will be omitted.

Note that even if the above description contains statements that are limited to the pachislot machine 1 of the first embodiment, such as "In the first embodiment, ..." or "In the pachislot machine 1 of the first embodiment, ...," they can also be applied to the pachislot machine 1 of the ninth embodiment, as long as they do not deviate from the spirit of the ninth embodiment. Similarly, the above description contains statements that are limited to the pachislot machines 1 of the second to eighth embodiments, as long as they do not deviate from the spirit of the ninth embodiment. Therefore, it is possible to partially replace or combine each of the configurations shown in the first to eighth embodiments (including each of the configurations shown in the modified examples and the extended examples) with the configuration shown in the ninth embodiment.

Furthermore, even if a component has a different shape from the pachislot machine 1 according to the first to eighth embodiments, the same reference numerals may be used for convenience to designate components with similar functions. Furthermore, even if a component has the same shape or the same processing as the pachislot machine 1 according to the first to eighth embodiments, different reference numerals or step numbers may be used for convenience.

[12. Alternative examples of main control board case]
348 to 362, other configuration examples of the main board case in a pachislot machine will be described. Note that, with regard to the various specifications and functions described as other examples of the main board case in this embodiment, some or all of them can be applied to other gaming machines (other configuration examples) described in this embodiment, and also, with regard to the various specifications and functions described as other gaming machines (other configuration examples), some or all of them can be applied to other examples of the main board case in this embodiment. In other words, an appropriate combination of these can be considered as the invention according to this embodiment.

[12-1. Pachislot machine equipped with a main board case according to another example]
First, with reference to Figures 348 and 349, a pachislot machine (referred to as pachislot machine 601 in this example) to which a main board case according to another example is attached will be described. Figure 348 is a front view showing the main board case attached to the cabinet G of pachislot machine 601. Figure 349 is a perspective view showing the main board case removed from the cabinet G of pachislot machine 601. Note that pachislot machine 601 in this example is configured as a gaming machine in which games are played using physical gaming value. However, the invention described in this example can also be applied to medalless gaming machines.

The main board case 620 shown in Figures 348 and 349 houses and seals the main control board 610 (see Figure 355). The main board case 620 is detachably attached to the top of the cabinet G. The main board case 620 is made of transparent (or nearly transparent) resin so that the state of the main control board 610 can be seen.

Hereinafter, the vertical, horizontal, and depth directions will be used when viewing the opening of cabinet G from the front. The side viewed in the depth direction will be referred to as the near side, and the side opposite the side viewed in the depth direction will be referred to as the far side.

The main board case 620 is formed as a flat, approximately rectangular parallelepiped that is long in the left-right direction. The main board case 620 has a front side, which is the surface closest to you in the depth direction, and a back side, which is the surface farthest in the depth direction. The back side of the main board case 620 faces the back panel 110a of the reel unit rear base G110, which will be described later. The front side of the main board case 620 faces the mounting surface of the main control board 610. Therefore, when the gaming facility manager opens the upper door mechanism UD (not shown), he or she can see the mounting surface of the main control board 610 from the front of the main board case 620.

The right side of the main board case 620 is provided with a main body fixing crimping portion 620a, an inspection crimping portion 620b, a board recovery crimping portion 620c, and a sealing crimping portion 620d.

The main body fixing crimping portion 620a is connected to the first case bracket G120a (see Figure 349) installed inside the cabinet G when the pachislot machine 601 is shipped. The main body fixing crimping hook 658 (see Figure 357), described below, is used to connect the main body fixing crimping portion 620a to the first case bracket G120a. When the main body fixing crimping portion 620a and the first case bracket G120a are connected, the main board case 620 and cabinet G (gaming machine main body) are sealed. When inspecting the main control board 610 after installing the pachislot machine 601, the connection between the main body fixing crimping portion 620a and the first case bracket G120a is disconnected. To disconnect the main body fixing crimping portion 620a from the first case bracket G120a, the main body fixing crimping portion 620a must be completely cut using a tool such as pliers. Therefore, when the connection between the main body fixing crimping portion 620a and the first case bracket G120a is released, traces remain that indicate that the main board case 620 has been removed from the cabinet G.

After inspecting the main control board 610, the inspection crimping portion 620b is connected to the second case bracket G120b (see Figure 349) provided inside the cabinet G. The main body crimping hook 656 (see Figure 362), described below, is used to connect the inspection crimping portion 620b to the second case bracket G120b. Connecting the inspection crimping portion 620b to the second case bracket G120b seals the main board case 620, and also seals the main board case 620 and the cabinet G (the gaming machine body). When removing the main board case 620 from the cabinet G after inspecting the main control board 610, the connection between the inspection crimping portion 620b and the second case bracket G120b is disconnected. To disconnect the inspection crimping portion 620b from the second case bracket G120b, the inspection crimping portion 620b must be completely cut using a tool such as pliers. Therefore, when the connection between the inspection crimping portion 620b and the second case bracket G120b is released, evidence remains that the main board case 620 has been opened and that the main board case 620 has been removed from the cabinet G.

The board retrieval crimping portion 620c is used when retrieving the main control board 610. The case crimping hook 657 (see Figure 352), described below, is connected to the board retrieval crimping portion 620c. This seals the main board case 620. To release the connection between the board retrieval crimping portion 620c and the case crimping hook 657, the board retrieval crimping portion 620c must be completely cut with a tool such as nippers. Therefore, when the connection between the board retrieval crimping portion 620c and the case crimping hook 657 is released, evidence that the main board case 620 has been opened remains.

The sealing crimping portion 620d is connected to the case crimping hook 657 at the time of shipment. This seals the main board case 620. After the pachislot machine 601 is installed, the connection between the sealing crimping portion 620d and the case crimping hook 657 is disconnected when the main control board 610 is inspected. To disconnect the sealing crimping portion 620d and the case crimping hook 657, it is necessary to completely cut the sealing crimping portion 620d with a tool such as nippers. Therefore, disconnecting the sealing crimping portion 620d and the case crimping hook 657 leaves evidence that the main board case 620 has been opened.

As shown in Figure 349, two engagement protrusions 620e are provided on the left side of the main board case 620. The two engagement protrusions 620e protrude approximately perpendicularly from the left side of the main board case 620. The two engagement protrusions 620e are inserted into two engagement holes G121 in the reel unit rear base G110 provided in the cabinet G. In other words, the main board case 620 is attached to the reel unit rear base G110 provided in the cabinet G.

The reel unit rear base G110 has a back panel G110a, a top panel G110b, and left and right side panels G110c and G110d. The back panel G110a faces the rear wall G3 of the cabinet G, and the top panel G110b faces the top wall G4. The left and right side panels G110c and G110d face the left and right side walls G2 of the cabinet G. The reel unit rear base G110 is fixed to the cabinet G using screws.

The back panel G110a is formed in a rectangular shape that is long in the left-right direction. The first case bracket G120a and second case bracket G120b described above are attached to the right end of the surface of the back panel G110a that faces the front in the depth direction. Furthermore, on the surface of the back panel G110a that faces the front in the depth direction, a plurality of ribs G123 are formed in areas other than the areas where the first case bracket G120a and second case bracket G120b are attached, i.e., in the area facing the main board case 620.

The multiple ribs G123 have vertical ribs extending up and down and horizontal ribs extending left and right, and are formed in a grid pattern. This allows the main board case 620 to come into contact with the multiple ribs G123. As a result, the main board case 620 does not come into surface contact with the back panel G110a, and heat dissipation from the main board case 620 is not hindered. Furthermore, ventilation holes G124 are provided in many of the areas defined by the multiple ribs G123. This allows a space that leads to the rear wall G3 deeper in the depth direction than the main board case 620. As a result, heat dissipation performance is improved. Note that no through-holes are provided in the area of the rear wall G3 of the cabinet G that faces the ventilation holes G124 of the back panel G110a. This prevents unauthorized access to the main board case 620 (main control board 610) from the rear wall G3 side (the rear side of the cabinet G).

The top plate G110b is continuous with the upper edge of the back plate 110a. Two openings G125 are provided in the top plate G110b. No through-holes are provided in the area of the top wall G4 of the cabinet G facing the two openings G125. This prevents unauthorized access to the interior of the cabinet G or the main board case 620 (main control board 610) from the top wall G4 side (the top side of the cabinet G).

The left side panel G110c is continuous with the left edge of the back panel 110a. The two engagement holes G121 mentioned above are formed in the left side panel G110c. The two engagement holes G121 are aligned vertically at an appropriate distance and penetrate the left side panel G110c horizontally. The two engagement holes G121 are formed in a roughly rectangular shape, with one edge on the far side in the depth direction located at the corner formed by the left side panel 110a and the back panel 110b. No through-holes are provided in the area of the left side wall G2 of the cabinet G facing the two engagement holes G121. This prevents unauthorized access to the interior of the cabinet G or the main board case 620 (main control board 610) from the left side wall G2 side (the left side of the cabinet G).

The right side panel G110c is continuous with the right edge of the back panel 110a. An opening G126 is provided in the left side panel G110c. This ensures sufficient working space when connecting or disconnecting the first case bracket G120a and second case bracket G120b to the inspection crimping portion 620b and main body fixing crimping portion 620a of the main board case 620. No through-holes are provided in the area facing the opening G126 in the right side wall G2 of the cabinet G. This prevents unauthorized access to the interior of the cabinet G or the main board case 620 (main control board 610) from the right side wall G2 side (the right side of the cabinet G).

A board control number certification sticker 604, which is a first affixing member; a product model name sticker 605, which is a second affixing member; and a record sticker 606, which is a third affixing member, are affixed to the front of the main board case 620. The board control number certification sticker 604 contains, for example, the board control number and a two-dimensional barcode for displaying a web page containing information related to the main control board 610. The product model name sticker 605 contains the product name and model of the pachislot machine 601 and the name of the manufacturer. The record sticker 606 contains, for example, a symbol that can identify the manufacturer, the board control number, and the date of manufacture. The record sticker 606 also has columns for recording the sealing date and the name of the person who sealed the main body fixing crimping portion 620a, the inspection crimping portion 620b, the board recovery crimping portion 620c, and the sealing crimping portion 620d. Furthermore, the recording sticker 606 contains a two-dimensional barcode for displaying a web page containing information such as the board control number, manufacturing date, and sealing date.

The product model name sticker 605 and recording sticker 606 are stickers with a transparent background (made from a transparent material). Therefore, the inside of the main board case 620 (main control board 610) can be seen through the product model name sticker 605 and recording sticker 606. On the other hand, the board management number certification sticker 604 is an opaque sticker (made from an opaque material). Furthermore, the board management number certification sticker 604 is smaller than the product model name sticker 605 and recording sticker 606. This prevents the visibility of the inside of the main board case 620 from being reduced.

[12-2. Components mounted on main control board according to another example]
Next, referring to Figure 350, we will explain the components mounted on the main control board 610.

Figure 350 is a plan view showing the mounting surface of the main control board 610.

As shown in Figure 350, the main control board 610 is formed in a rectangular shape that is long in the left-right direction. One flat surface of the main control board 610 is a mounting surface on which various components are mounted, and no components are mounted on the other flat surface of the main control board 610. Note that the main control board according to the present invention may have components mounted on both flat surfaces. When the main control board 610 is housed in the main board case 620, the mounting surface of the main control board 610 faces the front in the depth direction.

Two screw holes 610a, 610b and two positioning holes 610c, 610d are provided at the four corners of the main control board 610. Screw hole 610a is located in the lower right corner of the main control board 610, and screw hole 610b is located in the upper left corner of the main control board 610. Board fixing screws (not shown) for fixing the main control board 610 to the main board case 620 pass through the two screw holes 610a, 610b. Positioning hole 610c is located in the lower left corner of the main control board 610, and positioning hole 610d is located in the upper right corner of the main control board 610. Positioning protrusions 672, 676 (see Figure 353), described below, provided on the main board case 620 are fitted into the two positioning holes 610c, 610d. This allows the number of board fixing screws required to fix the main control board 610 to the main board case 620 to be reduced to two, reducing the number of steps required to assemble the main control board 610. Furthermore, when fixing using the board fixing screws, the main control board 610 can be temporarily fixed by fitting the positioning protrusions 672, 676 into the two positioning holes 610c, 610d. As a result, the assembly work of the main control board 610 can be carried out easily.

The mounting surface of the main control board 610 is equipped with a CPU chip 611, a power supply connector 612, a main control signal connector 613, a sub-control signal connector 614, and a strike/settlement switch 615. Also mounted on the mounting surface of the main control board 610 are a setting key cylinder 616, a setting operation switch 617, an inspection connector 618, a role ratio monitor device 619, and other components.

CPU chip 611 is a specific example of a predetermined electronic component related to game control. Note that the predetermined electronic component according to the present invention is not limited to a CPU chip, and various control electronic components such as an MCU (Micro-Control Unit) chip can be used as long as it is an electronic component related to game control.

The CPU chip 611 is located slightly above the center of the mounting surface of the main control board 610. The CPU chip 611 combines the CPU, ROM, and RAM into a single chip. The power connector 612, main control signal connector 613, sub control signal connector 614, and stop/adjustment switch 615 are located at the bottom of the mounting surface of the main control board 610. The power connector 612, main control signal connector 613, sub control signal connector 614, and stop/adjustment switch 615 are lined up at appropriate intervals along the bottom edge of the main control board 610.

The main control signal connector 613 is located approximately in the center in the left-right direction. The main control signal connector 613 is formed in the shape of a rectangular parallelepiped that is elongated in the left-right direction. A main control signal harness (not shown) is detachably connected to the main control signal connector 613. The power supply connector 612 is located to the right of the main control signal connector 613. The power supply connector 612 is formed in the shape of a rectangular parallelepiped that is slightly elongated in the left-right direction. A main board power supply harness (not shown) is connected to the power supply connector 612.

The sub-control signal connector 614 is located to the left of the main control signal connector 613. The sub-control signal connector 614 is formed in the shape of a rectangular parallelepiped that is long in the left-right direction. A sub-control signal harness (not shown) is connected to the sub-control signal connector 614. To the left of the sub-control signal connector 614 is the lower left corner of the main control board 610, which is provided with a positioning hole 610c. The lower left corner of the main control board 610 is an area where fewer components are placed compared to other areas.

The stop/settlement switch 615 is located to the right of the power connector 612. The stop/settlement switch 615 is a switch used to set whether or not to stop playing and automatically settle the balance after the bonus ends. To the right of the stop/settlement switch 615 is the bottom right corner of the main control board 610, which has a screw hole 610a.

The setting key cylinder 616 and setting operation switch 617 are located in the upper right corner of the main control board 610. The setting key cylinder 616 and setting operation switch 617 are lined up at an appropriate distance in the vertical direction. The setting key cylinder 616 is located below the setting operation switch 617. The setting key cylinder 616 has a roughly cylindrical cylinder body with an axis roughly perpendicular to the mounting surface. A setting key insertion port is formed on the end face of the cylinder body. The setting operation switch 617 has a roughly cylindrical operation knob with an axis roughly perpendicular to the mounting surface. When a setting key is inserted into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder 616 and turned ON, the setting value can be changed by operating the setting operation switch 617. The changed setting value can be confirmed (determined) by, for example, operating the start lever (not shown).

The inspection connector 618 is located in the upper left corner of the main control board 610. The inspection connector 618 is formed in the shape of a rectangular prism that protrudes approximately perpendicular to the mounting surface. An inspection harness (not shown) is connected to the inspection connector 618 when inspecting the main control board 610 after the pachislot machine 601 has been installed in an amusement facility. The winning combination monitor device 619 is composed of, for example, a four-digit, seven-segment LED. The winning combination monitor device 619 sequentially displays various percentage information related to games that has been compiled and calculated by the CPU chip 611 (main CPU). This percentage information is used by the amusement facility manager when checking to see if the pachislot machine 601 has been tampered with, for example.

Each component placed on the main control board 610 is silk-screened with letters, numbers, or a combination of letters to identify the component. This improves work efficiency when manufacturing the main control board 610. Furthermore, by comparing the components with the silk-screen printing, it is easy to check for any unauthorized modifications to the main control board 610.

[12-3. Configuration of main board case according to another example]
Next, the configuration of the main board case 620 will be described with reference to Figures 351 to 355.

Figure 351 is an exploded perspective view of the main board case 620. Figure 352 is an oblique view of the upper case of the main board case 620. Figure 353 is a plan view showing the inside of the upper case of the main board case 620. Figure 354 is a view showing the right side of the upper case of the main board case 620. Figure 355 is a view showing the left side of the upper case of the main board case 620.

As shown in Figure 351, the main board case 620 is composed of a lower case 621 and an upper case 622 that face each other in the depth direction. The lower case 621 is located at the back in the depth direction and forms the back surface of the main board case 620. The upper case 622 is located at the front in the depth direction and forms the front surface of the main board case 620.

(Lower case configuration)
The lower case 621 has a back panel 621a, an upper side panel 621b, a lower side panel 621c, a left side panel 621d, and a right side panel 621e. The back panel 621a is a generally rectangular panel that is long in the left-right direction. The upper side panel 621b is continuous with the upper long side of the back panel 621a and protrudes generally perpendicularly toward the front in the depth direction. The lower side panel 621c is continuous with the lower long side of the back panel 621a and protrudes generally perpendicularly toward the front in the depth direction. The left side panel 621d is continuous with the left short side of the back panel 621a and protrudes generally perpendicularly toward the front in the depth direction. The right side panel 621e is continuous with the right short side of the back panel 621a and protrudes generally perpendicularly toward the front in the depth direction.

(Back panel of the lower case)
Hereinafter, the surface of the back plate 621a of the lower case 621 that faces the upper case 622 will be referred to as the inner surface, and the surface of the back plate 621a opposite the inner surface will be referred to as the outer surface. An upper rib 632, a lower rib 633, and a right rib 634 are provided on the inner surface of the back plate 621a.

The upper rib 632 is located on the top of the rear plate 621a. The upper rib 632 faces the upper side plate 621b with a small gap between them and extends in the left-right direction. The upper rib 632 is a plate with a flat surface that is approximately perpendicular to the up-down direction. One long side of the upper rib 632 is continuous with the inner surface of the rear plate 621a. Four upper engagement pieces (not shown) are provided between the upper side plate 621b and the upper rib 632. The four upper engagement pieces are lined up at a predetermined interval in the left-right direction. The four upper engagement pieces are continuous with at least one of the upper side plate 621b and the upper rib 632. The four upper engagement pieces engage with four upper engagement grooves 682 (described below) of the upper case 622.

The lower rib 633 is located at the bottom of the rear plate 621a. The lower rib 633 faces the lower side plate 621c with a small gap between them and extends in the left-right direction. The lower rib 633 is a plate with a flat surface that is approximately perpendicular to the up-down direction. One long side of the lower rib 633 is continuous with the inner surface of the rear plate 621a. Four lower engagement pieces (not shown) are provided between the lower side plate 621c and the lower rib 633. The four lower engagement pieces are lined up at a predetermined interval in the left-right direction. The four lower engagement pieces are continuous with at least one of the lower side plate 621c and the lower rib 633. The four lower engagement pieces engage with four lower engagement grooves 685 (described below) of the upper case 622.

The right rib 634 is located on the right side of the back panel 621a. It faces the right side panel 621e with an appropriate gap between them and extends vertically. The right rib 634 is a plate with a plane that is approximately perpendicular to the left-right direction. One long side of the right rib 634 is continuous with the inner surface of the back panel 621a. If the lower case 621 and the upper case 622 are engaged when the board fixing screws (not shown) for securing the main control board 610 are not tight enough, the right rib 634 interferes with the board fixing screws. Therefore, the main board case 620 cannot be assembled when the board fixing screws are not tight enough. Furthermore, the right rib 634, together with the first inner wall portion 667 of the upper case 622 (see Figure 352), separates the internal space that houses the main control board 610 from the area where the above-mentioned crimping portions 620a-620d are provided. This prevents unauthorized access to the main control board 610 from the crimped portions 620a-620d side.

(Lower side panel of the lower case)
A seal affixing plate 635 is provided on the lower side plate 621c of the lower case 621. The seal affixing plate 635 is continuous with the left end of the lower side plate 621c and protrudes toward the front in the depth direction. The seal affixing plate 635 is a plate that forms the same plane as the lower side plate 621c. The seal affixing plate 635, together with a case fixing portion 684 of the upper case 622 (described later), forms a seal affixing surface.

(Left side panel of the lower case)
The left side panel 621d of the lower case 621 is provided with the two engaging protrusions 620e, two left cover pieces 636a, and a rear cover piece 636b. The two engaging protrusions 620e are aligned vertically at an appropriate distance. The two engaging protrusions 620e protrude substantially perpendicularly from the left side panel 621d. The two engaging protrusions 620e have a U-shaped cross section perpendicular to the left-right direction. The left side panel 621d is formed with through-holes (not shown) that face the spaces inside each engaging protrusion 620e. Reinforcing pieces 691 (described later) of the upper case 622 pass through the through-holes in the left side panel 621d. The reinforcing pieces 691 that pass through the through-holes in the left side panel 621d are inserted into the spaces inside the engaging protrusions 620e.

The two left-side lid pieces 636a are positioned between the two engaging protrusions 620e. The two left-side lid pieces 636a are provided on a step 637 that protrudes outward approximately perpendicularly from the left side panel 621d. The two left-side lid pieces 636a are formed into a rectangular plate shape by cutting out the step 637. The rear sides of the two left-side lid pieces 636a in the depth direction are continuous with the left side panel 621d via the step 637. The rear lid piece 636b is formed into a rectangular plate shape that protrudes inward approximately perpendicularly from the left side panel 621d. The rear lid piece 636b has a flat surface that is approximately perpendicular to the depth direction. The rear lid piece 636b faces the step 637 in the left-right direction. The length of one side extending in the vertical direction of the rear lid piece 636b is approximately equal to the length of the step 637 in the vertical direction. The two left-side cover pieces 636a and the rear-side cover piece 636b close the hook insertion/removal opening 654a (see Figure 355) of the crimping hook storage section 654 (described below) provided in the upper case 622.

(Right side panel of the lower case)
The right side plate 621e of the lower case 621 is provided with a main body fixing crimping part 638a, an inspection crimping part 638b, a board recovery crimping part 638c, a sealing crimping part 638d, and a boss part 639. The main body fixing crimping part 638a constitutes part of the main body fixing crimping part 620a (see FIG. 349 ). The inspection crimping part 638b constitutes part of the inspection crimping part 620b. The board recovery crimping part 638c constitutes part of the board recovery crimping part 620c. The sealing crimping part 638d constitutes part of the sealing crimping part 620d.

The boss 639 is located at the lower end of the right side panel 621e. The boss 639 is formed in a generally cylindrical shape that protrudes toward the front in the depth direction. A screw hole extending in the depth direction is formed in the boss 639. A case fixing screw 640 (Figure 360) is threaded into the screw hole of the boss 639 to fix the upper case 622 to the lower case 621.

(Upper case configuration)
The upper case 622 has a front panel 622a, an upper side panel 622b, a lower side panel 622c, a left side panel 622d, and a right side panel 622e. The front panel 622a is a generally rectangular plate that is long in the left-right direction. The upper side panel 622b is continuous with the upper long side of the front panel 622a and protrudes generally perpendicularly toward the rear in the depth direction. The lower side panel 622c is continuous with the lower long side of the front panel 622a and protrudes generally perpendicularly toward the rear in the depth direction. The left side panel 622d is continuous with the left short side of the front panel 622a and protrudes generally perpendicularly toward the rear in the depth direction. The right side panel 622e is continuous with the right short side of the front panel 622a and protrudes generally perpendicularly toward the rear in the depth direction.

(Front panel of the upper case)
The front plate 622a of the upper case 622 faces the mounting surface of the main control board 610. Hereinafter, the surface of the front plate 622a facing the main control board 610 (lower case 621) will be referred to as the inner surface, and the surface of the front plate 622a opposite the inner surface will be referred to as the outer surface. The outer surfaces of the front plate 622a include a first outer surface 641a, a second outer surface 641b recessed in the depth direction further than the first outer surface 641a, and a third outer surface 641c recessed in the depth direction further than the second outer surface 641b. The second outer surface 641b is formed on the left and right sides of the upper end of the front plate 622a. The third outer surface 641c is formed as a continuous flat surface extending from the left end to the lower end of the front plate 622a. The first outer surface 641a is the area of the front plate 622a other than the second outer surface 641b and the third outer surface 641c, and occupies most of the area of the front plate 622a.

The first outer surface 641a is provided with a recessed surface portion 643, a first sealing recessed surface portion 644 which is a recessed surface portion for a first affixing member, a second sealing recessed surface portion 645 which is a recessed surface portion for a second affixing member, and a third sealing recessed surface portion 646 which is a recessed surface portion for a third affixing member. The recessed surface portion 643, the first sealing recessed surface portion 644, the second sealing recessed surface portion 645, and the third sealing recessed surface portion 646 are recessed toward the rear in the depth direction.

The beveled portion 643 is located approximately in the center of the upper part of the first outer surface 641a. The beveled portion 643 is formed as a rectangular recess that is long in the left-right direction. The beveled portion 643 is set to a predetermined depth, and the bottom 643a of the beveled portion 643 faces the CPU chip 611 (see Figure 356) mounted on the main control board 610 with a gap between them. The bottom 643a of the beveled portion 643 is formed as a rectangle that is long in the left-right direction. The outline of the bottom 643a of the beveled portion 643 is larger than the outline of the CPU chip 611. When the CPU chip 611 is viewed from the front panel 622a side with the main control board 610 attached to the main board case 620, the outline of the CPU chip 611 fits within the outline of the bottom 643a of the beveled portion 643.

The recessed surface portion 643 is formed so that its opening widens as it moves away from the bottom 643a (towards the first outer surface 641a). That is, the opening area of the recessed surface portion 643 is larger than the area of the bottom 643a. In other words, the outline of the opening in the recessed surface portion 643 is larger than the outline of the bottom 643a, and when the recessed surface portion 643 is viewed from the front, the bottom 643a is located inside the opening of the recessed surface portion 643. The four side walls of the recessed surface portion 643 are each inclined so that the opening widens as it moves away from the bottom 643a. The recessed surface portion may also be formed as a circular or elliptical recess. In this case, the side walls of the recessed surface portion may be tapered so that the opening widens as it moves away from the bottom 643a. In this case, the outline of the bottom of the recessed surface portion is made larger than the outer shape of the CPU chip 611.

The first sealing recess 644 is provided in the lower left corner of the first outer surface 641a. The first sealing recess 644 is formed as a rectangular recess that is long in the left-right direction. The board management number certification sticker 604 (see Figure 348) is affixed to the first sealing recess 644. In other words, the first sealing recess 644 is provided in the area where the board management number certification sticker 604 is affixed. The outer shape of the first sealing recess 644 is slightly larger than the outer shape of the board management number certification sticker 604. By providing the first sealing recess 644, the position where the board management number certification sticker 604 is affixed can be easily identified.

The first sealing recessed portion 644 is set to a depth approximately equal to the thickness of the board management number certification sticker 604. This means that the board management number certification sticker 604 does not protrude further forward in the depth direction than the first outer surface 641a, or if it does protrude, it protrudes very slightly. As a result, the board management number certification sticker 604 attached to the first sealing recessed portion 644 is less likely to peel off. In addition, the four corners of the first sealing recessed portion 644 are formed at right angles (approximately 90 degrees). This means that the board management number certification sticker 604 can be easily attached to the first sealing recessed portion 644, whether the four corners of the board management number certification sticker 604 are right angles or rounded.

The second sealing recess 645 is provided below the recess 643. The second sealing recess 645 is formed as a substantially square recess. The product model name sticker 605 (see Figure 348) is affixed to the second sealing recess 645. That is, the second sealing recess 645 is provided in the area where the product model name sticker 605 is affixed. The outer shape of the second sealing recess 645 is slightly larger than the outer shape of the product model name sticker 605. The outer shape of the second sealing recess 645 is also larger than the outer shape of the first sealing recess 644. By providing the second sealing recess 645, the position where the product model name sticker 605 is affixed can be easily identified.

The second seal recessed surface 645 is set to a depth approximately equal to the thickness of the product model name sticker 605. This ensures that the product model name sticker 605 does not protrude forward in the depth direction beyond the first outer surface 641a, or if it does protrude, it protrudes very slightly. As a result, the product model name sticker 605 attached to the second seal recessed surface 645 is less likely to peel off. In addition, the four corners of the second seal recessed surface 645 are formed at right angles (approximately 90 degrees). This means that the product model name sticker 605 can be easily attached to the second seal recessed surface 645, whether the four corners of the product model name sticker 605 are right angles or rounded.

The third seal recessed surface portion 646 is provided to the right of the recessed surface portion 643 and the second seal recessed surface portion 645. The third seal recessed surface portion 646 is formed as a substantially square recess. The recording sticker 606 (see Figure 348) is affixed to the third seal recessed surface portion 646. In other words, the third seal recessed surface portion 646 is provided in the affixing area of the recording sticker 606. The outer shape of the third seal recessed surface portion 646 is slightly larger than the outer shape of the recording sticker 606. The outer shape of the third seal recessed surface portion 646 is also larger than the outer shape of the second seal recessed surface portion 645. By providing the third seal recessed surface portion 646, the position where the recording sticker 606 is affixed can be easily identified.

The third seal recessed surface portion 646 is set to a depth approximately equal to the thickness of the recording sticker 606. This means that the recording sticker 606 does not protrude further forward in the depth direction than the first outer surface 641a, or if it does protrude, it protrudes very slightly. As a result, the recording sticker 606 attached to the third seal recessed surface portion 646 is less likely to peel off. In addition, the four corners of the third seal recessed surface portion 646 are formed at right angles (approximately 90 degrees). This means that the recording sticker 606 can be easily attached to the third seal recessed surface portion 646, whether the four corners of the recording sticker 606 are right angles or rounded.

The board control number certification sticker 604, product model name sticker 605, and recording sticker 606 are set to different sizes. Therefore, by providing the first seal recessed surface 644, the second seal recessed surface 645, and the third seal recessed surface 646, it is possible to prevent mistakes in affixing the board control number certification sticker 604, product model name sticker 605, and recording sticker 606 when manufacturing the main board case 620.

An inspection connector through-hole 647 is provided on the second outer surface 641b, which is formed on the left side of the upper end of the front plate 622a. The inspection connector through-hole 647 is rectangular. The inspection connector 618 (see Figure 350) provided on the main control board 610 passes through the inspection connector through-hole 647. The outer shape of the inspection connector through-hole 647 is larger than the outer shape of the inspection connector 618. Therefore, a gap is formed between the inspection connector through-hole 647 and the inspection connector 618. As a result, when the inspection harness is connected to the inspection connector 618, even if the position of the inspection connector 618 is slightly misaligned, the inspection connector 618 will not interfere with the upper case 622. As a result, unnecessary force is not applied to the upper case 622, preventing damage to the upper case 622.

A cylinder through-hole 648 and a switch through-hole 649 are provided on the second outer surface 641b, which is formed on the right side of the upper end of the front plate 622a (see Figure 353). The cylinder through-hole 648 is circular. The setting key cylinder 616 (see Figure 350) provided on the main control board 610 passes through the cylinder through-hole 648. The diameter (external shape) of the cylinder through-hole 648 is larger than the diameter (external shape) of the setting key cylinder 616. Therefore, a gap is formed between the cylinder through-hole 648 and the setting key cylinder 616. As a result, when a setting key (not shown) is inserted into the setting key cylinder 616 and operated, even if the position of the setting key cylinder 616 is slightly misaligned, the setting key cylinder 616 does not interfere with the upper case 622. As a result, unnecessary force is not applied to the upper case 622 when the setting key is operated, preventing damage to the upper case 622.

The switch through-hole 649 is circular. The knob of the setting operation switch 617 (see Figure 350) provided on the main control board 610 passes through the switch through-hole 649. The diameter (external shape) of the switch through-hole 649 is larger than the diameter (external shape) of the operation knob of the setting operation switch 617. Therefore, a gap is formed between the switch through-hole 649 and the operation knob of the setting operation switch 617. As a result, even if the position of the operation knob of the setting operation switch 617 is slightly misaligned when the operation knob of the setting operation switch 617 is operated, the operation knob of the setting operation switch 617 will not interfere with the upper case 622. As a result, unnecessary force is not applied to the upper case 622 when the setting operation switch 617 is operated, preventing damage to the upper case 622.

The cylinder through-hole 648 and the switch through-hole 649 are opened and closed by a cover member 651. That is, the setting key cylinder 616 and the setting operation switch 617 that protrude from the cylinder through-hole 648 and the switch through-hole 649 are opened and closed by the cover member 651. The cover member 651 is made of a transparent (or nearly transparent) resin so that the setting key cylinder 616 and the setting operation switch 617 can be seen.

As shown in Figure 354, the cover member 651 is a member formed in the shape of a hollow housing with one side open. The cover member 651 is rotatably connected to a hinge receiving portion 681 provided on the upper side plate 622b. When the cover member 651 closes the second outer surface 641b, the opening of the cover member 651 faces the second outer surface 641b. As a result, the cover member 651 and the second outer surface 641b form a closed space. This space houses the setting key cylinder 616, which passes through the cylinder through-hole 648, and the setting operation switch 617, which passes through the switch through-hole 649.

When the cover member 651 closes the second outer surface 641b, the cover surface 651a facing the opening of the cover member 651 forms approximately the same plane as the first outer surface 641a (see Figure 351). This creates a sense of unity between the cover member 651 and the first outer surface 641a, improving design. The cover member 651 also prevents interference when determining the placement of other components and devices to be placed in the cabinet G, and components and devices installed in the upper door mechanism UD. The words "Setting Key" are printed on the cover surface 651a in a position facing the setting key cylinder 616. The words "Setting Change" are printed on the cover surface 651a in a position facing the setting operation switch 617.

Furthermore, when the cover member 651 is rotated in the closing direction with a setting key (not shown) inserted in the setting key cylinder 616, the setting key interferes with the cover member 651. The cover member 651 is then slightly raised from the second outer surface 641b. In this state, the components on the back side of the upper door mechanism UD are positioned so that they do not interfere with the cover member 651 even when the upper door mechanism UD is closed. This prevents damage to the components on the back side of the upper door mechanism UD and the cover member 651, even when the upper door mechanism UD is closed with the setting key inserted in the setting key cylinder 616.

A hook storage section 654 is provided on the third outer surface 641c formed on the left end of the front panel 622a. As shown in Figure 355, the hook storage section 654 is formed in the shape of a hollow housing. The rear end of the hook storage section 654 in the depth direction is located in a cutout portion of the left side panel 622d. Two hook storage chambers 655a, 655b are provided inside the hook storage section 654. The hook storage chambers 655a, 655b are adjacent to each other in the vertical direction. The hook storage section 654 has a hook insertion/removal opening 654a that opens to the hook storage chambers 655a, 655b. The hook insertion/removal opening 654a continues from the left side of the hook storage section 654 to the rear end face in the depth direction.

The main body crimping hook 656 is accommodated in the hook accommodation chamber 655a. The main body crimping hook 656 is fitted into the hook accommodation chamber 655a. The main body crimping hook 656 can be released from the hook accommodation chamber 655a by pulling the main body crimping hook 656 toward the rear. If the upper case 622 is placed on a table or the like with the front panel 622a facing upward (as shown in Figure 355), the main body crimping hook 656 will be pulled downward. When pulling the main body crimping hook 656 toward the rear (or downward), the portion of the main body crimping hook 656 exposed from the hook insertion/removal opening 654a can be hooked with a finger.

A case crimping hook 657 is housed in the hook housing chamber 655b. The case crimping hook 657 is fitted into the hook housing chamber 655b. The case crimping hook 657 can be released from the hook housing chamber 655b by pulling the case crimping hook 657 toward the rear. If the upper case 622 is placed on a stand or the like with the front panel 622a facing upward (as shown in Figure 355), the case crimping hook 657 will be pulled downward. When pulling the main body crimping hook 656 toward the rear (or downward), the portion of the case crimping hook 657 exposed from the hook insertion/removal opening 654a can be hooked with a finger.

In this embodiment, the main body crimping hook 656 and the case crimping hook 657 are formed to have the same shape. That is, the main body crimping hook 656 and the case crimping hook 657 are made into a common component. This allows the crimping hooks used for the inspection crimping portion 620b and the board retrieval crimping portion 620c to be made into a common component. As a result, when performing the crimping operation for the inspection crimping portion 620b or the board retrieval crimping portion 620c, it is not necessary to check whether the crimping hook to be used is housed in the hook housing chamber 655a or 655b. This improves workability and reduces the work time when crimping the inspection crimping portion 620b or the board retrieval crimping portion 620c. Note that the main body crimping hook and the case crimping hook according to the present invention may have different shapes.

When the main board case 620 is assembled by fixing the lower case 621 (see Figure 351) to the upper case 622, the hook insertion/removal opening 654a is blocked by the two left-side cover pieces 636a and rear-side cover pieces 636b of the lower case 621. The main body crimping hook 656 and case crimping hook 657 are parts that become necessary after the main board case 620 is opened. Therefore, in this embodiment, when the main board case 620 is opened and the lower case 621 and upper case 622 are separated, the main body crimping hook 656 and case crimping hook 657 can be removed from the hook storage section 654. This prevents the main board case 620 from being illegally removed. As a result, tampering with the main board case 620 can be suppressed or prevented.

As shown in Figures 352 and 353, the third outer surface 641c formed at the lower end of the front plate 622a is provided with an opening 662 for the first connector, an opening 663 for the second connector, an opening 664 for the third connector, and an opening 665 for the striking/adjustment switch. The inner surface of the front plate 622a has a first inner surface 642a, a second inner surface 642b, and a third inner surface 642c. The first inner surface 642a is the surface opposite the first outer surface 641a, and the second inner surface 642b is the surface opposite the second outer surface 641b. The third inner surface 642c is the surface opposite the third outer surface 641c.

The power supply connector 612 (see Figure 350) provided on the main control board 610 passes through the first connector opening 662. The main control signal connector 613 provided on the main control board 610 passes through the second connector opening 663. The sub control signal connector 614 provided on the main control board 610 passes through the third connector opening 664. The strike/adjustment switch opening 665 passes through the strike/adjustment switch 615 (see Figure 350) provided on the main control board 610.

The third inner surface 642c formed at the lower end of the front panel 622a fits closely to the mounting surface of the main control board 610. This prevents access to the main control board 610 or components mounted on the main control board 610 from between the connectors 612, 613, 614 and the connector openings 662, 663, 664, or between the strike/adjustment switch 615 and the strike/adjustment switch opening 665.

The first inner surface 642a is provided with a first inner wall portion 667, a substrate fixing boss portion 668, two protruding pieces 669, and four ribs 670a to 670d.

The first inner wall portion 667 is provided at the end of the first inner surface 642a on the right side panel 622e side. The first inner wall portion 667 is made of a plate having a flat surface that is approximately perpendicular to the left-right direction. One of the two sides of the first inner wall portion 667 extending in the up-down direction is continuous with the first inner surface 642a. One of the two sides of the first inner wall portion 667 extending in the depth direction is continuous with the upper side panel 622b, and the other is continuous with the lower side panel 622c. The first inner wall portion 667 is in surface contact with the right rib 634 (see Figure 351) of the lower case 621. As a result, the first inner wall portion 667 and the right rib 634 define an area where the main control board 610 is located and an area where the crimping portions 620a-620d (see Figure 349) are provided.

The board fixing boss 668 is located at the end of the first inner surface 642a facing the lower side panel 622c, on the first inner wall 667 side. The board fixing boss 668 is formed in a cylindrical shape that protrudes approximately vertically (in the depth direction) from the first inner surface 642a. The board fixing boss 668 has a screw hole extending in the depth direction. A board fixing screw (not shown) for fixing the main control board 610 to the upper case 622 is threaded into the screw hole of the board fixing boss 668. That is, a board fixing screw that passes through the screw through hole 610a (see Figure 350) of the main control board 610 is threaded into the screw hole of the board fixing boss 668.

The two protruding pieces 669 are provided on the bottom 643a of the recessed portion 643 on the first inner surface 642a. The two protruding pieces 669 are located at both left-right ends of the bottom 643a and do not overlap with the CPU chip 611 in the depth direction. The two protruding pieces 669 have a U-shaped cross section parallel to the bottom 643a, and include an opposing portion 669a made of a plate with a plane that is approximately perpendicular to the left-right direction, and two connection portions 669b connected to both ends of the opposing portion 669a in the up-down direction. The opposing portions 669a of the two protruding pieces 669 respectively face a first side surface and a second side surface that are approximately perpendicular to the left-right direction of the CPU chip 611 provided on the main control board 610.

The ribs 670a and 670b are continuous with the side wall on the upper side panel 622b side of the two side walls of the downturned portion 643, which have planes that intersect in the vertical direction, as well as with the bottom 643a and the upper side panel 622b. In other words, the ribs 670a and 670b are arranged so as to bridge the side wall on the upper side panel 622b side of the downturned portion 643 and the upper side panel 622b. The ribs 670a and 670b are aligned with a predetermined distance in the left-right direction. The portions of the ribs 670a and 670b that are continuous with the bottom 643a are sized so as not to overlap with the CPU chip 611 in the depth direction. Providing these ribs 670a and 670b increases the rigidity of the bottom 643a of the downturned portion 643 and the side wall on the upper side panel 622b side of the downturned portion 643. As a result, damage and deformation of the downturned portion 643 can be suppressed or prevented.

Ribs 670c and 670d are continuous with the side wall on the lower face panel 622c side of the two side walls of the recessed portion 643, which have planes that intersect in the vertical direction, and with the bottom 643a. Ribs 670c and 670d are aligned with a predetermined distance in the left-right direction. The portion of ribs 670c and 670d that is continuous with the bottom 643a is sized so that it does not overlap with the CPU chip 611 in the depth direction. Therefore, ribs 670c and 670d do not get in the way when viewing the CPU chip 611 through the recessed portion 643 from the front side in the depth direction. Furthermore, providing ribs 670c and 670d increases the rigidity of the bottom 643a of the recessed portion 643 and the side wall of the recessed portion 643 on the lower face panel 622c side. As a result, damage and deformation of the recessed portion 643 can be suppressed or prevented.

The second inner surface 642b is provided with a second inner wall portion 671, a positioning protrusion 672, and a third inner wall portion 673.

The second inner wall portion 671 is provided on the second inner surface 642b, on which the cylinder through-hole 648 and switch through-hole 649 are formed. The second inner wall portion 671 is made of a plate that is approximately L-shaped when viewed from the depth direction. The upper end portion of the second inner wall portion 671 in the vertical direction is continuous with the upper side plate 622b. Furthermore, when viewed from the front side in the depth direction, the right end portion of the second inner wall portion 671 in the horizontal direction is continuous with the first inner wall portion 667. Therefore, the second inner surface 642b, on which the cylinder through-hole 648 and switch through-hole 649 are formed, is surrounded by the upper side plate 622b, the first inner wall portion 667, and the second inner wall portion 671.

The rear end surface of the second inner wall 671 in the depth direction abuts against the mounting surface of the main control board 610. This allows the second inner wall 671 to isolate the setting key cylinder 616 and setting operation switch 617 provided on the main control board 610 from other components, including the CPU chip 611. As described above, gaps are formed between the cylinder through-hole 648 and the setting key cylinder 616, and between the switch through-hole 649 and the setting operation switch 617. Therefore, it is conceivable that unauthorized access to the interior of the main board case 620 may be gained through these gaps. Therefore, in this embodiment, the second inner wall 671 is provided to isolate the setting key cylinder 616 and setting operation switch 617 from other components, including the CPU chip 611. This prevents access to other components, including the CPU chip 611, from between the cylinder through-hole 648 and the setting key cylinder 616, and between the switch through-hole 649 and the setting operation switch 617.

Furthermore, by providing the second inner wall portion 671, the rigidity of the portion forming the second inner surface 642b (second outer surface 641b) of the front plate 622a can be increased. As a result, damage to the front plate 622a, which is easily subjected to force when operating the setting key cylinder 616 or setting operation switch 617, can be reduced or prevented.

As shown in Figure 353, the positioning protrusion 672 is positioned between the switch through-hole 649 and the first inner wall portion 667 in the left-right direction. The positioning protrusion 672 is formed in a cylindrical (pin-like) shape that protrudes approximately perpendicularly from the second inner surface 642b. The positioning protrusion 672 fits into the positioning hole 610d (see Figure 350) of the main control board 610.

The third inner wall portion 673 is provided on the second inner surface 642b in which the inspection connector through hole 647 is formed. The third inner wall portion 673 is made of a plate that is approximately L-shaped when viewed from the depth direction. The upper end portion of the third inner wall portion 673 in the vertical direction is continuous with the upper side plate 622b. Furthermore, when viewed from the front side in the depth direction, the left tip portion of the third inner wall portion 673 in the horizontal direction is continuous with the left side plate 622d. Therefore, the second inner surface 642b in which the inspection connector through hole 647 is formed is surrounded by the upper side plate 622b, the left side plate 622d, and the third inner wall portion 673.

The rear end face of the third inner wall 673 in the depth direction abuts against the mounting surface of the main control board 610. This allows the third inner wall 673 to isolate the inspection connector 618 provided on the main control board 610 from other components, including the CPU chip 611. As described above, an appropriate gap is formed between the inspection connector through hole 647 and the inspection connector 618. Therefore, it is conceivable that unauthorized access to the interior of the main board case 620 may be gained through this gap. Therefore, in this embodiment, the third inner wall 673 is provided to isolate the inspection connector 618 from other components, including the CPU chip 611. This prevents access to other components, including the CPU chip 611, from between the inspection connector through hole 647 and the inspection connector 618.

The third inner surface 642c is provided with a screw hole 675 for fixing the substrate and a positioning protrusion 676.

The board fixing screw hole 675 is provided on the third outer surface 641c formed at the left end of the front plate 622a. When viewed from the front side in the depth direction, the board fixing screw hole 675 is located to the left of the inspection connector through-hole 647. A board fixing screw (not shown) for fixing the main control board 610 to the upper case 622 is threaded into the board fixing screw hole 675. In other words, the board fixing screw that passes through the screw through-hole 610b (see Figure 350) of the main control board 610 is threaded into the board fixing screw hole 675.

The positioning protrusion 676 is provided on the third outer surface 641c formed at the lower end of the front plate 622a. When viewed from the front side in the depth direction, the positioning protrusion 676 is located to the left of the third connector opening 664. The positioning protrusion 676 is formed in a cylindrical (pin-like) shape that protrudes approximately perpendicularly from the third inner surface 642c. The positioning protrusion 676 fits into the positioning hole 610c (see Figure 350) of the main control board 610.

(Upper side panel of the upper case)
As shown in FIGS. 351 and 352, the upper side plate 622 b of the upper case 622 is provided with a hinge receiving portion 681 and four upper engagement grooves 682 .

The hinge receiving portion 681 is provided at the right end of the upper side panel 622b when viewed from the front side in the depth direction. The hinge receiving portion 681 protrudes upward from the upper side panel 622b. The hinge portion of the cover member 651 is rotatably connected to the hinge receiving portion 681.

The four upper engagement grooves 682 are aligned at a predetermined interval in the left-right direction. The upper engagement grooves 682 extend in the left-right direction. When viewed from the front in the depth direction, the left ends of the upper engagement grooves 682 open to the rear end surface of the upper side panel 622b in the depth direction. Four upper engagement pieces (not shown) of the lower case 621 (see Figure 351) engage with the four upper engagement grooves 682. The upper engagement pieces are inserted into the upper engagement grooves 682 from their left ends. Then, by sliding the upper case 622 to the left in the left-right direction when viewed from the front in the depth direction, the upper engagement pieces abut against the right ends of the upper engagement grooves 682. This prevents the upper case 622 from moving in the depth direction. Furthermore, the outer surface of the upper side panel 622b of the upper case 622 abuts against the inner surface of the upper side panel 621b of the lower case 621. This prevents the upper case 622 from moving upward.

(Lower side panel of the upper case)
A case fixing portion 684 and four lower engagement grooves 685 are provided on the lower side plate 622 c of the upper case 622 .

The case fixing portion 684 is located on the right end of the lower side panel 622c when viewed from the front in the depth direction. The case fixing portion 684 is formed as a rectangular parallelepiped protrusion having a flat surface continuous with the lower side panel 622c. The case fixing portion 684 protrudes toward the front in the depth direction. The surface of the case fixing portion 684 facing the front in the depth direction is the sealing surface 684a (see Figure 351). A screw through hole 686 is formed in the sealing surface 684a. A case fixing screw 640 (Figure 360) for fixing the upper case 622 to the lower case 621 passes through the screw through hole 686. The case fixing screw 640 that passes through the screw through hole 686 threads into a screw hole provided in the boss portion 639 of the lower case 621.

The seal affixing plate 635 of the lower case 621 abuts against the downward-facing surface of the case fixing portion 684. The front end surface of the seal affixing plate 635 in the depth direction forms the same plane as the sealing surface 684a of the case fixing portion 684. After the upper case 622 is fixed to the lower case 621 using the case fixing screw 640, a seal 688 (see Figure 359) is affixed across the sealing surface 684a of the case fixing portion 684 and the downward-facing surface of the seal affixing plate 635. As a result, the case fixing screw 640, along with the sealing surface 684a, is covered by the seal 688.

When removing the upper case 622 from the lower case 621, the seal 688 is cut to expose the case fixing screw 640. The case fixing screw 640 is then removed from the boss portion 639 of the lower case 621. Therefore, the state of the seal 688 makes it possible to confirm that the upper case 622 has been removed from the lower case 621. The seal 688 affixed to the sealing surface 684a and the seal affixing plate portion 635 is covered by the seal cover 689.

The sealing seal cover 689 is connected to the case fixing part 684. The sealing seal cover 689 is made of transparent resin. Therefore, the state of the sealing seal 688 can be seen even after the sealing seal cover 689 is connected to the case fixing part 684. To disconnect the sealing seal cover 689, it is necessary to cut off part of the sealing seal cover 689 with a tool such as nippers. Therefore, if the sealing seal cover 689, which should have been connected, is missing, there will at least be evidence that an attempt was made to open the main board case 620.

The four lower engagement grooves 685 are aligned at a predetermined interval in the left-right direction. The lower engagement grooves 685 extend in the left-right direction. When viewed from the front in the depth direction, the left ends of the lower engagement grooves 685 open to the rear end surface of the lower side panel 622c in the depth direction. Four lower engagement pieces (not shown) of the lower case 621 (see Figure 351) engage with the four lower engagement grooves 685. The lower engagement pieces are inserted into the lower engagement grooves 685 from their left ends. Then, by sliding the upper case 622 to the left in the left-right direction when viewed from the front in the depth direction, the lower engagement pieces abut against the right ends of the lower engagement grooves 685. This prevents the upper case 622 from moving in the depth direction. Furthermore, the outer surface of the lower side panel 622c of the upper case 622 abuts against the inner surface of the lower side panel 621c of the lower case 621. This prevents the upper case 622 from moving downward.

(Left side panel of the upper case)
Two reinforcing pieces 691 are provided on the left side panel 622d of the upper case 622. The two reinforcing pieces 691 protrude approximately perpendicularly from the outer surface of the left side panel 622d. The two reinforcing pieces 691 are arranged side by side at a predetermined distance in the vertical direction. The two reinforcing pieces 691 are formed in the shape of a plate having a flat surface that is approximately perpendicular to the depth direction. The two reinforcing pieces 691 are inserted into the spaces inside the two engaging protrusions 620e of the lower case 621 and fit into the two engaging protrusions 620e. As described above, the two engaging protrusions 620e are inserted into two engaging holes G121 (see FIG. 349 ) provided in the left side wall G2 of the cabinet G.

When installing the main board case 620 in the cabinet G, it is not possible to secure a large working space. Therefore, the two engagement protrusions 620e are inserted and removed from the two engagement holes G121 at an angle relative to the left and right. At this time, the two engagement protrusions 620e come into contact with the edges of the two engagement holes G121, applying force. Therefore, in this embodiment, two reinforcing pieces 691 are fitted into the two engagement protrusions 620e to reinforce the two engagement protrusions 620e. This increases the rigidity or strength of the two engagement protrusions 620e and prevents deformation or damage to the two engagement protrusions 620e. The two engagement protrusions 620e and two reinforcing pieces 691 also serve as fixing parts for the lower case 621 and upper case 622.

The outer surface of the left side panel 622d of the upper case 622 abuts against the inner surface of the left side panel 621d of the lower case 621. This prevents the upper case 622 from moving to the left.

(Right side panel of the upper case)
A main body fixing crimping part 693a, an inspection crimping part 693b, a board retrieval crimping part 693c, and a sealing crimping part 693d are provided on the right side plate 622e of the upper case 622. The main body fixing crimping part 693a is connected to the main body fixing crimping part 638a of the lower case 621 to form the main body fixing crimping part 620a (see FIG. 349 ). The inspection crimping part 693b is connected to the inspection crimping part 638b of the lower case 621 to form the inspection crimping part 620b. The board retrieval crimping part 693c is connected to the board retrieval crimping part 638c of the lower case 621 to form the board retrieval crimping part 620c. The sealing crimping part 693d is connected to the sealing crimping part 638d of the lower case 621 to form the sealing crimping portion 620d described above.

[12-4. Main board case accommodating main control board according to another example]
Next, referring to Figure 356, we will explain the main board case 620 that houses the main control board 610.

Figure 356 is a plan view showing the main board case 620 housing the main control board 610.

As shown in Figure 356, when the main board case 620 is viewed from the front in the depth direction, the main control board 610 housed inside the main board case 620 can be seen. The power supply connector 612, main control signal connector 613, sub-control signal connector 614, strike/settlement switch 615, setting key cylinder 616, setting operation switch 617, and inspection connector 618 provided on the main control board 610 pass through the upper case 622 of the main board case 620.

Connector openings 662, 663, and 664, through which the power supply connector 612, the main control signal connector 613, and the sub-control signal connector 614 pass, are provided on the third inner surface 642c of the upper case 622 (see Figure 352). This third inner surface 642c of the upper case 622 is in close contact with the mounting surface of the main control board 610. This prevents unauthorized access to the main control board 610 or components mounted on the main control board 610 from between the connectors 612, 613, and 614 and the connector openings 662, 663, and 664.

The upper case 622 of the main board case 620 has a recessed portion 643 facing the CPU chip 611. This allows the CPU chip 611 to be seen through the recessed portion 643 when the main board case 620 is viewed from the front in the depth direction. Furthermore, the distance between the upper case 622 and the CPU chip 611 can be made shorter than the distance between the upper case 622 and other components mounted on the main control board 610. As a result, the location of the CPU chip 611, which is prone to tampering, can be easily identified by anyone. Furthermore, the visibility of the CPU chip 611 is improved by reducing the influence of shadows from stickers (described below). This prevents tampering with the CPU chip 611 and allows for early detection of tampering with the CPU chip 611. Furthermore, the recessed portion 643 clearly provides the main board case 620 with a shape that makes it easy to detect tampering with the CPU chip 611. This makes it possible to check and prevent unauthorized modification of the CPU chip 611.

The outline (shape) of the bottom 643a of the beveled portion 643 is larger than the outline (shape) of the surface of the CPU chip 611 facing the bottom 643a. When the main control board 610 is attached to the main board case 620 and the CPU chip 611 is viewed from the front panel 622a, the outline of the CPU chip 611 is contained within the outline of the bottom 643a of the beveled portion 643. This allows the entire facing surface of the CPU chip 611 to be viewed from the bottom 643a of the beveled portion 643. Furthermore, the CPU chip 611 can be viewed even when the bottom 643a is viewed from an oblique angle rather than from the front. In other words, the viewing angle of the CPU chip 611 can be widened. Therefore, tampering with the CPU chip 611 can be easily detected even when the bottom 643a is viewed from an oblique angle (at an angle).

Furthermore, the beveled portion 643 is formed so that the opening widens as it moves away from the bottom 643a. This further widens the viewing angle of the CPU chip 611. Therefore, even when viewing the bottom 643a from an oblique direction (at an angle), the CPU chip 611 can be seen, making it easy to detect any tampering with the CPU chip 611.

The bottom 643a of the recessed portion 643 faces the CPU chip 611 with a gap between them. If the bottom 643a and the CPU chip 611 were to be tightly attached, the surface area of the CPU chip 611 exposed to air would be reduced, potentially resulting in reduced heat dissipation performance. However, in this embodiment, the gap between the bottom 643a and the CPU chip 611 prevents the surface area of the CPU chip 611 exposed to air from being reduced. As a result, the heat dissipation performance of the CPU chip 611 is prevented from being reduced. Furthermore, shocks and vibrations applied to the main board case 620 (upper case 622) are prevented from being directly transmitted to the CPU chip 611. As a result, damage to or failure of the CPU chip 611 is reduced or prevented. Furthermore, the gap between the bottom 643a of the recessed portion 643 and the CPU chip 611 is very small. Therefore, if fraud is committed by placing an unauthorized component between the CPU chip 611 and the main board, causing the CPU chip 611 to be higher than it should be, the CPU chip 611 will interfere with the bottom 643a. This makes it impossible to secure the main control board 610 to the main board case 620 (upper case 622). Furthermore, even if a fraudulent component is placed between the CPU chip 611 and the main board and the CPU chip 611 does not interfere with the bottom 643a, fraud can be discovered by confirming that the gap between the two has disappeared or become smaller.

Furthermore, four ribs 670a to 670d are provided on two vertically opposing side walls of the downturned portion 643. This increases the rigidity of the two side walls of the downturned portion 643. As a result, damage and deformation of the downturned portion 643 can be suppressed or prevented. Furthermore, the ribs 670a and 670b are provided so as to bridge between the side wall on the upper side plate 622b side of the downturned portion 643 and the upper side plate 622b. This increases the rigidity of the side wall on the upper side plate 622b side of the downturned portion 643 and the upper side plate 622b. As a result, the strength of the downturned portion 643 can be further improved, and damage and deformation of the downturned portion 643 can be suppressed or prevented.

The portions of the four ribs 670a-670d that reinforce the recessed portion 643 and that are continuous with the bottom 643a are sized so that they do not overlap the CPU chip 611 in the depth direction. Alternatively, the portions of the four ribs 670a-670d that are continuous with the bottom 643a are positioned so that they do not overlap the CPU chip 611. Therefore, the four ribs 670a-670d do not get in the way when viewing the CPU chip 611 through the bottom 643a. Furthermore, the ribs 670a and 670b are continuous with the side walls of the recessed portion 643 and the upper surface plate 622b. This increases the rigidity of the side walls of the recessed portion 643 and the upper surface plate 622b.

The two protruding pieces 669 are also sized so that they do not overlap the CPU chip 611 in the depth direction. Alternatively, the two protruding pieces 669 are positioned so that they do not overlap the CPU chip 611 in the depth direction. Therefore, the two protruding pieces 669 do not get in the way when viewing the CPU chip 611 through the bottom 643a.

The two protruding pieces 669 face first and second sides of the CPU chip 611 mounted on the main control board 610, which are approximately perpendicular to the left-right direction. This prevents unauthorized access to the CPU chip 611 from both the left and right sides of the CPU chip 611. The two protruding pieces 669 (facing portions 669a) may abut the mounting surface of the main control board 610. This makes unauthorized access to the CPU chip 611 more difficult. The two protruding pieces 669 have a U-shaped cross section parallel to the bottom 643a, which increases the strength of the two protruding pieces 669 themselves. This prevents or inhibits the destruction of the two protruding pieces 669 for fraudulent purposes. Furthermore, because the two protruding pieces 669 have a U-shaped cross section parallel to the bottom 643a, they also serve as reinforcing ribs for the bottom 643a. This prevents or inhibits damage or deformation of the bottom 643a.

A board management number sticker 604, a product model name sticker 605, and a recording sticker 606 are affixed to the upper case 622 of the main board case 620. This allows the main control board 610 housed in the main board case 620 to be properly managed. The board management number sticker 604 is a sticker made of an opaque material and is smaller than the product model name sticker 605 and the recording sticker 606. This ensures that the main control board 610 can be seen unobstructed through the main board case.

The board control number certification sticker 604, product model name sticker 605, and recording sticker 606 are affixed to the first seal recessed portion 644, second seal recessed portion 645, and third seal recessed portion 646 provided on the upper case 622. This makes it easy to identify the positions for affixing the board control number certification sticker 604, product model name sticker 605, and recording sticker 606. As a result, it is possible to prevent mistakes in affixing the board control number certification sticker 604, product model name sticker 605, and recording sticker 606.

The outer shape of the sealing recessed portions 644, 645, and 646 is slightly larger than the outer shape of each of the seals 604, 605, and 606. This prevents the three seals, which have different outer shapes, from being attached in the wrong positions. Furthermore, the four corners of the sealing recessed portions 644, 645, and 646 are formed at right angles (approximately 90 degrees). This makes it possible to easily attach each of the seals 604, 605, and 606 to the sealing recessed portions 644, 645, and 646, regardless of whether the corners of each seal 604, 605, and 606 are right angles or rounded.

The board management number certification sticker 604 is also made of an opaque material. The first seal recessed portion 644 to which the board management number certification sticker 604 is affixed has fewer components mounted in the opposing position on the main control board 610 than the second seal recessed portion 645 to which the product model name sticker 605 is affixed and the third seal recessed portion 646 to which the recording sticker 606 is affixed. This prevents the board management number certification sticker 604 from interfering with the detection of tampering with the main control board 610 or failures or damage to the main control board 610.

[12-5. Opening the main board case according to another example]
Next, with reference to Figures 357 to 361, the process of opening the main board case 620 will be described.

Figures 357 to 361 are diagrams explaining the process of opening the main board case 620.

For example, when inspecting the main control board 610, the main board case 620 attached to the cabinet G is opened. To perform the opening work, first, the main body crimping hook 658 used to connect the main body fixing crimping portion 620a to the first case bracket G120a is completely cut using a tool such as nippers (see Figure 357). This exposes the main body fixing crimping portion 620a.

Next, the main body fixing crimping portion 620a is cut with a tool such as nippers to release the connection with the first case bracket G120a (see Figure 358). At this time, the first case bracket G120a is not cut. Therefore, when replacing the main board case 620, the first case bracket G120a can be connected to the main body fixing crimping portion 620a of the new main board case 620.

Next, the main board case 620 is removed from the cabinet G. Then, the seal cover 689 attached to the case fixing part 684 of the main board case 620 is cut using a tool such as nippers (see Figure 359). The seal cover 689 is then removed from the case fixing part 684, thereby exposing the seal 688. The seal 688 is affixed to the case fixing part 684 (sealing surface 684a) of the upper case 622 and the seal affixing plate part 635 of the lower case 621.

Next, cut off the portion of the sealing sticker 688 that is attached to the case fixing portion 684. This exposes the case fixing screw 640 that secures the upper case 622 to the lower case 621 (see Figure 360). Then, remove the case fixing screw 640. Next, completely cut off the sealing crimping portion 620d with a tool such as pliers (see Figure 361). This releases the connection between the sealing crimping portion 620d and the case crimping hook 657 (not shown in Figure 361), completing the opening of the main board case 620. Once the opening is complete, the upper case 622 can be removed from the lower case 621. Then, the main control board 610 can be removed from the upper case 622.

[12-6. Sealing of main board case according to another example]
Next, referring to Figure 362, the sealing process for the main board case 620 will be described.

Figure 362 is a diagram explaining the sealing process for the main board case 620.

For example, if the inspection results for the main control board 610 show no problems, the sealing work is performed to seal the main board case 620. When performing the sealing work, remove the main body crimping hook 656 from the hook storage section 654 before fixing the upper case 622 to the lower case 621 (see Figure 352).

Next, the main control board is fixed to the upper case 622 using board fixing screws (not shown). Then, the upper and lower engagement pieces of the lower case 621 are inserted into the upper and lower engagement grooves 682 and 685 (see Figure 351) of the upper case 622, and the upper case 622 is slid to the left in the left-right direction relative to the lower case 621. At this time, if the board fixing screws (not shown) threaded into the board fixing boss portions 668 are not tight enough, the right rib 634 of the lower case 621 will interfere with the board fixing screws. This will cause the upper case 622 to stop sliding midway, and the main board case 620 cannot be assembled. On the other hand, if the board fixing screws are properly tightened, the right rib 634 will not interfere with the board fixing screws, and the main board case 620 can be assembled.

Next, the upper case 622 is fixed to the lower case 621 using the case fixing screws 640. This completes the assembly of the main board case 620. The two engagement protrusions 620e of the main board case 620 are then inserted into the two engagement holes G121 of the cabinet G (see Figure 349). This places the main board case 620 in its mounting position within the cabinet G. At this time, the inspection crimping portion 620b of the main board case 620 faces the second case bracket G120b (see Figure 362).

Next, the main body crimping hook 656 removed from the hook storage section 654 is inserted into the second case bracket G120b and the inspection crimping section 620b. As a result, the main board case 620 is sealed, and the main board case 620 and cabinet G (game machine main body) are also sealed. This completes the sealing process for the main board case 620.

When recovering the main control board 610, the main board case 620 is opened and then sealed. If the main control board 610 has not yet been inspected when the opening work is performed, the same opening work as for inspection as described above is performed. If the main control board 610 has already been inspected when the opening work is performed, the inspection crimped portion 620b is completely cut using a tool such as nippers. The main board case 620 is then removed from the cabinet G. Next, the case fixing screws 640 are removed. This completes the opening work for the main board case 620.

Then, remove the upper case 622 from the lower case 621. Then, remove the case crimping hook 657 from the hook storage section 654. The subsequent assembly of the main board case 620 is the same as during inspection, so will be omitted. Next, fit the case crimping hook 657 removed from the hook storage section 654 into the board recovery crimping section 620c of the assembled main board case 620. As a result, the main board case 620 is sealed. This completes the sealing process for the main board case 620.

[12-7. Summary of inventions relating to gaming machines equipped with main board cases (Appendix)]
As described above, a gaming machine equipped with the main board case 620 can be provided with the following configuration.

Gaming machines equipped with circuit board cases that enhance security to prevent unauthorized access to the control board have been known for some time (see, for example, JP 2008-55112 A). Such circuit board cases are designed so that the control ROM cannot be replaced unless the case is destroyed.

However, such board cases are required to not only provide access to the control board, but also to enhance security for the CPU (Central Processing Unit) chip mounted on the control board.

The present invention was made in light of these issues, and aims to provide a gaming machine that prevents tampering with the CPU chip and makes it possible to detect tampering with the CPU chip at an early stage.

To achieve the above objective, this embodiment provides a gaming machine with the following configuration.

(1)
A control board (e.g., main control board 610) on which predetermined electronic components (e.g., CPU chip 611) related to game control are mounted;
a transparent board case (e.g., main board case 620) that houses the control board;
The gaming machine is characterized in that the circuit board case has a recessed portion (e.g., recessed portion 643) at a location facing the specified control component that is recessed toward the specified control component.

This configuration prevents tampering with specific control components and enables early detection of tampering with specific control components.

(2)
The substrate case has a front plate (for example, a front plate 622a) on which the recessed portion is formed,
an attachment area for attaching at least a first attachment member (e.g., a board management number identification sticker 604) and a second attachment member (e.g., a product model name sticker 605) is provided in an area of the front plate other than the recessed portion;
The first adhesive member and the second adhesive member have different sizes,
The gaming machine described in (1) above is characterized in that each of the attachment areas of the front panel is formed with a recessed surface for attachment members (e.g., recessed surface for stickers 644 to 646) of a size corresponding to each attachment member, which is recessed on the opposite side to the attachment surface of each attachment member.

With this configuration, the first to third attachment members are attached, allowing the stored main control board to be managed correctly. Furthermore, because the attachment member recessed portions are formed in sizes appropriate for each attachment member, the attachment areas corresponding to each of the multiple attachment members are clearly visible, making it easy to identify each attachment area. Furthermore, because the attachment areas are recessed, the attached attachment members are less likely to peel off. Even if the board case is removed and placed with the front panel facing down on the floor, causing friction, the attachment members are not convex, so the printing and writing on the attachment members are less likely to fade.

(3)
the contour of the bottom of the recessed portion (for example, bottom 643 a) is larger than the contour of the top surface of the predetermined electronic component;
The gaming machine according to (2) above, wherein the recessed portion is formed so that the opening widens as it moves away from the bottom.

With this configuration, the entire opposing surface of the specified electronic component can be viewed from the bottom of the beveled portion. Furthermore, the specified control component can be viewed even when the bottom of the beveled portion is viewed from an oblique direction rather than from the front. In other words, the viewing angle of the specified control component can be widened. Therefore, tampering with the specified control component can be easily detected even when the bottom of the beveled portion is viewed from an oblique direction (at an angle). Furthermore, because the beveled portion is formed so that the opening widens with increasing distance from the bottom, the side walls of the beveled portion do not get in the way, ensuring visibility even when the bottom of the beveled portion is viewed from an oblique direction (at an angle).

(4)
The gaming machine described in (2) or (3) above is characterized in that the board case has a protrusion (e.g., protrusion 669) that is continuous with the downturned portion and has a U-shaped cross section that is parallel to the bottom of the downturned portion at a position facing each of the first side and second side of the specified electronic component, and a plurality of ribs (e.g., four ribs 670a to 670d) that are continuous with the side wall of the downturned portion.

With this configuration, the protruding piece prevents unauthorized access to a specified electronic component from the first and second sides of the specified electronic component. Furthermore, the cross-sectional shape parallel to the bottom of the beveled portion of the protruding piece is U-shaped, which increases the strength of the protruding piece itself. Therefore, it is possible to prevent or inhibit destruction of the protruding piece for the purpose of committing fraud. Furthermore, the protruding piece can also serve as a reinforcing rib for the bottom of the beveled portion. As a result, damage and deformation of the bottom of the beveled portion can be inhibited or prevented. Furthermore, the presence of multiple ribs continuing from the side wall of the beveled portion inhibits or prevents damage and deformation of the side wall of the beveled portion.

(5)
The gaming machine described in (4) above is characterized in that at least one of the plurality of ribs (for example, two ribs 670a, 670b) is continuous with the front panel on which the beveled portion is formed and with a side panel (for example, upper side panel 622b) that is approximately perpendicular to the front panel.

With this configuration, at least one of the multiple ribs is continuous with the front panel and the side panel, which increases the rigidity of the side wall on the side panel side of the beveled portion and the side panel. As a result, the strength of the beveled portion can be further improved, and damage and deformation of the beveled portion can be suppressed or prevented.

(6)
one of the first and second adhesive members is made of an opaque material and the other adhesive member is made of a transparent material;
The gaming machine according to claim (5), characterized in that the one attachment member is attached to the attachment area that has fewer electronic components mounted on the control board than the other attachment member when viewed from the front panel side.

This configuration ensures that one of the attachment members, made of an opaque material, does not interfere with the detection of tampering with the main control board, or failures or damage to the main control board.

A multilayer board may be used as the main control board (sub-control board) of the present invention. This reduces the board area and allows for a more compact main control board. A multilayer board may also be used as the main control board of the present invention, with at least one of POWER (power supply) and GND (ground) configured as an inner layer. For example, a single inner layer may be used for POWER and GND (no signal lines are used on the inner layer), or a four-layer board may be used with POWER and GND layers as inner layers. This improves the noise resistance of the main control board and reduces the number of noise-suppressing components. As a result, the cost of the main control board can be reduced. Furthermore, it is possible to suppress or prevent tampering with the main control board using radio waves.

Furthermore, the main control board (sub-control board) of the present invention may have a first and second surface (front and back) as mounting surfaces. For example, certain control-related electronic components may be mounted on the first surface (front surface), and a connector may be mounted on the second surface (back surface). This allows for the board to be made smaller, and increases the degree of freedom in designing the internal structure of the gaming machine.

Furthermore, the main control board (sub-control board) of the present invention may not have specific electronic components mounted on it. In other words, the main control board (sub-control board) of the present invention may be a finished product with electronic components not mounted on it. This allows for the standardization of main control boards and reduces the cost of main control boards. For example, a first gaming machine may use a main control board with specific electronic components mounted on it, while a second gaming machine may use a main control board without specific unnecessary electronic components mounted on it (as long as the space for mounting them is reserved). Whether a product (control board) does not have specific electronic components mounted on it can be confirmed by comparing it with an image (photograph) of the finished main control board taken in advance.

The main control board (sub-control board) of the present invention may also have unused components, such as empty terminals or empty connectors. In this case, the empty terminals or empty connectors are covered with a transparent case or the like. When the transparent case or the like is removed, a trace is left behind. This makes it possible to prevent external access to the empty terminals or empty connectors. It also makes it possible to prevent fraudulent use of the empty terminals or empty connectors.

[13. Alternative example of lower door mechanism]
Next, with reference to Figures 363 to 379, other configuration examples of the lower door mechanism of a pachislot machine will be described. Note that, with respect to the various specifications, functions, etc. described as other examples of the lower door mechanism in this embodiment, some or all of them can be applied to other gaming machines (other configuration examples) described in this embodiment, and further, with respect to the various specifications, functions, etc. described as other gaming machines (other configuration examples), some or all of them can be applied to other examples of the lower door mechanism described in this embodiment. In other words, an appropriate combination of these can be considered as the invention according to this embodiment.

[13-1. Pachislot machine equipped with lower door mechanism according to another example]
First, referring to Fig. 363, a pachislot machine (which is designated as pachislot machine 601 in this example) equipped with a lower door mechanism according to another example will be described. Fig. 363 is an exploded perspective view of the lower door mechanism according to another example. In this example, pachislot machine 601 is configured as a gaming machine in which games are played using physical gaming value. However, the invention described in this example can also be applied to medalless gaming machines.

The pachislot machine 601 has a cabinet G (see Figure 348) with a rectangular opening on the front side as the gaming machine body, an upper door mechanism (not shown) located at the upper front of the cabinet G, and a lower door mechanism 702 located at the lower front of the cabinet G.

The upper and lower door mechanisms 702 are formed to correspond to the shape and size of the opening in the cabinet G, and are configured to be able to close the upper and lower spaces of the opening in the cabinet G. In other words, the upper and lower door mechanisms 702 function as front doors installed on the front side of the pachislot machine 601.

Furthermore, each of the upper door mechanism and the lower door mechanism 702 is attached to the cabinet G so as to be able to open and close freely, for example, by an opening and closing mechanism (not shown) such as a hinge provided on the left side wall G2 (see Figure 348) of the cabinet G. Note that it is also possible to configure either the upper door mechanism or the lower door mechanism 702 to be able to open and close freely using the above-mentioned opening and closing mechanism, while the other can be attached and detached only when one of the door mechanisms is in the open state.

[13-2. Configuration of lower door mechanism according to another example]
Next, the configuration of the lower door mechanism 702 will be described with reference to Figures 363 to 365.

Figure 364 is a front view of the decorative unit in the lower door mechanism 702. Figure 365 is a rear view of the decorative unit in the lower door mechanism 702.

As shown in Figure 363, the lower door mechanism 702 has a lower door main body 704, a stop button unit 705, a decorative unit 706, and a medal tray 707. The stop button unit 705, decorative unit 706, and medal tray 707 are attached to the lower door main body 704.

Hereinafter, the up/down, left/right, and depth directions will be used when viewed from the front to refer to the surface of the lower door body 704 on which the decorative unit 706, etc. is attached. The side viewed in the depth direction will be referred to as the near side, and the side opposite the side viewed in the depth direction will be referred to as the far side.

The lower door body 704 is formed in the shape of a flat, roughly casing with a short depth, and is open on the entire top and back surfaces. The lower door body 704 has a front surface 704a, a bottom surface 704b, a left side surface 704c, and a right side surface 704d. Hereinafter, the surface of the front surface 704a facing the near side in the depth direction will be referred to as the front surface, and the surface of the front surface 704a facing the far side in the depth direction will be referred to as the back surface. A base portion 711 and multiple reinforcing portions 712 are provided on the surface side of the front surface 704a.

The base 711 is located at the top of the front portion 704a and is formed in the shape of a horizontally elongated, roughly rectangular parallelepiped. The wall surfaces of the base 711 are curved so that they convex toward the front in the depth direction. On the top surface of the base 711, there are, from left to right, an opening 711a for the bet button, an opening 711b for the effect button, and an opening 711c for inserting a medal.

A bet button unit (not shown) is attached to the bet button opening 711a. The bet button unit has, for example, a MAX BET button, a 1 BET button, and a settlement button. One end of a bet button signal harness is connected to the bet button unit. The other end of the bet button signal harness is connected to a main relay board 843 (see Figure 375) located on the back side of the lower door body 704. Operation signals for each button on the bet button unit are sent to the main control board 610 (see Figure 356) via the main relay board 843.

An effect button unit (not shown) is attached to the effect button opening 711b. The effect button unit has an effect button and a vibration motor that vibrates the effect button. The effect button may have, for example, a confirm button, a left selection button, and a right selection button. By configuring the effect button from multiple buttons in this way, a variety of effects can be produced using the effect buttons. One end of an effect button signal harness is connected to the effect button unit. The other end of the effect button signal harness is connected to a sub-relay board 845 (see Figure 375) located on the back side of the lower door main body 704. The effect button operation signal is sent to a sub-control board (not shown) via the sub-relay board 845. The sub-control board also supplies a vibration motor drive signal to the vibration motor via the sub-relay board 845. A medal insertion slot member (not shown) is attached to the medal insertion opening 711c.

The wall of the base 711 is provided with, from left to right, a lever opening 711d, a stop button fitting 711e, and a locking mechanism opening 711f. A start lever (not shown) passes through the lever opening 711d. One end of a rotation start signal harness is connected to the start lever. The other end of the rotation start signal harness is connected to a main relay board 843 located on the back side of the lower door body 704. When the start lever is operated, a rotation start signal is sent to the main control board 610 (see Figure 356) via the main relay board 843.

A stop button unit 705 is attached to the stop button fitting portion 711e. The stop button unit 705 has three stop buttons 713L, 713C, and 713R. One end of a stop button signal harness 714 (which is split into three ends to match the stop buttons) is connected to the stop button unit 705. The stop button signal harness 714 passes through a harness through-hole (not shown) provided in the stop button fitting portion 711e. The other end of the stop button signal harness 714 is connected to a main relay board 843 provided on the back side of the lower door main body 704. Operation signals from the three stop buttons 713L, 713C, and 713R are sent to the main control board 610 (see Figure 356) via the main relay board 843.

A locking mechanism 715 passes through the locking mechanism opening 711f. The locking mechanism 715 is composed of, for example, a cylinder lock. When the lower door mechanism 702 is closed, an amusement facility manager can insert a door key (not shown) into the keyhole and turn it clockwise to unlock it, allowing the lower door mechanism DD to open.

The wall surface of the base 711 is covered by a decorative unit 706. The start lever, stop button unit 705, and locking mechanism 715 attached to the wall surface of the base 711 pass through the decorative unit 706 and are exposed on the front side in the depth direction.

In addition, LED boards 716A and 716B, each equipped with multiple LEDs 720, are attached to the wall surface of the base 711. The LED boards 716A and 716B are, for example, white flexible boards for surface illumination, and are formed in a roughly rectangular shape. The multiple LEDs 720 on the LED board 716A emit light toward the left decorative lens 738 (described below) of the decorative unit 706. The multiple LEDs 720 on the LED board 716B emit light toward the right decorative lens 739 (described below) of the decorative unit 706.

The multiple reinforcing parts 712 are located in the vertical middle of the front part 704a and are arranged at appropriate intervals in the vertical direction. The multiple reinforcing parts 712 are covered by the decorative unit 706. Each of the multiple reinforcing parts 712 is formed in the shape of a plate of appropriate thickness with a flat surface that is approximately perpendicular to the vertical direction, and extends in the left-right direction.

LED boards 716C equipped with multiple LEDs 720 are attached to the multiple reinforcing parts 712. The LED boards 716C are, for example, white flexible boards for surface illumination, and are formed in a strip shape along the wall surface of the reinforcing part 712. The multiple LEDs 720 on the LED boards 716C irradiate light onto a decorative sheet 733 (see Figure 364) of the decorative unit 706, which will be described later.

A medal payout opening 717 and speaker openings 718a and 718b are provided at the bottom of the lower door main body 704. The medal payout opening 717 is located approximately in the center in the left-right direction, and the speaker openings 718a and 718b are located on both the left and right sides of the medal payout opening 717. A medal receiving tray 707 is also attached to the bottom of the lower door main body 704. The medal receiving tray 707 is located below the decorative unit 706. Medals paid out (or returned) from inside the pachislot machine 601 pass through the medal payout opening 717 and are stored in the medal receiving tray 707. The speaker openings 718a and 718b expose speakers 708a and 708b located on the back side of the lower door main body 704.

As shown in Figure 364, the decorative unit 706 has a waist panel portion 721, a left decorative portion 722, a right decorative portion 723, and a button cover portion 724.

The lower back panel 721 has a panel frame 731, a transparent cover 732 that covers the opening of the panel frame 731, and a decorative sheet 733 that faces the back side of the transparent cover 732. The panel frame 731 is a roughly rectangular frame that is long in the left-right direction. The top and bottom sides of the panel frame 731 are curved so that they convex toward the front in the depth direction. The panel frame 731 is made of a resin that does not transmit light. The panel frame 731 surrounds and holds the outer periphery of the transparent cover 732. The transparent cover 732 is made of, for example, an acrylic resin and has a horizontally long rectangular shape. The transparent cover 732 is light-transmitting. The surface of the transparent cover 732 is exposed toward the front in the depth direction through the opening of the panel frame 731.

The decorative sheet 733 is made of a transparent or translucent resin and allows light to pass through. Model information such as a logo representing the model name or characters representing a motif is depicted on the decorative sheet 733. The decorative sheet 733 is irradiated with light emitted from multiple LEDs 720 on the LED board 716C mounted on the base 711. In other words, the decorative sheet 733 is illuminated from the back.

A spacer of a specified thickness is interposed between the peripheral edge of the front surface of decorative sheet 733 and the peripheral edge of the back surface of transparent cover 732. This means that the front surface of decorative sheet 733 faces the back surface of transparent cover 732 at a specified distance (for example, approximately 5 mm). This makes it difficult for liquid to come into contact with both decorative sheet 733 and transparent cover 732, even if liquid seeps into the gap between decorative sheet 733 and transparent cover 732. As a result, Newton's rings can be prevented from occurring.

A left decorative piece 734 and a right decorative piece 735 are provided on the upper edge of the panel frame 731. The left decorative piece 734 and right decorative piece 735 are continuous with the left and right ends of the upper edge of the panel frame 731 and are formed integrally with the panel frame 731. In other words, the left decorative piece 734 and right decorative piece 735 are integrally molded from the same resin as the panel frame 731. The left decorative piece 734 and right decorative piece 735 form part of the left decorative section 722 and right decorative section 723. This creates a sense of unity between the waist panel section 721 and the left decorative section 722 and right decorative section 723, enhancing the design.

The surfaces of the left decorative piece 734 and the right decorative piece 735 facing the front in the depth direction are decorated with, for example, a motif of the model. This allows the waist panel portion 721 to have a unique design that matches the model. Additionally, the right decorative piece 735 has a locking mechanism through-hole 735a formed in it. The locking mechanism 715 passes through the locking mechanism through-hole 735a.

A partition member 736 is connected to the upper edge of the panel frame 731. The partition member 736 is positioned between the waist panel portion 721, the left decorative portion 722, the right decorative portion 723, and the button cover portion 724, separating each portion. The partition member 736 is formed from a resin of a different color than the panel frame 731. The partition member 736 is formed from a panel frame piece 736a, and left and right designed partition pieces 736b and 736c that are continuous with the panel frame piece 736a.

The panel frame piece 736a has a flat surface that is approximately perpendicular to the up-down direction and is formed as a plate extending in the left-right direction. The panel frame piece 736a is fitted into a notch provided in the left-right center of the upper edge of the panel frame 731. Therefore, the panel frame piece 736a of the partition member 736 forms part of the panel frame 731 in the lower panel portion 721.

The left decorative partition piece 736b has an inclined portion that extends diagonally upward to the left and an upper surface portion that extends horizontally and is continuous with the inclined portion. The left decorative partition piece 736b and the left decorative piece 734 form a frame that holds the left decorative lens 738. The left decorative part 722 is composed of the left decorative piece 734 and the left decorative lens 738.

The right decorative partition piece 736c has an inclined portion that extends diagonally upward to the right and an upper surface portion that extends horizontally and is continuous with the inclined portion. The right decorative partition piece 736c and the right decorative piece 735 form a frame that holds the right decorative lens 739. The right decorative part 723 is composed of the right decorative piece 735 and the right decorative lens 739.

The left decorative lens 738 and the right decorative lens 739 are made of transparent or translucent resin and allow light to pass through. The left decorative lens 738 and the right decorative lens 739 are irradiated with light emitted from multiple LEDs 720 on LED boards 716A and 716B provided on the base 711. In other words, the left decorative lens 738 and the right decorative lens 739 are illuminated from behind. The left decorative lens 738 also has a lever through-hole 738a through which a start lever (not shown) passes.

The surfaces of the left decorative lens 738 and right decorative lens 739 are decorated with, for example, decorations that represent the motif of the model. The decorations on the left decorative lens 738 and the left decorative piece 734 are formed to have a sense of unity. Furthermore, the decorations on the right decorative lens 739 and the right decorative piece 735 are formed to have a sense of unity. This allows for a connection between the opaque decoration and the light-transmitting decoration, enhancing the design.

The button cover portion 724 is formed in the shape of a roughly trapezoidal plate with its bottom edge shorter than its top edge. The button cover portion 724 is fixed to the partition member 736 using screws. Three button through-holes 724a are provided in the button cover portion 724. Three stop buttons 713L, 713C, and 713R (see Figure 363) pass through the three button through-holes 724a. The three stop buttons 713L, 713C, and 713R are operating parts operated by the player. Therefore, if debris accumulates between the three button through-holes 724a and the stop buttons 713L, 713C, and 713R, the operability of the stop buttons 713L, 713C, and 713R may be reduced. In the pachislot machine 601 of this embodiment, the decorative unit 706 can be easily removed from the lower door body 704, making it easy to remove debris that has accumulated between the three button through-holes 724a and the stop buttons 713L, 713C, and 713R. It also makes it easy to clean the areas around the stop buttons 713L, 713C, and 713R and to perform maintenance on the stop buttons 713L, 713C, and 713R.

The top edge of the button cover portion 724, the top surfaces of the left and right design partition pieces 736b and 736c, and the top surfaces of the left and right decorative pieces 734 and 735 form approximately the same plane as the top surface of the base portion 711 (see Figure 363). In other words, the top surface of the decorative unit 706 forms approximately the same plane as the top surface of the base portion 711. This gives a sense of unity to the base portion 711 and the decorative unit 706. Furthermore, because there is no step between the top surface of the base portion 711 and its surroundings, players can be sure that their hands or clothes will not get caught and knocked over.

As shown in Figure 365, a first reinforcing member 741 and a second reinforcing member 742 are provided on the back side of the decorative unit 706.

The first reinforcing member 741 has a lens-facing portion 744, an upper connection portion 745, a left fixing portion 746, and a right fixing portion 747.

The lens facing portion 744 consists of a substantially rectangular plate extending in the left-right direction. The left-right length of the lens facing portion 744 is substantially equal to the left-right length of the panel frame 731. The upper and lower edges of the lens facing portion 744 are curved so as to convex toward the front in the depth direction. The left and right ends of the lens facing portion 744 form flat surfaces that are substantially perpendicular to the left-right direction. The lens facing portion 744 faces the button cover portion 724, the left decorative lens 738, and the right decorative lens 739. The lens facing portion 744 is fixed to the back surface of the partition member 736 using multiple fixing screws.

The lens-facing portion 744 is made of transparent or translucent resin and allows light to pass through. Therefore, light emitted from the multiple LEDs 720 on the LED boards 716A, 716B provided on the base portion 711 passes through the lens-facing portion 744 and the left and right decorative lenses 738, 739. In this embodiment, it is possible to create an effect in which light passes through both the left and right decorative lenses 738, 739, or only one of them.

The lens-facing portion 744 also has a notch 744a to avoid interference with the stop button unit 705. The lens-facing portion 744 also has a lever through-hole 744b through which a start lever (not shown) passes, and a locking mechanism through-hole 744c through which the locking mechanism 715 (see Figure 363) passes.

A fitting hole 749 is formed at the left end of the lens facing portion 744. The fitting hole 749 penetrates the left end of the lens facing portion 744 in the left-right direction. A fitting insertion portion 793 (see Figure 369) of the first slide member 781, described below, is inserted into the fitting hole 749. Two fitting holes 750 are formed at the right end of the lens facing portion 744. The two fitting holes 750 are lined up at an appropriate distance in the vertical direction and penetrate the right end of the lens facing portion 744 in the left-right direction. Two fitting insertion portions 816 (see Figure 372) of the second slide member 782, described below, are inserted into the two fitting holes 750.

Two upper engagement protrusions 751 are provided on the lens opposing portion 744 at a position facing the button cover portion 724. The two upper engagement protrusions 751 are aligned at a specific distance in the left-right direction. The two upper engagement protrusions 751 are formed in the shape of a plate with a flat surface that is approximately perpendicular to the left-right direction. The two upper engagement protrusions 751 have engagement holes 751a that penetrate them in the left-right direction. The two upper engagement protrusions 751 penetrate two upper protrusion through-holes 771 (see Figure 366) of the lower door main body 704, which will be described later. Two upper engagement insertion portions 803 (see Figure 369) of the first slide member 781, which will be described later, are inserted into the engagement holes 751a.

The upper connection portion 745 is continuous with the lower part of the lens-facing portion 744. The upper connection portion 745 is made of a plate that is approximately vertical in the up-down direction and is formed into a roughly rectangular shape that is long in the left-right direction. The rear end face of the upper connection portion 745 in the depth direction (hereinafter referred to as the "rear end face") abuts against one of the reinforcing portions 712 of the lower door main body 704. A notch is formed in the rear end face of the upper connection portion 745 to match the unevenness of the reinforcing portion 712 that it abuts against.

Two upper hook portions 752 are provided on the rear end surface of the upper connection portion 745. The two upper hook portions 752 protrude from the rear end surface of the upper connection portion 745 toward the rear in the depth direction and consist of plates that form the same plane as the upper connection portion 745. The two upper hook portions 752 have a protrusion that protrudes to the right in the left-right direction and a recess that is recessed to the left in the left-right direction. The two upper hook portions 752 pass through two upper hook through-holes 776 (see Figure 366) in the lower door main body 704, which will be described later. The two upper hook portions 752 also engage with upper hook receiving portions 796, 797 (see Figure 371) of the first slide member 781, which will be described later.

A light-reflecting reflector is attached to the underside of the upper connection portion 745. This prevents light emitted from the multiple LEDs 720 on the LED board 716C from heading toward the left decorative lens 738 and the right decorative lens 739. It also prevents light emitted from the multiple LEDs 720 on the LED boards 716A and 716B from heading toward the decorative sheet 733. As a result, it is possible to prevent light from being unintentionally irradiated onto the decorative sheet 733, left decorative lens 738, and right decorative lens 739.

The left fixing portion 746 consists of a plate that is approximately perpendicular to the depth direction, and the upper part of the left fixing portion 746 is continuous with the left end of the lens facing portion 744. The left fixing portion 746 is fixed to the left side of the panel frame 731 using multiple fixing screws. The right fixing portion 747 consists of a plate that is approximately perpendicular to the depth direction, and the upper part of the right fixing portion 747 is continuous with the right end of the lens facing portion 744. The right fixing portion 747 is fixed to the right side of the panel frame 731 using multiple fixing screws.

The second reinforcing member 742 has a lower connection portion 755, a left fixing portion 756, and a right fixing portion 757.

The lower connection portion 755 is located below the upper connection portion 745. The lower connection portion 755 is made of a plate having a plane that is approximately vertical in the up-down direction, and is formed into a roughly rectangular shape extending in the left-right direction. The lower connection portion 755 is fixed to the lower edge of the panel frame 731 using multiple fixing screws. The end face on the rear side in the depth direction of the lower connection portion 755 (hereinafter referred to as the "rear end face") abuts against one of the reinforcing portions 712 of the lower door main body 704.

Two lower hook portions 759 are provided on the rear end surface of the lower connection portion 755. The two lower hook portions 759 protrude from the rear end surface of the upper connection portion 745 toward the rear in the depth direction and consist of plates that form the same plane as the lower connection portion 755. The two lower hook portions 759 have a protrusion that protrudes to the right in the left-right direction and a recess that is recessed to the left in the left-right direction. The two lower hook portions 759 pass through two lower hook through-holes 777 (see Figure 366) in the lower door main body 704, which will be described later. The two lower hook portions 759 also engage with two hook receivers 826, 827 (see Figure 373) of the third slide member 783, which will be described later.

The left fixing portion 756 consists of a plate that is approximately perpendicular to the depth direction, and the lower portion of the left fixing portion 756 is continuous with the left end of the lower connection portion 755. The left fixing portion 756, together with the left fixing portion 746 of the first reinforcing member 741, is fixed to the left edge of the panel frame 731 using multiple fixing screws. A lower engagement protrusion 761 is formed on the lower portion of the left fixing portion 756.

The lower engagement protrusion 761 is formed in the same shape as the upper engagement protrusion 751 described above. That is, the lower engagement protrusion 761 is formed in the shape of a plate having a flat surface that is approximately perpendicular to the left-right direction. The lower engagement protrusion 761 has an engagement hole 761a that penetrates in the left-right direction. The lower engagement protrusion 761 penetrates a lower protrusion through-hole 772 (see Figure 366), described below, of the lower door main body 704. The lower engagement insertion portion 823 (see Figure 373), described below, of the third slide member 783, is inserted into the engagement hole 761a.

The right fixing portion 757 consists of a plate that is approximately perpendicular to the depth direction, and the lower portion of the right fixing portion 757 is continuous with the left end of the lower connection portion 755. The right fixing portion 757, together with the right fixing portion 747 of the first reinforcing member 741, is fixed to the left edge of the panel frame 731 using multiple fixing screws. A lower engagement protrusion 762 is formed on the lower portion of the right fixing portion 757.

The lower engagement protrusion 762 is formed in the same shape as the upper engagement protrusion 751 described above. That is, the lower engagement protrusion 762 is formed in a plate shape with a plane that is approximately perpendicular to the left-right direction. The lower engagement protrusion 762 passes through a lower protrusion through-hole 773 (see Figure 366), described below, of the lower door main body 704. The lower engagement insertion portion 834 (see Figure 374), described below, of the fourth slide member 784 is inserted into the engagement hole 762a. The specific distance between the two upper engagement protrusions 751 provided on the first reinforcing member 741 is shorter than the distance between the lower engagement protrusions 761, 762 provided on the second reinforcing member 742.

(Lock through-hole provided in the lower door body)
Next, with reference to Figure 366, the locking through-holes provided in the lower door body 704 will be described.

Figure 366 is an explanatory diagram showing the back side of the lower door body 704.

The decorative unit 706 is fixed (locked) to the lower door body 704 by the first to third locking mechanisms. As shown in Figure 366, the lower door body 704 is provided with two upper protrusion through-holes 771 and lower protrusion through-holes 772, 773 associated with the first locking mechanism, and a first slide member through-hole 774 and two second slide member through-holes 775 associated with the second locking mechanism. Furthermore, the lower door body 704 is provided with two upper hook through-holes 776 and two lower hook through-holes 777 associated with the third locking mechanism.

The two upper protrusion through-holes 771 are located approximately in the left-right center of the wall surface of the base portion 711 (the upper part of the lower door main body 704), and are lined up at a specific distance apart in the left-right direction. The two upper protrusion through-holes 771 are formed as elongated rectangles in the vertical direction, and penetrate the wall surface of the base portion 711 in the depth direction. The two upper engagement protrusions 751 (see Figure 365) of the decorative unit 706 penetrate through the two upper protrusion through-holes 771 from the front side to the back side of the front portion 704a.

The lower protrusion through-holes 772, 773 are provided on both sides of one of the multiple reinforcing portions 712 on the front portion 704a of the lower door main body 704. The distance between the lower protrusion through-holes 772, 773 is longer than the specific distance between the two upper protrusion through-holes 771 described above. The lower protrusion through-holes 772, 773 are formed in the same shape as the upper protrusion through-hole 771 and penetrate the wall surface of the base portion 711 in the depth direction. The lower engagement protrusions 761, 762 (see Figure 365) of the decorative unit 706 penetrate through the lower protrusion through-holes 772, 773 from the front side to the back side of the front portion 704a.

The first slide member through-hole 774 is located at the left end of the wall surface of the base portion 711 (the upper part of the lower door main body 704). The first slide member through-hole 774 is formed in a roughly square shape and penetrates the wall surface of the base portion 711 in the left-right direction. The fitting insertion portion 793 (see Figure 369) of the first slide member 781, which will be described later, passes through the first slide member through-hole 774.

The two second slide member through-holes 775 are located on the right end of the wall surface of the base portion 711 (the upper part of the lower door body 704) and are aligned vertically at an appropriate distance. The two second slide member through-holes 775 are formed in a roughly square shape and penetrate the wall surface of the base portion 711 in the left-right direction. Two fitting insertion portions 816 (see Figure 372) of the second slide member 782, described below, pass through the two second slide member through-holes 775.

The two upper hook through-holes 776 are located at the bottom of the wall of the base portion 711 and are aligned at an appropriate distance in the left-right direction. The two upper hook through-holes 776 are formed in the shape of a long, narrow rectangle extending left-right, and penetrate the wall of the base portion 711 in the depth direction. The two upper hook portions 752 (see Figure 365) of the decorative unit 706 penetrate through the two upper hook through-holes 776 from the front side to the back side of the front portion 704a.

The two lower hook through-holes 777 are provided in the upper part of the wall surface of one of the multiple reinforcing parts 712, and are lined up at an appropriate distance in the left-right direction. The two lower hook through-holes 777 are formed in the shape of a long, narrow rectangle in the left-right direction, and penetrate the wall surface of the reinforcing part 712 in the depth direction. The two lower hook through-holes 777 allow the two lower hook parts 759 (see Figure 365) of the decorative unit 706 to penetrate from the front side to the back side of the front part 704a.

In addition, multiple guide bosses 780 are provided on the back surface of the front portion 704a of the lower door main body 704. The multiple guide bosses 780 are formed in a cylindrical shape that protrudes toward the back in the depth direction. The multiple guide bosses 780 pass through guide grooves in four slide members 781 to 784, which will be described later. The multiple guide bosses 780 also have threaded holes that extend in the depth direction. Locking screws 790 (see Figure 367), which will be described later, are threaded into the threaded holes of the multiple guide bosses 780.

(Lock slide member attached to the lower door body)
Next, with reference to Figures 367 and 368, the locking slide member provided on the lower door body 704 will be described.

Figure 367 is an explanatory diagram showing the state in which a sliding member is attached to the back surface of the lower door body 704, viewed from the back side. Figure 368 is an explanatory diagram showing the state in which a sliding member is attached to the back surface of the lower door body 704, viewed from the front side.

As shown in Figure 367, a first slide member 781, a second slide member 782, a third slide member 783, and a fourth slide member 784 are attached to the back surface of the front portion 704a of the lower door body 704 so that they can slide left and right. The four slide members 781 to 784 are components that make up the first to third locking mechanisms.

The four slide members 781-784 are formed from a resin of a different color from the resin forming the lower door body 704. For example, the lower door body 704 is formed from black resin, and the four slide members 781-784 are formed from vermilion resin. This makes it easy to see where the four slide members 781-784 are located on the back side of the lower door body 704 when specified separate components such as speakers 708a, 708b are provided on the back side of the lower door body 704. The colors of the resin forming the four slide members 781-784 and the resin forming the lower door body 704 can be set as appropriate, but it is preferable that they are not similar colors.

The first slide member 781 is positioned on the back side of the base portion 711, facing the two upper protrusion through-holes 771, the first slide member through-hole 774, and the two upper hook through-holes 776. Therefore, when the lower door body 704 is viewed from the front side, the first slide member 781 is exposed from the two upper protrusion through-holes 771, the first slide member through-hole 774, and the two upper hook through-holes 776 (see Figure 368).

The second slide member 782 is positioned on the back side of the base portion 711, facing the two second slide member through-holes 775. Therefore, when the lower door body 704 is viewed from the front side, the second slide member 782 is exposed from the two second slide member through-holes 775 (see Figure 368).

The third slide member 783 is positioned on the back side of the reinforcing portion 712, facing the lower protrusion through-hole 772 and the two lower hook through-holes 777. Therefore, when the lower door body 704 is viewed from the front side, the third slide member 783 is exposed from the lower protrusion through-hole 772 and the two lower hook through-holes 777 (see Figure 368).

The fourth slide member 784 is positioned on the back side of the reinforcing portion 712, facing the lower protrusion through-hole 773. Therefore, when the lower door body 704 is viewed from the front side, the fourth slide member 784 is exposed from the lower protrusion through-hole 773 (see Figure 368).

(Configuration of the first slide member)
Next, the configuration of the first slide member 781 will be described with reference to Figures 369 to 371.

Figure 369 is a perspective view of the first slide member 781. Figure 370 is an exploded perspective view of the first slide member 781. Figure 371 is a bottom view of the first member of the first slide member 781.

As shown in Figures 369 and 370, the first slide member 781 is composed of a first member 786 and a second member 787. The first member 786 and the second member 787 are individually attached to the back surface of the lower door main body 704 (base portion 711). The first member 786 is located at the rear in the depth direction (the near side when the back surface of the lower door main body 704 is viewed from the front), and the second member 787 is located at the front in the depth direction (the far side when the back surface of the lower door main body 704 is viewed from the front). Therefore, after the second member 787 is attached to the back surface of the lower door main body 704, the first member 786 is attached to the back surface of the lower door main body 704. At this time, the first member 786 is connected to the second member 787. As a result, the first member 786 and the second member 787 are integrally configured as the first slide member 781 and move together in the left-right direction.

The first member 786 has a base portion 791, an extension portion 792, a fitting insertion portion 793, and a connecting portion 794.

The base portion 791 is formed in a roughly rectangular parallelepiped shape that is long in the left-right direction. A recess is formed on the surface of the base portion 791 facing the rear in the depth direction (the surface opposite the surface facing the front portion 704a of the lower door main body 704). A guide groove 791a is provided on the bottom surface of the recess. The guide groove 791a penetrates the base portion 791 in the depth direction and extends in the left-right direction.

A guide boss 780 (see Figure 366) provided on the back surface of the lower door main body 704 passes through the guide groove 791a. The width of the guide groove 791a is slightly longer than the diameter of the guide boss 780. This allows the guide boss 780 to prevent the first member 786 from moving up and down. A retaining screw 790 (see Figure 367) is threadedly engaged with the guide boss 780. The retaining screw 790 prevents the first member 786 from moving toward the rear in the depth direction. The guide groove 791a also defines the left-right movement range of the first member 786 (first slide member 781) from the unlocked position to the locked position. The unlocked position is the rightmost position of the left-right movement range of the first member 786, and the locked position is the leftmost position of the left-right movement range of the first member 786.

An engagement piece 795 is provided on the surface of the base portion 791 that is closest to the depth. The engagement piece 795 is formed in the shape of a plate with a flat surface that is approximately perpendicular to the depth direction, and extends in the left-right direction. The right end of the engagement piece 795 is continuous with the base portion 791, and the left end of the engagement piece 795 is formed in a claw shape. The engagement piece 795 is capable of flexing and deforming in the horizontal direction.

The engagement piece 795 engages with a first engagement groove and a second engagement groove provided on the back surface of the lower door body 704. When the first member 786 is positioned in the unlocked position, the engagement piece 795 engages with the first engagement groove. Furthermore, when the first member 786 is positioned in the locked position, the engagement piece 795 engages with the second engagement groove. Engaging the engagement piece 795 with the first or second engagement groove creates resistance to left-right movement of the first member 786. This allows the operator to recognize that the first member 786 (first slide member 781) is positioned in the unlocked or locked position. Furthermore, even if vibrations or other factors occur, the first member 786 (first slide member 781) will not easily move from the unlocked or locked position.

The extension 792 has a horizontal portion that protrudes approximately perpendicularly from the left side of the base 791 and a vertical portion that protrudes upward from the horizontal portion. A locking direction indicator (not shown) is provided on the surface of the horizontal portion of the extension 792 facing the rear in the depth direction (the surface opposite the surface facing the front portion 704a of the lower door body 704). The locking direction indicator, for example, consists of an arrow indicating the direction in which the first member 786 (first slide member 781) should be moved to the locked position and the word "locked." This allows the worker to easily confirm the direction in which the first slide member 781 should be moved to the locked position. The locking direction indicator also serves as a reminder to remember to move the first slide member 781 to the locked position when securing the decorative unit 706 to the lower door body 704. The locking direction indicator of the present invention can be any indicator that indicates the direction in which the first slide member 781 should be moved to the locked position. Additionally, the fixed direction indicator according to the present invention may also indicate the direction in which the first slide member 781 moves to the unlocked position.

The vertical portion of the extension 792 is provided with a guide groove 792a and a finger hook 792b. The guide groove 792a penetrates the vertical portion of the extension 792 in the depth direction and extends in the left-right direction. Like the guide groove 791a, the guide groove 792a defines the left-right movement range of the first member 786. A guide boss 780 (see Figure 366) provided on the back surface of the lower door main body 704 penetrates the guide groove 792a. The width of the guide groove 792a is slightly longer than the diameter of the guide boss 780. A retaining screw 790 is threaded into the guide boss 780.

The finger hook portion 792b is a through-hole that penetrates the vertical portion of the extension portion 792 in the depth direction and is formed in a roughly rectangular shape. The two opposing left and right sides of the finger hook portion 792b are formed in arc shapes that convex in the directions away from each other. This makes it easier to hook a finger on the finger hook portion 792b when moving the first member 786 (first slide member 781) in the left and right direction. Note that the finger hook portion according to the present invention is not limited to a through-hole and may be, for example, a recess that opens to the far side in the depth direction.

The fitting insertion portion 793 protrudes to the left from the vertical portion of the extension portion 792. The fitting insertion portion 793 is formed in a rectangular parallelepiped shape that is long in the left-right direction. When the first slide member 781 is positioned in the unlocked position, the fitting insertion portion 793 faces the first slide member through-hole 774 of the lower door body 704. When the first slide member 781 is positioned in the locked position, the fitting insertion portion 793 passes through the first slide member through-hole 774 and is inserted into and fits into the fitting hole 749 of the decorative unit 706.

The connecting portion 794 is provided on the surface of the base portion 791 facing the front in the depth direction. The connecting portion 794 is formed in a plate shape with a flat surface that is approximately perpendicular to the up-down direction. As shown in Figure 370, the connecting portion 794 has a first mating recess 794a and a second mating recess 794b. The first mating recess 794a and the second mating recess 794b are adjacent to each other in the left-right direction.

The first mating recess 794a is formed in a roughly rectangular shape, with the top surface and the surface facing the front in the depth direction being open. A first mating piece 804a of the connecting portion 804 of the second member 787, described below, fits into the first mating recess 794a. The second mating recess 794b is formed in a roughly rectangular shape, with the bottom surface and the surface facing the front in the depth direction being open. A second mating piece 804b of the connecting portion 804 of the second member 787, described below, fits into the second mating recess 794b.

As shown in Figure 371, upper hook receiving portions 796, 797 are formed on the underside of the first member 786. The upper hook receiving portion 796 is provided at the right end of the underside of the base portion 791. The upper hook receiving portion 796 has an engagement surface 796a that is part of the underside of the base portion 791, and an engagement rib 796b that protrudes approximately perpendicularly from the engagement surface 796a. The upper surface of the upper hook portion 752 of the decorative unit 706 comes into surface contact with the engagement surface 796a. The engagement rib 796b is formed in a curved portion that is approximately U-shaped when the underside of the base portion 791 is viewed from the front. The engagement rib 796b engages with the recess of the upper hook portion 752 of the decorative unit 706.

The upper hook receiving portion 797 is provided at the right end (toward the base portion 791) of the underside of the extension portion 792. The upper hook receiving portion 797 has an engagement surface 797a that is part of the underside of the extension portion 792, and an engagement rib 797b that protrudes approximately perpendicularly from the engagement surface 797a. The upper surface of the upper hook portion 752 of the decorative unit 706 comes into surface contact with the engagement surface 797a. The engagement rib 797b is formed into a curved portion that is approximately U-shaped when the underside of the extension portion 792 is viewed from the front. The engagement rib 797b engages with a recess in the upper hook portion 752 of the decorative unit 706.

The second member 787 has a base portion 801, an extension portion 802, two upper engaging insertion portions 803, and a connecting portion 804.

The base portion 801 is made of a plate having a flat surface that is approximately perpendicular to the depth direction, and is formed into a rectangular shape that is elongated in the left-right direction. A guide groove 801a is provided at the right end of the base portion 801 in the left-right direction. The guide groove 801a penetrates the base portion 801 in the depth direction and extends in the left-right direction.

A guide boss 780 (see Figure 366) provided on the back surface of the lower door main body 704 passes through the guide groove 801a. The width of the guide groove 801a is slightly longer than the diameter of the guide boss 780. This allows the guide boss 780 to lock the second member 787 against vertical movement. A retaining screw 790 (see Figure 367) is screwed into the guide boss 780. The guide groove 801a also defines the left-right movement range of the second member 787 (first slide member 781) from the unlocked position to the locked position. The unlocked position is the rightmost position in the left-right movement range of the second member 787, and the locked position is the leftmost position in the left-right movement range of the second member 787.

The extension 802 protrudes approximately perpendicularly from the left side surface of the base 801. The extension 802 is a plate that forms the same plane as the base 791. A guide groove 802a is provided in the extension 802. The guide groove 802a penetrates the extension 802 in the depth direction and extends in the left-right direction. Like the guide groove 801a, the guide groove 802a defines the left-right movement range of the second member 787. A guide boss 780 (see Figure 366) provided on the back surface of the lower door main body 704 penetrates the guide groove 802a. A retaining screw 790 is screwed into the guide boss 780.

The two upper engagement insertion portions 803 are provided on the right end of the top surface of the base portion 801 and on the left side surface of the extension portion 802. The two upper engagement insertion portions 803 are formed as approximately rectangular plates with a plane that is approximately perpendicular to the depth direction. When the second member 787 is placed in the locked position, the two upper engagement insertion portions 803 are inserted into the engagement holes 751a (see Figure 365) of the two upper engagement protrusions 751 of the decorative unit 706. As a result, the two upper engagement insertion portions 803 engage with the two upper engagement protrusions 751 of the decorative unit 706.

The connecting portion 804 is provided on the surface of the base portion 801 facing the rear in the depth direction. The connecting portion 804 is formed in a plate shape with a flat surface that is approximately perpendicular to the up-down direction. As shown in Figure 370, the connecting portion 804 has a first mating piece 804a and a second mating piece 804b. The first mating piece 804a and the second mating piece 804b are adjacent to each other in the left-right direction.

The first mating piece 804a is formed as a roughly rectangular step that convex upward. The first mating piece 804a fits into the first mating recess 794a of the connecting portion 794 of the first member 786. The second mating piece 804b is formed as a roughly rectangular step that convex downward. The second mating piece 804b fits into the second mating recess 794b of the connecting portion 794 of the first member 786. As a result, the connecting portion 794 of the first member 786 and the connecting portion 804 of the second member 787 are mated and connected so as to mesh with each other.

(Configuration of second slide member)
Next, the configuration of the second slide member 782 will be described with reference to Figure 372.

Figure 372 is a front view of the second slide member 782.

As shown in Figure 372, the second slide member 782 is made of a generally C-shaped plate and has parallel portions 811, 812 and a connecting portion 813 that connects the parallel portions 811, 812. The parallel portions 811, 812 face each other in the vertical direction and are each formed into a generally rectangular shape that is elongated in the left-right direction. The connecting portion 813 is continuous with the left end portions of the parallel portions 811, 812 and is formed into a generally rectangular shape that is elongated in the vertical direction.

The upper parallel portion 811 has a guide groove 811a. The connecting portion 813 has a guide groove 813a and a finger hook 813b.

The guide groove 811a penetrates the parallel portion 811 in the depth direction and extends in the left-right direction. The guide groove 813a penetrates the connecting portion 813 in the depth direction and extends in the left-right direction. A guide boss portion 780 (see Figure 366) provided on the back surface of the lower door main body 704 penetrates the guide grooves 811a, 813a. The width of the guide grooves 811a, 813a is slightly longer than the diameter of the guide boss portion 780. A retaining screw 790 (see Figure 367) is screwed into the guide boss portion 780.

Guide grooves 811a and 813a define the left-right movement range of the second slide member 782 from the unlocked position to the locked position. The unlocked position is the leftmost position of the left-right movement range of the second slide member 782, and the locked position is the rightmost position of the left-right movement range of the second slide member 782.

The finger hook portion 813b is a through-hole that penetrates the connection portion 813 in the depth direction and is formed in a roughly rectangular shape. The two opposing left and right sides of the finger hook portion 813b are formed in arc shapes that convex in the directions away from each other. This makes it easier to hook a finger on the finger hook portion 813b when moving the second slide member 782 left and right.

A label portion 815 is provided on the upper portion of the parallel portion 811. The label portion 815 is formed as a rectangular plate that is long in the left-right direction. A locking direction indicator 815a is provided on the surface of the label portion 815 facing the rear in the depth direction (the surface opposite the surface facing the front portion 704a of the lower door main body 704). The locking direction indicator 815a consists of, for example, an arrow indicating the direction in which the second slide member 782 should be moved to the locked position and the word "locked." This allows the worker to easily confirm the direction in which the second slide member 782 should be moved to the locked position. The locking direction indicator 815a also serves as a warning to remember to move the second slide member 782 to the locked position when securing the decorative unit 706 to the lower door main body 704.

The second slide member 782 also has two fitting insertion portions 816. The two fitting insertion portions 816 protrude approximately perpendicularly from the right end faces of the parallel portions 811, 812 in the left-right direction. Each fitting insertion portion 816 is formed from two rectangular parallelepipeds lined up at an appropriate distance in the vertical direction. When the second slide member 782 is positioned in the unlocked position, the two fitting insertion portions 816 face the two second slide member through-holes 775 in the lower door main body 704. When the second slide member 782 is positioned in the locked position, the two fitting insertion portions 816 pass through the two second slide member through-holes 775 and are inserted into and fitted into the two fitting holes 750 in the decorative unit 706.

(Configuration of third slide member)
Next, with reference to Figure 373, the configuration of the third slide member 783 will be described.

Figure 373 is a perspective view of the third slide member 783.

As shown in FIG. 373, the third slide member 783 has a base portion 821, an extension portion 822, and a lower engagement insertion portion 823.

The base portion 821 is formed in a roughly rectangular parallelepiped shape that is long in the left-right direction. A recess is formed on the surface of the base portion 821 facing the rear in the depth direction (the surface opposite the surface facing the front portion 704a of the lower door main body 704). A guide groove 821a is provided on the bottom surface of the recess. The guide groove 821a penetrates the base portion 821 in the depth direction and extends in the left-right direction.

A guide boss 780 (see Figure 366) provided on the back surface of the lower door main body 704 passes through the guide groove 821a. The width of the guide groove 821a is slightly longer than the diameter of the guide boss 780. A retaining screw 790 (see Figure 367) is threaded into the guide boss 780. The guide groove 821a also defines the left-right movement range of the third slide member 783, from the unlocked position to the locked position. The unlocked position is the rightmost position in the left-right movement range of the third slide member 783, and the locked position is the leftmost position in the left-right movement range of the third slide member 783.

An engagement piece 825 is provided on the surface of the base portion 821 that is closest to the depth. The engagement piece 825 is formed in the shape of a plate with a flat surface that is approximately perpendicular to the depth direction, and extends in the left-right direction. The right end of the engagement piece 825 is continuous with the base portion 821, and the left end of the engagement piece 825 is formed in a claw shape. The engagement piece 825 is capable of bending and deforming in the horizontal direction.

The engagement piece 825 engages with a first engagement groove and a second engagement groove provided on the back surface of the lower door body 704. When the third slide member 783 is positioned in the unlocked position, the engagement piece 825 engages with the first engagement groove. Furthermore, when the third slide member 783 is positioned in the locked position, the engagement piece 825 engages with the second engagement groove. Engaging the engagement piece 825 with the first or second engagement groove creates resistance to left-right movement of the third slide member 783. This allows the operator to recognize when the third slide member 783 is positioned in the unlocked or locked position. Furthermore, even if vibrations or other factors occur, the third slide member 783 will not easily move from the unlocked or locked position.

Lower hook receivers 826 and 827 are formed on the upper surface of the base portion 821. The lower hook receiver 826 is provided at the right end of the upper surface of the base portion 821. The lower hook receiver 826 has an engagement surface 826a that is part of the upper surface of the base portion 821, and an engagement rib 826b that protrudes approximately perpendicularly from the engagement surface 826a. The lower surface of the lower hook portion 759 of the decorative unit 706 comes into surface contact with the engagement surface 826a. The engagement rib 826b is formed in a curved portion that is approximately U-shaped when the upper surface of the base portion 821 is viewed from the front. The engagement rib 826b engages with the recess of the lower hook portion 759 of the decorative unit 706.

The lower hook receiving portion 827 is provided at the left end of the top surface of the base portion 821. The lower hook receiving portion 827 has an engagement surface 827a that is part of the top surface of the base portion 821, and an engagement rib 827b that protrudes approximately perpendicularly from the engagement surface 827a. The lower surface of the lower hook portion 759 of the decorative unit 706 comes into surface contact with the engagement surface 827a. The engagement rib 827b is formed into a curved portion that is approximately U-shaped when the top surface of the base portion 821 is viewed from the front. The engagement rib 827b engages with the recess of the lower hook portion 759 of the decorative unit 706.

The extension 822 protrudes approximately perpendicularly from the left side surface of the base 791. The extension 822 is formed as a long, narrow plate extending in the left-right direction. A locking direction indicator (not shown) is provided on the surface of the extension 792 facing the rear in the depth direction (the surface opposite the surface facing the front surface 704a of the lower door body 704). The locking direction indicator consists of, for example, an arrow indicating the direction in which the third slide member 783 should be moved to the locked position and the word "locked." This allows the worker to easily confirm the direction in which the third slide member 783 should be moved to the locked position. The locking direction indicator also serves as a warning to remember to move the third slide member 781 to the locked position when securing the decorative unit 706 to the lower door body 704.

The extension 822 is provided with a guide groove 822a and a finger hook 822b. The guide groove 822a is formed on the left end of the extension 822 in the left-right direction. The guide groove 822a penetrates the extension 822 in the depth direction and extends in the left-right direction. Like the guide groove 821a, the guide groove 822a defines the left-right movement range of the third slide member 783. A guide boss 780 (see Figure 366) provided on the back surface of the lower door main body 704 penetrates the guide groove 822a. The width of the guide groove 822a is slightly longer than the diameter of the guide boss 780. A retaining screw 790 is threaded into the guide boss 780.

The finger hook 822b is located in the left-right center of the extension 822. The finger hook 822b is formed in a roughly rectangular frame shape that opens in the depth direction, and the bottom side of the finger hook 822b is continuous with the extension 822. The two opposing left-right sides of the finger hook 822b are formed in arc shapes that convex away from each other. This makes it easier to hook a finger on the finger hook 822b when moving the third slide member 783 left-right.

The lower engagement insertion portion 823 protrudes approximately perpendicularly from the left end face of the extension portion 792 in the left-right direction. The lower engagement insertion portion 823 is formed in a roughly rectangular plate shape with a flat surface that is approximately perpendicular to the depth direction. When the third slide member 783 is positioned in the locked position, the lower engagement insertion portion 823 is inserted into the engagement hole 761a (see Figure 365) of the lower engagement protrusion 761 of the decorative unit 706. This causes the lower engagement insertion portion 823 to engage with the lower engagement protrusion 761 of the decorative unit 706.

(Configuration of the fourth slide member)
Next, the configuration of the fourth slide member 784 will be described with reference to FIG.

Figure 374 is a front view of the fourth slide member 784.

As shown in FIG. 374, the fourth slide member 784 has a base portion 831, an operating portion 832, an extension portion 833, and a lower engagement insertion portion 834.

The base portion 831 is formed in the shape of a rectangular plate that is long in the left-right direction. The base portion 831 is provided with a guide groove 831a, a fixed direction indicator 831b, and an engagement piece 835. The guide groove 831a is formed in the upper right part of the base portion 831. The guide groove 831a penetrates the base portion 831 in the depth direction and extends in the left-right direction.

A guide boss 780 (see Figure 366) provided on the back surface of the lower door main body 704 passes through the guide groove 831a. The width of the guide groove 831a is slightly longer than the diameter of the guide boss 780. A retaining screw 790 (see Figure 367) is threaded into the guide boss 780. The guide groove 831a also defines the left-right movement range of the fourth slide member 784, from the unlocked position to the locked position. The unlocked position is the leftmost position in the left-right movement range of the fourth slide member 784, and the locked position is the rightmost position in the left-right movement range of the fourth slide member 784.

The fixed direction indicator 831b is located below the guide groove 831a on the surface of the base portion 831 facing the rear in the depth direction (the surface opposite the surface facing the front portion 704a of the lower door body 704). The fixed direction indicator 831b consists, for example, of an arrow indicating the direction in which the fourth slide member 784 should be moved to the locked position and the word "fixed." This allows the worker to easily confirm the direction in which the fourth slide member 784 should be moved to the locked position. The fixed direction indicator 831b also serves as a warning to remember to move the fourth slide member 784 to the locked position when fixing the decorative unit 706 to the lower door body 704.

A roughly rectangular opening is provided on the left side of the base portion 831 in the left-right direction. The engagement piece 835 is disposed within the opening in the base portion 831. The engagement piece 835 is formed in the shape of a plate with a flat surface that is roughly perpendicular to the depth direction, and extends in the left-right direction. The left end of the engagement piece 835 is continuous with one side of the opening in the base portion 831, and the right end of the engagement piece 835 is formed in a claw shape. The engagement piece 835 is capable of bending and deforming in the horizontal direction.

The engagement piece 835 engages with a first engagement groove and a second engagement groove provided on the back surface of the lower door body 704. When the fourth slide member 784 is positioned in the unlocked position, the engagement piece 835 engages with the first engagement groove. Furthermore, when the fourth slide member 784 is positioned in the locked position, the engagement piece 835 engages with the second engagement groove. Engaging the engagement piece 835 with the first or second engagement groove creates resistance to left-right movement of the fourth slide member 784. This allows the operator to recognize that the fourth slide member 784 is positioned in the unlocked or locked position. Furthermore, even if vibrations or other factors occur, the fourth slide member 784 will not easily move from the unlocked or locked position.

When viewed from the top and bottom, the operating unit 832 is formed in a roughly U-shape. The operating unit 832 consists of a first protruding piece that continues from the right end of the base unit 831 and protrudes toward the back in the depth direction, an operating piece that continues from the first protruding piece, and a second protruding piece that continues from the operating piece and protrudes toward the front in the depth direction. The operating piece of the operating unit 832 is formed in the shape of a plate with a flat surface that is roughly perpendicular to the depth direction. The operating piece of the operating unit 832 is provided with a finger hook 832a.

The finger hook portion 832a is a through-hole that penetrates the operating piece of the operating unit 832 in the depth direction and is formed in a roughly rectangular shape. The two opposing left and right sides of the finger hook portion 832a are formed in arc shapes that convex in the directions away from each other. This makes it easier to hook a finger on the finger hook portion 832a when moving the fourth slide member 784 left and right.

The extension 833 protrudes to the right in the left-right direction, continuing from the second protruding piece of the operating part 832. The extension 833 is a plate with a flat surface that is approximately perpendicular to the depth direction, and is formed in a rectangular shape that is long in the left-right direction. The depth position of the extension 833 is set to be approximately the same as the depth position of the base part 831.

A guide groove 833a is provided in the extension 833. The guide groove 833a penetrates the extension 833 in the depth direction and extends in the left-right direction. Like the guide groove 831a, the guide groove 833a defines the left-right movement range of the fourth slide member 784. A guide boss 780 (see Figure 366) provided on the back surface of the lower door main body 704 penetrates the guide groove 833a. The width of the guide groove 833a is slightly longer than the diameter of the guide boss 780. A retaining screw 790 is threaded into the guide boss 780.

The lower engagement insertion portion 834 protrudes approximately perpendicularly from the right end face of the extension portion 792 in the left-right direction. The lower engagement insertion portion 834 is formed in a roughly square plate shape with a flat surface that is approximately perpendicular to the depth direction. When the fourth slide member 784 is positioned in the locked position, the lower engagement insertion portion 834 is inserted into the engagement hole 762a (see Figure 365) of the lower engagement protrusion 762 of the decorative unit 706. This causes the lower engagement insertion portion 834 to engage with the lower engagement protrusion 762 of the decorative unit 706.

As described above, the decorative unit 706 is fixed to the lower door body 704 by the first locking mechanism, the second locking mechanism, and the third locking mechanism.

The first locking mechanism is composed of two upper engagement protrusions 751 and two lower engagement protrusions 761, 762 on the decorative unit 706, two upper protrusion through-holes 771 and two lower protrusion through-holes 772, 773 on the lower door body 704, two upper engagement insertion portions 803 on the first slide member 781, a lower engagement insertion portion 823 on the third slide member 783, and a lower engagement insertion portion 834 on the fourth slide member 784. The first locking mechanism can lock (stop) the decorative unit 706 from moving up and down, left and right, and in the depth direction.

The second locking mechanism is composed of mating holes 749, 750 in the decorative unit 706, the first slide member through-hole 774 and the second slide member through-hole 775 in the lower door body 704, the mating insertion portion 793 in the first slide member 781, and the mating insertion portion 816 in the second slide member 782. The second locking mechanism locks (stops) the decorative unit 706 from moving up, down, and in the depth direction. The second locking mechanism also allows the slide members 781, 782 to be mated with the decorative unit 706 on the outside of the lower door body 704. As a result, there is no need to consider interference with other components placed on the lower door body 704, allowing for greater design freedom for the lower door body 704.

The third locking mechanism is composed of two upper hook portions 752 and two lower hook portions 759 of the decorative unit 706, two upper hook through-holes 776 and two lower hook through-holes 777 of the lower door body 704, upper hook receiving portions 796, 797 of the first slide member 781, and lower hook receiving portions 826, 827 of the third slide member 783. The third locking mechanism can lock (stop) the decorative unit 706 from moving up and down and in the depth direction. The third locking mechanism also allows the decorative unit 706 to be secured to the lower door body 704 with a simple configuration.

The pachislot machine 601 of this embodiment is equipped with a decorative unit 706 that combines the waist panel 721 and the surrounding left and right decorative parts 722 and 723. This allows the waist panel 721, left decorative part 722, and right decorative part 723 to be removed together from the lower door body 704. The waist panel 721, left decorative part 722, and right decorative part 723 can also be attached together to the lower door body 704. As a result, the waist panel 721 and the surrounding decorative parts 722 and 723 can be easily changed.

Furthermore, in the pachislot machine 601 of this embodiment, the decorative unit 706 can be locked and unlocked simply by operating the four slide members 781-784 provided on the back side of the lower door body 704. This makes it easy to replace (remove and install) the decorative unit 706.

The decorative unit 706 also has a button cover portion 724 that exposes the stop buttons 713L, 713C, and 713R. This allows the members surrounding the stop buttons 713L, 713C, and 713R to be easily removed. As a result, cleaning around the stop buttons 713L, 713C, and 713R and maintenance of the stop buttons 713L, 713C, and 713R can be easily performed.

The first slide member 781 also has two upper engagement insertion portions 803 associated with the first locking mechanism, a fitting insertion portion 793 associated with the second locking mechanism, and upper hook receiving portions 796, 797 associated with the third locking mechanism. Therefore, a single slide member 781 can lock and unlock three locking mechanisms. This reduces the number of components in the locking mechanism.

The first slide member 781 also includes a first member 786 that is provided with an interlocking insertion portion 793 associated with the second locking mechanism and upper hook receiving portions 796, 797 associated with the third locking mechanism, and a second member 787 that is provided with two upper engagement insertion portions 803 associated with the first locking mechanism. When the first member 786 and the second member 787 are attached to the back side of the lower door body 704, the connecting portions 794, 804 engage and connect. This prevents areas of reduced strength compared to when the first slide member is formed as a single unit. As a result, damage to the first slide member can be reduced or prevented. Furthermore, when the slide member (second member 787) associated with the locking mechanism is located in a location that is difficult to reach or hidden behind a separate component, it can be moved to the locked and unlocked positions together with the operable component (first member 786).

Furthermore, the first slide member 781 has two of the four engagement insertion portions (two upper engagement insertion portions 803) involved in the first locking mechanism. This allows the two upper engagement insertion portions 803 to engage with the two upper engagement protrusions 751 of the decorative unit 706 by operating the first slide member 781. This allows for a reduction in the number of slide members.

[13-3. Installation of decorative units according to other examples]
Next, with reference to Figures 367 and 375 to 379, the work of attaching the decorative unit 706 to the lower door body 704 will be described.

Figure 375 is a view showing the back side of the lower door mechanism. Figure 376 is a view illustrating the state in which the upper hook portion 752 of the decorative unit 706 is inserted into the upper hook through-hole 776 of the lower door main body 704. Figure 377 is a view illustrating the state in which the upper hook portion 752 of the decorative unit 706 is engaged with the upper hook receiving portions 796, 797 of the first slide member 781. Figure 378 is a view illustrating the state in which the lower hook portion 759 of the decorative unit 706 is inserted into the lower hook through-hole 777 of the lower door main body 704. Figure 379 is a view illustrating the state in which the lower hook portion 759 of the decorative unit 706 is engaged with the lower hook receiving portions 826, 827 of the third slide member 783.

As shown in Figure 375, the lower door main body 704 is equipped with not only the four slide members 781-784 but also certain other components. Examples of such other components include the medal selector 841, medal return passage member 842, main relay board 843, sub-relay board 845, start lever 846, and speakers 708a and 708b. When viewed from the front on the rear surface of the lower door main body 704, the four slide members 781-784 are located further back (closer in the depth direction) than the medal selector 841, speakers 708a and 708b, and other other components. Furthermore, the finger hooks 792b, 813a, 822b, and 832a of the four slide members 781-784 are exposed through the gaps between the other components. This allows the four slide members 781-784 to be operated even when other components are located on the rear surface of the lower door main body 704. In addition to the finger hooks 792b, 813a, 822b, and 832a, the locking direction indicators (815a, 831b, etc.) of the four slide members 781-784 are also exposed. Therefore, even if the operator cannot see the engaging insertion portions 803, 823, and 834 or the fitting insertion portions 793 and 816, they can still recognize the direction in which to move the four slide members 781-784 to the locked position (the direction in which to move them to the unlocked position).

When attaching the decorative unit 706 to the lower door body 704, the back side of the decorative unit 706 is faced toward the front side of the lower door body 704, and the decorative unit 706 is pushed toward the rear in the depth direction. This causes the two upper engagement protrusions 751 (see Figure 365), lower engagement protrusions 761, 762, two upper hook portions 752, and two lower hook portions 759 of the decorative unit 706 to pass through the two upper protrusion through-holes 771 (see Figure 366), lower protrusion through-holes 772, 773, two upper hook through-holes 776, and two lower hook through-holes 777 of the lower door body 704, respectively. The fitting holes 749, 750 of the decorative unit 706 then face the first slide member through-hole 774 and the second slide member through-hole 775 of the lower door body 704.

On the other hand, four slide members 781-784 are slidably attached to the back side of the lower door body 704, and are each positioned in the unlocked position (see Figure 367). As shown in Figure 376, the two upper hook portions 752 that pass through the two upper protrusion through-holes 771 are inserted into the upper hook receiving portions 796, 797 of the first slide member 781. At this time, the upper surfaces of the two upper hook portions 752 come into surface contact with the engagement surfaces 796a, 797a of the upper hook receiving portions 796, 797. Furthermore, as shown in Figure 378, the two lower hook portions 759 that pass through the lower protrusion through-holes 772, 773 are inserted into the lower hook receiving portions 826, 827 of the third slide member 783. At this time, the lower surfaces of the two lower hook portions 759 come into surface contact with the engagement surfaces 826a, 827a of the lower hook receiving portions 826, 827.

Next, slide the four slide members 781-784 to the locked position. This secures the decorative unit 706 to the lower door body 704 via the first to third locking mechanisms, completing the installation of the lower door body 704.

(Lock by the first slide member)
When the first slide member 781 is moved to the locked position, the upper engagement insertion portion 803 of the first slide member 781 is inserted into the engagement hole 751a (see FIG. 365) of the upper engagement protrusion 751 of the decorative unit 706, and the upper engagement insertion portion 803 engages with the upper engagement protrusion 751. As a result, the decorative unit 706 is fixed to the lower door body 704 by the first locking mechanism.

Furthermore, the fitting insertion portion 793 of the first slide member 781 passes through the first slide member through-hole 774 of the lower door body 704 and fits into the fitting hole 749 of the decorative unit 706. As a result, the decorative unit 706 is fixed to the lower door body 704 by the second locking mechanism.

Furthermore, the upper hook receiving portions 796, 797 of the first slide member 781 engage with the two upper hook portions 752 of the decorative unit 706 (see Figure 377). Specifically, the engagement ribs 796b, 797b of the upper hook receiving portions 796, 797 engage with the recesses of the upper hook portions 752. As a result, the decorative unit 706 is fixed to the lower door body 704 by the third locking mechanism.

(Lock by the second slide member)
When the second slide member 782 is moved to the locked position, the two fitting insertion portions 816 of the second slide member 782 pass through the two second slide member through-holes 775 of the lower door body 704 and fit into the two fitting holes 750 of the decorative unit 706. As a result, the decorative unit 706 is fixed to the lower door body 704 by the second locking mechanism.

(Lock by the third slide member)
When the third slide member 783 is moved to the locked position, the lower engagement insertion portion 823 of the third slide member 783 is inserted into the engagement hole 761a (see Figure 365) of the lower engagement protrusion 761 of the decorative unit 706, and the lower engagement insertion portion 823 engages with the lower engagement protrusion 761. As a result, the decorative unit 706 is fixed to the lower door body 704 by the first locking mechanism.

Furthermore, the lower hook receiving portions 826, 827 of the third slide member 783 engage with the two lower hook portions 759 of the decorative unit 706 (see Figure 379). Specifically, the engagement ribs 826b, 827b of the lower hook receiving portions 826, 827 engage with the recesses of the lower hook portions 759. As a result, the decorative unit 706 is fixed to the lower door body 704 by the third locking mechanism.

(Lock by the fourth slide member)
When the fourth slide member 784 is moved to the locked position, the lower engagement insertion portion 834 of the fourth slide member 784 is inserted into the engagement hole 762a (see FIG. 365) of the lower engagement protrusion 762 of the decorative unit 706, and the lower engagement insertion portion 834 engages with the lower engagement protrusion 762. As a result, the decorative unit 706 is fixed to the lower door body 704 by the first locking mechanism.

[13-4. Removal of decorative unit according to another example]
To remove the decorative unit 706 from the lower door body 704, the four slide members 781 to 784 are slid to the unlocked position. This releases the locks of the first to third locking mechanisms, allowing the decorative unit 706 to be removed from the lower door body 704. In this manner, in this embodiment, the decorative unit 706, which includes the lower panel portion 721 and the left and right decorative portions 722 and 723, can be easily attached and detached to and from the lower door body 704. Therefore, the lower panel portion and the decorative portions surrounding it can be easily changed.

[13-5. Summary of the invention relating to a gaming machine equipped with a decorative unit according to another example (Appendix)]
As described above, a gaming machine equipped with the main board case 620 can be provided with the following configuration.

Gaming machines equipped with a lower panel that serves as an element for identifying the model have been known for some time (see, for example, JP 2019-024583 A). The lower panel of such gaming machines has a display surface that allows the sheet placed inside to be seen, and the content displayed on the display surface can be changed by replacing the sheet.

However, with these types of gaming machines, it was difficult to easily change the model-specific decoration (design) like with the lower back panel.

The present invention was made in light of these issues, and aims to provide an amusement machine that allows for easy modification of not only the waist panel but also the decoration around the waist panel.

To achieve the above objective, this embodiment provides a gaming machine with the following configuration.

(1)
a cabinet (e.g., cabinet G);
a door body (e.g., a lower door body 704) attached to the cabinet so as to be able to open and close;
a decorative unit (e.g., decorative unit 706) detachably attached to the front surface side of the door body;
The decorative unit has at least a waist panel portion (e.g., waist panel portion 721), decorative portions (e.g., left decorative portion 722 and right decorative portion 723) provided around the waist panel portion, and an engaging portion (e.g., fitting hole 749, upper engaging protrusion 751, upper hook portion 752) with which a slide member (e.g., first slide member 781) provided on the back side of the door body engages,
When the slide member engages with the engagement portion, the decorative unit is locked to the door body, and when the slide member disengages from the engagement portion, the lock is released.

This configuration makes it easy to change the waist panel and the decorative parts around it.

(2)
The decorative unit is characterized in that it has a button cover portion (e.g., button cover portion 724) around the waist panel portion that covers the periphery of the stop button (e.g., stop buttons 713L, 713C, 713R) located on the surface side of the door body so that the stop button is exposed on the front side.

With this configuration, the decorative unit can be removed from the door body, making it easy to clean the area around the stop button and perform maintenance on the stop button.

(3)
The engaging portion is configured to include an engaging protrusion (e.g., upper engaging protrusion 751) having an engaging hole penetrating in a direction intersecting the depth direction in which the decorative unit and the door body face each other, a fitting hole (e.g., fitting hole 749), and a hook portion (e.g., upper hook portion 752),
The door body has a protrusion through-hole (e.g., upper protrusion through-hole 771) through which the engaging protrusion penetrates from the front surface side to the back surface side, a slide member through-hole (e.g., first slide member through-hole 774) facing the fitting hole and through which the slide member penetrates from the back surface side to the front surface side, and a hook through-hole (e.g., upper hook through-hole 776) through which the hook portion penetrates from the front surface side to the back surface side,
The gaming machine described in (2) above is characterized in that the slide member has an engaging insertion portion (e.g., upper engaging insertion portion 803) that is inserted into the engaging hole of the engaging protrusion that passes through the protrusion through-hole, a fitting insertion portion (e.g., fitting insertion portion 793) that passes through the slide member through-hole and fits into the fitting hole, and a hook receiving portion (e.g., upper hook receiving portion 796) that engages with the hook portion that passes through the hook through-hole.

With this configuration, locking is achieved by the engagement of multiple types of engagement portions on the decorative unit (engagement holes, fitting holes, hook portions on the engagement protrusions) with multiple types of components on the sliding member (engagement insertion portions, fitting insertion portions, hook receiving portions).However, there is a locking mechanism in which the engagement holes (concave) on the engagement protrusions on the decorative unit engage with the engagement insertion portions (convex) on the sliding member, and a locking mechanism in which the hook portions (convex) on the decorative unit engage with the hook receiving portions (concave) on the sliding member.By using the locking mechanisms to adjust the concave and convex portions of each component, the load on each component is distributed even if force is applied to forcibly remove the decorative unit without releasing the lock, making the configuration less susceptible to damage.

In addition, since one slide member can lock and unlock the three locking mechanisms, the number of components in the locking mechanism can be reduced.

(4)
a plurality of the engaging projections and the slide members are provided;
One of the slide members (e.g., first slide member 781) has a plurality of the engagement inserts (e.g., upper engagement inserts 803),
The plurality of engagement protrusions include a plurality of upper engagement protrusions (e.g., two upper engagement protrusions 751) and a plurality of lower engagement protrusions (e.g., two lower engagement protrusions 762),
a distance between a first upper engagement protrusion and a second upper engagement protrusion among the plurality of upper engagement protrusions is shorter than a distance between a first lower engagement protrusion and a second lower engagement protrusion among the plurality of lower engagement protrusions;
The gaming machine described in (3) above, characterized in that the multiple engagement insertion portions provided on one of the multiple slide members are inserted into the engagement holes of the first upper engagement protrusion and the engagement holes of the second upper engagement protrusion.

With this configuration, by operating a single slide member, multiple engagement insertion portions can be engaged with multiple engagement protrusions. This allows for a reduction in the number of slide members. Furthermore, because the distance between the first upper engagement protrusion and the second upper engagement protrusion is shorter than the distance between the first lower engagement protrusion and the second lower engagement protrusion, slide members with multiple engagement insertion portions can be made smaller.

(5)
The gaming machine described in (4) above is characterized in that the slide member (e.g., first slide member 781) is positioned further back than a predetermined separate member (e.g., medal selector 841 or start lever 846) that is positioned on the back side of the door body, and has a finger loop (e.g., finger loop 792b) that can be operated with the predetermined separate member positioned on the back side of the door body.

With this configuration, the slide member can be operated even when a specific separate component is placed on the back side of the door body. Therefore, when fixing the decorative unit to the door body or removing the decorative unit from the door body, there is no need to remove the specific separate component. This makes it possible to avoid complicated work when attaching and removing the decorative unit to and from the door body.

(6)
One of the slide members (e.g., a first slide member 781) has a first member (e.g., a first member 786) provided with the fitting insertion portion and the hook receiving portion, and a second member (e.g., a second member 787) provided with the engagement insertion portion,
The gaming machine described in (5) above, wherein the first member and the second member are slidably attached to the rear side of the door body and are interlocked with each other.

With this configuration, the slide members associated with the three locking mechanisms are separated into a first member and a second member and connected together, allowing for a design that eliminates areas with low strength compared to when the slide members are formed as a single unit. As a result, damage to the slide members associated with the three locking mechanisms can be reduced or prevented. Furthermore, by providing slide members equipped with multiple types of locking mechanisms, even in the unlikely event that other slide members are damaged, the slide members associated with the three locking mechanisms can still perform a minimum locking function.

In this embodiment, the four slide members 781-784 are configured to slide left and right. However, the slide members of the present invention may slide in any direction as long as the direction intersects with the depth direction. Also, it is not necessary to align the movement direction of all slide members; the movement direction of each slide member can be set individually.

Furthermore, while the configuration of the present invention has been explained assuming a pachislot machine, it is also possible to implement a locking mechanism with a similar configuration in a pachinko machine. For example, the cabinet G can be configured as a base member such as a frame, the lower door body 704 as a door member attached to the base member, the decorative unit 706 and the left decorative portion 722 and right decorative portion 723 as a decorative unit arranged on the door member, and the lower panel as a decorative sheet arranged on the door member. Furthermore, when implementing a similar locking mechanism in a pachinko machine, it is not necessarily necessary to use the same configuration, and adjustments to each component may be made as needed.

Tenth Embodiment
The first to ninth embodiments have been described above. The tenth embodiment will now be described. The basic configuration of the pachislot machine 1 according to the tenth embodiment is the same as that of the pachislot machine 1 according to the first to ninth embodiments. In the following, components that are the same as those of the pachislot machine 1 according to the first to ninth embodiments will be described with the same reference numerals. Furthermore, explanations of portions that apply to the tenth embodiment from the explanations of the first to ninth embodiments will be omitted.

Note that even if the above description contains statements that are limited to the pachislot machine 1 of the first embodiment, such as "In the first embodiment, ..." or "In the pachislot machine 1 of the first embodiment, ...," they can also be applied to the pachislot machine 1 of the tenth embodiment, as long as they do not deviate from the spirit of the tenth embodiment. Similarly, the above description contains statements that are limited to the pachislot machines 1 of the second to ninth embodiments, as long as they do not deviate from the spirit of the tenth embodiment. Therefore, it is possible to partially replace or combine each of the configurations shown in the first to ninth embodiments (including each of the configurations shown in the modified examples and the extended examples) with the configuration shown in the tenth embodiment.

Furthermore, even if a component has a different shape from the pachislot machine 1 according to the first to eighth embodiments, the same reference numerals may be used for convenience to designate components with similar functions. Furthermore, even if a component has the same shape or the same processing as the pachislot machine 1 according to the first to eighth embodiments, different reference numerals or step numbers may be used for convenience.

[Initial movement of movable props]
First, with reference to Figures 380 to 382, we will explain the initial operation of the movable role when the power is applied to the pachislot machine 1. Here, a movable role refers to a role that can be operated by various drive mechanisms such as motors and solenoids, and does not include non-movable decorative roles. In the pachislot machine 1, when a performance using a movable role is determined, the main control circuit 100 or sub-control circuit 200 outputs various control signals (e.g., excitation data, etc.) to various drive mechanisms such as motors and solenoids. The movable role performs an operation corresponding to the performance by operating based on the control signal received by the drive mechanism of the movable role. Note that, in the initial operation of the movable role described below, the drive mechanism of the movable role is optional. In other words, any drive mechanism capable of performing the operation corresponding to the performance may be used as the drive mechanism for the movable role. Furthermore, it is preferable that the movable role be protected from contact by a transparent resin panel or the like.

(Outline of movable props)
First, an overview of the movable role will be explained with reference to Figure 380. Figure 380(A) is a diagram showing an example of the operation of the movable role, and Figure 380(B) is a diagram showing a time chart when the movable role operates. In the example shown in Figure 380, a movable role is used in a performance that notifies the player of the success or failure of the awarding of a bonus to the player. When an award is awarded to the player, the movable role operates to notify the player of the success of the performance, while when an award is not awarded to the player, the movable role does not operate to notify the player of the failure of the performance. Note that the performance example shown in Figure 380 is merely one example showing an example of the operation of the movable role, and the operation of the movable role is not limited to this.

As shown in Figure 380 (A), the pachislot machine 1 has a movable role piece 5001, a main display device 210, and an upper unit 5002. The main display device 210 is, for example, a liquid crystal display device, and provides visual effects to the player. The upper unit 5002 is a decorative role piece located above the main display device 210. In the example shown in Figure 380, the movable role piece 5001 is stored in the upper unit 5002 in its initial state before the role piece is activated, and is not visible to the player. Note that the movable role piece 5001 may be positioned so that, although it cannot be seen from the front, the bottom, or both, of the movable role piece 5001 can be seen by looking down from below.

In the example of the effect shown in the same figure, as shown in Figure 380(A)(a), the main display device 210 displays "Press the button!" and the player operates an effect button (not shown) to be notified of the success or failure of the effect. In other words, in the example shown in the same figure, the player's operation of the effect button triggers the movement of the movable role object. Of course, the trigger for the movement of the movable role object is not limited to the operation of the effect button, and can be set arbitrarily depending on the content of the effect to be executed.

As shown in Figure 380 (b), when the effect is successful (when it has been decided that a bonus will be awarded to the player), the movable role device 5001 moves from its initial position to its operating position in response to the player's operation of the effect button, thereby notifying the player that the effect has been successful. In the example shown in Figure 380, the initial position is when it is stored in the upper unit 5002 (Figure 380 (A) (a)), and the operating position is when it is moved to the front of the main display device 210 (Figure 380 (A) (b)). Note that in an effect using the movable role device 5001, other effect means also operate in conjunction with the movable role device 5001 to enhance the success of the effect. As an example, a message indicating that the effect has been successful is displayed on the main display device 210, and a lamp provided on the upper unit 5002 is illuminated in a different manner than usual, and a different effect sound is output from the speaker, thereby producing an effect linked to the operation of the movable role device 5001 using various effect means. Specific examples of effect effects will be explained below.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 1(c), if the effect fails (if it has been decided that a bonus will be awarded to the player), the movable role element 5001 will not move from its initial position even if the player operates the effect button, indicating that the effect has failed. In other words, the movable role element 5001 will remain stored in the upper unit 5002 and will not operate. Note that if the effect fails, not only may the movable role element 5001 not operate, but other means may be used to indicate that the effect has failed. For example, a liquid crystal display device such as the main display device 210 may display a message indicating that the effect has failed (for example, this may be a direct message such as "Failed," or the display screen may be darkened or otherwise indicated in a way that makes the failure noticeable), or a lamp, speaker, or the like may be used to display a message that is different from that displayed when the effect is successful, making the failure noticeable. Specific examples of such effects will be explained below.

Specific examples of the effects of other performance devices when the performance is successful and when it fails will be explained below.

First, we will explain the effects performed on LCD displays such as the main display device 210. The main display device 210 performs continuous effects across multiple games. Images of a battle between an ally character and an enemy character are displayed from before the previous game, and in the win/lose game, an operation instruction effect is displayed encouraging the player to intervene by saying "Press the button!" just before the scene in which the battle is decided. Although not shown, the operation instruction effect may also display a button image resembling an effect button along with the message "Press the button!" In this example, the operation instruction effect is performed when the stop switch associated with the third stop of the game changes from ON to OFF (hereinafter referred to as "third stop OFF"). However, it can be set to any time, such as after the start lever is turned ON, after the third stop OFF, or after any effect associated with the third stop OFF is executed.

When the effect is successful, if the player operates the effect button in accordance with the operation instruction effect, a success effect will be displayed to notify the player that the effect has been successful. Specifically, a visual effect such as a converging line or rainbow aura is displayed at the operating position where the movable role object 5001 appears. After a certain amount of time has passed in this state, the movable role object 5001 will begin to move to its initial position, and the video will fade to show the outcome of the battle (victory).

On the other hand, if the effect fails, and the player operates the effect button in accordance with the operation instruction effect, a failure effect will be displayed to notify the player that the effect has failed. Specifically, if the effect fails, the movable device 5001 will not move to its operating position, and a scene showing the conclusion of the battle (defeat) will be displayed immediately after the effect button is operated.

Next, we will explain the sound effects output from the speaker. In the continuous effects described above, voices and background music corresponding to the character battle effects are output from the speaker provided in the pachislot machine 1 from the game prior to the win/loss determination game, and after the third stop of the win/loss determination game is turned off, a voice such as "Press the button" and sound effects encouraging button operation are output in conjunction with the operation instruction effects on the main display device 210.

When the effect is successful, if the player operates the effect button in accordance with the operation instruction effect, a congratulatory sound will be output to notify the success of the effect. Specifically, a combination of the sound effect "Crrrrrrrrrr" and a voice saying "Big hit!" will be output from the speaker. Then, after a certain amount of time has passed in this state, the movable device 5001 will begin moving to its initial position, and the background music will switch to battle victory background music.

On the other hand, if the effect fails, when the player operates the effect button in accordance with the operation instruction effect, a sound effect announcing the effect failure is output. Specifically, if the effect fails, the movable role object 5001 does not move to its operating position, so the battle defeat background music is output immediately after the effect button is operated.

Next, we will explain the lamp effects. In the continuous effects described above, the decorative lamps (for example, side lamps on the left and right of the main display device 210) equipped on the pachislot machine 1 have been illuminating in a manner corresponding to the battle effects since the game prior to the win/loss determination game. After that, after the third stop of the win/loss determination game is turned off, the lamps are illuminated in a manner that slowly flashes white in conjunction with the operation instruction effect on the main display device 210, prompting the player to operate the effect button.

When the effect is successful, the player operates the effect button in accordance with the operation instruction effect, and the lamp lights up in a manner that indicates the success of the effect. Specifically, it continues to emit rainbow light. Then, after a certain amount of time has passed in this state, the movable device 5001 begins to move to its initial position, and the lamp's illumination mode switches to match the battle victory effect.

On the other hand, if the effect fails, when the player operates the effect button in accordance with the operation instruction effect, the lamp will light up in a manner that notifies the player that the effect has failed. Specifically, if the effect fails, the movable device 5001 will not move to its operating position, so immediately after the effect button is operated, the lamp will light up in a manner that matches the battle defeat effect.

Next, Figure 1B is a time chart for when the performance is successful (i.e., when the movable role 5001 is activated). As shown in the figure, the movable role 5001 remains in its initial position before activation. Because the movable role 5001 is stored in the upper unit 5002 at its initial position, the player cannot see the movable role 5001 while it is in its initial position. After that, when the operation trigger for the movable role 5001 is turned ON, various drive mechanisms operate based on control signals output from the main control circuit 100 or the sub-control circuit 200, causing the movable role 5001 to begin operation. When the movable role 5001 begins operation, the movable role 5001, which was hidden in its initial position, appears and becomes visible to the player. In other words, immediately after the movable role 5001 begins operation, the player can see part of the movable role 5001. The movable role device 5001 then moves from its initial position to its operating position. This allows the player to see all of the movable role device 5001. Once the movable role device 5001 has moved to its operating position, it waits at that operating position for a set period of time, and then moves to its initial position, completing its operation. As it moves to its initial position, the movable role device 5001, which was visible to the player, is stored in the upper unit 5002 and is no longer visible to the player. By setting a waiting time at the operating position in this way, various effects can be performed during that time to indicate that the effect has been successful, and as a result, the player can be reliably notified that the effect has been successful.

As mentioned above, the trigger for movement from the operating position to the initial position is basically the passage of a certain amount of time, but this is not limited to this. For example, it may be triggered by the operation to start the next game. In this case, the waiting time at the operating position may be shortened, or if the start operation is performed but the certain amount of time has not passed, the waiting time at the operating position may continue, or a locked state may be established in which the operation to start the next game cannot be performed during the certain amount of time. The same applies to other effects that accompany the operation of the movable device 5001.

Next, with reference to the same figure, we will explain the operation of other presentation means when the movable prop 5001 is in operation. Note that the same figure also shows, as other presentation means, a time chart for the operation of LCD display devices such as the main display device 210, and a time chart for the operation of speakers and lamps.

Before the movable role element 5001 is put into operation, the LCD display shows a battle scene, for example, in which a friendly character faces off against an enemy character. Then, before the movable role element 5001 is put into operation, a message such as "Press the button" is displayed on the LCD display. When the player operates the effect button in response to this message, the operation trigger for the movable role element 5001 is turned ON, and as the movable role element 5001 begins to operate, the LCD display shows a visual effect in which the operating position where the movable role element 5001 appears is enveloped in a converging line or rainbow-colored aura. Then, after a certain amount of time has passed in this state, the movable role element 5001 begins to move to its initial position, and the video fades to a scene in which the battle is decided (victory).

In addition, before the movable device 5001 is activated, the speaker outputs background music appropriate for the battle performance, and the lamp lights up in a manner appropriate for the battle performance. Then, in conjunction with a message such as "Press the button" displayed on the LCD display, the speaker outputs a voice message such as "Press the button" or a sound effect encouraging the player to press the button, and the lamp slowly flashes white to encourage the player to press the performance button. Then, when the player operates the performance button and the operation trigger for the movable device 5001 is turned on, the speaker outputs a celebratory sound such as "Kyuuin kyuuin kyuuin" in accordance with the operation of the movable device. Similarly, the lamp also lights up in rainbow to indicate that the performance was successful. After a certain amount of time has passed in this state, the movable prop 5001 begins to move to its initial position, and in conjunction with this, the sound effect output from the speaker is switched to battle victory background music, and similarly, the lamp's lighting pattern is switched to match the battle victory presentation.

In this way, when a performance is being performed, other performance means such as an LCD display device switch performances in accordance with the operation of the movable prop 5001.

Furthermore, although the initial position of the movable role element 5001 is set to a position that is difficult for the player to see (for example, stored in the upper unit 5002) and the operating position is set to a position that is visible to the player (for example, in front of the main display device 210), this is not limited to this. For example, the initial position may be set to a position that is visible to the player and the operating position may be set to a position that is difficult for the player to see, or both the initial position and the operating position may be positions that are visible to the player. Furthermore, both the initial position and the operating position may be positions that are not visible to the player. For example, by setting the initial position to a position stored in the upper unit 5002 and the operating position to a position stored in a lower unit provided below the main display device 210 or a side unit provided to the side of the main display device 210, the movable role element 5001 can be set to a role that moves from the upper unit 5002 to the lower unit or side unit. When this mode is adopted, the presentation flow is as follows: before the movable role object 5001 is operated, the LCD display displays a battle presentation, the speaker plays background music corresponding to the battle presentation, and the lamp emits light in a manner corresponding to the battle presentation; at this timing, the movable role object 5001 is not visible. Next, the LCD display displays a message such as "Press the button," and the lamp flashes white. When the player presses a button to activate the movable role object 5001, the movable role object 5001 begins to operate and becomes visible. At the same time, the LCD display displays a visual effect of a concentrated line or a rainbow-colored aura around the operating position where the movable role object 5001 appears, and the speaker emits a celebratory sound such as "Kyuin kyuin kyuin" in accordance with the operation of the movable role object 5001. Similarly, the lamp also emits rainbow light in accordance with the operation of the movable role object 5001, indicating that the presentation has been successful. During this time, the movable prop 5001 continues to move towards the lower unit, and becomes invisible when it reaches a position where it is stored in the lower unit. At the same time, the video fades to a scene where the battle has been decided (victory), the sound effects output from the speaker are switched to battle victory background music, and similarly, the lighting pattern of the lamp is switched to match the battle victory presentation, etc.

In addition, in the example shown in the figure, when the player operates the effect button, the operation trigger is turned ON and the movable device 5001 operates. However, for example, if the player does not operate the effect button, the movable device 5001 may be operated after a predetermined time has passed, or at the end of the game, or at the start of the next game (for example, when the player operates the bet for the next game or the start lever for the next game). Of course, the movable device 5001 may not be operated unless the player operates the effect button. In that case, if the next game is started without operating the effect button, the operation of the movable device 5001 is skipped, and the operation of the movable device 5001 and the various effects corresponding to it will not be performed.

The position of the movable part 5001 is determined, for example, by a detection piece and a sensor. As an example, in the case of a movable part 5001 that moves between two positions, the initial position and the operating position as described above, the sensors for determining the position of the movable part 5001 include a sensor for determining the initial position and a sensor for determining the operating position, and the detection piece is provided on the movable part 5001 itself or on a component whose position can be displaced in accordance with the movement of the movable part 5001, such as a drive mechanism. When the sensor for determining the initial position detects the detection piece, the movable part 5001 is determined to be in the initial position, and when the sensor for determining the operating position detects the detection piece, the movable part 5001 is determined to be in the operating position. The detection piece may be provided separately for the sensor for determining the initial position and the sensor for determining the operating position, or a single detection piece may be shared by both sensors. Furthermore, the sensor need not be provided at both the initial position or the operating position, but may be provided at only one of the initial position and the operating position. In such a case, if the sensor detects the detection piece (ON), it can be determined that the movable part 5001 is at the position where the sensor is installed, and if the sensor does not detect the detection piece (OFF), it can be determined that the movable part 5001 is not at the position where the sensor is installed.

When the initial position determination sensor detects the detection piece (initial position), the operation trigger is turned ON and a signal related to the operation of the reel is received from the control circuit, causing the drive mechanism to operate and move the movable reel 5001 to the operating position. Note that when the initial position determination sensor does not detect the detection piece (other than the initial position), even if the operation trigger is turned ON, it may be determined that the movable reel 5001 is not in the initial position due to a malfunction or other reason, and the movable reel 5001 may not be operated. For example, the control circuit may not output a signal related to the operation of the reel to the drive mechanism, thereby preventing the movable reel 5001 from operating from positions other than the initial position. By configuring the operation trigger to be ON during a performance during gameplay as described above, processing of the malfunctioning movable reel 5001 can be omitted, reducing the processing burden. However, this does not apply during the initial operation described below; for example, the movable prop 5001 may move from its initial position due to an impact caused by opening or closing a door, so it is preferable to perform the initial operation before determining the position (or without determining the position).

In addition, in the pachislot machine 1, even in games in which the reel is not operated, the control circuit preferably checks whether the sensor for determining the initial position is ON (whether the detection piece is being detected) at any time, such as at the start of play. If it is not ON, it determines that the movable reel 5001 is not in its initial position due to some error and performs a movement operation to its initial position. In other words, if such an error occurs, the control circuit preferably outputs a signal to the drive mechanism to move the movable reel 5001 to its initial position. In this case, if the movable reel 5001 moves to its initial position by the movement operation to its initial position (the sensor for determining the initial position is ON), the operation of the movable reel 5001 is terminated. On the other hand, if the movable reel 5001 does not move to its initial position after a certain period of time has passed (the sensor for determining the initial position is OFF), there is a high possibility that an abnormality has occurred in the movable reel 5001 or the drive mechanism, so the control circuit terminates the operation of the movable reel 5001.

In addition, if the operation of the movable role element 5001 is terminated due to the occurrence of an abnormality, it is preferable that the control circuit of the pachislot machine 1 notify the gaming parlor manager of this fact. For example, the main display device 210 may display a message indicating that an abnormality has occurred in the movable role element 5001, or a voice or sound effect indicating the abnormality may be output from the speaker, or the control circuit may output a signal to a hall computer or the like indicating that an abnormality has occurred in the movable role element 5001. In addition, even if the operation of the movable role element 5001 is terminated due to the occurrence of an abnormality, as long as the operating area of the movable role element 5001 is not in a position that may obstruct the visibility of the reels (or, if necessary, the pay lines on the reels), it can be said that this will not interfere with the minimum level of gameplay, and therefore no special notification may be issued.

Furthermore, if the initial position determination sensor remains OFF for a certain period of time at any timing, such as at the start of play, the pachislot machine 1 may determine that there is a high possibility that an abnormality has occurred in the movable role element 5001 or the drive mechanism, and may not control the operation of the role element thereafter until power is restored. In other words, even if a performance using the movable role element 5001 is decided, the movable role element 5001 will not be operated. Specifically, the control circuit may not output a signal related to the operation of the role element to the drive mechanism, thereby preventing the movable role element 5001 from being operated. Alternatively, if the initial position determination sensor remains OFF for a certain period of time, the output of a recovery signal may be stopped until power is restored, but a signal related to the operation of the role element for the performance may still be output. Note that "when the initial position determination sensor remains OFF for a certain period of time" may mean that a predetermined number of games are played while the initial position determination sensor remains OFF, or that a predetermined time has passed while the initial position determination sensor remains OFF, or that a return signal is sent a predetermined number of times to move the movable device 5001 to its initial position when it is not in its initial position.

(Initial movement of movable parts)
Next, we will explain the initial operation of the movable role unique to the pachislot machine 1 of the tenth embodiment. Since the effects using movable role elements attract the player's attention and add excitement to the game, if they do not operate during business hours, it will ruin the fun. Therefore, while the manager of the gaming parlor is interested in whether the movable role elements operate properly, effects using movable role elements are not performed frequently, and since a gaming parlor has many gaming machines installed, it is not realistic to play games until an effect using movable role elements is performed in order to check the operation before opening. Therefore, in the tenth embodiment, the movable role elements are automatically operated when the gaming machine is powered on, making it possible to check the operation of the movable role elements.

Figure 381 is a diagram explaining the initial operation of a movable role, and shows a comparison example with the operation when a performance using a movable role is performed. The initial operation is performed to check whether the movable role is operating properly, so while it is basically the same as the operation when performing practice, there are some differences, which will be explained below. Note that the initial operation of a movable role refers to the operation that is automatically performed when the power is turned on to the pachislot machine 1, and the operation when a performance using a movable role is performed refers to the operation of the movable role when a performance using a movable role is decided during play.

As shown in Figure 381 (A) (a), during the performance, the movable role element is located in its initial position (e.g., stored in the top unit) at the start of the performance (a-1). The movable role element is then controlled based on the determined performance data, and moves from its initial position to its operating position (a-2). During the performance, the movable role element moves to its operating position and waits there for a certain period of time (a-3) to liven up the game through operations linked with other performance means at the operating position. Then, after performing a performance linked with other performance means for a sufficient period of time while waiting in the operating position, the movable role element moves from its operating position to its initial position (a-4), thereby completing the performance. Note that the performance linked with the movable role element and other performance means does not only occur when the movable role element moves to its operating position, but continues throughout the performance using the movable role element.

Next, as shown in Figure 381 (A) (b), in the initial operation, when the power is applied to the pachislot machine 1, the movable part is located in its initial position (b-1). Next, when the power is applied to the pachislot machine 1, the movable part is controlled based on data for predetermined operation when the power is turned on, and as a result moves from its initial position to its operating position (b-2). At this time, since the purpose of the initial operation is to check the operation of the movable part (in other words, to check the operation of the drive mechanism that drives the movable part), the movable part does not wait in its operating position, unlike its operation during a performance (or its wait time is shorter than during a performance). In other words, in the initial operation, once the movable part moves to its operating position, it immediately moves to its initial position (b-3), thereby completing the initial operation.

Note that during the performance, other performance means work in conjunction with the movable props to perform the performance; however, during the initial operation when the power is turned on, the purpose is to check the operation of the movable props, so other performance means do not work in conjunction with the movable props to perform the performance. For example, if the main display device 210 returns to a demo screen when the power is turned on, the demo screen will be displayed on the main display device 210 during the initial operation of the movable props. Also, for example, if the main display device 210 returns to the performance screen that was running before the power was cut off when the power was turned on, the performance screen at the time of return will be displayed on the main display device 210 during the initial operation of the movable props. Also, since powering on/off basically cannot be performed without opening the front door of the cabinet, an error notification such as a door open error may be issued on the main display device 210 or the like when the power is turned on (for example, a message such as "The door is open" may be displayed on an LCD display device such as the main display device 210, and a lamp such as a side lamp may light up red to indicate an error state, and a message such as "The door is open" may be output from the speaker). When such an error notification is issued, it is preferable that the main display device 210 displays the power recovery effect screen after the front door is closed and the door open error is resolved.

Next, Figure 381 (B) shows a comparison example between a time chart of a movable part during performance execution and a time chart of a movable part during initial operation.

As shown in the diagram, the movable part moves from its initial position to its operating position both when the performance is being performed and when it is initially operating, so the two operations can be said to be similar. Furthermore, both have in common the fact that the movable part moves from its initial position to its operating position when the operation trigger is turned ON. However, the period during which it stays in the operating position - in other words, the duration of at least some of the operations that make up the performance using the movable part - differs between the two. Specifically, during the initial operation when the power is turned on, the movable part stays in the operating position for a shorter period, and moves from its operating position to its initial position more quickly than when the performance is being performed.

Furthermore, when a performance is being performed, the movable prop and other performance means are operated in conjunction with each other (Figure 380 (B)), enhancing the performance effect. However, since the purpose of the initial operation is to check the operation of the movable prop, other performance means are not linked. Note that the example shown in Figure 381 (B) shows a time chart for the initial operation of the movable prop along with a time chart for other performance means. As mentioned above, the initial operation is triggered by the power being turned on. However, since the front door must be opened when the power is turned on, the front door is also open immediately after the power is turned on. Therefore, the other performance means issue error notifications such as door open errors. Note that although the time chart shown in the same figure shows the start of the initial operation of the movable prop and the start of the error notification as being linked, they actually operate independently. In other words, the initial operation of the movable prop is triggered by the power being turned on, while the error notification of a door open error is not triggered by the initial operation of the movable prop, but by the front door opening while the power is on.

After that, when the front door is closed, the door open error notification will also end. Naturally, this end of the error notification occurs regardless of the initial operation of the movable device, so for example, if the front door is closed during the initial operation of the movable device, the error notification will end during the initial operation. Also, if the front door is closed after the initial operation of the movable device has ended, the error notification will continue even after the initial operation has ended until the front door is closed.

In this way, when the power is turned on, the pachislot machine 1 executes initial operation control, which activates the movable device with an operation similar to that during the execution of a special effect. This allows the gaming parlor manager to confirm that the movable device will operate properly before opening. As a result, it is possible to prevent the movable device from not operating during gameplay, which could ruin the enjoyment of the game. Furthermore, because power can be turned off and on during power outages or error resolution, gaming machines that perform initial operations may also perform the initial operation of the movable device when power is restored from a temporary power outage during play. When a movable device operates during normal play, this generally represents a favorable situation for the player. Therefore, for a player playing after power is restored from a temporary power outage, if the movable device operates due to the initial operation, the player may mistakenly believe that something favorable has happened to the player. Even in such cases, because the time scale is different from that during the execution of a special effect, it is less likely that the operation of the movable device will be mistaken as the result of play, and the enjoyment of the game will not be diminished.

In the examples shown in Figures 380 and 381, the movable prop 5001 moves between only two positions, between the initial position and the operating position, but this is not limited to this. For example, it may have multiple operating positions and move between three or more positions, or it may not only move between positions but also vibrate or rotate. Also, regarding the movement of position, the examples shown in the figures only illustrate linear up and down movement, but it may also move left and right, or move in an arc, or may move forward and backward to perform three-dimensional movement, or it may combine these to perform multiple stages of movement.

For example, if the action during performance involves three movements, from the initial position to a mid-point position, pausing at that mid-point, and then moving to a movable position, the initial action when the power is turned on may be to move from the initial position via the mid-point to the operating position, but not to pause at the mid-point. Of course, if the action during performance involves pausing not only at the mid-point but also at the operating position, the initial action may not pause at the mid-point or at the operating position. In this way, a difference can be made between the action during performance and the initial action, preventing misconception.

In addition, in the above example, it is assumed that the operation of the movable device during performance will end in one play, but the movable device can also be used by, for example, having it remain in its operating position during an advantageous state (bonus or AT) until the advantageous state ends. In other words, it may remain in its operating position continuously over multiple plays. In such gaming machines, the initial operation of the movable device is to move from its initial position to its operating position and then immediately return to its initial position, thereby preventing the player from mistaking it for an advantageous state.

Note that while the trigger for operation during performance is arbitrary, the trigger for operation during initial operation is assumed to be when the power is turned on. That is, the power is usually turned on with the front door open, but in the initial operation of the pachislot machine 1, the trigger for operation turns ON when the power is turned on, even if the front door is open, and the initial operation of the movable device begins (the movable device begins operation with the front door still open). By configuring it in this way, the initial operation can be started immediately, thereby saving the time required to check the operation.

The trigger for the initial operation does not have to be the power being turned on; it could also be the pressing of a specific button (such as a reset switch, a button for effects, or a button dedicated to initial operation) when the power is turned on. Alternatively, the hall menu could be configured to allow the user to decide whether or not to set the initial operation, and the initial operation setting being set to ON when the power is turned on could be the trigger. Alternatively, the hall menu could have an option for checking the operation of the reel devices, and the selection of that option could be the trigger.

In the above example, the movable device is always initialized when the power is turned on, but this is not limited to this. For example, if a momentary power outage occurs due to a power outage or poor connection, the movable device may not be initialized when the power is restored. Specifically, the control circuit of the pachislot machine 1 may measure the time between when the power is turned off and when it is turned on, and if it is less than a predetermined time, the movable device will not be initialized, but will be initialized only if it is equal to or greater than the predetermined time. Furthermore, whether or not to initialize the movable device may be controlled based on the time the power is turned on, rather than the time between when the power is turned off and when it is turned on. For example, if the time when the power is turned on is within a predetermined range (between 6:00 AM and 9:00 AM), the movable device may be initialized, but if it is outside the predetermined range, the movable device may not be initialized. It is preferable that the predetermined range within which the initial operation will be performed be freely designed by the administrator. This allows for control over whether or not to initialize the movable device in accordance with the business hours of the gaming facility.

Furthermore, if the power is cut off while the movable part is in operation, it is possible that the movable part will not be in its initial position when the power is turned on. In such a case, the control circuit may control the movable part to move from its operating position to its initial position without performing initial operation control of the movable part. Specifically, the control circuit may determine whether the movable part is in its initial position when the power is turned on, and if it is in its initial position, perform the initial operation control described above. However, if it is not in its initial position (or if it is in its operating position), output a signal to the drive mechanism to move the movable part to its initial position. The initial operation of the movable part is intended to confirm whether the movable part is operating properly, in other words, whether the drive mechanism is operating properly. Therefore, if it is possible to perform an operation to return it to its initial position, there is a high possibility that the movable part will operate properly.

(Another example of a movable prop)
Next, another example of a movable part will be described with reference to Figure 382. Figure (A) is a diagram showing an example of an unfolding type movable part, Figure (B) is a diagram showing an example of a combined type movable part, and Figure (C) is a diagram showing an example of a housing shape deformation type movable part.

(Deployable movable props)
In this embodiment, the term "deployable movable role" refers to a movable role that initially appears as a single role but unfolds one after another as it moves, resulting in a different shape before and after it is unfolded. Examples of such unfoldable movable role are the movable role 5010 of pattern 1 shown in FIG. 1A (a) and the movable role 5020 of pattern 2 shown in FIG. 1A (b). The movable role 5010 of pattern 1 is a movable role that is hidden and invisible before it is unfolded, but appears as it is unfolded, resulting in a different shape before and after it is unfolded. The movable role 5020 of pattern 2 is a movable role that is visible before it is unfolded, resulting in a different shape before and after it is unfolded.

As shown in Figure (A) (a), the movable device 5010 is composed of a device 5011 that displays "Big Win" and a device 5012 that displays "Congratulations." Before the movable device 5010 is deployed, the device 5012 is positioned behind the device 5011 so that it cannot be seen by the player.

Although not shown in the figures, in the initial state, the movable role element 5010 is stored in, for example, the upper unit. When the operation trigger is turned ON, it is driven by the drive mechanism and moves from the initial position to the operating position. Once the movable role element 5010 moves to the operating position, it then deploys role element 5012 in response to the operation of the drive mechanism. This allows the role elements to function as a single linked role element, displaying the "Big Win" and "Congratulations" symbols. Note that because role element 5012 is located behind role element 5011, simply deploying it will result in a step between role elements 5011 and 5012. Therefore, when role element 5012 is deployed, role element 5012 may be moved forward to place role elements 5011 and 5012 in a flat state with no step. Of course, instead of moving role element 5012 forward, role element 5011 may be moved backward, or both may be moved to create a flat state with no step.

In addition, when a specified time has elapsed after the movable reel 5012 is deployed, the drive mechanism operates to stop the deployment of the reel 5012, move the reel 5012 behind the reel 5011, and move from the operating position to the initial position, thereby ending operation.

When such a movable prop 5010 is turned on, the initial operation involves moving it to the operating position and deploying the prop 5012, but the time scale for maintaining the deployed state is set to be different from the time scale for performing the performance. This makes it possible to properly check the operation of even an deployable movable prop when the power is turned on.

Next, as shown in Figures (A) and (b), movable prop 5020 is composed of circular prop 5021 located in the center and arc-shaped props 5022, 5023, 5024, and 5025 located around prop 5021. Before being deployed, movable prop 5020 is used as a single large circular prop by combining props 5021 to 5025, but when deployed, it is used as a prop that gives the impression that the whole thing is in bloom.

Although not shown in the figures, in the initial state, movable role element 5020 is stored in, for example, the upper unit, and when the operation trigger is turned ON, it is driven by the drive mechanism and moves from the initial position to the operating position. Once movable role element 5020 moves to the operating position, it then deploys roles elements 5022, 5023, 5024, and 5025 in accordance with the operation of the drive mechanism. Furthermore, when a specified time has passed after deploying roles elements 5022, 5023, 5024, and 5025, movable role element 5020 ends the deployment of roles elements 5022, 5023, 5024, and 5025 in accordance with the operation of the drive mechanism, connects roles elements 5022, 5023, 5024, and 5025 to role element 5021, and moves from the operating position to the initial position, thereby completing its operation.

When such a movable prop 5020 is turned on, the initial operation involves moving it to the operating position and deploying props 5022, 5023, 5024, and 5025, but the time scale for maintaining the deployed state is set to be different from the time scale for performing the performance. This allows proper operation checks to be performed when the power is turned on, even for deployable movable props.

(Combined movable props)
In this embodiment, a combined movable gadget refers to a gadget that functions as a single gadget by combining multiple gadgets. For example, this includes a gadget that opens and closes a door that opens left and right or up and down, a gadget that represents a single kanji character by combining the "hen" (radical) and "tsukuri" (structural) parts of a kanji character, and a gadget that represents a compound word by combining multiple kanji characters. In the example shown in Figure 5B, gadgets 5031 and 5032 arranged on the left and right move to the center to combine and become a single movable gadget 5030.

As shown in the same figure (B), movable role piece 5030 is composed of role piece 5031, which is stored in the side unit on the left side when viewed from the front, and role piece 5032, which is stored in the side unit on the right side when viewed from the front. In the initial state, role pieces 5031 and 5032 are stored in the left and right side units, and when the operation trigger is turned ON, they are driven by the drive mechanism and move from the initial position to the operating position. Role pieces 5031 and 5032 combine when moved to the operating position and function as a single movable role piece 5030. Furthermore, when a specified time has passed after combining role pieces 5031 and 5032, movable role piece 5030 is driven by the drive mechanism and moves from the operating position to the initial position, releasing the combination and ending operation.

When such a movable prop 5030 is turned on, the initial operation involves movement to the operating position (and the combination of props 5031 and 5032 that accompanies the movement), but the time scale for maintaining the combined state is set to be different from the time scale for performing the performance. This makes it possible to properly check the operation of even a combined movable prop when the power is turned on.

(Moving device that changes the shape of the cabinet)
In this embodiment, a cabinet-shape-deforming movable device refers to a device that deforms the shape of the cabinet when the movable device is operated, causing the appearance of the pachislot machine 1 to change before and after the operation of the movable device. For example, a device that causes a part of the pachislot machine 1 to protrude forward, left, right, top, or bottom, making the appearance of the pachislot machine 1 appear larger than before operation, is an example of this. Note that "changing the appearance of the pachislot machine 1 before and after the operation of the movable device" does not necessarily mean making the appearance of the pachislot machine 1 appear larger when the movable device is operated, but also includes making the appearance of the pachislot machine 1 appear smaller when the movable device is operated, and also includes changing the shape rather than the size. The example shown in Figure 1C shows a movable device 5040 that is initially stored in the front door, but when operated, protrudes from the top of the top unit and tilts forward, causing a new LCD display device different from the main display device 210 to appear above the pachislot machine 1. That is, the housing-shape-deforming movable accessory 5040 shown in FIG. 1C is a movable liquid crystal display device.

As shown in Figure 1C, the movable role element 5040 is initially stored in the front door. When the operation trigger is turned ON, the movable role element 5040 moves upward due to the operation of the drive mechanism, moving from the initial position to the first operating position. This causes the movable role element 5040 to protrude from the top of the top unit. After moving to a predetermined position, the drive mechanism rotates the movable role element 5040 around its axis of rotation, moving it from the first operating position to the second operating position. This causes the movable role element 5040 to tilt forward above the pachislot machine 1, improving visibility to seated players. Furthermore, when a specified time has passed since the movable role element 5040 moved to the second operating position, it is driven by the drive mechanism and moves from the second operating position to the initial position via the first operating position, completing its operation.

When such a movable device 5040 is powered on, the initial operation involves movement from the initial position to the first operating position and from the first operating position to the second operating position, but the time it waits in the second operating position is set to a different length than the time it takes to perform the effect. This allows proper operation confirmation to be performed when the power is turned on, even for movable devices that change the shape of the cabinet.

Note that while the diagram illustrates an example in which a movable LCD display is used to enable a different LCD display when the gadget is in operation than when it is not, this is not limited to this. For example, an LCD display may be provided on the back of the top unit, and by moving the top unit itself upward, the LCD display that is hidden by the top unit when it is not in operation can be revealed when it is in operation.

In addition, in the above explanation, when a movable device performs two actions, it is described as performing the first action before the second action, but the order of the first and second actions is arbitrary. For example, the first action may be performed after the second action, or the first and second actions may be performed simultaneously. Specifically, in an unfolding type movable device, the device is deployed (second action) after moving from the initial position to the operating position (first action). However, for example, the device may be deployed at any time during movement from the initial position to the operating position. Furthermore, in a cabinet-shape-transforming type movable device, the device is described as moving upward in a straight line (first action) before rotating forward (second action). However, for example, the device may move upward while rotating forward, or may first rotate forward and then move upward.

In addition, while the above explanation exemplified a movable part that performs a maximum of two actions, it may also be a movable part that performs three or more actions, and even in this case, the order of the three or more actions is arbitrary. Furthermore, the above explanation described the action of the movable part when it moves from the initial position to the operating position, but the action of the movable part returning from the operating position to the initial position is similarly arbitrary. For example, if the action of moving from the initial position to the operating position involves performing a first action followed by a second action, the action of returning from the operating position to the initial position may involve performing the reverse of the second action followed by the reverse of the first action, or may involve performing the reverse of the first action followed by the reverse of the second action, or may involve performing the reverse of the first action and the reverse of the second action simultaneously.

(Initial operation when there are multiple performance patterns)
It is also conceivable that there are multiple presentation patterns depending on the movable role. For example, a gaming machine can be considered that is capable of executing multiple presentation patterns using the same movable role, including presentation pattern 1, which ends when the movable role moves from the initial position to the operating position and then returns to the initial position, and presentation pattern 2, which ends when the same movable role moves from the initial position to the first operating position and then to the second operating position, and then returns to the initial position via (or without via) the first operating position.

In such a gaming machine, the control circuit may perform the initial operation of the movable role element for only one of the multiple presentation patterns, or may perform the initial operation of the movable role element for two or more of the multiple presentation patterns but not for some of the multiple presentation patterns, or may perform the initial operation of the movable role element for all of the multiple presentation patterns. In either case, the initial operation corresponding to the presentation pattern is performed, but as mentioned above, it is preferable to vary the time scale of some of the operations. Note that since checking the operation of the movable role element is, in other words, checking the operation of the drive mechanism that drives the movable role element, in the tenth embodiment, as long as the multiple presentation patterns are performed using the same drive mechanism, the initial operation of the movable role element is performed for only one of the multiple presentation patterns. On the other hand, if there is a presentation pattern that uses a different drive mechanism among the multiple presentation patterns, the initial operation is also performed for this presentation pattern.

In addition, the initial operation may be performed using a dedicated pattern that is different from any of the performance patterns. In other words, a dedicated operation pattern may be provided for the initial operation. For example, if the performance patterns include performance pattern 1, in which movement occurs from the initial position via the first position to the operating position and then returns to the initial position via the same route, and performance pattern 2, in which movement occurs from the initial position via the second position to the operating position and then returns to the initial position via the same route, a dedicated pattern may be provided for the initial operation, in which movement occurs from the initial position via the first and second positions to the operating position and then returns to the initial position via the same route, and the initial operation may be performed using this dedicated pattern.

Furthermore, even when the same movable device is used, the content reported to the player may differ depending on the presentation pattern. For example, between presentation pattern 1 and presentation pattern 2, presentation pattern 1 is considered to be a presentation pattern that notifies the player that it is more advantageous to the player; in other words, presentation pattern 1 is considered to be a presentation pattern with a higher expectation. While "high" and "low" expectations refer to the relative difference in expectation between the presentation patterns being compared, a presentation pattern with a high expectation also includes, for example, a presentation pattern that guarantees the player will receive a special bonus. In such a case, if the same drive mechanism is used for the operation of the movable device in presentation pattern 1 (high expectation) and the operation of the movable device in presentation pattern 2 (low expectation), in the tenth embodiment, the initial operation upon power-on is to operate the movable device using presentation pattern 2, which has a relatively low expectation. For example, if a temporary power outage occurs during business hours, the initial operation of the movable device may be performed upon recovery. In such a case, operating the movable device using a presentation pattern with a high expectation may mislead the player into thinking that a special bonus will be awarded. In this regard, the initial operation of the movable device is intended to confirm the operation of the movable device, so the purpose can be achieved even if it is operated in a performance pattern with a low expectation of success, and even when initial operation control is performed when power is restored after a temporary power outage during play, it is possible to avoid player misunderstandings associated with the initial operation.

However, in general, presentation pattern 1, which has a high degree of expectation, often causes the movable parts to move more widely than presentation pattern 2, which has a low degree of expectation. Therefore, from the perspective of checking the operation of the movable parts, it is preferable to execute presentation pattern 1, which causes the movable parts to move more widely, as the initial operation, and since this is a trade-off with the risk of player misunderstanding, it should be designed appropriately according to priority.

(Initial operation when there are multiple movable parts)
In addition, some gaming machines may have a plurality of movable parts. For example, a gaming machine may have a plurality of movable parts including a first movable part and a second movable part. In such a gaming machine, the control circuit may perform initial operation control for only one of the plurality of movable parts, or may perform initial operation control for two or more of the plurality of movable parts but not for some of the movable parts, or may perform initial operation control for all of the plurality of movable parts.

Note that checking the operation of a movable part means, in other words, checking the operation of the drive mechanism that drives the movable part. Therefore, in the tenth embodiment, if there are multiple movable parts that use the same drive mechanism, only one of the multiple movable parts performs an initial operation, and the other movable parts do not perform an initial operation. On the other hand, for movable parts with different drive mechanisms, an initial operation is performed for each. In other words, in the tenth embodiment, the control circuit performs an initial operation for the movable part for each drive mechanism.

Furthermore, when performing initial operations for multiple movable parts, the operations of the multiple movable parts in the initial operation may be initiated simultaneously. For example, if multiple movable parts do not interfere with each other even when they are operated, the initial operations can be initiated simultaneously. On the other hand, when performing initial operations for multiple movable parts, the multiple movable parts may be operated one by one in sequence. This is suitable for multiple movable parts that will interfere with each other when operated. For example, when operating two movable parts in sequence, when the power is turned on, the initial operation of the first movable part is initiated, while the other movable parts are put on standby without operating. Then, when the initial operation of the first movable part is completed, the initial operation of the second movable part is initiated. Of course, when operating three or more movable parts in sequence, they can also be operated in a predetermined order. Note that if there are multiple movable parts that do not interfere with each other when operated and one or more movable parts that will interfere with at least part of the movable part when operated, it is preferable to separate the multiple non-interfering movable parts from the interfering movable part and operate them in sequence.

(Movement of movable props other than movement)
In the above explanation, the initial operation of the movable part was explained, focusing only on the movement of the movable part. However, the movement of the movable part is not limited to movement. For example, some movable parts rotate or vibrate in addition to moving. For such movable parts, at least the movement of the movable part is performed during the initial operation, but rotation or vibration may not be performed during the initial operation. Even if rotation or vibration cannot be performed during performance execution, as long as the movable part can move to the operating position (the position when the performance is executed), the performance using the movable part will at least be valid. Of course, rotation and vibration may also be performed during the initial operation. When rotating or vibrating the movable part during the initial operation, the time scale may be different from that during performance execution. Note that changing the time scale of rotation may mean, for example, changing the time (or number of rotations) for rotating the movable part, or changing the rotation speed of the movable part. Similarly, varying the time scale of vibration may mean, for example, varying the time (or frequency) for which the movable part is vibrated, or varying the speed at which the movable part is vibrated.

(Time scale for initial operation)
In addition, in the above explanation, an example was described in which the time scale is shorter during the initial operation of the movable role object than during the performance execution, but this is not limited to this, and the time scale may be longer than during the performance execution. In other words, the initial operation control in the tenth embodiment is not limited to shortening the time scale, and it is sufficient to operate the movable role object with a different time scale during the initial operation than during the performance execution. For example, for the operation of a movable role object that stays in the operating position for an extremely short time during the performance execution, it is possible to make the operation easier to check by slightly extending the time it stays in the operating position during the initial operation.

Furthermore, while the time scale is varied based on the time spent at the operating position, it is not limited to this and may also be varied by, for example, varying the movement speed of the movable props. Even in this case, the movement speed during initial operation may be faster than when the performance is being executed, or the movement speed during initial operation may be slower than when the performance is being executed. By making the movement speed during initial operation faster than when the performance is being executed, the time required to check the operation can be reduced. Furthermore, by making the movement speed during initial operation slower than when the performance is being executed, the operation of the movable props can be checked more carefully, making it easier to notice damage, etc.

(Initial operation other than moving parts)
Furthermore, while the above description focuses on movable gadgets as targets for initializing upon power-on, other presentation means may also be configured to perform initial operations upon power-on. Even in this case, the control circuit (main control circuit 100 or sub-control circuit 200) controlling the presentation means controls the initial operations of the presentation means so that the content of the presentation is similar to that of the presentations executed during gameplay, while at the same time varying the duration of at least some of the presentations constituting the presentation. For example, in a gaming machine that executes a presentation in which the upper and side lamps of the gaming machine illuminate in rainbow colors when a bonus is awarded to a player during play, the control circuit illuminates the upper and side lamps in rainbow colors upon power-on, allowing confirmation of the operation upon power-on. The duration of the rainbow illumination may be any duration that allows confirmation of the operation, and may be shorter (or, of course, longer) than during gameplay. Similarly, in a gaming machine that outputs special sound effects from a speaker or the like when a bonus is awarded to a player during play, the control circuit outputs the special sound effects upon power-on, allowing confirmation of the operation upon power-on. In this case, the time scale for outputting the special sound effect may be any time that allows confirmation of the action, and therefore may be shorter than that during game play (although it may of course be longer).

[Navi Custom]
Next, we will explain navigation customization in the pachislot machine 1 of the tenth embodiment. Pachislot machines may execute advantageous states (e.g., automatic timers or artful timers) that notify the player of advantageous stop operation modes. The pachislot machine 1 of the tenth embodiment allows the player to customize the presentation mode when notifying the player of advantageous stop operation modes. Among these presentation modes, the following focuses on customizing the navigation voice that outputs the advantageous stop operation modes by voice. Specifically, when notifying the "left, center, right" push order, there are multiple navigation voice patterns, such as a navigation voice pattern that outputs the voice "left" followed by the voice "center" and finally the voice "right," and a navigation voice pattern that outputs the voice "left" followed by the voice "center" and finally the voice "right." The player can customize the navigation voice pattern from among these. Customizing the navigation voice pattern is referred to as "navigation customization." In this case, the pachislot machine 1 of the tenth embodiment is characterized in that the timing at which the player perceives advantageous stop operation modes from the navigation voice varies depending on the content of the navigation customization.

(Navigation customization type)
First, the types of navigation customization will be described with reference to Fig. 383 (A). As shown in Fig. 383, the pachislot machine 1 of the tenth embodiment has multiple navigation customization types including navigation customizations A, B, C, and D.

Navi customization A is a customization type in which the character used in the effects is character A, and the voice played when notifying the player of advantageous stop operation modes is voice pattern A by character A. Voice pattern A refers to a voice pattern in which the voices "press left," "press middle," and "press right" are output in an order corresponding to the internal winning combination being notified. For example, if a combination in which the correct order is "middle, left, right" is determined as the internal winning combination, the voice "press middle" is output first, then the voice "press left," and finally the voice "press right." The character used in the effects may be a character that is always displayed on the sub-display device 220, or may be one that makes the character selected during the effects more likely to appear.

Navi customization B is a customization type in which the character used in the presentation is character B, and the voice played when notifying the player of the advantageous stopping operation mode is voice pattern B by character B. Voice pattern B refers to a voice pattern in which the voices "The correct reel is left," "The correct reel is middle," and "The correct reel is right" are output in an order corresponding to the internal winning role to be notified. For example, if a role in which the correct order is "right, middle, left" is determined as the internal winning role, first the voice "The correct reel is right" is output, then the voice "The correct reel is middle" is output, and finally the voice "The correct reel is left" is output.

Navi customization C is a customization type in which the character used in the presentation is character C, and the voice played when notifying the player of a favorable stop operation mode is voice pattern C by character C. Voice pattern C refers to a voice pattern in which the voices "one," "two," and "three" are output in the order "one," "two," and "three," regardless of the internal winning combination to be notified. For example, whether a combination in which the correct order of "left, center, right" is determined as the internal winning combination, or a combination in which the correct order of "right, left, center" is determined as the internal winning combination, the voice "one" is output first, then the voice "two," and finally the voice "three" is output.

Navi customization D is a customization type in which the character used in the presentation is character D, and the sound played when notifying the player of advantageous stop operation modes is voice pattern D by character D. Voice pattern D refers to a voice pattern in which the sound "Gau gau" is output at the sound output timing, regardless of the internal winning combination to be notified. For example, whether a combination in which the correct order of "left, center, right" is determined as the internal winning combination, or a combination in which the correct order of "center, right, left" is determined as the internal winning combination, the sound "Gau gau" is output at the first sound output timing, the sound "Gau gau" is output at the next sound output timing, and the sound "Gau gau" is output at the final sound output timing.

Comparing Navigation Customization A and Navigation Customization B, we can see that the timing of notifying the player of the type of stop button to operate differs. That is, in Voice Pattern A of Navigation Customization A, the voice begins with a word indicating the type of stop button to operate, such as "left," "middle," or "right," as in "Press left," so the player can immediately tell which type of stop button to operate as soon as the navigation voice is played. On the other hand, in Navigation Pattern B of Navigation Customization B, the voice ends with a word indicating the type of stop button to operate, such as "The correct order to press is left," so the player is unable to tell which type of stop button to operate immediately after the navigation voice is played, and the timing of this notification is delayed compared to Navigation Pattern A.

Furthermore, when comparing Navigation Customizations A and B with Navigation Customizations C and D, it can be seen that Navigation Customizations A and B notify the user of the type of stop button to operate based on the navigation voice that is played, while Navigation Customizations C and D do not notify the user of the type of stop button to operate based on the navigation voice that is played.

Although details will be omitted, notification of advantageous stop operation modes to the player is performed by any presentation means other than the navigation voice. For example, a display informing the player of advantageous stop operation modes is displayed on the main display device 210. Therefore, even in cases where the type of stop button to operate cannot be determined from the navigation voice that is played, as in the case of navigation customizations C and D, the player can determine the type of stop button to operate from the notification provided by other presentation means.

In this way, in the pachislot machine 1 of the tenth embodiment, the timing at which a player perceives advantageous stop operation patterns varies depending on the navigation customization, diversifying the gameplay and increasing the enjoyment of the game. For example, by accelerating the timing of the notification of the type of stop button to be operated, as in navigation customization A, a player can play smoothly, even while operating a mobile device such as a smartphone. Furthermore, by delaying the timing of the notification of the type of stop button to be operated, as in navigation customization B, if the player plays smoothly, the next notification will begin before the word corresponding to the batting order is output, preventing users other than the player from knowing the established batting order (internal winning combination). For example, if the probability that a combination corresponding to a specific correct stop operation pattern will be determined as the internal winning combination varies depending on the setting, preventing users other than the player from knowing the established batting order (internal winning combination) can be prevented from discovering the setting through the navigation voice alone. Additionally, for example, by not announcing the type of stop button to be operated, as in Navi Customizations C and D, it is possible to prevent surrounding users from discovering the settings from the Navi Voice alone.

Figure 383 (B) is a diagram showing a time chart for the output of the navigation voice. Figure 383 (a) is a time chart for the output of the navigation voice using voice pattern A when navigation customization A is selected, Figure 383 (b) is a time chart for the output of the navigation voice using voice pattern B when navigation customization B is selected, and Figure 383 (c) is a time chart for the output of the navigation voice using voice patterns C and D when navigation customizations C and D are selected. Timing T1 refers to the timing at least before the first stop operation, and in Figure 383 (b), for example, refers to the timing when the start lever is operated. Timing T2 refers to the timing from when the first stop operation is performed until when the second stop operation is performed, and in Figure 383 (b), for example, refers to the timing when the first stop operation is performed. Timing T3 refers to the timing from when the second stop operation is performed until when the third stop operation is performed, and in Figure 383 (b), for example, refers to the timing when the second stop operation is performed.

Furthermore, timing t1 is the timing at which the player can determine the manner of the stop operation (batting order) from the navigation voice for the first stop operation when navigation customization A is selected; timing t2 is the timing at which the player can determine the manner of the stop operation (batting order) from the navigation voice for the second stop operation when navigation customization A is selected; and timing t3 is the timing at which the player can determine the manner of the stop operation (batting order) from the navigation voice for the third stop operation when navigation customization A is selected. Similarly, timing t1a is the timing at which the player can determine the manner of the stop operation (batting order) from the navigation voice for the first stop operation when navigation customization B is selected; timing t2a is the timing at which the player can determine the manner of the stop operation (batting order) from the navigation voice for the second stop operation when navigation customization B is selected; and timing t3a is the timing at which the player can determine the manner of the stop operation (batting order) from the navigation voice for the third stop operation when navigation customization B is selected.

As shown in the figure, a navigation voice is output at timing T1. If the advantageous stop operation mode being notified is "right, center, left," voice pattern A outputs a voice saying "Press right" at timing T1, while voice pattern B outputs a voice saying "The correct reel is on the right." Because the advantageous stop operation mode being notified at timing T1 is "right," voice pattern A outputs "right" at the beginning of the voice, while voice pattern B outputs "right" at the end of the voice. Therefore, when voice pattern A is selected, the player can grasp the advantageous stop operation mode immediately after the voice is output, as shown at timing t1. However, when voice pattern B is selected, the player cannot grasp the advantageous stop operation mode immediately after the voice is output, as shown at timing t1a, but can grasp the advantageous stop operation mode after a certain time has passed since the voice of voice pattern B is output. In this way, in the pachislot machine 1 of the tenth embodiment, the timing at which the player detects advantageous stop operation modes varies depending on the navigation customization.

Note that timings T2 and T3 are similar to timing T1, so their explanation will be omitted.

Furthermore, in voice pattern C, the sound "one" is output at timing T1, and in voice pattern D, the sound "gau gau" is output. Although the advantageous stop operation type notified at timing T1 is "right," voice patterns C and D do not output the advantageous stop operation type through sound. Therefore, when navigation customization C or D is selected, the player cannot determine the advantageous stop operation type from the sound that is output (in this case, the player will determine the advantageous stop operation type based on the notification made by other presentation means such as the main display device 210).

Note that timings T2 and T3 are similar to timing T1, so their explanation will be omitted.

In this way, in the pachislot machine 1 of the tenth embodiment, by varying the order in which the words indicating advantageous stop operation modes appear, the timing at which the player recognizes the advantageous stop operation mode can be varied. For convenience, the timing at which the advantageous stop operation mode is recognized is described as the timing at which the audio output of the words indicating the advantageous stop operation mode has finished (for example, after the audio output of "left" in the case of "press left"). However, since the first consonants of "left (HIDARI)," "middle (NAKA)," and "right (MIGI)" are all different, the timing at which the advantageous stop operation mode is recognized can also be considered to be the timing immediately after the audio output of the words indicating the advantageous stop operation mode.

In the above explanation, the timing at which the player grasps the advantageous stopping operation is varied by varying the order in which the words indicating the advantageous stopping operation appear, but this is not limited to this. For example, the timing at which the player grasps the advantageous stopping operation may be varied by varying the timing at which the audio is output. For example, although both navigation customization A and navigation customization B output the same messages such as "Press left," "Press center," and "Press right," the timing at which the player grasps the advantageous stopping operation may be varied by outputting the audio earlier (for example, about one second) in the case of the voice pattern by navigation customization A than in the case of the voice pattern by navigation customization B. Furthermore, the timing at which the player grasps the advantageous stopping operation may be varied by varying the playback speed (pronunciation speed) of the audio. For example, both navigation customization A and navigation customization B output the same messages such as "left," "center," and "right," but the voice pattern from navigation customization A takes one second from start to finish, while the voice pattern from navigation customization B takes three seconds from start to finish, thereby differentiating the timing at which the player grasps the advantageous stopping operation. In this case, the playback speed of the same audio data may be changed to make the playback speeds different, or the audio data itself may be separate for each.

By varying the appearance order, output timing, and playback speed in this way, the timing at which the player recognizes advantageous stopping operations can be varied, but these may be used individually, or specifications 2 and 3 may be used in any combination.

(Custom Method)
Next, an example of a method for customizing a voice pattern by a player will be described. In the pachislot machine 1 of the tenth embodiment, voice patterns can be customized from the menu screen of the pachislot machine 1, and can also be customized from the player's mobile terminal such as a smartphone. When customizing a voice pattern from the menu screen of the pachislot machine 1, for example, a menu screen can be called up on the main display device 210 or the sub-display device 220, and the voice pattern can be customized from the "Custom" field on this menu screen. When customizing a voice pattern from the player's mobile terminal, the voice pattern can be customized within a gaming machine-linked application (e.g., "UniMemo") installed on the mobile terminal. Note that the content customized within the application on the player's mobile terminal can be reflected in the pachislot machine 1, for example, by issuing a password in the application and entering this password into the pachislot machine 1 after customization.

Navigation customization may be performed by selecting a character on the customization screen, or by selecting a voice pattern. In the former example, a voice pattern is set for each character, and when a character is selected, the voice pattern associated with that character is determined, resulting in navigation customization. In the latter example, navigation customization is performed by having the player select the voice pattern itself. For example, multiple voice patterns are prepared as selectable patterns, including voice pattern A, which includes "Press left," "Press middle," and "Press right," and voice pattern B, which includes "The correct reel is left," "The correct reel is middle," and "The correct reel is right," and navigation customization is performed by accepting a selection from the player.

Furthermore, when selecting a character or voice pattern, it may be possible to output the voice (lines) of each character or voice pattern before the selection is finalized. This allows the player to select their preferred character or voice pattern without actually starting the game, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

This feature varies the timing at which the player understands the advantageous stopping operation mode depending on the audio output as the navigation voice, and does not necessarily require the player to select a character or voice pattern. For example, the navigation voice may be associated with a game state or presentation stage, and the navigation voice (the timing at which the player understands the advantageous stopping operation mode) may vary as the game state or presentation stage changes.

Specifically, if voice pattern A is associated with a gaming state that is relatively unfavorable to the player (e.g., normal play), voice pattern B is associated with a gaming state that is relatively favorable to the player (e.g., during AT), and voice pattern C is associated with a special gaming state that can extend the duration of a gaming state that is relatively favorable to the player (e.g., during a specialized zone), the timing at which the player grasps the advantageous stop operation can be varied depending on the gaming state. Similarly, if multiple stages with different degrees of advantage for the player are provided during AT and different presentation stages are used depending on these stages, voice pattern A can be associated with the presentation stage with the lowest degree of advantage, voice pattern B with the presentation stage with the next lowest degree of advantage, and voice pattern C with the presentation stage with the highest degree of advantage, thereby varying the timing at which the player grasps the advantageous stop operation depending on the presentation stage. The degree of advantage during AT can be any, and may be, for example, the expected degree of AT continuation or the net increase in number of coins during AT. Additionally, if a bonus or specialized zone is won during the AT, there is a specification that allows the current AT to continue as is without immediately transitioning to the bonus or specialized zone. In such a specification, by using different voice patterns when the bonus or specialized zone has been internally won and when the bonus or specialized zone has not been internally won, the timing at which the player understands the advantageous stopping operation mode can be varied depending on the game state.

In the above example, the voice pattern was explained using a navigation voice for a push order role in which the push order determines an advantage or disadvantage. However, some pachislot machines may also provide roles other than push order roles as navigation targets. For example, a so-called 7 symbol alignment role may be navigated, in which a player is prompted to aim for a 7 symbol in a specific stop operation sequence, and if the 7 symbols line up, a bonus is awarded to the player, but if the 7 symbols do not line up, no bonus is awarded. Multiple voice patterns may also be provided for such 7 symbol alignment role navigation. For example, a voice pattern that simply provides navigation such as "Aim," a voice pattern that provides navigation such as "Aim for 7," a voice pattern that provides navigation such as "Aim from the right," or a voice pattern that provides navigation such as "Aim for 7 from the right" may be provided. Note that any of these voice patterns suggest that the player should aim for the 7 symbol starting from the right reel. Therefore, guidance suggesting that the player should aim for the 7 symbol starting from the right reel may also be provided in conjunction with the navigation voice using presentation means other than a speaker (such as a liquid crystal display or lamp).

The navigation voice for the push order role and the navigation voice for the 7-symbol matching role may have a predetermined correspondence, and may be configured so that the player cannot select each navigation voice individually. Conversely, the navigation voice for the push order role and the navigation voice for the 7-symbol matching role may not correspond, and the player may be configured so that the player can select each navigation voice individually.

By combining the navigation voices for these push order roles with the navigation voices for the 7-symbol matching roles, it is possible to freely design roles to suit a variety of concepts.

For example, voice pattern A, which is the navigation voice for the push order role, "Press left," "Press middle," "Press right," is a shorter and more concise navigation voice than voice pattern B, "The correct reel is left," "The correct reel is middle," "The correct reel is right," while voice pattern B is a more flashy navigation voice than voice pattern A. Similarly, when comparing the navigation voices for the 7-symbol role, "Aim," and "Aim for 7 from the right," the former is a short and concise navigation voice, while the latter is a more flashy navigation voice.

In this case, by combining a simple voice pattern for the push order role with a simple voice pattern for the 7-symbol matching role (simple/simple), a simple voice pattern will be output when navigation is performed, making this an ideal combination for players who are concerned about other players' gazes or who dislike lengthy presentations.

In addition, by combining the flashy voice pattern for push order roles with the flashy voice pattern for 7-symbol matching roles (flashy/flashy), when navigation is performed, a voice pattern is output that clearly explains the stopping operations that should be performed, so even beginners can play with confidence, making it a friendly combination that makes it difficult to make mistakes.

It is also possible to combine a simple voice pattern for the push order role with a flashy voice pattern for the 7 symbol role (simple/flashy). Between the navigation for the push order role and the navigation for the 7 symbol role, the latter is usually more anticipated by the player and appears less frequently. Therefore, by combining a simple voice pattern for the push order role with a flashy voice pattern for the 7 symbol role, the navigation for the push order role, which appears frequently and has a low expectation, is performed in a simple manner, so the player does not feel bothered. On the other hand, the navigation for the 7 symbol role, which appears infrequently and has a high expectation, is performed in a flashy manner, resulting in a more dynamic gameplay experience.

It is also possible to combine a flashy voice pattern for the push order role with a concise voice pattern for the 7 symbol combination role (flashy/concise). By using a voice pattern that clearly explains the stop operation details for the push order role, it is possible to make it less likely to make an operational error, such as with the push order bell that directly affects the payout. On the other hand, since the frequency of navigation for the 7 symbol combination role is low to begin with, players will respond carefully when the navigation is issued. Therefore, for players who do not want to attract attention when the navigation for the 7 symbol combination role occurs, keeping the navigation concise allows them to play with peace of mind.

[Password entry sound]
Next, operation sounds related to password input in the pachislot machine 1 of the tenth embodiment will be described. When linking the pachislot machine 1 with the player's mobile terminal, such as when accepting customization from the player's mobile terminal as described above, a password must be input into the pachislot machine 1. Password input into the pachislot machine 1 is performed arbitrarily depending on the model. For example, touch-panel gaming machines in which passwords are input using a touch panel and key-operated gaming machines in which passwords are input using input keys are known. Figure 384 (A) shows an example of a password input screen displayed on the pachislot machine 1. Figure 384 (A) shows a touch-panel password input screen, and Figure 384 (B) shows a key-operated password input screen. Note that Figure 384 shows an example in which a four-digit number is used as the password.

As shown in Figure 1(a), the touch-panel password entry screen displays a keyboard for entering numbers on a touch-panel display device, allowing the player to enter a password by touching the desired keys. With this touch-panel input method, the player enters the letters (numbers) corresponding to the password, presses the "OK" button to confirm the entry of the entire password (four-digit number), and presses the "Back One Character" button, which is operated if the entered letters (numbers) are incorrect. While the figure shows an example in which the "Back One Character" button, which is operated if the entered letters (numbers) are incorrect, erases the last character (number) entered, the erased character (number) is not limited to the last character, but may also erase all characters (numbers) entered up to that point. For example, a "Cancel" button may be provided instead of (or in addition to) the "Back One Character" button, and operating this "Cancel" button will erase all characters (numbers) entered up to that point.

As shown in FIG. 1B, in a key-operated gaming machine, a keyboard and cursor 5100 for entering numbers are displayed on the display device, and an input unit for operating the cursor 5100 is provided in a position accessible to the player. In the example shown in FIG. 1B, the input unit includes a cross key for moving the cursor 5100 up, down, left, and right, and a confirmation key for entering the content selected by the cursor 5100. On the key-operated password entry screen, the player operates the cursor 5100 using the cross key and then uses the confirmation key to enter the content selected by the cursor 5100. Password entry is then completed by operating the confirmation key after entering a specified number of characters (four-digit numbers), or by positioning the cursor 5100 on a "Confirm" button displayed on the display device and operating the confirmation key. Note that, in the latter case, if the "Confirm" button displayed on the display device must be operated to complete password entry, it is preferable to move the cursor 5100 so that the cursor 5100 automatically selects the "Confirm" button after entering the specified number of characters. Additionally, if the characters (numbers) entered are incorrect, just like with the touch panel type, the "Go back one character" button or the "Cancel" button can be used to erase the characters (numbers) entered.

(Password input sound volume)
Next, FIG. 10B illustrates the relationship between the operation volumes for password input. As described above, a password is input through the operations of inputting password characters, erasing the input password characters, and confirming the input password. Therefore, when a password is input, corresponding operation sounds are output. Specifically, an operation sound is output when inputting characters, an operation sound is output when erasing characters, and an operation sound is output when pressing the "Confirm" key. In the case of a key-operated gaming machine, the operation sounds for character input include an operation sound when moving the cursor 5100 (an operation sound associated with operating the cross key) and an operation sound when inputting the content selected by the cursor 5100 (an operation sound associated with pressing the "Confirm" key). In the pachislot machine 1 of the tenth embodiment, the volumes of these operation sounds are, in descending order from loudest to loudest, the operation sound when pressing the "Confirm" key, an operation sound when entering characters, and an operation sound when erasing characters, with the operation sound when erasing characters being output at the quietest volume. This makes it difficult for surrounding players to notice an input error when entering a password.

The operation sounds when entering characters, when erasing characters, and when pressing the "OK" button may all be the same operation sound (type of sound), or they may all be different operation sounds, or some may be the same operation sound but others may be different operation sounds. Some gaming machines allow players to adjust the volume of game sounds, but the volume of the operation sounds may be set to a volume that corresponds to the volume adjusted by the player, or, like error sounds, may be set to a uniform volume regardless of volume adjustment. The volume of the operation sounds may also be set by the administrator in the hall menu of the gaming machine, etc.

In this way, in the pachislot machine 1 of the tenth embodiment, the operation sound when erasing a character is controlled to the lowest volume. However, the operation sound when erasing a character may be controlled to a lower volume not only compared to the operation sound when entering a character and the operation sound when pressing the "OK" button, but also compared to other operation sounds. Examples of other operation sounds include the operation sound when opening a menu screen (the sound that calls up the menu screen), the operation sound when selecting an item from a menu screen, and the operation sound when moving the cursor on the menu screen. Furthermore, in the case of a key-operated gaming machine, the volume of the cursor movement sound and the operation sound of the OK key when entering a password may be lowered compared to the cursor movement sound and the operation sound of the OK key in other situations (for example, the operation sound when selecting a menu item on the menu screen), even if the key operation is the same. Furthermore, because response is highly important when entering a password, the volume may be increased even if the key operation is the same, or the volume may be the same. Additionally, in the case of key-operated gaming machines, the sound of moving the cursor or pressing the enter key when entering a password may be different (type of sound) from the sound of moving the cursor or pressing the enter key in other situations, or they may be the same sound.

In addition, in the pachislot machine 1 of the tenth embodiment, the operation sound when erasing characters is controlled to the lowest volume, but the lowest volume may include silence. In this case, the operation sound when entering characters and the operation sound when pressing the "OK" button may also be silent, but since the operation sound when pressing the "OK" button is an operation to complete password entry, it is preferable to output at least some kind of sound effect only for the operation sound when pressing the "OK" button.

[Stop button lamp control]
Next, a description will be given of the lamp control of the stop button in the slot machine 1 of the tenth embodiment. Usually, slot machines control the stop button by illuminating it in a predetermined color, so that it is possible to distinguish between a state in which the stop button is inoperable (a state in which the corresponding reel cannot be stopped) and a state in which the stop button is operable (a state in which the corresponding reel can be stopped).

First, we will explain the basic stop button lamp control in a typical pachislot machine, with reference to Figure 385. Figure 385 is a diagram showing a time chart of the basic stop button lamp control, with the stop operation being performed in the order of the left stop button, the middle stop button, and the right stop button.

In the figure, "left," "center," and "right" refer to the left stop button, center stop button, and right stop button, respectively, and "red" and "blue" refer to the corresponding stop button being illuminated in red or blue in lamp control. This also applies to Figures 387 and 388, which will be described later.

As shown in the diagram, the control circuit (main control circuit or sub-control circuit) of the pachislot machine keeps the color of each stop button "red" even after the start lever is operated and the reels begin to spin until they reach a constant speed. Then, once the reels reach a constant speed, the control circuit changes the color of each stop button from "red" to "blue." In other words, in the diagram, "red" means that the stop button cannot be operated (a state in which the corresponding reel cannot be stopped), and "blue" means that the stop button can be operated (a state in which the corresponding reel can be stopped).

Once the reels start spinning at a constant speed, the control circuit maintains the color of each stop button as "blue" until a stop operation is performed. Subsequently, when the first stop operation is performed, the color of the left stop button, for which the first stop operation was performed, changes from "blue" to "red." At this time, the middle stop button and right stop button have not been operated, so the control circuit maintains the color of the middle stop button and right stop button as "blue."

When the first stop operation is performed, the control circuit maintains the current color of each stop button until the second stop operation is performed. Subsequently, when the second stop operation is performed, the color of the stop button for which the second stop operation was performed changes from "blue" to "red." At this time, since the left stop button has already been operated and the right stop button has not, the control circuit maintains the color of the left stop button as "red" and the color of the right stop button as "blue."

When the second stop operation is performed, the control circuit maintains the current color of each stop button until the third stop operation is performed. Subsequently, when the third stop operation is performed, the color of the right stop button, for which the third stop operation was performed, changes from "blue" to "red." At this point, because the left stop button and middle stop button have already been operated, the control circuit maintains the colors of the left stop button and middle stop button as "red."

Then, when the third stop operation is performed and all reels stop spinning, stop button lamp control for one game ends. After the third stop operation is performed, the control circuit keeps the color of each stop button red until the constant speed rotation begins after the start operation of the next game (operation of the start lever).

Incidentally, recent pachislot machines sometimes perform an effect that halts game progress for a predetermined period of time (disables the player's game operations for a predetermined period of time) when predetermined execution conditions are met. This type of effect is called a "lock effect" (or simply "lock"), as well as a "freeze effect" (or simply "freeze"), and will be referred to below as a freeze effect.

During this type of freeze effect, the player's game operations are disabled for a specified period of time, and therefore the player cannot perform a stop operation during the freeze effect. Therefore, if the stop button lamp were controlled depending on whether a stop operation is possible or not, the player would be able to determine in advance from the color of the stop button whether a freeze has occurred, which would undermine the effect of the freeze effect, which is intended to give the player a strong surprise. The stop button lamp control in the pachislot machine 1 of the tenth embodiment is characterized by the lamp control during the freeze effect.

(Freeze effect gameplay example)
FIG. 386 is a diagram for explaining an example of a freeze effect, and shows the flow of play in a chance zone where a freeze occurs when the game is successful. Note that the example shown in the diagram is only one example of a freeze effect, and this lamp control can be applied to other effects as well. The diagram also shows the flow of play in one chance zone.

When a start operation is received from the player during this chance zone (step S2001), the main control circuit 100 performs various processes associated with the start operation (e.g., starting the reels and determining the internal winning combination) and determines whether the chance zone (CZ) has been entered (step S2002). Determining whether the chance zone has been entered means determining whether the player has been successful in the chance zone. For example, if the player has been successful, the chance zone is entered and some kind of special benefit is awarded to the player. On the other hand, if the player has not been successful, the chance zone is not entered in this game and no special benefit is awarded to the player in this game. Furthermore, the determination of whether the chance zone has been entered can be made arbitrarily. For example, it may be made based on the internal lottery results for the game. The probability of success in the chance zone may be preset for each winning result, and a lottery may be held based on the success probability. For example, the winning lottery may be conducted only for so-called rare roles (the success probability for roles other than rare roles is set to 0%), and different expectations may be set depending on the type and strength of the rare role. Furthermore, some rare roles and so-called fixed roles may guarantee success in the chance zone (the success probability is set to 100%). The success probability setting is not limited to this, and a success probability higher than 0% may be set for winning roles other than rare roles such as replay roles, bell roles, and misses, allowing for a configuration in which all winning results can be expected.

If the chance zone win/loss determination determines that the player has not won, the freeze effect will not be performed, and the main control circuit 100 will perform other necessary processing for that game (for example, stopping the reels in response to a stop operation) and end the current game.

On the other hand, if the chance zone win determination determines a win, the main control circuit 100 then determines the freeze timing, which is the timing for executing a freeze effect (S2003). In the example shown in the figure, the freeze timings are the first stop, second stop, third stop, and after the third stop, but this is not limited to these and the freeze effect may be executed at other times. Note that the first stop may be any time between the start operation and the first stop operation. Similarly, the second stop may be any time between the first stop operation and the second stop operation. The third stop may be any time between the second stop operation and the third stop operation. Furthermore, the after the third stop may be any time between the third stop operation and the start operation for the next game.

The main control circuit 100 then determines whether the first stop time has been determined as the freeze timing (S2004), and if the first stop time has been determined as the freeze timing, performs freeze control to disable the player's game operations for a predetermined period of time (S2005). After the freeze control has been performed for a certain period of time, the main control circuit 100 releases the freeze, then performs other necessary processing for the game (for example, stopping the reels in response to a stop operation), and ends the current game.

On the other hand, if the first stop time has not been determined as the freeze timing, the main control circuit 100 accepts the first stop operation (S2006) and stops the rotation of the corresponding reel in response to the first stop operation. The main control circuit 100 then determines whether the second stop time has been determined as the freeze timing (S2007), and if the second stop time has been determined as the freeze timing, performs freeze control to disable the player's game operations for a predetermined period of time (S2008). After the certain period of freeze control, the main control circuit 100 releases the freeze, then performs other processing required for the game (for example, stopping the reels in response to the stop operation), and ends the current game.

On the other hand, if the second stop time has not been determined as the freeze timing, the main control circuit 100 accepts the second stop operation (S2009) and stops the rotation of the corresponding reel in response to the second stop operation. The main control circuit 100 then determines whether the third stop time has been determined as the freeze timing (S2010), and if the third stop time has been determined as the freeze timing, performs freeze control to disable the player's game operations for a predetermined period of time (S2011). After the certain period of freeze control, the main control circuit 100 releases the freeze, then performs other processing required for the game (for example, stopping the reels in response to a stop operation), and ends the current game.

On the other hand, if the third stop time has not been determined as the freeze timing, the main control circuit 100 accepts the third stop operation (S2012) and stops the rotation of the corresponding reel in response to the third stop operation. Next, the main control circuit 100 performs freeze control to disable the player's game operations for a predetermined period of time (S2013). After the freeze control for a certain period of time, the main control circuit 100 releases the freeze and then performs other necessary processes for the game (for example, paying out medals or allowing the acceptance of a bet operation for the next game), and ends the current game.

(Stop button lamp control when freeze occurs)
Next, using the freeze effect illustrated in Fig. 386, the lamp control of the stop button when a freeze occurs in the pachislot machine 1 of the tenth embodiment will be described. Fig. 387(A) is a diagram showing lamp control of the stop button when the freeze timing is the first stop, Fig. 387(a) shows lamp control of the stop button in a conventional gaming machine for comparison, and Fig. 387(b) shows lamp control of the stop button (this control) in the pachislot machine 1 of the tenth embodiment. Also, Fig. 388(B) is a diagram showing lamp control of the stop button when the freeze timing is the second stop, Fig. 388(a) shows lamp control of the stop button in a conventional gaming machine for comparison, and Fig. 388(b) shows lamp control of the stop button in the pachislot machine 1 of the tenth embodiment. In addition, the lamp control of the stop button when the freeze timing is the third stop time is basically the same as the lamp control of the stop button when the freeze timing is the second stop time, and since it is sufficient to simply read the second stop operation as the third stop operation, explanation will be omitted.

As shown in Figure 387 (A), (a), and (b), in both the comparative example and this control, the control circuit (main control circuit or sub-control circuit) of the pachislot machine keeps the color of each stop button red even after the start lever is operated and the reels begin to rotate, until the reels reach constant speed. If the freeze timing is at the first stop, the first stop operation cannot be performed even when the reels reach constant speed rotation. Therefore, as shown in the comparative example in the same figure (a), the control circuit normally keeps the color of each stop button red even after the reels reach constant speed rotation, until the freeze is released and the first stop operation becomes possible. From the player's perspective, with the control shown in this comparative example, the stop buttons remain red even when constant speed rotation is reached, allowing the player to know in advance that a freeze will occur, reducing the player's interest in the freeze.

In contrast, with this control, just like the normal lamp control (Fig. 385) when a freeze does not occur, when the reels start rotating at a constant speed, the control circuit changes the color of each stop button from "red" to "blue" even if the freeze timing is the first stop. Because the stop buttons have changed to "blue," the player will attempt to perform a stop operation, but because a freeze has actually occurred, the stop operation will be invalidated. As a result, with this control, even if the player performs a stop operation without being wary of a freeze, a freeze may actually occur, increasing the player's interest in the freeze.

As such, the comparative example and this control differ in the way the lamps on each stop button are controlled from when a freeze occurs until the freeze is released. Specifically, in the comparative example, each stop button is controlled to "red" from when a freeze occurs until the freeze is released, as shown in the dashed box in Figure (a), while in this control, each stop button is controlled to "blue" from when a freeze occurs until the freeze is released, as shown in the dashed box in Figure (b).

Next, referring to Figure 388 (B), lamp control when the freeze timing is at the second stop will be described. As shown in Figures (a) and (b), in both the comparative example and this control, the control circuit of the pachislot machine maintains the color of each stop button as "red" even after the start lever is operated and the reels begin to rotate, until the reels begin to rotate at a constant speed. Then, once the reels begin to rotate at a constant speed, the control circuit changes the color of each stop button from "red" to "blue." After the reels begin to rotate at a constant speed, the control circuit maintains the color of each stop button as "blue" until the first stop operation is performed. Then, once the first stop operation is performed, the control circuit changes the color of the stop button to the left of the first stop operation from "blue" to "red."

At this time, because the freeze timing occurs at the second stop, the player's stop operation is disabled for a certain period of time (during the freeze) after the first stop operation is performed. For this reason, as shown in the comparative example in the same figure (a), the control circuit normally changes the color of not only the left stop button, where the stop operation was performed, but also the middle and right stop buttons, which have not yet been stopped but cannot be stopped, from "blue" to "red." From the player's perspective, with this control shown in the comparative example, the middle and right stop buttons remain changed to "red" during the freeze even though the stop operation has not yet been performed, allowing the player to know in advance that a freeze will occur, reducing the player's interest in the freeze.

In contrast, with this control, the color of the left stop button, where a stop operation has been performed, changes from "blue" to "red," while the stop buttons in the middle and right that have not yet been performed remain "blue," even though they are disabled due to the occurrence of a freeze. In other words, with this control, even if a freeze occurs, the color of the stop buttons remains "blue," just as with the normal lamp control when a freeze does not occur (Fig. 385). From the player's perspective, because the stop button is "blue," the player will perform a stop operation, but because a freeze has actually occurred, the stop operation will be disabled. As a result, with this control, even if the player performs a stop operation without being wary of a freeze, a freeze may actually occur, which can increase the player's interest in the freeze.

As such, the comparative example and this control differ in the way the lamps on the stop buttons are controlled from when a freeze occurs until the freeze is released. Specifically, in the comparative example, the middle stop button and the right stop button are controlled to "red" from when a freeze occurs until the freeze is released, as shown in the dashed box in Figure (a), whereas in this control, the middle stop button and the right stop button are controlled to "blue" from when a freeze occurs until the freeze is released, as shown in the dashed box in Figure (b).

(Performance control when freeze occurs)
Furthermore, in the pachislot machine 1, when a freeze occurs, an effect associated with the occurrence of the freeze may be produced using a liquid crystal display device or other production means. Such an effect associated with the occurrence of the freeze may be produced at any timing. For example, the control circuit may produce the effect associated with the occurrence of the freeze after a predetermined time has elapsed since the freeze occurred, or may produce the effect associated with the occurrence of the freeze in response to a stop operation received from the player while the freeze occurred. Furthermore, by combining these, if a stop operation is received from the player while the freeze occurs, the effect associated with the occurrence of the freeze may be produced in response to the stop operation received from the player, or if a predetermined time has elapsed without receiving a stop operation from the player while the freeze occurs, the effect associated with the occurrence of the freeze may be produced after a predetermined time has elapsed since the freeze occurred.

While a freeze occurs, the player's stop operation is disabled; however, this disablement means that the game progress associated with the game operation is disabled; since it is sufficient to disable the stop control associated with the stop operation, the control circuit can determine whether or not a stop operation has been performed while a freeze is occurring by monitoring the ON/OFF state of the stop switch corresponding to the stop button. In this way, by performing a freeze-related effect in response to a stop operation received from the player while a freeze is occurring, an effect can be performed to surprise the player at the appropriate time after they begin to feel uncomfortable that the reels have not stopped despite the stop operation, thereby increasing the player's interest in the freeze.

(Example of what happens when a freeze occurs)
An example of the effect associated with the occurrence of the freeze, which is performed after a predetermined time has elapsed since the occurrence of the freeze, will be described below. For example, when the chance zone starts, a video effect is produced in which an enemy character and an ally character confront each other. A winning combination is performed by a start operation, and the effect patterns in a game in which the winning combination is not won include a case in which no particular effect is produced, a case in which an attack against the enemy character is triggered by each operation but is repelled by the enemy character, or a case in which the enemy character attacks, in short, a case in which the enemy character cannot be defeated. On the other hand, when the winning combination is won and the freeze timing is determined at the time of the first stop operation, the effect is to cause a freeze in response to the start operation, and to start an attack on the enemy character in the same way as when the winning combination is not won. At this time, for example, if the winning combination is won, the attack will hit, and if the winning combination is not won, a video effect in which the enemy character repels the attack will be produced, but because the freeze is occurring, the video effect does not proceed. From the player's perspective, the first stop operation (specifically, the operation of the disabled stop button) does not proceed, and the reels do not stop, so the player realizes that a freeze has occurred (i.e., the chance zone has been successful). Then, before the freeze is released, a victory over the enemy character begins, and the freeze is released after a predetermined time has passed during this effect, making the stop operation possible. In this case, no special effect is performed in response to the stop operation. This effect pattern is not limited to this, and for example, the player can be made to feel even more surprised by causing a freeze without any effect upon the start operation, and then using the same effect pattern as above.

Next, Figures 387(A)(c) and 388(B)(c) show example time charts of effects that occur when a freeze occurs.

As shown in Figures 387(A) and (c), if the freeze timing is at the first stop, a freeze occurs when the start lever is operated and the reels start rotating at a constant speed. When the start lever is operated, a battle scene is played on the LCD display, and an image of an ally character attacking an enemy character is displayed. From the player's perspective, the player predicts that the attack will either hit or not depending on the stop operation, and performs the stop operation with all their might, hoping that the attack will hit. However, because the freeze has occurred, the stop operation is invalidated. The player expected the image to change in response to the stop operation (the attack will hit or be deflected), but the image does not change, causing a sense of incongruity. When the freeze is released in this situation, and the image switches to one of the attack hitting and the ally character winning, the player is given a strong sense of surprise.

Similarly, as shown in Figures 388(B) and (c), when the freeze timing is the second stop, the LCD display device operates the start lever, and a battle scene is displayed, showing an ally character launching a first attack against an enemy character. If the player then performs the first stop operation, an image is displayed showing the ally character launching a second attack, with the first attack hitting but not defeating the enemy character. At this time, because the freeze timing is the second stop, a freeze occurs in response to the first stop operation. From the player's perspective, the player predicts that the next stop operation will determine whether the attack will hit, and they perform the stop operation with all their might, hoping that the attack will hit. However, because the freeze has occurred, the stop operation is invalidated. The player expected the image to change in response to the stop operation (the attack will hit or be deflected), but the image does not change, which creates a sense of incongruity. When the freeze is released in this unnatural situation, the screen switches to a scene in which an attack hits and the ally character wins, giving the player a strong sense of surprise.

(Timing for unfreezing)
Furthermore, the timing for canceling the freeze when a freeze occurs, in other words, the timing for enabling a disabled game operation, is arbitrary. For example, the control circuit may cancel the freeze after a specific time has elapsed since the freeze occurred, or may cancel the freeze in response to a stop operation received from the player while the freeze occurred. Furthermore, by combining these, if a stop operation is received from the player while the freeze occurred, the freeze may be canceled in response to the stop operation received from the player (it may be canceled at the time the stop operation is received, or it may be canceled after a certain time has elapsed since the stop operation was received), or if a specific time has elapsed without a stop operation being received from the player while the freeze occurred, the freeze may be canceled after a specific time has elapsed since the freeze occurred.

Furthermore, as described above, when executing an effect associated with a freeze, the control circuit may unfreeze the effect at the start of the effect associated with the freeze, or may unfreeze the effect at the end of the effect associated with the freeze, or may unfreeze the effect at any timing during the effect associated with the freeze (for example, when a certain amount of time has passed since the effect began).

[Volume and Light Adjustment Screen Display Control]
Next, the display control of the volume and light intensity adjustment screen in the pachislot machine 1 of the tenth embodiment will be described. In recent gaming machines, the player can adjust the volume and light intensity. Adjustments of the volume and light intensity are generally possible when not playing, but cannot be made during play, particularly while a performance is being executed. In the pachislot machine 1 of the tenth embodiment, the volume and light intensity can be adjusted even while a performance is being executed.

(Display priority)
First, referring to FIG. 389 (A), the display priority order in the pachislot machine 1 of the tenth embodiment will be described. FIG. 389 (a) shows the priority order in the display control of a comparative example of this control, and FIG. 389 (b) shows the priority order in the display control of this control. Also, FIG. 389 only shows the priority order for three display layers: the presentation layer, the volume adjustment layer, and the notification layer. The display order of the other display layers is omitted, but the display order of the other display layers is arbitrary. The presentation layer is a display layer for displaying presentation images, including continuous presentation images executed as the game progresses. The volume adjustment layer is a layer that displays a display screen (see FIG. 389 (B)) for the player to adjust the volume and light intensity. The notification layer is a layer that displays notification images (e.g., a batting order navigation image) that notify the player of the type of stop operation.

As shown in Figure 1(a), in the comparative example, the volume adjustment layer has a higher priority than the presentation layer, but a lower priority than the notification layer. Therefore, while a player can call up the volume adjustment screen while a presentation is being executed, the volume adjustment screen cannot be called up (or is called up below the notification layer) during the execution of a notification, such as batting order navigation. Some players may wish to adjust the volume or light intensity during the execution of a notification. For example, when a presentation is executed during a freeze as described above, loud sound effects and lamp control with strong light emission are performed when the freeze occurs, resulting in an effect that surprises the player. In the example described above, such an effect is executed at the timing of the stop operation. Therefore, for example, if a player notices that they have entered a chance zone from the presentation screen after starting play, they may wish to adjust the volume or light intensity during play. However, with the display control shown in the comparative example, the notification layer takes priority over the volume adjustment layer during the execution of a notification, such as batting order navigation, so the volume adjustment screen cannot be called up (or is called up below the notification layer).

On the other hand, as shown in Figure 1(b), in this control, the volume and other adjustment layer has a higher priority than not only the presentation layer but also the notification layer. Therefore, not only during presentations, but also during notifications such as batting order navigation, players can access the volume and other adjustment screen in a layer higher than notifications such as batting order navigation to adjust the volume and light intensity. As a result, even if a notification such as batting order navigation is made in a situation where there is a high possibility of loud sound effects or strong light being emitted, the player can lower the volume and light intensity before the loud sound effects or strong light are emitted, allowing them to play with peace of mind.

In this way, in the pachislot machine 1 of the tenth embodiment, the volume and light adjustment layer is displayed with priority over the presentation layer and the notification layer, so that the volume and light intensity can basically be adjusted regardless of the game situation. However, the pachislot machine 1 of the tenth embodiment does not eliminate the need for a display layer that takes priority over the volume and light adjustment layer. For example, it is preferable to display the error layer, which displays an error screen notifying users that an error has occurred in the pachislot machine 1, with priority over the volume and light adjustment layer. More specifically, it is preferable to display the error layer with the highest priority. Furthermore, the completion layer, which displays the complete screen that is the display screen when the complete function is activated, may also be displayed with priority over the volume and light adjustment layer. Note that when the error layer or complete layer is displayed, the volume and light adjustment operations may not be accepted in the first place. Of course, the volume and light adjustment layer may also be displayed with priority over the error layer or complete layer.

In the above example, a comparative example was given in which the display priority order was used to limit the display of the volume adjustment screen while a notification was being executed. However, other methods may use the same display priority order as this control, but limit the timing of display as control. For example, one method would be to limit the display of the volume adjustment screen during play (from the start operation until the third stop operation is performed). Even with this type of control, the same effect can be achieved by not basically limiting the display as with this control unless an error or the like has occurred.

(Volume adjustment screen)
Next, the screen configuration of the volume and other adjustment screen in the slot machine 1 of the tenth embodiment will be described with reference to Fig. 389 (B). In the figure, the volume adjustment screen and the light intensity adjustment screen are displayed on a single screen, but they may be provided as separate screens.

As shown in the figure, it includes a volume control scale displayed side by side horizontally, and a light control scale displayed side by side vertically. The volume control scale gets taller from left to right, making it visually clear that the volume is lower on the left and higher on the right. Similarly, the light control scale gets longer from bottom to top, making it visually clear that the light intensity is weaker at the bottom and stronger at the top. Furthermore, the volume control scale is displayed with the bottoms aligned, and the light control scale is displayed with the lefts aligned. By displaying the scales aligned bottom or left rather than centered, the scales are limited to one direction of extension, making it easier to see that the size of the scales gradually increases.

In addition, on the volume adjustment screen, the currently selected volume and light intensity scales are displayed in a different color from the other scales, making the currently selected volume and light intensity easy to understand. In the figure, the fourth lowest volume level is selected as the volume, and the second lowest light intensity level is selected as the light intensity level. While the color of the currently selected scale can be chosen arbitrarily, in this embodiment, the color changes from cool to warm as the volume goes from low to high, and similarly as the light intensity goes from low to high. For example, the first scale may be displayed in blue, the second scale in yellow-green, the third scale in green, the fourth scale in yellow, the fifth scale in orange, and the sixth scale in red. Furthermore, only the currently selected scale may be colored, or the scales below the currently selected scale may also be colored, with the scales above remaining uncolored. For example, if the fourth lowest volume level is selected, the first to fourth scale levels may be displayed in blue, yellow-green, green, and yellow, in that order, with the fifth and sixth scale levels displayed without color.

The volume adjustment screen can be called up by operating the player-operable operation units (directional pad and/or enter key) provided on the pachislot machine 1. Operating the left or right side of the directional pad adjusts the volume displayed horizontally on the volume adjustment screen, and operating the up or down side of the directional pad adjusts the light intensity displayed vertically on the volume adjustment screen. When the volume adjustment screen is called up using the directional pad, the operation used to call up the screen may or may not be used to adjust the volume or light intensity. For example, if the volume and light intensity are set to 3 and 3, respectively, the volume may be increased to 4 and light intensity 3 upon this call-up operation. Alternatively, the volume may not be changed upon this call-up operation, and the volume and light intensity may remain at 3 and 3 when the volume adjustment screen is called up.

In addition, if separate screens for volume adjustment and light adjustment are provided, the left/right or up/down arrows on the directional pad, whichever is not used for adjustment, may be used to switch between the volume adjustment screen and the light adjustment screen. For example, if the left/right arrows on the directional pad are used for both volume and light adjustment, operating the left/right arrows on the volume adjustment screen will adjust the volume, and operating the up/down arrows on the volume adjustment screen will switch from the volume adjustment screen to the light adjustment screen. Similarly, operating the left/right arrows on the light adjustment screen will adjust the light, and operating the up/down arrows on the light adjustment screen will switch from the light adjustment screen to the volume adjustment screen. In addition, if the left/right arrows on the directional pad are used for volume adjustment and the up/down arrows on the directional pad are used for light adjustment, operating the left/right arrows on the volume adjustment screen will adjust the volume, and operating the up/down arrows on the volume adjustment screen will switch from the volume adjustment screen to the light adjustment screen. Similarly, operating the up/down arrows on the light adjustment screen will adjust the light, and operating the left/right arrows on the light adjustment screen will switch from the light adjustment screen to the volume adjustment screen.

The volume adjustment screen that has been called up may be set to disappear if no operation is performed for a certain period of time, or if the Enter key is operated. When the volume adjustment screen disappears, the content currently displayed on the lower layer will be displayed.

The volume adjustment screen is configured so that the background, other than the volume and light adjustment scales, is transparent, allowing the content displayed on the lower layer to be seen. It is preferable to position the volume and light adjustment scales so that they do not overlap with the position where the batting order navigation image is displayed on the lower layer's presentation screen. By doing this, even if the volume adjustment screen is called up during batting order navigation, the batting order navigation can be confirmed by viewing the background of the volume adjustment screen, without interrupting the progress of the game. In the example of Figure 389 (B), space is provided below the volume adjustment scale to prevent the volume and light adjustment scales from overlapping with the position where the batting order navigation image is displayed.

(About default settings)
The initial volume and light intensity can be set by the gaming parlor from a menu that can only be operated by the administrator. If the gaming parlor does not set the initial volume and light intensity, the initial values will be preset values (e.g., the fourth level from the bottom) at the time of factory shipment. The menu that can only be operated by the administrator may be a menu on a hall computer communicatively connected to the pachislot machine 1, or may be a menu for administrators provided on each individual pachislot machine 1. Even if a player adjusts the volume or light intensity on the volume adjustment screen, the volume or light intensity adjusted by the player may be reset to the initial value if a predetermined period of time has passed since no game was played. Alternatively, the volume or light intensity adjusted by the player may be maintained even after a predetermined period of time since no game was played. Furthermore, when power is restored after a power outage, the volume or light intensity adjusted by the player may be reset to the initial value, or the volume or light intensity adjusted by the player may be maintained.

(Adjustment sound effects, etc.)
Furthermore, with regard to volume adjustment, a predetermined sound effect may be output each time the volume is adjusted with the left and right keys. The output sound effect may be, for example, a simple sound effect such as "beep," or may be a voice indicating the adjusted volume, such as "volume is 4." The output sound effect may be output at the adjusted volume, or may be output at a constant volume regardless of the adjusted volume. The constant volume may be the initial volume of the pachislot machine 1, or may be a specific volume provided for volume adjustment.

In addition, with regard to adjusting the light intensity, a lamp (LED) may be illuminated at the adjusted light intensity each time the light intensity is adjusted with the up/down keys. The lamps illuminated when adjusting the light intensity may be all lamps provided on the pachislot machine 1, or may be lamps within a specified range. The specified range of lamps may be those around the LCD screen (for example, side lamps or upper lamps) that are likely to attract the player's attention. While the target lamps are illuminated when adjusting the light intensity, the illumination pattern of the illuminated lamps is optional. For example, a separate illumination pattern for adjusting the light intensity may be prepared, and the target lamps may be illuminated in that illumination pattern when adjusting the light intensity. Furthermore, if the light intensity is adjusted while a performance is being performed, the target lamps may be illuminated in the performance pattern currently being performed when the light intensity is adjusted.

Note that, unlike volume adjustment, adjusting the light intensity does not necessarily require outputting a sound effect, but a predetermined sound effect may be output, as with volume adjustment. Even in this case, the sound effect may be output at a volume that corresponds to the adjusted light intensity, or may be output at a constant volume regardless of the adjusted light intensity.

(Modification)
As described above, in the pachislot machine 1 of the tenth embodiment, the volume adjustment screen is displayed with priority over the effect screen. However, the control circuit may be configured not to display the volume adjustment screen when a specific effect is being executed, even if the player invokes the volume adjustment screen. Examples of such specific effects include continuous effects that are performed continuously over multiple games, setting suggestion effects that suggest setting values, and effects that display warnings to prevent addiction. Therefore, in the pachislot machine 1, the control circuit may display the volume adjustment screen when it accepts the player's invocation of the volume adjustment screen when it is executing an effect other than a specific effect, but may not display the volume adjustment screen when it accepts the player's invocation of the volume adjustment screen when it is executing a specific effect. This prevents the volume adjustment screen from being displayed during an effect that is highly important to the game, thereby preventing the player from missing important information.

Note that when the volume adjustment screen is not displayed, the control circuit may not accept volume or light adjustment operations, or may accept volume or light adjustment operations. In other words, the volume and light may not be adjustable when the volume adjustment screen is not displayed, or the volume and light may be adjustable even though they are not displayed. If the volume and light are adjustable when the volume adjustment screen is not displayed, as described above, sound effects related to volume adjustment and light emission related to light emission may be performed, or these may not be performed. By outputting sound effects and emitting light, the player can adjust the volume and light emission to their desired level even when the volume adjustment screen is not displayed. Furthermore, not outputting sound effects or emitting light does not interfere with presentations that are highly important to the game, preventing the player from missing highly important information.

[Shape of the lower tray in medal-less gaming machines]
Next, the shape of the lower tray provided in the pachislot machine 1 of the tenth embodiment will be described. The shape of the lower tray described below is used in medalless gaming machines that do not use medals or coins as gaming value. Because medalless gaming machines do not use physical medals, the lower tray functions as a storage space for the player. For example, when a player temporarily leaves his/her seat, unlike medal gaming machines in which medals are placed on the lower tray, it is difficult to tell at a glance whether a medalless gaming machine is vacant. Therefore, the player may leave a plastic bottle or other object on the lower tray and leave the seat to inform others that he/she is playing. In this case, if an object on the lower tray is difficult to see, it becomes difficult for others other than the player to determine whether someone is playing the gaming machine, and the player is likely to forget the object he/she placed on the lower tray when he/she finishes playing. Therefore, in the pachislot machine 1 of the tenth embodiment, the shape of the lower tray is designed to make the object easily visible.

Figure 390 (A) is a front view of the lower tray 5300 provided in the pachislot machine 1. As shown in the figure, the lower tray 5300 is provided at the bottom of the cabinet of the pachislot machine 1. More specifically, the lower tray 5300 is provided below the lower panel 5400. The lower panel 5400 is designed with a character motif or the model name, and turns on, off, or flashes depending on the state by controlling the backlight. The lower tray 5300 has a bottom surface 5301, a front wall 5302 erected at the front end of the bottom surface 5301, a left wall 5303 erected at the left end of the bottom surface 5301 when viewed from the front, and a right wall 5304 erected at the right end of the bottom surface 5301 when viewed from the front. The back wall may be part of the cabinet or may be part of the lower tray 5300.

(Shape of the bottom of the lower tray)
Next, Figure 390 (B) is a cross-sectional view of the lower tray 5300 provided in the pachislot machine 1. Specifically, it is a cross-sectional view of the lower tray 5300 cut in the vertical and front-to-back directions, and shows the shape of the depth of the bottom surface 5301 of the lower tray 5300. As shown in the figure, the bottom surface 5301 is inclined so that the rear side is higher and the front side is lower, that is, so that it slopes downward from the back side to the front side. The inclination angle is arbitrary, but in this embodiment, it is designed to be approximately 8.68 degrees. In addition, the depth of the lower tray 5300 is approximately 8 to 9 cm, which is deep enough to accommodate a smartphone with a 6.7-inch display screen.

In the pachislot machine 1 of the tenth embodiment, the bottom surface 5301 of the lower tray 5300 is inclined toward the front, so that any items placed on the lower tray 5300 move toward the front, making them easier to see. As a result, items placed on the lower tray 5300 are more easily visible when the player finishes playing, making it less likely that the player will forget about the items they placed on the lower tray 5300. Furthermore, since anyone other than the player can easily find items placed on the lower tray 5300, it becomes easier to know that someone is playing the gaming machine.

The bottom surface 5301 is inclined toward the front, but is not inclined left or right, and is formed approximately horizontally. This prevents items placed on the lower tray 5300 from moving to the right or left edge, where they are relatively difficult to see.

(Relationship between the lower plate and the lower panel)
Also, as shown in FIG. 390(B), the lower tray 5300 is provided so as to protrude forward from the front end of the lower panel 5400. That is, the front wall 5302 of the lower tray 5300 protrudes forward from the front end of the lower panel 5400. As a result, the opening of the lower tray 5300 is wider when viewed from the player's perspective, making it easier to see items placed on the lower tray 5300. Furthermore, in the pachislot machine 1, an illuminating decorative element such as a lamp 5500 is provided below the lower panel 5400. Because the lower tray 5300 is illuminated by the lamp 5500, the visibility of the lower tray 5300 is improved, making it easier to see items placed on the lower tray 5300. Note that, in the pachislot machine 1, the lower tray 5300 is illuminated by a lamp 5500 individually provided below the lower panel 5400; however, illumination of the lower tray 5300 may be performed by the lower panel 5400 rather than the lamp 5500. That is, since a back lamp is provided on the lower panel 5400, the back lamp may be turned on or off to illuminate the lower tray 5300. The lamp 5500 may be provided on the outside of the lower panel 5400 as shown in the figure, or may be provided inside the lower panel 5400 after the bottom surface of the lower panel 5400 is made translucent.

(Bottom design)
Next, FIG. 391(C) is a diagram showing an example of a design drawn on the placement surface of the bottom surface 5301. As shown in the figure, the placement surface of the bottom surface 5301 is printed with characters such as "KEEP." By printing "KEEP," players are encouraged to place their personal belongings in order to reserve a gaming machine when they temporarily leave their seat, thereby preventing them from forgetting to reserve the gaming machine. It also prevents players from forgetting their personal belongings that have been placed for the purpose of keeping, or from accidentally playing a reserved gaming machine with another player. As shown in the figure, the word "KEEP" is surrounded by a frame, and arrows pointing toward the center of the bottom surface 5301 are printed on all four sides. This draws the player's gaze to the word "KEEP" and the player's personal belongings placed within the frame, thereby more appropriately preventing players from leaving their personal belongings behind.

The design on the bottom is not limited to this, and any display that encourages players to secure the gaming machine may be used. For example, images of a smartphone, cigarettes, or plastic bottles may be printed on the bottom. Alternatively, no particular display may be used, but the placement surface may be made to stand out (to make players aware that they need to secure the gaming machine) by using a striking color scheme. Furthermore, the center of the placement surface where the object is placed may not be marked in any particular way, and instead "KEEP" or similar may be printed around it along with the arrows mentioned above, to make it clear that the object is in the "KEEP" state when placed there.

(Shape of the front wall of the lower tray)
Next, returning to Figure 390 (A), the shape of the front wall 5302 of the lower tray 5300 will be described. As described above, the lower tray 5300 is inclined downward from the back to the front, and therefore a front wall 5302 is provided at the front end of the lower tray 5300 to prevent items placed on the lower tray 5300 from falling off due to the inclination. However, if the front wall 5302 obscures items placed thereon, it can easily lead to personal belongings being left behind, so the height of the front wall of the lower tray is lower than that of the front wall of a conventional medal gaming machine. Also, as shown in the same figure, the left and right ends of the front wall 5302 are formed higher than the center. By forming the center of the front wall 5302 lower in this way, the visibility of the lower tray 5300 is improved, making it easier to see items placed on the lower tray 5300.

(Shape of the left and right walls of the lower tray)
Next, Figure 391 (D) is a cross-sectional view of the lower tray 5300 provided in the pachislot machine 1. Specifically, it is a cross-sectional view of the lower tray 5300 cut in the vertical and horizontal directions, and shows the cross-sectional shapes of the left wall 5303 and the right wall 5304 of the lower tray 5300. As shown in the figure, the left wall 5303 and the right wall 5304 are stepped. That is, the left and right ends of the lower tray 5300 have surfaces that are one step higher than the bottom surface 5302. This prevents items placed on the lower tray 5300 from rolling to both ends of the space within the lower tray 5300. As a result, the possibility of items moving to the ends with low visibility and personal belongings being left behind can be reduced. Furthermore, the opening portion can be made wider than the bottom surface of the lower tray 5300, improving the visibility of the lower tray 5300.

(others)
The inner surface of the lower tray 5300 may be formed from a reflective material. For example, the inner surface of the lower tray 5300 can be formed from a reflective material by being mirror-finished. This allows the lower tray 5300 to be reflected on the left and right walls and the back wall of the lower tray 5300, improving the visibility of the lower tray 5300 and making it easier to see objects placed on the lower tray 5300. Furthermore, by reflecting light from surrounding light sources such as the lighting in the game center, the backlight of the lower panel 5400 described above, and the lower tray lighting, the lower tray 5300 can be kept bright overall, making it easier to see objects placed on the lower tray 5300.

The lower tray 5300 may also be formed from a translucent, nearly transparent cover. This improves the visibility of the lower tray 5300, making it easier to see items placed on the lower tray 5300. In this case, the lower tray 5300 only needs to be translucent, and may be completely transparent, or may have a smoked or slightly colored finish.

[Cable deflection direction]
Next, we will explain how to control the bending direction of the cable in the pachislot machine 1 of the tenth embodiment. The housing of a pachislot machine is usually composed of a wooden or metal cabinet with a rectangular opening on the front side, and a front door that is located in front of the cabinet and attached to the cabinet so that it can be opened and closed. The front door may be a single door with the upper and lower doors integrated together, or may be composed of an upper door mechanism and a lower door mechanism that are separated from each other.

In addition, pachislot machines use cables such as discrete cables to connect components of the machine so that they can communicate with each other, and in these cases, a component on the cabinet side may be connected to a component on the front door side. When connecting a component on the cabinet side to a component on the front door side in this way, the cable is pulled from both the cabinet side and the front door side when the front door is opened. For this reason, pachislot machines have a certain amount of slack in the cable length to prevent it from breaking due to tension when the cable is open. While this slack length helps to alleviate tension when the cable is open, it can also bend when the front door is closed, which could result in the cable getting caught in the front door and breaking.

Therefore, in the pachislot machine 1 of the tenth embodiment, the bending direction of the cable is controlled to prevent the cable from being pinched in the front door when the front door is closed.

Figure 392 is a schematic diagram of a pachislot machine 1 with the front door open. The pachislot machine 1 is composed of a rectangular box-shaped housing. This housing is composed of a metal cabinet G that serves as the gaming machine body and has a rectangular opening on the front side, and a front door D that is located in front of the cabinet G and is attached to the cabinet G in an openable and closable manner.

The cabinet G has a pair of left and right side walls G2, a back wall G3, a top wall G4, and a bottom wall G5. The reel unit RU is housed approximately in the center of the interior of the cabinet G. A main control board 71 that controls games is attached to the back wall G3 above the reel unit RU. A power supply unit 34 is provided on the bottom wall G5 below the reel unit RU. A metal door frame member 5700 is attached to the side wall G2 on the side (left side) where the front door D of the cabinet G is attached. The door frame member 5700 may be a reinforcing material that reinforces the cabinet G, or it may be a hinge that allows the front door D to be opened and closed relative to the cabinet G.

A cable holding member GB that holds the cables is attached to the side wall G2 of the cabinet G on the side where the front door D is attached (left side). The cable holding member GB is, for example, a cable tie, a portion of which is attached to the cabinet G. Therefore, the cables held by the cable holding member GB are fixed to the cabinet G at the attachment position of the cable holding member GB. In this embodiment, the cable holding member GB is attached to the left side wall G2 of the cabinet G at a position approximately the same height as the main control board 71. The cable holding member GB is also attached to the side wall G2 of the cabinet G so that the cables it holds are oriented generally in the front-to-rear direction.

The front door D is formed to correspond to the shape and size of the opening of the cabinet G, and is provided so as to be able to close the opening of the cabinet G. Furthermore, the front door D is attached to the cabinet G so as to be able to be opened and closed freely, for example, by an opening and closing mechanism such as a hinge provided on the left side wall G2 of the cabinet G.

A main display window 4 is provided in the approximate center of the front door D. The main display window 4 has a reel window that allows the reels of the reel unit RU stored in the cabinet G to be viewed from the front of the pachislot machine 1. In the same figure, the main display window 4 is formed integrally with the liquid crystal display device that displays the effects. In other words, the main display window 4 is formed by providing a reel window in the liquid crystal display device. A sub-control board 72 that controls the effects is also attached above the main display window 4 on the front door D. The sub-control board 72 is attached at approximately the same height as the main control board 71 inside the cabinet G.

In addition, cable holding members DB1 and DB2 that hold the cables are attached to the front door D. Cable holding members DB1 and DB2 are, for example, cable ties, portions of which are attached to the front door D. Therefore, the cables held by cable holding members DB1 and DB2 are fixed to the attachment positions of cable holding members DB1 and DB2 on the front door D. In this embodiment, cable holding members DB1 and DB2 are attached at approximately the same height as the sub-control board 72, cable holding member DB1 is attached at approximately the same position as cable holding member GB, and cable holding member DB2 is attached slightly lower than cable holding members DB1 and GB. Furthermore, cable holding member DB1 is attached to the front door D so that the cable it holds faces generally left-right on the front door D, and cable holding member DB2 is attached to the front door D so that the cable it holds faces generally up-down.

In this type of pachislot machine 1, in the tenth embodiment, the cable 5610H connecting the power supply unit 34 provided on the bottom wall G5 of the cabinet G to the sub-control board 72 provided at the top of the front door D, and the cable 5620H connecting the main control board 71 provided at the top of the rear wall G3 of the cabinet G to the sub-control board 72 provided at the top of the front door D will be used as examples to explain the design of the cable's bending direction. Of course, the design of the cable's bending direction in the tenth embodiment can also be applied when connecting other components.

Cable 5610H has a connector (not shown) at one end connected to the sub-control board 72 on front door D, and a connector (not shown) at the other end connected to the power supply 34 on cabinet G. Cable 5610H is held by cable holding member DB1 on front door D and guided so that it faces left and right (in other words, horizontally) of front door D. Cable 5610H is also held by cable holding member GB on cabinet G and guided so that it faces forward and backward (in other words, horizontally). In this embodiment, cable holding member DB1 and cable holding member GB tightly tighten and hold cable 5610H to prevent the held portion from moving.

In this way, because cable 5610H is held horizontally by cable holding member DB1 and cable holding member GB, it is prone to bending horizontally when front door D is closed. While there is no problem if the cable bends inward toward cabinet G, if it bends outward toward cabinet G (the direction in which front door D is attached), there is a risk that it will be pinched by front door D and break. Therefore, in the pachislot machine 1 of this embodiment, a metal door frame member 5700 attached to cabinet G is used to control the bending direction of cable 5610H.

Figure 393 (A) is a schematic diagram showing a cross section of cabinet G cut horizontally at the height of cable holding member GB. As shown in the figure, door frame member 5700 is attached to the side wall G2 of cabinet G with a predetermined thickness. Cable holding member GB holds cable 5610H at a position deeper than door frame member 5700 and lower than door frame member 5700 in the thickness direction. As a result, cable 5610H is pushed toward the inside of cabinet G by door frame member 5700, making it less likely for the cabinet G to bend outward.

Returning to Figure 392, cable 5620H has a connector (not shown) at one end connected to the sub-control board 72 on front door D, and a connector (not shown) at the other end connected to the main control board 71 on cabinet G. Cable 5620H is held by cable holding member DB2 on front door D and guided to face in the vertical direction of front door D. Cable 5620H is also held by cable holding member GB on cabinet G and guided to face in the front-to-back direction (in other words, horizontal direction). Note that in this embodiment, cable holding member DB2 and cable holding member GB tightly tighten and hold cable 5610H to prevent the held portion from moving.

In this way, cable 5620H is held horizontally by cable holding member GB and vertically by cable holding member DB1, so it is prone to bending not only horizontally but also vertically when front door D is closed. Regarding horizontal bending, as with cable 5610H, the thickness of door frame member 5700 prevents bending outward from cabinet G. Furthermore, regarding vertical bending, a member that abuts against the opening of cabinet G when bending upward is provided to prevent this. Specifically, in pachislot machine 1, a base that controls the rotation range of front door D is provided above the attachment portion between front door D and cabinet G, and cable 5620H abuts against this base when bending upward, preventing cable 5620H from being pinched above front door D. Such a member may be a hinge attached to the top of cabinet G and front door D, or a dedicated member may be provided. For example, a plate member may be provided on the top wall G4 of the cabinet G so that it protrudes from the opening of the cabinet G and the protruding portion is stored in the front door D when the front door D is closed.

In this way, both cable 5610H and cable 5620H can be prevented from bending in the direction of being pinched by front door D when front door D is closed. In other words, this embodiment includes both the features of cable 5610H and cable 5620 used individually, and also includes both the features of cable 5610H and cable 5620 used together.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 392, in the pachislot machine 1 of this embodiment, cables 5610H and 5620H are bound by cable holding member 5630 between cable holding member DB1 and cable holding member GB, and between cable holding member DB2 and cable holding member GB. Note that cable holding member 5630 is, for example, a cable tie, but unlike cable holding members DB1, DB2 and cable holding member GB, it is not attached to either front door D or cabinet G. Because cables 5610H and 5620H are bound by cable holding member 5630 in this way, it is possible to prevent cables 5610H and 5620H from interfering with each other, and it is possible to appropriately control the bending direction of cables 5610H and 5620H.

Furthermore, the connection destinations of the connectors of each cable 5610H and cable 5620H are not limited to those described above, as long as one end is connected to the cabinet G side member and the other end is connected to the front door D side member. Similarly, the locations of each cable holding member, cable holding member GB and cable holding members DB1 and DB2, are not limited to those described above, and as long as cable holding member GB is located on the cabinet G side and cable holding members DB1 and DB2 are located on the front door D side, the locations can be changed as appropriate within the scope of achieving the same effect.

(Modification)
Next, referring to Fig. 393(B), another example of a device for controlling the bending direction of the cable will be described. In this device, the bending direction of the cable is controlled by changing the way the cable is fastened by the cable holding member. Fig. 393(a) is a diagram showing a comparative example to this device, and Fig. 393(b) is a diagram showing this device.

As shown in Figure 1(a), in the comparative example, both the cable holding member DB attached to the front door D and the cable holding member GB attached to the cabinet G tightly fasten and hold the cable H so that the held portion does not move. In this comparative example, because the portion held by the cable holding member does not move, the cable H will bend between the cable holding member DB and the cable holding member GB when the front door D is closed. Therefore, in the comparative example, the cable H will bend between the front door D and the cabinet G, and there is a possibility that it will become pinched in the front door D.

On the other hand, as shown in Figure 1(b), in this device, either the cable holding member DB attached to the front door D or the cable holding member GB attached to the cabinet G tightly holds the cable H to prevent the held portion from moving, while the other cable holding member holds the cable H loosely to allow the held portion to move. Note that in this figure, the cable holding member GB attached to the cabinet G is a cable holding member that loosely holds the cable H, but the cable holding member DB attached to the front door D may also be a cable holding member that loosely holds the cable H. However, because the cabinet G is usually deeper than the front door D and it is easier to secure space to store the cable, it is preferable to make the cable holding member GB attached to the cabinet G a cable holding member that loosely holds the cable H.

With this design, the portion held by cable holding member DB does not move, while the portion held by cable holding member GB can move. Therefore, when front door D is closed, cable H is pushed toward the back of cabinet G by the force from the front door D side (the portion held by cable holding member DB). As a result, with this design, even when front door D is closed, the flex of cable H can be absorbed at the back of cabinet G, preventing cable H from becoming pinched in front door D.

The cable holding member GB may be attached to any position on the cabinet G. For example, as shown in FIG. 392, it may be attached to the side wall G2 of the cabinet G, or to the top wall G4 of the cabinet G. However, because the cable holding member GB absorbs flexure by pushing the cable H toward the back of the cabinet G, it is preferable to attach the cable holding member GB at a position that is a sufficient distance from the rear wall G3. In other words, it is preferable to attach the cable holding member GB to the front side of the side wall G2 or top wall G4 of the cabinet G.

Furthermore, since the cable holding member GB absorbs flexure by pushing the cable H toward the back of the cabinet G, it is preferable to attach the cable holding member GB to the side wall G2 of the cabinet G so that the cable H it holds faces roughly in the front-to-rear direction.

In addition to these measures, a cable cover may be attached to the cable H for the purpose of protecting the cable H and reducing its flexibility. Such a cable cover may be a tubular cable cover that is transparent or translucent and allows the interior to be seen. Furthermore, the measures for the bending direction of the cable H described above can be applied not only to the wiring pattern shown in Figure 392 but also to other wiring patterns.

[Note]
Pachislot and pachinko machines use a variety of devices to create effects, but in recent years, gaming machines have also appeared that use movable devices to create a variety of effects (see, for example, JP 2009-261599 A).

While gambling devices and other presentation devices can enhance the presentation by working in conjunction with the game, if the presentation devices do not function properly when the gaming parlor is open, it could actually ruin the fun.

The present invention was made in consideration of these points, and aims to provide a gaming machine that allows the manager of an amusement facility to check whether the presentation means are operating normally.

To achieve the above objective, the gaming machine according to this embodiment provides the following:

(1) A gaming machine (e.g., a pachislot machine 1) in which a game progresses by changing and stopping multiple symbols, and which is equipped with a presentation control means (e.g., a main control circuit 100 or a sub-control circuit 200) capable of controlling presentations performed by a predetermined presentation means (e.g., a movable device 5001), wherein the presentation control means is capable of executing at least a first presentation control that performs a first presentation (e.g., an initial operation when the power is turned on) regardless of the game result when the power is turned on, and a second presentation control that performs a second presentation (e.g., an operation during normal presentation execution) depending on the game result at a predetermined timing other than when the power is turned on, and wherein the first presentation and the second presentation are both presentations performed by the predetermined presentation means and are controlled to execute substantially the same presentation content, but the duration of at least some of the presentations that make up the presentations differ.

With this configuration, the specified effect means is activated when the power is turned on, allowing the gaming establishment manager to check whether the specified effect means is operating normally before opening. When the power is turned on, the effect content is substantially the same as that during normal effects, but the duration of at least some of the effects is different, reducing the burden of checking on the manager. Furthermore, when power is restored after a temporary power outage or other such failure, the specified effect means will still be activated, but because the duration of at least some of the effects is different, players will be less likely to mistake this for an action based on the game result, maintaining the fun of the game.

(2) The gaming machine described in (1) is characterized in that the predetermined effect means is a movable object (e.g., a movable role object 5001), and the first effect and the second effect perform substantially the same movements, but the time scales of at least some of the movements that make up the effects are different.

With this configuration, gaming facility managers can check the operation of movable objects that deteriorate with movement before opening.

(3) The gaming machine described in (1) or (2) is characterized in that the presentation control means is further capable of controlling presentations performed by specific presentation means different from the predetermined presentation means (for example, other presentation means such as a liquid crystal display device, lamp, or speaker), and is capable of executing third presentation control in conjunction with the second presentation control in the specific presentation means, but does not execute the third presentation control in conjunction with the first presentation control (other presentation means are operated during normal presentations, but are not operated during initial operation).

With this configuration, the specific presentation means that operate when a presentation corresponding to a game is executed will not operate during the initial operation when the power is turned on, reducing the hassle of checking operation. Furthermore, even when the initial operation is performed after a temporary power outage or other power failure, it is clearly different from the normal presentation, so the player will not mistakenly believe that the operation is based on the game result, maintaining the excitement of the game.

A gaming machine with the above configuration can be provided that allows the gaming facility manager to check whether the presentation means is operating normally.

[others]
The movable gadgets are initially placed in a position (stored in the top unit or side unit) that is difficult for players to see when they are not in operation, but when they are in operation they become visible to players. This increases the impact of the presentation and is expected to increase interest.

In addition, in pachislot machine 1, the movement of the movable role object when a performance is executed is triggered by a specified operation by the player (pressing a performance button). This allows the player to be involved in the movement of the movable role object, which has a strong impact on the performance, and is expected to increase the player's interest.

The pachislot machine 1 also has a sensor that can determine whether the movable device is in its initial position, and the movable part that operates when the movable device is in operation has a detection piece that corresponds to the sensor, and by detecting this detection piece with the sensor, it can be determined that the movable device is in its initial position.

In addition, the pachislot machine 1 determines whether the movable device is in its initial position during play when the movable device is not in operation, and if it is not in its initial position, outputs a return signal to move the movable device to its initial position. This allows for early resolution of an abnormality when a movable device is not in its initial position even though it should be.

In addition, with pachislot machine 1, if the movable device is not in its initial position for a certain period of time, it is possible to prevent the output of a return signal until power is restored. If the movable device does not return to its initial position even after the return signal is output, it is possible that the movable device has become uncontrollable due to some factor. In such a case, continuing to send a return signal would only increase the control burden, so by not outputting the return signal, it is possible to reduce the control burden.

Furthermore, in pachislot machine 1, the initial operation and the operation during performance execution are operations in which the movable device moves from the initial position to the operating position and returns from the operating position to the initial position, and the amount of time it stays at the operating position differs. By varying the amount of time it stays at the operating position in this way, it is possible to prevent players from mistaking the operation of the movable device due to the initial operation for the operation of the movable device due to performance execution (i.e., a state with high expectations).

Specifically, the time spent in the operating position during initial operation is shorter than the time spent in the operating position during performance execution. Since the state in which the movable prop is waiting in the operating position is not necessary for checking the operation of the movable prop, shortening the time spent in the operating position in this way makes it possible to properly check the operation of the movable prop while also shortening the time required to check the operation.

In addition, in pachislot machine 1, the initial operation is triggered when the power is turned on. In other words, the initial operation is also performed when the door is open when the power is turned on. This reduces the time required to check the operation.

In addition, in pachislot machine 1, if the movable device is not in its initial position when the power is turned on, the device is controlled to move to its initial position without performing the initial operation that occurs when the power is turned on. For example, if the power is turned off while the movable device is in operation, it is possible that the movable device will not be in its initial position when the power is turned on. In such a case, by performing an operation to move the movable device to its initial position, it can be confirmed that the movable device is operable.

Furthermore, in pachislot machine 1, if multiple movement patterns are possible for the movable role element during performance execution, the initial movement of the movable role element will be performed with movement corresponding to at least one of those multiple movement patterns. If movement corresponding to at least one movement pattern is possible, it can be confirmed that the drive mechanism corresponding to that movement pattern operates appropriately, which is sufficient for confirming the movement of the movable role element.

Eleventh Embodiment
The first to tenth embodiments have been described above. An eleventh embodiment will now be described. The basic configuration of the pachislot machine 1 according to the eleventh embodiment is the same as that of the pachislot machine 1 according to the first to tenth embodiments. In the following, components that are the same as those of the pachislot machine 1 according to the first to tenth embodiments will be described with the same reference numerals. Furthermore, explanations of portions that apply to the eleventh embodiment from the explanations of the first to tenth embodiments will be omitted.

Note that even if the above description contains statements that are limited to the pachislot machine 1 of the first embodiment, such as "In the first embodiment," or "In the pachislot machine 1 of the first embodiment," these statements can also be applied to the pachislot machine 1 of the 11th embodiment, as long as they do not deviate from the spirit of the 11th embodiment. Similarly, the above description contains statements that are limited to the pachislot machines 1 of the second to tenth embodiments, as long as they do not deviate from the spirit of the 11th embodiment. Therefore, it is possible to partially replace or combine each of the configurations shown in the first to tenth embodiments (including each of the configurations shown in the modified examples and the extended examples) with the configuration shown in the 11th embodiment.

Furthermore, even if a component has a different shape from the pachislot machine 1 according to the first to tenth embodiments, the same reference numerals may be used for convenience to designate components with similar functions. Furthermore, even if a component has the same shape or the same processing as the pachislot machine 1 according to the first to tenth embodiments, different reference numerals or step numbers may be used for convenience.

<Game state transition flow>
FIG. 394 is a diagram showing transitions of game states according to an eleventh embodiment of the present invention. As explained in the first embodiment, in the pachislot machine 1, various game states can be set as game states in order to vary the degree of advantage to the player or to achieve the intended gameplay. In this embodiment, the game states shown in FIG. 394 are managed by the main control circuit 100. Such game states include a bonus non-winning state, a bonus winning state, and a bonus state.

A bonus non-winning state is a state in which the bonus has not been won and the bonus has not been activated (a prize has not been awarded). The bonus non-winning state is also referred to as the general state, general, non-internal medium, non-market state, non-internal medium, etc. In a bonus non-winning state, the state becomes RT0 (no RT), in which the replay probability of winning a replay role (replay role) is set to a medium probability (for example, 1/7.3). The bonus non-winning state (RT0) does not end based on the number of games played, and continues until a bonus role (BB) is won.

The bonus winning state is a state in which a bonus role (BB role) is carried over as an internal winning role, i.e., a bonus role has been won and the bonus is not activated. In a non-bonus winning state, if a BB role is internally won in a game and the symbol combination associated with that BB role is not displayed on an active line, the game enters the bonus winning state. The bonus winning state is also referred to as a carryover state, (bonus) flag interval, BB internal, internal, market state, etc. During the BB internal bonus winning state, the game enters RT1, in which the replay probability of winning a replay role (replay role) is set to a medium probability (e.g., 1/7.3). The BB internal (RT1) state does not end based on the number of games played and theoretically continues until the symbol combination associated with that BB role is displayed on an active line. However, during the BB state, which is the bonus winning state, if other small roles or replay roles are drawn in each play, reel control is performed to prioritize the symbol combinations associated with those other roles onto the active line. Therefore, the symbol combination associated with the BB role is not displayed on the active line, and the BB state continues. It is also possible to configure the BB role to be winnable during the BB state. For example, it is possible to allow a miss during the BB state (no small roles other than the BB or replay roles are achieved), to control the reels so that the BB role can be won even if some small roles are missed, or to control the reels so that the bonus role is drawn with priority over the small roles. Furthermore, a RB (a first-class special role) may be used as a bonus instead of or in combination with a BB (a role continuous operation device associated with a first-class special role). When a RB is used, the end conditions for the bonus are the number of small role wins and the number of games played, rather than the number of coins paid out.

In contrast, if a BB role is internally won in a game during a non-bonus state and the symbol combination associated with that BB role is displayed on an active line, it is possible to transition to the bonus state (activate the bonus state). The bonus state is also referred to as during bonus, bonus activation, during BB, BB activation, non-market state, etc. During the bonus state BB, the replay probability of winning a replay role (replay role) is set to 0 (no win). During BB, the game is controlled to a non-bonus state when a predetermined termination condition is met (for example, a payout of more than 77 coins).

<Pattern arrangement>
Fig. 395 shows the arrangement of symbols on the left reel 3L, center reel 3C, and right reel 3R, with Fig. 395(a) showing an example of a symbol arrangement table and Fig. 395(b) showing an example of a symbol code table. As shown in Fig. 395(a), symbols corresponding to the 20 symbol positions "1" to "19" and "0" defined on the left reel 3L, center reel 3C, and right reel 3R are shown.

The symbol positions "1" to "19" and "0" indicate the positions of the symbols arranged along the rotation direction on the left reel 3L, the center reel 3C, and the right reel 3R, respectively. As shown in the symbol arrangement table, ten types of symbols, namely "Bell A,""BellB,""Cherry,""Watermelon,""Lip,""Orange,""Green,""Purple,""BAR," and "Red 7," are arranged on each of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R. Furthermore, as shown in the symbol code table, symbol codes 1 to 10 are assigned to each symbol. <Symbol Combination Table>
FIG. 396 is a diagram showing a symbol combination table. The symbol combination table defines the correspondence between symbol combinations that can be displayed on a payline and the number of medals (payout coins) that will be paid out when the symbol combination is displayed on the payline. Regarding symbol combinations, the combination column in FIG. 396 shows the symbols on the left reel 3L, the center reel 3C, and the right reel 3R, separated by a "・" symbol, from left to right. Furthermore, for combinations with multiple symbols on each reel, the multiple symbols are separated by a "/" symbol. For example, No. 21, "Watermelon - Bell A - BAR - Cherry," indicates two combinations: "Watermelon - Bell A - BAR" and "Watermelon - Bell A - Cherry." The names of each combination are also shown.

In the pachislot machine 1 of this embodiment, the specified number for each game state is set to 3, and play can only be performed when three medals are bet (three medals are inserted and set as the bet number). For this reason, Figure 396 shows the payout numbers when three medals are bet.

The active line is a pseudo line (middle-middle-middle) connecting the middle area of the main display window 4 corresponding to the left reel 3L, the middle area of the main display window 4 corresponding to the middle reel 3C, and the middle area of the main display window 4 corresponding to the right reel 3R. The active line is activated when the required number of medals for the current game (the number of medals required to start the game) are bet.

The symbol combination table shown in Figure 396 associates combinations with the number of medals paid out when the combination is displayed on an active line when three coins are bet (3 BETs). It shows that when a combination of symbols for a role whose name includes, for example, "12 medals" is displayed along an active line, 12 medals will be paid out. In the pachislot machine 1 of this embodiment, the upper limit on the number of medals that can be paid out is set to 12. Furthermore, when a combination of symbols for a role whose name includes, for example, "lip" is displayed along an active line, no medals will be paid out, but a replay will be activated. Furthermore, when a combination of symbols for a role whose name includes, for example, "C_BB" is displayed along an active line, no medals will be paid out, but the game state will transition to a bonus state.

<Flag Combination Table>
397 and 398 are diagrams showing combination tables by flag. The combination tables by flag define the correspondence between various internal winning combinations and symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on an active line. As a result, when an internal winning combination is determined, the type of symbol combination that can be stopped and displayed on an active line (the type of winning display combination) is uniquely determined. Note that FIG. 397 shows the correspondence in the general state and within BB, and FIG. 398 shows the correspondence during BB.

Specifically, the flag combination tables shown in Figures 397 and 398 indicate with black circles the combinations that are permitted to be displayed on the pay lines in accordance with the internal winning combinations. The internal winning combinations in this embodiment are "Miss", "F_Rip A", "F_Rip B", "F_Rip C", "F_Weak Cherry Rip", "F_Strong Cherry Rip A", "F_Strong Cherry Rip B", "F_Watermelon Rip", "F_Confirmed Cherry", "F_Choice Bell A213", "F_Choice Bell B213", "F_Choice Bell A231", "F_Choice Bell B231", "F_Choice Bell A312", "F_Choice Bell B312", "F_Choice Bell A321", "F_Choice Bell B321", "F_Choice Bell C213", "F_Choice Bell D213", "F_Choice Bell C231", "F_Choice Bell D2 31", "F_Choice Bell C312", "F_Choice Bell D312", "F_Choice Bell C321", "F_Choice Bell D321", "F_Left Bell A", "F_Left Bell B", "F_Left Bell C", "F_Left Bell D", "F_Common 1-piece role", "F_Press role", "F_Choice 1 A" + "F_BB", "F_Choice 1 B" + "F_BB", "F_Choice 1 C" + "F_BB", "F_Choice 1 D" + "F_BB", "F_Choice 1 E" + "F_BB", "F_Choice 1 F" + "F_BB", "F_Choice 1 G" + "F_BB", "F_Choice 1 H" + "F_BB", and "F_BB".

For example, if the internal winning role is "F_Rip A," then "C_Rip 1," "S_Rip 2," "S_Rip 3," "C_Rip 4," "C_Rip 6," "S_Rip 7," "S_Rip 8," and "S_Rip 9," which have black circles in the "F_Rip A" column, are permitted to be displayed on the active line.

Also, if the internal winning combination is "F_Selection Bell A213", then the following combinations, marked with a black circle in the "F_Selection Bell A213" column, are permitted to be displayed on the active line: "S_12-Piece Role 1", "C_1-Piece Role 4", "S_1-Piece Role 5", "S_1-Piece Role 11", "S_1-Piece Role 12", "S_1-Piece Role 17", "S_1-Piece Role 18", "S_1-Piece Role 19", "S_1-Piece Role 20", and "S_1-Piece Role 30".

In addition, if the internal winning combination is "F_Choice 1 A" + "F_BB", the following symbols marked with a black circle in the "F_Choice 1 A" + "F_BB" column are permitted to be displayed on the active line: "C_BB", "C_1 symbol 4", "S_1 symbol 5", "S_1 symbol 11", and "S_1 symbol 19". If an internal winning combination containing "F_BB" is won, it indicates that the internal winning combination is "C_BB", which is BB.

<Internal lottery table>
The internal lottery tables according to this embodiment include an internal lottery table for small roles and bonus roles during normal and BB (see FIG. 399(a)), an internal lottery table for replay roles during normal and BB (see FIG. 399(b)), and an internal lottery table for small roles during BB (see FIG. 399(c)). Note that FIG. 399(b) shows the internal lottery table for normal RT0 and the internal lottery table for RT1 during BB.

In this embodiment, the pachislot machine 1 has only one set value (e.g., setting 1) defined as the setting value for determining the winning probability of a winning combination, and gameplay is always performed at that set value. Note that, instead of a specification that defines only one set value (e.g., setting 1), the actual machine configuration may not even have the information (concept) of a set value. In any case, it is sufficient for the gaming machine to not have the function of selecting and setting one set value from multiple set values, as in conventional slot machines. Note that, within the scope of compatibility, the specifications described below may be implemented in a gaming machine with multiple set values. The multiple internal lottery tables shown in Figure 399 are stored in the main ROM 102 corresponding to each gaming state and indicate the winning probability of each flag with a denominator of 65536. For example, in Figure 399(a), the lottery value "2803" is defined for "F_Selection Bell A213." As a result, the probability of winning "F_Selection Bell A213" internally is "2803/65536".

There are two cases where "F_BB" can be internally won: when "F_BB" is internally won alone, and when "F_BB" is internally won in combination with another internal winning combination. In Figure 399(a), when "F_BB" is internally won alone it is represented as "F_BB", and when "F_BB" is internally won in combination with another internal winning combination it is represented as "(other internal winning combination)" + "F_BB".

As shown in Figure 399(a), "F_BB" can be internally won in conjunction with "1 F_Choice A", "1 F_Choice B", "1 F_Choice C", "1 F_Choice D", "1 F_Choice E", "1 F_Choice F", "1 F_Choice G", and "1 F_Choice H". Also, if "1 F_Choice A", "1 F_Choice B", "1 F_Choice C", "1 F_Choice D", "1 F_Choice E", "1 F_Choice F", "1 F_Choice G", and "1 F_Choice H" are internally won, "F_BB" will always be internally won.

As mentioned above, within BB, "F_BB" has already been internally drawn. In general and within BB, the lottery values are set so that any combination will be internally drawn, so that only "losses" are not drawn, and the reels are also controlled so that any combination that has been internally drawn is given priority and drawn onto an active line, so as mentioned above, symbol combinations related to "F_BB" will never be displayed on an active line.

<Correspondence between internal winning combinations, stop operation modes, and display combinations>
400 to 402 are diagrams showing an example of the correspondence between internal winning roles, stop operation modes, and display roles, etc. In the first embodiment, when each internal winning role is won, it was explained which combination of symbols (which can also be referred to as a display role, a winning role, a stop display mode, a display result, etc.) is displayed depending on the stop operation mode (see FIG. 15). In this embodiment, the correspondence between internal winning roles, stop operation modes, and display roles, etc. is configured as shown in FIGS. 400 to 402. FIG. 400 shows the correspondence between internal winning roles, stop operation modes, and display roles, etc., in the normal and BB periods, and the internal winning roles that are the subject of the internal lottery in the normal (RT0) and BB periods (RT1) are indicated by "1" in the 3-coin insertion column.

For example, "1-2-3" in diagram 400 indicates a case where the stop operation for the left reel 3L is performed as the first stop operation, the stop operation for the center reel 3C is performed as the second stop operation, and the stop operation for the right reel 3R is performed as the third stop operation (also referred to as batting order 1). "1-3-2" indicates a case where the stop operation for the left reel 3L is performed as the first stop operation, the stop operation for the right reel 3R is performed as the second stop operation, and the stop operation for the center reel 3C is performed as the third stop operation (also referred to as batting order 2).

"2-1-3" indicates a case where the stop operation for the center reel 3C is performed as the first stop operation, the stop operation for the left reel 3L is performed as the second stop operation, and the stop operation for the right reel 3R is performed as the third stop operation (also referred to as batting order 3). "2-3-1" indicates a case where the stop operation for the right reel 3R is performed as the first stop operation, the stop operation for the left reel 3L is performed as the second stop operation, and the stop operation for the center reel 3C is performed as the third stop operation (also referred to as batting order 4).

"3-1-2" indicates a case where the stop operation for the center reel 3C is performed as the first stop operation, the stop operation for the right reel 3R is performed as the second stop operation, and the stop operation for the left reel 3L is performed as the third stop operation (also referred to as batting order 5). "3-2-1" indicates a case where the stop operation for the right reel 3R is performed as the first stop operation, the stop operation for the center reel 3C is performed as the second stop operation, and the stop operation for the left reel 3L is performed as the third stop operation (also referred to as batting order 6).

Specifically, if "F_Confirmed Cherry" is determined as the internal winning combination during general play, when a stopping operation is performed by batting order 1 or batting order 2, a "3-coin combination" will be displayed along the active line, and when a stopping operation is performed by any of batting orders 3 through 6, a "1-coin combination" will be displayed along the active line. If "F_Confirmed Cherry" is determined as the internal winning combination during BB, when a stopping operation is performed by any of batting orders 1 through 6, a "12-coin combination" will be displayed along the active line.

Also, if "F_Selection Bell A213" is determined as the internal winning combination during general play, and a stop operation is performed by batting order 1 or 2, a "1-piece combination" will be displayed along the active line, and a stop operation is performed by any of batting orders 3 through 6, a loss will result or a "1-piece combination" will be displayed along the active line. If "F_Selection Bell A213" is determined as the internal winning combination during BB, and a stop operation is performed by batting order 1 or 2, a "1-piece combination" will be displayed along the active line, and a stop operation is performed by batting order 3, a "12-piece combination" will be displayed along the active line, and a stop operation is performed by any of batting orders 4 through 6, a loss will result or a "1-piece combination" will be displayed along the active line.

Furthermore, if any of "F_Rep A" through "F_Watermelon Rep" is determined as the internal winning combination, one of the replay combinations will be displayed along the active line regardless of which of batting orders 1 through 6 is stopped. Furthermore, if any of "F_Weak Cherry Rep" through "F_Watermelon Rep" is determined as the internal winning combination, a replay combination consisting of a cherry symbol or a watermelon symbol lined up can be displayed along the active line depending on the timing of the stop operation.

For other internal winning combinations, as shown in Figure 400, reel control is performed depending on whether the reel is in normal play or inside a BB, and symbol combinations are displayed on the active line depending on the playing order and timing of the stop operation.

For the locations indicated as "0 or 1" in Diagram 400, the probability of 0 or 1 coins being awarded is determined based on the number of symbols that make up the combination of symbols associated with the winning combination arranged on the corresponding reel. Diagram 401 shows the percentage of the allocation for the locations indicated as "0 or 1" in Diagram 400. For example, if "F_Select Bell A213" is determined as the internal winning combination within BB and a stop operation is performed at batting order 4, based on the number of symbols that make up the combination of symbols associated with the winning combination of 1 coins being awarded by reel control at batting order 4, a "1 coin" will be displayed along the active line at a rate of 4000/8000, and a loss will occur at a rate of 4000/8000. Furthermore, if "F_Selection Bell A213" is determined as the internal winning combination within BB and a stop operation is performed at batting order 5 or 6, based on the number of symbols constituting the symbol combination for the 1-piece winning combination that is the target of draw by reel control at batting order 5 or 6, a "1-piece winning combination" will be displayed along the active line at a rate of 2000/8000, and a loss will occur at a rate of 6000/8000. For other internal winning combinations, the 1-piece winning combination that is the target of draw by reel control will also be displayed along the active line at a rate as shown in FIG. 401.

Figure 402 shows the correspondence between internal winning roles, stop operation modes, and displayed roles during BB, with the internal winning role that is the subject of the internal lottery being indicated by "1" in the 3-coin insertion column. If "F_Confirmed Cherry" is determined as the internal winning role during BB, a "12-coin role" will be displayed along the active line regardless of the batting order, and if "F_Common 1-coin role" is determined as the internal winning role, a "1-coin role" will be displayed along the active line regardless of the batting order.

<Gameplay>
FIG. 403 is a diagram showing an example of the transition flow of the payout state during the non-advantageous zone, the advantageous zone, and the advantageous zone according to the 11th embodiment of the present invention. In the pachislot machine 1 according to the 11th embodiment, the main control circuit 100 manages the game state (payout state) shown in FIG. 403 separately from the game state shown in FIG. 394. As shown in FIG. 403, the payout state is broadly divided into a normal zone, which is a non-advantageous zone, and an advantageous zone, which is a payout state other than the normal zone. Note that the pachislot machine 1 in this embodiment is the medal-less gaming machine described above, which does not have a game number limiter for the advantageous zone and does not end the advantageous zone depending on the number of games played, etc. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the advantageous zone may have a game number limiter, or may be a gaming machine in which actual medals are inserted and paid out (a gaming machine that is not a sealed-in type). In addition, the pachislot machine 1 in this embodiment is equipped with a complete function that disables the progress of the game when the increase in the number of medals from the reference point (the cumulative number from the base point, "CMP_MY") reaches an upper limit (e.g., 19,000) based on the reference point (base point) at the end of each game during a specified period from when the power is turned on (the lowest value of the cumulative number obtained by adding up the difference between the medals bet and the medals paid out), and even if the sum of the specified value of the payout number limit (e.g., +2,400 medals from the start of the advantageous zone) and the number of medals absorbed is equal to or greater than the upper limit (e.g., 19,000), the complete function (stop) can be activated before the end of the advantageous zone is controlled by the payout number limit. For example, in order for the number of absorbed coins to go from -20,000 to exceed +2,400 coins and the advantageous period due to limit processing to end, 22,401 coins or more must be acquired, but the complete function will be activated when 19,000 coins are acquired from -20,000 coins (i.e., -1,000 coins from the start of the advantageous period).

The normal section is a gaming period that cannot be controlled to a gaming state (AT state) in which information about stop operations that are advantageous to the player is notified. On the other hand, the advantageous section is a gaming period that can be controlled to a gaming state (AT state) in which information about stop operations (navigation) that are advantageous to the player is notified (see Figure 5).

Advantageous zones include general zones (advantageous zone, normal play, no AT) and increase zones (advantageous zone, AT state). A general zone is essentially a game state (non-AT state) in which information about stop operations advantageous to the player is not notified. It is similar to a non-advantageous zone in that it is a game state that is disadvantageous to the player compared to an AT state, but differs from a non-advantageous zone in that a transition in the ball output state occurs. An increase zone is essentially an AT state (a game state advantageous to the player). Note that a general zone may be a game state in which the payout rate is less than 1 (a zone in which the game value decreases as the game progresses), and may be a state in which information about stop operations advantageous to the player, such as batting order navigation or eye-pressing symbol navigation, can occur. Of course, even if such information is possible, the frequency of such navigation will be lower than in the AT state. Navigation for presentation purposes that does not affect ball output, i.e., navigation controlled by a presentation control means that does not involve navigation by an instruction monitor, may be allowed to occur in general zones and non-advantageous zones.

In the general section (no AT), the ball output state can be controlled to one of the following: advantageous waiting, advantageous normal, pull-back normal, pull-back consecutive, and premonition. Also, in the increase section (AT), when a navigation target role is won, instead of full navigation (full navigation), the ball output state can be controlled to one of the following: pseudo BNS return, where medals are slightly reduced (slight decrease section), pseudo BB, pseudo RB, and ending, where medals are increased with full navigation (for example, a net increase of 6 medals/G). The characteristics of each ball output state are described in detail below.

The normal zone can be controlled in both RT0 and RT1 game states. In the normal zone, a lottery is held, including a favorable zone transition lottery to determine whether to transition to a favorable zone (here, favorable normal), and a direct lottery to determine whether to transition to a pseudo BB. In the normal zone, when the result of the favorable zone transition lottery determines that a transition to the favorable zone will be made, the main control circuit 100 transitions the ball output state from the normal zone to favorable normal. A transition from the normal zone to favorable normal can be made in as little as one game. Note that the game state can be controlled in RT1 for favorable normal and the ball output state transitioned from favorable normal (excluding favorable standby).

When transitioning from the normal mode to the advantageous normal mode, the main control circuit 100 performs an initial setting process for the pseudo settings. This initial setting process is a process for setting one of the pseudo settings 0 through 7, which differ in the degree of advantage to the player (e.g., the probabilities used for various AT-related processes, such as the winning probability in the AT lottery and consecutive win count lottery, described below). The pseudo settings are provided in eight levels, more than the number of setting value levels exemplified in the above-mentioned embodiment (e.g., six levels from setting value 1 through 6). The higher the setting value, the higher the degree of advantage to the player. For example, the probabilities used for various AT-related processes, such as the winning probability in the AT lottery and consecutive win count lottery, described below, are set. This allows for more ball payout setting states than the maximum six setting levels, providing players with a more diverse range of ball payout trends to enjoy, enhancing the enjoyment of the game. In the pachislot machine 1 of this embodiment, there is one setting value for specifying the internal winning probability of small winnings, etc., but by setting one of multiple pseudo settings, the degree of advantage to the player can be changed. The initial setting process for the pseudo settings will be described later.

Furthermore, when a direct hit lottery result in a transition to pseudo BB during the normal period determines that the game will transition to pseudo BB, the main control circuit 100 transitions the ball output state from the normal period to pseudo BB. When a direct hit lottery is won, the game will transition to pseudo BB multiple times (a so-called consecutive win). Direct hit lotteries are conducted based on sub-flags. Sub-flags are information used to group internal winning roles that play similar roles (whether or not a role is eligible for lottery play, the probability of winning, etc.) in various lotteries related to gameplay (various processes related to advantageous periods and ATs) conducted by the main control circuit 100, and to assign the same information to make the groups identifiable. Figure 404(a) shows the correspondence between internal winning roles and sub-flags, and Figure 404(b) shows the names of the sub-flags.

Specifically, the sub-flag number "0" (sub-flag name: FC Replay) is set for the internal winning combinations "Miss", "F_Replay A", "F_Replay B", "F_Replay C", and "F_BB".

In addition, the internal winning roles are "F_Choice Bell A213", "F_Choice Bell B213", "F_Choice Bell A231", "F_Choice Bell B231", "F_Choice Bell A312", "F_Choice Bell B312", "F_Choice Bell A321", "F_Choice Bell B321", "F_Choice Bell C213", "F_Choice Bell D213", "F_Choice Bell C231", "F_Choice Bell D231", "F_Choice Bell C312", "F_Choice Bell D312", "F_Choice Bell C321", "F_Choice Bell D321", "F_Left Bell A", Sub-flag number "1" (sub-flag name: FC option role) is set for "F_Left Bell B", "F_Left Bell C", "F_Left Bell D", "F_Common 1-piece role", "F_Press role", "F_Choice 1 A" + "F_BB", "F_Choice 1 B" + "F_BB", "F_Choice 1 C" + "F_BB", "F_Choice 1 D" + "F_BB", "F_Choice 1 E" + "F_BB", "F_Choice 1 F" + "F_BB", "F_Choice 1 G" + "F_BB", and "F_Choice 1 H" + "F_BB".

Furthermore, the sub-flag number "2" (sub-flag name: FC Watermelon) is set for the internal winning combination "F_Watermelon Rip." Furthermore, the sub-flag number "3" (sub-flag name: FC Weak Cherry) is set for the internal winning combination "F_Weak Cherry Rip." Furthermore, the sub-flag number "4" (sub-flag name: FC Strong Cherry) is set for the internal winning combination "F_Strong Cherry Rip A" and "F_Strong Cherry Rip B." Furthermore, the sub-flag number "5" (sub-flag name: FC Confirmed Cherry) is set for the internal winning combination "F_Confirmed Cherry."

The above sub-flags are determined in the main control circuit 100 by the sub-flag setting process described in the first embodiment (see step S73 in Figure 26). Information indicating the determined sub-flag is then basically included in the start command data (see step S7 in Figure 23) and transmitted to the sub-control circuit 200. This allows the sub-control circuit 200 to recognize the determined sub-flag and perform an effect corresponding to that sub-flag.

Figure 404(c) also shows the lottery probabilities for direct lotteries. When an FC replay or FC selection role is won, the probability of multiple pseudo BBs is 0, whereas when an FC strong cherry or FC guaranteed cherry is won, the probability of multiple pseudo BBs is 256/256, meaning a win is guaranteed. Also, when an FC watermelon or FC weak cherry is won, the probability of multiple pseudo BBs is 3/256. In direct lotteries in this embodiment, the lottery is drawn with a uniform winning probability regardless of the pseudo setting that is set, but this is not limited to this; different winning probabilities may be set depending on the pseudo setting, and the lottery may be drawn with a winning probability that corresponds to the pseudo setting that is set.

Returning to Figure 403, in the advantageous normal mode that is controlled and initiated in the advantageous zone, lotteries related to the AT are held, including an AT lottery to determine whether to transition to pseudo BB and pseudo RB (hereinafter collectively referred to as pseudo BNS), a lottery to determine the number of consecutive wins to determine whether to make it a single win (one win) or consecutive wins (multiple wins) if the lottery is won, and a premonition lottery to determine whether to transition to a premonition. In the advantageous normal mode, if the result of the AT-related lottery is to transition to pseudo BNS, the main control circuit 100 will transition the ball output state from the advantageous normal mode to the premonition (also referred to as the actual premonition) and then transition to the selected pseudo BNS, or transition directly from the advantageous normal mode to the selected pseudo BNS without going through the premonition. Furthermore, in the advantageous normal mode, if the result of the AT-related lottery does not determine a transition to pseudo BNS, but rather a transition to premonition, the main control circuit 100 transitions the ball output state from advantageous normal mode to premonition (also called false premonition). The transition to premonition takes place over a predetermined period of time (for example, five plays).

Even in the case of a false premonition, a lottery related to the AT is held to determine whether or not to transition to a pseudo BNS. If the result of the lottery related to the AT determines that a transition to a pseudo BNS will occur, the main control circuit 100 replaces the false premonition with a real premonition and transitions to the winning pseudo BNS. Note that in the case of a false premonition, if the result of the lottery related to the AT does not determine that a transition to a pseudo BNS will occur, the main control circuit 100 transitions from the false premonition to an advantageous normal. Also, in the case of a real premonition (including a real premonition replaced by a false premonition), if a pseudo RB is won, a lottery to promote to a pseudo BB and a lottery to determine the number of consecutive wins (including adding to the number of consecutive wins) are held.

When initiating a pseudo BNS for the first win (the first win that is not part of a winning streak), for example, in a game where the symbol combinations "C_Rip 4" or "C_Rip 5" are drawn, which are red 7, red 7, red 7 or red 7, red 7, BAR, a "Aim for 7" effect is played, and a pseudo BB or pseudo RB is initiated by displaying red 7, red 7, red 7 or red 7, red 7, BAR on the active line, making it possible to perform navigation when a selection bell is drawn. In other words, the main control circuit 100 is controlled to enter AT mode when red 7, red 7, red 7 or red 7, red 7, BAR is displayed.

On the other hand, when starting the initial pseudo BNS, if a game in which "C_Rip4" or "C_Rip5" is won fails to display red 7, red 7, red 7 or red 7, red 7, BAR on the active line, the main control circuit 100 transitions to pseudo BNS return. Pseudo BNS return remains in effect until red 7, red 7, red 7 or red 7, red 7, BAR are displayed on the active line in a game in which "C_Rip4" or "C_Rip5" is won. When red 7, red 7, red 7 or red 7, red 7, BAR are displayed on the active line during pseudo BNS return, the main control circuit 100 transitions to pseudo BB or pseudo RB, allowing navigation to begin when a selection bell is won. The pseudo-BNS return is set to an AT state with a slight decrease, such as a state in which navigation is performed at a predetermined rate when a selection bell is drawn. The pseudo-BNS return may be a period in which medals decrease as in a normal unfavorable AT, or an AT state with a slight increase, or an AT state in which the status quo is maintained. It is desirable to set the state to be at least unfavorable compared to the pseudo-BNS state. As a variant, even if red 7, red 7, red 7, or red 7, red 7, BAR cannot be displayed on the active line, the pseudo-BNS may be initiated if the stop operation is performed in the order that matches the instructed stop operation order. As a variant, if a "Aim for 7" effect is performed in a game in which "C_Rip 4" or "C_Rip 5" is drawn, the pseudo-BNS may be initiated regardless of the stop operation mode, but the pseudo-BNS return may not be provided. As a variant, after the premonition ends and the pseudo BNS winning lottery is announced, an irregular button selection game may be played before the pseudo BNS starts, in which any button press other than the first left button, such as "X, ?, ?", is the correct answer. The correct answer is reached when the player's stop operation sequence matches the internally set button sequence. A specification may be such that, even if a pseudo BNS starts from the selection area upon a correct answer, there is no intervening seven-match game, or, alternatively, a specification may be such that, upon a correct answer, the selection area transitions to a state allowing a seven-match game to occur for starting the pseudo BNS, and the pseudo BNS starts when red 7, red 7, red 7 or red 7, red 7, BAR is displayed on the active line during the subsequent seven-match game.

During a pseudo BB or pseudo RB during AT, the player is notified of the push order that will be advantageous to the player in a game in which the navigation target role is won. For example, in a game in which the player wins a role that ends in "213" among the internally selected roles shown in Figure 400, a "1" is displayed on the instruction monitor and a push order navigation image for specifying batting order 3 is displayed on the display device (e.g., corresponding to a sub-display device). Also, in a game in which the player wins a role that ends in "231" among the internally selected roles shown in Figure 400, a "2" is displayed on the instruction monitor and a push order navigation image for specifying batting order 4 is displayed on the display device. Also, in a game in which the player wins a role that ends in "312" among the internally selected roles shown in Figure 400, a "3" is displayed on the instruction monitor and a push order navigation image for specifying batting order 5 is displayed on the display device. Furthermore, in a game in which the internal winning combinations shown in FIG. 400 ending in "321" and "F_Confirmed Cherry" are won, "4" is displayed on the instruction monitor and a push order navigation image for specifying the batting order of 6 is displayed on the display device. Furthermore, when performing navigation in a game in which the replay combination is won among the internal winning combinations shown in FIG. 400, "5" is displayed on the instruction monitor and a navigation image such as "Aim for the 7 symbol with reverse scissors" is displayed on the display device, or "6" is displayed on the instruction monitor and a navigation image such as "Aim for the 7 symbol with reverse push" is displayed on the display device. Furthermore, when performing navigation in a game in which the internal winning combinations shown in FIG. 400 ending in "213," "231," "312," "321," "F_Confirmed Cherry," and the replay combination are not won, "0" is displayed on the instruction monitor and no navigation image is displayed on the display device. In addition, even in games that do not generate navigation (including non-AT), the indicator monitor may display "0", meaning "no navigation", or nothing may be displayed on the indicator monitor in games with "no navigation". Similarly, in games that generate navigation for presentation purposes that do not affect the number of balls paid, "0" may be displayed on the indicator monitor, or nothing may be displayed on the indicator monitor. Furthermore, the indicator monitor may be able to maintain its display of "0" even after the game has ended or when the screen has switched to demo mode.

In addition, during non-AT play, the instruction monitor is not displayed, and so that the navigation image cannot be displayed on the sub-control circuit 200, the winning combination information (grouping information) that groups together the batting order combinations is sent to the sub-control circuit 200. For example, in Figure 400, No. 9's "F_Selection Bell A213" through No. 38's "F_Selection 1 H" + "F_BB" are grouped, and when any of these wins, information specifying "40" is sent as grouping information. If the player loses and wins No. 0, information specifying "0" is sent as grouping information. If the player wins No. 1's "F_Rep A," information specifying "1" is sent as grouping information. Thereafter, when the player wins any of Nos. 2 through 8, information specifying "2" through "8" corresponding to the order is sent as grouping information. If you win "F_BB" with 39, you will send information identifying "39" as grouping information.

The pseudo BB and pseudo RB end when the difference in number of coins from when navigation can begin at the time the selection bell is drawn reaches or exceeds a predetermined ending number. The ending number for a pseudo BB is set to, for example, 200, and the ending number for a pseudo RB is set to, for example, 100. In addition, during pseudo BB and pseudo RB, a lottery is held to determine the number of consecutive wins (including the addition of the number of consecutive wins), as well as the degree of advantage for the lottery related to the AT that is performed during normal or consecutive wins, which may be entered after the end of the game.

When the number of coins remaining in the pseudo BB and pseudo RB reaches or exceeds the final number, but only one win has been drawn (there are no consecutive wins), the main control circuit 100 transitions to normal replay. The transition to normal replay occurs, for example, for a predetermined period (for example, until 77 games have been played). In normal replay, just like in advantageous normal replay, AT-related lotteries (lotteries with the degree of advantage determined during pseudo BNS) including AT lotteries, consecutive win count lotteries, and premonition lotteries are held, and the game transitions to premonition, pseudo BB, etc. depending on the results of the lotteries. If the AT is drawn in normal replay and the game transitions to pseudo BNS, the game will transition to pseudo BNS at least twice (there will always be consecutive wins). In addition, in the example shown, the degree of advantage to the player of the lottery related to the AT in the normal pullback mode (for example, the probability of winning the AT, the number of consecutive wins, the probability of winning a premonition, etc.) is the degree of advantage determined in the pseudo BNS before the transition, but it is not limited to this and may be the same as the lottery related to the AT in the normal advantageous mode, or may be more advantageous to the player than the lottery related to the AT in the normal advantageous mode. If a predetermined period of time (for example, 77 plays) has passed without an AT being won in the normal pullback mode, the main control circuit 100 will transition to the normal advantageous mode.

In contrast, when the number of coins in a pseudo BB or pseudo RB reaches or exceeds the end number and there is one or more consecutive wins remaining, a specified notification lamp will be illuminated during the pseudo BB or pseudo RB or when the start lever is operated immediately after the end of the pseudo BB or pseudo RB, or if the specified notification lamp is not illuminated when the start lever is operated, lock 8, described below, will be generated when the first stop operation is performed in the first game immediately after the end of the pseudo BB or pseudo RB, thereby notifying the player that control over the pseudo BB or pseudo RB is possible.

When a predetermined notification lamp is lit when the start lever is operated during a pseudo BB or pseudo RB or immediately after the pseudo BB or pseudo RB ends, lock 9 is activated and a pseudo game begins when the start lever is operated, and a "Aim for 7" effect is displayed, and depending on the player's pseudo stop operation, red 7, red 7, red 7 or red 7, red 7, BAR are displayed (temporarily stopped) on the active line, ending the pseudo game and transitioning to a consecutive (1G consecutive) pseudo BB or pseudo RB. Similarly, when lock 8 is activated to notify that control to a pseudo BB or pseudo RB is possible, a pseudo game begins and a "Aim for 7" effect is displayed, and depending on the player's pseudo stop operation, red 7, red 7, red 7 or red 7, red 7, BAR are displayed (temporarily stopped) on the active line, ending the pseudo game and transitioning to a consecutive (1G consecutive) pseudo BB or pseudo RB. The number of consecutive wins is reduced by one each time the game transitions to a pseudo BB or pseudo RB. In a pseudo game aiming for the 7 symbol, a maximum of 19 reels may slide so that a red 7, red 7, red 7, or red 7, red 7, BAR temporarily stops regardless of the timing of the stop operation, or a maximum of four reels may slide, as in normal gameplay. Because the pseudo game is purely for presentation purposes, even if the red 7s or red 7, red 7, and BAR do not stop, the pseudo bonus will start as if they did. Furthermore, the red 7, red 7, red 7, or red 7, red 7, and BAR temporarily stops on a line other than the middle line (such as a cross-down line, cross-up line, upper line, or lower line), and the line on which the temporary stop occurs or the ready line at the second stop may suggest or notify the type of pseudo BNS, the game status, or the likelihood of a consecutive win.

Furthermore, when the number of coins remaining in the pseudo BB and pseudo RB reaches or exceeds the end number, the remaining number of consecutive wins is 0, and the game has transitioned to the pseudo BNS two or more times (when there has been a winning streak), the main control circuit 100 will transition to a pullback streak. The game will transition to a pullback streak for a predetermined period of time (for example, until 77 games have been played). In a pullback streak, as with a normal advantageous game, AT-related lotteries (lotteries with the degree of advantage determined during the pseudo BNS) including AT lotteries, consecutive win count lotteries, and premonition lotteries are held, and the game will transition to premonition, pseudo BB, etc. depending on the results of the lotteries. If the AT is won during a pullback streak and the game transitions to the pseudo BNS, the game will transition to the pseudo BNS at least two times (a winning streak is guaranteed). In addition, the degree of advantage to the player of the lottery related to the AT during a pullback streak (for example, the probability of winning the AT, the number of consecutive wins, the probability of winning a premonition, etc.) has been shown as the degree of advantage determined in the pseudo BNS before the transition, but it is not limited to this and may be the same as the lottery related to the AT during an advantageous normal state, or may be more advantageous to the player than the lottery related to the AT during an advantageous normal state.

If a predetermined period of time has elapsed without an AT win during a reversal streak, the main control circuit 100 determines whether the reset conditions for the favorable zone are met based on the difference in number of coins, including the number of coins absorbed. If the reset conditions are not met, the game transitions to favorable waiting. On the other hand, if the reset conditions for the favorable zone are met, the main control circuit 100 initializes all information, including information about the AT, a counter for determining the difference in number of coins, including the number of coins absorbed, and any pseudo settings that have been set, and transitions to the normal zone. The reset conditions for the favorable zone may be met, for example, when the difference between the difference in number of coins and the upper limit of 2,400 is less than the clear number (e.g., 1,000). For example, if the clear number is 1,000 coins, the reset condition may be met when the difference in number of coins is +1,401 or more coins (less than 1,000 coins from the start of the favorable zone, i.e., the upper limit of 2,400 coins for the favorable zone). The number of coins to be cleared may be, for example, a value that is predetermined according to the set pseudo setting, or may be a value that is determined by lottery each time a transition to a pullback streak occurs, such as a value determined by lottery from multiple values (e.g., 0 to 2000) based on an allocation rate that is set according to the set pseudo setting. Resetting the advantageous zone when the difference in coins is positive from the start of the advantageous zone has the advantage of increasing the maximum number of coins that a player can win in the advantageous zone thereafter. It is also possible to set the number of coins to be cleared so that the advantageous zone can be reset when the difference in coins is negative from the start of the advantageous zone. After installation, as operation progresses, the cumulative negative difference in coins tends to increase, and it may be difficult to end the advantageous zone. Therefore, by appropriately resetting the advantageous zone even in the case of a negative difference in coins, the pseudo setting value is updated, adding variety to the game.

In favorable standby, which can be transitioned from a pullback streak, the same operations as in the normal interval are performed, even though it is an advantageous interval. That is, in favorable standby, a lottery is conducted, including an advantageous normal transition lottery to determine whether to transition to advantageous normal, and a direct hit lottery to determine whether to transition to pseudo BB based on a flag. In favorable standby, if the result of the advantageous normal transition lottery determines to transition to advantageous normal, the main control circuit 100 transitions the ball output state from advantageous standby to advantageous normal. A transition from advantageous standby to advantageous normal can be made in as little as one game. When transitioning from advantageous standby to advantageous normal, the main control circuit 100 performs initial setting processing for the pseudo setting, just as when transitioning from the normal interval. The initial setting processing for the pseudo setting, etc., will be described later. Furthermore, in favorable standby, if the result of the direct hit lottery determines to transition to pseudo BB, the main control circuit 100 transitions the ball output state from advantageous standby to pseudo BB. It is also possible to have a design where there is no direct lottery in the normal zone (non-advantageous zone) or advantageous standby, and there is no direct transition from these states to the pseudo BB or pseudo BB precursor state.

The advantageous waiting state can be controlled in both RT0 and RT1 game states, and transition to the advantageous waiting state occurs when a special reset is performed, regardless of whether the game state is RT0 or RT1 or the ball payout state (advantageous zone). A special reset refers to turning the power OFF, inserting the setting key into the key switch and turning it to the ON state by turning the power ON, operating the start lever ON, and then turning the key switch OFF. While the power can be turned OFF in any state to perform a special reset, it may be possible to perform a special reset only when medals are being accepted, when the start lever is being accepted, or when an error is occurring, and prohibiting a special reset during gameplay, such as when the reels are spinning. When a special reset is performed in the pachislot machine 1 of this embodiment, predetermined data stored in a designated storage area of the main RAM 103, including information related to the AT, is initialized, as described below in Figure 405. This will be described later. When a special reset is performed, the credit lamp or payout number lamp described above displays a predetermined value corresponding to one setting (e.g., the letter "U" or "1"). When a special reset is performed, for example, the presence or absence of operation of the reset switch 53 is not referenced (determined). Therefore, even if the reset switch 53 is operated, no processing is performed and the specified display is maintained. This reduces the main processing load and capacity. However, the presence or absence of operation of the reset switch 53 may also be referenced. In such a case, since the processing is similar to that of conventional machines with multiple setting levels, part of the program can be reused, thereby reducing development man-hours. When the presence or absence of operation is referenced, the same character "U" may be displayed again upon operation, changing from "U" to "U", or the reference may be made without updating the specified display corresponding to the setting value. Note that display means capable of displaying the specified display corresponding to the setting value may be provided within the gaming machine. For example, it may be arranged as a single-digit segment on part of the main control board 71.

In addition, regardless of the payout state, if the difference in the number of coins, including the number of coins absorbed, is expected to exceed a predetermined number (e.g., the upper limit of 2,400, a predetermined number of coins for transitioning to the ending, or the upper limit of the cumulative number from the base point "CMP_MY" (e.g., 19,000)) due to control, for example, as a result of a lottery related to the AT or a winning pseudo BB, or if the result of the AT lottery is a specific lottery result (e.g., part of a winning pseudo BB), the main control circuit 100 will transition to the ending. In the ending, the navigation will continue to be executed when the selection bell is drawn until the difference in the number of coins exceeds the predetermined number, and when the difference in the number of coins exceeds the predetermined number, the main control circuit 100 will initialize all information, including information related to the AT, a counter for determining the difference in the number of coins, including the number of coins absorbed, the advantageous zone flag, and any pseudo settings that have been set, and transition to the normal zone. When the game transitions to the ending in this way, it is confirmed that the AT state will continue until the difference in number of coins exceeds a predetermined number, so no lotteries related to the AT will be held during the ending.

In the pachislot machine 1 of this embodiment, a predetermined penalty is imposed when irregular button presses are made outside of a pseudo BNS (for example, pressing buttons in a sequence other than the first stop of the left reel), when irregular button presses are made during a pseudo BNS without navigation, or when a button press order or timing error occurs when the "Aim for 7" effect is activated. For example, when irregular button presses are made outside of a pseudo BNS, a penalty is imposed such that various lotteries related to the AT (pseudo BNS) are not conducted for the game in which the irregular button presses were made. In addition to not conducting various lotteries, various counters that are updated as the game progresses may not be updated. For example, a counter indicating the number of games that have been stuck up to the so-called ceiling game number (a pseudo bonus is awarded when the ceiling game number is reached) may not be updated when irregular button presses are made. Furthermore, various lotteries may be conducted, but under less favorable conditions than when the left reel stops first. Depending on the type of lottery, some lotteries may be drawn without a draw and others may be drawn under unfavorable conditions. Even when irregular button presses are performed, some lotteries may be drawn under the same conditions as when the first left stop button is pressed. Furthermore, while roles in which the number of coins acquired varies depending on the button press order, such as a selectable bell role, are subject to a penalty, roles in which the game outcome (gain of game value or replay activation) does not vary depending on the button press order, such as a replay role or a common 1-coin role, or rare roles with a higher advantage than the selectable bell role, such as a watermelon role, a weak cherry role, or a strong cherry role, may not be subject to a penalty, thereby minimizing the degree of disadvantage to a player who accidentally presses an irregular button. If an irregular button press is performed in a situation where a penalty may be incurred, it is desirable to display an explanatory image or sound such as "The first left stop button is recommended" or "An irregular button press is being performed" when the first stop button is pressed or when all reels are stopped. Furthermore, if irregular button presses are made during a pseudo BNS when no navigation is occurring, various lotteries related to the AT will be held for the game in which the irregular button presses were made, but a penalty such as a reduction in the number of coins won will be imposed. Note that it is also possible to configure the system so that no penalty will be imposed even if irregular button presses are made during a pseudo BNS. Furthermore, if the button press order or timing is incorrect when the "Aim for 7" effect occurs, the right to the AT (pseudo BNS lottery) will not be lost, but as mentioned above, a penalty will be imposed, such as being moved to a pseudo BNS return, an AT period in which the number of coins decreases slightly until 7s are lined up. Although it is called a penalty for the sake of convenience, it is not a penalty intended to discourage irregular button press strategies; rather, it is an example of a design that strikes a balance between preventing the AT from disappearing when timing is incorrect while also preventing players from gaining benefits from mistakes.

Furthermore, in pachislot machine 1, for example, in a ball-dispensing state other than during pseudo BNS (AT), the high probability flag is set to ON at the end of a game in which the left reel first stops, but is not set to ON (set to OFF) at the end of a game in which an irregular press is performed, so that when the high probability flag is set in the next game, processing is performed that is more advantageous to the player than when the high probability flag is not set. For example, in a game in which the high probability flag is set to ON, various lotteries related to the specified AT (pseudo BNS) are conducted, whereas in a game in which the high probability flag is not set to ON, various lotteries related to the specified AT (pseudo BNS) are not conducted, effectively imposing a penalty on games in which the high probability flag is not set to ON. In addition, in games where the high probability flag is set to OFF, various lotteries related to the AT are conducted but may be at a disadvantage compared to the first stop on the left, or some lotteries may be no-draw or unfavorable depending on the type of lottery, and some lotteries may be conducted under the same conditions as when the high probability flag is set to ON. In addition, while the high probability flag is OFF (the game in which the irregular press was performed and the next game), it may be possible to generate an indication that a penalty has actually occurred, such as the screen going dark.

This encourages players to carefully stop when navigation is occurring, and encourages players to avoid irregular button presses when navigation is not occurring. On the other hand, the winning probability is set as shown in Figure 399, and by winning the 12-coin role only when pressing the buttons in the order shown in Figure 400 when the selection bell is won, an average of 31.9 games can be played with 50 medals in non-AT mode.

Furthermore, in the pachislot machine 1 of this embodiment, when a first number of games (e.g., 777) have been played after the pseudo BNS has ended without transitioning to a new pseudo BNS, it is determined that the first ceiling has been reached, and control is exercised to forcibly draw a winning number in the pseudo BNS. Furthermore, after a special reset, when a second number of games (e.g., 699; this is not limited to a number of games less than the first number of games) have been played without transitioning to the pseudo BNS, it is determined that a second ceiling has been reached, and control is exercised to forcibly draw a winning number in the pseudo BNS.

<Initialization target>
FIG. 405 illustrates an example of information that is initialized when a game is transitioned to a normal zone or when a special reset is performed. First, when a game is transitioned from a favorable zone to a normal zone, information stored in the main RAM 103 is initialized, including at least the set pseudo setting values, various information related to the AT (pseudo BNS), a favorable zone flag for identifying the favorable zone, and a favorable zone payout number counter for identifying the difference in the number of coins in the favorable zone. On the other hand, when a special reset is performed, information stored in the main RAM 103 is initialized, including at least the set pseudo setting values and various information related to the AT, but at least the favorable zone flag and the favorable zone payout number counter are maintained even after the special reset. The favorable zone flag and the favorable zone payout number counter are maintained and are not initialized by any operation on the pachislot machine 1. This maintains the number of coins absorbed, allowing the player to continue playing without worrying about the upper limit (2400) of the difference in the number of coins limiter, thereby providing benefits to the player. Furthermore, when a special reset is performed during normal (RT0), the RT information is initialized (which can also be considered maintained since it is originally 0). When a special reset is performed inside a BB, both the BB information and the RT information are maintained. When a special reset is performed during a BB, both the BB information and the RT information are initialized. Furthermore, the advantageous zone flag and advantageous zone payout number counter are not limited to being initialized by any operation on the pachislot machine 1, but may be initialized by a specific operation, and may also be initialized if the main backup data is lost (becomes unusable) after the power has not been turned on for a long period of time.

<Initial setting process for pseudo settings>
The initial setting process for the pseudo-setting that is performed when a transition is made from the normal section or advantageous standby to the advantageous normal state will be described with reference to Fig. 406. Fig. 406 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the initial setting process for the pseudo-setting, which is executed by the main CPU 101 when a transition is made from the normal section or advantageous standby to the advantageous normal state.

In SL01, it is determined whether or not the time has come to transition from advantageous standby to advantageous normal mode. If it is not determined in SL01 that the time has come to transition from advantageous standby to advantageous normal mode, it is determined in SL06 whether or not the time has come to transition from the normal zone to advantageous normal mode. If it is determined in SL06 that the time has come to transition from the normal zone, a low setting count acquisition lottery is held in SL07, followed by a pseudo setting lottery in SL04 and a pseudo setting ceiling play count lottery in SL05. The pseudo setting lottery, low setting count acquisition lottery, and pseudo setting ceiling play count lottery will be described later. The transition from the normal zone is also referred to as trigger 1.

On the other hand, when it is determined in SL01 that the game is transitioning from advantageous waiting to advantageous normal mode, it is determined in SL02 whether the advantageous waiting mode before the transition was a mode transitioned to due to a special reset. If it is determined in SL02 that the advantageous waiting mode was a result of a special reset, then, as with the transition from the normal mode, a lottery to obtain the low setting count is held in SL07, followed by a pseudo setting lottery in SL04 and a pseudo setting ceiling number of plays lottery in SL05. The transition from advantageous waiting to advantageous normal mode due to a special reset is also referred to as trigger 1, just like the transition from the normal mode.

In contrast, when it is not determined in SL02 that the advantageous waiting state was due to a special reset, that is, when the transition from a pullback streak to advantageous waiting has occurred and the game has transitioned to an advantageous normal state, it is determined in SL03 whether or not a pseudo-setting update condition has been met. The pseudo-setting update condition is met, for example, when the number of times a predetermined rare combination (e.g., "F_Strong Cherry Rip A," "F_Strong Cherry Rip B," "F_Definite Cherry," etc.) has been won has reached the pseudo-setting ceiling number of games (the number of times a predetermined combination, such as a predetermined rare combination, has been achieved), as described below. The pachislot machine 1 (main CPU 101) counts the number of times a rare combination has been won as the game progresses, and initializes this count, for example, each time a pseudo-setting lottery is held. In this embodiment, the pseudo setting update condition can be met depending on the number of times a specified rare role is won, which makes it easier for the frequency of rare roles to fluctuate, making it harder for players to detect the timing of the pseudo setting change. Note that the winning role used to determine whether the pseudo setting ceiling has been reached may be any winning role instead of the specified rare role described above. For example, a replay role may be counted, or a select bell role may be counted. The specified role that is counted may include multiple types of winning roles, or may only target one type of winning role.

When it is determined in SL03 that the pseudo setting update conditions are met, a pseudo setting lottery is conducted in SL04, and a pseudo setting ceiling play count lottery is conducted in SL05. The trigger for conducting a pseudo setting lottery when the advantageous zone continues without a special reset is also called Trigger 2. When Trigger 2 is met, the low setting count acquisition lottery is not conducted. On the other hand, when it is determined in SL03 that the pseudo setting update conditions are not met, even when transitioning to advantageous normal mode, the initial setting process is terminated without conducting a pseudo setting lottery (pseudo setting update). Furthermore, when a direct hit lottery for the pseudo BNS shown in FIG. 404(c) is won from the normal zone (non-advantageous zone) or advantageous standby mode (i.e., when transitioning from the normal zone/advantageous standby mode to the pseudo BNS or pseudo BNS precursor mode), the initial setting process for the pseudo setting shown in FIG. 406 is also conducted. This prevents the pseudo setting value from being set, preventing irregular events such as gameplay progressing in an advantageous zone other than advantageous waiting. Note that in the following explanation, the transition from advantageous waiting or normal zone to advantageous normal, pseudo BNS, or pseudo BNS precursor may be referred to as a transition to "advantageous normal, etc."

The situation in which the pseudo setting value is updated can be reorganized according to FIG. 406 as follows.
Situation 1: When transitioning from advantageous standby to advantageous normal, etc. and after a special reset (SL01 = YES, SL02 = YES)
Situation 2: When transitioning from advantageous standby to advantageous normal, etc., and when the pseudo setting update condition is met, not after a special reset (SL01 = YES, SL02 = NO, SL03 = YES)
Situation 3: When transitioning from a normal section to an advantageous normal section, not from an advantageous standby section (SL01 = NO, SL06 = YES)
Of these, in situation 3, the pseudo setting value is determined when transitioning from the normal zone to the advantageous zone (normal advantageous zone, or pseudo BNS or pseudo BNS precursor by direct lottery of Figure 404 (c)). The processing order may be either order A or order B below.
Sequence A: Pseudo setting determination process → State transition to advantageous zone Sequence B: State transition to advantageous zone → Pseudo setting determination process In other words, if Sequence A is specified, in a game where the conditions for transition to an advantageous zone are met in the normal zone, the pseudo setting value is determined and then the advantageous zone state is set; if Sequence B is specified, in a game where the conditions for transition to an advantageous zone are met in the normal zone, the pseudo setting value is determined and then the advantageous zone state is set.

In addition, in the situations 1 and 2, the pseudo setting value is determined when transitioning to advantageous normal. The processing order may be either order a or order b below.
Sequence a: Pseudo setting determination process → State transition to advantageous normal Sequence b: State transition to advantageous normal → Pseudo setting determination process In other words, if the specifications are as follows: sequence a, in a game in which the conditions for transition to advantageous normal are met, the pseudo setting value is determined and then advantageous normal is set; if the specifications are as follows: sequence b, in a game in which the conditions for transition to advantageous normal are met, the pseudo setting value is determined and then advantageous normal is set.

Note that Figure 406 shows an example in which the SL03 determination process regarding the success or failure of Trigger 2 is performed when transitioning from a pullback streak to favorable standby mode via favorable standby mode to favorable normal mode. However, this is not limited to this, and it may also be performed when the pullback streak ends and transitions to favorable standby mode. In this case, when the SL03 determination process regarding the success or failure of Trigger 2 determines that Trigger 2 has been achieved, the set pseudo setting value is cleared when transitioning to favorable standby mode, and the pseudo setting value is set in SL04 when transitioning from favorable standby mode to favorable normal mode. On the other hand, when the SL03 determination process regarding the success or failure of Trigger 2 determines that Trigger 2 has not been achieved, the set pseudo setting value is not cleared when transitioning to favorable standby mode, but is maintained even after transitioning from favorable standby mode to favorable normal mode. Note that if the SL03 determination process regarding the success or failure of Trigger 2 is performed when the pullback streak ends and transitions to favorable standby mode, a pseudo setting lottery for SL04 when Trigger 2 is achieved may be performed following the SL03 determination process. In this case, if the determination process in SL03 regarding the success or failure of trigger 2 determines that trigger 2 has been achieved, the set pseudo setting value is cleared when transitioning to advantageous standby and a new pseudo setting value is set; however, if the determination process in SL03 regarding the success or failure of trigger 2 determines that trigger 2 has not been achieved, the set pseudo setting value is not cleared when transitioning to advantageous standby, and is maintained even after transitioning from advantageous standby to advantageous normal.

Next, using Figure 407, we will explain the pseudo setting lottery, the low setting number of times acquisition lottery, and the pseudo setting ceiling number of plays lottery. Figure 407(a) is an example of a table used for the pseudo setting lottery. As shown in Figure 407(a), the pseudo setting lottery is conducted according to different allocation rates for trigger 1 and trigger 2. For example, when trigger 1 is established, pseudo settings that are more advantageous to the player (e.g., pseudo settings 4 to 7) are determined at a higher rate than when trigger 2 is established, whereas pseudo settings that are less advantageous to the player (e.g., pseudo settings 0 to 3) are determined at a lower rate than when trigger 2 is established. As a result, it can be said that the pseudo setting lottery based on trigger 1 is more advantageous to the player than the pseudo setting lottery based on trigger 2. For this reason, when an amusement parlor opens, which may be after the ending or a special reset, there is a high possibility that a highly advantageous pseudo setting will be set, which can increase the player's anticipation of playing on pachislot machine 1.

Figure 407(b) is an example of a table used in the low setting count lottery. As mentioned above, the low setting count lottery is a lottery that is executed when transitioning to a favorable zone or during a special reset, and as shown in Figure 407(b), there is a 16/256 chance of determining "1 time," a 7/256 chance of determining "2 times," and a 233/256 chance of determining "miss." When "1 time" or "2 times" is determined by the low setting count lottery, the number of times set to a pseudo setting below a predetermined value (e.g., "1") will subsequently reach the number determined by the low setting count lottery, and thereafter (at the next pseudo setting lottery) a pseudo setting will be set that is always above a specific value (e.g., "7"). For example, if YES is determined in SL03 of FIG. 406 and the pseudo-setting lottery is performed in SL04, and "1 time" or "2 times" is determined in the low-setting count acquisition lottery, and it is determined that the number of times set to a pseudo-setting of a predetermined value (e.g., "1") or less has reached the number of times selected in the low-setting count acquisition lottery, the pseudo-setting may be forcibly set to a specific value (e.g., "7") or more and updated. In this way, if a low-setting count is set, a pseudo-setting of a predetermined value or less is set that many times, so that a pseudo-setting of a specific value or more is forcibly set the next time, which is advantageous for the player. Also, as mentioned above, the low-setting count acquisition lottery is performed when trigger 1 is established. Therefore, after the ending or when the gaming parlor opens, which may be after a special reset, the possibility of a low-setting count being set increases, thereby increasing the player's anticipation for playing on the pachislot machine 1. The low setting number acquisition lottery may be held not only when trigger 1 is met, but also when trigger 2 is met, for example, when a low setting number is not set.

Figure 407(c) is an example of a table used to draw the pseudo-setting ceiling number of plays. As shown in Figure 407(c), the pseudo-setting ceiling number of plays is drawn according to a different allocation rate for each pseudo-setting. As mentioned above, the pseudo-setting ceiling number of plays does not directly define the ceiling number of plays (number of games), but rather roughly determines the length of time the player will stay at the current pseudo-setting based on the number of times a predetermined role, such as a cherry, is achieved. This creates a gameplay feature in which the expectation of a pseudo-setting change changes when a predetermined role is achieved. Furthermore, compared to when the ceiling is directly determined by the number of games, the timing of the pseudo-setting change is more difficult to detect because it depends on the luck of the predetermined role (the frequency of accidental achievement). The table used for the lottery for the pseudo setting ceiling number of plays is set so that, for example, when the set pseudo setting is 0, a small number of times that a predetermined role is achieved is determined as the pseudo setting ceiling number of plays (number of times a predetermined role is achieved) with a high probability; as the set pseudo setting becomes larger, the proportion of a small number of times that a predetermined role is achieved that is determined as the pseudo setting ceiling number of plays (number of times a predetermined role is achieved) decreases, while the proportion of a large number of times that a predetermined role is achieved increases; and when the set pseudo setting is 7, a large number of times that a predetermined role is achieved that is determined as the pseudo setting ceiling number of plays (number of times a predetermined role is achieved) with a high probability. As a result, when the set pseudo setting is a small value (when the degree of advantage to the player is low), a small number of times is set as the pseudo setting ceiling number of plays (number of times a predetermined role is achieved), SL03 in FIG. 406 is judged as YES, trigger 2 is established, and the frequency with which the pseudo setting lottery is held increases; on the other hand, when the set pseudo setting is a large value (when the degree of advantage to the player is high), a large number of times is set as the pseudo setting ceiling number of plays (number of times a predetermined role is achieved), SL03 in FIG. 406 is judged as YES, trigger 2 is established, and the frequency with which the pseudo setting lottery is held decreases, thereby increasing the player's sense of expectation.

The pseudo setting ceiling number of plays is not limited to being determined by a pseudo setting ceiling number of plays lottery, but may be a number that differs depending on the set pseudo setting (e.g., the higher the setting value, the more plays are determined), or may be a number that is uniformly determined regardless of the set pseudo setting, or may be a number that is randomly determined from multiple plays each time a pseudo setting lottery is held. Furthermore, the pseudo setting update condition in SL03 is not limited to being met depending on the number of times a rare combination is drawn, but may be met depending on the number of games played. Even in this case, the number of games that fulfills the pseudo setting update condition in SL03 may be a number that differs depending on the set pseudo setting (e.g., the higher the setting value, the more plays are determined), or may be a number that is uniformly determined regardless of the set pseudo setting, or may be a number that is randomly determined from multiple play numbers each time a pseudo setting lottery is held. In this case, instead of the number of times a predetermined combination is achieved, such as 5 or 10 times as shown in Figure 407 (c), a value corresponding to the number of games played, such as 500 games, 1000 games, 1500 games, etc., can be set as the ceiling reaching condition. Note that the number of games played here may be counted during a non-AT (advantageous normal, pullback normal, pullback streak, premonition), or may include games played during the AT. Also, the "pseudo setting ceiling number of games played = number of pseudo BNS occurrences since the pseudo setting was set" may be used, or other predetermined parameters that change according to the progress of the game may be used as the determination condition for the "pseudo setting ceiling number of games played."

Examples of tables used for the pseudo setting update conditions, pseudo setting lottery, and pseudo setting ceiling number of plays lottery are shown above, but different tables are used for the pseudo setting lottery and pseudo setting ceiling number of plays lottery so that the average number of games until an update by pseudo setting lottery differs for each pseudo setting that is set. Therefore, the average number of games until an update for each pseudo setting that is set will have a distribution as shown in Figure 408. The distribution of average number of games shown in Figure 408 is an example based on the results of, for example, running a simulator a considerable number of games for each pseudo setting. For example, the distribution of the average number of games required from when "0" is set as the pseudo setting until a pseudo setting lottery is held when Trigger 2 is fulfilled is 20% for 0-999G, 33% for 1000G-1999G, 30% for 2000G-2999G, 10% for 3000G-3999G, 6% for 4000G-4999G, and 1% for 5000G or above. The distribution of the average number of games required from when any of "1"-"7" is set until a pseudo setting lottery is held when Trigger 2 is fulfilled is as shown in Figure 408. As shown in Figure 408, the higher the pseudo setting value, the longer (longer) the average number of games required until the next pseudo setting lottery is held when Trigger 2 is fulfilled, and the smaller the pseudo setting value, the shorter (shorter) the average number of games required until the next pseudo setting lottery is held when Trigger 2 is fulfilled.

Figure 409 is a diagram summarizing the winning rate for each pseudo setting. Figure 403 explains that, for example, in advantageous normal modes, AT lotteries and consecutive win count lotteries are conducted based on the winning probability according to the set pseudo setting, so that the higher the pseudo setting, the greater the degree of advantage for the player. Also, in pseudo BNS, a consecutive win count lottery is conducted, and a lottery to determine the degree of advantage for the AT-related lottery conducted during normal pullbacks and consecutive pullbacks is conducted, and an AT lottery and consecutive win count lottery are conducted during normal pullbacks and consecutive pullbacks.

Figure 409(a) shows the winning probability for the first hit of pseudo BB and pseudo RB for each pseudo setting, as well as the combined winning probability. Figure 409(b) is a diagram showing an example of the high and low hit rates for each pseudo setting. As shown in Figure 409(a), the combined winning probability for pseudo BB and pseudo RB is such that pseudo setting 1 has a lower probability than pseudo setting 0, pseudo setting 3 has a lower probability than pseudo setting 2, pseudo setting 5 has a lower probability than pseudo setting 4, and pseudo setting 7 has a lower probability than pseudo setting 6. Therefore, with regard to the first hit of pseudo BNS, as shown in the pseudo BNS first hit column in Figure 409(b), when pseudo settings 0 and even numbers are set, the probability is higher than when the odd pseudo settings that are one number apart are set.

Furthermore, for two or more pseudo BNS initial hits, as shown in the consecutive BNS initial hit column in Figure 409(b), the probability is low when the pseudo setting is 0 to 3, medium when the pseudo setting is 4 and 5, and high when the pseudo setting is 6 and 7. Furthermore, the pull-back rate and consecutive hit count in normal pull-backs are higher (more) when an odd-numbered pseudo setting is set than when the pseudo setting is set to 0 or an even number, which are one number apart. Regarding the pull-back rate in pull-back consecutive hits, as shown in the pull-back rate after consecutive hits column in Figure 409(b), the probability is low when the pseudo setting is 0 or 1, medium when the pseudo setting is 2 to 5, and high when the pseudo setting is 6 and 7.

Figure 409(c) shows the combined winning probability and combined composite winning probability for all states, including consecutive pseudo BB and pseudo RB wins, for each pseudo setting. As shown in Figure 409(c), the combined composite winning probability for pseudo BB and pseudo RB increases the larger the pseudo setting.

Figure 409(d) is a diagram showing an example of the payout rate for each pseudo setting based on Figures 409(a) to 409(c). The payout rate for each pseudo setting is as shown in Figure 409(d); the higher the pseudo setting, the higher the payout rate, and at pseudo settings of 3 or higher, the payout rate is 100% (1 or higher). Furthermore, the overall payout rate (calculated when millions of games are played on a simulator) including pseudo setting transitions without performing a special reset is 98.1%, which is less than 100%.

<Processing related to advantageous zones and instruction functions>
Next, we will explain various processes for each main game state managed by the main control circuit 100 shown in Fig. 394. Fig. 410 is a diagram for explaining various processes for each main game state.

In Figure 410, as shown in the game status column, the game status is broadly divided into when the bonus is not activated and the bonus is activated (referred to as "actual BB" or "actual RB" in Figure 410), and when the bonus is not activated, it is divided into when the bonus is not carried over as an internal winning role and when the bonus is carried over as an internal winning role (referred to as "actual BB" in Figure 410), and when the bonus is not activated, it is further divided into when the bonus has not been won in the game (referred to as "actual BB condition device is not activated" in Figure 410) and when the bonus has been won in the game (referred to as "actual BB condition device is activated" in Figure 410).

In addition, as shown in the various processing columns in Figure 410, among the various types of processing, internal lottery processing, processing related to advantageous zones, and processing related to instruction functions are shown. Of these, internal lottery processing is executed both when the reel is not in operation and when the reel is in operation. Furthermore, processing related to advantageous zones is executed regardless of the game state when the reel is not in operation, but is not executed when the reel is in operation. Furthermore, processing related to instruction functions is executed regardless of the game state when the reel is in operation, but is not executed when the reel is in operation. Furthermore, during an advantageous zone, it is executed only when the ball output state is in advantageous standby, regardless of whether the condition device related to real BB is not in operation or when the condition device related to real BB is in operation.

Here, we will summarize the common processing that is executed during the advantageous period. During the advantageous period, processing is executed for each game to update the "CMP_MY" counter, which determines the cumulative number from the reference (base point) when the number of medals at the end of each game during a specified period from when the power was turned on is at its lowest (the lowest value of the cumulative number obtained by adding up the difference between the number of medals bet and the number of medals paid out), based on the difference in the number of medals for one game (one game). Also, the advantageous period payout number counter, which determines the difference in the number of medals including the number of medals absorbed, is updated.

In addition, during the advantageous zone, common processing related to reaching the limiter involves determining whether the value of the advantageous zone payout counter after the end of play exceeds +2400 from the initial value of the advantageous zone payout counter, and if it is determined that it has exceeded this value, processing is executed to end the advantageous zone under any circumstances.

Furthermore, during the advantageous zone, common processing related to the complete function is to determine whether the value of the "CMP_MY" counter has reached an upper limit (e.g., 19,000) after the end of play, and if it is determined that it has reached that limit, the complete function is activated, which disables game progress, and processing is executed to enter a main error state. Note that in the pachislot machine 1 of this embodiment, the cancellation processing after the complete function has been activated is executed by, for example, a special reset.

Furthermore, during the advantageous zone, as a common process related to the end of the advantageous zone, when the advantageous zone ends and the normal zone is entered, a process is executed to initialize all variables that affect the performance of the instruction function. In the pachislot machine 1 of this embodiment, as explained in Figure 405, not only are variables that affect the performance of the instruction function, such as pseudo settings and various information related to the AT, initialized, but also the advantageous zone flag and advantageous zone payout number counter.

<Rock>
Next, with reference to Fig. 411, a description will be given of a lock that can occur in the pachislot machine 1 in this embodiment. A lock is an effect that stops the progress of a game for a predetermined period of time (disables the game operation of a player for a predetermined period of time) when a predetermined execution condition (occurrence condition) is met, and is also called a "lock effect" or "freeze effect".

Figure 411 illustrates the triggering times and conditions for each of the 15 types of locks, Lock 1 through Lock 15. For example, Lock 1 pauses gameplay for 7,200.35 ms and can occur, for example, when a pseudo BB appears at the end of a push sequence + aim game (aim for 7 effect) or when a pseudo BB appears during a pseudo game in which symbols are stopped and aligned (when a 7 appears temporarily during a pseudo game). Lock 5 pauses gameplay for 4,000.69 ms and can occur, for example, when the number of symbols reaches or exceeds the number required for a pseudo BB and the pseudo BB ends (when the third stop button is released, or when the third button is pressed). Lock 8 pauses gameplay for 2,200.88 ms and can occur, for example, when the first stop operation is performed in the first game after the pseudo BB or pseudo RB ends. Lock 8 functions as a strange effect in which the reels do not stop even when the stop button for the second stop operation is pressed, and a pseudo BNS winning lottery is announced during or immediately after the lock. As shown in Figure 411, other locks can also occur for a period of time specified for each type when the conditions for occurrence specified for each type are met.

<External signal>
The pachislot machine 1 of this embodiment is equipped with an information display device equivalent to the information display device 14 including a 7-segment LED, and is capable of reporting various information related to the game by the lighting mode. Here, an example of an external signal transmitted to an external data display device, hall computer, etc. is described. Figure 412 is a diagram for explaining the specifications of the external signal, and Figure 412(a) is a diagram for explaining an example of the segment position of a specific 7-segment LED included in the information display device that is to be lit according to the type of external signal.

While external signal 1 is on (outputting), the main control circuit 100 lights up segment position e of the specific 7-segment LED, which corresponds to the external signal 1 LED. Furthermore, while external signal 2 is on (outputting), the main control circuit 100 lights up segment position d of the specific 7-segment LED, which corresponds to the external signal 2 LED. Furthermore, while external signal 3 is on (outputting), the main control circuit 100 lights up segment position c of the specific 7-segment LED, which corresponds to the external signal 3 LED. Note that in the pachislot machine 1 of this embodiment, the advantageous zone display LED at segment position g is not used (it is not lit even during an advantageous zone), but this is not a limitation, and segment position g may also be used as the advantageous zone display LED.

Figure 412 (b) is a diagram illustrating an example of the on and off triggers for each external signal that can be output from the gaming ball lending connection terminal board. External signal 1 is a signal that turns on (output) when the ball dispensing state is during a pseudo RB. The on trigger occurs when lock 2 or lock 12 occurs when the pseudo RB is aligned as shown in Figure 411. The off trigger occurs when lock 6 ends at the end of the pseudo RB as shown in Figure 411.

In addition, external signal 2 is a signal that turns on (output) when the ball dispensing state is during pseudo BB. The trigger for turning it on is when lock 1, lock 3, or lock 14 occurs when pseudo BB is lined up as shown in Figure 411, and when lock 4 occurs when pseudo RB is lined up but the game is ending. The trigger for turning it off is when lock 5 ends when pseudo BB ends as shown in Figure 411, and when lock 7 ends when the game is ending.

In addition, external signal 3 is a signal that turns on (output) when the ball dispensing state is ending. The trigger for turning it on is when lock 3 or lock 4 occurs during the ending shown in Figure 411. The trigger for turning it off is when lock 7 ends at the end of the ending shown in Figure 411.

External signal 4 is a signal that turns on (output) when a setting change is being confirmed or an error has occurred (including when the complete function is operating). The trigger for turning it on is when it is determined that the setting key switch is on or when it is determined that an error has occurred. The trigger for turning it off is when it is determined that the setting key switch is off or when it is determined that the error has been resolved. External signal 5 is a signal that turns on (output) when the door is open. The trigger for turning it on is when it is detected that the door is open. The trigger for turning it off is when it is detected that the door is closed.

<Other examples of specifications for the long press counting sound and count completion sound for medal-less gaming machines>
Examples of specifications for the long press counting sound and count completion sound of the medal-less gaming machine have been described with reference to Figures 311 and 312, but the present invention is not limited to these. Other examples of specifications will be described with reference to Figure 413.

Figure 413(a) shows an example of a specification in which the long press counting sound is changed (altered) depending on the press time during long press counting. The press time during long press counting in Figure 413 is the time elapsed after 500 ms has elapsed since the count button was detected as being pressed long (the device transitions to a continuous counting state in which 50 sheets are counted every 300 ms as long as the count button is pressed long). Note that after 4000 ms has elapsed, the device transitions to an auto counting state in which 50 sheets are counted every 300 ms even if the count button is released, so the counting continues regardless of whether the count button is actually being pressed long or whether the count button is released. This can be summarized as follows.
Short press state: Press time less than 500 ms Continuous count state (long press state): Press time 500 ms or more Auto count state: Press time 4000 ms or more Although a distinction is made between the continuous count state and the auto count state, the auto count state is a state in which the continuous count state continues even when the count button is released, so in a broad sense, the auto count state can also be considered a state included in the continuous count state. Note that the auto count state can be canceled by pressing the count button once after releasing the count button in the auto count state, and by changing from the pressed state to the non-pressed state (off-edge detection is performed when the hand is released from the count button), counting can be ended even when there are remaining credits. Note that the trigger for canceling the auto count state and ending counting may also be when the count button is detected as pressed (on-edge detection) in the auto count state. Counting also ends when the remaining credits reach 0. Naturally, once counting has finished, even after the auto-counting state is set, this is not counted as the time during which counting is ongoing ("pressed time" shown in FIG. 413). When the press time is between 0 ms and 5999 ms, a sound effect corresponding to the first level (for example, a sound effect with a pitch of level 1) is output, when the press time is between 6000 ms and 11999 ms, a sound effect corresponding to the second level (for example, a sound effect with a pitch of level 2 higher than level 1) is output, and thereafter, sound effects corresponding to the levels according to the press time (for example, a sound effect with a pitch that increases with each increasing level) are output, and when the press time is 60000 ms or longer, a sound effect corresponding to the seventh level (for example, a sound effect with a pitch of level 7 higher than level 6) is output. The sound effect may be output only once when the pressing time reaches the minimum value for each stage, or may be output every time a predetermined time (e.g., 1000 ms, or the time required to count a predetermined number of medals (e.g., 50 medals) (e.g., 300 ms)) has elapsed. If the count button is pressed for less than 500 ms, one medal is counted per press, which is considered a short press. A one-coin transfer sound (one-coin counting sound) is emitted for each operation, and the sound effects for each stage and special sound effects shown in FIG. 413 are not emitted. Even if you continue to press the count button without releasing your hand in the auto counting mode, counting continues as if you had released your hand. The sound effect shown in FIG. 413(a) indicating that counting is in progress is the same whether the counting is being continued while the counting time is being continued or released. In other words, the counting sound does not change even if you release your hand from the count button in the auto counting mode. If the sound effect changed when the player released their hand, it could lead the player to suspect that they should not have released their hand, so this is prevented. However, a predetermined sound effect may be emitted when it is detected that the player has released their hand during the auto-counting mode (when the off-edge of the count button is detected), or at least some of the sound effects emitted when the player released their hand may be different from those emitted when the count button was continued to be pressed. Furthermore, when four seconds have passed since the count button was pressed, when the auto-counting mode is entered, an explanatory voice message such as "Counting will continue even if you release your hand" may be emitted. Similarly, after four seconds have passed, an explanatory message such as "Counting will continue even if you release your hand" may be displayed on the screen, and this explanatory message may continue to be displayed or may be terminated when the player releases their hand from the count button.

413(b) shows an example of the specifications for the count completion sound that is output when the continuous counting state (including the auto counting state described above) ends with some credits remaining. Specifically, the continuous counting state ends in one of the following situations:
Situation 1: When the count button is pressed and held for 500 ms or more and then released.Situation 2: When the count button is pressed and held for 4000 ms or more, entering the auto counting state, and then the count button is released and then pressed to cancel the auto counting state and end the continuous counting state.Note that the count completion sound is not limited to this, and a common sound effect may be output regardless of the stage of the pressing time.

Figure 413(c) shows an example of the specifications for the count completion sound that is output when all credits have been counted by long press counting and the long press counting is complete. As shown in Figure 413(c), a sound effect corresponding to the level of press time (which may be the same as the sound effect corresponding to the level of press time (counting time) shown in Figure 413(b) or a different sound) is output, and a special sound effect (here, voice) corresponding to the level of press time is output. When the press time (counting time) is between 0 ms and 29,999 ms, a voice message such as "See you again" is output as the special sound effect. When the press time (counting time) is between 30,000 ms and 59,999 ms, a voice message such as "Thank you for the best memories" is output as the special sound effect. When the press time (counting time) is 60,000 ms or longer, a voice message such as "Model name AAA! Let's come again" is output as the special sound effect. In this way, if there are no credits remaining when the long press counting is complete and counting is complete, a special sound effect is output that is not output when credits remain. Note that, like the sound effects, the special sound effect may be one in which different sounds are defined for each stage, and may not be limited to voice messages but may also be music or sound effects output during play.

<Sub-control related>
The main control circuit 100 controls the game state and the ball dispensing state as shown in Fig. 394 and Fig. 403. On the other hand, the sub-control circuit 200 transitions to a sub-game state according to the game state and the ball dispensing state controlled by the main control circuit 100, and controls predetermined presentation means (for example, a display device (e.g., corresponding to a sub-display device), a group of lamps/LEDs, and a group of speakers) in a manner according to the sub-game state. Fig. 414 is a diagram for explaining an example of a presentation state that is controlled when power is cut off, a special reset is performed, a demo is restored, etc., while the machine is controlled in one of the sub-game states.

Figure 414(a) is a diagram showing an overview of when power is restored. In Figure 414(a), the "Before Power Restoration" column shows the type of sub-game state before power is restored, and the "After Power Restoration" column shows the respective states of the presentation status, including "Return Screen," "Exceptional Return Presentation, etc.", "Bonus Activation Screen, Bonus/ART End Screen, Bonus Combination Notification, Navigation, etc. (hereinafter referred to as "Bonus Activation Screen, etc.")," "Relevant Presentation Information," "Development Presentation Information, Scenario Information," "Winning Flash," "UniMemo Information," "Internal Presentation Information, Display Information," and "Exception Clear."

Regarding the "return screen," if the sub game state is during general gameplay, during a specified cherry sign, or during a pullback (when not in full game), the screen will return to the basic state during general gameplay. If the sub game state is during general gameplay, during a specified cherry sign, or during a pullback (when in full game), or in any other sub game state, the screen will return to the same state. Regarding the "bonus activation screen, etc.", the screen is generally "cleared" regardless of the type of sub game state, but if the sub game state is during a bonus return or BB and navigation is being executed, the navigation will be maintained. Note that states other than the "return screen" and "bonus activation screen, etc." will be cleared or absent, regardless of the type of sub game state, as shown in Figure 414(a). Among the sub game states, BB1 is a pseudo-BB where the notification lamp was off at the start, and BB2 is a pseudo-BB where the notification lamp was on from the start.

Figure 414(b) shows an overview of what happens when a special reset occurs. As shown in Figure 414(b), regardless of the sub-game state, after a special reset, the "return screen" will be "non-market state, after completion," and "exceptional return effects, etc." to "exception clear" will be clear or none, etc.

Figure 414 (c) is a diagram showing an overview of when returning to demo. As shown in Figure 414 (c), regardless of the sub-game state, after returning to demo, the "return screen" will be the "state before demo transition," and the "bonus activation screen, etc.", "development presentation information, scenario information," and "internal presentation information, display information" will be retained, while everything else will be cleared or absent.

Figure 415 is a diagram illustrating the state of the display device (e.g., equivalent to a sub-display device) and the lower back panel 13 when the pachislot machine 1 is in a non-market state, not a state (market state) in which it is intended for players to play at an amusement parlor, but a non-market state in which it is not intended for play. As shown in the state column of Figure 415(a), non-market states include non-internal, BB operation, pseudo setting change_non-internal with special reset performed during non-internal (e.g., advantageous waiting during non-internal), and pseudo setting change_internal with special reset performed during internal (e.g., advantageous waiting during internal).

When in the non-market state, not in the internal state, or pseudo setting change_not in the internal state, a message image such as "Waiting, waiting for internal state" is displayed on the display device, and the waist panel 13 is controlled to a flashing state. Also, when the BB is activated in the non-market state, a message image such as "Waiting, waiting for internal state" is displayed on the display device, and the waist panel 13 is controlled to an off state. Furthermore, when in the non-market state, pseudo setting change_internal, a message image such as "Waiting" is displayed on the display device, and the waist panel 13 is controlled to a flashing state. Figure 415(b) shows an example of the display during pseudo setting change_internal, in which a message image such as "Waiting" is displayed. This allows arcade staff and others to know that the state is not a market state but a non-market state. In the non-market state, the same basic operation sounds and actions as during general play (market state) are output, and the frame LED is turned off.

Figure 415 shows an example of a non-market state, but in the market state, even during the period between the transition from the advantageous zone to the normal zone and the transition to advantageous normal, or between the transition from a pullback streak to advantageous standby and the transition to advantageous normal, the same operation and mode as in other ball-dispensing states in the market state (e.g., advantageous normal) is used (e.g., instead of the state shown in Figure 415, a screen displaying the background and effects of the normal stage or a screen displaying the machine name, etc.) is used. In other words, the standby screen shown in Figure 415(b) will not be displayed after the store clerk has completed the pseudo setting set after a special reset, even in situations where the pseudo setting value is updated while the player is playing. This prevents the player from noticing from a display device, etc., that a pseudo setting lottery has been held or that the pseudo setting has been updated in the market state.

<Pseudo setting suggestions>
The pachislot machine 1 in this embodiment can execute a pseudo-setting suggestion effect that suggests the set pseudo-setting, for example, when lock 5 or 6 is released at the end of a pseudo BB or pseudo RB. The pseudo-setting suggestion effect in this embodiment includes a first pseudo-setting suggestion effect that is determined by a random drawing at the end of a pseudo BB or pseudo RB, and a second pseudo-setting suggestion effect that is determined by a random drawing at the time of a special reset in response to a special reset. Furthermore, the pseudo-setting suggestion effect includes not only effects that suggest a pseudo-setting value, but also pseudo-setting notification effects in which a specific pseudo-setting value is confirmed (e.g., a pseudo-setting value 7 confirmation effect). Furthermore, the "suggestion effect" also includes "notification effects" that, when viewed by someone who knows the rules of the effect, can narrow down the setting to a specific value. The pseudo setting suggestion may be made at a predetermined timing other than the above-mentioned unlock time (for example, when the pseudo BNS lottery is confirmed, during the pseudo BNS, at the end of the normal pullback, at the end of the ending, etc.). It may also be made possible to occur when a predetermined condition is met, such as pressing an effect button, at a predetermined timing. Furthermore, for setting suggestion effects on conventional gaming machines with multiple setting values such as settings 1 to 6, the pseudo setting values can be read as setting values in the specifications for the pseudo setting notification effects below, and can be adopted as appropriate, as long as there are no contradictions.

The first pseudo setting suggestion effect has multiple types of suggestion effects that match the pseudo setting for each pseudo setting, and the type of suggestion effect that is selected from the multiple types of suggestion effects that match the pseudo setting set by lottery at the end of the pseudo BB or pseudo RB will be executed.

On the other hand, for the second pseudo-setting suggestion effect, multiple types of schedules are provided to determine the order in which multiple types of suggestion effects that match each pseudo-setting are executed, and the suggestion effects are executed in an order based on a schedule determined from multiple types of schedules that match the pseudo-setting set by lottery at the time of the special reset.

Figure 416 is a timing chart outlining the processing related to the second pseudo-setting suggestion effect. As indicated by the circled number 1, when the pseudo-setting is updated by performing a special reset, one schedule is determined from multiple schedules for suggestion effects that match the set pseudo-setting. Figure 416 shows an example in which a schedule is determined to execute suggestion effects in the order shown in the example column for the first through tenth suggestion effects.

After that, when the first pseudo-BNS is completed, the first suggestive effect is identified and executed based on the determined schedule, as shown by circled number 2. Similarly, suggestive effects are identified and executed according to the number of times the pseudo-BNS has been completed thereafter. Each of the multiple schedules is designed so that the same suggestive effect is not identified (executed) until a predetermined number of times. Furthermore, the order of the suggestive effects is designed so that unnecessary information is not displayed (for example, a suggestive effect confirming a 4 or higher result is not executed after a suggestive effect confirming a 3 or higher result is not executed). Furthermore, each of the multiple schedules is designed to provide a certain amount of information the first time, and then gradually approach the core with each successive play (narrowing down the pseudo-settings that have been set). This increases the desire to aim for the next pseudo-BNS even if the pseudo-BNS ends in a single play, thereby improving the operating rate of the pachislot machine 1. Note that, as an example of where useless information is not announced, we have given the example of a situation where a suggestive effect of a confirmed 4 or more is not executed after a suggestive effect of a confirmed 3 or more, but even in such cases, the subsequent confirmed 3 or more effect may not necessarily be useless. For example, if there is a tendency for a specific confirmed 3 or more effect to appear more frequently the higher the pseudo-setting, or to appear more frequently at setting 5, then when a specific confirmed 3 or more effect appears after a confirmed 4 or more effect, the expectation of a high setting or the expectation of setting 5 increases. In such cases, it cannot be said to be useless information, so it is acceptable to schedule a confirmed 3 or more effect to appear after a suggested effect of a confirmed 4 or more.

In addition, not only when the pseudo settings are updated by a special reset, but also when a pseudo setting lottery is conducted and the pseudo settings are updated, one schedule may be determined from multiple schedules for suggestive effects that match the set pseudo settings, and the suggestive effects may be executed in the order based on the determined schedule each time the pseudo BNS ends.

The above explains the pseudo setting suggestion at the end of the pseudo BNS, but the pseudo setting suggestion is not limited to this and may be made at any time. It may also be made when a special reset is performed and the game moves from advantageous standby to advantageous normal mode. This makes it possible to confirm that the desired setting has been set when, for example, a special reset is performed by a store clerk before the game parlor opens and the game is put into market mode (advantageous normal mode).

The pseudo-setting suggestion that occurs when a special reset is performed and the game transitions from advantageous standby to advantageous normal mode may be, for example, an effect that makes it possible to identify the currently set pseudo-setting (announces or suggests 0-7), or an effect that makes it possible to identify whether a pseudo-setting of a predetermined value (e.g., 4) or higher has been set. For example, if the value is 4 or higher, an effect announcing a high setting (displaying "H" on the segment) may be executed to indicate a setting of 4 or higher, and if the value is 3 or lower, an effect announcing a low setting (displaying "L" on the segment) to indicate a setting of 3 or lower. Rather than a definitive announcement, a setting suggestion effect may be configured in which "L" may appear with a lower probability than "H" even when the setting is 4 or higher, and "H" may appear with a lower probability than "L" even when the setting is 3 or lower. Both definitive announcement and suggestion effects may be possible. Furthermore, when a special reset is performed and a transition is made from advantageous standby to advantageous normal, the pseudo setting suggestion may always be made, may be made at a predetermined rate, or may be made always when a pseudo setting of a predetermined value (for example, 4) or more is set, or may be made at a predetermined rate. Furthermore, the pseudo setting suggestion made when a special reset is performed and a transition is made from advantageous standby to advantageous normal may be made by presentation means (LED, 7-segment display, etc.) controlled by the main CPU, or may be made by presentation means (display device, LED, 7-segment display, etc.) controlled by the sub-CPU.

In addition, when drawing lots to determine whether or not to make a pseudo-setting suggestion, or which pseudo-setting suggestion to make, reference may be made to, for example, the value of the advantageous zone payout number counter to identify the difference in the number of coins in the advantageous zone, or the overall payout rate from a specified timing (for example, when the power is turned on). An example is described below.

SL07 in Figure 406 shows an example of a lottery for obtaining a low setting count. However, for example, if a low setting count (1 or 2) is set and the pseudo setting is subsequently determined to be "7," a pseudo setting suggestion to that effect may be made. In this case, if the pseudo setting suggestion is made when the value of the favorable zone payout counter has reached a predetermined number (e.g., 1,000) up to the upper limit of 2,400, the low setting count may also be initialized when the value of the favorable zone payout counter reaches its upper limit, ending the favorable zone and transitioning to the normal zone. This may result in a situation where the pseudo setting suggestion is made but "7" is not actually set as the pseudo setting. To prevent such a problem from occurring, the pseudo setting suggestion lottery that suggests the pseudo setting of "7" may refer to the value of the favorable zone payout counter, allowing the pseudo setting suggestion to be executed when the predetermined number of coins has not yet reached the upper limit, and disabling the pseudo setting suggestion when the predetermined number of coins has reached the upper limit.

Furthermore, as shown in SL03 and SL04 of Figure 406, a pseudo setting lottery may be conducted when a game transitions from a reversal streak to a favorable standby or favorable normal mode. For example, a pseudo setting suggestion may be conducted to indicate that a pseudo setting lottery has been conducted when a game transitions from a reversal streak to a favorable standby or favorable normal mode. In this case, the pseudo setting suggestion lottery, which indicates that a pseudo setting lottery has been conducted, may reference the overall payout rate from a predetermined timing (e.g., when the power is turned on) and vary the probability of the pseudo setting suggestion being executed according to the payout rate. For example, the probability of the pseudo setting suggestion being executed may be lowered when the payout rate is above a predetermined value, and increased when the payout rate is below the predetermined value. This makes the pseudo setting suggestion more likely to be executed when the payout rate is below the predetermined value, thereby increasing the expectation that the pseudo setting has been updated. Furthermore, the pseudo setting suggestion may be less likely to be executed when the payout rate is above the predetermined value, thereby increasing the expectation that the pseudo setting has been maintained. As a result, it is possible to promote operation of the pachislot machine 1 and make it impossible to quit (to know when to quit).

<Major configurations and effects of the pachislot machine 1 in the eleventh embodiment>
(1) As shown in FIG. 405, when a special reset is performed, predetermined information stored in the main RAM 103, including at least the configured pseudo settings and various information related to the AT (predetermined information among the information used to control the degree of advantage during the advantageous zone), is initialized. Meanwhile, among the information stored in the main RAM 103, at least the advantageous zone flag is maintained even after the special reset. This allows the gaming establishment to initialize the predetermined information while maintaining control over the advantageous zone, thereby appropriately adjusting the interests of both the gaming establishment and the customer (player). Furthermore, since the zone immediately following the special reset operation does not become a non-advantageous zone, status management can be performed taking into account the situation in the advantageous zone before the special reset operation.

(2) As shown in FIG. 405, even if a special reset is performed, the advantageous zone flag and the advantageous zone payout number counter are maintained even after the special reset. This maintains control over the advantageous zone and also maintains the difference in coins, including the number of coins absorbed, making it possible to maintain an advantageous state for the player (a state in which the number of coins absorbed is large). As a result, it is possible to increase motivation to play even after a special reset operation is performed.

The specified information to be initialized may be all of the various types of information related to the AT that is updated as the game progresses, excluding the advantageous zone flag and advantageous zone payout counter, or it may be a predetermined portion of the information excluding the advantageous zone flag and advantageous zone payout counter (specific information other than the advantageous zone flag and advantageous zone payout counter is not initialized), and pseudo settings may always be initialized.

(3) Although the pachislot machine 1 has only one setting value for determining the winning probability of the internal lottery role, as shown in SL04 of FIG. 406, by performing a special reset operation, the pseudo setting can be drawn and updated, thereby changing the degree of advantage to the player. This can increase the enjoyment of the game.

(4) The pseudo setting lottery is conducted and the pseudo setting is updated not when the special reset operation is accepted, but when the game is subsequently played and the opportunity to transition to advantageous normal mode is met. As a result, although the gaming establishment can intervene in updating the pseudo setting, it cannot adjust the pseudo setting that is set, which saves the trouble of having to consider which pseudo setting to set.

(5) Even when the special reset operation is not accepted, after the player has transitioned from a pullback streak to advantageous standby as the game progresses, a pseudo setting lottery is held and the pseudo setting is updated when the opportunity to transition to advantageous normal is met. As a result, the pseudo setting is automatically updated as the player progresses through the game, which saves the gaming facility the trouble of setting the pseudo setting and provides the player with the added fun of being involved in updating the pseudo setting.

(6) Even when the special reset operation is not accepted, the pseudo-settings are updated when the first trigger is met in response to the end of the advantageous zone and control to the normal zone, such as when the ending ends. As a result, the pseudo-settings are updated automatically as the player progresses through the game, which saves the gaming facility the trouble of setting the pseudo-settings and provides the player with the added fun of being involved in updating the pseudo-settings.

(7) As shown in FIG. 415, during the advantageous waiting state entered by a special reset, the display device and waist lamp are controlled in a manner different from that during the transition from the normal section to the advantageous normal state or during the advantageous waiting state entered from a pullback sequence. This allows the amusement store staff member to identify when the pseudo-settings are updated through the acceptance of a special reset operation, and as a result, the person who performed the special reset operation (for example, the amusement store staff member) can be notified and informed that the state has been entered after the special reset operation.

(8) As shown in Figure 404(c), during the advantageous waiting period entered upon receiving a special reset operation, the probability of winning the AT is constant. This prevents advantages and disadvantages from arising between players while the pseudo-settings are confirmed to be updated.

(9) As shown in Figure 405, when a special reset is performed, the pseudo settings that have been set are initialized. This allows the gaming establishment to initialize the pseudo settings, making it possible to appropriately adjust the benefits of both the gaming establishment and the customer (player), while maintaining the advantageous zone flag and advantageous zone payout counter even after the special reset. As a result, motivation to play can be increased even after a special reset operation is performed.

(10) As shown in FIG. 403, when a special reset is performed, during the period from when the game transitions to favorable waiting mode until the pseudo setting lottery is performed and the game transitions to favorable normal mode, as shown in FIG. 415, a message image such as "Waiting" is displayed on the display device (e.g., equivalent to a sub-display device) and the lamp on the waist panel 13 flashes, thereby notifying the game center that the game is in favorable waiting mode. This allows the game center to be notified that several games have been played after the special reset, the pseudo setting has been updated, and the game center should transition to favorable normal mode. Note that during favorable waiting mode, the display device is not limited to notifying the game center that the game is in favorable waiting mode, and the display device may also indicate that the game center may be in favorable waiting mode. For example, the display device may not display a message image, and the lamp on the waist panel 13 may simply flash. Even in this case, the game center can indicate that the game center should transition to favorable normal mode.

(11) As shown in Figure 400 and other figures, when an operation (specific operation) that results in the first left stop is performed, a 12-coin combination cannot be displayed on an active line when the selection bell is drawn, and therefore the expectation of medals being paid out (awarded) is lower than when an irregular operation is performed, which allows a 12-coin combination to be displayed on an active line. On the other hand, when an irregular operation is performed at least during a non-AT period, a penalty is imposed in which various lotteries related to the AT of the game are not conducted and the degree of advantage related to the AT is lower than when an operation that results in the first left stop is performed. Such penalties are also imposed during advantageous waiting. In other words, when an irregular operation is performed during advantageous waiting in a non-AT period, a penalty is imposed in which various lotteries related to the AT of the game during advantageous waiting (direct lottery) are not conducted and the degree of advantage related to the AT is lower than when an operation that results in the first left stop is performed. Furthermore, when an irregular operation is performed during advantageous waiting in a non-AT period, the high probability flag is set to off, and a penalty is also imposed in the next game (a game during advantageous waiting or a normal advantageous game). This effectively prevents irregular push strategies even when a player plays on a pachislot machine 1 that is in advantageous standby mode. The penalty is not limited to not conducting various lotteries related to the AT, but may involve not conducting some of the various lotteries related to the AT and conducting others, or may involve conducting various lotteries related to the AT but reducing the degree of advantage (such as the probability of winning) in those lotteries.

(12) When a special reset is performed on the pachislot machine 1 and the machine transitions from advantageous standby to advantageous normal mode, a pseudo setting suggestion is made to notify or suggest the pseudo setting established by the pseudo setting lottery. This makes it possible to confirm that the desired setting has been established when, for example, a special reset is performed by a store clerk before the opening of the gaming parlor and the operation to set the machine to the market state (advantageous normal mode) is carried out.

(13) As shown in FIG. 406, when trigger 1 occurs, such as when transitioning from the normal mode to the advantageous normal mode, or when transitioning from advantageous waiting to advantageous normal mode due to a special reset, or when trigger 2 occurs, such as when transitioning from advantageous waiting to advantageous normal mode due to the end of a pullback streak, a pseudo setting lottery is conducted and the pseudo setting is updated. Also, as shown in FIG. 409, the payout rate can be varied depending on the pseudo setting that is set. As a result, by updating and changing the payout wave during play, innovative gameplay can be achieved.

(14) As shown in FIG. 407, based on the allocation rate of the pseudo setting lottery table, the degree of advantage to the player differs between the pseudo setting lottery based on trigger 1 and the pseudo setting lottery based on trigger 2, with the pseudo setting lottery based on trigger 1 being more advantageous to the player than the pseudo setting lottery based on trigger 2. Therefore, after an ending that could be trigger 1 or when the gaming parlor opens, which may be after a special reset, there is a higher possibility that a pseudo setting with a high degree of advantage will be set, and as a result, the player's expectations for playing on pachislot machine 1 can be improved. In addition, the transition of the pseudo setting is less likely to be uniform, which can create more variety in the changes to the gameplay.

The degree of advantage in the pseudo setting lottery is not limited to that shown in Figure 407, and may be the same for the pseudo setting lottery based on trigger 1 and the pseudo setting lottery based on trigger 2, or the degree of advantage for the player may be higher for the pseudo setting lottery based on trigger 2 than for the pseudo setting lottery based on trigger 1. Also, while an example has been shown in which the degree of advantage in the pseudo setting lottery is the same when transitioning from the normal zone to advantageous normal and when transitioning from advantageous standby to advantageous normal due to a special reset, this is not limiting, and the degree of advantage for the player may be higher when transitioning from the normal zone to advantageous normal than when transitioning from advantageous standby to advantageous normal due to a special reset, or the degree of advantage for the player may be higher when transitioning from advantageous standby to advantageous normal due to a special reset than when transitioning from the normal zone to advantageous normal.

(15) Trigger 1 and Trigger 2 are triggers that cannot occur simultaneously. Therefore, by ensuring that triggers for updating pseudo-settings do not occur simultaneously, cumbersome processing such as priority setting, which would be necessary if simultaneous occurrence were assumed, is not required. Furthermore, it becomes easier for players to infer and guess which trigger caused the update or transition, which increases the enjoyment of the game.

(16) As shown in Figure 407, the degree of advantage to the player differs between a pseudo setting lottery resulting from a special reset and a pseudo setting lottery resulting from a transition from advantageous standby to advantageous normal mode due to the end of a pullback streak during play; the degree of advantage to the player is higher when a pseudo setting lottery resulting from a special reset is performed than when a pseudo setting lottery resulting from a transition from advantageous standby to advantageous normal mode due to the end of a pullback streak during play. For this reason, by varying the allocation of pseudo settings depending on the state, it becomes more difficult for players to detect the pseudo setting values. If there were only one pattern for changing the pseudo setting values, it would be easier for players to read the fluctuations in ball payouts from the slump graph or past data on the data display.

The degree of advantage in the pseudo setting lottery may be the same when a pseudo setting lottery is drawn due to a special reset and when a pseudo setting lottery is drawn due to a transition from advantageous standby to advantageous normal mode after a series of pullbacks ends during play; or the degree of advantage for the player may be higher when a pseudo setting lottery is drawn due to a transition from advantageous standby to advantageous normal mode after a series of pullbacks ends during play than when a pseudo setting lottery is drawn due to a special reset.

(17) As shown in Figure 408, the smaller the pseudo setting value, the shorter the average number of games until the pseudo setting is updated. As a result, when a pseudo setting that is less advantageous to the player and less favorable to the player is set, it is updated in a relatively small number of games, which makes it easier to create a sense of anticipation that the pseudo setting may be updated internally even when the player's medals are being sucked in (losing state), and that the player may be able to recover them. Conversely, the larger the pseudo setting value, the longer the average number of games until the pseudo setting is updated. As a result, when a pseudo setting that is highly advantageous to the player and more favorable to the player is set, it is maintained for a relatively long time, which heightens anticipation and improves the enjoyment of the game. Note that the average number of games until the pseudo setting is updated is not limited to this, and it may be designed to be shorter the larger the pseudo setting value.

(18) As shown in FIG. 416, when a pseudo setting lottery is conducted in response to a special reset, one of multiple schedules that matches the set pseudo setting is selected, and suggestive effects are executed in the order based on the selected schedule each time the pseudo BNS ends. In this way, by creating multiple suggestive effect scenarios in advance, it becomes easier to guess the pseudo setting, and the excitement of the game can be increased.

(19) In pachislot machine 1, the overall ball payout rate, including pseudo-setting transitions, is less than 1 (100%) without performing a special reset. Therefore, since there is only one setting value, the effort of setting or considering one of multiple setting values is eliminated, and even if pachislot machine 1 continues to operate at the gaming parlor, the gaming parlor can ensure appropriate profits, thereby improving the operational efficiency of the gaming parlor.

(20) As shown in Figure 407, in the pseudo setting lottery when Trigger 2 is realized, pseudo setting 0 or 1 is set with a probability of over 70%, but as shown in Figure 409 (d), the payout rate for pseudo setting 0 or 1 is only 90% or 93%. For this reason, the payout rate (the payout rate calculated when millions of games are played on a simulator) from when the pseudo setting is updated in the pseudo setting lottery when Trigger 2 is realized until the pseudo setting is updated again when the pseudo setting lottery is held again is less than 1 (100%). This prevents excessive gambling.

(21) In contrast to (20) above, as shown in Figure 407, in the pseudo setting lottery when Trigger 1 is established, the winning probability for pseudo setting 0 or 1 remains at 44%, while the winning probability for pseudo setting 6 or 7 jumps to 40%. As shown in Figure 409 (d), the payout rate for pseudo setting 6 or 7 is 115% or 120%. Therefore, the payout rate (calculated when millions of games are played on a simulator) from when the pseudo setting is updated in the pseudo setting lottery when Trigger 1 is established until the pseudo setting is updated again when the pseudo setting lottery is held again is 1 (100%) or more. This makes it possible to improve the operating rate at the start of business of the gaming facility, which may be after the ending or a special reset has been performed.

(22) As shown in FIG. 407, in the pseudo setting lottery when trigger 1 is established, including during a special reset, pseudo setting 3 or higher is set with a probability of 55% or more. As shown in FIG. 409(d), the payout rate for pseudo setting 3 or higher is 100% or more. Also, as shown in FIG. 408, even when pseudo setting 3 is set, the probability of updating by 1999G is 24%, and the probability of updating by 1999G when pseudo setting value 4 or higher is set is even lower. Therefore, in pachislot machine 1, the payout rate (calculated when millions of games are played on a simulator) from the establishment of trigger 1, including during a special reset, until at least a predetermined number of games (e.g., 1999G) have been played is 1 (100%) or more. This makes it possible to improve the operating rate at the opening of an amusement parlor, which may be after the ending or a special reset has been performed.

(23) As explained in (20) above, the payout rate (calculated when millions of games are played on a simulator) from the time the pseudo setting is updated in the pseudo setting lottery when trigger 2 is established until the pseudo setting is updated again by another pseudo setting lottery is less than 1 (100%). Also, as shown in FIG. 408, when pseudo setting 0 or 1 is set, the probability of updating even after 1999 games is 53% or 45%, which does not exceed 50% in total, making it unlikely that pseudo setting 0 or 1 will be updated. Therefore, in pachislot machine 1, the payout rate (calculated when millions of games are played on a simulator) from the time trigger 2 is established until at least a predetermined number of games (e.g., 1999 games) are played is less than 1 (100%). This prevents excessive gambling and allows for fluctuations in the payout rate, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

(24) The special reset can be performed by inserting the setting key into the setting key switch and turning it counterclockwise to turn it on, then turning the power on. After the power is turned on, the credit lamp or payout number lamp can display a single setting value (for example, the letter "U" or "1"). This allows for a display similar to the setting change operation of conventional machines with multiple setting values, allowing arcade staff to perform the special reset operation with the same feel as changing the settings of conventional machines, and also making it possible to visually recognize that a special reset is being performed.

(25) In (24) above, when a one-stage setting value is displayed on the credit lamp or payout number lamp after power-on, the display is maintained without any processing even if the reset switch 53 is operated. This makes it easier for store clerks to understand that this is a model in which the setting value does not need to be changed by operating the reset switch 53, since the display does not change even if the reset switch 53 is pressed accidentally. In addition, when a one-stage setting value is displayed, the presence or absence of operation of the reset switch 53 is not referenced, thereby reducing the main processing load and capacity.

[Note]
Some conventional gaming machines are capable of implementing navigation that notifies players of the order in which they press buttons that will be advantageous to them during advantageous zones (see, for example, Patent Publication No. 2020-182620).

However, the above gaming machines do not consider whether to initialize information related to advantageous zones when a specific operation is performed to initialize various AT-related information related to the AT, such as the navigation system (see paragraphs 1799-1807, etc.). Furthermore, the above gaming machines clear the advantageous zones and transition to the normal zones when a setting change operation to change the setting value is performed as an operation to initialize AT-related information (see paragraph 0662, etc.). This has resulted in problems, such as the inability to properly adjust the profits of the gaming parlor and the player by initializing AT-related information, but also the inability to manage the status based on the situation in the advantageous zones before initialization (including, for example, the difference in the number of coins, etc.).

The present invention was made in light of these points, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can initialize certain information in response to operations, appropriately balancing the benefits between the gaming parlor and the player, while also managing the status based on the situation in the advantageous zone before initialization.

To achieve the above objective, the gaming machine according to this embodiment provides the following:

(1) A section control means (e.g., FIG. 403) for controlling the section to one of a plurality of types including a normal section (e.g., a normal section) in which advantageous operation modes (e.g., navigation) that are advantageous to the player cannot be notified, and an advantageous section (e.g., an advantageous section) in which the advantageous operation modes can be notified;
An update means (for example, a process for updating various information related to the AT according to the progress of the game by the main control circuit 100) that updates predetermined parameters (for example, variables that affect the performance of instruction functions such as pseudo settings and various information related to the AT among the information stored in the main RAM 103) used to control the degree of advantage during the advantageous period according to the progress of the game within the advantageous period;
and an initialization means (e.g., FIG. 405) for initializing the predetermined parameters in response to receiving a special reset operation;
A gaming machine in which the zone control means maintains the advantageous zone even when the special reset operation is received in the advantageous zone (for example, see when a special reset is performed in Figure 405).

With this configuration, the gaming establishment can perform a special reset operation that can initialize certain parameters, allowing the interests of both the gaming establishment and the player to be appropriately adjusted. Furthermore, by maintaining control over the advantageous zone, the zone immediately after the special reset operation does not become a non-advantageous zone, allowing for status management that takes into account the situation in the advantageous zone before the special reset operation is performed.

(2) A counter updating means (for example, a process for updating the advantageous zone payout number counter by the main control circuit 100 according to the progress of the game) capable of updating the counter value of a predetermined counter according to the increase or decrease of the game value in the advantageous zone,
The interval control means terminates the advantageous interval and controls the interval to the normal interval when the counter value reaches a predetermined value (for example, an upper limit of 2400),
The counter update means maintains the counter value of the specified counter even when the special reset operation is accepted in the advantageous zone (see, for example, when a special reset is performed in Figure 405), (1) gaming machine.

With this configuration, the counter value of the specified counter is maintained even when a special reset operation is received, allowing the player to maintain an advantageous state (a state in which a large number of coins are sucked in), thereby increasing motivation to play even after a special reset operation is performed.

(3) A special state control means (for example, a process for controlling the main control circuit 100 to the pseudo BNS) that controls the transition to a special state (for example, an AT state, a pseudo BNS, etc.) in which the notification of the advantageous operation mode can be generated and the game value is increased;
A notification setting value update means (e.g., SL04 in FIG. 406) is provided that, when an update condition is satisfied, can update the notification setting value to one of a plurality of types of notification setting values (e.g., pseudo settings 0 to 7) that have different degrees of favorability for determining whether to transition to the special state;
The predetermined parameters include notification setting values updated by the notification setting value update means (see, for example, Figure 405), (1) a gaming machine.

With this configuration, the notification setting value is updated to one of several different types, which allows for variations in the degree of advantage in determining whether a special state is entered, and the notification setting value can be updated by performing a special reset operation, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

(4) The gaming machine described in (3) may be configured such that the update condition is met when a game is played after the special reset operation is accepted and a first trigger is satisfied (e.g., YES in SL02 of FIG. 406).

With this configuration, the notification setting value is updated not when the special reset operation is accepted, but when the first trigger is met during subsequent play. As a result, while the gaming establishment can intervene in updating the notification setting value, it cannot adjust the notification setting value that is set, eliminating the need to consider which notification setting value to set.

(5) A gaming machine described in (4) in which the update condition can be met by satisfying a trigger different from the first trigger as the game progresses, even when the special reset operation has not been accepted (for example, YES in SL03 of FIG. 406).

With this configuration, even when the special reset operation is not accepted, the notification setting value is updated when a trigger different from the first trigger is met as the game progresses. As a result, the notification setting value is automatically updated as the player progresses through the game, which saves the gaming facility the trouble of setting the notification setting value and provides the player with the added fun of being involved in updating the notification setting value.

(6) The gaming machine described in (5) may be configured such that the update condition can be met by satisfying a trigger different from the first trigger when the zone control means ends the normal zone and controls to the advantageous zone, even when the special reset operation has not been accepted (for example, YES at SL06 in FIG. 406).

With this configuration, even when the special reset operation has not been accepted, the notification setting value is updated when a trigger different from the first trigger is met in response to the end of the advantageous zone and control to the normal zone. As a result, the notification setting value is automatically updated as the player progresses through the game, which saves the gaming facility the trouble of setting the notification setting value and provides the player with the added fun of being involved in updating the notification setting value.

(7) Equipped with a presentation control means (e.g., processing by the sub-control circuit 200) that can control the presentation unit (e.g., display device, lamp, LED, waist lamp, etc.) according to the progress of the game,
The presentation control means is capable of controlling the presentation unit in a manner different from that of the gaming machine described in (e.g., Figure 415), (5) or (6), during the period from when the special reset operation is accepted until the first trigger is met (e.g., during advantageous waiting mode entered by the special reset) to when a trigger different from the first trigger (e.g., when transitioning to a normal mode or advantageous waiting mode in which the pseudo setting value is waiting to be updated) is met (e.g., when transitioning from a normal mode to advantageous normal mode, or from advantageous waiting mode after a series of pullbacks until transitioning to advantageous normal mode).

With this configuration, it is possible to determine from the state of the presentation unit whether the notification setting value will be updated as a result of accepting a special reset operation. As a result, the person who performed the special reset operation (for example, a store employee) can be notified and informed that the state has been reached after the special reset operation.

(8) A gaming machine as described in (4) in which the degree of advantage in determining whether to transition to the special state is constant (e.g., FIG. 404(c)) during the period from when the special reset operation is accepted until the first trigger is met (e.g., while in advantageous standby mode after the special reset shown in FIG. 403).

This configuration prevents advantages and disadvantages from arising between players while the notification setting value is being confirmed to be updated.

With a gaming machine configured as described above, certain information can be initialized in response to operations, allowing for appropriate adjustment of the benefits between the gaming parlor and the player, while also managing the status based on the situation in the advantageous zone before initialization.

The present invention may comprise only the matters specifying the invention recited in the claims, or may comprise only a portion of the matters specifying the invention recited in the claims, or may comprise the matters specifying the invention recited in the claims or a portion of the matters specifying the invention, plus configurations other than the matters specifying the invention (such as configurations different from the matters specifying the invention, configurations not recited in the claims, etc.).

[Twelfth embodiment]
The first to eleventh embodiments have been described above. The twelfth embodiment will now be described. The basic configuration of the pachislot machine 1 according to the twelfth embodiment is the same as that of the pachislot machine 1 according to the first to eleventh embodiments. In the following, components that are the same as those of the pachislot machine 1 according to the first to eleventh embodiments will be described using the same reference numerals. Furthermore, explanations of portions that apply to the twelfth embodiment from the first to eleventh embodiments will be omitted.

Note that even if the above description contains statements that are limited to the pachislot machine 1 of the first embodiment, such as "In the first embodiment," or "In the pachislot machine 1 of the first embodiment," these statements can also be applied to the pachislot machine 1 of the twelfth embodiment, as long as they do not deviate from the spirit of the twelfth embodiment. Similarly, the above description contains statements that are limited to the pachislot machines 1 of the second to eleventh embodiments, as long as they do not deviate from the spirit of the twelfth embodiment. Therefore, it is possible to partially replace or combine each of the configurations shown in the first to eleventh embodiments (including each of the configurations shown in the modified examples and the extended examples) with the configuration shown in the twelfth embodiment.

Furthermore, even if the shape is different from the pachislot machine 1 according to the first to eleventh embodiments, components with similar functions may be assigned the same reference numerals for convenience. Furthermore, even if the shape or processing is the same as the pachislot machine 1 according to the first to eleventh embodiments, different reference numerals or step numbers may be assigned for convenience. Note that the pachislot machine 1 according to the twelfth embodiment may be a gaming machine into which actual medals are inserted and paid out (a gaming machine that is not a sealed-in type), or may be a medal-less gaming machine that can be played using gaming value managed by data.

<Game state transition flow>
FIG. 417 is a diagram showing transitions of game states according to a twelfth embodiment of the present invention. As explained in the first embodiment, the pachislot machine 1 can provide various game states as game states in order to vary the degree of advantage of the game or to achieve the intended gameplay. In this embodiment, the game states shown in FIG. 417 are managed by the main control circuit 100. Such game states include RT0, RT1, non-RB inside (RB non-winning state), RB inside (RB winning state), and RB activated (bonus state).

Figure 417(a) is a diagram showing the transitions of RT. RT0 is the state to which a transition occurs after a setting change (for example, a setting change in the first embodiment, or a special reset in the eleventh embodiment). When a setting change occurs, game information including information about RB is initialized, as in the previously described embodiments. On the other hand, RT1 is transitioned to after passing through the following states in RT0: RB not in operation → RB in operation → RB in operation, and transitions are repeated after each subsequent RB operation.

RT0 and RT1 are set so that the replay probability of winning a replay role (replay role) is the same constant probability (e.g., 1/7.3). However, the degree of advantage to the player (e.g., the probability used for various processes related to the AT, such as the winning probability in the AT lottery and the lottery for the degree of advantage to the AT (number of AT games, net increase number, etc.)) is set so that the RT1 to which the game is transferred is higher than the RT0 after the setting change. Therefore, the expectation for the RT1 to which the game is played and the game is transferred can be improved compared to the RT0 after the setting change (e.g., first thing in the morning). Note that the degree of advantage to the player is not limited to this, and may be set so that the RT0 after the setting change is higher than the RT1 to which the game is transferred. This can improve the expectation for the RT0 after the setting change (e.g., first thing in the morning).
Note that the replay probability (total winning probability of each replay role) for RT0 and RT1 may be different. Also, as shown in FIG. 419, an example has been shown in which the replay probability (total winning probability of each replay role) for RT0 and RT1 is the same, but the winning type of the replay role may be different, such as F_RT variable replay A being winnable in RT0 and F_RT variable replay B being winnable in RT1. Also, instead of providing a replay role that only wins in specific RTs such as RT variable replay A and B, the type of replay role that can be won may be the same, with only the coefficients being different, such as the coefficient of F_normal replay being 8978 in RT0 and the coefficient of F_normal replay being 8979 in RT1. In any case, it is sufficient that the winning probabilities of at least some of the replay roles are different between RT0 and RT1, and the replay probability (the sum of the winning probabilities of each replay role) may be the same or different between RT0 and RT1.

Figure 417 (b) shows the transition of game states, including the operation of special devices. RB non-internal state is a state in which RB, an example of a bonus role, has not been won and the RB has not been activated (a prize has not been won). RB non-internal state is also sometimes referred to as the general state, general, non-internal state, etc. RB non-internal state continues until RB is won or a prize has been won.

Inside RB is a state in which the RB is carried over as a winning combination, i.e., the RB, which is a bonus combination, has been drawn and the RB is not operating. Control is exercised during inside RB when an RB is internally drawn during a game in which the symbol combination associated with the RB combination is not displayed on an active line during a non-inside RB period. However, this is not limited to this, and control may be exercised during inside RB from the time the RB is drawn. In this embodiment, most of the AT state, which provides navigation to notify advantageous operation modes, is consumed during the inside RB. Note that inside RB is also sometimes referred to as a carryover state, RB flag interval, inside, etc. Inside BB continues until the symbol combination associated with the RB combination is displayed on an active line.

In this embodiment, not only in games where an RB is internally drawn when not inside the RB, but also in games where an RB is drawn together with a predetermined combination inside the RB, combinations of symbols related to the RB combination can be displayed on the pay line, and transitions can be made while the RB is operating.

When RB is in operation, it is sometimes referred to as "bonus in progress," "bonus in operation," "RB in progress," etc. When RB is in operation, the replay probability of winning a replay role (replay role) is set to 0 (no win). When RB is in operation, it ends when a predetermined termination condition is met (for example, the number of small role wins reaches a predetermined number (e.g., 8) or the number of games played reaches a predetermined number (e.g., 12)), and the game is controlled to be outside of RB. In the pachislot machine 1 of this embodiment, no effects are actively performed to notify the player of an RB win, when RB is in operation, or when RB has ended. This allows the player to play without being aware of the RB. In this embodiment, RB (a first-class special bonus) is used as an example of a bonus, but instead of or in addition to this, it may be controllable as at least one or both of BB (a bonus continuous operation device related to a first-class special bonus) and MB (a bonus continuous operation device related to a second-class special bonus).

<Pattern arrangement>
Figure 418 shows the pattern arrangement of each of the left reel 3L, center reel 3C, and right reel 3R, where Figure 418(a) shows an example of a pattern arrangement table, Figure 418(b) shows an example of a pattern code table, and Figure 418(c) shows an example of an active line.

As shown in Figure 418(a), the symbols corresponding to each of the 20 symbol positions "1" to "20" defined on the left reel 3L, center reel 3C, and right reel 3R are shown. Symbol positions "1" to "20" indicate the positions of the symbols arranged in the direction of rotation on each of the left reel 3L, center reel 3C, and right reel 3R. As shown in the symbol arrangement table, there are 10 types of symbols arranged on each of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R: "Red Seven," "Blue Seven," "Bar," "Lip A," "Lip B," "Bell A," "Bell B," "Watermelon," "Cherry," and "Blank." Furthermore, as shown in the symbol code table in Figure 418(b), each symbol is assigned a symbol code 1 to 10.

As shown in gray in Figure 418(c), the activated lines are a pseudo activated line 1 (lower-lower-upper) connecting the lower area of the main display window 4 corresponding to the left reel 3L, the lower area of the main display window 4 corresponding to the center reel 3C, and the upper area of the main display window 4 corresponding to the right reel 3R, and a pseudo activated line 2 (lower-upper-upper) connecting the lower area of the main display window 4 corresponding to the left reel 3L, the upper area of the main display window 4 corresponding to the center reel 3C, and the upper area of the main display window 4 corresponding to the right reel 3R. The activated lines are activated when the specified number of medals required for the current game (the number of medals that can be used to start a game, for example, 3) have been bet.
Also, the reel arrangement and the symbol combination may be configured to cause a duplicate win in which a symbol combination related to a small role (a role that provides a game value) wins on both the active line 1 and the active line 2, or the reel arrangement and the symbol combination may be configured to cause no duplicate win. Note that duplicate wins of a replay role and a small role, duplicate wins of a replay role and a bonus role, and duplicate wins of a small role and a role are not allowed.

<Internal lottery table>
The internal lottery tables in this embodiment include an internal lottery table for lottery roles when the RB is not inside and when the RB is inside in RT0 (see Figure 419(a)), an internal lottery table for lottery roles when the RB is not inside and when the RB is inside in RT1 (see Figure 419(b)), and an internal lottery table for lottery roles when the RB is operating (see Figure 420).

In the pachislot machine 1 of this embodiment, multiple setting values (e.g., Settings 1 to 6) are defined as setting values for specifying the winning probability of a lottery role. However, this is not limited to this, and only one setting value may be defined, as in the 11th embodiment. Note that the lottery roles in the internal lottery tables shown in Figures 419 and 420 (e.g., "F_RT Variable Lip A" and "F_213 Bell" shown in the abbreviation column) are composed of a single predetermined role or multiple predetermined roles, as in the examples in the above-mentioned embodiments. Winning the lottery role allows the combination of symbols associated with the single role that constitutes the lottery role, or the combination of symbols associated with each of the multiple roles, to be displayed on the pay line. Furthermore, the combination of symbols associated with a single role may include those for which one type of combination is defined or those for which multiple types of combinations are defined, depending on the type of role.

Of the lottery roles shown in the internal lottery tables shown in Figures 419 and 420, No. 2 "F_RT Variable Rip A" to No. 4 "F_Normal Rip" are each composed of one or more predetermined replay roles. Furthermore, of the lottery roles shown in the internal lottery tables shown in Figures 419 and 420, No. 5 "F_RB + F_3 213" to No. 8 "F_RB + F_3 321" are each composed of an RB, a predetermined minor role with a payout of three coins, and a minor role with a payout of one coin. In this embodiment, when an RB is internally won, it will always be internally won in conjunction with another internal winning role (minor role). In addition, it may also be possible for the RB to be won alone with a predetermined probability (for example, an extremely low probability (lottery value 4)). Furthermore, among the lottery roles shown in the internal lottery tables shown in Figures 419 and 420, No. 9 "F_RB + F_213 Bell" to No. 26 "F_RB Medium Chance" are each composed of predetermined small roles.

The internal lottery tables shown in FIGS. 419 and 420 are stored in the main ROM 102 in correspondence with each gaming state, and indicate the winning probability of each flag with a denominator of 65536. For example, in FIG. 419(a), a lottery value of "3800" is specified for "F_213 Bell." As a result, the probability of "F_213 Bell" being internally won is "3800/65536." Also, as shown in FIGS. 419 and 420, the lottery values are specified so that any combination will be internally won, so that only "losses" are not won in any gaming state. The reel control also prioritizes pulling any of the internally won combinations into a pay line. However, this is not limited to this, and a "loss" may be won with a predetermined probability (for example, an extremely low probability (lottery value 4)) when not inside the RB or inside the RB. In addition, the internal lottery tables shown in Figures 419 and 420 show an example in which a common lottery value is set for all settings 1 to 6, but this is not limited to this, and different values may be set as lottery values for specific lottery roles depending on the setting (for example, from No. 5 ``F_RB+F_3 213'' which includes RB to No. 8 ``F_RB+F_3 321''), and the degree of advantage for the player may be set differently.
No. 13 "F_pressing role" is a small role that results in one coin winning or a miss (0 coins) depending on the position of the press. If the role is missed within the RB, the symbols constituting the RB are kicked away by the symbols constituting the small role (the symbols constituting the small role are pulled in first) so that the RB role does not win. In FIG. 419, the coefficient of No. 13 "F_pressing role" is 0 in either state, and the gaming machine does not have an F_pressing role, but it may have a coefficient of 4 or more and be equipped with an F_pressing role.

<Correspondence between internal winning combinations, stop operation modes, and display combinations>
FIG. 421 is a diagram showing an example of the correspondence between internal winning combinations, payouts, stop operation modes, and display combinations. In the first embodiment, we explained which symbol combinations (which can also be referred to as display combinations, winning combinations, stop display modes, display results, etc.) are displayed depending on the stop operation mode when each internal winning combination is won (see FIG. 15 ). In this embodiment, the correspondence between internal winning combinations, payouts, stop operation modes, display combinations, etc. is configured as shown in FIG. 421 . For example, the "first stop left" in FIG. 421 indicates a display combination when the stop operation on the left reel 3L is performed as the first stop operation, and combinations other than the "first stop left" (other than left) indicate a display combination when the stop operation on the center reel 3C or the right reel 3R is performed as the first stop operation. Note that, in the pachislot machine 1 of this embodiment, the upper limit of the number of payouts that can be made in one game is set to 15, but this is not limited to this.

As mentioned above, No. 5 "F_RB+F_3 213" to No. 8 "F_RB+F_3 321" shown in the internal lottery tables shown in Figures 419 and 420 are composed of at least RB, a predetermined minor combination with a payout of 3 coins, and a minor combination with a payout of 1 coin. Details will be described later with reference to Figure 423 etc. Furthermore, when any of "F_3 213" to "F_3 321" is determined as the internal winning combination during non-RB and RB (when any of No. 5 to No. 8 is won during non-RB (shown in the column for "during RB" in FIG. 421), or when any of No. 5 to No. 8 is won during RB), if a stop operation is performed at the first stop left, a symbol combination related to a small combination with a payout of 1 coin is drawn onto an active line in preference to a small combination with a payout of 3 coins or RB, and if the small combination with a payout of 1 coin cannot be drawn onto an active line, a symbol combination related to RB is displayed along the active line. In this way, in this embodiment, not only a game in which a winning combination of No. 5 "F_RB+F_3 213" to No. 8 "F_RB+F_3 321" is drawn during non-RB, but also a game in which a winning combination of No. 5 "F_RB+F_3 321" is drawn again during RB, In a game in which the winner wins any of No. 5 "F_RB+F_3 213" to No. 8 "F_RB+F_3 321", the RB may be won and the game may transition to the RB operation.
As shown in FIG. 419, the four internal winning combinations of "F_3 213,""F_3231,""F_3312," and "F_3 321" always overlap with the RB combination even when not inside the RB, and are never determined as winning combinations without overlapping with the RB. Therefore, in FIG. 421, "F_3 213,""F_3231,""F_3312," and "F_3 321" are marked with "-" to indicate that they will never win without overlapping with the RB. For convenience, in FIG. 421, overlapping formation of the RB combination and the small combination is listed in the column inside the RB. For example, if "F_RB + F_3 213" is won when not inside the RB, the reel control will be as listed in the column inside the RB.

As shown in Figure 420, when RB is in operation, the replay feature will not be awarded. This reduces the probability of the replay feature appearing, which is an obstacle in gaming machine model testing because it is treated as 0 coins inserted and 0 coins paid out, and increases the payout rate. It also reduces the discrepancy between the market payout rate (payout rate including replay features) and the test payout rate (payout rate excluding replay features).

On the other hand, if either "F_3 213" or "F_3 321" is determined as the internal winning combination during non-RB or RB, and the stop operation is performed other than the first stop left and in the push order corresponding to the winning combination (for example, if the winning combination is "F_3 213", the push order is center, left, right; if it is "F_3 321", the push order is right, center, left; the push order corresponds to the last three digits of the winning combination, and so on), The symbol combination for the minor win accompanied by the payout of 3 coins is displayed along the valid line, and if the stop operation is performed in a push order other than the first stop being left and different from the push order corresponding to the winning combination (for example, if the winning combination is "F_3 coins 213", the push order is such that the first and second stops are not center/left, and if the winning combination is "F_3 coins 321", the push order is such that the first and second stops are not right/center), the symbol combination for the minor win accompanied by the payout of 1 coin is displayed along the valid line.

In addition, within RB, if a winning combination is drawn for each game, reel control is performed to draw the symbol combination associated with that winning combination into a valid line in priority over symbol combinations associated with RBs that have carried over winning combinations. Therefore, in games where no winning combinations from No. 5 "F_RB + F_3 213" to No. 8 "F_RB + F_3 312" are drawn, reel control to result in an RB win is not performed, and no RB win occurs.

No. 9 "F_213 Bell" to No. 12 "F_321 Bell" shown in the internal lottery tables shown in Figures 419 and 420 are each composed of at least a predetermined minor winning combination with a payout of 15 coins and a minor winning combination with a payout of 1 coin. For example, if any of "F_213 Bell" to "F_321 Bell" is determined as the internal winning combination during a non-RB internal play, and a stop operation is performed on the first stop left, the symbol combination for the minor winning combination with a payout of 1 coin will be displayed along the active line. In contrast, if the stop operation is performed on a button sequence other than the first left stop that corresponds to the winning combination (for example, if the winning combination is "F_213 bell", then the button sequence is center, left, right; if the winning combination is "F_321 bell", then the button sequence is right, center, left; or the button sequence corresponds to the last three digits of the lottery combination), the symbol combination for the minor combination that pays out one coin is displayed along the active line. On the other hand, if the stop operation is performed on a button sequence other than the first left stop that differs from the button sequence that corresponds to the winning combination (for example, if the winning combination is "F_213 bell", then the button sequence is not center, left for the first and second stops; if the winning combination is "F_321 bell", then the button sequence is not right, center for the first and second stops), the losing symbol combination is displayed along the active line.

If any of "F_213 Bell" to "F_321 Bell" is determined as the internal winning combination inside the RB and a stop operation is performed on the first left stop, the symbol combination for the minor role with a payout of 1 coin will be displayed along the active line. Conversely, if a stop operation is performed on a stop other than the first left using the push order corresponding to the winning role, the symbol combination for the minor role with a payout of 15 coins will be displayed along the active line. On the other hand, if a stop operation is performed on a stop other than the first left using a push order different from the push order corresponding to the winning role, the symbol combination for the minor role with a payout of 1 coin will be preferentially drawn onto the active line, and if the minor role with a payout of 1 coin cannot be drawn onto the active line, the losing symbol combination will be displayed along the active line.

In the internal lottery tables shown in Figures 419 and 420, No. 16 "F_Common Bell A" to No. 18 "F_Chance" are each composed of a small win accompanied by a predetermined payout of at least 15 coins and a small win accompanied by a payout of 1 coin. For example, if any of "F_Common Bell A" to "F_Chance" is determined as the internal winning combination during a non-RB internal play, and a stop operation is performed at the first stop left, the symbol combination associated with the small win accompanied by the payout of 1 coin is displayed along the active line. In contrast, if a stop operation is performed at a timing other than the first stop left that corresponds to the winning combination (for example, a timing at which a symbol combination associated with the small win accompanied by the payout of 1 coin can be drawn), the symbol combination associated with the small win accompanied by the payout of 1 coin is displayed along the active line. On the other hand, if a stop operation is not performed at a timing other than the first stop left that corresponds to the winning combination, a losing symbol combination is displayed along the active line.

On the other hand, when either "F_Common Bell A" or "F_Chance" is determined as the internal winning combination inside RB, a symbol combination for a small winning combination with a payout of 15 coins is displayed along the active line, regardless of the push order or timing of the stop operation. Therefore, when either "F_Common Bell A" or "F_Chance" is determined as the internal winning combination inside RB, it is possible to win a small winning combination with a payout of 15 coins with a higher probability than when not inside RB, without generating push order navigation with a navigation display on the instruction monitor.

Similarly, for other internal winning combinations of small combinations outside the RB and inside the RB, the combination is made up of at least the number of small combinations listed in the payout column in Figure 421, and reel control is performed to determine whether the number of small combinations listed in the payout column in Figure 421 will be won or lost depending on the game state, whether it is the first stop left or other than the first stop left, and whether the stop operation was performed at a timing corresponding to the winning combination.

Considering the reel control during non-RB and RB periods, performing a stop operation on a position other than the first left stop is more advantageous to the player in terms of the number of coins paid out than performing a stop operation on the first left stop. However, in the pachislot machine 1 of this embodiment, a predetermined penalty is imposed when irregular button presses are made outside of the AT state (for example, pressing the left reel in a sequence other than the first left stop) or when irregular button presses are made during the AT state when navigation is not occurring. For example, when irregular button presses are made outside of the AT state, a penalty is imposed such that various lotteries related to the AT are not conducted for the game in which the irregular button presses were made. In addition to not conducting various lotteries, various counters that are updated as the game progresses may also not be updated. This allows the player to be encouraged to perform the first left stop outside of the AT state, and the number of coins paid out during the AT state can be increased even if the internal winning probability is the same as outside of the AT state.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 421, for the internal lottery role of the replay role, reel control is performed to win any of the replay roles (REP) regardless of the stop operation. Among the replay roles, No. 4 "F_Normal Replay" is composed of multiple replay roles, including a replay role in which at least Replay A or Replay B are aligned in a straight line to win, and a replay role in which Red Seven or Blue Seven are aligned in a straight line to win. Regardless of the push order or stop operation timing, any of the replay roles is won. However, a replay role in which Red Seven or Blue Seven are aligned in a straight line to win can only be won when the stop operation is performed in a predetermined push order other than the first stop left (for example, a reverse push of right, center, left, etc.). When the stop operation is performed in a different order from the predetermined push order, reel control is performed to win a replay role in which Replay A or Replay B are aligned in a straight line to win. In this embodiment, as will be described later, when controlled to the AT state, No. 4 is selected when the RB is not inside or inside the RB. In a game where you win "F_Normal Rip" of 4, an effect such as "Aim for red 7 by pressing in reverse" will be performed, and the AT state will begin when you win a re-play role in which red sevens or blue sevens line up in a straight line.
In the description of this embodiment of the irregular two-line configuration, "aligned in a straight line" means that the symbols line up in an apparent straight line, and does not mean that the symbols line up on an active line. For example, when blue sevens line up in a straight line, it means that a symbol combination other than blue seven-blue seven-blue seven stops on an active line.

Next, No. 21 "F_RB Intermediate Role A" to No. 26 "F_RB Intermediate Chance," which are internal lottery roles during RB operation, are each composed of a small role with a payout of 15 coins, a small role with a payout of 3 coins, a small role with a payout of 1 coin, etc., as shown in the payout column. Of these, No. 21 "F_RB Intermediate Role A" displays a symbol combination associated with a small role with a payout of 1 coin along the active line when the first stop is left, while displaying a symbol combination associated with a small role with a payout of 15 coins along the active line when the first stop is left. Furthermore, No. 22 "F_RB Intermediate Role B" displays a symbol combination associated with a small role with a payout of 1 coin along the active line when the first stop is left, while displaying a symbol combination associated with a small role with a payout of 3 coins along the active line when the first stop is left. In this embodiment, when RB is activated, No. We have explained an example where the symbol combination displayed on the active line and the number of coins paid out differ depending on the push order when No. 21 "F_RB Medium Role A" or No. 22 "F_RB Medium Role B" is won, but this is not limiting, and the same symbol combination and number of coins paid out may be the same (without bias) regardless of the push order etc. when the RB is activated.

In this embodiment, while RB is in operation, the probability of winning a small prize is higher than when not inside RB or when inside RB, but most wins are for No. 23 "F_RB Medium Prize C," which pays out one coin. On the other hand, the probability of winning No. 21 "F_RB Medium Prize A," No. 25 "F_RB Medium Strong Chance," and No. 26 "F_RB Medium Chance," which can pay out 15 coins, is extremely low. For this reason, even when a small prize with the largest payout number among the winning small prizes during RB operation occurs, the payout rate during RB operation is less than 1. Note that the probability of winning No. 21 "F_RB Medium Prize A" and No. Even if you win "F_RB Medium Role B" 22, when not in AT mode, a certain penalty is imposed when pressing irregular buttons, so only one coin is paid out, and the payout rate when RB is operating when not in AT mode is even lower.

In contrast, when not inside the RB or inside the RB, based solely on the winning probability and the number of coins paid out for the small winning combination, if a winning combination with the largest number of coins among the winning combinations occurs, the payout rate when not inside the RB or inside the RB will exceed 1. However, as mentioned above, when not inside the RB or inside the RB, a specified penalty is imposed if an irregular button press is made outside the AT state. On the other hand, as will be described later, most of the AT state is consumed inside the RB. For this reason, when inside the RB, taking into account the possibility of being controlled to the AT state, the expected payout rate is higher than when the RB is operating. In contrast, when not inside the RB, because penalties are imposed in most cases outside the AT state, the expected payout rate is lower than when the RB is operating. For this reason, the expected payout rate is in the following relationship: while inside RB > while RB is operating > while not inside RB, for both the market payout rate (payout rate including replay roles) and the test payout rate (payout rate excluding replay roles).

<Gameplay>
FIG. 422 is a diagram showing an example of a transition flow of the payout state according to the twelfth embodiment of the present invention. In the pachislot machine 1 according to the twelfth embodiment, the main control circuit 100 manages the game state (payout state) shown in FIG. 422 along with the game state shown in FIG. 417. As shown in FIG. 422, the payout state is broadly divided into a normal state, an AT state, and an AT preparation state in preparation for the AT state. Here, the description of the normal zone, which is a non-advantageous zone shown in the above-mentioned embodiment, and the advantageous zone is omitted in this embodiment. However, the pachislot machine 1 according to the twelfth embodiment, like the pachislot machines according to the other embodiments, is controlled to either a normal zone or an advantageous zone, and the AT state or the AT preparation state progresses (expires) in the advantageous zone, thereby making it possible to notify information (navigation) for identifying a stop operation mode advantageous to the player.

The normal state is a state that can be controlled in both the normal zone and the advantageous zone, and is basically a gaming state (non-AT state) in which information on stop operation patterns that are advantageous to the player is not notified, and is a gaming state that is disadvantageous to the player compared to the AT state. Note that the normal state only needs to have a payout rate of less than 1 (a zone in which the game value decreases as the game progresses), and may also be a state in which information on stop operations that are advantageous to the player, such as push order navigation or button press pattern navigation, can be generated. Of course, even if such information is specified to occur, the frequency of navigation will be lower than in the AT state. Furthermore, navigation for the purpose of effects that do not affect the payout, i.e., navigation controlled by an effect control means that does not involve navigation by an instruction monitor, may be allowed to occur in the normal state.

The normal state is not limited to RT1, and can be controlled in RT0, when RB is not inside, when RB is inside, or when RB is operating. When in the normal zone in the normal state, a lottery is held to determine whether to transition to an advantageous zone. If the result of the lottery at the time of transition to an advantageous zone is to transition to an advantageous zone, the main control circuit 100 transitions from the normal zone to the advantageous zone. The transition from the normal zone to the advantageous zone can be made in as little as one game.

In addition, in the normal state, a lottery is held to determine whether to transition to the AT state and the degree of AT advantage (number of AT games, net increase in number of coins, etc.) (collectively referred to below as AT-related lotteries). The AT-related lottery is held when a specific combination (e.g., No. 18 "F_Chance" to No. 20 "F_Premium Combination," No. 24 "F_RB Premium Combination" to No. 26 "F_RB Chance") is drawn while the RB is not in operation, while the RB is in operation, or while the RB is in operation, so that the AT winning probability and the allocation probability of the number of AT games are determined based on the type of specific combination drawn and the set value. The AT lottery may be conducted by transition determination or transition lottery based on the number of games lost in normal operation or the accumulated points, or it may be possible to transition to the AT via a chance zone (a state with a high probability of AT winning). As mentioned above, the payout rate for market play (calculating three replays as inserted and three paid out, stopping on the first left side when there is no navigation, and playing according to the navigation when there is navigation) is lower when the RB is activated than when the RB is activated. Therefore, to prevent players from losing interest in playing when the RB is activated during normal play, the degree of advantage for AT-related determinations may be higher when the RB is activated than when the RB is not activated (when there is an RB or not). For example, the probability of a rare combination with a high advantage for AT-related determinations (see, for example, No. 18 "F_Chance" and No. 19 "F_Strong Chance" in FIG. 419 and No. 25 "F_RB Medium Chance" and No. 26 "F_RB Medium Strong Chance" in FIG. 420) may be higher when the RB is activated than in other states. Also, the advantage for AT-related determinations may be higher when the RB is activated (a favorable lottery table may be referenced), or there may be AT-related determinations that are only performed when the RB is activated. Additionally, in the normal state, winning a replay role may trigger an unfavorable decision (for example, a decision to transition from a high probability state to a low probability state in the AT lottery, or a decision to end the chance zone), so not winning a replay role during RB may result in a relatively favorable state.

In addition, under normal conditions, a prescribed penalty is imposed when irregular button presses are made, and no notification is given to avoid winning an RB (for example, navigation indicating the correct button sequence to win a 3-coin winning combination in a game where you win No. 5 "F_3 coins 213" to No. 8 "F_3 coins 321". Navigation such as "?1?" or "??1" indicating the correct button sequence for the first stop only. Navigation to avoid the first stop on the left, such as "×??", as described below). For this reason, under normal conditions, in a game where you win No. 5 "F_3 coins 213" to No. 8 "F_3 coins 321", unless you win a small combination that pays out one coin, you will win an RB, be controlled during RB operation where the payout rate is less than 1, and you will not win a replay combination.

Also, in the normal state, if a decision is made to transition to the AT state as a result of an AT-related lottery, the main control circuit 100 transitions from the normal state to the AT preparation state. The AT preparation state can be controlled not only during RT1, but also during RT0, when RB is not inside, when RB is inside, or when RB is operating. In the AT preparation state, a notification is made to avoid an RB winning, and a notification is made to win a replay role in which red sevens or blue sevens line up in a straight line in a game in which No. 4 "F_Normal Replay" is won.

The notification to avoid the RB win is given when the player wins the internal winning combinations No. 5 "F_3 213" to No. 8 "F_3 321," which can display the RB-related symbol combinations along the pay line, by displaying a presentation suggesting a stop other than the first stop left (for example, a display such as "X??"). This allows the player to perform a stop operation other than the first stop left, thereby avoiding the RB win.
In addition, as a notification to avoid winning an RB in the AT preparation state, a navigation indicating the correct button press sequence to win a 3-coin prize (all correct navigation) or a navigation indicating the correct button press sequence only on the first stop, such as "?1?" or "??1," may be generated. The expected value of winning when a navigation is generated is as follows: all correct navigation (3 coins confirmed) > correct button press sequence only on the first stop (3 coins for two correct button presses on the second stop, 1 coin for an incorrect button press) > navigation indicating the first stop is other than left (3 coins for four correct button presses, 1 coin for an incorrect button press). Therefore, if you do not want to increase the payout rate too much in the AT preparation state, it is recommended to only display a navigation indicating the first stop is other than left, such as "×??". Furthermore, to prevent excessive coin loss during the AT preparation state, all correct navigation or correct button press sequence only on the first stop may be generated. The AT preparation state may be a state in which any one type of RB winning avoidance navigation can be generated, or a state in which multiple types of RB winning avoidance navigation can be generated as appropriate.

To notify the player of a winning replay role in which red or blue sevens line up in a straight line, a "push backwards to aim for red 7" or "push backwards to aim for blue 7" effect is displayed in a game in which No. 4 "F_Normal Rep" is won. This allows the player to aim for red or blue sevens and perform a stop operation in reverse to achieve a winning replay role in which red or blue sevens line up in a straight line, thereby initiating the AT state. Furthermore, if a "push backwards to aim for blue 7" effect is displayed in a game in which No. 4 "F_Normal Rep" is won, the AT may be initiated even if the stop sequence does not result in a blue 7 line, as long as the stop sequence is instructed. The AT may also be initiated even if the stop sequence differs from that of the navigation system. In addition, irregular pressing of a predetermined minor role related to the awarding of game value other than the replay role (for example, a minor role other than the so-called push order role, such as F_Common Bell A or B, that does not win during RB operation, is preferable) can stop a symbol combination that indicates the start of the AT, such as a line of blue 7s, and can generate an effect such as "Aim for blue 7 with reverse pressing" when a predetermined minor role is played. If such a minor role is provided, the design may or may not include a line of blue 7s due to a replay role. Up to this point, it has been explained that the trigger for transitioning from the AT preparation state to the AT state can occur either outside the RB or inside the RB, but it may also only occur inside the RB. By doing so, the AT preparation state may be slightly prolonged depending on the situation, but by switching to the RB from immediately after the AT start, the player can benefit from the possibility of winning 15 common bell roles from immediately after the AT start to while inside the RB.

Because the AT preparation state is entered through AT-related lotteries not only when the RB is not inside or inside the RB, but also when the RB is operating, the state is controlled not only when the No. 4 "F_Normal Rip" is won (when the RB is not inside or inside the RB), but also when the RB is operating and the No. 4 "F_Normal Rip" is not won. Even if a notification to avoid an RB win is issued in the AT preparation state, an erroneous stop operation may result in an RB win, causing the state to be controlled during RB operation. Therefore, if the AT preparation state is controlled during or after the RB operation, it will continue even after the end of the RB. In addition, in the AT preparation state, navigation (push order navigation) for winning a small prize involving a payout of 15 coins may be performed with a predetermined probability, as long as the payout rate does not exceed 1 (e.g., to the extent that the number of medals on hand does not decrease).
The following specifications may be used as a modified example of the conditions for transitioning from the AT preparation state to the AT state. By doing so, even players who are not good at pressing buttons by eye can easily transition to the AT. Also, by making it difficult for players who do not understand the rules of the push order navigation, such as not stopping the left reel first when an "x??" is displayed, to start the AT, beginners are less likely to lose money.
Specification 1: When a push order role is formed during the AT preparation state, a first stop irregular push navigation such as "×??" is generated, and the player performs an irregular push (any push order is fine as long as the first stop is not the left reel). Specification 2: When a push order role is formed during the AT preparation state, a first stop irregular push navigation such as "×??" is generated, and the player performs an irregular push and matches the internal correct push order (this may be the push order that awards the greatest game value, or any other push order may be the correct push order for determining the AT start condition). Note that the "×??" in specifications 1 and 2 does not occur while the RB is operating. It may be possible for it to occur when not inside the RB and inside the RB, or it may only be possible for it to occur inside the RB. For example, at least when not inside RB, if the aforementioned "x??" occurs in a game where the RB overlapping combination of No. 5 "F_RB + F_3 213" to No. 8 "F_RB + F_3 321" is won, the AT can be started inside RB. If inside RB, the "x??" push order judgment game can be performed for any combination other than "F_RB + F_3 321".

The AT state continues until a termination condition is met, such as by playing the number of AT games determined by the AT-related lottery or reaching the net increase in the number of coins determined by the AT-related lottery. During the AT state, for example, in a game in which a winning combination such as No. 5 "F_3 coins 213" or No. 12 "F_321 bell" is won, the player is notified of a push order advantageous to the player according to the winning combination (for example, if the winning combination is "F_3 coins 213," the push order is center, left, right; if the winning combination is "F_3 coins 321," the push order is right, center, left; or the push order according to the last three digits of the winning combination). This allows the player to win the small combination with the largest payout number in the game in which the small combination is won, while avoiding a RB win. Even if the push order corresponding to the winning combination is announced in the AT state, there are cases where an incorrect stop operation results in a RB winning, resulting in control during RB operation. When control is performed during RB operation in the AT state, the push order for winning the small combination with the highest payout number in the game in which the small combination was won during RB operation may be announced. Alternatively, as in the case where the AT preparation state is transitioned to RB operation, the push order for winning the small combination with a payout of 15 coins may be announced with a predetermined probability, as long as the payout rate does not exceed 1. In contrast, if any of "F_Common Bell A" to "F_Chance" is determined as the internal winning combination, the symbol combination for the small combination with a payout of 15 coins is displayed along the active line within the RB regardless of the push order or stop operation timing, so no navigation effects such as advantageous push orders are performed even in the AT state. This reduces the proportion of instructed combinations. During the AT preparation state and the AT state, effects corresponding to the respective states are performed, but during the RB operation to which the transition is made due to an erroneous RB winning (and during the subsequent non-RB state), the effects may be continued, or effects corresponding to waiting for a return to the RB state (for example, a message display such as "Waiting for return") may be performed.
(Performance when RB is won)
In normal game conditions, if the significance of highlighting a RB win is low, it is preferable not to generate RB activation notification effects such as fanfares or dedicated background music during RB activation when a RB win is achieved. In such a case, the on-screen effects and background music are maintained as normal stage effects and background music at the time of RB win. Similarly, during chance zones and high-probability stages, the current effects may be maintained without generating RB activation notification effects. As mentioned above, even if a RB win is accidentally achieved during an AT, it is desirable to maintain the background music and stage images during the AT, even if a caption such as "Waiting for return" is displayed. However, it is also possible to generate a winning notification sound when a RB win is achieved, or to generate background music corresponding to RB activation while the RB is in operation.

<About the winning combination that can result in RB winning>
In a game in which a player wins any of No. 5 "F_RB+F_3 coins 213" to No. 8 "F_RB+F_3 coins 321," which are possible RB wins, as shown in FIG. 421, when a stop operation is performed on the first left stop, the symbol combination associated with the small win accompanied by the payout of one coin is preferentially drawn onto the active line, and when the small win accompanied by the payout of one coin cannot be drawn onto the active line, the symbol combination associated with RB is displayed along the active line; when a stop operation is performed on a stop other than the first left stop in the push order corresponding to the winning combination, the symbol combination associated with the small win accompanied by the payout of three coins is displayed along the active line; and when a stop operation is performed on a stop other than the first left stop in the push order different from the push order corresponding to the winning combination, the symbol combination associated with the small win accompanied by the payout of one coin is displayed along the active line. Below, an example of the winning combination of "F_RB+F_3 321" that can win an RB prize will be shown, along with an example of reel control.

Figure 423 shows the winning combination and symbol combination for "F_RB+F_3 321." As shown in Figure 423, "F_RB+F_3 321" is composed of multiple roles, including RB, 3-coin role, 1-coin role a, and 1-coin role b. The RB symbol combination is defined as a "bar" or "blank" on the left (multiple symbols are separated by a / symbol in Figure 423), a "cherry" in the middle, and a "blank" on the right. This means that the RB symbol combination "bar-cherry-blank" and the RB symbol combination "blank-cherry-blank" are overlapping. In this embodiment, these two types of RB symbols are always simultaneously formed, and the type of RB symbol that activates is the same regardless of which symbol appears on the active line. Therefore, when symbols such as those shown in Figure 424(a) appear on the active line, an RB win occurs. As shown in Figure 418, all of the symbols constituting the RB symbol combination are arranged so that they can be drawn onto a payline regardless of the timing of the stop operation. Each reel has a maximum sliding number of four frames. The "cherry" symbol on the center reel, which is the symbol associated with the RB role, is separated by a maximum of six frames. However, since both the upper and lower frames of the center reel are eligible for the payline, there is no point where the RB symbol is missed due to the position of the button press. This prevents players from attempting to avoid winning the RB by pressing a specific spot. However, because the reel control prioritizes drawing other minor symbol combinations (3-coin and 1-coin) onto a payline over the RB symbol combination, in this embodiment, when the "F_RB + F_3 321" combination is won and other minor symbol combinations are missed, the RB symbol combination will be displayed on the payline. Additionally, the symbols that make up the RB symbol combination are set so that, for example, none of the symbols line up in a straight line, making it less noticeable that a win has been made, as shown in Figure 424(a).

The left symbol for a 3-coin combination is defined as "Rip A" or "Rip B," the middle symbol is "Cherry," and the right symbol is defined as "Rip A" or "Rip B." All of the symbols that make up a 3-coin combination are arranged so that they can be drawn onto an active line regardless of the timing of the stop operation, as shown in Figure 418. For this reason, as explained using Figure 421, when the stop operation is performed in the push order corresponding to "F_RB+F_3 321" (for example, push order: right, middle, left), the symbol combination for the 3-coin combination will be displayed along the active line. Figure 424(b) shows an example of the display when a 3-coin combination is displayed on an active line, with bell symbols aligned along the middle line.

Similarly, the symbols shown in the combination column are determined for 1-piece role a and 1-piece role b. Of the symbols that make up the symbol combination of 1-piece role a, the left and right symbols are arranged so that they can be drawn onto an active line regardless of the timing of the stop operation. In contrast, of the symbols that make up the symbol combination of 1-piece role a, the middle symbol is a symbol that cannot be drawn onto a single line depending on the timing of the stop operation. However, in this embodiment, the upper and lower rows of the middle symbol are determined to be active lines, and as a result, the symbol is arranged so that it can be drawn onto an active line regardless of the timing of the stop operation.

Figure 425 is a diagram illustrating an example of the stop display mode when "F_RB+F_3 coins 321" is won and the first stop is other than left, but the stop operation is not performed in the push order corresponding to "F_RB+F_3 coins 321." Here, an example is shown when the stop operation is performed in the push order right, left, middle. Figure 425(a) is a diagram showing when the right reel is stopped at the first stop. "Lip A," which is the right symbol for 3-coin and 1-coin roles, is displayed stopped on the active line. Note that Figure 425(a) shows an example where "Lip A" is displayed stopped on the top row, but depending on the timing of the stop operation, "Lip B" may also be displayed stopped on the top row.

Figure 425(b) shows what happens when the left reel is stopped at the second stop. Because the second stop left is not the push order corresponding to "F_RB+F_3 321", "Bell A", which is the left symbol for a 1-coin role, is displayed stopped on the active line, rather than the left symbol for a 3-coin role. Note that while Figure 425(a) shows an example where "Bell A" is displayed stopped on the bottom row of the left reel, depending on the timing of the stop operation, "Bell B" may also be displayed stopped on the bottom row of the left reel.

Figure 425(c) shows what happens when the middle reel is stopped on the third stop. The middle symbols for the 1-coin role, "Red Seven," "Blue Seven," and "Bar" (indicated by a star in Figure 425(c)), are displayed stopped on the active line. In this way, if the first stop is other than the left but the stop operation is not performed in the order corresponding to "F_RB+F_3 321," the symbol combination for the 1-coin role, a, will be displayed on the active line.

For the symbol combination of 1-piece role b, depending on the timing of the stop operation, the right symbol among the symbols that make up the symbol combination may not be drawn onto any of the active lines, resulting in a missed win.

Figure 426 is a diagram illustrating an example of the stop display mode when the first stop is left when "F_RB+F_3 coins 321" is won. Here, an example is shown when the stop operation is performed in the order of left, center, and right. Figure 426(a) is a diagram showing what happens when the left reel is stopped at the first stop. When the first stop is left, reel control is performed to preferentially draw 1 coin b onto the active line rather than 3 coin or 1 coin a, and the left symbol, a "bar," is displayed stopped on the active line. Note that while Figure 426(a) shows an example where a "bar" is displayed stopped on the bottom row, depending on the timing of the stop operation, a "blank" may also be displayed stopped on the bottom row.

Figure 426(b) shows what happens when the middle reel is stopped by the second stop. The middle symbol of 1-coin role b, "Cherry," is displayed stopped on the pay line. Note that while Figure 426(a) shows an example where "Cherry" is displayed stopped on the bottom row of the middle reel, depending on the timing of the stop operation, "Cherry" may also be displayed stopped on the top row of the middle reel. This makes it possible to win either 1-coin role b or RB depending on the timing of the third stop operation.

Figure 426(c) shows what happens when the right reel is stopped at the third stop. Figure 426(c) shows a case where the reel is stopped at a timing when the right symbol of a 1-coin combination, "Bell A," can be displayed on the active line. In this case, as shown in Figure 426(c), the symbol combination of 1-coin combination b will be displayed on the active line.

Figure 426(d) shows a case where the "Bell A", the right symbol of a 1-coin combination, is not stopped at the timing when it can be displayed on an active line. In this case, the "Bell A", the right symbol of a 1-coin combination, cannot be stopped on an active line, but the reel control is performed to pull the "Blank", the right symbol of the RB, onto an active line. As a result, the RB symbol combination is displayed on an active line, as shown in Figure 426(d).

With reference to Figures 423 to 426, the role configuration and reel control for No. 8 "F_RB+F_3 321," which allows for RB wins, have been explained. However, as for other winning roles that allow for RB wins, as illustrated in Figure 423, they may be configured to include at least a 3-coin role that is won when the buttons are pressed in the order corresponding to the winning role, a 1-coin role that is won when the first stop is pressed in the order corresponding to the winning role but the second stop is pressed in a different order, a 1-coin role that is preferentially drawn when the first stop is pressed to the left but may be missed depending on the timing of the stop operation, and an RB that is drawn when the 1-coin role is missed. Furthermore, while Figures 423 to 426 show an example of a 1-coin role that may result in a miss, it may also include a role in which a "Bell A" is designated as the right symbol in accordance with a winning role that allows for RB wins. For example, the single-coin combination that may result in a miss, included in No. 7 "F_RB+F_3 312," may have "Bell A" as the right symbol, similar to No. 8 "F_RB+F_3 321," while the single-coin combination that may result in a miss, included in No. 5 "F_RB+F_3 213" and No. 6 "F_RB+F_3 231," may have "Bell B" as the right symbol. This prevents intentional stopping operations that avoid RB wins in non-AT states.

Figure 427 is a diagram illustrating an example of reel control according to a winning role that can result in an RB win. As shown in Figure 427, when the reel is stopped at a position other than the first stop left and pressed in the order corresponding to the winning role, a 3-coin role is won; when the reel is stopped at a position other than the first stop left and pressed in an order different from the order corresponding to the winning role, a 1-coin role is won; when the reel is stopped at the first stop left in a position where a 1-coin role that may be missed and is included in the winning role can be drawn, that 1-coin role is won; and when the reel is not stopped at the first stop left in a position where that 1-coin role can be drawn, an RB is won.

In the example of Figure 427, No. 5 "F_RB + F_3 213" and No. 8 "F_RB + F_3 321", and No. 6 "F_RB + F_3 231" and No. 7 "F_RB + F_3 312" each have different right-hand symbols for the 1-piece combination that may result in a miss if the first stop is on the left. However, this is not limited to this. For example, for No. 5 "F_RB + F_3 213", two types of winning combinations may be provided, such as a lottery combination in which the right-hand symbol for the 1-piece combination that may result in a miss is "Bell A", and a lottery combination in which the right-hand symbol for the 1-piece combination that may result in a miss is "Bell B". No. 6 "F_RB + F_3 231" to No. Similarly, for "F_RB+F_3 321" (number 8), two winning combinations may be provided, each with a different right symbol of the 1-coin combination that may result in a miss. While the example in which an RB win occurs only when the first reel stops on the left has been described, an RB win may also occur when the first reel stops on the center or right reel stops in an irregular manner. Furthermore, an RB win may not occur when the first reel is pressed correctly, or an RB win may occur when the second reel is pressed incorrectly even if the first reel is pressed correctly. Furthermore, the RB may be awarded not only when the press order for the press order is incorrect, but also when a predetermined minor combination is won and the pressing position is the missed position for that predetermined minor combination. In this case, it is desirable to prevent an RB win due to a miss when playing by pressing a specific location (e.g., near the cherry on the left reel) so that an RB win can be avoided by pressing the appropriate location during the AT.

<About the flow for transitioning to advantageous zones>
In the pachislot machine 1 of this embodiment, control can be performed to transition from the advantageous zone to the normal zone and then back to the advantageous zone in response to the end of the AT state controlled during the advantageous zone. In this embodiment, the transition to the normal zone after the end of the AT state is performed each time the AT state ends, but this is not limited to this, and may be performed when the AT state has ended a predetermined number of times, when the value of the advantageous zone payout number counter is equal to or greater than a predetermined value, or when a predetermined lottery is won.

Furthermore, in the pachislot machine 1 of this embodiment, when transitioning to the normal zone, the timing of transition to the normal zone and the timing at which transition to the advantageous zone again can be varied depending on whether or not a predetermined condition is met when the AT state ends, thereby varying the degree of advantage to the player in the AT-related lottery during the normal zone and the advantageous zone. For example, at the end of the AT state, the AT state progresses mainly within the RB, and therefore the state is within the RB. On the other hand, after the AT state ends, no navigation is performed to avoid RB winning when a winning combination that allows RB winning is drawn. Therefore, after the AT state ends, RB winning occurs and the RB is activated, and then the state transitions to a non-RB state. Below, we will explain an example in which the timing of transition to the normal zone is changed depending on the type of stage (mode) to transition to after the AT state ends, for example, whether it is before or after the RB is won, and the timing of transition back to the advantageous zone is changed, thereby changing the degree of advantage for the player in the AT-related lottery during the advantageous zone depending on the game state when transitioning to the advantageous zone.

Figure 428 is a timing chart for explaining the advantageous zone transition flow. Figure 428 shows an example in which a stage lottery is held to determine the stage after the AT state ends when the AT state ends, and the stage is controlled to either the normal stage or the special stage depending on the result of the stage lottery. In the stage lottery, for example, the greater the net increase in the number of coins in the AT state, the higher the rate of transition to the special stage, and it is determined that there is a 100% probability of transition to the special stage when the ending is reached. Figure 428(a) shows the advantageous zone transition flow in the normal pattern when transitioning to the normal stage after the AT state ends, and Figure 428(b) shows the advantageous zone transition flow in the special pattern when transitioning to the special stage after the AT state ends. Note that the special stage transition rate when the ending is reached may be possible with a probability lower than 100%.

First, referring to Figure 428(a), the advantageous zone transition flow in the normal pattern will be explained. When the AT state ends and the normal stage is entered, the carried-over RB is won and the RB is activated, and after the RB ends, the advantageous zone ends and the normal zone is entered. As a result, a lottery for transitioning to an advantageous zone is held while not inside the RB, and the player transitions to the advantageous zone while not inside the RB depending on the lottery result. In this way, in the advantageous zone entered while not inside the RB, the AT-related lottery is held to a predetermined degree of advantage (such as the normal winning probability and allocation probability (but a probability more advantageous to the player than during RT0 as shown in Figure 417)).

Next, referring to Figure 428 (b), the advantageous zone transition flow in a special pattern will be explained. When a transition to a special stage occurs after the end of the AT state, the advantageous zone ends at the end of the AT state and transitions to the normal zone. After transitioning to the normal zone, play is performed and the carried-over RB is won, causing the RB to be activated. In a special pattern, a favorable zone transition lottery is conducted while the RB is in operation, and the player transitions to the advantageous zone while the RB is in operation depending on the lottery results. In this way, in the advantageous zone transitioned to while the RB is in operation, AT-related lotteries, etc. are conducted so that the AT-related lottery is more advantageous to the player than a predetermined degree of advantage (the degree of advantage of the advantageous zone transitioned to while not inside the RB) (such as a higher probability of winning than the normal lottery, or an allocation probability more advantageous to the player than the normal allocation probability). Note that Figure 428(b) shows an example in which the advantageous zone ends and the zone transitions to the normal zone when the AT state ends, but this is not limited to this, and the advantageous zone may also end and the zone transitions to the normal zone when an RB is won (such as when transitioning to RB operation).

In Figure 428, an example was explained in which the degree of advantage for the player is different when the player transitions to a favorable zone after the end of the AT state while not inside the RB, and when the player transitions to a favorable zone while the RB is operating. However, this is not limited to this, as long as the degree of advantage for the player is different depending on the state at the time of transition to the favorable zone. For example, the degree of advantage for the player may be different when the player transitions to a favorable zone after the end of the AT state while not inside the RB, and when the player subsequently transitions to a favorable zone while inside the RB.

In addition, Figure 428 shows an example in which the degree of advantage for the player is higher when the player transitions to an advantageous zone while the RB is operating than when the player transitions to an advantageous zone while the RB is not inside after the AT state has ended, but this is not limited to this, and the degree of advantage for the player may be higher when the player transitions to an advantageous zone while the RB is not inside after the AT state has ended than when the player transitions to an advantageous zone while the RB is operating.

Furthermore, while the degree of advantage for the player has been exemplified as the degree of advantage in AT-related lotteries, it is not limited to this and may also be the probability of a setting suggestion being made, or the degree of advantage (degree of added value) during the AT state when the next AT state is entered, etc.

Furthermore, Figure 428 shows an example in which the degree of advantage for the player in the AT-related lottery during the advantageous zone is varied depending on the game state when the game transitions to the normal zone after the AT state ends and then to the advantageous zone, but this is not limited to this, and the degree of advantage for the player in the AT-related lottery during the normal zone and the subsequent advantageous zone may be varied depending on the game state when the game transitions to the normal zone after the AT state ends.
(Additional information regarding the maintenance and termination of the advantageous zone)
In FIG. 428, in both cases (a) and (b), the advantageous zone is terminated once the AT ends. However, it is not necessary to terminate the advantageous zone after the AT ends. After the AT ends, the next normal advantageous zone may begin while the advantageous zone is maintained. Furthermore, the degree of advantage when the advantageous zone ends or is maintained after the AT ends should be in the order of "special pattern (FIG. 428(b))">"normal pattern (FIG. 428(a))">"maintaining the advantageous zone." Even if the advantageous zone is maintained, it may be more advantageous than the special or normal pattern. However, the total expected value when the advantageous zone is maintained after the AT should be as described above. Because medalless gaming machines do not require a limit on the number of games in the advantageous zone, gameplay can be created by balancing the situation where the end of the advantageous zone is an exceptional route.
(Variation when the advantageous zone is maintained after AT)
In the RB winning waiting period after the end of the AT shown in Figure 428 (a), in addition to the normal stage, a stage corresponding to waiting for an RB winning may be presented. Also, if no RB winning occurs for a predetermined period (e.g., 30 games) while waiting for an RB winning, a reversal game feature using conditions related to the RB winning may be implemented, such as transitioning to the AT. In this case, the presentation stage may be switched at the timing of RB winning, the end of RB operation, transition to a non-advantageous period, etc.

<Major configurations and effects of the pachislot machine 1 in the twelfth embodiment>
(1) In the pachislot machine 1 in the above-described embodiment, by announcing an operation mode that prevents the RB from winning during the AT state, it is possible to create a situation that is advantageous to the player when the RB is not inside or inside, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game. In contrast, when the AT state is not in effect, the RB can be won when the RB is drawn or when other roles (minor roles included in Nos. 5 to 8 in FIG. 419) cannot be won during the RB, and the replay role can be controlled during RB operation when the replay role is not determined as the winning role. This reduces the probability of the replay role appearing throughout the entire game period played on the pachislot machine 1, allowing for a high payout rate. Furthermore, it is possible to reduce the discrepancy between the market payout rate (the payout rate including the replay role) and the test payout rate (the payout rate excluding the replay role).
In the above-described embodiment, an example was shown in which the replay role is not determined as a winning role while the RB is in operation, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the replay role may be determined as a winning role even while the RB is in operation. In this case, the winning probability of the replay role while the RB is in operation may be lower than when the RB is not in operation or when the RB is in operation, and may be set to, for example, a probability slightly lower than the coefficient "8978" when the bonus is not in operation, such as a coefficient of "8977" (winning probability is 8977/65536), a probability significantly lower than when the bonus is not in operation, such as a coefficient of "4000", or an extremely low probability such as a coefficient of "4".

(2) As shown in Figure 428, by changing the game state when transitioning to the normal zone or advantageous zone depending on whether the game transitions to the normal stage or the special stage after the AT state ends, it is possible to control the game state to RT0 or RT1, which have different degrees of advantage for the player. This makes it possible to reflect the state before transitioning to the normal zone after transitioning to the normal zone, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

(3) As shown in Figure 419, etc., when the RB is not inside or inside, it is possible for the RB to win while it is winning with another role, which provides the player with the excitement of wondering whether the RB will win or another role will win, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

(4) Because AT-related lotteries are conducted not only when the RB is not inside or inside the RB, but also when the RB is operating, there are cases where the AT is won while the RB is operating. However, even in such cases, in a game where an "F_Normal Rep" that can be won when the RB is not inside or inside is won, the AT state is initiated by winning a replay symbol in which red sevens or blue sevens line up in a straight line. This prevents the AT state from being initiated while the RB is operating, which is disadvantageous for players whose payout rate is less than 1.

(5) In a game in which "F_Common Bell A," "F_Common Bell B," "F_Chance," etc. in FIG. 419 have been won, for example, when the stop operation is performed on the first stop left, if the player is not inside the RB, a symbol other than a symbol that will result in a small win with a payout of 15 (for example, a symbol for a small win with a payout of 1 coin, a losing symbol, etc.) will be displayed, whereas if the player is inside the RB, a symbol for a small win with a payout of 15 will be displayed. As a result, even if the stop operation is performed on the first stop left in a game in which "F_Common Bell A," "F_Common Bell B," "F_Chance," etc. in FIG. 419 have been won, if the player is inside the RB, a small win with a payout of 15 can be generated, unlike when the player is not inside the RB.

Also, as shown in Figure 421, in games where "F_Common Bell A," "F_Common Bell B," or "F_Chance" in Figure 419 have been won, regardless of the manner in which the stop operation is performed, not just the first stop left, when inside RB, it is possible to generate a small win with a 15-win payout, unlike when not inside RB. This makes it possible to generate a small win with a 15-win payout when inside RB without generating a navigation or the like, thereby reducing the proportion of games with instructions.

[Note]
In conventional gaming machines, most (normal) games are played in a bonus carryover state in which a winning bonus with a payout rate of less than 1 during operation is carried over, and when a minor role related to the push order is won in this bonus carryover state, the push order is announced (see, for example, JP 2015-202330 A).

However, during the bonus carryover state of the gaming machine described above, there is always a certain probability of winning the replay role, and there is no chance of losing, and it is possible to win any role. For this reason, even if a bonus is won, the bonus can only be activated by winning the game in which the bonus was won; the bonus will never actually be activated, and the replay role will continue to be won with a certain probability. As a result, the probability of the replay role appearing, which is an obstacle because it is treated as 0 coins inserted and 0 coins paid out in the gaming machine's model testing, cannot be reduced, and there are limits to increasing the payout rate. This also contributes to an increase in the market payout rate (payout rate including replay roles) and the test payout rate (payout rate excluding replay roles).

The pachislot machine 1 in the 12th embodiment was developed in consideration of these points, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can reduce the probability of a replay symbol appearing and the discrepancy between the market payout rate and the test payout rate.

To achieve the above objective, the gaming machine according to this embodiment provides the following:

(1) A gaming machine (e.g., a pachislot machine 1 shown in the twelfth embodiment, a medal-less gaming machine, etc.) that can be played using gaming value (e.g., medals, gaming value managed by data, etc.),
A role determination means (for example, internal lottery processing, step S5 in FIG. 23, etc.) for determining a winning role from among a plurality of roles including a granting role with the granting of a game value (for example, a small role included in the lottery roles of No. 5 to No. 26 in FIG. 419), a replay role with the granting of a replay (for example, a replay role included in the lottery roles of No. 2 to No. 4 in FIG. 419), and a specific role with a transition to a specific state (for example, RB, BB, etc.) (for example, a bonus role included in the lottery roles of No. 5 to No. 8 in FIG. 419),
A symbol display control means (e.g., steps S9 to S12 in FIG. 421 and FIG. 23) for displaying the symbols in a variable manner and then stopping the symbols in accordance with the winning role (e.g., internal winning role) determined by the role determination means and the player's stopping operation mode (e.g., push order, stopping operation timing, etc.);
A winning determination means capable of generating a winning result according to the symbols stopped and displayed (for example, a process of generating a winning result based on a symbol combination stopped and displayed, such as steps S13 and S14 in FIG. 23 );
A predetermined state control means (for example, a process of controlling by the main control circuit 100 while not inside RB) that controls the specific role among the plurality of roles to a predetermined state (for example, while not inside RB) that can determine the specific role as a winning role;
A carry-over state control means (for example, a process controlled by the main control circuit 100 inside the RB) that controls the specific role to be carried over as a winning role from the time the specific role is won until the symbol that wins the specific role is stopped and displayed,
A specific state control means (for example, a process of controlling by the main control circuit 100 during RB operation) that controls the specific state by stopping and displaying the symbols that will win the specific combination;
A notification control means (for example, a process of controlling to the AT state by the main control circuit 100) controls the state to be notified (for example, an AT state) in which advantageous operation modes advantageous to the player (for example, a stop operation to avoid winning an RB, a stop operation to win a 15-piece role when the lottery role of No. 9 to No. 12 in FIG. 419 is won, etc.) can be notified,
The role determination means
In the specific state, the re-play role is determined as a winning role with a lower probability than in the predetermined state (for example, an extremely low probability, such as a coefficient of "4"), or the re-play role is not determined as a winning role, and even if a winning role with the largest game value to be awarded among the winning roles determined as winning roles occurs in a game during the specific state, the payout rate during the specific state is less than 1. On the other hand, a winning role can be determined so that when a winning role with the largest game value to be awarded among the winning roles determined as winning roles occurs in a game during the predetermined state and the carryover state, the payout rate during the carryover state exceeds 1 (for example, see FIGS. 419 to 421).
In the predetermined state and the carryover state, the specific role can be determined as a winning role together with other roles so that the specific role will be a winning role together with any other role (for example, see No. 5 to No. 8 in FIG. 419),
The symbol display control means is capable of stopping and displaying symbols that will win the specific role when the specific role is won in the predetermined state and during the carryover state, when the player's stop operation mode is an operation mode that cannot stop and display symbols that will win other roles that have been won together with the specific role (for example, small roles included in the winning roles of No. 5 to No. 8 in FIG. 419) (for example, see FIGS. 423 to 427),
The gaming machine is capable of notifying an operation mode that will not result in the specific role being won (for example, a display such as "x??", a press order to win a small role that pays out three coins, etc.) as a favorable operation mode when the specific role is won in the predetermined state and when the notification state is being controlled during the carryover state.

With this configuration, by announcing an operation mode that prevents a specific role from being won during the notification state, it is possible to create a state that is advantageous to the player in a predetermined state or carryover state, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game. In contrast, when the notification state is not in effect, if a specific role is won or if other roles cannot be won during the carryover state, control is possible to create a specific state in which a specific role can be won and a replay role is not determined as a winning role. This reduces the probability of a replay role appearing throughout the entire period, making it possible to set a high payout rate. It also reduces the discrepancy between the market payout rate (payout rate including replay roles) and the test payout rate (payout rate excluding replay roles). Furthermore, it is possible to increase the probability of winning minor roles that can be won without announcing advantageous operation modes, thereby reducing the so-called instruction-inclusive role ratio.

(2) Notification state determination means (for example, AT lottery, AT-related lottery, etc.) for determining whether to control to the notification state;
a zone control means (for example, a lottery for transitioning to an advantageous zone) for controlling the zone to one of a plurality of zones including a normal zone (for example, a normal zone) in which the notification state cannot be attained and an advantageous zone (for example, an advantageous zone) in which the notification state can be attained;
When a predetermined condition is met when the notification state controlled during the carryover state ends (for example, when transitioning to a special stage), the section control means controls from the advantageous section to the normal section, and then controls from the normal section to a new advantageous section during the specific state in which the carried-over specific role is won and controlled (for example, see the special pattern in Figure 428 (b)). On the other hand, when the predetermined condition is not met when the notification state controlled during the carryover state ends, after the specific state in which the carried-over specific role is won and controlled ends, controls from the advantageous section to the normal section, and then controls to a new advantageous section (for example, see the normal pattern in Figure 428 (b)).
The notification state determination means determines the degree of advantage for the player to be different when the player is controlled from the normal zone to the new advantageous zone during the specific state and when the player is controlled from the normal zone to the new advantageous zone after the specific state ends (when a special stage is passed through, an AT-related lottery is conducted so that the AT-related lottery is more advantageous to the player than a predetermined degree of advantage (the degree of advantage of the advantageous zone that has been transitioned to while not inside the RB) (a probability higher than the normal winning probability, an allocation probability that is more advantageous to the player than the normal allocation probability, etc.)), a gaming machine as described in (1).

With this configuration, the game state when transitioning to the normal zone or advantageous zone can be changed depending on whether a predetermined condition is met when the notification state ends, thereby varying the degree of advantage for the player. This allows the state before transitioning to the normal zone to be reflected after transitioning to the normal zone, increasing the enjoyment of the game.

(3) The gaming machine described in (1), wherein the role determination means determines the specific role together with other roles as the winning role in the predetermined state and the carryover state, rather than determining only the specific role as the winning role (see, for example, FIG. 419).

This configuration provides players with the excitement of wondering whether a specific combination will win or another combination will win, increasing the enjoyment of the game.

(4) A notification state determination means (for example, an AT-related lottery) is provided that can determine whether to control to the notification state in any of the predetermined state, the carryover state, and the specific state;
The notification control means starts control to the notification state in either the specified state or the carryover state when the notification state determination means determines to control to the notification state, even when the determination is made during the specific state (for example, in a game in which an "F_normal lip" that can be won while not inside the RB and while inside the RB is won, the AT state is started by winning a re-play role in which red sevens or blue sevens line up in a straight line), a gaming machine as described in (1).

This configuration prevents the notification state from being initiated in certain situations that are disadvantageous to the player, such as when the payout rate is less than 1.

(5) The role determination means can determine, in the predetermined state and the carryover state, a predetermined role (such as “F_Common Bell A,” “F_Common Bell B,” or “F_Chance” in FIG. 419) including a maximum award role with the award of the maximum game value that can be awarded in one game (for example, a small role with the payout of 15 coins) and a small award role with the award of a game value less than the maximum game value (for example, a small role with the payout of 1 coin) as a winning role,
The pattern display control means, when a stop operation is performed in a predetermined stop operation mode (e.g., first stop left) in a game in which the predetermined role has been determined as the winning role, displays a pattern other than the pattern that will win the maximum award role (e.g., a pattern of a small role with a payout of 1 coin, a losing pattern, etc.) in the predetermined state, while displaying a pattern that will win the maximum award role (e.g., a pattern of a small role with a payout of 15 coins) in the carryover state (e.g., see Figure 421), (1) A gaming machine described in.

With this configuration, even if a stop operation is performed in a predetermined stop operation mode during a game in which a predetermined combination has been won, a maximum winning combination can be generated when the game is in a carryover state, unlike when the game is in a predetermined state.

(6) The gaming machine described in (5) wherein the symbol display control means, regardless of the stop operation mode during a game in which the predetermined role has been determined as the winning role, stops and displays symbols other than the symbol that will result in the maximum award role when in the predetermined state, and stops and displays the symbol that will result in the maximum award role when in the carryover state (see, for example, FIG. 421).

With this configuration, even if a beneficial operation mode is not notified, in the carryover state, a maximum payout can be generated regardless of the stop operation mode. This reduces the ratio of instructed roles.

A gaming machine with the above configuration can reduce the probability of a replay symbol appearing and the discrepancy between the market payout rate and the test payout rate.

The present invention may comprise only the matters specifying the invention recited in the claims, or may comprise only a portion of the matters specifying the invention recited in the claims, or may comprise, in addition to the matters specifying the invention recited in the claims or a portion of the matters specifying the invention, configurations other than the matters specifying the invention (configurations different from the matters specifying the invention, configurations not recited in the claims, etc.).

Thirteenth Embodiment
The first to twelfth embodiments have been described above. The thirteenth embodiment will now be described. The basic configuration of the pachislot machine 1 according to the thirteenth embodiment is the same as that of the pachislot machine 1 according to the first to twelfth embodiments. In the following, components that are the same as those of the pachislot machine 1 according to the first to twelfth embodiments will be described with the same reference numerals. Furthermore, explanations of portions that apply to the thirteenth embodiment from the explanations of the first to twelfth embodiments will be omitted.

Note that even if the above description contains statements that are limited to the pachislot machine 1 of the first embodiment, such as "In the first embodiment," or "In the pachislot machine 1 of the first embodiment," these statements can also be applied to the pachislot machine 1 of the thirteenth embodiment, provided that they do not deviate from the spirit of the thirteenth embodiment. Similarly, the above description contains statements that are limited to the pachislot machines 1 of the second to twelfth embodiments, and can also be applied to the pachislot machine 1 of the thirteenth embodiment, provided that they do not deviate from the spirit of the thirteenth embodiment. Therefore, it is possible to partially replace or combine each of the configurations shown in the first to twelfth embodiments (including each of the configurations shown in the modified examples and the extended examples) with the configuration shown in the thirteenth embodiment.

Furthermore, even if the shape is different from the pachislot machine 1 according to the first to twelfth embodiments, components with similar functions may be assigned the same reference numerals for convenience. Furthermore, even if the shape or processing is the same as the pachislot machine 1 according to the first to twelfth embodiments, different reference numerals or step numbers may be assigned for convenience. Note that the pachislot machine 1 according to the thirteenth embodiment may be a gaming machine into which actual medals are inserted and paid out (a gaming machine that is not a sealed-in type), or may be a medal-less gaming machine that can be played using gaming value managed by data.

<Game state transition flow>
FIG. 429 is a diagram showing transitions of game states according to a thirteenth embodiment of the present invention. As described in the first embodiment, the pachislot machine 1 can provide various game states as game states in order to vary the degree of advantage of the game or to achieve the intended gameplay. In this embodiment, game states such as those shown in FIG. 429 are managed by the main control circuit 100. Examples of such game states include RT0, RT1, and a BB operation state (bonus state) shown in FIG. 429, as well as a state within the BB (not shown) between the time the BB is drawn and the time the BB is won.

RT0 is the normal state and is generally the gaming state in which the player remains in this state for the longest time. In RT0, the replay probability of winning a replay role (replay role) is set to a predetermined probability (e.g., 1/7.3). On the other hand, in RT1, the replay probability is set to be higher than the predetermined probability in RT0, making it a gaming state that is advantageous to the player. RT1 ends when a BB is won or the number of plays played reaches a predetermined number (e.g., 100 plays). When RT1 reaches the predetermined number of plays, it transitions to RT0.

If you win BB in RT0 or RT1, you will be transferred to BB until you win BB, and if you win BB, you will be transferred to BB operation. While BB is in operation, the upper limit of the number of payout coins is set to 279, and the game will end if 279 coins are exceeded (BB end condition). Furthermore, while BB is in operation, it is always controlled by RB. Specifically, while BB is in operation, it will be transferred to RB when a game during BB begins (for example, when a BET is placed or the start lever is operated), and the game will end after seven games have been played or when any combination has been won seven times (RB end condition). However, if the BB end condition is not met, it will be transferred back to RB when the next game starts, etc. Furthermore, even if the RB end condition is not met during RB, if the BB end condition is met, RB will be forcibly ended when BB ends.

In addition, during BB operation (including RB), an internal lottery may result in a small win involving a 10-coin payout, or a small win for adjusting the payout amount, such as 10 or 9 coins, depending on the stop operation mode (e.g., the timing of the stop operation). If a 10-coin payout small win is won 28 times during BB operation, the payout amount reaches 280 coins (= 10 coins x 28 wins), and the BB termination condition is met. In contrast, if a 10-coin payout small win is won 27 times during BB operation and a 9-coin payout small win is won once, the payout amount becomes 279 coins (= 10 coins x 27 wins + 9 coins, a net increase of 196 coins), and the BB termination condition is not met. However, if a 10-coin payout small win is won one more time, the payout amount becomes 289 coins (a net increase of 202 coins), and the BB termination condition is met. In this way, during BB operation (including RB), in a game in which a small winning combination for adjusting the number of medals is drawn, more medals can be won by winning a small winning combination that results in a payout of 9 medals (hereinafter referred to as number adjustment).

Furthermore, the pachislot machine 1 in this embodiment controls the game state after BB ends to have different degrees of advantage for the player depending on whether or not the number of coins was adjusted during BB operation. As shown in FIG. 429, if the number of coins was not adjusted during BB operation, the game will transition to RT0, whereas if the number of coins was adjusted during BB operation, the game will transition to RT1. In this way, the game state after BB ends can be changed depending on the game content during BB operation (whether or not the number of coins was adjusted) without having to resort to a lottery to determine which RT to transition to or the winning combination that will transition to RT0 or RT1.

<Lottery role>
Fig. 430 is a diagram for explaining the lottery roles of the pachislot machine 1 in this embodiment. Fig. 430(a) shows the replay roles and small roles that are the subject of the internal lottery during RT0, RT1, and BB, and Fig. 430(b) shows the small roles that are the subject of the internal lottery during BB operation (including during RB).

During RT0, RT1, and BB, it is possible to win one type of replay role and eight types of minor roles. In the minor role payout column, roles containing 0 indicate roles that may be missed depending on the stop operation mode (stop timing, etc.), while roles not containing 0 indicate roles that can result in a win regardless of the stop operation mode. In RT0 and RT1, bonus roles such as BB (red 7BB, blue 7BB, etc., as described below) are also subject to the internal lottery.

On the other hand, when BB is in operation, three types of small winning combinations can be won. Of these, "F_BB Bell B" is a small winning combination for adjusting the number of coins. When "F_BB Bell B" is won, the reels are controlled so that a small winning combination for a payout of 9 coins is won when the reels are stopped in a specific operation mode (for example, a mode in which at least one of the left reel, center reel, and right reel is stopped at a specific location (specific timing)), and a small winning combination for a payout of 10 coins is won in all other cases.

The lottery role shown in Figure 430 is composed of one predetermined role or multiple predetermined roles, similar to the examples in the above-mentioned embodiments, and by winning the lottery role, it is permitted to display on the pay line a combination of symbols associated with one role that makes up the lottery role, or a combination of symbols associated with each of multiple roles. Furthermore, the combination of symbols associated with one role includes those for which one type of combination is determined, and those for which multiple types of combinations are determined, depending on the type of role. Furthermore, in the pachislot machine 1 in this embodiment, the maximum number of payouts that can be made in one game is set to 10, but this is not limited to this.

<Internal lottery table>
The internal lottery tables according to this embodiment include an internal lottery table for the lottery role in RT0 (see FIG. 431(a)), an internal lottery table for the lottery role in RT1 (see FIG. 431(b)), an internal lottery table for the lottery role within the red 7BB when the bonus role is a red 7BB (see FIG. 432(a)), an internal lottery table for the lottery role within the blue 7BB when the bonus role is a blue 7BB (see FIG. 432(b)), and an internal lottery table for the lottery role during BB operation (see FIG. 432(c)). In the pachislot machine 1 according to this embodiment, multiple setting values (for example, settings 1, 2, 5, and 6) are set as setting values for specifying the winning probability of the lottery role, but this is not limited thereto, and only one setting value may be set as in the eleventh embodiment. The internal lottery table is stored in the main ROM 102 in correspondence with each game state, and indicates the winning probability of each flag with a denominator of 65536.

Of the lottery roles shown in the internal lottery tables shown in Figures 431(a) and 431(b), No. 2 "F_Red 7BB" to No. 14 "F_Blue 7BB + F_Special E" are lottery roles that include the bonus roles of Red 7BB and Blue 7BB, respectively, and Nos. 3 to 7 and Nos. 9 to 14 are lottery roles in which a bonus role is won simultaneously with a minor role. Furthermore, of the lottery roles shown in the internal lottery tables shown in Figures 431(a) and 431(b), No. 16 "F_Bell A" to No. 22 "F_Cherry B" are each lottery roles for minor roles.

Of the lottery roles shown in the internal lottery tables shown in Figures 431(a) and 431(b), No. 15 "F_Normal Rip" is a lottery role for replay. As shown in the internal lottery tables shown in Figures 431(a) and 431(b), the winning probability of No. 15 "F_Normal Rip" is 1/7.3 (=8978/65536) in RT0, but 1/1.6 (=40000/65536) in RT1.

The internal lottery tables shown in Figures 432(a) and 432(b) are values obtained by adding up the lottery values of the lottery roles shown in the internal lottery tables shown in Figures 431(a) and 431(b) for each type of minor role and replay role, and are configured to include bonus roles that have been won for all lottery roles.

In the internal lottery table shown in Figure 432(c), lottery values are allocated so that a player will win either No. 2 "F_BB Rare" or No. 4 "F_BB Bell A." The winning probability of the "F_BB Bell B" for adjusting the number of coins is set to 1/4 (= 16,384/65,536), but this is not limited to this and the winning probability may be set to a lower probability than 1/4 (e.g., 1/30). In this case, since the number of coins cannot necessarily be adjusted even if a transition is made during BB operation, the player can be entertained by the same experience as if they were playing a lottery to transition to RT1, depending on whether or not they win the "F_BB Bell B" for adjusting the number of coins during BB operation. Furthermore, the probability of winning "F_BB Bell B" may be set to a probability higher than 1/4 (for example, 1/2), or may be set to an extremely high probability (95%) or 100%.

In this embodiment, the pachislot machine 1 performs a predetermined suggestion effect in a game in which the "F_BB Bell B" for adjusting the number of coins is won during BB operation. The predetermined suggestion effect may, for example, output a predetermined warning sound (such as "Queen!") from a speaker at a predetermined timing, such as when the lever is turned on, or may light or flash a predetermined lamp. This can indicate to the player that the "F_BB Bell B" for adjusting the number of coins has been won, and the player can attempt to stop the machine using a specific operation mode to win the small prize of nine coins. The predetermined suggestion effect may be performed in all games in which the "F_BB Bell B" is won, or may be performed with a predetermined probability (e.g., 50%) when the "F_BB Bell B" is won. Furthermore, the predetermined suggestive effect is performed only when the number of coins has not been adjusted, and when a small role with a payout of 9 coins has already been won and there is no need to win another small role with a payout of 9 coins, the predetermined suggestive effect may not be performed even if the "F_BB Bell B" for adjusting the number of coins is won.In addition, the predetermined suggestive effect may not be performed, and the player may be prompted to try to stop the game in a specific operation mode for each game during BB operation until the number of coins is adjusted.
(Performance when the number of sheets is adjusted)
When the number adjustment is successful, i.e., when the first 9-coin winning combination occurs in the BB, a specific winning combination effect (e.g., winning sound effect, backlight flash, etc.) different from the 10-coin winning combination effect (when the number adjustment is not performed) may be generated to indicate or notify the completion of the adjustment. It is desirable that the specific winning combination effect be more easily recognized by the player than the 10-coin winning combination effect. Examples of easily recognized combination effects include a louder sound effect, a higher pitch, and a flash effect with more illuminated squares and a longer duration. Furthermore, if a 9-coin winning combination is accidentally achieved during the BB after the number adjustment is completed (a situation in which the 9-coin winning combination is achieved two or more times, reducing the expected winning value in the BB), the specific winning combination effect may not be generated. Since the second or subsequent 9-coin winning combination is considered a mistake by the player, not generating the flashy specific winning combination effect makes it less likely that the mistake will be noticed by those around the player.
(Other effects when the number of cards is adjusted)
When the number of coins is successfully adjusted, a setting suggestion effect (including a setting notification effect) related to the setting value of the gaming machine (e.g., settings 1 to 6) may be generated in addition to or instead of the winning effect described above, to increase the player's motivation to continue playing during the bonus round. Furthermore, the timing of the setting suggestion effect based on the successful number of coins adjustment due to a successful pin-tap may occur at any time between the successful pin-tap and the end of the bonus. It may occur immediately after the successful pin-tap, or, for example, when the game in which the pin-tap was successful stops, or at the end of the bonus. Furthermore, instead of the setting suggestion effect, an effect related to a predetermined degree of advantage may be generated. For example, an effect related to the degree of advantage in the AT lottery in an AT machine (e.g., suggestion information on whether the AT is highly or lowly likely, or a suggestion or notification effect for a mode that affects the likelihood of winning the next AT) may be generated.
(Notification of completion of number adjustment)
Furthermore, when the number of coins is successfully adjusted, a predetermined number of coins adjustment completion effect may be generated and maintained until the end of BB, making it easy for the player to recognize whether the number of coins adjustment has been completed. At least, the effect mode should be performed before and after the number of coins adjustment is completed. The following effect examples are possible.
・Performance example 1: Before the lamp light emission state difference is completed, the light emission state of the predetermined lamp is the first state (off state, white light emission, etc.)
After completion, the light emission state of the predetermined lamp is in the second state (lit, flashing, red light, etc.)
It may be provided as a function display lamp in a predetermined area, like a so-called notification lamp, or may be provided as a decorative lamp on the gaming machine.
・Example 2: Screen display mode change Before completion: Daytime background, no specific character, designated icon hidden, no specific display After completion: Night background, specific character present, designated icon displayed, specific display (caption or text display such as "ready" displayed) ・Example 3: Before BGM change completion: First BGM
After completion: Second BGM
The second BGM may be the same song as that played during the high RT after BB, or a similar song with a similar atmosphere, to make it easier for the player to understand the flow of the game, which is that the game will move to high RT once the number of coins has been adjusted.

<Regarding RT transition control>
First, the BB processing performed during BB operation before transition to RT will be described. Figure 433 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the BB processing. The BB processing is executed by the main CPU 101 when one game is started and when one game is completed during BB operation.

In step S1301, it is determined whether or not the RB is activated, such as at the start of a game. If it is not determined in step S1301 that the RB is activated, the RB is activated (started) in step S1302. This means that the RB will be started when the BB is activated but the RB is not activated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1301 that the RB is activated, the process proceeds to step S1303.

In step S1303, it is determined whether the RB termination conditions are met, such as at the end of one game. If it is determined that the RB termination conditions are not met, the process proceeds to step S1305. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1303 that the RB termination conditions are met, the RB is terminated in step S1304, and the process proceeds to step S1305.

In step S1305, it is determined whether the BB termination conditions are met. If it is determined in step S1305 that the BB termination conditions are not met, the current BB processing is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1305 that the BB termination conditions are met, it is determined in step S1306 whether RB is in operation. In other words, whether RB is in operation is determined when the BB termination conditions are met; in other words, whether or not the number of sheets is adjusted while BB is in operation is indirectly determined.

If it is determined in step S1306 that RB is in operation, it is determined that the number of sheets needs to be adjusted, and in step S1307 RB and BB are terminated, and control is given to RT1, terminating the processing during BB. On the other hand, if it is not determined in step S1306 that RB is in operation, it is determined that the number of sheets does not need to be adjusted, and in step S1308 BB is terminated, and control is given to RT0, terminating the processing during BB.

In the BB processing, steps S1301 to S1302 may be performed each time a game starts while the BB is in operation, and steps S1303 to S1308 may be performed each time a game ends while the BB is in operation.

Figure 434 is a timing chart illustrating patterns for transitioning to RT. Figure 434(a) shows a pattern for transitioning to RT0, and Figure 434(b) shows a pattern for transitioning to RT1.

Figure 434 shows that RB is also operating in response to BB operation. Figure 434(a) shows the case when, during BB operation, it is determined in step S1305, which is entered after the RB termination conditions are met and RB is terminated in step S1303 of Figure 433, that the BB termination conditions are also met, and it is determined in step S1306 that RB is not in operation. For example, if the number of coins is not adjusted during BB operation and the 10-coin payout minor feature is won 28 times and the BB is terminated, the fourth RB (fourth RB) during that BB operation (= 28 times / 7 times) will end at the same timing. In this case, as shown in step S1308 of Figure 433, it is controlled to RT0.

Figure 434 (b) shows a case where, during BB operation, it is determined in step S1303 of Figure 433 that the RB termination condition is not met, and in step S1305 it is determined that the BB termination condition is met, and it is determined in step S1306 that the RB is in operation (the fifth RB is in operation). For example, if a number of coins is adjusted during BB operation, and a 9-coin payout minor feature is won once and a 10-coin payout minor feature is won a total of 28 times before the BB termination condition is met, this is a case where the fifth RB (= 29 times / 7 times) is in operation during that BB operation. In this case, control is performed to RT1, as shown in step S1307 of Figure 433.

<Major configurations and effects of the pachislot machine 1 in the thirteenth embodiment>
(1) As shown in Figures 429 to 434, during BB operation, the degree of advantage to the player after the end of BB can be varied depending on whether the game is proceeded as if control over RB continues or as if control over RB has ended when the BB operation ends. Therefore, without requiring a separate lottery to determine the degree of advantage after the BB ends, the game state can be controlled to have a high degree of advantage after the BB ends, depending on the game content during BB operation. As a result, the enjoyment of the game during BB can be improved without increasing the processing load, memory capacity, etc.

(2) The upper limit of the payout number, which is the condition for ending the BB, is set to 279 coins, which is the number that can be reached when control over the RB continues if a small role with a payout of 10 coins is won in the RB and a small role with a payout of 9 coins has been won at least once, and is the number that can be reached when control over the RB has ended if a small role with a payout of 9 coins is not won.In this way, by using a simple method such as adjusting the conditions for ending the BB and the RB, a situation in which control over the RB is in effect when the BB ends and a situation in which control over the RB has ended can be created, and the degree of advantage of the game state after the BB ends can be differentiated.
In addition, in the model test (simulation test) of the gaming machine, even if a game wins the small role (F_BB Bell B) for adjusting the number of coins, it will always result in a small role win accompanied by a payout of 10 coins, and the number of coins will not be adjusted. As a result, in the model test, the number of coins paid out during BB will not be large, and there will be no transition to RT1 after BB, which can work advantageously in the direction of increasing the actual payout rate (the payout rate in the market).

(3) Even if the game is controlled to RT1, it will be controlled to RT0 after 100 games have been played. This prevents the game from being controlled to RT1 indefinitely, while also preventing the difference in the degree of advantage from becoming too large when controlled to RT0 after the end of BB.

(4) An example has been described in which the degree of advantage to the player is greater when the game proceeds as if control over the RB continues when the BB operation ends (with coin count adjustment) than when the game proceeds as if control over the RB ends when the BB operation ends (without coin count adjustment). This provides the player with the added excitement of being able to play as if control over the RB continues when the BB ends, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

However, without being limited to this, it is also possible to make it so that the player is more advantageous when the game proceeds as if control over the RB has ended when the BB operation ends (without adjusting the number of coins) than when the game proceeds as if control over the RB continues when the BB operation ends (with adjusting the number of coins). In this case, it is possible to encourage the player to play in a way that does not require adjusting the number of coins.

(5) An example has been described in which the winning probability of a replay role is controlled to RT0 or RT1, which have different winning probabilities. This allows players to enjoy innovative gameplay, such as controlling the winning probability of a replay role to different RTs depending on the game content during BB operation. Furthermore, because there is no need to set data, storage area, or processing for missed winning numbers (specific losing numbers) of roles, as has been conventionally used, it is possible to control the game state to have different winning probabilities of a replay role without increasing the processing burden or memory capacity.

However, this is not limiting, and examples of varying the degree of advantage may include, for example, varying the degree of advantage in AT-related lottery winnings after the end of BB when controllable to the AT state, or varying the probability of setting suggestions.

[Note]
Among conventional gaming machines, there is known a gaming machine that transitions to a high RT state in which the probability of winning a replay role is high after a bonus has ended (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2006-204875).

However, in the gaming machines described above, after the bonus ends, the player always transitions to an advantageous state, such as a high RT state, which is advantageous for the player. Because of this, there is a risk that the degree of advantage increases after the bonus ends, which could lead to excessive gambling. It is also possible to conduct a separate lottery to determine whether or not to transition to an advantageous state, or to transition to an advantageous state based on the stopped symbols (for example, symbols of a specific winning combination or missed symbols), but in this case, the processing load and memory capacity would increase.

The pachislot machine 1 in the thirteenth embodiment was developed in consideration of these points, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state depending on the game content during a bonus without increasing the processing load or memory capacity.

To achieve the above objective, the gaming machine according to this embodiment provides the following:

(1) A gaming machine (e.g., a pachislot machine 1 shown in the thirteenth embodiment, a medal-less gaming machine, etc.) that can be played using gaming value (e.g., medals, gaming value managed by data, etc.),
A role determination means (for example, internal lottery processing, step S5 in FIG. 23, etc.) for determining a winning role from among a plurality of roles including a granting role that accompanies the awarding of a game value (for example, small roles included in the lottery roles of No. 3 to No. 7, No. 9 to No. 14, and No. 16 to No. 22 in FIG. 431), and a specific role that accompanies a transition to a specific state (for example, BB roles included in the lottery roles of No. 2 to No. 7, and No. 9 to No. 14 in FIG. 431),
After the symbols are displayed in a variable manner, a symbol display control means (e.g., steps S9 to S12 in FIG. 430 and FIG. 23) is provided for stopping and displaying the symbols in accordance with the winning role (e.g., internal winning role) determined by the role determination means and the player's stopping operation mode (e.g., push order, stopping operation timing, etc.);
A winning determination means capable of generating a winning result according to the symbols stopped and displayed (for example, a process of generating a winning result based on a symbol combination stopped and displayed, such as steps S13 and S14 in FIG. 23 );
A special state control means (for example, FIG. 429, a process of controlling by the main control circuit 100 while RB is operating) that controls a special state (for example, while BB is operating) from when the symbol that will win the specific role is stopped and displayed until a first condition (for example, a condition for ending BB) is met;
A game state control means for controlling the game state after the special state ends (for example, FIG. 429, a process for controlling to RT0 or RT1 by the main control circuit 100, etc.),
The special state control means
Control is continued for a specific period (while RB is operating) that is advantageous to the player from the start of a game in the special state until the first end condition is met or the second condition (for example, the end condition of RB) is met, and if the first condition is not met after the second condition is met and the specific period is ended, control is again performed for the specific period when a game is started (for example, NO in steps S1303 to S1305 of FIG. 433, and subsequent steps S1301 and S1302),
When the game in the special state is ended, a determination is made as to whether or not the second condition is established (for example, step S1303 in FIG. 433), and then a determination is made as to whether or not the first end condition is established (for example, step S1305 in FIG. 433),
The post-termination game state control means controls the gaming machine to a game state that is different in degree of advantage to the player when the first condition is met, depending on whether the second condition is not met and control is being performed during the specific period (e.g., YES in step S1306 of Figure 433) or whether the second condition is met and control over the specific period has ended (e.g., NO in step S1306 of Figure 433) (e.g., steps S1307, S1308 of Figure 433).

With this configuration, the degree of advantage after the end of a special state can be varied depending on whether the game proceeds as if it were under control for a specific period when the special state ends, or as if control over the specific period has ended. Therefore, a separate lottery is not required to determine the degree of advantage after the end of a special state; the game state can be controlled to have a high degree of advantage after the end of the special state, depending on the game content during the special state. As a result, the enjoyment of the game during a special state can be increased without increasing the processing load or memory capacity.

(2) The roles that the role determination means can determine as winning roles during the specified period include a first awarding role that involves the awarding of a first amount of game value (for example, a small role that involves the payout of 10 coins) and a second awarding role that involves the awarding of a second amount of game value that is smaller than the first amount (for example, a small role that involves the payout of 9 coins),
The second condition is met by generating a winning combination a predetermined number of times (for example, seven times) during the specific period,
The first condition is met when the game value awarded in the special state exceeds a predetermined amount (for example, 279 coins),
The predetermined amount is set to an amount that causes the winning of the first awarding role to occur during a specific period controlled during the special state, and when the number of times that the winning of the second awarding role has occurred is a specific number of times or more (e.g., 1 time), the first condition is met when control over the specific period continues, while when the number of times that the winning of the second awarding role has occurred is less than the specific number of times (e.g., 0 times), the first condition is met when control over the specific period ends (e.g., see Figure 434), (1) A gaming machine as described above.

With this configuration, by simply adjusting the first and second conditions, it is possible to create a situation where control is still in a specific period when the special state ends, and a situation where control over the specific period has ended, thereby differentiating the degree of advantage of the game state after the special state ends.

(3) The game state controlled by the game state control means after the game ends includes a first game state (for example, RT0) and a second game state (for example, RT1) that is more advantageous to the player than the first game state,
The gaming machine described in (1) above, wherein the game state control means controls the game to the first game state after the game has ended by controlling the game to the second game state and then playing the game a predetermined number of times (e.g., 100 times) (e.g., see Figure 429).

This configuration prevents control to the second gaming state from continuing indefinitely, while also preventing the difference in the degree of advantage from becoming too large when control is restored to the first gaming state after the special state ends.

(4) The gaming machine described in (1), wherein, when the first condition is met but the second condition is not met and control is being performed during the specific period, the post-termination gaming state control means controls the gaming machine to a gaming state (e.g., RT1) that is more advantageous to the player than when the second condition is met and control during the specific period has ended.

This configuration provides the player with the added excitement of experiencing the game as if it were being controlled for a specific period of time when the first condition is met, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

(5) A gaming machine as described in (1), wherein the gaming states controlled by the gaming state control means after the end of the game and having different degrees of advantage to the player are gaming states having different winning probabilities for determining a replay role that involves the awarding of a replay as the winning role.

This configuration allows players to enjoy innovative gameplay, controlling the game state so that the probability of winning a replay role differs depending on the game content during the special state. Furthermore, since there is no need to set data, storage area, or processing for missed roles (specific misses), the game state can be controlled so that the probability of winning a replay role differs without increasing the processing burden or memory capacity.

With a gaming machine configured as described above, it is possible to control the game state with different degrees of advantage depending on the game content during the special state without increasing the processing load or memory capacity.

The present invention may comprise only the matters specifying the invention recited in the claims, or may comprise only a portion of the matters specifying the invention recited in the claims, or may comprise, in addition to the matters specifying the invention recited in the claims or a portion of the matters specifying the invention, configurations other than the matters specifying the invention (configurations different from the matters specifying the invention, configurations not recited in the claims, etc.).

This embodiment can be widely applied to gaming machines installed in gaming facilities such as gaming parlors.

1... Pachislot machine, 3L, 3C, 3R... Reels, 7... Start lever, 8L, 8C, 8R... Stop buttons, 100... Main control circuit, 200... Sub-control circuit, 210... Main display device

Claims (1)

a control board on which predetermined electronic components related to game control are mounted;
a transparent board case that houses the control board,
The substrate case is
a recessed portion that is recessed toward the predetermined electronic component at a location facing the predetermined electronic component;
two protruding pieces, each of which is continuous with the recessed portion and faces a first side surface and a second side surface of the predetermined electronic component, and which have a U-shaped cross section parallel to a bottom of the recessed portion;
a rib continuous with a side wall of the recessed portion,
The two protruding pieces are:
a facing portion facing the first side surface or the second side surface of the predetermined electronic component, and two connection portions connected to both ends of the facing portion;
a length of the facing portion in a direction in which the recessed surface portion faces the predetermined electronic component is longer than a length of the two connecting portions in a direction in which the recessed surface portion faces the predetermined electronic component;
A gaming machine in which the protruding piece is located within the contour of the bottom of the downturned portion and is positioned so as not to overlap with the specified electronic component in the direction in which the downturned portion and the specified electronic component face each other .